JP2022121574A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To suppress a decrease in desire to play a game.

SOLUTION: A game machine is configured such that an advantageous game state advantageous to a player by game state setting means until a first performance and a second performance are executed a predetermined number of times from a plurality of game states. When the advantageous game state is set by the game state setting means, a second performance period is allowed to be set short by second performance period setting means. When the advantageous game state is completed, a first specific performance period is determined as a first performance period by first performance period determination means until the first performance and the second performance are executed a predetermined number of times. Thus, a decrease in desire to play a game can be suppressed.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art In some game machines such as pachinko machines, patterns are variably displayed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting prize winning slot, and a player is notified of the result of a lottery after the variative display is completed. In this way, in the gaming machine, an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is set by increasing the probability of a winning lottery or facilitating the execution of the lottery, and during the period in which the advantageous state continues. In some cases, game results such as the number of hits that have occurred and the number of prize balls won are displayed on the display screen after the advantageous state is over.

JP 2010-35664 A

However, there is a problem that the game result display cannot be displayed for a sufficient period of time, and the player's motivation to play is lowered.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that suppresses the decline in motivation to play.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a first obtaining means for obtaining first information based on the establishment of a first obtaining condition, and the first information obtained by the first obtaining means. first determination means for executing a first determination based on information; first effect execution means for executing a first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means in a first effect period; A second determination means for executing a second determination based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, and a second effect based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means during a second effect period. A second effect executing means to be executed, and a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when a specific second performance based on is executed, the first performance and the second performance from a plurality of game states. a game state setting means capable of setting an advantageous game state advantageous to the player until is executed a predetermined number of times; second effect period setting means for making it easier to set the period to be short; and a first effect period determining means for setting a specific first effect period as one effect period.

A gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined number of times is two or more.

In the gaming machine according to claim 3, in the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the first effect period determining means, when a game state different from the advantageous game state is set, determines that the specific second The ratio of selecting the shortened first effect period shorter than one effect period is high.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the probability that the first determination is determined as the specific first determination result and the specific first determination result is determined in the second determination. The probability of being determined to be the second determination result is set to be the same, and the second determining means, when the second determination is not determined to be the specific second determination result, determines the specific second determination result A special second determination result different from the result is determined with a predetermined probability, and the privilege game execution means, when the second effect based on the special second determination result is executed, the privilege game It executes a special privilege game in which the following privileges are given.

The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein when the advantageous gaming state is set, the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first determination. and a state in which the first determination is more likely to be executed than the second determination when the advantageous game state ends.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. Based on the determination result, the first effect execution means executes the first effect during the first effect period. Further, based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, the second determination is executed by the second determination means based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means, and the second determination is performed. Based on the result, the second effect execution means executes the second effect during the second effect period. Then, a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result A privilege game that is advantageous to the player when executed is executed by the privilege game execution means, and the game is played until the first performance and the second performance are executed a predetermined number of times from a plurality of game states. An advantageous game state advantageous to a player is settable by a game state setting means, and when the advantageous game state is set by the game state setting means, the second performance period is set short by the second performance period setting means. When the advantageous game state ends, a specific first performance period is set as the first performance period until the first performance and the second performance are executed a predetermined number of times. Determined by the determining means.

As a result, it is possible to set a specific period as the first performance period when the advantageous game state ends, so that the player can grasp the content of the performance executed when the advantageous game state ends. is possible, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to play.

According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, since the predetermined number of times is two or more, the content of the effect executed when the advantageous game state ends can be changed. There is an effect that it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp it, and that it is possible to suppress the decline in the player's desire to play.

According to the gaming machine of claim 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a game state different from the advantageous game state is set, the ratio of selecting the shortened first effect period shorter than the specific first effect period is increased by the first effect period determining means.

As a result, it is possible to set only a specific first effect period set for a predetermined number of times after the end of the advantageous gaming state to a period longer than the other first effect periods. By setting the overall length of the first effect period to be executed, it is possible to prevent the game from slowing down and lowering the player's motivation.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the probability that the first determination results in the specific first determination result and the probability that the second determination results in the specific second determination result are set to be the same, and the second determination results in the specific second determination result. If it is not determined, the second determination means determines a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result with a predetermined probability. Then, when the second effect based on the special second determination result is executed, a special privilege game in which a privilege equal to or lower than the privilege game is given by the privilege game executing means is executed.

As a result, there is an effect that the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the advantageous gaming state is set, the second judgment is more likely to be executed than the first judgment, and when the advantageous gaming state is terminated, the first judgment is more likely to be executed than the second judgment. It is varied by the variable control means.

As a result, there is an effect that the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; It is a front view of a rotary body raising/lowering unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body elevating unit; It is an exploded back perspective view of a rotary body raising/lowering unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the central unit; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the central unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a container. (a) is a side view of the container as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIa in FIG. 17, and (b) is a front view of the container as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. 18 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a first rotating body. It is a table which shows the combination of the figure of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body. It is a side view schematic diagram of the first rotating body and the second rotating body showing a transition state when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated. It is a side view schematic diagram of the first rotating body and the second rotating body showing a transition state when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated. It is a front view of a light-emitting decoration unit. Fig. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the light-emitting decoration unit; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the luminous decoration unit. (a) is a front view of the central rotary unit in a retracted position, and (b) is a front view of the central rotary unit in an extended position. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the central rotating unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central rotating unit; It is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. (a) is a front view of a connecting displacement member, (b) is a side view of the connecting displacement member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIIb in FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the connecting displacement member taken along line XXXIIa-XXXIIa; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; (a) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base and the connecting displacement member, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front base and the connecting displacement member taken along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39(a). It is a diagram. 40(a) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base and the first displacement member, and (b) is a view of the front base and the first displacement member as viewed in the direction of arrow XLb in FIG. 40(a). FIG. 40(c) is a schematic side view, and (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front base and the first displacement member taken along line XLc-XLc of FIG. 40(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a left rotation unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of a counterclockwise rotation unit. It is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit for explaining the engagement action by the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member; (a) is a partially enlarged view of the first displacement member and the second displacement member in the XLVIII section of FIG. and a side view of a second displacement member. It is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device. (a) is a front view of the winning device, (b) is a rear view of the winning device, and (c) is a top view of the winning device. 51(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning device taken along line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the prize winning device taken along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 52(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the prize winning device along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 52(b). FIG. 52(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the winning device taken along line LIV-LIV. It is a back schematic diagram of a winning device. 3 is a partially enlarged view of the game board in which the LVI portion of FIG. 2 is partially enlarged; FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged view of the game board in which the LVI portion of FIG. 2 is partially enlarged; FIG. It is a front perspective view of a center frame. 4 is a front view of an area forming section; FIG. FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view of the region forming portion taken along line LX-LX in FIG. 59; It is a front view of the game board in the second embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of a right rotation unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; It is an exploded front perspective view of a right rotation unit in a 4th embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; It is an exploded front perspective view of a right rotation unit in a 5th embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a top view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a top view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; It is an exploded front perspective view of a right rotation unit in a 6th embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; (a) to (c) are schematic front views of a right rotation unit according to a fourth embodiment, and (d) to (g) are schematic front views of a right rotation unit according to a sixth embodiment. FIG. 21 is an exploded front perspective view of a right rotation unit in a seventh embodiment; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; It is an exploded front perspective view of a left rotation unit in an eighth embodiment. It is an exploded back perspective view of a counterclockwise rotation unit. It is a front view of a guide part. FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating in the forward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating in the forward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; It is an exploded front perspective view of a left rotation unit in a ninth embodiment. It is an exploded back perspective view of a counterclockwise rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating in the forward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating in the forward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; It is a back schematic diagram of the counterclockwise rotation unit in 10th Embodiment. (a) is a front view of the cage, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the cage taken along line CXVIIb-CXVIIb of (a), and (c) is taken along line CXVIIc-CXVIIc of (a). It is a sectional view of a retainer. FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; It is an exploded rear perspective view of a left rotation unit in an eleventh embodiment. FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating in the forward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating in the forward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 32 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit in a twelfth embodiment; (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base taken along line CXXXIIb-CXXXIIb in (a). FIG. 5 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit for explaining the engagement action by the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member; FIG. 31 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit in a thirteenth embodiment; (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a sectional view of the front base taken along line CXXXVb-CXXXVb in (a). FIG. 5 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit for explaining the engagement action by the front base and the displacement-side engagement member; FIG. 32 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit in a fourteenth embodiment; (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the counterclockwise rotation unit with the second displacement member disposed at the retracted position, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross section of the counterclockwise rotation unit taken along line CXXXVIIIb-CXXXVIIIb of (a). It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in a state where the second displacement member is arranged in the extended position, and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the counterclockwise rotation unit taken along line CXXXIXb-CXXXIXb of (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. FIG. 31 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit according to a fifteenth embodiment; (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base taken along line CXLIb-CXLIb in (a). FIG. 5 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit for explaining the engagement action by the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member; FIG. 32 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit in a sixteenth embodiment; (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base taken along line CXLIVb-CXLIVb in (a). FIG. 4 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit for explaining the engagement action by the front base (opening) and the displacement-side engagement member; FIG. 32 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit in a seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 5 is a schematic top view of the left rotation unit for explaining the engagement action by the rear base and the displacement-side engagement member; FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of a right rotation unit in an eighteenth embodiment; FIG. 11 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position. FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of a right rotation unit in a nineteenth embodiment; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 11 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of a winning device in a twentieth embodiment; (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device with the seesaw member forming the first state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the prize winning device with the seesaw member forming the second state. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device in the twenty-first embodiment. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of a prize winning device according to a twenty-second embodiment. (a) and (b) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device. FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of a winning device in a twenty-third embodiment; (a) and (b) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device. (a) and (b) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device. FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device in the twenty-fourth embodiment; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device. (a) is a front view of the rotating shaft, and (b) is a side view of the rotating shaft as viewed in the direction of an arrow CLXXIb in (a). (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device with the seesaw member forming the first state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the prize winning device with the seesaw member forming the second state. 172(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device along line CLXXIIIa-CLXXIIIa in FIG. 172(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device along line CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb in FIG. 172(b). FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device in the twenty-fifth embodiment; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device with the seesaw member forming the first state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the prize winning device with the seesaw member forming the second state. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device taken along line CLXXVIIa-CLXXVIIa in FIG. 176(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device taken along line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. ) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device taken along line CLXXVIIc-CLXXVIIc in FIG. 176(b), and FIG. 176(d) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device taken along line CLXXVIId-CLXXVIId in FIG. 176(b). It is a front view of the center frame of the pachinko machine. 179(a) and (b) are enlarged views of the CLXXIX portion in FIG. 178. FIG. It is the figure which showed time-measurement change of the operation|movement of a flow-path solenoid, and time-measurement change with the opening-and-closing timing of the opening-and-closing board for every jackpot classification. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a method of shifting from one game state to another game state with respect to three types of game states set in the pachinko machine. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when all upper, middle, and lower symbol rows are fluctuating in the variable display effect, and (b) is a diagram in which the stop symbol of the jackpot is displayed in a stopped state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a ready-to-win effect is generated to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that the (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display content of the ready-to-win effect. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display content of the ready-to-win effect. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the result of the variable display of the first special symbol is out in the normal state and the variable probability state, and (b) shows an example of a customer waiting demo screen. It is a figure, (c) is a figure showing an example of the demo screen during special figure 2 fluctuation. (a) is a diagram showing an example of pattern variation in the latent definite state, (b) is a diagram showing an example of display content within 30 seconds after the end of the variable display, ( c) is a diagram showing an example of display contents after 30 seconds from the end of the variable display. (a) is a diagram showing this latent state end screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a result screen displayed after the latent state ends. It is the figure which showed an example of the revival production|presentation which is a kind of production|presentation performed during a latent certainty state. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in a RAM 203 of the main controller 110. FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a ROM of a main controller in a first control example; (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first per random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small per random number table, (c), It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the 2nd hit random number table typically. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit type selection table. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table; It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the table for normal use typically. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a normal table, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a latency table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal figure fluctuation pattern table. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of the main controller in the first control example; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example; (b) is the schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a screen display selection table; FIG. 4 is a block diagram of an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example; (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surfaces BD. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the rear surface E. FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 deviation fluctuation processing which is executed by MPU in main control unit. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 deviating stop processing that is executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing that is executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flowchart which shows a big-hit control process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart which shows big hit operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart showing a jackpot ending process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prize-winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows small hit operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize-winning process performed by MPU in a main control device. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the customer waiting effect|presentation process performed by MPU in an audio|voice lamp control apparatus. 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing stop type command reception processing executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device; FIG. 10 is a flow chart illustrating status command processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp controller; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart illustrating standby command processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp controller; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing remaining number update processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device be. (a) is a flow chart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 4 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; be. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; 4 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device; be. 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second control example. FIG. 11 is a front view showing the inside of the sorting unit in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a game state transition method in the second control example; It is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of special figure fluctuation in the second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when an additional effect is not executed in the remaining period, and (b) is a display screen when an additional effect A is executed as a type of additional effect during the remaining period. It is a schematic diagram showing. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when additional effect B is executed as the type of additional effect during the remaining period, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an additional effect C as the type of additional effect during the remaining period. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when executed; It is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when an additional effect D is executed as a type of additional effect during the remaining period. (a) and (b) are timing charts showing an example of the flow of special figure variation in the second control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration display A screen (customer waiting demonstration screen) in the third pattern display device, (b) is a demonstration display B screen (customer waiting demonstration screen) in the third pattern display device ) is a diagram showing an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a special display A screen in the third symbol display device, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a special display B screen in the third symbol display device. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the second control example, and (b) is a variation pattern selection table in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed the structure typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table (for two times or less after the end of latency) in the second control example, and (b) is a normal table in the second control example ( It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of (for 3 to 8 times after the end of latent certainty). (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation table in the second control example, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability table in the second control example is. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of a main controller in a second control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the second control example; (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a screen display selection table in the second control example; is. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an additional effect selection table in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. 10 is a flow chart showing game state update processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. It is a flow chart showing a process during execution of the first special symbol variation executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation stop process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation start process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. It is a flow chart showing a process during execution of a second special symbol variation executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation stop process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. 10 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process 2 executed by an MPU in a main control device in a second control example; It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot end processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a remaining count update process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing temporary stop-related processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a variable restart process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. It is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of special figure fluctuation in another example of the second control example. FIG. 11 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine in another example of the second control example; It is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of special figure fluctuation in the third control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a big hit end screen when the game state shifts to the latent state, and (b) is during the winning game in the latent state (during the small winning game ) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents displayed when the additional effect D (see point D in FIG. 290) is executed during the special figure fluctuation of the latent probability state, and (b) is , is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the final effect in the latent certainty state. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the winning effect during the latent certainty state; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the third control example; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the third control example; be. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an additional effect table in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a winning effect table in the third control example. be. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a first winning process 2 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a third control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a second prize winning process 2 executed by an MPU in the main controller in the third control example; 13 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation setting processing which is executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 3rd example of control. 10 is a flow chart showing state command processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing winning command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing variable display setting processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 3rd example of control. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing a display mode when the pending advance notice effect is executed. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing a display mode when a pressing additional effect is executed. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing a display mode when a pressing additional effect is executed. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing a display mode when a non-display mode is set in which the remaining number of times is hidden in the latent state. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing a non-display mode during the latent state. (a) is a diagram showing the display contents in the non-display mode when the actual remaining number of times of the latent definite state is 0 and the latent definite state ends, and (b) is the non-display mode It is a diagram showing a display mode (pinch escape effect) when a jackpot is set and the remaining number of times of the latent definite state is within 5 times. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; be. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of an additional effect selection table in the fourth control example, and (b) schematically showing the contents of a normal participation level table in the fourth control example. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a low participation table in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a big win table in the fourth control example. FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a pressing period table in the fourth control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special table in the fourth control example. be. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a pending advance notice determination table in the fourth control example; 14 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a process of pressing during addition effect executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a pending notice pressing process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 4 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 4th example of control. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing an additional effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a hold notice setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the residual probability variation frequency|count command process performed by MPU in an audio|voice ramp control apparatus. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing non-display setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a fixed command process executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the first modification of the first control example, (b) is a variation pattern selection in the first modification of the first control example It is a schematic diagram which showed the structure of the table typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a latency (second half) table in the first modification of the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the first modification of the first control example. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern scenario table; FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of a main controller in a first modified example of the first control example; It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 5 performed by MPU in the main control device in the 1st modification of the 1st control example. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing game state update processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first modified example of the first control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first modification of the first control example; FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a screen display selection 3 table in the second modified example of the first control example; (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first modification of the fourth control example; (b) is the audio ramp control device in the first modification of the fourth control example; 1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second normal table (for the third time or later after the end of the latent state) in the first modified example of the fourth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first modified example of the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing reach-in-process press processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first modified example of the fourth control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the press-down process during a jackpot performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 4th control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing pressing end processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first modified example of the fourth control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation|variation start processing 6 performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 4th control example. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing residual probability variation count command processing 6 executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the first modification of the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 6 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first modified example of the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing press-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first modified example of the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing reach-in-progress press command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first modified example of the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing scroll change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first modified example of the fourth control example; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing a scroll non-change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first modification of the fourth control example; (b) is the first modification of the fourth control example; It is the flowchart which showed the push-down command process during a jackpot performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in an example. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a character storage area in a second modification of the fourth control example; (b) is a schematic diagram of the character storage area in the second modification of the fourth control example; FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram showing the contents, and FIG. 14C is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the pattern arrangement storage area in the second modification of the fourth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second modified example of the fourth control example; FIG.

<First embodiment>
BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 1 to 60, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported toward the front side so that they can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 16a is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be visually recognized through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, ie, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as seen from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and a general winning prize. The opening 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 1640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the second through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. It is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood by pasting together thin plate materials, and is formed so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general prize winning port 63, the first ball inlet 64, the second ball inlet 1640, the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of 13 .

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640. . Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second ball entrance 1640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is conducted when either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640 wins a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during probability variation) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 1640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, and the second entrance 1640 refers to the game state in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or during the time reduction, not only the probability of winning the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second entrance 1640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. is set. When the electric accessory 1640a is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the second ball entrance 1640 more than when the electric accessory 1640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 1640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second entrance 1640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the electric accessary 1640a is opened more than during normal times. Also, during the probability change or the time reduction, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 1640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second ball entrance 1640 is opened and once per hit. It is also possible to change at least one of the number of times to perform. In addition, during the probability change and the time saving, the time when the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second entrance 1640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 1640a is opened per time are not set. Only the winning probability may be changed so as to be increased compared to normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) of either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display of the third pattern, and the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 are used as triggers. A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variably displaying the second pattern is provided.

A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86 . Further, when the rotating body elevating unit 300, the central floating unit 400 and the left/right rotating unit 500, which will be described later, are operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 thereof protrude into the opening of the center frame 86, and the opening is opened. visible through the part.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, the second symbol display device displays a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)). and are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time to perform a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 1640a associated with the second ball entrance 1640 is displayed in a predetermined manner. It is configured to be activated (released) only for a period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more chances to open the electric accessory 1640a of the second ball entrance 1640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 1640 during the variable probability and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 1640a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessary 1640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The first thru gate 66 is attached to the game board in the area on the left side of the variable display unit 80 , and the second thru gate 67 is attached to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80 . The first thru gate 66 and the second thru gate 67 are configured so that a part of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls launched to the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is held up to four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B and the second pattern is displayed. A holding lamp (not shown) is also illuminated. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). can be set to Also, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Also, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first ball entrance 64 in front view, a second ball entrance 1640 is arranged. When the ball enters the second ball entrance 1640, the second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by turning on the second ball entrance switch. A jackpot lottery is performed by the device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is a prize winning opening in which three balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins (enters a prize). Then, one ball becomes one of the prize winning openings from which a prize ball is paid out. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 1640 are made different. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 1640 are the same number (for example, both are five). may be configured as

Also, the second ball entrance 1640 is attached with an electric accessory 1640a. This electric accessory 1640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 1640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 1640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the second through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 1640a is in the open state. (Enlarged state), and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 1640 .

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ ” is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 1640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 1640a is opened is longer than during the normal time during the variable probability or during the time saving. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 1640 during the probability change or the time reduction than during normal times.

Here, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and when the ball enters the second ball entrance 1640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. be. However, the probability of winning the 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second ball entrance 1640 than when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. is set too high. On the other hand, the first ball entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory 1640a like the second ball entrance 1640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 1640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second ball entrance 1640, so the first ball entrance without the electric accessory is closed. 64, the ball is shot so that it passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left shot"), and by winning the first ball entrance 64, there are many chances for a big winning lottery. , it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big win.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the second through gate 67, the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second ball entrance 1640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second ball entrance 1640 wins. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is shot toward the second ball entrance 1640 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right hitting”), and is passed through the second through gate 67. It is advantageous for the player to set the electric accessory 1640a to an open state and to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning a prize in the second ball entrance 1640.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A variable prize winning device 65 is arranged above the second ball entrance 1640, and an opening/closing plate that prevents the ball from entering the inside of the variable prize winning device 65 by being in a closed state on the right side thereof. 65f1 is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640 results in a big win, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot is won. The first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is lit so as to become a stop pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. In this special game state, the opening/closing plate 65f1, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until five balls have been won).

The opening/closing plate 65f1 is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after being closed, the opening/closing plate 65f1 is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65f1 can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 is driven to open and close to the right side around the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65f1 that prevents the ball from entering the entrance portion (specific prize winning port 65a) of the variable prize winning device 65. and a large-opening solenoid (not shown) for The opening/closing plate 65f1 is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the variable winning device 65 while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. Also, the number of the variable winning device 65 is not limited to one, and a plurality (for example, three) may be arranged. Also, the arrangement position is not limited to above the second ball entrance 1640, and may be, for example, to the left of the variable display device unit 80. FIG.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out hole 71. be. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first ball entrance 64 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

Main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, display controller 114, payout controller 111, launch controller 112, power supply 115, and card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100-104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover unopenably by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In main controller 110, MPU 201 performs main processing of pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display in first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display result in second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65f of the variable winning device 65. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing to the right side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory are connected as a shaft. Send control signals.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420 , 530 , 630 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, changes the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the action unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the action unit 200. FIG. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

7 shows a state in which the rotating body lifting unit 300 is at the lowered position, and the central rotating unit 500, the right rotating unit 600, and the left rotating unit 700 are at the extended positions. The drawing shows a state in which the body lifting unit 300 is at the raised position, and the center rotation unit 500, the right rotation unit 600, and the left rotation unit 700 are at the retracted positions.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a box-shaped back case 210. In the inner space of the back case 210, there is a rotator elevating unit 300 below the back case 210, which emits light upward. A decoration unit 400 and a center rotation unit 500 are arranged, and a right rotation unit 600 and a left rotation unit 700 are arranged on the left and right sides, respectively.

The rear case 210 has a bottom wall portion 211 and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. The box is opened on one side (left front side of FIG. 6) by these wall portions 211 and 212. formed into a shape. A rectangular opening 211a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210, and the rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the external shape of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, in which the third pattern display device 81 can be arranged).

The rotating body elevating units 300 are composed of box-shaped housing bodies 330 in which a plurality (three in this embodiment) are arranged side by side in the width direction, and a plurality (two in this embodiment) to be housed in each of the housing bodies 330. ) (first rotating body 340a and second rotating body 340b).

The plurality of containers 330 are formed so as to be vertically movable (vertical direction in FIGS. 7 and 8) independently of each other. In this case, in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are arranged on the back side of the game board 13 and are invisible to the player. On the other hand, in the raised position (see FIG. 8), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are raised to the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and the player can visually recognize through the opening. be done.

The first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotatably supported by the housing body 330, and the rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b sequentially allow the player to visually recognize a plurality of figures (three in this embodiment) drawn on the outer peripheral surface. Let The first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed as columnar bodies having a triangular cross section, and different figures are drawn on the three surfaces of the outer periphery.

In the present embodiment, one driving motor 350 is shared as the drive source for the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, thereby making it possible to reduce the cost of the parts while reducing the cost of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. The combinations of figures 340b can be changed, and a total of nine combinations can be visually recognized by the player (see FIG. 20). Details will be described later.

The light-emitting decoration unit 400 mainly includes a base body 410 and a light-emitting device 420 arranged in the central portion of the base body 410, and emits light from a plurality of LEDs 421 arranged inside the light-emitting device 420. By changing the aspect (for example, the number of LEDs 421 to irradiate), effects by light emission are performed. Details will be described later.

The central rotating unit 500 includes a rear base 510 and a pair of displacement members 530 rotatably supported on the rear base 510 at their base ends, and is arranged on the rear side of the light emitting decoration unit 400 . The pair of displacement members 530 are located at a protruding position (see FIG. 7) protruding into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and retracted to the rear side of the light-emitting decoration unit 400 to be invisible to the player. It is rotated between the retracted position (see FIG. 8). Details will be described later.

The right rotation unit 600 includes a base body (rear base 610 and front base 620) disposed on the front surface of the front base 315 of the rotating body elevating unit 300, and a base body rotatably supported by the base body. and members (first displacement member 630 and second displacement member 640). On the other hand, the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 has a base body (rear base 610 and front base 620) arranged in front of the front base 317 of the rotating body elevating unit 300, and its proximal end is rotatably supported by the base body. and a displacement member (first displacement member 630 and second displacement member 640). Each displacement member has a projecting position (see FIG. 7) that projects into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and a retracted position (see FIG. 7) that retracts to the back side of the game board 13 and is invisible to the player ( (see FIG. 8). Details will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 60, detailed configurations of the rotating body elevating unit 300, the light emitting decoration unit 400, the center rotating unit 500, the right rotating unit 600, and the left rotating unit 700 will be described. First, the detailed configuration of the rotating body lifting unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 22 .

FIG. 9 is a front view of the rotating body lifting unit 300. FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body lifting unit 300, and FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body lifting unit 300. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 9 to 11, the rotating body elevating unit 300 includes a central unit 300C for raising and lowering the central container 330, and left and right units 300L and 300R for respectively raising and lowering the left and right containers 330. It is formed from three units of The left unit 300L is superimposed on the front side of the central unit 300C, and the right unit 300R is connected to the right end of the central unit 300C, thereby arranging the three containers 330 side by side in the width direction.

Here, detailed configurations of the central unit 300C, the left unit 300L, and the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19. FIG. First, the central unit 300C will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG. 12 is an exploded front perspective view of the central unit 300C, and FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central unit 300C.

As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the central unit 300C includes a rear base 311 that is L-shaped when viewed from the front, a front base 312 superimposed on the front side of the rear base 311, and a front base 312 on the front side of the front base 312. A drive motor 320 provided, an accommodation body 330 that moves up and down with respect to the rear base 311 and the front base 312 by the driving force of the drive motor 320, a first rotating body 340a and a first rotation body 340a accommodated in the accommodation body 330 It mainly includes a second rotating body 340b and a transmission mechanism that is housed between the facing surfaces of the rear base 311 and the front base 312 and transmits the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the housing body 330. As shown in FIG.

The transmission mechanism in the central unit 300C includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a transmission gear 322 meshed with the drive gear 321, a pinion gear 323 meshed with the transmission gear 322, A rack gear 324 which is meshed with the pinion gear 323 and which is formed as a rack having tooth cuts on the side surface of a flat member, and the rack gear 324 is arranged on one side and a container 330 is arranged on the other side. and a connecting member 325 provided.

A pair of shafts protrude from the front surface of the rear base 311, and a transmission gear 322 and a pinion gear 323 are rotatably supported on each of these shafts. Slide guides 351 and 352 are arranged parallel to each other on the front surface of the rear base 311 so that the guiding direction is the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 12). ) and the container 330 are guided vertically. That is, the movement directions of the connecting member 325 and the container 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gear 322, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational motion of the pinion gear 323 is converted into the linear motion of the rack gear 324. , along with the linear motion of the rack gear 324, the container 330 is vertically displaced (lifted) together with the connecting member 325 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the connecting member 325 connects the vertically elongated portion where the rack gear 324 is arranged and the vertically elongated portion where the container 330 is arranged, with the horizontally elongated portion connecting the lower ends thereof. , and is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front. As a result, even when the central container 330 is positioned at the raised position while the left container 330 is positioned at the lowered position, the horizontally elongated portion of the connecting member 325 can be positioned on the rear surface of the front base 312. , it is possible to avoid being viewed by the player.

The slide guide 351 is a linear guide made up of a guide groove formed on the front surface of the rear base 311 and a sliding body slidably formed along the guide groove and fixed to the rear surface of the connecting member 325. Formed as a mechanism. The same applies to the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R, which will be described later. The slide guide 352 includes a first rail fixed to the rear base 311, a second rail fixed to the connecting member 325 or the container 330, and a slide guide 352 interposed between the first rail and the second rail. It is formed as a telescopic linear guide mechanism with an intermediate rail for allowing relative displacement in the longitudinal direction.

Here, since the left container 330 is arranged side by side (left side in FIG. 12) of the central container 330 (see FIG. 9), the width of the connecting member 325 (left and right direction in FIG. 12) ) dimension is longer. Furthermore, as described above, since the oblong portion is interposed to avoid being viewed by the player, the connecting member 325 is formed in a U shape when viewed from the front, and its rigidity is reduced. Therefore, the posture of the center container 330 tends to be unstable (swaying in the left-right direction tends to occur).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since an extendable linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) is arranged on the back side of the central container 330, the state where the central container 330 is arranged at the raised position However, the elongated slide guide 352 can restrict the swinging in the horizontal direction and stabilize the posture of the center container 330 . On the other hand, in a state in which the central containing body 330 is arranged in the lowered position (see FIG. 9), the slide guide 352 can be shortened to avoid being viewed by the player.

Next, the left unit 300L will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit 300L, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit 300L.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the left unit 300L includes a rear base 313 which is vertically long in front view and arranged in front of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C, and the rear base 313. An intermediate base 314 superimposed on the front side, a front base 315 superimposed on the front side of the intermediate base 314, a drive motor 320 arranged on the rear side of the intermediate base 314, and a driving force of the drive motor 320. A housing body 330 that moves up and down with respect to each of the bases 313 to 315 by means of a and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the housing 330 .

The transmission mechanism in the left unit 300L includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, transmission gears 322a and 322b meshed with the drive gear 321, and a pinion gear 323 coaxially fixed to the transmission gear 322b. , a rack gear 324 which is meshed with the pinion gear 323 and is formed as a rack formed by tooth cutting on the side surface of a flat member, and a connecting member 326 which connects the rack gear 324 to the container 330 .

A shaft protrudes from the front surface of the intermediate base 314, and a transmission gear 322a is rotatably supported on this shaft. A shaft support hole is formed in the intermediate base 314, and a transmission gear 322b and a pinion gear 323 are rotatably supported in the shaft support hole while being coaxially fixed.

A slide guide 351 is disposed on the front surface of the rear base 313 so that the guiding direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 14), and the connecting member 326 (rack gear 324) is guided vertically by the slide guide 351. . A guide plate 353 is fastened and fixed to the front of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300 . The guide plate 353 has a guide groove 353a, which is an elongated opening, extending in the vertical direction. Interpolated. Accordingly, the container 330 is guided vertically along the guide groove 353 a of the guide plate 353 . That is, the moving directions of the connecting member 326 and the container 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gears 322a and 322b. With the linear motion of the rack gear 324, the container 330 is vertically displaced (lifted) together with the connecting member 326 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

Next, the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit 300R.

As shown in FIG. 16, the right unit 300L includes a rear base 316 that is formed in a substantially L-shaped front surface and is connected to the right end of the rear base 311 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C. A front base 317 superimposed on the front side of the back base 313 , a drive motor 320 arranged on the front side of the front base 317 , and the driving force of the drive motor 320 moves up and down with respect to the back base 316 and the front base 317 . a first rotating body 340a and a second rotating body 340b housed in the housing body 330; and a transmission mechanism that transmits to the body 330 .

The transmission mechanism in the right unit 300R includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a pinion gear 323 meshed with the drive gear 321, and a plate-shaped member meshed with the pinion gear 323. A rack gear 324 formed as a rack with toothed sides and a connecting member 327 connecting the rack gear 324 to the container 330 are provided.

A shaft protrudes from the front surface of the rear base 316, and a pinion gear 323 is rotatably supported on this shaft. A slide guide 351 is disposed on the front surface of the rear base 316 so that the guiding direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 16), and the connecting member 327 (rack gear 324) is guided vertically by the slide guide 351. . Further, the front base 316 has a guide groove 316a, which is an elongated opening, extending in the vertical direction. (not shown). Accordingly, the container 330 is guided vertically along the guide groove 316a of the rear base 316. As shown in FIG. That is, the movement directions of the connecting member 327 and the container 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the z of the pinion gear 323 is converted into the linear motion of the rack gear 324, and the rack gear 324 is rotated. Along with the linear motion, the container 330 is vertically displaced (lifted) together with the connecting member 327 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

As described above, in the central unit 300C, the width dimension of the connecting member 325 is long (see FIG. 12), and the posture of the central container 330 tends to be unstable (swaying in the horizontal direction is likely to occur). On the other hand, in the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R, since the rack gear 323 is provided at a position adjacent to the side surface of the left container 330 and the right container 330, the width of the connecting members 326 and 327 (Figs. The left-right direction) dimension can be shortened to increase its rigidity. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the attitude of the left and right containers 330 (to make it difficult to swing in the left-right direction).

Accompanying this, there is no need to dispose a telescopic linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) on the rear side of the left and right housing bodies 330, and the guide plates 353 or the guide grooves 353a and 316a of the rear base 316 are used for guidance. It can stabilize the posture sufficiently. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

Next, the housing 330 and the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b housed in the housing 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19. FIG.

17 is an exploded front perspective view of container 330. FIG. 18(a) is a side view of container 330 viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIa in FIG. 17, and FIG. 18(b) is a front view of container 330 viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. 18(a). is. 18(a) and 18(b) illustrate a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334 and the decorative body 335 are removed.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the container 330 includes a base 331, left and right side walls 332 and 333 provided on the left and right sides of the base 331, and inner surfaces of the left side wall 332. and a decorative body 335 disposed on the front surface of the base 331. These parts 331 to 335 are integrated by fastening to form a box shape.

The base 331 is a member that forms the rear surface (the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 18B), the upper surface and the lower surface (the upper side and the lower side of FIG. 18B) of the container 330, and is a combination of three plate-like members. formed integrally. A reflecting part RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is disposed on the front side of the portion forming the rear side of the container 330 .

The reflector RF is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a size that extends at least vertically beyond the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b when viewed from the front. (see FIG. 18(b)).

The side walls 332 and 333 are rectangular plate-shaped members forming the left and right side surfaces of the container 330, and are provided with holding holes 332a and 333a at two locations, respectively. The holding holes 332a and 333a are holes through which fixed shafts 341 (described later) of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are inserted, and hold the fixed shafts 341 so as not to rotate. The holding holes 332a and 333a have a cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis of the inner peripheral surface thereof, which is formed by removing one of the two points on the circumference of the circle and dividing the circle by a straight line.

The partition body 334 is a rectangular plate-shaped member having substantially the same outer shape as the side wall body 332 , and rotatably supports the transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 between the surfaces facing the side wall body 332 . In addition, the partition body 334 is provided with two insertion holes 334 a for inserting the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 .

The decoration body 335 is a member that decorates the front surface of the housing body 330, and is formed in a frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 335a in the center. The player can visually recognize the manner of rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of both rotating bodies 340a and 340b through the opening 335 (see FIG. 9). ).

The storage body 330 formed in this manner includes a drive motor 350 arranged in the partition body 334, a first rotating body 340a and a second rotating body 340b rotated by the driving force of the driving motor 350, and a driving motor. A transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the motor 350 to the first rotor 340a and the second rotor 340b and a detection mechanism for detecting the rotational position of the first rotor 340a are mainly housed.

The transmission mechanism in the container 330 includes a drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350, a transmission gear 352 meshed with the drive gear 351 in order, a first gear 353, an intermediate gear 354 and a second gear 355. and a gear train consisting of The transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 are rotatably held between the facing surfaces of the side wall body 332 and the partition body 334, and the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 are connected to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. They are fixed to the axial end faces, respectively.

Here, with reference to FIG. 19, detailed configurations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described. FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the first rotor 340a.

Note that since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b have substantially the same configuration except that the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface are different, the first rotating body 340a will be used as a representative example below. , and description of the second rotating body 340b is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 19, the first rotating body 340a includes a fixed shaft 341, a pair of end plates 342 rotatably supported on both axial ends (shaft portions 341a) of the fixed shaft 341, and a pair of It mainly includes three display boards (first display board 343A, second display board 343B, and third display board 343C) that are installed between the end plates 342 .

The fixed shaft 341 includes a trunk portion 341b and shaft portions 341a connected to both axial ends of the trunk portion 341b. The fixed shaft 341 is a portion that is non-rotatably held by the side walls 332 and 333 (see FIG. 17) of the container 330, and connects a pair of shaft portions 341a located at both ends in the axial direction. and a trunk portion 341b.

The axial cross-sectional shape of the shaft portion 341a is a shape obtained by removing one of the sections from a circular shape by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line (a shape obtained by chamfering a portion of the outer peripheral surface of a cylinder). , and is similar in shape to the holding holes 332a and 333a (see FIG. 17) of the side walls 332 and 333, respectively. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 341a into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall bodies 332 and 333, the fixed shaft 341 can be non-rotatably held in the container 330 (side wall bodies 332 and 333).

A plurality of (four in this embodiment) LEDs 344 are attached to the body portion 341b, and light emitted from the LEDs 344 can be irradiated to the inner surfaces of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C.

In this case, when the shaft portion 341a is inserted into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall members 332 and 333 and held so as not to rotate, the body portion 341b is arranged so that the irradiation direction of the LED 344 is directed to the front surface of the housing member 330 (decorative member 335). The opening 335a of FIG. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 344 can be irradiated to the inner surface of one of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C, which is arranged in front of the container 330 (“viewing position” described later). can.

The fixed shaft 341 (shaft portion 341a, body portion 341b) is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape with both ends in the axial direction open. It can be pulled out of the container 330 through the opening at the direction end. In addition, since the fixed shaft 341 is not rotatable with respect to the container 330, as described above, even if the first rotating body 340a is rotated, the wiring of the LED 344 is not subjected to external force such as twisting or pulling. can be avoided.

The end plate 342 is a member formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a shaft support hole 342a having a circular cross-section perpendicular to the axis. The inner diameter dimension of the shaft support hole 342 a is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the shaft portion 341 a of the fixed shaft 341 . Therefore, the end plate 342 is rotatably supported with respect to the fixed shaft 341 by inserting the shaft portion 341a into the shaft support hole 342a. Thereby, the end plate 342 is rotatably held inside the container 330 via the fixed shaft 341 .

Here, since the fixed shaft 341 has a trunk portion 341b larger in diameter than the shaft portion 341a, the end plate 342 is formed between the side walls 332 and 333 of the container 330 and the trunk portion 341b of the fixed shaft 341. The axial position can be defined, and the fixed shaft 341 can be held between the pair of side walls 332 and 333 via the end plate 342 .

A first gear 353 of the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end plates 342, and a base gear 361 of the detection mechanism, which will be described later, is fixed to the other. The second gear 355 of the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end plates 342 of the second rotating body 340b, but the attachment of the base gear 361 to the other is omitted (see FIGS. 17 and 17). 18).

Each of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C is a substantially rectangular plate-shaped member when viewed from the front. It is bridged between the end plates 342 and together with the end plates 342 forms a triangular prism.

A figure is drawn on the outer surface of each of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C. Therefore, when the triangular columnar body is rotated, the figures drawn on the outer surfaces of the respective display plates 343A to 343C are sequentially visible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335. FIG.

At least a part of the outer surface of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C is curved in an outwardly convex arc shape when viewed in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341 . As a result, as will be described later, even when there is a deviation of a predetermined rotational angle (for example, 12 degrees) between the rotational positions of the first rotor 340a and the second rotor 340b, each display plate 343A It is possible to make it difficult for the player who visually recognizes the figure drawn on the outer surface of 343C to recognize the deviation of the predetermined rotation angle.

In this embodiment, when viewed in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341, the widthwise ends of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C are curved in an arcuate shape that protrudes outward. A width direction central portion is formed in a substantially flat surface shape. Accordingly, it is possible to achieve both ensuring the visibility of the graphic and making it difficult to recognize the deviation between the rotating bodies 340a and 340b. In addition, the arc radius of the curved arc-shaped portion is a value larger than the maximum distance from the axis of the fixed shaft 341 to the outer surface of each of the display plates 343A to 343C (for example, 2 times or more and 4 times below).

Here, in the following description, the positions of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C when the triangular columnar body is rotated are assumed to be the front surface of the container 330 (the surface on the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 18B). The position at which the figure drawn on the outer surface can be viewed by the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is called a "visible position", and the outer surface is directed to the inner surface of the container 330 (base 331). A position where the figure drawn on the outer surface is invisible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as a "shielding position".

Therefore, for example, when the first display panel 343A is arranged at the visible position, the second display panel 343B and the third display panel 343C are arranged at the shielding position (see FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b)). . From this state, when the triangular prism body is rotated by 120 degrees in the forward direction or the reverse direction, either the second display panel 343B or the third display panel 343C is arranged at the viewing position, and the second display panel 343B or the third display panel is positioned. The other of the plates 343C and the first display plate 343A are arranged at the shielding position.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the first display panel 343A is formed in a shape that does not allow light to pass through, while the second display panel 343B and the third display panel 343C have a transparent portion PN through which light can pass. in part. In addition, a reflecting portion RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is disposed on the inner surface of the first display panel 343A.

As described above, the LED 344 is arranged at a position capable of illuminating the inner surface of the display board arranged at the visible position among the first display board 343A to the third display board 343C. Therefore, in a state where the second display panel 343B or the third display panel 343C is arranged at the viewing position, the light emitted from the LED 344 is transmitted through the transparent portions PN of the respective display panels 343B and 343C and directly viewed by the player. can be made

On the other hand, in the state where the first display panel 343A is placed at the viewing position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B), the light emitted from the LED 344 is reflected by the reflecting portion RF on the inner surface of the first display panel 343A. and transmitted through the transmission portion PN of the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C, and then reflected by the reflection portion RF of the base 331 of the container 330, and the reflected light from the reflection portion RF of the base 331 can be visually visually recognized by the player indirectly.

For example, by stopping the first rotating body 340a at the rotational position where the first display plate 343A is arranged at the viewing position and causing the LED 344 to emit light, the reflected light reflected by the reflecting portion RF of the base 331 of the container 330 is visually recognized. The player can be reminded of the figure of the second display board 343B or the third display board 343C arranged at a position (shielding position) invisible to the player. This makes it possible for the player to expect or suggest that the first rotating body 340a will be rotated to a position where the graphics on the second display panel 343B or the third display panel 343C can be visually recognized.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed to have triangular cross-sections, when the rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated, the reflector plate The distance between RF and the outer surface of each rotor 340a, 340b (display plates 343A to 343C), the distance between the outer surfaces of each rotor 340a, 340b (vertical distance in FIG. 18(b)), or The apparent diameter (vertical dimension in FIG. 18(b)) of each rotating body 340a, 340b can be increased or decreased, and the outer surface of each rotating body 340a, 340b (each display plate 343A to 343C) can be opposed to the reflector RF. You can change the angle. That is, as the rotating bodies 340a and 340b rotate, the light emitted from the LED 344 and emitted from the transmission portion PN is displayed as reflected light from the reflection portion RF of the substrate 331. The aspect (eg, the size of the area in which the light is visible) can be changed periodically.

Returning to FIGS. 17 and 18, description will be made. The detection mechanism includes a base gear 361 fixed to the end face plate 342 of the first rotating body 340a, an intermediate gear 362 meshed with the base gear 361, and a gear meshed with the intermediate gear 362. A terminal gear 363 having a detection target plate 363a projecting outward, and a sensor device 364 for detecting the detection target plate 363a of the terminal gear 363 are provided.

The intermediate gear 362 and the terminal gear 363 are rotatably held by the side wall 333, and the sensor device 364 is arranged on the base 331 with the detection area arranged on the movement locus of the plate 363a to be detected. Therefore, the sensor device 364 can detect the rotational position of the first rotating body 340a based on the detection state of the detected plate 363a. That is, based on the detection result of the sensor device 364, the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be controlled (for example, stopped at an arbitrary position).

Next, rotation operations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described. When the drive motor 350 rotates, the rotation is transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b via the transmission mechanism, and these rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated.

Specifically, when the drive motor 350 rotates, the rotation is transmitted to the first gear 353 via the drive gear 351 and the transmission gear 352, and the first gear 353 rotates. Thereby, the first rotating body 340a is rotated. Also, when the first gear 353 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second gear 355 via the intermediate gear 354, and the second gear 355 is rotated. As a result, the second rotating body 340b rotates in the same direction as the first rotating body 340a. Also, when the rotation direction of the driving motor 350 is reversed, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in the opposite direction.

As a result, the combination of the figure of the first rotating body 340a and the figure of the second rotating body 340b visually recognized by the player is changed in order. In this case, the number of combinations of figures of both rotors 340a and 340b is limited to three in the conventional product.

That is, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are synchronously driven to rotate by one driving motor, a combination that can be formed is, for example, the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. A first combination in which the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b is placed at the display position, and the second display plate 343B of the first rotating body 340a and the second display plate 343B of the second rotating body 340b are placed in the display position. There were only three second combinations, that is, a third combination in which the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotating body 340b are placed at the display positions.

On the other hand, by adopting a structure in which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are independently rotationally driven by different drive motors, a maximum of nine combinations can be formed. It can appear arbitrarily. However, in this case, the parts cost increases due to the need for two drive motors.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the number of drive motors 350 is limited to one, and nine combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be formed. It can appear arbitrarily. In addition, in the present embodiment, by allowing a predetermined amount of deviation of the rotational positions without requiring the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b to be perfectly matched, the nine combinations can be quickly realized. can let you out. The combination of the figures of both rotating bodies 340a and 340b will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21. FIG.

FIG. 20 is a table showing combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 21 and 22 are schematic side views of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b showing transition states when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated. (a) to FIG. 21(e) are No. in FIG. 22(a) to 22(e) are shown in FIG. They correspond to the states shown as 6-10, respectively.

In FIG. 20, as a combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, the state in which the first display plate 343A is arranged at the visible position is indicated by the symbol "A" or "A'". The state in which the second display panel 343B is arranged in the visible position is indicated by the code "B" or "B'", and the state in which the third display panel 343C is arranged in the visible position is indicated by the code "C" or "C'". be done.

For example, No. in FIG. In the state represented by 10 "A, C'", the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the visible positions, and the first rotating body A figure drawn on the first display panel 343A from 340a and a figure drawn on the third display panel 343C from the second rotator 340b correspond to a state visually recognized by the player.

Also, in FIG. 21, to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotor 340a are denoted by reference numerals "A to C". The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the rotator 340b are illustrated using reference numerals "A' to C'", respectively.

Here, the number of teeth of the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 fixed to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are set to different values. In this embodiment, the number of teeth of the first gear 353 is 14 and the number of teeth of the second gear 355 is 20. When the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees, the second rotating body 340b rotates 108 degrees. is formed to

No. in FIG. 1 and FIG. 21(a), the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are placed at their respective viewing positions (No. 1 "A', A", first combination), the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees, and the second display plate 343B is placed at the viewing position. 2 and FIG. 21(b), the second rotating body 340b places the second display panel 343B at the viewing position. Thereby, the second combination (No. 2 "B', B" in FIG. 20) can be formed.

In this case, the second rotating body 340b rotates 108 degrees while the first rotating body 340a rotates 120 degrees. , 340b from the direction perpendicular to the axis, it is difficult for the player to recognize the difference in rotation angle of 12 degrees. It can be recognized that the figures drawn on the outer surface of 343B are arranged at respective viewing positions (the second combination is formed).

In particular, in the present embodiment, as described above, the outer surfaces of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C are curved in an outwardly convex arc shape when viewed in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. (that is, the surface on which the figure is drawn is curved along the direction of rotation of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b). , the difference (deviation) in the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be made difficult to recognize.

No. in FIG. 2 and FIG. 21(b), the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display plate 343C is positioned at the visible position. 3 and FIG. 21(c), the second rotating body 340b is arranged at a position shifted from the first rotating body 340a. That is, in this state, a difference in rotation angle of 24 degrees is formed between the two, so that the player is made to recognize the deviation of the figure (no combination, No. 3 "-, C" in FIG. 20). be able to.

Similarly, No. in FIG. 4 and FIG. 21(d) to No. 4 in FIG. 9 and the state shown in FIG. 340b is arranged at a position where its rotational position is displaced from the first rotating body 340a. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize the deviation of the graphics (no combination, No. 4 "-, A" to No. 9 "-, C" in FIG. 20).

No. in FIG. 9 and FIG. 22(d) (No. 9 "-, C" in FIG. 20), the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the first display plate 343A is positioned at the visible position. 20 No. 10 and FIG. 22(e), the second rotor 340b places the third display panel 343C at the viewing position. Thereby, the third combination (No. 10 “C′, A” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

Note that, according to the present embodiment, the second rotation is also performed in the section where the figure deviation (the combination is not established, No. 3 "-, C" to No. 9 "-, C" in FIG. 20) is formed. Since the rotation of the body 340b can be continued and the graphics visually recognized by the player can be switched continuously, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which graphics will be combined in the third combination.

After that, substantially the same as the above-described aspect (rotation in the section from the state shown in No. 1 of FIG. 20 and FIG. 21 (a) to the state shown in No. 9 of FIG. 20 and FIG. 22 (e)) The aspect is repeated two more times to complete one cycle (the table is cycled from start to end).

In this case, No. in FIG. 11 to No. 20, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. B”), a fifth combination (No. 12 “B′, C” in FIG. 20) and a sixth combination (No. 20 “C′, B” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

Moreover, No. in FIG. 21 to No. 30, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. C”), the eighth combination (No. 22 “B′, A” in FIG. 20) and the ninth combination (No. 30 “C′, C” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 350 to the first rotor 340a and the second rotor 340b includes a plurality of gears (the drive gear 351 to the second gear 355 ), and is formed to be capable of transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 350 to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b at different rotation ratios.

Thereby, the rotation period of the first rotor 340a and the rotation period of the second rotor 340b can be made different. As a result, even with only one drive motor 350, it is possible to form nine sets of combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, and the combinations can be arbitrarily changed (desired Any combination can appear).

In addition, by forming the transmission mechanism as a gear train, not only is it possible to simplify the structure, reduce the cost of parts, and improve durability and reliability, but also the gears are always meshed. Therefore, by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 between normal and reverse, the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 20 can be switched.

Therefore, for example, proceeding in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 20) in the table of FIG. After or just before the third combination (No. 10 “C′, A” in FIG. 20) appears, the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed, and the table in FIG. 20 is reversed. A series of actions of returning to the direction (the upward direction in FIG. 20) can be repeated, thereby providing an effect that the player expects the appearance of the third combination.

Alternatively, for example, from the state in which the first combination (No. 1 "A', A" in FIG. 20) is formed, the ninth combination (No. 30 "C', C" in FIG. 20) appears. 20 in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 20) to reveal the ninth combination, and in addition, reverse the table in FIG. 20 (upward in FIG. 20). to reveal a ninth combination. That is, in the former case, it is necessary to rotate the first rotating body 340a by 120 degrees 30 times, whereas in the latter case, it is necessary to rotate the first rotating body 340a by 120 degrees once. Since it is sufficient to do so, a desired combination of figures can be made to appear quickly.

Here, when the second rotating body 340b is rotated by 60 degrees with respect to the rotation of the first rotating body 340a by 120 degrees (that is, the rotation of the second rotating body 340b is equivalent to the rotation of the first rotating body 340a). , when set to "1/integer" times), a plurality of combinations of figures can be formed without causing a difference (shift) in the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. can be done. However, in this case, the maximum number of graphics that can be combined is three.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first, fourth and seventh combinations (No. 1 "A', A", No. 11 "A', B" and No. 11 "A', B" in FIG. 20). 21 "A', C"), in the remaining six combinations (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth and ninth combinations), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body A difference (deviation) of a predetermined rotation angle is allowed to occur in the rotation position of 340b. As a result, the number of figures that can be combined can be nine.

That is, in the structure in which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated by one driving motor 350, setting the number of possible combinations of figures to nine sets means that the rotation of the driving motor 350 is controlled by the first rotating body 340a. and the second rotating body 340b. This is possible only by allowing the occurrence of a difference (deviation) in the predetermined rotation angle. As a result, the required number of drive motors 350 can be suppressed, and the product cost can be reduced, while improving the presentation effect by increasing the number of combinations of graphics.

In this case, a combination of figures (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth, and ninth combinations) in which the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are different (shifted) by a predetermined rotation angle. combination), the stop positions at which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are stopped may be corrected.

For example, in the second, fifth and eighth combinations (No. 2 "B', B", No. 12 "B', C" and No. 22 "B', A" in Fig. 20), Fig. 21 As shown in (b), since the phase of the second rotating body 340b is delayed, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at a rotational position where the phase is advanced by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotating body 340b, the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. , for example, is stopped at a rotational position rotated by 126 degrees. This makes it possible to disperse the positional deviation from the reference plane to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and make it inconspicuous.

Similarly, for example, in the third, sixth and ninth combinations (No. 10 “C′, A”, No. 20 “C′, B” and No. 30 “C′, C” in FIG. 20) 22(e), the phase of the second rotating body 340b is advanced, so the first rotating body 340a is stopped at a rotational position delayed in phase by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotating body 340b, the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. , for example, is stopped at a rotational position rotated by 114 degrees. This makes it possible to disperse the positional deviation from the reference plane to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and make it inconspicuous.

As described above, the rotating body elevating unit 300 is formed such that each containing body 300 can move up and down. , so that it is invisible to the player. Therefore, a desired combination of the figure of the first body of rotation 340a and the figure of the second body of rotation 340b can be displayed promptly at the required timing.

That is, in the present embodiment, nine combinations of figures can be formed, so the table becomes long (the number of stages of the table in FIG. 20 increases). It is necessary to rotate the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b relatively many times, which increases the time.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, by arranging each containing body 300 in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are retracted to a position invisible to the player. can be done. As a result, the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be rotated in advance to a predetermined rotating position without being recognized by the player. When the timing arrives, each container 300 is placed in the raised position (see FIG. 8), and the remaining rotations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are executed to rapidly achieve the desired combination. can be made to appear in

It should be noted that the placement of each containing body 300 in the lowered position may be performed only when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in a specific variation pattern. For example, in a variation pattern in which the time from the start of rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively short, each container 300 is not placed in the lowered position, and each While the rotation of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b is started and stopped at a position visible to the player, the time from the start of rotation of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively long. In the variation pattern, each rotating body 340a, 340b may be rotated in advance at a position invisible to the player.

In this case, in this embodiment, the preliminary rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in the lowered position is performed when a predetermined operating means is operated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

That is, when rotating the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, a relatively loud sound is generated. The generated sound may make the player aware that the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b have been rotated in advance.

On the other hand, by performing the rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b during the operation of the predetermined operating means, it is possible to blend them into the operation. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

Incidentally, examples of the operating means include the payout device 133, the audio output device 226, or the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 3 or 4). When these operation means are operated, for example, a relatively loud sound is generated with the delivery of the ball, the output of sound, or the shooting of the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

Alternatively, or in addition to this, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is a predetermined effect, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b may be rotated in advance. When the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a predetermined effect, the player's attention can be focused on the predetermined effect. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the body 340b.

Next, the light emitting decoration unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 25. FIG. FIG. 23 is a front view of the luminous decoration unit 400. FIG. 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting decoration unit 400, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the light emitting decoration unit 400. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the luminous decoration unit 400 includes a horizontally long rectangular base body 410 in a front view, which is disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 210, and a width of the base body 410. A light-emitting device 420 arranged in front in the center of the direction, a light-shielding member 430 covering the front surface of the light-emitting device 420, and a cover member 440 covering the front surface of the light-shielding member 430 and made of a light-transmitting material. , and ring-shaped peripheral decorations 450 and 460 surrounding the light emitting device 420 , the light shielding member 430 and the cover member 440 when viewed from the front.

On the front side of the light emitting device 420, a plurality of (15 in this embodiment) light emitters (LEDs 421) are arranged in a dispersed state over the entire surface, and are formed so as to be able to irradiate the back surface of the light shielding member 430 with light. . Here, the light shielding member 430 includes a main body portion 431 made of a light shielding material (non-light-transmitting material), and partition walls 432 erected from the front and rear surfaces of the main body portion 431 .

A main body portion 431 of the light shielding member 430 is provided with circular openings 431a in a front view at a plurality of locations (15 locations in the present embodiment). The plurality of openings 431a are arranged at positions corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 421 of the light emitting device 420 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 421 can reach the rear surface of the cover 440 through the opening 431a of the light shielding member 430 .

The partition wall 432 is formed in an annular shape with a diameter smaller than that of the body portion 431 when viewed from the front, and is arranged at a position eccentric from the center of the body portion 431 . As a result, the space between the light emitting device 420 and the cover body 440 is divided into a circular first space surrounded by the partition wall 432 and a substantially crescent-shaped first space positioned on the outer peripheral side of the partition wall 431 when viewed from the front. 2 spaces.

In this way, the division by the division wall 431 makes it possible to clarify the outline of the light visually recognized from the cover member 440 . That is, when only the LEDs 421 in the first space emit light, a circle can be seen, and when only the LEDs 421 in the second space emit light, a crescent shape can be seen.

Next, the central rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28. FIG. FIG. 26(a) is a front view of central rotation unit 500 in the retracted position, and FIG. 26(b) is a front view of central rotation unit 500 in the extended position. . 27 is an exploded front perspective view of the center rotation unit 500, and FIG. 28 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center rotation unit 500. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 26 to 28, the central rotating unit 500 includes a rear base 510 disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 210, and a front base 510 superimposed on the front of the rear base 510. a base 520, a pair of displacement members 530 whose base ends are rotatably supported by the rear base 510 and the front base 520, a driving motor 540 for generating a driving force for rotating the displacement members 530, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 540 to the displacement member 530 .

A front surface of the rear base 510 and a rear surface of the front base 520 are respectively recessed with shaft support holes 511 and 521 for rotatably supporting the base end side (rotating shaft 531) of the displacement member 530 . A support shaft 512 for rotatably supporting a crank gear 542 in the transmission mechanism projects from the front surface of the rear base 510 .

The displacement member 530 is a member whose front end side is decorated, and mainly includes a rotating shaft 531 , a connecting gear 532 , and a crank groove 533 . As described above, the rotating shaft 531 is a shaft supported by the support holes 511 and 521 of the rear base 510 and the front base 520, and protrudes from the front and rear surfaces of the displacement member 530 on the proximal end side.

The connection gear 532 is a gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the displacement member 530 on the base end side with the rotation axis 531 as the center of rotation. When one of the displacement members 530 is rotated about the rotating shaft 531, the connecting gear 532 transmits the rotation to the other connecting gear 532 to rotate it. As a result, the other displacement member 530 is rotated around the rotating shaft 531 .

The crank groove 533 is a linear groove in a front view into which a connecting pin 542a of a crank gear 542 of the transmission mechanism, which will be described later, is slidably inserted. It is recessed in the rear surface of the displacement member 530 on the right side). As will be described later, the rotation of the crank gear 542 is transmitted to the crank groove 533 via the connecting pin 542a, so that one displacement member 530 rotates about the rotation shaft 531. As shown in FIG.

As described above, the transmission mechanism is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 540 to the displacement member 530, and includes a pinion 541 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 540 and a pinion 541 meshed with the pinion 541. and a crank gear 542. The crank gear 542 has a connecting pin 542 a protruding from a position eccentric from its rotation center (support shaft 512 ) and inserted into the crank groove 533 of the displacement member 530 .

According to the central rotation unit 500 configured in this way, the rotation of the drive shaft of the drive motor 540 is transmitted to the crank gear 542 via the pinion 541, and when the crank gear 542 is rotated, the crank gear 542 is rotated. Along with the rotation, the connecting pin 542a is displaced while drawing an arc-shaped trajectory, and the displacement of the connecting pin 542a acts on the inner wall surface of the crank groove 533, thereby displacing one side (the left side in FIG. 27 and the right side in FIG. 28). A member 530 is rotated around a rotating shaft 531 . In this case, the other displacement member 530 is also synchronously rotated via the connecting gear 532 . As a result, the pair of displacement members 530 are retracted to the projecting position (see FIGS. 7 and 26(a)) projecting into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86) and the rear surface of the luminous decoration unit 400. It is rotatable between the retracted position (see FIGS. 8 and 26(b)).

Next, the right rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 40. FIG. 29 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 600, and FIGS. 30 and 31 are exploded rear perspective views of the right rotation unit 600. FIG. It should be noted that FIG. 31 illustrates a state in which a part of the right rotation unit 600 is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 31, the right rotation unit 600 includes a base body composed of a rear base 610 and a front base 620, and a first displacement unit displaceably disposed on the front side of the front base 620 of the base body. The member 630 and the second displacement member 640, a driving motor 650 that generates a driving force for displacing the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 and is arranged on the rear surface of the rear base 610, and its driving and a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the motor 650 .

A part of the transmission mechanism (the first pinion 651, the rack member 652 and the second pinion 653) is housed between the facing surfaces of the rear base 610 and the front base 620. As shown in FIG. A bearing recess 621 for rotatably supporting the first pinion 651 is recessed on the rear surface of the front base 620, and a sliding groove of the rack member 652 is formed to define the moving direction of the rack member 652. A pair of insertion pins 622 are provided to be inserted through 652a.

Further, the front base 620 has circular shaft support holes 624 and 625 penetrating therethrough for rotatably supporting the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 and the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654, respectively. They are arranged side by side in the width direction (transverse direction) of the front base 620 at predetermined intervals.

It should be noted that the shaft support hole 624 that supports the first displacement member 630 is closer to the opening side of the game board 13 than the shaft support hole 625 that supports the transmission member 654 (the overhang position side of the first displacement member 630, FIG. 29). left side), as will be described later, at the overhang position, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can secure the overhang area for overhanging the opening side of the game board 13, while at the retracted position and the extended position, the transmission member 654 can be easily hidden behind the first displacement member 630 .

A ridge 626 and a bearing 627 protrude from the front surface of the front base 620 . The ridge 626 is a laterally elongated protrusion extending along the width direction of the front base 620 and has a substantially triangular cross section. The ridge 626 is formed such that its top is curved in an arc centered on the shaft support hole 624 when viewed from the front. When the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642) is displaced, the apex of the ridge 626 can be brought into contact, and as will be described later, compared to the case where the front surface of the front base 620 is in full face contact. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the contact area and suppress the sliding resistance, and it is possible to suppress the formation of cloudiness due to rubbing on the connecting displacement member 642 made of a light transmissive material.

On the left side of the front base 620 in front view (the left side in FIG. 29, i.e., the opening side of the game board 13), an inclined surface 620a is provided by chamfering the ridgeline portions of the side surface and the front surface. . Therefore, as will be described later, when retracting to the retracted position, it is possible to prevent the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642) from being locked by the side surface of the front base 620 and unable to be displaced (see FIG. 33).

The bearing portion 627 is formed as a cylindrical body concentric with the shaft support hole 624 , and rotatably supports the rotating shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 with the shaft support hole 624 on its inner peripheral surface. A protruding portion 628 is formed to protrude radially outward and downward from the front base 620 from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627 . The protruding portion 628 can restrict the rotation of the first displacement member 630 within a predetermined range and prevent the first displacement member 630 from tilting forward. Details thereof will be described later (see FIG. 40).

In the present embodiment, the bearing recess 621 is recessed in the rear surface of the front base 620 , so that the bearing recess 621 is used to move the first pinion 651 between the opposing surfaces of the rear base 610 and the front base 620 . It can be held rotatably. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to fasten and fix the first pinion 651 to the drive shaft of the drive motor 650, thereby reducing the number of parts and reducing the parts cost and assembly cost.

On the other hand, when the bearing recess 621 is recessed in the rear surface of the front base 620 , a projecting portion 623 protrudes from the front of the front base 620 along with the recess. In this embodiment, since a part of the second displacement member 640 is pivotally supported on the distal end side of the first displacement member 630, when the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced, the front-rear direction sway is likely to occur, and there is a risk that the second displacement member 640 will interfere with the protruding portion 623, but such interference can be suppressed by the ridge 626. As shown in FIG. The details will be described later (see FIG. 39).

The transmission mechanism includes a first pinion 651 attached to the drive shaft of the drive motor 650, a second pinion 653 fastened and fixed to the rotating shaft 654a of the transmission member 654, and the first pinion 651 and the second pinion 653 having teeth. and a rack member 652 formed as a rack in which a rack gear to be combined is tooth-cut on the side surface of a flat member.

The rack member 652 is provided with two sliding grooves 652a extending along its longitudinal direction and having an elongated hole shape when viewed from the front. By doing so, the moving direction is held in a specified state. That is, the rack member 652 is held between the facing surfaces of the rear base 610 and the front base 620 so as to be linearly movable.

The transmission member 654 includes a rotating shaft 654a protruding from the back surface of one end, a drive pin 654b protruding from the front surface of the other end opposite to the rotating shaft 654a, and the rotating shaft 654a and the drive pin. A recessed portion 654c formed by recessing an arcuate portion between 654b when viewed from the front. Supported.

The drive pin 654b is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and is inserted into a first groove 635 and a second groove 641b of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640, which will be described later. The arcuate shape of the recessed portion 654c in front view is formed in a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620 (that is, in a shape capable of receiving the bearing portion 627 on its inner peripheral side).

Therefore, while the arrangement position of the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654 is brought close to the arrangement position of the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630, interference with the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620 is suppressed, and the transmission member The rotatable range of 654 can be increased. Therefore, as will be described later, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be further displaced while miniaturizing the entire right rotation unit 600 (see FIGS. 37 and 38).

According to the transmission mechanism, when the first pinion 651 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650 , the rotation of the first pinion 651 is transmitted to the second pinion 653 via the linear motion of the rack member 652 . As the second pinion 653 is rotated, the transmission member 654 is rotated around the shaft support hole 625 of the front base 620 . As will be described later, by rotating the transmission member 654 and causing the drive pin 654b to act on the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b, the displacement corresponding to the shape of the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b can be changed to the second groove. Each of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be operated independently (see FIGS. 37 and 38).

A rotation shaft 631, support shafts 632 and 633, and a contact portion 634 are provided on the rear surface of the first displacement member 630, and a first groove 635 is provided thereon. As described above, the rotating shaft 631 is a shaft-shaped body that is inserted through the shaft support hole 624 of the front base 620 . rotatably supported on the A retainer C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 624 is fastened and fixed to the axial end face of the rotation shaft 631 , thereby restricting the rotation shaft 631 from slipping out of the shaft support hole 624 .

The support shafts 632 and 633 are shaft-shaped bodies having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640, respectively. That is, the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 are rotatably held on the rear surface of the first displacement member 630 via support shafts 632 and 633, respectively.

A pair of abutting portions 634 are arranged around the rotating shaft 631 at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. A protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 is disposed between the pair of contact portions 634 when the first displacement member 630 is assembled to the front base 620 . Therefore, as will be described later, when the first displacement member 630 is rotated about the rotation shaft 631 with respect to the front base 620, the contact portion 634 is brought into contact with the side surface of the projecting portion 628 of the front base 620. Thus, the rotation of the first displacement member 630 with respect to the front base 620 can be restricted within a predetermined range.

The first groove 635 is a concave groove through which the driving pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is slidably inserted, and is formed by bending in a substantially V-shape when viewed from the front. Specifically, the first groove 635 includes an action section 635a that extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 630, and a first displacement member 635 that is curved in an arc shape concave on the rotating shaft 631 side. A non-interfering section 635b extending along the width direction of the member 630 (that is, formed into a shape obtained by dividing an annular shape concentric with the rotating shaft 631) is provided. As will be described later, the action section 635a is a section that receives action from the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, and the non-interference section 635b is a section that the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 does not interfere with.

The second displacement member 640 is formed by being divided into two members, a driven member 641 and a connecting displacement member 642 . A shaft support hole 641a is formed through the driven member 641 at the center in the longitudinal direction, and a second groove 641b and a connecting groove 641c are formed at one end and the other end of the driven member 641, respectively. Note that the connecting displacement member 642 is made of a light-transmitting resin material.

As described above, the shaft support hole 641a is a circular hole through which the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 630 is rotatably inserted. It is rotatably journalled on the rear surface of member 630 . A screw having a head portion larger in diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 641a is fastened to the axial end surface of the support shaft 632, thereby restricting the support shaft 632 from coming out of the shaft support hole 641a. .

The second groove 641 b is a groove-shaped opening through which the drive pin 654 b of the transmission member 654 is slidably inserted, and extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 641 . The second groove 641 b overlaps the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 when the driven member 641 is supported on the rear surface of the first displacement member 630 . Therefore, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 can be inserted through the first groove 635 via the second groove 641b. In addition, the second groove 641b is formed as an action section that receives action from the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, as will be described later.

The connecting groove 641c is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 641, and a connecting pin 643 of a connecting displacement member 642, which will be described later, is slidably inserted. That is, the second displacement member 640 is formed to be able to transmit the rotation of the driven member 641 to the connection displacement member 642 via the connection groove 641 c and the connection pin 643 .

A shaft support hole 642a is formed through the connecting displacement member 642, and a decorative portion 642b and a protruding portion 642c are formed to protrude outward across the shaft support hole 642a. A connecting pin 643 projecting toward the front side is arranged on the connecting displacement member 642 .

As described above, the shaft support hole 642a is a hole having a circular cross section through which the support shaft 633 of the first displacement member 630 is rotatably inserted. It is rotatably journalled on the rear surface of member 630 . A retainer C having a larger diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 642a is fastened and fixed to the axial end face of the support shaft 633, thereby restricting the rotation shaft 633 from slipping out of the shaft support hole 642a.

The connecting pin 643 is inserted through the connecting groove 641 c of the driven member 641 as described above, so that the rotation of the driven member 641 can be transmitted to the connecting displacement member 642 . That is, by rotating the driven member 641 with the support shaft 632 as the rotation center, it is possible to rotate the coupling displacement member 642 with the support shaft 633 as the rotation center.

In this way, the second displacement member 640 is divided into two parts, the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642, and the driving member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 are connected by the connecting groove 641c and the connecting pin 643 to form the second displacement member. Since the link mechanism is configured by being rotatably supported by the displacement member 640, the amplifying effect of the link mechanism is used to perform the first displacement of the connection displacement member 642 (decorative portion 642b), as will be described later. The amount of relative displacement with respect to member 630 can be increased (see FIG. 37). As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Here, the detailed configuration of the connecting displacement member 642 will be described with reference to FIG. 32 . 32(a) is a front view of the connecting displacement member 642, FIG. 32(b) is a side view of the connecting displacement member 642 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIIb in FIG. 32(a), and FIG. 32(c). 32(a) is a cross-sectional view of the connecting displacement member 642 taken along the line XXXIIa-XXXIIa of FIG. 32(a).

As shown in FIG. 32, the connecting displacement member 642 is formed with an overhanging portion 642c on the opposite side of the decorative portion 642b across the pivot hole 642a. The protruding portion 642c can serve as a weight for balancing when and after being lifted.

In this case, the overhanging portion 642c is formed so as to protrude from the decorative portion 642b on the front side (lower side in FIG. 32(b)) and is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member 630, which will be described later. Thus, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced (rotated), rattling of the connecting displacement member 642 with respect to the first displacement member 630 can be suppressed. In addition, since the overhanging portion 642c serves both as a weight and as a contacting portion with respect to the first displacement member 630, the structure can be simplified and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly.

Further, the overhanging portion 642c is formed by four side walls erected on the rear side from the four sides of the bottom wall forming the front side of the connecting displacement member 642 (the side facing the rear surface of the first displacement member 630). , is formed in a box shape with an open rear side. Therefore, weight and rigidity can be ensured while reducing the outer shape. Therefore, as will be described later, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced (rotated), a state in which the projecting portion 642c is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (that is, a state in which it is not visible from the front) is ensured. At the same time, the function as a weight and the function of contacting the first displacement member 630 to suppress rattling can be reliably exhibited.

The overhanging portion 642c is formed with a ridge 642c1 that protrudes from the bottom wall and extends along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 642a. It is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface of 630 . Therefore, compared with the case where the entire surface of the bottom wall of the projecting portion 642c contacts the rear surface of the first displacement member 630, sliding resistance can be suppressed.

The connecting pin 643 is made of a metal material (brass material in this embodiment) and has a higher hardness than a resin material. , the surface facing the front base 620 ), and is embedded (insert-molded) in the connecting displacement member 642 .

In this case, the top of the ridge 626 of the front base 620 extends along the displacement trajectory of the connecting pin 643 when the connecting displacement member 642 is displaced. The rear end surface of the connecting pin 643 can be mainly brought into contact with the . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the formation of cloudiness due to rubbing between the connecting displacement member 642 made of a light-transmitting resin material and the ridges 626 of the front base 620 . Therefore, it is possible to continuously exhibit the presentation effect by allowing light to pass through the connecting displacement member 642 .

Next, operations of the right rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 39. FIG. 33 and 34 are front views of the right rotation unit 600 in each state during operation between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 10A and 10B are rear views of the right rotation unit 600 in each state when rotating. 37 and 38 are schematic rear views of the right rotation unit 600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

33(a) shows FIGS. 35(a) and 37(a), FIG. 33(b) shows FIGS. 35(b) and 37(b), and FIG. 35(c) and FIG. 37(c) are in the same state, respectively, and FIG. 34(a) is FIG. ), FIG. 38(b), and FIG. 34(c) are the same states as FIG. 36(c) and FIG. 38(c), respectively. In this case, FIG. 33(c) is the same as FIG. 34(a), FIG. 35(c) is the same as FIG. 36(a), and FIG. 37(c) is the same as FIG. be.

As shown in FIGS. 33(a), 35(a), and 37(a), at the retracted position, the first displacement member 630 is in an upright state, and the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are facing forward. It is arranged in front of the base 620 .

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 37A), the first groove 635 (action section 635a) of the first displacement member 630 and the second 33(b), 35(b), and 37(b) by pushing the inner wall surface of the groove 641b in the projecting direction (the right side in FIG. 37(a)) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654. As shown, the first displacement member 630 is rotated in the projecting direction with the rotating shaft 631 as the rotating shaft. In this case, the second displacement member 640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 630 because the second groove 641b has the same outer shape as the action section 635b of the first groove 635, and the first displacement member 640 It is displaced integrally with member 630 .

33(b), 35(b), and 37(b), the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the positive direction (clockwise in Fig. 37(b)), the same as in the case described above. In addition, the inner wall surfaces of the first groove 635 (action section 635a) of the first displacement member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 are extended by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 (Fig. 37(b) right), thereby rotating the first displacement member 630 about the rotation shaft 631 in the projecting direction, and displacing the second displacement member 640 integrally with the first displacement member 630 .

Through the states shown in FIGS. 33(b), 35(b) and 37(b), the states shown in FIGS. 33(c), 35(c) and 37(c) ), and the states shown in FIGS. 36(a) and 38(a)), the driving pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moves between the action section 635a and the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. is reached at the connection part of the

33(c), 35(c) and 37(c) (that is, FIG. 34(a), FIG. 36(a) and FIG. 38(a)), the first displacement member 630 One contact portion 634 of the pair of contact portions 634 is brought into contact with one side surface of the projecting portion 628 of the front base 620, so that the rotation of the first displacement member 630 in the projecting direction is prevented. Regulated.

34(a), 36(a) and 38(a), when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 38(a)), the transmission member 654 The driving pin 654b moves along the non-interfering section 635b without interfering with the inner wall surface of the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 . As a result, the first displacement member 630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 38(a).

On the other hand, the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 is pushed downward (downward in FIG. 38(a)) by the driving pin 654b of the transmission member 654, thereby 36(b) and 38(b), the driven member 641 is rotated about the support shaft 632 in a direction to raise the connecting groove 641c (counterclockwise in FIG. 38(b)). The rotation of the driven member 641 is transmitted to the connection displacement member 642 via the connection of the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643, and the connection displacement member 642 rotates about the support shaft 633 in the direction in which the decorative portion 642b is lifted ( 38(b) clockwise). That is, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630. FIG.

34(b), 36(b), and 38(b), the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the positive direction (clockwise in Fig. 38(b)), the same as in the case described above. Then, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630. As shown in FIG. After that, when the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the end of the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640, FIG. ), and as shown in FIGS. 36(c) and 38(c), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are arranged at the overhang position.

Contrary to the case described above, the transmission member 654 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 38(c)) from the extended position shown in FIGS. 34(c), 36(c), and 38(c). When driven, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moves along the non-interfering section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, so that the first displacement member 630 is shown in FIG. maintained in the indicated state (position).

On the other hand, the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 is pushed upward (the upper side in FIG. 38(c)) by the driving pin 654b of the transmission member 654, thereby As shown in FIGS. 36(b) and 38(b), the driven member 641 is rotated around the support shaft 632 in a direction (clockwise in FIG. 642 is rotated around support shaft 633 in a direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 38(b)) in which decorative portion 642b is swung down. That is, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630. FIG.

34(b), 36(b), and 38(b), the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 38(b)). Similarly, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement portion 642) is displaced relative to the first displacement member 630 in the direction of swinging down the decorative portion 642b.

Through the states shown in FIGS. 34(b), 36(b) and 38(b), the states shown in FIGS. 34(a), 36(a) and 38(a) ), and the states shown in FIGS. 35(c) and 37(c)), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moves between the action section 635a and the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. is reached at the connection part of the

Therefore, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 37(c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 33(c), 35(c) and 37(c), the first displacement The inner wall surfaces of the first groove 635 (action section 635a) of the member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 are pushed in the standing direction (left side in FIG. 37(c)) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654. Then, as shown in FIGS. 33(b), 35(b) and 37(b), the first displacement member 630 is rotated about the rotation shaft 631 in the upright direction. In this case, the second displacement member 640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 630 because the second groove 641b has the same outer shape as the action section 635b of the first groove 635, and the first displacement member 640 It is displaced integrally with member 630 .

33(b), 35(b), and 37(b), the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the reverse direction (clockwise in Fig. 37(b)), the same as in the case described above. Then, the first displacement member 630 is rotated about the rotation shaft 631 in the upright direction, and the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630 . After that, when the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 and the starting end of the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640, FIG. 35(a) and 37(a), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are arranged at the retracted position.

33(a), 35(a), and 37(a), the other contact portion 634 of the pair of contact portions 634 of the first displacement member 630 is positioned at the front base. The rotation of the first displacement member 630 in the upright direction is restricted by contacting the other side surface of the projecting portion 628 of 620 .

In this way, the right rotation unit 600 rotates the first displacement member 630 in a posture in which the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are superimposed (superimposed) in the thickness direction (for example, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIGS. 33 and 34). And since the second displacement member 640 is disposed on the front side of the front base 620, compared with the conventional product in which the first and second grooves are arranged side by side in the same plane, the first groove 635 Also, the planar space required for disposing the second groove 641b (that is, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640) can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the outer shape (planar space) in a front view.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an increase in size of the display device (third symbol display device 81) is required. However, even in this case, the space in the thickness direction (the front-rear direction, for example, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIGS. 10 and 11) is relatively large. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, if the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are overlapped and a relatively large space in the thickness direction is used, the outer shape of the right rotation unit 600 when viewed from the front is small. This is particularly effective for increasing the size of the display device.

Further, if the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are overlapped, one drive pin 654b transmits the rotational driving force of the transmission member 654 to the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640, respectively. This eliminates the need for separate drive pins (transmission members) for the first and second grooves, unlike conventional products. That is, the parts can be used in common, and the part cost can be reduced accordingly.

As described above, the second displacement member 640 is divided into the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642, and the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 are connected by the connecting groove 641c and the connecting pin 643. Since the link mechanism is configured by being rotatably supported by the support shafts 632 and 633 of the first displacement member 630, the amplifying effect of the link mechanism can be utilized. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 34, 36 and 38, the amount of relative displacement of the connecting displacement member 642 (decorative portion 642b) with respect to the first displacement member 630 can be increased. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In this case, in this embodiment, the second displacement member 640 is divided into a driven member 641 and a connecting displacement member 642 to form a link mechanism, and a support shaft that pivotally supports the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642. By disposing 632 and 633 along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 630, as shown in FIGS. A posture in which the member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 are superimposed can be formed.

This makes it easier to hide the second displacement member 640 behind the first displacement member 630 (make it easier to make invisible to the player). Therefore, when the first displacement member 630 is tilted from the upright posture to the overhanging posture, it is possible to reduce the outer size of the right rotation unit 600 in the front view at the retracted position (see FIG. 33(a)). (see FIGS. 33(a) to 33(c)), while hiding the presence of the second displacement member 640 (decorative portion 642b) from the player, after the first displacement member 630 is tilted to the overhanging posture, The second displacement member 640 can be protruded from the back surface of the first displacement member 630 (see FIGS. 34(a) to 34(c)), making it easier to perform effects that give impact to the player.

As described above, the movement of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 from the retracted position shown in FIG. 33(a) to the extended position shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 33(c), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced (rotated) in the overhanging direction (that is, the falling direction, referred to as the “first direction”) while being integrated. 33(c) and 34(a), after the displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 630 is stopped, as shown in FIGS. 34(a) to 34(c), the second displacement member 630 The connecting displacement member 642 of the member 640 displaces (rotates) the decorative portion 642b in a lifting direction (referred to as a “second direction”). That is, the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions.

As a result, the inertial force associated with the stopping of the first displacement member 630 displaced in the first direction can be canceled by the inertial force when the second displacement member 640 starts displacing in the second direction. As a result, a series of movements from the retracted position to the extended position can be performed smoothly, which not only enhances the performance effect, but also reduces the load on the parts due to the action of inertial force and improves durability. can be achieved.

In this case, in this embodiment, since the weight of the first displacement member 630 is made heavier than the weight of the second displacement member 640, the retracted position shown in FIG. In the operation of displacing the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 to , the heavy first displacement member 630 may be stopped first, and the light weight second displacement member 640 may be stopped last. As a result, the load on the driving motor 650 and the gears (the first pinion 651, the rack member 652 and the second pinion 653, see FIGS. 29 and 30) in the transmission mechanism can be reduced.

That is, from the above-described state in which the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are integrally displaced in the projecting direction (first direction) (see FIGS. 33(a) to 33(c)), the The displacement of the first displacement member 630 is stopped (see FIGS. 33(c) and 34(a)), and the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 lifts its decorative portion 642b (second direction). The transition to the displaced state (see FIG. 34(a) to FIG. 34(c)) is made by the driving pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moving from the action section 635a of the first groove 635 to the non-interference section 635b. Therefore, the rotation of the drive motor 650 and the gears (the first pinion 651, the rack member 652 and the second pinion 653) in the transmission mechanism can be continued. Therefore, even if the first displacement member 630 is stopped during the state transition, it is possible to avoid the load on the gear of the transmission mechanism of the drive motor 650 due to the stop.

On the other hand, the displacement of the first displacement member 630 is stopped (see FIGS. 33(c) and 34(a)), and the direction in which the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 lifts its decorative portion 642b (the second 34(a) to 34(c)) to a state in which the second displacement member 640 is stopped (see FIG. 34(c)), the drive motor 650 and the gears of the transmission mechanism (the first pinion 651, the rack member 652 and the second pinion 653) must be stopped. However, in this case, the only member that is stopped is the second displacement member 640, which is light in weight, so the load on the gear can be reduced accordingly.

Here, as described above, the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 extends outward on the opposite side of the decorative portion 642b across the portion (shaft support hole 642a) that is pivotally supported by the first displacement member 630. A protruding portion 642c is provided (see FIG. 32), and the protruding portion 642c can serve as a weight.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 34, 36, and 38, when the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated to lift the decorative portion 642b upward, the projecting portion 642c is formed on the opposite side of the decorative portion 642b. As a result, the weight of the overhanging portion 642c can be used to facilitate upward lifting of the decorative portion 642b. Therefore, it is possible to quickly lift the decorative portion 642b, thereby enhancing the presentation effect and suppressing the driving force of the driving motor 650 required for the lifting operation.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 34(c), 36(c) and 38(c), after the decorative portion 642b is lifted, the weight of the decorative portion 642b and the weight of the overhanging portion 642c are suspended. Therefore, compared to the cantilevered state in which only the decorative portion 642b is formed, the posture in which the decorative portion 642b is lifted can be stabilized, and at the same time, it is necessary to maintain the posture. Therefore, the driving force of the driving motor 650 can be suppressed.

In this case, as described above, the projecting portion 642c of the connecting displacement member 642 is formed so that its bottom wall (projection 642c1, see FIG. 32) can contact the rear surface of the first displacement member 630. As shown in FIGS. 34, 36 and 38, when displacing (rotating) the connecting displacement member 642, the projecting portion 642c is brought into contact with the rear surface of the first displacing member 630, thereby displacing the connecting displacement. Rattling of the member 642 (decorative portion 642b) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the posture of the decorative portion 642b when it is displaced, thereby enhancing the presentation effect and suppressing wear and damage to the pivot portion due to looseness.

In addition to the role of the weight, the protruding portion 642c also plays the role of suppressing rattling by coming into contact with the first displacement member 630. Therefore, it is preferable to separately provide portions for these two roles. It can be made unnecessary, and the structure of the connecting displacement member 642 can be simplified accordingly. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

Furthermore, the projecting portion 642c of the connecting displacement member 642 is formed in a substantially box shape as described above (see FIG. 32). As a result, weight and rigidity can be ensured while reducing the outer shape of the projecting portion 642c. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 34, 36 and 38, in a state in which the overhanging portion 642c is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (that is, in a state in which it is invisible to the player in front), the connection displacement While ensuring that the member 642 (decorative portion 642b) can be displaced, the projecting portion 642c reliably exhibits the function of a weight and the function of suppressing rattling by contacting the back surface of the first displacement member 630. can be made

Here, in the front base 620, as described above, the shaft support hole 624 that supports the first displacement member 630 is located closer to the opening of the game board 13 than the shaft support hole 625 that supports the transmission member 654. 29 to 31), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 630 are arranged at the overhang position (see FIGS. 33 to 38). While the projecting area for projecting the 640 to the opening side of the game board 13 can be ensured, the transmission member 654 can be easily hidden behind the first displacement member 630 while it is displaced from the retracted position to the projecting position.

In this case, as described above, the front base 620 includes the bearing 627 that supports the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 (see FIG. 29), and the transmission member 654 is configured as shown in FIGS. As shown in (c), when the second displacement member 640 is displaced to the overhanging position, it is formed so as to be able to abut against the bearing portion 627 , so that the second displacement member 640 is positioned relative to the first displacement member 630 . Rotation can be restricted within a predetermined range. That is, the transmission member 654, which serves to transmit the driving force of the drive motor 650, can also serve as a stopper that restricts the relative rotation of the second displacement member 640 with respect to the first displacement member 630 within a predetermined range. Therefore, the structure can be simplified, and the part cost can be reduced accordingly.

Moreover, since the bearing portion 627 is a portion for raising the first displacement member 630 from the front base 620 and arranging the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 in an overlapping posture (Fig. 29), the rigidity is relatively high, and a dead space is formed on the outer peripheral side. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the rigidity of the portion that restricts the relative rotation of the second displacement member 640 with respect to the first displacement member 630 can be ensured, and the durability can be improved. can be improved.

Furthermore, as described above, the transmission member 654 is provided with a recess 654c corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing 627 (see FIGS. 29 to 31), and as shown in FIG. When the displacement member 640 is extended to the extended position, the bearing portion 627 is formed to be received in the recessed cutout portion 654c, so that the movable range of the transmission member 654 can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the amount of displacement of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be secured accordingly. In other words, while ensuring the movable range of the transmission member 654, the position of the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654 can be brought close to the bearing portion 627. 38, while the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced between the retracted position and the extended position, the transmission member 654 is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (that is, , invisible to the player in front).

As described above, the front base 620 is formed to be inclined on the left side of the front view (the opening side of the game board 13, for example, the left side of FIG. 33(c)) by chamfering the ridgeline portions of the side and front surfaces. An inclined surface 620a is provided. 34(c), the connecting displacement member 642 is displaced (rotated) in the direction in which the decorative portion 642b is lowered, through the state shown in FIG. 34(b), and then to the state shown in FIG. 34(a). When formed, the inclined surface 620a can prevent the connecting displacement member 642 from being locked by the side surface of the front base 620 and unable to be displaced. Similarly, from the state shown in FIG. 33(c), the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642) is displaced (rotated) toward the retracted position integrally with the first displacement member 630, and the state shown in FIG. 33(a) through the state shown in FIG. 33(a), the inclined surface 620a can prevent the coupling displacement member 642 from being locked by the side surface of the front base 620 and unable to be displaced.

In particular, in this embodiment, the first displacement member 630 is arranged in a cantilevered state with the rotation shaft 631 as a fulcrum, and the second displacement member 640 is arranged on the first displacement member 630, and the weight is reduced. As a result, the first displacement member 630 is likely to sway in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 33) (that is, sway in the direction in which the connecting displacement member 642 approaches and separates from the front base 620), and the connecting displacement member 642 The side surface of the front base 620 is easily locked. Therefore, the configuration in which the front base 620 is provided with the inclined surface 620a is particularly effective.

Further, the front base 620 is provided with the ridge 626 that protrudes from the front surface and extends along the displacement direction (rotational direction) of the first displacement member 630, as described above. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 33, 35 and 37, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630, only the top portion of the ridge 626 is displaced to the second displacement member 640. can be contacted. Therefore, compared to the case where the entire front surface of the front base 620 contacts the second displacement member 640, the contact area can be reduced and the sliding resistance can be suppressed. As a result, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be smoothly displaced, and the driving force required for the drive motor 650 can be suppressed.

Here, the relationship between the ridge 626 of the front base 620 and the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39(a) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base 620 and the connecting displacement member 642, and FIG. and a schematic cross-sectional view of a connecting displacement member 642. FIG.

As described above, the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 is made of a light transmissive resin material. Therefore, the decorative effect can be enhanced by transmitting light emitted from the light-emitting body or the display device. On the other hand, since the connecting displacement member 642 is a member arranged to face the front base 620 (see FIGS. 29 to 31), shaking and rattling occur when the second displacement member 640 is displaced. As a result, it abuts on the front surface of the front base 620 . In this case, when the front surface of the front base 620 comes into contact with the front surface of the front base 620, the friction between the front surface of the front base 620 and the front surface of the front base 620 forms fogging on the front surface of the front base 620, which impairs light transmission.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, as described above, the front surface of the front base 620 is provided with the ridge 626, and only the top of the ridge 626 can be brought into contact with the connecting displacement member 642. It is possible to partially suppress fogging (a portion where light transmittance is impaired) formed on the connecting displacement member 642 due to rubbing.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, the second displacement member 640 is provided with a metal connection pin 643 for connecting the driven member 641 and the connection displacement member 642. The ridge 626 of the front base 620 is integrated with the first displacement member 630 along the trajectory of the connecting pin 643 when the second displacement member 640 is displaced (see FIGS. 33, 35 and 37). extended.

As a result, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630, the rear end surface of the connecting pin 642 (the right surface in FIG. can be brought into contact. Therefore, the surface pressure acting on the connecting displacement member 642 from the top of the ridge 626 can be borne by the rear end surface of the connecting pin 642, and the surface pressure acting on other portions of the connecting displacement member 642 can be weakened accordingly. can. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of fogging on other portions of the connecting displacement member 642 due to friction with the ridges 626, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the function of transmitting light.

Next, referring to FIG. 40, the function of the protrusion 628 of the front base 620 will be described. FIG. 40(a) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base 620 and the first displacement member 630, and FIG. 40(b) is a front base viewed in the direction of arrow XLb in FIG. 40(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front base 620 and the first displacement member 630 along line XLc-XLc in FIG. 40(a).

As shown in FIG. 40 , the front base 620 includes a bearing portion 627 that rotatably supports the first displacement member 630 . A space for disposing the second displacement member 640 can be formed between the front surface of the front base 620 and the rear surface of the first displacement member 630 because the base 620 is pivotally supported in a raised state. That is, as described above, the second displacement member 640 can be superimposed on the rear surface of the first displacement member 630 (see FIGS. 29 to 31).

As described above, the front base 620 includes the protruding portion 628 that protrudes radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627, and the first displacement member 630 protrudes from the rear surface thereof. The contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630 is brought into contact with the projection 628 of the front base 620, so that the first displacement member 630 can rotate relative to the front base 620 within a predetermined range. can be regulated within

In this case, the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620 is erected from the front of the front base 620 as a large-diameter cylindrical body to increase its rigidity and form a dead space on the outer peripheral side. A projecting portion 628 is projected radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627, and the contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630 is brought into contact with the projecting portion 628. The rigidity of the portion that restricts the relative rotation of the member 630 with respect to the front base 620 can be ensured, and durability can be improved.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the outer shape of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 40(a)) of the first displacement member 630 is set to a size that includes the projecting portion 628 of the front base 620 when viewed from the front. That is, the front surface of the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 40(a)) is formed so as to come into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member 630 . As a result, rattling when the first displacement member 630 is displaced and tilting of the first displacement member 630 forward (in the direction of arrow Fr in FIG. 40(c)) can be suppressed.

In addition, the projecting portion 628 of the front base 620 receives the contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630 on its side surface and serves as a stopper for restricting relative displacement. Since it is possible to share the role of receiving and suppressing rattling and tilting, it is not necessary to separately provide parts for these two roles, and the structure can be simplified accordingly. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the first displacement member 630 is arranged in a cantilevered state with the rotating shaft 631 (bearing portion 627 of the front base 620) as a fulcrum. Since the displacement member 640 is provided and the weight increases, the first displacement member 630 is likely to sway in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 40(a)). The swinging of the first displacement member 630 in the direction of approaching the front base 620 (the direction opposite to the arrow X in FIG. 40(c)), but the swinging in the direction in which the first displacement member 630 separates from the front base 620 (the direction of the arrow Fr in FIG. 40(c)) cannot be regulated. Since it is bulky, damage near the fulcrum is likely to occur. Therefore, a configuration in which the front surface of the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member 630 to suppress forward swinging (tilting) of the first displacement member 630 is particularly effective.

In this case, the projecting portion 628 of the front base 620 protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627 and is connected to the front surface of the front base 620, so that the rigidity of the projecting portion 628 can be increased. In particular, when the first displacement member 630 tilts forward (direction of arrow Fr in FIG. 40(c)), the direction in which the tilting is supported (that is, the projection 628 is positioned between the rear surface of the first displacement member 630 and the front base 620). Since the rigidity in the direction sandwiched between the first displacement member 630 and the front surface can be increased, the forward tilting of the first displacement member 630 can be effectively suppressed.

Next, the left rotation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 48. FIG. 41 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit 700, and FIG. 42 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 700. FIG. 43 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 700. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 41 to 43, the left rotation unit 700 has a base body composed of a rear base 710 and a front base 720, and a base body disposed on the front side of the front base 720 so that the base end thereof can be displaced. A first displacement member 730, a second displacement member 740 displaceably disposed on the distal end side of the first displacement member 730, and a driving force for displacing the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740. and a drive motor 750 disposed on the rear surface of the rear base 710, a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 750, and a connecting member ( A first connecting member 760 and a second connecting member 770 ), and a cover body 780 covering the front surface of the front base 720 on the lower end side.

A part of the transmission mechanism (the first pinion 751, the rack member 752 and the second pinion 753) is accommodated between the facing surfaces of the rear base 710 and the front base 720. As shown in FIG. A pair of insertion pins 722 that are inserted into the sliding grooves 752a of the rack member 752 are projected from the rear surface of the front base 720 to define the movement direction of the rack member 752 .

Circular shaft support holes 723 , 724 , 725 are formed through the front base 720 in a front view. The rotating shaft 754a and the rotating shaft 761 of the first connection member 760 are rotatably supported. Similarly, a circular shaft support hole 781 is formed through the cover body 780 when viewed from the front, and the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 is rotatably supported in this shaft support hole 781 .

A base-side engaging member 726 is projected from the front surface of the front base 720, and a receiving concave portion 727 is formed. The base-side engaging member 726 includes a base portion 726a erected from the front of the front base 720, and a bent portion 726b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 726a and having an inner surface serving as an engaging surface. , the engagement surfaces of the second displacement member 740 and a displacement-side engagement member 742, which will be described later, can be engaged with each other. Thereby, as will be described later, it is possible to suppress forward tilting of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 with respect to the front base 720 (see FIG. 47).

The receiving recess 727 is a substantially rectangular recess in front view that is recessed at a position facing the bent portion 726b of the base-side engaging member 726. By forming with an opening area larger than the outer shape, it is formed so as to be able to receive the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 742 . Thereby, as will be described later, at the retracted position, relative displacement of the second displacement member 730 in the approaching direction with respect to the front base 720 is permitted, and damage due to collision can be suppressed (see FIG. 47(c)).

The transmission mechanism includes a first pinion 751 attached to the drive shaft of the drive motor 750, a second pinion 753 fastened and fixed to the rotating shaft 754a of the transmission member 754, and the first pinion 751 and the second pinion 753 having teeth. and a rack member 752 formed as a rack in which a rack gear to be combined is tooth-cut on the side surface of a flat member.

The rack member 752 has two sliding grooves 752a extending along its longitudinal direction and having the shape of an oblong hole when viewed from the front. By doing so, the moving direction is held in a specified state. That is, the rack member 752 is held between the facing surfaces of the rear base 710 and the front base 720 so as to be linearly movable.

The transmission member 754 includes a rotating shaft 754a protruding from the rear surface of one end side, and a drive pin 754b protruding from the front surface of the other end opposite to the rotating shaft 754a. It is rotatably supported on the front side of the front base 720 by being inserted through the shaft support hole 724 . The drive pin 754b is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and is inserted through a drive groove 762 of the first connecting member 760, which will be described later.

According to the transmission mechanism, when the first pinion 751 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 750 , the rotation of the first pinion 751 is transmitted to the second pinion 753 via the linear motion of the rack member 752 . As the second pinion 753 is rotated, the transmission member 754 is rotated around the shaft support hole 724 of the front base 720 .

When the transmission member 754 is rotated, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 acts on the drive groove 762 of the first connection member 760 to drive the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 770, as will be described later. . As a result, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced relative to the first displacement member 730 via the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 770 . can be displaced with respect to the front base 720 (see FIG. 46).

The first displacement member 730 has a rotating shaft 731 projecting from one longitudinal end thereof (lower side in FIG. 42), and a shaft at the other longitudinal end side opposite to the rotating shaft 731 (upper side in FIG. 42). A support hole 732 is formed through the first displacement member 730, and a slide groove 733 having an oval shape in a front view is recessed in the rear surface of the first displacement member 730, and a connecting pin 734 is protruded. An engaged portion 735 is formed on the outer edge of the first displacement member 730 on the other longitudinal end side and on the side of the shaft support hole 732 .

The rotating shaft 731 is, as described above, a shaft-like body inserted through the shaft supporting hole 723 of the front base 720 and the shaft supporting hole 781 of the cover body 780. It is rotatably pivotally supported on the front side of the front base 720 by being inserted through the support holes 723 and 781 . That is, the first displacement member 730 is rotatably pivotally supported on the base end side between the facing surfaces of the front base 720 and the cover body 780 .

The shaft support hole 732 is a circular hole in front view, and rotatably supports the rotation shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740 . The sliding groove 733 is a concave groove extending along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730, and the end of the connecting shaft 790 is slidably inserted therethrough. The connecting shaft 790 pivotally supports the other ends of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 so as to be relatively rotatable. As will be described later, when the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 are driven, the connecting shaft 790 acts on the sliding groove 733 with respect to the first displacement member 730, so that the first displacement member 730 moves forward. It is displaced (rotated) with respect to the base 720 (see FIG. 45).

The connecting pin 734 is a shaft-like member having a circular cross section and is inserted into a slide groove 772 of the second connecting member 770, which will be described later. placed in Therefore, the direction in which the connecting shaft 790 slides along the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 should coincide with the direction in which the connecting pin 734 slides along the sliding groove 772 of the second connecting member 770. can be done. That is, as will be described later, when the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 are driven, the form of relative displacement of the second connecting member 770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is linear motion (sliding displacement). (See FIG. 45).

The engaged portion 735 is a portion formed on the outer edge of the first displacement member 730 extending to a position overlapping the second displacement member 740 in a rear view. The side engaging member 742 (the engaging surface of the bent portion 742b) is formed to be engageable (see FIG. 48). Thereby, as will be described later, rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed at the extended position (see FIG. 48).

The second displacement member 740 includes a rotating shaft 741 and a displacement-side engaging portion 742 protruding from its back surface, a receiving recess 743 recessed from its back surface, and a flange member fastened and fixed to the end surface of the rotating shaft 741. 744 and.

As described above, the rotating shaft 741 is a shaft-shaped body that is inserted through the shaft support hole 732 of the first displacement member 730. By inserting the rotating shaft 741 through the shaft support hole 732, the first displacement member A second displacement member 740 is rotatably supported on the distal end side of 730 in the longitudinal direction. The flange member 744 has a larger diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 732 at the base end side that is fastened and fixed to the rotation shaft 741 , thereby restricting the rotation shaft 741 from slipping out of the shaft support hole 732 .

A connecting pin 744a is projected from the rear surface of the flange member 744 at a position eccentric from the axis of the rotating shaft 741 . The connecting pin 744a is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and is inserted through a connecting groove 772 of the second connecting member 770, which will be described later. As will be described later, when the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 are driven, the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 receives action from the connecting groove 772 of the second connecting member 770, thereby causing the second displacement. The member 740 is relatively displaced (relatively rotated) with respect to the first displacement member 730 (see FIG. 46).

The displacement side engaging member 742 includes a base portion 742a erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 742a and having an inner surface serving as an engaging surface, As described above, in the retracted position, the engagement surfaces are formed to be engaged with the displacement-side engagement member 726 of the front base 720, and in the overhang position, the first displacement member 730 is engaged. The joint portion 735 is formed to be engageable with an engaging surface.

The receiving recess 743 is a substantially rectangular recess in a front view that is recessed at a position facing the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 742. The base-side engagement member 726 is formed so as to receive the bent portion 726b of the base-side engaging member 726 by forming it with a large opening area. Thereby, as will be described later, at the retracted position, relative displacement of the second displacement member 730 in the approaching direction with respect to the front base 720 is permitted, and damage due to collision can be suppressed (see FIG. 47(c)).

The connecting first member 760 has a rotary shaft 761 protruding from the rear surface of one longitudinal end side (lower side in FIG. 42) and a sliding groove 762 opened in the substantially central portion in the longitudinal direction. A connecting groove 771 and a sliding groove 772 are opened at one longitudinal end side (the upper side in FIG. 42) and at the longitudinal central portion, respectively.

The rotating shaft 761 of the first connecting member 760 is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 725 of the front base 720 , and the connecting groove 771 of the second connecting member 770 is connected to the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740 . A pin 744a is inserted. Further, the other longitudinal ends of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 are rotatably supported by a connecting shaft 790 inserted through the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 .

That is, one longitudinal end of the first connecting member 760 is displaceably connected to the front base 720, and one longitudinal end of the second connecting member 770 is displaceably connected to the second displacement member 740. A connecting portion (connecting pin 790) between the other ends in the longitudinal direction of the second connecting member 770 is connected to the first displacement member 730 so as to be displaceable.

As will be described later, this allows the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 to be displaced relative to each other and relative to the front base 720, while allowing the first coupling member 760 and the second coupling member 770 to move to the first position. It can be hidden behind the displacement member 730 to make it difficult for the player to see. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 from being exposed at the overhang position and impairing the appearance (see FIGS. 44(c) and 45c(c)).

As described above, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is inserted through the drive groove 762 of the first connection member 760, and the sliding groove 772 of the second connection member 770 is provided with the first displacement member 730. connecting pin 734 is inserted.

Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46. FIG. 44 is a front view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIG. 45 is a front view of each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. 7 is a rear view of the left rotation unit 700. FIG. 46A and 46B are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

Note that FIG. 44 illustrates a state in which the cover body 780 is omitted. 44(a) shows FIGS. 45(a) and 46(a), FIG. 44(b) shows FIGS. 45(b) and 46(b), and FIG. 45(c) and FIG. 46(c), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 44(a), 45(a), and 46(a), at the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in an upright state and arranged in front of the front base 720. is set.

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 46(a)), the inner wall surface of the driving groove 762 of the first connecting member 760 is protruded by the driving pin 754b of the transmission member 754. By being pushed in the direction (left side in FIG. 46(a)), the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(a)) about the rotation axis 761 thereof.

When the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 moves to the connecting shaft that connects the other ends of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 . 46(a) to the left), the first displacement member 730 is pushed toward its rotation axis as shown in FIGS. 44(b), 45(b) and 6(b). 731 as the center of rotation, and rotates in the projecting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(a)).

Further, when the first connection member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction, the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 770 connected to each other by the connection shaft 790 move downward (lower side in FIG. 46(a)). ), and the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 771 of the second connecting member 770 pushes down the connecting pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, thereby As shown in FIG. 46(b), the second displacement member 740 is relatively displaced (rotated relative to the first displacement member 730) in the first direction (clockwise in FIG. 46(a)) about the rotation axis 741 thereof. ) is done.

In this case, the second connecting member 770 is arranged along the extending direction of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 and the sliding groove 772 of the second connecting member 770 so that the connecting shaft 790 and the first displacement member 730 The connecting pins 734 of the first displacement member 730 are linearly moved (slide displaced) along the longitudinal direction.

From the states shown in FIGS. 44(b), 45(b) and 46(b), the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 46(b)), and the first connecting member 760 When rotated in the overhanging direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(b)) about the rotating shaft 761, the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotating shaft 731 in the overhanging direction as described above. (Fig. 46(b) counterclockwise), and the second displacement member 740 rotates about its rotation axis 741 with respect to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (Fig. 46(b) clockwise). relative displacement (relative rotation) to

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is tilted as shown in FIGS. A state is formed in which the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the overhang position, and the second displacement member 740 is displaced (relatively rotated) to the maximum relative to the first displacement member 730 .

44(c), 45(c) and 46(c), the transmission member 754 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(c)). When driven, the driving pin 754b of the transmission member 754 pushes the inner wall surface of the driving groove 762 of the first connecting member 760 in the retracting direction (the right side in FIG. 46(c)), so that the first connecting member 760 It rotates in the retraction direction (clockwise in FIG. 46(c)) about the rotating shaft 761 as the center of rotation.

When the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 moves to the connecting shaft 790 that connects the other ends of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770. 46(c) right side), the first displacement member 730 rotates its rotating shaft 731 as shown in FIGS. 44(b), 45(b) and 6(b). It is rotated in the retraction direction (clockwise in FIG. 46(c)) as the center of rotation.

Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 770, in which the first connecting member 760 and the other end are connected to each other by the connecting shaft 790, moves upward (upward in FIG. 46(c)). 44(b), 45(b) and FIG. 44(b), 45(b) and FIG. 6(b), the second displacement member 740 is displaced relative to the first displacement member 730 in the second direction (counterclockwise in FIG. ) is done.

From the states shown in FIGS. 44(b), 45(b) and 46(b), the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(b)), and the first connecting member 760 is When the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 46B), the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotating shaft 731 in the retracting direction (see FIG. 46B). 46(b) clockwise), and the second displacement member 740 rotates relative to the first displacement member 730 about its rotation axis 741 in the second direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(b)). Displaced (relatively rotated).

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the starting end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is erected as shown in FIGS. A state is formed in which the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position, and the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is minimized.

Thus, according to the counterclockwise rotation unit 700, since the connection member (connection first member 760 and connection second member 770) that connects between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740 is provided, such a connection member is provided. By acting between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 730 causes relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 730 with respect to the first displacement member 730. ).

In this case, in the conventional product in which the connecting member is installed between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the first displacement member 730 protrudes from the front base 720 and is displaced in the direction in which it is spaced apart (projection direction). Then, the connecting member is exposed between the front base 720 and the second displacing member 740 and can be visually recognized by the player, thereby spoiling the appearance.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the connecting member is divided into two members, the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770, and one longitudinal end of the first connecting member 760 is connected to the front base 720, The other longitudinal end of the second connection member 770 is connected to the second displacement member 740, the other longitudinal ends of the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 770 are connected so as to be relatively displaceable, and the connection Since the portion (connecting shaft 790) is displaceably connected to the first displacement member 730, even when the first displacement member 730 projects from the front base 720 and is displaced in a direction (protruding direction) in which the connecting member (The first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770) can be hidden behind the first displacement member to make it difficult for the player to see. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connection member from being exposed and the appearance from being spoiled.

In this case, as described above, the second connecting member 770 is held by the first displacement member 730 in a form of linear movement (sliding displacement) along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730. 730 is displaced (rotated) in the direction in which 730 protrudes from the front base 720 and is separated from the front base 720 (projection direction). Even in such a case, the second connecting member 770 can be kept hidden behind the first displacing member 730 to avoid being seen by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connection member from being exposed and the appearance from being spoiled.

Here, in this embodiment, the second displacement member 740 includes a light emitter (not shown), and an electrical connection line W for supplying power to the light emitter is wired on the back surface of the first displacement member 730. (See Figure 45). In this case, the connection line W is introduced from an opening formed in the rear surface of the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740 and connected to the light emitter. Therefore, the connection line W is wired along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730 on the rear surface of the first displacement member 730 . Therefore, when the connecting member is displaced on the back surface of the first displacement member 730, the connecting member may interfere and damage the connection line W.

In this case, the connecting member (second connecting member 770) is disposed on the first displacement member 730 so as to linearly move (sliding) along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730, as described above. , the second connection member 770 can be prevented from interfering with the connection line W. Therefore, it is possible to avoid interference with the connecting second member 770 without securing a large space for wiring the connection line W (that is, the dimension in the width direction of the first displacement member 730). The space for arranging the wire W can be reduced, and the shape of the first displacement member 730 when viewed from the front (especially, the size in the width direction) can be reduced accordingly.

Here, if the above-described connection members (the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 770) are provided, the driving force of the drive motor 750 is applied to the first displacement member 730 (that is, the first displacement member 730 Even in a configuration in which a drive groove is provided and the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is connected to the drive groove), the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can be made to perform the same operation as described above. can.

However, in the case of this configuration, the size of the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 is increased. That is, it is necessary for the connecting member to displaceably connect the connecting portion between the other ends of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 to the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730. It is arranged between the facing surfaces of the displacement member 730 and the front base 720 . Therefore, when a drive groove is provided in the first displacement member 730 and the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is connected to the drive groove, the transmission member 754 and the connection member (connection first member 760 and connection second member 770) In order to avoid interference with the first displacement member 730, it is necessary to provide a drive groove in the first displacement member 730 at a position that does not overlap with the displacement trajectory of the connecting member. Therefore, the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 needs to have a size (area) that includes both the displacement trajectory of the connecting member and the drive groove. Make larger.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive groove 762 is provided in the first connection member 760, and the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is connected to the drive groove 762 of the first connection member 760, so that the driving force of the drive motor 750 is reduced. is given to the connecting first member 760, the size of the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 can be reduced.

That is, there is no need to avoid interference between the transmission member 754 and the connecting members (the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770), and the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 corresponds only to the displacement trajectory of the connecting members. The size (area) is sufficient, and the size (area) does not need to include the driving groove, so the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 can be reduced accordingly.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48, the engagement action by the base-side engaging member 726 and displacement-side engaging member 742 will be described.

FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 for explaining the engagement action by the base-side engaging member 726 and displacement-side engaging member 742, and corresponds to the cross section taken along line XLVIIa-XLVIIa in FIG. 45(a). do.

47(a) shows the state immediately before the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the retracted positions, and FIG. 47(b) shows the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740. A state in which the displacement member 740 is disposed at the retracted position is illustrated. 47(c) shows a state in which the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced in the direction of approaching the front base 720 in FIG. 47(b).

As described above, the base-side engaging member 726 is projected from the front surface of the front base 720, and the displacement-side engaging member 742 is projected from the rear surface of the second displacement member 740. The engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 are disposed with their open sides (the distal end side of the bent portion 726b) facing each other (see FIGS. 41 to 43).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47(a), when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced in the retracting direction (upper side in FIG. 47) with respect to the front base 720, the bending portions 726b of each other , 742b can enter the inner surfaces of the mating bent portions 726b, 742b, and the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position as shown in FIG. , the inner surfaces (engagement surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b can be engaged with each other.

Here, in the conventional product in which the connecting member is installed between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740 are positioned relatively apart from the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730. The member 740 is connected by a connecting member. Therefore, in the retracted position, even if the first displacement member 730 tilts the tip portion (that is, the second displacement member 740) on the side opposite to the rotation shaft 731 in the direction (forward) away from the front base 720, By the action of the connecting member interposed between the base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the tilting can be suppressed.

However, in this embodiment, one longitudinal end of the second coupling member 770 is coupled to the second displacement member 740 , while one longitudinal end of the first coupling member 760 is relative to the rotation axis 731 of the first displacement member 730 . It is connected to the front base 720 at a proximal position. Therefore, at the retracted position, the rotating shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 becomes the proximal end (fulcrum), and the distal end portion on the side opposite to the rotating shaft 731 (that is, the second displacement member 740 side) becomes the free end of the cantilever. In this state, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in the standing posture. Therefore, the first displacement member 730 has a free end due to its own weight and the weight of the second displacement member 740. ) away from the front base 720 (forward, right in FIG. 47(b)).

On the other hand, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position, the second displacement member is engaged with the base-side engagement member 726 of the front base 720 as shown in FIG. 47(b). Since the displacement-side engaging member 742 of 740 can be engaged, the tip portion (second displacement member 740) of the first displacement member 730 opposite to the rotating shaft 731 moves away from the front base 720 (forward, It is possible to suppress tilting to the right in FIG. 47(b).

The displacement-side engaging member 742 may protrude from the rear surface of the first displacement member 730, but in this embodiment, the displacement-side engaging member 742 protrudes from the rear surface of the second displacement member 740. be done. Therefore, the engagement position between the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 can be set at a position away from the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 . As a result, the tip portion (second displacement member 740) of the first displacement member 730 on the side opposite to the rotating shaft 731 is effectively tilted in the direction away from the front base 720 (forward, right side in FIG. 47(b)). can be suppressed to

On the other hand, when the displacement-side engaging member 742 is formed on the second displacement member 740, the displacement-side engaging member 742 is located away from the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730, so the first displacement member 730 becomes susceptible to swinging in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 47), and the positional relationship between the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 becomes unstable. Therefore, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced toward the retracted positions, it becomes difficult to engage the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement-side engaging member 742 has an engaging surface on the inner surface of the bent portion 742b that is arranged in the second direction from the distal end side of the bent portion 742b toward the base end side (base portion 742a side). The displacement member 740 is slanted toward the back surface thereof. As a result, the distance between the engagement surface and the rear surface of the second displacement member 740 can be widened on the receiving side of the displacement-side engagement member 742 (the tip side of the bent portion 742b, the upper side in FIG. 47(a)). Even if shaking occurs when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced toward the retracted position, the engagement between the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 can be facilitated. .

In this manner, the engagement between the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 is facilitated, and when these engagements are started, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are moved to the retracted position. As the second displacement member 740 is displaced toward the front base 720 (left side in FIG. 47(b)), the second displacement member 740 is brought closer to the front base 720 side (left side in FIG. 47(b)) along with the inclination of the engagement surface of the base side engagement member 742 (bent portion 742b). be able to.

As a result, at the retracted position, the tip portions (on the second displacement member 740 side) of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are separated from the front base 720 with the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 as a fulcrum. Not only is it possible to suppress tilting in the direction (forward, right in FIG. 47(b)), but also the projection dimension of the second displacement member 740 from the front base 720 can be suppressed, , the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are slightly elastically deformed as a whole. 720 can be suppressed to stably maintain its posture in a stopped state.

On the other hand, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 have the tip portion (second displacement member 740 side) of the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 as a fulcrum toward the front base 720 (forward , left side of FIG. 47(b)) is allowed. In this case, the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 are plate-like bodies bent into a substantially V-shaped cross section, and when tilted, the rear or front base of the second displacement member 740 is bent. If it collides with the front of 720, it will be deformed in a bending direction, so there is a high possibility of breakage.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the receiving recesses 727 and 743 for receiving the mating bent portions 726b and 742b are recessed on the front surface of the front base 720 and the back surface of the second displacement member 740. 47(c), the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are tilted toward the front base 720 (forward, leftward in FIG. 47(b)). When receiving, the receiving recesses 727, 743 can receive the mating bent portions 726b, 742b. As a result, breakage due to collision between the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 can be suppressed.

When tilting, the rear surface of the second connecting member 770 facing parallel to the front surface of the front base 720 collides with the front surface of the front base 720 in a face contact manner over the entire surface, so the surface pressure at the time of collision is reduced. (dispersion) can be Therefore, damage can be suppressed.

FIG. 48(a) is a partially enlarged view of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 in the XLVIIIa section of FIG. 45(c), and FIG. 48(b) is an arrow XLVIIIb direction of FIG. 48(a). Fig. 11 is a side view of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 in perspective;

As described above, when the left rotation unit 700 is shifted from the retracted position to the extended position, the first displacement member 730 is extended and the second displacement member 740 is moved relative to the first displacement member 730 . is relatively displaced (rotated) around its rotation axis 741 (see FIGS. 45(a) to 45(c)).

As shown in FIGS. 48(a) and 48(b), according to this embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the overhang position (FIG. 45(c) ), the engaging surface of the displacement-side engaging member 742 (bent portion 742b) is engaged with the engaged portion 735 of the first displacing member 730, whereby the first displacing member 730 and the second displacing member 740 are engaged. can be combined with Therefore, it is possible to suppress rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 at the extended position.

In particular, since the engagement surface of the displacement-side engagement member 742 is inclined as described above, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are slightly elastically deformed by the inclination. They can be displaced toward each other. Therefore, at the retracted position, rattling between the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can be suppressed, and the posture can be stably maintained in the stopped state.

In addition, the displacement-side engaging member 742 engages with the base-side engaging member 726 of the front base 720 at the retracted position to connect the second displacement member 740 to the front base 720. Since the engagement with the engaged portion 735 of the first displacement member 730 can also be used to couple the second displacement member 740 to the first displacement member 730, the portions for these two roles are separately provided. The provision can be made unnecessary, and the structure can be simplified accordingly. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

Next, the winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 55. FIG. 49 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 65, and FIG. 50 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 65. FIG. 51(a) is a front view of the winning device 65, FIG. 51(b) is a rear view of the winning device 65, and FIG. 51(c) is a top view of the winning device 65. FIG.

52(a) and 52(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning device 65 taken along line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 51, and FIGS. and FIG. 52(b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the winning device 65 along the LIIIa-LIIIa line and the LIIIb-LIIIb line.

It should be noted that illustration of the opening/closing plate 860 is omitted in FIG. 51, and illustration of the guide rib 813a is omitted in FIG. Further, FIG. 52(a) shows the state in which the seesaw member 840 forms the first state, and FIG. 52(b) shows the state in which the seesaw member 840 forms the second state.

As shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, the winning device 65 includes a front base 810, an intermediate base 820 superimposed on the rear side of the front base 810, and a rear base 830 superimposed on the rear side of the intermediate base 820. , a seesaw member 840 and a follower member 850 disposed between the facing surfaces of the front base 810 and the intermediate base 820, and an opening/closing plate 860 for opening/closing the winning opening 65a.

The prize winning device 65 is formed in a box shape having an internal space by a front base 810, a front base 820 and a rear base 830. In the internal space, there is a guide passage through which balls winning from the prize winning port 65a are guided. The weight of the game ball acts on the seesaw member 840 when the game ball passes through the guide passage.

The seesaw member 840 forms a first state in which one end side (one end decoration portion 853) is lowered and the other end side (other end decoration portion 843) is raised when the weight of the game ball is not applied (Fig. 52(a)), when the weight of the game ball is applied to the other end side, a second state is formed in which the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered (see FIG. 52(b)).

That is, the prize winning device 65 utilizes the weight of the game ball passing through the guide passage to cause the seesaw member 840 to alternately appear in the first state and the second state, and one end side (one end decoration) of the seesaw member 840 is displayed. 853) and the other end side (the other end side decoration body 843) are formed to be capable of performing an effect of vertically displacing them.

Here, as will be described later, the seesaw member 840 has a length dimension of the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 larger than the length dimension of the receiving surface 844 in the direction connecting the one end side and the other end side. be. Therefore, when a plurality of balls pass continuously, the game balls stay on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846, and the second state is likely to be maintained. In contrast, in this embodiment, even when a plurality of game balls pass continuously, the weight of the game balls prevents the seesaw member 840 from remaining in the second state. and alternately appearing can be reliably executed. The configuration of the winning device 65 for performing such effects will be described below.

The front base 810 includes a front substrate 811 forming its front surface, and a front first side wall 812, a front second side wall 813, a front first bottom wall 814, and a front second bottom wall 815 projecting from the rear side of the front substrate 811. and are mainly provided.

In the front base 810, recessed portions 811a and 811b formed by recessing the lower edge of the front base 810 are arranged side by side at a predetermined interval in the width direction. And part of the driven member 850 (the one end side decorative portion 853 and the other end side decorative portion 843) is exposed so as to be visible to the player.

The front first side wall 812 and the front second side wall 813 are portions forming side walls of a guide passage for guiding game balls, and are arranged to face each other with a predetermined distance therebetween. The front first bottom wall 814 and the front second bottom wall 815 are parts that form the bottom walls of the guide passages, and are connected to the lower end sides of the front first side wall 812 and the front second side wall 813, respectively.

Between the front first side wall 812 and the front second side wall 813 facing each other, an open portion on the upper end side thereof serves as a prize winning port 65a, and game balls flow into the guide passage through this open portion (winning prize port 65a). In this case, the front second side wall 813 is formed substantially vertically, while the front first side wall 812 and the front first bottom wall 814 are inclined downward toward the front second bottom wall 815 and The front second bottom wall 815 is arranged at a position lower than the wall 814 . Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the guide passage from the winning opening 65a can be guided to the second front bottom wall 815 by the downward inclination of the front first side wall 812 and the front first bottom wall 814 .

The front second bottom wall 815 is formed with a guide bottom surface 815a that slopes downward toward the side away from the front substrate 811 (that is, the intermediate base 830 side). Therefore, the game ball guided by the front second bottom wall 815 rolls along the downward slope of the guide bottom surface 815a and is guided to the guide passage (receiving port 821b) of the intermediate base 830. As shown in FIG.

In addition, guide ribs 813a are erected at a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) on the second front side wall 813 . The guide rib 813a is formed in such a shape that the erected height from the second front side wall 813 becomes lower as it is separated from the front base 811, so that the erected end face is an inclined surface. As a result, for example, as a result of colliding with the front first side wall 812 and rebounding when flowing (dropping) into the guide passage from the winning opening 65a, the game ball advances to the front second side wall 813 at a relatively high speed. Even in such a case, the game ball can be smoothly guided toward the guide passage of the intermediate base 830 by the inclined surface of the standing tip of the guide rib 813a.

The intermediate base 820 has an intermediate substrate 821 facing the front substrate 811 of the front base 810 with a predetermined gap therebetween, an intermediate first sidewall 822, an intermediate second sidewall 823, and an intermediate bottom wall protruding from the rear surface of the intermediate substrate 821. 824 and .

The intermediate substrate 821 is formed with an opening/closing plate advance/retreat port 821a, a receiving port 821b, a delivery port 821c, and a discharge port 821d. , stopper portions 821g and 821h are protrudingly provided.

The opening/closing plate entrance/exit 821a of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for allowing the opening/closing plate 860 to move forward/backward. When the opening 65a is closed and the opening/closing plate 860 is retracted (retracted) to the opening/closing plate advance/retreat opening 821a, the winning opening 65a is opened.

The receiving port 821b of the intermediate substrate 821 is an opening for receiving the game ball guided from the front second bottom wall 815 (guide bottom surface 815a) of the front base 810 into the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side. (Receiving bottom surface 821b1) is formed continuously with the guide bottom surface 815a of the second front bottom wall 815. As shown in FIG.

The delivery port 821c of the intermediate substrate 821 is an opening for delivering game balls from the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. Formed by That is, the game ball that has passed through the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 and is delivered to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 from the delivery port 821c.

The discharge port 821 d of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for receiving the game ball discharged from the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 , and the bottom surface of the opening is formed by the discharge bottom wall 825 . A game ball ejected from the ejection surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and received in the ejection port 821d rolls on the ejection bottom wall 825 and enters an ejection passage (not shown) connected to the rear side of the rear base 830. sent out.

The support shaft 821 e of the intermediate substrate 821 is a shaft-like body for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840 and is inserted through the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840 . The bearing 821f of the intermediate substrate 821 is a shaft hole for rotatably supporting the driven member 850, and the rotating shaft 851 of the driven member 850 is inserted therethrough.

The stopper portions 821g and 821h of the intermediate substrate 821 are portions for contacting the lower surface of the seesaw member 840 to restrict the rotation of the seesaw member 840. The stopper portion 821g is located at the other longitudinal end of the seesaw member 840. The stopper portion 821h is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface (the surface opposite to the discharge surface 846), and the stopper portion 821h is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface (the surface opposite to the receiving surface 844) on one longitudinal end side of the seesaw member 840. be done.

The first state of the seesaw member 840 is formed by restricting the rotation of the seesaw member 840 by the stopper portion 821h (see FIG. 52(a)). It is formed by being restricted by the portion 821g (see FIG. 52(b)).

Here, as described above, the stopper portion 821g is formed at a position where it can come into contact with the lower surface of the seesaw member 840 opposite to the ejection surface 846, so that the ejection of the game ball can be stabilized. That is, when a game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and the second state is formed by the weight thereof, the stopper portion 821g supports the lower surface opposite to the discharge surface 846. Therefore, for example, the stopper portion 821h is supported. As compared with the case where the stopper portion 821g supports a position near the support shaft 821e (for example, the lower surface on the side opposite to the inclined surface 845), the seesaw member 840 can be prevented from swinging on the discharge surface 846 side. As a result, the discharge of game balls from the discharge surface 846 can be stabilized.

The intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 form the side walls of the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 (the passage for guiding the game balls received from the receiving port 821b to the delivery port 821c), and are separated by a predetermined interval. They are arranged facing each other while being separated from each other. That is, the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 receive the game ball sent out along the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 52(a)) from the guide passage on the side of the front base 810 through the receiving opening 821b and The received game ball is directed toward the intermediate bottom wall 824 and guided along a substantially vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 52(a)).

The intermediate bottom wall 824 forms the bottom wall of the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side, and is connected to the lower end sides of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823, respectively. The intermediate bottom wall 824 is formed with a guide bottom surface 824a that slopes downward toward the delivery port 821c side (that is, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840). A game ball guided through the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824, passes through the delivery port 821c, and reaches the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in a substantially horizontal direction (Fig. 52(a) left-right direction).

In this way, the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 is provided with an intermediate bottom wall 824 (a guide bottom surface 824a), and the game ball rolling on the guide bottom surface 824a is moved to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in a substantially horizontal direction. Since it is guided from the side, the game balls can be guided one by one to the receiving surface 844, and a plurality of game balls can be placed on the receiving surface 844 as in the case of the form in which the game balls are dropped from above the receiving surface 844. Avoid stacking balls. As a result, as will be described later, even when a plurality of game balls continuously pass through the guide passage, the seesaw member 840 can be easily switched between the first state and the second state.

Here, the extension length of the guide passage that guides the game ball along the substantially horizontal direction toward the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 of the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 is twice the diameter of the game ball. It is preferable to set the following. In this embodiment, the horizontal distance dimension L (see FIG. 52(a)) from the extended end of the guide bottom surface 824a to the rear wall 831 of the rear base 830, which will be described later, is set to 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball. be done. As a result, as will be described later, even when a plurality of game balls continuously pass through the guide passage, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 one by one at intervals.

In addition, the facing interval between the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 is set to a size equivalent to the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, since the position of the game ball can be defined between the facing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823, the seesaw member 840 always keeps the game ball rolling on the guide bottom surface 824a and delivered from the delivery port 821c. can be received by the receiving surface 844 (guided to the same position on the receiving surface 844).

In this case, the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 is formed so that, in the first state, the height position of the end of the downward slope is higher than the height position of the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 ( See FIG. 53(a)). Thereby, as will be described later, the game ball can be smoothly guided from the guide bottom surface 824a to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, and the transition to the second state can be quickly performed.

On the other hand, in the second state, the height position of the end of the downward slope is formed to be lower than the height position of the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (see FIG. 53(b)). Thereby, as will be described later, a step formed between the guide bottom surface 824a and the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 can be used to easily lower the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, thereby forming the first state. can be made easier.

The rear base 830 mainly comprises a rear wall 831 , a discharge side wall 832 and a discharge ceiling wall 833 . The rear wall 831 abuts against the rear side end surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822, the intermediate second side wall 823, and the intermediate bottom wall 824 of the intermediate base body 820 (that is, covers the rear side open portion). It forms the back side wall (back wall) of the guide passage.

The discharge side wall 832 and the discharge ceiling wall 833 form the side wall and the ceiling wall of the guide passage for guiding the game ball from the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 to the discharge passage (not shown), and the discharge port 821d. along the outer edge of the That is, the cross-sectional shape of the guide passage taken in by the discharge bottom wall 825 of the intermediate base 820 and the discharge side wall 832 and discharge ceiling wall 833 of the rear base 830 is substantially the same as the shape of the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820. be. As a result, the width of the guide passage can be ensured, so that a plurality of game balls can be guided smoothly. Further, even when the later game ball collides with the previous game ball on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and bounces up, the latter game ball can be guided smoothly. Details will be described later.

The seesaw member 840 includes a bearing 841 formed at a substantially central portion in the longitudinal direction, a connecting pin 842 formed at one end side in the longitudinal direction, a decorative portion 843 formed at the other end side in the longitudinal direction, and a It mainly includes a receiving surface 844 , an inclined surface 845 and a discharge surface 846 that are formed, and a claw portion 847 erected on the discharge surface 846 .

As described above, the bearing 841 is a hole having a circular cross section through which the support shaft 821e projecting from the intermediate substrate 821 of the intermediate base 820 is rotatably inserted. 840 is rotatably journalled between opposing surfaces of front base 810 and intermediate base 820 .

The connecting pin 842 is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and is slidably inserted into a connecting groove 852 (described later) of the driven member 850 . Thereby, the rotation of the seesaw member 840 can be transmitted to the driven member 850 . That is, when the seesaw member 840 rotates about the support shaft 821e, the connecting pin 842 acts on the connecting groove 852, so that the driven member 850 rotates about the rotating shaft 851. .

The other end decorative portion 843 is a portion with a decoration such as a pattern on the front, and is exposed to the player through the cutout portion 811b of the front base 810 so as to be visible to the player, as described above.

The receiving surface 844 is a flat surface portion that receives a game ball that rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a in the guide passage of the intermediate base 820 and is delivered from the delivery port 821c. It is a flat surface-like part for rolling the received game ball to the discharge surface 846 .

The receiving surface 844 and the inclined surface 845 are not dependent on the rotational position of the seesaw member 840, i.e., in a no-load state where no game ball is placed on the seesaw member 840 (i.e., the first state, see FIG. 52(a)). ) is formed in a shape with a downward slope toward the discharge surface 846 . Therefore, in either the first state or the second state, the game ball received by the receiving surface 644 can roll toward the discharge surface 646 from the receiving surface 644 and the inclined surface 643 .

Here, in this embodiment, since the receiving surface 844 is located on the one longitudinal end side (the left side in FIG. 52(a)) of the seesaw member 840 relative to the axial center of the bearing 841, the receiving surface 844 is in the second state (the other end side is lowered). 52(b)), when the receiving surface 844 receives a game ball, the weight of the received game ball causes the one end in the longitudinal direction (receiving surface 844 side) to move. can be lowered. As a result, as will be described later, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

The discharge surface 846 is a flat surface-shaped part for sending out (discharging) the game ball from the seesaw member 840 to the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820, and is arranged from the front base 810 side to the intermediate base 820 side (FIG. 52(b)). It is formed so as to be inclined downward from the front side of the paper to the back side. Therefore, when the game ball rolls up to the discharge surface 846, the game ball can roll toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 due to the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846.

The pawl portion 847 switches the rolling direction of the game ball to the direction toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 when the game ball rolls on the discharge surface 846 along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840. It is provided with a guide surface 847a formed as an inclined surface that guides the abutted game ball toward the discharge port 821d. This makes it easier for the game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846 to flow into the discharge port 821d quickly. Therefore, as will be described later, the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are formed. alternate switching can be performed smoothly.

In this case, the claw portion 847 is formed on the other end in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, and is biased toward the side close to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d) in the width direction of the seesaw member 840. is set. As a result, as will be described later, when the position of the game ball rolling on the output surface 846 varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, , the time during which the second state is formed) can be easily made constant, and as a result, alternate switching between the first state and the second state can be performed smoothly.

The driven member 850 has a rotating shaft 851 protruding from the rear surface of the driven member 850 at the other end in the longitudinal direction. and a connecting groove 852 formed in the front of the driven member 850 and a one-end decorative portion 853 exposed to the player through the cutout 811b of the front base 810 so as to be visible to the player. Prepare for.

The rotating shaft 851 is a shaft-shaped body rotatably inserted through the bearing 821f projecting from the intermediate substrate 821 of the intermediate base 820, as described above. are rotatably journalled between the facing surfaces of front base 810 and intermediate base 820 .

As described above, the connecting groove 852 is a concave groove through which the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840 is slidably inserted. , the driven member 850 is rotated as the seesaw member 840 is rotated.

When the seesaw member 840 is shifted from the first state to the second state, the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 852 is pushed up by the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840, and the driven member 850 rotates about the rotating shaft 851 as shown in FIG. (a) Rotating clockwise raises the linking driven member 850 (one end decorative portion 853) (see FIG. 52(b)). On the other hand, when the seesaw member 840 transitions from the second state to the first state, the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 852 is pushed down by the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840, and the driven member 850 rotates about the rotating shaft 851 as shown in FIG. (a) By rotating clockwise, the linking driven member 850 (one end decorative portion 853) is lowered (see FIG. 52(a)).

In this embodiment, the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840 is thus connected to the connecting groove 852 of the driven member 850, and a link mechanism is configured to rotate the driven member 850 as the seesaw member 840 rotates. A link ratio of the link mechanism is set to a ratio that amplifies the rotation angle of the driven member 850 with respect to the rotation angle of the seesaw member 840 . As a result, the movable range of the driven member 850 (one-end decorative portion 853) can be expanded, and the presentation effect associated with the displacement can be enhanced.

Here, since the seesaw member 840 can be rotated using the weight of the game ball, the transition from the first state to the second state can be easily performed at high speed and in a relatively short time. On the other hand, the transition from the second state to the first state requires rotation of the seesaw member 840 only by its own weight, so the operation becomes slow and takes a long time. In order to ensure that the seesaw member 840 alternately switches between the first state and the second state when a plurality of game balls pass through the guide passage continuously, the transition from the second state to the first state should be done promptly.

In this case, according to the present embodiment, the driven member 850 is connected to one longitudinal end of the seesaw member 840 , so the weight of the driven member 850 is applied to the one longitudinal end of the seesaw member 840 by an external force. (That is, it can be used as an assisting force for transitioning from the second state to the first state). As a result, it is possible to shorten the time required for the transition from the second state to the first state. Alternate switching between the first state and the second state can be facilitated.

Next, the operation of the winning device 65 will be described. When game balls flow into the guide passage on the side of the front base 810 from the winning opening 65a, the game balls are collected on the front second bottom wall 815 and roll on the guide bottom surface 815a of the front second bottom wall 815. 53(a) and 53(b)), and flows from the receiving port 821b of the intermediate base 820 into the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side.

A game ball that has flowed into the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 travels between the facing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 in a substantially vertical direction (downward direction in FIGS. 53(a) and 53(b)). and reach the intermediate bottom wall 824 . The guiding direction of the game ball that reaches the intermediate bottom wall 824 is switched. That is, the game ball rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824, is guided in a substantially horizontal direction (left direction in FIGS. 53(a) and 53(b)), It is delivered to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 from the outlet 821c.

As shown in FIG. 52(a), when the seesaw member 840 forming the first state receives a game ball on its receiving surface 844, the game ball rolls on the receiving surface 844 and the inclined surface 845 toward the discharge surface 846. The weight of the game ball causes the seesaw member 840 to rotate clockwise about the rotating shaft 841 in FIG. A second state is formed, as shown at 52(b). However, illustration of game balls is omitted in FIG. 52(b).

When the game ball is discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 and a no-load state is formed in which the weight of the game ball is not applied to the seesaw member 840, the seesaw member 840 rotates the rotating shaft 841 by its own weight. 52(b) about the center (the other end in the longitudinal direction (the other end decorative portion 843 side) is raised), and as shown in FIG. 52(a), the first state is formed ( seesaw member 840 is returned to the first state).

In this case, when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided to the seesaw member 840, the weight of the game balls causes the seesaw member 840 to descend to the second state (the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the side of the other end decorative portion 843)). state), and it may not be possible to alternately switch between the first state and the second state.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the seesaw member 840 has the receiving surface 844 located on the one longitudinal end side (the left side in FIG. As shown, even when the seesaw member 840 forming the second state receives the game ball on its receiving surface 844, the weight of the game ball supported by the receiving surface 844 allows the one end in the longitudinal direction to descend. That is, the seesaw member 840 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 52(b) about the rotating shaft 841 (the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the side of the other end decorative portion 843) is raised), as shown in FIG. 52(b). A second state can be formed (made easier to form). As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

Here, in this embodiment, as described above, since the guide passages for guiding the game balls are formed in the internal spaces of the front base 810, the intermediate base 820 and the rear base 830, a plurality of game balls can be delivered from the winning opening 65a. Even in the case of continuous inflow, it is possible to store a plurality of game balls using the guide passage and to guide the plurality of game balls to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in order. can.

However, even when a plurality of game balls are stored using the guide passage and the game balls are guided to the guide surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in order, the game balls are In the configuration where the game balls are guided by dropping from above, the plurality of game balls tend to pile up on the receiving surface 844, and the game balls are hindered from rolling from the receiving surface 844 to the inclined surface 845. Therefore, the seesaw member 840 cannot alternately switch between the first state and the second state.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, a horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824 ) is formed, and the game ball rolling on the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage is guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 from the substantially horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIGS. 53(a) and 5(b)). can be done. As a result, the game balls can be guided one by one from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the receiving surface 844 can sequentially receive the game balls from the horizontal passage one by one). It is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls from being vertically stacked on the receiving surface 844.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member 840 .

In this case, as described above, the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 guides the game ball along the substantially vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 52(a)) between the facing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823. A horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) is connected to the downstream side thereof, and the extension length of the horizontal passage is shorter than twice the diameter of the game ball. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are stored in the guide passage, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 one by one at intervals.

That is, by setting the extension length of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) to a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball (in this embodiment, the extension tip of the guide bottom surface 824a to the rear surface The horizontal distance L from the base 830 to the rear wall 831, which will be described later, is approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball), and only one game ball is present in the horizontal passage, and Since the direction in which the horizontal passage extends and the direction in which the upstream passage extends are different, when the ball flows from the upstream passage to the horizontal passage, it is necessary to change the inflow direction. It is possible to increase the time required for the flow into the horizontal passage by the change of direction.

Therefore, when the previous game ball existing in the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) is guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, the game ball after the upstream passage (next game ball) is changed direction. While taking time, the game ball is flowed into the horizontal passage, and the subsequent game ball is guided from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. - 特許庁That is, the later game ball is spaced apart from the previous game ball. As a result, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 one by one at intervals.

As shown in FIGS. 52(b) and 53(b), in the second state, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is positioned above the downward inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824). Therefore, a step in the height direction (vertical direction in FIG. 53(b)) can be formed between the receiving surface 844 and the guide bottom surface 824a. As a result, in the second state, when guiding the game ball to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 by rolling the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal path, the game ball is caused to ride on the receiving surface 844 (collide with the step). 53(b)), and this riding action (collision) can be used to facilitate lowering of the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (moving downward in FIG. 53(b)). That is, the one end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 can be easily lowered, and the first state can be easily formed. It is possible to facilitate switching between the state and the second state alternately.

On the other hand, when the seesaw member 840 forms the first state (see FIGS. 52(a) and 53(a)), the seesaw member 840 is in an unloaded state and the guide bottom surface of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) The game ball guided from 824a and received by the receiving surface 844 is rapidly rolled toward the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846, and the weight of the game ball acts on the other end of the seesaw member 840 in the longitudinal direction. It is required to descend (form the second state).

In this case, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, as shown in FIGS. Since the ball is also positioned downward, it is not necessary for the game ball to ride on the receiving surface 844 (collide with the step) as in the case of the second state described above, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a time lag due to such an operation. Therefore, it is possible to quickly roll the game ball from the receiving surface 844 toward the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846, thereby facilitating formation of the second state.

In the first state, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is formed so as to be at the same height position (flat position) as the downward inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824). preferably. When the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is positioned below the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal path, the game ball is dropped from the guide bottom surface 824a to the receiving surface 844, so that the game ball bounces, This is because a time lag and an increased load on the rotating shaft 841 of the seesaw member 840 due to the impact of the drop can be eliminated if the height is the same.

Next, the claw portion 847 of the seesaw member 840 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the winning device 65 taken along line LIV-LIV in FIG. 52(b).

As shown in FIG. 54, the seesaw member 840 has a claw portion 847 erected from a discharge surface 846 thereof. The pawl portion 847 has a guide surface 847a which is formed to be inclined so as to approach the discharge port 821d as it goes from the inclined surface 825 side toward the other end decorative portion 843 side. As a result, when the game ball rolls on the discharge surface 846 along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (left and right direction in FIG. 54) toward the other end decorative portion 843 (right side in FIG. 54), the game ball can be brought into contact with the guide surface 847a of the claw portion 847 to switch the rolling direction to the direction toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 (upward in FIG. 54). The time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) can be shortened, and as a result, alternate switching between the first state and the second state can be performed. It can be done smoothly.

In this case, as described above, the claw portion 847 is located on the discharge surface 846 on the other longitudinal end side of the seesaw member 840 (the other end decorative portion 843 side, right side in FIG. 54) and in the width direction of the seesaw member 840 ( 54), it is biased toward the side close to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d, the bottom side in FIG. 54). As a result, when the position of the game ball rolling on the output surface 846 varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the second state is The formed time) can be easily made constant, and as a result, alternating switching between the first state and the second state can be performed smoothly.

That is, in the width direction of the seesaw member 840 (vertical direction in FIG. 54), the game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846 on the side close to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d, the lower side in FIG. A game ball that has a long distance to 821d and rolls on the discharge surface 846 on the side close to the intermediate base 820 (the side close to the discharge port 821d, the upper side in FIG. 54) has a short distance to the discharge port 821d.

Therefore, by arranging the claw portion 847 in the width direction of the seesaw member 840 so as to be closer to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d, the lower side in FIG. The former game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846 on the side (lower side in FIG. 54) collides with the guide surface 847a of the claw portion 847 at an early stage and is discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d, while the intermediate base For the latter game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846 on the side close to 820 (upper side in FIG. 54), it is possible to delay or prevent the collision of the pawl portion 847 with the guide surface 847a. Thereby, in each of the former and the latter, the total time during which the game ball rolls on the discharge surface 846 can be brought close to the same. As a result, even if the rolling position of the game ball varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the weight of the game ball acts on the discharge surface 846 can be easily made constant.

Next, the outlet 821d of the intermediate base 820 will be described with reference to FIG. 55A and 55B are schematic rear views of the winning device 65, in which FIG. 55A shows the first state shown in FIG. 52A, and FIG. 55B shows the second state shown in FIG. 52B. , respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b), the width dimension of the outlet 821d (horizontal dimension in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b)) is more than twice the diameter of the game ball. It is set to a large size (approximately 2.5 times in this embodiment). As a result, in a state in which the previous game ball exists on the other longitudinal direction end side of the seesaw member 840 (the left side in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b)), the next game ball further moves to the other longitudinal direction end side. Even when rolling toward, each of these game balls can be smoothly flowed into the discharge port 821d.

For example, the later game ball collides with the previous game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846, and the latter game ball bounces back in the opposite direction to the rolling direction (that is, the interval between the two game balls (Fig. 55 (a) and FIG. 55(b) are expanded in the width direction of the discharge port 821d), and even when these game balls are discharged to the discharge port 821d, the width dimension of the discharge port 821 is sufficient. Each of them can flow in smoothly by being secured in

Also, the height dimension of the discharge port 821d (vertical dimension in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b)) is greater on the side of the inclined surface 845 than on the side of the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840. is set to the larger dimension. As a result, in a state in which the previous game ball exists on the other longitudinal direction end side of the seesaw member 840 (the left side in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b)), the next game ball is further positioned on the other longitudinal direction end side. Even if it rolls toward , each of these game balls can be smoothly flowed into the discharge port 821d.

That is, the later game ball collided with the previous game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846, and the subsequent game ball was bounced upward, or bounced back in the opposite direction to the rolling direction and inclined surface Even if the game ball is bounced upward at 845, the height dimension of the discharge port 821d on the side of the inclined surface 845 can be used to allow the later game ball to flow into the discharge port 821 smoothly. On the other hand, even if the previous game ball collides with the next game ball, it is difficult to be bounced up. can be suppressed, and a space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

Next, the game area will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 60. FIG. 56 and 57 are partially enlarged views of the game board 13, in which the LVI portion of FIG. 2 is partially enlarged. Note that FIG. 57 shows a state in which the center frame 86 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60, a nail, a pinwheel, an inner rail 61, an outer rail 62, various prize openings (see FIG. 2), a center frame 86, and the like. As described above, the front surface of the game board 13 and the area defined by the inner rail 12 is the game area (area where nails, winning holes, etc. are arranged and shot balls flow down). be.

An opening is formed in the center of the game board 13 so that a third symbol display device 81, which is a display device, can be visually recognized. In this case, conventionally, the opening of the game board 13 is made larger than the outer shape of the third pattern display device 81, and a production device arranged displaceably on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60) by that amount. is secured in a visible area. However, there is a limit to enlarging the opening of the game board 13 because it is necessary to secure an area for the balls to flow down.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the center frame 86 to be installed in the opening of the game board 13 (the opening 60a of the base plate 60) is made of a light-transmissive material, and a part of the center frame 86 (hereinafter referred to as (referred to as "area forming part R") forms part of the game area. As a result, the rendering device (the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 in this embodiment) can be visually recognized through the area forming portion R of the center frame 86 (see through). Therefore, the area in which the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 can be visually recognized can be enlarged while securing the area for the ball to flow down. However, in FIG. 56, in order to simplify the drawing, illustration of the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 seen through the area forming portion R is omitted.

In this case, in this embodiment, the opening of the game board 13 (the opening 60a of the base plate 60) is formed so that its inner edge reaches the outer edge of the game area (that is, the inner rail 61). Via the area forming part R of 86, the area in which the production device (counterclockwise rotation unit 700) can be visually recognized can be secured to the maximum.

On the other hand, the area forming portion R of the center frame 86 has a width dimension that allows only one game ball to pass through, so that the opening of the center frame 86 (that is, the area forming portion R Without the part R), it is possible to secure a maximum area in which the production device (counterclockwise rotation unit 700) can be directly visually recognized.

A detailed configuration of the area forming portion R in the center frame 86 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60. FIG. 58 is a front perspective view of the center frame 86, and FIG. 59 is a front view of the area forming portion R. As shown in FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view of the region forming portion R taken along line LX-LX in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 60, the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 is illustrated typically.

As shown in FIG. 58 , the center frame 86 includes a frame plate base portion 910 formed in a frame shape when viewed from the front, and an inner portion erected from the rear surface of the frame plate base portion 910 and fitted in an opening 60 a of the base plate 60 . It mainly comprises a fitting wall portion 920 and an inner edge defining wall portion 930 erected from the front surface of the frame base portion 910 opposite to the inner fitting wall portion 920 and defining the inner edge of the game area.

The frame plate base portion 910 is a portion superimposed on the front surface of the base plate 60, and the front side thereof is a region where game balls flow down. A plurality of insertion holes 911 for inserting tapping screws for fastening and fixing the center frame 86 to the base plate 60 are drilled in the frame plate base portion 910 . In addition, the outer edge of the frame plate base portion 910 is inclined downward so as to be smoothly connected to the front surface of the base plate 60 . This inclination allows smooth rolling of the game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 59 and 60 , a columnar portion 940 , a side wall portion 950 and a downstream wall portion 960 are erected from the front surface of the frame plate base portion 910 in the region forming portion R of the center frame 86 .

The columnar portion 940 is formed as a columnar body having a substantially rhombic cross section, and is arranged at an intermediate position between the inner rail 61 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930 (see FIG. 56). As a result, in the upstream portion of the region forming portion R, a first path M1 is defined between the columnar body 940 and the inner rail 61, and a second path M1 is defined between the columnar body 940 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930. M2 is partitioned.

The side wall portion 950 is formed as a wall portion provided in parallel with the inner rail 61 on the downstream side of the columnar body 940 and partitions the third path M3 between itself and the inner edge defining wall portion 930 . In this case, the portion of the inner edge defining wall portion 930 facing the side wall portion 950 is closer to the inner rail 61 side than the portion facing the columnar body 940 .

As a result, the downstream side of the second path M2 is bent toward the inner rail 61 side (the side wall portion 450 side). On the other hand, since the first path M1 and the third path M3 are paths formed along the inner rail 61, they are connected substantially in a straight line. Further, the first path M1 and the third path M3 are formed as linear paths that allow the ball to flow down in an inclined direction when viewed from the front.

A concave groove 971 is provided in the front surface of the frame plate base portion 910 . The recessed groove 971 is a portion for suppressing the flow speed of the game ball, and is formed as a recessed portion having an inverted triangular cross section, and while repeatedly bending left and right in a sawtooth shape when viewed from the front, the first path M1 and the second path M1 are formed. It extends along the route direction of the 3 route M3.

Protrusions 972 are provided on opposing surfaces of the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930, respectively. The protrusion 972 is a part for suppressing the falling speed of the game ball, is formed in a substantially semicircular cross section, and extends along the erecting direction of the both wall portions 930 and 950 . Each of these protrusions 972 is disposed at a position out of phase with the curved portion of the recessed groove 971 along the direction of the third path M3.

The downstream wall portion 960 is formed as a wall portion connected to the downstream end portion of the side wall portion 950 and faces the downstream side of the third path M3. Specifically, it is formed as a wall portion substantially orthogonal to the flow direction of the third route M3. In this case, the inner edge defining wall portion 930 has a portion corresponding to the downstream wall portion 940 formed along the downstream wall portion 960 , thereby forming a fourth wall portion between the inner edge defining wall portion 930 and the downstream wall portion 940 . A route M4 is demarcated.

The width dimension of the first path M1 (interval between the inner rail 61 and the columnar body 640), the width dimension of the second path M2 (interval between the columnar body 640 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930), and the width of the third path M3 Only game balls with a dimension (opposing distance between the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930) and a width dimension of the fourth path M4 (opposing distance between the downstream wall portion 960 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930) can pass. Each is set to the width dimension. In this embodiment, it is set to be approximately 1.2 times the diameter of the game ball.

Next, the action of the area forming portion R formed in this manner on the falling game ball will be described. A game ball that is guided by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 and flows down from the upper area of the game area bounces off a nail or rolls along the inner edge regulating wall portion 930, and then travels along the first path M1 or the first path. It flows into the region forming portion R from one of the two routes M2. A game ball passing through the first path M1 or the second path M2 and flowing down the third path M3 collides with the downstream wall portion 960 and flows down to the lower area of the game area via the fourth path M4.

Here, since the area forming portion R is a part of the center frame 86 and is made of a resin material, nails cannot be implanted therein. Therefore, the falling speed of the game ball cannot be reduced, and there is a possibility that the player may find it difficult to visually recognize the falling game ball.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the downstream wall portion 960 is erected on the downstream side of the third route M3 (at the confluence portion of the third route M3 and the fourth route M4) in the area forming portion R. By colliding with the downstream wall portion 960, the falling speed of the game ball can be reduced, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the falling game ball.

In this case, the downstream wall portion 960 is erected from the frame plate substrate 910, that is, formed integrally with the center frame 86, so that the downstream wall portion 960 can be easily molded by resin molding using a mold. is formed as a separate part and fixed to the frame plate substrate 910 by fastening. Therefore, the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly.

On the other hand, the third path M3 is formed in a straight line, and the downstream wall portion 960 made of a resin material bears the portion where the game ball flows down relatively quickly, and the portion where the game ball repeatedly collides with the downstream wall portion 960 is formed. , there is a risk of damage. On the other hand, since the downstream wall portion 960 is connected to the downstream side of the side wall portion 950, the rigidity of the downstream wall portion 960 can be increased, and damage to the downstream wall portion 960 can be suppressed.

In this case, an inclined surface 961 that inclines toward the fourth path M4 is formed at the connecting portion between the side wall portion 950 and the downstream wall portion 960 . As a result, the connecting portion between the side wall portion 950 and the downstream wall portion 960 can be triangular in front view as shown in FIG. 59, so that the rigidity of the downstream wall portion 960 can be increased accordingly.

Further, when the game ball that has flowed down the third path M3 collides with the inclined surface 961 and then with the downstream wall portion 960, it is possible to suppress the game ball from bouncing in the direction in which the game ball flows backward along the third path M3. , it can be made to flow down toward the outlet of the third route M3 while reducing its flow rate. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the fourth path M4, and the load on the downstream wall portion 960 can be reduced. Therefore, damage to the downstream wall portion 960 can be suppressed also from this point.

The side wall portion 950 is also formed integrally with the center frame 86, and can be easily formed by resin molding using a mold. There is no need to perform complicated operations such as fastening and fixing to the frame plate substrate 910, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly. Further, the side wall portion 950, which serves to partition the third path M3, can also serve to increase the rigidity of the downstream wall portion 960, thereby simplifying the structure and reducing the cost of parts accordingly. can be done.

Here, in the conventional game machine, the manner in which the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the inner rail 61 is that it collides with the nail and bounces, and then collides with the nail. Damage to the inner rail 61 was unlikely to occur.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the effect device (counterclockwise rotation unit 700) is directly visible through the opening of the center frame 86 (that is, without the area forming portion R). , the width of the area forming portion R is set to a narrow dimension (in this embodiment, the width dimension that allows only game balls with 1=1 to pass through the third path M3). That is, the width of the game area is narrowed by the area forming portion R. Therefore, on the upstream side of the area forming portion R, it is necessary to greatly change the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the game area (in this embodiment, it is necessary to form the second path M2). In such a form, some of the game balls (game balls flowing down the second path M2) collide with the inner rail 61 at a relatively high speed, which may cause damage (bending due to collision) of the inner rail 61. .

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the side wall portion 750 is arranged side by side with the inner rail 61, the side wall portion 950 receives the game ball that has flowed down the second path M2, thereby preventing the game ball from colliding with the inner rail 61. can be avoided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inner rail 61 from being damaged (bending due to collision).

In other words, it is conceivable that the inner rail 61 also functions to partition the third path M3 without forming the side wall portion 750, but in this case, it is necessary to avoid collision of the game ball with the inner rail 61. Therefore, the width of the upstream side of the region forming portion R cannot be reduced, and the opening of the center frame 86 (the inner edge defining wall portion 930) must be arranged in the direction away from the inner rail 61. Therefore, the area in which the directing device (counterclockwise rotation unit 700) is directly visible is reduced accordingly. Therefore, the present embodiment in which the side wall portion 750 is arranged side by side with the inner rail 61 results in maximizing the area in which the effect device (left rotation unit 700) can be directly visually recognized.

As described above, the side wall portion 750 is integrally formed as a part of the center frame 86 made of a light-transmitting material, so that light emitted from the light emitter on the back side of the center frame 86 (side wall portion 950, concave groove 971, etc.) It can function as a light guide that guides the emitted light P to the game area. For example, the light P emitted from the back side and introduced into the side wall portion 950 is guided to the upright end face (upper side in FIG. 60) of the side wall portion 950 and irradiated from the upright end face. Not only can the illuminated light P exert a dramatic effect, but the light P guided to the side surface of the side wall portion 950 (the surface facing the inner edge defining wall portion 930) is irradiated from the side surface of the side wall portion 950. can do. As a result, the light is guided to the front surface of the frame plate base 910 (upper surface in FIG. 60) and the side surface of the inner edge defining wall portion 930 (the surface facing the side wall portion 950), and together with the light P emitted from the upper surface or the side surface, the game The production effect by the light P that shines the area where the ball rolls (the game ball when the game ball rolls) can be exhibited.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the side wall portion 950 is arranged side by side with the inner rail 61, the light P emitted from the rear side of the center frame 86 and introduced into the side wall portion 750 is directed toward the inner rail 61 side (the inner edge defining wall). The inner rail 61 can reduce leakage to the outside from the side surface of the portion 930 (opposite side of the portion 930). That is, the inner rail 61 can reflect the light P toward the standing end surface or the side surface (the side surface facing the inner edge defining wall portion 930). Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of light that can be irradiated from the standing end surface or side surface of the side wall portion 950, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the guided light P.

The luminous body is arranged in the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 (not shown), and the retracted position of the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 is the rear surface of the area forming portion R. FIG. Therefore, in a state in which the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 is arranged at the retracted position, the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 can be visually recognized through the region forming portion R, and the light P emitted from the light emitter is guided through the side wall portion 950. It is possible to allow the player to visually recognize the image. That is, the shape of the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 visually recognized through the area forming portion R can be associated with the light P emitted from the standing end surface of the side wall portion 950, and the player can visually recognize the shape. The production effect by the light P can be heightened.

Here, as described above, projections 972 protrude from the facing surfaces of the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930 . Therefore, the game ball flowing down the third path M3 can be made to collide with the projection 972 and its flow down can be inhibited. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball is slowed down in the region forming portion R where nails cannot be implanted, and the player can easily see the falling game ball.

In this case, the projection 972 projecting from the side wall portion 950 and the projection 972 projecting from the inner edge defining wall portion 930 are arranged out of phase with each other along the direction of the third path M3. That is, they are arranged in a zigzag pattern on the left and right facing surfaces. Therefore, when the game ball flows down the third path M3, the game ball can alternately collide with the left and right projections 972 to cause the game ball to meander left and right. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball can be easily slowed down, and a displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the flowing direction (path direction of the third path M3) is imparted to the game ball to change the movement of the game ball. can be done.

Further, the front surface of the frame plate base portion 910 is provided with the concave groove 971 formed in a sawtooth shape when viewed from the front, as described above. Therefore, when the game ball flows down the third path M3, the game ball can be guided along the inner surface of the recessed groove 971 to meander left and right. Therefore, this also makes it easier to slow down the flow speed of the game ball, and also gives the game ball a displacement component in the direction perpendicular to the flow direction (path direction of the third path M3), thereby changing the movement of the game ball. can give

In addition, when the light emitted from the back side of the area forming portion R is guided toward the front surface of the game area, the recessed groove 971 recessed in the front surface of the frame plate base portion 910 is used to diffuse or collect the light. Since it can be used as a lens that emits light, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the guided light.

In this case, the bent portion of the recessed groove 971 has a phase difference along the direction of the third route M3 with respect to the projection 972 projecting from the side wall portion 950 and the projection 972 projecting from the inner edge defining wall portion 930. are staggered. Therefore, when the game ball flows down the third path M3, the game ball that is guided by the inner surface of the recessed groove 971 and meanders left and right can be made to collide alternately with the left and right projections 972 easily. A synergistic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the action of 971 and the action of projection 972 . As a result, the falling speed of the game ball can be easily made slower, and the change in movement of the game ball can be made greater.

In addition, since these protrusions 972 and grooves 971 slow down the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the third route M3, damage to the downstream wall portion 960 is suppressed and the game from the third route M3 to the fourth route M4 is suppressed. It contributes to the smooth guidance of the ball.

In addition, the terminal end side of the recessed groove 971 (the portion arranged side by side with the inclined surface 961) overlaps the downstream wall portion 960 in its extending direction and points to the exit of the third path M3. As a result, the game ball guided to the terminal end side of the recessed groove 971 can collide with the downstream wall portion 960 from an oblique direction. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball from bouncing in the direction of flowing backward on the third route M3, and to reduce the flow speed of the game ball to flow down toward the exit of the third route M3. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the fourth path M4, and the load on the downstream wall portion 960 can be reduced.

<Second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a second embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a front view of the game board 2013 in the second embodiment. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the game board 2013 of the second embodiment, the formation range of the area forming portion R is expanded to substantially the top of the game area, as compared with the game board 13 of the first embodiment. As a result, through the opening of the center frame 2086 (that is, not through the area forming part R), the production device (in this embodiment, the central rotation unit 400, the central rotation unit 500, and the left rotation unit 700) can be directly connected. The visible area can be further expanded than in the case of the first embodiment.

In the region forming member R, formation of the columnar body 940 (see FIG. 59) is omitted, and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 extends along the outer rail 62 . As a result, a fifth path M5 and a sixth path M6 are defined between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 in a region above the return ball prevention member 68 .

In addition, the facing interval between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 is set to a dimension larger than twice the diameter of the game ball and smaller than three times. In this embodiment, it is set to be approximately 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball. As a result, passages (fifth path M5 and sixth path M6) in which game balls can pass each other without colliding are formed between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930, and the center frame 2086 is formed. It is possible to maximize the above-described area where the production device can be directly visually recognized through the opening.

In addition, the windmill WM has its rotating shaft disposed substantially in the center between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 facing each other. Thereby, the game ball can pass between the outer rail 62 and the rotating shaft of the windmill WM and between the rotating shaft of the windmill WM and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930, respectively.

According to the area forming part R formed in this way, the game ball shot from the ball shooting unit and guided to the upper area of the game area by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 is guided along the outer rail 62. Thus, after passing the windmill WM, the vehicle moves along the fifth route M5. In this case, by setting the firing intensity to a value greater than the reference value, the game ball can flow down to the right side area beyond the upper top of the game area, while the firing intensity is set to a value smaller than the reference value. By doing so, the game ball can flow down along the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 (moving the sixth path M6) without passing over the upper top portion of the game area. The game ball that has moved on the sixth route M6 flows down to the third route M3 after passing through the windmill WM.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 67. FIG. In the right rotation unit 600 of the first embodiment, a case will be described where two members, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642), can be displaced as the transmission member 654 is displaced. However, the right rotation unit 3600 in the third embodiment displaces the three members of the first displacement member 3630, the second displacement member 3640 (connection displacement member 642) and the third displacement member 3660 as the transmission member 654 is displaced. is displaceable. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

62 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 3600 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 3600. FIG. 62 and 63 show a state in which part of the right rotation unit 3600 (back base 610 and front base 620) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, a right rotation unit 3600 in the third embodiment has a third displacement member 3660 slidably disposed in front of one end side (upper side in FIG. 62) of a first displacement member 3630. Prepare. As will be described later, the tip of the connecting pin 3641d of the second displacement member 3640 (driven member 3641) is connected to the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660 via the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 3630. , and by rotating the driven member 3641 relative to the first displacement member 3630, the third displacement member 3660 can be displaced (slid) relative to the first displacement member 3630. .

The through groove 3636 is a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc around the support shaft 632, and the width of the groove is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641. be done. Therefore, the rotation of the driven member 3641 about the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 3630 is allowed by displacing the connecting pin 3641 d along the extending direction of the through groove 3636 .

The connecting pin 3641 d is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section and is inserted into the through groove 3636 , and its protrusion height is set to a dimension that allows it to protrude from the front surface of the first displacement member 3630 . That is, in the assembled state, the distal end side of the connecting pin 3641d can be inserted into a slide groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660 described later via the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 3630. FIG.

A sliding groove 3661 is recessed in the rear surface of the third displacement member 3660, and a slide rail 3662 is arranged above the sliding groove 3661. As shown in FIG. As described above, the sliding groove 3661 is a concave groove through which the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 is slidably inserted. The dimension is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 3641 d of the driven member 3641 .

The slide rail 3662 is an extendable linear guide mechanism interposed between the first displacement member 3630 and the third displacement member 3660. It consists of a front side rail connected to the front side of the rail so that relative displacement in the longitudinal direction is possible. The third displacement member 3660 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 by the extension and contraction of the slide rail 3662 due to the relative displacement of the rear side rail and the front side rail in the longitudinal direction.

When the third displacement member 3660 is arranged on the front side of the first displacement member 3630, only a part of the sliding groove 3661 overlaps with the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 3630 (the sliding groove 3661 and through groove 3636). Therefore, by rotating the driven member 3641 around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 3630 and displacing the connecting pin 3641d along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, the connecting pin 3641d is moved to the third displacement member. By acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 of the 3660 (the connecting pin 3641 d presses the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 ), the third displacement member 3660 can be slid with respect to the first displacement member 3630 .

Next, the operation of right rotation unit 3600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67. FIG. 64 and 65 are front views of the right rotation unit 3600 in each state during operation between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. Fig. 10 is a schematic back view of the right rotation unit 3600 in each state when rotating.

64(a) to 64(c) correspond to FIGS. 66(a) to 66(c), and FIGS. 65(a) to 65(c) correspond to FIGS. 67(a) to 67(c). c) and the same state respectively. In this case, FIG. 64(c) is the same as FIG. 65(a), and FIG. 66(c) is the same as FIG. 67(a).

Here, in the third embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 3630, so that the first displacement member 3630, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 3660 are respectively displaced, and the manner of displacement of the first displacement member 3630 and the second displacement member 3640 is the same as in the case of the above-described first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a), at the retracted position, the slide rail 3662 of the third displacement member 3660 is shortened, and the connecting pin of the driven member 3641 of the second displacement member 3640 is 3641d is located on one end side of the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660 (end far from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, right side in FIG. 66(a)). In this case, the length from the proximal end of the first displacement member 3630 to the distal end of the third displacement member 3660 is the dimension h1.

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 66(a)), the states shown in FIGS. As shown in 66(c), the first displacement member 3630 is rotated in the projecting direction with the rotating shaft 631 as the rotating shaft. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 and is displaced together with the first displacement member 3630 .

Therefore, the second displacement member 3640 does not displace relative to the third displacement member 3660 either. Therefore, since the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 in the second displacement member 3640 does not slide in the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660, the third displacement member 3660 is integrated with the first displacement member 3630. displaced. 64(a) to 64(c) and 66(a) to 66(c), the length from the proximal end of the first displacement member 3630 to the distal end of the third displacement member 3660 is remains at dimension h1.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 67(a)) from the state shown in FIGS. While the state (position) shown in FIG. After passing through, it is arranged in the extended position shown in FIGS. 65(c) and 67(c).

In this case, when the driven member 3641 is rotated about the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 3641 moves the connecting pin 3641d to the other end side of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (support shaft 632 and the end closer to the shaft support hole 641a (left side in FIG. 67(a)).

Therefore, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the inner wall surface on the far side from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, the upper side in FIG. 67(a)) is It is pushed up in the direction of extending the slide rail 3662 (see FIG. 63). As a result, the third displacement member 3660 is slid relative to the first displacement member 3630, and in the sections shown in FIGS. 65(a) to 65(c) and FIGS. The length from the proximal end of the first displacement member 3630 to the distal end of the third displacement member 3660 changes (increases) from dimension h1 to dimension h3 via dimension h2 (h1<h2<h3).

Contrary to the above case, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 67(c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 65(c) and 67(c), the first displacement While the member 3630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. After going through the states shown in b) and FIG. 67(b), it is placed in the states shown in FIGS. 65(a) and 67(a).

In this case, the rotation of the driven member 3641 about the support shaft 632 causes the connecting pin 3641d to move toward one end of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the far end from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a). 67(c) to the right) (clockwise in FIG. 67(c)).

Therefore, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the inner wall surface on the side closer to the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, the lower side in FIG. 67(c)) is Since the slide rail 3662 (see FIG. 63) is pushed down in the direction of shortening, the third displacement member 3660 is slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630, and the third displacement member 3660 is displaced from the proximal end of the first displacement member 3630. The length to the tip is shortened to dimension h1.

64(c) and 66(c), when the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 66(c)), the first displacement member 3630 rotates the rotating shaft 631. 64(a) and 66(a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630, so that the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 is aligned with the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660. , the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 3660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 3630 .

Thus, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 3660 are not displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630, and the first displacement member 3630, the second displacement member 3640 and A configuration in which the third displacement member 3660 is displaced integrally (see FIGS. 64 and 66), and a configuration in which the first displacement member 3630 is maintained in a stopped state and the second displacement member 3640 and the second displacement member 3640 A form (see FIGS. 65 and 67) in which the third displacement members 3660 are relatively displaced individually can be formed.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 73. FIG. In the third embodiment, the case where the right rotation unit 3600 is formed so that the third displacement member 3660 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 has been described. A third displacement member 4660 is rotatable with respect to the first displacement member 4630 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

68 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 69 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 4600. FIG. 68 and 69 show a state in which part of the right rotation unit 4600 (back base 610 and front base 620) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment includes a third displacement member 4660 rotatably pivotally supported in front of one end side (the upper side in FIG. 68) of the first displacement member 4630. . As will be described later, the tip of the connecting pin 3641d of the second displacement member 3640 (driven member 3641) is connected to the sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660 via the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 4630. The third displacement member 4660 can be displaced (rotated) relative to the first displacement member 4630 by rotating the driven member 3641 relative to the first displacement member 4630 .

A slide groove 4661 is recessed in the rear surface of the third displacement member 4660, and a rotary shaft 4662 is projected above the slide groove 4661. As shown in FIG. As described above, the sliding groove 4661 is a concave groove through which the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 is slidably inserted. The dimension is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 3641 d of the driven member 3641 .

The rotating shaft 4662 is a shaft-like body that is inserted through a shaft support hole 4637 drilled at one end (upper side in FIG. 68) of the first displacement member 4630. Through the rotating shaft 4662 and the shaft support hole 4637, A third displacement member 4660 is rotatably journalled to the first displacement member 4630 . A retainer C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 4637 is fastened and fixed to the axial end face of the rotation shaft 4662 , thereby restricting the rotation shaft 4662 from slipping out of the shaft support hole 4637 .

When the third displacement member 4660 is arranged (pivotally supported) on the front side of the first displacement member 4630, only a part of the sliding groove 4661 overlaps the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 4630 (sliding). The moving groove 4661 and the through groove 3636 intersect). Therefore, by rotating the driven member 3641 around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 4630 and displacing the connecting pin 3641d along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, the connecting pin 3641d is moved to the third displacement member. The third displacement member 4660 can be rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630 by acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 of the 4660 (the connecting pin 3641d presses the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661).

Next, the operation of right rotation unit 4600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 73. FIG. 70 and 71 are front views of the right rotation unit 4600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. Fig. 10 is a schematic back view of the right rotation unit 4600 in each state when rotating.

FIGS. 70(a) to 70(c) correspond to FIGS. 72(a) to 72(c), and FIGS. 71(a) to 71(c) correspond to FIGS. 73(a) to 73(c). c) and the same state respectively. In this case, FIG. 70(c) is the same as FIG. 71(a), and FIG. 72(c) is the same as FIG. 73(a).

Here, in the fourth embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 4630, thereby causing the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are respectively displaced, and the manner of displacement of the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 3640 is the same as in the case of the above-described first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 70(a) and 72(a), in the retracted position, an imaginary line L1 passing through the axial center of the shaft support hole 4637 (rotating shaft 4662) and along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 4630 , and an imaginary line L2 passing through the axial center of the shaft support hole 4637 (rotating shaft 4662) and extending along the longitudinal direction of the third displacement member 4660 is defined as an intersection angle θ1.

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 72(a)), the states shown in FIGS. As shown in 72(c), the first displacement member 4630 is rotated in the projecting direction with the rotating shaft 631 as the rotating shaft. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630 and is displaced together with the first displacement member 4630 .

Therefore, the second displacement member 3640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the third displacement member 4660, and the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 in the second displacement member 3640 , the third displacement member 4660 is also displaced integrally with the first displacement member 4630 . That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 70(a) to 70(c) and FIGS. 72(a) to 72(c), the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) is maintained at the intersection angle θ1.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 73(a)) from the state shown in FIGS. While the state (position) shown in FIG. After passing through, it is arranged in the extended position shown in FIGS. 71(c) and 73(c).

In this case, when the driven member 3641 is rotated about the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 3641 is caused by the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 4660 (the direction of movement of the connecting pin 3641d). The inner wall surface (upper side in FIG. 73(a)) is the direction in which the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 pushes up.

As a result, the third displacement member 4660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, and in the sections shown in FIGS. 71(a) to 71(c) and FIGS. , the angle formed by the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) changes (decreases) from the crossing angle θ1 to the crossing angle θ3 via the crossing angle θ2 (θ3< θ2<θ1).

Contrary to the case described above, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 73(c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 71(c) and 73(c), the first displacement While the member 4630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. After going through the states shown in b) and FIG. 73(b), it is placed in the states shown in FIGS. 71(a) and 73(a).

In this case, the rotation of the driven member 3641 around the support shaft 632 is applied to the inner wall surface of the slide groove 4661 in the third displacement member 4660 (the inner wall surface on the advancing direction side of the connecting pin 3641d, the lower side in FIG. 73(c)). ) is the direction in which the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 pushes down. Therefore, the third displacement member 4660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, and the angle formed by the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) becomes an intersection. is increased to the angle θ1.

70(c) and 72(c), when the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 72(c)), the first displacement member 4630 moves the rotating shaft 631. 70(a) and 72(a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630, so that the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 is aligned with the sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660. Therefore, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 4630 .

Thus, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are not displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630, and the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 3640 and A configuration in which the third displacement member 4660 is displaced integrally (see FIGS. 70 and 71), and a configuration in which the first displacement member 4630 is maintained in a stopped state and the second displacement member 3640 and the second displacement member 3640 A form (see FIGS. 71 and 73) in which the third displacement members 4660 are relatively displaced individually can be formed.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 81. FIG. In the third embodiment, the case where the right rotation unit 3600 is formed so that the third displacement member 3660 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 has been described. A third displacement member 5660 can be retracted in the front-rear direction with respect to the first displacement member 5630 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

74 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 75 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 5600. FIG. 74 and 75 show a state in which part of the right rotation unit 5600 (back base 610 and front base 620) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, in the right rotation unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment, a third displacement member 5660 extends forward and backward (for example, FIG. 76 ( a) It is arranged so that it can appear and disappear in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface). As will be described later, the tip of the connecting pin 5641d of the second displacement member 5640 (the driven member 5641) is connected to the sliding inclined portion of the third displacement member 5660 through the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 5630. 5663, and when the driven member 5641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 5630, the third displacement member 5660 is displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630 (in the front-rear direction). haunting) can be made.

A pair of sliding holes 5638 are formed in the first displacement member 5630 . The sliding hole 5638 is a hole having a circular cross-section through which a sliding guide rod 5664 described later of the third displacement member 5660 is inserted. be. That is, the sliding guide rod 5664 is slidably supported along the drilling direction of the sliding hole 5638, thereby supporting the third displacement member 5660 so as to protrude and retract in the front-rear direction with respect to the first displacement member 5630. be done.

The connecting pin 5641 d is a shaft-like body having a circular cross-section that is inserted into the through groove 3636 , and is set to a protrusion height such that the tip thereof is positioned within the through groove 3636 . That is, in the assembled state, the distal end of the connecting pin 5641 d contacts the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 in the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 5630 .

A sliding inclined portion 5663 and a sliding guide rod 5664 are projected from the rear surface of the third displacement member 5660 . As described above, the sliding inclined portion 5663 is a plate-like portion on which the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641 slides. It is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined upward toward the other end (left side in FIG. 75). That is, the projecting height of the sliding inclined portion 5663 from the third displacement member 5660 is gradually increased from one end to the other end. Therefore, when the connecting pin 5641d slides on the rear surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 from one end to the other end (or in the opposite direction) as the driven member 5641 rotates, the driven member The distance between 5641 and the third displacement member 5660 is enlarged (reduced).

Here, the plate thickness of the sliding inclined portion 5663 is set to be slightly smaller than the groove width of the through groove 3636 , and the rear view shape thereof is formed in a curved shape corresponding to the through groove 3636 . That is, in the assembled state, the protruding distal end side of the sliding inclined portion 5663 is inserted into the through groove 3636 in a state of being slidable in the front-rear direction. Therefore, when the third displacement member 5660 moves back and forth with respect to the first displacement member 5630, not only the sliding guide rod 5664 but also the sliding inclined portion 5663 causes the third displacement member 5660 to slide. Since the movement can be supported (that is, supported at three locations), the forward tilting of the third displacement member 5660 can be suppressed, and the retracting operation can be stabilized.

As described above, the sliding guide rod 5664 is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section slidably supported in the sliding hole 5638 of the first displacement member 5630. A retainer C having a larger diameter than the inner diameter of is fastened and fixed, thereby restricting the slide guide rod 5664 from coming out of the slide hole 5638 .

In this case, a biasing member S formed as a coil spring is interposed between the holding body C and the first displacement member 5630 in an elastically compressed state (a state in which the entire length is shortened). The elastic recovery force of the force member S acts in the direction of separating the holding body C from the back surface of the first displacement member 5630 . As a result, the third displacement member 5660 is biased toward the first displacement member 5630 , and the sliding inclined portion 5663 is inserted through the through groove 3636 .

Therefore, by rotating the driven member 5641 around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 5630 and displacing the connecting pin 5641d along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, the tip of the connecting pin 5641d is moved to the second position. The third displacement member 5660 is moved back and forth with respect to the first displacement member 5630 by acting on the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 (the connecting pin 5641d is slid along the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663). You can spawn in any direction.

Next, the operation of right rotation unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80. FIG. 76 and 77 are front views of the right rotation unit 5600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 56 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit 5600 in each state when rotating. FIG. 80 and 81 are top views of right rotation unit 5600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

FIGS. 76(a) to 76(c) correspond to FIGS. 78(a) to 78(c), FIGS. 80(a) to 80(c), and FIGS. 77(a) to 77(c). ) are the same states as FIGS. 79(a) to 79(c) and FIGS. 81(a) to 81(c), respectively. In this case, FIG. 76(c) is the same as FIG. 77(a), FIG. 78(c) is the same as FIG. 79(a), and FIG. 80(c) is the same as FIG. 81(a). be.

Here, in the fifth embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 5630, thereby causing the first displacement member 5630, the second displacement member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are respectively displaced, and the manner of displacement of the first displacement member 5630 and the second displacement member 5640 is the same as in the case of the above-described first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 76(a), 78(a), and 80(a), at the retracted position, the third displacement member 5660 is brought close to the first displacement member 5630, and the second displacement member 5640 78 (a ) and the right side of FIG. 80(a)). In this case, the amount of protrusion from the front surface of the first displacement member 5630 to the front surface of the third displacement member 5660 is the dimension J1.

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 78(a)), the states shown in FIGS. As shown in 76(c), FIG. 78(c) and FIG. 80(c), the first displacement member 5630 is rotated in the overhanging direction with the rotating shaft 631 as the rotating shaft. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 5640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 5630 and is displaced together with the first displacement member 5630 .

Therefore, the second displacement member 5640 does not displace relative to the third displacement member 5660 either. Therefore, since the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641 in the second displacement member 5640 does not slide on the rear surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660, the third displacement member 5660 is also integrated with the first displacement member 5630. is displaced. 76(a) to 76(c), 78(a) to 78(c), and 80(a) to 80(c), the third displacement member 5660 It is maintained in the state closest to the 1-displacement member 5630 (state in which the amount of protrusion is the dimension J1).

77(a), 79(a), and 81(a), when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 67(a)), the first displacement member 5630 is While maintaining the state (position) shown in FIG. After going through the states shown in b) and FIG. 81(b), it is placed in the extended position shown in FIGS. 77(c), 79(c) and 81(c).

In this case, when the driven member 5641 is rotated around the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 5641 causes the tip of the connecting pin 5641d to move to the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660. The direction of sliding toward the end side (the end of the side where the projection height from the back surface of the third displacement member 5660 is high, the upper left side in FIG. 79(a), the left side in FIG. 81(a)) ( ) counterclockwise) rotation.

Therefore, the rear surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 is pushed forward (to the upper side in FIG. 81(a)) by the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641 . As a result, the third displacement member 5660 protrudes forward with respect to the first displacement member 5630, and as shown in FIGS. 77(a) to 77(c), FIGS. ) to FIG. 81(c), the amount of protrusion from the front surface of the first displacement member 5630 to the front surface of the third displacement member 5660 changes (increases) from the dimension J1 to the dimension J3 via the dimension J2 (J1 <J2<J3).

Contrary to the above case, the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 79(c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 77(c), 79(c) and 81(c). Then, while the first displacement member 5630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. After being displaced and passing through the states shown in FIGS. be.

In this case, the rotation of the driven member 5641 around the support shaft 632 causes the connecting pin 5641d to move toward one end of the rear surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 (projection from the rear surface of the third displacement member 5660). The rotation is in the direction (clockwise in FIG. 79(c)) of sliding to the lower end in FIG. 79(c), the right side in FIG. 81(c).

Therefore, by moving the connecting pin 5641d to one end side of the rear surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 in the third displacement member 5660, the sliding inclined portion 5663 retreats (retracts) rearward (back side) accordingly. is allowed, the elastic recovery force of the biasing member S causes the third displacement member 5660 to approach the first displacement member 5630, and the distance from the front surface of the first displacement member 5630 to the front surface of the third displacement member 5660 is The amount of protrusion is shortened to dimension J1.

From the states shown in FIGS. 76(c), 78(c) and 80(c), when the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 78(c)), the first displacement member 5630 is rotated in the erecting direction about the rotating shaft 631, and placed in the retracted position shown in FIGS. 76(a), 78(a) and 80(a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 5640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 5630, so that the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641 is positioned at the sliding inclined portion of the third displacement member 5660. Since the back surface of 5663 is not slid, the second displacement member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 5630 .

Thus, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are not displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630, and the first displacement member 5630, the second displacement member 5640 and A mode in which the third displacement member 5660 is displaced integrally (see FIGS. 76, 78, and 81), and a second displacement with respect to the first displacement member 5630 while maintaining the first displacement member 5630 in a stopped state. A form (see FIGS. 77, 79 and 81) in which the member 5640 and the third displaceable member 5660 are separately displaced relative to each other can be formed. In particular, according to the fifth embodiment, since the displacement direction of the third displacement member 5660 is the front-rear direction, it is possible to avoid interference with the displacement of other adjacent units, and the movable range of such other units can be reduced. can be secured. In addition, the forward projection of the third displacement member 5660 allows the third displacement member 5660 to be brought closer to the player, and a powerful performance can be performed.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 88. FIG. In the third embodiment, the case where the right rotation unit 3600 is formed so that the period during which the second displacement member 3640 is displaced and the period during which the third displacement member 3660 is displaced has been described. In the right rotation unit 6600, the period during which the second displacement member 6640 is displaced differs from the period during which the third displacement member 4660 is displaced. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

82 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 83 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 6600. FIG. 82 and 83 show a state in which part of the right rotation unit 6600 (back base 610 and front base 620) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, a right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment has a third displacement member in front of one end side (upper side in FIG. 82) of a first displacement member 4630, as in the case of the fourth embodiment. 4660 is rotatably pivoted, and the driven member 6641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, so that the second displacement member 6640 (connection displacement member 642) and the third displacement member 4660 are moved to the first displacement position. Relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to member 4630 .

In this case, in the fourth embodiment, the connecting groove 641c of the driven member 3641 is formed linearly, whereas in the sixth embodiment, the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 is formed in an action section 6641c1 as will be described later. and the non-interfering section 6641c2 are bent in a substantially V-shape when viewed from the front.

As a result, both the second displacement member 6640 (the connection displacement member 642) and the third displacement member 4660 are rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630 while the connection pin 643 passes through the action section 6641c1. Only the third displacement member 4660 can be rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630 while the second displacement member 6640 is stopped while the 643 passes through the non-interference section 6641c2.

The connecting groove 6641c is a groove-shaped opening through which the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is slidably inserted. Extending along the width direction of the driven member 6641 while curving in an arc shape concave on the shaft support hole 641a (supporting shaft 632) side (that is, a shape obtained by dividing an annular shape concentric with the rotating shaft 631) ) and a non-interference section 6641c2.

As will be described later, the action section 6641c1 is a section that acts on the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642, and the non-interfering section 6641c2 is a section that does not interfere with the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642.

Next, the operation of right rotation unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87. FIG. 84 and 85 are front views of the right rotation unit 6600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 66 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit 6600 in each state when rotating. FIG.

FIGS. 84(a) to 84(c) correspond to FIGS. 86(a) to 86(c), and FIGS. 85(a) to 85(c) correspond to FIGS. 87(a) to 87(c). c) and the same state respectively. In this case, FIG. 84(c) is the same as FIG. 85(a), and FIG. 86(c) is the same as FIG. 87(a).

Here, the right rotation unit 6600 of the sixth embodiment differs from the right rotation unit 4600 of the fourth embodiment in the shape of the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641, and other configurations are substantially Since they are formed identically, the explanation of the identical parts will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 86, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 86(a)) from the retracted position shown in FIGS. As described above, while the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the action section 635a of the first groove 635, the second displacement member 6640 (the driven member 6641) is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630. , the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 4630 .

That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 84(a) to 84(c) and FIGS. 86(a) to 86(c), the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) are maintained at the intersection angle θ1.

85(a) and 87(a), the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is positioned at the starting end of the working section 6641c1 in the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 (the working section 6641c and non-interfering section 6641c2). It is located at the end opposite to the connection part, Fig. 87(a) right side). In this case, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is positioned at the connecting portion between the action section 635a and the non-interference section 635b of the first groove 635. As shown in FIG.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 87(a)) from the state shown in FIGS. While being maintained in the state (position) shown, the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b is pushed downward (downward in FIG. It is rotated around the center in a direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 87(b)) to raise the connecting groove 6641c.

Due to this rotation of the driven member 6641, the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is pushed upward by the inner wall surface of the working section 6641c1 in the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 while sliding on the working section 6641c1. As a result, the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated around the support shaft 633 in a direction (clockwise in FIG. 87(a)) to lift the decorative portion 642b. As a result, the connecting pin 643 reaches the connecting portion of the working section 6641c1 and the non-interfering section 6641c2 of the connecting groove 6641c, and the state shown in FIGS. state) is formed.

In this case, the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is arranged on the same side (the left side in FIG. 87(b)) as the decorative portion 642b (that is, the center of gravity of the connecting displacement member 642) with respect to the shaft support hole 642a, The connection groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 is formed so that the inner wall surface of the non-interference section 6641c2 can support the connection pin 643 from below. That is, the non-interfering section 6641c2 is formed such that its inner wall surface intersects at a predetermined angle with the movement direction of the connecting pin 643 when the connecting displacement member 642 rotates around the shaft support hole 642a by its own weight. be done.

Therefore, in the state shown in FIGS. 85(b) and 87(b), the inner wall surface of the non-interference section 6641c2 supports the connecting pin 643 from below (restricts movement of the connecting pin 643), thereby displacing the connecting displacement member. 642 can be restricted from rotating around the shaft support hole 642a by its own weight. That is, the connecting displacement member 642 can be maintained in a stopped state with respect to the first displacement member 4630 .

85(b) and 87(b), the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660 is pushed up by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 6641, as described above. As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) changes to the intersection angle θ2 ( decremented) (θ2<θ1).

85(b) and 87(b), when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 87(b)), the inside of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 4660 The wall surface is pushed up by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 6641, and as shown in FIGS. L2) is changed (decreased) to the intersection angle θ3 (θ3<θ2<θ1).

In this case, the non-interfering section 6641c2 of the connecting groove 6641c is curved in an arc around the support shaft 632 (shaft support hole 641a). 87(b) about the center, the inner wall surface of the non-interfering section 6641c2 supports the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 from below, and the connecting displacement member 642 engages the shaft support hole 642a. Rotation by its own weight as the center is restricted, but the connecting pin 643 is not pushed upward, so that the connecting displacement member 642 is not rotated about the support shaft 633 in the direction of lifting the decorative portion 642b. That is, the connecting displacement member 642 can be maintained in a substantially stopped state, and the rotation of the third displacement member 4660 can be continued.

Contrary to the above case, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 87(c)) from the state shown in FIGS. While the connecting pin 643 of 642 passes through the non-interference section 6641c2, the connecting displacement member 642 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIGS. and FIG. 87(b)), while the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 passes through the working section 6641c1, the connecting pin 643 is pushed down by the inner wall surface of the working section 6641c1, thereby lowering the decorative portion 642b. The connecting displacement member 642 is rotated around the support shaft 633 in the direction.

The operation mode of the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment thus formed will be described in comparison with the operation mode of the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment with reference to FIG.

FIGS. 88(a) to 88(c) are schematic front views of a right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, and FIGS. 88(d) to 88(g) are right rotation units in the sixth embodiment. 6600 is a schematic front view of 6600, illustrating states when operating between retracted and extended positions, respectively; FIG.

In the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are not displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630, and the first displacement member 4630 and the third displacement member 4660 are not displaced. A configuration in which the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are displaced together (a configuration between FIGS. 88(a) and 88(b)), and a configuration in which the first displacement member 4630 is maintained in a stopped state, A configuration in which the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630 (a configuration between FIGS. 88(b) and 88(c)) can be formed. can. In this case, in the latter form, the period of displacement of the second displacement member 3640 (start and end) substantially coincides with the period of displacement of the third displacement member 4660 (start and end).

On the other hand, in the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment, the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 are integrally displaced (FIGS. 88(d) and 88(e) ) and a mode in which the first displacement member 4630 is maintained in a stopped state and the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 are relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630 (FIG. 88 88(f)) and the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 6640 while maintaining the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 6640 in a stopped state. 88(f) and 88(g)) in which the third displacement member 4660 is relatively displaced.

That is, in the sixth embodiment, the period of displacement of the second displacement member 6640 (start and end) can be different from the period of displacement of the third displacement member 4660 (start and end). More specifically, the displacement of the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 is started at the same time, and the timing of stopping the displacement of the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 is staggered (the second displacement member 6640 can be stopped first, and then the displacement of the third displacement member 4660 can be stopped).

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 94. FIG. In the third embodiment, the case where the connecting displacement member 642 and the third displacement member 3660 are displaceably disposed on the first displacement member 3630 to form the right rotation unit 3600 has been described. In the right rotation unit 7600, the third displacement member 7660 is displaceably arranged on the first displacement member 7630, and the connecting displacement member 642 is arranged on the third displacement member 7660 so as to be displaceable. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

89 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 90 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 7600. FIG. 89 and 90 show a state in which part of the right rotation unit 7600 (back base 610 and front base 620) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, in a right rotation unit 7600 according to the seventh embodiment, a third displacement member 7660 is rotatably supported in front of one end of a first displacement member 7630 (upper side in FIG. 89). , the third displacement member 7660 of which the coupling displacement member 642 is rotatably supported. As will be described later, when the driven member 7641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 7630 and the third displacement member 7660 is rotated with respect to the first displacement member 7630, the rotation of the third displacement member 7660 Along with this, the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated while changing the position of its center of rotation along a curved trajectory.

The first displacement member 7630 has a cutout portion 7639 formed at the edge of one end side (upper side in FIG. 90), and the space created by the cutout portion 7639 serves as a support shaft 7665 for the third displacement member 7660, which will be described later. It is considered to be the installation space for A connecting groove 7641 c is formed in the driven member 7641 of the second displacement member 7640 . The connecting groove 7641c is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 7641, and the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is slidably inserted.

The groove width of the connecting groove 7641 c is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 643 . Also, the total length (groove length) of the connecting groove 7641c is made longer than the connecting groove 641c in the fourth embodiment. Thereby, the relative displacement amount (relative rotation angle) of the connecting displacement member 642 with respect to the driven member 7641 can be ensured.

A support shaft 7665 protrudes from the rear surface of the third displacement member 7660 . The support shaft 7665 is a shaft-like member having a circular cross section that is inserted through the shaft support hole 642a of the connection displacement member 642. rotatably pivoted on the back of the

A retainer C having a larger diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 642a is fastened and fixed to the axial end surface of the support shaft 7665, thereby restricting the indicator shaft 7665 from coming out of the support hole 642a. The support shaft 7665 has a large diameter portion on the base side and a small diameter portion smaller than the large diameter portion on the tip side, and the small diameter portion is inserted through the shaft support hole 642a. That is, the large-diameter portion is a portion for raising the connecting displacement member 642 from the back surface of the third displacement member 7660. By raising the large-diameter portion, the connecting displacement member 642 moves forward and backward relative to the driven member 7641 (for example, , and the vertical direction of the paper surface of FIG. 91A) are set to be the same as in the case of the fourth embodiment.

Next, the operation of right rotation unit 7600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. FIG. 91 and 92 are front views of the right rotation unit 7600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 76A and 76B are schematic rear views of the right rotation unit 7600 in each state when rotating.

FIGS. 91(a) to 91(c) correspond to FIGS. 93(a) to 93(c), and FIGS. 92(a) to 92(c) correspond to FIGS. 94(a) to 94(c). c) and the same state respectively. In this case, FIG. 91(c) is the same as FIG. 92(a), and FIG. 93(c) is the same as FIG. 94(a).

Here, in the seventh embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 7630, thereby causing the first displacement member 7630, the second displacement member 7640 and the third displacement member 7660 are respectively displaced, and the manner of displacement of the first displacement member 7630 and the third displacement member 7660 is the same as in the case of the fourth embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 93, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 93(a)) from the retracted position shown in FIGS. As described above, while the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the action section 635a of the first groove 635, the second displacement member 7640 (the driven member 7641) is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 7630. , the second displacement member 7640 and the third displacement member 7660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 7630 .

That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 91(a) to 91(c) and FIGS. 93(a) to 93(c), the first displacement member 7630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 7660 (imaginary line L2) are maintained at the intersection angle θ1.

92(a) and 94(a), when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 94(a)), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is pushed into the first groove 635. By passing through the non-interference section 635b, the first displacement member 7630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 94(a) in the direction of lifting the connecting groove 7641c and the connecting pin 3641d.

As a result, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 7660 is moved by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 7641, and the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is moved by the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 7641c of the driven member 7641. , are pushed upward (upper side in FIG. 94(a)).

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 94, the third displacement member 7660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 7630, the first displacement member 7630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 7660 (virtual line L1). line L2) changes (decreases) from the intersection angle θ1 to the intersection angle θ3 via the intersection angle θ2 (θ3<θ2<θ1), and the connecting displacement member 642 moves toward the support shaft 7665 (shaft support hole 642a ) as the center of rotation in the clockwise direction in FIG.

In this case, the third displacement member 7660 is rotated about the rotation shaft 4662 in the direction of lifting the support shaft 7665 upward. The connecting displacement member 642 itself pivotally supported by the support shaft 7665 can be lifted upward.

That is, according to the seventh embodiment, the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated with respect to the third displacement member 7660 around the support shaft 7665, and is rotated with respect to the first displacement member 7630 in an arc-shaped trajectory. It can be displaced (lifted) upwards. As a result, the displacement of the connecting displacement member 642 (decorative portion 642b) can be interlocked with the displacement of the third displacement member 7660, making it possible to create a more complicated mode, and the amount of upward protrusion of the decorative portion 642b (the first Crossing angle θ4), which is an angle formed by an imaginary line L3 passing through the axial center of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 7665) and along the longitudinal direction of the connecting displacement member 64 with respect to the displacement member 4630 (imaginary line L1). can be expanded to assume a posture that protrudes further upward.

<Eighth Embodiment>
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 105. FIG. In the first embodiment, the mode of relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is the same in the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. Although the case where the left rotation unit 700 is formed so as to different in In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

95 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit 8700 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 96 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 8700. FIG. 97 is a front view of the guide portion 8773. FIG. 95 and 96 show a state in which part of the left rotation unit 8700 (back base 710 and front base 720) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, a counterclockwise rotation unit 8700 according to the eighth embodiment has a guide portion 8773 recessed in front of one longitudinal end side (upper side in FIG. 95) of a second connecting member 8770 . As will be described later, the guide portion 8773 is formed as a circular path, and the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is guided along the guide portion 8773, thereby making the second displacement member 740 relative to the first displacement member 730. The form of displacement can be different in the outward and return paths.

The connecting pin 8744a is a shaft-like body with a circular cross section that protrudes from the back surface of the flange member 8744 and is arranged eccentrically from the axis of the rotating shaft 741. Its diameter is slightly larger than the groove width of the guide portion 8773. By setting the small size, it is possible to move along the guide portion 8773 . An elastic body (not shown) made of a coil spring is accommodated in the second connecting member 8770 in an elastically compressed state, and the elastic recovery force of the elastic body causes the connecting pin 8744a to move the second connecting member 8770. It is acted in the direction to protrude from the back of the Therefore, when the connecting pin 8744 a moves along the guide portion 8773 , the tip of the connecting pin 8744 a is maintained in contact with the bottom surface of the guide portion 8773 .

The guide portion 8773 is a recessed groove having a substantially U-shaped cross section for guiding the connecting pin 8744a. is formed with directionality (see FIG. 97).

More specifically, the guide portion 8773 extends substantially linearly in a front view along the width direction of the second connecting member 8770 (a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction, the left-right direction in FIG. 97) starting from the position P1. 1 groove 8773a and a first groove 8773a connected to the terminal end of the first groove 8773a and extending substantially linearly along the longitudinal direction of the second connecting member 8770 (vertical direction in FIG. 97) starting from position P2. A second groove 8773b is connected to the terminal end of the second groove 8773b, and is curved and extended in an arc shape (in this embodiment, a convex arc shape in the direction away from the position P2) with the position P3 as the starting end. and a third groove 8773c whose terminal end is connected to the starting end of the first groove 8773a.

A first step 8773h is formed at the connecting portion between the first groove 8773a and the second groove 8773b. The first step 8773h has a bottom surface on the starting end side (position P2) of the second groove 8773b that is lower than the bottom surface on the terminal end side of the first groove 8773a (located on the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 97). It is the vertical plane that connects them. As a result, movement of the connecting pin 8744a from the end of the first groove 8773a to the starting end of the second groove 8773b is permitted, while movement of the connecting pin 8744a from the starting end of the second groove 8773b to the end of the first groove 8773a is prohibited. It can be regulated by one step 8773h.

Similarly, a second step 8773i and a third step 8773j are formed at the connecting portion between the second groove 8773b and the third groove 8773c and the connecting portion between the third groove 8773c and the first groove 8773a. The bottom surface of the second step 8773i on the starting end side (position P3) of the third groove 8773c is lower than the bottom surface on the terminal end side of the second groove 8773b. The bottom surface of (position P1) is formed by making it lower than the bottom surface of the third groove 8773c on the terminal side.

This allows the connecting pin 8744a to move from the terminal end of the second groove 8773b (third groove 8773c) to the starting end of the third groove 8773c (first groove 8773a), while allowing the third groove 8773c (first groove 8773a) to move. The movement of the connecting pin 8744a from the starting end of the second groove 8773b (third groove 8773c) to the terminal end of the second groove 8773b (third groove 8773c) can be restricted by the second step 8773i (third step 8773j).

In other words, the connecting pin 8744a is only allowed to rotate the guide portion 8773 along the directions of the arrows L1, L2 and L3 in the first groove 8773a, the second groove 8773b and the third groove 8773c in order. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 98 to 105, the operation of left rotation unit 8700 will be described.

Here, in the eighth embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides in the drive groove 762 of the first connection member 760 (presses the inner wall surface), so that the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 8770, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are respectively displaced, and the manner of displacement between the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 8770 and the first displacement member 730 is similar to that of the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as the case of the form, its detailed description is omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101, the operation of the counterclockwise rotation unit 8700 when moving forward from the retracted position to the extended position will be described.

Figures 98 and 99 are front views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 8700 in each state during forward movement from the retracted position to the extended position. 87A and 87B are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 8700 in each state when the forward movement is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 98( a ) and 100 ( a ), at the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in an upright state and arranged in front of the front base 720 .

In this case, an imaginary line M1 passing through the axial center of the shaft support hole 732 (rotating shaft 741) and along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730 and the axial center of the shaft supporting hole 732 (rotating shaft 741) The angle formed by the imaginary line M2 along the longitudinal direction of the second displacement member 740 is defined as the intersection angle α1. In addition, the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is positioned at the position P1 of the guide portion 8773 (the starting end of the first groove 8773a) (see FIG. 97), and the second connecting member 8770 ).

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 100(a)), the first connecting member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the direction of extension (counterclockwise in FIG. 100(a)). 100(a)), the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotation shaft 731 in the projecting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 100(a)). As a result, the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the projecting direction as shown in FIGS. 98(b) and 100(b).

Further, when the first connection member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction, the second connection member 8770 is pulled downward (lower side in FIG. 101(a)), and the guide portion 8773 (first The inner wall surface of the groove 8773a) pushes down the connecting pin 8744a in the flange member 8744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 8744a arranged at the position P1 moves the guide portion 8773 along the first groove 8773a. is guided in the direction of arrow L1 (see FIG. 97).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 98(b) and 100(b), the second displacement member 740 rotates about the rotation shaft 741 relative to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (clockwise in FIG. 100(a)). rotation), and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle α1 to the intersection angle α2. (α1<α2).

When the transmission member 754 is further rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 100(b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 98(b) and 100(b), the first connecting member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the extending direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 100(b)), so that the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotating shaft 731 in the extending direction (see FIG. 100(b)). ) counterclockwise) and is further tilted in the extension direction as shown in FIGS. 99(a) and 101(a).

Further, when the first connection member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction, the second connection member 8770 is further drawn downward (lower right in FIG. 101(b)), and the guide portion 8773 ( The inner wall surface of the first groove 8773a) pushes down the connecting pin 8744a in the flange member 8744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 8744a moves the guide portion 8773 along the first groove 8773a in the direction of the arrow L1. Further guidance is provided (see Figure 97).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 99(a) and 101(a), the second displacement member 740 rotates about the rotation shaft 741 with respect to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (clockwise in FIG. 100(b)). ), and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle α2 to the intersection angle α3. ) (α1<α2<α3).

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is tilted to the maximum and the first displacement A state is formed in which the second displacement member 740 is displaced (relatively rotated) to the maximum with respect to the member 730 . That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the extended position.

In this case, the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the first groove 8773a along the guide portion 8773 in the direction of the arrow L1, and after passing (jumping down) the first step 8773h, hits the inner wall surface of the second groove 8773b. , at position P2 (see FIG. 97). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle α3 to the intersection angle α4 (α1<α2<α3 <α4).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 102 to 105, the operation of the counterclockwise rotation unit 8700 during the return movement from the extended position to the retracted position will be described.

Figures 102 and 103 are front views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 8700 in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position to the retracted position, and Figures 104 and 105 are views from the extended position to the retracted position. 87A and 87B are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 8700 in each state when operating on the return path. FIG. 98(a) is the same as FIG. 103(b), and FIG. 99(b) is the same as FIG. 102(a).

Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 102(b) and 104(b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 99(a) and 101(a). The rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 103(a) and 105(a) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 98(b) and 100(b). .

102(a) and 104(a), in the extended position, the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is positioned at the position P2 of the guide portion 8773 (the starting end of the second groove 8773b) ( 97), the second connecting member 8770 is pulled to the bottom (lower right side in FIG. 104(a)).

102(a) and 104(a), the transmission member 754 moves in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 104(a)). ), the first connecting member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. It is rotated in the retraction direction (clockwise in FIG. 104(a)) as the center of rotation. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is rotated (raised) in the retraction direction, as shown in FIGS. 102(b) and 104(b).

Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 8770 is pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 104(a)), and the connecting pin 8744a arranged at the position P2 is moved to the guide portion. 8773 is guided along the second groove 8773b in the direction of arrow L2 (see FIG. 97). In this case, as described above, the second groove 8773b extends along the longitudinal direction of the second connecting member 8770, and relative displacement of the second connecting member 8770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 A linear motion (slide displacement) in a direction along the direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 102(b) and 104(b), in the section where the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the second groove 8773b (see FIG. 97), the second displacement member relative to the first displacement member 730 No relative displacement (relative rotation) of 740 about rotation axis 741 is formed. As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4.

When the transmission member 754 is further rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 104(b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 102(b) and 104(b), the connection first When the member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 104(b)), the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotating shaft 731 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 104(b)). 103(a) and 105(a), and is further rotated (upright) in the retraction direction.

Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 8770 is further pushed upward (upper left in FIG. 104(b)), so that the connecting pin 8744a moves the guide portion 8773 to the second position. It is further guided along the groove 8773b in the direction of arrow L2, passes through (jumps down) the second step 8773i, and hits the inner wall surface of the third groove 8773c to be positioned at position P3 (see FIG. 97).

As described above, in the section where the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the second groove 8773b, relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 about the rotation axis 741 is not formed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 103(a) and 105(a), the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4. be done.

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, as shown in FIGS. A state is created in which the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the member 730 is minimized. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position.

In this case, the second connecting member 8770 is pushed up to the uppermost position, so that the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the third groove 8773c in the direction of the arrow L3 through the guide portion 8773 and passes through the third step 8773j ( After jumping down), it collides with the inner wall surface of the first groove 8773a to be positioned (returned) to the position P1 (see FIG. 97). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) returns (decreases) from the intersection angle α4 to the intersection angle α1.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the first displacement member 730 is displaced (rotated) with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720 in the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. ) can be the same, but the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be different.

Specifically, in the outward path, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is defined as the displacement of the first displacement member 730 with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720. While gradually increasing in proportion to the amount (amount of rotation), on the return path, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4. It is possible to form a mode in which the crossing angle α4 is reduced to the crossing angle α1 in a short period of time immediately before being arranged at the retracted position.

Further, since the connecting pin 8744a is guided along each of the grooves 8773a to 8773c of the guide portion 8773, even when the transmission member 754 (first displacement member 730) is rotationally driven (displaced) at a relatively high speed, Rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed.

<Ninth Embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 115. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the guide portion 8773 is formed as a circular path in which grooves having a U-shaped cross section are endlessly connected has been described. It is formed as an opening that is loosely fitted. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

106 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit 9700 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 107 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 9700. FIG. 106 and 107 show a state in which a part of the left rotation unit 9700 (back base 710 and front base 720) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, a counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 according to the ninth embodiment has a guide portion 9773 formed at one longitudinal end of a second connecting member 9770 (upper side in FIG. 106). As will be described later, by displacing the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 in the guide portion 9773, the form of relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is different between the outward path and the return path. can do.

The guide portion 9773 is connected to a first inner wall 9773a that extends substantially linearly in a front view along the width direction (a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction) of the second connecting member 9770, and the terminal end of the first inner wall 9773a. and a second inner wall 9773b extending substantially linearly in a front view along the longitudinal direction of the second connecting member 9770 (vertical direction in FIG. 106); (In this embodiment, the third inner wall 9773a and the second inner wall 9773b are curved and extend in a convex shape in a direction away from the connecting portion of the second inner wall 9773b), and the end thereof is connected to the starting end of the first inner wall 9773a. The inner wall 9773c is formed as an opening that serves as the inner wall surface.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 108 to 115, the operation of left rotation unit 9700 will be described.

Here, in the ninth embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides in the drive groove 762 of the first connection member 760 (presses the inner wall surface), so that the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 9770, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are respectively displaced, and the manner of displacement between the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 9770 and the first displacement member 730 is similar to that of the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as the case of the form, its detailed description is omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 108 to 111, the operation of the counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 when moving forward from the retracted position to the extended position will be described.

108 and 109 are front views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 in each state when operating in the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIGS. 97A and 97B are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 in each state when the forward movement is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 108( a ) and 110 ( a ), at the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in an upright state and arranged in front of the front base 720 .

In this case, an imaginary line M1 passing through the axial center of the shaft support hole 732 (rotating shaft 741) and along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730 and the axial center of the shaft supporting hole 732 (rotating shaft 741) The angle formed by the imaginary line M2 along the longitudinal direction of the second displacement member 740 is defined as the intersection angle β1. In addition, the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 is positioned at the connecting portion (starting end of the first inner wall 9773a) of the first inner wall 9773a and the third inner wall 9773c of the guide portion 9773, and the second connecting member 9770 is located at the uppermost position (Fig. 110(a) upward).

Further, the center of gravity G, which is the center of mass of the second displacement member 740 (the point of action of the resultant force of gravity acting on the second displacement member 740), is the center of rotation of the rotation shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732) when viewed in the axial direction (that is, in the figure). 110(a)), the side opposite to the connecting pin 744a (the left side in FIG. 110(a)) across a vertical line Z that passes through the axis of the rotating shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732) and is parallel to the direction of gravity. ).

Therefore, the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight about the rotating shaft 741 in a direction to lift the connecting pin 744a upward (counterclockwise in FIG. 110(a)). As the second displacement member 740 rotates due to its own weight, the connecting pin 744 a contacts (is pressed against) the first inner wall 9773 a of the guide portion 9773 .

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 110(a)), the first connecting member 760 extends in the direction of extension (counterclockwise in FIG. 110(a)) about the rotation shaft 761. 110(a)), the first displacement member 730 is rotated about the rotation shaft 731 in the projecting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110(a)). As a result, the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the projecting direction as shown in FIGS. 108(b) and 110(b).

Further, when the first connection member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction, the second connection member 9770 is drawn downward (lower side in FIG. 110(a)), and the inner wall surface of the guide portion 9773 of the second connection member 9770 The (first inner wall 9773a) pushes down the connecting pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 744a moves the guide portion 9773 along the first inner wall 9773a toward the second inner wall 9773b. be guided in the direction.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 108(b) and 110(b), the second displacement member 740 rotates about the rotation shaft 741 relative to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (clockwise in FIG. 110(a)). rotation), and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle β1 to the intersection angle β2. (β1<β2).

When the transmission member 754 is further rotated in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 110(b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 108(b) and 110(b), the first connecting member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the extending direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110(b)), so that the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotating shaft 731 in the extending direction (see FIG. 110(b)). ) counterclockwise) and is further tilted in the extension direction as shown in FIGS. 109(a) and 111(a).

Further, when the first connection member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction, the second connection member 9770 is further drawn downward (lower right in FIG. 110(b)), and the guide portion 9773 of the second connection member 9770 The inner wall surface (first inner wall 9773a) pushes down the connecting pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 744a moves the guide portion 9773 along the first inner wall 9773a to the second inner wall 9773b. You will be guided further in the direction of

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 109(a) and 111(a), the second displacement member 740 rotates about the rotation shaft 741 relative to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (clockwise in FIG. 110(b)). ), and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle β2 to the intersection angle β3. ) (β1<β2<β3).

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, as shown in FIGS. A state is formed in which the second displacement member 740 is displaced (relatively rotated) to the maximum with respect to the member 730 . That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the extended position.

In this case, the connecting pin 744a is guided along the first inner wall 9773a in the guide portion 9773 and abuts against the inner wall surface of the second inner wall 9773b, so that the connecting portion (second inner wall) between the first inner wall 9773a and the second inner wall 9773b 9773b). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle β3 to the intersection angle β4 (β1<β2<β3 <β4).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 to 115, the operation of the counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 during the return movement from the extended position to the retracted position will be described.

Figures 112 and 113 are front views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 in each state during the return movement from the extended position to the retracted position, and Figures 114 and 115 are views from the extended position to the retracted position. 97A and 97B are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 in each state when operating on the return path. 112(a) is the same as FIG. 109(b), and FIG. 113(b) is the same as FIG. 108(a).

Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 112(b) and 114(b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 109(a) and 111(a). The rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 113(a) and 115(a) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 108(b) and 110(b). .

112(a) and 114(a), in the extended position, the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 is connected to the first inner wall 9773a and the second inner wall 9773b of the guide portion 9773. 114(a), and the second connecting member 9770 is drawn downward (lower right side in FIG. 114(a)).

Further, the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is perpendicular to the vertical line Z when viewed in the axial direction of the rotation shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732) (that is, the state shown in FIG. 114(a)). They are located on the same side (the right side in FIG. 114(a)). Therefore, the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight about the rotating shaft 741 in the direction of pushing down the connecting pin 744a (clockwise in FIG. 114(a)). As the second displacement member 740 rotates under its own weight, the connecting pin 744 a contacts (is pressed against) the second inner wall 9773 b of the guide portion 9773 .

112(a) and 114(a), the transmission member 754 moves in the opposite direction (Fig. 114 ( a) counterclockwise), the first connecting member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 114(a)), so that the first displacing member 730 It is rotated in the retraction direction (clockwise in FIG. 114(a)) with the rotating shaft 731 as the center of rotation. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is rotated (raised) in the retraction direction, as shown in FIGS. 112(b) and 114(b).

Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 9770 is pushed upward (upper left in FIG. 114(a)). As described above, the connecting pin 744a is in contact with (pressed against) the second inner wall 9773b of the guide portion 9773 as the second displacement member 740 rotates under its own weight. It is guided in the direction toward the third inner wall 9773c along the second inner wall 9773b.

In this case, the second inner wall 9773b extends along the longitudinal direction of the second connecting member 9770 as described above, and the relative displacement of the second connecting member 9770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 A linear motion (slide displacement) in a direction along the direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 112(b) and 114(b), in the section where the connecting pin 744a is guided along the second inner wall 9773b, the rotational axis 741 of the second displacement member 740 relative to the first displacement member 730 No relative displacement (relative rotation) about rotation is formed. As a result, the angle between the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle β4.

112(b) and 114(b), when the transmission member 754 is further rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 114(b)), the connection first When the member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 114(b)), the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotating shaft 731 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 114(b)). 113(a) and 115(a), and is further rotated (upright) in the retraction direction.

Further, when the first connection member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connection member 9770 is further pushed upward (upper left in FIG. It is further guided in the direction toward the third inner wall 9773c along the inner wall 9773b, and hits the inner wall surface of the third inner wall 9773c, thereby reaching the connecting portion (starting end of the third inner wall 9773c) of the second inner wall 9773b and the third inner wall 9773c. be located.

As described above, in the section where the connecting pin 744a is guided along the second inner wall 9773b, relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 about the rotation axis 741 is not formed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 113(a) and 115(a), the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle β4. be done.

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, as shown in FIGS. A state is created in which the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the member 730 is minimized. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position.

In this case, the connecting pin 744a is guided along the third inner wall 9773c in the direction toward the first inner wall 9773a by pushing up the second connecting member 9770 to the uppermost position. is positioned (returned) to the connecting portion (starting end of the first inner wall 9773a) of the first inner wall 9773a and the third inner wall 9773c. As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) returns (decreases) from the intersection angle β4 to the intersection angle β1.

115(a) to the state shown in FIG. 115(b), the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 crosses the vertical line Z. , can be rotated prior to being pushed up by the second connecting member 9770 .

Specifically, when the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is positioned on the same side of the vertical line Z as the connecting pin 744a (the right side in FIG. 115(a)), the second displacement member 740 Since the connection pin 744a is pressed against the third inner wall 9773c by rotation due to its own weight, it gradually rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 115(a), the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 crosses the vertical line Z and is positioned on the opposite side of the connecting pin 744a (left side in FIG. 115(a)). is rotated in a direction to lift the connecting pin 744a upward by its own weight. That is, it rotates prior to being pushed up by the second connecting member 9770 .

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 730 with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720 is reduced in the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. While the modes can be the same, the mode of relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 to the first displacement member 730 can be changed. The angle formed with the member 740 (virtual line M2) is displaced toward the retracted position while maintaining the crossing angle β4, and the crossing angle β4 is changed from the crossing angle β4 to the crossing angle β1 at high speed (short time) immediately before being arranged at the retracted position. A reducing aspect can be formed.

<Tenth Embodiment>
Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Here, the counterclockwise rotation unit 10700 in the tenth embodiment differs from the counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 in the ninth embodiment only in that it is provided with a retainer 10746, and the rest of the configuration is the same, so the description thereof will be omitted.

116 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit 10700 according to the tenth embodiment, illustrating a state where the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is positioned on the vertical line Z. FIG. As shown in FIG. 116, a retainer 10746 is arranged on the back surface of the second displacement member 740 in the left rotation unit 10700 in the tenth embodiment. The retainer 10746 will now be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 117(a) is a front view of the retainer 10746, FIG. 117(b) is a cross-sectional view of the retainer 10746 along line CXVIIb-CXVIIb of FIG. 117(a), and FIG. 117(a) is a cross-sectional view of the retainer 10746 along line CXVIIc-CXVIIc of FIG. 117(a). FIG.

As shown in FIG. 117, the retainer 10746 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an internal space with a circular cross section, and a predetermined heavy load is displaceably accommodated in the internal space. In this embodiment, the liquid LQ is a predetermined heavy object, and the liquid LQ fills about 1/3 of the volume of the internal space. Therefore, according to the inclination of the retainer 10746, the liquid LQ can be displaced to one end side or the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the retainer 10746 (right or left side in FIG. 117(c)) (see FIGS. 118 to 121).

Returning to FIG. 116, description will be made. The retainer 10746 has a posture (horizontal posture) in which its longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 116) is orthogonal to the vertical line Z when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732) (that is, the state in FIG. 116). It is disposed on the back surface of the second displacement member 740 at a position where the longitudinal center thereof coincides with the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 .

Therefore, when the second displacing member 740 is rotated to one side or the other side about the rotation shaft 741, the retainer 10746 in the horizontal posture is tilted so that one side or the other side in the longitudinal direction is positioned downward. , the contained heavy object (liquid LQ) is displaced to one side or the other side in the longitudinal direction (that is, the same side as the moving direction of the center of gravity G).

As a result, when the second displacement member 740 rotates around the rotation shaft 741, the second displacement member 740 and the retainer 10746 are integrally formed as compared to the case where the retainer 10746 is not provided. , the amount of change in the position of the center of mass (center of gravity G′) can be increased.

Next, the operation of left rotation unit 10700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 121. FIG. Figures 118 and 119 are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 10700 in each state during forward movement from the retracted position to the extended position, and Figures 120 and 121 from the extended position to the retracted position. 107A and 107B are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 10700 in each state when operating on the return path.

As shown in FIGS. 118 to 121, the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward or reverse direction to rotate the first displacement member 730 with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720, and the first displacement member When the second displacement member 740 is relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to 730, the retainer 10746 is tilted according to the rotational position of the second displacement member 740, and the liquid LQ filled in the internal space thereof is displaced. The retainer 10746 can be displaced to one longitudinal end or the other.

As a result, the center of gravity G' of the second displacement member 740 and the retainer 10746 can be positioned farther from the vertical line Z than when the retainer 10746 is not provided.

Therefore, in the section in which the connecting pin 744a is displaced along the first to third inner walls 9773a to 9773c of the guide portion 9773, the second displacing member 740 using the center of gravity G′ is rotated by its own weight to ensure the rotation of the connecting pin 744a. can be easily maintained in contact with the first to third inner walls 9773a to 9773c. As a result, rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed, and the relative displacement (rotation) thereof can be stabilized.

On the other hand, in the section in which the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight prior to the push-up by the second connecting member 9770, it is possible to ensure that the second displacement member 740 advances by using the center of gravity G'. As a result, the rotation from the crossing angle β4 to the crossing angle β1 can be performed at a higher speed (shorter time) immediately before being arranged at the retracted position.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 130. FIG. In the first embodiment, a case where relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is formed in both the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position will be described. However, in the counterclockwise rotation unit 11700 according to the eleventh embodiment, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is formed only in the outward trip and not formed in the return trip. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 11700 in the eleventh embodiment. Note that FIG. 122 illustrates a state in which a part of the left rotation unit 11700 (the rear base 710 and the front base 720) is assembled.

As shown in FIG. 122, in a left rotation unit 11700 according to the eleventh embodiment, a second displacement member 740 and a second connecting member 11770 are connected by a rack and pinion mechanism consisting of a pinion gear 11747 and a rack gear 11774 . In this case, as will be described later, the pinion gear 11747 is configured as a one-way clutch. By restricting the conversion of the linear motion of the member 11770 into the rotational motion of the second displacement member 740, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be formed only in the outward path.

The pinion gear 11747 is formed as a cam-type one-way clutch with a roller and a spring interposed between the inner ring and the outer ring. A gear that meshes with is engraved. In this case, when the outer ring is rotated clockwise in the rear view of the second displacement member 740, the pinion gear 11747 transmits the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740), while the outer ring rotates counterclockwise. Then, the transmission of that rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740) is cut off.

The rack gear 11774 is a gear engraved on the side surface of the second connection member 11770 and meshes with the pinion gear 11747 . The engraving range of the rack gear 11774 is a range in which the engagement with the pinion gear 11747 is released when the second connecting member 11770 is drawn downward to the maximum (see FIGS. 126(b) and 129). ).

Between the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740, a biasing spring SP formed as a torsion spring made of metal is interposed. The coil portion of the biasing spring SP is fitted around the rotation shaft 741 and is elastically torsionally deformed. An arm extending from the other end of the coil portion is engaged with the second displacement member 740, and its elastic recovery force is distributed between the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2). , in the direction of maintaining the crossing angle γ1.

Next, the operation of left rotation unit 11700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 130. FIG.

Here, in the eleventh embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides in the drive groove 762 of the first connection member 760 (presses the inner wall surface), so that the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 11770, the first displacement member 730, and the second displacement member 740 are respectively displaced, and the manner of displacement between the first connection member 760, the second connection member 11770, and the first displacement member 730 is similar to that of the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as the case of the form, its detailed description is omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 123 to 126, the operation of left rotation unit 11700 when moving forward from the retracted position to the extended position will be described.

Figures 123 and 124 are front views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 11700 in each state during forward movement from the retracted position to the extended position, and Figures 125 and 126 are views from the retracted position to the extended position. 117A and 117B are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 11700 in each state when the forward movement is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 123(a) and 125(a), at the retracted position, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is the intersection angle γ1. In this case, the second connection member 11770 is in a state of being pushed up most upward (the upper side in FIG. 125(a)).

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 125(a)), the first connecting member 760 extends in the direction of extension (counterclockwise in FIG. 125(a)) about the rotation shaft 761. 110(a)), the first displacement member 730 is rotated about the rotation shaft 731 in the projecting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110(a)). 124(a) and 126(a), the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the projecting direction through the states shown in FIGS. 123(b) and 125(b).

Further, when the first connection member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction, the second connection member 11770 is drawn downward (lower side in FIG. 125(a)), so that the rack gear 11774 of the second connection member 11770 becomes the pinion gear. 11747 (outer ring) is rotated clockwise in FIG. 125(a). Rotation of the outer ring in such a direction is rotation in a direction that transmits the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740).

123(b) and 125(b), and then as shown in FIGS. ) is further elastically deformed in the torsional direction and rotated relative to the first displacement member 730, and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is The crossing angle γ1 is changed (increased) to the crossing angle γ3 via the crossing angle γ2 (γ1<γ2<γ3).

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 extends to the maximum as shown in FIGS. 730 and second displacement member 740 are positioned in the extended position.

In this case, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 124(b) and 126(b), when the second connection member 11770 is pulled to the lowest position, the rack gear 11774 and the pinion gear 11747 are disengaged. As a result, the second displacement member 740 receives the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP (see FIG. 122) and returns to the initial position. That is, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) returns (decreases) from the intersection angle γ3 to the intersection angle γ1.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 127 to 130, the operation of the counterclockwise rotation unit 11700 during the return movement from the extended position to the retracted position will be described.

Figures 127 and 128 are front views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 11700 in each state during the return movement from the extended position to the retracted position, and Figures 129 and 130 are views from the extended position to the retracted position. 117A and 117B are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 11700 in each state when operating on the return path. FIG. 127(a) is the same as FIG. 124(b), and FIG. 128(b) is the same as FIG. 123(a).

Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 127(b) and 129(b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 124(a) and 126(a). 128(a) and 130(a) are the same as the rotational positions of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 123(b) and 125(b). .

123 to 126), the transmission member 754 moves in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in ), the first connecting member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. It rotates in the retraction direction (clockwise in FIG. 129(a)) about the center of rotation. 128(b) and 130(b) through the states shown in FIGS. 127(b) and 128(a) and FIGS. ), it is placed (raised) at the retracted position.

Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 11770 is pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 129(a)), thereby turning into FIGS. 127(b) and 129(b). As shown, the rack gear 11774 meshes with the pinion gear 11747, and the second coupling member 11770 is further pushed upward, causing the rack gear 11774 to rotate the pinion gear 11747 (outer ring) counterclockwise in FIG. 129(b). Rotation of the outer ring in such a direction is rotation in a direction that cuts transmission of that rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740).

Therefore, from the state shown in FIGS. 127(b) and 129(b), through the states shown in FIGS. 128(a) and 130(a), the retracted position shown in FIGS. , the second displacement member 740 is not relatively rotated with respect to the first displacement member 730, and the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) are separated from each other. is maintained at the intersection angle γ1.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the forward trip, as the first displacement member 730 rotates (tilts) with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720 in the projecting direction, the first displacement member 730 is rotated (tilted). The second displacement member 740 is gradually relatively displaced, and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is increased from the intersection angle γ1 to the intersection angle γ3, In the overhang position, a displacement mode is formed in which the crossing angle γ1 is changed, while in the return path, a relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is not formed (that is, the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (imaginary line M2) while maintaining the crossing angle γ1), the first displacement member 730 rotates (stands up) in the retraction direction with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720. It is possible to form a displacement mode that

<Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the base-side engaging member 726 is fixed so as to protrude from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described. It is arranged so that it can appear in front of the. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 131 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 12700 in the twelfth embodiment. 132(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 12720, and FIG. 132(b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 12720 taken along line CXXXIIb-CXXXIIb in FIG. 132(a).

As shown in FIGS. 131 and 132, a left rotation unit 12700 according to the twelfth embodiment accommodates a base-side engagement member 12726 and a transmission member 12728 in an internal space of a front base 12720, and a second displacement member. An insert member 12745 is disposed on the back of 12740 .

The base-side engaging member 12726 is a sliding portion that is disposed so as to be slidably displaceable in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 132(a) and the vertical direction in FIG. 132(b)) along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 12720. 12726c, and a base portion 726a and a bent portion 726b are formed on the front surface of the slide portion 12726c (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 132(a) and the lower side of FIG. 132(b)).

The sliding portion 12726c of the base-side engaging member 12726 slides toward the front along a guide groove (not shown), thereby moving the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b from the receiving recess 727 to the front side (Fig. 132(a) paper surface). 132c (b) lower side), and the sliding portion 12726c slides toward the back side (FIG. 132 (a) back side of the paper surface and FIG. 132 (b) upper side) along a guide groove (not shown). By being displaced, the base portion 726 a and the bent portion 726 b can be retracted into the receiving recess 727 .

In this case, between the front surface of the slide portion 12726c and the rear surface of the front base 12720, an urging spring SP1 made of a coil spring is disposed in an elastically compressed state, and the urging spring SP1 is elastically restored. The force maintains the base side engaging member 12726 in the retracted state (the state shown in FIG. 132(b)). In this immersed state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b and the front surface of the front base 12720 are flush with each other, making it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the base-side engaging member 12726. FIG.

A side surface of the slide portion 12726c (left side in FIG. 132(b)) is formed as an inclined surface inclined in a direction away from the transmission member 12728 toward the rear side, and the inclined surface of the transmission member 12728 is formed on the inclined surface. abutted.

The transmission member 12728 is slidably displaceable in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 132(a), left-right direction in FIG. 132(b)) along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 12720. b) right side) is exposed from the insertion opening 12720a formed in the side surface of the front base 12720; In addition, on the other end side of the transmission member 12728 (left side in FIG. 132(b)), an inclined surface inclined in a direction away from the base-side engaging member 12726 toward the front side is formed. , the inclined surface of the base-side engaging member 12726 abuts thereon.

Therefore, the inclined surfaces of the base-side engaging member 12726 and the transmission member 12728 slidably displace the transmission member 12728 in a direction approaching the base-side engaging member 12726, thereby moving the base-side engaging member 12726 toward the front side. In addition, by slidingly displacing the transmission member 12728 in a direction away from the base-side engaging member 12726, the base-side engaging member 12726 can be slid to the rear side (inside the receiving recess 727). It can be displaced (immersed).

Between the transmission member 12728 and the front base 12720, an urging spring SP2 made of a coil spring is disposed in an elastically deformed state. 12728 is maintained at a position spaced apart from the base side engaging member 12726 (the position shown in FIG. 132(b), that is, the position where the base side engaging member 12726 is retracted).

The pressing member 12745 includes a base portion 12745a erected from the rear surface of the second displacement member 12740, and an insertion portion 12745b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 12745a. In the pressing member 12745, the standing height of the base portion 12745a is set higher than the standing height of the base portion of the displacement side engaging member 742 so that the insertion portion 12745b can be inserted into the insertion opening 12720a of the front base 12720. In addition, the extension direction of the insertion portion 12745b is the same direction (parallel) as the extension direction of the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 742 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the engagement action by the base-side engagement member 12726 and displacement-side engagement member 742 will be described.

FIG. 133 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 12700 for explaining the engagement action by the base-side engaging member 12726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742, in which the second displacement member 12740 is displaced toward the retracted position. Schematically, the transition state when the 133(a) to the state shown in FIG. 133(c), the second displacement member 12740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIG. 133(a), when the second displacement member 12740 is displaced in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 133(a)) with respect to the front base 12720, the insertion portion 12745b of the pressing member 12745 is first displaced. The tip abuts on one end side of the transmission member 12728 via the insertion opening 12720a of the front base 12720 .

From the state shown in FIG. 133(a), when the second displacement member 12740 is further displaced toward the retreating direction (left side in FIG. 133(a)) with respect to the front base 12720, the insertion portion 12745b of the pressing member 12745 is By inserting the transmission member 12728 into the front base 12720 through the insertion port 12720a against the biasing force of the biasing springs SP1 and SP2, the transmission member 12728 is pushed in a direction approaching the base-side engagement member 12726 (sliding displacement). is done).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 133(b) and 133(c), the base side engaging member 12726 is gradually protruded to the front of the front base 12720 and displaced toward the base side engaging member 12726. The side engaging member 742 is brought closer, and the mutual bent portions 726b, 742b enter the inner surfaces of the mating bent portions 726b, 742b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 133(d), when the second displacement member 12740 is arranged at the retracted position, the inner surfaces (engagement surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b can be engaged with each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 12740 from tilting away from the front base 12720 .

In particular, in this embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 12740 are extended to the extended position, the base-side engaging member 12726 is pushed into the receiving recess 727 by the elastic recovery force of the biasing springs SP1 and SP2. You can immerse yourself inside. That is, in the retracted state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b of the base-side engaging member 12726 can be arranged flush with the front surface of the front base 12720. As shown in FIG. As a result, even when the front surface of the front base 12720 is exposed, the base-side engaging member 12726 is made difficult for the player to visually recognize, and the appearance can be improved.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 136. FIG. In the first embodiment, the displacement-side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base-side engaging member 726 projecting from the front of the front base 720. However, the thirteenth embodiment The displacement-side engaging member 13742 of the second displacement member 13740 in the form is engaged with the wall surface on the front side of the front base 13720 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 134 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 13700 in the thirteenth embodiment. 135(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 13720, and FIG. 135(b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 13720 along line CXXXVb-CXXXVb in FIG. 135(a).

As shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, a left rotation unit 13700 according to the thirteenth embodiment is attached to a front base 13720 on the front side (FIG. 135(a) front side, FIG. 135(b) bottom side) and side sides. 135(a) and 135(b) right side) is formed, and a rotating member 13726 is rotatably disposed in the space formed by the opening 13720a.

The rotating member 13726 is formed in a V shape in cross section from a side portion 13726a that closes the side surface of the front base 13720 in the opening 13720a and a front portion 13726b that closes the front side of the front base 13720. One side (opposite side of front portion 13726b) is rotatably supported.

That is, the rotating member 13726 is rotated to one side about the pivotal portion of the side surface portion 13726a, and is placed in the initial position (the position shown in FIGS. 134 and 135) to close the opening 13720a. It is retracted into the front base 13720 by rotating to the other side around the pivotal portion of the side surface portion 13726a.

In this case, between the front base 13720 and the rotating member 13726, an urging spring SP3 made of a torsion spring is disposed in an elastically torsionally deformed state. Rotating member 13726 is maintained in the initial position. In this initial position, the front of the front portion 13726b and the side of the side portion 13726a are flush with the front and side of the front base 13720, making it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the rotating member 13726.

The displacement-side engaging member 13742 includes a base portion 13742a erected from the rear surface of the second displacement member 13740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 13742a and having an inner surface serving as an engaging surface. The standing height of the base portion 13742a is set to such a height that the bent portion 742b can come into contact with the side portion 13726a of the rotating member 13726. As shown in FIG. As a result, when the second displacement member 13740 is displaced in the retracting direction, the bent portion 742b can rotate the rotating member 13726 in the retracting direction along with the displacement (see FIG. 136).

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the engagement action by the front base 13720 and displacement side engagement member 13742 will be described.

FIG. 136 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 13700 for explaining the engagement action by the front base 13720 and the displacement-side engagement member 13742, when the second displacement member 13740 is displaced toward the retracted position. is schematically illustrated. 136(a) to the state shown in FIG. 136(b), the second displacement member 13740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIG. 136(a), when the second displacement member 13740 is displaced in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 136(a)) with respect to the front base 13720, the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 13742 , abuts on the side surface portion 13726 a of the rotating member 13726 .

From the state shown in FIG. 136(a), when the second displacement member 13740 is further displaced toward the retreating direction (left side in FIG. 136(a)) with respect to the front base 13720, the bent portion of the displacement-side engaging member 13742 742b pushes (rotates) the rotating member 13726 in the retraction direction against the biasing force of the biasing spring SP3.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 136(b), the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 13742 is gradually advanced into the internal space of the front base 13720 through the opening 13720a, as shown in FIG. 136(c). Thus, when the second displacement member 13740 is arranged at the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 13742 can face the rear surface of the front base 13720 in an engageable manner. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 13740 from tilting away from the front base 13720 .

In particular, in this embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 13740 are extended to the extended position, the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP3 places (returns) the rotating member 13726 to the initial position. can be made That is, in its initial position, the front surface of the front portion 13726b and the side surface of the side surface portion 13726a can be flush with the front surface and side surfaces of the front base 13720, respectively. As a result, even when the front and side surfaces of the front base 13720 are exposed, the opening 13720a and the rotating member 13726 are difficult for the player to see, and the appearance can be improved.

<14th Embodiment>
Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 to 139. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the base-side engaging member 726 is fixed so as to protrude from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described. It is arranged so that it can appear in front of the. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 137 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit 14700 according to the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 138(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 14700 with the second displacement member 740 arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 138(b) is the line CXXXVIIIb-CXXXVIIIb of FIG. 138(a). is a partially enlarged cross-sectional schematic diagram of the counterclockwise rotation unit 14700 in FIG. 139(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 14700 with the second displacement member 740 arranged at the extended position, and FIG. 139(b) is CXXXIXb of FIG. 139(a). 147 is a partially enlarged schematic cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 14700 taken along line -CXXXIXb; FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 137 to 139, a left rotation unit 14700 according to the fourteenth embodiment accommodates a base-side engagement member 14726 in the internal space of a front base 14720, and a rack member 14752 on one longitudinal end side ( A transmission portion 14752b is formed on the front surface of FIG. 137 (upper side).

The base-side engaging member 14726 includes a slide portion 14726c that is disposed so as to be slidably displaceable in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIGS. 138(b) and 139(b)) along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 14720. , a base portion 726a and a bent portion 726b are formed on the front surface of the slide portion 14726c (the left side surface in FIGS. 138(b) and 139(b)).

The base-side engaging member 14726 slides and displaces the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b toward the front side (the left side in FIG. 138(b)) from the receiving recess 727 by sliding the sliding portion 14726c toward the front along a guide groove (not shown). ) (see FIG. 138), and the slide portion 14726c is slid along a guide groove (not shown) toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 139(b)) to receive the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b. It can be retracted into recess 727 (see FIG. 139).

In this case, between the rear surface of the slide portion 14726c and the front surface of the rear base 710, an urging spring SP4 made of a coil spring is disposed in an elastically deformed state. The force maintains the base-side engaging member 14726 in the retracted state (the state shown in FIG. 139(b)). In this immersed state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b and the front surface of the front base 14720 are flush with each other, making it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the base-side engaging member 14726. FIG.

The rear surface of the slide portion 14726c (right side in FIGS. 138(b) and 139(b)) is inclined in a direction away from the rack member 14752 as it goes upward (upper side in FIGS. 138(b) and 139(b)). It is formed as an inclined surface, and the inclined surface (front surface) of the transmission portion 14752b of the rack member 14752 abuts against the inclined surface.

138(b) and 139(b)), the base side engaging member 14726 (slide portion 14726c) is formed, and the inclined surface of the slide portion 14726c abuts on the inclined surface.

Therefore, the base side engaging member 14726 slides toward the front side (in the direction in which it protrudes from the receiving recess 727) as the rack member 14752 is displaced downward by the action of the inclined surfaces of the base side engaging member 14726 and the transmission portion 14752b. In addition, as the rack member 14752 is displaced upward, the base-side engaging member 14726 can be slid to the rear side (into the receiving recess 727).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 138, when the rack member 14752 is displaced to the lowest position and the second displacement member 740 is arranged at the retracted position, the inner surfaces (engagement surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b are brought into contact with each other. The first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can be prevented from tilting away from the front base 14720 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 139, when the rack member 14752 is displaced to the uppermost position and the second displacement member 740 is arranged at the extended position, the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP4 causes the base side engagement. Member 14726 can be recessed into receiving recess 727 . That is, in the retracted state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b of the base-side engaging member 14726 can be arranged flush with the front surface of the front base 14720. As shown in FIG. As a result, even when the front surface of the front base 14720 is exposed, the base-side engaging member 14726 is made difficult for the player to visually recognize, and the appearance can be improved.

<Fifteenth Embodiment>
Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 to 142. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the base-side engaging member 726 is fixed so as to protrude from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described. is slidably disposed in front of the . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 140 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 15700 in the fifteenth embodiment. 141(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 15720, and FIG. 134(b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 15720 taken along line CXLIb-CXLIb in FIG. 141(a).

As shown in FIGS. 140 and 141, a left rotation unit 15700 according to the fifteenth embodiment is attached to a front base 15720 on the front side (FIG. 141(a) front side, FIG. 141(b) bottom side) and side sides. (Fig. 141(a) and Fig. 141(b) right side) is formed, and the front side (Fig. 141(b) lower side) of the front base 15720 in the space formed by the opening 15720a is formed. A base-side engaging member 15726 is slidably disposed in the portion.

The base-side engaging member 15726 is formed in a flat plate shape having substantially the same shape as the front side of the front base 15720 in the opening 15720a (that is, a shape that closes the opening 15720a when viewed from the front). Along the first guide groove 15720b1 and the second guide groove 15720b2, it is disposed so as to be slidable in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIGS. 141(a) and 141(b)).

The first guide groove 15720b1 is formed to have a first inclination angle with respect to the left-right direction of the front base 15720 (left-right direction in FIG. 141(b)) when viewed from above in FIG. The guide groove 15720b2 is formed to have an angle of inclination (second angle of inclination) smaller than the angle of inclination of the first guide groove 15720b1 with respect to the left-right direction of the front base 15720 (the left-right direction in FIG. 141(b)). be. In this embodiment, the second tilt angle is 0°. That is, the second guide groove 15720b2 is formed parallel to the left-right direction of the front base 15720. As shown in FIG.

Therefore, the base-side engaging member 15726 is guided along the first guide groove 15720b1 from the initial position shown in FIG. left upper side), and then guided along the second guide groove 15720b2, so that the front base 15720 is slid sideways (left side in FIG. 141(b)), It is immersed inside the base 15720 .

In this case, between the front base 15720 and the base-side engaging member 15726, an urging spring (not shown) consisting of a coil spring is disposed in an elastically deformed state. The elastic recovery force maintains the base side engaging member 15726 in the initial position. In this initial position, the front surface of the base-side engaging member 15726 (the surface on the front side in FIG. 141(a) and the bottom surface in FIG. 141(b)) and the front surface of the front base 15720 are arranged flush with each other. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the side engaging member 15726 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the engagement action by the base-side engagement member 15726 and displacement-side engagement member 742 will be described.

FIG. 142 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 15700 for explaining the engagement action by the base-side engaging member 15726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742, in which the second displacement member 740 is displaced toward the retracted position. Schematically, the transition state when the 142(a) to the state shown in FIG. 142(c), the second displacement member 740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 142(a) and 142(b), when the second displacement member 740 is displaced with respect to the front base 15720 toward the retreating direction (left side in FIG. 142(a)), displacement-side engagement occurs. The tip of the bent portion 742b of the member 742 is inserted through the opening 15720a into the front base 15720, and the base portion 742a of the displacement-side engaging member 742 is brought into contact with the side surface of the base-side engaging member 15726.

From the state shown in FIG. 142(b), when the second displacement member 740 is further displaced toward the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 142(b)) with respect to the front base 15720, as shown in FIG. 142(c). , the base portion 742a of the displacement-side engaging member 742 pushes (slides) the base-side engaging member 15726 in the retracting direction along the first guide groove 15720b1 against the biasing force of the biasing spring. When the second displacement member 740 is further displaced in the retreating direction from the state shown in FIG. is done).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 142(d), when the second displacement member 740 is arranged at the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 742 faces the rear surface of the base-side engaging member 15726. , can be engagably opposed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 from tilting away from the front base 15720 (downward in FIG. 142(c)).

In particular, in this embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are extended to the extended position, the base-side engaging member 15726 is arranged (returned) to the initial position by the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring. ). That is, in the initial position, the front surface of the base-side engaging member 15726 can be arranged flush with the front surface of the front base 15720 . As a result, even when the front of the front base 15720 is exposed, the opening 15720a and the base-side engaging member 15726 are made difficult for the player to see, and the appearance can be improved.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. FIG. In the first embodiment, the displacement-side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base-side engaging member 726 projecting from the front of the front base 720. The displacement side engaging member 16742 of the second displacement member 16740 in the form is engaged with the inner edge of the opening 16720a of the front base 16720 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 143 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 16700 in the sixteenth embodiment. 144(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 16720, and FIG. 144(b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 16720 taken along line CXLIVb-CXLIVb in FIG. 144(a).

FIG. 145 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 16700 for explaining the engagement action by the front base 16720 (opening 16720a) and the displacement side engagement member 16742, and the second displacement member 16740 moves to the retracted position. Schematically illustrated is the transition state as it is displaced towards. 145(a) to the state shown in FIG. 145(b), the second displacement member 16740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 143 to 145, the left rotation unit 16700 in the sixteenth embodiment has an opening 16720a formed in the side surface of the front base 16720 (the right side surface in FIGS. 135(a) and 135(b)). .

The displacement-side engaging member 16742 includes a base portion 16742a erected from the rear surface of the second displacement member 16740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 16742a and having an inner surface serving as an engaging surface. The standing height of the base portion 16742a is set to a height that allows the bending portion 742b to be inserted into the opening 16720a of the front base 16720. As shown in FIG.

Thus, according to the present embodiment, when the second displacement member 16740 is displaced in the retracting direction, the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 16742 is moved through the opening 16720a along with the displacement to the front base. 16720, and when the second displacement member 16740 is placed at the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 16742 is engaged with the inner edge of the opening 16720a of the front base 16720. can face each other as much as possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 16740 from tilting away from the front base 16720 .

In particular, in this embodiment, it is only necessary to open the opening 16720a in the front base 16720, and there is no need to provide a base-side engaging member, so the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. In addition, since the opening 16720a is arranged on the side surface of the front base 16720, the opening 16720a is visible to the player when the second displacement member 16740 is displaced in the projecting direction and the front of the front base 16720 is exposed. The appearance can be improved by making it difficult.

<Seventeenth Embodiment>
Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147. FIG. In the first embodiment, the displacement-side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base-side engaging member 726 projecting from the front of the front base 720. The displacement side engaging member 17742 of the second displacement member 17740 in the form is engaged with the rear surface of the rear base 710 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 146 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 17700 in the seventeenth embodiment. 147 is a schematic top view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 17700 for explaining the engagement action by the rear base 710 and the displacement-side engagement member 17742, in which the second displacement member 17740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition state at the moment is schematically illustrated.

147(a) to the state shown in FIG. 147(b), the second displacement member 17740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, in the left rotation unit 17700 of the seventeenth embodiment, the entire front and side surfaces of one longitudinal end side (upper side in FIG. 146) of the front base 17720 are formed as decorative surfaces. That is, the front base 17720 is formed in a shape in which the base-side engaging member 726 and the receiving recess 727 are omitted from the front base 720 in the first embodiment.

The displacement-side engaging member 17742 includes a base portion 17742a erected from the rear surface of the second displacement member 17740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 17742a and having an inner surface serving as an engaging surface. The standing height of the base portion 17742a is set to such a height that the inner surface of the bent portion 742b can face the rear surface of the rear base 710 with a predetermined gap therebetween.

Thus, according to the present embodiment, when the second displacement member 17740 is displaced in the retracting direction, the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 17742 is gradually moved toward the rear side of the rear base 710 along with the displacement. , and the second displacement member 17740 is arranged at the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 17742 can face the rear surface of the rear base 710 in an engageable manner. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 17740 from tilting away from the front base 17720 .

In particular, in this embodiment, since it is not necessary to provide the front base 17720 with a base-side engaging member, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

Furthermore, since it is not necessary to form an opening on the side surface of the front base 17720, the appearance of the front base 17720 can be improved by avoiding the functional part unrelated to the decoration from being visually recognized by the player. can be done. In other words, there is no need to obscure the sides of the front base 17720 from the player by means of the second displacement member 17740 arranged at the overhanging position, so the amount of overhang of the second displacement member 17740 is increased to enhance the presentation effect. be able to.

<Eighteenth Embodiment>
Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 151. FIG. In the right rotation unit 600 of the first embodiment, the operation of displacing (raising) the first displacement member 630 tilted in the overhanging direction toward the retracted position (raising operation of the first displacement member 630) is performed by the drive motor 650. Although the case where it is performed only by the rotational driving force has been described, the erecting motion of the first displacement member 630 in the right rotation unit 18600 of the eighteenth embodiment utilizes the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650 and the action of the inertial force. is done. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 148 is an exploded perspective view of a right rotation unit 18600 according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 149 is a front view of the clockwise rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position, and FIG. 18600 is a rear view of the right rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half section of FIG.

149(a) and 150(a) show the state in which the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 18640 are arranged in the extended position (that is, FIGS. 34(c) and 36(c)). corresponds to 149(b) and 150(b) correspond to FIGS. 34(b) and 36(b), and FIGS. 149(c) and 150(c) correspond to FIGS. 36(a).

FIG. 151 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half section when moving from the extended position toward the retracted position, and FIG. 151(c) corresponds to FIGS. 150(a), 150(b) and 150(c) respectively.

As shown in FIG. 148, in the right rotation unit 18600 according to the eighteenth embodiment, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped abutted portion 18629 from the front of the front base 18620 is attached to the decorative portion 642b of the connecting displacement member 18642 of the second displacement member 18640. Approximately cylindrical contact portions 18644 protrude from the rear surface. The contact portion 18644 is disposed at the end portion of the connecting displacement member 18642 in the longitudinal direction opposite to the pivot hole 642a (support shaft 633).

As shown in FIGS. 149 to 151, the abutted portion 18629 and the abutting portion 18644 are in the middle of displacing the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 18640 from the extended position to the retracted position. In a predetermined section, the outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 18644 is formed so as to contact the upper surface of the contacted portion 18629 (upper surface in FIG. 148).

Specifically, from the extended position shown in FIGS. 149(a), 150(a) and 151(a), as shown in FIGS. 149(b), 150(b) and 151(b), 149(c), 150(c) and 151(c), the connecting displacement member 18642 is rotated about the support shaft 633 (shaft support hole 642a) in the direction of retreating to the rear surface of the first displacement member 630. ), when the connecting displacement member 18642 is rotated to the maximum around the support shaft 633 (shaft support hole 642a), the contact portion 18644 is brought into contact with the upper surface of the contact portion 18629. As shown in FIG.

From the states shown in FIGS. 149(c), 150(c) and 151(c), the first displacement member 630 starts to rotate (stand up) toward the retracted position about the rotation shaft 631. 33(b), 35(b), and 37(b), the contact portion 18644 is separated from the upper surface of the contact portion 18629, and the contact portion 18629 and the contact portion 18644 are separated from each other. Abutment is released.

In this case, the drive motor 650 moves only the second displacement member 18640 in the interval until the contact portion 18644 contacts the contacted portion 18629 (that is, the interval shown in FIGS. 149, 150, and 151). Rotational driving is sufficient, and the driving load is relatively small. That is, since this section is a section where the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, only the weight of the second displacement member 18640 is rotationally driven. is assumed to be the load of In addition, since the displacement direction of the connecting displacement member 18642 is the downward direction of gravity, the load on the drive motor 650 is reduced in this respect as well.

On the other hand, when the contact portion 18644 is in contact with the contacted portion 18629 , the driving pin 654 b of the transmission member 654 reaches the working section 635 a of the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 . Therefore, from this state, not only the weight of the second displacement member 18640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 630 is added as the load of the rotational drive of the drive motor 650 . In particular, from this state, the first displacement member 630 is raised against gravity, so the load on the drive motor 650 is rapidly increased in this respect as well.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the contact portion 18644 is provided at the end of the connecting displacement member 18642 opposite to the shaft support hole 642 a (support shaft 633 ), and the connecting displacement member 18642 rotates the support shaft 633 . When rotated around the center, the abutting portion 18644 abuts on the abutted portion 18629 of the front base 18620 (see FIG. 151(c)).

That is, the rotation of the connecting displacement member 18642 about the support shaft 633 can be regulated by the abutment of the abutted portion 18629 and the abutting portion 18644, and the rotation of the connecting displacement member 18642 can be suddenly stopped. , the inertial force of the connecting displacement member 18642 generated by the sudden stop is the force in the direction (arrow F) can act on the first displacement member 630 .

As a result, the driving pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, and the weight of the first displacement member 630 as well as the weight of the second displacement member 18640 is reached. Also, when added as a load for rotationally driving the drive motor 650 , the inertial force described above can be used as a force that assists the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the drive motor 650, stabilize the displacement of each of the displacement members 630 and 18640 from the extended position to the retracted position, and increase the durability of the drive motor 650. It is possible to improve the quality.

<Nineteenth Embodiment>
Next, a nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 160. FIG. In the right rotation unit 18600 of the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the abutting portion 18644 of the connecting displacement member 18642 contacts the abutted portion 18629 of the front base 18620 has been described. The contacting portion 19644 of the contacting portion 19644 contacts the contacted portion 19639 provided on the first displacement member 19630 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

152 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 19600 in the nineteenth embodiment, and FIG. 153 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 19600. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, in a right rotation unit 19600 according to the nineteenth embodiment, the connecting portion (connecting groove 641c and connecting pin 643) of the driven member 19641 of the second displacement member 19640 and the connecting displacement member 19642 is the first. It is set at a position different from that of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 29 and 30).

Specifically, one end in the longitudinal direction of the driven member 19641 (the side opposite to the second groove 641b across the shaft support hole 641a, the upper side in FIGS. 152 and 153) is curved in an arc, and the curved portion A connecting groove 641c is provided on the extended distal end side of the . This curved portion avoids interference between the driven member 19641 and the shaft support hole 642 a of the connecting displacement member 19642 . The connecting displacement member 19642 is formed by projecting a plate-like projecting portion 19642c outward from the shaft support hole 642a, and a connecting pin 643 projects from the front side of the projecting portion 19642c.

In this case, in the above-described first embodiment, the axis of the shaft support hole 641a (support shaft 632) of the driven member 641 is centered and the axis of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) of the connecting displacement member 19642 is The connecting portion (connecting groove 641c and connecting pin 643) of the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 is positioned inside (on the center side) of the virtual circle passing through the center.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, an imaginary shaft centered on the shaft center of the shaft support hole 641a (support shaft 632) of the driven member 19641 passes through the shaft center of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) of the connecting displacement member 19642. The connecting portion (connecting groove 641c and connecting pin 643) of the driven member 19641 and the connecting displacement member 19642 is positioned outside the circle.

Therefore, the direction of relative rotation of the connecting displacement member 19642 with respect to the first displacement member 19630 is opposite to that in the first embodiment. Here, the relative rotation in the opposite direction will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 157. FIG.

154 and 155 are front views of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state during operation between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 19600 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state when rotating. FIG.

154(a), 154(b) and 154(c) are the same states as FIGS. 156(a), 156(b) and 156(c) respectively, ), FIGS. 155(b) and 155(c) are the same states as FIGS. 157(a), 157(b) and 157(c), respectively. 154(c) is the same as FIG. 155(a), and FIG. 156(c) is the same as FIG. 157(a).

Here, in the right rotation unit 19600 in the nineteenth embodiment, relative rotation of the connecting displacement member 19642 with respect to the first displacement member 19630 is caused by the difference in the positions of the connecting portions (the connecting groove 641c and the connecting pin 643) described above. , is opposite to that of the first embodiment, the other operation modes are formed substantially in the same manner, so description of the same portions will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 154 and 156, at the retracted position, the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. By pushing down the inner wall surfaces of the section 635a) and the second groove 641b in the projecting direction, the first displacement member 19630 is rotated (tilted) in the projecting direction integrally with the second displacement member 19640. FIG.

155(a) and 157(a), when the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. The inner wall surface of the second groove 641b of the driven member 19641 is pushed downward (lower side in FIG. 157(a)) while passing through the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of .

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 155(b) and 157(b), the driven member 19641 rotates around the support shaft 632 in a direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 157(b)) to raise the connecting groove 641c. , the rotation of the driven member 19641 is transmitted to the connection displacement member 19642 through the connection of the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643, and the connection displacement member 19642 lowers the decorative portion 642b with the support shaft 633 as the rotation center. direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 108(b)).

That is, while the first displacement member 19630 is stopped, the connecting displacement portion 19642 is displaced (rotated) relative to the first displacement member 19630 in the direction opposite to that in the first embodiment. After that, as shown in FIGS. 155(c) and 157(c), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moves the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640. By reaching the end of the second groove 641b, the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 are arranged at the overhang position.

Returning to FIGS. 152 and 153, description will be made. In this embodiment, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped contacted portion 19639 projects from the back surface of the first displacement member 19630, and a substantially cylindrical contact portion 19644 projects from the front surface of the decorative portion 642b of the connecting displacement member 19642. . The contacted portion 19639 is arranged between the rotation shaft 631 and the support shaft 632 in the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 19630 .

The contacted portion 19639 and the contact portion 19644 are arranged in a predetermined section in the middle of the displacement of the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 from the extended position to the retracted position. The outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 19644 is formed so as to be able to contact with the side surface of (the right side surface in FIG. 153). 158 to 160, the effect of the abutment of the abutted portion 19639 and the abutting portion 19644 will be described.

FIG. 158 is a front view of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position, and FIG. 19600 is a rear view of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state in the first half section of FIG.

158(a) and 159(a) show the state in which the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 are arranged in the extended position (that is, FIGS. 155(c) and 157(c)). corresponds to 158(b) and 159(b) correspond to FIGS. 155(b) and 157(b), and FIGS. 158(c) and 159(c) correspond to FIGS. 157(a).

FIG. 160 is a schematic back view of the clockwise rotation unit 19600 in each state in the first half section when it operates from the extended position toward the retracted position, and FIG. 160(a), FIG. 160(c) corresponds to FIGS. 159(a), 159(b) and 159(c) respectively.

From the extended position shown in FIGS. 158(a), 159(a) and 160(a), as shown in FIGS. 158(b), 159(b) and 160(b), the connecting displacement member 19642 158(c), 159(c), and 160(c) are rotated in the direction of retracting to the rear surface of the first displacement member 19630 with the support shaft 633 (shaft support hole 642a) as the center of rotation. Further, when the connecting displacement member 19642 is rotated to the maximum around the support shaft 633 (shaft support hole 642a), the contact portion 19644 is brought into contact with the lower surface of the contacted portion 19639 .

In this case, the drive motor 650 moves only the second displacement member 19640 in the interval until the contact portion 19644 contacts the contacted portion 19639 (that is, the interval shown in FIGS. 158, 159 and 160). Rotational driving is sufficient, and the driving load is relatively small. That is, since this section is a section where the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the non-interfering section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630, only the weight of the second displacement member 19640 is rotationally driven. is assumed to be the load of

On the other hand, when the contact portion 19644 is in contact with the contacted portion 19639 , the drive pin 654 b of the transmission member 654 reaches the working section 635 a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630 . Therefore, in such a state, not only the weight of the second displacement member 19640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 19630 is added as a load for rotationally driving the drive motor 650 . In particular, from this state, the load on the drive motor 650 is abruptly increased because the first displacement member 19630 is erected against gravity.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the decorative portion 642b of the connecting displacement member 19642 is provided with the abutting portion 19644, and the connecting displacement member 19642 is rotated around the support shaft 633, thereby rotating the connecting displacement member 19642. The abutting portion 19644 lifted upward along with this abuts against the lower surface of the abutted portion 19639 of the first displacement member 19630 (see FIG. 160(c)).

That is, the rotation of the connecting displacement member 19642 about the support shaft 633 can be restricted by the abutment of the abutted portion 19639 and the abutting portion 19644, and the rotation of the connecting displacement member 19642 can be suddenly stopped. , the inertial force of the connecting displacement member 19642 generated by the sudden stop is the force in the direction (arrow F) can act on the first displacement member 19630 .

As a result, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630, and the weight of the first displacement member 19630 as well as the weight of the second displacement member 19640 is reached. Also, when added as a load for rotationally driving the drive motor 650 , the inertial force described above can be used as a force that assists the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the drive motor 650, stabilize the displacement of the displacement members 19630 and 19640 from the extended position to the retracted position, and increase the durability of the drive motor 650. It is possible to improve the quality.

<Twentieth Embodiment>
Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162. FIG. In the winning device 65 of the first embodiment, the game ball is delivered from the delivery port 821c to the seesaw member 840 (receiving surface 844) regardless of the state of the seesaw member 840 (that is, either the first state or the second state). state), but the winning device 20065 in the twentieth embodiment restricts the delivery of game balls from the delivery port 821c to the seesaw member 20840 (receiving surface 844) at least in the second state. be done. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 161 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 20065 in the twentieth embodiment. Also, FIG. 162(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 20065 with the seesaw member 20840 forming the first state, and FIG. 162(b) is a winning device with the seesaw member 20840 forming the second state. 20065 is a cross-sectional view of device 20065. FIG. 162(a) and 162(b) correspond to FIGS. 52(a) and 52(b), respectively.

As shown in FIG. 161, in the prize winning device 20065 of the twentieth embodiment, a seesaw member 20840 is formed with a restricting portion 20848 . The restricting portion 20848 is formed as a substantially triangular portion in front view that stands upward (upper side in FIG. 161) from the edge portion of the receiving surface 844 opposite to the inclined surface 845 .

As shown in FIG. 162(a), when the seesaw member 20840 is in the first state, the restricting portion 20848 is positioned outside the opening area of the delivery port 821c. (Fig. 162(a) left-right dimension) is maintained at a dimension W1 larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, delivery of the game ball from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is allowed.

On the other hand, when the seesaw member 20840 is in the second state, as shown in FIG. A portion is located inside the opening region of the delivery port 821c (that is, a portion of the restricting portion 20848 overlaps the opening region of the delivery port 821c). As a result, the opening width of the delivery port 821c is reduced to the dimension W2 which is smaller than the diameter of the game ball (W2<W1). Therefore, the delivery of game balls from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is restricted (prohibited).

Thus, according to this embodiment, the delivery of the game ball from the guide passage (delivery port 821c) of the intermediate base 820 to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 20840 is controlled (allowed) according to the state of the seesaw member 20840. or regulation).

That is, in the first state, the game ball is delivered from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844, and the game ball is rolled from the receiving surface 844 toward the inclined surface 845 and the discharging surface 846, thereby rotating the seesaw member 20840. , the second state can be formed quickly.

Here, even after the seesaw member 20840 starts rotating toward the second state, when the game balls are sent out in a row from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844, they were sent out first (the receiving surface 844 received ) A state in which the game ball is still rolling on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 is formed, and the seesaw member 20840 is likely to be maintained in the second state.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the seesaw member 20840 starts to rotate toward the second state, the restricting portion 20848 narrows the opening width of the delivery port 821c to the dimension W2, so that the receiving surface is separated from the delivery port 821c. By restricting (prohibiting) the delivery of game balls to 844, it is possible to secure time for discharging the game balls rolling on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d.

That is, until game balls are completely discharged from the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d and there are no more game balls on the seesaw member 20840, the delivery of the game balls from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is on standby. can be made As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

The dimension W2 may be larger than the diameter of the game ball as long as it is smaller than the dimension W1. That is, the dimension W2 may be a dimension that allows the game ball to be delivered from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844. Even in this case, the width of the opening of the delivery port 821c is narrowed by the restricting portion 20848, making it difficult for the game ball to pass through. (delay the passage of the game ball). As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

<21st embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 163, a twenty-first embodiment will be described. In the winning device 65 of the first embodiment, by rolling along the downward slope of the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840, the game ball is discharged to the discharge port 821d. The winning device 21065 in the twenty-first embodiment comprises a rotating member 21870 for pushing out the game balls and discharging them to the discharge port 821d. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

163(a) and 163(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 21065 in the twenty-first embodiment, corresponding to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 163, the winning device 21065 in the twenty-first embodiment comprises a rotating member 21870 above the seesaw member 840. As shown in FIG. The rotating member 21870 does not interfere with the seesaw member 840 and does not contact the game ball on the seesaw member 840 even if the seesaw member 840 is in the first state or the second state. placed at the height possible.

The rotating member 21870 includes a shaft support portion 21871 through which a shaft support pin (not shown) is inserted so as to be rotatably supported on the rear surface of the front base 810, and a delivery port 821c that protrudes from the shaft support portion 21871 to one side. A plate-shaped receiving plate 21872 facing the receiving plate 21872, and a plate-shaped receiving plate 21872 and a push plate projected from the shaft support portion 21871 to the other side opposite to the receiving plate 21872 and facing the discharge port 821d 21873.

The shaft support portion 21871 is disposed in a posture in which the axial direction thereof is along the direction of gravity (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 163(a)) (that is, perpendicular to the rotation shaft (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 840). The receiving plate 21872 and the ejecting plate 21873 are connected with a predetermined crossing angle with the shaft support portion 21871 as the crossing center. Therefore, the rotating member 21870 is bent in a substantially doglegged shape when viewed in the direction of the pivot 21871 (gravitational force).

163(a), the rotating member 21870 is such that when the pushing plate 21873 rotates along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (horizontal direction in FIG. 163(a)), the receiving plate 21872 can 163(a), and when the receiving plate 21872 rotates along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, as shown in FIG. 163(b), The pushing plate 21873 is in a posture protruding above the inclined surface 845 and/or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 .

163(a), the rotating member 21870 is such that when the push plate 21873 is retracted to the side opposite to the discharge port 821d (lower side in FIG. 163(a)), the receiving plate 21872 is positioned at the discharge port 163(b), the receiving plate 21872 is advanced toward the side close to 821c, and the receiving plate 21872 is retracted to the side opposite to the delivery port 821c (lower side in FIG. 163(b)), as shown in FIG. 163(b). The pushing plate 21873 is advanced toward the outlet 821d.

Therefore, according to this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. When the game ball is delivered to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, the game ball delivered to the receiving surface 844 from the delivery port 821c is received by the receiving plate 21872 of the rotating member 21870, and the rotating member 21870 pushes the pushing plate 21873. is rotated in a direction to protrude above the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 . By this rotation, as shown in FIG. 163(b), the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be pushed out by the pushing plate 21873 and discharged to the discharge port 821d.

As a result, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are changed. Alternate switching can be performed smoothly.

In addition, the receiving plate 21872 of the rotating member 21870 receives the game ball sent out from the delivery port 821c, and the rotating member 21870 is in a posture in which the ejecting plate 21873 protrudes above the inclined surface 845 and the discharging surface 846 (that is, , posture shown in FIG. 163(b)), the game ball received by the receiving plate 21872 (the game ball shown on the left side of FIG. Since it rolls along the discharge surface 846, the rotating member 21870 can be returned to the posture in which the receiving plate 21872 protrudes above the receiving surface 844 (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 163(a)).

In this way, the rotating member 21870 uses the rolling motion of the game ball to move to the initial position (the position where the game ball can be received by the receiving plate 21872 and the game ball can be pushed out by the pushing plate 21873, that is, FIG. position shown in (a)). Therefore, since driving by the driving means and detection by the sensor device can be eliminated, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

<22nd Embodiment>
Next, a twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

164(a) and 164(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 22065 in the twenty-second embodiment, corresponding to FIG. 165(a) and 165(b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the winning device 22065, corresponding to FIG.

Here, the prize winning device 22065 of the twenty-second embodiment differs from the prize winning device 21065 of the twenty-first embodiment by having an opening 22849 formed in the seesaw member 22840 and a projecting piece 22874 projecting from the rotating member 22870. Furthermore, since only the provision is different and the other configurations are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 164 and 165, the rotating member 22870 has a plurality of (three in this embodiment) projecting pieces 22874 protruding from the lower side of the pushing plate 21873 (on the side of the seesaw member 22840, on the lower side in FIG. 165). is set. On the other hand, a plurality of (three in this embodiment) openings 22849 for receiving the projecting pieces 22874 are formed in the plate-like portion where the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 22840 are formed.

The protruding piece 22874 is curved in an arc around the rotation axis of the seesaw member 22840 when viewed from the front (when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 22840, i.e., the state shown in FIG. 165). be. On the other hand, the opening 22849 is curved in an arc shape around the rotation axis of the rotation member 22870 when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of the rotation axis (shaft support portion 21871) of the rotation member 22870, that is, the state shown in FIG. 164). It is formed.

Therefore, the seesaw member 22840 rotates between the first state and the second state around the support shaft 821e (bearing 841), and the rotating member 22870 rotates through its movable range around the shaft support 21871. In either state, interference of the projecting piece 22874 with the inner edge of the opening 22849 can be suppressed. As a result, the seesaw member 22840 and the rotating member 22870 can be made independent of each other and smoothly rotated.

Here, when the pushing plate 21873 of the rotating member 21870 does not have a projecting piece as in the case of the twenty-first embodiment, the seesaw member 840 is in the second state (or in a state similar thereto). , When the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is pushed out to the discharge port 821d by the push plate 21873, the distance between the push plate 21873 and the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 is large, the lower part of the ejector plate 21873 is brought into contact with the upper part of the game ball (the front part of the paper surface in FIG. 163(a)). Therefore, the time required for the pushing plate 21873 to contact the upper part of the game ball increases, and it becomes difficult to discharge the game ball to the discharge port 821d quickly. In addition, it becomes difficult to sufficiently apply the energy of the rotation of the rotating member 21870 formed by receiving the game ball with the receiving plate 21872 to the game ball via the pushing plate 21873 .

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the projecting piece 22874 projects downward (the seesaw member 22840) from the ejector plate 21873 of the rotating member 22870. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. In addition, when the seesaw member 22840 forms the second state, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 22840 can be pushed out to the discharge port 821d by the projecting piece 22874.

Therefore, in this case, the projecting piece 22874 can be brought into contact with the side portion of the game ball (lower portion in FIG. 164(a)). Therefore, the time until the projecting piece 22874 comes into contact with the side portion of the game ball can be shortened, and the game ball can be quickly discharged (pushed out) to the discharge port 821d accordingly. Also, the energy of the rotation of the rotating member 22870 formed by receiving the game ball with the receiving plate 21872 can be sufficiently applied to the game ball via the projecting piece 22874 .

As a result, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are changed. Alternate switching can be performed smoothly.

<Twenty-third embodiment>
Next, a twenty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167. FIG. In the twenty-first embodiment, the rotating member 21870 is arranged (rotatably supported) on the front base 810, but the rotating member 23870 of the twenty-third embodiment is arranged (rotatably supported) on the seesaw member 840. supported). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 166 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 23065 in the twenty-third embodiment. 167(a) and 167(b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the winning device 23065, corresponding to FIG. 168(a) and 168(b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the winning device 23065, corresponding to FIG.

Here, the prize winning device 23065 of the twenty-third embodiment differs from the prize winning device 21065 of the twenty-first embodiment in the position where the rotating member 23870 is arranged and the presence or absence of the stopper portion 23875, and the rest of the configuration is the same. Therefore, its description is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 166 to 168 , the rotating member 23870 in the twenty-third embodiment is rotatably supported on the upper surface of the seesaw member 840 by a shaft support pin 23876 inserted through the shaft support portion 21871 . In this case, in this embodiment, the rotating member 23870 is disposed in such a manner that the axial direction of the shaft support portion 21871 is orthogonal to the rotating shaft (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 840, The side surfaces face the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 substantially in parallel.

As described above, according to this embodiment, since the rotating member 23870 is disposed on the seesaw member 840, the seesaw member 840 is in the first state or the first state as shown in FIGS. 168(a) and 168(b). In any of the two states, the pushing plate 21873 can face the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 .

Therefore, unlike the case of the twenty-first embodiment described above (that is, the form in which the lower part of the ejector plate 21873 abuts against the upper part of the game ball (the part on the near side of the paper in FIG. 163(a)), the ejector plate 21873 can be brought into contact with the side portion of the game ball (lower portion in FIG. 167(a)). Therefore, the time required for the pushing plate 21873 to come into contact with the side portion of the game ball can be shortened, and the game ball can be quickly discharged (pushed out) to the discharge port 821d accordingly. Also, the energy of the rotation of the rotating member 23870 formed by receiving the game ball with the receiving plate 21872 can be sufficiently applied to the game ball via the pushing plate 21873 .

As a result, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are changed. Alternate switching can be performed smoothly.

Here, the rotating member 23870 of this embodiment has a stopper portion 23875 projecting from the back surface of the pushing plate 21873 (the surface opposite to the side that pushes out the game ball), and the stopper portion 23875 hits the back surface of the front base 810. be accessible. When the stopper portion 23875 is in contact with the rear surface of the front base 810 (see FIG. 167(a)), the rotating member 23870 moves the pushing plate 21873 in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (horizontal direction in FIG. 167(a)). It is arranged in a rotational position along.

Therefore, compared to the case where the stopper portion 23875 is omitted and the push plate 21873 is retracted to the position where it abuts against the back surface of the front base 810, the push plate is closer to the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the ejection surface 846. 21873 can be made to stand by, and the time until the pushing plate 21873 comes into contact with the game ball can be shortened. As a result, the game ball can be quickly discharged (pushed out) to the discharge port 821d.

Here, as described above, even if the rotary member 23870 is arranged in a posture in which the ejector plate 21873 protrudes above the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 167(b)), The game ball received by the receiving plate 21872 (the game ball shown on the left side in FIG. 167(b)) rolls along the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 while retracting the ejecting plate 21873. The rotating member 23870 can be returned to the posture in which it protrudes upward from the receiving surface 844 (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 167(a)).

In this case, since the rotating member 23870 is arranged on the seesaw member 840 in this embodiment, a predetermined gap is formed between the pushing plate 21873 and the front base 810 . Therefore, when the push-out plate 21873 is retracted to a position where it abuts against the rear surface of the front base 810, the game ball rolls away from the discharge port 821d, and the rolling trajectory of the game ball increases. Therefore, the discharge to the discharge port 821d is delayed.

On the other hand, by protruding the stopper portion 23875 from the back surface of the pushing plate 21873, the game ball received by the receiving plate 21872 (the game ball shown on the left side in FIG. It is possible to prevent the ejector plate 21873 from being excessively retreated to the rear side of the front base 810 when rolling along (see FIG. 167(a)). That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling in a direction away from the discharge port 821d, and to easily discharge the game ball to the discharge port 821d.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since no stopper portion is formed on the rear surface of the receiving plate 21872, the receiving plate 21872 can be retracted to a position where it contacts the rear surface of the front base 810 (FIG. 167(b)). )reference). That is, by utilizing the gap between the rotating member 23870 and the front base 810 formed by disposing the rotating member 23870 on the seesaw member 840, the receiving plate 21872 receives the game ball and rotates when the rotating member 23870 is rotated. The rotation angle of the member 23870 (rotation angle from the rotation position shown in FIG. 167(a) to the rotation position shown in FIG. 167(b)) can be increased.

As a result, the time during which the game ball delivered from the delivery port 821c is in contact with the receiving plate 21872 can be lengthened (that is, the impulse received by the rotating member 23870 from the game ball can be increased). Therefore, the energy of the rotation of the rotating member 23870 formed by receiving the game ball with the receiving plate 21872 can be increased, and even when a plurality of game balls roll on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846, they A plurality of game balls can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d by pushing out the push-out plate 21873. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the ejection surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the transition between the first state and the second state is made. Alternate switching can be performed smoothly.

<24th Embodiment>
Next, a twenty-fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the seesaw member 840 is rotated while maintaining its rotation axis in a horizontal posture has been described. be done. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

169 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 24065 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 170 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 24065. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 170, a winning device 24065 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment has bearings 24816 and 24826 protruding from the rear surface of a front base 24810 and the front surface of an intermediate base 24820, respectively. The bearing portions 24816 and 24826 are portions that rotatably support both ends of the rotating shaft 24877 on their inner peripheral surfaces, and have substantially U-shaped projections with an open upper side (the upper side in FIGS. 169 and 170). formed as a part.

In this embodiment, the bearing portion 24816 of the front base 24810 has a larger inner radius than the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate base 24820 . As will be described later, this permits the rotation of one axial end of the rotary shaft 24877 (the end on which the cam portion 24877b is formed).

The rotating shaft 24877 is a shaft-like body for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840 with respect to the front base 24810 and the intermediate base 24820 . Here, referring to FIG. 171, the rotating shaft 24877 will be described.

Fig. 171(a) is a front view of the rotating shaft 24877, and Fig. 171(b) is a side view of the rotating shaft 24877 viewed in the direction of arrow CLXXIb in Fig. 171(a).

As shown in FIG. 171, the rotary shaft 24877 includes a body portion 24877a formed as a shaft-like body having a circular cross section, and a cam portion 24877b formed at an axial end of the body portion 24877a. The cam portion 24877b is formed to protrude radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 24877a (that is, the distance from the axis of the main body portion 24877a to the outer peripheral surface of the cam portion 24877b varies depending on the rotation angle). ) is formed as a so-called disc cam.

Returning to FIGS. 170 and 171, description will be made. The rotating shaft 24877 is set such that the axial length of the body portion 24877 a is larger than the axial length of the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840 . Therefore, the main body portion 24877a of the rotary shaft 24877 is fitted in the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840, and the cam portion 24877b and the main body portion 24877a projecting from both ends of the bearing 841 in the axial direction are connected to the bearing portion 24816 of the front base 24810 and the intermediate base. 24820 are pivotally supported by bearings 24826 (see FIG. 173). The rotating shaft 24877 is fixed to the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840 after being positioned at a predetermined phase (rotational position).

Next, the action of the cam portion 24877b on the rotating shaft 24877 when the seesaw member 840 is rotated will be described.

FIG. 172(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 24065 with the seesaw member 840 forming the first state, and FIG. 172(b) is the winning device 24065 with the seesaw member 840 forming the second state. is a cross-sectional view of. 173(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 24065 along the line CLXXIIIa-CLXXIIIa in FIG. 172(a), and FIG. 173(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 24065 along the line CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb in FIG. 172(b). is a cross-sectional view of. 172(a) and 172(b) correspond to FIGS. 52(a) and 52(b), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 172(a) and 173(a), in the first state, the axis of the rotating shaft 24877 is parallel to the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 173(a)). Both ends in the axial direction are pivotally supported by the bearing portion 24816 of the front cover 24810 and the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate cover 24820, respectively. In this case, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820 at the first inclination angle.

When the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state shown in FIGS. 172(a) and 173(a) toward the second state, the cam portion 24877b at one end of the rotating shaft 24877 in the axial direction increases as the rotation angle increases. gradually acts on the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 24816 of the front cover 24810 to gradually increase the height position of the one axial end side of the rotating shaft 24877 (the side where the cam portion 24877b is formed).

As shown in FIGS. 172(b) and 173(b), when the seesaw member 840 reaches the second state, the height position of the one axial end side of the rotating shaft 24877 (the side on which the cam portion 24877b is formed) reaches the maximum. , and the axis of the rotating shaft 24877 is tilted downward from the front base 24810 toward the intermediate base 24820 . As a result, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is tilted downward toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820 at a second tilt angle larger than the first tilt angle described above.

Thus, according to the present embodiment, as the seesaw member 840 rotates from the first state toward the second state, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 can be increased.

Here, as in the first embodiment described above, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated while maintaining its rotation axis in a horizontal position (that is, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is maintained at a predetermined angle). case), if the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the ejection surface 846 is strong (large), the ejection of the game ball from the ejection surface 846 is hasty, and the second state cannot be reliably formed, while the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the ejection surface 846 is If is loose (small), the discharge of the game ball from the discharge surface 846 is slowed down, and the residence time becomes long, so that the alternating switching between the first state and the second state is not performed smoothly.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is relatively loose (small) at the initial stage. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the rapid discharge of the game ball from the discharge surface 846 (that is, to make the game ball stay on the discharge surface 846), and to make it easier to reliably form the second state. can.

On the other hand, in the final stage, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is relatively strong (large), and the game ball can be discharged quickly from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d. By shortening the time during which the ball is placed (that is, the time during which the second state is formed), the alternating switching between the first state and the second state can be performed smoothly.

<25th Embodiment>
Next, a twenty-fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 177. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the seesaw member 840 is rotated while maintaining its rotation axis in a horizontal posture has been described. be done. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

174 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 25065 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, and FIG. 175 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 25065. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, a winning device 25065 according to the twenty-fifth embodiment has bearings 25816 and 24826 protruding from the rear surface of a front base 25810 and the front surface of an intermediate base 24820, respectively. These bearing portions 25816 and 24826 are portions that rotatably support both ends of the rotating shaft 25877 on their inner peripheral surfaces, and are formed in the same shape as each other.

The rotating shaft 25877 is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840 with respect to the front base 25810 and the intermediate base 24820, and its axial length is the length of the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840. Set to a dimension greater than the axial length. Therefore, the rotating shaft 25877 is fitted in the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840, and the portions protruding from both ends of the bearing 841 in the axial direction are supported by the bearing portion 25816 of the front base 25810 and the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate base 25820, respectively. (See FIG. 177).

Also, on the rear surface of the front base 25810, a push-up portion 25817 is provided to protrude on the side of the bearing portion 25816. As shown in FIG. The push-up portion 25817 is positioned on the locus of movement of the discharge surface 846 forming portion when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, and is discharged when the seesaw member 840 approaches the second state. It abuts against the lower surface of the surface 846 forming portion. Due to this contact, as will be described later, one side of the seesaw member 840 is pushed up by the push-up portion 25817, and the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is increased.

Next, the action of the push-up portion 25817 when the seesaw member 840 is rotated will be described.

FIG. 176(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 with the seesaw member 840 forming the first state, and FIG. 176(b) is the winning device 25065 with the seesaw member 840 forming the second state. is a cross-sectional view of.

177(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 along the line CLXXVIIa-CLXXVIIa in FIG. 176(a), and FIG. 177(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 along the line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 176(a). 177(c) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 taken along line CLXXVIIc-CLXXVIIc in FIG. 176(b), and FIG. 177(d) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CLXXVIId-CLXXVIId in FIG. 176(b) is a sectional view of the winning device 25065 in FIG. 176(a) and 176(b) correspond to FIGS. 52(a) and 52(b), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 176(a), 177(a), and 177(b), in the first state, since there is a gap between the seesaw member 840 and the push-up portion 25817, the rotating shaft 25877 177(a) left-right direction), both axial ends of the rotating shaft 25877 are supported by the bearing portion 25816 of the front cover 25810 and the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate cover 24820, respectively. be. In this case, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820 at the first inclination angle.

When the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state shown in FIGS. 176(a), 177(a), and 177(b) toward the second state, and the discharge surface 846 formation portion of the seesaw member 840 is lowered. , the lower surface of the portion forming the discharge surface 846 is brought into contact with the upper surface of the push-up portion 25817 (not shown).

From this state, when the seesaw member 840 is further rotated toward the second state, the lower surface of the portion forming the discharge surface 846 is in contact with the upper surface of the push-up portion 25817, so that the seesaw member 840 rotates toward the rotation shaft 25877. 174 (left front side in FIG. 174, left side in FIG. 177(a)), and the discharge surface 846 forming portion is not in contact with the upper surface of the push-up portion 25817 (right rear side in FIG. 174). , right side of FIG. 177(b)).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176(b), 27(c), and 177(d), when the seesaw member 840 reaches the second state, the one axial end side of the rotation shaft 25877 moves toward the inner periphery of the bearing portion 25816. It is lifted from the bottom surface, and the axis of the rotating shaft 25877 is tilted downward from the front base 25810 toward the intermediate base 24820 . As a result, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is tilted downward toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820 at a second tilt angle larger than the first tilt angle described above.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, the initial stage (until the lower surface of the discharge surface 846 formation portion comes into contact with the push-up portion 25817). section), the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is maintained at the first inclination angle (that is, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is not changed), and the final stage (the part where the discharge surface 846 is formed 25817), the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 can be rapidly increased to the second inclination angle.

As a result, in the initial stage, it is possible to easily suppress the rapid discharge of the game ball from the discharge surface 846 (that is, the game ball can be easily retained on the discharge surface 846), so that the second state can be formed more reliably. . On the other hand, in the final stage, the game ball can be quickly discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d easily, so the time when the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 (that is, the second state is formed) time) can be shortened, so that alternating switching between the first state and the second state can be performed more smoothly.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the groove 971 is recessed in the front surface of the frame plate substrate 910 in the third path M3 has been described. It is also possible to provide a protruding strip that is provided and extends in a substantially sawtooth shape when viewed from the front. In this case, as in the case of the recessed groove 971, the game ball flowing down the third path M3 can be guided along the outer surface of the ridge to meander left and right. Therefore, the falling speed of the game ball can be slowed down, and the movement of the game ball can be varied. Also, the ridges can be used as lenses for diffusing or condensing light.

In each of the embodiments described above, in the second state, the case where the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is positioned above the downward inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. However, in the second state, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is aligned in the height direction with the downwardly inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 or positioned below the downwardly inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a. You may form so that it may carry out.

In the above-described third embodiment, the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 3662 is used to slide the third displacement member 3660 relative to the first displacement member 3630, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, a groove is provided in one of the first displacement member 3630 or the third displacement member 3660, a pin that slides along the groove is provided in the other of the first displacement member 3630 or the third displacement member 3660, and the pin for the groove may be used to slide the third displacement member 3660 relative to the first displacement member 3630.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the relative rotation of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is performed by the weight of the second displacement member 740 (action of gravity) has been described. Instead, the elastic force of an elastic spring such as a coil spring or a torsion spring or an elastic body such as rubber or urethane is used to move the second displacement member 740 in either one direction or the other direction with respect to the first displacement member 730 . may be energized. Thereby, the relative rotation of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be stabilized.

In the tenth embodiment, the case of using the liquid LQ as the predetermined heavy object has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Other heavy objects may be those that can be displaced (for example, rolling or sliding) in the internal space of the retainer 10746 along the longitudinal direction as the posture of the retainer 10746 changes. Examples include spheres and cylindrical bodies made of metal. In that case, the internal space of retainer 10746 need not be sealed.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where a predetermined heavy load is held in the internal space of the retainer 10746 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The second displacement member 740 may be suspended from any position on the vertical line Z passing through G. Thus, when the second displacement member 740 is rotated about the rotation shaft 741 to one side or the other side, it is possible to displace a predetermined heavy object to the same side as the movement direction of the center of gravity G.

In the tenth embodiment described above, the retainer 10746 is arranged at a position where the center in the longitudinal direction thereof coincides with the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740, but this is not necessarily the case. However, it is preferable to position the center of the retainer 10746 in the longitudinal direction on the vertical line Z passing through the center of gravity G.

In the eleventh embodiment, the return operation of the second displacement member 740 to the crossing angle γ1 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is performed using the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP, but this is not necessarily the case. However, the biasing spring SP may be omitted and the movement may be performed by the weight of the second displacement member 740 (action of gravity).

In the twenty-fourth and twenty-fifth embodiments, in the first state, the rotating shaft 24877 is pivotally supported in a posture in which the axis is parallel to the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 173(a)). , but not necessarily limited to this, in the first state, the height position of one axial end of the rotating shaft 24877 (the side on which the cam portion 24877b is formed) is higher (or lower) than the other axial end. position may be set. That is, the above-described first tilt angle (the tilt angle at which the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 in the first state is tilted downward toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820) is the above-described second tilt angle (the second tilt angle). It suffices if the ejection surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 in the two states is formed to be able to increase to a greater inclination angle than the inclination angle downwardly inclined toward the ejection port 821d of the intermediate base 24820).

In the 21st and 22nd embodiments, a case where a sufficient gap is not formed between the rotating members 21870, 22870 and the front base 810 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A predetermined gap may be provided between the receiving plate 21872 and the pushing plate 21873 and the front base 810 . In this case, it is preferable to provide a predetermined gap only on the receiving plate 21872 side. This provides the same effect as in the twenty-third embodiment.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 in each embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 257. FIG. In this first control example, normal state (low probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols), probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols and time saving state of normal symbols), and latent state ( There are three game states, namely, a high-probability state of special symbols and a normal state of normal symbols. And it is configured so that the latent state is the most advantageous game state for the player. More specifically, in the latency state, the variation time of the variation display that is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 1640 is made shorter than in other gaming states (600 seconds → 0.5 seconds). In addition, the normal pattern normal state (low probability state) and the normal pattern time saving state (high probability state) are configured so that the probability of winning the normal pattern is almost the same (231/240 → 232/240), The open period of the electric accessory 1640a in the case of winning the normal symbol is common (1 second×2 times). As a result, in the hidden state in which the normal state of the normal pattern is set, the ball is aimed at the second ball entrance 1640 rather than hitting the ball aiming at the first ball entrance 64 (so-called left-handed hitting). By hitting (so-called right hitting), the lottery of special symbols can be executed more efficiently. Hereinafter, the special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is referred to as the first special symbol lottery, and the ball enters the second ball entrance 1640. The special symbol lottery executed based on the ball being thrown is called a second special symbol lottery.

In the first control example, the lottery for the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol. Specifically, in the lottery for the second special symbol, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period (1.648 seconds x 1 time, 0.06 seconds x 6 times, or 0.06 seconds x 8 times ) is released. Therefore, even if the lottery of the second special pattern does not result in a big win, it is more advantageous than the lottery of the first special pattern because it gives a lot of opportunities to enter the ball into the specific prize winning port 65a and win the prize ball. becomes. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of explanation, the result of the lost lottery in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened will be referred to as a "small win".

In addition to the big hit in the lottery of the second special pattern, the specific prize winning port 65a is opened even when the small win is achieved, thereby increasing the number of prize balls in the latent state where the fluctuation time of the second special pattern is short. can continue to let Therefore, it is possible to play a game in anticipation of a latent definite state. In addition, although details will be described later, in the normal state and the variable probability state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is extremely long, so the frequency of opening the specific winning opening 65a as a big hit or a small hit is the latent state significantly reduced compared to Therefore, in the normal state and the variable probability state, the number of balls used in the game is larger than that of prize balls even if the player hits to the right. Therefore, in the normal state and the variable probability state, it is more advantageous to hit left. In a general game machine, the variable probability state is the most advantageous game state, but in this control example, the latent probability state is more advantageous than the variable probability state, so it is possible to provide novel game characteristics.

In addition, in the first control example, the variation display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous using the variable method). As a result, even when the variable display of one special pattern is being executed, the variable display of the other special pattern can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the lottery of the special patterns can be executed more efficiently. can. Also, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, if one of them stops fluctuating with a jackpot or a small hit stop pattern, the other fluctuation display will be the remaining fluctuation time or the lottery. Regardless of the result, it will be stopped with a stop symbol that is out. As a result, during execution of a big win or a small win, the other variable display is fixedly displayed as a win or a small win, and it is possible to prevent the problem that the big win or the small win is started redundantly.

First, details of the variable winning device 65 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 180. FIG. FIG. 178 is a front view of the center frame 86 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 178, a second through gate 67 is arranged on the right side of the center frame 86, and a variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower left side of the second through gate 67. As shown in FIG. There is a possibility that the ball will reach the second through gate 67 and the variable winning device 65 when the player hits to the right. In FIG. 178, in order to facilitate understanding of the structure of the variable winning device 65, of the cover provided on the front side of the variable winning device 65 when viewed from the front, the portion other than the outer peripheral portion is omitted. (Part CLXXIX in FIG. 178).

Here, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 179(a) and (b). 179 is an enlarged view of the CLXXIX portion in FIG. 178. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 179(a) and (b), the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening into which game balls can enter. Below the specific winning opening 65a, a detection opening 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor for detecting winning of a game ball is arranged. A game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is distributed to either the normal discharge channel 65e1 or the special discharge channel 65e2 provided on the downstream side.

As shown in FIGS. 179(a) and 179(b), the opening of the specific prize winning port 65a is opened by the opening/closing plate 65f1 so that the game ball can be entered, and is in a closed state where the game ball cannot be entered (difficult to enter the ball). and is variable. In the closed state, the opening is covered with the opening/closing plate 65f1, and the ball can flow down the right side of the opening/closing plate 65f1. Further, in the open state, the opening/closing plate 65f1 is configured so that the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is opened by tilting toward the right side in front view.

By configuring in this way, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball flows down the flow path on the right side of the variable winning device 65 when viewed from the front, to the second ball entrance 1640 side. is configured to be induced. Therefore, in the most advantageous latent state, the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 1640 to perform the lottery of the second special symbol, and when a small hit or a big hit is made, the specific winning opening 65a. Winning a prize ball by hitting the ball into the bottom can be achieved by simply continuing to hit right. Therefore, in the latent state, the player can play the game more easily.

Next, referring to FIGS. 179(a) and 179(b), the opening/closing plate 65f1 is opened, and game balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a are distributed to the normal discharge channel 65e1 and the special discharge channel 65e2, which will be described later. The configuration to be used will be described.

First, referring to FIG. 179(a), the case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1 will be described. In FIG. 179(a), the channel solenoid 65k is inactive, and the switching member 65h protrudes to the left side of the front view (the channel side where the ball flows down). It is a figure which shows the state which block|closes the opening surface.

When the opening/closing plate 65f1 is opened, the game ball entering the specific winning hole 65a flows down through the detection hole 65a1. Then, the game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the switching member 65h, and as a result of being blocked by the switching member 65h from flowing down the special discharge channel 65e2, the normal discharge channel You will be directed to 65e1. A discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge channel 65e1. With this discharge confirmation switch 65e4, the number of out balls discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as out balls from the normal discharge passage 65e1 can be accurately detected.

Next, referring to FIG. 179(b), the case where the game ball is guided to the special discharge channel 65e2 will be described. FIG. 179(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the channel solenoid 65k is activated and the switching member 65h is retracted to the right in front view, thereby opening the opening of the entrance of the special discharge channel 65e2. .

As shown in FIG. 179(b), the game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 flows down along the outer peripheral wall and is guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. The game ball guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2 is provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2, is detected by the V passage switch 65e3 configured by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball, and is detected as an out ball. It is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 . As a result, whether or not all the game balls entering the variable winning device 65 have been discharged can be determined by the sum of the out balls detected by the V passage switch 65e3 and the out balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 65e4. Therefore, when trouble such as clogged balls occurs in the variable winning device 65, the trouble can be found early.

Here, details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the game ball passes through the above-described V passing switch 65e3 during the big win game, so that the game state after the big win is a special symbol probability variable state ( definite variable state, or latent definite state) is set. That is, the V pass switch 65e3 is configured as a prize winning opening for providing a probability variable state of the special symbol. In addition, the switching member 65h has a configuration for distributing the game state after the big hit to a low probability state or a variable probability state of the special symbols.

In this way, the game state set after the big win game is varied according to the downflow route of the game balls that have entered the specific winning hole 65a during the big win game, so that the interest of the player can be improved even during the big win game. . The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 65e2 (opening surface closed by the switching member 65h) is 1 second at the longest. As for the operation of the switching member 65h, the operation timing and the operation time are set in association with the elapsed time after the start of the big win. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 180, but in this control example, the switching member 65h operates for 4 seconds after the start of the first round of the jackpot, and the special discharge flow continues to the V passage switch 65e3. A game ball can pass through the path 65e2.

In this way, when a game ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the detection hole 65a1, the player receives a prize ball (in this example of control, for one ball winning) as a privilege. 15 prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by utilizing the game ball after being detected by the detection port 65a1, whether or not to pass through the V passing switch 65e3 can be sorted, so that whether or not to give the probability variable state of the special symbol A lottery can also be performed. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated prize winning port for giving variable probability states of special symbols separately from the variable prize winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 180, the correspondence relationship between the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65f1 in one jackpot will be described. In this control example, by varying the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 in the first round of the big win according to the type of the big win, the easiness of the ball flowing down the special discharge channel 65e2 is changed. In this control example, two types of patterns (a pattern that makes it difficult to enter a ball into the specific winning hole 65a and a pattern that makes it easy to enter a ball) are provided as the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1.

FIG. 180 is a diagram schematically showing time-measured changes in the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and time-measured changes in opening/closing timing of the opening/closing plate 65f1 for each jackpot type. As shown in FIG. 180(a), the flow path solenoid 65k is kept off before the start of one round of jackpots. That is, before the start of one round, the state is such that the ball can flow down to the normal discharge channel 65e1 (see FIG. 179(a)). This off state continues until one round starts. Then, when the first round is started, the channel solenoid 65k is set to the ON state for 4 seconds. That is, the state is such that the ball can flow down to the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 179(a)). When the ON state period of 4 seconds ends, the passage solenoid 65k is set to the OFF state again (set to a state in which the ball can flow down to the normal discharge passage 65e1), and thereafter the OFF state until the jackpot ends. kept in

Further, as shown in FIG. 180(b), when the jackpot C is reached, the closed opening/closing plate 65f1 is opened when one round starts. A ball can enter the inside of the variable winning device 65 by opening the opening/closing plate 65f1. This open state lasts only 0.2 seconds. After 0.2 seconds have passed since the open/close plate 65f1 was opened, the open/close plate 65f1 is kept closed until 2.9 seconds have passed since the start of the first round. Then, when 2.9 seconds have passed since the start of the first round, the opening/closing plate 65f1 is set to the open state again. This open state continues for only 0.1 second, after which one round ends and the open/close plate 65f1 is kept closed until the second round starts after an interval period of 5 seconds. One round in this control example ends when 10 balls enter the specific winning hole 65a or three seconds elapse after the start of one round. It is very difficult to enter the ball into the specific winning hole 65a during the open period of 0.2 seconds and the open period of 0.1 seconds. , the big hit ends without the ball flowing down to the special discharge channel 65e2. That is, since the ball cannot be passed through the V-passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, the variable probability state of the special symbol is not given after the big hit. Therefore, when the jackpot C is reached, the game state after the jackpot is disadvantageous to the player compared to the other jackpot types. In addition, although the probability is low, when the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during 0.2 seconds or 0.1 seconds when the opening and closing plate 65f1 is opened, and the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 , can be shifted to a special symbol probability variable state after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, even when the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the game can be played in anticipation of setting the probability variable state of the special symbols after the jackpot ends.

Also, as shown in FIG. 180(c), when any one of the jackpots A, B, D to G is achieved, the opening/closing plate 65f1 is opened for three seconds after the start of the first round of jackpots. That is, an opening/closing pattern is set in which it is easy for the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a in the first round. Therefore, the ball can be easily passed through the V-pass switch 65e3 by entering the specific winning hole 65a during the open period of 3 seconds which is longer than the big win C. Therefore, when the big wins A, B, E to G are achieved, the ball can easily pass through the V-pass switch 65e3 during the big win. Then, after the big hit, it is possible to shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol.

The ON period of the passage solenoid 65k is one second longer than the opening period of the opening/closing plate 65f1 because the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a and then reaches the special discharge passage 65e2. This is because it takes a maximum of 1 second to complete. That is, even if a ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a just before the end of the first round of the jackpot flows down in the maximum flow time, the ball can pass through the V-pass switch 65e3. As a result, when the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a in the first round of the big win, the variable probability state of the special symbol can be imparted after the big win regardless of the timing of entering the ball.

Thus, in this control example, the easiness of shifting to the variable probability state is varied according to the jackpot type. As a result, the game can be played in anticipation of setting an opening/closing pattern that facilitates transition to the variable probability state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 181, transition of the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. FIG. 181 is a schematic diagram schematically showing how to shift from one game state to another game state with respect to the three types of game states set in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example.

First, a description will be given of how to transition to the game state when staying in the normal state. As described above, in the normal state, the frequency of drawing special symbols tends to be higher when playing the game with the left hand than when playing the game with the right hand, so the left hand is more advantageous for the player. This is because it becomes easier to enter the ball into the first ball entrance 64 when hitting left-handed. In addition, as described above, in the lottery for the first special symbol that is executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, a small win is not drawn. It becomes a disadvantageous state that continues to decrease. In this normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to another game state only when a big win is achieved. In addition, four types of jackpots A to D are provided as jackpot types that can be won in the lottery of the first special symbol. Details of these jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG. 192(a).

As shown on the left side of FIG. 181, in the normal game state ST1 (normal state), when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, when the jackpot A determined at a rate of 32% is reached, after the jackpot ends, FIG. It shifts to the probability variation gaming state ST2 (probability variation state) shown in the center. Also, in the normal game state ST1 (normal state), when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbols, if either jackpot B or D determined at a rate of 58% in total, after the jackpot ends, in FIG. 181 It shifts to the latent probability variable game state ST3 (latent probability state) shown on the right side. On the other hand, when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win and the big win C is determined at a rate of 10%, the normal state is set again as the game state after the big win (the normal state is looped. do).

As described above, in the latent state, the variation time of the second special symbols is shortened, and the game efficiency is increased when hitting to the right, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the normal state and the variable probability state, the variation time of the second special symbol is long, so the gaming efficiency when hitting to the right is extremely reduced, resulting in a disadvantageous gaming state compared to the latent probability state. . Therefore, in the normal state, the game can be played in anticipation of the big wins B and D that will trigger the transition to the advantageous latent state.

In the normal state, the game is usually played aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by hitting left, but the player intentionally hits right and the ball enters the second ball entrance 1640. Or, as a result of some of the left-handed balls entering the second ball entrance 1640, there is a possibility that the lottery for the second special symbol will result in a big win. In this case, all the jackpot types (jackets E to G) are common, and after the jackpot is completed, the state shifts to the probability variation gaming state ST2 (probability variation state). In the normal state, when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit, there is a possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent state at a rate of 58% (jackpots B, D), while the second in the normal state. When a special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent certainty state becomes zero. Therefore, it is possible to increase the demerit when performing the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol by hitting right in the normal state, so that the irregular game can be suppressed.

Also, as described above, even when the big wins A, B, D to G are achieved, if the ball cannot be passed through the V-pass switch 65e3 during the big win because the ball was not launched during the big win. , the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the most unfavorable normal state (the normal state is looped). On the other hand, even when the most unfavorable jackpot C is reached, if the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the most advantageous latent state.

Next, a description will be given of a game state transition method when staying in the variable probability state. As described above, in the variable probability state, as in the normal state, playing the game with the left hand tends to increase the lottery frequency of special symbols rather than playing the game with the right hand, so the left hand is more advantageous for the player. becomes. In addition, in the definite variable state, the probability of a special symbol jackpot is increased compared to the normal state, so it is advantageous compared to the normal state, but disadvantageous compared to the latent definite state. In the probability variation gaming state ST2 (probability variation state), if it becomes a big hit or if it is continuously lost over the lottery of special symbols of the specified number of times (120 times) after becoming the probability variation state, it will be in another gaming state. Transition.

Specifically, as shown in the central part of FIG. 181, when the jackpot C is determined at a rate of 10% when the first special symbol lottery is a jackpot, after the jackpot ends, the left side of FIG. to the normal game state ST1 (normal state) shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbols, if either the jackpot B or D is determined at a rate of 58% in total, after the jackpot ends, the latent probability variable game state ST3 shown on the right side of FIG. 181 (latent state). On the other hand, if the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot and the jackpot A is determined at a rate of 32%, the probability variable state is set again after the jackpot ends (the probability variable state is looped). . In addition, when the special symbol lottery of the specified number of times (120 times) continues to be lost in the variable probability state, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1 (normal state) after the specified number of times.

In the variable probability state, it is normal to play a game aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by hitting to the left as in the normal state, but the ball enters the second ball entrance 1640 and the second special There is also the possibility of winning a big prize by lottery of patterns. In this case, in common for all jackpot types (jackets E to G), the probability variation gaming state ST2 (probability variation state) is looped after the end of the jackpot. In the case of a jackpot due to the lottery of the first special symbol in the variable state, there is a possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent state at a rate of 58% (jackpots B, D) as in the normal state. When a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the second special symbols in the variable definite state, the possibility of shifting to the advantageous latent definite state becomes zero. Therefore, it is possible to increase the demerit when performing the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol by hitting the right hand in the probability variable state, so that the irregular game can be suppressed.

Next, a description will be given of a game state transition method when staying in the latent state. As described above, in the latent probability variable state, unlike the normal state and the probability variable state, the variation time of the second special symbol is short, so the lottery of the second special symbol can be efficiently performed by playing the game with the right hand. . Therefore, a right-handed hit is more advantageous for the player than a left-handed hit. In the latent definite variable game state ST3 (latent definite state), it shifts to another game state when it is lost continuously over the specified number of times (120 times) of special symbol lotteries mainly after becoming the latent definite state. do.

Specifically, as shown on the right side of FIG. 181, if the latent state is set and the special symbol lottery of the specified number of times (120 times) is continuously lost, after the specified number of times has passed, the normal It shifts to game state ST1 (normal state). On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the latent state where the game is played with the right hand (the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed) and the jackpot is won, basically after the big win (specified during the big win) If the ball is launched aiming at the winning hole 65a), the latent probability variable game state ST3 (latent probability state) is set again after the big hit is completed. Therefore, in the latent state, by continuing to win the big win before losing 120 consecutive times, the advantageous latent state and the big win with which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained are repeated. The game state becomes extremely advantageous for the player. Although the details will be described later, when the lottery for the special symbols is executed in the latent state (high probability state for special symbols), the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/80. In the 1/80 jackpot lottery, the probability of losing 120 times in a row is about 22% (79/80 to the 120th power), so the probability of winning the jackpot within 120 times in the latent state is about 78%. Therefore, once it enters the latent definite state, it becomes a very advantageous state in which the big win and the latent definite state loop at about 78%.

In addition, since the game is normally played with the right hand in the latent state, basically the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the first special symbol lottery is not executed. , If the player makes a mistake in the direction of launching, or if the player shifts to the hidden state while the reserved ball of the first special symbol remains in the normal state, etc., the first special symbol is displayed even in the hidden state. A lottery may be held. In this case, if a big win is achieved, there is a possibility of shifting to another game state. Specifically, when the jackpot C (distribution 10%) is reached in the lottery of the first special symbols in the latent state, the state shifts to the normal state after the jackpot. On the other hand, when the jackpots A, B, and D are obtained in the lottery of the first special symbols, the latent definite state is set again after the jackpot.

In addition, unlike the normal state and the probability variable state, the latent probability state is set even after the end of the jackpot A. This is to reduce the possibility of shifting to a disadvantageous variable probability state when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed after the state transition and the jackpot is won. Immediately after the transition to the latent state, the first special pattern lottery that was held is held and becomes a big hit, and if it shifts to the variable state, it will be in a disadvantageous state without benefiting from the latent state. Since the player falls, there is a risk that the player's motivation for playing the game will be lowered. On the other hand, in the first control example, when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit in an advantageous latency state, the rate of looping the latent probability state after the big hit is higher than the normal state or the variable probability state. is set to As a result, even when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win immediately after shifting to an advantageous latent certainty state, the latent certainty state is set again at a high rate (90%). Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a decrease in the player's motivation for playing the game.

Next, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 189. FIG. FIG. 182 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 182(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 182(b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 9 types of main patterns numbered from "1" to "9". Each main pattern is composed of rear patterns imitating various animals with numbers "1" to "9" attached thereto. Specifically, for example, the number "1" is attached to the rear design imitating an elephant, and the number "2" is attached to the rear design imitating a lion.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 is a big win, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variable display is finished. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur later. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

As shown in FIG. 182(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. Approximately 1/4 of the lower side of the .

The main display area Dm displays upper, middle, and lower three pattern rows L1, L2, and L3. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 is periodically scrolled in the left-right direction for variable display. In particular, the upper symbol row L1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row L2 and the lower symbol row L3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of left, middle and right for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. The left vertical line, the middle vertical line, and the right vertical line of the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, a downward-sloping line and an upward-sloping line in the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V4 and V5, respectively. During each game, the third symbols are stopped and displayed on the activated lines V1 to V5 in the order of upper symbol row L1→lower symbol row L3→middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is maintained for at least one second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period of time (one second or more), the player can determine whether or not the combination of the third symbols corresponds to the big win (the lottery result of the special symbol is the big win). presence or absence) can be suppressed from being overlooked. Also, when the combination of big winning patterns (combination of the same main patterns in this control example) is aligned on the effective lines V1 to V5 when the third pattern is stopped, a big winning moving image (opening performance) is displayed as a big winning.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to a loss and there is a held ball, a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the held ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. . In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third pattern of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special pattern is stop-displayed for one second in the absence of the reserved ball, the stop-display of the third pattern continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640 . Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration screen) indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed (see FIG. 186). ). A situation in which no ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640 even though the player continuously shoots the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is rare. In most cases, when the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the game by the pachinko machine 10 is not performed at all because the player quits the game. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and a demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration performance. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 1640 before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new ball entrance. Variation display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm. This sub-display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64 . In this control example, the ball entered the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display based on the first special symbol lottery was being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37). In this case, the number of ball entries is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds allows the player to clearly recognize the number of reserved balls whose variable display is currently reserved. In this control example, only the variable display of the first special symbol can be reserved, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not stored. Therefore, only the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

Next, an example of display contents actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 182(b). On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 182(b), a total of nine main symbols and sub-symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, on the right side and the left side of the display area Dm, three parts of the main symbols and three parts of the sub symbols are displayed. These show the lottery results of the first special symbol in the normal state and the variable probability state. Furthermore, a small area Dm1 for displaying a third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in the upper central portion of the main display area Dm. In this small area Dm1, a simple variable display of three third symbols composed only of numbers "1" to "9" is executed. Also in this small area Dm1, a big win is started by stop-displaying three third symbols composed of the same number. It should be noted that the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in a simpler manner than the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol is basically in the normal state and the variable state. This is because the lottery for the first special symbol is executed at the beginning of the game, and there is almost no opportunity for the lottery for the second special symbol to be executed. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol that is mainly executed is displayed in a larger display area, the game result is displayed more clearly. In the following description, the variable display of the special symbol that is mainly executed in each gaming state (in the normal state and the probability variable state, the variable display of the first special symbol corresponds) is called the main variation, and in each gaming state The variable display of the special symbol that is hardly executed when the regular game method is performed (in the normal state and the probability variable state, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponds) is called sub-variation.

In the small area Ds1 in the sub-display area Ds, the reserved symbols imitating a bird's face are displayed in the same number as the number of reserved balls of the first symbol. At the start of the variable display based on the corresponding reserved balls, the reserved symbols enter the inside of the house displayed on the right side in the small area Ds1. This allows the player to easily understand that the variable display corresponding to the held ball has started. Further, in the small area Ds1, a notice effect is sometimes performed such that a reserved symbol performs a special action or another character appears.

In this control example, the number of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 is held up to four times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to four. It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Also, it may be configured such that the ball entering the second ball entrance 1640 can be suspended. Alternatively, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the areas divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, colors or lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 183(a) and 183(b), the variation display effect (variation pattern effect) of the third symbol in this control example will be described. FIG. 183(a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when all the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows are fluctuating in the variable display effect. When each symbol row is fluctuating, each symbol row is scroll-displayed (varying display) from the right side to the left side of the screen. By executing the variable display, the player can easily recognize that the lottery for the special symbols has been newly executed. Therefore, the game can be played with the expectation of a big hit stop pattern (main patterns to which the same numbers are attached are aligned on any of the effective lines V1 to V5) after the end of the variable display presentation.

FIG. 183(b) shows an example of display contents when a ready-to-win effect is generated to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that the stop symbol of the big win will be stop-displayed in the variable display effect of the third symbol. It is a diagram.

Here, reach means a state in which the upper symbol row L1 and the lower symbol row L3 are stopped and displayed in variable display, and only the middle symbol row L2 is variably displayed, and on any of the activated lines V1 to V5. This is a mode in which the main symbols with the same number are stopped and displayed, suggesting that there is a chance that the main symbols with the same number are aligned on the activated line L1. In the example shown in FIG. 183(b), two main symbols with the number "1" attached on the activated line V4 are stopped and displayed, and the number "2" attached on the activated line V5. It shows a state in which two main symbols drawn are stopped and displayed. In this case, when the main symbol with the number "1" or "2" attached to the middle row of the medium symbol row L2 is stopped and displayed, it becomes a stop symbol for a big hit, so that the player will be rewarded with a big win. can be expected to become

The upper symbol L1 and the lower symbol row L3 are stopped and displayed, and when a ready-to-win occurs, a character "reach!" . By displaying this character, it is possible to make the player more certainly recognize the occurrence of ready-to-win. Therefore, it can be expected that the stop symbol of the big win will be stop-displayed at the end of the variable performance in which the reach has occurred.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 184 and 185, a special ready-to-win effect, which is a type of ready-to-win effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, will be described. In this special ready-to-win effect, once the effect (temporary stop effect) is executed as if all the symbol rows L1 to L3 were stopped and displayed in combination with the stop symbols corresponding to the loss, the symbol rows L1 to L3 are different. A special form of reach in which a different pattern row is newly displayed and reach occurs in the newly displayed pattern row and part (two) of the symbol rows L1 to L3 that are stopped and displayed. It is a performance. This special reach effect is selected as part of the reach effect, and is set so that the expectation that it will be a big hit is higher than the normal reach effect (it will be difficult to select if the lottery result of the special pattern is out). there is

As shown in FIG. 184(a), when the special ready-to-win effect is executed, first, each symbol row is stop-displayed (temporarily stopped) with an off stop symbol without being accompanied by a ready-to-win. In this case, when there is another symbol row on the upper side of the upper symbol row L1, the stop symbols of the combination of the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are stop-displayed. be. In the example of FIG. 184(a), main symbols with the numeral "1" are displayed in the middle of the upper symbol row L1 and on the left side of the middle symbol row L2. That is, if there is a symbol row above the upper symbol row L1, and the main symbol with the symbol "1" on the right side of the symbol row is stopped and displayed, the same number "1" is displayed. The main symbols marked with are stopped and displayed in the order in which they are arranged in a straight line. In addition, as a mode of temporary stop in the special ready-to-win effect, there are a plurality of modes other than a mode in which the main symbols with the same numbers are arranged in the left side of the upper symbol row L1 and the middle row of the middle symbol row L2 in an ascending rightward direction. is provided. For example, in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2, the main symbols with the same number on either the left side, the middle row, or the right side are aligned vertically, or the middle symbol of the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol are aligned. There is also provided a mode in which the main symbols having the same numbers as those on the right side of the row L2 are arranged upward to the right.

In the special ready-to-win production, after the third symbols of each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 are temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. Among the patterns, the main pattern changes to look up. By changing the mode, the player can easily recognize that the current variable display effect has not ended.

After each main pattern is changed to look up, as shown in FIG. 185(a), the screen angle (camera angle) is shifted toward the direction in which each main pattern is looked up (upward). is executed. When the effect of shifting the angle of the screen is performed, a new symbol row L4 in the process of shifting is displayed (the new symbol row L4 enters the frame). Along with this, the lower pattern row L4 is framed out of the screen.

Then, as shown in FIG. 185(b), when the new symbol row L4 appears (frame-in), the new symbol row L4 and the "1" displayed in the middle of the upper symbol row L1 are combined. The ready-to-win state is constituted by the main symbols with numbers and the main symbols with the number "1" displayed on the left side of the middle symbol row L2. Along with this, the main symbol on which the reach is applied (the main symbol with the number "1" attached) is changed to a form wearing an aura, and the characters "Reach!" Is displayed. As a result, when the fluctuation of the new symbol row L4 stops, if the main symbol with the number "1" attached to the right side is stopped and displayed, the main symbol with the same number on the new activated line V6 is displayed. 3 are aligned (the symbol for stopping the big win), it is possible to clearly suggest to the player that there is a chance to win the big win.

As described above, in the first control example, as a kind of ready-to-win effect, a special ready-to-win is provided in which a new symbol row is displayed after the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination that is not possible. ing. As a result, even when the symbols are stopped and displayed in an incorrect combination, it is possible to confirm the combination of the stop symbols in anticipation of developing a special ready-to-win effect. That is, the combination of the stop patterns can be confirmed by paying attention to whether it is a combination of the stop patterns that can develop into a special ready-to-win performance (a combination that becomes a ready-to-win when the new pattern row L4 is temporarily displayed). Therefore, every time an incorrect combination is stop-displayed in the variable display, development to a special ready-to-win effect can be expected, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the first control example, when the special ready-to-win effect is executed, the new symbol row L4 is displayed above the upper symbol row L1, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the new symbol row L4 may be displayed below the lower symbol row L3, and the middle symbol row L2, the lower symbol row L3, and the new symbol row L4 may form a reach. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a new symbol row L4 is displayed between each symbol row. That is, a new symbol row L4 appears between the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2, and a reach is formed by the upper symbol row L1, the middle symbol row L2, and the new symbol row L4. good too. Further, in the first control example, by erasing the lower symbol row L3 when the new symbol row L4 is displayed, the number of symbol rows displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not changed. Since the type of the displayed pattern row is changed, the size of each pattern displayed during the special ready-to-win effect and the size of each pattern displayed before the special ready-to-win effect can be unified. However, without being limited to this, a new symbol row L4 may be displayed so that the number of symbol rows displayed on the third symbol display device 81 increases.

Next, with reference to FIG. 186, the demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration screen) in the first control example will be described. FIG. 186(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the result of the variable display of the first special symbol is out in the normal state or the variable probability state. When there is no suspension of the first special symbol (when the number of suspended balls is 0), as long as the ball does not enter the first ball entrance 64, the combination of the third symbol at the time of stopping the fluctuation is within 30 seconds. continue to appear across. Then, after 30 seconds have passed, the screen is switched to the customer waiting demo screen shown in FIG. 186(b). In the example of FIG. 186(b), a movie of the sun setting over the mountains is displayed as the customer waiting demo screen. In this movie, the display content changes with the lapse of time. For example, as the time elapses, three birds pass in front of the mountain as shown in FIG. 186(c). By switching to this customer waiting demo screen, a player who is not playing a game can easily determine whether or not the table is empty. When the display is switched to the customer waiting demo screen, the stop symbol of the first special symbol is displayed in a simplified form (only numbers) on the upper left of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 186 (c), in the normal state and the probability variation state, the variation display (secondary variation) of the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol while the customer waiting demo screen is displayed. is started, or the 3rd symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the 1st special symbol is stopped and displayed, and 30 seconds have passed while only the secondary fluctuation is being executed, the customer waiting demo screen is displayed. It is configured so that As described above, in the normal state and the probability variable state, by setting the variation time of the second special symbol extremely long (600 seconds), it is configured to improve the game efficiency by hitting left rather than hitting right. . For this reason, when the player accidentally hits right in the normal state or the probability variable state, and the player quits the game immediately after the second special symbol variation display (secondary variation) is started. will keep the subvariation running for about 600 seconds. Under this circumstance, if the customer waiting demo screen is not displayed during execution of the secondary variation, the third symbol display device 81 will be displayed for a maximum of about 600 seconds even though no one is playing. There is a risk that the displayed content will appear as if a game is in progress. Therefore, other players may hesitate to start a game with the pachinko machine 10 until the secondary fluctuation ends, and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 may decrease.

On the other hand, in the first control example, after 30 seconds have passed since the main fluctuation is completed, regardless of whether or not the secondary fluctuation is being executed, the screen is switched to the customer waiting demo screen. And this customer waiting demo screen is configured to continue to be displayed until the next lottery of the first special symbol is executed (until the main fluctuation is started) regardless of whether the secondary fluctuation is being executed or not. there is With this configuration, even if the player enters the ball into the second ball entrance 1640 and quits the game immediately after the start of the variable display for 600 seconds, it will take about 30 seconds. After that, the customer waiting demo screen can be displayed. Therefore, other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demo screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is an empty machine, so that a game can be started with the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 from decreasing. In addition, in this first control example, as shown in FIG. 186(b), on the demonstration display screen when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are stopped and displayed, the stop symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and the Although the stop symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in substantially the same size, for example, the size of the special symbol on the main fluctuation side is larger than the size of the special symbol on the side of the secondary fluctuation. You may make it display. Also, in the display screen shown in FIG. 186(b), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper left, and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper center. The special symbol may be stopped and displayed on the upper left of the display screen, and the special symbol on the side of the secondary variation may be stopped and displayed on the upper center of the display screen. As a result, regardless of the game state, it is possible to easily grasp the fluctuation state of the main fluctuation simply by checking a specific portion of the display screen.

Next, with reference to FIG. 187, the display mode in the latent state will be described. As described above, in the first control example, the latent state is the most advantageous state. In this latent state, in the main display area Dm1, an effect (a character 811 resembling a rabbit running at full speed) different from the normal variable display is performed.

As shown in FIG. 187(a), in the latent state, a character 811 resembling a rabbit is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. Then, the variation display corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol (secondary variation in the latent state) is displayed in the upper center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the variation corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol. The display (primary variation in latent state) is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. In addition, as described above, in the latent state, the regular game method is to play the game aiming at the second ball entrance 1640 by hitting to the right, so the fluctuation display (main fluctuation) corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in a larger display area than the variation display (secondary variation) corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol. That is, the special symbol that is the main variation is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol based on the game state shifting from the normal state to the latent state, and the special symbol that is the secondary variation is the second special. Even if the symbol is changed to the first special symbol, the area where the secondary variation is displayed is configured not to be changed from the upper center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁This makes it possible to share and use at least a portion of the data that performs the display (variation display or demo display) for the sub-variation.

In addition, below the area for displaying the variation display (main variation) corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol, the character "right hit" is displayed. By displaying this character, the player can easily recognize that hitting to the right is the regular game method.

Further, in the remaining number display area D1 displayed on the upper left of the main display area Dm, an indication of the remaining number of times in the latent probability state (an indication of the number of lotteries until transition to the normal state) is displayed. In the example of FIG. 187(a), "40 times remaining" is displayed, and the player is informed that there is a possibility of shifting to the normal state when the special symbol lottery is lost 40 times in a row. suggests to. The remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is 120 times, which is the number of continuations of the latent certainty state, when the state is first shifted from another game state (normal state or probability variable state) to the latent certainty state. The value is decremented by one in conjunction with the start of the variable display indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this control example, even if a special symbol lottery results in a big win, the number of remaining times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is not reset, and the number of times before the big win continues to be displayed even after the big win ( That is, when a big win is achieved, the displayed number of times and the actual remaining number of times are shifted). If the player continues to hit the right hand according to the displayed instruction (characters of "Right hit"), the ball can be passed through the V passage switch 65e3 when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win. Since it is possible, a new probability state of 120 times is set after the end of the big win. Therefore, if a jackpot is won during the latent certainty state, the number of times the latent certainty state actually continues is greater than the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1. Although the details will be described later, the difference between the displayed remaining number of latent definite states and the actual remaining number of latent definite states is the displayed remaining number of times when the displayed remaining number of times becomes 0. (see FIG. 189). Thus, even if the displayed remaining number of times approaches 0, the game can be played in anticipation that the number of times will be added when the remaining number of times on the display becomes 0. - 特許庁

As described above, it is easier to win a small win in the lottery for the second special symbol. It becomes difficult for the player to determine whether or not he or she has won the prize and moved. In addition, in this control example, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is the same regardless of whether a big win or a small win is made. Specifically, even if a big win or a small win is made, by keeping the display mode in which the character 811 sprints during the big win or small win, the appearance of the third pattern display device 81 becomes a big win. It is configured so that it is difficult to determine whether it is a small win or a small win. Therefore, in the latent state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not there is a difference between the displayed remaining number of times and the actual remaining number of times, so that the displayed remaining number of times becomes zero. It is possible to make it difficult to predict whether or not the remaining number of times will be added and displayed when it becomes. Therefore, when the remaining number of times on the display becomes 0, the player can play the game with a strong expectation that the remaining number of times will be displayed in addition to the remaining number of times, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. be able to.

As described above, both the variable prize winning device 65 and the second ball entrance 1640 are arranged at positions where the ball can easily enter the ball by hitting to the right. Even if the display mode is the same as that during the variation of the third pattern or during the stop display of the third pattern, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from missing the winning ball of the big win or the small win. Therefore, when the remaining number of times on the display becomes 0, it is possible to make the player strongly expect that the number of times will be displayed with the number of times added, without causing a loss to the player.

FIG. 187(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 within 30 seconds after the end of the variable display corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol. In this case, the same display mode (a rabbit-like character 811 running) is displayed except that the symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, in the present first control example, in addition to not having the function of suspending the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely short in the latent state (0.5 seconds and ), the frequency of the fluctuation stop state becomes extremely high. Under such circumstances, if the display mode is changed (switched) between when the symbols are changing and when the variation is stopped, the display mode will switch frequently, which may confuse the player. Moreover, if the frequency of switching the display mode increases, there is a possibility that the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 will also increase.

Therefore, in the first control example, the display mode of the main display area Dm is made common during the variable display of the pattern and during the stationary display. As a result, frequent switching of the display mode can be suppressed, so that confusion of the player can be prevented (suppressed). Also, the processing load on the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, when 30 seconds have passed in the stealth state with the fluctuation stop state, the display mode is switched to the display mode (stealth proof display) in which the character 811 imitating a rabbit stands still. By switching the display mode, it is possible to easily recognize that the fluctuation stop state has continued for a long time (30 seconds or more). In addition, when 30 seconds have passed since the change stopped state in the stealth state, by displaying a screen (demonstration display for stealth) that is different from the customer waiting demo screen (see FIG. 186(b)), It is possible to easily recognize that the current game state is in the latent state. Therefore, for example, when a player who is playing in a latent state temporarily leaves the pachinko machine 10 due to a break or the like, it prevents (suppresses) the trouble that another player starts playing with the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加can do. The latent state is the most advantageous state in the pachinko machine 10, and since it is difficult to think of quitting the game during the latent state, the player who was playing the game only temporarily leaves the seat. This is because other players can be made to recognize that.

Furthermore, in the latent certainty state in the first control example, the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely short, so if the customer waiting demo screen (see FIG. 187(b)) is displayed, the second input When the ball enters the ball opening 1640, if it takes a long time to switch the screen, there is a possibility that the variable time will end before the effect associated with the ball entering is displayed. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player will feel distrust that the performance is not executed even though the ball has entered the second ball entrance 1640 . On the other hand, in this control example, instead of the customer waiting demo screen (see FIG. 187(b)) in the hidden state, the hidden confirmation demo display (FIG. 187(c)) in which the same character 811 as during fluctuation continues to be displayed ), it is possible to smoothly switch the display mode (effect mode) when the ball entering the second ball entrance 1640 is detected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of distrust.

Next, with reference to FIG. 188(a), a description will be given of the latent state end screen displayed when the latent state ends. FIG. 188(a) is a diagram showing this latent state end screen. This latent state end screen is displayed when the remaining number of lotteries in the latent state becomes zero.

As shown in FIG. 188(a), when the latent state end screen is displayed, the character 811 in the shape of a rabbit falls to the ground, and the upper side of the character 811 says, "Finish, return to left-handed." !” is displayed in the display area 812 . This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the advantageous latency state has ended. In addition, on the right side of the character 811, the characters "return to left-handed" are displayed. This display allows the player to return to left-handed hitting more reliably. In addition, this latent state end screen detects the entry into the first ball entrance 64 and starts the variable display, or after the latent state ends, the first special symbol is in a state where the fluctuation is stopped. will continue to be displayed until 30 seconds have elapsed. Then, when either of these two conditions is met, a result screen showing the prize balls obtained during the latent state and the total number of times the latent state has continued is displayed. The details of this result screen will be described with reference to FIG. 188(b).

FIG. 188(b) is a diagram showing an example of a result screen displayed after the end of the latent state. As shown in FIG. 188(b), after the end of the latent certainty state, when the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is first detected and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the variation A results screen is displayed showing the results of the latent state using time. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 188(b), the characters "456 GAME" are displayed as the number of times the latent state has continued (the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the latent state), and the number of times of continuation. Below the characters indicating , the characters "10030 points won!" indicating the total number of prize balls paid out during the latent state are displayed. By displaying these characters, the player can clearly understand how many times the latent state has continued and how many prize balls have been won. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game in the normal state without having any doubts about the finished potential state. In addition, by displaying the result screen after each latent state, the player can play the game with the aim of achieving a better result in the next latent state. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the result of the latent state (result) is not displayed during the latent state, but after the end of the latent state, it is displayed during the fluctuation time of the first special symbol that is executed first. , This is because the variation time of the second special symbol in the latent definite state is extremely short. Therefore, if the result of the latent certainty state is displayed during the variable display executed last in the latent certainty state, the result can only be displayed for an extremely short period of time. On the other hand, in the first control example, after the end of the latent certainty state, the results of the latent certainty state are displayed during the variable display of the first special symbol executed first. The status results can be displayed long enough. Although the details will be described later, in this first control example, in order to make the player confirm the result of the latent state more reliably, a lottery of special symbols is held twice after the latent state ends. A fixed variable time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol. With this configuration, the results can be displayed each time within the fixed variable time, so that the players can more reliably confirm the results.

Even if 30 seconds have passed since the end of the latent certainty state, if the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is not detected (the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is not started), , instead of the customer waiting demo screen, a result display is performed. After that, the result display in this case continues to be displayed until the change display of the first special symbol, which is performed when the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is first detected, ends. As a result, even a player who leaves the pachinko machine 10 for a break or the like immediately after the end of the latent state can be made to confirm the result of the latent state.

In addition, in the first control example, the result is not displayed until the variable display of the first special symbol is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the result of the latent certainty state is displayed immediately after the latent certainty state ends. Then, the display may be continued until the first variable display of the first special symbol is completed. By adopting a configuration in which the result is displayed immediately after the end of the latent certainty state, the player can immediately know the result of the completed latent certainty state. Therefore, even if it takes a long time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 after the player returns to the left-hand shot, the result of the latent state is not displayed and stress is given to the player. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the storage.

In addition, when displaying the result of the latent certain state immediately after the latent certain state ends, a measuring means for measuring the period after the latent certain state ends is provided, and the measuring means measures a predetermined period (for example, 12 Seconds) may be configured to display the result until the elapse. In this case, when the variation of the first special symbol is started before the lapse of the predetermined period, the result is continuously displayed until the variation is finished, and the variation of the first special symbol is started after the lapse of the predetermined period. In such a case, it may be configured to perform normal display instead of result display in that variation.

Furthermore, when the variation of the first special symbol for displaying the latent definite result is winning, it is preferable to change the display mode of the result. For example, it is preferable to display "10,030 points or more!" as a suggestive display suggesting that the player has won the prize on the normal result display screen shown in FIG. 188(b). In this way, by displaying the success/failure determination result of the special symbol using the result contents of the latent probability state, the player can be informed of the result display of the latent probability state and the success/failure determination result of the special symbol without discomfort. . In addition, if a jackpot is won during the period when the result display of the latent state is executed and the state is shifted to the latent state again, the contents of the result in the previous latent state are taken over and updated. good. As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game during the period in which the result display in the latent state is executed.

In addition, as an effect during the latent state, using the period of one special symbol variation or multiple special symbol variations, a display similar to the display screen of the latent state result displayed after the end of the latent state. An effect in which a screen is displayed (pseudo end effect) may be used. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected presentation, and to continue the latent state for the player even when the latent state is actually ended and the result display of the latent state is executed. You will be able to make people expect that.

Next, with reference to FIG. 189, the resurrection effect, which is a type of effect executed during the latent definite state, will be described. This resurrection effect is a effect that may be displayed when the remaining number of lotteries in the latent state displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 becomes zero. More specifically, when the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is 1 or more and the remaining number of lotteries on the display becomes 0, the actual remaining number of times is added to the remaining number of times on the display. It is a production to display.

When this resurrection effect is executed, first, the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 becomes 0 as in the case where the latent state end screen (see FIG. 188(a)) is displayed. , the character 811 imitating a rabbit falls to the ground. Then, as shown in FIG. 189, the character 811, which has once fallen to the ground, stands up, and the characters "resurrection" are displayed around the character 811. FIG. By executing this mode of presentation, the player can be made to recognize that the advantageous latent state will continue, so that the player can be pleased. In addition, the number of actual remaining latent states is displayed in addition to the number of remaining times display area D1 in accordance with the effect that the character 811 stands up. FIG. 189 illustrates a case where the display of the remaining count display area D1 is updated to "10 remaining counts" because there are actually 10 remaining latent definite state counts.

As described above, in the first control example, when the second special symbol lottery is a big hit during the latent state, and the remaining number of times of the latent state (actual remaining number) is updated to 120 times, the remaining It is configured to take over the obvious display content without resetting the remaining number of times displayed in the number display area D1 (remaining number of times on the display). Then, when there is a difference between the actual remaining number of times and the displayed remaining number of times and the displayed remaining number of times becomes 0, the revival is performed by adding the difference from the actual remaining number of times to the displayed remaining number of times. It is configured to execute production. By configuring in this way, even when the remaining number of times on the display approaches 0, the game can be played in anticipation that the resurrection effect will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game during the latent certainty state.

In addition, in this control example, the difference between the actual remaining number of times of the potential state and the displayed remaining number of times is added and displayed in the resurrection effect, but it is not limited to this. In the revival performance to be executed first, a configuration may be adopted in which a value smaller than the difference is added and displayed, and when the revival performance is executed once, the revival performance is always executed a plurality of times. As a result, when the resurrection performance is executed first in the latent certainty state of 1, it is confirmed that the resurrection performance is further executed even if the remaining number of times added by the resurrection performance is completed, so that the resurrection is performed next. The game can be played without anxiety until the performance is performed. In addition, the player can play the game looking forward to how many times the resurrection presentation will be performed. Also, when this resurrection effect is executed, it is preferable to execute the result display that is displayed when the latent certainty state ends, and then execute the resurrection effect. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 to 207. FIG. First, the details of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

The main controller 110 executes major processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 190) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 190, counters and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. used in

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, the selection of the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small hit) lottery and the jackpot type (jackpot pattern). A first winning type counter C2 used for , a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1 are used. A second winning random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols (second symbol display device 83), and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In addition, a small hit type counter C5 is used for selection of the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 208), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 227). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value for winning the first ball entrance 64 is stored, and each counter value for each winning prize for the second ball entrance 1640. A second special symbol execution area 203b to be stored is provided. In this control example, up to four holding balls are provided in the first ball entrance 64 . Therefore, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 during a period in which a special symbol lottery is possible, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable display or when the special symbol jackpot game is not in progress, each counter value is increased to the first. It is stored in the 1 special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and when a game ball wins in the second ball entrance 1640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b. After that, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is variably displayed (dynamic Various settings and control processing for displaying the image are executed. Further, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is used as it is for various settings and control processing for variably displaying the second special symbol.

On the other hand, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 during a period in which the first special symbol lottery is impossible, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or during the jackpot game with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, In addition, when the number of reserved balls in the first ball entrance 64 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example), each counter value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. be done. Also, if the number of pending balls for the first ball entrance 64 is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (four in this control example), each counter value is not acquired and prize balls (five in this embodiment) prize balls) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player. In addition, when the ball wins the second ball entrance 1640 during the second special symbol lottery period such as during the variable display of the second special symbol or during the jackpot game with the first special symbol or the second special symbol. , only prize balls (in this embodiment, 5 prize balls) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player without acquiring each counter value or the like.

In this control example, the upper limit of the number of held balls is set to 4 with respect to the first ball entrance 64, but it is not limited to this, and may be less than 4 (for example, 3), More than 4 (eg, 8) may be used. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not provide an upper limit. In addition, in this control example, the entry into the second ball entrance 1640 (variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is not suspended, but as with the first ball entrance 64, it is possible to hold and store it. may be configured.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 479. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 208) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 227).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and is the timing at which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640. is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is defined in the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 192(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the first winning random number counter C1 If the value coincides with the value of the random number for the big win defined in the first random number table 202a, it is determined as the special symbol big win. In addition, the value of the random number that becomes the small hit of the special symbol is specified in the small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 192(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 192(a). The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined as winning in each game state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 192(a), when the gaming state is a low probability gaming state, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the acquired first random number counter C1 is determined to be either "7 or 8", and if it is either "7 or 8", it is determined to be a big win. In addition, when the game state is a high probability game state, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is within the range of "0 to 5". If it is within the range of "0 to 5", it is determined to be a big hit.

Next, with reference to Drawing 192 (b), small hit random number table 202b is explained. The small hit random number table 202b is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined as a small hit is set in the special symbol lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 192(b), in the lottery for the first special symbol, no random number value for a small win is defined. That is, the lottery for the first special symbol does not result in a small hit. On the other hand, in the lottery for the second special symbol, regardless of the gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is within the range of "212 to 432". If it is within, it is determined to be a small hit.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that becomes a small winning, the first symbol The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is the one at the time of the small hit of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot, the second The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the 1-symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big win is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0-479. As described above, in the low-probability state of the special symbol, there are two values of the first winning random number counter C1 for the special symbol jackpot. It is stored in the random number table 202a. Among the total number of random numbers of 480, the total number of random number numbers that will result in a big win is 2, so the probability of a big win with a special symbol is "1/240". On the other hand, in the high-probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first winning random number counter C1 for the special symbol jackpot. 202a. Among the total number of random numbers of 480, the total number of random number numbers for a big hit is 6, so the probability of a big win for special symbols is "1/80".

Furthermore, as described above, there are 221 values of the first winning random number counter C1 that becomes a small winning in the lottery of the second special symbols, and the random numbers "212 to 432" are stored in the small winning random number table 202b. ing. Among the total number of random numbers of 480, the total number of small winning random numbers is 221, so the probability of winning a special symbol is "221/480" (approximately 46%).

Returning to FIG. 190, the description continues. The value of the first win type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, the big win type is selected based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 and the big winning type selection table 202d (see FIG. 193(a)). becomes. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 193(a).

The small hit type counter C5 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a small hit, based on the value of this small hit type counter and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 193 (b)), the small hit type (small hit A to C) will be selected. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 193(b).

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). One variation pattern is determined from the set variation pattern selection table by the variation type counter CS1. A variation time (dynamic display period) is set for this variation pattern, and the variation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the variation time. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 227) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 194 to 196) storing a random number for determining one fluctuation time of pattern fluctuation from the value (random number) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. located inside.

A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 194 to 196). In this variation pattern selection table 202f, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables are set according to the game state, and variation pattern selection tables are set for each winning/failure determination result. Details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 194 to 196. FIG.

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this example of control, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 208), and the ball has passed through either the left or right normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired when this is detected and stored in the second symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 .

Then, the value of the random number that becomes the normal winning pattern is defined in the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 192(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4. is equal to the value of the winning random number defined in the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol (second symbol). Details of the second winning random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 192(c).

FIG. 192(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second winning random number table 202c. In this second winning random number table 202c, there are 231 random numbers that are normal symbols when the probability of normal symbols is low (during the normal state of normal symbols), and the range is "0 to 230". . Since the total number of winning random numbers is 231 out of 240 possible random numbers of the second winning random number counter C4, the probability of winning a normal symbol is "231/240".

On the other hand, when the probability of normal symbols is high (during the time-saving state of normal symbols), there are 232 random numbers that are normal symbols, and the range is "0 to 231". Since the total number of winning random numbers is 232 out of 240 possible random numbers of the second winning random number counter C4, the probability of winning a normal symbol is "232/240". In this way, in this control example, since the random number value for winning the normal symbols differs only by one between the low-probability state of the normal symbols and the high-probability state of the normal symbols, the winning probabilities are almost the same. there is In addition, the variation time of the normal symbols and the opening time of the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second ball entrance 1640 in the case of winning the normal symbols are also the same. Therefore, the ease of entering the second ball entrance 1640 is the same between the normal symbol low probability state and the normal symbol high probability state. However, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, as described above, the variation time of the second special symbol in the normal state and the variable probability state is extremely longer (600 seconds) than the variation time in the probability state. As a result, in the normal state and the variable probability state, it becomes more difficult to execute the lottery of the second special symbol than in the latent state, so in the normal state and the variable probability state, the player aims at the first ball entrance 64 and plays the game. can be done.

When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second symbol display device 83 performs the variable display of normal symbols for 3 seconds. Then, in the low-probability state of normal symbols, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "0 to 230", it is determined to be winning, and the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 ends. After that, the symbol "O" is illuminated as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the second ball entrance 1640 is opened only "1 second x 2 times". On the other hand, in the high-probability state of normal symbols, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 231", it is determined to be winning, and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished. Afterwards, the "o" symbol is illuminated as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the second ball entrance 1640 is opened only "1 second x 2 times". In addition, in this control example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the normal electric accessary product opening time, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed within a range that does not impair the game performance.

Ordinary figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially added by 1 in the range of 0 to 198 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). When the game ball passes through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g for selecting the normal pattern fluctuation pattern based on the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 (see FIG. 197) is defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG. The details of this normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described later with reference to FIG.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see Fig. 208). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 227).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 to 197. FIG. FIG. 191 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this control example. In the ROM 202, in addition to the above-described first winning random number table 202a, small winning random number table 202b, and second winning random number table 202c, a large winning type selection table 202d, a small winning type selection table 202e, and a variation pattern selection At least a table 202f and a normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202g are provided.

First, with reference to FIG. 193(a), details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described. The jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 193(a)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is , are defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the jackpot type selection table 202d, and the first hit A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 193(a), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 31" in association with "jackpot A". . This "jackpot A" has 15 rounds, and the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 is an opening/closing pattern in which the V passage switch 65e3 can be passed (easily) in the first round of the big win (see FIG. 180(c)). is set. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 32 counter values are "jackpot A". ratio is 32% (32/100).

It should be noted that, in the case of "jackpot A", whether or not the time-saving state of the normal pattern is given depends on whether the game state at the time of winning the "jackpot A" and whether the V passage switch 65e3 was passed during the jackpot. It depends on whether or not Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193(a), when the "jackpot A" is set in the normal state and the probability variable state, and the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot, at the end of the jackpot 120 time reduction times are set. On the other hand, in other cases (when the V pass switch e3 is not passed during the jackpot, or when the jackpot is hit in the latent state and the V pass switch 65e3 is passed during the jackpot), the number of time saving times is not set. (set to 0 times). Therefore, when it becomes "jackpot A" in the normal state or the probability variable state, in many cases, the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the probability variable number of times of 120 times and the time saving number of times of 120 times are set, The game state after the big hit becomes a probability variable state. On the other hand, when it becomes "jackpot A" in the latent probability state, the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the probability variable number of times (and the number of time reduction times of 0 times) is set, and the game state after the jackpot. becomes latent. On the other hand, if the ball does not pass through the V passage switch 65e3 because the player did not hit the ball during the big win, the normal state, which is the most disadvantageous to the player, is set as the game state after the big win. be.

"Jackpot A" is one of the jackpot types with the largest number of rounds, so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained, but in the normal state and the variable state, basically the game state after the end of the jackpot. is set (advantageous latent state is not given), the game state after the big win is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, when "jackpot A" is reached in the probability state, the probability state is basically looped even after the end of the big win.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "32 to 80" in association with "jackpot B". This "jackpot B" has seven rounds, and the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 is an opening/closing pattern that allows (easily) passage through the V-passing switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpot (see FIG. 180(c)). is set. In addition, after the end of the "jackpot B", the time saving state is not provided (the number of time saving is set to 0 times). Therefore, after the end of the "jackpot B", basically the probability state (probability variable number of times 120 times, time saving number of times 0 times) is set. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 48 counter values are "jackpot B". 48% (48/100).

"Jack B" is one of the jackpot types with the fewest number of rounds, so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be won, but if the ball is hit toward the variable prize winning device 65 during the big win (right-handed) ), regardless of the game state, the player moves to an advantageous latent state, which is advantageous in terms of the game state. If the ball does not pass through the V-pass switch 65e3 during the big win because the ball is not hit during the big win, the game state after the big win is set to the normal state regardless of the game state at the time of winning. .

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "81 to 90" in association with "jackpot C". This "jackpot C" has seven rounds, and the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 is set to an opening/closing pattern (see FIG. 180(b)) in which it is difficult to pass through the V-passing switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpot. be. In addition, after the end of the "jackpot C", the time saving state is not given (the number of time saving is set to 0 times). Therefore, after the end of the "jackpot C", basically the normal state (both 0 times as the number of probability variation and the number of time reduction) is set. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values are the "jackpot C", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot C" is determined. ratio is 10% (10/100).

"Jackpot C" has the smallest number of rounds and is basically set to the most unfavorable normal state after the jackpot is finished regardless of the game state at the time of winning, so it is the jackpot type that is the most disadvantageous for the player. be. Although the possibility is low, if the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a within a short period of time when the specific winning opening 65a is opened, the ball will pass through the V passage switch 65e3. In this case, the most advantageous probability state is set after the big win.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "80 to 99" in association with "jackpot D". This "jackpot D" has 15 rounds, and the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 is an opening/closing pattern in which the V passage switch 65e3 can (easily) be passed in the first round of the jackpot (see FIG. 180(c)). is set. In addition, after the "jackpot D" is completed, the time saving state is not provided (the number of time saving times is set to 0). Therefore, after the end of the "jackpot D", basically the probability state (probability variable number of times 120 times, time saving number of times 0 times) is set. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values are the "jackpot D", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot D" is determined. ratio is 10% (10/100).

"Jackpot D" has the largest number of rounds, and basically the most advantageous latent state is set after the jackpot is finished regardless of the game state at the time of winning, so that the jackpot type is the most advantageous for the player. one of. If the ball does not pass through the V-pass switch 65e3 during the big win because the ball is not hit during the big win, the game state after the big win is set to the normal state regardless of the game state at the time of winning. .

On the other hand, as the type of jackpot by lottery of the second special symbols, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 79" is defined in association with "jackpot E". This "jackpot E" has seven rounds, and the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 is an opening/closing pattern that allows (easily) passage through the V-passing switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpot (see FIG. 180(c)). is set. Moreover, the number of times of time saving is set under the same conditions as the "jackpot A". In other words, when the "jackpot E" is set in the normal state or the probability variable state, and the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the number of times of time reduction is set to 120 times, and the game state after the jackpot becomes the probability variable state. . In addition, when "jackpot E" is won in the potential state and the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the number of times of time saving is set to 0 times, so the game state after the jackpot is the potential state. become (loop latent state). Also, when the ball does not pass through the V passage switch 65e3 during the big win, the number of times of time saving is set to 0 regardless of the game state at the time of winning, so the game state after the big win becomes the normal state. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 80 counter values are the "jackpot E", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the "jackpot E" is determined. ratio is 80% (80/100).

Since this "jackpot E" has the smallest number of rounds among the six jackpot types, it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls. On the other hand, the lottery for the second special pattern is basically performed in the latent state, and when the "jackpot E" is reached in the latent state, the latent state is basically looped even after the big win, so the game state after the big win. favors the player.

In addition, it becomes "big hit E" in the normal state and the variable probability state, and when the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3, it is configured to shift to the variable probability state. This is in order to suppress a game method that is unfair. That is, even if the "jackpot E" is obtained in the normal state or the probability variable state, if the latent state is set after the big hit, the normal state or the probability state is expected to shift to an advantageous latent state. There is a possibility that the player will play an irregular game method to execute the lottery for the second special symbol (perform a right-handed stroke) even in the variable probability state. Therefore, in this control example, the second special symbol jackpot (jackpot E to G) is obtained in the normal state or the probability variable state, and when the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the game state after the jackpot is the probability variable state. is configured to be set. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the advantage of performing the lottery for the second special symbol in the normal state or the variable probability state, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the irregular game method of always hitting to the right.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "80 to 95" in association with "jackpot F". This "jackpot F" has 15 rounds, and the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 is an opening/closing pattern that allows (easily) the passage of the V-passing switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpot (see FIG. 180(c)). is set. In addition, the number of times of time saving is set under the same conditions as "jackpot A" and "jackpot E". That is, when the "jackpot F" is won in the normal state or the variable probability state, and the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the number of times of time saving is set to 120 times. On the other hand, in other cases, the number of times of time saving is not set (set to 0 times). Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 15 counter values become the "jackpot F", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the "jackpot F" is determined. ratio is 15% (15/100).

Although this "jackpot F" has a large number of rounds, the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 in each round other than the first round is different from other jackpot types. More specifically, an opening/closing pattern (special opening/closing pattern) is set in which the opening/closing plate 65f1 is opened only for a maximum of 0.06 seconds in each of the 2nd to 15th rounds of the "jackpot F". Since it is difficult to enter the ball into the specific winning hole 65a in 0.06 seconds, it becomes difficult to win the prize ball in the 2nd to 15th rounds of the "jackpot F". In this way, the reason why the special opening/closing pattern is set in the case of "big hit F" is that when the opening/closing plate 65f1 is opened in the latent state, it is either a small hit or a "big hit F". This is to make it ambiguous. Details will be described later, but the small hit of this control example is a small hit A in which the opening and closing plate 65f1 is opened only once for a relatively long time (1.648 seconds), and a short time (0.06 seconds). Small hits B and C are provided in which the opening operation is repeated multiple times. Therefore, by setting a special opening/closing pattern in the case of a "big hit F", it is possible to make the operation of the opening/closing plate 65f1 similar to the case of a small win B or a small win C after a small win A. can. As a result, it is difficult to discriminate whether the 120-time probability state is reset by becoming a "jackpot F" during the probability state, or whether the number of small wins is successively won and the number of times is subtracted. can be Therefore, whether or not the number of times of the remaining definite state on the display matches the actual remaining number of times (whether or not the definite state ends when the remaining number of times on the display becomes 0 or not) is determined. Since it can be difficult to distinguish from the appearance, when the remaining number of times on the display approaches 0, a revival effect (see FIG. 189) is performed and the remaining number of times on the display is displayed on top of the remaining number of times. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game during the latent state of the player.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "95 to 99" in association with "jackpot G". This "jackpot G" has 15 rounds, and the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 is an opening/closing pattern that allows (easily) passage through the V-passing switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpot (see FIG. 180(c)). is set. Also, the number of times of time saving is set under the same conditions as "jackpot A", "jackpot E", and "jackpot F". That is, when the "jackpot G" is won in the normal state or the variable probability state and the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot, 120 times of time saving is set. On the other hand, in other cases, the number of times of time saving is not set (set to 0 times). Among 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the number of counter values that become the "jackpot G" is five, so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot G" is determined. ratio is 5% (5/100).

Since this "jackpot G" has the largest number of rounds among the six types of jackpot types, it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls. In addition, the lottery for the second special pattern is basically performed in the latent state, and if the "jackpot G" is reached in the latent state, the latent state is basically looped even after the big win, so the game state after the big win is established. is also advantageous to the player.

Thus, in this control example, when the left-handed hit is performed in the normal state or the variable probability state, and the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the latent probability state is advantageous at a rate of 58% (jackpots B, D). configured to move to Then, in the latent definite state, the player hits to the right, and when the second special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the advantageous latent definite state is looped at a rate of 100% (big hits E to G). Therefore, once the latent state (probability variable state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols) is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is performed by winning the second ball entrance 1640 by hitting to the right. It is easy to execute, and the state with a high jackpot probability and the jackpot of the second special symbol are likely to be repeated. For this reason, the player can play the game with the purpose of making the transition to the latent state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to Drawing 193 (b), the details of small hit classification selection table 202e are explained. This small hit type selection table 202e is a data table that is referred to for determining the type of small hit when the first special symbol lottery results in a small hit. In this small hit type selection table 202e, a corresponding small hit type is defined for each range of values of the small hit type counter C5.

As shown in FIG. 193(b), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "0 to 93" in association with "small hit A". This "small win A" is a small win type in which the opening/closing plate 65f1 of the variable prize winning device 65 is set to the open state only once for 1.648 seconds during the small win game. Of the 100 possible random numbers of the small hit type counter C5, the number of random numbers that become "small hit A" is 94, so when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit, "small hit A" is obtained. is determined 94% (94/100).

Further, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "94 to 98" in association with "small hit B". This "small win B" is a small win type in which the opening/closing plate 65f1 is set to be opened 6 times for 0.06 seconds during the small win game. Among the 100 possible random numbers of the small hit type counter C5, there are 5 random numbers that become "small hit B", so when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit, "small hit B". is determined at 5% (5/100).

Furthermore, the value "99" of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with "small hit C". This "small win C" is a small win type in which the opening/closing plate 65f1 is set to be opened 0.06 seconds×8 times during the small win game. Among the 100 possible random numbers of the small winning type counter C5, one random number becomes ``small winning C'', so when a special symbol lottery results in a small winning, it becomes ``small winning C''. The proportion is 1% (1/100).

Thus, in this control example, a small winning game is executed in which the opening/closing plate 65f1 opens and closes one or more times, triggered by a small winning in the special symbol lottery. As a result, when the opening/closing plate 65f1 performs the opening/closing operation in the latent sure state, it is made difficult to determine whether the opening/closing operation is due to the winning of the big win or the winning of the small win. can be done. Therefore, even if the lottery of the second special symbols executed during the latent definite state does not result in a big win even once, when the number of remaining times of the latent definite state on the display approaches 0, the resurrection performance is performed. can be expected. In addition, in this control example, when the lottery for the second special symbol is performed, the percentage of small hits is about 46%. Therefore, in the lottery of 120 times of special symbols set as a latent probability state, a small hit is won about 55 times. Therefore, since the opening/closing plate 65f1 is frequently opened and closed during the latent certainty state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the win is a big win or a small win.

Next, details of the variation pattern selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. 194 to 196. FIG. As described above, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f defines a random number that determines the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation display from the value (random number) of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 194, the variation pattern selection table 202f includes a normal table A202f1 and a normal table B202f2 for determining the variation pattern (variation time) in the normal state, and for determining the variation pattern in the probability variation state. At least a definite variable table 202f3 and a definite variable table 202f4 for determining a variation pattern in the definite state are included. Specific contents of these tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 and 196. FIG. In each table shown in FIGS. 195 and 196, the fluctuation time is expressed in units of milliseconds, but in the following description, the fluctuation time is expressed in units of seconds for easy understanding.

First, the normal table A202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. This normal table A is a table that is referred to when the game state is the normal state and special symbol lotteries other than two times are executed immediately after the end of the latent probability variable state. FIG. 195 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this normal table A202f1. As shown in FIG. 195, the normal table A202f1 is a random value for determining the type of variation pattern (variation time) for each type of special symbol and each stop type of special symbol (counter of variation type counter value CS1 value) is specified.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determined when the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 50" and normal reach (20 seconds) is associated, Super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "51 to 100", Super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "101 to 150", Super reach is associated with the range of "151 to 198" C (30 seconds) is associated.

On the other hand, if the first special symbol is lost in the lottery and this normal table A202f1 is referred to, the correspondence between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the selected variation pattern is variable according to the number of held balls. do. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 195, when the number of held balls is within the range of 0 or 1, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "0 to 70" (10 seconds) is associated with the variation pattern of , and outside the range of "71 to 150", normal reach (20 seconds) is associated. In addition, as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the range of "151 to 170" is associated with super reach A (30 seconds), and the range of "171 to 198" is associated with super reach B (30 seconds). It is

On the other hand, when the number of held balls is 2 or 3, a short deviation (8 seconds) variation pattern is associated with the range of "0 to 70" as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation type As the value of the counter CS1, the range of "71 to 150" is associated with the variation pattern of long outliers (10 seconds), and the range of "151 to 170" is associated with the normal reach (20 seconds). In addition, as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the range of "171 to 185" is associated with super reach A (30 seconds), and the range of "185 to 198" is associated with super reach B (30 seconds). It is It should be noted that the process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol with reference to the normal table A202f1 (see S307 of S210) is faster than the process of subtracting the reserved balls of the first special symbol (see S303 of FIG. 210). Executed later. Therefore, the normal table A202f is not referred to when there are four reserved balls.

Thus, when the number of held balls is small (0 or 1), a variation pattern with a long fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than when the number of held balls is large (2 or 3). By configuring in this way, when the number of held balls is small, it is possible to secure the time for accumulating the held balls and make it difficult for the fluctuation display to be interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from becoming bored with the game. On the other hand, when the number of held balls is large, the fluctuation time becomes short and it becomes difficult to accumulate the held balls. can be prevented (suppressed) from entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that he or she has lost.

On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is executed and the normal table A202f1 is referred to, 600 seconds (10 minutes) is set as the variable time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the variation type counter CS1 can take is associated with the long variation A (600 seconds), When the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the small hit long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, When the lottery result of the second special symbol is out, the out long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the whole range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As a result, when the right hand is hit in the normal state and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the variation time is set to 600 seconds each time, so the game efficiency is extremely worse than when the left hand is hit. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which the player hits to the right normally.

Next, details of the normal table B202f2 will be described with reference to FIG. 196(a). This normal table B202f2 is a table that is referred to only when the game state is the normal state and the number of special symbol lotteries is two or less after the end of the latent certainty state.

As shown in FIG. 196(a), when this normal table B202f2 is referred to, the same variation time is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol or the number of reserved balls. Specifically, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation after ST (12 seconds) is associated with the entire range of values (0 to 198) that can be taken by the variation type counter CS1. ing. Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is out, the fluctuation after the out ST (12 seconds) is associated with the whole range of possible values (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Therefore, if the first or second special symbol lottery after the end of the latent definite state is the first special symbol lottery, the variation time of 12 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result. During these 12 seconds, the above-described latent state result display (see FIG. 188(b)) is performed. By adopting a configuration in which a fixed variable time is selected, it is possible to ensure sufficient time for displaying the result. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to fully confirm the result of the definite state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 196(a), for the lottery for the second special symbol, a fluctuation time of 600 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result, similarly to the normal table A202f1. Since the content is the same as the normal table A202f1 described above with reference to FIG. 195, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, after the end of the latent probability, not only the first special symbol lottery, but also the second special symbol lottery is the first special symbol lottery. This is because there is a possibility that the ball enters the second ball entrance 1640 during the period from the end of the latent definite state to the return to left-handed hitting, and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed first. . As in this control example, if the second special symbol lottery after the end of the latent probability is configured to set the variation time of 12 seconds, even if the second special symbol variation display is started first, Since the fluctuation time of 12 seconds can be set by executing the first special symbol lottery after that, regardless of whether or not the first special symbol lottery was executed first, every time. Result display can be performed for the same amount of time after the end of the latent state. Also, in the latent certainty state, it is conceivable that the lottery for the second special symbol is executed twice in succession without the lottery for the first special symbol being executed. However, as described above, when the fluctuation stop state of the first special symbol continues for 30 seconds or more after the latent certainty state ends (that is, when the main fluctuation does not start for 30 seconds), the result display is performed. It is configured. Therefore, even in this case, the results can be displayed for a sufficiently long time.

In addition, the result of the latent state (result) is not displayed during the latent state, but after the end of the latent state, it is displayed during the fluctuation time of the first special symbol that is executed first. , This is because the variation time of the second special symbol in the latent definite state is extremely short. Therefore, if the result of the latent certainty state is displayed during the variable display executed last in the latent certainty state, the result can only be displayed for an extremely short period of time. On the other hand, in the first control example, after the end of the latent certainty state, the results of the latent certainty state are displayed during the variable display of the first special symbol executed first. The status results can be displayed long enough. Although the details will be described later, in this first control example, in order to make the player confirm the result of the latent state more reliably, a lottery of special symbols is held twice after the latent state ends. A fixed variable time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol. With this configuration, the results can be displayed each time within the fixed variable time, so that the players can more reliably confirm the results.

In this control example, a fixed variable time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol. It may be set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. For example, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a win, a display suggesting the win may be executed in addition to the display contents of the result display. In addition, even when the lottery result of the second special symbol whose variation is performed simultaneously (in parallel) with the variation of the first special symbol whose result display is performed based on the variation of the first special symbol is a hit, In addition to the display contents of the result display executed based on the variation of the first special symbol, a display suggesting a win may be executed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to display the game result of the latent definite state and the lottery result of the special symbol in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

Further, in this control example, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed twice in succession after the end of the latent certainty state, the result display is executed only for the first fluctuation. In the second fluctuation, the fluctuation display based on the lottery result of the special symbol is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the latent definite game result is excessively displayed and the variable display based on the lottery result of the special symbol is not executed.

In addition, the probability variation table 202f3 has almost the same configuration as the normal table A202f1, so it will be briefly described. Each variation pattern (per normal reach, per super reach A to C) is selected at the selection ratio. Moreover, even when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the variable time of 600 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result, similarly to the normal state. On the other hand, when the lottery for the first special symbol is lost, a variation pattern with a shorter variation time than in the normal state is likely to be selected. This is because the odds of a big win are increased in the variable probability state, so if a variation pattern with a long variation time occurs frequently despite the failure, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in the first control example, when the first special symbol lottery is lost during the variable probability state, the variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected, and the variation pattern with a long variation time is configured. It is configured to make the player more strongly expect a big win when it is selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 196(b), the details of the confirmation table 202f4 will be described. This table 202f4 for latent probability is a table referred to for selecting a variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result when a special symbol lottery is executed in the latent probability state.

As shown in FIG. 196(b), the jackpot of the first special pattern is defined by matching the middle variation (60 seconds) with the whole range of values (0 to 198) that can be taken by the variation type counter CS1. It is Further, in the deviation of the first special symbol, the deviation super-short variation A (0.5 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range of possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198).

Also, as shown in FIG. 196(b), the second special symbol jackpot has a super short variation (0.5 seconds) for the entire range of possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198). is defined in association with the small hit of the second special symbol, and a small hit super short variation (0.5 seconds) is associated with the entire range of possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198). , and the deviation of the second special symbol is defined in association with the entire range of possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198) and the super short variation (0.5 seconds). . That is, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the latent certainty state, the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result.

In the latent state, the second special symbol lottery is basically performed, so the variation time is approximately 0.5 seconds. Therefore, the game can be played efficiently (speedily) by hitting to the right in an advantageous latent state. Also, even if the lottery for the first special symbol is lost in the latent state, 0.5 seconds is selected as the variable time, so for example, in a state where there is one or more pending first special symbols When entering into the latent definite state, the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be quickly digested. Therefore, the player can play the game while concentrating on the variation display of the second special symbol, which is the main variation in the latent certainty state.

It should be noted that the relatively long variation time (60 seconds) is set when the first special symbol lottery is a jackpot in the latent state. This is because the latent state may end. Specifically, when the jackpot C is reached in the latent certainty state, an opening/closing pattern (see FIG. 180(b)) in which the ball is difficult to pass through the V passage switch 65e3 is set for the opening/closing plate 65f1, so basically the jackpot The game state after the end becomes the normal state. If such a situation occurs, there is a risk that the player's motivation for playing the game will be lowered. Therefore, in this control example, by setting a relatively long variation time when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the second special symbol is hit to the right during the first special symbol big hit variation. It is configured so that the lottery of symbols can be executed a plurality of times. As described above, in the lottery of the second special symbol, about once every two times (at about 46%) to win a small hit, so before the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol ends, the second special symbol It is possible to end the small hit fluctuation with a high probability. As described above, in this control example, a simultaneous variation method is adopted in which the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. In addition, if the fluctuation display of one special design is confirmed and displayed with a stop design of a big hit or a small hit during simultaneous fluctuation, the fluctuation display of the other special design is the remaining fluctuation time or the lottery at the start of fluctuation Regardless of the result, it will be forcibly stopped with a stop symbol that is out. Therefore, even during the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol, the big hit of the first special symbol can be discarded by first confirming and displaying the stop symbol of the small hit due to the small hit variation of the second special symbol. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) with a high probability the start of the first special pattern jackpot, which may end the latent certainty state, so that the player can more surely enjoy the latent certainty state. can let

In addition, in this control example, 0.5 seconds is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol set corresponding to the latent state, but there is a small probability (for example, "1/199" ) to select a long variation time (eg, 12 seconds). Further, when a long fluctuation time is selected, a result display showing the above-described latent state game result (actually, the game result during the latent state game) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It should be displayed. As a result, it is possible to execute a performance that makes the latent definite state end during the latent definite state, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance, and the effect of enhancing the performance effect. There is

Next, with reference to FIG. 197, the details of the normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described. As described above, the normal pattern variation pattern table 202g is a table referred to for selecting a normal pattern variation pattern when a normal symbol lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 197, in this general pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g, for each game state at the time when the normal pattern lottery is executed, the range of the value of the general pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) and are defined in association with each other.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 197, when the gaming state is a normal state, the variation time is 3 seconds for the entire range of values that can be taken by the normal figure variation type counter CS2 (0 to 198) A variation pattern is associated. Similarly, when the game state is a probability variable state, a variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds is associated with the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the normal figure variation type counter CS2 can take.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is the potential state, the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 190", and the fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is associated with the normal pattern fluctuation type counter. A variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second is associated with the CS2 value range of "191 to 198". When the normal pattern lottery is executed in the latent definite state, by varying the variation time of the normal pattern, the time from the execution of the normal pattern lottery to the release of the electric accessory 1640a is predicted. can be made difficult. Therefore, the ball is hit one by one to the first through gate 66, the second first through gate 66, or the second through gate 67, and when the ball passes through one of the through gates, the normal pattern hits. In this case, the irregular game method of predicting the timing when the electric accessory 1640a is released and hitting the ball can be suppressed, and the player can continuously hit to the right during the latent definite state.

In addition, in the first control example, the configuration is such that a plurality of variation patterns are provided only in the latent state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the normal state and the probability variable state, the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal design may have variations.

In addition, in this control example, when the normal symbol lottery is executed in the latent certainty state, either one of two types of variation time, 1 second or 3 seconds, is set, but there are two types of variation time. , and may be configured so that more variation times can be selected. The more variations are given to the variation time, the more difficult it is for the player to predict the variation time, so that the player can be made to continuously hit the right hand more reliably during the latent definite state.

Furthermore, in this control example, the variation time of the normal design is set based on the game state and the value of the acquired normal pattern variation type counter CS2, but in addition to that, based on the number of reserved balls of the normal design It is also possible to use a configuration that changes the variation time by changing the variation time, a configuration that changes the variation time based on the number of special symbol lotteries, and a configuration that sets the variation time of the normal symbol by a method combining the above-described various configurations. Specifically, 1 second is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the game state shifts to the latent definite state, and after that (51 times to 120 times) may be configured such that 3 seconds is set as the normal symbol variation time. In addition, during the period when the even-numbered special symbol lottery is being executed after the game state shifts to the latent definite state, 1 second is set as the normal symbol variation time, and otherwise (odd-numbered times), It may be configured such that 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. In this way, by changing the variation time of the normal symbols based on the number of times the lottery of the special symbols is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the variation time. You can continuously hit right. In this case, when the special symbol lottery is not executed, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is longer (longer than when the special symbol lottery is executed), or the special symbol is changed. It is preferable to configure such that the variation time of the normal symbols becomes longer as the number of holding and storing the lottery is smaller.

Further, when setting the variation time of the normal symbol based on the number of retained balls of the normal symbol, it is preferable that the larger the number of retained balls of the normal symbol, the longer the variation time is likely to be selected. By constructing in this way, the pachinko machine 10 adjusted to make it difficult for the number of reserved balls of normal patterns to accumulate and the pachinko machine 10 adjusted to easily accumulate the number of reserved balls of normal patterns to increase the number of balls per unit time. Normal pattern lottery frequency can be made uniform.

Details of the RAM 203 will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 198 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 203 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 198, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol execution area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a normal symbol reserved ball. Number counter 203e, V winning flag 203f, time saving counter 203g, winning counter 203h, special figure 1 standby flag 203i, special figure 2 standby flag 203j, variable probability counter 203k, jackpot flag 203m, winning state storage area 203n, small win Flag 203o, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p, prefetching reservation storage area 203r, special figure 1 fluctuation timer 203s, special figure 2 fluctuation timer 203t, big hit flag 203u, small hit flag 203v, other memory area 203z ing.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area (first special symbol execution area) and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). The area stores the values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the small per type counter C5, and the variation type counter CS1.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), the value of each counter is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (first holding area to holding 4th area) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this control example, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

The second special symbol execution area 203b, like the first special symbol execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, stores a determination value (counter value) for executing a special symbol lottery. In this second special symbol execution area 203b, each counter value acquired at the timing when the start winning to the second entrance 1640 is detected is stored.

Like the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area (normal symbol reserved ball execution area) and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). ). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, when the ball passes through either the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is Among the vacant areas of the reservation areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area), the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in ascending order. That is, similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes vacant. A shift process is performed to pack the winning data into a reserve area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display of special symbols (first symbol display device 37, It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero. is incremented by 1 (see S1504 in FIG. 222). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S303 in FIG. 210).

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of holding the variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S304 of FIG. 210, of FIG. 222 S1505 reference). The pending ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113, every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed, by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the variable display of the variable display withheld by the main controller 110 It is possible to acquire the value of the number of retained balls itself. As a result, the number of holding balls of the variable display managed by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the holding of the actual variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if there is a deviation from the number of pitches, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of pending pitches command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is a normal symbol (second symbol) variable display held ball that is performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67. It is a counter that counts the number (waiting times) up to four times. The value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number M of holding variable display in normal symbols) is initially set to zero, and the ball passes through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67. 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 each time the number of held balls in the variable display increases (see S1704 in FIG. 224). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S1605 in FIG. 223).

When the ball passes through the first thru gate 66 or the second thru gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times M of variable display in normal symbols is held) is less than 4, the second The value of the hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (see S1705 in FIG. 224). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. It is not stored (see S1703: No in FIG. 224).

The V winning flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state after the jackpot game to the probability variable state. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the variable probability state is determined by whether or not the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 (see FIG. 179(b)) during the jackpot game. Here, when the ball passes through the V pass switch 65e3, the V winning flag 203f is set to ON (see S2410 in FIG. 231). On the other hand, this V winning flag 203f is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see S2307 in FIG. 230). The V winning flag 203f is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power was turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Moreover, it is set to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized.

If the V winning flag 203f is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the V passing switch 65e3 was passed before the power was turned off. The flag 203f may be formally set to ON to return. In this case, whether or not the V passage switch 65e3 is passed before the power is turned off can be determined by whether or not the variable probability passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value greater than zero. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement arcade side by discriminating fraud such as turning on only the V winning flag 203f while the power is turned off and turning on the power again. can.

The time saving counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving state. This time-saving counter 203g is set to 120 when one of the jackpots A, E to G is won in the normal state or the variable probability state, and the V winning flag 203f is ON at the end of the jackpot game. Also, the time-saving counter 203g is decremented by one in the game state update process executed immediately after setting the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (see S607 in FIG. 213). If the value of the time saving counter 203g is 1 or more when the lottery for the normal pattern is carried out, it is determined that the time saving state for the normal pattern is selected, and the suitability determination for the normal pattern is executed with reference to the table for the high probability time. (See S1610 in FIG. 223). On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 203g is 0, it is determined as the normal state of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol determination is performed with reference to the table for low probability (see S1611 in FIG. 223).

The winning counter 203h is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won (entered) the specific winning opening 65a in each round of the jackpot. When the value of the prize winning counter 203h reaches 5, which is the upper limit value, it is determined that the end condition for the round is met, and the round is ended (see S2406 in FIG. 231). It should be noted that even if the value of the winning counter 203h is less than 5 in each round of the jackpot, the round is terminated when the round period set for each round is reached. The prize winning counter 203h is incremented by 1 each time a ball is detected to enter the specific prize winning opening 65a during the jackpot round validity period. Also, the value is reset to 0 at the end of each round.

The special figure 1 standby flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not the first special symbol is in the fluctuation stop state. If this special figure 1 standby flag 203i is on, it indicates that the first special symbol is in a state of stopping fluctuation, and if it is off, the first special symbol is fluctuating or the first special symbol is reserved. It means that it is in the state just before starting the variable display based on the sphere. This special figure 1 standby flag 203i is set to ON when the first special symbol is not fluctuating and the number of pending balls is 0 (see S311 in FIG. 210). On the other hand, when the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol is set, it is set to OFF (see S309 in FIG. 210).

The special figure 2 standby flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not the second special symbol is in the fluctuation stop state. If this special figure 1 standby flag 203j is on, it indicates that the second special symbol is in a state of stopping the fluctuation, and if it is off, it means that the second special symbol is fluctuating. This special figure 2 standby flag 203j is set to ON when the second special symbol is not fluctuating and the start winning prize for the second entrance 1640 is not detected (see S809 in FIG. 215). On the other hand, when the start of variation of the second special symbol is set, it is set to OFF (see S807 in FIG. 215).

The variable probability counter 203k is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a variable probability state of special symbols (high probability state of special symbols). If the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 1 or more, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state, and if the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (special It indicates that it is a low probability state of the pattern).

The variable probability counter 203k has an initial value of 0, and when the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 during the big win, 120 is set at the end of the big win (see S2304 in FIG. 230). Also, in the game state update process (see FIG. 213) executed immediately after setting the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the value is subtracted by one (see FIG. 213). (see S602). Also, the variable probability counter 203k is reset to 0 when a jackpot game is started (see S708 in FIG. 214 and S1309 in FIG. 220). This probability variation counter 203k is referred to in order to determine whether or not the probability variation state of the special symbols in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 216). (See S402 in FIG. 211 and S902 in FIG. 216).

The jackpot flag 203m is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. 211 and S906 in FIG. 216). This jackpot flag 203m is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (see S708 in FIG. 214 and S1309 in FIG. 220). A 2-bit storage area is assigned to the jackpot flag 203m, and information corresponding to the first special design is stored in the upper bits and information corresponding to the second special design is stored in the lower bits. More specifically, if the jackpot flag 203m is "10B", it indicates that the jackpot has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and that the variable display showing the lottery result is in progress. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 203m is "01B", it indicates that the jackpot has been won in the lottery of the second special symbol, and that the variable display showing the lottery result is in progress. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 203m is "00B", it indicates that the jackpot variation is not executed.

When the variation time of the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the ON state ends while the jackpot flag 203m is ON, a process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol by removing the symbol is executed (S705 in FIG. 214, FIG. 220). (see S1306 of ). As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that one of the first special symbols and the second special symbol becomes a big win or a small win while one of the big wins is being executed.

The winning state storage area 203n is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a normal state (if the values of the time reduction counter 203g and the variable probability counter 203k are both 0), the normal state is indicated in the winning state storage area 203n. "00H" is stored as information. On the other hand, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probability variable state (if the values of the time reduction counter 203g and the probability variable counter 203k are both 1 or more), information indicating the probability variable state is stored in the winning state storage area 203n "01H" is stored. Also, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a latent state (if the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 and the value of the variable probability counter 203k is 1 or more), the winning state storage area 203n "02H" is stored as information indicating the certain state.

The information stored in the winning state storage area 203n is retained until the end of the big win, and is referred to when setting the time-saving game after the end of the big win (see S2301 in FIG. 230). As described above, when the jackpots A, E to G occur and the ball passes through the V-pass switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the game state after the jackpot varies depending on whether or not the game state at the time of winning is the latent state. I'm letting In this control example, information corresponding to the game state at the time of winning the big win is stored in the state storage area 203n at the time of winning, and by referring to it at the end of the big win, information corresponding to the type of big win and the game state at the time of winning the big win is stored. Appropriate game state can be set.

The small hit flag 203o is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 1640 matches the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation. This is a flag to be set (see S1002 in FIG. 217). This small win flag 203o is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small win (see S1405 in FIG. 220). When the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends while the small hit flag 203o is on, a process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol with the missing symbol is executed (see S1403 in FIG. 221). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem that a big win is made in the lottery of the first special symbol while the small winning of the second special symbol is being executed, and the big winning is started during the small winning. can.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is a flag indicating that it is a period between when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) by the stop symbol of the big hit and when the big win is started. When this special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to ON, even if there is a new entry to the second entrance 1640, the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. (See S801: Yes in FIG. 215). This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to ON when the second special symbol is forced to stop in the off design (see S703 in FIG. 214), avoiding the process for executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is set to OFF (S811 in FIG. 215).

The prefetch reservation storage area 203r is a storage area for storing the prediction result when the special symbol lottery result is predicted before the original special symbol lottery timing. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, immediately after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) and each counter value is acquired, each of the acquired From the counter value, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated). Predicting various information to be obtained when the original lottery is performed before the original lottery for the special symbols is performed in this way is hereinafter referred to as "prefetching". In the look-ahead reservation storage area 203r, at the timing when each counter value is acquired based on the start winning for the first entrance 64, the look-ahead result based on the counter value jackpot type, and variation pattern) are stored. Further, the same number of prefetch results as the number of reserved balls (that is, up to four) can be stored in the prefetch pending storage area 203r.

The special figure 1 variation timer 203s and the special figure 2 variation timer 203t are timers for measuring the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol respectively, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol When a variation pattern is selected, a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. It is determined whether or not the variation time of each special symbol has ended according to the timing results of the special figure 1 variation timer 203s and the special figure 2 variation timer 203t (see S701 in FIG. 214 and S1301 in FIG. 220).

The jackpot flag 203u is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot is in progress. When this jackpot middle flag 203u is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in jackpot, and when it is OFF, it indicates that it is not jackpot. This jackpot middle flag 203u is set to ON when the start of jackpot is set (see S709 in FIG. 214 and S1310 in FIG. 220). On the other hand, it is set to OFF in the jackpot end processing executed at the end of the jackpot (see S2307 in FIG. 230).

The flag 203v during a small hit is a flag which shows whether it is during a small hit. If this small winning medium flag 203v is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a small winning state, and if it is OFF, it indicates that it is not in a small winning state. This small hit medium flag 203v is set to ON when the start of the small hit is set (see S1406 in FIG. 221). On the other hand, it is set to OFF at the end of the small hit (see S2512 in FIG. 232).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is provided with various flags, counters, and the like. Based on various tables provided in the ROM 202 and flags and counters provided in the RAM 203, the basic functions of the pachinko machine 10 and the novel state transitions shown in FIG. 181 can be realized.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 199 and 200, the details of the electrical configuration of audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 199(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 199(a), the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and a screen display selection table 222b.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 by the sound ramp control device 113. ) to determine the details of the variable display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes. Here, one variation mode out of a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation contents instructed by the main controller 110 . It should be noted that the aspect of the special reach production described above (see FIGS. 184 and 185) is also defined in this variation pattern selection table 222a, and the variation content indicated by the variation pattern command is hit super reach A or lose super reach A. selected in some cases.

The screen display selection table 222b is a table that defines the display contents when 30 seconds have passed since the first special symbol or the second special symbol has stopped changing. As described above, in this example of control, the simultaneous variation method is adopted, and even if one special symbol is in the state of stopping the variation, the situation that the other special symbol is in the process of varying frequently occurs. In addition, depending on the game state, the variation display of the first special symbol becomes the main variation, or the variation display of the second special symbol becomes the main variation, and the special symbol that the player should pay attention to is switched. This screen display selection table 222b is referred to in order to appropriately display the variation display of the main symbol in each game state and to set the demonstration display corresponding to the game state when the main variation is stopped. Details of the screen display selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 200 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the screen display selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 200, this screen display selection table 222b is associated with the combination of the gaming state, the state of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s, and the state of the special figure 2 standby flag 223t, and the third symbol display device The display content (screen display type) to be displayed in 81 is defined. In addition, the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t are the first special symbol and the second special symbol respectively. flag to indicate Each flag indicates that a predetermined time has passed when it is on, and if it is off, it is during a fluctuation display based on the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol, or a predetermined time ( 30 seconds).

As shown in FIG. 200, when the gaming state is normal state or variable probability state, the display contents (screen display type ) is defined as normal display. In this normal display, the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol and the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol are displayed in the normal state (see FIG. 182(b)). display content. In the normal state, since the main fluctuation is the fluctuation display based on the lottery result of the first special symbol, the main fluctuation can be reliably displayed by setting the normal display.

In the normal state or probability variable state, the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is on, and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is off for the combination, the demonstration display is associated. When this demo display is determined, the customer waiting demo screen (see FIGS. 186(b) and (c)) is set. After 30 seconds have passed since the fluctuation of the first special symbol, which is the main fluctuation, is completed, regardless of whether or not the secondary fluctuation is being executed, the display is switched to the demonstration display (customer waiting demonstration screen). As a result, even if the player enters the ball into the second ball entrance 1640 and quits the game immediately after the 600-second variable display starts, the game will be displayed after the predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed. can display the customer waiting demo screen. Therefore, other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demo screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is an empty machine, so that a game can be started with the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the rate of operation of the pachinko machine 10 from decreasing.

In the normal state or the probability variable state, the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t are also associated with a combination of off. Therefore, in this case as well, the customer waiting demo screen (see FIGS. 186(b) and (c)) is set. As a result, other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is empty.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is the latent state, the special display is associated with the combination of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s off and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t on. This special display means the above-described demonstration display for concealment (see FIG. 187(c)), and a special mode of demonstration display is set in which the same character 811 as during variation continues to be displayed. As a result, when the ball entering the second ball entrance 1640 is subsequently detected, the display mode (effect mode) can be switched smoothly. It should be noted that special display is set also in the case of a combination in which both the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t are turned on. That is, irrespective of the situation of the first special symbol corresponding to the sub-fluctuation in the hidden state, if 30 seconds or more have passed since the second special symbol corresponding to the main fluctuation has become a fluctuation stop state, the special display is displayed. set.

In the latent state, the normal display is associated with the combination of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s on and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t off. Therefore, in the latent definite state, variable display or stop display corresponding to the lottery result of the second special pattern continues to be displayed as usual even if 30 seconds or more have passed since the first special pattern entered the variable stop state.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 199 is a block diagram showing the contents of RAM 223. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e, and a special figure 1 stop. Type selection flag 223f, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g, production counter 223h, state setting area 223i, sub special figure 1 standby flag 223j, special figure 1 standby counter 223k, sub special figure 2 A standby flag 223m, a special figure 2 standby counter 223n, a remaining probability variation number area 223o, a production probability variation number area 223p, a short remaining time number area 223q, a special figure 1 standby flag 223s, and a special figure 2 standby flag 223t and at least another memory area 223z.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the commands are processed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 238) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out and is read by the command determination processing. , the command is parsed and an action is taken according to the command.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects the starting winning for the first ball entrance 64, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the first winning type counter C2 are obtained according to the starting winning. From each value of the small hit type counter C5 and the variation type counter CS1, various information obtained when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed (win or not, jackpot type in the case of a big hit, variation pattern) The main controller 110 predicts (estimates), and the predicted various information is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of winning information commands.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win or fail, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and extracts the winning information. is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four open areas (1st to 4th areas). be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a variable effect (variable display) of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is suspended in the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable performance of the first special symbol that is being held up to 4 times at maximum for each type of special symbol.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and cannot acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of reserved balls is counted based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of reserved balls is counted as a special symbol by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. are managed by type.

Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of pending balls for variable display is added by entering the first ball entrance 64, or when main controller 110 executes variable display in the special symbol. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 d after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 is obtained from the reserved ball number command. , stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4310 in FIG. 238). Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c is updated, the first special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used to display the reserved ball number symbols in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and stores the first special symbol reserved after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the number of balls counter 223c, a command for the number of reserved balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is reserved. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of balls pattern is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 . As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. can. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

Special figure 1 variation start flag 223d and special figure 2 variation start flag 223e receive the first special symbol variation pattern command and the second special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from main controller 110 respectively. It is turned on (see S4304 and S4307 in FIG. 238), and turned off when the variable display is set in the third pattern display device 81 (see S4702 and S4706 in FIG. 243). When the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e are turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 236), It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

When the special figure 1 stop classification selection flag 223f and the special figure 2 stop classification selection flag 223g receive the first special symbol stop classification command and the second special symbol stop classification command transmitted from the main control device 110 , respectively (see S4401 in FIG. 239), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S4710 in FIG. 243). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is turned on, the stop type is based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command. It is determined.

The effect counter 223h is a counter used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various effects, and the like. This effect counter 223h is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 236) is executed, the value is incremented by 1 and updated. be done.

The state setting area 223i is a storage area in which information corresponding to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. This state setting area 223i is updated with information corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the state command each time a state command output from the main controller 110 is received (S4011 in FIG. 235, FIG. 240 S4506). More specifically, the state setting area 223i is assigned a 2-bit storage area, and in order from the upper bit, whether it is a probability variable state of a special symbol or whether it is a time saving state of a normal symbol. The indicated value is stored. For example, if the value of the state setting area 223i is "11B", it means that the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol (that is, the probability variation state). It means that the definite variable state of the symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, the latent definite state). On the other hand, "00H" means the normal state.

By updating the state setting area 223i according to the state command output from the main controller 110, the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped in the sound lamp control device 113.

The sub-special figure 1 standby flag 223j and the sub-special figure 2 standby flag 223m are flags indicating whether or not the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in the fluctuation stop state, respectively. If these flags are on, it means that the corresponding special symbol is in a state of stopping fluctuation, and if it is off, it means that it is in fluctuation. These are updated in synchronization with the state of the special figure 1 standby flag 203i and the special figure 2 standby flag 203j of the main controller 110.

The special figure 1 standby counter 223k and the special figure 2 standby counter 223n are counters for counting the elapsed time after the first special symbol and the second special symbol become a fluctuation stop state, respectively. Among the special figure 1 standby counter 223k and the special figure 2 standby counter 223n, when the count value corresponding to the special symbol to be the main fluctuation in the current game state becomes a value corresponding to 30 seconds, the game A demonstration effect is set according to the state (see S4211 in FIG. 237).

The remaining probability variable number of times area 223o and the remaining time reduction number area 223q are storage areas for storing the number of remaining times of the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time reduction state of the normal symbol, respectively. The remaining probability variable number area 223o and the remaining short time number area 223q are notified by a residual probability variable number command and a remaining short time number command output each time the values of the variable probability counter 203k and the short time counter 203g are updated in the main control device 110, respectively. (See S4652 and S4662 in FIG. 242). As a result, in synchronization with the values of the probability variation counter 203k and the time reduction counter 203g of the main control device 110, the values stored in the remaining probability variation number area 223o and the remaining short time number area 223q can be updated, so the sound lamp control device The remaining number of probability variations and the number of times of saving time grasped by 113 can be matched with the actual number of times of probability variation and the number of times of saving time updated by the main controller 110 .

The effect probability variable number of times area 223p is a storage area for storing an estimate of the remaining number of times of the latent probability state displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 in the latent certainty state. 120 is set in the effect probability variation count area 223p when the state is shifted from another game state to the latent probability state (see S4505 in FIG. 240). In addition, the value is subtracted by 1 each time the special symbol is varied in the latent certainty state (see S4657 in FIG. 242).

Special figure 1 standby flag 223s and special figure 2 standby flag 223t are flags indicating whether or not the fluctuation stop state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has continued for 30 seconds or more, respectively, and if it is on It indicates that the corresponding special symbols have been stopped from fluctuating for 30 seconds or more. On the other hand, if it is off, it indicates that the corresponding special symbol is fluctuating, or that it is within 3 seconds from the fluctuation stop state. These special figure 1 standby flag 223s and special figure 2 standby flag 223t are turned on when the count value of special figure 1 standby counter 223k and special figure 2 standby counter 223n respectively becomes a value corresponding to 30 seconds It is set (see S4204 and S4208 in FIG. 237).

The standby setting completion flag 223u refers to the screen display selection table 222b (see FIG. 200) with reference to the screen display selection table 222b (see FIG. 200) to display the demonstration production as 30 seconds have passed since the fluctuation stop state of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. (See FIGS. 186(b), (c), and 187(c)) is a flag indicating whether or not screen display is set. This standby set flag 223u is set to ON when a new screen display is set by referring to the screen display selection table 223b in the customer waiting effect process (see FIG. 237) (see S4212 in FIG. 237). ). Also, when the special figure 1 standby flag 223s or the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON (see S4204, S4208 in FIG. 237), the special figure 1 standby flag 223s or the special figure 2 When the standby flag 223t is newly set to off, the standby set flag 223u is set to off.

The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not there has been a momentary power failure. The power-off flag 223y receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 and is set to ON before the power-off process is executed (see S4115 in FIG. 236). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain period of time (100 milliseconds) has passed. Therefore, when the power-off flag 223y is on (see 1508: Yes in FIG. 42) in the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 235), the power-off flag 223y is set to on and then This is when the audio lamp controller 113 wakes up before the time (100 milliseconds) elapses, that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 is not deleted, and unnecessary information (or incomplete information due to the deletion of only part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there is a case, the information in the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S4009 in FIG. 235). As a result, processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

Next, referring to FIG. 201, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 201 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND-type flash memories generally have a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and accesses to the defective data block are avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 should be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 244) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 244) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 207) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws one frame of a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c to be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 246(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, a NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of a ROM, but has a slower read speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance is displayed. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variable image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a variable effect when a ball entering the mouth 1640 is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 244).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 202 . FIG. 202 shows the power on display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. 202(a). The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 executes the command shown in FIG. 202(b). As shown in FIG. 202(c), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a variation image at power-on with a "○" pattern at the lower right position of the screen, and a "○" at power-on as shown in FIG. A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit with a special design", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Also, when the power is turned on, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player starts the game, and the ball is detected to enter the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640. 202(b) and 202(c), the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display on the third pattern display device 81 at 10:00 a.m. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640 while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed in the third symbol. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

Returning to FIG. 201, the description continues. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 203, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. FIG. 203 is an explanatory diagram for explaining four kinds of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 203(b) shows the back faces B to D corresponding to the "forest stage", "river stage", and "empty stage", respectively, with respect to back face A corresponding to "town stage". . Also, FIG. 204 is shown with respect to the back surface E corresponding to the "island stage".

As shown in FIG. 203, the character ROM 234 prepares back images corresponding to the respective back images A to D, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When a change in the back surface type is determined based on the back surface type selection table 222b and the stage is changed to "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "sky stage", the MPU 231 selects the corresponding back surface. First, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the initial position of the display area is set between position a and position a′ of the image, and the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . As time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the positions a to c by repeatedly scrolling smoothly in a leftward direction.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 204, the rear image on the rear surface E shows the third pattern in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→ . . . It is displayed on the display device 81 . Specifically, on the back side E, an image of a mountain towering over an island, an image of a sandy beach at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed as the third pattern in a state where the displayed positions are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81 . On the other hand, an image of the sky that spreads over a mountain changes its color tone with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the back image shown in FIG. 204(a) is displayed as the initial back image of the back E. FIG. In the rear image shown in FIG. 204(a), an orange sky indicating morning glow is displayed. As time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 204(b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 204(b), a vivid blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, as time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 204(c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 204(c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and further to orange. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 204(a) is restored, and the rear images shown in FIGS.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 203(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the street stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage "town stage" is displayed. By keeping all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "sky stage" are shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. Further, the back side E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 204(a), and the image data corresponding to the back side images between FIGS. is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident during the start-up process.

Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235 . As such, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a' (or the range shown in FIGS. 204(a) to (b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, if a stage change is determined by a lottery at the start of fluctuation, the resident video RAM 235 can be stored on the back side of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back faces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and scroll display or color tone change with the passage of time. can be displayed while In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images are stored for back faces B to D, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In addition, after the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear faces B to D, the image data stored in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to turn the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

204(a) to 204(b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 after the image at the initial position is displayed. 204(a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 204(b) to (c) and FIGS. to (b) is set. As a result, image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 204(b)-(c) and 204(c)-(a) are normally used while the images of FIGS. 204(a)-(b) are displayed. 204(a)-(b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. 204(b) to (c) and FIGS. 204(c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with the lapse of time using the image data corresponding to the rear image obtained. be able to.

Image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 for the rear-side images B to E is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear-side images provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 (see FIG. 201). As a result, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the rear faces B to D, the image data stored in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to images between position b' and position b. image data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 201, the description continues. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640, although the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable performance is not immediately started.

In addition, in the third design area 235d, as the main designs to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main design consisting of the rear design such as a wooden box, and the rear design and characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of the accessory pattern which imitates is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, it does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but stores the resident data. By reading out the image data previously resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

By providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, as described above, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image for one frame developed earlier can be read out from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a background image change flag 233w, a background image determination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a fixed display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main controller 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is a performance for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state from now on and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round performance will start from now on. This is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is a effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the people involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to an opening effect, a round effect, an ending effect, and a demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 205 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. The type of back face is the back face A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information specifying whether to display one of the back images or to display a back image different from the back images A to E is described. Further, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to E, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image to display.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to E is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back faces A to E as a drawing target, In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to E, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed according to the back surface type, and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81 display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether or not the back surface image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H" which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 205) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 207), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order defined in the display data table, so the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in a conventional pachinko machine, if a program to be executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is generated for each frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 206, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 206 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that should be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 206). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 206).

The transfer data information includes the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table. "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 207) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 206, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, since the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can easily display various effects images. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not the third pattern display device 81 displays the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. flag to indicate This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 244) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 244). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S7605 in FIG. 255(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 246(b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 246(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 246(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 247 to 251) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 252 to 254) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 255(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 255(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 256) is executed to transfer image data required for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the rendering content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 207), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 draws an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 207), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 207) described later, which describes the contents of image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed (FIG. 246(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 252) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list described later. (see FIG. 207), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a draw list instructing 237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 207 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (pattern) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. Therefore, the type and address of the storage RAM where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, if the transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (FIG. 246(b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 252). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. perform various operations to

The storage image data discrimination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S6002 in FIG. 244) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The storage image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 256) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, the stored state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 256). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 256). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing for that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. The information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 257).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of drawing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 246(b)) is performed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing for one frame of image in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for one frame of image.

The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not the type of the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is to be changed. If the back image change flag 233w is ON, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is OFF, it means that no change is made. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when a back image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 251(a)). The back image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 256), and is set to OFF when the back image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 256). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the presentation mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag consists of, for example, 1 byte, and each bit is associated with each rear face type. If any bit of the back image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the bit that is on is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image determination flag 233x is ON, it means that the rear surface A is set. In the rear image determination flag 233x, when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 251(a)). ) of S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily specified.

The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 252) (see S7221 in FIG. 252). is set to off when a display data table other than the display data table buffer 233d is set to the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 248(a), S6705 in FIG. 249(a), S6805 in FIG. 249(b) , S6905 in FIG. 250). With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration effect is currently being performed.

The fixed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect means the effect of stopping and displaying (fixed display) the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is ON, it means that the confirmation display effect is being performed, and if it is OFF, it means that the confirmation display effect is not being performed. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 252) (S7214 in FIG. 252). It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 248(a), S6705 in FIG. 249(a), S6805 in FIG. 249(b), FIG. 250 S6905). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmation display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 208 to 234. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this control example). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 208 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various prize-winning switches are read (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the second per random number counter C4 and the small per type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the second per random number counter C4 and the small per type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum value (in this control example 479, 99, 232, 99) are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2, C4 and C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed as well as performing display on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). After that, a starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the start winning process, the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 and the normal symbol variation process for performing the process associated with the passage of the ball in the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 are executed ( S106). Details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the normal symbol variation process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and further, other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process ends. In the shooting control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the ball is shot on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 209, special symbol variation processing (S104), which is one processing of the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 209 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104), various judgments and determinations are made based on each counter value acquired based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 1640, and predetermined In the variable display mode determined by the control of , the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 can be controlled to simultaneously perform variable display, or control to stop display in the display mode showing the determination result. is executed. The special symbol variation processing (FIG. 209, S104) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (whether or not the jackpot flag 203u is ON) (S201). 203u is on) (S201: Yes), since there is no need to set special symbol lottery or stop variable display, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (the jackpot flag 203u is off) (S201: No), whether or not the small hit game is in progress (whether the small hit flag 203v is on) is determined (S202). In the process of S202, when it is determined that the small winning medium flag 203v is on (S202: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not during the small hit (the flag 203v during the small hit is off) (S202: No), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (S203). When it is determined that the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable display (S203: Yes), in the first special symbol variation stop process (S205), when the variation time of the first special symbol in the variable display has passed , a first special symbol variation stop process for stopping and displaying a stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol is executed (S205), and the process proceeds to S206. In addition, in the first special symbol variation stop processing (S205), when the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the stop symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is forcibly removed. Stop display processing is executed. The details of this first special symbol variation stop process (S205) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S203, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not displayed in a variable display (S203: No), at least one reserved data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. On the condition that it has been done, the first special symbol variation start processing for executing the big hit determination and variation pattern selection processing based on the reserved data is executed (S204), and the processing proceeds to S206. The details of this first special symbol variation start process (S204) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the processing of S206 executed after the first special symbol variation start processing (S204) or the first special symbol variation stop processing (S205) is performed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. (S206), if the variation display of the second special symbol is being performed (S206: Yes), a second special symbol variation stop process is executed (S208), and this process is terminated. In this second special symbol variation stop process (S208), similarly to the first special symbol variation stop process (S205), when the prescribed variation time of the second special symbol during variable display has passed, the second special symbol It is a process for setting the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the lottery result. The details of the second special symbol variation stop processing (S208) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 220 and 221. FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S206, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable display (S206: No), on the condition that a new start winning to the second entrance 1640 is detected, the second A special symbol lottery is executed to execute a second special symbol variation start process for setting the start of a new variation display (S207), and this process is terminated. The details of this second special symbol variation start process (S207) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

Next, with reference to FIG. 210, the first special symbol variation start process (S204), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104), will be described. FIG. 210 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S204).

In the first special symbol variation start process (Fig. 210, S204), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the acquired value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter It is determined whether (N1) is greater than 0 (S302). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 1 is subtracted (S303), and a pending ball number command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the pending ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d after the subtraction is set (S304). .

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 227) executed by the MPU 201, voice It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c. Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c is updated, the first special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

When the process of S304 is finished, next, the data in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the previous data (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.

When the process of S305 is completed, then, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). This first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 211, S306) will be described in detail later. It is a process for executing a big win determination as to whether or not a big win is made based on the set game state.

When the process of S306 is finished, next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (FIG. 212, S307). Although the details will be described later, this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) includes the determination result of the first special symbol and the variation type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of CS1.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is finished, next, the game state update process is executed (S308). This game state update process (FIG. 213, S308) will be described in detail later, but by updating the values of various counters (probability variable counter 203k, time reduction counter 203g) indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 This is processing for updating the state. When the process of S308 ends, the special figure 1 standby flag 203i is set to off, and the special figure 1 standby command indicating off is set (S309), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S302: No), whether the special figure 1 standby flag 203i is ON It is determined (S310), and if it is determined that it is on (S310: Yes), this processing is terminated. In the process of S310, when it is determined that it is off (that is, not on) (S310: No), the special figure 1 standby flag 203i is set to on (S311), and the special figure 1 standby command indicating on After setting (S312), this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 211, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 210, S204), will be described. FIG. 211 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 211, S306), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable probability counter 203k is 1 or more (S402). That is, it is determined whether or not it is in a high probability state (probability variable state of special symbols). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol) (S402: Yes), the first per random number table 202a for high probability When it is defined as a jackpot It is determined whether or not the random value obtained from the counter buffer matches the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the determination result (lottery result) is obtained (S403). On the other hand, in the process of S402, when it is determined that the probability variation counter 203k is 0 (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S402: No), the first per random number table 202a for low probability It is determined whether or not the specified random value for the big win matches the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is obtained (S404).

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in S403 or S404 is a big hit (S405), and if the lottery result is a big hit (S405: Yes), the big hit flag 203m is set to ON for the first special symbol. (S406), the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a big hit (S407). Then, based on the value of the obtained win type counter, the first special symbol jackpot symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S408), and the value corresponding to the current game status is stored in the winning status storage area. 203n (S409), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S405, when it is determined that the lottery result is lost (S405: No), the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S410), and then , the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 212, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 210, S204), will be described. FIG. 212 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 212, S307), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 211, S306), whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, that is, the first It is determined whether or not a jackpot of 1 special symbol is set (S501). Here, whether or not the big hit is determined is determined by whether or not the big hit flag 203m is turned on for the first special symbol. This jackpot flag 203m is set to ON in the processing of S406 in the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 211).

In the process of S501, when it is determined that the first special symbol jackpot is set (S501: Yes), the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) acquired in the process of S401 Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 193(a)) (S502), and the process proceeds to S503.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (that is, the jackpot flag 203m for the first special symbol is off) (S501: No), the process of S502 is performed. Skip and move to the processing of S503.

In the processing of S503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S503). Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 194 to 196) corresponding to the game state is read out (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. The game state is determined based on the value of the variable probability counter 203k and the value of the time reduction counter 203g. In the process of S505, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S505), and then based on the selected variation pattern, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set ( S506).

When the processing of S506 ends, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop design is set (S507). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the first special symbol (S508), and ends this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 213, the game state update process (S308), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 210), will be described. FIG. 213 is a flow chart showing this game state update process (S308).

When the gaming state update process (see FIG. 213) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable probability counter 203k is greater than 0 (S601). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 0 (S601: No), the processes of S602 to S605 are skipped and the process proceeds to S606. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variable counter 203k is greater than 0 (S601: Yes), the value of the probability variable counter is subtracted by 1 (S602), and a remaining probability variable number command indicating the value of the probability variable counter is set ( S603).

The remaining probability variation count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 227), which will be described later. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . Upon receiving the residual probability variation number command, the audio ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the probability variation counter 203k from the residual probability variation number command, and stores the extracted value in the residual probability variation number area 223o of the RAM 223. In this way, the sound ramp control device 113 updates the value of the remaining probability variation count area 223o in accordance with the pending ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that it is synchronized with the value of the probability variation counter 203k of the main controller 110. while you can update its value. As a result, it is possible for the sound lamp control device 113 side to accurately grasp whether or not it is in the latent state, and to execute the corresponding effect.

When the process of S603 ends, it is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 203k after subtraction is 0 (S604), and if it is determined that the value after subtraction is not 0 (S604: No), S605 Skip the process and move to the process of S606. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203k is 0 (S604: Yes), a state command indicating a normal state is set (S605), and the process proceeds to S606.

In the process of S606, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203g is greater than 0 (S606), and if the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 (S606: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S606, if it is determined that the time reduction counter 203g is greater than 0 (S606: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S607), and a remaining time reduction number command indicating the value of the time reduction counter is set. After (S608), this process is terminated.

The remaining time reduction command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 227) described later. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the short remaining time command, it extracts the value of the short working time counter 203g from the short remaining time command and stores the extracted value in the short remaining time area 223q of the RAM223. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the remaining time reduction number area 223q according to the pending ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that it is synchronized with the value of the time reduction counter 203g of the main control device 110. while you can update its value.

Next, referring to FIG. 214, the first special symbol variation stop process (S205), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104), will be described. FIG. 214 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing (S205).

In the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 214, S205), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation display of the first special symbol (S701), and if it is determined that it is the end timing ( S701: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203m is set to ON for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) (S702). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203m is set to ON for the first special symbol (S702: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to ON (S703), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop Set the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the flag 203p has been turned on (S704). Next, the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a deviating symbol (S705).

When the processing of S705 is completed, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S706), and the jackpot flag 203m, probability variation counter 203k, and time reduction counter 203g are reset (S707). Next, the jackpot medium flag 203u is set to ON (S708), and the process proceeds to S709.

On the other hand, in the process of S702, if the jackpot flag 203m is set to OFF for the first special symbol (S702: No), the process of S703 to S708 is skipped and the process proceeds to S709.

In the process of S709, a special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of fixing and stopping the first special symbol is set (S709). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (S710), and this process is finished.

On the other hand, in the process of S701, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable display of the first special symbol being executed (S701: No), the display of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated ( S711), the process ends.

Thus, in the first special symbol stop processing (S205), when the prescribed fluctuation time of the first special symbol during variable display has elapsed (S701: Yes), the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game Processing (S703 to S710) for stopping the variable display is executed. Also, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (S702: Yes), a process (S703, S704) of forcibly stopping the second special symbol during variable display is executed.

In this first control example, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol during variable display is forcibly stopped and displayed as a deviated symbol. is not limited to For example, it may be configured such that the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped) when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol is finished, the variable display of the second special symbol may be restarted. As a result, it is possible to produce a more natural presentation than when the game is forcibly stopped due to a failure. In addition, in this control example, a jackpot scenario is set in the processing of S706 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203n in the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 211). For example, a jackpot scenario is set in the processing of S706 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203n in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) using the opening period of the jackpot game. You may make it

Next, with reference to FIG. 215, the second special symbol variation start process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104), will be described. FIG. 215 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation start process (S207).

In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 215, S207), first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203p is set to ON (S801). If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to ON (S801: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to OFF, and this process is terminated. Special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p, as described above, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol ends, is a flag that is set to ON while causing the stop symbol corresponding to the second special symbol to be stopped and displayed. . That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is ON, it means that the big hit is started, so the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. Therefore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is ON in the process of S801, without executing each process of S802 to S810 to set the start of fluctuation, the process is configured to end as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S801, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S801: No), the second entrance 1640 It is determined whether or not winning has been detected (S802). If the winning to the second ball entrance 1640 is detected (S802: Yes), next, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1, and the small per type counter C5 Each value is acquired and stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b (S803), and the second special symbol jackpot determination process for executing the second special symbol jackpot determination is executed based on each stored counter value. (S804). The details of this second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S804 is completed, then, based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S803, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern is performed. Execute (S805). The details of this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S805) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S805 is completed, the above-described game state update processing (see FIG. 213) is executed (S806), and the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is set to off, and the special figure 2 standby command indicating off is issued. After setting (S807), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S801, if it is determined that the winning to the second ball entrance 1640 is not detected (S801: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is on (S808 ), if it is ON (S808: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S808, when it is determined that the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is off, the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is set to on (S809), and the second special symbol is in a fluctuation stop state. Set a special figure 2 standby command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of that (S810), and terminate this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 216, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S804), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 215, S207), will be described. FIG. 216 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S804).

In this second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 216, S804), the same process as the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) is executed, so the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 211 ) will be mainly explained.

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S804) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203b is acquired (S901). Then, the processing of S902 to S904 for acquiring the lottery result as to whether or not the jackpot is won is executed based on each acquired counter value and the value of the variable probability counter 203k. In each of these processes, the only difference is that the counter value used for the lottery (judgment) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b. control is executed.

When the processing of S903 or S904 ends, it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (S905), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (S905: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is obtained. The processing of S906 to S909 for setting the jackpot is executed, and this processing ends. In each of these S906 to S909 processes, the same processes as those of S406 to S409 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol to the big hit in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) are executed. be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S905, when it is determined that the obtained lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big hit (S905: No), a small hit of the second special symbol or a stop symbol corresponding to the loss is set. Special figure 2 deviation processing is executed (S910), and this processing ends. Details of this special figure 2 deviation variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing this special figure 2 deviation variation process (S909).

In the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation process (S909), first, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in the process of S903 or S904 in FIG. 216 is a small hit of the second special symbol (S1001), and the lottery result If so (S1001: Yes), the small hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1002), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a small hit (S1003). Then, the small winning symbol indicating the small winning type corresponding to the acquired value of the small winning type counter C5 is set as the stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S1004), and the process is finished.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is lost in the process of S1001 (S1001: No), the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1005), and then, End this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 218, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S805), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 215, S805), will be described. FIG. 218 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S805).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 212, S307), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b (S1101). Next, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 216, S804), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the second special symbol jackpot is set. (S1102). Here, whether or not the big win is determined is determined by whether or not the big win flag 203m is turned on for the second special symbol. This jackpot flag 203m is set to ON in the processing of S906 in the above-described second special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 216).

In the process of S1102, when it is determined that the second special symbol jackpot is set (S1102: Yes), the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 195 and 1196) corresponding to the current game state is read. (S1103). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in the process of S901 in the above-described second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 216), the jackpot from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 193 (a)) The type is determined (S1105).

When the process of S1105 is completed, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S1105), and then, based on the selected variation pattern, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is set. (S1106). Then, the process proceeds to S1108.

On the other hand, in the process of S1102, when it is determined that the second special symbol jackpot is not set (S1102: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1107) is executed, and the process of S1108 Transition.

In the process of S1108, the special figure 2 stop classification command which shows a stop design is set (S1108). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the second special symbol (S1109), and then terminates this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 219, this special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1107) will be described. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process (S1107).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (FIG. 219, S1107), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S1201). Here, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1201). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203o is ON (S1201: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S1202). Then, based on the obtained value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 192(b)), the small hit type is selected (S1203).

Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 195 and 1196) corresponding to the current gaming state is read (S1204), and from the read variation pattern selection table, the small per variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected (S1205). After that, set the special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the selected small hit variation pattern (S1206), and terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out) (S1201: No), the variation pattern selection table (Fig. 195 and FIG. 1196) is read (S1207), and from the read variation pattern selection table, an outlier variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected (S1208). After that, based on the variation pattern of the selected deviation, set the special figure 2 variation pattern command (S1209), and terminate this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 220, the second special symbol variation stop process (S208), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104), will be described. FIG. 220 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation stop process (S208).

In the second special symbol variation stop processing (S208), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variation based on the second special symbol being executed (S1301). In the process of S1301, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the variation based on the second special symbol being executed (S1301: Yes), the jackpot flag 203m is turned on for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is set (S1303). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203m is set to ON for the second special symbol (S1303: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the fluctuation stop of the special figure 1 is set (S1305), The process proceeds to S1306.

Next, the processing after S1306 differs from the processing after S705 of the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 214, S205) in the following points. In the processing of S1306 and S1312 corresponding to the processing of S705 and S711, the point that the first special symbol is changed to the second special symbol, and in the processing of S1311 corresponding to the processing of S710, the special figure 1 confirmation command is a special figure 2 in that it is changed to a definite command. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variation based on the second special symbol being executed (S1301: No), the display of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated ( S1302), the process ends. In addition, in the processing of S1303, if the jackpot flag 203m is set to OFF for the second special symbol (S1303: No), special figure 2 out stop processing is executed (S1304), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 221, special figure 2 deviation stop processing (S1304), which is one processing of the second special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 220, S208), will be described. FIG. 221 is a flow chart showing this special figure 2 deviating stop process (S1304).

In the special figure 2 deviating stop processing (Fig. 221, S1304), first, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1401). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1401: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the fluctuation stop of the special figure 1 is set (S1402). Next, the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a deviating symbol (S1403).

After completing the processing of S1403, a small winning scenario based on the selected small winning type is set (S1404). After that, the small hit flag 203o is set to OFF (S140, and the small hit medium flag 203v is set to ON (S1406).

When the processing of S1406 ends, the special figure 2 decision command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to decide and stop the second special symbol is set (S1407). After that, the second special symbol, which is being variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 37, stops variably in the small hit symbol (S1408), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1401, when it is determined that the small hit flag 203o is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out) (S1401: No), the second special symbol is fixed and stopped. Set a special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing that to the audio lamp control device 113 (S1409). After that, the second special symbol that is being variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 37 is deviated and the variation is stopped with the symbol (S1410), and this process is finished.

As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be independently executable in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously varied. can be displayed. Therefore, lottery games with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined period of time, and the probability that a player will receive a big win within the predetermined period of time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In this control example, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed as a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, it is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be temporarily stopped or variably displayed while the measurement of the variability time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbols are stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can understand that the temporary stop is being performed, so that the player can see that the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display disappears. It is possible to grasp that the player is not in the game, and the player can play the jackpot game with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 222, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 208) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 222 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). The start winning process (FIG. 222, S105) determines whether the game ball has won the first start port (first ball entrance) 64, and if it wins, the upper limit number of reservations Up to 4), it is a process of storing each acquired counter value in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a , a process of predicting the result of determination of suitability, the variation pattern to be selected, etc. is executed in advance. The starting winning process (FIG. 222, S105) will be described below.

In the starting winning process (FIG. 222, S105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first starting opening 64 (starting winning) (S1101). Here, winning to the first ball entrance 64 is detected. When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 64 (there has been a starting prize) (S1501: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is obtained (S1502). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1503). It is determined whether this is less than 4, which is the upper limit of the number of reservations for the first starting port 64 (that is, whether the number of reservations is stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1503: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (1504). A reserved pitch number command for notifying the reserved number to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S1505). Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1, which are various counter values, is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S1506).

Next, based on each stored counter value, the determination result of the first special symbol, the determined hit type, and the variation pattern are predicted (S1507). Then, the winning information command including the predicted result of determination of the first special symbol, the winning type, and the variation pattern is set (S1508), and this process is finished.

Thus, in this control example, when the game ball wins the first starting port (first ball entrance) 64 and is newly stored on hold, based on the information stored on hold, the winning/failure determination result is determined before the start of fluctuation and notified to the audio ramp controller 113 . As a result, based on the hold-stored hit/fail judgment result, the display mode of the hold ball is changed (for example, the color of the hold ball is changed to a different color than usual) and displayed, or before the start of variation It is possible to execute an effect to suggest the result of winning/failure determination to the player by displaying the notice pattern or the like.

Next, with reference to FIG. 223, normal design variation processing (S106), which is one processing of the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 223 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variable display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display unit 88, the opening time of the electric accessory 1640a, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 223, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting. (S1601). Winning of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes the period from when the winning is displayed on the second symbol display device (not shown) to when the electric accessory 1640a is controlled to open and close. When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S1601: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S1601: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol of the second symbol display device is being variably displayed (S1602). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being changed and displayed (S1602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S1618 ). It should be noted that the variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S1617, which will be described later, before the variable display is started in the second symbol display unit (not shown).

In the process of S1011, if the variation time has not elapsed (S1618: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1618, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbols displayed in a variable manner has passed (S1618: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1619). In the processing of S1619, if the lottery of normal symbols is won and the display mode is set by the processing of S1613, the second symbol display device (not shown) stops the "○" symbol as the second symbol. It is set to be displayed (lit display). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode at the time of loss is set by the processing of S1615, the second symbol display device (not shown) displays the "x" symbol as the second symbol. It is set so that it is stopped (lighted up). When the stop display is set by the process of S1619, the variable display on the second symbol display device is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in the second symbol in the display mode set by the process of S1613 and the process of S1615. Stopped display (lighting display) is performed on the symbol display device.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S1620). When it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a hit (S1620: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 1640a is set (S1621). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a loss (S1620: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1602, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not displayed in a variable display (S1602: No), the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203e (the number M of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1603).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S1604), and when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S1604: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S1604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S1605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1606). In the process of S1606, the data stored in the normal design reservation first to fourth areas of the normal design reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, normal design reservation 1st area → execution area, normal design reservation 2nd area → normal design reservation 1st area, normal design reservation 3rd area → normal design reservation 2nd area, normal design reservation 4th area → Shift the data in each area such as the third area for normal design reservation. After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S1607).

Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the time saving state (S1608). More specifically, when the value of the time saving counter 203g is 1 or more, it is determined that the time saving state. In the process of S1608, if it is determined that it is not in the time saving state (S1608: No), based on the hit determination value of the normal per symbol random number table for low probability (see FIG. 192 (c)), the success or failure determination A result is acquired (S1611). On the other hand, in the process of S1608, when it is determined that the time saving game is in progress (S1608: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1609). In the process of S1609, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1609: Yes), the process of S1611 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in the jackpot (S1609: No), the hit determination value of the normal symbol random number table for high probability (see FIG. 192 (c)) Based on this, the result of the suitability determination is acquired (S1610).

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery of the second symbol (normal symbol) is hit (S1612), and when it is determined that the result of the lottery of the second symbol (normal symbol) is not hit (that is, it is lost). (S1612: No), the display mode of "x", which is the display mode when out, is set (S1615), and the process proceeds to S1616. On the other hand, in the process of S1612, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is winning (that is, winning) (S1612: Yes), the display mode at the time of winning is "○". is set (S1613).

Next, the electric accessory 1640a is set to 1 second for an open period and 2 times for the number of times of opening (S1614). Then, in the process of S1616 to be executed after executing the process of S1614 or S1615, the normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202g (see FIG. 197) is read (S1616), the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 from the read normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202g A variable time corresponding to the value of is set (S1617), and this process ends.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 224 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 208) to determine whether or not a game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 when there is.

In the through gate passing process (FIG. 224, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1701). Here, passage of a game ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained. (S1702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example) (S1703).

Whether the game ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1701: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter If the value (M) of 203e is not less than 4 (S1703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), normal The value (M) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S1704).

When the processing of S1704 is finished, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 208) is stored in the free reservation area (reservation first area to the fourth reserved area) (S1705), and the process ends. In the process of S1705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the lottery based on the second special symbol is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol. Therefore, the state in which the ball can enter the second ball entrance 1640 provided by winning the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is a game state more advantageous than the normal game state.

By indicating the timing at which such a game state is provided based on the pre-determined result of the normal game, the player can play the game without missing a game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state. It should be noted that, when the production is performed using the preliminary determination result of such a general pattern, not only the production based on the result of the judgment of the general pattern, but also the electric accessory 1640a in the case where the general pattern is determined to be hit is opened. It is good to perform a production that suggests the timing of By doing so, in the normal game state, the game is played aiming at the game area on the left side of the game board 13, and the second ball entrance 1640 (the ball entrance accompanied by the electric accessory 1640a) is the game board 13. Even if it is arranged on the right side, it is possible to switch to a game aiming at the right side of the game board 13 (so-called right hitting) before the electric accessory 1640a performs the opening operation, and it is a normal game state. Also, there is an effect that the possibility of a ball entering the second ball entrance 1640 can be increased.

225 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as power-off occurrence information setting (S1801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

Incidentally, the above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, referring to FIG. 226, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 226 is a flow chart showing this startup process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 226), first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this control example) is executed. (S1902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3132) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1904), and if it is turned on (S1904: Yes), the process proceeds to S1910. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3132) is not turned on (S1904: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1905). : No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S1910.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1906). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S1910, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1910). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization processing of RAM 203 (S1911, S1912).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall opens, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (Fig. 3132). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3132) is pushed during execution of startup processing, initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1911, S1912) is executed.

Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1911, S1912) is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S1911, S1912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1912). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1913.

On the other hand, the RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3132) is not turned on (S1904: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. If there is (S1907: Yes), the data backed up in the RAM 203 is retained, and the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1908). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S1909), and the process proceeds to S1910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1913). After that, each value of the variable probability counter 203k and the time saving counter 203g is read (S1914), and a state command is set based on the read counter value (S1915). After the process of S1915 is completed, the interrupt is permitted (S1916), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 227, the main process (S2000) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up process described above will be described. FIG. 227 is a flow chart showing this main process (S2000). This main process (S2000) is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process (FIG. 227, S2000), first, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 223 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 208) is sent to each sub side. External output processing for transmission to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S2001).

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S2002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 .

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2003). A jackpot control process is executed (S2004). Details of this jackpot control process (S2004) will be described later with reference to FIG. 228, but a process of setting the operation of the variable winning device 65 in the jackpot game is executed.

After the big hit game process (S2004) is executed, the small hit control process (S2005) is executed. This small winning control process will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, an electric accessary product opening/closing process is executed (S2006). In this electric accessary product opening/closing process (S2006), the opening/closing process of the electric accessary product 1640a is executed. Thereafter, display control processing of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S2007).

Next, display control processing of the second pattern (for example, the pattern of "o" or "x") by the second pattern display device 83 is executed (S2008). Briefly, on the condition that the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of passing, and the second symbol display device 83 Then, the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) is carried out. Then, a lottery for the second symbol (normal symbol) is carried out according to the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the second symbol (normal symbol) wins, the electric accessory 1640a is opened for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2009). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S2010). If the predetermined time (4 ms) has already passed (S2010: Yes), the process proceeds to S2001, and the above-described processes after S2001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S2010: No), the second main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (479, 232 in this control example), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffers of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S2002 (S2012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S2001 to S2008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and displayed as a variable. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S2009, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S2009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 225 is executed, so the processing at power-off from S2013 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S2013), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S2014). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S2015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2016), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

In addition, the processing of S2009 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S2001 to S2008, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S2011 and S2012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S2001. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S2001 as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the initialization process (FIG. 226, S1901) By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S2001 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S2004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 228 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S2004). This jackpot control processing (S2004) is executed in the main interrupt processing (see FIG. 227), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, specific winning This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 228, S2004), first, it is determined whether a jackpot scenario is set (S2101). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario is not set (S2101: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S2101, if it is determined that the jackpot scenario is set (S2101: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (S2102), and it is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the jackpot scenario (S2103). ). More specifically, in the process of S2102, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S2103, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) is the opening start of the jackpot scenario. Determine whether the value corresponds to

In the processing of S2103, when it is determined that it is time to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S2103: Yes), an opening command for jackpot is set (S2104), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no timing to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S2103: No), then it is determined whether it is time to start a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2105).

In the processing of S2105, if it is determined that it is time to start a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting processing is executed (S2106), and this processing ends. The details of this jackpot operation setting process (S2106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2105 that it is not the time to start a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2105: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the round currently being executed has been met ( S2107). Here, in this control example, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 5) are won in total while the specific winning opening 65a is open, or when the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a elapses for a predetermined period of time. If so, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the round end condition of the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S2107: Yes), the processing of S2108 sets the specific winning opening 65a to be closed (opening/closing plate of the first specific winning opening 65a 65f1 is set to be in a closed state), and this process is terminated. It should be noted that the determination process of S2105 to S2107 described above is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the big win set in the big win scenario.

On the other hand, in the process of S2107, if it is determined that the round end condition of the round currently being executed is not established (S2107: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S2109), and the ending effect is determined. If it is the start timing of (S2109: Yes), the ending command for big hits is set (S2110), and this process is completed. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S2001) of the main processing (see FIG. 227). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the big win.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2109, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2109: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2111). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed. In the process of S2111, when it is determined that it is time to end the big win (S2111: Yes), the big win end process for setting the gaming state after the big win ends (S2112), and this process ends. The details of this jackpot ending process (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S2111: No), the first winning process is executed (S2113), and this process ends. Details of the first winning process (S2113) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 229, the jackpot operation setting process (S2106), which is one process in the jackpot control process (FIG. 228, S2004), will be described. FIG. 229 is a flow chart showing the contents of this jackpot operation setting process (S2106). In the jackpot action setting process (FIG. 229, S2106), first, the opening scenario in which the opening action corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to start is set is read (S2201). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k (see FIG. 179) is set based on the data read in S2201 (S2202). The opening operation is set according to the data read in the process of S2201 (S2203), and this process ends.

In this way, each operation of the variable prize winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big win game, the big win game will end in the middle. Defects can be suppressed.

In addition, in this control example, in the case of a small winning game, the operation of the variable probability solenoid 65k is not set, and only the opening operation of the opening/closing plate 65f1 is set. The small prize consists of two rounds, and the opening/closing plate 65f1 is opened for one second in each round.

Next, with reference to FIG. 230, the jackpot end process (S2112), which is one process in the jackpot control process (FIG. 228, S2004) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. This jackpot end process (S2112) is, as described above, a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends. FIG. 230 is a flow chart showing the contents of this jackpot ending process (S2112).

In the jackpot ending process (FIG. 230, S2112), first, based on the winning state storage area 203n, the gaming state at the time of winning is specified (S2301). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning is the latent state (S2302). In the process of S2302, if it is determined that the game state at the time of winning is not the latent state (S2302: No), it is determined whether the V winning flag 203f is ON (S2303). In the processing of S2303, if it is determined that the V winning flag 203f is ON (S2303: Yes), it means that the ball has passed through the V passage switch 65e3 during the big hit this time, so the value of the variable probability counter 203k is set to 120 (S2304).

Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot types are jackpots B to D (S2305). If it is not a big hit B to D (S2305: No), the value of the time saving counter 203g is set to 120 (S2306), and the process proceeds to S2307.

On the other hand, in the process of S2302, if it is determined that the game state at the time of winning is the latent state (S2302: Yes), or in the process of S2303, if the V winning flag 203f is off (that is, not on). If it is determined (S2303: No), or if it is not a jackpot B to D in the process of S2305 (S2305: No), the process proceeds to S307. Thus, when the game state at the time of winning is not the latent state, and when the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch 65e3 during the big win, the game state after the big win is set to the normal state. Further, when the game ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 and the hit type is the big hit B to D, the 120 times probability variable state is set after the big hit. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 and the hit type is the jackpot A, the variable probability state of 120 times and the time saving state of 100 times are set after the jackpot.

In the process of S2307, both the jackpot medium flag 203u and the V prize winning flag 203f are set to OFF, and the winning state storage area 203n is cleared (S2207). After that, a state command corresponding to the set game state is set (S2308), and this process is terminated.

Thus, in this control example, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the variable probability setting flag 203h is ON, and if it is ON, the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V passage switch 65e3, and a high probability game state can be set. Therefore, the player can continue to expect the transition to the high probability game state (latent probability variable game state ST2 or probability variable game state ST3) until the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, if the game ball can be passed through the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, a high probability game state (latent probability variable game state ST2 or probability variable game state ST3) is given after the jackpot game, so during the jackpot game Also, the player can play the game with an interest in whether or not the game ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3.

Next, with reference to FIG. 231, details of the first winning process (S2113) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing this first winning process (S2113). This first winning process (S2113) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 228), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a. be.

In the first winning process (FIG. 231, S2113), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is reached (S2401). Here, the round effective period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from when the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is set to the open state to when the interval period (5 seconds) ends. is. In the process of S2401, if it is not the round valid period (S2401: No), the prize winning counter 203h is reset (S2402), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2401, if it is determined that the current round is valid (S2401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not winning to the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a has been detected (S2403), If the winning to the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is not detected (S2403: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2403, if winning for the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is detected (S2403: Yes), the value of the winning counter 203h is updated by adding 1 (S2404). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 203h is equal to or greater than the upper limit (5 in this control example) (S2405), and if the value of the winning counter 203h is equal to or less than the upper limit (5 in this control example) ( S2405: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter 203h is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (5 in this control example) (S2405: Yes), the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a (opening/closing plate 65f1 attached thereto) is set. (S2406). Next, the jackpot scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2407), and it is determined whether the V winning flag 203f is ON (S2408). If the V winning flag 203f is ON (S2408: Yes), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the V winning flag 203f is off (that is, not on) (S2408: No), it is determined whether the V passage switch 65e3 is on (S2409). In the process of S2409, if the V pass switch 65e3 is off (that is, not on) (S2409: No), this process ends.

In the process of S2409, if the V passage switch 65e3 is ON (S2409: Yes), the V winning flag is set ON. Then, a V winning command is set, and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 232, the small winning control process (S2005), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 227) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 227 is a flow chart showing the contents of this small winning control process (S2005).

In the small hit control process (FIG. 232, S2005), first, it is determined whether a small hit scenario is set (S2501). Specifically, the process of S1404 of the special figure 2 deviating stop process (see FIG. 221) is executed, and it is determined whether a small hit scenario is set. In the process of S2501, if the small winning scenario is not set (S2501: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501, if the small winning scenario is set (S2501: Yes), the small winning scenario is updated (S2502), and it is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the small winning scenario (S2503). More specifically, in the processing of S2502, 1 is added to the counter value of the small winning scenario counter (not shown), and in the processing of S2503, the counter value of the small winning scenario counter (not shown) is a small winning scenario It is determined whether the value corresponds to the opening start of .

In the process of S2503, if it is determined that it is time to start the opening of the small winning scenario (S2503: Yes), the small winning opening command is set (S2504), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the opening start timing of the small winning scenario (S2503: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the round of the small winning scenario (S2505).

In the processing of S2505, when it is determined that it is time to start the round of the small winning scenario (S2505: Yes), small winning operation setting processing is executed (S2506), and this processing ends. The details of the small hit operation setting process (S2506) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the time to start the round of the small winning scenario (S2505: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the round currently being executed is met (S2507). Here, in this control example, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 5) are won in total while the specific winning opening 65a is open, or when the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a elapses for a predetermined period of time. If so, it is determined that the round end condition is met.

In the processing of S2507, when it is determined that the round end condition of the round currently being executed is satisfied (S2507: Yes), the processing of S2108 sets the specific winning opening 65a to be closed (first The solenoid is turned off so that the opening/closing plate 65f1 of the specific winning port 65a is closed), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end condition of the specific winning opening 65a is not established (S2507: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S2509).

In the process of S2509, when it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S2509: Yes), the small winning ending command is set (S2510), and the process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S2001) of the main processing (see FIG. 227). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the big win.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2509, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511). Here, the end timing of the small hit indicates the case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed.

In the process of S2511, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511: Yes), the flag 203v during the small hit is set to OFF (S2512), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small hit (S2511: No), the second winning process is executed (S2513), and this process ends. Details of the second winning process (S2513) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 233, the small hitting operation setting process (S2506) which is one process in the small hitting control process (FIG. 232, S2005) will be described. FIG. 233 is a flow chart showing the contents of this small winning operation setting process (S2506). In the small winning operation setting process (FIG. 233, S2506), first, the opening scenario in which the opening operation corresponding to the number of small winning rounds to be started is set is read (S2601). The opening operation of (the opening/closing plate 65f1 attached thereto (see FIG. 179)) of the specific winning opening 65a is set by the data read in the process of S2601 (S2602), and this process ends.

In this way, each operation of the variable prize winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big win game, the big win game will end in the middle. Defects can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 234, details of the second winning process (S2513) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 234 is a flow chart showing this second winning process (S2513). This second winning process (S2513) is executed in the small winning control process (see FIG. 232), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to winning to the specific winning opening 65a.

In the second winning process (FIG. 234, S2513), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is reached (S2701). Here, the round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from when the specific winning opening 65a is set to the open state to when the interval period (5 seconds) ends. In the process of S2401, if it is not the round valid period (S2701: No), the prize winning counter 203h is reset (S2702), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2701, if it is determined that the current round valid period (S2701: Yes), then it is determined whether or not winning to the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S2703), and to the specific winning opening 65a is not detected (S2703: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2703, if winning for the specific winning hole 65a is detected (S2703: Yes), the value of the winning counter 203h is updated by adding 1 (S2704). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 203h is equal to or greater than the upper limit (5 in this control example) (S2705), and if the value of the winning counter 203h is equal to or less than the upper limit (5 in this control example) ( S2705: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the value of the prize winning counter 203h is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (5 in this control example) (S2705: Yes), the specific winning port 65a (the opening/closing plate 65f1 associated therewith) is set to be closed (S2706). Next, the small winning scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2707), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 235 to 243, each control process executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing that is activated upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 235, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 235 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S4116 (see FIG. 236) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 236, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives power-off occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see FIG. 236, S4113), the power-off processing of S4116 is executed. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S4116 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S4116. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), it will transfer to S2004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). from), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S4116 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S4116, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4116 is executed (see FIG. 236 and S4115). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S4116 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the startup processing this time is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S4009), and after setting the initial values of the RAM 223 (S4010), the state The state setting area is updated based on the command (S4011). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4010 to set the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010).

The reason why the clearing process of S4009 is skipped is that when the process of S4008 is reached from S4004 via the process of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 236, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 236 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process was started or since the processing of S4101 was last executed (S4101). If the time has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4110. In the processing of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has passed because S4102 to S4110 are processing related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). , S4111 and the variable display setting process of S4112 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, the setting regarding the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is a command in the display control device. 114.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S4109, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S4110). After that, the process proceeds to S4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. Lamp edit processing of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring processing. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After that, a command determination process (S4111) for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to S4112. Details of this command determination process (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4112, in order to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variable pattern command for display is generated based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110, and the command is sent to the display controller 114. Executes a variable display setting process, which is a process for setting to transmit to. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S4112 is finished, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4115), and the power-off processing is executed (S4116). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S4117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the customer waiting presentation process (S4105) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 237 is a flow chart showing the customer waiting effect process (S4105). This customer waiting effect processing (S4105) is a sub-special figure 1 standby flag 223j that is set to ON when a special figure 1 standby command or a special figure 2 standby command output from the main control device 110 is received, a sub special Based on the setting status of the standby flag 223m in FIG. 2, processing for setting the standby display screen is executed. Details of the customer waiting effect process (S4105) will be described below.

In the customer waiting effect process (FIG. 237, S4105), first, it is determined whether or not the sub special figure 1 waiting flag 223j is set to ON (S4201). When it is determined that the sub special figure 1 standby flag 223j is set to ON (S4201: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k is updated (S4202). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k is the upper limit value (S4203). Here, in this control example, a value (30000) corresponding to 30 seconds is set as the upper limit value of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k. That is, when 30 seconds have passed since the fluctuation of the special figure 1 stopped (when the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k reaches the upper limit value) the special figure 1 standby flag is set to ON It is

If the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k is less than the upper limit (S4203: No), the process proceeds to S4205.

On the other hand, in the process of S4203, if the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k is the upper limit value (S4203: Yes), set the special figure 1 standby flag 223s to ON, the sub special figure 1 standby flag 223j, Then, the standby set flag 223u is set to OFF (S4204), and the process proceeds to S4205. By setting the standby setting completion flag 223u to OFF in the processing of S4204, for example, in a state where the standby display command for display is set based on the fact that the special figure 2 standby flag 223t described later is set to ON , When the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to ON, it becomes possible to determine the standby display type again. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately perform the standby display according to the variation situation (standby situation) of each special figure (special figure 1, special figure 2).

Also, in the processing of S4201, if it is determined that the sub special figure 1 standby flag 223j is set to OFF (that is, not set to ON) (S4201: No), the processing of S4202 to S4204 is performed. Skip and move to the processing of S4205.

In the processing of S4205, it is determined whether or not the sub special figure 2 standby flag 223m is set to ON (S4205). When it is determined that the sub special figure 2 standby flag 223m is set to ON (S4205: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 223n is updated (S4206). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 223n is the upper limit (30000) (S4207). If the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 223n is less than the upper limit (S4207: No), the process proceeds to S4209.

On the other hand, in the process of S4207, if the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 223n is the upper limit (S4207: Yes), set the special figure 2 standby flag 223t to ON, the sub special figure 2 standby flag 223m, Then, the standby set completion flag 223u is set to OFF (S4208), and the process proceeds to S4209. By setting the standby set flag 223u to off in the process of S4208, for example, in a state where the standby display command for display is set based on the fact that the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to ON, When the standby flag 223t in FIG. 2 is set to ON, the standby display type can be determined again. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately perform the standby display according to the variation situation (standby situation) of each special figure (special figure 1, special figure 2).

Also, in the process of S4205, if it is determined that the sub special figure 2 standby flag 223m is set to OFF (that is, not set to ON) (S4205: No), S4206 and S4207 Skip the process and move to the process of S4209.

In the processing of S4209, it is determined whether or not the standby set completion flag 223u is set to ON (S4209). If it is determined that the standby setting completion flag 223u is set to ON (S4209: Yes), the processing of S4211 to S4214 for setting the standby display type is skipped, and this processing ends. In other words, the state in which the standby setting completion flag 223u is set to ON is a state in which the variation state of each special figure (the setting state of the standby flag) has not been changed from the state in which the standby display type has already been set. Therefore, by not executing the processing for setting the standby display type when such a state is determined, the load of the processing for setting the standby display type can be reduced.

In addition, although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 241, in this control example, a new special figure variation in a state where the standby flag (special figure 1 standby flag 223s or special figure 2 standby flag 223t) is set to ON Also when a command (special figure standby command indicating OFF) indicating that it has been started is received, the process of setting the standby setting completion flag 223u to OFF is executed. Therefore, each special figure (special figure 1, special figure 2) because it is possible to always reset the standby display type whenever the fluctuation situation of special figure 1 or special figure 2 (setting status of standby flag) is changed It is possible to more appropriately perform the standby display according to the fluctuation state (standby state) of the display.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the standby set flag 223u is set to OFF (that is, not set to ON) (S4209: No), the special figure 1 standby flag 223s or the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON (S4210).

In the process of S4210, if it is determined that the special figure 1 standby flag 223s or special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S4210: No), this process finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 standby flag 223s or the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON (S4210: Yes), the game state set in the state setting area 223i is read (S4211) . Then, based on the read game state and the setting status of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t, the standby display type is determined from the screen display selection table 222b (see FIG. 200) (S4212).

Next, based on the determined standby display type, a display standby display command for notifying the standby display type to the display control device 114 is set (S4213). After that, the stand-by set completion flag 223u is set to ON (S4214), and this processing is terminated.

Next, the command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 238 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 236) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. . Details of the command determination process (S4111) will be described below.

In the command determination process (S2111), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read out and analyzed. It is determined whether or not the 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4301). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4301: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4302) and this process ends. The details of this stop type command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4301, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4301: No), whether or not the special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received It is determined (S4303). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol.

In the process of S4303, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S4303: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4304) and received The variation pattern type is extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command (S4305), and the process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that allows identification of the variation pattern type of the first special symbol. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the first special symbol (set the variable pattern command for the display of the first special symbol used).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is not received (S4303: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (S4306). In addition, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

In the process of S4306, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received (S4306: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM223 is set to ON (S4307), and the received special The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command in FIG. 2 (S4308), and this process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that allows identification of the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and in the variation display setting process described later (see FIG. 243) , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variable pattern command for the display of the second special symbol used).

In the processing of S4306, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S4306: No), it is determined whether the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4309). If it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S4309: Yes), the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the received pending ball number command (that is, the first The number of reserved balls of variable display of special symbols) is extracted, and the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value ( S4310), the process ends. In addition, in this control example, since it does not have a configuration to hold and store the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), in the process of S4310, the value of the first special symbol (special figure 1) reserved ball number counter 223c Only updates are performed.

Here, the pending ball number command is transmitted from main controller 110 when a ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), so each time there is a starting winning, the process of S4310 , the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start When the reserved ball number command is notified based on the winning, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, and the first special symbol reserved ball number of the main controller 110 is corrected. It can be matched with the value of the counter 203d.

Also, in the process of S4309, if it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4309: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4311). In the process of S4311, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4311: Yes), the information of the received winning information command (special symbol lottery propriety, hit type, and variation pattern) is converted to winning information corresponding to The data is set in the storage area 223b (S4312), and the processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4311 that the winning information command has not been received (S4311: No), it is determined whether or not the status command has been received (S4313). If it is determined that a state command has been received (S4313: Yes), state command processing (S4314) is executed. Details of this state command processing (S4314) will be described with reference to FIG. state) in the state setting area 223i.

In the processing of S4313, if it is determined that the state command has not been received (S4313: No), it is determined whether the special figure 1 standby command or the special figure 2 standby command is received from the main controller 110 (S4315) . In the process of S4315, when it is determined that either the special figure 1 standby command or the special figure 2 standby command is received (S4315: Yes), customer waiting command processing (S4316) is executed. Details of this customer waiting command process (S4316) will be described with reference to FIG. A process for setting the standby flag 223s or the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is executed.

In the process of S4315, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 standby command nor the special figure 2 standby command is received (S4315: No), the remaining probability variable number command or the remaining time short number command is received from the main controller 110 It is determined whether or not it has been done (S4317). In the process of S4315, when it is determined that either the remaining probability variable number command or the remaining time short number command is received (S4317: Yes), the remaining number update process (S4318) is executed. Details of this remaining number update process (S4318) will be described with reference to FIG. A process for setting the content of the effect display to be displayed is executed.

In the process of S4317, if it is determined that neither the remaining probability variable number command nor the remaining time short number command is received (S4317: No), the process according to other commands is executed (S4319), and this process ends do. In the processing of S4319, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is processed. to the display control device 114 .

Next, the stop type command reception process (S4302) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 239 is a flow chart showing this stop type command reception process (S4302). This stop type command reception process (S4302) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 238) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. Details of the stop type command reception process (S4302) will be described below.

In the stop type command reception process (FIG. 239, S4302), first, in response to the received command, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is set to ON, When the special figure 2 stop classification command is received, the special figure 2 stop classification selection flag 223g is set to ON. (S4401). Next, the stop type (jackpot A to jackpot G, small hit A to small hit C, off, reach off, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S4402), this End the process.

The stop type extracted in S4402 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. In addition, the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the second special symbol Each stop type is stored so as to be identifiable. Thereby, even if the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) start to fluctuate at the same time, it becomes possible to manage the stop types respectively, and to execute appropriate fluctuation display. can be done.

Next, referring to FIG. 240, the state command processing (S4314) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 240 is a flow chart showing this state command processing (S4314). This state command processing (S4314) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 238) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. Details of the state command processing (S4314) will be described below.

In the state command process (FIG. 240, S4314), first, the game state before receiving the state command is determined from the value of the state setting area 223i provided in the RAM 223 (S4501). That is, it is determined in which game state the state command was received. Next, it is determined whether the game state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4502). If it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is not the latent state (S4502: No), it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating transition to the latent state (S4503). In the processing of S4503, if the received command is a state command indicating transition to the latent certain state (S4503: Yes), the latent certainty notification effect for informing the entry of the latent certainty state is set (S4504). Then, 120 is set in the effect probability variation number area 223p (S4505), and the process proceeds to S4506.

On the other hand, in the processing of 4502, if it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4502: Yes), or in the processing of 4503, the received command indicates a transition to the latent state. If it is not a status command to indicate (S4503: No), the process proceeds to S4506.

In the processing of S4506, the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the received state command is stored in the state setting area 223i (S4506), and the processing ends.

As described above, the state command processing (S4314) in this control example is based on the game state set in the state setting area 223i and the game state indicated by the state command output from the main controller 110. , it is determined that a game state other than the latent certainty state has shifted to the latent certainty state, and when the game state other than the latent certainty state has shifted to the latent certainty state, the remaining number display area of the third symbol display device 81. A process of controlling "120" as an initial value is executed in D1 (see FIG. 187(a)). On the other hand, if the jackpot is won during the latent definite state and the latent definite state is set again after the jackpot game ends, it is determined that the latent definite state is set in the state setting area 223i in the processing of S4502 (S4502 : Yes), in order to skip the processing of S4504 and S4505, the effect probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (see FIG. 187(a)) of the third symbol display device 81 is added (reset). never As a result, even if you win a jackpot during the latent probability state and the actual probability variation number is reset (set to 120 times), the display of the production probability variation number will continue to be the value that was displayed before winning the jackpot. will be displayed. Therefore, the rest of the actual probability variation number (remaining probability variation number) and the remaining number of production probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (see FIG. 187 (a)) of the third symbol display device 81 (production remaining probability variation number) can be made different, making it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the latent certainty state ends.

It should be noted that in the above-described state command processing (S4314 in FIG. 240), when entering a new latent probability state, the same number of times (120 times) as the actual probability variation number of times (120 times) of the third symbol display device 81 Although it is configured to be displayed in the remaining number display area D1, other configurations may be used. For example, a number smaller than the actual probability variation number may be displayed in the remaining number display area D1.

Next, the standby command process (S4316) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 241 is a flow chart showing this standby command process (S4316). This state command processing (S4314) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 238) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and each standby command output from the main control device 110 Based on (special figure 1 standby command, special figure 2 standby command), a process of setting the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t to ON or setting it to OFF is executed. The setting status of this special figure 1 standby flag 223s and special figure 2 standby flag 223t is referred to in the above-described customer waiting effect processing (see S4105 in FIG. 237).

When the standby command process (S4316) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 standby command is received (S4601). In the process of S4601, if it is determined that the special figure 1 standby command is received (S4601: Yes), the sub special figure 1 standby flag 223j is set to ON (S4602), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, if it is determined that the special figure 1 standby command has not been received (S4601: No), it is determined whether the special figure 1 standby command indicating the off of the special figure 1 standby flag 203i has been received (S4603). In the process of S4603, if it is determined that the special figure 1 standby command indicating the off of the special figure 1 standby flag 203i is received (S4603: Yes), the sub special figure 1 standby flag 223j is set to off (S4604 ), the special figure 1 waiting counter 223k is reset (S4605). After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to ON (S4606).

In the processing of S4606, if it is determined that the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to OFF (that is, it is not set to ON) (S4606: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4606, if it is determined that the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to ON (S4606: Yes), the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the standby set flag 223u are set to off (S4607), this processing ends.

That is, in the state in which the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to ON (a state in which 30 seconds or more have passed without the special figure 1 fluctuating), the special figure 1 standby flag 203i has been set to off When receiving the special figure 1 standby command indicating (that the variation of the special figure 1 is executed), the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to off, and the standby set flag 223u is set to off , In the customer waiting effect process (see S4105 in FIG. 237), the standby display type corresponding to when the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to OFF is set. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the standby display type according to the fluctuation situation of each special figure (the setting situation of the standby flag).

On the other hand, in the processing of S4603, if it is determined that the special figure 1 standby command indicating the off of the special figure 1 standby flag 203i is not received (S4603: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 standby command is received (S4608). In the process of S4608, if it is determined that the special figure 2 standby command is received (S4608: Yes), the sub special figure 2 standby flag 223m is set to ON (S4609), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4608, if it is determined that the special figure 2 standby command is not received (S4608: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 standby command indicating the off of the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is received (S4610). In the process of S4610, if it is determined that the special figure 2 standby command indicating the off of the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is received (S4610: Yes), the sub special figure 2 standby flag 223m is set to off (S4611 ), the special figure 2 standby counter 223n is reset (S4612). After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON (S4613).

In the process of S4613, if it is determined that the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to OFF (that is, not set to ON) (S4613: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4613, if it is determined that the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON (S4613: Yes), the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the standby set flag 223u are set to off (S4614), this processing ends.

That is, in the state that the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON (the state in which 30 seconds or more have passed without the special figure 2 fluctuating), the special figure 2 standby flag 203j has been set to off When receiving the special figure 2 standby command indicating (that the variation of the special figure 2 is executed), the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to off, and the standby set flag 223u is set to off , In the customer waiting effect process (see S4105 in FIG. 237), the standby display type corresponding to when the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to OFF is set. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the standby display type according to the fluctuation situation of each special figure (the setting situation of the standby flag).

On the other hand, in the process of S4610, if it is determined that the special figure 2 standby command indicating the off of the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is not received (S4610: No), this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 242, the remaining count update process (S4318) will be described. FIG. 242 is a flow chart showing the content of this remaining count update process (S4318). This remaining number update process (S4318) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 238) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113. Or based on receiving a short time remaining command. A process of updating the contents set in the remaining probability variable count area 223o, the effect probability variable floor area 223p, and the remaining time short floor area 223q is executed.

In the remaining number update process (S4318), first, it is determined whether or not a remaining probability variation number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4651). In the processing of S4651, if it is determined that the remaining probability variation count command has been received (S4651: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is stored in the remaining probability variation count area 223o (S4652). Next, it is determined whether or not data indicating the latent state is stored in the state setting area 223i (S4653).

That is, in the process of S4653, it is determined whether the currently set gaming state is the latent state or the variable probability state, and if it is determined to be the latent certainty state, an effect display dedicated to the latent certainty state, which will be described later. will be executed. On the other hand, if it is determined to be in the variable probability state, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example executes the same effect display in the variable probability state and the normal state, so this processing ends without executing a dedicated effect display. do.

In the processing of S4653, if it is determined that the data indicating the probability state is stored (set) in the state setting area 223i (S4653: Yes), the remaining probability change number notified (received) by the main controller 110 is 0 times (S4654). In the process of S4654, when it is determined that the number of remaining probability variations notified (received) by the main control device 110 is 0 (S4654: Yes), the end effect of the latent probability state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Set (S4657). Then, the state setting area 223i is overwritten with data indicating the normal state, and the process proceeds to S4661.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4654, when it is determined that the number of remaining probability variations notified (received) by the main controller 110 is one or more (that is, not 0 times) (S4654: No), the effect probability variation number area 223p is decremented by 1 (S4657). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of production probability variations after the subtraction is 0 (S4658). In the processing of S4658, when it is determined that the number of times of probability variation after the subtraction is 0 (S4658: Yes), the number of times of the number of times of probability variation remaining area 223o is set to the number of times of probability variation of effect 223p (S4659). Thereafter, a resurrection effect for notifying the set number of times in the effect probability variable number area 223p is set (S4660), and the process proceeds to S4661.

That is, in a state where the actual remaining probability variation number (substantially remaining probability variation number) stored (set) in the remaining probability variation number area is 1 or more, when the production probability variation number (representation probability variation number) becomes 0 , in order to notify the player that the latent certainty state continues, the value of the number of times of residual probability change is updated to the value of the actual number of times of residual probability change, and the value is displayed in the remaining number display area of the third symbol display device 81. The effect (resurrection effect) displayed in D1 is executed.

By executing such a performance, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the latent definite state ends, and after making the player think that the latent definite state has ended, the number of times of remaining probability variation of the performance is increased again. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

In this control example, the timing at which this resurrection effect is executed is the case where the number of times of production probability variation (remaining probability variation number of productions) becomes 0, but other configurations may be used, for example, the number of production probability variations On the condition that (remaining probability variation number of performances) is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times (for example, 5), a lottery is conducted as to whether or not to execute the resurrection performance, and the resurrection performance is executed based on the result of the lottery. You may As a result, the player can play the game while predicting at what timing (special figure fluctuation) the resurrection effect will occur, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Moreover, instead of executing the resurrection effect based on the special figure variation, for example, it may be executed using the ending period of the small winning game. In this case, on the condition that the production probability variation number (production remaining probability variation number) is 0 (or a state in which a display mode indicating that the latent probability state is not confirmed to continue) is displayed. It is desirable to execute a resurrection effect. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to set a long variable time during which the resurrection effect can be executed as the special figure variable time in the latent certainty state, and the game in the latent certainty state can be provided smoothly.

In addition, it may be configured such that the long variable time in which the resurrection effect can be executed is set as the special figure variable time only in the final stage (for example, the number of times of real residual probability variation is 10 times or less) among the latent definite states. As a result, the display state in which the resurrection effect can be executed (the number of times of probability of effect variation (the number of times of probability of effect remaining) is 0 (or the state in which the display mode indicating that the continuation of the latent probability state is not confirmed is displayed) )) is difficult to execute in the early stages of the latent definite state, there is no need to set a long variable time during which the resurrection performance can be executed, and the latent definite state game can be provided smoothly.

Next, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 243 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S4112). This variable display setting process (FIG. 243, S4112) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 236) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As described above, in the variable display setting process (FIG. 243, S4112), in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, the first or special figure 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 Based on this, the process of setting the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Also, based on the extracted stop type (jackpot A to jackpot G), the process of setting the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 243, S4112), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4701). Then, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is off (S4701: No), since it is in a state where the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, the process of S4705 Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S4701: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S4702).

Next, in the processing of S4703, the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command in the processing of S4303 of the command determination processing (Fig. 238, S4111) is stored in the other memory area of the RAM 223. 223z to generate a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol (S4703). The display variation pattern command for the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is the display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol variation pattern command. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the variable pattern command for display of the 2-byte configuration are "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special design, and if it is "01", the second special design It is configured to indicate that it corresponds to

The first special symbol display variation pattern command set in the process of S4703 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and displayed by the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 236). is transmitted to the control device 114 for use. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, a special symbol corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 is displayed with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the pattern is performed.

Along with the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol The data corresponding to the first special symbol is shifted in the winning information storage area 223b (S4704).

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4705). And, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S4705: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110 Therefore, the processing of S4709 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S4705: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S4706). In the processing of S4306 of the command determination processing (FIG. 238, S4111), the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the special figure 2 variation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223, and the second 2 Set a variation pattern command for displaying special symbols (S4707).

The second special symbol display variation pattern command set in the process of S4707 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and displayed by the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 236). is transmitted to the control device 114 for use. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, a special symbol corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 is displayed with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the pattern is performed. Then, the data corresponding to the second special symbol is shifted in the winning information storage area 223b (S4708).

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4709). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g are not set to ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4709: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on (S2709: Yes), when the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is on sets the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f to off, and when the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on, sets the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g to off (S4710).

In the process of S4301 of the command determination process (Fig. 238, S4111), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command is set (S4711), and this process ends. When the extracted stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, a display special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. In addition, when the extracted stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, based on the stop type, set the display special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the stop type to the display control device 114 . In addition, the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 is to notify the jackpot type when the jackpot is hit, even if the determination result is out. be done. If the determination result is out, the out symbol is set without referring to the stop type.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 244 to 257. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 244, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 244 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present control example, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, thereby speeding up the NOR ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, referring to FIG. 245, the boot processing (S6001) will be described. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 244) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S6002 in FIG. 244) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 245, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the command pointer 231a in step S6101. and the processing of S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in this control example, the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after initializing the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing in S6003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 255(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 255(a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 246(b)) can be easily performed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) (not shown) is drawn. Command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 246(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 246(b)) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is issued. When received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and simple variation is performed. can perform. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 246(a). FIG. 246(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 246(b). FIG. 246(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 246(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S6302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 247 to 251. FIG.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 252 to 254. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 255 and 256. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305), 207, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the buffer information to be drawn. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear out reach, reach other than front-rear out, complete out) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, simple command determination processing (S6308) is executed, then simple display setting processing (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 247 to 251, the details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 247 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 247, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a variation pattern command for display (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 248(a), the details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will be described. FIG. 248(a) is a flow chart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114. FIG.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation longer than the set display data table can be actually obtained. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501 , extracts the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 248(b). FIG. 248(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (any of jackpots A to G, small hits A to C, reach out, complete out) stop type table corresponding to is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 246(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each of the stop symbols, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. It is set to ON (S6603) and returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 247, the description is continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the opening command process (S6409) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 249(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 247, the description is continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S6410), and display If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 249(b), details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described. FIG. 249(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing. This number-of-rounds command process is for executing a process corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 247, the description continues. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the ending command process (S6413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 247, the description is continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no ending command for display (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 251, the details of the back image change command process (S6415) will be described. FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the back image determination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the other bits are set to ON. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after change is selected from the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display one of the back faces A and B according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, from the back face image determination flag 233x set in S7002, The type of background image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the background image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type ( Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6414 that there is no back image change command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). Otherwise (S6416: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the error command processing (S6417) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 251(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp controller 114 .

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process of S7102 sets on error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no error command (S6416: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6418), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), and the processing of S6402 to S6418 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6418 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 246(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 248(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 248(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and for other commands, A process to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 248(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on varying moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 252 to 254, the details of the display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 252, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). ), it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S7202), S7203-S7204 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

Here, with reference to FIG. 253, details of the warning image setting process will be described. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S7301).

In task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are specified, and the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing such as

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 252 . After the warning image setting process (S7204), or if it is determined in the process of S7203 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S7203: No), then the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Details of the pointer update processing will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7401, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the display data table for demonstration set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S7405), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7402: No), this process ends and returns to the display setting process.

Here, return to FIG. 252 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S7206 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and each sprite , determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (S7210), and then the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), returns to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114 .

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S7215, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7209, if the fixed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S7216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect. After that, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demonstration display data table is obtained and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents thereof are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加, you can set its drawing contents.

In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 246(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. A process of setting a display data table specifying that the image is to be displayed still in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 255 and 256, the details of the transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 255(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S7502), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S7501, that is, if it is turned off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S7502), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 255(b). FIG. 255(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S7601). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7602). In the processing of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7602 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S7603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 246(b)), command Since the judgment processing (see FIGS. 247 to 251) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 252 to 254) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 256) (see S7501: No in FIG. 255(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, with reference to FIG. 256, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 256 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is obtained (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

In addition, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not ended (S7706: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), image data to be transferred exists, so is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709). Then, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the back image determination flags 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is obtained (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the image to be transferred, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 257, details of the drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 257 is a flow chart showing this rendering process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (FIG. 207) is generated (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . In addition, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed simultaneously in parallel. can be done.

In the rendering process, after the process of S7802, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the load process (see FIG. 246(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is configured to switch between the three game states of the normal state, the variable probability state, and the latent probability state, triggered by a big win or the like. Then, the probability state is set to the most advantageous game state. Specifically, compared to the lottery of the first special symbol, after increasing the ratio of small hits in the lottery of the second special symbol (0% → about 46%), in the latent state, other games It is configured to make it easier to execute the lottery of the second special symbol compared to the state. As a result, if the lottery for the second special pattern is performed in the hidden state, the probability of winning a small prize is high and the probability of winning a big prize is also increased, so the balls are made to enter the specific prize winning port 65a and the prize balls are awarded. can be made more likely than other game states. Therefore, the game can be played in anticipation of transition to the latent certainty state.

In addition, in the first control example, the type of special symbol that is likely to be selected according to the game state is switched (main variation and sub variation are switched). Specifically, in the normal state and the probability variation state, the variation display of the first special symbol is the main variation, and in the latent probability state the variation display of the second special symbol is the main variation. In each game state, when the elapsed time from the stop of the main variation reaches a predetermined time (30 seconds) or more, even if the secondary variation is being executed, a demo display corresponding to the game state is displayed. (customer waiting demo screen, hidden confirmation display) are displayed. Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the fluctuation stopped state, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and a demonstration display is performed. In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not a game is being played by the presence or absence of a demonstration display. A game can be started on the machine. As a result, it is possible to improve the operation rate of the gaming machine.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when applied to a gaming machine with specifications in which multiple symbols fluctuate at the same time, even if some symbols are in a state of stopping fluctuation, as long as the other symbols are fluctuating. , was unable to run the demo display. Therefore, it may be difficult for a player looking for an empty table to determine from the displayed content whether the table is empty or not.

On the other hand, in the first control example, in the normal state and the probability variable state, it is configured to determine whether or not to display the customer waiting demo screen (regardless of the secondary fluctuation situation) only according to the main fluctuation situation. . As a result, even if the player enters the ball into the second ball entrance 1640 and quits the game immediately after the 600-second variable display is started, the player will be able to can display the customer waiting demo screen. Therefore, other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demo screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is an empty machine, so that a game can be started with the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 from decreasing.

In addition, in this control example, when 30 seconds or more have passed since the main variation stopped in the latent state, a special mode of demonstration display (special display) in which the same character 811 as during the variation continues to be displayed is displayed. It is configured to be set. That is, the display contents of the same system are displayed during the normal display and during the demonstration display. As a result, when the ball entering the second ball entrance 1640 is subsequently detected, the display mode (performance mode) can be switched smoothly, so the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. .

In addition, in the first control example, as a kind of ready-to-win effect, a special ready-to-win is provided in which a new symbol row is displayed after the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination that does not come off. . Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a plurality of symbols are variably displayed and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, an advantageous winning state is given to the player. In such a game machine, while one symbol is changing and the other symbols are stopped and displayed, a ready-to-win state is generated in which the stopped and displayed symbols constitute a part of a predetermined combination, resulting in a win. By making players expect that, they are trying to improve their interest.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, even if all symbols are not stopped and displayed when the ready-to-win state does not occur, there is no possibility of a winning state at that time, and the player's play is greatly affected. There was a risk of losing interest. On the other hand, in this control example, a special ready-to-win effect is provided in which, after the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in an out-of-combination combination, a new pattern row is framed to develop into a ready-to-win effect. As a result, even if the third symbol is stop-displayed once due to a combination that is out of alignment, it can be expected to develop into a special ready-to-win effect. That is, the combination of the stop patterns can be confirmed by paying attention to whether it is a combination of the stop patterns that can develop into a special ready-to-win performance (a combination that becomes a ready-to-win if the new pattern row L4 is displayed). Therefore, every time an incorrect combination is stop-displayed in the variable display, development to a special ready-to-win effect can be expected, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the first control example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, irrespective of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in a state in which one variable display is being performed, other variable displays may be configured to be unexecutable. Then, when there is a reserved ball, it may be configured such that the variable display is executed in order from the reserved ball with the oldest starting prize in terms of time. By configuring in this way, the control can be simplified, so the processing load can be reduced.

In the first control example, the latent state is set to the most advantageous state, but it is not limited to this. For example, the variable probability state may be set to the most advantageous state. That is, in the variable probability state, the ball is configured to easily enter the second ball entrance 1640, and in the normal state and the latent state, the ball is more likely to enter the first ball entrance 64 than the second ball entrance 1640. may be configured so that it is easier for the ball to enter the ball. Specifically, for example, in the normal state and the latent state, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a variation pattern with a variation time of 600 seconds is selected as the variation pattern, and in the variable state. , a variation pattern having an extremely short variation time (0.5 seconds) may be selected. That is, the specified contents of the probability variation table 202f3 and the probability variation table 202f4 in the first control example may be exchanged. In addition, when the second special symbol jackpot (jackpot E to F) is obtained in the variable probability state, and the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the number of times of time reduction is set to 120 times, and in the normal state and the latent state, It is good also as a structure which sets the number of times of time saving as 0 times. As a result, when the second special pattern is a big hit in the probability variable state, the game state after the big win is easily set to the probability variable state again (the probability variable state is easily looped), so the superiority of the probability variable state is enhanced. be able to.

Also, the normal state may be set as the most advantageous state instead of the latent probability state or the probability variable state. Specifically, for example, the specified contents of the normal table A202f1 and the latency table 202f4 in the first control example are exchanged, and the normal state is easily looped in the case of a big hit in the normal state (the V passage switch 65e3 is turned on). In the latent probability state or the probability variable state, the V passage switch 65e3 is configured so that it is easy to win the jackpot type of the open/close pattern in which the ball easily passes. good too.

In the first control example, among the opening/closing patterns set for the opening/closing plate 65f1, the opening/closing plate 65f1 is kept open for 0.2 second after the start of one round as a pattern that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the V-pass switch 65e3. Although a set opening/closing pattern is provided, the opening period may be shortened to reliably prevent the ball from entering the specific winning hole 65 .

In the first control example, when the special ready-to-win effect is executed and each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 is temporarily stopped, all the temporarily stopped main symbols on the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are new symbols. Although it is configured to face the direction of the row L4, it is not limited to this. For example, only the main symbol (in the example of FIG. 185(a), the main symbol with the number "1") that is reachable by the appearance (frame-in) of the new symbol row L4 is the new symbol row L4. may be configured to look up in the direction of Further, for example, the degree of expectation for a big win may be suggested by the number of main symbols that look up at the new symbol row L4 among the main symbols other than the main symbols on which reach is applied. That is, the higher the number of main symbols looking up in the direction of the new symbol row L4, the higher the expectation of a big win in the special ready-to-win effect. In this case, when all the main symbols look up at the new symbol row L4, the big win may be decided (for example, it may be selected only in the case of winning super reach). By constructing in this manner, when the symbols that have been fluctuating are stopped and displayed in an incorrect combination, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the aspect of each main symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. .

In the first control example, when the special ready-to-win effect is executed, all the main symbols temporarily stopped in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 face the direction of the new symbol row L4. It is not limited to this. Not only the main symbols but also the reserved symbols may face the direction of the new symbol row L4. In this case, the number of reserved symbols facing the direction of the new symbol row L4 may indicate the degree of expectation for a big win in the special ready-to-win effect. That is, the greater the number of reserved symbols facing the direction of the new symbol row L4, the higher the expectation of a big win. In addition, instead of suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit in the special ready-to-win effect by the number of reserved symbols, it may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the reserved balls corresponding to the reserved symbols will be a big hit. For example, from the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the variation pattern of each reserved ball is read in advance, and the variation pattern (losing super reach or winning super reach) that develops into a super reach effect is reserved in the reserved ball. When it is determined that the ball is included, the reserved pattern corresponding to the reserved ball that develops into the super ready-to-win performance is directed to a new pattern row L4 at the time of temporary stop in the special ready-to-win performance. may be configured. As a result, when the game is temporarily stopped in the special super ready-to-win effect, the game can be played while paying attention to the reserved symbols, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the first control example, the new symbol row L4 displayed when the special ready-to-win effect is executed is scroll-displayed in parallel with each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. , it is not necessary to scroll and display the symbol rows L1 to L3 in parallel. For example, the new symbol row L4 may be displayed on the right or left side of each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 and scrolled in the vertical direction (perpendicular to each of the symbol rows L1 to L3). As a result, it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom in the performance when the special ready-to-win performance is selected. Also, the number of new symbol rows is not limited to one, and a plurality of symbol rows may be newly displayed when the special ready-to-win effect is executed. By adopting a configuration in which a plurality of symbol rows are displayed, it is possible to increase the number of combinations of main symbols at the time of temporary stop that can develop into a special reach. Therefore, when it stops at the stop pattern corresponding to the loss, it is possible to increase the possibility of becoming a stop pattern that may develop into a special reach, so that the player is more likely to develop into a special reach effect. You can expect more frequently. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In this first control example, a result display (see FIG. 188(b)) indicating the result of the latent state is basically performed until the variable display of the first special symbol is started after the latent state is ended. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the result of the latent certainty state is displayed immediately after the latent certainty state ends. Then, the display may be continued until the first variable display of the first special symbol is completed. By adopting a configuration in which the result is displayed immediately after the end of the latent certainty state, the player can immediately know the result of the completed latent certainty state. Therefore, even if it takes a long time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 after the player returns to the left-hand shot, the result of the latent state is not displayed and stress is given to the player. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the storage.

In this first control example, after the end of the latent certainty state, the variation time of the first special symbol is fixed to 12 seconds over two special symbol lotteries, but it is not limited to 12 seconds, and the result It may be set arbitrarily (for example, 10 seconds or 20 seconds) as long as the display is sufficiently recognizable to the player.

In this first control example, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big win or a small win, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, it is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be temporarily stopped or variably displayed while the measurement of the variability time is interrupted. Also, if either the first special symbol or the second special symbol wins a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol will win a big hit or a small hit until the big hit or small win is stopped. A compulsory lottery that never wins may be executed so that the result of the lottery is always a loss. As a result, it is possible to suppress the situation where both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are elected as a big win or a small win. In addition, in this case, it is preferable to configure so that the remaining probability variation number and the remaining time reduction number are not subtracted based on the number of times the forced lottery is executed. As a result, it is possible to provide a fair game to the players.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 258 to 289. FIG. In the above-described first control example, the first ball entrance 64 into which the ball is likely to enter by hitting left-handed and the second ball entrance 1640 into which the ball is likely to enter by hitting right-handed are provided. In the normal state and the probability variable state that are executed, the game (special figure 1 Substantially variable game), in the latent state where the right-handed game is executed, the lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 2) based on the entry of the ball into the second ball entrance 1640 is mainly The game to be executed (special figure 2 substantial variation game) was configured to be executed. Then, in the latent state where the right-handed game is executed, the variable winning device 65 is set for a predetermined period (for example, , about 1.65 seconds).

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is configured so that both the lottery of the special figure 1 and the lottery of the special figure 2 can be executed by hitting to the right, and the variation of each special figure in the latent definite state. By setting the variable time of the special figure 2 shorter than the variable time of the special figure 1, the lottery of the special figure 2 is more likely to be executed than the special figure 1 in the latent sure state. In addition, the number of time reductions given in the probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols and time saving state of normal symbols) is set to the number of times that the high probability state of special symbols is set (for example, 120 times). (For example, set to 100 times), and when the number of lotteries of special figures (number of fluctuations of special figures) exceeds 100 times in the probability variation state, it is configured to move from the probability variation state to the latent probability state. .

In addition, long variation (180 seconds) and short variation (3 seconds) are set for the variation time of the second special symbol in the probability variation state, and the second special symbol variation at the timing of transition from the probability variation state to the latent probability state It is configured to vary the degree of occurrence of small hits in the latent state according to the situation. Specifically, when the second special symbol shifts to the latent state at the timing immediately after the long fluctuation (180 seconds) starts, the fluctuation by the first special symbol until the second special symbol starts to fluctuate is executed, the number of lotteries for the second special symbol during the latent certainty state is reduced, and as a result, the degree of occurrence of small wins can be reduced. On the other hand, when the second special symbol shifts to the latent state in the short fluctuation (3 seconds) or near the end timing of the long fluctuation (180 seconds), the second special immediately after the transition to the latent state Since the variation of the pattern is started, as a result, the degree of occurrence of small winnings can be increased. In addition, although the details will be described later, in the area where the ball is launched by right-handed hitting (right-handed hitting area), there is a mechanism for alternately entering the ball into the right first ball entrance 64b and the second right ball entrance 1640b. is provided, and it is configured so that a ball cannot be entered only through one of the ball entry holes (for example, the second ball entry hole 1640a) (to make it difficult).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the opportunity to shift to the latent state, which is the game state most advantageous to the player, and to improve the player's motivation for the game, as in the first control example described above. can. Furthermore, since the degree of advantage (the degree of occurrence of small hits) when shifting from the variable probability state to the latent probability state can be varied depending on the timing of the state transition, it is possible to provide the player with more complicated game characteristics, and the game It is possible to suppress early boredom. In addition, the ball is alternately placed in the right first ball entrance 64b for executing the lottery for the first special symbol by entering the ball and the second ball entrance 1640b for executing the lottery for the second special symbol by entering the ball. is provided in the right-handed area, it is possible to suppress the execution of only the second special symbol lottery that is advantageous to the player, and a state that is excessively advantageous to the player It is possible to suppress giving.

Furthermore, in the first control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to execute the lottery at the same time (execute variation), and the lottery result of either one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a hit (big hit or small hit), and at the timing when the pattern indicating the winning lottery result is stopped and displayed (at the time when the hit is confirmed), the other special pattern (for example, the first special pattern) changes. It was configured to be forcibly stopped by the design.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, the lottery result of any one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a win (big win or small win), and a symbol indicating the winning lottery result. At the timing when is stopped and displayed (at the timing when the hit is confirmed), the measurement (count) of the fluctuation time for the fluctuation of the other special pattern (for example, the first special pattern) is interrupted, and the lottery result of one special pattern At the timing when the base winning game is finished (timing when the special symbol can be varied), the measurement (counting) of the variation time for the variation of the other special symbol which has been interrupted is restarted.

Thereby, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously executed (executed variation), the lottery result of each special symbol can be surely provided to the player, and the player can enjoy the game. You can make it so that you don't feel dissatisfied with it.

The pachinko machine 10 in the second control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that, on the game board 13, the arrangement position of the variable winning device 65 is changed from the right-handed area to the left-handed ball. And the point that the ball hit to the right moves to the central lower area where the ball can be entered, the point that the distribution unit 660 is provided instead of the second ball entrance 1640, the ball to the second ball entrance 1640 The contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 are partially changed in that an electric accessory 660f that restricts the entry of balls into the sorting unit 660 is provided instead of the electric accessory 1640a that restricts ball entry. , the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 are partially changed, and a part of the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. , the content of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, the content of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and The point is that part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are as follows: It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 258, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 258 is a front view of the board surface 13 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 258, in the second control example, the sorting unit 660 is placed at the position where the variable winning device 65 was arranged in the first control example (on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (right hitting area)). , the electric accessory 660f is arranged above the sorting unit 660, and the second input arranged on the downstream side of the right-handed area (lower right side of the board surface 13) in the first control example. The difference is that the ball hole 1640 is removed and the variable winning device 65 is arranged below the central area of the board surface (below the first ball hole 64). Although the details will be described later, the sorting unit 660 is configured so that a ball can enter through a passage opening provided in the upper portion thereof. Inside the sorting unit 660, there is a right first ball entrance 64b where a lottery for a first special symbol is executed when a ball enters, and a lottery for a second special symbol is executed when a ball enters. A second ball entry port 1640b is provided, and a ball entered into the distribution unit 660 through the passage port is distributed to one of these ball entry ports. Therefore, by hitting the ball aiming at the sorting unit 660 by hitting to the right, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed.

Furthermore, above the sorting unit 660, an electric accessory 660f is arranged that can be changed between an allowable position for allowing balls to flow into a passage opening provided at the top of the sorting unit 660 and a regulation position for regulating it. there is This electric accessory 660f, like the electric accessory 640a of the first control example described above, is executed for a predetermined period of time when the result of the normal symbol lottery executed based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is a win. (1 second x 2 times) It is controlled to vary to the allowable position. As a result, in the normal state, aiming at the first ball entrance 64 in a game for executing left-handed hitting (hereinafter referred to as a left-handed game) results in a game for executing right-handed hitting (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game). Rather than aiming at the entrance 64b, it is configured so that the first special symbol can be changed efficiently.

Here, with reference to FIG. 259, the configuration of distribution unit 660 will be described. 259(a) and (b) are diagrams showing the internal structure of the sorting unit 660. FIG. In fact, a cover body is arranged on the front side, and the cover body is composed of a member whose inside can be seen through, and a spiral pattern is attached to the surface and colored so that the inside cannot be seen through or is difficult to see through. It is configured so that it is difficult to visually recognize the inside.

As shown in FIGS. 259(a) and 259(b), the upper part of the sorting unit 660 is provided with a passage opening through which a ball can enter. A mold entry sensor 660a is located. A distribution member 900 for distributing balls to the right first ball entrance 64b or the second ball entrance 1640b is provided below the passage opening. A right first ball entrance 64b is arranged in the lower left direction of the distribution member 900 when viewed from the front, and a second ball entrance 1640b is arranged in the lower right direction of the distribution member 900 when viewed from the front. The ball that has passed through the passage port is alternately distributed to the right first ball entrance port 64b and the second ball entrance port 1640b by the distribution member 900. FIG.

The sorting member 900 is configured to be able to receive a ball that has entered the sorting unit 660 with the accommodating portion 900a or 900c. When a ball is received by the storage portion 900a, the weight of the ball causes the distribution member 900 as a whole to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front. As a result, the housing portion 900a is in a state inclined downward to the left (see FIG. 89(b)), and the first right ball entering the distribution member 900 is arranged in the lower left direction in front view. The ball falls toward the opening 64b (the ball is guided to the right first ball entrance 64b).

Here, the sorting member 900 is configured to be rotatable about 15 degrees clockwise and counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and a magnet 900b is provided on the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900b. ing. On the other hand, on the base body provided on the back side of the sorting unit 660, the state where the sorting member 900 is not rotated clockwise or counterclockwise ), the base-side magnet 901 is arranged on the rear side (on the center line of the passage port) of the position where the magnet 900b is arranged.

The magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 and the base-side magnet 901 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a bar-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet 901 is arranged and fixed so that the tip thereof faces the distribution member 900 side. The magnet 900b is also made of a bar-shaped magnet similar to the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the sorting member 900 so that the tip thereof faces the base-side magnet 901 side. At a position where the distribution member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900c is directly above (on the center line of the interval where about one game ball can enter the passage opening), the base side magnet 901 and the magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 are closest to each other (tips face each other). Here, since the mutual magnets are arranged so as to have the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole), they repel each other and stop at the position where the boundary wall of the distribution member 900 faces directly upward. It is maintained at a position rotated to either the left or right.

As a result, when the magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 is positioned on the center line of the passage port (upward position), the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 repel each other. As a result, one of the storage portions 900a and 900c faces the side of receiving incoming balls of the sorting unit 660 (passing port side of the sorting unit 660). Therefore, the ball entering the sorting unit 660 can be reliably sorted to the right first ball entrance 64b and the second ball entrance 1640b.

In addition, due to the repulsion between the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901, for example, the accommodation portion 900a receives the ball and rotates about 30 degrees to the left, guiding the ball to the right first ball entrance 64b, and then swinging. It is possible to prevent the division member 900 from rotating to the right (the receiving portion 900a faces upward). As a result, after the ball is guided to the right first ball entrance 64b, the storage portion 900c faces upward, and the ball that enters the sorting unit 660 is received by the storage portion 900c. The distribution member 900 rotates clockwise by about 30 degrees due to the weight of the ball, and the container 900c is tilted in the lower right direction when viewed from the front. , enters the second ball entrance 1640b (the ball is guided to the second ball entrance 1640b). In this way, the sorting member 900 can alternately guide the ball entering the sorting unit 660 to the right first ball entrance 64b and the second right ball entrance 1640b. The balls can be evenly distributed to the 64b and the second ball entrance 1640b to win a prize. Thereby, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed in parallel.

A guide plate 900z1 is provided between the distribution member 900 and the right first ball entrance 64b to guide the ball housed in the housing portion 900a to the right first ball entrance 64b. A guide plate 900Z2 is provided between the member 900 and the second ball entrance 1640b to guide the ball housed in the housing portion 900a to the second ball entrance 1640b. As a result, the balls sorted by the sorting member 900 can be smoothly guided to the respective ball entrances.

Furthermore, a regulating member (not shown) for regulating the rotation range of the distribution member 900 is provided on the upper end side (distribution member 900 side) of each of the guide plates 900z1 and 900z2. The rotation range is regulated by contact with the member. As a result, excessive rotation of the distribution member 900 (further counterclockwise rotation than in the state shown in FIG. 259(b)) due to the weight of the balls accommodated in the accommodation portion 900a can be suppressed. The balls distributed by the distribution member 900 can be smoothly guided to the respective ball entrances.

<Game Description of Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 260 to 268, the contents of the game in this second control example will be described. In the second control example, the ratio of transition to each game state (normal state, variable probability state, latent probability state) is changed with respect to the first control example described above, and the number of time reductions given in the variable probability state is changed. A point, a point of changing the fluctuation time of each special symbol in the probability variable state and the latent probability state, and when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, one special symbol stops at a winning symbol. At the displayed timing (the timing at which the hit is confirmed), the measurement of the fluctuation time for the fluctuation of the other special pattern is interrupted (temporary stop), and after the winning game based on the lottery result of one special pattern, the interrupted fluctuation time is different in that it uses a configuration that restarts the measurement of

First, referring to FIG. 260, the flow of game state transition in the second control example will be described. FIG. 260 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of game state transition in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 260, the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, like the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, transitions between three game states (normal state, variable probability state, latent probability state). It is configured.

Among the three game states described above, in the normal state (normal game state), the variation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is set in the same manner as the first control example described above. It is Therefore, the normal state is a game state in which the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is mainly performed (actual special figure 1 fluctuation). Further, in this control example, since a small hit is not set in the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1), a small hit game is not executed.

Next, in the variable probability state (variable probability gaming state), the variation time of the second special symbol is set shorter than the above-described first control example, and the right area of the board 13 (the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80 ) is executed (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game), and a game is executed in which balls flow into the sorting unit 660 and both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed at the same time. The details of the variation time of the second special symbol will be described later with reference to FIG. 270 (b), but in this control example, the first special symbol (special A short-term variation (3 seconds) shorter than the variation time of Figure 1) and a long-term variation (180 seconds) longer than the variation time of the special figure 1 are set, and the probability variation state depending on the selected variation time The ratio of lottery (fluctuation) executed in is set to be different.

Furthermore, in the present control example, the number of times (100 times) less than the number of times the variable probability state is set as the number of time reductions during the variable probability state (100 times) is configured. Therefore, in the definite variable state, when the variation of the special symbols exceeds 100 times without winning the special symbol jackpot, the game state is configured to shift from the definite variable state to the latent definite state (20 times). there is As a result, for example, after the jackpot game won in the normal state, even if the game shifts from the latent probability state that is the most advantageous to the player to the variable probability state, the player does not go through the special symbol jackpot. Since it is possible to shift to the latent definite state, the player can continue to have expectations.

In addition, as described above, in this control example, as the variation time of the second special symbol in the probability variation state, short-term variation (3 seconds) and long-term variation (180 seconds) are set, so special during the probability variation state When the number of symbol fluctuations exceeds 100 times and the game state shifts from the definite variable state to the latent definite state (20 times), depending on the variation situation of the second special symbol, a small hit during the latent definite state (20 times) It is possible to make a difference in the number of winning times. Specifically, for example, when the time saving state ends by the start of the long-time variation (180 seconds) of the second special symbol, and the game state shifts from the probability variation state to the latent probability state, the second special symbol The timing at which the next variation is executed is 180 seconds later. On the other hand, the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 10 seconds in the definite state (see FIG. 270 (b)) and 5 seconds in the latent state (see FIG. 271), so the next variation of the second special symbol The first special symbol is set to be variable 20 times before 180 seconds elapses until is executed.

Furthermore, in this control example, when a right-handed game is executed, the ball flows into the sorting unit 660 and is configured to enter the right first ball entrance 64b and the second ball entrance 1640b alternately. Therefore, it is impossible (difficult) to keep changing only the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to easily provide a difference by the number of variations of each special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) executed during the latent certainty state (20 times).

In the latent state (latent playing state), the variation time of the first special symbol is set shorter than the above-described first control example, and the lottery (fluctuation) of the first special symbol and the selection of the second special symbol are performed. Lottery (variation) is configured to be executed together (special figure 1 special figure 2 real variation). Since other elements are the same as those of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the second control example, an opportunity is provided to shift to the latent state, which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, without winning a special symbol jackpot, so the player's willingness to play has the effect of being able to continuously increase Furthermore, when the state shifts to the latent state without winning the jackpot of the special symbol, it is possible to vary the degree of advantage in the latent state depending on the transition timing and the fluctuation situation of the second special symbol. There is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a variety of playability and prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In addition, in the latent certainty state, the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol in which the small hit is set in the lottery result and the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol in which the small hit is not set in the lottery result are executed. Since it is a configuration, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the situation where a small winning game occurs excessively.

In addition, the variation ratio between the variation of the first special symbol (lottery) and the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) in the gaming state (variable state, latent state) in which the right-handed game is executed is It is set differently depending on the variation time set for the variation. Therefore, even in the same game state, the degree of advantage differs depending on the set variation time of each special symbol, so that the player can play the game while expecting that the variation of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player will be executed frequently. There is an effect that it can be done.

In this control example, although a small hit is not set in the lottery result of the first special symbol, the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. For example, the lottery result of the first special symbol may be set so that the small winning is won with a winning probability lower than that of the second special symbol. In addition, the small winning probability is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the small winning game executed when the small winning is won is higher than the case where the small winning is won with the first special symbol. , a small winning game may be provided in which the ball is more likely to enter the variable winning device 65 during the small winning game when winning a small winning with the second special symbol. In this case, a plurality of small winning games with different opening periods and opening patterns of the variable winning device 65 are set, and the case where the small winning is won with the second special symbol is higher than the case where the small winning is won with the first special symbol. , it is preferable that the opening period of the variable winning device 65 is lengthened, or an opening pattern in which the ball is likely to enter is selected.

Next, referring to FIG. 261, in the state where the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are fluctuating simultaneously in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, either one (the special figure 2) wins (jackpot or The flow of each special figure fluctuation and the effect display (the effect display displayed by the third symbol display device 81) in the case of a small hit will be described. Figure 261 is the timing chart which shows one example of the flow of each special figure fluctuation, the production display which is based on the fluctuation of special figure 1 in 3rd design display 81 (the production display which uses the 3rd design) is executed. In the probability variation state, the variation of the special figure 1 (10 seconds) and the variation of the special figure 2 (3 seconds) are executed at the same time, and the flow when the special figure 2 has been elected as a small hit is shown.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be varied (lottery) at the same time, the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the variation of each special figure. There are some effects that are executed. In this control example, among each special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2), the variation display corresponding to one of the special figure variations (main variation) and the variation display corresponding to the other special figure variation (sub variation) is executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 182).

This main variation and sub-variation are configured so that the corresponding special figure variation is switched according to the game state, for example, the variation display corresponding to special figure 1, which is a real variation in the normal state, becomes the main variation, It is set so that the variation display corresponding to the special figure 2 is a secondary variation. In this way, among the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation, the special figure variation that is substantially executed in the set game state is displayed as the main variation, so that the player can display the third symbol. The result of the game can be displayed on the device 81 in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in this second control example, an example is shown in which the variation display of each special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is switched to the main variation and the sub-variation according to the game state, but it is limited to this without, it may be configured so that the variation display corresponding to the special figure 1 variation and the variation display corresponding to the special figure 2 variation are randomly switched to the main variation and the sub-variation, or a predetermined rule (for example, alternating ) may be switched. In addition, the configuration may be such that the player can select. Even with such a configuration, the same problem occurs when a special figure variation on the side that does not correspond to the main variation executed by the third symbol display device 81 is won.

Returning to FIG. 261, the description continues. First, the variation of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are simultaneously started, and the special figure 1 effect display (10 seconds) is executed by the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the variation start timing of the special figure 1. Then, after 3 seconds from the start of the fluctuation of each special figure (after the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 has elapsed), the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a pattern indicating that the small hit has been won, and the variation of the special figure 1 is interrupted. In addition, details will be described later with reference to FIG. 275, but during the period when the measurement of the fluctuation time for the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is interrupted (the interruption period of FIG. 261), the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. The 1-symbol display device 37 is configured so that the variation of the special figure 1 is continuously executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player that the variation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped when the small winning game is executed.

On the other hand, in the second control example, the same processing as the variable display setting processing in the first control example (see S4112 in FIG. 243) is executed. The variation display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed by is a predetermined period (corresponding to the variation time of the special figure variation) even if the special figure variation is interrupted (the measurement of the special figure variation time is interrupted) 8 seconds) is configured to run continuously. As a result, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted (the measurement of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted), the fluctuation display ( (or effect display) is interrupted, and a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable can be suppressed.

Here, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted (the measurement of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted) as described above, the third symbol variation display (or effect display) executed by the third symbol display device 81 In the case of continuous execution, the interrupted special figure variation is resumed, and the timing at which the restarted special figure variation ends and the variation display (or effect) of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 There was a problem that an error for a predetermined period (interruption period of special figure fluctuation) would occur with the timing at which the display) ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, the variation pattern (variation display of the third symbol or The third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is not completely stopped and displayed until the pattern confirmation command output from the main control device 110 is received after the execution of the effect display) is completed. , is configured to execute a shaking performance in which each pattern is slightly shaken. Therefore, a predetermined period (interruption period of special figure fluctuation ) minute error period, the third pattern display device 81 continues the shaking performance with respect to the third pattern, making the player think that the pachinko machine 10 has a problem, thereby lowering the player's willingness to play. I had a problem letting it go.

On the other hand, in the second control example, the above-described problem is solved by enabling execution of the additional effect using the above-described error period. That is, the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, as shown in FIG. If the game state has not ended, a shaking effect that swings the third pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 on the third pattern display device 81 during the period (1 second) until the small winning game state ends. is executed, after that, the small winning game state is ended, and when the special figure 1 fluctuation is restarted, an additional performance corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation period after the restart is executed. By configuring in this way, the interrupted special figure fluctuation is resumed, and the timing at which the restarted special figure fluctuation ends and the variation display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 ) is finished and the error period (six seconds in FIG. 261), the third symbol can be prevented from being continuously oscillatingly displayed. It is possible to suppress the situation where

Although the details will be described later, in the second control example, the length of the error period is calculated, and the content of the additional effect to be executed is changed according to the error period. As a result, it is possible to execute a more suitable effect display for the player.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 262 to 264, the contents of the additional effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 will be described. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273(b), but in this control example, the types of additional effects to be executed are made different based on the length of the period during which the additional effects are executed. As a result, regardless of the lottery result of the secondary fluctuation, the player feels uncomfortable with the production display (additional production display) that is executed in the remaining period when the production display corresponding to the main fluctuation is continuously executed. can be suppressed from giving

FIG. 262(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display screen when the additional effect is not executed in the remaining period. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273(b), but in this control example, in some cases where the remaining period is less than the predetermined period (less than 2 seconds), the additional effect is not executed. . This is done intentionally because if the additional effect is executed when the remaining period is so short that it is difficult for the player to grasp the content of the additional effect, the player will feel uncomfortable. This is to prevent the additional performance from being executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 262(a), until the stop command from the main control device 110 is received (see point D to point E in FIG. 261), the shaking is performed in the state corresponding to the main fluctuation. Stop is displayed.

Next, FIG. 262(b) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when additional effect A is executed as the type of additional effect during the remaining period. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273(b), but in this control example, in some cases where the remaining period is less than the predetermined period (less than 2 seconds), the additional effect A is executed. there is As shown in FIG. 262(b), in this additional effect A, when the effect corresponding to the main variation is completed, the number (identification information) displayed with each symbol is changed to "?" Shaking stop display. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the result of the main fluctuation until the remaining period elapses.

In this control example, a display mode in which only the numbers attached to each pattern are hidden is used, but for example, a display mode in which characters (such as "animals") of each pattern are also hidden may be used. By doing so, it is possible to further prevent the player from grasping the result of the main fluctuation until the remaining period elapses. In addition, since this additional effect A is a effect that only changes the display mode (display mode of the pattern) of a part of the effect corresponding to the executed main variation, even if it is executed when the remaining period is short It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

FIG. 263(a) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when additional effect B is executed as the type of additional effect during the remaining period. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273(b), but in this control example, in some cases where the remaining period is a predetermined period (2 seconds to 6 seconds), the additional effect B is configured to be executed. ing. As shown in FIG. 263(a), in this additional effect B, the same display as in FIG. A telop is displayed in the small area Ds5 to notify the presence. As a result, the player can easily understand that the main fluctuation is being fluctuated even when the state in which the main fluctuation is displayed in a state where the shaking is stopped continues.

In this control example, as the additional effect B, the display in the main display area Dm is configured to display the same display as in FIG. However, without being limited to this, for example, as an additional effect B, the display of the main display area Dm may be the same display as in FIG. . As a result, it is possible to execute the additional effect using the entire area of the third symbol display device 81, and there is an effect that the player can easily grasp that the additional effect is being executed.

Next, FIG. 263(b) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when additional effect C is executed as the type of additional effect during the remaining period. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273(b), but in this control example, in some cases where the remaining period is a predetermined period (2 seconds to 6 seconds), the additional effect C is configured to be executed. ing. As shown in FIG. 263(b), in this additional effect C, the main variable display is displayed in a reduced size in a small area Dm5 in the upper right part of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, and the pachinko machine 10 is displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm. A game description is displayed. In this way, by providing the player with information different from the information suggesting the lottery result of the main variation during the remaining period after the main variation effect is finished, the player is given a sense of discomfort. The remaining period of the main fluctuation can be digested without. Also, in the sub-display area Ds, similarly to FIG. 263(a), a telop is displayed in the small area Ds5 to inform the player that the variation is being executed. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the change is in progress.

FIG. 264 is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when an additional effect D is executed as the type of additional effect during the remaining period. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273(b), in this control example, the additional effect D is executed when the remaining period is longer than or equal to a predetermined period (6 seconds or longer). As shown in FIG. 264, in this additional effect D, similar to the additional effect C shown in FIG. In the central portion of the area Dm, the main variation effect is displayed again (replay display). In this way, when the period (residual period) during which the additional effect is executed is longer than or equal to a predetermined period (6 seconds or more), the effect (replay display effect) dedicated to the additional effect is executed without making the player feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the performance effect using the remaining period can be enhanced.

As described above, in the second control example, in the configuration in which the variation of each special figure (special figure 1, special figure 2) is executed at the same time, one of the special figures stops at the symbol indicating the hit When it is displayed, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special figure is stopped, and after the winning game is completed, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special figure is restarted, so the above-described first control example As in, it is possible to execute the game without forcibly stopping the variation of the special figure, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable with the game content.

Furthermore, the variation display corresponding to the special figure variation executed by the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the main variation) is set in advance even if the measurement of the special figure variation time is stopped. Since it is continuously executed during the period (period corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special figure), it is possible to suppress the interruption of the fluctuation display corresponding to the other special figure fluctuation due to the lottery result of one special figure. can. As a result, for example, as a variation display corresponding to the other special figure variation, when a production with a story is being executed, it is a case where the winning game is started by winning with one special figure variation Even so, it is possible to execute without interrupting the production with a story corresponding to the other special figure fluctuation. Therefore, there is an effect that the performance effect of the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, when the measurement of the variation time of the other special figure is stopped, the period until the variation of the other special figure is completed, and the other special figure variation executed by the third symbol display device 81 Although the period during which the corresponding variable display is completed is different, since the different period (remaining period) is used to execute the additional effect, the special figure is changed for the player. It is possible to suppress giving discomfort due to the difference between the period and the period of the variation display corresponding to the special figure variation.

In addition, in the second control example, the additional effect that is executed when the variation period of the special figure and the period of the variation display corresponding to the special figure variation are different, the length of the different period (remainder period) Since it is configured to be changed according to the situation, it is possible to further suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Specifically, when the remaining period is less than a predetermined period (for example, less than 2 seconds), the additional performance is intentionally prevented from being executed so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the additional performance being executed. , It is configured to execute an additional effect (short-term additional effect) in which only a part of the display content indicating that the variation display corresponding to the special figure variation is completed is changed. As a result, even if there is a surplus period in which it is difficult to provide the additional effect to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, in this second control example, as an additional effect in which only a part of the display content indicating that the fluctuation display corresponding to the special figure fluctuation has ended, of the fluctuation display corresponding to the special figure fluctuation, the special figure It is configured to execute an additional effect in which the display mode showing the lottery result is changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation by the fluctuation display corresponding to the special figure fluctuation before the special figure fluctuation period ends.

Also, if the remainder period is a predetermined period (for example, from 2 seconds to 6 seconds), the period during which the additional effect is being executed (the display of the special figure fluctuation has ended, but the special figure fluctuation has not been completed Period), since no new special figure variation is executed, there is a possibility that the player may suspect that the pachinko machine 10 is broken. Therefore, in this control example, when the remainder period is a predetermined period, the display for notifying the player that the special figure is fluctuating on the third symbol display device 81 ("fluctuation display") is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the state in which no new special figure variation is executed is a normal state.In addition, in the main issue 2 control example, the remainder period is a predetermined period At the same time as the additional effect that is executed in the case is started, the above-described “display during fluctuation” is displayed, but for example, a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the additional effect was executed. It may be configured so that the "in-varying display" is executed later. By configuring in this way, immediately after the additional effect is executed (for example, two seconds from the start), the same effect as the above-described short-term additional effect is executed, so the execution period of the additional effect is the game. It is possible to suppress being grasped by a person.

In addition, in the second control example, when a remainder period of a predetermined period (2 seconds to 6 seconds) is set, information unrelated to the lottery result of the special figure (for example, information explaining the game content etc.) An additional effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is also executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to effectively use the period in which a new special figure variation is not started on the display on the third symbol display device 81 to inform the player of the information regarding the game. Furthermore, by displaying information unrelated to the lottery result of the special figure, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the occurrence of the remaining period. In addition, in the second control example, information explaining the game content is displayed as information unrelated to the lottery result of the special figure. Often, for example, past game history may be displayed, or information unrelated to the game itself (fortune-telling, games, etc.) may be displayed.

In addition, in the second control example, among the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation that are executed at the same time, the special figure variation that the player expects more for the lottery result is the main variation, and the other is the secondary variation. In order for the player to easily grasp the contents of the main variation, the area in which the main variation is performed is larger than the area in which the secondary variation is performed on the third symbol display device 81. there is As a result, the player can easily comprehend the variation content of the main variation.

Furthermore, in the second control example, the special figure (special figure subject to actual fluctuation) that the player expects in the lottery result is switched according to the gaming state. is executed as the main variation, the game content can be displayed (notified) in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 265, the flow of variation of each special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) when the game state in the second control example shifts from the latent state to the normal state will be described. do. Figure 265 (a) is a timing chart showing the flow when the special figure fluctuation of the 1st rotation after the end of the latent state (121st rotation after the end of the previous jackpot) is special figure 2, Figure 265 (b) Is a timing chart showing the flow when the special figure fluctuation of the 1st rotation after the end of the latent certainty state (121st exhibition after the end of the previous jackpot) is the special figure 1.

As shown in FIGS. 265(a) and (b), in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed at the same time, the advantageous state (potential state) in which the player is advantageous is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 120 times), the number of times the advantageous state is set when the special figure variation (special figure 1 variation or special figure 2 variation) is executed during the advantageous state (that is, the probability variation number ) is subtracted. In this case, if the special figure variation to be executed in the first rotation after the end of the advantageous state (number of variations "121" in FIG. 265) becomes special figure 1 variation (see FIG. 265 (b)) and special figure 2 variation (see FIG. 265(a)).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, a short variation time is set as the special figure variation time during the latent state in order to efficiently digest (execute) the game during the latent state. (See FIG. 270(b)), The game result displayed when the latent certainty state ends (see FIG. 188(b)) is configured to be displayed during the special figure fluctuation executed after the latent certainty state ends. is doing. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation (main fluctuation in the normal state) that is executed first after shifting from the latent state to the normal state makes the player grasp the game result (Fig. 188 (b) is set to be a sufficient time (12 seconds in this control example).

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, the special figure 1 fluctuation that is executed first after shifting from the latent certainty state to the normal state is the special figure of the first rotation after the end of the latent certainty state. Whether it will be a fluctuation or a special figure fluctuation in the second rotation depends on the game situation during the latent state, so just setting the special figure fluctuation time of the first rotation after the latent state to 12 seconds is latent. There is a problem that the player cannot grasp the game result of the state.

Therefore, in this second control example, the fluctuation time for two rotations after the end of the latent certainty state is set to a time (12 seconds in this control example) sufficient for the player to grasp the game result (FIG. 188(b)). Set, when the variation of the special figure 1 is executed in any special figure variation, it is configured to notify the game result using the variation time.By this, the player is surely latent The state game result can be reported.

That is, in the case shown in FIG. 265 (a), the special figure variation of the second rotation after the end of the latent state (variation number "122") becomes the special figure 1 variation, and the game result is notified using the variation time , In the case shown in FIG. 265 (b), the special figure variation of the first rotation after the end of the latent state (variation number "121") becomes the special figure 1 variation, and the game result is notified using the variation time .

It should be noted that, in the case shown in FIG. 265 (a), after the transition from the latent state to the normal state, the game result using the period until the special figure 1 fluctuation that becomes the main fluctuation in the normal state is started It is good also as a structure which alert|reports.

Next, with reference to FIG. 266 and FIG. 267, screen display contents set based on the setting status of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t will be described. 266(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of demonstration display A, FIG. 266(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of demonstration display B, and FIG. 267B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of special display A, and FIG. 267B is a schematic diagram showing the contents of special display B. FIG.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, configurations of ROM 202 and RAM 203 provided in main controller 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 268 to 271. FIG. In the ROM 202 of the second control example, the content of the jackpot type selection table 202d is partially changed with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 of the first control example described above, and the content of the variation pattern selection table 202f is partially changed. The difference is that

First, with reference to FIG. 268(a), the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the second control example will be described. FIG. 268(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d.

The jackpot type selection table 202d used in the second control example is a first hit type counter in which each jackpot type is defined for the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 193) used in the first control example described above. The point that the value of C2 is changed, the point that the jackpot H is defined instead of the jackpot G, which is the jackpot type selected when the pattern type is the special figure 2, and the case where a part of the jackpot type wins V. It is different from the point that the number of times of reduced working hours to be given is stipulated as 100 times instead of 120 times. Other than that, it is the same as the first control example described above, and detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 268 (a), when the symbol type is special figure 1 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 29", the jackpot A is selected as the jackpot type, and the first hit When the value of the type counter C2 is "30 to 79", the jackpot B is selected as the jackpot type, and when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 89", the jackpot C is selected as the jackpot type. If selected and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "90 to 99", the jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type.

Also, if the symbol type is special figure 2 and the value of the first per type counter C2 is "0 to 44", the big hit E is selected as the big hit type, and the value of the first per type counter C2 is " 45 to 49", jackpot F is selected as the jackpot type, and when the value of the first win type counter C2 is "50 to 99", jackpot H is selected as the jackpot type.

Here, the jackpot H, which is the jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d of the second control example, will be described. This big win H is a big win in which two rounds (R) of the big win game are executed, and the same opening pattern as the small win game is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 65 executed during the big win game. . As a result, it is possible to execute a big winning game and a small winning game with the same opening pattern of the variable winning device 65, and by grasping the opening pattern of the variable winning device 65, the type of winning game (big winning game or small winning game) games) can be difficult to identify.

Therefore, for example, when a winning game is executed during the latent certainty state, whether the winning game is a winning game (that is, a jackpot game H) that resets the value of the actual residual probability variation number to the initial value (120 times) , Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify whether it is a winning game (that is, a small winning game) that does not change the value of the number of times of real residual probability variation, it is an advantageous gaming state for the player It is made difficult to grasp the period during which a certain latent state continues, and the game can be played while predicting the period during which the latent certain state continues.

In addition, in this second control example, the number of times of time saving set when shifting to the variable probability state (high probability / time saving state) is set to 100 times, which is less than the number of times the probability variable state continues (120 times), When the special figure variation exceeds 100 times without winning a jackpot in the probability variable state, the game state is shifted from the probability variable state to the latent probability state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set an opportunity other than the opportunity of winning a big hit with a special figure as a transition opportunity to shift to the latent state which is a game state advantageous to the player, and to increase the interest of the game. can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 268(b), the contents of the variation pattern table 202f of the second control example will be described. FIG. 268(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern table 202f. As shown in FIG. 268(b), in the second control example, the period in which the normal table A202f1 is referred to for the variation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 194) of the first control example described above is set to the latent state. Instead of the 3rd rotation after the end, the 9th rotation after the end of the latent state, the normal table B202fb2 instead of the normal table B202f2, and the high variation table instead of the high variation table 202f3. b202fb3 is provided, the concealment table b202fb4 is provided instead of the concealment table 202f4, and the normal table Cb202fb5 is provided which is referred to during the period of the third to eighth rotations after the concealment state ends. It is different from the point.

Here, a characteristic variation pattern set for a characteristic game property of the second control example (a game property different from that of the above-described first control example) will be described. As described above, this second control example is configured to be able to hold and store up to four lotteries of special figure 2. Therefore, for example, when the game state shifts from the latent certainty state to the normal state in a state where the right-handed game is executed during the latent certainty state and the four lotteries of the special figure 2 are held and stored, the held storage The lottery of the special figure 2 that is being executed will be executed in the state where the normal state is set as the game state.

In addition, in the second control example as well as in the first control example described above, in order to suppress the frequent execution of the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state, the variation pattern with a long variation time (for example, , a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 minutes) is set to be selected, so there was a problem that the lottery of the special figure 2 held and stored during the latent state was executed in the normal state. .

Therefore, in the second control example, even if the lottery of the special figure 2 held and stored during the latent certainty state is executed during the normal state, in order to suppress the execution of the special figure fluctuation with a long fluctuation time, A predetermined period (period until the special figure lottery is executed 8 times) after the game state shifts from the latent definite state to the normal state is set so that the fluctuation time for the special figure 2 lottery is short. there is As a result, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 from fluctuating for a long time even though the player is playing a proper game.

Furthermore, in the second control example, as described above, when one of the special symbols stops with a symbol indicating a win (big win or small win), until the winning game based on that win ends (the winning game ends However, until the special figure variation becomes executable), the other special figure variation is temporarily stopped (the subtraction of the special figure variation time is temporarily stopped), so the long-time variation of the special figure 2 is executed If it is done, even if the jackpot is won in the lottery of special figure 1 and the game state shifts from normal state to latent state, the lottery of special figure 2 will be held during the period until the long-term fluctuation ends. There is a risk that the game will not be executed and that a game state that is advantageous to the player cannot be provided.

Even for such a problem, the predetermined period after the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state (the period until the special figure lottery is executed 8 times) is the period after that in the normal state. (The period after the special figure lottery is executed 8 times) By configuring so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected, the above-described problem can be solved.

Here, the normal table Bb202fb2 will be described with reference to FIG. 269(a). FIG. 269(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal table Bb202fb2. This normal table Bb202fb2 differs from the normal table B202f2 of the first control example described above in that the fluctuation times defined for some of the fluctuation patterns are changed, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

Specifically explaining the difference from the above-described first control example, in the normal table Bb202fb2, any variation pattern selected when the symbol type is special figure 2 is "12000 milliseconds (12 seconds)" Variable time is specified. In other words, from the time the game state transitions from the latent state to the normal state until the special drawing is executed twice, regardless of the symbol type and the success/failure determination result, the fluctuation of "12000 milliseconds (12 seconds)" A time will be set.

By configuring in this way, one of the two fluctuations after the game state shifts from the latent certainty state to the normal state can be made the special figure 1 fluctuation. Therefore, for example, when the game result in the latent certainty state is notified in response to the variation of the special figure 1, there is an effect that the period for notifying the game result can be reliably secured.

In addition, in the second control example, the normal table Bb202fb2 is referred to only for a predetermined period (period until the special figure fluctuation is executed twice) after the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state , Regardless of the type of symbol and the result of the judgment result, the same variation time (12 seconds) is specified to be set, but it is not necessary to set all the variation times to the same value. It may be configured to set In this case, it is better to set the variation time of the special figure 2 longer than the variation time of the special figure 1 (for example, 15 seconds). As a result, during the variation of the special figure 1 executed after the game state shifts from the latent certainty state to the normal state, the variation of the special figure 2 won as a jackpot is stopped and displayed to prevent the start of the jackpot game. It is possible to suppress it, and it is possible to make it easier to display the effect display that is executed corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 for a predetermined period (12 seconds).

In addition, in this second control example, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed at the same time, the effect display executed in response to the variation of the special figure 1 (for example, the game in the latent state In order to execute the result display showing the result) for a predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds), each special figure (special figure 1 Or special figure 2) is configured to be a predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds), so that the special figure 1 fluctuates for 12 seconds regardless of the timing when the variation between special figure 1 and special figure 2 is started In response to the variation of the special figure 1, a predetermined effect display for 12 seconds (for example, a result display showing the game result during the latent state) is executed. After the game state transitions from the latent certainty state to the normal state, if the special figure 1 fluctuates continuously, a predetermined effect display (for example, in the latent certainty state in response to the first special figure 1 fluctuation Result display showing the game result) is executed, and for the second special figure 1 variation, a normal effect display that suggests the corresponding lottery result to the player may be executed.

Next, the normal table Cb202fb5 will be described with reference to FIG. 269(b). FIG. 269(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table Cb202fb5. This normal table Cb202fb5 is a table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern for the 3rd to 8th rotations after the end of the latent state.

This normal table Cb202fb5 is set so that the variation time set for the variation pattern selected when the symbol type is special figure 2 is shorter than the normal table Bb202fb2 described above. Specifically, the variation time selected when the symbol type is the special figure 2 is set to be 0.5 seconds (500 milliseconds) regardless of the result of the determination. By constructing in this way, the lottery of the special figure 2 held and stored in the latent definite state is completely consumed within a predetermined period (within 8 rotations of the special figure fluctuation) after the game state shifts to the normal state. becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the motivation of the player from being lowered due to the execution of a long-time variation when the game state is changed despite the fact that a proper game is being executed.

In addition, in this control example, in order to prevent the lottery of the special figure 2 held and stored during the latent state from being executed with a long time variation (about 10 minutes), the maximum number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 (4 pieces) and the maximum number of reserved memories (4 pieces) of special figure 2 are configured so that a special variation pattern is selected during the period in which the special figure lottery for 8 pieces is executed, It is only necessary to prevent the lottery of the special figure 2 held and stored during the latent state from being executed for a long period of time (about 10 minutes). The variation pattern is set by referring to the normal table Bb202fb2 by configuring the shortest variation time to be at least four times longer than the longest variation time corresponding to the special figure 2 defined in the normal table Bb202fb2. The lottery of the reserved and stored special figure 2 may be all executed before the variation (lottery) of the special figure 1 is completed. By doing so, it is possible to digest the lottery of special figure 2 held and stored in a shorter period of time.

In addition, the period from when the game state shifts from the latent certainty state to the normal state until all the lotteries reserved and stored in the special figure 2 are digested (the lottery is executed) is a special effect period for displaying the results of the latent certainty state. Alternatively, the third symbol display device 81 may execute a dedicated effect. As a result, for example, the lottery of the special figure 2 in which the lottery result is a big win is reserved and stored during the latent definite state, and even if the lottery is executed in the normal state, the big win is stopped and displayed during the special performance period. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

Furthermore, after the special effect period ends (after all the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is consumed), the normal state effect display is executed by configuring the normal state effect display. It is better to prevent the lottery of special figure 2 from being executed (variation is executed). As a result, the state where the special figure 2 is being variably displayed while the normal state effect display is being executed on the third pattern display device 81 can easily be regarded as a state where an appropriate game is not being executed. can be discriminated. Therefore, the hall clerk can appropriately deal with the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 270(a), the contents of the probability variation table b202fb3 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 270(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation table b202fb3. This probability variation table b202fb3 is a table referred to when the gaming state is the probability variation state.

As shown in FIG. 270 (a), in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, as the variation time of the special figure 1 in the variable probability state, the same variation time is set regardless of the number of pending balls and the result of winning or not determination is doing. Specifically, if the hit or fail determination result of special figure 1 is hit (jackpot), the hit probability variation (variation time 10 seconds) is defined, and if the hit or fail determination result of special figure 1 is off , deviation probability variation (variation time 10 seconds) is defined.

In addition, as the variation time of the special figure 2, a long variation longer than the variation time of the special figure 1 and a short variation shorter than the variation time of the special figure 1 are configured to be set for each propriety determination result. ing. Specifically, if the result of the success or failure determination of the special figure 2 is a hit (jackpot), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 159". , and a probability variable short variation (variation time: 3 seconds) is associated with the range of “160 to 198”.

If the success or failure determination result of the special figure 2 is a small hit, a small hit probability variable long fluctuation (variation time 180 seconds (3 minutes)) is associated with the range of "0 to 159" as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, The range of "160 to 198" is associated with a small hit probability variable short fluctuation (variation time 3 seconds). Furthermore, if the result of the right or wrong determination of the special figure 2 is out, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "0 to 159". Out of the range of "160 to 198", variable probability short fluctuation (fluctuation time: 3 seconds) is associated.

Here, the relationship between the game content in the probability variable state in the second control example and the variable time set for each special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) described above will be described. In this second control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 260, a probability variable state in which time reduction is given to the first 100 times of the high probability state (120 times) is set, and in the high probability state When the number of special lottery numbers exceeds 100 without winning a jackpot, a latent definite state is set in which the reduction of working hours is not given.

Furthermore, in the second control example, a distribution unit 660 is provided in the right-handed area, and by executing a right-handed game, the ball alternately enters the right first ball entrance 64b and the second ball entrance 1640b. It is configured to enter the ball (see Figure 258). And, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, since the variable time is set so that both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 lottery can be executed during the variable probability state as described above, the above-described first Unlike the control example, it becomes possible to execute a right-handed game during the variable probability state.

That is, in the second control example, a right-handed game is executed during the variable probability state, and a game in which the ball is alternately entered into the right first ball entrance 64b and the second ball entrance 1640b is executed. Since the lottery between 1 and special figure 2 is set based on the variation time, for example, the variation pattern of special figure 2 is set continuously with a variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds, Lottery (fluctuation) based on Toku-zu 2 can be executed more than in FIG. Also lottery (fluctuation) based on special figure 1 will be executed a lot.

In this way, by varying the rate at which the special figure variation (the variation of the special figure 2) that is advantageous to the player is executed, depending on the set variation time, the game that gives the player a sense of tension can be realized. can be executed. In this control example, one type of variation time of special figure 1 (10 seconds) and two types of variation time of special figure 2 (3 seconds, 3 minutes) are configured, but it is advantageous for the player The shortest variation time of special figure variation (variation of special figure 2) is made shorter than the shortest variation time of special figure variation (variation of special figure 1) that is disadvantageous to the player, and a feature that is advantageous to the player The maximum variation time of the figure fluctuation (variation of special figure 2) may be configured to be longer than the longest variation time of the special figure variation (variation of special figure 1) that is disadvantageous to the player. It may be configured such that multiple types of variable times are set for the figures (special figure 1 and special figure 2).

Furthermore, as the variation time of the special figure variation (variation of special figure 1) that is disadvantageous to the player, with a low probability (for example, only in the range of "1" as the value of the variation type counter CS1), the player It may be configured so that a longer variation time (for example, 5 minutes) than the longest variation time of the special figure variation (variation of special figure 2) on the side to be advantageous is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a definite variable state in which many special figure variations (variations of special figure 2) that are advantageous to the player are performed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the second control example, it is configured so that the variation time of each special figure in the probability variable state is set regardless of the number of retained balls, but the variation time is configured to differ according to the number of retained balls. For example, the variation time of the special figure 2 that is advantageous to the player may be lengthened as the number of pending balls decreases. As a result, it is possible to continuously execute the game (right-handed game) so that the number of reserved balls is always the upper limit in order to execute the lottery of the special figure 2 more often.

In addition, the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponding to the lottery of the reserved and stored special figures is determined, and a notification (prefetching It may be configured to execute variable time notification). In this case, for example, when the number of held balls is small (for example, when the number of held balls is 0 or 1) as a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of a specific fluctuation type counter CS1 (for example, "10 to 30") A long variation time (eg, 3 minutes) is selected, and a short variation time (eg, 3 seconds) is set when the number of held balls is large (eg, when the number of held balls is 2 or more) By configuring as above, the player may be informed that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 30" has been retained and stored by the pre-read fluctuation time notice. As a result, the player can more positively execute the game (right-handed game) in order to prevent the special figure 2 from fluctuating for a long time.

The contents explained above are executed for the special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) that is advantageous to the player, but the same technical idea is applied to the special figure variation (special figure 1 variation) that is disadvantageous to the player. variation). In addition, the number of pending memories referred to when changing the variable time according to the number of pending memories may refer to the sum of the number of pending memories of special figures 1 and 2, and the variation is executed You may refer only to the reserved memory number corresponding to the symbol type (special figure 1 or special figure 2).

In addition, in the variable state, without winning the jackpot, the number of special drawing lots (number of fluctuations) of special drawing 1 and the number of drawing of special drawing 2 (number of fluctuations) is 100 By exceeding the number of times, the game state is shifted from the definite variable state to the latent definite state. The advantage in the latent certainty state can be varied according to the variation situation of the special figure 2 at the timing when the game state shifts to the latent certainty state.

Next, referring to FIG. 270(b), the contents of the latency confirmation table b202fb4 will be described. FIG. 270(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latency confirmation table b202fb4. This latency table b202fb4 is different from the latency table 202f4 of the first control example described above in that the variation time of special figure 1 is set shorter, and the variation time of special figure 2 is It is different in that it changes and that the variation time of Toku-zu 2 is changed.

Specifically, if the hit or fail determination result of the special figure 1 is a hit (jackpot), a short variation per hit (variation time 5 seconds) is defined, and if the hit or fail determination result of the special figure 1 is out , and out-of-short variation (variation time 5 seconds) are defined.

In addition, as the fluctuation time of special figure 2, if the result of special figure 2 is a hit (jackpot), the number of held balls is 1 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198" A short variation A (variation time of 1 second) is associated with a hit, and a short variation B (variation time of 5 seconds) is associated with a range of “0 to 198” with the number of held balls being 0, 2, 3. . Also, if the success/failure determination result of special figure 2 is a small hit, the number of pending balls is 1 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to a small hit short fluctuation A (variation time 1 second) in the range of "0 to 198" ) is associated, and the number of held balls is 0, 2, 3 and the small hit short variation B (variation time 5 seconds) is associated with the range of “0 to 198”. In addition, if the success/failure determination result of special figure 2 is out, regardless of the number of held balls, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "0 to 198" Short variation A (variation time 1 second) corresponds attached.

In this way, by setting multiple types of fluctuation times of special figure 2 when the success/failure determination result is a small hit, the timing at which the small hit is executed It is possible to suppress the game of shooting a ball aiming at (so-called stopping shot).

Further, when the number of held balls is large (the number of held balls is 2 and 3), the variable time is set longer than when the number of held balls is small (the number of held balls is 1). This is because when the number of held balls is large, a large number of balls enter the first right ball entrance 64b and the second ball entrance 1640b. This is a state in which sufficient prize balls are paid out to the player. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is small (the number of reserved balls is 1), the number of balls entering the right first ball entrance 64b and the second ball entrance 1640b is small. has not been paid out.

Therefore, when the number of held balls is large (the number of held balls is 2 and 3), the set fluctuation time is longer than when the number of held balls is small (the number of held balls is 1). It is possible to equalize the total number of prize balls, which is the sum of the number of prize balls paid out by the ball entering the game and the number of prize balls paid out by the small winning game. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 is adjusted unfavorably to the player (adjustment to make it difficult for the ball to enter each ball entrance), it is possible to easily obtain the prize balls by small hits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation from declining.

In addition, in this control example, when the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 is 0, the same fluctuation time as when the number of reserved balls is large (number of reserved balls 2, 3) is set. . This is to suppress a game in which a player shoots balls at intervals and aims for a short fluctuation time. As a result, it is possible to provide a game in which it is difficult for a player who plays a malicious game to win a prize ball by a small hit.

Furthermore, in this control example, by executing a right-handed game, the second ball entrance 1640b where the lottery of the special figure 2 advantageous to the player is executed and the right number where the lottery of the disadvantageous special figure 1 is executed Since the ball is alternately entered into the 1 ball entrance 64b, it is more suppressed that the game intentionally aiming only for the lottery of the special figure 2 in which the short fluctuation time is set is executed. can do.

In addition, in this second control example, as the variable time of the special figure 2, it is configured to be able to set two types of variable time according to the number of held balls, but without being limited to this, multiple types of variable time can be set in various ways. It may be configured to be set under various conditions. For example, a different variation time may be set for each number of held balls, or the range of the variation type counter CS1 may be divided and varied so that different variation times are set even for the same number of held balls. You can set the time. In addition, only the special figure lottery of the predetermined number of times executed after the end of the small winning game may be set to a different variation time. For example, after the end of the small winning game, until the lottery of the special figure is executed three times, it is preferable to configure the variation time set when winning the small winning becomes longer. As a result, it is possible to suppress the excessive payout of prize balls when the lottery for winning a small prize is biased.

Alternatively, only a predetermined period after the end of the small winning game (for example, the period until the lottery of the special figure is executed 3 times), a short fluctuation when the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 is a predetermined number or more (for example, 2 or more) It is preferable to set a time (for example, 0.5 seconds). By configuring in this way, the player can continue to play the game. Furthermore, the variable time set in this case may be the same as the inter-round interval time in the jackpot game. As a result, when small wins are won consecutively, the variable prize winning device 65 can be varied as if a big win is won, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As described above, in this second control example, the frequency of executing the small hit game during the latent state can be set based on the number of balls held in the special figure 2, so that the latent state We are trying to equalize the number of prize balls paid out inside (the number of prize balls based on the number of balls entered into each entrance and the number of prize balls based on the small winning game), but other than that, the normal figure lottery It may be configured to set the fluctuation time of the normal drawing lottery based on the number of pending memories. For example, if the number of pending memories of the normal drawing lottery is large, the ball is likely to enter the distribution unit 660 (because the ball is likely to enter each ball entrance). , and if the number of pending memories of the general pattern lottery is small, it is better to set the variation time of the general pattern lottery to be shorter than when it is large. As a result, it is possible to equalize the degree of ball entry into the distribution unit 660, and as a result, the number of prize balls paid out during the latent state (the number of prize balls based on the number of balls entered into each ball entrance) And the number of prize balls based on the small hit game) can be uniformed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 271, the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in this second control example will be described. FIG. 271 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this second control example.

As shown in FIG. 271, the RAM 203 in the second control example has the second special symbol execution area 203b and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p deleted from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first control example (see FIG. 198). In addition, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203bb, a special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc, and a special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd are added.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is a variable display (third It is a counter that counts up to 4 times the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the pattern display device 81 . The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is set to zero. is incremented by 1 until On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed. The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, like the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d.

The second special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203bb has one execution area and four reserved areas, like the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. In the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203bb, each counter value acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 1640b (start winning) is stored. Since the counter value storage method and the like are the same as those in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is a flag indicating a period to stop updating (subtracting) the fluctuation time of special figure 1, and stops updating (subtraction) of the fluctuation time when it is set to ON, When the ON state is changed to OFF, the stopped update (subtraction) of the variable time is restarted.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON when stopping the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) where the lottery result is a big hit (S1332 in FIG. 281), special symbol variation processing 2 ( 275) (S232 in FIG. 275). As a result of referencing, if it is set to ON, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the special figure 1 is executed in the same manner as during fluctuation (S233 in FIG. 275). That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the variable display is continuously executed. Become. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped by setting the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc to ON. Then, when it is determined that it is set to ON in the first special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 277) (S2801 in FIG. 277: Yes), it is set to OFF (S2803 in FIG. 277). Although detailed description and illustration are omitted, this special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is the same process as when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a small hit. is executed and set to on.

Special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is a flag indicating a period to stop the update (subtraction) of the variation time of special figure 2, and stops the update (subtraction) of the variation time when it is set to ON, When the ON state is changed to OFF, the stopped update (subtraction) of the variable time is restarted.

This special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON when stopping the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) where the lottery result is a big hit (S732 in FIG. 278), special symbol variation processing 2 ( 275) (S232 in FIG. 275). In addition, since it is the same as that of special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc mentioned above about the content referred in this process, the description is abbreviate|omitted. Then, when it is determined that it is set to ON in the second special symbol variation in-execution process (see FIG. 280) (S2901 in FIG. 280: Yes), it is set to OFF (S2903 in FIG. 280).

Next, with reference to FIG. 272(a), details of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 272(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in this second control example.

As shown in FIG. 272(a), the ROM 222 in the second control example partially replaces the contents of the screen display selection 2 table 222b with the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example (see FIG. 199(a)). It is different in that it has been changed and that an additional effect selection table 222ba has been added.

Here, the screen display selection 2 table 222b in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 272(b). FIG. 272(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the screen display selection 2 table 222b. This screen display selection 2 table 222b is configured such that different screen display types are selected depending on whether the game state is the normal state or the variable probability state with respect to the screen display selection table 222b of the first control example described above; The difference is that the display content (screen display type) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Other elements are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

As shown in Figure 272 (b), when the gaming state is the normal state, the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is off, the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is for the combination of on, the display content (screen display type) The normal display is defined as In this normal display, the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol and the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol are displayed in the normal state (see FIG. 182(b)). display content. In the normal state, since the main fluctuation is the fluctuation display based on the lottery result of the first special symbol, the main fluctuation can be reliably displayed by setting the normal display.

In the normal state, the demonstration display A is associated with the combination of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s on and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t off. When this demonstration display A is determined, the demonstration display A screen (see FIG. 266(a)) is set. After 30 seconds have passed since the fluctuation of the special figure 1, which is the main fluctuation, has passed, regardless of whether the secondary fluctuation is being executed or not, it is configured to switch to the demonstration display A screen (customer waiting demonstration screen). By doing so, even if the player enters the ball into the second ball entrance 1640b and quits the game immediately after the long-time fluctuation display starts, the predetermined time (30 seconds) will elapse. After that, the customer waiting demo screen can be displayed. Therefore, other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demo screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is an empty machine, so that a game can be started with the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the rate of operation of the pachinko machine 10 from decreasing. Furthermore, in this demonstration display A screen, the special figure 2 is actually displayed in a variable manner. You can play the game." is displayed. As a result, the player can start the game with more peace of mind.

In the normal state, the combination of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t both off is associated with the demonstration display B (see FIG. 266(b)). As a result, other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is empty.

Next, in the probability variable state, the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is on, the combination of the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is off, or the combination of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s off and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is on are associated with normal display. In the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, a game in which both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are variable is executed in the variable probability state, so that either special figure standby flag (special figure 1 standby flag 223s , The customer waiting demo screen is not displayed while the special figure 2 standby flag 223t) is set to OFF. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In this way, it is determined whether the special figure is changing for each of the special figures 1 and 2 (whether a predetermined period has passed since the variation of the special figure has stopped), and the respective determination results, And by setting the screen display type based on the currently set game state, the symbol type (special figure 1, special figure 2) for the pachinko machine 10 having a game property to change (game property to change the symbol type (special figure 1, special figure 2) that substantially changes according to the game state), in the current game state It is possible to easily inform whether or not the variation (main variation) of the symbol type (special figure 1, special figure 2) expected by the person is executed.

In the probability variation state, special display A (see FIG. 267 (a)) is associated with the combination of both special figure 1 standby flag 223s and special figure 2 standby flag 223t off. This makes it possible to suggest the current game situation to the player who has confirmed the customer waiting demo screen.

In the latent state, the display content ( Special display B (FIG. 267(b)) is defined as the screen display type). This special display B is displayed in a state in which the special figure 2, which is a substantial variation in the latent state, has not changed (the special figure 2 standby flag is set to ON).

Next, with reference to FIG. 273, the additional effect selection table 222ba in this control example will be described. FIG. 273 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional effect selection table 222ba. This additional effect selection table 222ba, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON, the additional effect period ( FIG. 261) is a table that is referred to when selecting the type of additional effect to be executed (additional effect type), and the length of the period during which the additional effect can be executed (remaining fluctuation time) and the acquired effect An additional effect type is selected based on the value of the counter 223h.

Specifically, when the remaining variation time (period in which additional effects can be executed) is less than 2 seconds (period A) and the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is "0 to 99", the additional effect “None” is selected as the type (see FIG. 262(a)), and in the case of “100 to 198”, “additional effect A” is selected as the additional effect type (see FIG. 262(b)).

When the remaining variation time (period in which additional effects can be executed) is 2 seconds to 15 seconds (period B), and the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is "0 to 99", the additional effect type is " "Additional effect B" is selected (see FIG. 263(a)), and in the case of "100 to 198", "additional effect C" is selected as the additional effect type (see FIG. 263(b)).

If the remaining fluctuation time (period in which additional effects can be executed) is 15 seconds or more (period C), and the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is "0 to 99", the additional effect type is "additional effect C" is selected (see FIG. 263(b)), and in the case of "100 to 198", "additional effect D" is selected as the additional effect type (see FIG. 264).

As described above, in this control example, the additional effect to be executed is selected based on the length of the period (remaining fluctuation time) during which the additional effect can be executed. When the variable time is short (when it is difficult for the player to grasp the contents of the effect to be executed by the additional effect), an additional effect (for example, an additional effect A) is executed by partially changing the normal effect, and the remaining effect is executed. When the remaining variation time is long so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the performance executed during the variable time (when the player can fully grasp the details of the performance executed by the additional performance). , an additional effect (for example, an additional effect D) different from the normal effect can be executed to enhance the effect of the effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 274, details of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 274 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this second control example.

As shown in FIG. 274, the RAM 223 in the second control example has the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 199(b)), the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223ba, the remaining variation time information A storage area 223bb and an additional effect information storage area 223bc are added.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ba is a counter updated based on the reserved ball number command related to the second special symbol output from the main control device 110, and is the first special symbol described above in the first control example. The only difference with respect to the symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is that the counter update target is the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba instead of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and the other elements are the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

The remaining variation time information storage area 223bb stores information about the remaining period (remaining variation time) of the currently set variation pattern calculated when the special figure 1 or special figure 2 temporary stop command is received from the main controller 110. This is an area for storing, and the stored information is referred to when selecting an additional effect to be executed after restarting the fluctuation.

This remaining variation time information storage area 223bb in the temporary stop related processing (see Figure 286), when receiving the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command (S4901 in Figure 286: Yes), the variation pattern The remaining fluctuation period is calculated (S4903 in FIG. 286), and the remaining fluctuation period information is set based on the length of the remaining fluctuation period (see S4907 to S4908 in FIG. 286). Then, in the fluctuation restart process (see FIG. 287), the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command is received (S5001 in FIG. 287: Yes), and when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not being executed (S5002 in FIG. 287: No), used to determine the additional effect type (S5003 in FIG. 287), and then the set remaining fluctuation period information is cleared (S5009 in FIG. 287).

The additional effect information storage area 223bc is an area for storing the determined additional effect type, and the additional effect is executed based on the stored additional effect type. This additional effect information storage area 223bc is set with the determined additional effect type (S5005, S5006 in FIG. 287) in the variable resuming process (see FIG. 287), and is read when setting the display additional effect command. (S5007 in FIG. 287), and then cleared (S5009 in FIG. 287).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 275 to 283. FIG. The control processing of the main controller 110 in the second control example is the special symbol variation processing 2 instead of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 209) in contrast to the control processing of the main controller 110 in the first control example described above. (see FIG. 275), game state update processing 2 (see FIG. 276) in place of the game state update processing (see FIG. 213), start winning processing 2 (see FIG. 282) instead of starting winning processing (see FIG. 222), The difference is that the jackpot end processing 2 (FIG. 283) is executed instead of the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 230), and otherwise the same processing is executed. The same processes are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the second control example, in addition to the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special symbol 1), which is a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special symbol), in addition to the first control example described above, In the case that the lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 2) can also be held and stored, and when the special figure 1 and special figure 2 are performing fluctuations at the same time, either one When the special figure is stopped and displayed with a pattern indicating a win, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the other special figure is interrupted, and after the winning game based on the win of one special figure, the subtraction of the fluctuation time is resumed again. They are very different in terms of structure.

In addition, the point that the lottery of special figure 2 can be retained and stored, and the control processing based on it are the same as the configuration and control processing for retaining and storing the lottery of special figure 1 described in the first control example described above. Therefore, its description is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 275, the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (S104) in the second control example will be described. FIG. 275 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (S104). When the special symbol variation process 2 (S104) is executed, first, it is determined whether a big win or a small win is in progress (S231). When it is determined that the jackpot or the small hit is in progress (S231: Yes), next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON (S232). . In the processing of this S232, it is determined whether or not the subtraction of the other special figure fluctuation time during fluctuation is interrupted because one special figure is stopped and displayed in a pattern indicating a hit. In the process of S232, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON (S232: Yes), the first corresponding to the special figure that is temporarily stopped The display of the symbol display device 37 is updated (S233), that is, the process of continuing the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed for the special symbols for which the subtraction of the variable time is interrupted, and this processing exit. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player that the special figure fluctuation is not forcibly stopped.

On the other hand, in the process of S231, if it is determined that the current is a big hit or a small hit (S231: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203s is greater than 0 (that is, the special figure 1 fluctuates If it is determined (S234), and the value of the special figure 1 variable time timer 203s is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S234: No), the above-described first control example The same processing as the first special symbol variation start processing (S204) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S238 for executing the variation processing regarding the special figure 2.

In the processing of S234, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time timer 203s is greater than 0 (S234: Yes), the first special symbol variation in-execution processing (S235) is executed. This first special symbol variation in-execution process (S235) executes the process during special figure 1 variation, and will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

When the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S235) is finished, next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the special figure 1 variation time timer 203s is 0) (S236), and the variation time When it is determined that it is the end timing (S236: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S237) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S238. On the other hand, in the processing of S236, if it is determined that the timing is not the end of the variable time (S236: No), the processing of S237 is skipped and the process proceeds to S238.

In the processing of S238-S242, the same processing as S234-S237 executed for special figure 1 is executed. When the process of S238 is executed, first, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203t is greater than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is fluctuating) is determined (S238), special figure 2 fluctuation When it is determined that the value of the time timer 203t is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S238: No), the second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239) is executed, and then this process is terminated. This second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239) is the second special symbol variation start process 2 described above (see S217 in FIG. 215) in which subtraction processing of the number of pending memories is added. will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S238, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time timer 203t is greater than 0 (S238: Yes), the second special symbol variation in-execution processing (S240) is executed. This second special symbol variation in-execution process (S240) executes the process during special figure 2 variation, and its detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the second special symbol variation executing process (S240) is finished, next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the special figure 2 variation time timer 203t is 0) (S241), and the variation time When it is determined that it is the end timing (S241: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S242) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S241, if it is determined that the timing is not the end of the variable time (S241: No), the process of S242 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 276, the content of the game state update process 2 (S307) will be described. FIG. 276 is a flow chart showing the contents of the game state update process 2 (S307). In this game state update process 2 (S307), the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 0 and the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 0, in contrast to the game state update process (see FIG. 213) of the first control example described above. The difference is that a configuration is added to set a state command indicating a latent state when there is no such state. This is, in the present second control example, is configured so that the number of times (100 times) set in the variable probability state is less than the number of times the variable probability state is set (120 times), special figure in the variable probability state This is because when the number of lotteries (fluctuations) exceeds 100 times, the game state can be shifted from the variable probability state to the latent probability state without winning a jackpot.

When the game state update process 2 (S307) is executed, first, the same processing as S601 to S608 of the above-described game state update process (see FIG. 213) is executed, and when the process of S608 is finished, then time saving It is determined whether the value of the counter 203g is 0 (S631), and if it is determined to be 0 (S631: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 0 (S632). Here, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203k is not 0 (1 or more) (S632: No), it is a variable probability state (that is, a latent probability state) in which the time saving game is not given, so the latent probability state is set (S633), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S631, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203g is not 0 (S631: No), or in the process of S632, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203k is 0 (S632: Yes ) skips the processing of S633 and terminates this processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 277, the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process (S235) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S104 of FIG. 275) will be described. FIG. 277 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S235). In this first special symbol variation executing process (S235), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the first special symbol variation executing process (S235) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON (S2801). Here, the case where this processing is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON will be briefly described. As described above, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed in a pattern indicating a hit (big hit or small hit) while the special figure 1 is fluctuating. be. Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON, since the big hit flag 203u is set to ON in the process, the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds by the main controller 110 When the processing loops and the next (2 milliseconds after the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON) special symbol variation processing 2 (FIG. 275) is executed, during the jackpot in the processing of S231 Since it is determined that there is, the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S235) is not executed. Then, when the big winning game (or small winning game) is completed and it is determined that the big winning (or small winning) is not performed in the process of S231, the first special symbol variation executing process (S235) is executed. It will be. By configuring in this way, the state in which the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S235) is executed in the state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON is the jackpot (or small hit) game It is configured to be the timing of restarting the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation that has been terminated and the subtraction of the fluctuation time has been interrupted.

Returning to FIG. 277, the description continues. In the process of S2801, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON (S2801: Yes), then set the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command (S2802), special figure 1 provisional The stop flag 203bc is set to OFF (S2803), and the process proceeds to S2804. On the other hand, in the process of S2801, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S2801: No), the processes of S2802 and S2803 are skipped and S2804 to process.

In the process of S2804, the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer (special figure 1 fluctuation timer) 203s is updated by subtracting 1 (S2804), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S2805), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 278, the contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S237) executed in the special symbol variation processing 2 (see S104 of FIG. 275) will be described. FIG. 278 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S237). This first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S237) executes the process for stopping the variation of the special figure 1, and is the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 214) of the first control example described above. ), when the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a big hit, instead of the configuration of forcibly stopping the variation of the special figure 2, the variation of the special figure 2 is interrupted (the subtraction of the variation time is interrupted) The difference is that the

When the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S237) is executed, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit (S731), and it is not a big hit (it is a loss ) (S731: No), the same processing as S709 and S710 of the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 214) of the first control example described above is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S731, if it is determined to be a big hit (S731: Yes), then set the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd to ON (S732), and turn on the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd Set a special figure 2 temporary stop command indicating that it has been set (S733). Then, the same processing as S706 and S708 of the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 214) of the first control example described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 279, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S104 of FIG. 275) will be described. FIG. 279 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239). In this second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239), a process for starting the variation of the special figure 2 is executed.

In the second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239), first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON (S831), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S831 : Yes), that is, the second special symbol variation start processing 2 (Figure 279 S239) is executed, all the various processes executed in the second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239 in FIG. 279) are skipped, and this process ends. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the variation of the special figure 2 is started at the timing when the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed in the pattern indicating the hit (within the same process).

In the process of S831, if it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S831: No), then the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba (N2) is acquired (S832), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter is greater than 0 (S833). In the processing of S833, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is greater than 0 (S833: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba Subtract 1 (S834), and set a pending ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the pending ball number command indicating the value (N2) of the second special symbol pending ball number counter 203ba after the subtraction. (S835).

The reserved ball number command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 227), as in the first control example described above. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223ba. Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the pending ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the second special symbol pending ball number counter 223ba is updated, the second special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203ba.

When the processing of S835 is finished, next, the data of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203bb is shifted to the previous data (S836). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.

When the process of S836 ends, then the same processes as S804 to S807 of the second special symbol variation start process (see S207 in FIG. 215) of the first control example described above are executed, and this process ends. Also, in the process of S833, even when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is 0 (S833: No), the second special symbol fluctuation start of the above-described first control example The same processing as S808 to S810 of the processing (see S207 in FIG. 215) is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 280, the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (S240) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S104 of FIG. 275) will be described. FIG. 280 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S240). In this second special symbol variation executing process (S240), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 2 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the second special symbol variation executing process (S240) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON (S2901). Here, the case where this processing is executed in a state where the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON will be briefly described. As described above, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON when the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed in a pattern indicating a win (jackpot) while the special figure 2 is fluctuating. Then, when the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON, since the big hit flag 203u is set to ON in the process, the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds by the main controller 110 When the process loops and the next (2 milliseconds after the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON) special symbol variation process 2 (Figure 275) is executed, during the jackpot in the process of S231 Since it is determined that there is, the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S240) is not executed. Then, when the jackpot game ends and it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress in the processing of S231, the second special symbol variation in-execution processing (S240) is executed. By configuring in this way, the state in which the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S240) is executed in a state where the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON, the jackpot game ends, and the variation time It is configured to be the timing to restart the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation that had been interrupted.

Returning to FIG. 280, the description continues. In the process of S2901, if it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON (S2901: Yes), then set the special figure 2 fluctuation resume command (S2902), special figure 2 provisional The stop flag 203bd is set to OFF (S2903), and the process proceeds to S2904. On the other hand, in the process of S2901, if it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S2901: No), S2902 and S2903 are skipped and S2904 to process.

In the process of S2904, the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer (special figure 2 fluctuation timer) 203t is updated by subtracting 1 (S2904), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S2805), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 281, the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S242) will be described. FIG. 281 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S242). This second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S242) executes the process for stopping the variation of the special figure 2, and is the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 220) of the first control example described above. See), when the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a big hit, instead of the configuration for forcibly stopping the variation of the special figure 1, interrupt the variation of the special figure 1 (interrupt the subtraction of the variation time) The difference is that the configuration is provided and the processing that is executed when the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit is added.

When the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S242) is executed, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit (S1331), and it is not a big hit (it is a loss ), (S1331: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit (S1334). In the process of S1334, when it is determined that the small hit is not (S1334: No), the same process as S1310 and S1311 of the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 220) of the first control example described above is executed, End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1334, when it is determined that it is a small hit (S1334: Yes), next, a small hit stop process is executed (S1335). In this small hit stop processing, the same processing as S1402 to S1406 of the special figure 2 out stop processing (see S1304 in FIG. 221) of the first control example described above is executed. When this small winning stop process (S1335) is finished, the same process as S1310 and S1311 of the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 220) of the first control example described above is executed, and this process is finished.

In the process of S1331, when it is determined that it is a big hit (S1331: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON (S1332), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON Set the special figure 1 temporary stop command shown (S1333). Then, the same processing as S1307-1311 of the second special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 220) of the first control example described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 282, the contents of the starting winning process 2 (S105) will be described. FIG. 282 is a flow chart showing the contents of the starting winning process 2 (S105). This starting winning process 2 (S105) is different from the starting winning process (see FIG. 222) of the above-described first control example, and is performed when a ball enters the second ball entrance 1640b. They are different in that respect. Specifically, since the second control example is configured to be able to hold and store the lottery of special figure 2, when the ball wins (enters) the second ball entrance 1640b, the second special symbol holding ball A process of adding the value (N2) of the number counter 203ba is executed.

Regarding the processing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 1640b, the ball enters the first ball entrance (enters the prize) in the above-described starting prize winning processing of the first control example (see FIG. 222). Since it differs only in that the target of the processing is changed from the special figure 1 to the special figure 2, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 283, the content of the jackpot ending process 2 (S2112) will be described. FIG. 283 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot ending process 2 (S2112). This jackpot end processing 2 (S2112) is different from the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 230) of the first control example described above only in that the value set in the time saving counter 203g is changed from 120 to 100, and other , the detailed description thereof will be omitted. Thereby, in the present second control example, the number of times of time reduction (100 times) set when the gaming state becomes the variable probability state is less than the number of times the variable probability state is set (120 times), so in the variable probability state When the lottery (fluctuation) of the special figure exceeds 100 times, it becomes possible to shift the game state to the latent definite state.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 284 to 287. FIG. The control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example is the command determination processing 2 instead of the command determination processing (see FIG. 238) in the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first control example. (S4111 in FIG. 284) is executed, and otherwise the same processing is executed. Specifically, a process is added that is executed when various commands output by changing the control contents executed by the main controller 110 from the first control example are received.

Here, the contents of the command determination process 2 (S4111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 2 (S4111). This command determination process 2 (S4111) is, in contrast to the command determination process (FIG. 238) of the first control example, the process executed when the remaining probability variable number command or the remaining time short number command is received, and the temporary stop A process that is executed when a related command is received has been added.

When the command determination process 2 (S4111) is executed, first, the same processes as S4301 to S4317 of the command determination process (FIG. 238) of the first control example described above are executed. Then, in the process of S4317, if it is determined that the remaining probability variable number command or the remaining time short number command is received (S4317: Yes), then the remaining number update process 2 (S4318) is executed.

Here, the contents of the remaining count update process 2 (S4318) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 285 is a flow chart showing the contents of the remaining count update process 2 (S4318). When this remaining count update process 2 (S4318) is executed, the same processes as S4651 and S4652 of the remaining count update process (see FIG. 242) of the first control example described above are executed. The same processes as S4661 and S4662 of the remaining count update process (see FIG. 242) of the first control example described above are executed. That is, only the process of updating the information in the remaining probability variation count area 223o and the effect probability variation count area 223q to the information corresponding to the value of the remaining probability variation count command or the remaining time short command output from the main controller 110 is executed. Also in the second control example, the same remaining count update process (see FIG. 242) as in the first control example described above may be executed.

Returning to FIG. 284, the description continues. In the processing of S4317, when it is determined that the remaining probability variable number command or the remaining time short number command has not been received (S4317: No), next, it is determined whether or not the temporary stop related command has been received (S4331). Here, as the temporary stop related command, the special figure 1 temporary stop command output when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to on, and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd when it is set to on The special figure 2 temporary stop command output to, the special figure 1 fluctuation resume command output when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to off, and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd are set to off There is a special figure 2 fluctuation resume command that is output when

In the process of S4331, if it is determined that the temporary stop related command has been received (S4331: Yes), then the temporary stop related process is executed (S4332), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4331 that the temporary stop-related command has not been received (S4331: No), the same process as S4319 of the above-described command determination process of the first control example (see FIG. 238) is executed. and terminate this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 286, the content of the temporary stop related process (S4332) will be described. FIG. 286 is a flow chart showing the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4332). In this temporary stop related process (S4332), the process of determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when receiving the special figure 1 temporary stop command or special figure 2 temporary stop command, special figure 1 fluctuation resume command or special figure When the 2-fluctuation resume command is received, a process of setting an effect (additional effect) to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

When the temporary stop related process (S4332) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received (S4901), and if it is determined that it is not received (S4901 : No), the process proceeds to S4902 to execute the variable restart process. On the other hand, in the process of S4901, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received (S4901: Yes), the remaining fluctuation period of the currently set fluctuation pattern is calculated (S4903 ). Then, it is determined whether or not the residual fluctuation period calculated in the processing of S4903 is less than 2 seconds (S4904). A period A indicating that the period is short is set (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4902.

On the other hand, in the process of S4904, if it is determined that the remaining variation period is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (S4904: No), then it is determined whether the remaining variation period is less than 15 seconds ( S4906), if it is determined that it is less than 15 seconds (S4906: Yes), the period B indicating the normal remaining variation period is set in the remaining variation time information storage area 223bb (S4907), and the process proceeds to S4902. Transition.

In the process of S4906, if it is determined that the remaining variation period is not less than 15 seconds (15 seconds or more) (S4906: No), the period C indicating that the remaining variation period is long is added to the remaining variation time information storage area 223bb. set (S4908) and proceed to the processing of S4902. In this way, the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) to be executed when the special figure fluctuation is resumed is calculated at the timing when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted (the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted), and corresponds to that period By setting the information to be performed, it is possible to execute the production (additional production) suitable for the remaining fluctuation period without delay at the timing of restarting the special figure fluctuation.

Next, referring to FIG. 287, the content of the variable restart processing (S4902) will be described. FIG. 287 is a flow chart showing the details of the variable restart processing (S4902). This fluctuation restart process (S4902) executes the process of setting the additional effect to be executed when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command is received.

When the fluctuation restart process (S4902) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command is received (S5001), and if it is determined that it is not received (S5001: No ), the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5001, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation resume command or the special figure 2 fluctuation resume command is received (S5001), then it is determined whether the current fluctuation effect is being executed (S5002) . In the process of S5002, the variation production that is executed for the variation time of the special figure variation (for example, 30 seconds) in accordance with the execution of the special figure variation interrupts the special figure variation (interrupts the subtraction of the special figure variation time). , It is to determine whether the state is not completed when the special figure fluctuation is restarted after the end of the winning game.

In the process of S5002, when it is determined that the variable effect is being executed (S5002: Yes), the additional effect A is set in the additional effect information storage area (S5006), and the process proceeds to S5007. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5002 that the variable effect is not being executed (S5002: No), then the remaining variation time information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223bb is read out (S5003). Then, based on the read remaining fluctuation time information and the effect counter 223h, the additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection table 222ba (S5004), and the determined additional effect type is set (stored) in the additional effect information storage area 223bc. (S5005).

After completing the processing of S5005 or S5006, the additional effect type stored (set) in the additional effect information storage area 223bc is read (S5007), and the additional effect command for display corresponding to the read additional effect week is set. (S5008), clears the information set in the remaining variation time information storage area 223bb and the additional effect information storage area 223bc (S5009), and ends this processing.

As described above, in the second control example, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted, the normal production (the production display executed when the special figure fluctuation is started) is finished, and the special figure fluctuation During the period until is resumed, a shaking effect that oscillates the 3rd pattern is executed, and when the special figure fluctuation is resumed, an additional production corresponding to the special figure fluctuation period (remaining fluctuation period) after the restart Although it is configured to run, other configurations may be used.

For example, an effect period discriminating means for discriminating a normal effect period during which a normal effect is executed is provided, and when the effect period discriminating means determines that the normal effect period has ended, the additional effect is executed. good too. By configuring in this way, the normal effect and the additional effect can be executed continuously, so it is possible to provide a more suitable effect display to the player. Also, in this case, there may be an error between the end timing of the additional effect period in which the additional effect is executed and the special figure fluctuation period after the restart, but during the error period, the additional effect is continuously executed. Alternatively, a shaking effect may be executed to display the third symbol in a swinging manner. Further, an error period discriminating means for discriminating the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period discriminating means discriminates that the error period is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the additional effect is executed again. It may be configured as

Further, in the second control example described above, one of the special figure fluctuations (for example, special figure 2) is stopped and displayed in a pattern indicating the hit, so that the other special figure variation (for example, special figure 1) is interrupted (special figure Figure variation time subtraction is interrupted), and when the other special figure variation is restarted, the normal production corresponding to the other special figure variation has already ended (Figure 261), for example, when the other special figure variation is restarted, the case where the normal effect corresponding to the other special figure variation has not ended will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 288 is the timing chart which shows one example of the flow of each special figure fluctuation, the production display which is based on the fluctuation of special figure 1 in 3rd design display 81 (the production display which uses the 3rd design) is executed. In the probability variation state, the variation of the special figure 1 (10 seconds) and the variation of the special figure 2 (3 seconds) are executed at the same time, and the flow when the special figure 2 has been elected as a small hit is shown.

In the example shown in FIG. 288, when the special figure 1 fluctuation is restarted, the normal effect (normal effect period 10 seconds) executed by the third symbol display device 81 is not completed. In such a case, if the additional effect is executed at the timing when the special figure 1 fluctuation is restarted, the additional effect will be executed before the normal effect is completed, and the effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort. There is a problem that it will be executed. In order to solve such a problem, in the example shown in FIG. 288, the additional effect is not executed at the timing when the special figure 1 fluctuation is restarted, but the additional effect is executed after the normal effect is completed. It consists of In this way, the timing for executing the additional performance is not the special figure 1 fluctuation restart timing, but the normal performance end timing, so that the normal performance and the additional performance can be executed without discomfort, and the player's willingness to play. can be suppressed.

In this case, when the special figure 1 fluctuation is interrupted, the remaining period discriminating means for discriminating the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) after restarting, and the interruption period discriminating means for discriminating the period during which the special figure 1 fluctuation is interrupted , Restart determining means for determining that the special figure 1 fluctuation has been resumed, and when it is determined that it is the timing at which the special figure 1 fluctuation is restarted by the restart deciding means, whether or not the normal performance is being executed and a performance situation determination means for determining the remaining period determined by the remaining period determination means when the performance status determination means determines that the normal performance is not executed (already finished). An additional performance executing means for executing additional performance corresponding to the above, and when it is determined that the normal performance is being executed, the execution of the additional performance is put on standby until the performance situation determining means determines that the normal performance is finished. It is preferable to provide an additional effect execution waiting means. By configuring in this way, the timing of executing the additional production based on the timing at which the special figure 1 fluctuation is restarted and the end timing of the normal production of the special figure 1 fluctuation It is possible to set an appropriate timing as time), and to provide an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, in the second control example, by providing a distribution unit 660 in the right hitting area of the game board 13, it is configured so that the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation are executed during the right hitting game, Similarly, as the board configuration of the game board 13 on which the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation are executed during the right-handed game, other configurations may be used, for example, even if the configuration as shown in FIG. 289 is used good.

Here, another example of the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 289 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in another example of the second control example. In another example of the second control example, instead of the distribution unit 660, the second ball entrance 1640 and the second ball entrance are used for the board configuration (see FIG. 258) of the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example described above. The difference is that an electric accessory 1640a attached to the mouth is provided, and the variable winning device 65 is moved from the lower center area of the game board to the lower right-handed area, and the other configurations are the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 289, in the pachinko machine 10 of this another example, a first ball entrance 64 or a second ball entrance 1640 is provided so that a ball fired in a right-handed game can be entered. there is By configuring in this way, in the game state (variable probability state or latent probability state) in which the right hitting game is executed, the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation will be executed. In addition, as in the distribution unit 660 of the second control example described above, the entrance (right first entrance 64b) where the special figure 1 lottery (variation) is executed and the special figure 2 lottery (variation) are executed Since there is no mechanism for distributing balls so that they alternately enter the ball entrance (second ball entrance 1640b), the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640. You can randomize the rate of balls. As described above, in the second control example, the degree of advantage to the player is different between the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery. The player can be made to pay attention to whether the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced. Also, the ratio of the balls launched in the right-handed game flowing down (rolling) toward the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640 is Since it can be changed by adjusting, it is possible to easily adjust the ratio of the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation in the special figure variation executed during the right hitting game.

As described above, in this second control example, the number of times the time saving state is set (100) than the number of times the high probability state of the special symbol is set as the variable probability state (120 times) is reduced , it is possible to increase the opportunities for transition to the latent state which is advantageous to the player, and to increase the player's willingness to play. In addition, since the lottery based on the special figure 1 and the lottery based on the special figure 2 are configured to be executable in the latent certainty state, it is possible to suppress the state of being excessively advantageous to the player in the latent certainty state.

In this second control example, the lottery result of one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a hit (big win or small win), and at the timing when the symbol indicating the winning lottery result is stopped and displayed ( At the timing when the hit is confirmed), the measurement (counting) of the fluctuation time for the fluctuation of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is interrupted, and the timing when the winning game based on the lottery result of the one special symbol is completed ( At the timing when the special symbol can be changed), the measurement (counting) of the variation time for the variation of the other special symbol, which has been interrupted, is restarted.

Here, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted (the measurement of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted), the fluctuation display (or effect display) of the third pattern executed by the third pattern display device 81 is continuously executed. In that case, the interrupted special figure fluctuation is resumed, and the timing at which the restarted special figure fluctuation ends and the third symbol variation display (or effect display) executed by the third symbol display device 81 are finished. There was a problem that an error for a predetermined period (interruption period of special figure fluctuation) occurred in the timing to do.

On the other hand, in this second control example, the timing at which the restarted special figure variation ends and the timing at which the variation display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 ends When an error for a predetermined period (interruption period of special figure fluctuation) occurs, additional production (specific production) is configured to be executable using the error period. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

<Third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 290 to 303. FIG. This control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the content of the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the latent state is different. Specifically, the display control of the remaining number of effects displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 of the main area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is changed, and winning (big or small) during the latent probability The difference is that an effect display that is executed when the game is executed is added, and other effect displays are changed so as to correspond to the above two points.

In the first control example described above, when the latent probability state is entered (the latent probability state is set), the same number of times as the internally set probability variable number (120 times) is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. However, the remaining number of probability variation times set internally each time the special figure variation is executed (hereinafter referred to as the actual remaining probability variation number), and the remaining number of times for the effect display displayed in the remaining number display area D1 ( Hereinafter, it is configured to update (subtract) the effect remaining probability variation number). In addition, in order to prevent the player from easily grasping whether the player has won a big win in which the number of real residual probability changes is set again or a small win in which the number of real residual probability changes is not set during the latent probability state, When a win (big win or small win) is won in a certain state, the performance of returning the number of times of the remaining probability change to the initial value (120 times) and the performance of not returning the number of times of the remaining probability change are executed, and the actual number of times of the remaining probability change and the remaining probability change of the effect are performed. The number of games is different from the number of games, so that the player has a sense of anticipation until the end. Then, in a state in which the number of real remaining probability variations and the number of remaining production probability variations are different, if the number of remaining production probability variations becomes "0" ”), the resurrection effect (see FIG. 189) is executed, and the number of times (“10 times”) corresponding to the substantial remaining probability variation count is displayed in the remaining count display area D1. As a result, even when the number of times display displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 becomes "0", the player can expect the latent state to continue.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example, when entering the latent probability state (the latent probability state is set), the number of times smaller than the internally set probability variable number of times (120 times) (for example, "100 times") is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. As a result, when the latent probability state is set, it is possible to make the actual residual probability variation number and the production residual probability variation number different (display the production residual probability variation number less than the actual residual probability variation number). During the state, it is possible to make it easier to execute the performance that adds the number of times of remaining probability variation of the performance. It should be noted that, in this control example, each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2) is executed in the same manner as the first control example described above (every time the actual residual probability variation number is subtracted), the remaining number of times Although it is configured to subtract the number of times of effect remaining probability variation displayed in the display area D1, for example, when the variation of the special figure (special figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player is executed in the latent probability state may be configured so as not to subtract the number of production remaining probability variations. In this case, as in this control example, at the timing of starting the latent certainty state (timing at which the latent certainty state is set), the number of remaining probability variations displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is displayed smaller than the actual remaining probability variation number. As a result, a situation occurs in which the number of residual probability variations of production is greater than the number of actual residual probability variations even if the number of variations of the residual probability of production is not subtracted for the fluctuation of the special figure (special figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the third control example, as a lottery result of the special figure, the number of real residual probability variations is set to the initial value (120 times). is not set to the initial value (120 times), and when winning a small win, an additional performance is executed to add a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 to 40 times) to the number of times of remaining probability change during the small win game. It consists of As a result, when a winning game (a game in which the variable winning device 65 opens and closes) is executed during the latent probability state, whether or not the actual probability variable number of times is reset to the initial value (120 times) (during the latent probability state) It is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether or not the special figure jackpot has been won.

In addition, in the third control example, the timing of starting the latent state (the timing at which the latent state is set) and the number of real probability variations and the number of residual probability variations that occur when the special figure jackpot is won during the latent probability state In order to fill the difference, it is configured to execute an additional performance that adds the number of performance remaining probability variation displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 as a special figure variation performance in the latent probability state. As a result, since it is possible to add the number of production remaining probability variations at various timings during the latent probability state, whether the actual probability variation number has been reset to the initial value (120 times) during the latent probability state (latent probability state It is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether or not the special figure jackpot has been won.

Furthermore, in the third control example, the number of additions displayed in the addition effect executed at each timing (special figure fluctuation timing, timing during execution of winning game) (remaining probability change number of effects displayed in the remaining number display area D1 The number of times added to ) is configured to be changed based on the difference between the actual probability variation frequency and the effect remaining probability variation frequency (see FIG. 290). As a result, when the number of performance remaining probability variations is greatly increased by the additional performance, the player is made to think that he or she has won a special figure jackpot with the actual probability variation frequency at the initial stage (120 times) during the latent probability state. In addition, it is possible to suppress the number of times of residual probability change of production from becoming "0 times" in a state where the number of times of real probability change and the number of times of residual probability change of production deviate greatly.

In addition, in the above-described first control example, a winning game (for example, a ball out of a jackpot game) is played during the latent state so as not to let the player know that a win (big win or small win) has been won during the latent state. Even if a big winning game or a small winning game with a small amount of money is executed, the third pattern display device 81 is configured not to execute the performance display showing the winning game, and at any timing during the latent certainty state, the actual probability variation number is initialized. It is configured to make it difficult to identify whether the jackpot set to the value (120 times) has been won.

On the other hand, in the third control example, a winning game (a big winning game or a small winning game) that is executed when winning (for example, a big winning game or a small winning game with few balls out of the big winning games) is won during the latent state. It is configured such that the third symbol display device 81 executes a display based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65 as a winning effect executed during the winning game (see FIG. 293). As a result, the player can easily grasp that the winning game will be executed during the latent certainty state. Then, as a winning effect executed during this winning game, the details will be described later, but the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, when a ball enters the variable winning device 65 A display mode for displaying the number of winning balls) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so as to be different between when a big winning game is being executed and when a small winning game is being executed. . As a result, even when the player wins a big win in which the number of balls winning the variable winning device 65 in one winning game is larger than that in the small winning game, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the small winning. It is possible to make it similar to the performance during hitting corresponding to the game. Therefore, while notifying (displaying) that the winning game is executed in the latent certainty state in an easy-to-understand manner to the player, it notifies (displaying) whether the winning game is a big winning game or a small winning game in an incomprehensible manner to the player. This allows the player to play the latent state with anticipation until the end.

The pachinko machine 10 in the third control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the content of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The content of the RAM 223 provided in the voice ramp control device 113 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice ramp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. The point is that Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are as follows: It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 290, the actual remaining probability variation number set while the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example is in the latent probability state and the effect remaining number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 I will explain the transition of the number of probability variations. FIG. 290 is a timing chart showing the flow during the latent state in the third control example.

As shown in FIG. 290, when the game state is the normal state, when the jackpot game winning the jackpot B or the jackpot D is executed, the actual remaining probability variation count is "120 times" at the end timing (during the ending) of the jackpot game. is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays a display indicating that the state is shifted to a latent probability state, and "100 times" is displayed as the number of times of effect remaining probability change in the remaining number of times display area D1 (Fig. 291 (see)) .

Then, when the game in the latent probability state is started, the actual residual probability variation number and the effect residual probability variation number are subtracted "1 time" each time the special figure variation is executed. In this control example, the first special figure variation in the latent certainty state is executed because the real remaining probability variation number and the effect remaining probability variation number are subtracted at the timing when the special figure variation is started in the same way as the first control example. In the interval, "99 times" is displayed as the number of times of the remaining probability change in the remaining number of times display area D1.

After that, the special figure variation (lottery) is executed, and if you win a small hit at the 14th special figure variation in the latent state (the special figure variation that displays "86th" as the number of production remaining probability variations), the real residual A small winning game is started while the probability variable number of times is maintained at "106 times". During the small winning game, when the third symbol display device 81 executes an additional effect A (effect of adding (adding) the value of the number of times of the remaining probability change of the effect to "5 times")), the remaining number of times The value of the effect remaining probability change number displayed in the display area D1 is added and displayed from "86th time" to "91st time" (see FIG. 291(b)). In this way, during the winning game (small winning game) that is executed when the winning is won (when winning the small winning) when the actual remaining probability changing number is not changed (not reset), the value of the production remaining probability changing number is changed. By executing the effect to add (additional effect), the player can expect that the actual remaining probability variation number has been reset by the current winning game.

Then, when the small winning game ends, the special figure variation in the latent probability state (the special figure variation corresponding to the actual residual probability variation number of times "105 times" and the effect remaining probability variation number of times "90") is continuously started. Next, when the jackpot is won by the special figure variation in which the actual number of remaining probability variations is "30 times" (the special figure variation in which the number of times of effect remaining probability variation is "15 times"), the timing at which the jackpot game is started. is set to "0 times". It should be noted that the remaining probability variation number of effects displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is not set to "0 times", but is configured to continuously display "15 times". In the case of shifting to the latent certainty state again after the end of the big winning game, "120 times" is reset as the substantial remaining probability variation number at the timing when the big winning game ends. In addition, during the big win game, as in the case of the small win game, an additional effect is executed as the effect display of the third symbol display device 81, and the additional effect C (the value of the number of times of the effect remaining probability change is set to "20 When the effect of adding (adding) "time" is executed, the value of the effect remaining probability change number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added and displayed from "15 times" to "35 times".

Although details will be described later, in this control example, regardless of the type of win (big win or small win), the difference value between the actual remaining probability variation number and the production remaining probability variation number and the value of the acquired production counter 223f are added. It is configured to determine the number of additions (the number of additions) displayed in the performance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether the current winning game is a small winning game or a big winning game depending on the contents of the additional performance executed during the winning game.

Next, when the jackpot game ends, the special figure variation in the latent probability state (substantial residual probability variation number "119") is started. During this special figure variation, the additional effect D is executed, and the value of the effect remaining probability change number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added and displayed from "34 times" to "74 times". Thus, in this third control example, the value of the remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added (added) even during the special figure fluctuation in the latent probability state. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to predict the number of real remaining probability variations, and to play a game while expecting how long the latent probability state will continue.

In addition, by making it possible to execute the additional performance even during the special figure fluctuation, the value of the remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 during the winning game and during the special figure fluctuation during the latent probability state can be added (added). Therefore, since it is possible to increase the number of times that the additional effect is executed, even if the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number greatly deviates (when the difference value is large), the player feels uncomfortable. You can make its value easier to converge without giving it. Furthermore, in the third control example, the number of additions (the number of additions) to be displayed in the additional effect is determined based on the difference between the actual remaining probability variation count and the effect remaining probability variation count. Since it is configured so that the larger the difference value between the actual residual probability variation number and the effect residual probability variation frequency, the more the production residual probability variation frequency is added (added), the value can be adjusted without giving the player a sense of discomfort. It can be made easier to converge.

Then, the additional effect D is executed and the value of the number of times of the remaining probability change displayed in the remaining number display area D1 becomes "74 times". The number of remaining probability variations is "118 times" and the number of remaining probability variations is "83 times". After that, when the variation of the number of remaining probability changes to "1 time" ends without winning a win, the number of remaining probability changes of production "???" It continues to be displayed until "0 times" is reached. By constructing in this way, even if the actual remaining probability variation frequency and the performance remaining probability variation frequency finally do not match, the game can be executed in a latent probability state without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In the third control example, a configuration is used in which "???" is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 in the final effect display. When is "0 times", the value of the actual remaining probability variation number may be displayed in the remaining number display area D1 ("35 times" is displayed in the example of FIG. 290). Further, the additional effect may be forcibly executed based on the value of the actual remaining probability change number of times when the value of the number of times of the remaining probability change of the effect becomes "0 times". By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the player to play the latent certainty state with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 291 and 292, the display contents displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example is the latent state will be described. It should be noted that the same elements as in the first control example described above are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 291(a), the jackpot end screen when the game state shifts to the latent certainty state will be described. FIG. 291(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot end screen. As shown in FIG. 291(a), when it is confirmed that the game state shifts to the latent definite state after the end of the big win (when V is won in the big win that shifts to the latent definite state by winning V during the big win game) , A remaining number display area D1 is provided in the upper left area of the jackpot end screen, and "100 times" is displayed as the number of production remaining probability variations (see point A in FIG. 290). In the central part of the main display area Dm, the characters "RUSH Rush" for notifying that the state will shift to the latent state and the character 811 imitating a rabbit used for display during the latent state are shifted to the latent state. It is displayed in a display mode that congratulates you on doing so. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the game state will shift to the latent state after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in the third control example, the above-described display is performed on the jackpot end screen. can be configured to In addition, unlike the pachinko machine 10 used in the third control example, the jackpot game is ended according to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won, unlike the configuration in which the variable probability state is provided after the jackpot game ends by winning the V prize during the jackpot game. You may use the structure by which a probability change state is provided later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 291(b), the display screen during the winning game (during the small winning game) in the latent state will be described. FIG. 291(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen during a winning game. As shown in FIG. 291(b), even when a small winning game or a big winning game is executed during the latent certainty state, the effect that the character 811 moves from the left direction of the screen to the right direction continues as in the special figure fluctuation. is executed as Then, when the additional effect is executed, the character 811 runs through the side of the "treasure box" and at the same time, the "treasure box" opens, and the value of the remaining probability variation number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added (added). A display mode corresponding to the value is displayed ("5 times" in FIG. 291(b)), and the value of the number of times of the remaining probability change is added to "5 times" to display "95 times" (of FIG. 290). See point B). In addition, in the display area D4 provided below the main display area, the value of the number of times of remaining probability variation ("5 times") added in this additional effect is displayed in characters.

In this way, in the third control example, the additional effect that is executed during the latent state is executed using part of the effect that is always executed during the latent state (the effect of moving the character 811). Therefore, there is an effect that the value of the remaining probability variation number of times ("5 times") can be added (added) without making the player feel uncomfortable.

FIG. 292(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content displayed when the additional effect D (see point D in FIG. 290) is executed during the special figure fluctuation in the latent certainty state. As shown in FIG. 292(a), during the special figure variation, an effect is executed in which the character 811 moves from left to right on the screen. Then, when the additional effect is executed, the character 811 runs through the side of the "treasure box" and at the same time, the "treasure box" opens, and the value of the remaining probability variation number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added (added). The display mode corresponding to the value is displayed ("40 times" in FIG. 292(a)), and the value of the number of times of the effect remaining probability variation is added to "40 times" to display "74 times" (in FIG. 290 See point D). In addition, in the display area D4 provided below the main display area, the value of the number of times of remaining probability variation ("40 times") added in the current additional effect is displayed in characters.

Above, as explained in FIG. 291 (b) and FIG. 292 (a), the value of the remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 during the winning game and special figure variation in the latent state An add-on effect for adding (adding) is executed. Then, since the additional performance executed during the winning game and the additional performance executed during the special figure fluctuation are executed in the same performance mode, it is possible to determine whether the current winning game is in progress by the executed additional performance. It is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether it is in the process of fluctuating.

In addition, since the display form of the value is changed according to the value of the number of times of production remaining probability variation added (added) by the additional production (the display form of "+5" in FIG. 291 (b) and the display form of FIG. 292 (a ), the player can be visually notified of the effect of the additional effect. In addition, it is possible to execute a production display that suggests the value of the number of times of production remaining probability change to be added (added) by the addition production, for example, the value of the number of times of production remaining probability change to be added (added) by the addition production is stored. You may change the display form of the "treasure chest" which exists according to the value added.

Next, with reference to FIG. 292(b), the final effect executed during the latent state will be described. FIG. 292(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the final effect during the latent definite state. This final effect is executed when the value of the actual remaining probability variation number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is "0 times" in a state in which the value of the actual number of remaining probability variations is greater than "0 times". It is an effect of displaying “???” as the value of the number of times of the remaining real probability variation until the remaining substantial number of times of probability variation is consumed. Thus, even if the values of the substantial remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number are different, the performance during the latent probability state can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, while the final effect is being executed, an effect in which the character 811 is chased by the rock 813 is executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 as an effect suggesting that the latent state is over. As a result, it is possible to visually suggest to the player the possibility that the latent certainty state will end, and to provide the player with an easily comprehensible effect. Furthermore, a character "pinch" is displayed in the display area D4 as a character suggesting that the latent state will end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 293, the display contents during the latent probability state per game in the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example will be described. FIG. 293 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the winning effect during the latent certainty state. As shown in FIG. 293, when a winning game is executed during the latent certainty state and the ball wins the variable winning device 65, a winning display mode 815 indicating that the ball has won the variable winning device 65 is displayed. be. The winning display mode 815 moves from the lower right side of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see 815c in FIG. 293) to the upper center (see 815b in FIG. 293) to the left side and is enlarged. It is stopped and displayed (see 815a in FIG. 293). The winning display mode 815 displays a value ("15" in this control example) corresponding to the number of winning balls to be paid out when the variable winning device 65 wins. A player can be notified of the fact that a ball has won a prize and the number of prize balls to be paid out due to the prize.

Further, when a plurality of balls win the variable winning device 65 in one winning game and the winning display mode 815 is executed a plurality of times, a plurality of winning displays are displayed until one winning game is completed. Mode 815 is configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, other configurations may be used as the display method of the winning display mode 815 , for example, the winning display mode 815 may be displayed without being stopped on the third symbol display device 81 .

Furthermore, in this control example, instead of executing the display of the winning display mode 815 corresponding to all the balls that have won the variable winning device 65 during the winning game, the type of the winning game (big winning game or small winning game ) and whether or not to display the winning display mode 815 is determined based on the winning number information during the winning game, and if it is determined to display the winning display mode 815, the winning display mode 815 is displayed. Configure. With this configuration, even when the ease with which the ball enters the variable winning device 65 is varied depending on the type of winning game (when the period during which the variable winning device 65 is opened is varied) ), since it is possible to adjust the number of winning display modes 815 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the number of winning display modes 815 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 allows the game It is possible to suppress that a person perceives the type of winning game (big winning game or small winning game).

In this control example, the value ("15" in this control example) corresponding to the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins is displayed in the variable prize winning device 65 as the prize display mode. For example, the value corresponding to the number of winning balls to be paid out when the variable winning device 65 wins a prize may be divided into a plurality (for example, "10" and "5") and displayed. As a result, it is possible to set a plurality of patterns for the number of times the winning display mode 815 is displayed for the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 . In addition, even in the case of having a variable prize winning device in which the number of prize balls to be paid out at the time of winning is different, the value corresponding to the number of prize balls to be paid out is divided and displayed so that the player can easily determine the type of winning game. It is possible to suppress grasping (big hit game or small hit game). Also, the period until the winning display mode 815 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be varied depending on the winning type. Specifically, in the case of a winning type that can be expected to win a lot (for example, 15R), the winning display mode 815 is the third symbol than the winning type (for example, 7R) that is less than that. It is preferable to set the period until the display on the display device 81 is long. As a result, even if the winning display mode 815 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 determines the winning type, the period until determination can be extended. Even in this case, the winning display mode 815 may be displayed at the same timing for the game ball that wins first.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 294, configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 294(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example.

As shown in FIG. 294(a), the ROM 222 in the third control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example in that an additional effect table 222ca and a winning effect table 222cb are added. do.

First, with reference to FIG. 295(a), details of the additional effect table 222ca in the third control example will be described. FIG. 295(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the addition effect table 222ca in this control example. This add-on effect table 222ca is a table referred to when determining the type of add-on effect to be executed during the latent probability state, and is obtained as a difference value indicating the difference between the actual residual probability change and the number of times of the effect residual probability change. The type of additional effect is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223f. This additional production is a production that adds (adds) the value of the remaining probability variation number of productions displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display area during the latent probability state, and the value differs for each type of additional production. (Value to be added (added)) is set.

This addition production table 222ca, in the special figure 2 fluctuation setting process (see FIG. 299) in the latent certainty state, when it is determined that the value of the production residual probability variation number of times is less than the value of the real residual probability variation number of times (of FIG. 299 S5103: Yes) and when the winning ending command is received during the latent state (see S5218 in FIG. 300).

As shown in FIG. 295(a), the add-on effect table 222ca in this control example is set so that the type of add-on effect selected according to the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation count and the value of the effect remaining probability change count is different. It is Specifically, when the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation count and the value of the effect remaining probability variation count is “1 to 40” and the value of the performance counter 223f is “0 to 99”, the additional performance is executed. If the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 179", the additional effect A (the number of additions +5) is set as the additional effect. Further, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "180 to 198", an additional effect B (number of additions +5 times) is set as an additional effect.

When the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is "41 to 80" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 49", the additional performance is not executed, and the performance When the value of the counter 223f is "50 to 149", the additional effect A (the number of additions +5) is set as the additional effect. Further, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "150 to 198", an additional effect B (the number of additions +5 times) is set as an additional effect.

Furthermore, if the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is "81 or more" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 99", the additional performance C (addition number of times +20) is set. Further, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 198", an additional effect D (number of additions +40 times) is set as an additional effect.

As described above, in this control example, the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is calculated, and the type of the additional performance is selected based on the calculated difference value. Therefore, it is possible to execute an additional effect suitable for the display situation of the number of times the effect remaining probability changes in the latent probability state. In addition, the larger the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the number of times of production remaining probability variation, the more likely it is that the additional effect will be executed. When there is a divergence (when the difference value increases), the difference can be made easier to converge. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the performance display in the latent probability state due to the fact that the value of the substantial remaining probability variation frequency remains large even though the value of the effect remaining probability variation frequency is "0". can.

Further, in this control example, the larger the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number, the larger the value to be added (added) in one additional performance. As a result, when the value of the actual residual probability variation count and the value of the effect residual probability variation count deviate greatly (when the difference value becomes large), the difference can be easily converged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of incongruity with respect to the performance display in the latent probability state due to a large value of the actual remaining probability variation frequency remaining even though the value of the performance remaining probability variation frequency is "0". be able to.

Next, the prize effect table 222cb will be described with reference to FIG. 295(b). FIG. 295(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the prize effect table 222cb. This winning effect table 222cb is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the display of the winning display mode (winning effect) when the ball wins the variable winning device 65 in the winning game executed during the latent definite state. It is a table to be played, and whether or not there is a winning effect is determined based on the winning determination result (hit type) of the special figure, the number of balls won in the winning game, and the value of the effect counter 223f. This winning effect is the effect of displaying the winning display mode 815 shown in FIG.

Specifically, if the win/loss determination results are jackpots A to E and jackpot G (that is, jackpots that can be expected to come out), and the number of winning balls is the first or second prize, regardless of the value of the effect counter 223f. (when the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 198"), the winning effect "Yes" is selected and the winning effect is executed (the display of the winning display mode 815 is executed). That is, the winning display mode 815 is always displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the first and second winning balls after the winning game is executed. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that a winning game is being executed.

If the number of winning balls is the third winning, if the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "0 to 4", the winning effect "none" is selected, and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "5 to 198". , the prize-winning effect "Yes" is selected. That is, it is set so that the winning effect is executed with a probability of about 97.5% and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of 2.5%.

If the number of winning balls is the fourth prize, and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "0 to 119", the winning effect "none" is selected, and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "120 to 198". , the prize-winning effect "Yes" is selected. That is, it is set so that the winning effect is executed with a probability of about 40% and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of about 60%.

If the number of winning balls is the fifth prize, and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "0 to 189", the winning effect "none" is selected, and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "5 to 198". , the prize-winning effect "Yes" is selected. That is, it is set so that the winning effect is executed with a probability of about 5% and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of about 95%. If the number of winning balls is six or more, and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "0 to 193", the winning effect "none" is selected, and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "194 to 194". 198", the prize effect "with" is selected. That is, it is set so that the winning effect is executed with a probability of about 2.5% and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of about 97.5%.

Next, if the success/failure determination result is a jackpot F (that is, a jackpot that cannot be expected to come out), regardless of the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls is the first or more), and regardless of the value of the effect counter 223f. (When the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 198"), the winning effect is executed. In other words, the winning display mode 815 is always displayed based on the winning of the ball in the variable winning device 65 . Also, when the win/fail judgment result is a small hit, the same as the above-described big win F, regardless of the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls is the first or more), and regardless of the value of the effect counter 223f (acquired effect counter 223f is "0 to 198"), a winning effect is executed. In other words, the winning display mode 815 is always displayed based on the winning of the ball in the variable winning device 65 .

As described above, in this control example, the execution of the winning game (big winning game or small winning game) during the latent state is indicated to the player by the winning effect based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65. can be notified to This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that a winning game has occurred during the latent state.

Furthermore, since the degree of occurrence of the winning effect based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65 is varied according to the type of winning game, it is possible to execute the winning effect suitable for each winning game.

In addition, in this control example, the winning game executed during latent probability is a jackpot game that can set the value of the actual residual probability variation number to the initial value (120 times) after the end of the game, or the value of the substantial residual probability variation number In order to suppress the player from easily identifying whether it is a small winning game that is not changed, a big winning game (jackets A to E, and G) are set so that the more the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65, the more difficult it is to execute the winning effect. Thus, even if many balls actually win in the variable prize winning device 65 (even if more balls win than the number of balls won in the small winning game), the number of times the winning performance is executed is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying the type of winning game based on the number of winning presentations executed by the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, the cumulative value of the number of balls acquired during the latent certainty state (accumulated value of the number of prize balls paid out in each winning game executed while the latent certainty state continues) is displayed on the third symbol display device. The configuration indicated at 81 may also be used. When such a configuration is used, the number of winning balls may be accumulated regardless of the presence or absence of the winning effect, or the cumulative value of the number of winning balls may be displayed according to the number of times the winning effect is executed. It may be configured to add. In this case, the difference between the actual cumulative value and the displayed cumulative value is the same as the number of winning balls for which the winning effect has not been executed. When a winning game is executed, it is preferable to execute a prize winning effect without being based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65, and execute a provisional winning effect to converge the difference of the cumulative value. As a result, it is possible to display the display mode of the winning effect and the cumulative display mode of the number of winning balls without discomfort. In addition, by executing the provisional winning effect, it is possible to display the winning display mode 815 with more than the number of balls actually winning the variable winning device 65 during the small winning game. It is possible to prevent the player from identifying the type of the winning game by the number of times of the winning effect (the number of times of displaying the winning display mode 815).

Returning to FIG. 294(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 294(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example.

As shown in FIG. 294(b), the RAM 223 in the third control example has a flag 223ca for the remaining probability variation count display, an additional effect flag 223cb, and an additional effect type storage area 223cc for the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example. is added.

The remaining probability variation number displaying flag 223ca is a flag for indicating a period in which the number of remaining probability variations is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (see FIG. 291(a)) of the third symbol display device 81, and is turned on. When it is set, the number of production remaining probability variations is displayed. This remaining probability variable number of times display flag 223ca determines that the winning ending command has been received in the winning related command process 2 (see FIG. 301), (S5207 in FIG. 301: Yes), then the current winning is the winning game When it is determined that it is a win to shift the game state to the latent state after the end (S5209 in FIG. 301: Yes), and further, when it is determined that the flag 223ca during the remaining probability variation number display is not set to ON (Fig. S5210 of 301: Yes), set to ON (S5213 of FIG. 301), and similarly, in the winning related command process (see FIG. 301), it is determined whether the current winning game is a winning game capable of executing an additional effect. It is referred to at that time (S5210 in FIG. 301). Then, in the state command process 2 (see FIG. 300), when a state command indicating that the game state has changed from the latent state to the normal state is received (S4531 in FIG. 300: Yes), it is set to OFF (see FIG. 300). 300 S4532).

The add-on effect flag 223cb is a flag for indicating that the add-on effect based on the special figure fluctuation is being executed in the third symbol display device 81, and when it is set to on, the change display setting process is performed. 2 (see FIG. 303) is executed, the addition effect is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4736 in FIG. 304) executed in the fluctuation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303) (Fig. S4813 of 304). This add-on effect flag 223cb is set to on (S5106 in FIG. 299) when the add-on effect is selected in the special figure 2 fluctuation setting process (see FIG. 299) (S5108 in FIG. 299), and the special figure 2 Referred to in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 304) (S4809 in FIG. 304), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S4809 in FIG. 304: Yes), it is set to OFF (S4810 in FIG. 304) , An additional effect is set.

Add-on effect type storage area 223cc is an area for setting the selected add-on effect table 222ca with reference to the add-on effect table 222ca. reference). This add-on effect type storage area 223cc is set the type of add-on effect selected in the special figure 2 fluctuation setting process (see FIG. 299) (S5107 in FIG. 299), to the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 304) When it is determined that the add-on effect flag 223cb is set to ON (S4809 in FIG. 304: Yes), the add-on effect based on the type of the set add-on effect is set (S4812 in FIG. 304).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the third control example>
Next, various control processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 296 and 297. FIG. The control process of main controller 110 in the third control example is the first winning process ( 231) instead of the first winning process 2 (see FIG. 296), the second winning process 2 (see FIG. 234) executed in the small hit control process (see FIG. 232) instead of the second winning process 2 (see FIG. 297), and otherwise the same processing is executed. The same processes are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the first winning process 2 (S2113) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 296 is a flow chart showing the first winning process 2 (S2113). This first winning process 2 (S2113 in FIG. 296) is similar to the first winning process (see FIG. 231) in the above-described first control example, during the jackpot game in the pachinko machine 10. 65a) is processed based on the winning ball.

When the first winning process 2 (S2113) is executed, the same processes as S2401 to S2404 of the first winning process (see FIG. 231) of the first control example are executed. Then, when the process of S2404 is finished, a winning prize command is set (S2431), then the same processes as S2405 to S2411 of the above-described first winning process (see FIG. 231) are executed, and this process ends. In this first winning process 2 (S2113), by setting a winning command, the ball that has won the variable winning device 65 (specific winning port 65a) during the jackpot game is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. can output information about

Information about the number of balls won during one round of the jackpot game is added to the winning command, and the sound lamp control device 113 performs winning command processing described later when receiving the winning command. (Refer to FIG. 302) is executed, and it is determined whether or not to execute the winning effect during the winning game (Refer to FIG. 293).

Next, with reference to FIG. 297, the second winning process 2 (S2513) will be described. FIG. 297 is a flow chart showing the second winning process 2 (S2513). This second winning process 2 (S2513) is similar to the second winning process (see FIG. 234) in the first control example described above. A process based on the winning ball is executed.

When the second winning process (S2513) is executed, the same processes as S2701 to S2704 of the second winning process (see FIG. 234) are executed. When the process of S2704 is completed, a winning command is set (S2731), and then the same processes as S2705 to S2711 of the second winning process (see FIG. 234) are executed, and this process ends. In this second winning process 2 (S2513), by setting a winning command, the variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening 65a) is won during the small winning game from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. Information about the sphere can be output.

Information about the number of balls won during the small winning game is added to the winning command, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning command, the winning command processing described later (see FIG. 302) is executed. ) is executed, and it is determined whether or not to execute the winning effect (see FIG. 293) during the winning game.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the third control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 298 to 304. FIG. The control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example is the command determination processing 3 instead of the command determination processing (see FIG. 238) in the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first control example. (S4111 in FIG. 298), the variable display setting process 2 (S4112 in FIG. 303) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 243), and otherwise the same processes are executed.

First, the command determination process 3 (S4111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 298 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 3 (S4111). Similar to the command determination process (see FIG. 238) in the first control example described above, this command determination process 3 is a process in which various processes are executed when various commands output from main controller 110 are received.

Command determination processing 3 (S4111) is, for the command determination processing (Figure 238) of the first control example described above, when receiving a special figure 2 variation pattern command (S4306 in Figure 298: Yes), special figure 2 299) is executed, and when a state command is received (S4313 in FIG. 298: Yes), instead of the state command processing (see FIG. 240), state command processing 2 (FIG. (see S4352 in FIG. 298) is executed, a process for determining that a hit-related command has been received (S4352 in FIG. 298), and when a hit-related command is received (S4352 in FIG. 298: Yes), a hit-related command The difference is that the processing (see FIG. 301) is executed, and the other processing is the same. The same processes are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 3 (S4111) is executed, first, the processes of S4301 to S4306 are executed similarly to the command determination process (see FIG. 238) of the first control example described above. And, in the processing of S4306, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received (S4306: Yes), the special figure 2 variation setting process is executed (S4351).

Here, with reference to FIG. 299, the special figure variation setting process 2 (S4351) will be described. Figure 299 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special figure 2 variation setting process 2 (S4351). In this special figure 2 variation setting process 2 (S4351), the process of setting the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e to ON in the same way as the command determination process of the first control example (see FIG. 238) (S5101), and reception A process (S5102) of extracting a variation pattern command from the command executed is executed, and a process (S5103 to S5108) of determining whether or not to execute an additional effect (see FIG. 292(a)) is executed.

First, when the special figure 2 variation setting process 2 (S4351) is executed, the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e is set to ON (S5101), and then the variation pattern command is extracted from the received command (S5102) . The processing of S5101 described above is the same as the processing of S4307 of the command determination processing of the first control example (see FIG. 238), and the processing of S5102 is the same as the command determination processing of the first control example (see FIG. 238). 238), the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the remaining probability variation number set in the remaining probability variation number area 223o (hereinafter referred to as the actual remaining probability variation number) and the remaining probability variation number set in the effect probability variation number area (hereinafter referred to as the effect remaining probability variation number) A comparison is made (S5103). In the processing of S5103, when it is determined that the value of the number of times of residual probability variation is less than the value of the number of times of real probability variation, that is, the number of times of residual probability variation displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 The value is smaller than the actually set remaining probability variation count (remaining probability variation count updated in the game state update process (see FIG. 213) of the main controller 110), and it is determined that the additional effect can be executed. If it is (S5103: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired (S5104), then the additional effect table 222cb is referred to, and the difference value between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the value of the effect residual probability variation number Based on the value of the production counter 223h acquired in the process of S5104, the additional production type is selected (S5105).

On the other hand, in the processing of S5103, if it is determined that the value of the number of times of residual probability change is not less than (same or greater than) the value of the actual number of times of probability of change, that is, the value of the number of times of residual probability change is added by the additional effect. If it is determined that it is not possible (S5103: No), this processing is set as it is.

When the processing of S5105 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the additional effect has been selected (S5106). In the process of S5106, if no additional effect is selected, that is, in the process of S5105, the difference value between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the value of the effect residual probability variation number is "1 to 40" and acquired When the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is "0 to 99", and the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is "41 to 80", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 49" (S5106: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5106, if it is determined that the additional effect is selected (S5106: Yes), the type of the selected additional effect is set in the additional effect type storage area 223cc (S5107), and the additional effect flag 223cb is set. It is set to ON (S5108), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 298, the description continues. In the process of S4306, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is not received (S4306), then the command determination process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 238) S4309 ~ S4318 same process. Then, in the process of S4317, if it is determined that the remaining probability variable number of times command or the remaining time short number of times command is not received (S4317: No), it is determined whether the hit-related command is received (S4352).

In the process of S4352, if it is determined that the win-related command has not been received (S4352: No), in the same manner as the command determination process of the first control example (see FIG. 238), other commands are processed. Various processes are executed (S4319), and this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a hit-related command has been received (S4352: Yes), a hit-related command process is executed (S4353). This winning-related command process (S4353) is a process executed when each command related to winning output from the main controller 110 is output. opening command output when the game) is started, round start command output when a new round game is started in the jackpot game, winning game (jackpot game or small winning game) is being executed Winning command output based on the winning of the ball to the specific winning opening 65a between, Ending command output when the ending period starts in the winning game (jackpot game or small winning game), other commands related to winning (V winning command, etc.) is executed when it is determined that it is output (received) from the main controller 110 .

When the hit-related command process (S4353) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S5201), and if it is determined that an opening command has been received (S5201: Yes), then A display opening command is set (S5202). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5201 that the opening command has not been received (S5201: No), then it is determined whether or not the round start command has been received (S5203).

In the processing of S5203, if it is determined that the round start command has been received (S5203), the display round command is set (S5204), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5203, if it is determined that the round start command has not been received (S5203: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning command has been received (S5205). This winning command is a command set in the first winning process 2 (see S2113 in FIG. 296) and the second winning process 2 (see S2513 in FIG. 297) executed in main controller 110, It is a command output based on the fact that a ball enters the variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening 65a) during a game or a small winning game. It should be noted that this winning prize command includes information about the number of winning balls and the type of winning game being executed (big hit type or small hit type) and information that can be specified.

Here, the winning prize command process (S5206) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 302 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning command process (S5206).

When the winning command process (S5206) is executed, first, the game state at the time of winning is specified based on the state setting area (S5301). is determined (S5302). If it is determined that it is not in the latent definite state (S5302: No), the winning effect is selected (S5305), and the process proceeds to S5306. On the other hand, in the process of S5302, when it is determined that it is in the latent state (S5302: Yes), when selecting the winning effect to be executed in the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) in the latent state The value of the effect counter 223h to be used is acquired (S5303), and the winning effect is selected based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223h and the winning effect table 222cb (S5304).

When the process of S5304 or the process of S5305 is finished, it is next determined whether or not the winning effect has been selected (S5306), and if it is determined that the winning effect has been selected (S5306: Yes), the selected winning effect is indicated. A winning effect command for display is set (S5307), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S5306, if it is determined that the winning effect is not selected (S5306: No), this processing ends.

Next, the variable display setting process 2 (S4112) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 303 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S4112). This variable display setting process 2 (S4112) is different from the variable display setting process (see FIG. 243) of the first control example described above, in which the process of updating the display content of the remaining probability variation number of times and the addition effect flag 223cb being turned on. A process of executing an additional effect when it is set to is added. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the same element other than that, and the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, in the variable display setting process 2 (S4112), the same processes as S4701 to S4704 of the variable display setting process (FIG. 243) of the first control example are executed. Based on the information provided. It is determined whether the present state is in the latent state (S4731).

In the processing of S4731, if it is determined that the current state is not the latent certainty state (S4731: No), the process of updating the number of times of remaining probability variation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the latent certainty state (S4732 to S4736) is skipped and the process proceeds to S4705. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent definite state (S4731: Yes), then 1 is subtracted from the effect remaining probability variable number of times set in the effect probability variable number of times area 223p (S4732) and subtracted. It is determined whether or not the value of the effect remaining probability variation frequency is greater than 0 (S4733). In the processing of S4733, if it is determined that the value of the number of times of effect remaining probability variation is greater than 0, that is, "1 time" or more in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 When the number of times of probability variation is displayed (S4733: Yes), a command of the number of times of probability variation for display is set based on the value of the number of times of probability variation set in the number of times of effect probability variation area 223p (S4734).

On the other hand, in the processing of S4733, if it is determined that the value of the number of times of variation of the remaining probability of effect is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S4733: No), It is determined whether the value of the number of remaining probability variations is greater than 0 (S4735). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of times of residual probability variation of the effect is 0, but the value of the number of times of real probability variation is not 0 (1 or more).

In the process of S4735, if it is determined that the value of the actual remaining probability variation number is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S4735: No), the process proceeds to the above-described S4734 process, and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number Based on this, a display residual probability variable number command (that is, a command for indicating "0 times" in the residual number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81) is set (S4734). Then, the process proceeds to S4705.

On the other hand, in the process of S4735, if it is determined that the value of the actual residual probability variation number is greater than 0 (S4735: Yes), a residual probability variation number command for display indicating the number of production residual probability variations "???" is set ( S4736), the process proceeds to S4705. By doing so, in a situation where the value of the actual residual probability variation frequency is not 0, when the effect residual probability variation frequency displayed in the remaining frequency display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 is "0 times" "???" can be displayed instead of the display of "0 times" (see Fig. 292(b)). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the latent probability state continues even after "0 times" is displayed as the number of times of remaining probability variation of the effect. Further, by setting the number of times of the effect remaining probability change to "???", the player can play the game while predicting how long the latent probability state will continue, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the process of S4701, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4701: No), it is determined that there is no latent state in the process of S4731 If so (S4731: No), and when the process of S4734 or S4736 is finished, then the same process as S4705 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 243) of the first control example described above is executed.

In the processing of S4705, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to ON (S4705: Yes), then special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is executed (S4737). For this special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4737), the detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S4705: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4737) is skipped The process proceeds to S4709, the same processes as S4709 to S4711 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 243) of the first control example described above are executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in the third control example, when the latent probability state is entered (the latent probability state is set), the number of times ( For example, "100 times") is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. As a result, when the latent probability state is set, it is possible to make the actual remaining probability variation number different from the production remaining probability variation number (display the production remaining probability variation number less than the actual remaining probability variation number). During the state, it is possible to make it easier to execute the performance that adds the number of times of remaining probability variation of the performance. It should be noted that, in this control example, each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2) is executed in the same manner as the first control example described above (every time the actual residual probability variation number is subtracted), the remaining number of times Although it is configured to subtract the number of times of effect remaining probability variation displayed in the display area D1, for example, when the variation of the special figure (special figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player is executed in the latent probability state may be configured so as not to subtract the number of production remaining probability variations. In this case, as in this control example, at the timing of starting the latent certainty state (the timing at which the latent certainty state is set), the number of remaining probability variations displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is displayed smaller than the actual remaining probability variation number. As a result, a situation occurs in which the number of residual probability variations of production is greater than the number of actual residual probability variations even if the number of variations of the residual probability of production is not subtracted for the fluctuation of the special figure (special figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the third control example, as a lottery result of the special figure, the number of real residual probability variations is set to the initial value (120 times). is not set to the initial value (120 times), and when winning a small win, an additional performance is executed to add a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 to 40 times) to the number of times of the remaining probability change during the small win game. It consists of As a result, when a winning game (a game in which the variable winning device 65 opens and closes) is executed during the latent probability state, whether or not the actual probability variable number of times is reset to the initial value (120 times) (during the latent probability state) It is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether or not the special figure jackpot has been won.

Also, in the third control example, the timing of starting the latent state (the timing at which the latent state is set) and the number of real probability variations and the number of residual probability variations that occur when the special figure jackpot is won during the latent probability state In order to fill the difference, it is configured to execute an additional performance that adds the number of performance remaining probability variation displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 as a special figure variation performance in the latent probability state. As a result, since it is possible to add the number of production remaining probability variations at various timings during the latent probability state, whether the actual probability variation number has been reset to the initial value (120 times) during the latent probability state (latent probability state It is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether or not the special figure jackpot has been won.

Furthermore, in the third control example, the number of additions displayed in the addition effect executed at each timing (special figure fluctuation timing, timing during execution of winning game) (remaining probability change number of effects displayed in the remaining number display area D1 The number of times added to) is configured to be changed based on the difference between the actual probability variation frequency and the effect remaining probability variation frequency (see FIG. 290). As a result, when the performance remaining probability variation frequency is greatly added by the additional performance, the player is made to think that he or she has won a special figure jackpot with the actual probability variation frequency at the initial stage (120 times) during the latent probability state. In addition, it is possible to suppress the number of times of residual probability change of production from becoming "0 times" in a state where the number of times of real probability change and the number of times of residual probability of production deviate greatly.

In the third control example, during a winning game (a big winning game or a small winning game) that is executed when winning (for example, a big winning game or a small winning game with few balls out of a big winning game) is won during a latent state It is configured such that the third symbol display device 81 executes the display based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65 as the performance during the hit (see FIG. 293). As a result, the player can easily grasp that the winning game will be executed during the latent certainty state. Then, as a winning effect executed during the winning game, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the variable winning device 65 is displayed. Display mode) is configured to make the ratio of display on the third symbol display device 81 different between when a big winning game is being executed and when a small winning game is being executed. As a result, even if the player wins a big win with a larger number of balls winning the variable winning device 65 in one winning game than in the small winning game, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the small winning. It is possible to make it similar to the effect during hitting corresponding to the game. Therefore, while informing (displaying) that the winning game is executed in the latent certainty state in an easy-to-understand manner for the player, it informs (displays) whether the winning game is a big-hit game or a small-hit game in an incomprehensible manner to the player. The player can play the latent definite state with anticipation until the end.

<Fourth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 305 to 325. FIG. In the first control example described above, when the jackpot hits during the latent probability state and the latent probability state is newly set 120 times (the value of the probability variable counter 203k is overwritten to 120), the displayed probability The remaining number of times in the state is configured to continue to display the number of times before becoming a big hit. Then, if there is a difference between the displayed number of remaining definite states and the actual remaining number of definite states, and the displayed remaining number of times becomes 0, the actual remaining number of times is changed. It was configured to execute a resurrection effect to be displayed in addition. That is, the timing at which the remaining number of times on the display is additionally displayed is limited to the timing when the remaining number of times becomes 0.

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, when there is a difference between the actual remaining number of times of the latent state and the remaining number of times on the display, a plurality of opportunities to display the remaining number of times on the display are provided. and More specifically, in the state where the difference is generated, a lottery is performed at the start of the fluctuation to determine whether or not to execute the additional effect, and if the lottery is won, the remaining number of times displayed may be added. It was configured to execute an additional production that suggests something. In this superimposition effect, the number of times of superimposition display is changed according to the operation timing of the frame button 22 . As a result, the desire of the player to participate in the additional performance is intended to be improved. Hereinafter, the additional effect in which the displayed remaining number of times is added by operating (pressing) the frame button 22 will be referred to as the pressing additional effect.

In addition, in the fourth control example, when the displayed remaining number of times is 0 and the actual remaining number of times is not 0 (is 1 or more), the remaining number of times is not displayed (hidden). ) It is configured to set the non-display mode. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine when the latent certainty state ends, so that it is possible to provide a game with a sense of tension in the latent certainty state. Furthermore, when the non-display mode is set, if the second special symbol jackpot occurs in a state where the actual remaining number of times in the latent state (the value of the probability variation counter 203k) is within a predetermined number of times (5 times) ( That is, when the remaining number of times of the latent certainty state is updated to 120 times immediately before the latent certainty state ends), a special additional performance (special additional performance) different from the normal additional performance is executed. and As a result, it is possible to make the player who confirms the special additional performance recognize that he/she has won the jackpot just before the actual remaining number of times becomes 0 and that the latent certainty state is newly set. can bring greater joy to

Further, in the fourth control example, an effect is provided in which the effect mode is changed by operating the frame button 22 in addition to the additional effect. Specifically, in the normal state and the variable probability state, there is provided a suspension notice effect that changes the mode of the suspension symbol according to the operation content of the frame button 22. - 特許庁In this pending notice performance, the range of pending symbols for executing the notice performance is determined based on the player's operation of the frame button 22 (player's selection), and based on the look-ahead results for the pending balls in the range selected by the player. Then, it is configured to execute the notice effect using the reserved pattern. As a result, when an effect with a high degree of expectation is executed as the advance notice effect for the selected range, the player's sense of expectation for the big win can be heightened. Also, as a notice effect for the selected range, even if a low expected effect is executed, if a ball different from the selected range is selected, a high expected notice effect may be executed. It is possible to make the player think that they do not know. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel effect that a big hit can be expected for the reserved balls corresponding to the reserved symbols outside the selection range.

The pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the configurations of the RAM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The only difference is that part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 305 to 310, the display modes of various characteristic effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described. FIGS. 304 and 306 are diagrams showing the display mode when the suspension notice effect is executed in the fourth control example, and FIGS. FIG. 309 and FIG. 310 are diagrams showing a display mode when executed, and FIGS. 309 and 310 are diagrams showing a display mode when a non-display mode is set in which the remaining count is hidden in the latent state. .

FIG. 304(a) is a diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the suspension notice effect is started in this control example. As shown in FIG. 305(a), when the suspension notice effect is started, a display area Ds1a in which characters "Push to decide who to feed" is displayed on the upper left side of the sub-display area Ds1. is formed. This character can prompt the player to press the frame button 22 . Also, a tray Ds1b on which the number of pieces of meat on the bone smaller than the number of reserved symbols is placed is displayed below the reserved symbols Dh1 to Dh4. The example of FIG. 305(a) illustrates a case where there are four reserved balls and three pieces of meat on the bone. The tray Ds1b is displayed in a reciprocating manner in the horizontal direction.

When the player presses the frame button 22 according to the characters displayed in the display area Ds1a, the reciprocating motion of the tray Ds1b is stopped at the timing of the press. FIG. 305(b) illustrates a case where the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the tray Ds1b is placed below the reserved symbols Dh2 to Dh4. In this case, the tray Ds1b is stopped below the reserved patterns Dh2 to Dh4, and the reserved patterns Dh2 to Dh4 displayed above the stopped tray Ds1b are changed to a happy smiling face. As a result, the player can be made aware that the reserved symbols Dh2 to Dh4 whose modes have been changed are subject to the current reserved notice.

If the player does not press the frame button 22 while the display area Ds1a is being formed, the reciprocating movement of the tray Ds1b is stopped when the display time (for example, two seconds) of the display area Ds1a has elapsed. be.

Next, as shown in FIG. 305(c), an effect of eating the meat on the bone placed on the tray is executed according to the reserved symbols in the range selected by the player's operation (the tray is stopped on the lower side). , After each reserved pattern eats up the meat with the bone, an effect is executed in which part or all of the reserved patterns that have eaten the meat with the bone lay eggs. FIG. 305(c) illustrates a mode in which a reserved symbol Dh2 and a reserved symbol Dh4 lay eggs Dh2a and Dh4a, respectively. A reserved symbol that has laid an egg is displayed to suggest to the player that it is a reserved symbol based on a highly anticipated reserved ball. More specifically, if the reserved ball indicated by the reserved pattern in the selection range includes a reserved ball that causes reach, the reserved pattern corresponding to the reserved ball has completely eaten the bone meat. An effect of laying an egg later is executed. In addition, when the selection range does not include the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball that causes reach, the effect of laying eggs is not executed. As a result, the player can perceive the occurrence of the ready-to-win performance before the lottery for the first special symbol based on the reserved balls is executed, so that the player can enjoy the ready-to-win performance while playing the game. can. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the pending notice effect is configured to be more likely to be determined when there is a pending ball that causes the ready-to-win effect. Therefore, when the effect of laying eggs is not executed after the effect of eating the meat on the bone, the ready-to-win effect is generated in the reserved patterns outside the range of the reserved patterns selected by the player by operating the frame button 22. It is more likely that a reserved symbol corresponding to the sphere is included. Therefore, if the effect of laying an egg is executed by the reserved symbols within the range selected by the player, a big win can be expected for the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved symbol that laid the egg, and in addition, the egg is laid. It is possible to provide a novel performance that a big hit can be expected for the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved pattern outside the range selected by the player when the spawning performance is not executed. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

After execution of the effect that the reserved symbol lays an egg, as shown in FIG. 306(a), an image prompting repeated pressing of the frame button 22 is displayed inside the display area Ds1a. This image makes it possible for the player to recognize that the performance will develop by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22, so that the player can be made to continuously press the frame button 22.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the pending advance notice effect.

When the player repeatedly hits the frame button 22 according to the instruction of the image displayed in the display area Ds1a, and reaches the prescribed number of repeated hits determined when the effect occurs, the inside of the house Ds1c displayed on the right side of the reserved symbols Dh1 to Dh4. A production in which the egg moves to is executed. In addition, the eggs are moved in order from the reserved pattern with the oldest reserved order. FIG. 306(b) illustrates a case where only the egg Dh2a displayed above the reserved symbol Dh2 moves inside the house Ds1c. The movement to the house Ds1c suggests that there is a possibility of developing super reach in the variable display based on the held ball. Super ready-to-win is likely to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, and is less likely to be selected when the result is a loss, so the degree of expectation for a big win is high. Therefore, the player can be made to repeatedly hit the frame button 22 more seriously. It should be noted that it is undetermined whether or not super reach will occur only by moving to house Ds1c, and as shown in FIG. Superreach is confirmed when it occurs.

As described above, in the fourth control example, when the suspension notice effect is executed, the player selects the range of the reservation symbols for generating the notice. As a result, depending on the content of the reservation notice performance, the player can have expectations for the reserved balls within the range selected by the player, or expect for the reserved balls outside the selection range of the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unprecedented novel pending notice effect.

In addition, in the fourth control example, it is configured to notify whether or not the pattern of the egg moves to the house Ds1c by repeatedly pressing the frame button 22, but it is not limited to this. For example, the effect of moving to the house Ds1c may be omitted, and an effect may be executed in which super reach is determined when the egg is broken by repeated hits. In other words, it may be configured such that all the egg symbols are collectively informed of whether or not a single continuous hit by the player will lead to super ready-to-win. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the presentation easier to understand.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 307 and 308, the press-up effect performed during the latent definite state will be described. This additional press effect is an effect indicating that pressing (operating) the frame button 22 may increase the number of remaining times of the latent certainty state on the display. This pressing additional performance is provided with a normal mode in which the number of times the player operates the frame button 22 is relatively small (or 0 times) and a special mode in which the number of times the player operates the frame button 22 is relatively large. It is The special mode is when the difference between the number of remaining latent states on the display and the actual number of remaining latent states is 30 or more, or when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit. This is an aspect that is likely to be selected in some cases. On the other hand, the normal mode is a mode that is likely to be selected when the difference between the displayed remaining number of times and the actual remaining number of times is less than 30.

First, the normal mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 307 and 308(a). FIG. 307(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of execution of the normal mode press-up effect. As shown in FIG. 307(a), when the push-up effect is started, a button D2 with the characters "push" written is displayed near the center of the main display area Dm, and "additional chance ” is displayed. Further, below the button D2, a display area D3 having a substantially rectangular shape in the horizontal direction is displayed, and below the display area D3, a display area D4 is displayed with the words "Press the button at the right timing!" is displayed. The display area D3 includes small areas D3b and D3f marked with "?", small areas D3c and D3e marked with "chance!" and a scroll bar D3a for scrolling from the left side to the right side in front view on each small area. These display contents make it possible for the player to easily recognize that operating the frame button 22 with good timing may increase the probability variation count on the display. Note that the number of additions is greatest when the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is placed on the small region D3d, and the frame button is pressed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is placed on the small regions D3b and D3f. It is the lowest when 22 is pressed.

FIG. 307(b) is a diagram showing the display contents when the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged on the small area D3d. As shown in FIG. 307(b), when the player operates (depresses) the frame button 22 at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is placed on the small area D3d to which the characters "Extremely hot!!!" A number-of-additions display area D5 in which the characters "+5" are displayed is displayed, and the characters "GET" are displayed above the number-of-additions display area D5. In addition, 5 times is added to the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1. Further, the characters "GET ADDED 5 TIMES!!" are displayed in the display area D4. These display contents make it possible for the player to easily understand the displayed remaining number of times added in the current pressing additional effect. Note that the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 defines the correspondence relationship between the timing of pressing the scroll bar D3a and the displayed remaining number of times to be added.

FIG. 308(a) shows the display contents when the player presses the frame button 22 at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is placed on the small area D3f with the character "?" It is a figure showing. In this case, as shown in FIG. 308(a), the button D2 is split in two, and the characters "Unfortunately..." are displayed above the button D2. In addition, the characters "Failure to add..." are displayed in the display area D4. These display contents allow the player to easily recognize that the operation timing of the frame button 22 was bad. Therefore, when the pressing additional performance is executed next time, the player can be made to press the frame button 22 at a better timing, so that the player's willingness to participate in the pressing additional performance can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 308(b), the special mode pressing-up effect will be described. When the special mode press-up effect is executed, a button D2 larger than that displayed in the normal mode is displayed in the vicinity of the center of the screen in the main display area Dm, and a "super-addition chance" is displayed above the button D2. ” is displayed. As a result, the player can be made to understand that a special effect, which is clearly different from the normal mode, has started.

Further, in each of the small areas D3b to D3h of the display area D3, the number of times (5 to 30) to be superimposed when the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged is displayed. is set to , and the text "Determine the number of additions with your own power!" is displayed in the display area D4. As a result, the player can be made aware that the timing at which he or she operates the frame button 22 determines the number of additions (that is, it is not a successful race). Therefore, since the player can be made to press the frame button 22 more positively, the player's willingness to participate in the pressing additional effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 309 and 310, the non-display mode during the latent state will be described. As described above, this non-display mode may be set when the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display becomes 0, making it unclear when the latent state will end. It is a production to give a sense of tension to the audience.

As shown in FIG. 309(a), when the remaining count of the latent state displayed in the remaining count display area D1 becomes 0, a character 811 imitating a rabbit falls to the ground in the same manner as in the first control example. is set to In addition, in this control example, the characters “end...?” are displayed in the display area 812 displayed above the character 811 . In other words, the display content is set as if it is not yet known whether or not the latent state will end.

Then, if the actual remaining number of latent definite states is not 0, the state shifts to the non-display mode shown in FIG. 309(b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 309(b), an effect is executed in which a rock 813 approaches a rabbit-like character 811 from behind, and "Pinch!" is displayed below the main display area Dm. !” appears in a display area. Further, in the remaining count display area D1, characters "???" are displayed in place of the indication of the number of remaining latent states. With these displays, it is possible to make the player recognize that although the latent state has not ended yet, it is unknown when it will end. Therefore, it is possible to make the player face the game with a sense of urgency because of the anxiety that the end of the latent certainty state may be near.

FIG. 310(a) is a diagram showing the display contents in the non-display mode when the number of actual remaining times of the latent certainty state becomes 0 and the latent certainty state ends. As shown in FIG. 310(a), when the latent probability state ends while the non-display mode is set (when the value of the variable probability counter 203k becomes 0), an effect in which the character 811 is crushed by the rock 813 is performed. will be In the display area 812 above the crushed character 811, the characters "END!!" are displayed. These displays allow the player to clearly understand that the latent state has ended.

Also, FIG. 310(b) is a diagram showing a display mode (pinch escape effect) when a jackpot is set in a non-display mode and the number of times remaining in the latent state is within 5 times. . If the jackpot of the second special symbol occurs just before the end of the latent definite state, the latent definite state is basically set 120 times after the big win, which is advantageous for the player. In this case, as shown in FIG. 310(b), an effect is executed in which the character 811 jumps over the rock 813 approaching from behind. In addition, the characters "Get out of pinch!!" are displayed on the left side of the rock 813, and the display of the remaining count display area D1 is updated to "Remaining 100 times". Since this pinch escape effect is performed only when a big hit occurs just before the end of the latent state (within 5 times of the latent certainty state remaining), the player who has confirmed this pinch escape effect is latently confirmed. Just before the state ends, a big hit is achieved, and the player can be made to recognize that a new latent certainty state has been given. Therefore, it is possible to make the player happy with the timing of the big win, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Electrical configuration in the fourth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 311 to 315. FIG. First, FIG. 311(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 311(a), in the ROM 222 in the fourth control example, in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example, an additional effect selection table 222da, a pressing period table 222db, and a pending notice determination table 222dc and are provided.

The add-on effect selection table 222da is a data table that is referred to for determining whether or not to execute the press-on add-on effect in the latent definite state, and the form of the press-on add-on effect to be executed (either normal form or special form). be. Details of the additional effect selection table 222da will be described with reference to FIGS. 312 and 313. FIG.

FIG. 312(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the additional effect selection table 222da. As shown in FIG. 312(a), in the additional effect selection table 222da, the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, and the degree of participation of the player in the pressing additional effect is normal (the game has been played in the additional effect within the past 5 times). The participation degree normal table 222da1 referred to when the player operates the frame button 22), the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, and the player's participation degree in the pressing additional effect is low (past 5 A table 222da2 for low participation level referred to when the player does not operate the frame button 22 in the additional performance over times or more, and a table 222da3 for big win referred to when a big win is achieved in the special pattern lottery. and are provided.

First, the details of the normal participation degree table 222da1 will be described with reference to FIG. 312(b). FIG. 312(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal participation level table 222da1. As shown in FIG. 312(b), the normal participation level table 222da1 changes the value of the effect counter 223h for each difference between the displayed remaining number of latent definite states and the actual remaining number of latent definite states. The range is defined in association with the type (mode) of the pressing additional effect.

As shown in FIG. 312(b), when the difference between the number of remaining times of the latent definite state on the display and the actual remaining number of times of the latent definite state is within the range of 5 times to 29 times, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined in association with the range of "0 to 95" with "no additional effect". On the other hand, the range of the value of the effect counter 223h from "96 to 99" is defined in association with the "normal mode". For this reason, when the special pattern lottery results in a small hit and the normal participation table 222da1 is referred to, "no additional effect" is selected at a rate of 96% (96/100), so the pressing additional effect is selected. is not executed. In addition, the normal mode pressing additional effect is executed at a rate of 4% (4/100). In addition, the reason why the special mode is not selected when the difference between the displayed remaining number of hidden definite states and the actual remaining number of hidden definite states is within the range of 5 to 29 times is the displayed remaining number of times and the actual remaining number of times. This is to prevent the additional display exceeding the difference from the remaining number of times.

In addition, if the difference between the displayed remaining number of latent states and the actual remaining number of latent states is 30 times or more, the value of the effect counter 223h is "additional effect" to the range of "0 to 90". "None" is associated and defined. On the other hand, when the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "91 to 97", the "normal mode" is defined in correspondence, and when the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "98, 99", the "special mode" is defined. are defined in association with each other. For this reason, when the special symbol lottery results in a small hit and the normal participation table 222da1 is referred to, "no additional effect" is selected at a rate of 91% (91/100), so the pressing additional effect is selected. is not executed. In addition, the normal mode press-up performance is executed at a rate of 7% (7/100), and the special mode press-up performance is executed at a rate of 2% (2/100).

In this way, if the difference between the displayed remaining number of times and the actual remaining number of times is large (if it is 30 or more), the probability of occurrence of the pressing additional effect is increased, so that the difference is prevented from becoming too large. can do.

Next, the details of the low participation degree table 222da2 will be described with reference to FIG. 313(a). FIG. 313(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the low participation degree table 222da2. As shown in FIG. 313(a), when the difference between the number of remaining times of the latent definite state on the display and the actual remaining number of times of the latent definite state is within the range of 5 times to 29 times, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined in association with the range of "0 to 90" with "no additional effect". On the other hand, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined in the range of "91 to 99" in association with the "normal mode". For this reason, when the special symbol lottery results in a small hit and the normal participation table 222da1 is referred to, "no additional effect" is selected at a rate of 91% (91/100), so the pressing additional effect is selected. is not executed. In addition, the normal mode press-up performance is executed at a rate of 9% (9/100). That is, when the degree of participation of the player in the additional pressing effect is low, the frequency of the additional pressing effect is increased (4%→9%). As a result, the player's willingness to participate in the pressing additional effect can be improved.

In addition, if the difference between the number of remaining times of the latent definite state on the display and the actual remaining number of times of the definite state is 30 times or more, the value of the effect counter 223h is "additional effect" for the range of "0 to 80" "None" is associated and defined. On the other hand, when the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "81 to 94", the "normal mode" is defined in correspondence, and when the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "95 to 99", the "special mode" is defined. are defined in association with each other. For this reason, when the special pattern lottery results in a small hit and the normal participation table 222da1 is referred to, "no additional effect" is selected at a rate of 81% (81/100), so the pressing additional effect is selected. is not executed. Further, the normal mode pressing-up effect is executed at a rate of 14% (14/100), and the special mode pressing-over effect is executed at a rate of 5% (5/100). That is, even when the difference between the displayed number of remaining times of the latent definite state and the actual remaining number of times of the latent definite state is 30 times or more, the frequency of the pressing additional effect is increased (9%→19%). . As a result, the player's willingness to participate in the pressing additional effect can be improved.

Next, the jackpot table 222da3 will be described with reference to FIG. 313(b). As described above, this big win table 222da3 is a table that is referred to when a special symbol lottery results in a big win during the latent state. As shown in FIG. 313(b), when the difference between the number of remaining times of the latent definite state on the display and the actual remaining number of times of the latent definite state is within the range of 5 times to 29 times, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined in association with the "normal mode" for the range of "0 to 99". That is, the normal mode press-up performance is always executed.

In addition, when the difference between the displayed remaining number of times of the latent certainty state and the actual remaining number of times of the latent certainty state is 30 times or more, the value of the effect counter 223h is "normal mode" for the range of "0 to 49". ” are defined in association with each other, and a “special mode” is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223h in the range of “50 to 99”. In other words, the normal mode or the special mode press-up effect is always executed. In this manner, when the difference between the displayed remaining number of times and the actual remaining number of times is 5 or more in the latent probability state, when the jackpot is achieved, the pressing-up performance is always executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to expect a big win when the press additional effect is generated. In particular, the addition effect of the special mode has a significantly higher selection rate than the normal expectation level table 222da1 and the low expectation level table 222da2. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that the player has won a big win even more strongly when the special mode pressing-up performance is generated. Therefore, since the game can be played while paying attention to the aspect of the pressing additional effect, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the fourth control example, when the difference between the displayed remaining number of times and the actual remaining number of times is 5 or more and the second special symbol is a jackpot, the pressing additional effect is always set. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the rate at which the additional pressing effect is set is reduced, and the additional pressing effect is set at a rate of 80%. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily generate a difference between the displayed remaining number of times and the actual remaining number of times, so that the pressing additional effect can be executed more effectively.

Returning to FIG. 311, the description continues. The pressing period table 222db is a data table that defines the number of additional displays according to the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed during execution of the pressing additional effect. Details of the pressing period table 222db will be described with reference to FIGS.

First, FIG. 313(c) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pressing period table 222db. As shown in FIG. 313(c), the pressing period table 222db includes a normal table 222db1 that is referred to when the normal pressing effect is set, and a special pressing effect that is referred to when the special pressing effect is set. and a special table 222db2 that When execution of the additional pressing effect is determined, a table corresponding to the determined pressing additional effect is read out and stored in a pressing period storage area 223da of the RAM 223, which will be described later. When the depression of the frame button 22 is detected during the execution of the depression additional effect, the table stored in the depression period storage area 223da is referenced to determine the number of additions.

First, the details of the normal table 222db1 will be described with reference to FIG. 314(a). FIG. 314(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal table 222db1. As shown in FIG. 314(a), in the normal table 222db1, the number of times (addition value) to be added to the remaining number display area D1 is defined in association with the elapsed time from the start of the pressing addition effect. ing. It should be noted that the elapsed time after the effect is started is counted by the pressing period timer 223db of the RAM 223. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 314(a), the elapsed time range of 0 to 699 milliseconds is associated with "0" as the added value. In addition, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during this period (range of 0 to 699 milliseconds from the start of the pressing additional effect) is that the scroll bar D3a moves on the small area D3b marked with "?" It becomes a mode. Also, the elapsed time range of 700 milliseconds to 999 milliseconds is associated with "3" as the added value. In addition, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during this period (in the range of 700 to 999 milliseconds from the start of the pressing additional effect) is that the scroll bar D3a moves on the small area D3c to which the characters "chance!" It becomes the mode to do. Also, the range of elapsed time from 1000 milliseconds to 1499 milliseconds is associated with "5" as an added value. The display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during this period (in the range of 1000 to 1499 milliseconds from the start of the pressing additional effect) is that the scroll bar D3a is displayed in a small area D3d to which the characters "Extremely hot!!!" It will move upwards.

Similarly, the elapsed time range of 1500 to 1799 milliseconds (the period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3e) is associated with "2" as an additional value, and the elapsed time range of 1800 to 2500 milliseconds. "0" is associated with (a period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3f) as an additional value.

In this way, the normal table 222db1 defines the correspondence relationship between the elapsed time and the additional value corresponding to the presentation mode of the pressing additional presentation of the normal mode (time-measured change in the position of the scroll bar D3a). As a result, the number of times according to the display mode (the position of the scroll bar D3a) at the time when the player presses the frame button 22 can be additionally displayed.

Next, the details of the special table 222db2 will be described with reference to FIG. 314(b). FIG. 314(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal table 222db2.

As shown in FIG. 314(b), the range of elapsed time from 0 to 799 milliseconds (the period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3b) is associated with "5" as the added value, and the elapsed time is 800 milliseconds. 999 milliseconds (the period during which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small region D3c) is associated with "10" as an added value, and the elapsed time range is 1000 to 1099 milliseconds (the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small region D3d). ) is associated with an additional value of "20", and an elapsed time in the range of 1100 to 1299 milliseconds (period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3e) is associated with an additional value of "10". The associated elapsed time range of 1,300 to 1,999 milliseconds (the period during which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3f) is associated with "5" as the added value, and the elapsed time range of 2,000 to 2,049 milliseconds. (The period during which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3g) is associated with "30" as the added value, and the elapsed time range of 2050 to 2500 milliseconds (the period during which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3h) , and "5" is associated as an added value.

With this special table 222db2, the number of additions displayed in the small area through which the scroll bar D3a is passing can be accurately displayed in the remaining number display area D1 at the timing when the frame button 22 is pressed.

Returning to FIG. 311(a), the description continues. The pending advance notice determination table 222dc is a table referred to for determining whether or not to execute the pending advance notice effect. As described above, the pending notice effect may be executed when the game state is the normal state or the probability variable state and the number of retained balls of the first special symbol increases. is a rendition performed to suggest the existence of Details of this pending notice determination table 222dc will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 315 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the pending notice determination table 222dc. As shown in FIG. 315, the pending notice determination table 222dc includes a table for when there is reach, which is referred to when there is a held ball that causes a ready-to-win effect among the held balls, and a ready-to-win effect occurs in the held ball. It is composed of a table for no reach that is referred to when there is no ball to be held. Each table is associated with the value of the effect counter 223h for determining the execution of the pending notice effect for each number of pending balls.

As shown in FIG. 315, in the ready-to-win table, the value of the production counter 223h is not specified in the range of 0 to 2 for the number of pending balls. That is, when the number of pending balls is 2 or less, the pending advance notice effect is not set. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is 3, "0 to 9" is associated as the value range of the effect counter 223h, and when the number of reserved balls is 4, the value range of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 15" are associated. In other words, the larger the number of pending balls, the easier it is to execute the pending notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player actively shoot balls in an attempt to accumulate more reserved balls, so that the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 315, even in the no-reach table, the value of the production counter 223h is not specified in the range of 0 to 2 of the number of pending balls. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is 3, "0" is associated as the value of the tooth effect counter 223h, and when the number of reserved balls is 4, the value range of the effect counter 223h is "0, 1". ” is associated. That is, the non-reach table has fewer random numbers (counter values) for determining the execution of the pending notice effect than the table for the ready reach. Therefore, the presence of the ball on hold for which the ready-to-win performance is performed makes it easier to execute the pending notice performance, so that the ready-to-win performance is developed for the player at the stage when the pending notice performance is started. can be strongly expected.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 311(b). FIG. 311(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. is. The RAM 223 in the fourth control example differs from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a depression period storage area 223da, a depression period timer 223db, and a continuous hit counter 223dc are added.

The pressing period storage area 223da is a storage area for storing the pressing period corresponding to the type of the determined pressing additional effect when execution of the pressing additional effect is determined. That is, when it is determined to start the pressing effect, the table (normal table 222db1 or special table 222db2) read from the pressing period table 222db is stored (see S4392 in FIG. 321). When the depression of the frame button 22 is detected during execution of the additional depression effect, the additional value is determined based on the table stored in the depression period storage area 223da and the timer value of the depression period timer 223db, which will be described later. , the remaining count displayed in the remaining count display area D1 is updated.

The pressing period timer 223db is a timer that counts the elapsed time from the start of the pressing additional effect. Based on the timer value of the pressing period timer 223db and the table stored in the pressing period storage area 223da, the additional value in the pressing additional effect is determined.

The repeated hit counter 223dc is set to a predetermined upper limit value for each effect when an effect (see FIG. 306(a)) prompting repeated hits of the frame button 22 occurs in the pending notice effect. is a counter whose value is decremented by one each time the frame button 22 is operated (see S5703 in FIG. 318). When the value of the repeated hitting counter 223dc becomes 0 during execution of the effect for prompting repeated hitting of the frame button 22, the effect progresses to the next stage (the egg pattern moves inside the house Ds1c).

The depressed flag 223dd is a flag indicating whether or not the operation (depression) of the frame button 22 has been executed by the player in the 1 depression additional effect. If this pressed flag 223dd is ON, it means that the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 has been detected in the pressing effect of 1, and if it is OFF, the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 has been detected. Means not detected. When the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is detected during execution of the press-over effect, this pressed-down flag 223dd is referred to, and only when the state is OFF, the pressed state stored in the pressed-down period table storage area 223da is detected. An added value corresponding to the period is read out and displayed in addition to the remaining count display area D1 (see S5605 in FIG. 317). That is, even if the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 a plurality of times in the 1st addition effect, only the addition for the first operation (presses) is executed. In addition, when the pressing additional effect ends with the pressed flag 223dd turned off, 1 is added to the value of the participation degree counter 223df, which will be described later. In other words, the number of times the player did not participate in the pressing additional effect (pressing the frame button 22) is counted by the participation degree counter 223df. In this control example, the execution frequency of the pressing additional effect is varied according to the count value of the participation degree counter 223df.

The on-hold notice flag 223de is a flag indicating whether or not the on-hold notice effect (see FIGS. 305 and 306) is being executed. Indicates that the performance is not in progress. This pending notice flag 223de is set to ON when execution of the pending notice effect is determined (see S5808 in FIG. 322), and is set to OFF at the end of the pending notice effect (see S5835 in FIG. 325). While this pending notice flag 223de is on, execution of a new pending notice effect is avoided. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from being confused by repeated execution of the pending notice.

The degree-of-participation counter 223df is a counter that indicates the degree of participation of the player in the pressing additional effect. This participation degree counter 223df is incremented by 1 when the additional pressing effect ends without detecting the operation of the frame button 22 (see S5509 in FIG. 316). When an operation is detected, the value is reset to 0 (see S5609 in FIG. 317). That is, the value of the participation degree counter 223df counts the number of consecutive times the player did not press the frame button 22 (did not participate) in the press additional effect. In this control example, the execution frequency of the pressing additional effect is varied according to the count value of the participation degree counter 223df. That is, if the count value of the participation degree counter 223df is greater than 5 (if the player has not participated in the push-up additional effect six or more times in a row), the determination ratio of the push-up additional effect is increased. As a result, it is possible to increase the opportunity for prompting the player to operate (depress) the frame button 22, so that the player's willingness to participate in the pressing additional effect can be enhanced.

The non-display setting flag 223dg is a flag indicating whether or not the non-display mode (see FIG. 309(b)) is set as the display mode during the latent state. When the non-display setting flag 223dg is on, it indicates that the non-display mode is set, and when it is off, it indicates that the non-display mode is not set. This non-display setting flag 223dg is set to ON when the non-display mode is set (see S5896 in FIG. 324), and when an additional effect (pressing additional effect, special additional effect) is set (see FIG. 321). S4395, see S5860 in FIG. 323), it is set to OFF when the latent state ends during the non-display mode (see S5858 in FIG. 323).

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 316 to 325. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 316, the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 236) of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 316 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107).

When this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see FIG. 316) is started, first, it is determined whether or not pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S5501). (S5501: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the pressing additional effect is being executed (S5502).

In the process of S5502, if it is determined that the pressing additional effect is being executed (S5502: Yes), in the pressing additional effect, the additional value corresponding to the operation timing of the frame button 22 is added to the remaining count display area D1. Pressing processing during an additional effect is executed (S5503), and this processing ends. The details of this press-down process during addition effect (S5503) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S5502, if it is determined that the pressing additional effect is not being executed (S5502: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending notice effect is being executed (S5504). In the process of S5504, if it is determined that the suspension notice effect is being performed (S5504: Yes), the suspension notice pressing process for executing the effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 in the suspension notice effect is executed ( S5505), the process ends. The details of this pending notice pressing process (S5505) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, in the processing of S5504, if it is determined that the suspension notice effect is not being executed (S5504: No), other processing corresponding to the pressing timing is executed (S5506), and this processing ends. It should be noted that the other pressing timing is, for example, the timing at which the back image can be changed. In the fourth control example, as described above, a plurality of back images are defined, and the back surface type is switched each time the player operates the frame button 22 in the fluctuation stop state. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

If it is determined in the process of S5501 that the pressing of the frame button 22 has not been detected (S5501: No), then it is determined whether or not it is time to end the pressing effect (S5507). If it is determined that it is time to end the addition effect (S5507: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the depressed flag 223dd is ON (S5508). Then, when it is determined that the pressed flag 223dd is off (S5508: No), the player did not operate (press) the frame button 22 in the pressing additional effect, and the pressing additional effect ended (the player 1 is added to the value of the participation degree counter 223df (S5509), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5507 that it is not the end timing of the pressing additional effect (S5507: No), or if it is determined in the process of S5508 that the pressed flag 223dd is ON (S5508: Yes), S5509 This process ends without executing the process of .

By executing these processes of S5507 to S5509, it is possible to accumulate the player's degree of participation in the pressing additional effect over a plurality of additional effects. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the pressing additional effect according to the player's degree of participation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 317, the details of the pressing process during addition effect (S5503) will be described. As described above, the process of pressing during the additional effect (S5503) is a process for displaying the additional value corresponding to the operation timing of the frame button 22 in addition to the remaining count display area D1.

When the pressing process during the addition effect (S5503) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the pressed flag 223dd is ON (S5601). Since the additional value has been displayed in the remaining count display area D1 in the press additional effect, and there is no need to execute a new additional addition, this processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5601 that the pressed flag 223dd is off (S5601: Yes), then the pressed period set in the pressed period table storage area is read (S5602), and the Among the pressing periods, the additional value corresponding to the value of the pressing period timer 223db is read out (S5603). Next, it is determined whether or not the read additional value is 0 (S5604), and if not 0 (S5604), an effect is set to display the read additional value in the remaining count display area D1 (S5605).

After the processing of S5605, the added value read in the processing of S5603 is added to the number of times stored in the effect probability variation number of times area 223p and updated (S5606), and the process proceeds to S5608. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5604 that the read-out addition value is 0 (S5604: Yes), an addition failure effect (see FIG. 308(a)) for notifying that the addition has failed is set (S5607). ), and the process proceeds to S5608.

In the process of S5608, which is executed after the process of S5606 or S5607 ends, the pressed flag 223dd is set to ON (S5608), the value of the participation degree counter 223df is reset to 0 (S5609), and this process exit. By executing the pressing process during the additional effect (see FIG. 317), when the additional pressing effect occurs, the additional value of the number of times corresponding to the position where the scroll bar D3a is displayed is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. can be displayed in addition to the number of times Therefore, it is possible to provide a production that does not give a sense of discomfort.

Next, with reference to FIG. 318, the details of the pending notice pressing process (S5505) will be described. This pending notice pressing process (S5505) is, as described above, a process for executing an effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 in the pending notice effect. In this pending notice pressing process (S5505), first, it is determined whether it is the pressing period (see FIG. 305(a)) in the holding notice effect (S5701), and if it is not the pressing period (S5701: No), then, It is determined whether or not it is the repeated hitting period (see FIG. 306(a)) (S5702).

In the processing of S5702, if it is determined that it is not the continuous hitting period (S5702: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5702, if it is determined that it is in the continuous hitting period (S5702: Yes), the value of the repeated hitting counter 223dc is updated by subtracting 1 (S5703), and whether the updated counter value is 0 or not. is determined (S5704). Then, when it is determined that the updated counter value has become 0 (S5704: Yes), a development effect (see FIG. 306(b)) in which the egg pattern moves to the house Ds1c is set (S5705), and this End the process. On the other hand, in the processing of S5704, if it is determined that the value of the repeated hitting counter 223dc after updating is 1 or more (S5704: No), the processing of S5705 is skipped and the present processing ends.

Also, in the process of S5701, if it is determined that the current time is the pressing period (S5701), first, at the pressing timing of the frame button 22, it is specified in the third symbol display device 81 (the tray Ds1b is displayed directly below). (S5706). Next, it is determined whether or not the winning information within the range specified by pressing the frame button 22 includes the winning information that causes the ready-to-win effect (S5707). Incidentally, the ready-to-win effect refers to any of the normal reach to lose, the super reach to lose A and B, the normal reach to hit, and the super reach to hit A to C.

In the process of S5707, if it is determined that the winning information that causes the reach effect is included in the specified range (S5707: Yes), then for the reserved symbol corresponding to the winning information that the reach occurs to display an egg pattern (reserved pattern lays an egg) is set (S5708). Then, a repeated hitting period for executing a repeated hitting effect that encourages repeated hitting of the frame button 22 is set (S5709), a value corresponding to the value of the repeated hitting counter 223dc is set (S5710), and this processing ends.

In the processing of S5707, if it is determined that the winning information for generating the ready-to-win effect is not included in the specified range (S5707: No), the pending notice flag 223de is set to indicate the end of the pending notice effect. It is set to off (S5711), and this processing ends.

By executing this pressing process during pending notice (see FIG. 318), when the depression of the frame button 22 is detected during the pending notice effect, it is possible to set an appropriate effect mode according to the pressing timing. Further, as described above, in this control example, the range of pending symbols for executing the pending notice effect is configured to be selectable by the player's operation. As a result, when no advance notice (egg symbol display) is made for the reserved symbols within the selection range, it is possible to inform the player that there is a highly anticipated reserved symbol among the reserved symbols outside the player's selection range. can be expected. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel performance in which a big hit can be expected for the held ball even when the suspension notice performance does not occur.

Next, with reference to FIG. 319, details of command determination processing 4 executed in place of the command determination processing (see FIG. 238) in the first control example will be described. Of the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 319) in the fourth control example, the processes of S4301 to S4306, S4309 to S4311, S4313 to S4315, and S4319 each correspond to the command determination process in the first control example (see FIG. 238). ) are executed in steps S4301 to S4306, S4309 to S4311 to S4315, and S4319.

Further, in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 319) in the present fourth control example, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received in the process of S4306 (S4303: Yes), the variation start of the second special symbol Execute the special figure 2 fluctuation start process for setting (S4361) and end this process. Details of this special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4361) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 319) in the fourth control example, if it is determined that the winning command has been received in the process of S4311 (S4311: Yes), based on the winning information notified by the winning command is executed (S4362), and this processing is terminated. Details of this pending notice setting process (S4362) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Also, in the process of S4315, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 standby command nor the special figure 2 standby command is received (S4315: No), it is determined whether the remaining probability variation number command is received (S4363 ), if the residual probability variable number command is received (S4363), the residual probability variable number command process is executed for executing the process corresponding to the number of times notified by the residual probability variable number command (S4364), and this process is executed. finish. The details of this remaining probability variable count command process (S4364) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Furthermore, in the process of S4363, if it is determined that the remaining probability variation number command has not been received (S4363: No), then at least one of the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command is received (S4364), if at least one of the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command is received (S4364: Yes), the confirmation display of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol corresponding to the command is executed (S4364), and the process ends. Details of this confirmation command processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 320, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4361) will be described. Figure 320 is the flowchart which shows the details of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. When this special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 320) is started, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to ON (S4371), and then it is notified by the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command A variation pattern is extracted (S4372).

When the processing of S4372 ends, it is then determined whether the current game state is the latent certainty state (S4373), and if it is the latent certainty state (S4373: Yes), it is judged whether or not to set the pressing additional effect. is executed (S4374), and the process proceeds to S4376. On the other hand, in the processing of S4373, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S4373: No), the display mode corresponding to the variation pattern extracted in the processing of S4372 is specified from the variation pattern selection table 222a. , the process proceeds to S4376. In the process of S4376, a display variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the display control device 114 is set (S4376), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 321, details of the additional effect setting process (S4374) will be described. As described above, this pressing additional effect setting process (S4374) is a process for determining execution of the pressing additional effect during the latent certainty state.

When the addition effect setting process (see FIG. 321) is started, first, it is determined whether the lottery of the second special symbol of this time was a lottery result that becomes the stop type of the small hit (S4381), and it is not the stop type of the small hit. If it is determined (S4381: No), then when the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received, during the setting of the non-display mode (see FIG. 309 (b)), and the remaining probability variation number is 5 or less (S4382). In the process of S4382, if the non-display mode is not being set, or if the number of remaining probability variations is 6 or more (S4382: No), the process proceeds to S4391.

On the other hand, in the process of S4382, the non-display mode is set, and if it is determined that the remaining probability variation number is 5 or less (S4382: Yes), then the lottery of the second special symbol of this time is a big hit E ~ It is determined whether or not the lottery result was the stop type of G (S4383), and when it is determined that none of the jackpots E to G is determined (S4383: No), the process proceeds to S4391. On the other hand, in the process of S4383, if it is determined that any one of the jackpots E to G (S4383: Yes), as a table for determining the setting of the pressing additional effect, it is selected from the additional effect selection table 222da for the big win. The table 222da3 is read (S4384). Next, the difference between 120, which is the number of latencies given after the big hit, and the number of times stored in the effect probability variable number storage area 223p is calculated (S4385), and the process proceeds to S4391.

Also, in the process of S4381, if it is determined that the current stop type is a small hit (S4381: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the participation counter 223df is greater than 5 (S4386), If the value of the participation degree counter 223df is greater than 5 (S4386: Yes), the participation degree normal table 222da1 is read from the additional effect selection table 222da as a table for determining the setting of the pressing additional effect (S4387). Next, the difference between the actual remaining number of times of the latent probability state stored in the remaining probability variation number area 223o and the remaining number of times of the latent probability state on the display stored in the effect probability variation number of times area 223p is calculated, and the process proceeds to S4391. to move to.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4386, when it is determined that the value of the participation degree counter 223df is less than 5 (S4386: No), the low participation degree table 222da1 is read from the addition effect selection table 222da (S4387). Next, the difference between the actual remaining number of times of the latent probability state stored in the remaining probability variation number area 223o and the remaining number of times of the latent probability state on the display stored in the effect probability variation number of times area 223p is calculated, and the process proceeds to S4391. to move to.

In the process of S4391 executed after any one of S4385, S4388, and S4391 is completed, the difference calculated in any of S4385, S4388, and S4391 and the difference calculated in any of S4384, S4387, and S4388 are Based on the table read out, the mode of the pressing additional effect (any of no additional effect, normal mode, and special mode) is specified (S4391), and the process proceeds to S4392.

In the process of S4392, it is determined whether or not execution of the pressing additional effect is determined (S4392). The corresponding pressing period is read from the pressing period table 222db (see FIGS. 314(a) and (b)) and set in the pressing period storage area 223da (S4393). The pressing period set here is referred to when the player's operation (pressing) on the frame button 22 is detected during execution of the pressing additional effect decided to be executed this time, and the pressing period corresponding to the operation (pressing) timing is referred to. The value is displayed in addition to the remaining count display area D1. As a result, the player can positively operate (press) the frame button 22 in anticipation that the number of times of the remaining latent definite state on the display will be increased. It can improve willingness to participate. After the processing of S4393, the non-display setting flag 223dg is set to OFF (S4394), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4392, if it is determined that the execution of the pressing additional effect is not determined (S4392: No), the effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command is specified from the variation pattern selection table 222a. (S4395), this processing ends. By executing this add-on performance setting processing, it is possible to select an appropriate form of push-down add-on performance according to the player's past participation status for the push-down add-on performance, the lottery result of the second special symbol, or the like.

In addition, in this control example, in the latent state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit or only when the big hit E to G, the push-up effect is set, but it is not limited to this. . For example, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, it may be possible to set the press-up effect. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in performance.

Next, details of the pending notice setting process (S4362) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This pending notice setting process (S4362) is, as described above, a process for determining execution of the pending notice based on the winning information notified by the winning command. When this pending notice setting process (S4362) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the game state is the latent state (S5801). Skip each processing of S5802 to S5809 for setting the advance notice effect, and terminate this processing as it is. The reason why the suspension notice effect is not executed in the latent definite state is that the main variation in the latent definite state is the variable display of 2 special symbols that cannot be held and stored. For this reason, in the latent state, in most cases, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol becomes 0, and it is not necessary to determine whether or not to execute the reserved notice. Therefore, the processing load of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the latent state can be reduced by skipping the execution determination of the on-hold notice itself.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5801, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not a latent state (normal state or variable probability state) (S5801: No), then whether the pending notice flag 223de is on It is determined whether or not (whether or not the suspension notice effect is already being executed) (S5802), and if it is determined that the suspension notice flag 223de is ON (the suspension notice effect is already being executed) (S5802 : Yes), and the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pending notice flag 223de is off in the process of S5802 (S5802: No), then the winning information of the first special symbol is read from the winning information storage area 223a (S5803), It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the variation pattern in which the ready-to-win effect occurs is included in the read winning information (S5804).

In the process of S5804, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the variation pattern that generates the ready-to-win effect is included (S5804: Yes), the The table is read from the pending notice determination table 222dc (see FIG. 315) to determine execution of the pending notice, and the process proceeds to S5807. On the other hand, in the processing of S5804, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the variation pattern in which the ready-to-win effect occurs is not included (S5804: No), the table for determining the execution of the pending notice effect is set to no reach. The time table is read from the suspension notice determination table 222dc to determine whether the suspension notice is to be executed, and the process proceeds to S5807.

In the process of S5807 executed after the process of S5805 or S5806, it is determined whether or not the execution of the pending notice effect is determined in the process of S5805 or S5806 (S5807), and it is determined that the execution of the pending notice effect is determined. If so (S5807: Yes), the on-hold notice flag 223de is set to ON (S5808). Next, an effect (see FIG. 305(a)) that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 is set (S5809), and the process ends.

By executing this pending notice setting process, the pending notice effect can be set at an appropriate ratio according to the number of pending balls and the content of each pending ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 323, details of the remaining probability variation number command processing (S4364) will be described. This residual probability variable number command process (S4364) is, as described above, a process for executing control according to the probability variable number of times notified by the residual probability variable number command. When this residual probability variable number command process (S4364) is started, first, the residual probability variable number of times notified by the residual probability variable number command is stored in the residual probability variable number area 223o (S5851), and then the current game state is latent probability. It is determined whether it is in the state (S5852).

In the processing of S5852, if it is determined that the gaming state is not the latent state (S5852: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5852, if it is determined that the gaming state is the latent state (S5852: Yes), then whether the non-display setting flag 223dg is on (whether the non-display mode is set) (S5853), and if the non-display setting flag 223dg is off (S5853), a non-display setting process for determining whether or not to set the non-display mode is executed (S5861). ), the process ends. The details of this non-display setting process (S5861) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5853 that the non-display setting flag 223dg is ON (S5854), it means that the non-display mode (see FIG. 309(b)) is set. In the processing, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining probability variations stored in the remaining probability variation number area 223o is 5 or less (S5854). In the process of S5854, when it is determined that the number of remaining probability variations is 6 or more (S5854: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of remaining probability variations is 5 or less (S5854: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is one of the jackpots E to G (S5855), and the jackpots E to If it is determined that it is neither G (S5855: No), then it is determined whether or not the remaining probability variation count is 0 (whether the number of times stored in the remaining probability variation count area 223o is 0). Determine (S5856).

In the processing of S5856, if it is determined that the number of remaining probability variations is not 0 (S5856: No), this processing is terminated as it is in order to continue the non-display mode. On the other hand, in the process of S5856, if it is determined that the number of remaining probability variations is 0 (S5856: Yes), it means that the latent probability state in which the non-display mode is set has ended, so the end effect of the non-display mode (see FIG. 310(a)) is set, the non-display setting flag 223dg is set to off (S5858), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5855, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is one of the big hits E to G (S5855: Yes), since the latent state of 120 times is set after the big hit, first , Set the execution of the special addition effect (see FIG. 310 (b)) (S5859), then overwrite the effect probability variable number of times area 223p to 100 times, set the non-display setting flag 223dg to off ( S5860), the process ends.

Thus, in the present fourth control example, when the non-display mode is set, the second In the case of a special pattern jackpot (that is, when the number of remaining times of the latent certainty state is updated to 120 times just before the latent certainty state ends), a special addition of a mode different from the normal press-up addition performance is performed. It is configured to execute production (special additional production). As a result, the player who has confirmed the special additional performance can be made to recognize that the jackpot is won just before the actual remaining number of times becomes 0 and the latent certainty state is newly set. can bring greater joy to

Next, details of the non-display setting process (S5861) will be described with reference to FIG. This non-display setting process (S5861) is, as described above, a process for determining whether or not to set the non-display mode. As shown in FIG. 324, when the non-display setting process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of times stored in the effect probability variation number area 223p is 0 (S5891). If it is determined (S5891: No), subtract 1 from the remaining number of times stored in the effect probability variable number of times area 223p (S5892), display in the remaining number display area D1 according to the stored value of the effect probability variable number of times area 223p after subtraction The displayed number of times is updated (S5893), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5891, if it is determined that the remaining number of times stored in the effect probability variation number of times area 223p is 0 (S5891: Yes), the actual remaining number of times stored in the remaining probability variation number of times area 223o It is determined whether or not the number is 0 (S5894), and if the actual number of remaining times is not 0 (S58994: No), the non-display mode (see FIG. 309(b)) is set (S5895) and non-display is performed. The setting flag 223dg is set to ON (S5896), and this processing ends. By setting the non-display mode, it is possible to make it impossible to know when the latent state ends, so that the player can have a sense of tension in the remaining latent state of the game.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5894, if it is determined that the actual remaining number of times of the latent certainty state stored in the remaining probability variation number area 223o is 0 (S5894: Yes), the display on the display at the end timing of the latent certainty state Since it means that the remaining number of times has also been updated to 0, a normal ending effect (see FIG. 188(a)) is set (S5897), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the non-display setting process in the fourth control example, the non-display mode is set if the latent state does not end when the remaining number of times on the display becomes zero. This makes it possible to create a state in which it is not known how long the latent state will last. Therefore, while the non-display mode is set, the game can be played with a sense of tension.

Next, with reference to FIG. 325, the details of the confirmation command process (S4366) will be described. This confirmation command process (S4366) is, as described above, a process for setting the confirmation display of the third symbol. When this confirmation command process (see FIG. 325) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 confirmation command is received (S5831), and if it is determined that it is a special figure 1 confirmation command (S5831), set the confirmation display of the first special symbol (S5832). Next, it is determined whether or not the pending notice flag 223de is ON (S5833), and if it is determined to be ON (S5833: Yes), the pending notice effect is displayed during the variable display for which the fixed display is set this time. It is determined whether or not the processing has ended (S5834). In the processing of S5834, when it is determined that the suspension notice effect has ended (S5834: Yes), the suspension notice flag 223de is set to OFF (S5835), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5833, if it is determined that the pending notice flag 223de is off (S5833: No), or if it is determined that the pending notice effect is continuing in the processing of S5834 (S5834: No ), and the process ends. In addition, in the processing of S5831, if it is determined that the received confirmation command is the special figure 2 confirmation command (S5831: No), the confirmation display of the second special symbol is set (S5836), and this processing is terminated. .

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example is configured to be able to execute the suspension notice effect as the interest effect in the normal state or the variable probability state. In this pending notice performance, the pending symbol for executing the notice is configured to be selectable by the player's operation of the frame button 22.例文帳に追加

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines capable of executing a suspension notice effect indicating the degree of expectation of a suspended variable display. In such a conventional gaming machine, by changing the color and shape of the reserved symbols, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbols will result in a big win. , making it possible to heighten the player's expectations.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when a suspension notice effect is generated, it may be difficult for the player to have expectations for the suspension symbols that are not subject to the suspension notice. This is because it was normal to set the suspension notice effect for the suspension pattern corresponding to the suspension ball with high expectation in the suspension.

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, it is possible to designate the range of pending symbols in which the pending notice effect is executed. In addition, it is configured so that the percentage of execution of the suspension notice effect is higher when the suspension ball with high expectation of winning a big hit is included. As a result, when the pending notice performance is not set for the reserved symbols in the specified range, or when the pending notice performance in the form of low expectation is executed, the reserved symbols outside the range specified by the player are handled. It is possible to have the expectation that the held ball will be a big hit. Therefore, when a highly anticipated suspension notice effect occurs in the selection range, the expectation that the suspension ball corresponding to the reservation pattern in which the suspension notice has occurred will be a big hit, and whether the suspension notice will occur, When a reservation notice with a low degree of expectation is generated, it is possible to provide a novel performance in which expectations can be felt for the reservation ball outside the selection range.

In addition, in the fourth control example, as a type of additional effect for pressing down which is executed in the latent state, the rest of the latent state is displayed in the remaining count display area D1 according to the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22. There is a production that adds to the number of times.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has operation means such as operation buttons that can be operated by a player, and is capable of executing an operation effect prompting the player to operate the operation means as a kind of entertainment effect. be. In this conventional game machine, by operating the operation button in the operation presentation, a special presentation different from the usual one is generated, or a win is announced, etc., to improve the interest of the player.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since the operation effect is executed as part of the effect of notifying the result of the predetermined winning lottery, the result of the player's operation of the frame button is the result of the effect (the winning (whether or not it is notified) was irrelevant. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to increase the player's willingness to participate in the operation presentation.

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, there is a case where there is a difference between the actual remaining number of times in the latent certainty state and the displayed remaining number of times. Then, when the pressing additional performance is executed, a different additional value is added and displayed according to the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22 within a range in which the displayed remaining number of times does not exceed the actual remaining number of times. and As a result, the remaining number of additions on the display can be varied depending on the operation timing of the player, so that the player can be made to actively participate in the addition performance (the frame button 22 can be pressed at the appropriate timing). . Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the game.

Furthermore, in the fourth control example, in the latent certainty state, the number of remaining latent certainty states is set to a non-display mode in which the number of remaining latent certainty states is not displayed, and the actual remaining number of latent certainty states is set. becomes a jackpot of the second special pattern within a predetermined number of times (5 times) (the probability state is newly set to 120 times), a special add-on effect different from the normal add-on effect can be executed. Configure.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the normal state is set for a predetermined number of lotteries based on a predetermined trigger such as winning. In such a conventional game machine, when the player enters an advantageous state, it is difficult to know how long the advantageous state will continue. There are things that are trying to improve interest.

However, in such a conventional game machine, when a predetermined trigger such as winning occurs in an advantageous state and the advantageous state is reset (overwritten), it is unknown at what stage of the advantageous state was reset. , and there is a risk of making the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, a special additional effect is provided that is executed only when the number of remaining latent chances is within 5 times and the jackpot is achieved. On the other hand, it is possible to clearly recognize that the latent certainty state has been added just before the end of the latent certainty state. Therefore, it is possible to bring greater joy to the player who recognizes that he or she has won the jackpot with good timing. In addition, since the remaining number of times of the latent definite state at the time of the big win is clarified, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in the fourth control example, the special additional effect is executed only when the non-display mode is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the remaining number of times is displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1, if the remaining number of times of the actual probability state (the value stored in the remaining probability change number area 223o) is within 5 times, a special It is good also as composition which performs additional production. As described above, in the fourth control example, there may be a difference between the displayed remaining number of latent definite states and the actual remaining number of latent definite states. In other words, even if the displayed remaining number of times is five or less, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the actual remaining number of times is five or less. Therefore, even if the remaining number of times on the display is within 5 times, and the remaining number of times on the display is added, the actual remaining number of times is also within 5 times (that is, just before the end of the latent state). It becomes unclear whether the actual remaining number of times was sufficient or not, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, if the actual remaining number of times is within 5 times, regardless of whether or not the non-display mode is set, a special additional effect is executed. To make a player surely recognize the fact when winning a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable. Note that the effect mode of the special additional effect may be changed depending on whether or not the non-display mode is set. That is, when the non-display mode is not set, for example, an effect may be executed in which the running character 811 is enlarged and 100 times is added to the remaining number displayed in the remaining number display area D1. . By executing a different special additional effect depending on whether or not the non-display mode is set, a more natural flow effect can be executed in each display mode. Moreover, the mode of presentation can be diversified.

In the fourth control example, whether or not the pattern of the egg moves to the house Ds1c is notified by the effect of prompting repeated hitting of the frame button 22 in the reservation notice effect, but it is not limited to this. For example, the effect of moving to the house Ds1c may be omitted, and an effect may be executed in which if the egg is broken by repeated hits, the super reach is confirmed. In other words, it may be configured such that all the egg symbols are collectively informed as to whether or not they will develop into super ready-to-win with one continuous hit by the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the presentation easier to understand.

In the fourth control example, when the suspension notice effect is generated and the player does not operate (press) the frame button 22, the range of the suspension symbols for automatically performing the suspension notice is determined. However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the player does not operate (press) the frame button 22 within a predetermined period (for example, within 2 seconds) from the occurrence of the pending notice effect, the pending notice effect itself may be terminated. By configuring in this way, it is possible to meet the needs of players who do not want to see the pending notice effect (purely want to enjoy the variable display). That is, if the degree of expectation for a big win is suggested by the reservation notice effect, there is a possibility that the variable display corresponding to the reservation ball with the low degree of expectation may become unenjoyable. Therefore, by enabling the player to select not only the range of reserved symbols in which the reserved notice effect is executed, but also whether or not to perform the reserved notice effect itself, the variable display corresponding to each reserved symbol can be used as expected. can make you feel. Therefore, the needs of each player can be widely met.

In the fourth control example, the degree of expectation of each reserved symbol is suggested depending on whether the reserved symbol lays an egg and whether the egg breaks. It is not something that can be done. It is sufficient that the reserved symbols can be varied in different modes according to the degree of expectation of the corresponding reserved ball. good. More specifically, for example, it is configured such that the degree of expectation increases in the order of white→blue→yellow→green→red→rainbow. Then, when the player selects a reserved pattern for performing a reserved notice effect, the reserved pattern in the selection range is changed to white. Then, when the player repeatedly hits the frame button 22, the color of each reserved symbol may be changed. In this case, for each reserved symbol, how much the color changes according to the number of repeated hits may be determined in advance at the start of the reserved notice or when the player selects the reserved symbol. Specifically, for example, when a reserved pattern corresponding to a holding ball that becomes a variation pattern of short out, normal reach out, and hit super reach A is selected, the reserved pattern corresponding to short out is changed from white to another color Set it so that it does not change, and set it so that the reserved pattern corresponding to the lost normal reach changes up to yellow according to the number of repeated hits (changes in the order of white → blue → yellow), and the hold corresponding to hit super reach A The pattern may be set to change up to a rainbow color according to the number of repeated hits (changes in the order of white→blue→yellow→green→red→rainbow). By configuring in this way, the player can be made to aggressively hit repeatedly while looking forward to the extent to which the colors of the reserved symbols change. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate.

<First Modification of First Control Example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 326 to 331. FIG. In the first control example described above, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the latent state, the same (0.5 seconds) variation time is set regardless of the second special symbol lottery result. It was configured. As a result, it is configured to improve the efficiency of the game in the latent state.

On the other hand, in the first modified example, the variation time of the second special symbol is varied according to the remaining number of times of the latent definite state. In the first half of the latent certainty state, a relatively short variation time is likely to be set, and in the second half, a relatively long variation time is likely to be set. As a result, in the first half of the latent definite state, the interval between small hits or big wins is shortened, and it is possible to increase the number of prize balls in a relatively short period of time. It is possible to lengthen the interval between the balls and make the increase width of the prize balls relatively gentle. Therefore, since it is possible to add waves to the number of prize balls, it is possible to give sharpness to the ball output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous in the latent certainty state.

The first modification of the first control example differs from the first control example in configuration in that the configurations of the RAM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 are partially changed. The difference is that part of the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the control device 110 is changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first modified example of the first control example>
First, with reference to FIGS. 326 to 328, the electrical configuration of the first modified example of the first control example will be described. FIG. 327(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the first modified example of the first control example. As shown in FIG. 326(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the first modified example has a variation pattern scenario table 202ea added to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first control example (see FIG. 191). The difference is that Moreover, in this modified example, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202f are partially changed.

First, with reference to FIG. 326(b), the variation pattern selection table 202f in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 326(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202f in this control example. As shown in FIG. 326(b), the variation pattern selection table 202f in the first modified example replaces the latency table 202f4 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 194) in the first control example. A latent (first half) table 202f4a and a latent (second half) table 202f4b are provided.

The latent probability (first half) table 202f4a is a table that is referred to for selecting a variation pattern in the first half of the latent probability state (when the lottery of the 1st to 50th special symbols is executed). The second half) table 202f4b is a table referred to in the latter half of the latent state (when the lottery for the 51st to 120th special symbols is executed). The details of this latent probability (latter half) table 202f4b will be described with reference to FIG. 327(a). In addition, the stipulated content of the latent probability (first half) table 202f4a is the same as the latent probability table 202f4 (see FIG. 196(b)) in the first control example, and is 0 regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol. A variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 327(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the latency (latter half) table 202f4b. Of these, the contents of the regulation for the lottery of the first special symbols are the same as those of the probability (first half) table 202f4a (and the probability table 202f4 in the first control example), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. . Further, for the lottery for the second special symbol, a variable time of 2 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the second special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the winning short variation (2 seconds) is selected in the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that the variation type counter CS1 can take, and the second special symbol lottery. In the case of a small hit, if the small hit short fluctuation (2 seconds) is selected in the entire range of values that can be taken by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (0 to 198), and the second special symbol lottery is lost. is out of the whole range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and a short fluctuation (2 seconds) is selected.

In this way, when the latency (second half) table 202f4b is referred to, the variation time becomes longer (0.5 seconds→2 seconds) than when the latency (first half) table 202f4a is referred to. By doing so, in the latter half of the latent state (51 times to 120 times), it is possible to lengthen the interval between small wins or big wins. Therefore, in the first half of the latent probability state, the number of possession balls increases easily, and in the second half, the increase in the possession balls becomes gentle, so that the increase in the possession balls can be waved, and the game becomes monotonous. can be prevented (suppressed).

Next, details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ea will be described with reference to FIG. 327(b). This variation pattern scenario table 202ea is a table in which the number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the big win and a table for selecting a variation pattern are defined in association with each other. When selecting a variation pattern, a table for selecting a variation pattern is specified from this variation pattern scenario table 202ea.

As shown in FIG. 327(b), when the normal state is set as the game state after the big hit, regardless of the number of special symbol lotteries after the big hit in which the normal state is set, the fluctuation pattern A normal table A202f1 is associated as a selection table. Therefore, when the normal state is set after the big hit, the normal table A202f1 is always referred to and the variation pattern is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 327 (b), when the probability variation state is set as the gaming state after the big hit, the number of lotteries of special symbols after the end of the big hit ranges from 1 to 120, the probability variation table 202f3 are defined in association with each other, and normal table A202f1 is defined in association with special symbol lottery times of 121 or later. Therefore, when the lottery number of special symbols is 120 times or less, the probability variation table 202f3 is referred to as a table for selecting the variation pattern selection table, and after 121 times, the normal table A202f1 is referred to. be.

Also, as shown in FIG. 327(b), when the latent certainty state is set as the gaming state after the big win, the number of lotteries after the big win is in the range of 1 to 50, and the latent certainty (first half) table 202f4a is defined in association with the number of times of lottery of special symbols in the range of 51 to 120, the table 202f4b for latency (second half) is defined in association with the range of 121, 122, normal A normal table A 202f1 is defined corresponding to 123 and later.

As a result, in the first half of the latent probability state, the variation pattern can be determined by referring to the latent probability (first half) table 202f4a, in which a short variation time is likely to be determined, so that the intervals between small wins or big wins can be shortened. can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the increasing speed of prize balls in the first half of the latent probability state. On the other hand, in the latter half of the latent probability state, the variation pattern can be determined by referring to the latent probability (second half) table 202f4b in which long variation times are difficult to determine, so the intervals between small wins or big wins become longer. Therefore, since the increasing speed of the prize balls can be moderated in the second half of the latent probability state, the degree of increase of the prize balls can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous during the latent certainty state.

Further, after the end of the latent state, in the special symbol lottery twice, the variation pattern can be selected by referring to the normal table B202f2, so as in the first control example, the result of the latent state Sufficient production time for displaying can be secured. Furthermore, when the number of special symbol lotteries exceeds 123 times, the normal table A202f1 is referred to.

Next, referring to FIG. 328, the configuration of RAM 203 of main controller 110 in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 328 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 328, the RAM 203 in the first modified example has a scenario storage area 203ea and a lottery number counter 203eb added to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first control example (see FIG. 198). differ in

The scenario storage area 203ea is a storage area for storing a scenario corresponding to a game state after a big win among the scenarios defined in the variation pattern scenario table 202ea. The scenario storage area 203ea stores a variation pattern scenario corresponding to the gaming state after the big win at the end of the big win (see S2351 in FIG. 331). At the start of fluctuation, the scenario stored in the scenario storage area 203ea is referenced to determine a fluctuation pattern selection table for selecting a fluctuation pattern.

The number-of-lotteries counter 203eb is a counter for counting the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the big win. When the variation pattern selection table is selected from the scenario storage area 203ea, the number of special symbol lotteries is determined by the value of the lottery counter 203eb, and the variation pattern selection table is selected.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first modified example of the first control example>
Next, various control processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the first modified example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 329 to 331. FIG. First, referring to FIG. 329, first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 5 (see FIG. 212) executed in this first modification instead of first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 212) in the first control 329) will be explained.

Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (see FIG. 330) in the first modification, in each process of S501 to S503 and S505 to S508, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process in the first control example The same processes as the processes of S501 to S503 and S505 to S508 (see FIG. 212) are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (see FIG. 329) in this modification, when the process of S503 is completed, the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the value of the lottery number counter 203eb is then selected from the scenario storage area 203ea. (S551), and the process proceeds to S505. Using the variation pattern selection table read here, a variation pattern is selected by the process of S505. It should be noted that, although not shown in the drawings, also in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process, when reading the variation pattern selection table, the same process as this S551 is executed to determine the table.

Next, with reference to FIG. 330, the game state update process 5 (see FIG. 330) executed in this first modified example instead of the game state update process (see FIG. 213) in the first control example will be described. Of the game state update process 5 (see FIG. 330) in the first modification of the first control example, in each process of S601 to S608, S601 to S601 of the game state update process (see FIG. 213) in the first control example The same processing as each processing of S608 is executed.

In addition, in the game state update process 5 (see FIG. 330) in the first modified example, after the process of S608, the value of the lottery number counter 203eb is updated by adding 1 (S651), and this process ends. By updating the value of the lottery number counter 203eb each time in the game state update process 5 (see FIG. 330), the value of the lottery number counter 203eb can always be matched with the number of lotteries of special symbols executed after the big win. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 331, description will be given of jackpot end processing 5 (see FIG. 331) that is executed in this first modification instead of the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 230) in the first control example. In the processing of S2301 to S2308 of the jackpot end processing 5 (see FIG. 331), the same processing as the processing of S2301 to S2308 in the jackpot control processing of the first control example (see FIG. 230) is executed. .

In addition, in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 331) in the first modified example, when the process of S2308 is completed, the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the gaming state set in the processes of S2302 to S2306 is displayed in the variation pattern scenario table 202ea. , and set in the scenario storage area 203ea (S2351). Next, the value of the lottery number counter 203eb is reset to 0 (S2352), and this process ends. By this jackpot end processing 5 (see FIG. 331), an appropriate variation pattern scenario can be set according to the game state after the jackpot ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modification of the first control example, the first half of the latent state (the number of lotteries after the big win is 1 to 50) or the latter half (the number of lotteries after the big win is 51 to 120) times), the variation pattern selection table referred to for selecting the variation pattern is switched. A variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected in the second half of the latent definite state than in the first half of the latent definite state. As a result, the interval between the small win or the big win can be made different between the first half and the latter half of the latent definite state, and the possibility of the small win or big win being made at shorter intervals in the first half can be increased. That is, the increasing speed of prize balls can be increased in the first half of the latent state, and the increasing speed of prize balls can be relatively moderated in the latter half. Therefore, since the increasing speed of the prize balls can be varied, the increase of the prize balls can be waved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous during the latent certainty state. In addition, since the speed of increase of prize balls is faster in the first half of the latent state, the player's expectation for the first half of the latent state can be enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to win a jackpot in the first half of the latent probability state (before entering the second half) and make the player want to play the game in the first half of the latent probability state again. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the game.

In addition, in this first modification, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the first half of the latent state, the variation time of 0.5 seconds is always set, and in the second half of the latent state, the second special symbol Although the variation time is always set to 2 seconds when the lottery is executed, it is not limited to this. For example, even in the first half of the latent state, a variable time of 2 seconds may be set at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 20%). Similarly, even in the trial in the latent state, the variable time of 0.5 seconds may be set at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 20%). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to determine from the fluctuation time whether it is the first half or the latter half of the latent state, so even when the fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set, the player is expected to play the game in the first half. be able to.

<Second Modification of First Control Example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second modified example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 332 and 333. FIG. In the above-described first control example, referring to the screen display selection table 222b (see FIG. 200), the third symbol display based on the fluctuation situation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (setting status of each standby flag) It is configured to set the display content (screen display type) to be displayed on the device 81, and in the normal state, the second special symbol fluctuation situation (special figure 2 standby flag 223t setting situation) which is a secondary fluctuation Regardless, by executing the demonstration display only when the special figure 1 standby flag 223 s indicating that a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation of the first special symbol that is the main fluctuation is stopped is set to ON, It was configured to reliably display the main fluctuation.

Here, in the above-described first control example, during the normal state, that is, in the state in which the left-hand shot is executed, the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol, which is the secondary variation, continues to be stopped and displayed in the small area Dm1. Met. This is because the second ball entrance 1640 where the lottery for the second special symbol is executed is provided in the right hitting area.

As described above, if the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in the small area Dm1 while stopped, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 where the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. When the player sees the symbols displayed in the small area Dm1 where the fluctuation is not started, the player may feel that the pachinko machine 10 is out of order.

On the other hand, in this second modification, the special figure 2 standby flag 223t indicating that a predetermined period has passed since the variation of the second special symbol, which is a secondary variation, stops during the normal normal state was set to ON. In the case, it is configured to execute the sub-variation demonstration display (special figure 2 demonstration display) in the small area Dm1. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the simultaneous variation is executed, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol (second special symbol) on the side of the secondary variation continues to be displayed while stopped. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the contents of the game.

The second modification of the first control example differs from the first control example in terms of configuration in that the configuration of the RAM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first control. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, the contents of the sub-variation demonstration display (the second special symbol demonstration display) displayed according to the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 332 is a diagram showing an example of a secondary variation demonstration display (second special symbol demonstration display) displayed in the small area Dm1 in the normal state (or probability variation state).

As shown in Figure 332, in the normal state (or probability variation state), the state in which the first special symbol is fluctuating, the second special symbol has not fluctuated for a predetermined period (30 seconds in this modification) In the state, instead of the stop display (see FIG. 182) showing the lottery result of the second special symbol in the small area Dm1, a sub-fluctuation demonstration display indicating that the first special symbol is fluctuating is displayed as "playing". characters are displayed. In this way, by executing the display other than the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol in the small area Dm1 as the secondary variation demonstration display, even though the game is being executed (the left-handed game is executed) A game player is given a sense of incongruity by continuing to display a symbol (second special symbol) in which variation is not executed (even though the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64). can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the content of the secondary variation demonstration display (second special symbol demonstration display) is configured to be settable based on the variation situation of the first special symbol (setting status of special figure 1 standby flag 223s). As shown in 332, when the first special symbol is fluctuating (if the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to off), the fact that the first special symbol, which is the main fluctuation, is fluctuating Since the content is displayed, it is possible to provide a display mode that is easy for the player to understand.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second modification of the first control example>
An electrical configuration in the second modification of the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 333 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the screen display selection 3 table 222b in the second modified example of the first control example. As shown in FIG. 333, the screen display selection 3 table 222b in the second modified example is different from the screen display selection table 222b (see FIG. 200) in the first control example. Then, the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to off, and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is different in that it changes the screen display type defined in response to the state that is set to on there is Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 333, the gaming state is a normal state or a variable probability state, the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to off, and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to on the screen As a display type, "special figure 2 demonstration display" is defined correspondingly. This "special figure 2 demonstration display" is a screen display type in which the small area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is used as the demonstration display area of the second special symbol to display "playing" (see FIG. 332). .

As described above, in the second modification, in the pachinko machine 10 in which two types of special symbols are varied simultaneously, one of the two types of special symbols (which is advantageous for the player) Special symbol) is variably displayed as the main variation using most of the third symbol display device 81, and the other special symbol (special symbol more disadvantageous than the main variation for the player) is part of the third symbol display device 81'. (An area smaller than the display area where the variation display of the main variation is performed) When using a configuration that is displayed as a secondary variation, the area where the variation display of the secondary variation is performed (secondary variation display area) Since the demo display corresponding to the secondary fluctuation can be executed in , it is possible to prevent the pattern indicating the lottery result of the secondary fluctuation from being displayed for a long time (30 seconds or more), which makes the player feel uncomfortable. can be suppressed. Also, the player can be made to pay attention to the variation display (effect display) corresponding to the main variation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . It is possible to provide a presentation that is easy for the player to understand.

Furthermore, by setting the contents of the demonstration display executed for the sub-fluctuation (second special symbol) based on the fluctuation situation of the main fluctuation (first special symbol), the sub-fluctuation (second special symbol) is displayed. It is possible to notify the player of the fluctuation situation of the main fluctuation (first special symbol) using the area (secondary fluctuation display area). Therefore, in the state where the demonstration display is performed in the sub-variation area, all (almost) of the third symbol display device 81 can be used to perform display related to the main variation, providing an easy-to-understand effect for the player. be able to.

In addition, in the second modification, the second special symbol demo display is executed instead of the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol, which is a secondary variation, but other configurations may be used. Well, for example, the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol may be displayed in a reduced size, and the second special symbol demonstration display may be executed in the empty space of the secondary variation display area, or the secondary variation display area You may use the structure which performs a 2nd special design demonstration display in a different area|region.

In addition, in the second modification, the configuration of the second special symbol demonstration display (secondary variation demonstration display) in the normal state or probability variation state in which the first special symbol is the main variation and the second special symbol is the secondary variation. However, for example, it is preferable to use the same configuration even in a latent state where the second special symbol is the main fluctuation and the first special symbol is the sub-fluctuation. In this case, by setting the small area Dm1 of the third symbol display area 81 as the variation display area of the first special symbol and setting the small area Dm1 as the secondary variation display area regardless of the game state, the secondary variation demonstration display can be performed. Display data and display control can be shared, and there is an effect that the processing load of display control on the third pattern display device 81 can be reduced.

<First Modification of Fourth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 334 to 350, a first modification of the fourth control example described above will be described. In the fourth control example described above, when there is a difference between the actual remaining number of times in the latent state and the remaining number of times displayed, the remaining number of times displayed is displayed in addition to the variable effect of the special symbol. A non-display mode (see FIG. 309(b)) is set when the displayed remaining number of times is 0 and the actual remaining number of times is not 0 (is 1 or more). , when the non-display mode is set, and a special additional performance executed when the jackpot is achieved with the actual remaining number of times of the latent probability state within a predetermined number of times (5 times), At various timings during the latent state, an effect was executed to add the remaining number of times on the display.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a specific game state (latency state) in which the player is advantageous is executed a predetermined number of times (120 times), and is updated and managed by the main controller 110. There is a difference between the actual remaining number of times and the displayed remaining number of times displayed on the third symbol display device 81, making it difficult for the player to understand how long the specific game state will continue. In such a game machine, by executing an effect that adds the displayed remaining number of times and converging the difference between the actual remaining number of times and the displayed remaining number of times, the player can enter a specific game state without any sense of incongruity. It is configured to be played.

In this case, as the effect to add the remaining number of times on the display, as described in the fourth control example described above, an additional effect (pressing additional effect) executed based on the variation of the special symbol, and the remaining number of times on the display is within a predetermined number of times. By executing various additional effects in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult to understand the remaining number of times that the specific game state (latency state) is executed, and the state that gives the player a sense of tension. A game can be played continuously, and a sense of security can be imparted when a large number of times is added by the additional performance.

However, the effect (additional effect) for converging the difference between the actual remaining number of times and the displayed remaining number of times is something that the player has different tastes. There was a risk that the motivation of the employees would decrease. Specifically, it is for a player who prefers an effect in which the actual remaining number of times is not known until the displayed remaining number of times decreases, and the actual remaining number of times is added when the displayed remaining number of times decreases. On the other hand, if the additional effect is performed before the displayed remaining number of times decreases, the difference between the displayed remaining number of times and the actual remaining number of times will be reduced by the number of times added by the additional effect. When the upper remaining number of times is reduced, the number of times of adding the actual remaining number of times is reduced, and there is a fear that the player's motivation for the performance is lowered.

On the other hand, in the first modified example, as the additional effect executed during the latent certainty state, the effect mode (additional chance mode) that can be expected for each fluctuation additional effect, and the remaining number of times on the display is a predetermined number or less Since the player can select the performance mode (post-notification mode) in which the additional performance is executed when the game becomes true, the player can arbitrarily set the mode of the additional performance desired by the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player's motivation for the performance is lowered.

Furthermore, as described above, in the gaming machine capable of selecting the effect mode of the additional effect, for example, every time the variation of the special symbol is executed, the first effect mode capable of executing the additional effect is set, and the remaining on the display In a state where 3 times is displayed as the number of times, if the user selects the second effect mode in which the additional effect is executed when the remaining number of times on the display reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 rotations), the additional effect will not be performed. There is a problem that the execution timing is missed and the performance effect is lowered.

On the other hand, in this modification, during the jackpot game in which the actual remaining number of times is reset to 120 times, the effect mode of the additional effect can be selected, and further, the remaining number of times on the display as the effect mode is a predetermined number of times. It is configured to set the remaining number of times on the display to 100 times during the big winning performance based on the selection of the second performance mode in which the additional performance is executed when (for example, 5 rotations) are made.

Thus, in a game machine in which a player can arbitrarily select a performance mode of an additional performance, a performance corresponding to the selected performance mode can be executed regardless of which performance mode is selected at any timing.

The first modified example of the fourth control example differs from the fourth control example in terms of configuration in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The content of the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed, and the content of the partial processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and other processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the 4 control examples. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the fourth control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

Here, the contents of the effect display executed according to the first modified example will be described with reference to FIGS. 334 to 337. FIG. In this first modification, as the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, after the symbol variation display moving in the horizontal direction is stopped (temporarily stopped) (after reach loss), some symbols are displayed in the vertical direction. A moving variation pattern (scroll variation effect) is set (see FIGS. 334 and 335). Further, when a jackpot G is won in the latent definite state, a plurality of performance modes are selectable in which different additional performance modes are executed during the jackpot game (see FIGS. 336 and 337).

First, with reference to FIGS. 334 and 335, the contents of the scroll change effect will be described. FIG. 334(a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the reach (first reach mode) in which the pattern moves in the horizontal direction is stopped (temporarily stopped) due to disengagement among the scroll change effects, and FIG. 334(b) is a 335(a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which, after the first ready-to-reach mode is disengaged and stopped (temporary stop), some of the symbols are displayed in a suggestive mode suggesting that they move in the vertical direction, and FIG. FIG. 335(b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the ready-to-win state in which the symbol moves in the vertical direction (second ready-to-win mode) is executed, and FIG. . Note that the reach (first reach mode) in which the pattern moves in the horizontal direction is the same as the above-described fourth control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 334(a), in the first modification, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into a left display area Dz1 and a right display area Dz2 and is configured to be controllable. During the pattern variation display (symbol variation display in the horizontal direction), the display control of the left display region Dz1 and the right display region Dz2 is collectively executed, so that the entire display region of the third pattern display device 81 is varied. When the display is executed and a special pattern variation display (vertical pattern variation display) different from normal is performed, the areas (left display area Dz1 and right display area Dz2 ) is configured to execute control to update only the display data. As a result, it is possible to execute a proper design display effect only by updating the display data of the area suitable for the design variation display, so that the processing load of the control relating to the design variation processing can be reduced.

In FIG. 334(a), the symbol row L1 and the symbol row L3 are first stopped and displayed (first ready-to-win mode), and as a result, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit, the symbols to be stopped and displayed are displayed. The symbol row L2 is stop-displayed in a mode shifted by one frame (shifted by one frame in the plus direction) with respect to the combination (a combination of patterns in which the patterns showing the same number are stopped and displayed linearly).

After that, among the symbols stopped and displayed in the left display area Dz1 (the symbol row L1 is a symbol imitating a "lion", the symbol row L2 is a sub-symbol, and the symbol row L3 is a symbol imitating a "snake"), A pattern simulating a character is displayed in a moving direction suggesting mode indicating an action suggesting a vertical (downward) movement, and a vertical (downward) pattern row is displayed in the left display area Dz1. Specifically, a sub-symbol is displayed above the symbol row L1 displayed in the left display area Dz1, and a sub-symbol is displayed below the symbol row L3 displayed in the left display area Dz1. A pattern row in the vertical direction (from the top, a sub-symbol, a “lion” pattern, a sub-symbol, a “snake” pattern, and a sub-symbol pattern row are displayed in this order). (See FIG. 334(b)).

As a result, it is possible to suggest that the symbols displayed in the left display area Dz1 will fluctuate in the vertical direction, and an effect that gives the player a feeling of anticipation can be executed. Furthermore, in the first modified example, the display content in the left display area Dz1 is changed (that is, the display mode of each symbol stopped and displayed in the left display area Dz1 is changed, and the left display area Dz1 is newly displayed. It is a configuration that suggests that the reach (second reach mode) in which the pattern fluctuates in the vertical direction will be executed only by executing the process of adding a pattern and additionally displaying the pattern row in the vertical direction. , it is possible to reduce the processing load of the control related to the pattern variation processing.

It should be noted that, without using the configuration of the first modified example, a configuration suggesting that the second ready-to-win mode is executed by changing the display mode of the symbols stopped (temporarily stopped) in the right display area Dz2. may be used. As a result, since it is possible to execute the suggestive effect using the entire third symbol display device 81, it is possible to give an easy-to-understand notification to the player.

Then, when the second ready-to-win mode (the ready-to-win in which the pattern fluctuates in the vertical direction) is executed, as shown in FIG. As a second reach mode, a main symbol (main symbol imitating an elephant) with the number "1" attached to the activated line V5 or activated line V6 is stopped and displayed to indicate a big hit. A special double reach mode is executed. In this way, by combining the normal horizontal reach mode (first reach mode) and the vertical reach mode (second reach mode), from the variable display of the unidirectional symbol row (L1 to L3) Even complicated pattern variation display can be easily executed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 335(a), it is possible to set a plurality of stop positions where a specific main symbol (main symbol with the number "1" attached) indicates a big win, increasing the expectation of a big win. can perform the performance.

Then, when the execution of the second ready-to-win mode is finished and the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit, the main symbol (the elephant model) with the number "1" attached to either of the activated lines V5 and V6 is displayed. main symbols) are stopped and displayed in a row (see FIG. 335(b)). After that, a jackpot game is executed.

In the display example described above, the left display area Dz1 is displayed from the state in which the first reach state is stopped (temporary stop) (see FIG. 334(a)) to the state in which the second reach state is stopped (temporarily stopped). Although an example of not changing the display data of areas other than Dz2 has been shown, the display data corresponding to each symbol (main symbol and sub symbol) stopped and displayed in the right display area Dz2 is not updated. display data (for example, the display of "reach" displayed in the right display area Dz2) may be updated. As a result, when the special double reach mode shown in FIG. 334(a) is executed, the display of "reach" is changed to the display of "multi reach" indicating that the expectation of the big win is higher than in the normal reach mode. It becomes possible to update, and the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, a display area showing the current pattern variation status (the area displaying "Reach" in FIG. 334(a)) is provided in the left display area Dz1, and the contents to be displayed are appropriately changed according to the pattern variation status. It may be configured to As a result, only by executing the process of updating the display data of only the specific display area (the left display area Dz1) among the display areas of the third symbol display device 81, the second ready-to-win mode is executed and the symbol fluctuation situation is executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the control related to the pattern variation processing, and to execute an effect that enhances the expectation of a big win.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 336 and 337, the contents of the add-on mode selection effect for selecting the add-on effect executed during the latent certainty state in the first modified example of the fourth control example will be described. This additional mode selection effect is displayed in order to converge the difference between the actual remaining number of times in the latent probability state (value of the probability variable number area 223o) and the remaining number of times on the display (value of the probability variable number counter 223p). It is a production for selecting the production mode (addition mode) of the additional production that adds (adds) the remaining number of times, and it is determined whether or not to execute the additional production each time the fluctuation of the special symbol is started. A player selects an optional performance mode (additional mode) from a performance mode (additional chance mode) and a performance mode (post notification mode) in which an additional performance is executed when the remaining number of times on the display reaches a predetermined number of times. It is a selectable performance.

As a result, the player can select a performance mode in which an additional performance suitable for his or her taste is executed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation due to execution of an unintended additional performance. .

First, with reference to FIG. 336(a), the display contents of the additional mode selection effect in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 336(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents of the additional mode selection effect. As shown in FIG. 336(a), in the first modification, the extra mode selection effect is executed during the jackpot game executed when the jackpot G is won in the latent state.

When the addition mode selection effect is executed, the remaining number of times displayed when winning the big win G (remaining probability variation number of effects) continues in the remaining number display area D1 of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display area 81. is displayed. As a result, the remaining number of times on the display can be easily confirmed even during the jackpot game. In the main control unit 110, the value of the probability variation counter 203k is cleared (set to 0) when a jackpot game is executed, but the remaining number of times displayed in the effect probability variation number area 223p of the sound lamp control device 113 By storing (setting) the (remaining probability variation number of times), the remaining number of times on the display can be continuously displayed even during the jackpot game.

In the central area of the main display area Dm, a button D6a with the word "push" for prompting the user to operate (depress) the frame button 22 is displayed. A first selected display D6b described and a second selected display D6c described as "post notification mode" are displayed, and a first selection position for selecting the first selected display D6b and a second selected display D6b are displayed. A selection display D6d is displayed, which moves at a predetermined interval to the second selection position for selecting the display D6c. In the display area D4, a telop is displayed to explain the contents of the additional mode selection effect, and in FIG. In addition, on the left side of the sub-display area Ds, the add-on performance mode (add-on mode) selected in the state of winning the jackpot is displayed, so that the player can easily know which add-on effect mode the player has selected. making it comprehensible.

During this add-on mode selection effect, the designated add-on mode is set by operating (depressing) the frame button 22 while the selection display D6d designates the desired add-on mode.

Then, in FIG. 336(a), when the additional chance mode (first selected display D6b) is selected, as shown in FIG. is displayed, and a character 811 is displayed in a display mode to congratulate the continuation of the latent state. Also, in this case, since the add-on effect mode is not changed in the add-on mode selection effect (because it is "add-on chance mode" at the time of winning the jackpot → "add-on chance mode" after the add-on mode selection effect), the remaining number display area D1 , the same “remaining 3 times” as at the time of winning the jackpot is continuously displayed. As a result, the latent state can be resumed in the same situation (remaining number of times on the display) as the situation (remaining number of times on the display) at the time of winning the jackpot, so that the player can resume the latent state without making the player feel uncomfortable. A game can be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 336(b), the add-on mode selected by the add-on mode selection effect is displayed on the right side of the sub-display area Ds. Thus, by seeing the display contents of the sub-display area Ds, it is possible to easily grasp both the add-on mode at the time of the big win and the add-on mode after the add-on mode selection performance.

On the other hand, in FIG. 336(a), when the post notification mode (second selected display D6c) is selected, as shown in FIG. display is performed. Other than that, the same contents as those explained in FIG. 336(b) are displayed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same location, and the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted. In this way, when the add-on mode at the time of winning the jackpot and the add-on mode selected by the add-on mode selection performance are different, the add-on mode is newly executed by setting the remaining number display area D1 to 100 times. , it is possible to smoothly execute the additional performance without a sense of incongruity, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 336(a), a jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed in a state where the remaining count display area D1 indicates "three times", and an extra mode selection effect is performed during the jackpot game. When the add-on mode is changed from the add-on chance mode to the post-announcement mode, if the number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is left as "three times", the add-on effect is executed in the post-announcement mode. (the number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is within "five times") may be lost, and there is a problem that a suitable effect cannot be provided to the player. However, as in the first modification, when the addition mode is changed, the number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is set to 100, so that the addition effect is executed in the post-notice mode. Opportunities (the number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is within "five times") can be reliably secured.

In addition, in the first modification, it is configured so that it is determined whether or not the latent state is given after the jackpot game ends in the 7th round of the jackpot game (the ball passes V in the 7th round Since the switch 65e3 (see FIG. 179) is configured so that the latent state is given when it passes through), the above-mentioned additional performance mode selection effect is configured to be executed after the 8th round during the jackpot game. It is As a result, it is possible to execute the effect of selecting the additional mode in the state that the actual remaining number of times is reset to 120 times, so that the ball does not pass through the V passage switch 65e3 during the big win and the big win. When the latent definite state is not imparted after the end, the jackpot game can be ended without executing the additional performance mode selection performance.

<Electrical configuration in the first modification of the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 338 and 339, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the fourth control example will be described. First, FIG. 338 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second normal table A202ff1 provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the first modification of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 338, this second normal table A 202ff1 has a defined variation pattern partially changed from the normal table 202f1 (see FIG. 195) used in the above-described fourth control example. The difference is that Since other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, among the variation patterns defined in the second normal table A202ff1, variation patterns changed from the normal table A202f1 will be described. In the first modification of the fourth control example, a scroll change effect (see FIGS. 334 and 335) is executed as the special symbol variation pattern. Specifically, when the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "101 to 150", and super reach D (30 seconds) is associated, "151 ∼ 198" is associated with super reach E (30 seconds).

Furthermore, the lottery for the first special symbol is lost, and the number of pending balls is 0 or 1, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "71 to 150" Normal reach B (20 seconds) It is associated with super reach C (30 seconds) outside the range of "171 to 198". In addition, when the lottery for the first special symbol is lost and the number of reserved balls is 2 or 3, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "131 to 170" and corresponds to normal reach B (20 seconds) and is out of the range of "186-198" and associated with super reach C (30 seconds).

When hit super reach D (30 seconds) is set as a variation pattern, the reach performance (first reach mode) (see FIG. 183(b)) in which the third symbol moves in the horizontal direction is executed for the first 17 seconds. , the mode indicating that the first ready-to-reach mode is out (the mode in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by one frame) is stopped (temporary stop display) (see FIG. 334(a)), after which a scroll change effect is suggested. The production is executed for 3 seconds, which is the suggested production period (Fig. 334(b)), and after the suggested production period, the ready-to-win production (second ready-to-win mode) in which the third symbol moves in the vertical direction is executed for 10 seconds (Fig. 334(b)). 335(a)). Then, the third symbol is stop-displayed in a combination indicating winning (see FIG. 335(b)).

When hit super reach E (30 seconds) is set as a variation pattern, the reach effect (first reach mode) (see FIG. 183(b)) in which the third symbol moves in the horizontal direction is executed for the first 17 seconds. , the mode indicating that the first ready-to-reach mode is out (the mode in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by one frame) is stopped (temporary stop display) (see FIG. 334(a)), after which a scroll change effect is suggested. The effect is executed for 3 seconds, which is the suggestive effect period (Fig. 334(b)), and after the suggestive effect period passes, the ready-to-win effect (third ready-to-win mode) in which the third symbol moves laterally is executed for 10 seconds. Then, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a win.

When normal reach B (20 seconds) is set as a variation pattern, the reach effect (first reach mode) (see FIG. 183 (b)) in which the third symbol moves in the horizontal direction is executed for the first 17 seconds, A stop display (temporary stop display) is displayed in a state in which the first ready-to-reach state indicates a loss (a state in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by one frame) (see FIG. 334(a)). After that, after the suggestive effect suggesting the scroll change effect is executed for 3 seconds which is the suggestive effect period (Fig. 334(b)), the third symbol is stop-displayed in a combination indicating the disengagement.

When Super Reach C (30 seconds) is set as a variation pattern, the Reach performance (first Reach mode) (see FIG. 183(b)) in which the third symbol moves in the horizontal direction is executed for the first 17 seconds. , the mode indicating that the first ready-to-reach mode is out (the mode in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by one frame) is stopped (temporary stop display) (see FIG. 334(a)), after which a scroll change effect is suggested. The effect is executed for 3 seconds, which is the suggestive effect period (Fig. 334(b)), and after the suggestive effect period passes, the ready-to-win effect (third ready-to-win mode) in which the third symbol moves laterally is executed for 10 seconds. Then, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a disengagement.

As described above, in the first modification of the fourth control example, the first reach mode (17 seconds) and the suggestive effect ( 3 seconds) is executed, and the second reach mode (10 seconds) is executed in the remaining 10 seconds. As a result, after the completion of the suggestive effect, the third pattern is stopped and displayed as it is in combination with a deviation time of 20 seconds. 10 seconds) can be combined with variations (hitting super reach E, losing super reach C) to make the player expect to win at various timings during pattern fluctuation.

Specifically, while the suggestive effect is being executed, the game can be played while expecting that the temporarily stopped third symbol will be restarted. In addition, in the first modification, the degree of expectation for winning is different depending on the direction in which the third symbol restarts, so the game is played while also expecting in which direction the third symbol restarts. be able to. It should be noted that during execution of this suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 334(b), the third pattern display device 81 indicates whether or not the third pattern will restart, or suggests the direction in which the third pattern restarts. Since the effect (suggestive effect) is executed, the player confirms the content of the effect executed as the suggestive effect to determine whether or not the third symbol restarts or the direction in which the third symbol restarts. The game can be played while predicting the

In addition, in FIG. 334(b), a suggestion effect is executed in which the display form of the third symbol is changed to a display form (moving direction suggesting display form) suggesting the moving direction (downward), but other suggestions are executed. As an effect, for example, in order to suggest that the third pattern restarts in the horizontal direction (left direction), the display form of the third pattern is changed to a display form (second movement direction suggestion display form), a suggestion effect in which the reserved pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 changes to a display form suggesting the restart direction of the third pattern, and a suggestion effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 There is a suggestive effect that suggests the restart direction of the third pattern using other display bodies.

Furthermore, instead of suggesting the restart direction of the third symbol, it may be configured to execute a suggestion effect that simply suggests the restart of the third symbol. In this case, during the suggestive effect period, a suggestive effect (restart suggestive effect) that suggests that the third symbol restarts is first executed, and then a suggestion that suggests the moving direction of the third symbol when restarted. It is preferable to configure so as to execute an effect (restart direction suggesting effect). As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the degree of expectation of winning step by step, and to make the player continue to watch the performance.

In addition, in the first modified example, when the third symbol is restarted, it is configured so that the variation in the vertical direction (downward) or the variation in the horizontal direction (leftward) is executed. The direction in which the three symbols are restarted may be provided in addition to the above, and for example, a variation pattern may be provided in which the game is restarted in the upward direction in addition to the downward direction described above as the restart in the vertical direction. In this case, the variation patterns in which the third pattern restarts in the vertical direction (upward, downward) are set so that the hit expectation is different, and as a suggestive effect, it is suggested that the third pattern restarts in the vertical direction. By providing a suggestive effect to suggest that the third pattern restarts upward, and a suggestive effect to suggest that the third pattern restarts downward, The degree of expectation for winning can be reported step by step.

Next, with reference to FIG. 339, the electrical configuration of the sound ramp control device 113 in the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 339(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the first modified example. As shown in FIG. 399(a), the ROM 222 in the first modified example is provided with an add-on mode selection table 222fa in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example.

This add-on mode selection table 222fa stores the contents of each add-on effect to be executed in the add-on mode (add-on chance mode, post-announcement mode) selectable by the player during the latent state, and selects the add-on mode effect. An effect corresponding to the add-on mode effect selected in the process is read out and executed.

FIG. 223(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first modified example. In the first modified example, a pressed a flag 223fa, a pressed b flag 223fb, a scroll change flag 223fc, a mode change flag 223d, a mode addition flag 223fd, and an addition mode setting area 223fe are added to the above-described fourth control example. is doing.

The depressed a flag 223fa indicates that the frame button 22 is operated during a period set during reach (depressed period during reach) within a period during which the operation (depression) of frame button 22 is determined to be valid (operation valid period). This flag is set to ON based on the fact that the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) during the reach-while-pressed period. This pressed a flag 223fa is set to ON when the pressing process (see S5332 in FIG. 341) of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (see FIG. 340) is executed (see S8002 in FIG. 341), It is referenced (S8201 in FIG. 343) in the pressing end time process (see S5537 in FIG. 343), and then set to OFF (S8204 in FIG. 343).

The pressed b flag 223fb indicates that the frame button 22 is operated during a period set during the jackpot game (pressing period during the jackpot) in a period during which the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is determined to be valid (operation valid period). It is a flag for indicating that it has been done, and is set to ON based on the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 during the pressing period during the jackpot. This pressed b flag 223fb is set to ON when the jackpot middle pressing process (see S5334 in FIG. 341) of the frame button input monitoring/production process 2 (see FIG. 340) is executed (see S8102 in FIG. 342), It is referred to in the pressing end process (see S5537 in FIG. 343) (S8207 in FIG. 343), and then set to OFF (S8212 in FIG. 343).

The scroll change flag 223fc is a flag that is set to ON when the conditions for changing the scroll are established in the scroll change effect (see FIGS. 334 and 335) in which the variation direction of the third symbol is switched midway. This scroll change flag 223fc is set when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the pressing period (suggestion rendering period) during reach of the variation pattern (hit super reach D) in which the variation direction of the third symbol can be switched midway. Then, it is determined that the condition for changing the scroll in the scroll change effect is established, and is set to ON (see S8005 in FIG. 341). Then, it is referred to in the pressing end time process (see S5537 in FIG. 343) (S8202 in FIG. 343), and when it is determined to be ON (see S8202 in FIG. 343: Yes), it is set to OFF (see S8203 in FIG. 343). ). In this pressing end time process (see S5537 in FIG. 343), the display command output to the display control device 114 is changed in accordance with the setting status of the scroll change flag 223fc, thereby making it possible to execute a scroll change effect. is doing.

The mode change flag 223fd is a flag indicating that the currently set add-on mode is changed in the add-on mode selection effect executed during the jackpot game, and turns on when the add-on mode is changed by the add-on mode selection effect. is set to This mode change flag 223fd is set to ON (S8105 in FIG. 342) when it is determined that the mode has been changed in the jackpot middle pressing process (see S5534 in FIG. 342) (S8104 in FIG. 342: Yes) and pressed It is referred to in the termination process (see S5537 in FIG. 343) (S8208 in FIG. 343), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S8208 in FIG. 343: Yes), it is set to OFF (S8209 in FIG. 343). ). In this pressing end processing (S5537 in FIG. 343), it is configured to vary the value of the effect probability variable number of times area 223p according to the setting status of the mode change flag 223fd, and the mode change flag 223fd is set to ON. If there is, 100 is set to the value of the effect probability variation number area 223p (S8210 in FIG. 343). Thus, when the add-on mode is changed by the add-on mode selection effect, the value of the effect probability variable number of times area 223p is set to 100, that is, the remaining number of times display area D1 of the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. It is possible to execute a game in a latent probability state from a state in which the remaining number of times on the display (the number of times of variation of the remaining probability of performance) is set to 100, and to suitably provide the additional performance executed in the added mode after the change. can.

The add-on mode setting area 223fe is an area for setting (storing) at least the currently set add-on mode and the previously set add-on mode. The add-on mode is set (S8211 in FIG. 343). In this addition mode setting area 223fe, information indicating that the addition chance production mode is set in the initial setting (S4001 in FIG. 235) of the start-up process (see FIG. 235) executed when the power is turned on is set. In a state in which the player has not selected the add-on mode, the add-on chance mode in the latent certainty state is executed. The information set (stored) in the add mode setting area 223fe (currently set add mode) is referred to in special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 6 (see S4361 in FIG. 344) (see S4391 in FIG. 344), In addition, it is configured to be referenced (see S5871 in FIG. 345) in the remaining count command process 6 (see S4364 in FIG. 345) and to execute an add-on effect corresponding to the currently set add-on mode.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the first modification of the fourth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the first modification of the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 340 to 345. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 340, frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (see FIG. 340) of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 340 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S4107).

When this frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (see FIG. 340) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S5501), and it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected. If so (S5501: Yes), then it is determined whether it is during the reach pressing period (S5531).

In the process of S5531, when it is determined that it is during the reach pressing period (S5531: Yes), during reach pressing process for changing the variation direction (scrolling direction) of the third symbol during reach is executed (S5532 ), the process ends. The details of this reach-while-pressing process (S5532) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S5531, if it is determined that the reach pressing period is not noted (S5531: No), then it is determined whether it is the pressing period during the jackpot (S5533). In the process of S5533, when it is determined that it is during the jackpot pressing period (S5533: Yes), the jackpot pressing process for selecting one add-on mode from a plurality of add-on modes with different types of add-on effects to be executed is performed. Execute (S5534) and terminate this process. The details of this jackpot middle pressing process (S5534) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Also, in the process of S5533, if it is determined that it is not the pressing period during the jackpot (S5533: No), other processes corresponding to the pressing timing are executed (S5535), and this process ends. It should be noted that the other pressing timings refer to the processing of S5507 of the fourth control example described above, as well as the additional effect executed in the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S4107 of FIG. 316) of the fourth control example described above. Middle press processing (S5503 in FIG. 316) and pending notice mid-press processing (S5505 in FIG. 316) are executed.

In the process of S5501, if the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is not detected (S5501: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the pressing period (S5536), and it is determined that it is the end timing of the pressing period. If so (S5536: Yes), the pressing end time process (see FIG. 343) is executed (S5537), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5501 that the frame button 22 is not operated (pressed), the process at the end of pressing (see FIG. 340) is skipped and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 341, the content of the reach-in-progress pressing process (S5532) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (see FIG. 340) will be described. FIG. 341 is a flow chart showing the details of the process of pressing during reach (S5532). This reach-while pressing process (S5532) is to execute the process when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the reach-while pressing period. Specifically, a process of determining whether or not a condition for changing the variation direction (scrolling direction) of the third symbol is established in the scroll change effect (see FIGS. 334 and 335) is executed.

When the in-reach pressing process (S5532) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pressed a flag 223fa is set to ON (S8001), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S8001: No) , the pressed a flag 223fa is set to ON (S8002), and then the display reach middle press command is set (S8003). By setting the push-down command during reach for display, the third symbol display device 81 is notified (displayed) of the pressed display mode indicating that the frame button 22 has been pushed within the push-down period during reach. It should be noted that this pressed-down display mode is continuously displayed during the reach-while-pressing period (suggestion effect period), and although not shown in the figure, indicates whether or not the third symbol is restarted in the scroll change effect. It is displayed in a manner suggesting the degree of expectation or the direction to restart.

After the processing of S8003 is finished, it is next determined whether the variation pattern being executed is the hit super reach D (see FIG. 338) (that is, whether it is a variation pattern corresponding to the scroll change effect) (S8004). . In the process of S8004, when it is determined that the variation pattern is the hit super reach D (S8004: Yes), the scroll change flag 223fc is set to ON (S8005), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern is not hit super reach D (S8004: No), this process is terminated.

Further, when it is determined that the pressed a flag 223fa is set to ON in the process of S8001 (S8001: Yes), the frame button 22 has already been operated within the pressing period during reach (second and subsequent times). Since it is in a state where the frame button operation has been executed), all processing is skipped and this processing ends. In addition, in the first modification of the fourth control example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) for the first time within the pressing period during reaching, the pressing process during reaching (S5532) is executed. However, for example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) a predetermined number of times, the process of pressing during reach (S5532) is executed, or a lottery is executed each time the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), and the lottery result is It may be configured such that the reach-in-progress pressing process (S5532) is executed when a hit is achieved. By configuring in this way, it is possible to complicate the content of the effect to be executed, and to enhance the effect of the effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 342, the contents of the jackpot middle pressing process (S5534) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (see FIG. 340) will be described. FIG. 342 is a flow chart showing the contents of the process of pressing during the jackpot (S5534). This jackpot middle pressing process (S5534) executes the processing when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed down) during the jackpot middle pressing period (additional mode selection effect period). Specifically, based on the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 in the add-on mode selection effect (see FIG. 336), the process for setting the add-on mode during the latent certainty state executed after the jackpot is completed. executed.

When the jackpot middle pressing process (S5534) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pressed b flag 223fb is set to ON (S8101), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S8101: No) , The pressed b flag 223fb is set to ON (S8102), and then the command for pressing during the display jackpot is set (S8103). By setting this display jackpot mid-press command, the third symbol display device 81 is notified (displayed) of the pressed display mode indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed within the jackpot mid-press period. Although not shown, this pressed display mode is displayed in a mode in which the button D6a shown in FIG. It is displayed in a manner indicating that the selected display (D6b or D6c) on the selected side has been selected.

After completing the process of S8103, it is next determined whether or not the add-on mode has been changed (S8104). Here, the add-on mode set before the jackpot game is executed is read from the add-on mode setting area 223fe and compared with the add-on mode selected in the add-on mode selection effect of this time, so that the add-on mode can be changed. It is determined whether the If it is determined in the process of S8104 that the add-on mode has been changed (S8104: Yes), the mode change flag 223fd is set to ON (S8105), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the add-on mode has not been changed (S8104: No), this processing ends.

In addition, if it is determined that the pressed b flag 223fb is set to ON in the process of S8101 (S8101: Yes), the frame button 22 has already been operated within the pressing period during the jackpot (second and subsequent Since it is in a state where the frame button operation has been executed), all processing is skipped and this processing ends. In addition, in the first modification of the present fourth control example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) for the first time during the pressing period during the jackpot, the pressing process (S5532) during the jackpot is executed, and the addition mode is determined. However, for example, if it is within the pressing period during the jackpot, the addition mode may be configured to be set again.

Next, with reference to FIG. 343, the contents of the pressing end process (S5537) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (see FIG. 340) will be described. FIG. 343 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pressing end process (S5537). This pressing end time process (S5537) is a process that is executed at the timing when the pressing period for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22 (pressing period during reach, pressing period during jackpot) ends, and during each pressing period For setting the contents of the effect to be executed after the pressing period ends based on the status of the flag set in .

When the pressing end time process (S5537) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pressed a flag 223fa is set to ON (S8201). Here, if it is determined that the pressed a flag 223fa is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S8201: No), the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the pressing period during reaching. Since it is the case where there is not, the process (S8202 to S8205) based on the frame button operation within the pressing period during reach is skipped, and the process proceeds to S8207.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8201 that the pressed a flag 223fa is set to ON (S8201: Yes), then it is determined whether the scroll change flag 223fc is set to ON (S8202). If it is determined that the scroll change flag 223fc is set to ON (S8202: Yes), the scroll change flag 223fc is set to OFF (S8203), the display scroll change command is set (S8204), and the process proceeds to S8206.

If it is determined in the process of S8202 that the scroll change flag 223fc is not set to ON (it is set to OFF), a display scroll non-change command is set (S8205), and the process proceeds to S8206. In the process of S8206, the pressed a flag 223fa is set to OFF (S8206).

After the process of S8206 is finished, it is next determined whether the pressed b flag 223fb is set to ON (S8207). Here, if it is determined that the pressed b flag 223fb is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S8207: No), the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the pressing period during the jackpot. Since it is not the case, the processing (S8208 to S8212) based on the frame button operation within the pressing period during the jackpot is skipped and this processing ends. That is, when the frame button 22 is not operated during the pressing period during the jackpot (during the addition mode selection effect), the value of the effect probability variable number of times area 223p and the setting contents of the addition mode setting area 223fe are not changed. A latent state after the end of the jackpot game is executed in a state in which the state at the time of winning the jackpot (additional mode and the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1) is continued. Therefore, if the player does not intentionally operate (press) the frame button 22 during the extra mode selection effect because he/she does not want to change the extra mode in the latent certainty state, the extra mode and It is possible to prevent the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 from being changed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8207 that the pressed b flag 223fb is set to ON (S8207: Yes), then it is determined whether the mode change flag 223fd is set to ON (S8208), If it is determined that it is set to ON (S8208: Yes), the mode change flag 223fd is set to OFF (S8209), the value of the effect probability variation number of times area is set to 100 (S8210), and the selected addition mode is set in the add mode setting area 223fe (S8211). Then, the pressed b flag 223fb is set to OFF, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8208 that the mode change flag 223fd is not set to ON (it is set to OFF) (S8208: No), the processes of S8209 and S8210 are skipped and the process proceeds to S8211. Transition. In this way, when the add-on mode is changed during the add-on mode selection effect, by setting the value of the effect probability variable number of times area 223p to 100, the add-on mode after the change is changed in the latent probability state executed after the end of the jackpot game. The added effect used can be suitably executed. In addition, if the add-on mode is selected so that the add-on mode is not changed during the add-on mode selection effect (see S8208), the process for setting the value of the effect probability variable number of times area 223p (S8210) is skipped. If the player intentionally selects the same add-on mode as the currently set add-on mode during the add-on mode selection effect because he does not want to change the add-on mode during the state, the add-on mode and the remaining mode are changed after the jackpot game ends. It is possible to prevent the remaining number of times displayed in the number of times display area D1 from being changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 344, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 6 (S4361) will be described. Figure 344 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 6. This special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 6 (S4361) is based on the type of the addition mode currently set for the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 4 (see FIG. 319) of the fourth control example described above Add production The difference is that a process for determining whether to execute the process is added. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 6 (S4361) is executed, first, the same processing as S4371 to S4373, S4375 of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 4 (see FIG. 320) of the fourth control example described above is executed , In the processing of S4373, if it is determined that the game state is the potential state (S4373: Yes), next, it is determined whether the currently set add-on mode is the add-on chance mode (S4391). In the process of S4391, information (additional mode information) set in the additional mode setting area 223fe is read, and determination is executed based on the additional mode information.

In the processing of S4391, if it is determined that the currently set add-on mode is the add-on chance mode (S4391: Yes), S4374 of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 4 (see FIG. 320) of the fourth control example described above , S4376 are executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the currently set add-on mode is not the add-on chance mode (it is the post-announcement mode) (S4391: No), the process of S4374 is skipped and this process ends.

By configuring in this way, when the special figure 2 variation start processing 6 (S4361) is executed (when the variation of the second special symbol is executed), the currently set addition mode is the addition chance mode In the case of , the additional production setting process is executed, and it is possible to provide an additional mode that can be expected for each fluctuation additional production. By preventing the difference between the remaining number of times and the remaining number of times on the display from converging, the number of additional times displayed at the time of the post-announcement (additional effect executed when the remaining number of times on the display reaches a predetermined number) You can make it bigger. Therefore, it is possible to execute an unexpected performance for the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 345, the details of the remaining probability variation number command process 6 (S4364) will be described. FIG. 345 is a flow chart showing the contents of the remaining probability variable count command process 6 (S4364). This remaining probability variable number command processing 6 (S4364) is related to the addition effect based on the type of the currently set addition mode in contrast to the remaining probability variation number command processing (see FIG. 323) of the fourth control example described above. The difference is that a process for determining whether to execute the process is added. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the residual probability variable number command process 6 (S4364) is executed, first, the same processes as S5851 and S5852 of the residual probability variable number command process (see FIG. 323) of the above-described fourth control example are executed, and in the process of S5851 If it is determined that the game state is the potential state (S5852: Yes), then it is determined whether the currently set addition mode is the post-announcement mode (S5871). In the process of S5871, the information (additional mode information) set in the additional mode setting area 223fe is read, and determination is executed based on the additional mode information.

In the processing of S5871, if it is determined that the post notification mode is set (S5871: Yes), the same processing as S5853 to S5861 of the remaining probability variation number command processing of the fourth control example (see FIG. 323) is performed. Execute and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the process of S5871, if it is determined that the post-notification mode is not set (additional chance mode is set) (S5871: No), the process of S5853 to S5861 is skipped and this process ends. .

By configuring in this way, when the remaining probability variation number command process 6 (S4364) is executed (when the variation of the second special symbol is executed), the currently set addition mode is the addition chance mode In the case, the additional production setting process is executed, and it is possible to provide an additional mode that can be expected for each variable additional production. By preventing the difference between the remaining number of times and the remaining number of times displayed on the display from converging, the number of additional times displayed at the time of post-notification (additional effect that is executed when the remaining number of times on the display reaches a predetermined number) is increased. can do. Therefore, the performance effect of the performance desired by the player can be enhanced.

<Regarding control processing executed by the display control device in the first modification of the fourth control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the first modification of the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 346 to 350. FIG. This modified example is different from the above-described fourth control example in that the press-related command process is added in the command determination process 6 (see FIG. 346), and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination process 6 executed by the MPU 221 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In command determination processing 6, the processing of S6401 to S6417 is executed in the same manner as the command determination processing (see FIG. 247) in the fourth control example described above.

If it is determined in the process of S6416 that an error command has not been received (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not a display press-related command has been received (S6431).

In the process of S6431, if it is determined that the display press-related command has been received (S6431: Yes), the press-related command process is executed (S6432), and the process returns to S6401. Details of the press-related command processing (S6432) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6431 that the press-related command has not been received (S6431: No), then other command processing is executed in the same manner as in the first control example (S6418). Return to processing.

Next, details of the press-related command processing (S6432) will be described with reference to FIGS. 347 to 350. FIG. The press-related command processing (S6432) is processing for performing processing corresponding to various commands for displaying (executing) press-related effects.

In the press-related command process (S6432), first, it is determined whether or not a display-use-reach-during-press command has been received (S8301). In the process of S8301, if it is determined that the display reach middle press command is received (S8301: Yes), the reach middle press command process is executed (S8302), and the process proceeds to the process of S8303.

Here, with reference to FIG. 348, details of the reach-in-progress press command process (S8302) will be described. FIG. 348 is a flow chart showing the reach-while-pressing command process. This reach-in-progress press command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display reach-in-progress press command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the reach-while-press command processing, first, the reach-while-press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the reach-while-press command for display is determined, and the determined press-down display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, It is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8401). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S8402).

Then, based on the push-in-reach display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8401, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8404). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S8405), the reach-in-progress press command processing is terminated, and the press-related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 347, the description continues. In the process of S8301, if it is determined that the display reach middle press command has not been received (S8301: No), then it is determined whether or not the display scroll change command has been received (S8303).

In the process of S8303, if it is determined that the scroll change command for display has been received (S8303: Yes), the scroll change command process is executed (S8304), and the process proceeds to S8305.

Details of the scroll change command process (S8304) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 349 is a flowchart showing scroll change command processing. This scroll change command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display scroll change command received from the audio lamp control device 113 .

In the scroll change command process, first, based on the display contents displayed in the display area Dm1 and the win/fail related information, a pattern array for vertical scrolling is set and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8501). Next, the vertical scroll effect display data table corresponding to the display contents of the display area Dm1 is determined, the determined vertical scroll effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8502). ). After that, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S8503).

Based on the vertical scroll effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8502, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8506), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8507). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S8508), the scroll change command processing is terminated, and the press-related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 347, the description continues. In the process of S8303, if it is determined that the display scroll change command has not been received (S8303: No), then it is determined whether or not the display scroll non-change command has been received (S8305).

In the process of S8305, when it is determined that the display scroll non-change command is received (S8305: Yes), the scroll non-change command process is executed (S8306), and the process proceeds to S8307.

Here, with reference to FIG. 350(a), the details of the scroll non-change command process (S8306) will be described. FIG. 350(a) is a flow chart showing the scroll non-change command process. This scroll non-change command process is for executing the process corresponding to the display auto-press start command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the scroll non-change command processing, first, the scroll non-change display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display scroll non-change command is determined, and the determined auto-press start display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8601). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S8602).

Then, based on the scroll non-change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8601, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8604). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S8605), the scroll non-change command processing is terminated, and the press-related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 347, the description continues. In the process of S8305, when it is determined that the display scroll non-change command is not received (S8305: No), it is then determined whether or not the display jackpot middle press command is received (S8307).

In the process of S8307, when it is determined that the display jackpot middle press command is received (S8307: Yes), the jackpot middle press command process is executed (S8308), and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 350(b), the details of the pressing command process (S8308) during the jackpot will be described. FIG. 350(b) is a flow chart showing the pressing command process during the jackpot. This jackpot middle press command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display jackpot middle press command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the jackpot middle-press command process, first, the jackpot middle-press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the jackpot middle-press command for display is determined, and the determined jackpot middle-press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8701). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S8702).

Then, based on the jackpot mid-press display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8701, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S8705), the big hit middle press command process is terminated, and the process returns to the press related command process.

Returning to FIG. 347, the description continues. In the process of S8307, when it is determined that the display jackpot middle press command is not received (S8307: No), this process is terminated.

<Another example in the first modified example of the fourth control example>
Next, another example of the first modification of the fourth control example described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 351 to 354. FIG. In this example, the scroll change effect (see FIGS. 334 and 335) executed in the first modified example of the fourth control example described above is combined with the special reach effect executed in the first control example (FIGS. 184, 335). FIG. 185 reference) is configured to be able to execute a combined reach effect. As a result, a complicated ready-to-win effect can be executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this example, the character storage area 234a2 set in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 is partially changed from each of the control examples described above, and the one executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is changed. The difference is that the partial processing has been changed. Other configurations are the same as the configurations and various control processes used in the control examples described above. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 351(a), the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 used in this example will be described. FIG. 351(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As shown in FIG. 351(a), in this example, a symbol row L4 that is scrolled in the horizontal direction and variably displayed is added to the upper side of the symbol row L1 in addition to the control examples described above. The difference is that a symbol row L8 scrolled and variably displayed is added below the symbol row L3.

Furthermore, in this example, the main display area Dm in which the patterns are variably displayed in the third pattern display device 81 is variably displayed by scrolling in the left-right direction into five (five columns) pattern rows (L1 to L4). , and L8), the number of symbol rows that can be displayed in the display area at the same time is three (three rows). Of the five (five rows) of symbol rows (L1 to L4, and L8) variably displayed by scrolling in the horizontal direction, the symbol row displayed in the main display area Dm can be changed.

Then, variation control of five (five columns) symbol columns (L1 to L4 and L8) is performed on a variation region Dz3, which is a region wider than the displayable display region of the main display region Dm. , display control is executed for the symbol row displayed in the main display area Dm. As a result, when the symbol row displayed in the main display area Dmm is to be changed, the changed symbol row can be displayed simply by executing display control based on the content of variation control executed in advance. , the variable display of the symbol row can be executed without delay for the player.

In addition, this example is different in that the symbol rows L5 to L7 corresponding to the scroll display in the vertical direction (vertical direction) used when the scroll change effect is executed are set in advance. That is, when the scroll change effect is executed, a combination pattern of symbols to be stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first ready-to-win state is set in advance, and the display mode corresponding to the combination pattern of the symbols is set. A symbol row corresponding to the second ready-to-win mode is set so that the second ready-to-win mode is executed.

Specifically, when the scroll change effect is executed, display control is performed so that the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first ready-to-win mode when it is out of +1 frame, and the first ready-to-win mode is stopped. In the (temporary stop) display state, the vertical display area where the symbol indicating the combination of the reach (reach symbol) and the symbol that is displayed to stop (temporary stop) when plus one frame is missed (loss symbol) is not displayed. A second ready-to-reach mode is executed in which display is variably displayed in the vertical direction (vertical direction). Thus, by setting the stop (temporary stop) display pattern of the first reach mode to a predetermined pattern (reach plus one frame off stop (temporary stop) display pattern), the initial state when the second reach mode is executed It is possible to pattern the pattern array.

In this example, as the symbol array corresponding to the second ready-to-win mode, the symbol array corresponding to the stop (temporary stop) display pattern of the first ready-to-reach mode is stored in advance for each of the symbol arrays L5 to L7. The second ready-to-reach mode can be executed in correspondence with the stop (temporary stop) display pattern of the first ready-to-reach mode. As a result, it is possible to execute the effect without delay when executing the second ready-to-win mode using part of the third symbols stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first ready-to-win mode.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 351(b) to 352(b), the details of the composite ready-to-win effect in another example of the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 351(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a state in which pattern variation in the horizontal direction is executed in the composite reach effect, and FIG. 352(a) shows the main display area Dm FIG. 352(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a state in which the pattern variation in the vertical direction is executed in the composite reach effect. be. In this composite ready-to-win effect, the pattern variation (normal pattern variation) in the horizontal direction using the pattern rows L1 to L3 is executed for 10 seconds (see FIG. 351(b)), and then displayed in the main display region Dm. The ready-to-win effect (first ready-to-win mode) is executed for 10 seconds by changing the symbol row upward or downward (see FIG. 352(a)), and the pattern fluctuation direction (scrolling direction) is changed from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction. And the changed reach effect (second reach mode) is executed for 10 seconds (see FIG. 352(b)).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 351(b), the normal symbol variation is executed, and the third symbol is stopped (temporary stop )Is displayed. At this point in time, variation control (update of variation data in accordance with progress of variation time (elapsed time)) of the symbol rows (L4, L8) not displayed in the main display area Dm is being executed. That is, when the composite ready-to-win effect is executed, first, execution of variation control is started for all symbol rows (L1 to L4, L8) corresponding to symbol variation in the horizontal direction, and then the main display is performed. Variation control and display control for 10 seconds are executed for the symbol rows (L1 to L3) displayed in the area Dm, and symbol rows (L4, L8) set outside the main display area Dm are , 20 seconds (the period until the first reach mode (see FIG. 352(a)) is stopped (temporarily stopped)). In this way, by executing variation control in synchronization with the elapsed time of the ready-to-win effect even for symbol rows that are not displayed in the main display region Dm, the symbol rows displayed in the main display region Dm are changed and new patterns are displayed. When displaying the symbol row (for example, symbol row L4 or L8), it can be displayed without delay.

In the example shown in FIG. 351(b), the third symbol with the number 1 (the third symbol with a character imitating an "elephant") is positioned at the center of the symbol row L1 and on the right side of the symbol row L2. Temporarily stop display is performed in the stopped (temporarily stopped) deviated display mode (first temporary stop mode). In addition, when the deviation variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds is executed, the third symbol is stop-displayed in the deviation display mode shown in FIG. 351(b), and the symbol variation ends.

Then, a suggestive effect (for example, FIG. 184(b)) suggesting that the symbol row displayed in the main display area Dm is changed while the third symbols are stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed in the first temporary stop mode. As shown in , the display form of the character attached to the third pattern is changed to produce an effect suggesting that the display area will change, or display that suggests that the display area will change on the third pattern display device 81. Effect to be executed) is executed, and then the symbol row displayed in the main display area Dm is changed (see FIG. 352(a)).

In the example shown in FIG. 352(a), the display area is moved upward so that the symbol rows L1, L2, and L4 are displayed in the main display area Dm (upper movement area), and the first temporary stop mode ( The symbol row L3 displayed within the main display area Dm in FIG. 351(b) has moved outside the main display area Dm. As a result, from the first temporary stop display mode, which was a stop (temporary stop) display mode indicating a disengagement, the third symbol with the number 1 (the third symbol with a character imitating an "elephant") is changed to the symbol row. It is displayed in the ready-to-win display mode (first ready-to-win mode) stopped (temporarily stopped) at the central position of L1 and the right side position of the symbol row L2. As a result, by executing the process of changing the display area (symbol row) displayed in the main display area Dm, the winning display mode (first temporary stop mode), which temporarily makes the player think that the player has come off, is changed. can be changed to a reach display mode (first reach mode) in which the player can expect a hit, so that even after the third symbol indicating the loss is stopped and displayed, it is possible to continue to have a sense of expectation for the hit. It is possible to maintain the player's motivation for the game.

It should be noted that, in this another example, the third pattern in the first temporary stop mode (each third pattern displayed in FIG. 351(b)) is reached by moving upward the display area displayed by the main display area Dm. The display area of the main display area Dm is moved upward because the stop (temporary stop) display is performed in a combination capable of executing the effect (first reach mode), but the display area displayed by the main display area Dm is changed to When the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed in a combination capable of executing the ready-to-win effect (first ready-to-win mode) by moving downward, the display area of the main display area Dm is moved downward. Processing is performed. In this way, by configuring the display area of the main display area Dm to be movable in two different directions (upward or downward), a combination of third symbols that can be stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed in the first temporary stop mode. can be increased.

That is, when the display area of the main display area Dm is configured to be movable only in one direction, the main display area Dm before movement is required to execute the ready-to-win effect (first ready-to-win mode) in the display area after movement. Although it was necessary to display the same third pattern in rows in the pattern rows displayed on the upper side and the center of the Dm, the display area of the main display area Dm can be moved in two different directions (upper or lower). When the configuration is used, either the pattern row displayed above and in the center of the main display area Dm before movement or the pattern row displayed in the bottom and center of the main display area Dm before movement is the same. By displaying the third symbols in a row, it is possible to execute the ready-to-win effect (first ready-to-win mode) in the display area after movement, so the third symbol that can be displayed to stop (temporarily stop) in the first temporary stop mode can increase the number of combinations, and it is possible to prevent the player from easily predicting whether or not the pattern variation will develop into the first ready-to-win mode, that is, the pattern variation effect to be executed in the future, and the effect There is an effect that the effect can be enhanced.

Then, in the ready-to-win effect (first ready-to-win mode) shown in FIG. )) is stopped (temporarily stopped), that is, of the symbol rows displayed in the main display area Dm, the upper symbol row (symbol row L4) and the lower symbol are displayed. The right position of the row (symbol row L2) and the same third symbol (the third symbol with the number 1 in FIG. 352 (b)) in the middle symbol row (symbol row L1) is stopped (temporary stop) display ( When it is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the second temporary stop display mode, as shown in FIG. It is variably displayed in the vertical direction as a row L5.

As a result, the same ready-to-win effect as the second ready-to-win mode (see FIG. 335(a)) described in the first modification of the fourth control example is executed. Since it is the same as the first modified example of the fourth control example, its description is omitted.

As described above, in another example of the first modified example of the fourth control example, as the composite ready-to-win effect, the normal symbol variation is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first temporary stop display mode, and then a new symbol is displayed. The display area is changed so as to display the array, the first ready-to-win mode is made executable, and the first ready-to-win mode is temporarily stopped and displayed in the second temporary stop display mode, and then the direction of pattern fluctuation is changed. The second reach mode is configured to be executable. As a result, a ready-to-win effect with a high effect can be executed for the player.

In addition, since it is configured to temporarily stop in the temporary stop display mode multiple times during the composite ready-to-win effect, by matching the timing of temporary stop with the stop display timing of the deviation variation pattern, when the deviation variation pattern is executed It is possible to execute the same effect (at least part of the display data can be diverted) in the case where the compound reach effect is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the amount of display data used for the effect can be reduced. In addition, even when the losing variation pattern is executed, the player can be made to think that the complex ready-to-win effect is being executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 353, an electrical configuration in another example of the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. This example differs from the electrical configuration used in any of the control examples described above in that the contents of the character storage area 234a2 set in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 are partially changed. All other elements are identical. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 353(a), the contents of the character storage area 234a2 in another example of the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 353(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the character storage area 234a2. As shown in FIG. 353(a), the character storage area 234a2 stores a command specifying the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (display area change information included in the variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113). ), and a pattern arrangement for storing the pattern arrangement used when executing the pattern variation display executed in the main display region Dm of the third pattern display device 81. An arrangement storage area 234a2b and other storage area 234a2c in which display data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are stored are defined.

Here, the contents of the display area storage area 234a2a will be described with reference to FIG. 353(b). FIG. 353(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display region storage area 234a2a. In the display area storage area 234a2a, as display area types, a display area 1 (reference area) in which the pattern arrays L1 to L3 are displayed in the main display area Dm, and a display area 1 (reference area) in which the pattern arrays L1, L2, and L4 are displayed in the main display area Dm. A display area 2 (upward movement area) to be displayed and a display area 3 (downward movement area) in which the pattern arrays L2, L3, and L8 are displayed in the main display area Dm are set. The display area displayed in the main display area Dm is set based on a command specifying the display area (display area change information included in the variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113).

Although detailed description is omitted, the variation pattern command output from the sound ramp control device 113 includes information for executing symbol variation for all of the symbol arrays L1 to L4 and L8. , the display control device 114 is configured to execute processing so as to update the display contents for all of the pattern arrays L1 to L4 and L8. Specifically, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 248) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is executed for all of the pattern arrays L1 to L4 and L8 based on the received display variation pattern command. . Then, in the drawing process (see FIG. 257), a drawing list is created for the pattern string corresponding to the currently set display area, and the drawing list and drawing object buffer information are transmitted to the image controller. is doing. As a result, all the display information of the pattern arrays L1 to L4 and L8 can be updated in correspondence with the time data, and the display processing can be executed only for the pattern arrays to be displayed. In this case, a flag (storage area) is provided for determining the currently set display area type among the display area types stored in the display area storage area 234a2a, and determination is performed by referring to the flag. good.

Next, referring to FIG. 353(c), the contents of the pattern arrangement storage area 234a2b will be described. FIG. 353(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the pattern arrangement storage area 234a2b. The pattern array storage area 234a2b stores a normal pattern array (horizontal scrolling) used when the normal variation is executed and a vertical scrolling pattern array used when the second ready-to-win state is executed. It is The symbol array for vertical scrolling includes a symbol array (1 for vertical scrolling) corresponding to symbol row L5 (see FIG. 351(a)) and a symbol array (1 for vertical scrolling) corresponding to symbol row L6 (see FIG. 351(a)). Vertical scrolling 2) and a symbol array (vertical scrolling 3) corresponding to the symbol row L7 (see FIG. 351(a)) are stored, and the second ready-to-win mode is executed for each of them. A symbol array corresponding to the third symbol stopped and displayed is stored in .

Specifically, as the pattern arrangement for vertical scrolling 1 (symbol row L5), the third pattern with the number 1 attached when the second ready-to-win mode is executed is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the out-of-reach display mode. (See FIG. 334) "symbol array 1" set when the second ready-to-win state is executed, the third pattern with the number 9 is stopped (temporary stop) display in the out-of-reach display state Nine types are set up to "symbol arrangement 9" which is set when it is set. In this example, the display mode (first temporary stop mode) of the third symbol that is stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed when the second ready-to-win mode is executed is set to a predetermined stop mode. Therefore, the number of pattern arrangement types for vertical scrolling stored in the pattern arrangement storage area 234a2b can be reduced.

Similarly to the pattern arrays 1 to 9 stored corresponding to the vertical scroll 1 (symbol row L5), vertical scroll 2 (symbol row L6) and vertical scroll 3 (symbol row L7) are also provided. Nine kinds of pattern arrangement are set. In addition, when the third pattern stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed at the center position of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 is vertically variably displayed (vertical scroll display), the first temporary stop mode is 2. This is a case where the third symbol of the kind is displayed as a stop (temporary stop) in a combination indicating a disengagement in a state where the third symbol is in a ready-to-win state (so-called double reach state).

Thus, by pre-storing the pattern arrangement used in the second ready-to-win mode (the ready-to-reach mode executed after changing the direction of fluctuation (scrolling direction) of the third symbol), the second ready-to-reach mode is delayed. can be run without Further, by predetermining the combination of the third symbols to be stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed in the first temporary stop mode, it is possible to reduce the types of symbol arrays used when executing the second ready-to-win mode. .

<Regarding control processing executed by the display control device in another example of the first modification of the fourth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 354, pointer update processing 2 executed in another example of the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. This pointer update process 2 differs from the above-described pointer update process (S7205 in FIG. 254) in that a process for changing the display area displayed in the main display area Dm is added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing the contents of pointer update processing 2 (S7205). When the pointer update process 2 (S7205) is executed, first, the same process as S7401 of the above-described pointer update process (see FIG. 254) is executed, and then it is determined whether it is time to change the display area. (S7431). In the process of S7431, if it is determined that it is time to change the display area (S7431: Yes), then the display area corresponding to the command is set by referring to the display area storage area 234a2a (S7432). , the determined display area data is overwritten in the display data table buffer (S7433). Then, the process proceeds to S7402.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7431 that it is not the timing to change the display area, the process skips S7432 and S7433 and proceeds to S7402. In S7402 to S7406, the same processing as S7402 to S7406 of the above pointer update processing (see FIG. 254) is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, in another example of the first modified example of the fourth control example, as the composite ready-to-win effect, the normal symbol variation is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first temporary stop display mode, and then a new symbol arrangement is displayed. is displayed, the first ready-to-win mode is made executable, and the first ready-to-win mode is temporarily stopped and displayed in the second temporary stop display mode, and then the direction of symbol fluctuation is changed. 2 reach modes are configured to be executable. As a result, a ready-to-win effect with a high effect can be executed for the player. It should be noted that in this example, there are two directions of variation of the symbol row, that is, the horizontal direction and the vertical direction, but the symbol row may be varied in other directions.

In addition, since it is configured to temporarily stop in the temporary stop display mode multiple times during the composite ready-to-win effect, by matching the timing of temporary stop with the stop display timing of the deviation variation pattern, when the deviation variation pattern is executed It is possible to execute the same effect (at least part of the display data can be diverted) in the case where the compound reach effect is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the amount of display data used for the effect can be reduced. In addition, even when the losing variation pattern is executed, the player can be made to think that the complex ready-to-win effect is being executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, since the symbol row data used when executing the first ready-to-win mode and the symbol row data used when performing the second ready-to-win mode are stored and set to be different, Various effects can be executed by combining the data. In addition, the first reach mode is set so that the combination of symbols displayed when the first reach mode is stopped (temporarily stopped) matches the combination of symbols set in the symbol row used in the second reach mode. Since the stop (temporary stop) display mode of the ready-to-win mode is set, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when switching the performance mode from the first ready-to-reach mode to the second ready-to-reach mode.

In addition, while the display control of each symbol row (L1 to L4, L8) executed in the first reach mode is being executed, the display control of each symbol row (L5 to L7) executed in the second reach mode may be executed in advance. In this case, a layer in which the display of the first ready-to-reach mode is executed and a layer in which the display of the second ready-to-reach mode is executed are provided separately, and in a state in which the first ready-to-reach mode is being executed, the game is displayed in the second ready-to-reach mode. The display control of each layer may be switched at the timing when the second ready-to-win mode is executed, so that the player can visually recognize the second ready-to-win mode.

In each control example described above, the case of using a gaming machine in which the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) are executed at the same time was described. The symbol display device 81 may be configured to simultaneously display the variation of the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) and the normal symbol, and the technique described in each control example described above may be applied. In this case, as a result of the lottery of the normal symbols, the benefit to be executed when winning is set to be the same as the benefit to be executed when the special symbol is winning, so that more effect can be achieved. can.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the right rotation unit 600 as an example>
a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member displaceably formed with respect to the base member, a transmission member for transmitting driving force to the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the transmission member In the gaming machine comprising a drive means for applying a driving force to the transmission member, the transmission member comprises a drive pin, the first displacement member and the second displacement member respectively comprise a first groove and a second groove, and the The first groove includes an action section that receives action from the drive pin and a non-interference section that does not interfere with the drive pin. The second groove includes at least an action section that receives action from the drive pin. The first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged on the base member in a posture in which the groove and the second groove are superimposed and the drive pin is inserted through the first groove and the second groove. Gaming machine A1 to play.

Here, in a game machine such as pachinko, a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and a driving force applied to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. A performance member having a transmission member that transmits and a driving means that imparts a driving force to the transmission member is provided, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are provided via the first groove and the second groove provided in the transmission member. There is a gaming machine in which a member is connected to a transmission member (for example, JP-A-2009-100994).

According to this game machine, when the driving force of the driving means is applied to the transmitting member, the effecting member transmits the driving force from the transmitting member to the first displacement member and the second displacement member through the first groove and the second groove. is transmitted, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced with respect to the base member.

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the first groove and the second groove are arranged side by side, the space required for arranging the first groove and the second groove is large, and the front view of the effect member is correspondingly large. There was a problem that the outer shape in the case became large. In particular, in recent years, there has been a demand for larger liquid crystal display devices, and an increase in the outer shape of the effect member when viewed from the front hinders an increase in the size of the liquid crystal display device, which is not preferable.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged on the base member in a posture in which the first groove and the second groove are superimposed (superimposed). Compared to the conventional product in which the grooves and the second grooves are arranged side by side, the space required for disposing the first grooves and the second grooves can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the outer size in a front view. In this case, even if the liquid crystal display device is required to be enlarged, the space in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) is relatively large. With the structure in which the two layers are superimposed, it is possible to reduce the size of the outer shape in a front view by using a relatively large space in the thickness direction, which is particularly effective for increasing the size of the liquid crystal display device.

Further, according to the gaming machine A1, since the drive pin is inserted through the superimposed first groove and the second groove, the driving force from the transmission member is transferred to the first displacement member and the second displacement member by one drive pin. , making it unnecessary to provide a drive pin for each of the first groove and the second groove. That is, the parts can be used in common, and the part cost can be reduced accordingly.

According to the game machine A1, when the driving force of the driving means is applied to the transmission member, the driving force is transmitted from the transmission member to the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member A member is displaced relative to the base member. In this case, in a state in which the action sections of the first groove and the second groove are acted upon by the transmission member, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are respectively displaced, while only the action section of the second groove is affected by the transmission member. In a state of being acted upon (the transmission member does not interfere with the first groove due to the non-interference section), the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced.

In the gaming machine A1, the second displacement member is connected to a driven member displaceably disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member and formed with the second groove, and to a driven portion thereof. A gaming machine A2 comprising a connecting displacement member displaceably disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member and having a decorative portion.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the second displacement member includes a driven member displaceably disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member and having the second groove formed thereon; A link structure can be formed by the driven member and the connecting displacement member, since the connecting displacement member is connected to the driven portion and displaceably disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member. Accordingly, when the driven member is driven by the transmission member, the decorative portion of the connecting displacement member can be largely displaced relative to the first displacement member.

A gaming machine A3 in the gaming machine A2, wherein the second displacement member can form a posture in which the driven member and the connecting displacement member are superimposed.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, the second displacement member can form a posture in which the driven member and the connecting displacement member are overlapped. It is possible to reduce the size of the outer shape of the displacement member when viewed from the front.

In the game machine A3, the first displacement member is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and an overhanging position, and the second displacement member has a posture in which the driven member and the connecting displacement member are superimposed. A gaming machine A4, characterized in that it is formed so as to be arranged on the back surface of the first displacement member in the retracted position.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3, the second displacement member can be arranged behind the first displacement member in the retracted position in a posture in which the driven member and the connecting displacement member are superimposed. Since it is formed, it is possible to reduce the outer size of the first displacement member and the second displacement member arranged at the retracted position in a front view by the amount corresponding to the overlap.

In any one of the game machines A2 to A4, the connecting displacement member has an overhanging portion formed so as to overhang in the opposite direction to the decorative portion across a portion displaceably arranged to the first displacement member. A gaming machine A5 characterized by:

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A2 to A4, the connecting displacement member protrudes to the side opposite to the decorative portion across the portion displaceably arranged to the first displacement member. With the overhang formed, the overhang can act as a weight.

For example, when the driven portion is driven to lift the decorative portion of the connecting displacement member upward, the weight of the overhanging portion is used because the overhanging portion is formed on the side opposite to the decorative portion. , the decorative portion can be easily lifted upward. Therefore, the overhanging portion can be lifted quickly and the driving force required for lifting can be suppressed. In addition, after the decorative portion is lifted, the weight of the decorative portion and the weight of the overhanging portion can be hung together. The lifted posture can be stabilized and the driving force required to maintain the posture can be suppressed.

A game machine A6 in the game machine A5, wherein the overhanging portion of the connecting displacement member is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the protruding portion of the connecting displacement member is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member. When displacing the displacement member, the projecting portion is brought into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member, so that rattling of the connecting displacement member (decorative portion) can be suppressed. In addition, the protruding portion serving as a weight can also play a role of suppressing rattling by coming into contact with the first displacement member, thereby simplifying the structure and reducing the parts cost accordingly. can be achieved.

A game machine A7, wherein in the game machine A6, the projecting portion of the connecting displacement member is formed in a substantially box shape.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of the game machine A6, the protruding portion of the connecting displacement member is formed in a substantially box shape, so that the weight and rigidity can be ensured while reducing the outer shape. can. Therefore, in a state where the projecting portion is hidden behind the back surface of the first displacement member (that is, in a state in which it is not visible from the front), the connecting displacement member can be displaced, and the function as a weight and the back surface of the first displacement member It is possible to reliably exhibit the function of suppressing rattling by coming into contact with.

In any one of game machines A1 to A7, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and a projecting portion that projects from an outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion. The first displacement member has a contact portion formed to be able to come into contact with the protrusion, the bearing portion pivotally supports the first displacement member in a raised state from the base member, and the protrusion is provided with the first displacement member. A game machine A8 characterized in that the relative rotation of the first displacement member with respect to the base member is restricted within a predetermined range by the abutment of the abutment portion.

According to game machine A8, in the game machine according to any one of game machines A1 to A7, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and the bearing portion supports the first displacement member. Since it is pivotally supported in a raised state from the base member, such raising makes it possible to form a space for disposing the second displacement member between the base member and the first displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to dispose the first displacement member and the second displacement member in an overlapping posture.

In this case, according to the game machine A8, the base member further includes a projecting portion formed to project from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion, and the first displacement member is a contact portion formed to be able to contact the projecting portion. and the contact portion is brought into contact with the projection portion, whereby the relative rotation of the first displacement member with respect to the base member can be restricted within a predetermined range. That is, in order to dispose the first displacement member and the second displacement member in a superimposed posture, the bearing portion that raises the first displacement member from the base member has a relatively high rigidity, and the outer peripheral side of the bearing portion has a A projecting portion is provided from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion where the dead space is formed, and a contact portion is brought into contact with the projecting portion, thereby preventing relative rotation of the first displacement member with respect to the base member. The rigidity of the portion to be regulated can be ensured to improve the durability, and the dead space can be effectively used, so that the size can be reduced accordingly.

A game machine A9 in the game machine A8, wherein the projecting portion of the base member is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A8, the projecting portion of the base member is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member, so when the first displacement member is displaced, , the projecting portion of the base member is brought into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member, thereby suppressing rattling of the first displacement member. In addition, the projecting portion, which serves to restrict the relative displacement of the first displacement member with respect to the base member, can also serve to suppress rattling by coming into contact with the first displacement member, thereby simplifying the structure. Therefore, the part cost can be reduced accordingly.

In particular, in the game machine A9 subordinate to the game machine A2, the second displacement member (the driven member and the connecting displacement member) is disposed on the first displacement member, so the first displacement member is the weight of the second displacement member. It is necessary to rotate with respect to the base member while supporting the base member, and rattling is likely to occur. Therefore, it is effective to have the protruding portion of the base member contact the rear surface of the first displacement member to suppress rattling of the first displacement member.

In the game machine A9, the first displacement member has its longitudinal one end side pivotally supported by the bearing portion of the base member, and the protrusion of the base member is located at the edge portion of the longitudinal direction one end side of the first displacement member. A gaming machine A10 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to come into contact with its back surface.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effects of the game machine A9, one longitudinal end of the first displacement member is pivotally supported by the bearing portion of the base member, and the projecting portion of the base member corresponds to one longitudinal end of the first displacement member. Since it is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface of the side edge, when the first displacement member tilts due to its own weight, the projection can be arranged at a position where the tilting can be suppressed. As a result, rattling of the first displacement member can be effectively suppressed.

A game machine A11 in the game machine A10, wherein the projecting portion projects from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion and is connected to the front surface of the base member.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A10, the protrusion protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing and is connected to the front surface of the base member, so that the rigidity of the protrusion can be increased. can be done. In particular, when the first displacement member is tilted by its own weight, it is possible to increase the rigidity in the direction in which the tilting is supported (that is, the direction in which the projecting portion is pressed against the front surface of the base member). Sticking can be effectively suppressed.

A game machine A12 according to any one of the game machines A2 to A11, wherein the base member has an inclined surface formed by chamfering the ridgeline portions of the side surface and the front surface thereof.

According to the game machine A12, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A2 to A11, the base member has an inclined surface formed by chamfering the ridgeline portions of the side surface and the front surface. It is possible to prevent the second displacement member from being locked by the side surface of the base member and becoming unable to be displaced. In this case, in the present invention, the connecting displacement member of the second displacement member is displaceably arranged in a cantilevered state on the back surface of the first displacement member, so that the first displacement member and/or the second displacement member When displacing, the connecting displacement member of the second displacement member tends to swing in the direction of approaching and separating from the base member, and the connecting displacement member tends to be locked to the side surface of the base member. Therefore, the configuration in which the base member is provided with the inclined surface is particularly effective.

In the gaming machine A12, the second displacement member is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the base member protrudes from the front surface thereof and extends along the displacement direction of the second displacement member. A gaming machine A13 characterized by having a ridge.

According to the game machine A13, in addition to the effects of the game machine A12, the base member has a ridge projecting from the front surface and extending along the displacement direction of the second displacement member. can be brought into contact with the second displacement member. Therefore, compared to the case where the entire front surface of the base member comes into surface contact with the second displacement member, the contact area can be reduced and the sliding resistance can be suppressed.

Here, since the second displacement member is made of a light-transmitting material, when displacing the connection displacement member and making it visible to the player, the second displacement member transmits the irradiated light to produce an effect. can increase In this case, when the second displacement member is displaced, if the entire front surface of the base member comes into contact with the connecting displacement member, the friction between the front surface of the base member and the front surface of the base member causes clouding of the connecting displacement member. This impairs the performance effect of transmitting the light of the connecting displacement member. On the other hand, according to the game machine A12, a ridge is formed on the front surface of the base member, and only the tip of the ridge can be brought into contact with the connection displacement member, so that the connection displacement member rubs. can be partially cloudy due to As a result, it is possible to exhibit a performance effect by allowing light to pass through the connecting displacement portion.

In the gaming machine A13, the second displacement member includes a connection pin that connects the driven member and the connection displacement member and is formed of a metal material, and the ridge of the base member is configured so that the second displacement member A gaming machine A14, characterized in that it extends along the trajectory of the connecting pin when it is displaced.

According to the game machine A14, in addition to the effects of the game machine A13, the second displacement member includes a connection pin that connects the driven member and the connection displacement member and is formed of a metal material, is extended along the trajectory of the connecting pin when the second displacement member is displaced, so that the connecting pin can be brought into contact with the projecting tip of the ridge. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the formation of cloudiness on the portion of the light-transmissive material of the connecting displacement member due to friction with the ridges, and to exhibit the presentation effect by allowing light to pass through the connecting displacement member. can be done.

In the game machine A13 or A14, a gear interposed between the drive means and the transmission member is provided, and the base member includes a gear receiving portion for supporting the gear in its internal space, and A gaming machine A15, wherein a gear receiving portion projects from the front surface of the base member, and the ridge extends to a position corresponding to the gear receiving portion.

According to the game machine A15, in addition to the effects of the game machine A13 or A14, the ridge is extended to a position corresponding to the gear receiving portion projecting from the front surface of the base member, so that the second displacement member It is possible to prevent the member from being locked by the gear receiving portion projecting from the side surface of the member and becoming unable to be displaced or hindered from displacing it. In other words, by providing a ridge on the front surface of the base member and extending the ridge to a position corresponding to the gear receiving portion, the gear receiving portion can be projected from the front surface of the base member. can be done. As a result, the gear can be rotatably accommodated in the inner space of the base member while reducing the thickness dimension of the base member. As a result, for example, it is not necessary to fix the drive shaft of the drive means to the gear (that is, the gear is held in the gear receiving portion of the base member, so the drive shaft of the drive means only needs to be inserted through the gear). ), the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A15, the first displacement member and the transmission member are rotatably supported by the base member, and the first displacement member is positioned in front of the base member at a retracted position. It is formed so as to be displaceable between an overhanging position that overhangs in a direction away from the base member, and the rotating shaft of the first displacement member is disposed closer to the overhanging position than the rotating shaft of the transmission member. A gaming machine A16 characterized by:

According to the game machine A16, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A15, the first displacement member and the transmission member are rotatably supported by the base member, and the rotation shaft of the first displacement member is connected to the transmission member. , the area of the first displacement member protruding to the protruding position can be increased, while the first displacement member can be positioned at any position between the retracted position and the protruding position. Even in the case of , the transmission member can be arranged on the back surface of the first displacement member to make it easier to make it invisible to the player.

In the game machine A16, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and the transmission member is arranged to rotate the second displacement member when the second displacement member is extended to the extended position. A gaming machine A17 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the bearing.

According to the game machine A17, in addition to the effects of the game machine A16, the base member has a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and the transmission member has the second displacement member that extends to the projecting position. In this case, the second displacement member is formed to contact the bearing portion of the base member, so that the relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member can be restricted within a predetermined range. That is, the transmission member, which serves to transmit the driving force of the driving means, can also serve as a stopper that restricts the relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member within a predetermined range. It is possible to simplify and reduce the part cost accordingly.

Further, the bearing portion is a portion for raising the first displacement member from the base member and arranging the first displacement member and the second displacement member in an overlapping posture, and has relatively high rigidity. Since a dead space is formed on the outer peripheral side of the transmission member, the rigidity of the portion that restricts the relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member can be ensured by adopting a configuration in which the transmission member abuts against the bearing portion. As a result, durability can be improved, dead space can be effectively used, and the size can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine A17, the transmission member is provided with a recess corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing, and when the second displacement member projects to the projecting position, the bearing is received in the recess. A gaming machine A18 characterized in that it is formed in such a way that:

According to the game machine A18, in addition to the effects of the game machine A17, the transmission member is provided with a concave portion corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion, and when the second displacement member is overhanging to the overhanging position, the bearing Since the portion is formed receivably in the recess, the movable range of the transmission member can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the displacement amounts of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be secured. In other words, the position of the rotating shaft of the transmission member can be brought close to the bearing portion while ensuring the movable range of the transmission member. It is possible to easily form a state in which the transmission member is hidden behind the first displacement member (that is, a state in which it is not visible from the front) while being displaced between the position and the extended position.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A18, when the transmission member is driven in the forward direction, the action sections of the first groove and the second groove are acted upon by the transmission member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are operated. After each displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the action section of the second groove is acted upon by the transmission member, and the non-interference section causes the transmission member to be non-interfering with the first groove, A game machine A19 characterized in that the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced in a second direction, and the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions. .

According to the game machine A19, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 to A18, when the transmission member is driven in the forward direction, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are respectively displaced in the first direction, and then the second One displacement member is stopped and a second displacement member is displaced in a second direction. In this case, since the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A18, the inertia accompanying the stop of the first displacement member displaced in the first direction The force can be canceled by the inertia force when the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the parts due to the action of the inertial force and improve the durability.

In the game machine A19, one or more gears are provided between the driving means and the transmission member to transmit the driving force, and the weight of the first displacement member is made heavier than the weight of the second displacement member. A gaming machine A20 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A20, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A19, the weight of the first displacement member is made heavier than the weight of the second displacement member. The heavy first displacement member can be stopped first, and the light weight second displacement member can be stopped last. Thereby, the load on the gear can be reduced.

That is, from a state in which the transmission member is driven in the forward direction and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are each displaced in the first direction, the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction. Since the transition to the state of being displaced in the direction is performed by the transmission member moving from the transmission section of the first groove to the non-interference section, the rotation of the driving means and the gear is continued. Therefore, even if the first displacement member is stopped, no load is applied to the gear. On the other hand, the transition from the state in which the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction to the state in which the second displacement member is also stopped depends on the rotation of the driving means and the gear. In this case, the only member that is stopped is the light weight second displacement member, so the load on the gear can be reduced accordingly.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A20, a third displacement member disposed displaceably on the first displacement member is provided, and the third displacement member is displaced under the action of the second displacement member. A gaming machine A21 characterized by:

According to the game machine A21, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A20, the third displacement member is displaceably disposed on the first displacement member, and the third displacement member is the second displacement member. Since it is displaced by the action of the member, the third displacement member can also be displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member.

In the gaming machine A21, one of the second displacement member and the third displacement member includes a drive pin, and the other of the second displacement member and the third displacement member includes a third groove, and the third groove is , a game machine A22 comprising an action section receiving action from the drive pin and a non-interference section in which the drive pin does not interfere.

According to the game machine A22, in addition to the effects of the game machine A21, one of the second displacement member and the third displacement member has a drive pin, and the other of the second displacement member and the third displacement member has the third groove. Since the third groove has an action section that receives action from the drive pin and a non-interference section that does not interfere with the drive pin, both the second displacement member and the third displacement member are displaced with respect to the first displacement member. and a mode in which only one of the second displacement member and the third displacement member is displaced with respect to the first displacement member.

A gaming machine A23 characterized in that in the gaming machine A21, the second displacement member is displaceably disposed on the third displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A23, since the second displacement member is displaceably disposed on the third displacement member, when the third displacement member is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member, The relative displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member can be superimposed on the relative displacement of the third displacement member with respect to the first displacement member, and as a result, the first It is possible to increase the amount of relative displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the displacement member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention, Taking the Counterclockwise Rotation Unit 700 as an Example>
a base member, a first displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the first displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member and a connecting member connecting between the base member and the second displacement member, wherein the second displacement member is displaced as the first displacement member is displaced. In a game machine that is relatively displaced with respect to a first displacement member, the connecting member includes a first connecting member having one end connected to the base member and the other end connected to the other end of the first connecting member. and a connection second member having one end connected to the second displacement member, and a connection portion between the other ends of the connection first member and the connection second member is displaceably connected to the first displacement member A gaming machine B1 characterized by:

Here, in a game machine such as pachinko, a base member, a first displacement member arranged displaceably on the base member, a second displacement member arranged displaceably on the first displacement member, There is a game machine provided with driving means for generating a driving force for displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and a connecting member for connecting between the base member and the second displacement member (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2013). -17886).

According to this game machine, when the first displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the connection member acts between the base member and the second displacement member, thereby displacing the first displacement member. , the second displacement member can be displaced relative to the first displacement member. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the first displacement member is displaced in a direction away from the base member, the connection member connecting between the base member and the second displacement member is exposed. There is a problem that it becomes visible to people, and the appearance is spoiled.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the connecting member includes a connecting first member having one end connected to the base member, and the other end connected to the other end of the connecting first member and to the second displacement member. and a connecting second member to which one end is connected, and the connecting portion between the other ends of the connecting first member and the connecting second member is connected to the first displacement member so as to be displaceable, so that the first displacement member is the base. Even when displaced in a direction away from the member, the connecting member (the first connecting member and the second connecting member) can be arranged on the back surface of the first displacement member to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connection member from being exposed and the appearance from being spoiled.

In the gaming machine B1, the first displacement member is rotatably arranged on the base member, and the second connecting member of the connecting member is slidably arranged on the first displacement member. Gaming machine B2.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, the first displacement member is rotatably disposed on the base member, and the second member connected to the connection member is slidably displaceable to the first displacement member. Therefore, when the first displacement member is rotated with respect to the base member, when the amount of rotation is large (that is, the amount of displacement of the first connecting member and the second connecting member needs to be increased) Even so, it is possible to avoid being viewed by the player by maintaining the state in which the second connecting member of the connecting member is disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second connecting member of the connecting member from being exposed and impairing the appearance.

Further, even when an electrical connection line is wired to the first displacement member, the second connection member of the connection member is slidably disposed on the first displacement member so that the connection line and the second connection member interference with can be easily suppressed. Therefore, since it is not necessary to secure a large space for wiring the connection lines in order to avoid interference, it is possible to reduce the size of the front view shape of the first displacement member accordingly.

In the game machine B1 or B2, a driving body driven by the driving means is provided, the driving body is connected to the first connecting member of the connecting member, and the driving force of the driving means is transferred from the driving body to the first connecting member. A game machine B3 characterized in that the first displacement member and the second displacement member are driven by being transmitted to the members.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the driving body driven by the driving means is provided, the driving body is connected to the connecting first member of the connecting member, and the driving force of the driving means is Since the first displacement member and the second displacement member are driven by transmission from the driving body to the connecting first member, it is possible to reduce the size of the front view shape of the first displacement member.

That is, the connection member is positioned between the first displacement member and the base member because the connection portion between the other ends of the first connection member and the second connection member is displaceably connected to the first displacement member. When the driving body is connected to the first displacement member, the driving body and the connecting member may interfere with each other. Therefore, it is necessary to connect the driving body to the first displacement member at a position that does not overlap the displacement trajectory of the connecting member. There is Therefore, the front view shape of the first displacement member needs to have a size that includes the displacement trajectory of the connection member and the connection portion to which the driving body is connected. do. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B3, it is not necessary to avoid interference between the driving body and the connecting member, and the front view shape of the first displacement member only needs to have a size corresponding to the displacement trajectory of the connecting member. Since it is not necessary to include a connecting portion to which the driving body is connected, the front view shape of the first displacement member can be reduced accordingly.

In game machines B1 to B3, the first displacement member is rotatably disposed on the base member and is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position, and the base member serves as a base-side engagement member. and a displacement-side engaging member formed to be engageable with the base-side engaging member in a state in which the first displacement member is displaced to the retracted position, of the first displacement member or the second displacement member. A game machine B4 characterized in that one side is provided with the game machine B4.

Here, in the above-described conventional game machine, the connecting member connects the base member and the second displacement member in an erected state, and in the retracted position, at a position relatively distant from the rotation axis of the first displacement member, A connecting member connects the base member and the second displacement member. Therefore, even if the first displacement member tries to tilt the portion on the opposite side of the rotation shaft (that is, the second displacement member side) in the direction away from the base member, there will be a gap between the base member and the second displacement member. The tilting can be suppressed by the action of the intervening connecting member.

However, in the game machine B4, since the connection portion between the other ends of the connection first member and the connection second member is connected to the first displacement member so as to be displaceable, the first displacement member is displaceable at the retracted position. With the rotating shaft as the base end, the portion opposite to the rotating shaft (that is, the second displacement member side) is the free end. Therefore, due to its own weight and the weight of the second displacement member, the portion of the first displacement member opposite to the rotating shaft (second displacement member side) tends to tilt away from the base member.

In this case, according to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machines B1 to B3, the base member includes the base-side engagement member, and one of the first displacement member and the second displacement member is the displacement-side engagement member. When the first displacement member is displaced to the retracted position, the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member are formed so as to be able to engage with each other. It is possible to suppress tilting of the portion (on the side of the second displacement member) in a direction away from the base member.

A gaming machine B5, wherein the second displacement member comprises the displacement side engaging member in the gaming machine B4.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4, since the second displacement member includes the displacement side engagement member, the engagement position between the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member is set to the first position. It can be located relatively far from the axis of rotation of the displacement member. Therefore, by utilizing the engagement of the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member, the portion of the first displacement member opposite to the rotation shaft (second displacement member side) tilts in a direction away from the base member. can be effectively suppressed.

In the gaming machine B5, the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member are formed by bending a base portion erected from the front surface of the base member or the rear surface of the second displacement member and bending the tip of the base portion. and a bent portion having an inner surface serving as an engaging surface, and the engaging surfaces of the bent portions are engaged with each other by displacing the first displacement member from the extended position to the retracted position. , the engagement surface of the bent portion of the base-side engaging member is inclined in a direction away from the front surface of the base member toward the engaging tip side thereof, or (and) engagement of the bent portion of the displacement-side engaging member. A gaming machine B6 characterized in that the surface is inclined in a direction away from the back surface of the second displacement member toward the engaging tip side thereof.

Here, when the second displacement member includes a displacement-side engagement member as in the game machine B5, the engagement position between the base-side engagement member and the displacement-side engagement member is shifted from the rotation axis of the first displacement member. Since the positions are relatively distant, it becomes difficult to engage the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member due to the shaking of the first displacement member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B6, the engagement surface of the bent portion of the base-side engagement member is inclined in a direction away from the front surface of the base member toward the engagement tip side, or (and) displacement-side engagement. The engagement surface of the bent portion of the member is inclined in a direction away from the rear surface of the second displacement member toward the engaging tip side, that is, the engagement surface of the bent portion and the front surface of the base member or the rear surface of the second displacement member. Since the distance between is widened toward the engagement tip side, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, even if the first displacement member shakes, the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member can be easily engaged.

Furthermore, according to the gaming machine B6, the engagement surface of the bent portion of at least one of the base-side engagement member and the displacement-side engagement member is inclined as described above, so that the first displacement member moves toward the retracted position. When displaced by the second displacement member, the second displacement member can be brought closer to the base member along with the inclination of the engagement surface of the bent portion. As a result, at the retracted position, the projection dimension of the second displacement member from the base member can be suppressed, and rattling of the second displacement member can be absorbed to maintain its posture.

In the gaming machine B5 or B6, the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member comprise a base erected from the front surface of the base member or the rear surface of the second displacement member, and a tip of the base that is bent to bent portions having inner surfaces serving as engagement surfaces, and the engagement surfaces of the bent portions are engaged with each other by displacing the first displacement member from the extended position to the retracted position. A gaming machine B7 characterized in that a receiving portion for receiving a bent portion of an opponent is formed on the front surface of the base member and the back surface of the second displacement member.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5 or B6, the front surface of the base member and the rear surface of the second displacement member are formed with a receiving portion for receiving the bent portion of the opponent. In a state in which the displacement member is arranged at the retracted position (a state in which the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member are engaged), the bent portion is received by the receiving portion and approaches the base member of the second displacement member. Directional displacement can be allowed. Therefore, the standing dimensions of the base portions of the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member are increased to make it easier to engage the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member, while at the retracted position, the second Damage due to collision can be prevented by allowing displacement of the displacement member in a direction approaching the base member.

In any one of game machines B3 to B7, the displacement-side engagement member is engaged with the first displacement member in a state where the first displacement member is arranged at the extended position. Gaming machine B8.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B3 to B7, in the state where the first displacement member is arranged at the projecting position, the displacement side engaging member is the first displacement member. Engaged, that is, the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be coupled via the displacement-side engaging member. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress rattling of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member at the overhang position. At the retracted position, the displacement-side engaging member engages with the base-side engaging member to couple the second displacement member to the base member. Since the member can also play the role of connecting the member to the first displacement member, the structure can be simplified and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B8, an interposing means interposed between the second displacement member and one end of the second connection member is provided, and the interposing means is adapted to the base member. Different modes of action occurring between the second displacement member and one end of the second connecting member depending on whether the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction or in the second direction. A game machine B9 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the interposing means interposed between the second displacement member and the one end of the connecting second member, and the interposing means is the action that occurs between the second displacement member and one end of the second connecting member when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction and in the second direction with respect to the base member. Since the modes are different, depending on whether the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction or in the second direction with respect to the base member, the mode of displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member is changed. can be different.

In the gaming machine B9, the interposing means includes a guided portion provided at one end of the first displacement member or the second connection member, and one end of the first displacement member or the second connection member. a guide portion disposed on the other side for guiding the guided portion, and when the first displacement member is displaced in a first direction and in a second direction with respect to the base member, A gaming machine B10 characterized in that by guiding the guide portion along different paths of the guide portion, the mode of action occurring between the second displacement member and the one end of the second connecting member is differentiated.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects of the game machine B9, the intervening means displaces the first displacement member in the first direction and in the second direction with respect to the base member. By guiding the guiding portion along different paths of the guided portion, the mode of action generated between the second displacement member and the one end of the second connecting member is made different. It is possible to easily change the mode of displacement of the second displacement member with respect to one displacement member. That is, the degree of freedom in designing can be increased.

In the gaming machine B9, the interposition means acts between the second displacement member and one end of the second connecting member when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction with respect to the base member. is generated, and when the first displacement member is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member, the action between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member is released. Gaming machine B11.

According to the game machine B11, when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction with respect to the base member, the interposition means causes the action between the second displacement member and one end of the second connecting member. On the other hand, when the first displacement member is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member, the action between the second displacement member and the one end of the connecting second member is released. It is possible to make the mode of displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member largely different between when the member is displaced in the first direction and when the member is displaced in the second direction.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Center Frame 86 as an Example>
Formed so as to be displaceable between a game board having a game area on the front and an opening formed in the center, a retracted position on the back side of the game board, and an overhanging position visible through the opening. and a displacement member, comprising a center frame made of a light-transmissive material and fitted in the opening of the game board, the center frame forming part of the game area. A gaming machine C1 characterized by comprising an area forming section.

Here, in a game machine such as pachinko, a game board having a game area on the front and an opening formed in the center, a retracted position on the back side of the game board, and a tension that can be visually recognized through the opening. There is a game machine provided with a displacement member formed to be displaceable between out positions (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-176580).

According to this game machine, the opening of the game board is made larger than the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device to secure an area in which the displacement member can be visually recognized. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since it is necessary to secure an area for the balls to flow down in the game area, there is a limit to enlarging the opening of the game board, and the area where the displacement member can be visually recognized is limited. There was a problem that it could not be sufficiently secured.

On the other hand, the game machine C1 is provided with a center frame made of a light-transmitting material and fitted inside the opening of the game board, and the center frame is provided with an area forming portion that forms a part of the game area. Therefore, the displacement member can be visually recognized through the region forming portion. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently secure an area in which the displacement member can be visually recognized while securing an area for the ball to flow down in the game area.

In the game machine C1, the area forming part of the center frame forms a continuous area from the inner edge of the opening of the game board to the outer edge of the game area as part of the game area. C2.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the area forming part of the center frame forms a continuous area from the inner edge of the opening of the game board to the outer edge of the game area as part of the game area. Therefore, it is possible to secure a maximum area in which the displacement member can be visually recognized.

In the gaming machine C2, the gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the area forming portion of the center frame is set to have a width allowing only one game ball to pass through.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2, the area forming portion of the center frame is set to a width that allows only one game ball to pass through, so that the opening of the game board ( That is, it is possible to ensure the maximum possible area in which the displacement member can be visually recognized (without passing through the center frame).

In the game machine C2 or C3, the game machine C4 is characterized in that the region forming portion of the center frame comprises a downstream wall portion erected on the downstream side of the region and formed integrally with the center frame.

Here, if the center frame is made of a resin material and nails cannot be implanted, the speed of the game ball flowing down increases, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the falling game ball.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C4, since the area forming part of the center frame is provided with a downstream wall part erected on the downstream side of the area, the game ball flowing down the area forming part hits the downstream wall part. can be brought into contact. Therefore, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2 or C3, the falling speed of the game ball can be reduced to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball. In addition, since the downstream wall portion is integrally formed with the center frame, it can be easily molded by molding, and the fastening and fixing of separate parts can be eliminated, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly. .

In the game machine C4, the region forming portion of the center frame has a side wall portion which is erected in the region and defines a passage through which game balls flow down, and which is integrally formed with the center frame. A gaming machine C5 characterized by being connected to a wall.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4, the area forming part of the center frame is provided with a side wall part which is erected in the area and defines a passage through which game balls flow down, and the side wall part is located downstream. Since it is connected to the wall, it is possible to increase the rigidity of the downstream wall that receives the game ball flowing down. This can prevent the downstream wall from being damaged. In addition, since the connecting wall portion is integrally formed with the center frame, it can be easily formed by molding, and the fastening and fixing of separate parts can be eliminated, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly. . Furthermore, since the side wall portion which plays the role of partitioning the passage through which the game balls flow down can also play the role of increasing the rigidity of the downstream wall portion, the structure can be simplified and the part cost can be reduced accordingly. be able to.

In the game machine C5, an inner rail is provided to guide a game ball launched from the front surface of the game board to the game area, and the side wall portion is arranged in parallel with the inner rail. Machine C6.

Here, in the conventional game machine, the mode in which the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the inner rail after colliding with the nail and bouncing, and the speed is relatively slow, and this causes damage to the inner rail. There was no problem such as inviting On the other hand, in the present invention, in order to maximize the area where the displacement member can be visually recognized, the width of the area forming portion forming a part of the game area is narrow (for example, only one game ball is allowed to pass through). width). That is, the width of the game area is narrowed by the area forming section. Therefore, on the upstream side of the area forming section, it is necessary to guide the game balls flowing down the game area toward the area forming section. , and the inner rail may bend.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C6, since the side wall portion is arranged side by side with the inner rail, the game ball flowing down the game area is guided toward the area forming portion, and as a result, the game ball is directed toward the inner rail. Even if the game ball falls down, the side wall catches the game ball and prevents it from colliding with the inner rail. As a result, in addition to the effects of the game machine C5, it is possible to suppress the bending of the inner rail.

In the gaming machine C5 or C6, a light emitting means is disposed on the back side of the area forming portion of the center frame and formed to emit light, and the side wall portion emits light emitted from the light emitting means. A game machine C7 characterized in that it is formed to function as a light guide leading to the front side of the game area.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects of the game machine C5 or C6, the side wall portion is formed to function as a light guide that guides the light emitted from the light emitting means to the front side of the game area. It is possible to demonstrate the effect of directing by. In particular, in the game machine C7 subordinate to the game machine C6, the side wall portion is arranged side by side with the inner rail, so that the inner rail can reduce the leakage of light, and the amount of light that can be guided can be increased accordingly. . As a result, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the light.

In the game machine C7, the light emitting means is arranged on the displacement member, and the retracted position of the displacement member is the rear surface of the region forming portion of the center frame.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects of the game machine C7, the light emitting means is arranged on the displacement member, and the retracted position of the displacement member is the rear surface of the region forming portion of the center frame. is placed at the retracted position, the displacement member is visible through the region forming portion of the center frame, and the light emitted from the light emitting means of the displacement member is guided through the side wall portion. can be visualized. As a result, the effect of lighting can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C8, the area forming portion of the center frame defines a passage which is erected in the area and through which game balls flow down, and which is formed integrally with the center frame. A game machine C9 characterized in that one or a plurality of protrusions are protruded from the opposing surfaces of the pair of side wall portions.

Here, when the center frame is made of a resin material and nails cannot be implanted in the region forming portion, the speed of the game ball flowing down the passage partitioned by the pair of side wall portions increases, and the falling game ball is played. difficult for people to see.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C9, since one or a plurality of protrusions are protrudingly provided on the facing surfaces of the pair of side wall portions, when the game ball flows down the passage partitioned by the pair of side wall portions In addition, the game ball can be made to collide with the protrusions to hinder its flow. As a result, in addition to the effects of the game machines C1 to C8, the falling speed of the game balls can be slowed down, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the falling game balls.

A gaming machine C10 characterized in that, in the gaming machine C9, the projections on one facing surface and the projections on the other facing surface of the pair of side wall portions are arranged in a zigzag pattern.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C9, the projections on one facing surface of the pair of side wall portions and the projections on the other facing surface are arranged in a zigzag manner, so that the pair of side wall portions are partitioned. When the game ball flows down the passage, the game ball is caused to alternately collide with left and right projections, thereby making the flowing down game ball meander. As a result, in addition to the effects of the game machine C9, the falling speed of the game ball can be made slower so that the player can easily see the falling game ball, and the flowing game ball can be seen in the direction perpendicular to the flowing direction. It can be displaced to change the movement of the game ball.

In the game machine C10, the game machine C11 is characterized in that the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with a concave groove that is concavely formed in the front surface thereof and extends in a substantially sawtooth shape.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C10, the area forming portion of the center frame is recessed in the front surface thereof and has a concave groove extending in a substantially sawtooth shape, so that the area forming portion can be used as a game. When the ball flows down, the game ball can be guided by the inner surface of the concave groove to meander. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball can be slowed down, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the falling game ball. In addition, according to the game machine C11 subordinate to the game machine C7, the recessed groove can be used as a lens to guide the light emitted from the light emitting means to the front of the game area, so that the effect of the light can be exhibited. can do.

In the game machine C11, the game machine C12 is characterized in that the concave groove is arranged such that the bent portion thereof is displaced from the protrusion in the flowing direction of the game ball.

According to the game machine C12, in addition to the effects of the game machine C11, the bent portion of the recessed groove is displaced from the projection in the direction in which the game ball flows, so the game ball flows down the area forming portion. In this case, the meandering game ball guided by the inner surface of the groove can easily collide alternately with the protrusions. Therefore, a synergistic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the action of the concave groove and the action of the projection. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball can be made slower, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the falling game ball. In addition, it is possible to increase the change in the motion of the game ball.

In the game machine C10, the game machine C13 is characterized in that the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with a ridge projecting from the front surface thereof and extending in a substantially sawtooth shape.

According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C10, the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with a ridge projecting from the front surface and extending in a substantially sawtooth shape, so that the area forming portion can be used as a game. When the ball flows down, the game ball can be guided by the outer surface of the ridge to meander. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball can be slowed down, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the falling game ball. Further, according to the game machine C13 subordinate to the game machine C7, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be guided to the front of the game area by using the ridge as a lens, and the effect of the light can be exhibited. can do.

In the game machine C13, the game machine C14 is characterized in that the bent portion of the protruding line is aligned with the projection in a flowing direction of the game ball.

According to the game machine C14, in addition to the effects of the game machine C13, the bent portion of the ridge is aligned with the protrusion in the flowing direction of the game ball, so the game ball flows down the area forming portion. In this case, the meandering game ball guided by the outer surface of the ridge can easily collide alternately with the protrusions. Therefore, a synergistic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the action of the ridges and the action of the protrusions. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball can be made slower, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the falling game ball. In addition, it is possible to increase the change in the motion of the game ball.

In any one of the gaming machines C11 to C14, the terminal end side of the groove or the ridge is arranged so that its extending direction overlaps with the downstream wall portion and faces the exit of the passage partitioned by the pair of side wall portions. Characterized game machine C15.

According to the game machine C15, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C11 to C14, the terminal end side of the recessed groove or the ridge overlaps the downstream wall portion in the extending direction and is partitioned by the pair of side wall portions. Since the outlet of the passage is oriented, the game ball guided to the end side of the concave groove or the ridge can collide with the downstream wall from an oblique direction, thereby suppressing the bouncing of the game ball. The game ball can be made to flow down toward the exit of the passage while reducing the flow speed. As a result, the game balls can be smoothly discharged from the outlet of the passage.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Winning Device 65 as an Example>
A first seesaw member having one end side and the other end side rotatably supported by a rotating shaft is provided, and the seesaw member is lowered at one end side and raised at the other end side in an unloaded state. The seesaw member in a gaming machine that forms a state and forms a second state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered by placing a game ball on the other end side of the rotating shaft. The seesaw member is provided with a receiving surface for receiving the game ball guided by the guiding means, and the receiving surface is located on the one end side of the rotating shaft. Gaming machine D1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a seesaw member rotatably supported by a rotating shaft between one end side and the other end side. While forming a first state in which the other end side is raised while the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft, the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered A second state There is a gaming machine that forms a (for example, JP-A-2007-283136).

According to this gaming machine, when a game ball is dropped onto the seesaw member in the first state and placed between the rotating shaft and the other end, the weight of the game ball causes The other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised to form the second state. On the other hand, when the game ball placed between the rotating shaft and the other end side is ejected, the other end side is raised and the one end side is lowered to return to the first state. In other words, the weight of the dropped game ball can be used to alternately appear the first state and the second state, and an effect is produced by an action in which one end side and the other end side of the seesaw member are displaced up and down. It can be carried out.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, the second state is maintained in which the other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised, and the first state and the second state are maintained. There was a problem that it was not possible to alternately switch between

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, since the receiving surface for receiving the game ball guided from the guide means is located on the one end side of the rotating shaft, the other end side of the seesaw member is lowered and the one end side is raised. Even in the second state, the one end side can be lowered by the weight of the game ball received by the receiving surface. That is, it is possible to form the first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

In the gaming machine D1, the receiving surface is formed so as to be able to deliver the game ball to the other end side when receiving the game ball guided from the guide means in the first state. Game machine D2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the receiving surface is formed so as to be able to deliver the game ball to the other end when receiving the game ball guided from the guiding means in the first state. Therefore, switching from the first state to the second state can be reliably performed.

Examples of a configuration in which the game ball can be delivered to the other end include a configuration in which the receiving surface is inclined downward from one end to the other end even in the first state, a projection formed on the receiving surface, For example, the protrusion is formed in a shape that bounces the game ball guided from the guide means toward the other end side.

The game machine D1 or D2 includes a rotatably pivotally supported decorative member, one end of the seesaw member is connected to the decorative member, and the decorative member rotates around the rotation axis of the seesaw member. is displaced.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, it is provided with a rotatably pivotally supported decorative member, one end of the seesaw member is connected to the decorative member, and the rotation axis of the seesaw member is the center. Since a link mechanism is formed in which the decorative member is displaced in accordance with the rotation, the movable range of the decorative member can be expanded according to the link ratio, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Here, in order to reliably alternately switch the seesaw member between the first state and the second state, the first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised when the no-load state is established. It is preferable to be able to return the seesaw member early. In this case, according to the gaming machine D3, since the decorative member is connected to one end of the seesaw member, the weight of the decorative member is applied to the one end of the seesaw member to lower the one end. be able to. Therefore, in the no-load state, the seesaw member can be quickly returned to the first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. Alternate switching between states can be facilitated.

The weight of the decorative member prevents one end of the seesaw member from rising (forming the second state). is placed on the other end side, it is possible to form a second state in which the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the guide means includes a passage through which the game balls pass, and on the terminal end side of the passage, a rolling roller that extends in a substantially horizontal direction and on which the game balls roll. A game machine D4 is characterized in that a horizontal passage having a guide surface is formed, and a game ball rolling on the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage is guided substantially horizontally to the receiving surface of the seesaw member.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of the game machines D1 to D3, the guide means has a passage through which the game balls pass, so a plurality of game balls can be stored using the passage. , the plurality of game balls can be sequentially guided from the passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member.

However, even in this case, in the form in which the game balls are guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member by falling from above, when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, the plurality of game balls will fall on the receiving surface. The seesaw member cannot be alternately switched between the first state and the second state.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D4, a horizontal passage extending substantially horizontally and having a rolling guide surface on which game balls roll is formed on the end side of the passage, and the horizontal passage rolls. Since game balls rolling on the dynamic guide surface are guided substantially horizontally to the receiving surface of the seesaw member, they can be guided one by one from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member (that is, the receiving surface is horizontal). One ball at a time can be received from the passage in order), and it is possible to avoid stacking a plurality of game balls on the receiving surface. Therefore, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member.

In the gaming machine D4, the guide means includes an upstream passage connected to the upstream side of the horizontal passage and extending in a direction different from the extending direction of the horizontal passage, and the length of extension of the horizontal passage is is set to a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects of the game machine D4, the guide means includes an upstream passage connected to the upstream side of the horizontal passage and extending in a direction different from the extending direction of the horizontal passage, Since the extension length of the horizontal passage is set to a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball, even when a plurality of game balls are stored in the passage, the game balls are placed one by one on the receiving surface of the seesaw member. It is possible to provide guidance while keeping an interval.

That is, since the extension length of the horizontal passage is set to a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball, the horizontal passage can be in a state in which only one game ball exists, and the extension of the horizontal passage can be reduced. Since the installation direction and the extension direction of the upstream passage are different directions, when the ball flows from the upstream passage to the horizontal passage, it is necessary to change the inflow direction, It is possible to lengthen the time required to flow into the horizontal passage. Therefore, when the previous game ball existing in the horizontal passage is guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member, the game ball behind the upstream passage flows into the horizontal passage while taking time to change direction, and after that, is guided from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member. That is, the later game ball is spaced from the previous game ball. As a result, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member one by one while being spaced apart.

In the game machine D4 or D5, the game machine D6 is characterized in that, at least in the second state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is positioned above the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of the game machine D4 or D5, at least in the second state (state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered), the receiving surface of the seesaw member rolls in the horizontal path. Since a step is formed between the receiving surface and the rolling guide surface located above the guide surface, the game ball rolling on the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path is guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member. When it is played, the game ball can be run on the receiving surface (collision with the step), and the receiving surface of the seesaw member can be easily lowered by using this running operation (collision). As a result, it is possible to easily form the first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised.

In the gaming machine D6, at least in the first state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is positioned flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path or positioned below the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path. Characterized game machine D7.

Here, the fact that the seesaw member is in the first state means that the seesaw member is in an unloaded state, and the game ball received by the receiving surface after being guided from the horizontal passage is quickly sent out to the other end side. It means that the weight of the game ball is required to act on the other end side of the rotating shaft to lower the other end side (to form the second state).

In this case, according to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, at least in the first state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is positioned flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path or the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path. Since it is positioned below the dynamic guide surface, the game ball can be smoothly guided from the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path to the receiving surface of the seesaw member. That is, unlike the case of the second state, the game ball does not need to ride on the receiving surface (collide with the step), and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a time lag due to such an operation. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly sent out to the other end side, and as a result, it is possible to easily form the second state in which the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered.

In addition, in the first state, it is preferable that the receiving surface of the seesaw member is flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage. When the receiving surface of the seesaw member is positioned below the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage, the game ball guided from the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage falls onto the receiving surface of the seesaw member. This is because the ball bounces, resulting in a time lag and an increased load on the rotating shaft of the seesaw member due to the impact of the drop.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D7, the seesaw member is formed such that the other end side thereof is bent upward in a substantially doglegged shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft. Machine D8.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D7, the seesaw member has the other end bent upward in a substantially dogleg shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotation shaft. Since it is formed, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member while suppressing the space required for arranging the seesaw member.

That is, the seesaw member, if the downward inclination of the other end side of the rotating shaft is insufficient, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side (that is, the other end side is lowered and the second state is formation time) is lengthened, and alternating switching between the first state and the second state is hindered. However, if the entire area on the other end side of the rotating shaft is inclined downward, the other end side protrudes from the space allowed for disposing the seesaw member (that is, the space required for disposing the seesaw member increases. ). On the other hand, if the length from the rotating shaft to the other end is shortened so as to fit within the space allowed for the arrangement of the seesaw member, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end (that is, Since the other end side is lowered and the time during which the second state is formed is shortened and the formation of the second state becomes uncertain, alternating switching between the first state and the second state is hindered. In addition, in order to fit the seesaw member in the space allowed for disposing the seesaw member while ensuring the length from the rotating shaft to the other end side, the downward inclination of the other end side from the rotating shaft is insufficient. .

On the other hand, by forming the other end side of the seesaw member in a shape that bends upward in a substantially doglegged shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft, the problems described above can be resolved, and as a result, It is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member while suppressing the space required for arranging the seesaw member.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D8, the seesaw member is provided with an inlet into which game balls rolled from the rotating shaft toward the other end side are introduced, and the other end side of the seesaw member is provided with the above-mentioned A game machine D9, characterized in that a pawl portion is protrudingly formed so as to be capable of switching a rolling direction of a game ball rolled from a rotating shaft toward the other end side to a direction toward the inflow port.

According to the game machine D9, in any one of the game machines D1 to D8, the other end side of the seesaw member has a rolling direction of the game ball rolled from the rotating shaft toward the other end side toward the inlet. Since the pawl is formed to be switchable in direction, the game ball can be quickly introduced into the inlet. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the seesaw member (that is, the time during which the other end side is lowered and the second state is formed) becomes too long, resulting in the first state and the second state. It is possible to suppress the inhibition of alternating switching between and.

In the game machine D9, the game machine D10 is characterized in that the pawl portion is biased toward the side opposite to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member.

According to the game machine D10, in addition to the effects of the game machine D9, the pawl portion is disposed on the side opposite to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member, so that the rolling position of the game ball is aligned with the seesaw member. Even if there is variation in the width direction, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member (that is, the time during which the other end side is lowered and the second state is formed). It can be easily made constant.

That is, the pawl portion is biased toward the side opposite to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member, so that the game ball that rolls on the back side in the width direction of the seesaw member (opposite side to the inflow port) is Since the distance to the inlet in the width direction of the seesaw member is long, it is made to collide with the claw at an early stage and roll to the inlet, while the front of the seesaw member in the width direction (closer to the inlet) rolls. Since the ball has a short distance to the inlet in the width direction of the seesaw member, it is possible to delay the collision with the claw. Thereby, in each of the former and the latter, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member can be made to be equally close.

As a result, even if the rolling position of the game ball varies in the width direction of the seesaw member, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member (that is, the other end side is time during which the second state is formed) can be easily made constant.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D10, the seesaw member is provided with an inlet into which the game ball rolled from the rotating shaft toward the other end side is introduced, and the width of the inlet is equal to the diameter of the game ball. A game machine D11 characterized in that it is set to a dimension larger than double.

According to the game machine D11, in any of the game machines D1 to D10, the seesaw member is provided with an inlet into which game balls rolled from the rotating shaft toward the other end side are introduced, and the width of the inlet is is set to a dimension larger than twice the diameter of the game ball, so that the next game ball rolls further toward the other end side while the previous game ball exists on the other end side of the seesaw member. In this case, each of these game balls can be smoothly flowed into the inlet. For example, even if a later game ball collides with a previous game ball and these game balls roll into the inlet at the same time, they can be made to flow in smoothly.

In the game machine D11, the game machine D12 is characterized in that the height of the inflow port is set to be larger on the rotating shaft side than on the other end side of the seesaw member.

According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D11, the height of the inlet is set to be larger on the rotating shaft side than on the other end of the seesaw member. Even when the next game ball rolls further toward the other end side and collides with the previous game ball existing on the other end side of the seesaw member, each of these game balls is smoothly moved to the inflow port. can flow in. That is, even if the game ball bounces up after colliding with the previous game ball, the height of the inlet is increased on the side of the rotating shaft, so that the height of the game ball can be used to catch the subsequent game ball. It can be ejected smoothly. On the other hand, even if the previous game ball collides with the next game ball, it is difficult to bounce up, so by reducing the height dimension on the other end side, the previous game ball smoothly flows into the inlet. In addition, the space required for the inlet can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

Any one of the game machines D1 to D12 is characterized by comprising suppressing means for suppressing guidance of a game ball from the guide means to the seesaw member when the seesaw member is arranged at least in the second state. Game machine D13.

According to the gaming machine D13, any one of the gaming machines D1 to D12 is provided with the suppressing means for suppressing the guidance of the game ball from the guiding means to the seesaw member when the seesaw member is arranged at least in the second state. , the time for the game ball on the other end side of the seesaw member to be kicked can be secured. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

In the gaming machine D13, the guide means includes a delivery port for delivering game balls to the seesaw member, and the suppressing means includes a restricting portion disposed closer to one end of the seesaw member than the rotating shaft, When the seesaw member is rotated to at least the second state, at least a portion of the restricting portion projects to the delivery port, thereby suppressing delivery of the game ball from the delivery port to the seesaw member. Gaming machine D14.

According to the game machine D14, in addition to the effects of the game machine D13, the suppressing means includes a regulating portion arranged on the one end side of the seesaw member relative to the rotation shaft, and the seesaw member is rotated at least to the second state. By projecting at least a part of the regulating portion to the delivery port, the delivery of the game ball from the delivery port to the seesaw member is suppressed, so that the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. That is, the seesaw member can also serve as a mechanism for projecting the restricting portion into the delivery port, and a driving mechanism for displacing the restricting portion and a control means for controlling the displacement timing thereof can be eliminated.

The state in which the restricting portion protrudes into the delivery port and the delivery of the game ball is suppressed means that the game machine cannot pass through the delivery port and the game ball can pass through the delivery port. Including both. Even in the latter case (passable), the regulation portion protrudes into the delivery port and narrows the passage width of the delivery port so that the game ball collides with the inner wall of the delivery port and the outer wall of the regulation portion. Since the game ball is delivered from the delivery port, throwing of the game ball is suppressed. That is, the game balls in a continuous state can be separated.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Winning Device 65 as an Example>
A first seesaw member having one end side and the other end side rotatably supported by a rotating shaft is provided, and the seesaw member is lowered at one end side and raised at the other end side in an unloaded state. A game machine that forms a second state in which a game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft so that one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered, wherein the rotating shaft A game machine E1 characterized by comprising a discharge means for easily discharging a game ball placed on the other end side of the game machine E1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a seesaw member rotatably supported by a rotating shaft between one end side and the other end side. While forming a first state in which the other end side is raised while the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft, the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered A second state There is a gaming machine that forms a (for example, JP-A-2007-283136).

According to this gaming machine, when a game ball is dropped onto the seesaw member in the first state and placed between the rotating shaft and the other end, the weight of the game ball causes The other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised to form the second state. On the other hand, when the game ball placed between the rotating shaft and the other end side is ejected, the other end side is raised and the one end side is lowered to return to the first state. In other words, the weight of the dropped game ball can be used to alternately appear the first state and the second state, and an effect is produced by an action in which one end side and the other end side of the seesaw member are displaced up and down. It can be carried out.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, the second state is maintained in which the other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised, and the first state and the second state are maintained. There was a problem that it was not possible to alternately switch between

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the seesaw member is provided with a discharge means for easily discharging the game ball placed on the other end side, so that the other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised. Even in this state, the game ball can be discharged from the other end by the discharge means, the weight of the game ball on the other end can be removed, and the one end can be easily lowered. That is, the state in which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft (that is, the state in which the second state is formed) is terminated early, and the one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. a first state can be formed. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

In the gaming machine E1, the discharging means includes a rotatably supported shaft support portion, a receiving portion disposed on one side of the shaft supporting portion and receiving the game ball guided from the guide means, and a receiving portion. and a push-out portion arranged to sandwich the shaft support portion with respect to the portion, and when the receiving portion receives the game ball guided from the guide means, the push-out portion is rotated around the shaft support portion. A game machine E2 characterized in that a portion protrudes to the other end side of the seesaw member.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, when the receiving part receives the game ball guided from the guide means, the ejecting part rotates about the shaft supporting part so that the pushing part moves to the seesaw member. Since it protrudes to the other end side, the game ball placed on the other end side of the seesaw member can be pushed out by the pushing portion and discharged from the seesaw member. As a result, the other end side of the seesaw member can be raised by discharging the game ball by the pushing portion, and the one end side of the seesaw member can be lowered by the weight of the game ball received by the receiving portion. Early termination can facilitate switching between the first state and the second state. In addition, the operation of receiving the game ball by the receiving portion is used to rotate the ejecting means (protruding the push-out portion), so the drive mechanism for such rotation and the control means for controlling the rotation timing thereof can be eliminated.

In the game machine E2, the game machine E3 is characterized in that the shaft supporting portion of the discharge means is rotatably supported by the seesaw member.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects of the game machine E2, the discharge means is rotatably supported by the seesaw member at the shaft supporting portion, so that the relative position of the discharge means to the seesaw member can be made constant. . Therefore, the game ball guided from the guide means can be easily received by the receiving part, and the rotation around the shaft support part can be surely formed, and the pushing part projected to the other end side of the seesaw member by the rotation can be played. The game ball can be reliably pushed out (discharged) from the seesaw member by facilitating contact with the ball. As a result, it is possible to facilitate switching between the first state and the second state.

In the game machine E2 or E3, the receiving portion of the discharging means has a larger retractable amount than the pushing portion with respect to a virtual plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the seesaw member and the pivotal support portion of the discharging means. A gaming machine E4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2 or E3, the ejection means has a larger retractable amount of the receiving portion than the push-out portion. , and the energy received from the received game ball can be increased accordingly. As a result, it is possible to ensure the pushing force of the game ball by the pushing portion accompanying the retreat of the receiving portion. That is, the game ball can be discharged quickly and easily.

On the other hand, by making the retraction amount of the pushing portion smaller than that of the receiving portion, when the game ball rolling toward the other end of the seesaw member causes the pushing portion to retreat, the rolling trajectory of the game ball increases. can be suppressed, and such game balls can be quickly discharged easily.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the discharging means is mounted on the other end side of the rotating shaft by relatively raising one of the rotating shafts of the seesaw member in the axial direction with respect to the other in the axial direction. The game machine E5 is characterized by making it easy to discharge placed game balls.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E1 to E4, one of the rotation shafts of the seesaw member in the axial direction is raised relative to the other in the axial direction by the ejecting means, By increasing the downward inclination angle of the seesaw member from one axial direction to the other axial direction of the rotating shaft, a game ball placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft can be ejected from the seesaw member. This makes it easier to alternately switch between the first state and the second state.

It should be noted that the fact that one of the rotating shafts in the axial direction is raised relative to the other in the axial direction means that it is sufficient if the amount of rise in one of the axial directions is greater than the amount of rise in the other axial direction. Therefore, after being raised, one axial direction may be arranged at a lower position than the other axial direction.

In the game machine E5, when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, the discharging means moves one axial direction of the rotation shaft of the seesaw member in the first section. In the second section which is not raised relative to the other and which is closer to the second state than the first section, one of the rotation shafts of the seesaw member in the axial direction is relative to the other in the axial direction. The game machine E6 is characterized by being raised in a positive manner.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5, when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state toward the second state, the ejection means rotates the rotation axis of the seesaw member in the first section. in the second section, which is closer to the second state than the first section, the one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member is shifted to the other axial direction. , it is possible to reliably form the second state and smoothly alternately switch between the first state and the second state.

That is, when the operation of relatively raising one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member relative to the other axial direction is performed from the first section, the discharge of the game ball is accelerated, and the second state is surely formed. Can not. On the other hand, if the operation to raise one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member relative to the other axial direction is not performed, the ejection of the game ball is slowed down (residence time is lengthened), resulting in the second state. easier to maintain.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E5, when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, in the first section, one of the rotation shafts of the seesaw member in the axial direction is rotated to the other axial direction. On the other hand, since it does not rise relatively, it is possible to suppress the ejection of the game ball from being hastened (that is, to make the game ball stay), and to make it easier to reliably form the second state. On the other hand, in the second section, since one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other axial direction, the game ball can be discharged quickly, and the game ball is placed. The time (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) can be shortened. As a result, alternate switching between the first state and the second state can be performed smoothly while the second state can be reliably formed.

In the gaming machine E5 or E6, the seesaw member is formed with a cam on at least one side in the axial direction of the rotating shaft, and along with the rotation of the rotating shaft, from the axis of the rotating shaft to the outer peripheral surface of the cam. A game machine E7 characterized in that one of the rotation shafts of the seesaw member in the axial direction is raised relative to the other in the axial direction by increasing the distance of the seesaw member.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5 or E6, a cam is formed in at least one axial direction of the rotating shaft, and along with the rotation of the rotating shaft, from the axis of the rotating shaft to the outer peripheral surface of the cam By increasing the distance of the seesaw member, one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other axial direction, so control for controlling the drive mechanism and its drive timing for operating such a rotating shaft No means required. Moreover, the first section and the second section can be reliably formed, and the degree of freedom in designing the ratio of the first and second sections can be increased.

In any one of game machines E5 to E7, a push-up portion is provided on a moving locus when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, and the push-up portion hits the seesaw member. A game machine E8 characterized in that one of the rotation shafts of the seesaw member in the axial direction is raised relative to the other in the axial direction by being brought into contact with each other.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E5 to E7, the seesaw member is provided on the movement locus when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, When the push-up portion is brought into contact with the seesaw member, one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other axial direction. Control means for controlling timing can be made unnecessary. In addition, the first section and the second section can be reliably formed, and the degree of freedom in designing the ratio of each section can be increased.

<Regarding the concept of the invention as an example of the base side engaging member 12726>
A game machine comprising a base member and a displacement member rotatably disposed on the base member at its base end side and rotated between a retracted position and an extended position, wherein the base member comprises a base-side engagement member. In addition, the displacement member includes a displacement-side engagement member formed to be engageable with the base-side engagement member at the retracted position, and in a state in which the first displacement member is arranged at the extended position, the base The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the base-side engaging member is formed such that it is difficult for a player to visually recognize the member when viewed from the front.

Here, in a game machine such as pachinko, a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and a driving force applied to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. A performance member having a transmission member that transmits and a driving means that imparts a driving force to the transmission member is provided, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are provided via the first groove and the second groove provided in the transmission member. There is a gaming machine in which a member is connected to a transmission member (for example, JP-A-2009-100994).

In this conventional game machine, the connecting member connects the base member and the second displacement member in an erected state, and in the retracted position, the base member and the second displacement member are positioned relatively apart from the rotation axis of the first displacement member. 2 displacement members are connected by a connecting member. Therefore, even if the first displacement member tries to tilt the portion on the opposite side of the rotation shaft (that is, the second displacement member side) in the direction away from the base member, there will be a gap between the base member and the second displacement member. The tilting can be suppressed by the action of the intervening connecting member.

However, in the game machine F1, the base end side of the displacement member is rotatably supported, while the side opposite to the base end side (tip end side) is a free end. Therefore, at the retracted position, the side opposite to the proximal side (tip side) tends to tilt (forward) in a direction away from the base member due to its own weight and the weight of the decorative portion provided on the front side.

In this case, according to the gaming machine F1, the base member includes the base-side engagement member, the displacement member includes the displacement-side engagement member, and in a state in which the displacement member is displaced to the retracted position, the base-side engagement Since the member and the displacement-side engaging member are formed to be engageable, it is possible to suppress tilting of the side opposite to the base end side of the displacement member (the distal end side) in a direction away from the base member.

On the other hand, in the case where the base member is provided with the base-side engaging member and the displacement member is provided with the displacement-side engaging member as described above, when the displacement member is extended to the projecting position, the front surface of the base member is exposed, the base-side engagement member is visually recognized by the player, and the appearance is spoiled. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the base-side engaging member is formed so as to be difficult for the player to visually recognize when the base member is viewed from the front.

In the game machine F1, the base-side engaging member is disposed in front of the base member so as to be retractable, and when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base-side engaging member moves in front of the base member. and when the displacement member is rotated to the extended position, the base-side engagement member is retracted toward the back side of the base member.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, the base-side engaging member is disposed in front of the base member so as to be retractable, and when the displacement member is rotated to the projecting position, the base-side engaging member is engaged. Since the joining member is retracted toward the back side of the base member, the base-side engaging member can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize when the base member is viewed from the front, and the deterioration of the appearance can be suppressed.

Further, when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base-side engaging member protrudes from the front surface of the base member. be able to. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the displacement-side engaging member from interfering with other members when the displacement member is rotated. In other words, since the protrusion height of the displacement-side engaging member can be reduced, a space for displacing other members can be secured.

In the game machine F2, a drive means is provided for rotating the displacement member with respect to the base member, and the base-side engagement member is projected from the front surface of the base member by the action of the driving force of the drive means. A game machine F3 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, the driving means for rotating the displacement member with respect to the base member is provided, and the driving force of the driving means causes the base-side engagement member to move to the base member. Since it protrudes from the front, it can also be used as a driving means, and the product cost can be reduced. That is, the driving force for rotationally driving the displacement member can also be used as the driving force for protruding the base-side engaging member, making it unnecessary to separately provide a driving means for such projection.

As a form of projecting the base-side engaging member by the action of the driving force of the driving means, when the displacement member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the base-side engaging member is directly or indirectly engaged by the displacement member. When the member is displaced in the projecting direction, or when the transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the displacing member is displaced, the displacing member directly or indirectly displaces the base-side engaging member in the projecting direction. and the like are exemplified.

The gaming machine F3 is provided with biasing means for biasing the base-side engaging member in the retraction direction, and when the action of the driving force of the driving means is released, the action of the biasing force of the biasing means The game machine F4 is characterized in that the base-side engaging member is returned to the retracted position.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, the biasing means for biasing the base-side engaging member in the direction of insertion is provided, and when the action of the driving force of the driving means is released, the biasing means is activated. Since the base-side engaging member is returned to the retracted position by the action of the biasing force of the biasing means, it is not necessary to interlock both the projecting direction and the retracting direction with the action of the driving force of the driving means, and only the projecting direction is interlocked. The structure can be simplified accordingly.

In the gaming machine F1, the base-side engaging member is arranged so as to be retractable from the front surface of the base member, and when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base-side engaging member moves to the front surface of the base member. a gaming machine F5, wherein the base-side engaging member is advanced toward the front side of the base member when the displacement member is retracted from the base member and the displacement member is rotated to the extended position.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base side engagement member is retracted from the front of the base member. By engaging the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member, it is possible not only to suppress tilting of the base end side and the opposite side (distal end side) of the displacement member in a direction away from the base member, but also to prevent the base-side engaging member from tilting. By narrowing the distance between the engaging surfaces (inner surfaces) of the member and the displacement-side engaging member, it is possible to suppress back-and-forth rattling on the distal end side of the displacement member.

Further, when the displacement member is rotated to the extended position, the base-side engaging member is advanced toward the front of the base member, so that the base-side engaging member is visually recognized by the player when the base member is viewed from the front. It can be made difficult, and it can be suppressed that the appearance is spoiled.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the right rotation unit 18600 as an example>
a base member, a first displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the first displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member , wherein the first displacement member is formed to be displaceable in at least a first direction, and the second displacement member is capable of coming into contact with the first displacement member or the base member The inertial force generated by contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member acts as a force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member in the first direction. Characteristic game machine G1.

Here, in a game machine such as pachinko, a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and a driving force applied to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. There is a game machine provided with driving means for giving (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-100994). According to this gaming machine, it is possible to form a mode in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced and a mode in which only one of the first displacement member or the second displacement member is displaced.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, for example, in a mode in which only the second displacement member is displaced, the load on the drive means is relatively small, while in a mode in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced, Since the load on the driving means is relatively large, the load on the driving means changes (increases) abruptly when the mode is switched. As a result, there is a problem that the durability of the driving means is lowered, and the displacement speed is lowered when the mode is switched, making stable (constant) displacement difficult.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, the second displacement member is formed to be able to contact the first displacement member or the base member, and the second displacement member is generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member. Since the inertial force applied acts as a force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member in the first direction, the first mode of displacing the second displacement member is switched to the second mode of displacing the first displacement member. In this case, the action of the inertial force can be used as an auxiliary force, and a sudden change (increase) in the load of the driving means can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to improve the durability of the driving means, suppress a decrease in displacement speed when switching from the first mode to the second mode, and facilitate stable (constant) displacement. .

As the first mode and the second mode, for example, the first mode displaces only the second displacement member, and the second mode displaces both the first displacement member and the second displacement member. Alternatively, a mode is exemplified in which the first mode displaces only the second displacement member and the second mode displaces only the first displacement member. The latter aspect is particularly useful when the load required for displacement of the first displacement member is sufficiently greater than the load required for displacement of the second displacement member (for example, the weight of the first displacement member relative to the weight of the second displacement member). is sufficient).

In the gaming machine G1, the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the first displacement member. and the rotation axes of the second displacement member are parallel to each other.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the first displacement member. Since the directions of the rotation axes of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are parallel to each other, the inertial force generated by the contact of the second displacement member with the first displacement member or the base member is reduced to , can be efficiently acted on the first displacement member as a force for displacing the first displacement member in the first direction.

In the game machine G1 or G2, the direction of displacement of the second displacement member when the second displacement member is brought into contact with the first displacement member or the base member is a direction including a downward component in the direction of gravity. A game machine G3 characterized by.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1 or G2, the direction of displacement of the second displacement member when the second displacement member abuts against the first displacement member or the base member is downward in the direction of gravity. Since it is a direction including a facing component, it is possible to easily secure the inertial force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member.

A game machine G4 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines G1 to G3, the first direction is a direction including an upward component in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, since the first direction is a direction including an upward component in the gravity direction, the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base It is particularly effective to use the inertial force generated by the contact with the member as an assisting force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member in the first direction.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G4, the first displacement member has one end rotatably supported by the base member, and the second displacement member has one end supported by the first displacement member. When the other end side of the second displacement member is rotatably supported on the other end side, and the other end side of the second displacement member approaches the one end side of the first displacement member from the direction opposite to the first direction, the second displacement member a gaming machine G5, wherein the other end side of the is abutted against the base member.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines G1 to G4, one end side of the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and one end side of the second displacement member is the first displacement member. When the other end of the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the other end of the member and the other end of the second displacement member approaches the one end of the first displacement member from the direction opposite to the first direction, the other end of the second displacement member Since the first displacement member abuts against the base member, the inertial force generated by the abutment between the second displacement member and the base member can be efficiently acted as a force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member in the first direction. can be done. That is, when switching from the first mode in which the second displacement member is displaced to the second mode in which the first displacement member is displaced, the action of the inertial force is used as an auxiliary force for displacing the first displacement member in the first direction. Power can be used effectively.

As a result, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the driving means, improve the durability of the driving means, and reduce the displacement speed when switching from the first mode to the second mode. It can be restrained to facilitate stable (constant) displacement.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G4, the first displacement member has one end rotatably supported by the base member, and the second displacement member has one end supported by the first displacement member. When the other end side of the second displacement member is rotatably supported on the other end side and approaches the one end side of the first displacement member from the same direction as the first direction, the second displacement member is abutted against the first displacement member.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines G1 to G4, one end side of the first displacement member is rotatably pivotally supported by the base member, and one end side of the second displacement member is the first displacement member. When the other end of the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the other end of the member and the other end of the second displacement member approaches the one end of the first displacement member in the same direction as the first direction, the other end of the second displacement member Since the first displacement member contacts the first displacement member, the inertial force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member is effectively used as a force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member in the first direction. can act on That is, when switching from the first mode in which the second displacement member is displaced to the second mode in which the first displacement member is displaced, the action of the inertial force is used as an auxiliary force for displacing the first displacement member in the first direction. Power can be used effectively.

As a result, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the driving means, improve the durability of the driving means, and reduce the displacement speed when switching from the first mode to the second mode. It can be restrained to facilitate stable (constant) displacement.

In any one of game machines G1 to G7, a transmission member having a drive pin for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the first displacement member and the second displacement member, the first displacement member includes the drive pin and a non-interfering section connected to the working section and not interfering with the drive pin, wherein the second displacement member has a working section that receives the action from the drive pin. and a second groove having at least Gaming machine G8.

According to the game machine G8, in addition to the effects of the game machines G1 to G7, the first groove of the first displacement member is connected to the action section that receives the action from the drive pin and the action section, and the drive pin interferes with the action section. and the second groove of the second displacement member has at least an action section that is acted upon by the drive pin, so that the drive pin displaces the non-interference section of the first groove and the action section of the second groove. By doing so, a first mode in which the second displacement member is displaced while the first displacement member is maintained in a stopped state, and a drive pin is displaced in the action section of the first groove and the action section of the second groove. Thus, it is possible to form a second mode in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced, and to smoothly transition from the first mode to the second mode.

<Feature H group> (Demonstration control with AT type special figure 1 waiting)
a first acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition; a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; A first effect execution means for executing a first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means in a first effect period; second acquisition means for acquiring second information; second determination means for executing second determination based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means; and second determination by the second determination means a second effect execution means for executing a second effect based on the result in a second effect period; and a specific first effect or the second effect based on the fact that the result of the first determination is a specific first determination result a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when a specific second performance based on the result of the decision being the specific second decision result is executed. a first timing means for starting a first timing when execution of the first effect is completed and the first information is not acquired by the first obtaining means; and execution of the second performance is completed. a second timekeeping means for starting second timekeeping when the second information is not acquired by the second acquisition means; a notification executing means for starting execution of a first notification mode and starting execution of a second notification mode based on the second time counting becoming a second set value; and when the second acquisition condition is satisfied, A game machine H1 characterized by comprising a setting means capable of switching and setting a first period for terminating the first notification mode being executed and a second period for continuing the same.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines variably display symbols based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning slot, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the variative display is completed. (For example, JP-A-2006-000392). Such gaming machines are configured to display a specific screen (demonstration screen) when the symbols are not changing (playing), allowing the player to easily find an empty table. .

In addition, among the above-described conventional type gaming machines, there is a first symbol in which variable display is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening and the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening. There is a second symbol that is displayed in a variable manner based on the second symbol, and the symbols can be varied simultaneously (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221). In such a gaming machine, the first symbol and the second symbol have different variation periods, and a long variation period (for example, 10 minutes) is executed as the variation period for one of the symbols. there is something

In such a conventional gaming machine, if a specific screen (demonstration screen) is displayed when the variable display of both symbols is completed, the player can When the player ends the game, the next player continues to be in a state where it is difficult for the next player to play the game on that gaming machine (but the screen), so there is a problem that the operation of the game is reduced. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine H1, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the result of the first determination is Based on this, the first effect execution means executes the first effect during the first effect period. Further, based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, the second determination is executed by the second determination means based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means, and the second determination is performed. Based on the result, the second effect execution means executes the second effect during the second effect period. Then, a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result A privilege game that is advantageous to the player when executed is executed by the privilege game execution means, the execution of the first effect is completed, and the first information is not acquired by the first acquisition means. , when the first timing is started by the first timing means, the execution of the second effect is completed, and the second information is not acquired by the second obtaining means, the second timing is started by the second timing means. be done. The notification executing means starts the execution of the first notification mode when the first clock reaches the first set value, and performs the second notification when the second clock reaches the second set value. Execution of the aspect begins. In addition, the setting means switches and sets a first period during which the first notification mode being executed when the second acquisition condition is satisfied and a second period during which the first notification mode is continued.

As a result, even when the second effect is being executed, the first notification mode indicating that the first effect is not being executed can be continued. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily grasp the state of the gaming machine, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation of the game. Furthermore, when the second effect is executed, the setting means can switch between the first period for ending the first notification mode indicating that the first effect is not being executed and the second period for continuing. , it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

The configuration of the gaming machine H1 is, for example, a gaming machine configured to be able to execute a first effect and a second effect at the same time. It is preferable to use it for a game machine having a period during which the effect is substantially executed. In this case, during the period in which the second performance is not substantially executed, even if the second acquisition condition is satisfied, the first notification mode being executed is continued, and during the period in which the second performance is substantially executed. can terminate the first notification mode being executed when the second acquisition condition is satisfied.

The gaming machine H1 is characterized by having game state setting means capable of setting a first game state that facilitates execution of the first determination and a second game state that facilitates execution of the second determination. Game machine H2.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the following effects are produced. That is, the game state setting means sets a first game state in which the first determination is likely to be executed and a second game state in which the second determination is likely to be executed.

This makes it possible to set the first period or the second period according to the game state set by the game state setting means. Therefore, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine H2, the setting means sets the second period when the first game state is set by the game state setting means. The game machine H3 is characterized in that the first period is set when the game state is set.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H2, the following effects are produced. That is, the setting means sets the second period when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, and sets the first period when the second game state is set.

Thus, in a game state in which the first determination is likely to be executed, even if the second acquisition condition is met, the first notification mode being executed is continued, and in a game state in which the second determination is likely to be executed, the second notification mode is continued. When the acquisition condition is satisfied, the first notification mode being executed can be terminated. Therefore, it is possible to provide an appropriate effect according to the game state, and it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

A game machine H4 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines H1 to H3, the notification execution means terminates the second notification mode being executed based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. .

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines H1 to H3, the second notification mode being executed is terminated by the notification execution means based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, so that the second effect is executed. An effect can be executed according to the execution state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H4, the notification executing means executes the second notification mode while suppressing the first effect from being hindered even when the first effect is being executed. A gaming machine H5 characterized by:

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects of the game machines H1 to H4, the following effects are produced. That is, the second notification mode is executed by the notification executing means while suppressing the first effect from being disturbed even while the first effect is being executed.

As a result, it is possible to notify that the second effect is not being executed while the first effect is being executed, while preventing the first effect from being disturbed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game in which the game situation is easy for the player to understand.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H5, the first effect executing means and the second effect executing means are capable of simultaneously executing the first effect and the second effect. A game machine H6.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects of the game machines H1 to H5, the first effect execution means and the second effect execution means are configured so that the first effect and the second effect can be executed at the same time. There is an effect that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner of the situation of the first performance and the second performance that are executed simultaneously.

The game machine H7 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines H1 to H6, the notification executing means can simultaneously execute the first notification mode and the second notification mode.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H1 to H6, the notification execution means is configured to simultaneously execute the first notification mode and the second notification mode. There is an effect that the player can be notified of the situation of the performance and the second performance in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H7, the notification executing means notifies predetermined information other than information indicating the result of the second effect as the second notification mode when the first effect is being executed. A game machine H8 characterized by executing a predetermined notification mode.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first effect is being executed, the notification executing means executes a predetermined notification mode in which predetermined information other than the information indicating the result of the second effect is notified as the second notification mode.

Thereby, when the first effect is being executed, it is possible to suppress the notification of the information indicating the result of the previously executed second effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the result of the first effect with the result of the second effect, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8, the notification execution means executes a first effect indicating that the first effect is being executed as the second notification mode when the first effect is being executed. A game machine H9 characterized in that it executes a medium notification mode.

According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first effect is being executed, the notification execution means executes the first effect execution notification mode indicating that the first effect is being executed as the second notification mode.

As a result, it is possible to allow the player to easily understand the effect being executed, and it is possible to provide the game situation in an easy-to-understand manner.

Furthermore, according to the configuration of the gaming machine H6, information regarding the first effect that is actually being executed, out of the first effect and the second effect that can be executed at the same time, is displayed as the second notification mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the game situation can be provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H9, a first display area for displaying either the first notification mode or the second notification mode executed by the notification executing means, and a second display for displaying the other. and display control means for controlling display contents in the first display area and the second display area of the display means, wherein the display control means corresponds to the setting means. When the first period is set by, the first notification mode is displayed in the first display area, and when the second period is set, the second notification mode is displayed in the first display area A gaming machine H10 characterized by controlling the display contents of the display means so as to

According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display means has a first display area in which one of the first notification mode and the second notification mode executed by the notification execution means is displayed and a second display area in which the other is displayed, When the first period is set by the setting means, the first notification mode is displayed in the first display area, and when the second period is set, the second notification mode is displayed in the first display area. Then, the display contents of the display means are controlled by the display control means.

Thereby, the notification mode displayed in the first display area can be changed according to the game state. Therefore, it is possible to execute an easy-to-understand notification mode display according to the game state, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

<Characteristic group I> (demonstration control when the game state is varied)
a first acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition; a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; A first effect execution means for executing a first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means in a first effect period; second acquisition means for acquiring second information; second determination means for executing second determination based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means; and second determination by the second determination means a second effect execution means for executing a second effect based on the result in a second effect period; and a specific first effect or the second effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result. a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when a specific second performance based on the result of the decision being a specific second decision result is executed. wherein, when a specific condition is established, an advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state advantageous to the player until the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times; Variable control that makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first judgment when the advantageous state is set, and makes it easier to execute the first judgment than the second judgment when the advantageous state ends. means for setting a first setting when the first effect is not executed for a predetermined first period, and setting a second setting when the second effect is not executed for a predetermined second period. setting means for setting a first display setting to the display means on the basis that the first setting is set when the advantageous state is set; and setting the first display setting when the advantageous state is set; display setting means for setting a second display setting to the display means based on the second setting being set, wherein the display setting means sets the advantageous state in a state where the second display setting is made; is completed, a specific display setting different from the second display setting is set.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines variably display symbols based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning slot, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the variative display is completed. (For example, JP-A-2006-000392). Such gaming machines are configured to display a specific screen (demonstration screen) when the symbols are not changing (playing), allowing the player to easily find an empty table. .

In addition, among the above-described conventional type gaming machines, there is a first symbol in which variable display is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening and the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening. There is a second symbol that is displayed in a variable manner based on the second symbol, and the symbols can be varied simultaneously (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221). Further, there is a configuration in which a game state in which the first symbol is likely to be variably displayed and a game state in which the second symbol is likely to be variably displayed are set in accordance with the game state to improve the interest of the game.

In such a conventional gaming machine, if the game state shifts while a specific screen (demonstration screen) indicating that the variable display of one of the symbols has ended is displayed, the player will not be able to change the display content. There is a problem that it is difficult to grasp the

For example, in a predetermined game state, if the display area for symbols that are likely to be variably displayed is set to be larger than the display area for symbols that are difficult to be variably displayed, the displayed contents will be enlarged as the game state shifts. There is a problem that the game is different and the player is provided with a game that is difficult to understand. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine I1, the first information is acquired by the first acquisition means based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the first information, and the first determination is performed. A first effect based on the result of the first determination is executed in a first effect period by the first effect executing means. second information is acquired by the second acquisition means based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, and the second determination is performed by the second determination means based on the second information; A second effect based on the result of the second determination is executed in a second effect period by the second effect executing means. A specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result is executed. In this case, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. Then, when the specific condition is satisfied, the advantageous state setting means sets an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player until the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times. When the advantageous state is set, the variable control means makes it easier to execute the second judgment than the first judgment, and makes it easier to execute the first judgment than the second judgment when the advantageous state ends. The setting means sets the first setting when the first effect is not executed for a predetermined first period, and sets the second setting when the second effect is not executed for a predetermined second period. . Further, the display setting means sets the first display setting to the display means based on the fact that the first setting is set when the advantageous state is set, and the second display setting is set when the advantageous state is set. The second display setting is set to the display means based on the setting being set. In addition, when the advantageous state ends while the second display setting is set, a specific display setting different from the second display setting is set by the display setting means.

Accordingly, when the advantageous state ends while the second display setting is set, the specific display setting different from the second display setting is set by the display setting means, so the second display setting is set. Even in the state, the player can easily grasp that the advantageous state has ended. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine I1, the first display setting is set so that a predetermined first display mode is displayed on the display means, and the second display setting is a predetermined second display mode. A game machine I2 characterized in that it is displayed on display means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by setting the first display setting, a predetermined first display mode is displayed on the display means, and by setting the second display setting, a predetermined second display mode is displayed on the display means. be.

This allows the player to easily grasp the execution status of the first determination by the first determination means and the second determination by the second determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In the game machine I1 or I2, when the second effect is executed while the second display setting is being executed, the second effect is performed while the second display setting is maintained. A game machine I3 characterized in that a presentation mode is displayed on the display means.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second effect is executed while the second display setting is being executed, the effect mode corresponding to the second effect is displayed on the display means while the second display setting is maintained. .

Thereby, when the second effect is executed while the second display setting is being executed, the second effect can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

Here, the configuration of the gaming machine I3 may be provided, for example, in a gaming machine in which the second presentation period for executing the second presentation is set to be short. In this case, when the second performance is executed during the period in which the second display setting is being executed, the second performance in which the short second performance period is set can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the second display setting is to display on the display means a suggestive display mode suggesting that the advantageous state is set. A gaming machine I4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by setting the second display setting, the display means displays a suggestive display mode suggesting that it is a period in which the advantageous state is set.

As a result, it is possible to display information about the game state to the player using the period in which the second effect is not executed. Therefore, there is an effect that a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided by effectively utilizing the period in which the second effect is not executed.

In any one of the game machines I1 to I4, when the advantageous state is set, determination means for determining establishment of a specific condition based on information based on the execution of the first effect and the second effect, and the determination. A game machine I5, characterized by comprising: regulation means for regulating setting of the second display setting when the means determines that a specific condition is established.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the advantageous state is set, the determining means determines whether the specific condition is established based on the information based on the execution of the first effect and the second effect, and when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied, the regulating means restricts the setting of the second display setting.

As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the specific condition is established by not setting the second display setting. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In any one of the game machines I1 to I5, when the second determination is executed, a second effect period determining means for determining the second effect period from a plurality of second effect periods, and one other than the advantageous state. When the normal game state is set, the probability of selecting a longer period than when the advantageous state is set as the second performance period determined by the second performance period determination means is set high. A gaming machine I6 characterized by comprising: a probability variable means for making a game.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second determination is executed, the second effect period is determined from a plurality of second effect periods by the second effect period determining means. When one normal game state other than the advantageous state is set by the probability varying means, the second effect period determined by the second effect period determining means is longer than when the advantageous state is set. The probability that the period will be selected is set high.

As a result, when the advantageous state is set, it becomes possible to execute more second determinations than when one normal game state other than the advantageous state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game aiming at an advantageous state in which the second determination is frequently executed.

A game machine I7 characterized in that, in any of the game machines I1 to I6, the first effect and the second effect can be executed simultaneously.

According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines I1 to I6, the first effect and the second effect are executed simultaneously, so the game can be efficiently executed.

<Characteristic J group> (Securing result production in AT type)
a first acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition; a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; a first effect execution means for executing a first effect in a first effect period based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means; Second determination means for executing 2 determination, second effect execution means for executing a second effect based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means in a second effect period, and the result of the first determination When a specific first effect based on a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result is executed, the game and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player, the game machine is advantageous to the player until the first performance and the second performance are executed a predetermined number of times from a plurality of game states. A game state setting means capable of setting an advantageous game state, and a second performance period setting means for making it easy to set the second performance period short when the advantageous game state is set by the game state setting means. Then, when the advantageous game state ends, a specific first effect period is set as the first effect period until the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times. A gaming machine J1 characterized by comprising: first effect period determining means.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines variably display symbols based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning slot, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the variative display is completed. In this way, in the gaming machine, an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is set by increasing the probability of a winning lottery or facilitating the execution of the lottery, and during the period in which the advantageous state continues. There is a system that displays game results such as the number of hits that have occurred and the number of winning balls on a display screen (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-35664). In such a gaming machine, the game result is displayed on the display screen after the advantageous state ends.

In addition, among the above-described conventional type gaming machines, there is a first symbol in which variable display is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening and the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening. There is a second symbol that is displayed in a variable manner based on the second symbol, and the symbols can be varied simultaneously (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221).

In such a conventional gaming machine, since both symbols are configured to fluctuate at the same time, it depends on the game situation whether the first symbol to be executed after the end of the advantageous state is the first symbol or the second symbol. may be different. In such a gaming machine, if only the first variation time period after the end of the advantageous state is set as the variation period during which the game result can be displayed, the game result display may not be displayed depending on the pattern that is first varied after the end of the advantageous state. There is a problem that the player cannot be displayed for a sufficient period of time, and the motivation of the player is lowered. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine J1, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the result of the first determination is Based on this, the first effect execution means executes the first effect during the first effect period. Further, based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, the second determination is executed by the second determination means based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means, and the second determination is performed. Based on the result, the second effect execution means executes the second effect during the second effect period. Then, a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result A privilege game that is advantageous to the player when executed is executed by the privilege game execution means, and the game is played until the first performance and the second performance are executed a predetermined number of times from a plurality of game states. An advantageous game state advantageous to a player is settable by a game state setting means, and when the advantageous game state is set by the game state setting means, the second performance period is set short by the second performance period setting means. When the advantageous game state ends, a specific first performance period is set as the first performance period until the first performance and the second performance are executed a predetermined number of times. Determined by the determining means.

As a result, it is possible to set a specific period as the first performance period when the advantageous game state ends, so that the player can grasp the content of the performance executed when the advantageous game state ends. This has the effect of suppressing a situation in which the player's motivation is lowered due to the fact that the contents of the presentation cannot be grasped.

As an effect executed when the advantageous game state ends, an effect indicating the game result during the advantageous game state (for example, the number of jackpots executed during the advantageous game state or the total number of prize balls) may be executed. In this case, there is an effect that the player can easily grasp the game result during the advantageous game state after the advantageous game state ends.

Further, as in the gaming machine J1, by setting the first effect period to be executed after the end of the advantageous game state to be the specific first effect period, the first effect to be executed using the specific first effect period is advantageous. It can be executed after the game state ends. As a result, for example, it is not necessary to set the first effect period executed at the end (final stage) of the advantageous game state as the first effect period, so that the player can smoothly execute the advantageous game state. effective.

A gaming machine J2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine J1, the predetermined number of times is two or more.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1, the predetermined number of times is two or more. It can be executed using a specific first performance period, and the player can grasp the contents of the performance to be executed when the advantageous game state ends, and the player cannot understand the contents of the performance. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which motivation is lowered.

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the first effect period determining means selects a shortened first effect period shorter than the specific first effect period when a game state different from the advantageous game state is set. A gaming machine J3 characterized by having a high percentage of playing games.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a game state different from the advantageous game state is set, the ratio of selecting the shortened first effect period shorter than the specific first effect period is increased by the first effect period determining means.

As a result, it is possible to set only a specific first effect period set for a predetermined number of times after the end of the advantageous gaming state to a period longer than the other first effect periods. By setting the overall length of the first effect period to be executed, it is possible to prevent the game from slowing down and lowering the player's motivation.

In any one of the game machines J1 to J3, the probability that the first determination is determined as the specific first determination result and the probability that the second determination is determined as the specific second determination result are set to be the same. and the second determination means determines, with a predetermined probability, a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result when the second determination does not determine the specific second determination result. The privilege game execution means executes a special privilege game in which a privilege equal to or lower than the privilege game is given when the second effect based on the special second determination result is executed. A gaming machine J4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the probability that the first determination results in the specific first determination result and the probability that the second determination results in the specific second determination result are set to be the same, and the second determination results in the specific second determination result. If it is not determined, the second determination means determines a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result with a predetermined probability. Then, when the second effect based on the special second determination result is executed, a special privilege game is executed in which a privilege equal to or lower than the privilege game is given by the privilege game executing means.

Thus, the second determination in which the second effect is executed is more advantageous to the player than the first determination in which the first effect is executed. Therefore, an advantageous game state in which the second effect period in which the second effect is executed is likely to be set to be short can be reliably changed to an advantageous state for the player, and there is an effect that the player's willingness to play can be enhanced. .

In addition, according to the gaming machine J4, by executing a special privilege game based on the fact that the determination result of the second determination means is the special second determination result, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is formed. However, it suffices that the game state in which the second effect period is set to be short becomes an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player. The special privilege game may be configured to be executed with a lower probability than the special privilege game (first special privilege game) executed based on the determination result of the first determination means. It may be configured to be a privilege game with a lower value than the special privilege game (second special privilege game) executed based on the determination result.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, when the advantageous gaming state is set, the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first determination, and when the advantageous gaming state ends, the second determination is performed. The game machine J5 is characterized by having variable control means for varying a state in which the first determination is more likely to be executed than the determination.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the advantageous gaming state is set, the second judgment is more likely to be executed than the first judgment, and when the advantageous gaming state is terminated, the first judgment is more likely to be executed than the second judgment. It is varied by the variable control means.

This makes it easier to execute the second determination in the advantageous gaming state than in gaming states other than the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, the advantageous game state can be changed to a game state more advantageous to the player, and there is an effect that the game motivation of the player aiming for the advantageous game state can be enhanced.

Note that the variable control means of the gaming machine J4 includes, for example, a configuration that varies the length of the presentation period between the first presentation period and the second presentation period, and a configuration that varies the ease with which the second acquisition condition is established. can be considered.

In the gaming machine J5, the variable control means is characterized in that the selection ratio is variably set so as to vary the length of the presentation period between the first presentation period and the second presentation period. Game machine J6.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the selection ratio is variably set so as to vary the length of the presentation period between the first presentation period and the second presentation period by the variable control means.

As a result, there is an effect that the easiness of execution of the first determination and the second determination can be easily varied.

<Feature K group> (AT type, even if one wins a small hit, the other variable production is continued, and the fluctuation production that balances the balance after the small hit is executed)
a first acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition; a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; a first effect execution means for executing a first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means in a first effect period; and the first effect of the first effect executed by the first effect execution means. a first performance period determination means for determining a performance period from a plurality of performance periods; a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition; a second effect executing means for executing a second effect based on the result of the second determination by the determining means in a second effect period; and the second effect period of the second effect executed by the second effect executing means. a second performance period determining means for determining from a plurality of performance periods; 2. A gaming machine having privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when a specific second effect based on the determination result is executed, wherein the privilege game executing means Temporary stop means for temporarily stopping timing of the first effect period of the first effect being executed or the second effect period of the second effect being executed when the privilege game is executed, and the privilege game release means for releasing the temporary stop by the temporary stop means based on the end of the above, and even when the timing is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop means, the first effect execution means or the second effect execution means A continuation means for executing the first effect or the second effect, and a means for continuing to execute the first effect or the second effect, even when the first effect or the second effect ends, when there is a remaining period of the first effect period or the second effect period. , and a specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect in the remaining period of the gaming machine K1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a variable display is executed for a predetermined period based on the winning of a game ball to the first start winning opening and the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening. There is a second pattern that is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period based on the pattern, and the patterns can be changed simultaneously (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221). In such a gaming machine, when one of the first symbol and the second symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that the winning symbol has been won, the fluctuation period of the other symbol that is being variably displayed is reduced. Some machines are constructed such that measurement is interrupted, and when the winning game ends, the interrupted measurement of the fluctuation period is restarted.

In such a conventional gaming machine, the player expects that the fluctuation display based on the symbols for which the measurement of the fluctuation period is interrupted during the fluctuation display will be stopped based on the interruption of the measurement of the fluctuation period. However, there is a problem that the variable display that the player has been watching while playing is suddenly stopped, which spoils the enjoyment of the game. Also, even if the measurement of the fluctuation period is interrupted, if the fluctuation display is continuously displayed, there will be an error between the end timing of the fluctuation period and the end timing of the fluctuation display (that is, the error for the interruption period ) occurs, and an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort is executed, causing a loss of interest in the game. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine K1, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the result of the first determination is Based on this, the first effect executing means executes the first effect for the first effect period determined from the plurality of effect periods by the first effect period determining means. Further, based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, the second determination is executed by the second determination means based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means, and the second determination is performed. Based on the result, the second performance execution means executes the second performance during the second performance period determined from a plurality of performance periods by the second performance period determination means. Then, a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result A privilege game that is advantageous to the player when executed is executed by the privilege game execution means, and when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, the first effect being executed is determined. The timing of the first effect period or the second effect period of the second effect is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop means, and the temporary stop by the temporary stop means is canceled by the release means based on the end of the privilege game. Even when the timing is temporarily stopped by the temporary stopping means, the continuation means causes the first performance executing means or the second performance executing means to execute the first performance or the second performance, and the first performance or the second performance. Even when is finished, if there is a remaining period of the first performance period or the second performance period, the specified performance execution means executes the specified performance in the remaining period.

As a result, even if the timing of the first effect period of the first effect or the second effect period of the second effect being executed by the temporary stop means is temporarily stopped, the first effect or the second effect is continued. can perform the performance. Therefore, it is possible to continue to execute the effect that the player has been watching while anticipating, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, even when the first performance or the second performance ends, if there is a remaining period of the first performance period or the second performance period, the specific performance executing means executes the specific performance in the remaining period. Even if there is an error between the timing at which the first performance or the second performance ends and the timing at which the first performance period or the second performance period ends, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable, There is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine K1, the first effect is set in advance with effect periods corresponding to a plurality of the first effect periods determined by the first effect period determining means, and the second effect is the second effect. The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that performance periods are set in advance corresponding to a plurality of second performance periods determined by a second performance period determining means.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1, the following effects are produced. That is, the first effect is set in advance with effect periods corresponding to a plurality of first effect periods determined by the first effect period determining means, and the second effect is set in advance with a plurality of second effect periods determined by the second effect period determining means. A production period corresponding to the production period is set in advance.

Thus, the performance period during which the first performance is executed and the performance period during which the second performance is executed are determined in advance, and the timing at which the first performance or the second performance ends and the first performance period or the second performance period are determined. It is possible to execute a specific effect when an error occurs in the timing of the end of. Therefore, the period during which the first effect or the second effect is executed can be set in advance regardless of the temporary stop of the timing by the temporary stop means, so that the processing load for setting the effect period can be reduced. be.

In the game machine K1 or K2, the first effect and the second effect are the result of the first determination or the second determination in a predetermined period until the first effect period or the second effect period respectively elapses. A game machine K3 characterized in that a fixed effect mode indicating is set.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1 or K2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, for the first effect and the second effect, a fixed effect mode indicating the result of the first determination or the second determination is set for a predetermined period until the respective first effect period or second effect period elapses.

Thus, even if the temporary stop means does not temporarily stop the clocking, the result of the first determination or the second determination can be indicated by executing the first effect or the second effect. Therefore, there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

In the game machine K3, the game machine K4 is characterized in that the specific effect comprises at least part of the fixed effect mode.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effects of the game machine K3, the specific effect is composed of at least a part of the fixed effect mode, so the specific effect is executed after the first effect or the second effect is finished. Even so, there is an effect that the effect can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the privilege game executing means is executed based on the determination by the first determining means that the special first determination result is different from the specific first determination result. A special second effect is executed when a special first effect is executed or when the second determination means determines that the special second determination result is different from the specific second determination result. The gaming machine K5 is characterized by executing a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the privilege game when executed.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a special first effect is executed based on the fact that the first determination means determines that the special first determination result is different from the specific first determination result, or the second determination means specifies When a special second effect that is executed based on the fact that it is determined as a special second determination result different from the second determination result of is executed, the privilege game execution means gives the player more than the privilege game An advantageous special game is executed.

As a result, the player can play the game while having expectations for both the game executed by the first determination means and the game executed by the second determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines K1 to K5, the specific effect executing means is different from the specific effect when the first effect or the second effect ends while the privilege game is being executed. The game machine K6 is characterized in that a special performance is executed at least during the remaining period.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first performance or the second performance ends during the period in which the privilege game is executed by the specific performance executing means, the special performance different from the specific performance is executed at least in the remaining period.

As a result, when the first performance or the second performance ends, a special performance different from the specific performance is executed when a remaining period longer than the remaining period of the first performance period or the second performance period occurs. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of discomfort even when the specific effect alone causes an error that is insufficient.

In addition, as a special effect used in the game machine K6, the period from the end of the first effect or the second effect to the end of the first effect period or the second effect period is used to produce a different effect from the specific effect. may be executed, and the first effect or the second effect ends during the period from the end of the first effect or the second effect to the end of the first effect period or the second effect period. , a new effect is executed in the period until the privilege game is finished, and a specific effect is executed in the period from the end of the privilege game to the end of the first effect period or the second effect period. . In this case, the latter configuration has the advantage of being able to reduce the volume of effect data.

In any one of the game machines K1 to K6, a remainder for determining the length of the remaining period from the end of the first effect or the second effect to the end of the first effect period or the second effect period. A gaming machine K7 characterized by comprising a period discriminating means and a specific effect mode determining means for determining the effect mode of the specific effect based on the result of discrimination by the remaining period discriminating means.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K6, the following effect is exhibited, that is, after the first presentation or the second presentation ends, the first presentation period or the second presentation The length of the remaining period until the end of the period is determined by the remaining period determination means, and the specific effect mode determination means determines the effect mode of the specific effect based on the result of the determination.

As a result, since the effect mode of the specific effect can be determined based on the length of the remaining period, it is possible to execute an effect suitable for the player, thereby increasing the effect of effect.

Here, as the specific effect determined based on the length of the remaining period, for example, it is determined that the remaining period is so short that it is difficult for the player to grasp the content of the specific effect to be executed during the remaining period. In this case, the effect mode using all or part of the first effect or the second effect is set as the effect mode of the specific effect. As a result, the specific performance can be executed as if the first performance or the second performance is extended, and the specific performance can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable. In this case, it is preferable to execute the specific effect including the aspect of notifying that the first effect or the second effect is extended. As a result, for a player who cannot grasp the contents of the specific production, the specific production is executed as if the first production or the second production is extended, and for the player who can grasp the contents of the specific production. In addition, by notifying that the performance mode of the first performance or the second performance is extended, it is possible to suppress the misunderstanding that the first performance or the second performance is not finished due to the malfunction of the game machine. It has the effect of being able to

Further, when it is determined that the remaining period is long enough for the player to fully grasp the content of the specific effect to be executed during the remaining period, information indicated by the first effect or the second effect in the specific effect Information other than (information indicating the determination result of the determination means) may be displayed in an effect mode. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with new information using the remaining period, and to prevent the player from losing his or her desire to play.

In the gaming machine K7, the privilege effect mode determining means selects at least one of the fixed effect mode as the effect mode of the specific effect when the remaining period determining means determines that the remaining period is shorter than a predetermined period. A game machine K8 characterized in that it determines a specific performance mode composed of parts.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the remaining period determination means determines that the remaining period is shorter than the predetermined period, the special effect mode configured by at least a part of the fixed effect mode is determined by the privilege effect mode determination means as the effect mode of the specific effect. determined by

As a result, the specific performance can be executed as if the first performance or the second performance is extended, and the specific performance can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In the gaming machine K7 or K8, when the remaining period determining means determines that the remaining period is longer than a predetermined period, the privilege effect mode determining means selects the first effect or A gaming machine K9 is characterized in that it determines a specific effect mode including information different from information included in the second effect.

According to the game machine K9, in addition to the effects of the game machine K7 or K8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the remaining period determination means determines that the remaining period is longer than the predetermined period, the specific effect mode including information different from the information included in the first effect or the second effect is used as the effect mode of the specific effect. It is determined by the privilege presentation mode determining means.

As a result, it is possible to provide the player with new information using the remaining period, and to prevent the player from losing his or her desire to play.

<Characteristic group L> (ST number display control)
specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game advantageous to the player for a specific number of times when a predetermined condition is established; frequency updating means for updating the number of times the specific game is executed by the specific game execution means; Remaining number determination means for determining the number of remaining times of the specific number of times, Number of times reporting means for reporting the number of times equal to or less than the remaining number of times determined by the remaining number of times determining means, and increasing the number of times reported by the number of times reporting means. A gaming machine L1, characterized by comprising privilege notification execution means capable of executing privilege notification according to a predetermined rule, and rule switching means capable of switching the predetermined rule.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines variably display symbols based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning slot, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the variative display is completed. In this way, the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a specific game that is advantageous to the player a specific number of times by increasing the probability of a winning lottery or facilitating the execution of the lottery, and the specific game is executed. There is a device that displays the remaining number of times to be performed on a display screen (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-6562).

In such a conventional gaming machine, the remaining number of times the specific game is executed is displayed on the display screen. There was a problem of hoarding. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine L1, when a predetermined condition is established, a specific game advantageous to the player is executed a specific number of times by the specific game executing means, and the number of times the specific game is executed by the specific game executing means is updated. Updated by means. The remaining number of times of the specific number of times is discriminated by the remaining number of times discriminating means, and the number of times equal to or less than the remaining number of times discriminated by the remaining number of times discriminating means is notified by the number of times informing means. A privilege notification for increasing the number of times notified by the frequency notification means is executed by the privilege notification execution means based on a predetermined rule, and the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means.

As a result, it is possible to notify the number of times the specific game is executed which is equal to or less than the remaining number of times. Therefore, even if the number of times notified is reduced, the game can be played while expecting that the specific game will be continued, and the player's motivation can be prevented from decreasing. has the effect of being able to

Furthermore, by executing the privilege notification that increases the number of times notified by the number of times notification means, it is possible to increase the number of times that the specific game is confirmed to be executed for the player. As a result, the player can continue playing the game while having a moderate sense of security.

In addition, since the rule for executing the privilege notification can be switched, it is possible to increase the number of times notified by the number of times notification means in various patterns. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

The game machine L2 is characterized in that the game machine L1 has operation means that can be operated by the player, and the rule switching means switches the predetermined rule based on the operation of the operation means.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effects of the game machine L1, the following effects are produced. That is, the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means based on the player's operation on the operable operation means.

Therefore, since the player can switch the predetermined rules according to his or her taste, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine L1 or L2, the rule switching means executes a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the privilege notification each time the number of games is updated, and executes the privilege notification based on the result of the lottery. It is configured to be switchable between a first rule and a second rule for determining whether or not to execute the privilege notification based on the number of times notified by the frequency notification means being equal to or less than a predetermined number of times. A gaming machine L3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1 or L2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the rule switching means executes a determination as to whether or not to execute a privilege notification every time the number of games is updated, and a first rule in which the privilege notification is executed based on the determination result; and a second rule in which it is determined whether or not to execute the privilege notification based on the number of times the notification is given by the rule becomes equal to or less than a predetermined number of times.

As a result, it is possible to execute privilege notification according to rules with different tastes.

In any one of the game machines L1 to L3, the privilege notification executing means executes the privilege notification if the remaining number of times is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times when the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means. A gaming machine L4 characterized by:

According to the game machine L4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines L1 to L3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means by the privilege notification executing means, if the remaining number of times is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times, the privilege notification is executed.

Thereby, privilege information can be executed at the timing when the predetermined rule is switched. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while expecting that the predetermined rule will be switched by the rule switching means, and it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

In the game machine L4, the privilege notification executing means executes the privilege notification indicating that the number of times possible within the range of the remaining number of times among the preset upper limit number of times is increased. game machine L5.

According to the game machine L5, in addition to the effects of the game machine L4, the following effects are produced. That is, the privilege notification executing means executes the privilege notification indicating that the number of times that can be played within the range of the remaining number of times among the preset upper limit number of times is increased.

As a result, it is possible to complicate the mode of privilege notification, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

<Feature M group> (Attractor award-winning production determined by lottery)
A discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a privilege game for executing one privilege game among a plurality of different privilege games based on the fact that the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. When the privilege game is executed by the execution means and the privilege game execution means, a predetermined condition is established to change from a first state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter to a second state in which it is easier to enter than in the first state. a variable ball entry means for varying until a game ball enters the variable ball entry means; a condition determination means for determining establishment of an execution condition based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entrance means; production execution means capable of executing production when the game is executed; ratio variable means for variably setting the ratio at which the execution condition is satisfied based on the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means; A gaming machine M1 characterized by having:

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines variably display symbols based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning slot, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the variative display is completed. In this way, in the gaming machine, when a winning game is executed, a specific winning hole is opened, and there is one that notifies that a game ball has won in the specific winning hole (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-138735). . In addition, there is also a configuration in which a plurality of winning games with different opening patterns of the specific winning opening are set, and the number of game balls that can be won in the specific winning opening varies depending on the winning game to be executed. By making it difficult to understand which winning game is being executed with respect to the player, there is also a game that improves the interest of the game by making the player predict the game.

In such a conventional gaming machine, notification is executed each time a game ball wins a prize in a specific winning hole, so that the player can easily grasp that a winning game is being executed. However, since the notification is executed every time a game ball wins in a specific winning opening, just by grasping the content of the notification that is executed each time a game ball wins in a specific winning opening, the winning that is being executed There is a problem that the player can easily grasp the type of game.

Furthermore, in a gaming machine that shifts the game state after the end of the winning game to a state advantageous to the player depending on the type of the winning game to be executed, making it difficult to understand the type of the winning game to be executed enhances the interest of the game. However, in the case of using such a gaming machine, if notification is executed every time a game ball wins in a specific winning hole, while expecting the game state to shift after the winning game ends There is a problem that the winning game cannot be performed, and the player's desire to play is lowered. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine M1, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and one privilege game among a plurality of different privilege games is selected based on the discrimination result being a specific discrimination result. It is executed by the privilege game executing means. When the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means, the variable ball entry means establishes a predetermined condition from a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to a second state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the first state. variable until The establishment of the execution condition is determined by the condition determination means based on the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means, and the performance is executed by the performance execution means when the condition determination means determines that the execution condition is satisfied. be done. Then, based on the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the rate at which the execution condition is established is variably set by the rate variable means.

Thereby, based on the type of privilege game, it is possible to vary the rate at which the performance is executed based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of the privilege game and lowering the player's willingness to play by the effect executed by the effect executing means.

The game machine M1 has payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls to the player based on the game balls entering the variable ball entry means, and the effect is The gaming machine M2 is characterized in that it is set based on the number of said prize balls paid out by said paying-out means.

According to the game machine M2, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the game balls entering the variable ball entry means, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player as prize balls by the payout means, and the number of prize balls paid out by the payout means is increased. Production is set based on the number.

As a result, the effect executing means executes the effect, so that the player can easily grasp that the privilege game is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player does not realize that a privilege game that is advantageous to the player has been executed, and to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine M1 or M2, the privilege game executing means includes a first privilege game in which the game ball is likely to enter the variable ball entering means and a second privilege game in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first privilege game. 2 privilege game can be executed at least, and the ratio variable means sets the ratio lower when the first privilege game is executed than when the second privilege game is executed. A gaming machine M3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine M3, the privilege game execution means provides a first privilege game in which the game ball is likely to enter the ball entering means, and a second privilege game in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first privilege game. and/or are executed. Then, when the first bonus game is executed, the ratio of fulfillment of the execution condition is set lower than when the second bonus game is executed by the ratio varying means.

Thereby, when the first privilege game and the second privilege game with different easiness of entering the ball into the ball-entering means are executed, it is possible to approximate the number of executions of the performance executed by the performance executing means. becomes. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of the privilege game and lowering the player's willingness to play by the effect executed by the effect executing means.

Here, when using the configuration of the game machine M2, regardless of the type of the privilege game execution means, the game ball that first entered the ball entry means is always (with a high probability) performed by the effect execution means. It is preferable that the performance is executed. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the privilege game has been executed, and furthermore, it is possible to provide a performance that does not allow the player to easily grasp the type of the privilege game that is being executed.

A game machine M4 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines M1 to M3, the effect is to display a display mode as at least one of the effect modes on a display means.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines M1 to M3, the display mode is displayed on the display means as at least one of the presentation modes, so that the player can understand the content displayed on the display means. There is an effect that the player can easily grasp that the privilege game has been executed based on this.

In the gaming machine M3 or M4, in the first privilege game, a period from when the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state until the predetermined condition is satisfied is set longer than in the second privilege game. A game machine M5 characterized in that

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effects of the game machine M3 or M4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the period from when the variable ball entering means is changed to the second state by the first privilege game to when the predetermined condition is established is set longer than in the second privilege game.

As a result, there is an effect that the first privilege game can be reliably executed as a privilege game in which the ball is easier to enter than the second privilege game.

In the game machine M3 or M5, the game machine M6 is characterized in that the number of times the first privilege game is changed to the second state is set larger than the number of times the second privilege game is changed.

According to the game machine M6, in addition to the effects of the game machine M3 or M4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of times of changing to the second state by the first privilege game is set larger than that of the second privilege game.

As a result, there is an effect that the first privilege game can be reliably executed as a privilege game in which the ball is easier to enter than the second privilege game.

Any one of claims M1 to M6, further comprising second rate variable means for variably setting a rate at which the execution condition is established based on the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means. A gaming machine M7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines M1 to M6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second rate varying means variably sets the rate at which the execution condition is established based on the number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means.

As a result, it is possible to change the rate at which the performance is executed based on the number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to set the performance execution ratio in a more complicated manner.

In the gaming machine M7, the privilege game executing means includes a first privilege game in which the game ball is likely to enter the ball entering means and a second privilege game in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first privilege game. and the second rate varying means makes it more difficult for the execution condition to be established as the number of game balls entering the variable means increases. M8.

According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least one of the first privilege game in which the game ball is easy to enter the ball entering means and the second privilege game in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first privilege game by the privilege game execution means. is executed. Then, by the second rate varying means, the more the number of game balls entering the variable means increases, the more difficult it becomes to establish the execution condition.

As a result, it is possible to approximate the number of times of effects executed by the effect executing means between when the first privilege game is executed and when the second privilege game is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of the privilege game and lowering the player's willingness to play by the effect executed by the effect executing means.

In any one of the game machines M2 to M8, the effect executing means displays a divided display mode indicating the number obtained by dividing the number of the prize balls to be paid out by the payout means as the effect to the payout by the payout means. The game machine M9 is characterized in that it is set so as to correspond to the number of prize balls.

According to the game machine M9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines M2 to M8, the following effects are produced. That is, the performance execution means sets the divided display mode indicating the number of the divided number of the prize balls put out by the payout means as the performance so as to correspond to the number of the prize balls put out by the payout means.

This makes it possible to display a plurality of split display modes in one performance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of the privilege game and lowering the player's willingness to play by the effect executed by the effect executing means. Also, even in a gaming machine having privilege games with different numbers of winning balls, the same effect can be obtained by executing the effect using the split display mode.

<Feature N group> (Variable number of additions with PUSH effect)
privilege information determination means for determining privilege information that is advantageous to the player; storage means capable of storing the privilege information determined by the privilege information determination means; and at least the privilege information stored in the storage means. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to a corresponding player, and when the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means, the privilege is made to correspond to the privilege information stored in the storage means. Privilege information updating means for updating to privilege information reduced from privileges, display means for displaying identification information based on privilege information less than the privilege information stored in the storage means, and display on the display means. Determination means for determining the privilege information stored in the storage means as the upper limit, an operation means operable by the player, and corresponding to the operation timing when the operation means is operated. setting means for variably setting the privilege information; variable setting means for varying the privilege information set by the setting means based on a specific condition; and the setting means based on the operation of the operation means. and a display updating means for acquiring the privilege information set by the display means and updating the privilege information corresponding to the identification information displayed on the display means to the corresponding identification information. A gaming machine N1 characterized by:

Here, game machines such as pachinko machines have operation means such as operation buttons that can be operated by the player, and are capable of executing operation effects to prompt the player to operate the operation means as a kind of entertainment effect. (for example, JP-A-2006-263523). In this conventional game machine, by operating the operation button in the operation presentation, a special presentation different from the usual one is generated, or a win is announced, etc., to improve the interest of the player.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since the operation effect is executed as part of the effect of notifying the result of the predetermined winning lottery, the result of the player's operation of the frame button is the result of the effect (the winning (whether or not it is notified) was irrelevant. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to increase the player's willingness to participate in the operation presentation. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine N1, privilege information that is advantageous to the player is determined by the privilege information determining means. The privilege information determined by the privilege information determining means is stored in the storage means, and a privilege giving advantage to the player corresponding to at least part of the stored privilege information is given by the privilege giving means. When the privilege is given by the privilege giving means, the privilege information is updated to the privilege information obtained by subtracting the privilege corresponding to the privilege information stored in the storage means by the privilege information updating means. Identification information based on privilege information less than the privilege information stored in the storage means is displayed on the display means. The privilege information to be displayed on the display means is determined by the determination means with the privilege information stored in the storage means as the upper limit. When the operation means is operated by the player, privilege information corresponding to the operation timing is variably set by the setting means. The privilege information set by the setting means is varied by the variable setting means based on specific conditions. The privilege information set by the setting means is acquired based on the operation of the operation means, and the privilege information corresponding to the identification information displayed on the display means is updated to the corresponding identification information by the display updating means. .

This makes it possible to update the privilege information based on the operation of the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the willingness to participate in the operation performance of the player can be improved.

In the game machine N1, a determination means for executing a determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result. and game execution means, wherein the privilege granting means maintains a high probability state for a predetermined number of times to increase the probability that the determination means determines that the specific determination result is obtained, until the determination by the determination means is performed. The gaming machine N2 is characterized in that the privilege is continuously set each time the determination is executed.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the judgment is executed by the judging means based on the establishment of the judging condition. A privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result. Then, the high-probability state that increases the probability of being determined as a specific determination result by the determination means is given as a benefit each time the determination is performed until the determination is performed by the determination means a predetermined number of times. set to continue.

As a result, the high-probability state that increases the probability of being determined as a specific determination result by the determination means continues to be set until the determination is performed by the determination means a predetermined number of times, so that the high-probability state is set. The player can easily grasp that the Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the game machine N2, the identification information is information indicating the number of times that the high-probability state will be continued is decided and notified.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N2, the identification information indicates the number of times to determine and notify that the high probability state will continue.

As a result, the player can easily grasp the number of times that the high-probability state continues. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In any one of game machines N1 to N3, suggestive display control means for displaying on said display means a suggestive display mode suggesting the timing of operating said operating means, and said suggestive display mode displayed on said suggestive display control means. and suggestion display mode determining means for determining based on the timing of the privilege information set by the setting means.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the suggestive display mode suggesting the timing of operating the operation means is displayed on the display means by the suggestive display control means. The suggestive display mode displayed on the suggestive display control means is determined by the suggestive display mode determination means based on the timing of the privilege information set in the setting means.

Thus, by operating the operation means based on the suggestive display mode displayed on the display means, privilege information is given, so that there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In the game machine N4, the suggestive display mode includes a variable display mode in which display is changed based on the passage of time, and a determination mode in which the privilege information set in the setting means can be discriminated by the variable display mode. is displayed at least.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the suggestive display mode, the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner based on the passage of time, and the variable display mode is used to display the determination mode that allows the privilege information set in the setting means to be determined.

As a result, it is possible to determine the privilege information to be given by the display contents displayed in the variable display mode, so that the player can target the timing of operating the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play.

<Feature O group> (Suppresses the frequency of occurrence of small hits)
discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; benefit granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result; a determination condition storage means capable of storing a plurality of conditions of determination conditions; and suppression means for suppressing the frequency of execution of the determination by the determination means, wherein the suppression means is stored in the determination condition storage means. A game machine O1 characterized in that it is easier to suppress the frequency of execution of the determination when the number of determination conditions set is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, rather than when the number is less than the predetermined number.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine pays out a predetermined number of game balls based on the winning of the game balls into the starting prize winning opening, variably displays the symbols, and draws a lottery for the player after the variative display is completed. There is something that reports the results of Some of such gaming machines are configured to hold and store a plurality of lotteries that are executed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning opening (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-35664). .

In such a conventional gaming machine, when the frequency of winning of game balls to the start winning opening is high, more game balls are paid out than when the frequency of winning of game balls to the starting winning opening is low. Since many lotteries are executed and the benefits received by the player differ greatly depending on the frequency of winning the game balls into the starting winning opening, the winning of the game balls into the starting winning opening There is a problem that the operation of a game machine with a low frequency is lowered. To provide a game machine that is fair to a player who executes a game because it is necessary for the player to play many games in order to grasp whether or not the winning frequency of the game balls into the starting winning hole is appropriate. I had a problem that I couldn't. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine O1, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the privilege provision means determines the player based on the result of the determination by the determination means becoming a specific determination result. benefits are given to. A plurality of determination conditions are stored in the determination condition storage means. The suppressing means suppresses the frequency of determination by the determining means. In addition, the suppressing means makes it easier to suppress the frequency of determination when the number of determination conditions stored in the determination condition storage means is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, rather than when the number is less than the predetermined number.

This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which determination is performed when the number of determination conditions stored in the determination condition storage means is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, rather than when the number is less than the predetermined number. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided to a player who executes a game.

In the gaming machine O1, display means for displaying identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination means, dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and the dynamic display and dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the execution means, wherein the suppressing means causes the dynamic display period to be extended by the dynamic display period setting means. The gaming machine O2 is characterized in that the frequency of execution of the determination is suppressed by setting a period.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination means is displayed on the display means, and the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means. A dynamic display period for dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is set by the dynamic display period setting means. By setting a long dynamic display period by the dynamic display period setting means, the frequency of determination by the suppression means is suppressed.

Thus, by setting a long dynamic display period, it is possible to suppress the frequency of execution of discrimination, so that the frequency of execution of discrimination can be reliably suppressed, and a fair display is provided to the player who is playing the game. There is an effect that the accuracy of providing the game machine can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine O2, a second determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition, and a second display means for displaying second identification information indicating the result of determination by the second determination means. , second dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means; and dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display executing means A second dynamic display period setting means for setting a second dynamic display period, and a second determination result given to the player based on the result of the determination by the second determination means being a specific second determination result. and a second privilege granting means for granting a privilege, wherein the second determination condition is likely to be established by granting the privilege by the privilege granting means. .

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second determination condition is satisfied, the second determination means performs determination, and the second display means displays the second identification information indicating the result of determination by the second determination means. The dynamic display of the second identification information is executed by the second dynamic display execution means on the second display means, and the second dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means is performed. A dynamic display period is set by the second dynamic display period setting means. A second privilege is granted to the player by the second privilege granting means based on the fact that the result of discrimination by the second discrimination means is a specific second discrimination result. Then, when the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means, the second determination condition is likely to be satisfied.

Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the granting of a privilege that facilitates the establishment of the second determination condition by the suppressing means. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided to a player who executes a game.

In the gaming machine O2, a second determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition, and a second display means for displaying second identification information indicating the result of determination by the second determination means. , second dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means; and dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display executing means A second dynamic display period setting means for setting a second dynamic display period, and a second determination result given to the player based on the result of the determination by the second determination means being a specific second determination result. and a second privilege granting means for granting a privilege, wherein the determination condition is likely to be established by granting the second privilege by the second privilege granting means. Machine O4.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second determination condition is satisfied, the second determination means performs determination, and the second display means displays the second identification information indicating the result of determination by the second determination means. The dynamic display of the second identification information is executed by the second dynamic display execution means on the second display means, and the second dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means is performed. A dynamic display period is set by the second dynamic display period setting means. A second privilege is granted to the player by the second privilege granting means based on the fact that the result of discrimination by the second discrimination means is a specific second discrimination result. Then, the determination condition is likely to be met by the second privilege being granted by the second privilege granting means.

Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the granting of the second privilege that makes it easier for the determination condition to be satisfied by the suppressing means. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided to a player who executes a game.

In any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the suppressing means makes it easy to suppress the frequency of performing the determination when the result of determination by the determining means is the specific determination result. Gaming machine O5.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the result of determination by the determination means is a specific determination result, the suppression means tends to suppress the frequency of performing the determination.

This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the determination is performed when the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which many benefits are granted in a short period of time.

In any one of the game machines O2 to O5, the suppressing means reduces the number of the discrimination conditions stored in the discrimination condition storage means from the first predetermined number which is less than the predetermined number to the first predetermined number which is less than the first predetermined number. 2. A game machine O6 characterized in that the frequency of execution of the determination can be easily suppressed in the case of a predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine O6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines O2 to O4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the number of discrimination conditions stored in the discrimination condition storage means is a second predetermined number which is less than the first predetermined number, the frequency at which the determination is performed by the suppressing means is higher than the first predetermined number which is less than the predetermined number. easier to suppress.

Thus, when the number of determination conditions stored in the determination condition storage means is less than the predetermined number, and when the second predetermined number is less than the first predetermined number than the first predetermined number, the determination is executed. Since the frequency of discrimination is likely to be suppressed, when the game is played intentionally while the number of discrimination conditions stored is small, the frequency of discrimination can be suppressed. There is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided.

<Feature P group> (Variable range of pending notice)
information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; information storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of information acquired by the information acquisition means; Determining means for performing determination when a determination condition is satisfied based on the information, and a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determining means. a bonus game execution means, in a gaming machine comprising: a preliminary determination means capable of performing preliminary determination before the determination condition is established based on the information stored in the information storage means; and the information identification pattern display control means for displaying on display means an identification pattern corresponding to each piece of information stored in the storage means; variable means for varying the identification pattern based on the result of preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means; and determining means for determining a combination of identification symbols.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines variably display symbols based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning slot, and inform the player of the result of the lottery after the variative display is completed. Further, the lottery executed based on the winning of the game ball into the start prize winning slot can be held and stored a plurality of times, the held patterns corresponding to the number of reserved memories are displayed, and the displayed reserved patterns are displayed. There is one that is configured to be able to execute a pending notice effect that can notify information about the corresponding lottery in advance by using it (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-297071).

In such a conventional gaming machine, by changing the color and shape of the reserved symbols, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbols will result in a big win. , making it possible to heighten the player's expectations.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when a pending notice effect occurs, it becomes difficult for the player to have expectations for the pending symbols that are not subject to the pending notice, and this reduces the player's desire to play. There was a problem of hoarding. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine P1, information is acquired by the information acquisition means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number by the information storage means. Based on the information stored in the information storage means, discrimination is executed by the discrimination means when a discrimination condition is established, and based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result, it is advantageous to the player. A privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. Based on the information stored in the information storage means, the preliminary determination is performed by the preliminary determination means before the determination condition is satisfied. An identification pattern corresponding to the number of pieces of information stored in the information storage means is displayed on the display means by the identification pattern display control means. The identification pattern is varied by the variable means based on the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means with respect to the information before being determined by the determination means. A determination means determines a combination of identification patterns that are varied by the variable means, among a plurality of identification symbols displayed on the identification pattern display control means.

As a result, it is possible to determine a combination of identification symbols to be varied by the variable means, among the plurality of identification symbols displayed on the identification symbol display control means. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the execution of the variable means for all identification symbols displayed on the display means, it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to play.

In the gaming machine P1, the variable means changes the information corresponding to the identification symbol displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied during a period until the determination condition of the information corresponding to the identification symbol being displayed is satisfied. The game machine P2 is characterized in that the mode of displaying information based on the result of the prior determination for the game machine P2 is variable.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during a period until the determination condition of the information corresponding to the displayed identification pattern is satisfied by the variable means, the information corresponding to the identification pattern is information based on the result of preliminary determination. is displayed.

As a result, it becomes possible for the player to pay attention to the variable content of the identification symbol. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

A game machine P1 or P2 having specific display control means for displaying a specific display mode corresponding to the identification pattern on the display means for a specific period by using the identification pattern changed by the variable means. A gaming machine P3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1 or P2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, using the identification pattern changed by the variable means, a specific display mode corresponding to the identification pattern is displayed on the display means for a specific period by the specific display control means.

As a result, it becomes possible to execute a specific effect mode using the identification pattern changed by the variable means, and there is an effect that an effect advantageous to the player can be executed.

In any one of the game machines P1 to P3, when the identification pattern is changed by the operation means operable by the player and the variable means, setting of a specific performance is executed based on the operation of the operation means. A game machine P4 characterized by having a specific effect executing means.

According to the game machine P4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines P1 to P3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the identification symbol is varied by the variable means, the specific effect execution means executes the setting of the specific effect based on the operation of the operation means by the player.

As a result, there is an effect that a specific performance mode can be executed for a specific period using the identification pattern changed by the changing means.

In the game machine P4, the number of the identification symbols varied by the variable means when the predetermined determination result is determined by the preliminary determination means, compared to when the determination result is other than the specific determination result. A game machine P5, characterized in that it has a variable number setting means for setting a large number of .

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of identification patterns to be changed by the variable means is set by the variable number setting means to be larger when it is determined by the preliminary determination means that it is a specific determination result than when it is determined to be other than the specific determination result. be.

As a result, there is an effect that the frequency at which identification symbols are displayed can be changed according to the game state, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

<Feature Q group> (Perform a specific effect when the remaining number of times of ST becomes a big hit below a predetermined number)
Determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition; Bonus game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means; A plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state as the game state after the bonus game executed by the bonus game executing means is completed. A game state setting means for setting one game state from among the game state setting means, and when the second game state is set by the game state setting means, a specification that is likely to be established as the number of executions of discrimination by the discrimination means increases. a specific condition determining means for determining whether or not a condition is satisfied; and based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific condition determining means, the game state is changed from the second game state to the first game state. a game state changing means for changing the game state, and a suggestive effect executing means for executing a suggestive effect suggesting the likelihood of the specific condition being established when the second game state is set by the game state setting means. , a comparison means for comparing the ease of establishment of the specific condition suggested by the suggestive effect with the actual ease of establishment of the specific condition, and the comparison result by the comparison means is the specific comparison result. a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect corresponding to the specific comparison result on the basis of establishment of a predetermined condition;

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines variably display symbols based on the winning of a game ball into a starting prize winning slot, and inform the player of the result of the lottery after the variative display is completed. In this way, the game machine is configured to be able to execute a specific game that is advantageous to the player for a specific number of times by increasing the probability of a winning lottery or facilitating the execution of the lottery. Some do not notify the player of the number of times the game is played (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-6562).

In such a conventional type gaming machine, since the number of times the specific game is executed is not notified to the player, if a win is won during execution of the specific game, the remaining number of times of the specific game cannot be grasped and the game is played. There is a problem that the player cannot be sufficiently satisfied with the result. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine Q1, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player is played based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result. Executed by execution means. A plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state as game states after the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means is finished. 1 game state is set by the game state setting means. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the specific condition determining means determines whether or not a specific condition, which is likely to be established as the number of executions of determination by the determining means increases, is established. The game state is changed from the second game state to the first game state by the game state changing means when the specific condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the suggestive effect execution means executes a suggestive effect suggesting the likelihood of establishment of the specific condition. The ease of establishment of the specific condition suggested by the suggestive effect and the ease of actual establishment of the specific condition are compared by the comparison means, and when the comparison result by the comparison means is the specific comparison result, the predetermined condition is determined. is established, a specific effect corresponding to a specific comparison result is executed by the specific effect executing means.

As a result, when the likelihood of establishment of the specific condition suggested by the suggestive effect and the likelihood of actual establishment of the specific condition are a specific comparison result, the specific comparison result is obtained based on the establishment of the prescribed condition. A corresponding specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. Therefore, by executing the specific effect, it is possible for the player to grasp the current situation of the second game state, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Here, the player can grasp the situation of the second game state when the privilege game is executed by structuring so that the predetermined condition is established when the determination result of the determination means becomes a specific determination result. become. Therefore, when the privilege game is executed just before the end of the second game state, there is an effect that the player can be given a sense of satisfaction.

In the game machine Q1, a specific condition setting means for setting a predetermined number of execution times by the determination means for satisfying the specific condition when the second game state is set by the game state setting means. A gaming machine Q2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the specific condition setting means sets the predetermined number of executions by the determination means that the specific condition is satisfied.

As a result, the specific condition can be set based on the number of executions of the determination means, so the number of times the second game state is set can be set in advance. Therefore, the player can play the game while being conscious of the remaining number of times that the second game state is set, and the motivation for the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, when the suggestive effect is being executed by the suggestive effect executing means, the easiness of establishing the actual specific effect for the suggestive effect being executed based on the fulfillment of the effect conditions is determined. A gaming machine Q3 characterized by having a variable performance means for varying a suggestive performance close to .

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, when the suggestive effect is being executed by the suggestive effect executing means, based on the fulfillment of the effect conditions, the suggestive effect being executed is suggested by the variable effect means to approach the actual feasibility of the specific effect. It is variable in production.

As a result, the number of times that the second game state is set can be increased, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the game machine Q3, the suggestive effect is a suggestive effect indicating the number of remaining determinations by the determining means until the specific condition is established, and the variable effect means provides a suggestive effect indicating the number of determinations close to the remaining number of determinations. A game machine Q4 characterized by being variable to .

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determining means suggests the number of remaining determinations until the specific condition is satisfied by the suggestive effect, and the variable effect means changes the suggestive effect indicating the number of determinations close to the number of remaining determinations.

As a result, it is possible to suggest the number of determinations close to the remaining number of determinations, so that there is an effect that the player can be made to feel nervous.

Any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q4 has means for executing an effect different from the specific effect when the privilege game is executed in a case other than the specific comparison result. Characteristic game machine Q5.

According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the bonus game is executed when the result is other than the specific comparison result, an effect different from the specific effect is executed.

As a result, by executing an effect different from the specific effect, the player can grasp that the second privilege game has been executed when the result is other than the specific comparison result. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic group R> (After temporary stop, reach is formed using a new symbol row)
display means for displaying identification information; dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of a plurality of identification information strings composed of a plurality of pieces of identification information arranged in a predetermined order by the display means; a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the static display of a predetermined combination of identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information string by the display execution means. machine, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the dynamic display of the identification information sequence stops displaying a combination of identification information different from the predetermined combination of identification information. identification information string display means for dynamically displaying a new identification information string while at least a part of the combination of the obtained identification information is stopped and displayed; and the new identification information string is displayed by the identification information string display means. Based on this, when the combination of the predetermined identification information is stop-displayed using at least part of the combination of the identification information stop-displayed and the new identification information string, the privilege game is executed. and execution means for executing the privilege game by the means.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a plurality of symbols are variably displayed and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, a winning state advantageous to the player is given (for example, , JP-A-10-265). In such a game machine, while one symbol is changing and the other symbols are stopped and displayed, a ready-to-win state is generated in which the stopped and displayed symbols constitute a part of a predetermined combination, resulting in a win. By making players expect that, they are trying to improve their interest.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, even if all symbols are not stopped and displayed when the ready-to-win state does not occur, there is no possibility of a winning state at that time, and the player's play is greatly affected. There was a problem that lost interest. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the game machine R1, the dynamic display execution means dynamically displays a plurality of identification information strings composed of a plurality of identification information arranged in a predetermined order on the display means. Based on the dynamic display of the identification information string by the dynamic display executing means and the static display of the predetermined combination of identification information, the privilege game executing means executes a privilege game advantageous to the player. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, based on the static display of a combination of identification information different from a predetermined combination of identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information sequence, the statically displayed identification A new identification information string is dynamically displayed by the identification information string display means while at least part of the combination of information is displayed still. Based on the display of the new identification information string by the identification information string display means, a predetermined combination of identification information using at least a part of the combination of the identification information stopped and displayed and the new identification information string. is stopped and displayed, the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is executed by the execution means.

As a result, a new identification information string is dynamically displayed by the identification information string display means while at least a part of the combination of identification information that has been stopped and displayed once is still displayed. can provide. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine R1, the identification information string display means dynamically displays the special identification pattern string combined with the plurality of identification information displayed by the plurality of identification information strings in the direction in which the dynamic display execution means dynamically displays the string. is dynamically displayed in different directions.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the identification information string display means dynamically displays the special identification pattern string combined with the plurality of identification information displayed by the plurality of identification information strings in a direction different from the direction in which the dynamic display execution means dynamically displays the special identification pattern string. Is displayed.

As a result, the dynamic display direction of the symbol row can be changed to a different direction, so that an unexpected performance can be provided to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine R2, the identification information string display means dynamically displays the special identification pattern string in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the identification pattern string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. A game machine R3 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special identification pattern row is dynamically displayed by the identification information row display means in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the identification pattern row dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means.

As a result, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the direction of dynamic display has been changed, and it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

In the gaming machine R1, the identification information string display means dynamically displays a new identification information string different from the identification information string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. Non-display setting for setting non-display of at least one of the plurality of identification information strings dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means when the new identification information string is displayed by the display means. A gaming machine R4 characterized by having means.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the identification information string display means dynamically displays a new identification information string different from the identification information string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, and the identification information string display means displays the new identification information string. If so, at least one of the plurality of identification information strings dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means is set to be non-display by the non-display setting means.

As a result, it is possible to dynamically display a new identification information string without changing the area for displaying the identification information string. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load for dynamic display can be reduced.

In the gaming machine R1 or R4, display data for displaying the new identification information string dynamically displayed by the identification information string display means and the identification information string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means The display data to be displayed is set at the same timing, and a decision is made to determine the display data to be displayed among the set display data as the area set in the display area of the display means. A gaming machine R5 characterized by having means.

According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R1 or R4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display data for displaying the new identification information string dynamically displayed by the identification information string display means and the display data for displaying the identification information string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means are The display data to be displayed is determined by the determining means from among the display data that are set at the same timing and set as the display area of the display means.

As a result, there is an effect that the control load for dynamic display can be reduced.

The gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that each gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, it is provided with variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displaying the identification information in a fixed manner, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

The gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

The gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that each gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
S301 First acquisition means S306 First determination means S307 First effect execution means S506 First effect period setting means S804 Second determination means S805 Second effect execution means S1106 Second effect period setting means S2004 Bonus game execution means S2112 Game state setting means

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art In some game machines such as pachinko machines, patterns are variably displayed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting prize winning slot, and a player is notified of the result of a lottery after the variative display is completed. As described above, in some gaming machines, when a winning game is executed, a specific winning hole is opened to inform that a game ball has entered the specific winning hole .

JP 2014-138735 A

However, by executing notification every time a game ball wins a prize in a specific winning hole, the type of winning game currently being executed is grasped, and there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced. .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that suppresses a decline in motivation to play games.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a discrimination result by the discrimination means that is a specific discrimination result. A privilege game execution means for executing one privilege game among a plurality of privilege games, and when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, a game ball is changed from a first state in which it is difficult to enter to the first state. a variable ball entry means for changing to a second state in which the ball is easier to enter than the state until a predetermined condition is established, and establishment of the execution condition based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means. and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect when the condition determining means determines that the execution condition is satisfied, wherein the privilege game executing means is the variable ball entry means and a second privilege game in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first privilege game, and the gaming machine is capable of executing the first privilege game When the privilege game is executed, control is performed so that the probability of establishment of the execution condition is lower than when the second privilege game is executed .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1 , the determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, a plurality of different privilege games Among them, a privilege game execution means for executing one privilege game, and when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, the game ball enters from a first state in which it is difficult to enter the ball more than the first state. and a variable ball entry means for changing the game ball to the second state, which is easy to enter, until a predetermined condition is established, and a condition judgment for judging establishment of the execution condition based on the fact that the game ball has entered the variable ball entry means. and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect when the condition determination means determines that the execution condition is satisfied, and the privilege game execution means is configured such that a game ball enters the variable ball entry means. It is possible to execute a first privilege game in which the ball is easy to hit, and a second privilege game in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first privilege game, and the gaming machine executes the first privilege game. When the second privilege game is executed, the probability of establishment of the execution condition is controlled to be lower than when the second privilege game is executed.

Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; It is a front view of a rotary body raising/lowering unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body elevating unit; It is an exploded back perspective view of a rotary body raising/lowering unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the central unit; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the central unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a container. (a) is a side view of the container as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIa in FIG. 17, and (b) is a front view of the container as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. 18 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a first rotating body. It is a table which shows the combination of the figure of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body. It is a side view schematic diagram of the first rotating body and the second rotating body showing a transition state when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated. It is a side view schematic diagram of the first rotating body and the second rotating body showing a transition state when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated. It is a front view of a light-emitting decoration unit. Fig. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the light-emitting decoration unit; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the luminous decoration unit. (a) is a front view of the central rotary unit in a retracted position, and (b) is a front view of the central rotary unit in an extended position. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the central rotating unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central rotating unit; It is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. (a) is a front view of a connecting displacement member, (b) is a side view of the connecting displacement member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIIb in FIG. 32(a), and (c) is a diagram of FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the connecting displacement member taken along line XXXIIa-XXXIIa; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; (a) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base and the connecting displacement member, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front base and the connecting displacement member taken along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39(a). It is a diagram. 40(a) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base and the first displacement member, and (b) is a view of the front base and the first displacement member as viewed in the direction of arrow XLb in FIG. 40(a). FIG. 40(c) is a schematic side view, and (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front base and the first displacement member taken along line XLc-XLc of FIG. 40(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a left rotation unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of a counterclockwise rotation unit. It is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit for explaining the engagement action by the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member; (a) is a partially enlarged view of the first displacement member and the second displacement member in the XLVIII section of FIG. and a side view of a second displacement member. It is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device. (a) is a front view of the winning device, (b) is a rear view of the winning device, and (c) is a top view of the winning device. 51(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning device taken along line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the prize winning device taken along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 52(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the prize winning device along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 52(b). FIG. 52(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the winning device taken along line LIV-LIV. It is a back schematic diagram of a winning device. 3 is a partially enlarged view of the game board in which the LVI portion of FIG. 2 is partially enlarged; FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged view of the game board in which the LVI portion of FIG. 2 is partially enlarged; FIG. It is a front perspective view of a center frame. 4 is a front view of an area forming section; FIG. FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view of the region forming portion taken along line LX-LX in FIG. 59; It is a front view of the game board in the second embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of a right rotation unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; It is an exploded front perspective view of a right rotation unit in a 4th embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; It is an exploded front perspective view of a right rotation unit in a 5th embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a top view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a top view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; It is an exploded front perspective view of a right rotation unit in a 6th embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; (a) to (c) are schematic front views of a right rotation unit according to a fourth embodiment, and (d) to (g) are schematic front views of a right rotation unit according to a sixth embodiment. FIG. 21 is an exploded front perspective view of a right rotation unit in a seventh embodiment; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; It is an exploded front perspective view of a left rotation unit in an eighth embodiment. It is an exploded back perspective view of a counterclockwise rotation unit. It is a front view of a guide part. FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating in the forward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating in the forward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; It is an exploded front perspective view of a left rotation unit in a ninth embodiment. It is an exploded back perspective view of a counterclockwise rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating in the forward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating in the forward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; It is a back schematic diagram of the counterclockwise rotation unit in 10th Embodiment. (a) is a front view of the cage, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the cage taken along line CXVIIb-CXVIIb of (a), and (c) is taken along line CXVIIc-CXVIIc of (a). It is a sectional view of a retainer. FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; It is an exploded rear perspective view of a left rotation unit in an eleventh embodiment. FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating in the forward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating in the forward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the outward path from the retracted position to the overhanging position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the left-hand rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 32 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit in a twelfth embodiment; (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base taken along line CXXXIIb-CXXXIIb in (a). FIG. 5 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit for explaining the engagement action by the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member; FIG. 31 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit in a thirteenth embodiment; (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a sectional view of the front base taken along line CXXXVb-CXXXVb in (a). FIG. 5 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit for explaining the engagement action by the front base and the displacement-side engagement member; FIG. 32 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit in a fourteenth embodiment; (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the counterclockwise rotation unit with the second displacement member disposed at the retracted position, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross section of the counterclockwise rotation unit taken along line CXXXVIIIb-CXXXVIIIb of (a). It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the counterclockwise rotation unit in a state where the second displacement member is arranged in the extended position, and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the counterclockwise rotation unit taken along line CXXXIXb-CXXXIXb of (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. FIG. 31 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit according to a fifteenth embodiment; (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base taken along line CXLIb-CXLIb in (a). FIG. 5 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit for explaining the engagement action by the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member; FIG. 32 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit in a sixteenth embodiment; (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base taken along line CXLIVb-CXLIVb in (a). FIG. 4 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit for explaining the engagement action by the front base (opening) and the displacement-side engagement member; FIG. 32 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit in a seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 5 is a schematic top view of the left rotation unit for explaining the engagement action by the rear base and the displacement-side engagement member; FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of a right rotation unit in an eighteenth embodiment; FIG. 11 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position. FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of a right rotation unit in a nineteenth embodiment; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 4B is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotating unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position; FIG. 11 is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position; FIG. 10 is a schematic back view of the right-handed rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of a winning device in a twentieth embodiment; (a) is a cross-sectional view of the prize winning device with the seesaw member forming the first state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the prize winning device with the seesaw member forming the second state. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device in the twenty-first embodiment. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of a prize winning device according to a twenty-second embodiment. (a) and (b) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device. FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of a winning device in a twenty-third embodiment; (a) and (b) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device. (a) and (b) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device. FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device in the twenty-fourth embodiment; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device. (a) is a front view of the rotating shaft, and (b) is a side view of the rotating shaft as viewed in the direction of an arrow CLXXIb in (a). (a) is a cross-sectional view of the prize winning device with the seesaw member forming the first state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the prize winning device with the seesaw member forming the second state. 172(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device along line CLXXIIIa-CLXXIIIa in FIG. 172(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device along line CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb in FIG. 172(b). FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device in the twenty-fifth embodiment; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the prize winning device with the seesaw member forming the first state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the prize winning device with the seesaw member forming the second state. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device taken along line CLXXVIIa-CLXXVIIa in FIG. 176(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device taken along line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. ) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device taken along line CLXXVIIc-CLXXVIIc in FIG. 176(b), and FIG. 176(d) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device taken along line CLXXVIId-CLXXVIId in FIG. 176(b). It is a front view of the center frame of the pachinko machine. 179(a) and (b) are enlarged views of the CLXXIX portion in FIG. 178. FIG. It is the figure which showed time-measurement change of the operation|movement of a flow-path solenoid, and time-measurement change with the opening-and-closing timing of the opening-and-closing board for every jackpot classification. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a method of shifting from one game state to another game state with respect to three types of game states set in the pachinko machine. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when all upper, middle, and lower symbol rows are fluctuating in a variable display effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a ready-to-win effect is generated to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that the (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display content of the ready-to-win effect. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display content of the ready-to-win effect. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the result of the variable display of the first special symbol is out in the normal state and the variable probability state, and (b) shows an example of a customer waiting demo screen. It is a figure, (c) is a figure showing an example of the demo screen during special figure 2 fluctuation. (a) is a diagram showing an example of pattern variation in the latent certainty state, (b) is a diagram showing an example of display content within 30 seconds after the end of the variable display, ( c) is a diagram showing an example of display contents after 30 seconds from the end of the variable display. (a) is a diagram showing this latent state end screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a result screen displayed after the latent state ends. It is the figure which showed an example of the revival production|presentation which is a kind of production|presentation performed during a latent certainty state. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in a RAM 203 of the main controller 110. FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a configuration of a ROM of a main controller in a first control example; (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first per random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small per random number table, (c), It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the 2nd hit random number table typically. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit type selection table. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table; It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the table for normals typically. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a normal table, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a latency table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal figure fluctuation pattern table. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of the main controller in the first control example; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example, and (b) is the schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example. 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a screen display selection table; FIG. 3 is a block diagram of an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example; (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surfaces BD. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the rear surface E. FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 deviation fluctuation processing which is executed by MPU in main control unit. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 deviating stop processing that is executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flowchart which shows a big-hit control process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart which shows big hit operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart showing a jackpot ending process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prize-winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows small hit operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize-winning process performed by MPU in a main control device. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the customer waiting effect|presentation process performed by MPU in an audio|voice lamp control apparatus. 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing stop type command reception processing executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device; FIG. 10 is a flow chart illustrating status command processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp controller; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart illustrating standby command processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp controller; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing remaining number update processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device be. (a) is a flow chart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 4 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; be. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; 4 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device; be. 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second control example. FIG. 11 is a front view showing the inside of the sorting unit in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a game state transition method in the second control example; It is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of special figure fluctuation in the second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when an additional effect is not executed in the remaining period, and (b) is a display screen when an additional effect A is executed as a type of additional effect during the remaining period. It is a schematic diagram showing. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when additional effect B is executed as the type of additional effect during the remaining period, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an additional effect C as the type of additional effect during the remaining period. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when executed; It is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when an additional effect D is executed as a type of additional effect during the remaining period. (a) and (b) are timing charts showing an example of the flow of special figure variation in the second control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration display A screen (customer waiting demonstration screen) in the third pattern display device, (b) is a demonstration display B screen (customer waiting demonstration screen) in the third pattern display device ) is a diagram showing an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a special display A screen in the third symbol display device, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a special display B screen in the third symbol display device. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the type of jackpot in the second control example, and (b) is a variation pattern selection table in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed the structure typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table (for within two times after the end of latency) in the second control example, and (b) is a normal table in the second control example ( It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of (for 3 to 8 times after the end of latent certainty). (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation table in the second control example, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability table in the second control example is. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of a main controller in a second control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the second control example; (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a screen display selection table in the second control example; is. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an additional effect selection table in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. 10 is a flow chart showing game state update processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. It is a flow chart showing a process during execution of the first special symbol variation executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation stop process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation start process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. It is a flow chart showing a process during execution of a second special symbol variation executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation stop process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. 10 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process 2 executed by an MPU in a main control device in a second control example; It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot end processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a remaining count update process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing temporary stop-related processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a variable restart process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. It is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of special figure fluctuation in another example of the second control example. FIG. 11 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine in another example of the second control example; It is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of special figure fluctuation in the third control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a big hit end screen when the game state shifts to the latent state, and (b) is during the winning game in the latent state (during the small winning game ) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents displayed when the additional effect D (see point D in FIG. 290) is executed during the special figure fluctuation of the latent probability state, and (b) is , is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the final effect in the latent certainty state. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the winning effect during the latent certainty state; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the third control example; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the third control example; be. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an additional effect table in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a winning effect table in the third control example. be. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a first winning process 2 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a third control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a second prize winning process 2 executed by an MPU in the main controller in the third control example; 13 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation setting processing which is executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 3rd example of control. 10 is a flow chart showing state command processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing winning command processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing variable display setting processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 3rd example of control. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing a display mode when the pending advance notice effect is executed. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing a display mode when a pressing additional effect is executed. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing a display mode when a pressing additional effect is executed. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing a display mode when a non-display mode is set in which the remaining number of times is hidden in the latent state. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing a non-display mode during the latent state. (a) is a diagram showing the display contents in the non-display mode when the actual remaining number of times of the latent definite state becomes 0 and the latent definite state ends, and (b) is the non-display mode It is a diagram showing a display mode (pinch escape effect) when a jackpot is set and the remaining number of times of the latent definite state is within 5 times. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; be. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of an additional effect selection table in the fourth control example, and (b) schematically showing the contents of a normal participation level table in the fourth control example. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a low participation table in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a big win table in the fourth control example. FIG. 12C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of a pressing period table in the fourth control example; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special table in the fourth control example. be. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a pending advance notice determination table in the fourth control example; 14 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a process of pressing during addition effect executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a pending notice pressing process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 4 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 4th example of control. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing an additional effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a hold notice setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the residual probability variation frequency|count command process performed by MPU in an audio|voice ramp control apparatus. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing non-display setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a fixed command process executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the first modification of the first control example, (b) is a variation pattern selection in the first modification of the first control example It is a schematic diagram which showed the structure of the table typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a latency (second half) table in the first modification of the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the first modification of the first control example. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern scenario table; FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of a main controller in a first modified example of the first control example; It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 5 performed by MPU in the main control device in the 1st modification of the 1st control example. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing game state update processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first modified example of the first control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first modification of the first control example; FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a screen display selection 3 table in the second modified example of the first control example; (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first modification of the fourth control example; (b) is the audio ramp control device in the first modification of the fourth control example; 1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second normal table (for the third time or later after the end of the latent state) in the first modified example of the fourth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first modified example of the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing reach-in-process press processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first modified example of the fourth control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the press-down process during a jackpot performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 4th control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing pressing end processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first modified example of the fourth control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation|variation start processing 6 performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 4th control example. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing residual probability variation count command processing 6 executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the first modification of the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 6 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first modified example of the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing press-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first modified example of the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing reach-in-progress press command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first modified example of the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing scroll change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first modified example of the fourth control example; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing a scroll non-change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first modification of the fourth control example; (b) is the first modification of the fourth control example; It is the flowchart which showed the push-down command process during a jackpot performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in an example. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd design display. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a character storage area in a second modification of the fourth control example; (b) is a schematic diagram of the character storage area in the second modification of the fourth control example; FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram showing the contents, and FIG. 14C is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the pattern arrangement storage area in the second modification of the fourth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second modified example of the fourth control example; FIG.

<First Embodiment>
BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 1 to 60, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported toward the front side so that they can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 16a is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be visually recognized through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as seen from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and a general winning prize. The opening 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 1640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the second through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. It is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood by pasting together thin plate materials, and is formed so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general prize winning port 63, the first ball inlet 64, the second ball inlet 1640, the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of 13 .

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640. . Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second ball entrance 1640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is conducted when either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640 wins a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during probability variation) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 1640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, and the second entrance 1640 refers to the game state in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or during the time reduction, not only the probability of winning the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second entrance 1640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. is set. When the electric accessory 1640a is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the second ball entrance 1640 more than when the electric accessory 1640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 1640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second entrance 1640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the electric accessary 1640a is opened more than during normal operation. Also, during the probability change or the time reduction, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 1640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second ball entrance 1640 is opened and once per hit. It is also possible to change at least one of the number of times to perform. In addition, during the probability change and the time saving, the time when the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second entrance 1640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 1640a is opened per time are not set. Only the winning probability may be changed so as to be increased compared to normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) of either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display of the third pattern, and the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 are used as triggers. A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variably displaying the second pattern is provided.

A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86 . Further, when the rotating body elevating unit 300, the central floating unit 400 and the left/right rotating unit 500, which will be described later, are operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 thereof protrude into the opening of the center frame 86, and the opening is opened. visible through the part.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, the second symbol display device displays a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)). and are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time to perform a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 1640a associated with the second ball entrance 1640 is displayed in a predetermined manner. It is configured to be activated (released) only for a period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more chances to open the electric accessory 1640a of the second ball entrance 1640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 1640 during the variable probability and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 1640a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessary 1640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The first thru gate 66 is attached to the game board in the area on the left side of the variable display unit 80 , and the second thru gate 67 is attached to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80 . The first thru gate 66 and the second thru gate 67 are configured so that a part of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls launched to the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is held up to four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B and the second pattern is displayed. A holding lamp (not shown) is also illuminated. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). can be set to Also, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Also, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first ball entrance 64 in front view, a second ball entrance 1640 is arranged. When the ball enters the second ball entrance 1640, the second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by turning on the second ball entrance switch. A jackpot lottery is performed by the device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is a prize winning opening in which three balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins (enters a prize). Then, one ball becomes one of the prize winning openings from which a prize ball is paid out. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 1640 are made different. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 1640 are the same number (for example, both are five). may be configured as

Also, the second ball entrance 1640 is attached with an electric accessory 1640a. This electric accessory 1640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 1640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 1640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the second through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 1640a is in the open state. (Enlarged state), and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 1640 .

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ ” is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 1640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 1640a is opened is longer than during the normal time during the variable probability or during the time saving. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 1640 during the probability change or the time reduction than during normal times.

Here, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and when the ball enters the second ball entrance 1640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. be. However, the probability of winning the 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second ball entrance 1640 than when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. is set too high. On the other hand, the first ball entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory 1640a like the second ball entrance 1640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 1640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second ball entrance 1640, so the first ball entrance without the electric accessory is closed. 64, the ball is shot so that it passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left shot"), and by winning the first ball entrance 64, there are many chances for a big winning lottery. , it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big win.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the second through gate 67, the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second ball entrance 1640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second ball entrance 1640 wins. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is shot toward the second ball entrance 1640 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right hitting”), and is passed through the second through gate 67. It is advantageous for the player to set the electric accessory 1640a to an open state and to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning a prize in the second ball entrance 1640.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A variable prize winning device 65 is arranged above the second ball entrance 1640, and an opening/closing plate that prevents the ball from entering the inside of the variable prize winning device 65 by being in a closed state on the right side thereof. 65f1 is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640 results in a big win, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot is won. The first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is lit so as to become a stop pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. In this special game state, the opening/closing plate 65f1, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until five balls have been won).

The opening/closing plate 65f1 is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after being closed, the opening/closing plate 65f1 is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65f1 can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 is driven to open and close to the right side around the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65f1 that prevents the ball from entering the entrance portion (specific prize winning port 65a) of the variable prize winning device 65. and a large-opening solenoid (not shown) for The opening/closing plate 65f1 is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the variable winning device 65 while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. Also, the number of the variable winning device 65 is not limited to one, and a plurality (for example, three) may be arranged. Also, the arrangement position is not limited to above the second ball entrance 1640, and may be, for example, to the left of the variable display device unit 80. FIG.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out hole 71. be. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first ball entrance 64 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

Main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, display controller 114, payout controller 111, launch controller 112, power supply 115, and card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100-104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover unopenably by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In main controller 110, MPU 201 performs main processing of pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display in first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display result in second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65f of the variable winning device 65. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing to the right side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory are connected as a shaft. Send control signals.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420 , 530 , 630 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, changes the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the action unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the action unit 200. FIG. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

7 shows a state in which the rotating body lifting unit 300 is at the lowered position, and the central rotating unit 500, the right rotating unit 600, and the left rotating unit 700 are at the extended positions. The drawing shows a state in which the body lifting unit 300 is at the raised position, and the center rotation unit 500, the right rotation unit 600, and the left rotation unit 700 are at the retracted positions.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a box-shaped back case 210. In the inner space of the back case 210, there is a rotator elevating unit 300 below the back case 210, which emits light upward. A decoration unit 400 and a center rotation unit 500 are arranged, and a right rotation unit 600 and a left rotation unit 700 are arranged on the left and right sides, respectively.

The rear case 210 has a bottom wall portion 211 and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. The box is opened on one side (left front side of FIG. 6) by these wall portions 211 and 212. formed into a shape. A rectangular opening 211a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210, and the rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the external shape of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, in which the third pattern display device 81 can be arranged).

The rotating body elevating units 300 are composed of box-shaped housing bodies 330 in which a plurality (three in this embodiment) are arranged side by side in the width direction, and a plurality (two in this embodiment) to be housed in each of the housing bodies 330. ) (first rotating body 340a and second rotating body 340b).

The plurality of containers 330 are formed so as to be vertically movable (vertical direction in FIGS. 7 and 8) independently of each other. In this case, in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are arranged on the back side of the game board 13 and are invisible to the player. On the other hand, in the raised position (see FIG. 8), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are raised to the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and the player can visually recognize through the opening. be done.

The first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotatably supported by the housing body 330, and the rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b sequentially allow the player to visually recognize a plurality of figures (three in this embodiment) drawn on the outer peripheral surface. Let The first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed as columnar bodies having a triangular cross section, and different figures are drawn on the three surfaces of the outer periphery.

In the present embodiment, one driving motor 350 is shared as the drive source for the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, thereby making it possible to reduce the cost of the parts while reducing the cost of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. The combinations of figures 340b can be changed, and a total of nine combinations can be visually recognized by the player (see FIG. 20). Details will be described later.

The light-emitting decoration unit 400 mainly includes a base body 410 and a light-emitting device 420 arranged in the central portion of the base body 410, and emits light from a plurality of LEDs 421 arranged inside the light-emitting device 420. By changing the aspect (for example, the number of LEDs 421 to irradiate), effects by light emission are performed. Details will be described later.

The central rotating unit 500 includes a rear base 510 and a pair of displacement members 530 rotatably supported on the rear base 510 at their base ends, and is arranged on the rear side of the light emitting decoration unit 400 . The pair of displacement members 530 are located at a protruding position (see FIG. 7) protruding into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and retracted to the rear side of the light-emitting decoration unit 400 to be invisible to the player. It is rotated between the retracted position (see FIG. 8). Details will be described later.

The right rotation unit 600 includes a base body (rear base 610 and front base 620) disposed on the front surface of the front base 315 of the rotating body elevating unit 300, and a base body rotatably supported by the base body. and members (first displacement member 630 and second displacement member 640). On the other hand, the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 has a base body (rear base 610 and front base 620) arranged in front of the front base 317 of the rotating body elevating unit 300, and its proximal end is rotatably supported by the base body. and a displacement member (first displacement member 630 and second displacement member 640). Each displacement member has a projecting position (see FIG. 7) that projects into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and a retracted position (see FIG. 7) that retracts to the back side of the game board 13 and is invisible to the player ( (See FIG. 8). Details will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 60, detailed configurations of the rotating body elevating unit 300, the light emitting decoration unit 400, the center rotating unit 500, the right rotating unit 600, and the left rotating unit 700 will be described. First, the detailed configuration of the rotating body lifting unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 22 .

FIG. 9 is a front view of the rotating body lifting unit 300. FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body lifting unit 300, and FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body lifting unit 300. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 9 to 11, the rotating body elevating unit 300 includes a central unit 300C for raising and lowering the central container 330, and left and right units 300L and 300R for respectively raising and lowering the left and right containers 330. It is formed from three units of The left unit 300L is superimposed on the front side of the central unit 300C, and the right unit 300R is connected to the right end of the central unit 300C, thereby arranging the three containers 330 side by side in the width direction.

Here, detailed configurations of the central unit 300C, the left unit 300L, and the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19. FIG. First, the central unit 300C will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG. 12 is an exploded front perspective view of the central unit 300C, and FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central unit 300C.

As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the central unit 300C includes a rear base 311 that is L-shaped when viewed from the front, a front base 312 superimposed on the front side of the rear base 311, and a front base 312 on the front side of the front base 312. A drive motor 320 provided, an accommodation body 330 that moves up and down with respect to the rear base 311 and the front base 312 by the driving force of the drive motor 320, a first rotating body 340a and a first rotation body 340a accommodated in the accommodation body 330 It mainly includes a second rotating body 340b and a transmission mechanism that is housed between the facing surfaces of the rear base 311 and the front base 312 and transmits the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the housing body 330. As shown in FIG.

The transmission mechanism in the central unit 300C includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a transmission gear 322 meshed with the drive gear 321, a pinion gear 323 meshed with the transmission gear 322, A rack gear 324 which is meshed with the pinion gear 323 and which is formed as a rack having tooth cuts on the side surface of a flat member, and the rack gear 324 is arranged on one side and a container 330 is arranged on the other side. and a connecting member 325 provided.

A pair of shafts protrude from the front surface of the rear base 311, and a transmission gear 322 and a pinion gear 323 are rotatably supported on each of these shafts. Slide guides 351 and 352 are arranged parallel to each other on the front surface of the rear base 311 so that the guiding direction is the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 12). ) and the container 330 are guided vertically. That is, the movement directions of the connecting member 325 and the container 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gear 322, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational motion of the pinion gear 323 is converted into the linear motion of the rack gear 324. , along with the linear motion of the rack gear 324, the container 330 is vertically displaced (lifted) together with the connecting member 325 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the connecting member 325 connects the vertically elongated portion where the rack gear 324 is arranged and the vertically elongated portion where the container 330 is arranged, with the horizontally elongated portion connecting the lower ends thereof. , and is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front. As a result, even when the central container 330 is positioned at the raised position while the left container 330 is positioned at the lowered position, the horizontally elongated portion of the connecting member 325 can be positioned on the rear surface of the front base 312. , it is possible to avoid being viewed by the player.

The slide guide 351 is a linear guide made up of a guide groove formed on the front surface of the rear base 311 and a sliding body slidably formed along the guide groove and fixed to the rear surface of the connecting member 325. Formed as a mechanism. The same applies to the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R, which will be described later. The slide guide 352 includes a first rail fixed to the rear base 311, a second rail fixed to the connecting member 325 or the container 330, and a slide guide 352 interposed between the first rail and the second rail. It is formed as a telescopic linear guide mechanism with an intermediate rail for allowing relative displacement in the longitudinal direction.

Here, since the left container 330 is arranged side by side (left side in FIG. 12) of the central container 330 (see FIG. 9), the width of the connecting member 325 (left and right direction in FIG. 12) ) dimension is longer. Furthermore, as described above, since the oblong portion is interposed to avoid being viewed by the player, the connecting member 325 is formed in a U shape when viewed from the front, and its rigidity is reduced. Therefore, the posture of the center container 330 tends to be unstable (swaying in the left-right direction tends to occur).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since an extendable linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) is arranged on the back side of the central container 330, the state where the central container 330 is arranged at the raised position However, the elongated slide guide 352 can restrict the swinging in the horizontal direction and stabilize the posture of the center container 330 . On the other hand, in a state in which the central containing body 330 is arranged in the lowered position (see FIG. 9), the slide guide 352 can be shortened to avoid being viewed by the player.

Next, the left unit 300L will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit 300L, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit 300L.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the left unit 300L includes a rear base 313 which is vertically long in front view and arranged in front of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C, and the rear base 313. An intermediate base 314 superimposed on the front side, a front base 315 superimposed on the front side of the intermediate base 314, a drive motor 320 arranged on the rear side of the intermediate base 314, and a driving force of the drive motor 320. A housing body 330 that moves up and down with respect to each of the bases 313 to 315 by means of a and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the housing 330 .

The transmission mechanism in the left unit 300L includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, transmission gears 322a and 322b meshed with the drive gear 321, and a pinion gear 323 coaxially fixed to the transmission gear 322b. , a rack gear 324 which is meshed with the pinion gear 323 and is formed as a rack formed by tooth cutting on the side surface of a flat member, and a connecting member 326 which connects the rack gear 324 to the container 330 .

A shaft protrudes from the front surface of the intermediate base 314, and a transmission gear 322a is rotatably supported on this shaft. A shaft support hole is formed in the intermediate base 314, and a transmission gear 322b and a pinion gear 323 are rotatably supported in the shaft support hole while being coaxially fixed.

A slide guide 351 is disposed on the front surface of the rear base 313 so that the guiding direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 14), and the connecting member 326 (rack gear 324) is guided vertically by the slide guide 351. . A guide plate 353 is fastened and fixed to the front of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300 . The guide plate 353 has a guide groove 353a, which is an elongated opening, extending in the vertical direction. Interpolated. Accordingly, the container 330 is guided vertically along the guide groove 353 a of the guide plate 353 . That is, the moving directions of the connecting member 326 and the container 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gears 322a and 322b. With the linear motion of the rack gear 324, the container 330 is vertically displaced (lifted) together with the connecting member 326 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

Next, the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit 300R.

As shown in FIG. 16, the right unit 300L includes a rear base 316 that is formed in a substantially L-shaped front surface and is connected to the right end of the rear base 311 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C. A front base 317 superimposed on the front side of the back base 313 , a drive motor 320 arranged on the front side of the front base 317 , and the driving force of the drive motor 320 moves up and down with respect to the back base 316 and the front base 317 . a first rotating body 340a and a second rotating body 340b housed in the housing body 330; and a transmission mechanism that transmits to the body 330 .

The transmission mechanism in the right unit 300R includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a pinion gear 323 meshed with the drive gear 321, and a plate-shaped member meshed with the pinion gear 323. A rack gear 324 formed as a rack with toothed sides and a connecting member 327 connecting the rack gear 324 to the container 330 are provided.

A shaft protrudes from the front surface of the rear base 316, and a pinion gear 323 is rotatably supported on this shaft. A slide guide 351 is disposed on the front surface of the rear base 316 so that the guiding direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 16), and the connecting member 327 (rack gear 324) is guided vertically by the slide guide 351. . Further, the front base 316 has a guide groove 316a, which is an elongated opening, extending in the vertical direction. (not shown). Accordingly, the container 330 is guided vertically along the guide groove 316a of the rear base 316. As shown in FIG. That is, the moving directions of the connecting member 327 and the container 330 are restricted in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the z of the pinion gear 323 is converted into the linear motion of the rack gear 324, and the rack gear 324 is rotated. Along with the linear motion, the container 330 is vertically displaced (lifted) together with the connecting member 327 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

As described above, in the central unit 300C, the width dimension of the connecting member 325 is long (see FIG. 12), and the posture of the central container 330 tends to be unstable (swaying in the horizontal direction is likely to occur). On the other hand, in the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R, since the rack gear 323 is provided at a position adjacent to the side surface of the left container 330 and the right container 330, the width of the connecting members 326 and 327 (Figs. The left-right direction) dimension can be shortened to increase its rigidity. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the attitude of the left and right containers 330 (to make it difficult to swing in the left-right direction).

Accompanying this, there is no need to dispose a telescopic linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) on the rear side of the left and right housing bodies 330, and the guide plates 353 or the guide grooves 353a and 316a of the rear base 316 are used for guidance. It can stabilize the posture sufficiently. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

Next, the housing 330 and the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b housed in the housing 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19. FIG.

17 is an exploded front perspective view of container 330. FIG. 18(a) is a side view of container 330 viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIa in FIG. 17, and FIG. 18(b) is a front view of container 330 viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. 18(a). is. 18(a) and 18(b) illustrate a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334 and the decorative body 335 are removed.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the container 330 includes a base 331, left and right side walls 332 and 333 provided on the left and right sides of the base 331, and inner surfaces of the left side wall 332. and a decorative body 335 disposed on the front surface of the base 331. These parts 331 to 335 are integrated by fastening to form a box shape.

The base 331 is a member that forms the rear surface (the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 18B), the upper surface and the lower surface (the upper side and the lower side of FIG. 18B) of the container 330, and is a combination of three plate-like members. formed integrally. A reflecting part RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is disposed on the front side of the portion forming the rear side of the container 330 .

The reflector RF is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a size that extends at least vertically beyond the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b when viewed from the front. (see FIG. 18(b)).

The side walls 332 and 333 are rectangular plate-shaped members forming the left and right side surfaces of the container 330, and are provided with holding holes 332a and 333a at two locations, respectively. The holding holes 332a and 333a are holes through which fixed shafts 341 (described later) of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are inserted, and hold the fixed shafts 341 so as not to rotate. The holding holes 332a and 333a have a cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axis of the inner peripheral surface thereof, which is formed by removing one of the two points on the circumference of the circle and dividing the circle by a straight line.

The partition body 334 is a rectangular plate-shaped member having substantially the same outer shape as the side wall body 332 , and rotatably supports the transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 between the surfaces facing the side wall body 332 . In addition, the partition body 334 is provided with two insertion holes 334 a for inserting the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 .

The decoration body 335 is a member that decorates the front surface of the housing body 330, and is formed in a frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 335a in the center. The player can visually recognize the manner of rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of both rotating bodies 340a and 340b through the opening 335 (see FIG. 9). ).

The storage body 330 formed in this manner includes a drive motor 350 arranged in the partition body 334, a first rotating body 340a and a second rotating body 340b rotated by the driving force of the driving motor 350, and a driving motor. A transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the motor 350 to the first rotor 340a and the second rotor 340b and a detection mechanism for detecting the rotational position of the first rotor 340a are mainly housed.

The transmission mechanism in the container 330 includes a drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350, a transmission gear 352 meshed with the drive gear 351 in order, a first gear 353, an intermediate gear 354 and a second gear 355. and a gear train consisting of The transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 are rotatably held between the facing surfaces of the side wall body 332 and the partition body 334, and the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 are connected to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. They are fixed to the axial end faces, respectively.

Here, with reference to FIG. 19, detailed configurations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described. FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the first rotor 340a.

Note that since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b have substantially the same configuration except that the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface are different, the first rotating body 340a will be used as a representative example below. , and description of the second rotating body 340b is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 19, the first rotating body 340a includes a fixed shaft 341, a pair of end plates 342 rotatably supported on both axial ends (shaft portions 341a) of the fixed shaft 341, and a pair of It mainly includes three display boards (first display board 343A, second display board 343B, and third display board 343C) that are installed between the end plates 342 .

The fixed shaft 341 includes a trunk portion 341b and shaft portions 341a connected to both axial ends of the trunk portion 341b. The fixed shaft 341 is a portion that is non-rotatably held by the side walls 332 and 333 (see FIG. 17) of the container 330, and connects a pair of shaft portions 341a located at both ends in the axial direction. and a trunk portion 341b.

The axial cross-sectional shape of the shaft portion 341a is a shape obtained by removing one of the sections from a circular shape by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line (a shape obtained by chamfering a portion of the outer peripheral surface of a cylinder). , and is similar in shape to the holding holes 332a and 333a (see FIG. 17) of the side walls 332 and 333, respectively. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 341a into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall bodies 332 and 333, the fixed shaft 341 can be non-rotatably held in the container 330 (side wall bodies 332 and 333).

A plurality of (four in this embodiment) LEDs 344 are attached to the body portion 341b, and light emitted from the LEDs 344 can be irradiated to the inner surfaces of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C.

In this case, when the shaft portion 341a is inserted into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall members 332 and 333 and held so as not to rotate, the body portion 341b is arranged so that the irradiation direction of the LED 344 is directed to the front surface of the housing member 330 (decorative member 335). The opening 335a of FIG. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 344 can be irradiated to the inner surface of one of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C, which is arranged in front of the container 330 (“viewing position” described later). can.

The fixed shaft 341 (shaft portion 341a, body portion 341b) is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape with both ends in the axial direction open. It can be pulled out of the container 330 through the opening at the direction end. In addition, since the fixed shaft 341 is not rotatable with respect to the container 330, as described above, even if the first rotating body 340a is rotated, the wiring of the LED 344 is not subjected to external force such as twisting or pulling. can be avoided.

The end plate 342 is a member formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a shaft support hole 342a having a circular cross-section perpendicular to the axis. The inner diameter dimension of the shaft support hole 342 a is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the shaft portion 341 a of the fixed shaft 341 . Therefore, the end plate 342 is rotatably supported with respect to the fixed shaft 341 by inserting the shaft portion 341a into the shaft support hole 342a. Thereby, the end plate 342 is rotatably held inside the container 330 via the fixed shaft 341 .

Here, since the fixed shaft 341 has a trunk portion 341b larger in diameter than the shaft portion 341a, the end plate 342 is formed between the side walls 332 and 333 of the container 330 and the trunk portion 341b of the fixed shaft 341. The axial position can be defined, and the fixed shaft 341 can be held between the pair of side walls 332 and 333 via the end plate 342 .

A first gear 353 of the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end plates 342, and a base gear 361 of the detection mechanism, which will be described later, is fixed to the other. The second gear 355 of the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end plates 342 of the second rotating body 340b, but the attachment of the base gear 361 to the other is omitted (see FIGS. 17 and 17). 18).

Each of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C is a substantially rectangular plate-shaped member when viewed from the front. It is bridged between the end plates 342 and together with the end plates 342 forms a triangular prism.

A figure is drawn on the outer surface of each of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C. Therefore, when the triangular columnar body is rotated, the figures drawn on the outer surfaces of the respective display plates 343A to 343C are sequentially visible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335. FIG.

At least a part of the outer surface of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C is curved in an outwardly convex arc shape when viewed in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341 . As a result, as will be described later, even when there is a deviation of a predetermined rotational angle (for example, 12 degrees) between the rotational positions of the first rotor 340a and the second rotor 340b, each display plate 343A It is possible to make it difficult for the player who visually recognizes the figure drawn on the outer surface of 343C to recognize the deviation of the predetermined rotation angle.

In this embodiment, when viewed in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341, the widthwise ends of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C are curved in an arcuate shape that protrudes outward. A width direction central portion is formed in a substantially flat surface shape. Accordingly, it is possible to achieve both ensuring the visibility of the graphic and making it difficult to recognize the deviation between the rotating bodies 340a and 340b. In addition, the arc radius of the curved arc-shaped portion is a value larger than the maximum distance from the axis of the fixed shaft 341 to the outer surface of each of the display plates 343A to 343C (for example, 2 times or more and 4 times below).

Here, in the following description, the positions of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C when the triangular columnar body is rotated are assumed to be the front surface of the container 330 (the surface on the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 18B). The position at which the figure drawn on the outer surface can be viewed by the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is called a "visible position", and the outer surface is directed to the inner surface of the container 330 (base 331). A position where the figure drawn on the outer surface is invisible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as a "shielding position".

Therefore, for example, when the first display panel 343A is arranged at the visible position, the second display panel 343B and the third display panel 343C are arranged at the shielding position (see FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b)). . From this state, when the triangular prism body is rotated by 120 degrees in the forward direction or the reverse direction, either the second display panel 343B or the third display panel 343C is arranged at the viewing position, and the second display panel 343B or the third display panel is positioned. The other of the plates 343C and the first display plate 343A are arranged at the shielding position.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the first display panel 343A is formed in a shape that does not allow light to pass through, while the second display panel 343B and the third display panel 343C have a transparent portion PN through which light can pass. in part. In addition, a reflecting portion RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is disposed on the inner surface of the first display panel 343A.

As described above, the LED 344 is arranged at a position capable of illuminating the inner surface of the display board arranged at the visible position among the first display board 343A to the third display board 343C. Therefore, in a state where the second display panel 343B or the third display panel 343C is arranged at the viewing position, the light emitted from the LED 344 is transmitted through the transparent portions PN of the respective display panels 343B and 343C and directly viewed by the player. can be made

On the other hand, in the state where the first display panel 343A is placed at the viewing position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B), the light emitted from the LED 344 is reflected by the reflecting portion RF on the inner surface of the first display panel 343A. and transmitted through the transmission portion PN of the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C, and then reflected by the reflection portion RF of the base 331 of the container 330, and the reflected light from the reflection portion RF of the base 331 can be visually visually recognized by the player indirectly.

For example, by stopping the first rotating body 340a at the rotational position where the first display plate 343A is arranged at the viewing position and causing the LED 344 to emit light, the reflected light reflected by the reflecting portion RF of the base 331 of the container 330 is visually recognized. The player can be reminded of the figure of the second display board 343B or the third display board 343C arranged at a position (shielding position) invisible to the player. This makes it possible for the player to expect or suggest that the first rotating body 340a will be rotated to a position where the graphics on the second display panel 343B or the third display panel 343C can be visually recognized.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed to have triangular cross-sections, when the rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated, the reflector plate The distance between RF and the outer surface of each rotor 340a, 340b (display plates 343A to 343C), the distance between the outer surfaces of each rotor 340a, 340b (vertical distance in FIG. 18(b)), or The apparent diameter (vertical dimension in FIG. 18(b)) of each rotating body 340a, 340b can be increased or decreased, and the outer surface of each rotating body 340a, 340b (each display plate 343A to 343C) can be opposed to the reflector RF. You can change the angle. That is, as the rotating bodies 340a and 340b rotate, the light emitted from the LED 344 and emitted from the transmission portion PN is displayed as reflected light from the reflection portion RF of the substrate 331. The aspect (eg, the size of the area in which the light is visible) can be changed periodically.

Returning to FIGS. 17 and 18, description will be made. The detection mechanism includes a base gear 361 fixed to the end face plate 342 of the first rotating body 340a, an intermediate gear 362 meshed with the base gear 361, and a gear meshed with the intermediate gear 362. A terminal gear 363 having a detection target plate 363a projecting outward, and a sensor device 364 for detecting the detection target plate 363a of the terminal gear 363 are provided.

The intermediate gear 362 and the terminal gear 363 are rotatably held by the side wall 333, and the sensor device 364 is arranged on the base 331 with the detection area arranged on the movement locus of the plate 363a to be detected. Therefore, the sensor device 364 can detect the rotational position of the first rotating body 340a based on the detection state of the detected plate 363a. That is, based on the detection result of the sensor device 364, the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be controlled (for example, stopped at an arbitrary position).

Next, rotation operations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described. When the drive motor 350 rotates, the rotation is transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b via the transmission mechanism, and these rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated.

Specifically, when the drive motor 350 rotates, the rotation is transmitted to the first gear 353 via the drive gear 351 and the transmission gear 352, and the first gear 353 rotates. Thereby, the first rotating body 340a is rotated. Also, when the first gear 353 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second gear 355 via the intermediate gear 354, and the second gear 355 is rotated. As a result, the second rotating body 340b rotates in the same direction as the first rotating body 340a. Also, when the rotation direction of the driving motor 350 is reversed, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in the opposite direction.

As a result, the combination of the figure of the first rotating body 340a and the figure of the second rotating body 340b visually recognized by the player is changed in order. In this case, the number of combinations of figures of both rotors 340a and 340b is limited to three in the conventional product.

That is, since the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are synchronously driven to rotate by one driving motor, a combination that can be formed is, for example, the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. A first combination in which the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b is placed at the display position, and the second display plate 343B of the first rotating body 340a and the second display plate 343B of the second rotating body 340b are placed in the display position. There were only three second combinations, that is, a third combination in which the third display plate 343C of the first rotating body 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotating body 340b are placed at the display positions.

On the other hand, by adopting a structure in which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are independently rotationally driven by different drive motors, a maximum of nine combinations can be formed. It can appear arbitrarily. However, in this case, the parts cost increases due to the need for two drive motors.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the number of drive motors 350 is limited to one, and nine combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be formed. It can appear arbitrarily. In addition, in the present embodiment, by allowing a predetermined amount of deviation of the rotational positions without requiring the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b to be perfectly matched, the nine combinations can be quickly realized. can let you out. The combination of the figures of both rotating bodies 340a and 340b will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21. FIG.

FIG. 20 is a table showing combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 21 and 22 are schematic side views of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b showing transition states when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated. (a) to FIG. 21(e) are No. in FIG. 22(a) to 22(e) are shown in FIG. They correspond to the states shown as 6-10, respectively.

In FIG. 20, as a combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, the state in which the first display plate 343A is arranged at the visible position is indicated by the symbol "A" or "A'". The state in which the second display panel 343B is arranged in the visible position is indicated by the code "B" or "B'", and the state in which the third display panel 343C is arranged in the visible position is indicated by the code "C" or "C'". be done.

For example, No. in FIG. In the state represented by 10 "A, C'", the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the visible positions, and the first rotating body A figure drawn on the first display panel 343A from 340a and a figure drawn on the third display panel 343C from the second rotator 340b correspond to a state visually recognized by the player.

Also, in FIG. 21, to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotor 340a are denoted by reference numerals "A to C". The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the rotator 340b are illustrated using reference numerals "A' to C'", respectively.

Here, the number of teeth of the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 fixed to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are set to different values. In this embodiment, the number of teeth of the first gear 353 is 14 and the number of teeth of the second gear 355 is 20. When the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees, the second rotating body 340b rotates 108 degrees. is formed to

No. in FIG. 1 and FIG. 21(a), the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are placed at their respective viewing positions (No. 1 "A', A", first combination), the first rotating body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees, and the second display plate 343B is placed at the viewing position. 2 and FIG. 21(b), the second rotating body 340b places the second display panel 343B at the viewing position. Thereby, the second combination (No. 2 "B', B" in FIG. 20) can be formed.

In this case, the second rotating body 340b rotates 108 degrees while the first rotating body 340a rotates 120 degrees. , 340b from the direction perpendicular to the axis, it is difficult for the player to recognize the difference in rotation angle of 12 degrees. It can be recognized that the figures drawn on the outer surface of 343B are arranged at respective viewing positions (the second combination is formed).

In particular, in the present embodiment, as described above, the outer surfaces of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C are curved in an outwardly convex arc shape when viewed in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. (that is, the surface on which the figure is drawn is curved along the direction of rotation of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b). , the difference (deviation) in the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be made difficult to recognize.

No. in FIG. 2 and FIG. 21(b), the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display plate 343C is positioned at the visible position. 3 and FIG. 21(c), the second rotating body 340b is arranged at a position shifted from the first rotating body 340a. That is, in this state, a difference in rotation angle of 24 degrees is formed between the two, so that the player is made to recognize the deviation of the figure (no combination, No. 3 "-, C" in FIG. 20). be able to.

Similarly, No. in FIG. 4 and FIG. 21(d) to No. 4 in FIG. 9 and the state shown in FIG. 340b is arranged at a position where its rotational position is displaced from the first rotating body 340a. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize the deviation of the graphics (no combination, No. 4 "-, A" to No. 9 "-, C" in FIG. 20).

No. in FIG. 9 and FIG. 22(d) (No. 9 "-, C" in FIG. 20), the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the first display plate 343A is positioned at the visible position. 20 No. 10 and FIG. 22(e), the second rotor 340b places the third display panel 343C at the viewing position. Thereby, the third combination (No. 10 “C′, A” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

Note that, according to the present embodiment, the second rotation is also performed in the section where the figure deviation (the combination is not established, No. 3 "-, C" to No. 9 "-, C" in FIG. 20) is formed. Since the rotation of the body 340b can be continued and the graphics visually recognized by the player can be switched continuously, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which graphics will be combined in the third combination.

After that, substantially the same as the above-described aspect (rotation in the section from the state shown in No. 1 of FIG. 20 and FIG. 21 (a) to the state shown in No. 9 of FIG. 20 and FIG. 22 (e)) The aspect is repeated two more times to complete one cycle (the table is cycled from start to end).

In this case, No. in FIG. 11 to No. 20, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. B”), a fifth combination (No. 12 “B′, C” in FIG. 20) and a sixth combination (No. 20 “C′, B” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

Moreover, No. in FIG. 21 to No. 30, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. C”), the eighth combination (No. 22 “B′, A” in FIG. 20) and the ninth combination (No. 30 “C′, C” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 350 to the first rotor 340a and the second rotor 340b includes a plurality of gears (the drive gear 351 to the second gear 355 ), and is formed to be capable of transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 350 to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b at different rotation ratios.

Thereby, the rotation period of the first rotor 340a and the rotation period of the second rotor 340b can be made different. As a result, even with only one drive motor 350, it is possible to form nine sets of combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, and the combinations can be arbitrarily changed (desired Any combination can appear).

In addition, by forming the transmission mechanism as a gear train, not only is it possible to simplify the structure, reduce the cost of parts, and improve durability and reliability, but also the gears are always meshed. Therefore, by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 between normal and reverse, the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 20 can be switched.

Therefore, for example, proceeding in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 20) in the table of FIG. After or just before the third combination (No. 10 “C′, A” in FIG. 20) appears, the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed, and the table in FIG. 20 is reversed. A series of actions of returning to the direction (the upward direction in FIG. 20) can be repeated, thereby providing an effect that the player expects the appearance of the third combination.

Alternatively, for example, from the state in which the first combination (No. 1 "A', A" in FIG. 20) is formed, the ninth combination (No. 30 "C', C" in FIG. 20) appears. 20 in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 20) to reveal the ninth combination, and in addition, reverse the table in FIG. 20 (upward in FIG. 20). to reveal a ninth combination. That is, in the former case, it is necessary to rotate the first rotating body 340a by 120 degrees 30 times, whereas in the latter case, it is necessary to rotate the first rotating body 340a by 120 degrees once. Since it is sufficient to do so, a desired combination of figures can be made to appear quickly.

Here, when the second rotating body 340b is rotated by 60 degrees with respect to the rotation of the first rotating body 340a by 120 degrees (that is, the rotation of the second rotating body 340b is equivalent to the rotation of the first rotating body 340a). , when set to "1/integer" times), a plurality of combinations of figures can be formed without causing a difference (shift) in the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. can be done. However, in this case, the maximum number of graphics that can be combined is three.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first, fourth and seventh combinations (No. 1 "A', A", No. 11 "A', B" and No. 11 "A', B" in FIG. 20). 21 "A', C"), in the remaining six combinations (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth and ninth combinations), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body A difference (deviation) of a predetermined rotation angle is allowed to occur in the rotation position of 340b. As a result, the number of figures that can be combined can be nine.

That is, in the structure in which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated by one driving motor 350, setting the number of possible combinations of figures to nine sets means that the rotation of the driving motor 350 is controlled by the first rotating body 340a. and the second rotating body 340b. This is possible only by allowing the occurrence of a difference (deviation) in the predetermined rotation angle. As a result, the required number of drive motors 350 can be suppressed, and the product cost can be reduced, while improving the presentation effect by increasing the number of combinations of graphics.

In this case, a combination of figures (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth, and ninth combinations) in which the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are different (shifted) by a predetermined rotation angle. combination), the stop positions at which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are stopped may be corrected.

For example, in the second, fifth and eighth combinations (No. 2 "B', B", No. 12 "B', C" and No. 22 "B', A" in Fig. 20), Fig. 21 As shown in (b), since the phase of the second rotating body 340b is delayed, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at a rotational position where the phase is advanced by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotating body 340b, the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. , for example, is stopped at a rotational position rotated by 126 degrees. This makes it possible to disperse the positional deviation from the reference plane to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and make it inconspicuous.

Similarly, for example, in the third, sixth and ninth combinations (No. 10 “C′, A”, No. 20 “C′, B” and No. 30 “C′, C” in FIG. 20) 22(e), the phase of the second rotating body 340b is advanced, so the first rotating body 340a is stopped at a rotational position delayed in phase by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotating body 340b, the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. , for example, is stopped at a rotational position rotated by 114 degrees. This makes it possible to disperse the positional deviation from the reference plane to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and make it inconspicuous.

As described above, the rotating body elevating unit 300 is formed such that each containing body 300 can move up and down. , so that it is invisible to the player. Therefore, a desired combination of the figure of the first body of rotation 340a and the figure of the second body of rotation 340b can be displayed promptly at the required timing.

That is, in the present embodiment, nine combinations of figures can be formed, so the table becomes long (the number of stages of the table in FIG. 20 increases). It is necessary to rotate the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b relatively many times, which increases the time.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, by arranging each containing body 300 in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are retracted to a position invisible to the player. can be done. As a result, the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be rotated in advance to a predetermined rotating position without being recognized by the player. When the timing arrives, each container 300 is placed in the raised position (see FIG. 8), and the remaining rotations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are executed to rapidly achieve the desired combination. can be made to appear in

It should be noted that the placement of each containing body 300 in the lowered position may be performed only when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in a specific variation pattern. For example, in a variation pattern in which the time from the start of rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively short, each container 300 is not placed in the lowered position, and each While the rotation of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b is started and stopped at a position visible to the player, the time from the start of rotation of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively long. In the variation pattern, each rotating body 340a, 340b may be rotated in advance at a position invisible to the player.

In this case, in this embodiment, the preliminary rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b in the lowered position is performed when a predetermined operating means is operated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

That is, when rotating the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, a relatively loud sound is generated. The generated sound may make the player aware that the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b have been rotated in advance.

On the other hand, by performing the rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b during the operation of the predetermined operating means, it is possible to blend them into the operation. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

Incidentally, examples of the operating means include the payout device 133, the audio output device 226, or the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 3 or 4). When these operation means are operated, for example, a relatively loud sound is generated with the delivery of the ball, the output of sound, or the shooting of the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

Alternatively, or in addition to this, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is a predetermined effect, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b may be rotated in advance. When the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a predetermined effect, the player's attention can be focused on the predetermined effect. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the body 340b.

Next, the light emitting decoration unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 25. FIG. FIG. 23 is a front view of the luminous decoration unit 400. FIG. 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting decoration unit 400, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the light emitting decoration unit 400. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the luminous decoration unit 400 includes a horizontally long rectangular base body 410 in a front view, which is disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 210, and a width of the base body 410. A light-emitting device 420 arranged in front in the center of the direction, a light-shielding member 430 covering the front surface of the light-emitting device 420, and a cover member 440 covering the front surface of the light-shielding member 430 and made of a light-transmitting material. , and ring-shaped peripheral decorations 450 and 460 surrounding the light emitting device 420 , the light shielding member 430 and the cover member 440 when viewed from the front.

On the front side of the light emitting device 420, a plurality of (15 in this embodiment) light emitters (LEDs 421) are arranged in a dispersed state over the entire surface, and are formed so as to be able to irradiate the back surface of the light shielding member 430 with light. . Here, the light shielding member 430 includes a main body portion 431 made of a light shielding material (non-light-transmitting material), and partition walls 432 erected from the front and rear surfaces of the main body portion 431 .

A main body portion 431 of the light shielding member 430 is provided with circular openings 431a in a front view at a plurality of locations (15 locations in the present embodiment). The plurality of openings 431a are arranged at positions corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 421 of the light emitting device 420 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 421 can reach the rear surface of the cover 440 through the opening 431a of the light shielding member 430 .

The partition wall 432 is formed in an annular shape with a diameter smaller than that of the body portion 431 when viewed from the front, and is arranged at a position eccentric from the center of the body portion 431 . As a result, the space between the light emitting device 420 and the cover body 440 is divided into a circular first space surrounded by the partition wall 432 and a substantially crescent-shaped first space positioned on the outer peripheral side of the partition wall 431 when viewed from the front. 2 spaces.

In this way, the division by the division wall 431 makes it possible to clarify the outline of the light visually recognized from the cover member 440 . That is, when only the LEDs 421 in the first space emit light, a circle can be seen, and when only the LEDs 421 in the second space emit light, a crescent shape can be seen.

Next, the central rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28. FIG. FIG. 26(a) is a front view of central rotation unit 500 in the retracted position, and FIG. 26(b) is a front view of central rotation unit 500 in the extended position. . 27 is an exploded front perspective view of the center rotation unit 500, and FIG. 28 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center rotation unit 500. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 26 to 28, the central rotating unit 500 includes a rear base 510 disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 210, and a front base 510 superimposed on the front of the rear base 510. a base 520, a pair of displacement members 530 whose base ends are rotatably supported by the rear base 510 and the front base 520, a driving motor 540 for generating a driving force for rotating the displacement members 530, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 540 to the displacement member 530 .

A front surface of the rear base 510 and a rear surface of the front base 520 are respectively recessed with shaft support holes 511 and 521 for rotatably supporting the base end side (rotating shaft 531) of the displacement member 530 . A support shaft 512 for rotatably supporting a crank gear 542 in the transmission mechanism projects from the front surface of the rear base 510 .

The displacement member 530 is a member whose front end side is decorated, and mainly includes a rotating shaft 531 , a connecting gear 532 , and a crank groove 533 . As described above, the rotating shaft 531 is a shaft supported by the support holes 511 and 521 of the rear base 510 and the front base 520, and protrudes from the front and rear surfaces of the displacement member 530 on the proximal end side.

The connection gear 532 is a gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the displacement member 530 on the base end side with the rotation axis 531 as the center of rotation. When one of the displacement members 530 is rotated about the rotating shaft 531, the connecting gear 532 transmits the rotation to the other connecting gear 532 to rotate it. As a result, the other displacement member 530 is rotated around the rotating shaft 531 .

The crank groove 533 is a linear groove in a front view into which a connecting pin 542a of a crank gear 542 of the transmission mechanism, which will be described later, is slidably inserted. It is recessed in the rear surface of the displacement member 530 on the right side). As will be described later, the rotation of the crank gear 542 is transmitted to the crank groove 533 via the connecting pin 542a, so that one displacement member 530 rotates about the rotation shaft 531. As shown in FIG.

As described above, the transmission mechanism is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 540 to the displacement member 530, and includes a pinion 541 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 540 and a pinion 541 meshed with the pinion 541. and a crank gear 542. The crank gear 542 has a connecting pin 542 a protruding from a position eccentric from its rotation center (support shaft 512 ) and inserted into the crank groove 533 of the displacement member 530 .

According to the central rotation unit 500 configured in this way, the rotation of the drive shaft of the drive motor 540 is transmitted to the crank gear 542 via the pinion 541, and when the crank gear 542 is rotated, the crank gear 542 is rotated. Along with the rotation, the connecting pin 542a is displaced while drawing an arc-shaped trajectory, and the displacement of the connecting pin 542a acts on the inner wall surface of the crank groove 533, thereby displacing one side (the left side in FIG. 27 and the right side in FIG. 28). A member 530 is rotated around a rotating shaft 531 . In this case, the other displacement member 530 is also synchronously rotated via the connecting gear 532 . As a result, the pair of displacement members 530 are retracted to the projecting position (see FIGS. 7 and 26(a)) projecting into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86) and the rear surface of the luminous decoration unit 400. It is rotatable between the retracted position (see FIGS. 8 and 26(b)).

Next, the right rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 40. FIG. 29 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 600, and FIGS. 30 and 31 are exploded rear perspective views of the right rotation unit 600. FIG. It should be noted that FIG. 31 illustrates a state in which a part of the right rotation unit 600 is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 31, the right rotation unit 600 includes a base body composed of a rear base 610 and a front base 620, and a first displacement unit displaceably disposed on the front side of the front base 620 of the base body. The member 630 and the second displacement member 640, a driving motor 650 that generates a driving force for displacing the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 and is arranged on the rear surface of the rear base 610, and its driving and a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the motor 650 .

A part of the transmission mechanism (the first pinion 651, the rack member 652 and the second pinion 653) is housed between the facing surfaces of the rear base 610 and the front base 620. As shown in FIG. A bearing recess 621 for rotatably supporting the first pinion 651 is recessed on the rear surface of the front base 620, and a sliding groove of the rack member 652 is formed to define the moving direction of the rack member 652. A pair of insertion pins 622 are provided to be inserted through 652a.

Further, the front base 620 has circular shaft support holes 624 and 625 penetrating therethrough for rotatably supporting the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 and the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654, respectively. They are arranged side by side in the width direction (transverse direction) of the front base 620 at predetermined intervals.

It should be noted that the shaft support hole 624 that supports the first displacement member 630 is closer to the opening side of the game board 13 than the shaft support hole 625 that supports the transmission member 654 (the overhang position side of the first displacement member 630, FIG. 29). left side), as will be described later, at the overhang position, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can secure the overhang area for overhanging the opening side of the game board 13, while at the retracted position and the extended position, the transmission member 654 can be easily hidden behind the first displacement member 630 .

A ridge 626 and a bearing 627 protrude from the front surface of the front base 620 . The ridge 626 is a laterally elongated protrusion extending along the width direction of the front base 620 and has a substantially triangular cross section. The ridge 626 is formed such that its top is curved in an arc centered on the shaft support hole 624 when viewed from the front. When the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642) is displaced, the apex of the ridge 626 can be brought into contact, and as will be described later, compared to the case where the front surface of the front base 620 is in full face contact. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the contact area and suppress the sliding resistance, and it is possible to suppress the formation of cloudiness due to rubbing on the connecting displacement member 642 made of a light transmissive material.

On the left side of the front base 620 in front view (the left side in FIG. 29, i.e., the opening side of the game board 13), an inclined surface 620a is provided by chamfering the ridgeline portions of the side surface and the front surface. . Therefore, as will be described later, when retracting to the retracted position, it is possible to prevent the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642) from being locked by the side surface of the front base 620 and unable to be displaced (see FIG. 33).

The bearing portion 627 is formed as a cylindrical body concentric with the shaft support hole 624 , and rotatably supports the rotating shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 with the shaft support hole 624 on its inner peripheral surface. A protruding portion 628 is formed to protrude radially outward and downward from the front base 620 from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627 . The protruding portion 628 can restrict the rotation of the first displacement member 630 within a predetermined range and prevent the first displacement member 630 from tilting forward. Details thereof will be described later (see FIG. 40).

In the present embodiment, the bearing recess 621 is recessed in the rear surface of the front base 620 , so that the bearing recess 621 is used to move the first pinion 651 between the opposing surfaces of the rear base 610 and the front base 620 . It can be held rotatably. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to fasten and fix the first pinion 651 to the drive shaft of the drive motor 650, thereby reducing the number of parts and reducing the parts cost and assembly cost.

On the other hand, when the bearing recess 621 is recessed in the rear surface of the front base 620 , a projecting portion 623 protrudes from the front of the front base 620 along with the recess. In this embodiment, since a part of the second displacement member 640 is pivotally supported on the distal end side of the first displacement member 630, when the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced, the front-rear direction sway is likely to occur, and there is a risk that the second displacement member 640 will interfere with the protruding portion 623, but such interference can be suppressed by the ridge 626. As shown in FIG. The details will be described later (see FIG. 39).

The transmission mechanism includes a first pinion 651 attached to the drive shaft of the drive motor 650, a second pinion 653 fastened and fixed to the rotating shaft 654a of the transmission member 654, and the first pinion 651 and the second pinion 653 having teeth. and a rack member 652 formed as a rack in which a rack gear to be combined is tooth-cut on the side surface of a flat member.

The rack member 652 is provided with two sliding grooves 652a extending along its longitudinal direction and having an elongated hole shape when viewed from the front. By doing so, the moving direction is held in a specified state. That is, the rack member 652 is held between the facing surfaces of the rear base 610 and the front base 620 so as to be linearly movable.

The transmission member 654 includes a rotating shaft 654a protruding from the back surface of one end, a drive pin 654b protruding from the front surface of the other end opposite to the rotating shaft 654a, and the rotating shaft 654a and the drive pin. A recessed portion 654c formed by recessing an arcuate portion between 654b when viewed from the front. Supported.

The drive pin 654b is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and is inserted into a first groove 635 and a second groove 641b of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640, which will be described later. The arcuate shape of the recessed portion 654c in front view is formed in a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620 (that is, in a shape capable of receiving the bearing portion 627 on its inner peripheral side).

Therefore, while the arrangement position of the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654 is brought close to the arrangement position of the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630, interference with the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620 is suppressed, and the transmission member The rotatable range of 654 can be increased. Therefore, as will be described later, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be further displaced while miniaturizing the entire right rotation unit 600 (see FIGS. 37 and 38).

According to the transmission mechanism, when the first pinion 651 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650 , the rotation of the first pinion 651 is transmitted to the second pinion 653 via the linear motion of the rack member 652 . As the second pinion 653 is rotated, the transmission member 654 is rotated around the shaft support hole 625 of the front base 620 . As will be described later, by rotating the transmission member 654 and causing the drive pin 654b to act on the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b, the displacement corresponding to the shape of the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b can be changed to the second groove. Each of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be operated independently (see FIGS. 37 and 38).

A rotation shaft 631, support shafts 632 and 633, and a contact portion 634 are provided on the rear surface of the first displacement member 630, and a first groove 635 is provided thereon. As described above, the rotating shaft 631 is a shaft-shaped body that is inserted through the shaft support hole 624 of the front base 620 . rotatably supported on the A retainer C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 624 is fastened and fixed to the axial end face of the rotation shaft 631 , thereby restricting the rotation shaft 631 from slipping out of the shaft support hole 624 .

The support shafts 632 and 633 are shaft-shaped bodies having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640, respectively. That is, the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 are rotatably held on the rear surface of the first displacement member 630 via support shafts 632 and 633, respectively.

A pair of abutting portions 634 are arranged around the rotating shaft 631 at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. A protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 is disposed between the pair of contact portions 634 when the first displacement member 630 is assembled to the front base 620 . Therefore, as will be described later, when the first displacement member 630 is rotated about the rotation shaft 631 with respect to the front base 620, the contact portion 634 is brought into contact with the side surface of the projecting portion 628 of the front base 620. Thus, the rotation of the first displacement member 630 with respect to the front base 620 can be restricted within a predetermined range.

The first groove 635 is a concave groove through which the driving pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is slidably inserted, and is formed by bending in a substantially V-shape when viewed from the front. Specifically, the first groove 635 includes an action section 635a that extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 630, and a first displacement member 635 that is curved in an arc shape concave on the rotating shaft 631 side. A non-interfering section 635b extending along the width direction of the member 630 (that is, formed into a shape obtained by dividing an annular shape concentric with the rotating shaft 631) is provided. As will be described later, the action section 635a is a section that receives action from the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, and the non-interference section 635b is a section that the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 does not interfere with.

The second displacement member 640 is formed by being divided into two members, a driven member 641 and a connecting displacement member 642 . A shaft support hole 641a is formed through the driven member 641 at the center in the longitudinal direction, and a second groove 641b and a connecting groove 641c are formed at one end and the other end of the driven member 641, respectively. Note that the connecting displacement member 642 is made of a light-transmitting resin material.

As described above, the shaft support hole 641a is a circular hole through which the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 630 is rotatably inserted. It is rotatably journalled on the rear surface of member 630 . A screw having a head portion larger in diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 641a is fastened to the axial end surface of the support shaft 632, thereby restricting the support shaft 632 from coming out of the shaft support hole 641a. .

The second groove 641 b is a groove-shaped opening through which the drive pin 654 b of the transmission member 654 is slidably inserted, and extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 641 . The second groove 641 b overlaps the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 when the driven member 641 is supported on the rear surface of the first displacement member 630 . Therefore, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 can be inserted through the first groove 635 via the second groove 641b. In addition, the second groove 641b is formed as an action section that receives action from the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, as will be described later.

The connecting groove 641c is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 641, and a connecting pin 643 of a connecting displacement member 642, which will be described later, is slidably inserted. That is, the second displacement member 640 is formed to be able to transmit the rotation of the driven member 641 to the connection displacement member 642 via the connection groove 641 c and the connection pin 643 .

A shaft support hole 642a is formed through the connecting displacement member 642, and a decorative portion 642b and a protruding portion 642c are formed to protrude outward across the shaft support hole 642a. A connecting pin 643 projecting toward the front side is arranged on the connecting displacement member 642 .

As described above, the shaft support hole 642a is a hole having a circular cross section through which the support shaft 633 of the first displacement member 630 is rotatably inserted. It is rotatably journalled on the rear surface of member 630 . A retainer C having a larger diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 642a is fastened and fixed to the axial end face of the support shaft 633, thereby restricting the rotation shaft 633 from slipping out of the shaft support hole 642a.

The connecting pin 643 is inserted through the connecting groove 641 c of the driven member 641 as described above, so that the rotation of the driven member 641 can be transmitted to the connecting displacement member 642 . That is, by rotating the driven member 641 with the support shaft 632 as the rotation center, it is possible to rotate the coupling displacement member 642 with the support shaft 633 as the rotation center.

In this way, the second displacement member 640 is divided into two parts, the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642, and the driving member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 are connected by the connecting groove 641c and the connecting pin 643 to form the second displacement member. Since the link mechanism is configured by being rotatably supported by the displacement member 640, the amplifying effect of the link mechanism is used to perform the first displacement of the connection displacement member 642 (decorative portion 642b), as will be described later. The amount of relative displacement with respect to member 630 can be increased (see FIG. 37). As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Here, the detailed configuration of the connecting displacement member 642 will be described with reference to FIG. 32 . 32(a) is a front view of the connecting displacement member 642, FIG. 32(b) is a side view of the connecting displacement member 642 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIIb in FIG. 32(a), and FIG. 32(c). 32(a) is a cross-sectional view of the connecting displacement member 642 taken along the line XXXIIa-XXXIIa of FIG. 32(a).

As shown in FIG. 32, the connecting displacement member 642 is formed with an overhanging portion 642c on the opposite side of the decorative portion 642b across the pivot hole 642a. The protruding portion 642c can serve as a weight for balancing when and after being lifted.

In this case, the overhanging portion 642c is formed so as to protrude from the decorative portion 642b on the front side (lower side in FIG. 32(b)) and is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member 630, which will be described later. Thus, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced (rotated), rattling of the connecting displacement member 642 with respect to the first displacement member 630 can be suppressed. In addition, since the overhanging portion 642c serves both as a weight and as a contacting portion with respect to the first displacement member 630, the structure can be simplified and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly.

Further, the overhanging portion 642c is formed by four side walls erected on the rear side from the four sides of the bottom wall forming the front side of the connecting displacement member 642 (the side facing the rear surface of the first displacement member 630). , is formed in a box shape with an open rear side. Therefore, weight and rigidity can be ensured while reducing the outer shape. Therefore, as will be described later, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced (rotated), a state in which the projecting portion 642c is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (that is, a state in which it is not visible from the front) is ensured. At the same time, the function as a weight and the function of contacting the first displacement member 630 to suppress rattling can be reliably exhibited.

The overhanging portion 642c is formed with a ridge 642c1 that protrudes from the bottom wall and extends along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 642a. It is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface of 630 . Therefore, compared with the case where the entire surface of the bottom wall of the projecting portion 642c contacts the rear surface of the first displacement member 630, sliding resistance can be suppressed.

The connecting pin 643 is made of a metal material (brass material in this embodiment) and has a higher hardness than a resin material. , the surface facing the front base 620 ), and is embedded (insert-molded) in the connecting displacement member 642 .

In this case, the top of the ridge 626 of the front base 620 extends along the displacement trajectory of the connecting pin 643 when the connecting displacement member 642 is displaced. The rear end surface of the connecting pin 643 can be mainly brought into contact with the . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the formation of cloudiness due to rubbing between the connecting displacement member 642 made of a light-transmitting resin material and the ridges 626 of the front base 620 . Therefore, it is possible to continuously exhibit the presentation effect by allowing light to pass through the connecting displacement member 642 .

Next, operations of the right rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 39. FIG. 33 and 34 are front views of the right rotation unit 600 in each state during operation between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 10A and 10B are rear views of the right rotation unit 600 in each state when rotating. 37 and 38 are schematic rear views of the right rotation unit 600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

33(a) shows FIGS. 35(a) and 37(a), FIG. 33(b) shows FIGS. 35(b) and 37(b), and FIG. 35(c) and FIG. 37(c) are in the same state, respectively, and FIG. 34(a) is FIG. ), FIG. 38(b), and FIG. 34(c) are the same states as FIG. 36(c) and FIG. 38(c), respectively. In this case, FIG. 33(c) is the same as FIG. 34(a), FIG. 35(c) is the same as FIG. 36(a), and FIG. 37(c) is the same as FIG. be.

As shown in FIGS. 33(a), 35(a), and 37(a), at the retracted position, the first displacement member 630 is in an upright state, and the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are facing forward. It is arranged in front of the base 620 .

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 37A), the first groove 635 (action section 635a) of the first displacement member 630 and the second 33(b), 35(b), and 37(b) by pushing the inner wall surface of the groove 641b in the projecting direction (the right side in FIG. 37(a)) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654. As shown, the first displacement member 630 is rotated in the projecting direction with the rotating shaft 631 as the rotating shaft. In this case, the second displacement member 640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 630 because the second groove 641b has the same outer shape as the action section 635b of the first groove 635, and the first displacement member 640 It is displaced integrally with member 630 .

33(b), 35(b), and 37(b), the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the positive direction (clockwise in Fig. 37(b)), the same as in the case described above. In addition, the inner wall surfaces of the first groove 635 (action section 635a) of the first displacement member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 are extended by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 (Fig. 37(b) right), thereby rotating the first displacement member 630 about the rotation shaft 631 in the projecting direction, and displacing the second displacement member 640 integrally with the first displacement member 630 .

Through the states shown in FIGS. 33(b), 35(b) and 37(b), the states shown in FIGS. 33(c), 35(c) and 37(c) ), and the states shown in FIGS. 36(a) and 38(a)), the driving pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moves between the action section 635a and the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. is reached at the connection part of the

33(c), 35(c) and 37(c) (that is, FIG. 34(a), FIG. 36(a) and FIG. 38(a)), the first displacement member 630 One contact portion 634 of the pair of contact portions 634 is brought into contact with one side surface of the projecting portion 628 of the front base 620, so that the rotation of the first displacement member 630 in the projecting direction is prevented. Regulated.

34(a), 36(a) and 38(a), when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 38(a)), the transmission member 654 The driving pin 654b moves along the non-interfering section 635b without interfering with the inner wall surface of the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 . As a result, the first displacement member 630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 38(a).

On the other hand, the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 is pushed downward (downward in FIG. 38(a)) by the driving pin 654b of the transmission member 654, thereby 36(b) and 38(b), the driven member 641 is rotated about the support shaft 632 in a direction to raise the connecting groove 641c (counterclockwise in FIG. 38(b)). The rotation of the driven member 641 is transmitted to the connection displacement member 642 via the connection of the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643, and the connection displacement member 642 rotates about the support shaft 633 in the direction in which the decorative portion 642b is lifted ( 38(b) clockwise). That is, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630. FIG.

34(b), 36(b), and 38(b), the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the positive direction (clockwise in Fig. 38(b)), the same as in the case described above. Then, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630. As shown in FIG. After that, when the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the end of the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640, FIG. ), and as shown in FIGS. 36(c) and 38(c), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are arranged at the overhang position.

Contrary to the case described above, the transmission member 654 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 38(c)) from the extended position shown in FIGS. 34(c), 36(c), and 38(c). When driven, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moves along the non-interfering section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, so that the first displacement member 630 is shown in FIG. maintained in the indicated state (position).

On the other hand, the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 is pushed upward (the upper side in FIG. 38(c)) by the driving pin 654b of the transmission member 654, thereby As shown in FIGS. 36(b) and 38(b), the driven member 641 is rotated around the support shaft 632 in a direction (clockwise in FIG. 642 is rotated around support shaft 633 in a direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 38(b)) in which decorative portion 642b is swung down. That is, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630. FIG.

34(b), 36(b), and 38(b), the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 38(b)). Similarly, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement portion 642) is displaced relative to the first displacement member 630 in the direction of swinging down the decorative portion 642b.

Through the states shown in FIGS. 34(b), 36(b) and 38(b), the states shown in FIGS. 34(a), 36(a) and 38(a) ), and the states shown in FIGS. 35(c) and 37(c)), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moves between the action section 635a and the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. is reached at the connection part of the

Therefore, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 37(c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 33(c), 35(c) and 37(c), the first displacement The inner wall surfaces of the first groove 635 (action section 635a) of the member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 are pushed in the standing direction (left side in FIG. 37(c)) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654. Then, as shown in FIGS. 33(b), 35(b) and 37(b), the first displacement member 630 is rotated about the rotation shaft 631 in the upright direction. In this case, the second displacement member 640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 630 because the second groove 641b has the same outer shape as the action section 635b of the first groove 635, and the first displacement member 640 It is displaced integrally with member 630 .

33(b), 35(b), and 37(b), the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the reverse direction (clockwise in Fig. 37(b)), the same as in the case described above. Then, the first displacement member 630 is rotated about the rotation shaft 631 in the upright direction, and the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630 . After that, when the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 and the starting end of the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640, FIG. 35(a) and 37(a), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are arranged at the retracted position.

33(a), 35(a), and 37(a), the other contact portion 634 of the pair of contact portions 634 of the first displacement member 630 is positioned at the front base. The rotation of the first displacement member 630 in the upright direction is restricted by contacting the other side surface of the projecting portion 628 of 620 .

In this way, the right rotation unit 600 rotates the first displacement member 630 in a posture in which the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are superimposed (superimposed) in the thickness direction (for example, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIGS. 33 and 34). And since the second displacement member 640 is disposed on the front side of the front base 620, compared with the conventional product in which the first and second grooves are arranged side by side in the same plane, the first groove 635 Also, the planar space required for disposing the second groove 641b (that is, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640) can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the outer shape (planar space) in a front view.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an increase in size of the display device (third symbol display device 81) is required. However, even in this case, the space in the thickness direction (the front-rear direction, for example, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIGS. 10 and 11) is relatively large. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, if the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are overlapped and a relatively large space in the thickness direction is used, the outer shape of the right rotation unit 600 when viewed from the front is small. This is particularly effective for increasing the size of the display device.

Further, if the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are overlapped, one drive pin 654b transmits the rotational driving force of the transmission member 654 to the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640, respectively. This eliminates the need for separate drive pins (transmission members) for the first and second grooves, unlike conventional products. That is, the parts can be used in common, and the part cost can be reduced accordingly.

As described above, the second displacement member 640 is divided into the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642, and the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 are connected by the connecting groove 641c and the connecting pin 643. Since the link mechanism is configured by being rotatably supported by the support shafts 632 and 633 of the first displacement member 630, the amplifying effect of the link mechanism can be utilized. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 34, 36 and 38, the amount of relative displacement of the connecting displacement member 642 (decorative portion 642b) with respect to the first displacement member 630 can be increased. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In this case, in this embodiment, the second displacement member 640 is divided into a driven member 641 and a connecting displacement member 642 to form a link mechanism, and a support shaft that pivotally supports the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642. By disposing 632 and 633 along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 630, as shown in FIGS. A posture in which the member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 are superimposed can be formed.

This makes it easier to hide the second displacement member 640 behind the first displacement member 630 (make it easier to make invisible to the player). Therefore, when the first displacement member 630 is tilted from the upright posture to the overhanging posture, it is possible to reduce the outer size of the right rotation unit 600 in the front view at the retracted position (see FIG. 33(a)). (see FIGS. 33(a) to 33(c)), while hiding the presence of the second displacement member 640 (decorative portion 642b) from the player, after the first displacement member 630 is tilted to the overhanging posture, The second displacement member 640 can be protruded from the back surface of the first displacement member 630 (see FIGS. 34(a) to 34(c)), making it easier to perform effects that give impact to the player.

As described above, the movement of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 from the retracted position shown in FIG. 33(a) to the extended position shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 33(c), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced (rotated) in the overhanging direction (that is, the falling direction, referred to as the “first direction”) while being integrated. 33(c) and 34(a), after the displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 630 is stopped, as shown in FIGS. 34(a) to 34(c), the second displacement member 630 The connecting displacement member 642 of the member 640 displaces (rotates) the decorative portion 642b in a lifting direction (referred to as a “second direction”). That is, the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions.

As a result, the inertial force associated with the stopping of the first displacement member 630 displaced in the first direction can be canceled by the inertial force when the second displacement member 640 starts displacing in the second direction. As a result, a series of movements from the retracted position to the extended position can be performed smoothly, which not only enhances the performance effect, but also reduces the load on the parts due to the action of inertial force and improves durability. can be achieved.

In this case, in this embodiment, since the weight of the first displacement member 630 is made heavier than the weight of the second displacement member 640, the retracted position shown in FIG. In the operation of displacing the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 to , the heavy first displacement member 630 may be stopped first, and the light weight second displacement member 640 may be stopped last. As a result, the load on the driving motor 650 and the gears (the first pinion 651, the rack member 652 and the second pinion 653, see FIGS. 29 and 30) in the transmission mechanism can be reduced.

That is, from the state in which the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are integrally displaced in the overhanging direction (first direction) (see FIGS. 33(a) to 33(c)), the The displacement of the first displacement member 630 is stopped (see FIGS. 33(c) and 34(a)), and the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 lifts its decorative portion 642b (second direction). The transition to the displaced state (see FIG. 34(a) to FIG. 34(c)) is made by the driving pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moving from the action section 635a of the first groove 635 to the non-interference section 635b. Therefore, the rotation of the drive motor 650 and the gears (the first pinion 651, the rack member 652 and the second pinion 653) in the transmission mechanism can be continued. Therefore, even if the first displacement member 630 is stopped in the middle of such state transition, it is possible to avoid the load on the gear of the drive motor 650 transmission mechanism due to the stop.

On the other hand, the displacement of the first displacement member 630 is stopped (see FIGS. 33(c) and 34(a)), and the direction in which the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 lifts its decorative portion 642b (the second 34(a) to 34(c)) to a state in which the second displacement member 640 is stopped (see FIG. 34(c)), the drive motor 650 and the gears of the transmission mechanism (the first pinion 651, the rack member 652 and the second pinion 653) must be stopped. However, in this case, the only member that is stopped is the second displacement member 640, which is light in weight, so the load on the gear can be reduced accordingly.

Here, as described above, the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 extends outward on the opposite side of the decorative portion 642b across the portion (shaft support hole 642a) that is pivotally supported by the first displacement member 630. A protruding portion 642c is provided (see FIG. 32), and the protruding portion 642c can serve as a weight.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 34, 36, and 38, when the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated to lift the decorative portion 642b upward, the projecting portion 642c is formed on the opposite side of the decorative portion 642b. As a result, the weight of the overhanging portion 642c can be used to facilitate upward lifting of the decorative portion 642b. Therefore, it is possible to quickly lift the decorative portion 642b, thereby enhancing the presentation effect and suppressing the driving force of the driving motor 650 required for the lifting operation.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 34(c), 36(c) and 38(c), after the decorative portion 642b is lifted, the weight of the decorative portion 642b and the weight of the overhanging portion 642c are suspended. Therefore, compared to the cantilevered state in which only the decorative portion 642b is formed, the posture in which the decorative portion 642b is lifted can be stabilized, and at the same time, it is necessary to maintain the posture. Therefore, the driving force of the driving motor 650 can be suppressed.

In this case, as described above, the projecting portion 642c of the connecting displacement member 642 is formed so that its bottom wall (projection 642c1, see FIG. 32) can contact the rear surface of the first displacement member 630. As shown in FIGS. 34, 36 and 38, when displacing (rotating) the connecting displacement member 642, the projecting portion 642c is brought into contact with the rear surface of the first displacing member 630, thereby displacing the connecting displacement. Rattling of the member 642 (decorative portion 642b) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the posture of the decorative portion 642b when it is displaced, thereby enhancing the presentation effect and suppressing wear and damage to the pivot portion due to looseness.

In addition to the role of the weight, the protruding portion 642c also plays the role of suppressing rattling by coming into contact with the first displacement member 630. Therefore, it is preferable to separately provide portions for these two roles. It can be made unnecessary, and the structure of the connecting displacement member 642 can be simplified accordingly. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

Furthermore, the projecting portion 642c of the connecting displacement member 642 is formed in a substantially box shape as described above (see FIG. 32). As a result, weight and rigidity can be ensured while reducing the outer shape of the projecting portion 642c. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 34, 36 and 38, in a state in which the overhanging portion 642c is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (that is, in a state in which it is invisible to the player in front), the connection displacement While ensuring that the member 642 (decorative portion 642b) can be displaced, the projecting portion 642c reliably exhibits the function of a weight and the function of suppressing rattling by contacting the back surface of the first displacement member 630. can be made

Here, in the front base 620, as described above, the shaft support hole 624 that supports the first displacement member 630 is located closer to the opening of the game board 13 than the shaft support hole 625 that supports the transmission member 654. 29 to 31), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 630 are arranged at the overhang position (see FIGS. 33 to 38). While the projecting area for projecting the 640 to the opening side of the game board 13 can be ensured, the transmission member 654 can be easily hidden behind the first displacement member 630 while it is displaced from the retracted position to the projecting position.

In this case, as described above, the front base 620 includes the bearing 627 that supports the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 (see FIG. 29), and the transmission member 654 is configured as shown in FIGS. As shown in (c), when the second displacement member 640 is displaced to the overhanging position, it is formed so as to be able to abut against the bearing portion 627 , so that the second displacement member 640 is positioned relative to the first displacement member 630 . Rotation can be restricted within a predetermined range. That is, the transmission member 654, which serves to transmit the driving force of the drive motor 650, can also serve as a stopper that restricts the relative rotation of the second displacement member 640 with respect to the first displacement member 630 within a predetermined range. Therefore, the structure can be simplified, and the part cost can be reduced accordingly.

Moreover, since the bearing portion 627 is a portion for raising the first displacement member 630 from the front base 620 and arranging the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 in an overlapping posture (Fig. 29), the rigidity is relatively high, and a dead space is formed on the outer peripheral side. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the rigidity of the portion that restricts the relative rotation of the second displacement member 640 with respect to the first displacement member 630 can be ensured, and the durability can be improved. can be improved.

Furthermore, as described above, the transmission member 654 is provided with a recess 654c corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing 627 (see FIGS. 29 to 31), and as shown in FIG. When the displacement member 640 is extended to the extended position, the bearing portion 627 is formed to be received in the recessed cutout portion 654c, so that the movable range of the transmission member 654 can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the amount of displacement of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be secured accordingly. In other words, while ensuring the movable range of the transmission member 654, the position of the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654 can be brought close to the bearing portion 627. 38, while the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced between the retracted position and the extended position, the transmission member 654 is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (that is, , invisible to the player in front).

As described above, the front base 620 is formed to be inclined on the left side of the front view (the opening side of the game board 13, for example, the left side of FIG. 33(c)) by chamfering the ridgeline portions of the side and front surfaces. An inclined surface 620a is provided. 34(c), the connecting displacement member 642 is displaced (rotated) in the direction in which the decorative portion 642b is lowered, through the state shown in FIG. 34(b), and then to the state shown in FIG. 34(a). When formed, the inclined surface 620a can prevent the connecting displacement member 642 from being locked by the side surface of the front base 620 and unable to be displaced. Similarly, from the state shown in FIG. 33(c), the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642) is displaced (rotated) toward the retracted position integrally with the first displacement member 630, and the state shown in FIG. 33(a) through the state shown in FIG. 33(a), the inclined surface 620a can prevent the coupling displacement member 642 from being locked by the side surface of the front base 620 and unable to be displaced.

In particular, in this embodiment, the first displacement member 630 is arranged in a cantilevered state with the rotation shaft 631 as a fulcrum, and the second displacement member 640 is arranged on the first displacement member 630, and the weight is reduced. As a result, the first displacement member 630 is likely to sway in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 33) (that is, sway in the direction in which the connecting displacement member 642 approaches and separates from the front base 620), and the connecting displacement member 642 The side surface of the front base 620 is easily locked. Therefore, the configuration in which the front base 620 is provided with the inclined surface 620a is particularly effective.

Further, the front base 620 is provided with the ridge 626 that protrudes from the front surface and extends along the displacement direction (rotational direction) of the first displacement member 630, as described above. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 33, 35 and 37, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630, only the top portion of the ridge 626 is displaced to the second displacement member 640. can be contacted. Therefore, compared to the case where the entire front surface of the front base 620 contacts the second displacement member 640, the contact area can be reduced and the sliding resistance can be suppressed. As a result, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be smoothly displaced, and the driving force required for the drive motor 650 can be suppressed.

Here, the relationship between the ridge 626 of the front base 620 and the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39(a) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base 620 and the connecting displacement member 642, and FIG. and a schematic cross-sectional view of a connecting displacement member 642. FIG.

As described above, the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 is made of a light transmissive resin material. Therefore, the decorative effect can be enhanced by transmitting light emitted from the light-emitting body or the display device. On the other hand, since the connecting displacement member 642 is a member arranged to face the front base 620 (see FIGS. 29 to 31), shaking and rattling occur when the second displacement member 640 is displaced. As a result, it abuts on the front surface of the front base 620 . In this case, when the front surface of the front base 620 comes into contact with the front surface of the front base 620, the friction between the front surface of the front base 620 and the front surface of the front base 620 forms fogging on the front surface of the front base 620, which impairs light transmission.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, as described above, the front surface of the front base 620 is provided with the ridge 626, and only the top of the ridge 626 can be brought into contact with the connecting displacement member 642. It is possible to partially suppress fogging (a portion where light transmittance is impaired) formed on the connecting displacement member 642 due to rubbing.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, the second displacement member 640 is provided with a metal connection pin 643 for connecting the driven member 641 and the connection displacement member 642. The ridge 626 of the front base 620 is integrated with the first displacement member 630 along the trajectory of the connecting pin 643 when the second displacement member 640 is displaced (see FIGS. 33, 35 and 37). extended.

As a result, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630, the rear end surface of the connecting pin 642 (the right surface in FIG. can be brought into contact. Therefore, the surface pressure acting on the connecting displacement member 642 from the top of the ridge 626 can be borne by the rear end surface of the connecting pin 642, and the surface pressure acting on other portions of the connecting displacement member 642 can be weakened accordingly. can. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of fogging on other portions of the connecting displacement member 642 due to friction with the ridges 626, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the function of transmitting light.

Next, referring to FIG. 40, the function of the protrusion 628 of the front base 620 will be described. FIG. 40(a) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base 620 and the first displacement member 630, and FIG. 40(b) is a front base viewed in the direction of arrow XLb in FIG. 40(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front base 620 and the first displacement member 630 along line XLc-XLc in FIG. 40(a).

As shown in FIG. 40 , the front base 620 includes a bearing portion 627 that rotatably supports the first displacement member 630 . A space for disposing the second displacement member 640 can be formed between the front surface of the front base 620 and the rear surface of the first displacement member 630 because the base 620 is pivotally supported in a raised state. That is, as described above, the second displacement member 640 can be superimposed on the rear surface of the first displacement member 630 (see FIGS. 29 to 31).

As described above, the front base 620 includes the protruding portion 628 that protrudes radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627, and the first displacement member 630 protrudes from the rear surface thereof. The contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630 is brought into contact with the projection 628 of the front base 620, so that the first displacement member 630 can rotate relative to the front base 620 within a predetermined range. can be regulated within

In this case, the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620 is erected from the front of the front base 620 as a large-diameter cylindrical body to increase its rigidity and form a dead space on the outer peripheral side. A projecting portion 628 is projected radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627, and the contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630 is brought into contact with the projecting portion 628. The rigidity of the portion that restricts the relative rotation of the member 630 with respect to the front base 620 can be ensured, and durability can be improved.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the outer shape of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 40(a)) of the first displacement member 630 is set to a size that includes the projecting portion 628 of the front base 620 when viewed from the front. That is, the front surface of the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 40(a)) is formed so as to come into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member 630 . As a result, rattling when the first displacement member 630 is displaced and tilting of the first displacement member 630 forward (in the direction of arrow Fr in FIG. 40(c)) can be suppressed.

In addition, the projecting portion 628 of the front base 620 receives the contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630 on its side surface and serves as a stopper for restricting relative displacement. Since it is possible to share the role of receiving and suppressing rattling and tilting, it is not necessary to separately provide parts for these two roles, and the structure can be simplified accordingly. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the first displacement member 630 is arranged in a cantilevered state with the rotating shaft 631 (bearing portion 627 of the front base 620) as a fulcrum. Since the displacement member 640 is provided and the weight increases, the first displacement member 630 is likely to sway in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 40(a)). The swinging of the first displacement member 630 in the direction of approaching the front base 620 (the direction opposite to the arrow X in FIG. 40(c)), but the swinging in the direction in which the first displacement member 630 separates from the front base 620 (the direction of the arrow Fr in FIG. 40(c)) cannot be regulated. Since it is bulky, damage near the fulcrum is likely to occur. Therefore, a configuration in which the front surface of the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member 630 to suppress forward swinging (tilting) of the first displacement member 630 is particularly effective.

In this case, the projecting portion 628 of the front base 620 protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627 and is connected to the front surface of the front base 620, so that the rigidity of the projecting portion 628 can be increased. In particular, when the first displacement member 630 tilts forward (direction of arrow Fr in FIG. 40(c)), the direction in which the tilting is supported (that is, the projection 628 is positioned between the rear surface of the first displacement member 630 and the front base 620). Since the rigidity in the direction sandwiched between the first displacement member 630 and the front surface can be increased, the forward tilting of the first displacement member 630 can be effectively suppressed.

Next, the left rotation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 48. FIG. 41 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit 700, and FIG. 42 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 700. FIG. 43 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 700. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 41 to 43, the left rotation unit 700 has a base body composed of a rear base 710 and a front base 720, and a base body disposed on the front side of the front base 720 so that the base end thereof can be displaced. A first displacement member 730, a second displacement member 740 displaceably disposed on the distal end side of the first displacement member 730, and a driving force for displacing the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740. and a drive motor 750 disposed on the rear surface of the rear base 710, a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 750, and a connecting member ( A first connecting member 760 and a second connecting member 770 ), and a cover body 780 covering the front surface of the front base 720 on the lower end side.

A part of the transmission mechanism (the first pinion 751, the rack member 752 and the second pinion 753) is accommodated between the facing surfaces of the rear base 710 and the front base 720. As shown in FIG. A pair of insertion pins 722 that are inserted into the sliding grooves 752a of the rack member 752 are projected from the rear surface of the front base 720 to define the movement direction of the rack member 752 .

Circular shaft support holes 723 , 724 , 725 are formed through the front base 720 in a front view. The rotating shaft 754a and the rotating shaft 761 of the first connection member 760 are rotatably supported. Similarly, a circular shaft support hole 781 is formed through the cover body 780 when viewed from the front, and the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 is rotatably supported in this shaft support hole 781 .

A base-side engaging member 726 is projected from the front surface of the front base 720, and a receiving concave portion 727 is formed. The base-side engaging member 726 includes a base portion 726a erected from the front of the front base 720, and a bent portion 726b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 726a and having an inner surface serving as an engaging surface. , the engagement surfaces of the second displacement member 740 and a displacement-side engagement member 742, which will be described later, can be engaged with each other. Thereby, as will be described later, it is possible to suppress forward tilting of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 with respect to the front base 720 (see FIG. 47).

The receiving recess 727 is a substantially rectangular recess in front view that is recessed at a position facing the bent portion 726b of the base-side engaging member 726. By forming with an opening area larger than the outer shape, it is formed so as to be able to receive the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 742 . Thereby, as will be described later, at the retracted position, relative displacement of the second displacement member 730 in the approaching direction with respect to the front base 720 is permitted, and damage due to collision can be suppressed (see FIG. 47(c)).

The transmission mechanism includes a first pinion 751 attached to the drive shaft of the drive motor 750, a second pinion 753 fastened and fixed to the rotating shaft 754a of the transmission member 754, and the first pinion 751 and the second pinion 753 having teeth. and a rack member 752 formed as a rack in which a rack gear to be combined is tooth-cut on the side surface of a flat member.

The rack member 752 has two sliding grooves 752a extending along its longitudinal direction and having the shape of an oblong hole when viewed from the front. By doing so, the moving direction is held in a specified state. That is, the rack member 752 is held between the facing surfaces of the rear base 710 and the front base 720 so as to be linearly movable.

The transmission member 754 includes a rotating shaft 754a protruding from the rear surface of one end side, and a drive pin 754b protruding from the front surface of the other end opposite to the rotating shaft 754a. It is rotatably supported on the front side of the front base 720 by being inserted through the shaft support hole 724 . The drive pin 754b is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and is inserted through a drive groove 762 of the first connecting member 760, which will be described later.

According to the transmission mechanism, when the first pinion 751 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 750 , the rotation of the first pinion 751 is transmitted to the second pinion 753 via the linear motion of the rack member 752 . As the second pinion 753 is rotated, the transmission member 754 is rotated around the shaft support hole 724 of the front base 720 .

When the transmission member 754 is rotated, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 acts on the drive groove 762 of the first connection member 760 to drive the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 770, as will be described later. . As a result, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced relative to the first displacement member 730 via the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 770 . can be displaced with respect to the front base 720 (see FIG. 46).

The first displacement member 730 has a rotating shaft 731 projecting from one longitudinal end thereof (lower side in FIG. 42), and a shaft at the other longitudinal end side opposite to the rotating shaft 731 (upper side in FIG. 42). A support hole 732 is formed through the first displacement member 730, and a slide groove 733 having an oval shape in a front view is recessed in the rear surface of the first displacement member 730, and a connecting pin 734 is protruded. An engaged portion 735 is formed on the outer edge of the first displacement member 730 on the other longitudinal end side and on the side of the shaft support hole 732 .

The rotating shaft 731 is, as described above, a shaft-like body inserted through the shaft supporting hole 723 of the front base 720 and the shaft supporting hole 781 of the cover body 780. It is rotatably pivotally supported on the front side of the front base 720 by being inserted through the support holes 723 and 781 . That is, the first displacement member 730 is rotatably pivotally supported on the base end side between the facing surfaces of the front base 720 and the cover body 780 .

The shaft support hole 732 is a circular hole in front view, and rotatably supports the rotation shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740 . The sliding groove 733 is a concave groove extending along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730, and the end of the connecting shaft 790 is slidably inserted therethrough. The connecting shaft 790 pivotally supports the other ends of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 so as to be relatively rotatable. As will be described later, when the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 are driven, the connecting shaft 790 acts on the sliding groove 733 with respect to the first displacement member 730, so that the first displacement member 730 moves forward. It is displaced (rotated) with respect to the base 720 (see FIG. 45).

The connecting pin 734 is a shaft-like member having a circular cross section and is inserted into a slide groove 772 of the second connecting member 770, which will be described later. placed in Therefore, the direction in which the connecting shaft 790 slides along the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 should coincide with the direction in which the connecting pin 734 slides along the sliding groove 772 of the second connecting member 770. can be done. That is, as will be described later, when the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 are driven, the form of relative displacement of the second connecting member 770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is linear motion (sliding displacement). (See FIG. 45).

The engaged portion 735 is a portion formed on the outer edge of the first displacement member 730 extending to a position overlapping the second displacement member 740 in a rear view. The side engaging member 742 (the engaging surface of the bent portion 742b) is formed to be engageable (see FIG. 48). Thereby, as will be described later, rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed at the extended position (see FIG. 48).

The second displacement member 740 includes a rotating shaft 741 and a displacement-side engaging portion 742 protruding from its back surface, a receiving recess 743 recessed from its back surface, and a flange member fastened and fixed to the end surface of the rotating shaft 741. 744 and.

As described above, the rotating shaft 741 is a shaft-shaped body that is inserted through the shaft support hole 732 of the first displacement member 730. By inserting the rotating shaft 741 through the shaft support hole 732, the first displacement member A second displacement member 740 is rotatably supported on the distal end side of 730 in the longitudinal direction. The flange member 744 has a larger diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 732 at the base end side that is fastened and fixed to the rotation shaft 741 , thereby restricting the rotation shaft 741 from slipping out of the shaft support hole 732 .

A connecting pin 744a is projected from the rear surface of the flange member 744 at a position eccentric from the axis of the rotating shaft 741 . The connecting pin 744a is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and is inserted through a connecting groove 772 of the second connecting member 770, which will be described later. As will be described later, when the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 are driven, the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 receives action from the connecting groove 772 of the second connecting member 770, thereby causing the second displacement. The member 740 is relatively displaced (relatively rotated) with respect to the first displacement member 730 (see FIG. 46).

The displacement side engaging member 742 includes a base portion 742a erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 742a and having an inner surface serving as an engaging surface, As described above, in the retracted position, the engagement surfaces are formed to be engaged with the displacement-side engagement member 726 of the front base 720, and in the overhang position, the first displacement member 730 is engaged. The joint portion 735 is formed to be engageable with an engaging surface.

The receiving recess 743 is a substantially rectangular recess in a front view that is recessed at a position facing the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 742. The base-side engagement member 726 is formed so as to receive the bent portion 726b of the base-side engaging member 726 by forming it with a large opening area. Thereby, as will be described later, at the retracted position, relative displacement of the second displacement member 730 in the approaching direction with respect to the front base 720 is permitted, and damage due to collision can be suppressed (see FIG. 47(c)).

The connecting first member 760 has a rotary shaft 761 protruding from the rear surface of one longitudinal end side (lower side in FIG. 42) and a sliding groove 762 opened in the substantially central portion in the longitudinal direction. A connecting groove 771 and a sliding groove 772 are opened at one longitudinal end side (the upper side in FIG. 42) and at the longitudinal central portion, respectively.

The rotating shaft 761 of the first connecting member 760 is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 725 of the front base 720 , and the connecting groove 771 of the second connecting member 770 is connected to the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740 . A pin 744a is inserted. Further, the other longitudinal ends of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 are rotatably supported by a connecting shaft 790 inserted through the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 .

That is, one longitudinal end of the first connecting member 760 is displaceably connected to the front base 720, and one longitudinal end of the second connecting member 770 is displaceably connected to the second displacement member 740. A connecting portion (connecting pin 790) between the other ends in the longitudinal direction of the second connecting member 770 is connected to the first displacement member 730 so as to be displaceable.

As will be described later, this allows the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 to be displaced relative to each other and relative to the front base 720, while allowing the first coupling member 760 and the second coupling member 770 to move to the first position. It can be hidden behind the displacement member 730 to make it difficult for the player to see. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 from being exposed at the overhang position and impairing the appearance (see FIGS. 44(c) and 45c(c)).

As described above, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is inserted through the drive groove 762 of the first connection member 760, and the sliding groove 772 of the second connection member 770 is provided with the first displacement member 730. connecting pin 734 is inserted.

Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46. FIG. 44 is a front view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIG. 45 is a front view of each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. 7 is a rear view of the left rotation unit 700. FIG. 46A and 46B are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

Note that FIG. 44 illustrates a state in which the cover body 780 is omitted. 44(a) shows FIGS. 45(a) and 46(a), FIG. 44(b) shows FIGS. 45(b) and 46(b), and FIG. 45(c) and FIG. 46(c), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 44(a), 45(a), and 46(a), at the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in an upright state and arranged in front of the front base 720. is set.

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 46(a)), the inner wall surface of the driving groove 762 of the first connecting member 760 is protruded by the driving pin 754b of the transmission member 754. By being pushed in the direction (left side in FIG. 46(a)), the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(a)) about the rotation axis 761 thereof.

When the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 moves to the connecting shaft that connects the other ends of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 . 46(a) to the left), the first displacement member 730 is pushed toward its rotation axis as shown in FIGS. 44(b), 45(b) and 6(b). 731 as the center of rotation, and rotates in the projecting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(a)).

Further, when the first connection member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction, the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 770 connected to each other by the connection shaft 790 move downward (lower side in FIG. 46(a)). ), and the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 771 of the second connecting member 770 pushes down the connecting pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, thereby As shown in FIG. 46(b), the second displacement member 740 is relatively displaced (rotated relative to the first displacement member 730) in the first direction (clockwise in FIG. 46(a)) about the rotation axis 741 thereof. ) is done.

In this case, the second connecting member 770 is arranged along the extending direction of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 and the sliding groove 772 of the second connecting member 770 so that the connecting shaft 790 and the first displacement member 730 The connecting pins 734 of the first displacement member 730 are linearly moved (slide displaced) along the longitudinal direction.

From the states shown in FIGS. 44(b), 45(b) and 46(b), the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 46(b)), and the first connecting member 760 When rotated in the overhanging direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(b)) about the rotating shaft 761, the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotating shaft 731 in the overhanging direction as described above. (Fig. 46(b) counterclockwise), and the second displacement member 740 rotates about its rotation axis 741 with respect to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (Fig. 46(b) clockwise). relative displacement (relative rotation) to

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is tilted as shown in FIGS. A state is formed in which the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the overhang position, and the second displacement member 740 is displaced (relatively rotated) to the maximum relative to the first displacement member 730 .

44(c), 45(c) and 46(c), the transmission member 754 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(c)). When driven, the driving pin 754b of the transmission member 754 pushes the inner wall surface of the driving groove 762 of the first connecting member 760 in the retracting direction (the right side in FIG. 46(c)), so that the first connecting member 760 It rotates in the retraction direction (clockwise in FIG. 46(c)) about the rotating shaft 761 as the center of rotation.

When the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 moves to the connecting shaft 790 that connects the other ends of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770. 46(c) right side), the first displacement member 730 rotates its rotating shaft 731 as shown in FIGS. 44(b), 45(b) and 6(b). It is rotated in the retraction direction (clockwise in FIG. 46(c)) as the center of rotation.

Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 770, in which the first connecting member 760 and the other end are connected to each other by the connecting shaft 790, moves upward (upward in FIG. 46(c)). 44(b), 45(b) and FIG. 44(b), 45(b) and FIG. 6(b), the second displacement member 740 is displaced relative to the first displacement member 730 in the second direction (counterclockwise in FIG. ) is done.

From the states shown in FIGS. 44(b), 45(b) and 46(b), the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(b)), and the first connecting member 760 is When the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 46B), the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotating shaft 731 in the retracting direction (see FIG. 46B). 46(b) clockwise), and the second displacement member 740 rotates relative to the first displacement member 730 about its rotation axis 741 in the second direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46(b)). Displaced (relatively rotated).

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the starting end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is erected as shown in FIGS. A state is formed in which the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position, and the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is minimized.

Thus, according to the counterclockwise rotation unit 700, since the connection member (connection first member 760 and connection second member 770) that connects between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740 is provided, such a connection member is provided. By acting between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 730 causes relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 730 with respect to the first displacement member 730. ).

In this case, in the conventional product in which the connecting member is installed between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the first displacement member 730 protrudes from the front base 720 and is displaced in the direction in which it is spaced apart (projection direction). Then, the connecting member is exposed between the front base 720 and the second displacing member 740 and can be visually recognized by the player, thereby spoiling the appearance.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the connecting member is divided into two members, the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770, and one longitudinal end of the first connecting member 760 is connected to the front base 720, The other longitudinal end of the second connection member 770 is connected to the second displacement member 740, the other longitudinal ends of the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 770 are connected so as to be relatively displaceable, and the connection Since the portion (connecting shaft 790) is displaceably connected to the first displacement member 730, even when the first displacement member 730 projects from the front base 720 and is displaced in a direction (protruding direction) in which the connecting member (The first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770) can be hidden behind the first displacement member to make it difficult for the player to see. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connection member from being exposed and the appearance from being spoiled.

In this case, as described above, the second connecting member 770 is held by the first displacement member 730 in a form of linear movement (sliding displacement) along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730. 730 is displaced (rotated) in the direction in which 730 protrudes from the front base 720 and is separated from the front base 720 (projection direction). Even in such a case, the second connecting member 770 can be kept hidden behind the first displacing member 730 to avoid being seen by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connection member from being exposed and the appearance from being spoiled.

Here, in this embodiment, the second displacement member 740 includes a light emitter (not shown), and an electrical connection line W for supplying power to the light emitter is wired on the back surface of the first displacement member 730. (See Figure 45). In this case, the connection line W is introduced from an opening formed in the rear surface of the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740 and connected to the light emitter. Therefore, the connection line W is wired along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730 on the rear surface of the first displacement member 730 . Therefore, when the connecting member is displaced on the back surface of the first displacement member 730, the connecting member may interfere and damage the connection line W.

In this case, the connecting member (second connecting member 770) is disposed on the first displacement member 730 so as to linearly move (sliding) along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730, as described above. , the second connection member 770 can be prevented from interfering with the connection line W. Therefore, it is possible to avoid interference with the connecting second member 770 without securing a large space for wiring the connection line W (that is, the dimension in the width direction of the first displacement member 730). The space for arranging the wire W can be reduced, and the shape of the first displacement member 730 when viewed from the front (especially, the size in the width direction) can be reduced accordingly.

Here, if the above-described connection members (the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 770) are provided, the driving force of the drive motor 750 is applied to the first displacement member 730 (that is, the first displacement member 730 Even in a configuration in which a drive groove is provided and the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is connected to the drive groove), the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can be made to perform the same operation as described above. can.

However, in the case of this configuration, the size of the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 is increased. That is, it is necessary for the connecting member to displaceably connect the connecting portion between the other ends of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 to the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730. It is arranged between the facing surfaces of the displacement member 730 and the front base 720 . Therefore, when a drive groove is provided in the first displacement member 730 and the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is connected to the drive groove, the transmission member 754 and the connection member (connection first member 760 and connection second member 770) In order to avoid interference with the first displacement member 730, it is necessary to provide a drive groove in the first displacement member 730 at a position that does not overlap with the displacement trajectory of the connecting member. Therefore, the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 needs to have a size (area) that includes both the displacement trajectory of the connecting member and the drive groove. Make larger.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive groove 762 is provided in the first connection member 760, and the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is connected to the drive groove 762 of the first connection member 760, so that the driving force of the drive motor 750 is reduced. is given to the connecting first member 760, the size of the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 can be reduced.

That is, there is no need to avoid interference between the transmission member 754 and the connecting members (the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770), and the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 corresponds only to the displacement trajectory of the connecting members. The size (area) is sufficient, and the size (area) does not need to include the driving groove, so the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 can be reduced accordingly.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48, the engagement action by the base-side engaging member 726 and displacement-side engaging member 742 will be described.

FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 for explaining the engagement action by the base-side engaging member 726 and displacement-side engaging member 742, and corresponds to the cross section taken along line XLVIIa-XLVIIa in FIG. 45(a). do.

47(a) shows the state immediately before the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the retracted positions, and FIG. 47(b) shows the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740. A state in which the displacement member 740 is disposed at the retracted position is illustrated. 47(c) shows a state in which the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced in the direction of approaching the front base 720 in FIG. 47(b).

As described above, the base-side engaging member 726 is projected from the front surface of the front base 720, and the displacement-side engaging member 742 is projected from the rear surface of the second displacement member 740. The engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 are disposed with their open sides (the distal end side of the bent portion 726b) facing each other (see FIGS. 41 to 43).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47(a), when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced in the retracting direction (upper side in FIG. 47) with respect to the front base 720, the bending portions 726b of each other , 742b can enter the inner surfaces of the mating bent portions 726b, 742b, and the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position as shown in FIG. , the inner surfaces (engagement surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b can be engaged with each other.

Here, in the conventional product in which the connecting member is installed between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740 are positioned relatively apart from the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730. The member 740 is connected by a connecting member. Therefore, in the retracted position, even if the first displacement member 730 tilts the tip portion (that is, the second displacement member 740) on the side opposite to the rotation shaft 731 in the direction (forward) away from the front base 720, By the action of the connecting member interposed between the base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the tilting can be suppressed.

However, in this embodiment, one longitudinal end of the second coupling member 770 is coupled to the second displacement member 740 , while one longitudinal end of the first coupling member 760 is relative to the rotation axis 731 of the first displacement member 730 . It is connected to the front base 720 at a proximal position. Therefore, at the retracted position, the rotating shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 becomes the proximal end (fulcrum), and the distal end portion on the side opposite to the rotating shaft 731 (that is, the second displacement member 740 side) becomes the free end of the cantilever. In this state, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in the standing posture. Therefore, the first displacement member 730 has a free end due to its own weight and the weight of the second displacement member 740. ) away from the front base 720 (forward, right in FIG. 47(b)).

On the other hand, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position, the second displacement member is engaged with the base-side engagement member 726 of the front base 720 as shown in FIG. 47(b). Since the displacement-side engaging member 742 of 740 can be engaged, the tip portion (second displacement member 740) of the first displacement member 730 opposite to the rotating shaft 731 moves away from the front base 720 (forward, It is possible to suppress tilting to the right in FIG. 47(b).

The displacement-side engaging member 742 may protrude from the rear surface of the first displacement member 730, but in this embodiment, the displacement-side engaging member 742 protrudes from the rear surface of the second displacement member 740. be done. Therefore, the engagement position between the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 can be set at a position away from the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 . As a result, the tip portion (second displacement member 740) of the first displacement member 730 on the side opposite to the rotating shaft 731 is effectively tilted in the direction away from the front base 720 (forward, right side in FIG. 47(b)). can be suppressed to

On the other hand, when the displacement-side engaging member 742 is formed on the second displacement member 740, the displacement-side engaging member 742 is located away from the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730, so the first displacement member 730 becomes susceptible to swinging in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 47), and the positional relationship between the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 becomes unstable. Therefore, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced toward the retracted positions, it becomes difficult to engage the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement-side engaging member 742 has an engaging surface on the inner surface of the bent portion 742b that is arranged in the second direction from the distal end side of the bent portion 742b toward the base end side (base portion 742a side). The displacement member 740 is slanted toward the back surface thereof. As a result, the distance between the engagement surface and the rear surface of the second displacement member 740 can be widened on the receiving side of the displacement-side engagement member 742 (the tip side of the bent portion 742b, the upper side in FIG. 47(a)). Even if shaking occurs when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced toward the retracted position, the engagement between the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 can be facilitated. .

In this manner, the engagement between the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 is facilitated, and when these engagements are started, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are moved to the retracted position. As the second displacement member 740 is displaced toward the front base 720 (left side in FIG. 47(b)), the second displacement member 740 is brought closer to the front base 720 side (left side in FIG. 47(b)) along with the inclination of the engagement surface of the base side engagement member 742 (bent portion 742b). be able to.

As a result, at the retracted position, the tip portions (on the second displacement member 740 side) of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are separated from the front base 720 with the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 as a fulcrum. Not only is it possible to suppress tilting in the direction (forward, right in FIG. 47(b)), but also the projection dimension of the second displacement member 740 from the front base 720 can be suppressed, , the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are slightly elastically deformed as a whole. 720 can be suppressed to stably maintain its posture in a stopped state.

On the other hand, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 have the tip portion (second displacement member 740 side) of the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 as a fulcrum toward the front base 720 (forward , left side of FIG. 47(b)) is allowed. In this case, the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 are plate-like bodies bent into a substantially V-shaped cross section, and when tilted, the rear or front base of the second displacement member 740 is bent. If it collides with the front of 720, it will be deformed in a bending direction, so there is a high possibility of breakage.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the receiving recesses 727 and 743 for receiving the mating bent portions 726b and 742b are recessed on the front surface of the front base 720 and the back surface of the second displacement member 740. 47(c), the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are tilted toward the front base 720 (forward, leftward in FIG. 47(b)). When receiving, the receiving recesses 727, 743 can receive the mating bent portions 726b, 742b. As a result, breakage due to collision between the base-side engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 can be suppressed.

When tilting, the rear surface of the second connecting member 770 facing parallel to the front surface of the front base 720 collides with the front surface of the front base 720 in a face contact manner over the entire surface, so the surface pressure at the time of collision is reduced. (dispersion) can be Therefore, damage can be suppressed.

FIG. 48(a) is a partially enlarged view of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 in the XLVIIIa section of FIG. 45(c), and FIG. 48(b) is an arrow XLVIIIb direction of FIG. 48(a). Fig. 11 is a side view of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 in perspective;

As described above, when the left rotation unit 700 is shifted from the retracted position to the extended position, the first displacement member 730 is extended and the second displacement member 740 is moved relative to the first displacement member 730 . is relatively displaced (rotated) around its rotation axis 741 (see FIGS. 45(a) to 45(c)).

As shown in FIGS. 48(a) and 48(b), according to this embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the overhang position (FIG. 45(c) ), the engaging surface of the displacement-side engaging member 742 (bent portion 742b) is engaged with the engaged portion 735 of the first displacing member 730, whereby the first displacing member 730 and the second displacing member 740 are engaged. can be combined with Therefore, it is possible to suppress rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 at the extended position.

In particular, since the engagement surface of the displacement-side engagement member 742 is inclined as described above, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are slightly elastically deformed by the inclination. They can be displaced toward each other. Therefore, at the retracted position, rattling between the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can be suppressed, and the posture can be stably maintained in the stopped state.

In addition, the displacement-side engaging member 742 engages with the base-side engaging member 726 of the front base 720 at the retracted position to connect the second displacement member 740 to the front base 720. Since the engagement with the engaged portion 735 of the first displacement member 730 can also be used to couple the second displacement member 740 to the first displacement member 730, the portions for these two roles are separately provided. The provision can be made unnecessary, and the structure can be simplified accordingly. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced.

Next, the winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 55. FIG. 49 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 65, and FIG. 50 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 65. FIG. 51(a) is a front view of the winning device 65, FIG. 51(b) is a rear view of the winning device 65, and FIG. 51(c) is a top view of the winning device 65. FIG.

52(a) and 52(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning device 65 taken along line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 51, and FIGS. and FIG. 52(b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the winning device 65 along the LIIIa-LIIIa line and the LIIIb-LIIIb line.

It should be noted that illustration of the opening/closing plate 860 is omitted in FIG. 51, and illustration of the guide rib 813a is omitted in FIG. Further, FIG. 52(a) shows the state in which the seesaw member 840 forms the first state, and FIG. 52(b) shows the state in which the seesaw member 840 forms the second state.

As shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, the winning device 65 includes a front base 810, an intermediate base 820 superimposed on the rear side of the front base 810, and a rear base 830 superimposed on the rear side of the intermediate base 820. , a seesaw member 840 and a follower member 850 disposed between the facing surfaces of the front base 810 and the intermediate base 820, and an opening/closing plate 860 for opening/closing the winning opening 65a.

The prize winning device 65 is formed in a box shape having an internal space by a front base 810, a front base 820 and a rear base 830. In the internal space, there is a guide passage through which balls winning from the prize winning port 65a are guided. The weight of the game ball acts on the seesaw member 840 when the game ball passes through the guide passage.

The seesaw member 840 forms a first state in which one end side (one end decoration portion 853) is lowered and the other end side (other end decoration portion 843) is raised when the weight of the game ball is not applied (Fig. 52(a)), when the weight of the game ball is applied to the other end side, a second state is formed in which the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered (see FIG. 52(b)).

That is, the prize winning device 65 utilizes the weight of the game ball passing through the guide passage to cause the seesaw member 840 to alternately appear in the first state and the second state, and one end side (one end decoration) of the seesaw member 840 is displayed. 853) and the other end side (the other end side decoration body 843) are formed to be capable of performing an effect of vertically displacing them.

Here, as will be described later, the seesaw member 840 has a length dimension of the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 larger than the length dimension of the receiving surface 844 in the direction connecting the one end side and the other end side. be. Therefore, when a plurality of balls pass continuously, the game balls stay on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846, and the second state is likely to be maintained. In contrast, in this embodiment, even when a plurality of game balls pass continuously, the weight of the game balls prevents the seesaw member 840 from remaining in the second state. and alternately appearing can be reliably executed. The configuration of the winning device 65 for performing such effects will be described below.

The front base 810 includes a front substrate 811 forming its front surface, and a front first side wall 812, a front second side wall 813, a front first bottom wall 814, and a front second bottom wall 815 projecting from the rear side of the front substrate 811. and are mainly provided.

In the front base 810, recessed portions 811a and 811b formed by recessing the lower edge of the front base 810 are arranged side by side at a predetermined interval in the width direction. And part of the driven member 850 (the one end side decorative portion 853 and the other end side decorative portion 843) is exposed so as to be visible to the player.

The front first side wall 812 and the front second side wall 813 are portions forming side walls of a guide passage for guiding game balls, and are arranged to face each other with a predetermined distance therebetween. The front first bottom wall 814 and the front second bottom wall 815 are parts that form the bottom walls of the guide passages, and are connected to the lower end sides of the front first side wall 812 and the front second side wall 813, respectively.

Between the front first side wall 812 and the front second side wall 813 facing each other, an open portion on the upper end side thereof serves as a prize winning port 65a, and game balls flow into the guide passage through this open portion (winning prize port 65a). In this case, the front second side wall 813 is formed substantially vertically, while the front first side wall 812 and the front first bottom wall 814 are inclined downward toward the front second bottom wall 815 and The front second bottom wall 815 is arranged at a position lower than the wall 814 . Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the guide passage from the winning opening 65a can be guided to the second front bottom wall 815 by the downward inclination of the front first side wall 812 and the front first bottom wall 814 .

The front second bottom wall 815 is formed with a guide bottom surface 815a that slopes downward toward the side away from the front substrate 811 (that is, the intermediate base 830 side). Therefore, the game ball guided by the front second bottom wall 815 rolls along the downward slope of the guide bottom surface 815a and is guided to the guide passage (receiving port 821b) of the intermediate base 830. As shown in FIG.

In addition, guide ribs 813a are erected at a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) on the second front side wall 813 . The guide rib 813a is formed in such a shape that the erected height from the second front side wall 813 becomes lower as it is separated from the front base 811, so that the erected end face is an inclined surface. As a result, for example, as a result of colliding with the front first side wall 812 and rebounding when flowing (dropping) into the guide passage from the winning opening 65a, the game ball advances to the front second side wall 813 at a relatively high speed. Even in such a case, the game ball can be smoothly guided toward the guide passage of the intermediate base 830 by the inclined surface of the standing tip of the guide rib 813a.

The intermediate base 820 has an intermediate substrate 821 facing the front substrate 811 of the front base 810 with a predetermined gap therebetween, an intermediate first sidewall 822, an intermediate second sidewall 823, and an intermediate bottom wall protruding from the rear surface of the intermediate substrate 821. 824 and .

The intermediate substrate 821 is formed with an opening/closing plate advance/retreat port 821a, a receiving port 821b, a delivery port 821c, and a discharge port 821d. , stopper portions 821g and 821h are protrudingly provided.

The opening/closing plate entrance/exit 821a of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for allowing the opening/closing plate 860 to move forward/backward. When the opening 65a is closed and the opening/closing plate 860 is retracted (retracted) to the opening/closing plate advance/retreat opening 821a, the winning opening 65a is opened.

The receiving port 821b of the intermediate substrate 821 is an opening for receiving the game ball guided from the front second bottom wall 815 (guide bottom surface 815a) of the front base 810 into the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side. (Receiving bottom surface 821b1) is formed continuously with the guide bottom surface 815a of the second front bottom wall 815. As shown in FIG.

The delivery port 821c of the intermediate substrate 821 is an opening for delivering game balls from the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. Formed by That is, the game ball that has passed through the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 and is delivered to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 from the delivery port 821c.

The discharge port 821 d of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for receiving the game ball discharged from the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 , and the bottom surface of the opening is formed by the discharge bottom wall 825 . A game ball ejected from the ejection surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and received in the ejection port 821d rolls on the ejection bottom wall 825 and enters an ejection passage (not shown) connected to the rear side of the rear base 830. sent out.

The support shaft 821 e of the intermediate substrate 821 is a shaft-like body for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840 and is inserted through the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840 . The bearing 821f of the intermediate substrate 821 is a shaft hole for rotatably supporting the driven member 850, and the rotating shaft 851 of the driven member 850 is inserted therethrough.

The stopper portions 821g and 821h of the intermediate substrate 821 are portions for contacting the lower surface of the seesaw member 840 to restrict the rotation of the seesaw member 840. The stopper portion 821g is located at the other longitudinal end of the seesaw member 840. The stopper portion 821h is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface (surface opposite to the discharging surface 846), and the stopper portion 821h is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface (surface opposite to the receiving surface 844) on one longitudinal end side of the seesaw member 840. be done.

The first state of the seesaw member 840 is formed by restricting the rotation of the seesaw member 840 by the stopper portion 821h (see FIG. 52(a)). It is formed by being restricted by the portion 821g (see FIG. 52(b)).

Here, as described above, the stopper portion 821g is formed at a position where it can come into contact with the lower surface of the seesaw member 840 opposite to the ejection surface 846, so that the ejection of the game ball can be stabilized. That is, when a game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and the second state is formed by the weight thereof, the stopper portion 821g supports the lower surface opposite to the discharge surface 846. Therefore, for example, the stopper portion 821h is supported. As compared with the case where the stopper portion 821g supports a position near the support shaft 821e (for example, the lower surface on the side opposite to the inclined surface 845), the seesaw member 840 can be prevented from swinging on the discharge surface 846 side. As a result, the discharge of game balls from the discharge surface 846 can be stabilized.

The intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 form the side walls of the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 (the passage for guiding the game balls received from the receiving port 821b to the delivery port 821c), and are separated by a predetermined interval. They are arranged facing each other while being separated from each other. That is, the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 receive the game ball sent out along the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 52(a)) from the guide passage on the side of the front base 810 through the receiving opening 821b and The received game ball is directed toward the intermediate bottom wall 824 and guided along a substantially vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 52(a)).

The intermediate bottom wall 824 forms the bottom wall of the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side, and is connected to the lower end sides of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823, respectively. The intermediate bottom wall 824 is formed with a guide bottom surface 824a that slopes downward toward the delivery port 821c side (that is, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840). A game ball guided through the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824, passes through the delivery port 821c, and reaches the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in a substantially horizontal direction (Fig. 52(a) in the lateral direction).

In this way, the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 is provided with an intermediate bottom wall 824 (a guide bottom surface 824a), and the game ball rolling on the guide bottom surface 824a is moved to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in a substantially horizontal direction. Since it is guided from the side, the game balls can be guided one by one to the receiving surface 844, and a plurality of game balls can be placed on the receiving surface 844 as in the case of the form in which the game balls are dropped from above the receiving surface 844. Avoid stacking balls. As a result, as will be described later, even when a plurality of game balls continuously pass through the guide passage, the seesaw member 840 can be easily switched between the first state and the second state.

Here, the extension length of the guide passage that guides the game ball along the substantially horizontal direction toward the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 of the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 is twice the diameter of the game ball. It is preferable to set the following. In this embodiment, the horizontal distance dimension L (see FIG. 52(a)) from the extended end of the guide bottom surface 824a to the rear wall 831 of the rear base 830, which will be described later, is set to 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball. be done. As a result, as will be described later, even when a plurality of game balls continuously pass through the guide passage, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 one by one at intervals.

In addition, the facing interval between the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 is set to a size equivalent to the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, since the position of the game ball can be defined between the facing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823, the seesaw member 840 always keeps the game ball rolling on the guide bottom surface 824a and delivered from the delivery port 821c. can be received by the receiving surface 844 (guided to the same position on the receiving surface 844).

In this case, the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 is formed so that, in the first state, the height position of the end of the downward slope is higher than the height position of the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 ( See FIG. 53(a)). Thereby, as will be described later, the game ball can be smoothly guided from the guide bottom surface 824a to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, and the transition to the second state can be quickly performed.

On the other hand, in the second state, the height position of the end of the downward slope is formed to be lower than the height position of the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (see FIG. 53(b)). Thereby, as will be described later, a step formed between the guide bottom surface 824a and the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 can be used to easily lower the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, thereby forming the first state. can be made easier.

The rear base 830 mainly comprises a rear wall 831 , a discharge side wall 832 and a discharge ceiling wall 833 . The rear wall 831 abuts against the rear side end surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822, the intermediate second side wall 823, and the intermediate bottom wall 824 of the intermediate base body 820 (that is, covers the rear side open portion). It forms the back side wall (back wall) of the guide passage.

The discharge side wall 832 and the discharge ceiling wall 833 form the side wall and the ceiling wall of the guide passage for guiding the game ball from the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 to the discharge passage (not shown), and the discharge port 821d. along the outer edge of the That is, the cross-sectional shape of the guide passage taken in by the discharge bottom wall 825 of the intermediate base 820 and the discharge side wall 832 and discharge ceiling wall 833 of the rear base 830 is substantially the same as the shape of the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820. be. As a result, the width of the guide passage can be ensured, so that a plurality of game balls can be guided smoothly. Further, even when the later game ball collides with the previous game ball on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and bounces up, the latter game ball can be guided smoothly. Details will be described later.

The seesaw member 840 includes a bearing 841 formed at a substantially central portion in the longitudinal direction, a connecting pin 842 formed at one end side in the longitudinal direction, a decorative portion 843 formed at the other end side in the longitudinal direction, and a It mainly includes a receiving surface 844 , an inclined surface 845 and a discharge surface 846 that are formed, and a claw portion 847 erected on the discharge surface 846 .

As described above, the bearing 841 is a hole having a circular cross section through which the support shaft 821e projecting from the intermediate substrate 821 of the intermediate base 820 is rotatably inserted. 840 is rotatably journalled between opposing surfaces of front base 810 and intermediate base 820 .

The connecting pin 842 is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and is slidably inserted into a connecting groove 852 (described later) of the driven member 850 . Thereby, the rotation of the seesaw member 840 can be transmitted to the driven member 850 . That is, when the seesaw member 840 rotates about the support shaft 821e, the connecting pin 842 acts on the connecting groove 852, so that the driven member 850 rotates about the rotating shaft 851. .

The other end decorative portion 843 is a portion with a decoration such as a pattern on the front, and is exposed to the player through the cutout portion 811b of the front base 810 so as to be visible to the player, as described above.

The receiving surface 844 is a flat surface portion that receives a game ball that rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a in the guide passage of the intermediate base 820 and is delivered from the delivery port 821c. It is a flat surface-like part for rolling the received game ball to the discharge surface 846 .

The receiving surface 844 and the inclined surface 845 are not dependent on the rotational position of the seesaw member 840, i.e., in a no-load state where no game ball is placed on the seesaw member 840 (i.e., the first state, see FIG. 52(a)). ) is formed in a shape with a downward slope toward the discharge surface 846 . Therefore, in either the first state or the second state, the game ball received by the receiving surface 644 can roll toward the discharge surface 646 from the receiving surface 644 and the inclined surface 643 .

Here, in this embodiment, since the receiving surface 844 is located on the one longitudinal end side (the left side in FIG. 52(a)) of the seesaw member 840 relative to the axial center of the bearing 841, the receiving surface 844 is in the second state (the other end side is lowered). 52(b)), when the receiving surface 844 receives a game ball, the weight of the received game ball causes the one end in the longitudinal direction (receiving surface 844 side) to move. can be lowered. As a result, as will be described later, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

The discharge surface 846 is a flat surface-shaped part for sending out (discharging) the game ball from the seesaw member 840 to the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820, and is arranged from the front base 810 side to the intermediate base 820 side (FIG. 52(b)). It is formed so as to be inclined downward from the front side of the paper to the back side. Therefore, when the game ball rolls up to the discharge surface 846, the game ball can roll toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 due to the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846.

The pawl portion 847 switches the rolling direction of the game ball to the direction toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 when the game ball rolls on the discharge surface 846 along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840. It is provided with a guide surface 847a formed as an inclined surface that guides the abutted game ball toward the discharge port 821d. This makes it easier for the game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846 to flow into the discharge port 821d quickly. Therefore, as will be described later, the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are formed. alternate switching can be performed smoothly.

In this case, the claw portion 847 is formed on the other end in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, and is biased toward the side close to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d) in the width direction of the seesaw member 840. is set. As a result, as will be described later, when the position of the game ball rolling on the output surface 846 varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, , the time during which the second state is formed) can be easily made constant, and as a result, alternate switching between the first state and the second state can be performed smoothly.

The driven member 850 has a rotating shaft 851 protruding from the rear surface of the driven member 850 at the other end in the longitudinal direction. and a connecting groove 852 formed in the front of the driven member 850 and a one-end decorative portion 853 exposed to the player through the cutout 811b of the front base 810 so as to be visible to the player. Prepare for.

The rotating shaft 851 is a shaft-shaped body rotatably inserted through the bearing 821f projecting from the intermediate substrate 821 of the intermediate base 820, as described above. are rotatably journalled between the facing surfaces of front base 810 and intermediate base 820 .

As described above, the connecting groove 852 is a concave groove through which the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840 is slidably inserted. , the driven member 850 is rotated as the seesaw member 840 is rotated.

When the seesaw member 840 is shifted from the first state to the second state, the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 852 is pushed up by the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840, and the driven member 850 rotates about the rotating shaft 851 as shown in FIG. (a) Rotating clockwise raises the linking driven member 850 (one end decorative portion 853) (see FIG. 52(b)). On the other hand, when the seesaw member 840 transitions from the second state to the first state, the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 852 is pushed down by the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840, and the driven member 850 rotates about the rotating shaft 851 as shown in FIG. (a) By rotating clockwise, the linking driven member 850 (one end decorative portion 853) is lowered (see FIG. 52(a)).

In this embodiment, the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840 is thus connected to the connecting groove 852 of the driven member 850, and a link mechanism is configured to rotate the driven member 850 as the seesaw member 840 rotates. A link ratio of the link mechanism is set to a ratio that amplifies the rotation angle of the driven member 850 with respect to the rotation angle of the seesaw member 840 . As a result, the movable range of the driven member 850 (one-end decorative portion 853) can be expanded, and the presentation effect associated with the displacement can be enhanced.

Here, since the seesaw member 840 can be rotated using the weight of the game ball, the transition from the first state to the second state can be easily performed at high speed and in a relatively short time. On the other hand, the transition from the second state to the first state requires rotation of the seesaw member 840 only by its own weight, so the operation becomes slow and takes a long time. In order to ensure that the seesaw member 840 alternately switches between the first state and the second state when a plurality of game balls pass through the guide passage continuously, the transition from the second state to the first state should be done promptly.

In this case, according to the present embodiment, the driven member 850 is connected to one longitudinal end of the seesaw member 840 , so the weight of the driven member 850 is applied to the one longitudinal end of the seesaw member 840 by an external force. (That is, it can be used as an assisting force for transitioning from the second state to the first state). As a result, it is possible to shorten the time required for the transition from the second state to the first state. Alternate switching between the first state and the second state can be facilitated.

Next, the operation of the winning device 65 will be described. When game balls flow into the guide passage on the side of the front base 810 from the winning opening 65a, the game balls are collected on the front second bottom wall 815 and roll on the guide bottom surface 815a of the front second bottom wall 815. 53(a) and 53(b)), and flows from the receiving port 821b of the intermediate base 820 into the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side.

A game ball that has flowed into the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 travels between the facing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 in a substantially vertical direction (downward direction in FIGS. 53(a) and 53(b)). and reach the intermediate bottom wall 824 . The guiding direction of the game ball that reaches the intermediate bottom wall 824 is switched. That is, the game ball rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824, is guided in a substantially horizontal direction (left direction in FIGS. 53(a) and 53(b)), It is delivered to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 from the outlet 821c.

As shown in FIG. 52(a), when the seesaw member 840 forming the first state receives a game ball on its receiving surface 844, the game ball rolls on the receiving surface 844 and the inclined surface 845 toward the discharge surface 846. The weight of the game ball causes the seesaw member 840 to rotate clockwise about the rotating shaft 841 in FIG. A second state is formed, as shown at 52(b). However, illustration of game balls is omitted in FIG. 52(b).

When the game ball is discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 and a no-load state is formed in which the weight of the game ball is not applied to the seesaw member 840, the seesaw member 840 rotates the rotating shaft 841 by its own weight. 52(b) about the center (the other end in the longitudinal direction (the other end decorative portion 843 side) is raised), and as shown in FIG. 52(a), the first state is formed ( seesaw member 840 is returned to the first state).

In this case, when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided to the seesaw member 840, the weight of the game balls causes the seesaw member 840 to descend to the second state (the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the side of the other end decorative portion 843)). state), and it may not be possible to alternately switch between the first state and the second state.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the seesaw member 840 has the receiving surface 844 located on the one longitudinal end side (the left side in FIG. As shown, even when the seesaw member 840 forming the second state receives the game ball on its receiving surface 844, the weight of the game ball supported by the receiving surface 844 allows the one end in the longitudinal direction to descend. That is, the seesaw member 840 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 52(b) about the rotating shaft 841 (the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the side of the other end decorative portion 843) is raised), as shown in FIG. 52(b). A second state can be formed (made easier to form). As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

Here, in this embodiment, as described above, since the guide passages for guiding the game balls are formed in the internal spaces of the front base 810, the intermediate base 820 and the rear base 830, a plurality of game balls can be delivered from the winning opening 65a. Even in the case of continuous inflow, it is possible to store a plurality of game balls using the guide passage and to guide the plurality of game balls to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in order. can.

However, even when a plurality of game balls are stored using the guide passage and the game balls are guided to the guide surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in order, the game balls are In the configuration where the game balls are guided by dropping from above, the plurality of game balls tend to pile up on the receiving surface 844, and the game balls are hindered from rolling from the receiving surface 844 to the inclined surface 845. Therefore, the seesaw member 840 cannot alternately switch between the first state and the second state.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, a horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824 ) is formed, and the game ball rolling on the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage is guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 from the substantially horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIGS. 53(a) and 5(b)). can be done. As a result, the game balls can be guided one by one from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the receiving surface 844 can sequentially receive the game balls from the horizontal passage one by one). It is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls from being vertically stacked on the receiving surface 844.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member 840 .

In this case, as described above, the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 guides the game ball along the substantially vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 52(a)) between the facing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823. A horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) is connected to the downstream side thereof, and the extension length of the horizontal passage is shorter than twice the diameter of the game ball. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are stored in the guide passage, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 one by one at intervals.

That is, by setting the extension length of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) to a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball (in this embodiment, the extension tip of the guide bottom surface 824a to the rear surface The horizontal distance L from the base 830 to the rear wall 831, which will be described later, is approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball), and only one game ball is present in the horizontal passage, and Since the direction in which the horizontal passage extends and the direction in which the upstream passage extends are different, when the ball flows from the upstream passage to the horizontal passage, it is necessary to change the inflow direction. It is possible to increase the time required for the flow into the horizontal passage by the change of direction.

Therefore, when the previous game ball existing in the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) is guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, the game ball after the upstream passage (next game ball) is changed direction. While taking time, the game ball is flowed into the horizontal passage, and the subsequent game ball is guided from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. - 特許庁That is, the later game ball is spaced apart from the previous game ball. As a result, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 one by one at intervals.

As shown in FIGS. 52(b) and 53(b), in the second state, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is positioned above the downward inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824). Therefore, a step in the height direction (vertical direction in FIG. 53(b)) can be formed between the receiving surface 844 and the guide bottom surface 824a. As a result, in the second state, when guiding the game ball to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 by rolling the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal path, the game ball is caused to ride on the receiving surface 844 (collide with the step). 53(b)), and this riding action (collision) can be used to facilitate lowering of the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (moving downward in FIG. 53(b)). That is, the one end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 can be easily lowered, and the first state can be easily formed. It is possible to facilitate switching between the state and the second state alternately.

On the other hand, when the seesaw member 840 forms the first state (see FIGS. 52(a) and 53(a)), the seesaw member 840 is in an unloaded state and the guide bottom surface of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) The game ball guided from 824a and received by the receiving surface 844 is rapidly rolled toward the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846, and the weight of the game ball acts on the other end of the seesaw member 840 in the longitudinal direction. It is required to descend (form the second state).

In this case, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, as shown in FIGS. Since the ball is also positioned downward, it is not necessary for the game ball to ride on the receiving surface 844 (collide with the step) as in the case of the second state described above, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a time lag due to such an operation. Therefore, it is possible to quickly roll the game ball from the receiving surface 844 toward the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846, thereby facilitating formation of the second state.

In the first state, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is formed so as to be at the same height position (flat position) as the downward inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824). preferably. When the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is positioned below the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal path, the game ball is dropped from the guide bottom surface 824a to the receiving surface 844, so that the game ball bounces, This is because a time lag and an increased load on the rotating shaft 841 of the seesaw member 840 due to the impact of the drop can be eliminated if the height is the same.

Next, the claw portion 847 of the seesaw member 840 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the winning device 65 taken along line LIV-LIV in FIG. 52(b).

As shown in FIG. 54, the seesaw member 840 has a claw portion 847 erected from a discharge surface 846 thereof. The pawl portion 847 has a guide surface 847a which is formed to be inclined so as to approach the discharge port 821d as it goes from the inclined surface 825 side toward the other end decorative portion 843 side. As a result, when the game ball rolls on the discharge surface 846 along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (left and right direction in FIG. 54) toward the other end decorative portion 843 (right side in FIG. 54), the game ball can be brought into contact with the guide surface 847a of the claw portion 847 to switch the rolling direction to the direction toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 (upward in FIG. 54). The time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) can be shortened, and as a result, alternate switching between the first state and the second state can be performed. It can be done smoothly.

In this case, as described above, the claw portion 847 is located on the discharge surface 846 on the other longitudinal end side of the seesaw member 840 (the other end decorative portion 843 side, right side in FIG. 54) and in the width direction of the seesaw member 840 ( 54), it is biased toward the side close to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d, the bottom side in FIG. 54). As a result, when the position of the game ball rolling on the output surface 846 varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the second state is The formed time) can be easily made constant, and as a result, alternating switching between the first state and the second state can be performed smoothly.

That is, in the width direction of the seesaw member 840 (vertical direction in FIG. 54), the game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846 on the side close to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d, the lower side in FIG. A game ball that has a long distance to 821d and rolls on the discharge surface 846 on the side close to the intermediate base 820 (the side close to the discharge port 821d, the upper side in FIG. 54) has a short distance to the discharge port 821d.

Therefore, by arranging the claw portion 847 in the width direction of the seesaw member 840 so as to be closer to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d, the lower side in FIG. The former game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846 on the side (lower side in FIG. 54) collides with the guide surface 847a of the claw portion 847 at an early stage and is discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d, while the intermediate base For the latter game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846 on the side close to 820 (upper side in FIG. 54), it is possible to delay or prevent the collision of the pawl portion 847 with the guide surface 847a. Thereby, in each of the former and the latter, the total time during which the game ball rolls on the discharge surface 846 can be brought close to the same. As a result, even if the rolling position of the game ball varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the weight of the game ball acts on the discharge surface 846 can be easily made constant.

Next, the outlet 821d of the intermediate base 820 will be described with reference to FIG. 55A and 55B are schematic rear views of the winning device 65, in which FIG. 55A shows the first state shown in FIG. 52A, and FIG. 55B shows the second state shown in FIG. 52B. , respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b), the width dimension of the outlet 821d (horizontal dimension in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b)) is more than twice the diameter of the game ball. It is set to a large size (approximately 2.5 times in this embodiment). As a result, in a state in which the previous game ball exists on the other longitudinal direction end side of the seesaw member 840 (the left side in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b)), the next game ball further moves to the other longitudinal direction end side. Even when rolling toward, each of these game balls can be smoothly flowed into the discharge port 821d.

For example, the later game ball collides with the previous game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846, and the latter game ball bounces back in the opposite direction to the rolling direction (that is, the interval between the two game balls (Fig. 55 (a) and FIG. 55(b) are expanded in the width direction of the discharge port 821d), and even when these game balls are discharged to the discharge port 821d, the width dimension of the discharge port 821 is sufficient. Each of them can flow in smoothly by being secured in

Also, the height dimension of the discharge port 821d (vertical dimension in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b)) is greater on the side of the inclined surface 845 than on the side of the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840. is set to the larger dimension. As a result, in a state in which the previous game ball exists on the other longitudinal direction end side of the seesaw member 840 (the left side in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b)), the next game ball is further positioned on the other longitudinal direction end side. Even if it rolls toward , each of these game balls can be smoothly flowed into the discharge port 821d.

That is, the later game ball collided with the previous game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846, and the subsequent game ball was bounced upward, or bounced back in the opposite direction to the rolling direction and inclined surface Even if the game ball is bounced upward at 845, the height dimension of the discharge port 821d on the side of the inclined surface 845 can be used to allow the later game ball to flow into the discharge port 821 smoothly. On the other hand, even if the previous game ball collides with the next game ball, it is difficult to be bounced up. can be suppressed, and a space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

Next, the game area will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 60. FIG. 56 and 57 are partially enlarged views of the game board 13, in which the LVI portion of FIG. 2 is partially enlarged. Note that FIG. 57 shows a state in which the center frame 86 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60, a nail, a pinwheel, an inner rail 61, an outer rail 62, various prize openings (see FIG. 2), a center frame 86, and the like. As described above, the front surface of the game board 13 and the area defined by the inner rail 12 is the game area (area where nails, winning holes, etc. are arranged and shot balls flow down). be.

An opening is formed in the center of the game board 13 so that a third symbol display device 81, which is a display device, can be visually recognized. In this case, conventionally, the opening of the game board 13 is made larger than the outer shape of the third pattern display device 81, and a production device arranged displaceably on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60) by that amount. is secured in a visible area. However, there is a limit to enlarging the opening of the game board 13 because it is necessary to secure an area for the balls to flow down.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the center frame 86 to be installed in the opening of the game board 13 (the opening 60a of the base plate 60) is made of a light-transmissive material, and a part of the center frame 86 (hereinafter referred to as (referred to as "area forming part R") forms part of the game area. As a result, the rendering device (the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 in this embodiment) can be visually recognized through the area forming portion R of the center frame 86 (see through). Therefore, the area in which the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 can be visually recognized can be enlarged while securing the area for the ball to flow down. However, in FIG. 56, in order to simplify the drawing, illustration of the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 seen through the area forming portion R is omitted.

In this case, in this embodiment, the opening of the game board 13 (the opening 60a of the base plate 60) is formed so that its inner edge reaches the outer edge of the game area (that is, the inner rail 61). Via the area forming part R of 86, the area in which the production device (counterclockwise rotation unit 700) can be visually recognized can be secured to the maximum.

On the other hand, the area forming portion R of the center frame 86 has a width dimension that allows only one game ball to pass through, so that the opening of the center frame 86 (that is, the area forming portion R Without the part R), it is possible to secure a maximum area in which the production device (counterclockwise rotation unit 700) can be directly visually recognized.

A detailed configuration of the area forming portion R in the center frame 86 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60. FIG. 58 is a front perspective view of the center frame 86, and FIG. 59 is a front view of the area forming portion R. As shown in FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view of the region forming portion R taken along line LX-LX in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 60, the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 is illustrated typically.

As shown in FIG. 58 , the center frame 86 includes a frame plate base portion 910 formed in a frame shape when viewed from the front, and an inner portion erected from the rear surface of the frame plate base portion 910 and fitted in an opening 60 a of the base plate 60 . It mainly comprises a fitting wall portion 920 and an inner edge defining wall portion 930 erected from the front surface of the frame base portion 910 opposite to the inner fitting wall portion 920 and defining the inner edge of the game area.

The frame plate base portion 910 is a portion superimposed on the front surface of the base plate 60, and the front side thereof is a region where game balls flow down. A plurality of insertion holes 911 for inserting tapping screws for fastening and fixing the center frame 86 to the base plate 60 are drilled in the frame plate base portion 910 . In addition, the outer edge of the frame plate base portion 910 is inclined downward so as to be smoothly connected to the front surface of the base plate 60 . This inclination allows smooth rolling of the game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 59 and 60 , a columnar portion 940 , a side wall portion 950 and a downstream wall portion 960 are erected from the front surface of the frame plate base portion 910 in the region forming portion R of the center frame 86 .

The columnar portion 940 is formed as a columnar body having a substantially rhombic cross section, and is arranged at an intermediate position between the inner rail 61 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930 (see FIG. 56). As a result, in the upstream portion of the region forming portion R, a first path M1 is defined between the columnar body 940 and the inner rail 61, and a second path M1 is defined between the columnar body 940 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930. M2 is partitioned.

The side wall portion 950 is formed as a wall portion provided in parallel with the inner rail 61 on the downstream side of the columnar body 940 and partitions the third path M3 between itself and the inner edge defining wall portion 930 . In this case, the portion of the inner edge defining wall portion 930 facing the side wall portion 950 is closer to the inner rail 61 side than the portion facing the columnar body 940 .

As a result, the downstream side of the second path M2 is bent toward the inner rail 61 side (the side wall portion 450 side). On the other hand, since the first path M1 and the third path M3 are paths formed along the inner rail 61, they are connected substantially in a straight line. Further, the first path M1 and the third path M3 are formed as linear paths that allow the ball to flow down in an inclined direction when viewed from the front.

A concave groove 971 is provided in the front surface of the frame plate base portion 910 . The recessed groove 971 is a portion for suppressing the flow speed of the game ball, and is formed as a recessed portion having an inverted triangular cross section, and while repeatedly bending left and right in a sawtooth shape when viewed from the front, the first path M1 and the second path M1 are formed. It extends along the route direction of the 3 route M3.

Protrusions 972 are provided on opposing surfaces of the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930, respectively. The protrusion 972 is a part for suppressing the falling speed of the game ball, is formed in a substantially semicircular cross section, and extends along the erecting direction of the both wall portions 930 and 950 . Each of these protrusions 972 is disposed at a position out of phase with the curved portion of the recessed groove 971 along the direction of the third path M3.

The downstream wall portion 960 is formed as a wall portion connected to the downstream end portion of the side wall portion 950 and faces the downstream side of the third path M3. Specifically, it is formed as a wall portion substantially orthogonal to the flow direction of the third route M3. In this case, the inner edge defining wall portion 930 has a portion corresponding to the downstream wall portion 940 formed along the downstream wall portion 960 , thereby forming a fourth wall portion between the inner edge defining wall portion 930 and the downstream wall portion 940 . A route M4 is demarcated.

The width dimension of the first path M1 (interval between the inner rail 61 and the columnar body 640), the width dimension of the second path M2 (interval between the columnar body 640 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930), and the width of the third path M3 Only game balls with a dimension (opposing distance between the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930) and a width dimension of the fourth path M4 (opposing distance between the downstream wall portion 960 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930) can pass. Each is set to the width dimension. In this embodiment, it is set to be approximately 1.2 times the diameter of the game ball.

Next, the action of the area forming portion R formed in this manner on the falling game ball will be described. A game ball that is guided by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 and flows down from the upper area of the game area bounces off a nail or rolls along the inner edge regulating wall portion 930, and then travels along the first path M1 or the first path. It flows into the region forming portion R from one of the two paths M2. A game ball passing through the first path M1 or the second path M2 and flowing down the third path M3 collides with the downstream wall portion 960 and flows down to the lower area of the game area via the fourth path M4.

Here, since the area forming portion R is a part of the center frame 86 and is made of a resin material, nails cannot be implanted therein. Therefore, the falling speed of the game ball cannot be reduced, and there is a possibility that the player may find it difficult to visually recognize the falling game ball.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the downstream wall portion 960 is erected on the downstream side of the third route M3 (at the confluence portion of the third route M3 and the fourth route M4) in the area forming portion R. By colliding with the downstream wall portion 960, the falling speed of the game ball can be reduced, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the falling game ball.

In this case, the downstream wall portion 960 is erected from the frame plate substrate 910, that is, formed integrally with the center frame 86, so that the downstream wall portion 960 can be easily molded by resin molding using a mold. is formed as a separate part and fixed to the frame plate substrate 910 by fastening. Therefore, the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly.

On the other hand, the third path M3 is formed in a straight line, and the downstream wall portion 960 made of a resin material bears the portion where the game ball flows down relatively quickly, and the portion where the game ball repeatedly collides with the downstream wall portion 960 is formed. , there is a risk of damage. On the other hand, since the downstream wall portion 960 is connected to the downstream side of the side wall portion 950, the rigidity of the downstream wall portion 960 can be increased, and damage to the downstream wall portion 960 can be suppressed.

In this case, an inclined surface 961 that inclines toward the fourth path M4 is formed at the connecting portion between the side wall portion 950 and the downstream wall portion 960 . As a result, the connecting portion between the side wall portion 950 and the downstream wall portion 960 can be triangular in front view as shown in FIG. 59, so that the rigidity of the downstream wall portion 960 can be increased accordingly.

Further, when the game ball that has flowed down the third path M3 collides with the inclined surface 961 and then with the downstream wall portion 960, it is possible to suppress the game ball from bouncing in the direction in which the game ball flows backward along the third path M3. , it can be made to flow down toward the outlet of the third route M3 while reducing its flow rate. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the fourth path M4, and the load on the downstream wall portion 960 can be reduced. Therefore, damage to the downstream wall portion 960 can be suppressed also from this point.

The side wall portion 950 is also formed integrally with the center frame 86, and can be easily formed by resin molding using a mold. There is no need to perform complicated operations such as fastening and fixing to the frame plate substrate 910, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly. Further, the side wall portion 950, which serves to partition the third path M3, can also serve to increase the rigidity of the downstream wall portion 960, thereby simplifying the structure and reducing the cost of parts accordingly. can be done.

Here, in the conventional game machine, the manner in which the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the inner rail 61 is that it collides with the nail and bounces, and then collides with the nail. Damage to the inner rail 61 was unlikely to occur.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the effect device (counterclockwise rotation unit 700) is directly visible through the opening of the center frame 86 (that is, without the area forming portion R). , the width of the area forming portion R is set to a narrow dimension (in this embodiment, the width dimension that allows only game balls with 1=1 to pass through the third path M3). That is, the width of the game area is narrowed by the area forming portion R. Therefore, on the upstream side of the area forming portion R, it is necessary to greatly change the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the game area (in this embodiment, it is necessary to form the second path M2). In such a form, some of the game balls (game balls flowing down the second path M2) collide with the inner rail 61 at a relatively high speed, which may cause damage (bending due to collision) of the inner rail 61. .

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the side wall portion 750 is arranged side by side with the inner rail 61, the side wall portion 950 receives the game ball that has flowed down the second path M2, thereby preventing the game ball from colliding with the inner rail 61. can be avoided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inner rail 61 from being damaged (bending due to collision).

In other words, it is conceivable that the inner rail 61 also functions to partition the third path M3 without forming the side wall portion 750, but in this case, it is necessary to avoid collision of the game ball with the inner rail 61. Therefore, the width of the upstream side of the region forming portion R cannot be reduced, and the opening of the center frame 86 (the inner edge defining wall portion 930) must be arranged in the direction away from the inner rail 61. Therefore, the area in which the directing device (counterclockwise rotation unit 700) is directly visible is reduced accordingly. Therefore, the present embodiment in which the side wall portion 750 is arranged side by side with the inner rail 61 results in maximizing the area in which the effect device (left rotation unit 700) can be directly visually recognized.

As described above, the side wall portion 750 is integrally formed as a part of the center frame 86 made of a light-transmitting material, so that light emitted from the light emitter on the back side of the center frame 86 (side wall portion 950, concave groove 971, etc.) It can function as a light guide that guides the emitted light P to the game area. For example, the light P emitted from the back side and introduced into the side wall portion 950 is guided to the upright end face (upper side in FIG. 60) of the side wall portion 950 and irradiated from the upright end face. Not only can the illuminated light P exert a dramatic effect, but the light P guided to the side surface of the side wall portion 950 (the surface facing the inner edge defining wall portion 930) is irradiated from the side surface of the side wall portion 950. can do. As a result, the light is guided to the front surface of the frame plate base 910 (upper surface in FIG. 60) and the side surface of the inner edge defining wall portion 930 (the surface facing the side wall portion 950), and together with the light P emitted from the upper surface or the side surface, the game The production effect by the light P that shines the area where the ball rolls (the game ball when the game ball rolls) can be exhibited.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the side wall portion 950 is arranged side by side with the inner rail 61, the light P emitted from the rear side of the center frame 86 and introduced into the side wall portion 750 is directed toward the inner rail 61 side (the inner edge defining wall). The inner rail 61 can reduce leakage to the outside from the side surface of the portion 930 (opposite side of the portion 930). That is, the inner rail 61 can reflect the light P toward the standing end surface or the side surface (the side surface facing the inner edge defining wall portion 930). Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of light that can be irradiated from the standing end surface or side surface of the side wall portion 950, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the guided light P.

The luminous body is arranged in the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 (not shown), and the retracted position of the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 is the rear surface of the area forming portion R. FIG. Therefore, in a state in which the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 is arranged at the retracted position, the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 can be visually recognized through the region forming portion R, and the light P emitted from the light emitter is guided through the side wall portion 950. It is possible to allow the player to visually recognize the image. That is, the shape of the counterclockwise rotation unit 700 visually recognized through the area forming portion R can be associated with the light P emitted from the standing end surface of the side wall portion 950, and the player can visually recognize the shape. The production effect by the light P can be heightened.

Here, as described above, projections 972 protrude from the facing surfaces of the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930 . Therefore, the game ball flowing down the third path M3 can be made to collide with the projection 972 and its flow down can be inhibited. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball is slowed down in the region forming portion R where nails cannot be implanted, and the player can easily see the falling game ball.

In this case, the projection 972 projecting from the side wall portion 950 and the projection 972 projecting from the inner edge defining wall portion 930 are arranged out of phase with each other along the direction of the third path M3. That is, they are arranged in a zigzag pattern on the left and right facing surfaces. Therefore, when the game ball flows down the third path M3, the game ball can alternately collide with the left and right projections 972 to cause the game ball to meander left and right. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball can be easily slowed down, and a displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the flowing direction (path direction of the third path M3) is imparted to the game ball to change the movement of the game ball. can be done.

Further, the front surface of the frame plate base portion 910 is provided with the concave groove 971 formed in a sawtooth shape when viewed from the front, as described above. Therefore, when the game ball flows down the third path M3, the game ball can be guided along the inner surface of the recessed groove 971 to meander left and right. Therefore, this also makes it easier to slow down the flow speed of the game ball, and also gives the game ball a displacement component in the direction perpendicular to the flow direction (path direction of the third path M3), thereby changing the movement of the game ball. can give

In addition, when the light emitted from the back side of the area forming portion R is guided toward the front surface of the game area, the recessed groove 971 recessed in the front surface of the frame plate base portion 910 is used to diffuse or collect the light. Since it can be used as a lens that emits light, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the guided light.

In this case, the bent portion of the recessed groove 971 has a phase difference along the direction of the third route M3 with respect to the projection 972 projecting from the side wall portion 950 and the projection 972 projecting from the inner edge defining wall portion 930. are staggered. Therefore, when the game ball flows down the third path M3, the game ball that is guided by the inner surface of the recessed groove 971 and meanders left and right can be made to collide alternately with the left and right projections 972 easily. A synergistic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the action of 971 and the action of projection 972 . As a result, the falling speed of the game ball can be easily made slower, and the change in movement of the game ball can be made greater.

In addition, since these protrusions 972 and grooves 971 slow down the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the third route M3, damage to the downstream wall portion 960 is suppressed and the game from the third route M3 to the fourth route M4 is suppressed. It contributes to the smooth guidance of the ball.

In addition, the terminal end side of the recessed groove 971 (the portion arranged side by side with the inclined surface 961) overlaps the downstream wall portion 960 in its extending direction and points to the exit of the third path M3. As a result, the game ball guided to the terminal end side of the recessed groove 971 can collide with the downstream wall portion 960 from an oblique direction. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball from bouncing in the direction of flowing backward on the third route M3, and to reduce the flow speed of the game ball to flow down toward the exit of the third route M3. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the fourth path M4, and the load on the downstream wall portion 960 can be reduced.

<Second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a second embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a front view of the game board 2013 in the second embodiment. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the game board 2013 of the second embodiment, the formation range of the area forming portion R is expanded to substantially the top of the game area, as compared with the game board 13 of the first embodiment. As a result, through the opening of the center frame 2086 (that is, not through the area forming part R), the production device (in this embodiment, the central rotation unit 400, the central rotation unit 500, and the left rotation unit 700) can be directly connected. The visible area can be further expanded than in the case of the first embodiment.

In the region forming member R, formation of the columnar body 940 (see FIG. 59) is omitted, and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 extends along the outer rail 62 . As a result, a fifth path M5 and a sixth path M6 are defined between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 in a region above the return ball prevention member 68 .

In addition, the facing interval between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 is set to a dimension larger than twice the diameter of the game ball and smaller than three times. In this embodiment, it is set to be approximately 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball. As a result, passages (fifth path M5 and sixth path M6) in which game balls can pass each other without colliding are formed between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930, and the center frame 2086 is formed. It is possible to maximize the above-described area where the production device can be directly visually recognized through the opening.

In addition, the windmill WM has its rotating shaft disposed substantially in the center between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 facing each other. Thereby, the game ball can pass between the outer rail 62 and the rotating shaft of the windmill WM and between the rotating shaft of the windmill WM and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930, respectively.

According to the area forming part R formed in this way, the game ball shot from the ball shooting unit and guided to the upper area of the game area by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 is guided along the outer rail 62. Thus, after passing the windmill WM, the vehicle moves along the fifth route M5. In this case, by setting the firing intensity to a value greater than the reference value, the game ball can flow down to the right side area beyond the upper top of the game area, while the firing intensity is set to a value smaller than the reference value. By doing so, the game ball can flow down along the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 (moving the sixth path M6) without passing over the upper top portion of the game area. The game ball that has moved on the sixth route M6 flows down to the third route M3 after passing through the windmill WM.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 67. FIG. In the right rotation unit 600 of the first embodiment, a case will be described where two members, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642), can be displaced as the transmission member 654 is displaced. However, the right rotation unit 3600 in the third embodiment displaces the three members of the first displacement member 3630, the second displacement member 3640 (connection displacement member 642) and the third displacement member 3660 as the transmission member 654 is displaced. is displaceable. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

62 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 3600 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 3600. FIG. 62 and 63 show a state in which part of the right rotation unit 3600 (back base 610 and front base 620) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, a right rotation unit 3600 in the third embodiment has a third displacement member 3660 slidably disposed in front of one end side (upper side in FIG. 62) of a first displacement member 3630. Prepare. As will be described later, the tip of the connecting pin 3641d of the second displacement member 3640 (driven member 3641) is connected to the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660 via the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 3630. , and by rotating the driven member 3641 relative to the first displacement member 3630, the third displacement member 3660 can be displaced (slid) relative to the first displacement member 3630. .

The through groove 3636 is a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc around the support shaft 632, and the width of the groove is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641. be done. Therefore, the rotation of the driven member 3641 about the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 3630 is allowed by displacing the connecting pin 3641 d along the extending direction of the through groove 3636 .

The connecting pin 3641 d is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section and is inserted into the through groove 3636 , and its protrusion height is set to a dimension that allows it to protrude from the front surface of the first displacement member 3630 . That is, in the assembled state, the distal end side of the connecting pin 3641d can be inserted into a slide groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660 described later via the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 3630. FIG.

A sliding groove 3661 is recessed in the rear surface of the third displacement member 3660, and a slide rail 3662 is arranged above the sliding groove 3661. As shown in FIG. As described above, the sliding groove 3661 is a concave groove through which the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 is slidably inserted. The dimension is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 3641 d of the driven member 3641 .

The slide rail 3662 is an extendable linear guide mechanism interposed between the first displacement member 3630 and the third displacement member 3660. It consists of a front side rail connected to the front side of the rail so that relative displacement in the longitudinal direction is possible. The third displacement member 3660 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 by the extension and contraction of the slide rail 3662 due to the relative displacement of the rear side rail and the front side rail in the longitudinal direction.

When the third displacement member 3660 is arranged on the front side of the first displacement member 3630, only a part of the sliding groove 3661 overlaps with the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 3630 (the sliding groove 3661 and through groove 3636). Therefore, by rotating the driven member 3641 around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 3630 and displacing the connecting pin 3641d along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, the connecting pin 3641d is moved to the third displacement member. By acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 of the 3660 (the connecting pin 3641 d presses the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 ), the third displacement member 3660 can be slid with respect to the first displacement member 3630 .

Next, the operation of right rotation unit 3600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67. FIG. 64 and 65 are front views of the right rotation unit 3600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. Fig. 10 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit 3600 in each state when rotating.

64(a) to 64(c) correspond to FIGS. 66(a) to 66(c), and FIGS. 65(a) to 65(c) correspond to FIGS. 67(a) to 67(c). c) and the same state respectively. In this case, FIG. 64(c) is the same as FIG. 65(a), and FIG. 66(c) is the same as FIG. 67(a).

Here, in the third embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 3630, so that the first displacement member 3630, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 3660 are respectively displaced, and the manner of displacement of the first displacement member 3630 and the second displacement member 3640 is the same as in the case of the above-described first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a), at the retracted position, the slide rail 3662 of the third displacement member 3660 is shortened, and the connecting pin of the driven member 3641 of the second displacement member 3640 is 3641d is located on one end side of the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660 (end far from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, right side in FIG. 66(a)). In this case, the length from the proximal end of the first displacement member 3630 to the distal end of the third displacement member 3660 is the dimension h1.

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 66(a)), the states shown in FIGS. As shown in 66(c), the first displacement member 3630 is rotated in the projecting direction with the rotating shaft 631 as the rotating shaft. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 and is displaced together with the first displacement member 3630 .

Therefore, the second displacement member 3640 does not displace relative to the third displacement member 3660 either. Therefore, since the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 in the second displacement member 3640 does not slide in the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660, the third displacement member 3660 is integrated with the first displacement member 3630. displaced. 64(a) to 64(c) and 66(a) to 66(c), the length from the proximal end of the first displacement member 3630 to the distal end of the third displacement member 3660 is remains at dimension h1.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 67(a)) from the state shown in FIGS. While the state (position) shown in FIG. After passing through, it is arranged in the extended position shown in FIGS. 65(c) and 67(c).

In this case, when the driven member 3641 is rotated about the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 3641 moves the connecting pin 3641d to the other end side of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (support shaft 632 and the end closer to the shaft support hole 641a (left side in FIG. 67(a)).

Therefore, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the inner wall surface on the far side from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, the upper side in FIG. 67(a)) is It is pushed up in the direction of extending the slide rail 3662 (see FIG. 63). As a result, the third displacement member 3660 is slid relative to the first displacement member 3630, and in the sections shown in FIGS. 65(a) to 65(c) and FIGS. The length from the proximal end of the first displacement member 3630 to the distal end of the third displacement member 3660 changes (increases) from dimension h1 to dimension h3 via dimension h2 (h1<h2<h3).

Contrary to the above case, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 67(c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 65(c) and 67(c), the first displacement While the member 3630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. After going through the states shown in b) and FIG. 67(b), it is placed in the states shown in FIGS. 65(a) and 67(a).

In this case, the rotation of the driven member 3641 about the support shaft 632 causes the connecting pin 3641d to move toward one end of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the far end from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a). 67(c) to the right) (clockwise in FIG. 67(c)).

Therefore, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the inner wall surface on the side closer to the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, the lower side in FIG. 67(c)) is Since the slide rail 3662 (see FIG. 63) is pushed down in the direction of shortening, the third displacement member 3660 is slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630, and the third displacement member 3660 is displaced from the proximal end of the first displacement member 3630. The length to the tip is shortened to dimension h1.

64(c) and 66(c), when the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 66(c)), the first displacement member 3630 rotates the rotating shaft 631. 64(a) and 66(a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630, so that the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 is aligned with the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660. , the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 3660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 3630 .

Thus, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 3660 are not displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630, and the first displacement member 3630, the second displacement member 3640 and A configuration in which the third displacement member 3660 is displaced integrally (see FIGS. 64 and 66), and a configuration in which the first displacement member 3630 is maintained in a stopped state and the second displacement member 3640 and the second displacement member 3640 A form (see FIGS. 65 and 67) in which the third displacement members 3660 are relatively displaced individually can be formed.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 73. FIG. In the third embodiment, the case where the right rotation unit 3600 is formed so that the third displacement member 3660 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 has been described. A third displacement member 4660 is rotatable with respect to the first displacement member 4630 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

68 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 69 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 4600. FIG. 68 and 69 show a state in which part of the right rotation unit 4600 (back base 610 and front base 620) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment includes a third displacement member 4660 rotatably pivotally supported in front of one end side (the upper side in FIG. 68) of the first displacement member 4630. . As will be described later, the tip of the connecting pin 3641d of the second displacement member 3640 (driven member 3641) is connected to the sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660 via the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 4630. The third displacement member 4660 can be displaced (rotated) relative to the first displacement member 4630 by rotating the driven member 3641 relative to the first displacement member 4630 .

A slide groove 4661 is recessed in the rear surface of the third displacement member 4660, and a rotary shaft 4662 is projected above the slide groove 4661. As shown in FIG. As described above, the sliding groove 4661 is a concave groove through which the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 is slidably inserted. The dimension is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 3641 d of the driven member 3641 .

The rotating shaft 4662 is a shaft-shaped body that is inserted through a shaft support hole 4637 drilled at one end (upper side in FIG. 68) of the first displacement member 4630. Through the rotating shaft 4662 and the shaft support hole 4637, A third displacement member 4660 is rotatably journalled to the first displacement member 4630 . A retainer C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 4637 is fastened and fixed to the axial end face of the rotation shaft 4662 , thereby restricting the rotation shaft 4662 from slipping out of the shaft support hole 4637 .

When the third displacement member 4660 is arranged (pivotally supported) on the front side of the first displacement member 4630, only a part of the sliding groove 4661 overlaps the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 4630 (sliding). The moving groove 4661 and the through groove 3636 intersect). Therefore, by rotating the driven member 3641 around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 4630 and displacing the connecting pin 3641d along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, the connecting pin 3641d is moved to the third displacement member. The third displacement member 4660 can be rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630 by acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 of the 4660 (the connecting pin 3641d presses the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661).

Next, the operation of right rotation unit 4600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 73. FIG. 70 and 71 are front views of the right rotation unit 4600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 10A and 10B are schematic rear views of the right rotation unit 4600 in each state when rotating.

FIGS. 70(a) to 70(c) correspond to FIGS. 72(a) to 72(c), and FIGS. 71(a) to 71(c) correspond to FIGS. 73(a) to 73(c). c) and the same state respectively. In this case, FIG. 70(c) is the same as FIG. 71(a), and FIG. 72(c) is the same as FIG. 73(a).

Here, in the fourth embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 4630, thereby causing the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are respectively displaced, and the manner of displacement of the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 3640 is the same as in the case of the above-described first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 70(a) and 72(a), at the retracted position, an imaginary line L1 passing through the axial center of the shaft support hole 4637 (rotating shaft 4662) and along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 4630 , and an imaginary line L2 passing through the axial center of the shaft support hole 4637 (rotating shaft 4662) and extending along the longitudinal direction of the third displacement member 4660 is defined as a crossing angle θ1.

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 72(a)), the states shown in FIGS. As shown in 72(c), the first displacement member 4630 is rotated in the projecting direction with the rotating shaft 631 as the rotating shaft. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630 and is displaced together with the first displacement member 4630 .

Therefore, the second displacement member 3640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the third displacement member 4660, and the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 in the second displacement member 3640 , the third displacement member 4660 is also displaced integrally with the first displacement member 4630 . That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 70(a) to 70(c) and FIGS. 72(a) to 72(c), the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) is maintained at the intersection angle θ1.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 73(a)) from the state shown in FIGS. While the state (position) shown in FIG. After passing through, it is arranged in the extended position shown in FIGS. 71(c) and 73(c).

In this case, when the driven member 3641 is rotated about the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 3641 is caused by the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 4660 (the direction of movement of the connecting pin 3641d). The inner wall surface (upper side in FIG. 73(a)) is the direction in which the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 pushes up.

As a result, the third displacement member 4660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, and in the sections shown in FIGS. 71(a) to 71(c) and FIGS. , the angle formed by the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) changes (decreases) from the crossing angle θ1 to the crossing angle θ3 via the crossing angle θ2 (θ3< θ2<θ1).

Contrary to the case described above, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 73(c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 71(c) and 73(c), the first displacement While the member 4630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. After going through the states shown in b) and FIG. 73(b), it is placed in the states shown in FIGS. 71(a) and 73(a).

In this case, the rotation of the driven member 3641 around the support shaft 632 is applied to the inner wall surface of the slide groove 4661 in the third displacement member 4660 (the inner wall surface on the advancing direction side of the connecting pin 3641d, the lower side in FIG. 73(c)). ) is the direction in which the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 pushes down. Therefore, the third displacement member 4660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, and the angle formed by the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) becomes an intersection. is increased to the angle θ1.

70(c) and 72(c), when the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 72(c)), the first displacement member 4630 moves the rotating shaft 631. 70(a) and 72(a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630, so that the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 is aligned with the sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660. Therefore, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 4630 .

Thus, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are not displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630, and the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 3640 and A configuration in which the third displacement member 4660 is displaced integrally (see FIGS. 70 and 71), and a configuration in which the first displacement member 4630 is maintained in a stopped state and the second displacement member 3640 and the second displacement member 3640 A form (see FIGS. 71 and 73) in which the third displacement members 4660 are relatively displaced individually can be formed.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 81. FIG. In the third embodiment, the case where the right rotation unit 3600 is formed so that the third displacement member 3660 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 has been described. A third displacement member 5660 can protrude and disappear in the front-rear direction with respect to the first displacement member 5630 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

74 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 75 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 5600. FIG. 74 and 75 show a state in which part of the right rotation unit 5600 (back base 610 and front base 620) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, in the right rotation unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment, a third displacement member 5660 extends forward and backward (for example, FIG. 76 ( a) It is arranged so that it can appear and disappear in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface). As will be described later, the distal end of the connecting pin 5641d of the second displacement member 5640 (driven member 5641) is connected to the sliding inclined portion of the third displacement member 5660 through the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 5630. 5663, and when the driven member 5641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 5630, the third displacement member 5660 is displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630 (in the front-rear direction). haunting) can be made.

A pair of sliding holes 5638 are formed in the first displacement member 5630 . The sliding hole 5638 is a hole having a circular cross-section through which a sliding guide rod 5664 described later of the third displacement member 5660 is inserted. be. That is, the sliding guide rod 5664 is slidably supported along the drilling direction of the sliding hole 5638, thereby supporting the third displacement member 5660 so as to protrude and retract in the front-rear direction with respect to the first displacement member 5630. be done.

The connecting pin 5641 d is a shaft-like body having a circular cross-section that is inserted into the through groove 3636 , and is set to a protrusion height such that the tip thereof is positioned within the through groove 3636 . That is, in the assembled state, the distal end of the connecting pin 5641 d contacts the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 in the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 5630 .

A sliding inclined portion 5663 and a sliding guide rod 5664 are projected from the rear surface of the third displacement member 5660 . As described above, the sliding inclined portion 5663 is a plate-like portion on which the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641 slides. It is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined upward toward the other end (left side in FIG. 75). That is, the projecting height of the sliding inclined portion 5663 from the third displacement member 5660 is gradually increased from one end to the other end. Therefore, when the connecting pin 5641d slides on the rear surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 from one end to the other end (or in the opposite direction) as the driven member 5641 rotates, the driven member The distance between 5641 and the third displacement member 5660 is enlarged (reduced).

Here, the plate thickness of the sliding inclined portion 5663 is set to be slightly smaller than the groove width of the through groove 3636 , and the rear view shape thereof is formed in a curved shape corresponding to the through groove 3636 . That is, in the assembled state, the protruding distal end side of the sliding inclined portion 5663 is inserted into the through groove 3636 in a state of being slidable in the front-rear direction. Therefore, when the third displacement member 5660 moves back and forth with respect to the first displacement member 5630, not only the sliding guide rod 5664 but also the sliding inclined portion 5663 causes the third displacement member 5660 to slide. Since the movement can be supported (that is, supported at three locations), the forward tilting of the third displacement member 5660 can be suppressed, and the retracting operation can be stabilized.

As described above, the sliding guide rod 5664 is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section slidably supported in the sliding hole 5638 of the first displacement member 5630. A retainer C having a larger diameter than the inner diameter of is fastened and fixed, thereby restricting the slide guide rod 5664 from coming out of the slide hole 5638 .

In this case, a biasing member S formed as a coil spring is interposed between the holding body C and the first displacement member 5630 in an elastically compressed state (a state in which the entire length is shortened). The elastic recovery force of the force member S acts in the direction of separating the holding body C from the back surface of the first displacement member 5630 . As a result, the third displacement member 5660 is biased toward the first displacement member 5630 , and the sliding inclined portion 5663 is inserted through the through groove 3636 .

Therefore, by rotating the driven member 5641 around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 5630 and displacing the connecting pin 5641d along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, the tip of the connecting pin 5641d is moved to the second position. The third displacement member 5660 is moved back and forth with respect to the first displacement member 5630 by acting on the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 (the connecting pin 5641d is slid along the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663). You can spawn in any direction.

Next, the operation of right rotation unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80. FIG. 76 and 77 are front views of the right rotation unit 5600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 56 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit 5600 in each state when rotating. FIG. 80 and 81 are top views of right rotation unit 5600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

FIGS. 76(a) to 76(c) correspond to FIGS. 78(a) to 78(c), FIGS. 80(a) to 80(c), and FIGS. 77(a) to 77(c). ) are the same states as FIGS. 79(a) to 79(c) and FIGS. 81(a) to 81(c), respectively. In this case, FIG. 76(c) is the same as FIG. 77(a), FIG. 78(c) is the same as FIG. 79(a), and FIG. 80(c) is the same as FIG. 81(a). be.

Here, in the fifth embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 5630, thereby causing the first displacement member 5630, the second displacement member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are respectively displaced, and the manner of displacement of the first displacement member 5630 and the second displacement member 5640 is the same as in the case of the above-described first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 76(a), 78(a), and 80(a), at the retracted position, the third displacement member 5660 is brought close to the first displacement member 5630, and the second displacement member 5640 78 (a ) and the right side of FIG. 80(a)). In this case, the amount of protrusion from the front surface of the first displacement member 5630 to the front surface of the third displacement member 5660 is the dimension J1.

From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 78(a)), the states shown in FIGS. As shown in 76(c), FIG. 78(c) and FIG. 80(c), the first displacement member 5630 is rotated in the overhanging direction with the rotating shaft 631 as the rotating shaft. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 5640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 5630 and is displaced together with the first displacement member 5630 .

Therefore, the second displacement member 5640 does not displace relative to the third displacement member 5660 either. Therefore, since the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641 in the second displacement member 5640 does not slide on the rear surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660, the third displacement member 5660 is also integrated with the first displacement member 5630. is displaced. 76(a) to 76(c), 78(a) to 78(c), and 80(a) to 80(c), the third displacement member 5660 It is maintained in the state closest to the 1-displacement member 5630 (state in which the amount of protrusion is the dimension J1).

77(a), 79(a), and 81(a), when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 67(a)), the first displacement member 5630 is While maintaining the state (position) shown in FIG. After going through the states shown in b) and FIG. 81(b), it is placed in the extended position shown in FIGS. 77(c), 79(c) and 81(c).

In this case, when the driven member 5641 is rotated around the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 5641 causes the tip of the connecting pin 5641d to move to the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660. The direction of sliding toward the end side (the end of the side where the projection height from the back surface of the third displacement member 5660 is high, the upper left side in FIG. 79(a), the left side in FIG. 81(a)) ( ) counterclockwise) rotation.

Therefore, the rear surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 is pushed forward (to the upper side in FIG. 81(a)) by the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641 . As a result, the third displacement member 5660 protrudes forward with respect to the first displacement member 5630, and as shown in FIGS. 77(a) to 77(c), FIGS. ) to FIG. 81(c), the amount of protrusion from the front surface of the first displacement member 5630 to the front surface of the third displacement member 5660 changes (increases) from the dimension J1 to the dimension J3 via the dimension J2 (J1 <J2<J3).

Contrary to the above case, the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 79(c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 77(c), 79(c) and 81(c). Then, while the first displacement member 5630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. After being displaced and passing through the states shown in FIGS. be.

In this case, the rotation of the driven member 5641 around the support shaft 632 causes the connecting pin 5641d to move toward one end of the rear surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 (projection from the rear surface of the third displacement member 5660). The rotation is in the direction (clockwise in FIG. 79(c)) of sliding to the lower end in FIG. 79(c), the right side in FIG. 81(c).

Therefore, by moving the connecting pin 5641d to one end side of the rear surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 in the third displacement member 5660, the sliding inclined portion 5663 retreats (retracts) rearward (back side) accordingly. is allowed, the elastic recovery force of the biasing member S causes the third displacement member 5660 to approach the first displacement member 5630, and the distance from the front surface of the first displacement member 5630 to the front surface of the third displacement member 5660 is The amount of protrusion is shortened to dimension J1.

From the states shown in FIGS. 76(c), 78(c) and 80(c), when the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 78(c)), the first displacement member 5630 is rotated in the erecting direction about the rotating shaft 631, and placed in the retracted position shown in FIGS. 76(a), 78(a) and 80(a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 5640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 5630, so that the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641 is positioned at the sliding inclined portion of the third displacement member 5660. Since the back surface of 5663 is not slid, the second displacement member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 5630 .

Thus, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are not displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630, and the first displacement member 5630, the second displacement member 5640 and A mode in which the third displacement member 5660 is displaced integrally (see FIGS. 76, 78, and 81), and a second displacement with respect to the first displacement member 5630 while maintaining the first displacement member 5630 in a stopped state. A form (see FIGS. 77, 79 and 81) in which the member 5640 and the third displaceable member 5660 are separately displaced relative to each other can be formed. In particular, according to the fifth embodiment, since the displacement direction of the third displacement member 5660 is the front-rear direction, it is possible to avoid interference with the displacement of other adjacent units, and the movable range of such other units can be reduced. can be secured. In addition, the forward projection of the third displacement member 5660 allows the third displacement member 5660 to be brought closer to the player, and a powerful performance can be performed.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 88. FIG. In the third embodiment, the case where the right rotation unit 3600 is formed so that the period during which the second displacement member 3640 is displaced and the period during which the third displacement member 3660 is displaced has been described. In the right rotation unit 6600, the period during which the second displacement member 6640 is displaced differs from the period during which the third displacement member 4660 is displaced. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

82 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 83 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 6600. FIG. 82 and 83 show a state in which part of the right rotation unit 6600 (back base 610 and front base 620) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, a right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment has a third displacement member in front of one end side (upper side in FIG. 82) of a first displacement member 4630, as in the case of the fourth embodiment. 4660 is rotatably pivoted, and the driven member 6641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, so that the second displacement member 6640 (connection displacement member 642) and the third displacement member 4660 are moved to the first displacement position. Relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to member 4630 .

In this case, in the fourth embodiment, the connecting groove 641c of the driven member 3641 is formed linearly, whereas in the sixth embodiment, the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 is formed in an action section 6641c1 as will be described later. and the non-interfering section 6641c2 are bent in a substantially V-shape when viewed from the front.

As a result, both the second displacement member 6640 (the connection displacement member 642) and the third displacement member 4660 are rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630 while the connection pin 643 passes through the action section 6641c1. Only the third displacement member 4660 can be rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630 while the second displacement member 6640 is stopped while the 643 passes through the non-interference section 6641c2.

The connecting groove 6641c is a groove-shaped opening through which the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is slidably inserted. Extending along the width direction of the driven member 6641 while curving in an arc shape concave on the shaft support hole 641a (supporting shaft 632) side (that is, a shape obtained by dividing an annular shape concentric with the rotating shaft 631) ) and a non-interference section 6641c2.

As will be described later, the action section 6641c1 is a section that acts on the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642, and the non-interfering section 6641c2 is a section that does not interfere with the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642.

Next, the operation of right rotation unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87. FIG. 84 and 85 are front views of the right rotation unit 6600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 66 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit 6600 in each state when rotating. FIG.

FIGS. 84(a) to 84(c) correspond to FIGS. 86(a) to 86(c), and FIGS. 85(a) to 85(c) correspond to FIGS. 87(a) to 87(c). c) and the same state respectively. In this case, FIG. 84(c) is the same as FIG. 85(a), and FIG. 86(c) is the same as FIG. 87(a).

Here, the right rotation unit 6600 of the sixth embodiment differs from the right rotation unit 4600 of the fourth embodiment in the shape of the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641, and other configurations are substantially Since they are formed identically, the explanation of the identical parts will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 86, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 86(a)) from the retracted position shown in FIGS. As described above, while the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the action section 635a of the first groove 635, the second displacement member 6640 (the driven member 6641) is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630. , the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 4630 .

That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 84(a) to 84(c) and FIGS. 86(a) to 86(c), the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) are maintained at the intersection angle θ1.

85(a) and 87(a), the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is positioned at the starting end of the working section 6641c1 in the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 (the working section 6641c and non-interfering section 6641c2). It is located at the end opposite to the connection part, Fig. 87(a) right side). In this case, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is positioned at the connecting portion between the action section 635a and the non-interference section 635b of the first groove 635. As shown in FIG.

When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 87(a)) from the state shown in FIGS. While being maintained in the state (position) shown, the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b is pushed downward (downward in FIG. It is rotated around the center in a direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 87(b)) to raise the connecting groove 6641c.

Due to this rotation of the driven member 6641, the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is pushed upward by the inner wall surface of the working section 6641c1 in the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 while sliding on the working section 6641c1. As a result, the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated around the support shaft 633 in a direction (clockwise in FIG. 87(a)) to lift the decorative portion 642b. As a result, the connecting pin 643 reaches the connecting portion of the working section 6641c1 and the non-interfering section 6641c2 of the connecting groove 6641c, and the state shown in FIGS. state) is formed.

In this case, the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is arranged on the same side (the left side in FIG. 87(b)) as the decorative portion 642b (that is, the center of gravity of the connecting displacement member 642) with respect to the shaft support hole 642a, The connection groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 is formed so that the inner wall surface of the non-interference section 6641c2 can support the connection pin 643 from below. That is, the non-interfering section 6641c2 is formed such that its inner wall surface intersects at a predetermined angle with the movement direction of the connecting pin 643 when the connecting displacement member 642 rotates around the shaft support hole 642a by its own weight. be done.

Therefore, in the state shown in FIGS. 85(b) and 87(b), the inner wall surface of the non-interference section 6641c2 supports the connecting pin 643 from below (restricts movement of the connecting pin 643), thereby displacing the connecting displacement member. 642 can be restricted from rotating around the shaft support hole 642a by its own weight. That is, the connecting displacement member 642 can be maintained in a stopped state with respect to the first displacement member 4630 .

85(b) and 87(b), the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660 is pushed up by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 6641, as described above. As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) changes to the intersection angle θ2 ( decremented) (θ2<θ1).

85(b) and 87(b), when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 87(b)), the inside of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 4660 The wall surface is pushed up by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 6641, and as shown in FIGS. L2) is changed (decreased) to the intersection angle θ3 (θ3<θ2<θ1).

In this case, the non-interfering section 6641c2 of the connecting groove 6641c is curved in an arc around the support shaft 632 (shaft support hole 641a). 87(b) about the center, the inner wall surface of the non-interfering section 6641c2 supports the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 from below, and the connecting displacement member 642 engages the shaft support hole 642a. Rotation by its own weight as the center is restricted, but the connecting pin 643 is not pushed upward, so that the connecting displacement member 642 is not rotated about the support shaft 633 in the direction of lifting the decorative portion 642b. That is, the connecting displacement member 642 can be maintained in a substantially stopped state, and the rotation of the third displacement member 4660 can be continued.

Contrary to the above case, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 87(c)) from the state shown in FIGS. While the connecting pin 643 of 642 passes through the non-interference section 6641c2, the connecting displacement member 642 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIGS. and FIG. 87(b)), while the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 passes through the working section 6641c1, the connecting pin 643 is pushed down by the inner wall surface of the working section 6641c1, thereby lowering the decorative portion 642b. The connecting displacement member 642 is rotated around the support shaft 633 in the direction.

The operation mode of the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment thus formed will be described in comparison with the operation mode of the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment with reference to FIG.

FIGS. 88(a) to 88(c) are schematic front views of a right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, and FIGS. 88(d) to 88(g) are right rotation units in the sixth embodiment. 6600 is a schematic front view of 6600, illustrating states when operating between retracted and extended positions, respectively; FIG.

In the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are not displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630, and the first displacement member 4630 and the third displacement member 4660 are not displaced. A configuration in which the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are displaced together (a configuration between FIGS. 88(a) and 88(b)), and a configuration in which the first displacement member 4630 is maintained in a stopped state, A configuration in which the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630 (a configuration between FIGS. 88(b) and 88(c)) can be formed. can. In this case, in the latter form, the period of displacement of the second displacement member 3640 (start and end) substantially coincides with the period of displacement of the third displacement member 4660 (start and end).

On the other hand, in the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment, the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 are integrally displaced (FIGS. 88(d) and 88(e) ) and a mode in which the first displacement member 4630 is maintained in a stopped state and the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 are relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630 (FIG. 88 88(f)) and the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 6640 while maintaining the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 6640 in a stopped state. 88(f) and 88(g)) in which the third displacement member 4660 is relatively displaced.

That is, in the sixth embodiment, the period of displacement of the second displacement member 6640 (start and end) can be different from the period of displacement of the third displacement member 4660 (start and end). More specifically, the displacement of the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 is started at the same time, and the timing of stopping the displacement of the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 is staggered (the second displacement member 6640 can be stopped first, and then the displacement of the third displacement member 4660 can be stopped).

<Seventh Embodiment>
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 94. FIG. In the third embodiment, the case where the connecting displacement member 642 and the third displacement member 3660 are displaceably disposed on the first displacement member 3630 to form the right rotation unit 3600 has been described. In the right rotation unit 7600, the third displacement member 7660 is displaceably arranged on the first displacement member 7630, and the connecting displacement member 642 is arranged on the third displacement member 7660 so as to be displaceable. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

89 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 90 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 7600. FIG. 89 and 90 show a state in which part of the right rotation unit 7600 (back base 610 and front base 620) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, in a right rotation unit 7600 according to the seventh embodiment, a third displacement member 7660 is rotatably supported in front of one end of a first displacement member 7630 (upper side in FIG. 89). , the third displacement member 7660 of which the coupling displacement member 642 is rotatably supported. As will be described later, when the driven member 7641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 7630 and the third displacement member 7660 is rotated with respect to the first displacement member 7630, the rotation of the third displacement member 7660 Along with this, the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated while changing the position of its center of rotation along a curved trajectory.

The first displacement member 7630 has a cutout portion 7639 formed at the edge of one end side (upper side in FIG. 90), and the space created by the cutout portion 7639 serves as a support shaft 7665 for the third displacement member 7660, which will be described later. It is considered to be the installation space for A connecting groove 7641 c is formed in the driven member 7641 of the second displacement member 7640 . The connecting groove 7641c is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 7641, and the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is slidably inserted.

The groove width of the connecting groove 7641 c is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 643 . Also, the total length (groove length) of the connecting groove 7641c is made longer than the connecting groove 641c in the fourth embodiment. Thereby, the relative displacement amount (relative rotation angle) of the connecting displacement member 642 with respect to the driven member 7641 can be ensured.

A support shaft 7665 protrudes from the rear surface of the third displacement member 7660 . The support shaft 7665 is a shaft-like member having a circular cross section that is inserted through the shaft support hole 642a of the connection displacement member 642. rotatably pivoted on the back of the

A retainer C having a larger diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 642a is fastened and fixed to the axial end surface of the support shaft 7665, thereby restricting the indicator shaft 7665 from coming out of the support hole 642a. The support shaft 7665 has a large diameter portion on the base side and a small diameter portion smaller than the large diameter portion on the tip side, and the small diameter portion is inserted through the shaft support hole 642a. That is, the large-diameter portion is a portion for raising the connecting displacement member 642 from the back surface of the third displacement member 7660. By raising the large-diameter portion, the connecting displacement member 642 moves forward and backward relative to the driven member 7641 (for example, , and the vertical direction of the paper surface of FIG. 91A) are set to be the same as in the case of the fourth embodiment.

Next, the operation of right rotation unit 7600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. FIG. 91 and 92 are front views of the right rotation unit 7600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 76A and 76B are schematic rear views of the right rotation unit 7600 in each state when rotating.

FIGS. 91(a) to 91(c) correspond to FIGS. 93(a) to 93(c), and FIGS. 92(a) to 92(c) correspond to FIGS. 94(a) to 94(c). c) and the same state respectively. In this case, FIG. 91(c) is the same as FIG. 92(a), and FIG. 93(c) is the same as FIG. 94(a).

Here, in the seventh embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 7630, thereby causing the first displacement member 7630, the second displacement member 7640 and the third displacement member 7660 are respectively displaced, and the manner of displacement of the first displacement member 7630 and the third displacement member 7660 is the same as in the case of the fourth embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 93, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 93(a)) from the retracted position shown in FIGS. As described above, while the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the action section 635a of the first groove 635, the second displacement member 7640 (the driven member 7641) is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 7630. , the second displacement member 7640 and the third displacement member 7660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 7630 .

That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 91(a) to 91(c) and FIGS. 93(a) to 93(c), the first displacement member 7630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 7660 (imaginary line L2) are maintained at the intersection angle θ1.

92(a) and 94(a), when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 94(a)), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is pushed into the first groove 635. By passing through the non-interference section 635b, the first displacement member 7630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 94(a) in the direction of lifting the connecting groove 7641c and the connecting pin 3641d.

As a result, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 7660 is moved by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 7641, and the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is moved by the inner wall surface of the connecting groove 7641c of the driven member 7641. , are pushed upward (upper side in FIG. 94(a)).

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 94, the third displacement member 7660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 7630, the first displacement member 7630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 7660 (virtual line L1). line L2) changes (decreases) from the intersection angle θ1 to the intersection angle θ3 via the intersection angle θ2 (θ3<θ2<θ1), and the connecting displacement member 642 moves toward the support shaft 7665 (shaft support hole 642a ) as the center of rotation in the clockwise direction in FIG.

In this case, the third displacement member 7660 is rotated about the rotation shaft 4662 in the direction of lifting the support shaft 7665 upward. The connecting displacement member 642 itself pivotally supported by the support shaft 7665 can be lifted upward.

That is, according to the seventh embodiment, the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated with respect to the third displacement member 7660 around the support shaft 7665, and is rotated with respect to the first displacement member 7630 in an arc-shaped trajectory. It can be displaced (lifted) upwards. As a result, the displacement of the connecting displacement member 642 (decorative portion 642b) can be interlocked with the displacement of the third displacement member 7660, making it possible to create a more complicated mode, and the amount of upward protrusion of the decorative portion 642b (the first Crossing angle θ4), which is an angle formed by an imaginary line L3 passing through the axial center of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 7665) and along the longitudinal direction of the connecting displacement member 64 with respect to the displacement member 4630 (imaginary line L1). can be expanded to assume a posture that protrudes further upward.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 105. FIG. In the first embodiment, the mode of relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is the same in the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. Although the case where the left rotation unit 700 is formed so as to different in In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

95 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit 8700 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 96 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 8700. FIG. 97 is a front view of the guide portion 8773. FIG. 95 and 96 show a state in which part of the left rotation unit 8700 (back base 710 and front base 720) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, a counterclockwise rotation unit 8700 according to the eighth embodiment has a guide portion 8773 recessed in front of one longitudinal end side (upper side in FIG. 95) of a second connecting member 8770 . As will be described later, the guide portion 8773 is formed as a circular path, and the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is guided along the guide portion 8773, thereby making the second displacement member 740 relative to the first displacement member 730. The form of displacement can be different in the outward and return paths.

The connecting pin 8744a is a shaft-like body with a circular cross section that protrudes from the back surface of the flange member 8744 and is arranged eccentrically from the axis of the rotating shaft 741. Its diameter is slightly larger than the groove width of the guide portion 8773. By setting the small size, it is possible to move along the guide portion 8773 . An elastic body (not shown) made of a coil spring is accommodated in the second connecting member 8770 in an elastically compressed state, and the elastic recovery force of the elastic body causes the connecting pin 8744a to move the second connecting member 8770. It is acted in the direction to protrude from the back of the Therefore, when the connecting pin 8744 a moves along the guide portion 8773 , the tip of the connecting pin 8744 a is maintained in contact with the bottom surface of the guide portion 8773 .

The guide portion 8773 is a recessed groove having a substantially U-shaped cross section for guiding the connecting pin 8744a. is formed with directionality (see FIG. 97).

More specifically, the guide portion 8773 extends substantially linearly in a front view along the width direction of the second connecting member 8770 (a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction, the left-right direction in FIG. 97) starting from the position P1. 1 groove 8773a and a first groove 8773a connected to the terminal end of the first groove 8773a and extending substantially linearly along the longitudinal direction of the second connecting member 8770 (vertical direction in FIG. 97) starting from position P2. A second groove 8773b is connected to the terminal end of the second groove 8773b, and is curved and extended in an arc shape (in this embodiment, a convex arc shape in the direction away from the position P2) with the position P3 as the starting end. and a third groove 8773c whose terminal end is connected to the starting end of the first groove 8773a.

A first step 8773h is formed at the connecting portion between the first groove 8773a and the second groove 8773b. The first step 8773h has a bottom surface on the starting end side (position P2) of the second groove 8773b that is lower than the bottom surface on the terminal end side of the first groove 8773a (located on the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 97). It is the vertical plane that connects them. As a result, movement of the connecting pin 8744a from the end of the first groove 8773a to the starting end of the second groove 8773b is permitted, while movement of the connecting pin 8744a from the starting end of the second groove 8773b to the end of the first groove 8773a is prohibited. It can be regulated by one step 8773h.

Similarly, a second step 8773i and a third step 8773j are formed at the connecting portion between the second groove 8773b and the third groove 8773c and the connecting portion between the third groove 8773c and the first groove 8773a. The bottom surface of the second step 8773i on the starting end side (position P3) of the third groove 8773c is lower than the bottom surface on the terminal end side of the second groove 8773b. The bottom surface of (position P1) is formed by making it lower than the bottom surface of the third groove 8773c on the terminal side.

This allows the connecting pin 8744a to move from the terminal end of the second groove 8773b (third groove 8773c) to the starting end of the third groove 8773c (first groove 8773a), while allowing the third groove 8773c (first groove 8773a) to move. The movement of the connecting pin 8744a from the starting end of the second groove 8773b (third groove 8773c) to the terminal end of the second groove 8773b (third groove 8773c) can be restricted by the second step 8773i (third step 8773j).

In other words, the connecting pin 8744a is only allowed to rotate the guide portion 8773 along the directions of the arrows L1, L2 and L3 in the first groove 8773a, the second groove 8773b and the third groove 8773c in order. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 98 to 105, the operation of left rotation unit 8700 will be described.

Here, in the eighth embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides in the drive groove 762 of the first connection member 760 (presses the inner wall surface), so that the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 8770, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are respectively displaced, and the manner of displacement between the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 8770 and the first displacement member 730 is similar to that of the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as the case of the form, its detailed description is omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101, the operation of the counterclockwise rotation unit 8700 when moving forward from the retracted position to the extended position will be described.

Figures 98 and 99 are front views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 8700 in each state during forward movement from the retracted position to the extended position. 87A and 87B are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 8700 in each state when the forward movement is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 98( a ) and 100 ( a ), at the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in an upright state and arranged in front of the front base 720 .

In this case, an imaginary line M1 passing through the axial center of the shaft support hole 732 (rotating shaft 741) and along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730 and the axial center of the shaft supporting hole 732 (rotating shaft 741) The angle formed by the imaginary line M2 along the longitudinal direction of the second displacement member 740 is defined as the intersection angle α1. In addition, the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is positioned at the position P1 of the guide portion 8773 (the starting end of the first groove 8773a) (see FIG. 97), and the second connecting member 8770 ).

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 100(a)), the first connecting member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the direction of extension (counterclockwise in FIG. 100(a)). 100(a)), the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotation shaft 731 in the projecting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 100(a)). As a result, the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the projecting direction as shown in FIGS. 98(b) and 100(b).

Further, when the first connection member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction, the second connection member 8770 is pulled downward (lower side in FIG. 101(a)), and the guide portion 8773 (first The inner wall surface of the groove 8773a) pushes down the connecting pin 8744a in the flange member 8744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 8744a arranged at the position P1 moves the guide portion 8773 along the first groove 8773a. is guided in the direction of arrow L1 (see FIG. 97).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 98(b) and 100(b), the second displacement member 740 rotates about the rotation shaft 741 relative to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (clockwise in FIG. 100(a)). rotation), and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle α1 to the intersection angle α2. (α1<α2).

When the transmission member 754 is further rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 100(b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 98(b) and 100(b), the first connecting member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the extending direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 100(b)), so that the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotating shaft 731 in the extending direction (see FIG. 100(b)). ) counterclockwise) and is further tilted in the extension direction as shown in FIGS. 99(a) and 101(a).

Further, when the first connection member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction, the second connection member 8770 is further drawn downward (lower right in FIG. 101(b)), and the guide portion 8773 ( The inner wall surface of the first groove 8773a) pushes down the connecting pin 8744a in the flange member 8744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 8744a moves the guide portion 8773 along the first groove 8773a in the direction of the arrow L1. Further guidance is provided (see Figure 97).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 99(a) and 101(a), the second displacement member 740 rotates about the rotation shaft 741 with respect to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (clockwise in FIG. 100(b)). ), and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle α2 to the intersection angle α3. ) (α1<α2<α3).

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is tilted to the maximum and the first displacement A state is formed in which the second displacement member 740 is displaced (relatively rotated) to the maximum with respect to the member 730 . That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the extended position.

In this case, the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the first groove 8773a along the guide portion 8773 in the direction of the arrow L1, and after passing (jumping down) the first step 8773h, hits the inner wall surface of the second groove 8773b. , at position P2 (see FIG. 97). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle α3 to the intersection angle α4 (α1<α2<α3 <α4).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 102 to 105, the operation of the counterclockwise rotation unit 8700 during the return movement from the extended position to the retracted position will be described.

Figures 102 and 103 are front views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 8700 in each state when operating on the return path from the extended position to the retracted position, and Figures 104 and 105 are views from the extended position to the retracted position. 87A and 87B are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 8700 in each state when operating on the return path. FIG. 98(a) is the same as FIG. 103(b), and FIG. 99(b) is the same as FIG. 102(a).

Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 102(b) and 104(b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 99(a) and 101(a). The rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 103(a) and 105(a) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 98(b) and 100(b). .

102(a) and 104(a), in the extended position, the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is positioned at the position P2 of the guide portion 8773 (the starting end of the second groove 8773b) ( 97), the second connecting member 8770 is pulled to the bottom (lower right side in FIG. 104(a)).

102(a) and 104(a), the transmission member 754 moves in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 104(a)). ), the first connecting member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. It is rotated in the retraction direction (clockwise in FIG. 104(a)) as the center of rotation. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is rotated (raised) in the retraction direction, as shown in FIGS. 102(b) and 104(b).

Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 8770 is pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 104(a)), and the connecting pin 8744a arranged at the position P2 is moved to the guide portion. 8773 is guided along the second groove 8773b in the direction of arrow L2 (see FIG. 97). In this case, the second groove 8773b extends along the longitudinal direction of the second connecting member 8770 as described above, and the relative displacement of the second connecting member 8770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 A linear motion (slide displacement) in a direction along the direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 102(b) and 104(b), in the section where the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the second groove 8773b (see FIG. 97), the second displacement member relative to the first displacement member 730 No relative displacement (relative rotation) of 740 about rotation axis 741 is formed. As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4.

When the transmission member 754 is further rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 104(b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 102(b) and 104(b), the connection first When the member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 104(b)), the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotating shaft 731 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 104(b)). 103(a) and 105(a), and is further rotated (upright) in the retraction direction.

Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 8770 is further pushed upward (upper left in FIG. 104(b)), so that the connecting pin 8744a moves the guide portion 8773 to the second position. It is further guided along the groove 8773b in the direction of arrow L2, passes through (jumps down) the second step 8773i, and hits the inner wall surface of the third groove 8773c to be positioned at position P3 (see FIG. 97).

As described above, in the section where the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the second groove 8773b, relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 about the rotation axis 741 is not formed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 103(a) and 105(a), the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4. be done.

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, as shown in FIGS. A state is created in which the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the member 730 is minimized. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position.

In this case, the second connecting member 8770 is pushed up to the uppermost position, so that the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the third groove 8773c in the direction of the arrow L3 through the guide portion 8773 and passes through the third step 8773j ( After jumping down), it collides with the inner wall surface of the first groove 8773a to be positioned (returned) to the position P1 (see FIG. 97). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) returns (decreases) from the intersection angle α4 to the intersection angle α1.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the first displacement member 730 is displaced (rotated) with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720 in the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. ) can be the same, but the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be different.

Specifically, in the outward path, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is defined as the displacement of the first displacement member 730 with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720. While gradually increasing in proportion to the amount (amount of rotation), on the return path, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4. It is possible to form a mode in which the crossing angle α4 is reduced to the crossing angle α1 in a short period of time immediately before being arranged at the retracted position.

Further, since the connecting pin 8744a is guided along each of the grooves 8773a to 8773c of the guide portion 8773, even when the transmission member 754 (first displacement member 730) is rotationally driven (displaced) at a relatively high speed, Rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed.

<Ninth Embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 115. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the guide portion 8773 is formed as a circular path in which grooves having a U-shaped cross section are endlessly connected has been described. It is formed as an opening that is loosely fitted. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

106 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit 9700 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 107 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 9700. FIG. 106 and 107 show a state in which a part of the left rotation unit 9700 (back base 710 and front base 720) is assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, a counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 according to the ninth embodiment has a guide portion 9773 formed at one longitudinal end of a second connecting member 9770 (upper side in FIG. 106). As will be described later, by displacing the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 in the guide portion 9773, the form of relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is different between the outward path and the return path. can do.

The guide portion 9773 is connected to a first inner wall 9773a that extends substantially linearly in a front view along the width direction (a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction) of the second connecting member 9770, and the terminal end of the first inner wall 9773a. and a second inner wall 9773b extending substantially linearly in a front view along the longitudinal direction of the second connecting member 9770 (vertical direction in FIG. 106); (In this embodiment, the third inner wall 9773a and the second inner wall 9773b are curved and extend in a convex shape in a direction away from the connecting portion of the second inner wall 9773b), and the end thereof is connected to the starting end of the first inner wall 9773a. The inner wall 9773c is formed as an opening that serves as the inner wall surface.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 108 to 115, the operation of left rotation unit 9700 will be described.

Here, in the ninth embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides in the drive groove 762 of the first connection member 760 (presses the inner wall surface), so that the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 9770, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are respectively displaced, and the manner of displacement between the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 9770 and the first displacement member 730 is similar to that of the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as the case of the form, its detailed description is omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 108 to 111, the operation of the counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 when moving forward from the retracted position to the extended position will be described.

108 and 109 are front views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 in each state when operating in the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIGS. 97A and 7B are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 in each state when the forward movement is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 108( a ) and 110 ( a ), at the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in an upright state and arranged in front of the front base 720 .

In this case, an imaginary line M1 passing through the axial center of the shaft support hole 732 (rotating shaft 741) and along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730 and the axial center of the shaft supporting hole 732 (rotating shaft 741) The angle formed by the imaginary line M2 along the longitudinal direction of the second displacement member 740 is defined as the intersection angle β1. In addition, the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 is positioned at the connecting portion (starting end of the first inner wall 9773a) of the first inner wall 9773a and the third inner wall 9773c of the guide portion 9773, and the second connecting member 9770 is located at the uppermost position (Fig. 110(a) upward).

Further, the center of gravity G, which is the center of mass of the second displacement member 740 (the point of action of the resultant force of gravity acting on the second displacement member 740), is the center of rotation of the rotation shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732) when viewed in the axial direction (that is, in the figure). 110(a)), the side opposite to the connecting pin 744a (the left side in FIG. 110(a)) across a vertical line Z that passes through the axis of the rotating shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732) and is parallel to the direction of gravity. ).

Therefore, the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight about the rotating shaft 741 in a direction to lift the connecting pin 744a upward (counterclockwise in FIG. 110(a)). As the second displacement member 740 rotates due to its own weight, the connecting pin 744 a contacts (is pressed against) the first inner wall 9773 a of the guide portion 9773 .

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 110(a)), the first connecting member 760 extends in the direction of extension (counterclockwise in FIG. 110(a)) about the rotation shaft 761. 110(a)), the first displacement member 730 is rotated about the rotation shaft 731 in the projecting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110(a)). As a result, the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the projecting direction as shown in FIGS. 108(b) and 110(b).

Further, when the first connection member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction, the second connection member 9770 is drawn downward (lower side in FIG. 110(a)), and the inner wall surface of the guide portion 9773 of the second connection member 9770 The (first inner wall 9773a) pushes down the connecting pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 744a moves the guide portion 9773 along the first inner wall 9773a toward the second inner wall 9773b. be guided in the direction.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 108(b) and 110(b), the second displacement member 740 rotates about the rotation shaft 741 relative to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (clockwise in FIG. 110(a)). rotation), and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle β1 to the intersection angle β2. (β1<β2).

When the transmission member 754 is further rotated in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 110(b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 108(b) and 110(b), the first connecting member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the extending direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110(b)), so that the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotating shaft 731 in the extending direction (see FIG. 110(b)). ) counterclockwise) and is further tilted in the extension direction as shown in FIGS. 109(a) and 111(a).

Further, when the first connection member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction, the second connection member 9770 is further drawn downward (lower right in FIG. 110(b)), and the guide portion 9773 of the second connection member 9770 The inner wall surface (first inner wall 9773a) pushes down the connecting pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 744a moves the guide portion 9773 along the first inner wall 9773a to the second inner wall 9773b. You will be guided further in the direction of

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 109(a) and 111(a), the second displacement member 740 rotates about the rotation shaft 741 relative to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (clockwise in FIG. 110(b)). ), and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle β2 to the intersection angle β3. ) (β1<β2<β3).

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, as shown in FIGS. A state is formed in which the second displacement member 740 is displaced (relatively rotated) to the maximum with respect to the member 730 . That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the extended position.

In this case, the connecting pin 744a is guided along the first inner wall 9773a in the guide portion 9773 and abuts against the inner wall surface of the second inner wall 9773b, so that the connecting portion (second inner wall) between the first inner wall 9773a and the second inner wall 9773b 9773b). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle β3 to the intersection angle β4 (β1<β2<β3 <β4).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 to 115, the operation of the counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 during the return movement from the extended position to the retracted position will be described.

Figures 112 and 113 are front views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 in each state during the return movement from the extended position to the retracted position, and Figures 114 and 115 are views from the extended position to the retracted position. 97A and 97B are schematic rear views of the left rotation unit 9700 in each state when operating on the return path. 112(a) is the same as FIG. 109(b), and FIG. 113(b) is the same as FIG. 108(a).

Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 112(b) and 114(b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 109(a) and 111(a). The rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 113(a) and 115(a) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 108(b) and 110(b). .

112(a) and 114(a), in the extended position, the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 is connected to the first inner wall 9773a and the second inner wall 9773b of the guide portion 9773. 114(a), and the second connecting member 9770 is drawn downward (lower right side in FIG. 114(a)).

Further, the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is perpendicular to the vertical line Z when viewed in the axial direction of the rotation shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732) (that is, the state shown in FIG. 114(a)). They are located on the same side (the right side in FIG. 114(a)). Therefore, the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight about the rotating shaft 741 in the direction of pushing down the connecting pin 744a (clockwise in FIG. 114(a)). As the second displacement member 740 rotates under its own weight, the connecting pin 744 a contacts (is pressed against) the second inner wall 9773 b of the guide portion 9773 .

112(a) and 114(a), the transmission member 754 moves in the opposite direction (Fig. 114 ( a) counterclockwise), the first connecting member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 114(a)), so that the first displacing member 730 It rotates in the retraction direction (clockwise in FIG. 114(a)) with the rotating shaft 731 as the center of rotation. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is rotated (raised) in the retraction direction, as shown in FIGS. 112(b) and 114(b).

Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 9770 is pushed upward (upper left in FIG. 114(a)). As described above, the connecting pin 744a is in contact with (pressed against) the second inner wall 9773b of the guide portion 9773 as the second displacement member 740 rotates under its own weight. It is guided in the direction toward the third inner wall 9773c along the second inner wall 9773b.

In this case, the second inner wall 9773b extends along the longitudinal direction of the second connecting member 9770 as described above, and the relative displacement of the second connecting member 9770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 A linear motion (slide displacement) in a direction along the direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 112(b) and 114(b), in the section where the connecting pin 744a is guided along the second inner wall 9773b, the rotational axis 741 of the second displacement member 740 relative to the first displacement member 730 No relative displacement (relative rotation) about rotation is formed. As a result, the angle between the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle β4.

112(b) and 114(b), when the transmission member 754 is further rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 114(b)), the connection first When the member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 114(b)), the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotating shaft 731 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 114(b)). 113(a) and 115(a), and is further rotated (upright) in the retraction direction.

Further, when the first connection member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connection member 9770 is further pushed upward (upper left in FIG. It is further guided in the direction toward the third inner wall 9773c along the inner wall 9773b, and hits the inner wall surface of the third inner wall 9773c, thereby reaching the connecting portion (starting end of the third inner wall 9773c) of the second inner wall 9773b and the third inner wall 9773c. be located.

As described above, in the section where the connecting pin 744a is guided along the second inner wall 9773b, relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 about the rotation axis 741 is not formed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 113(a) and 115(a), the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle β4. be done.

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, as shown in FIGS. A state is created in which the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the member 730 is minimized. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are arranged at the retracted position.

In this case, the connecting pin 744a is guided along the third inner wall 9773c in the direction toward the first inner wall 9773a by pushing up the second connecting member 9770 to the uppermost position. is positioned (returned) to the connecting portion (starting end of the first inner wall 9773a) of the first inner wall 9773a and the third inner wall 9773c. As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) returns (decreases) from the intersection angle β4 to the intersection angle β1.

115(a) to the state shown in FIG. 115(b), the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 crosses the vertical line Z. , can be rotated prior to being pushed up by the second connecting member 9770 .

Specifically, when the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is positioned on the same side of the vertical line Z as the connecting pin 744a (the right side in FIG. 115(a)), the second displacement member 740 Since the connection pin 744a is pressed against the third inner wall 9773c by rotation due to its own weight, it gradually rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 115(a), the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 crosses the vertical line Z and is positioned on the opposite side of the connecting pin 744a (left side in FIG. 115(a)). is rotated in a direction to lift the connecting pin 744a upward by its own weight. That is, it rotates prior to being pushed up by the second connecting member 9770 .

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 730 with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720 is reduced in the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. While the modes can be the same, the mode of relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 to the first displacement member 730 can be changed. The angle formed with the member 740 (virtual line M2) is displaced toward the retracted position while maintaining the crossing angle β4, and the crossing angle β4 is changed from the crossing angle β4 to the crossing angle β1 at high speed (short time) immediately before being arranged at the retracted position. A reducing aspect can be formed.

<Tenth Embodiment>
Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Here, the counterclockwise rotation unit 10700 in the tenth embodiment differs from the counterclockwise rotation unit 9700 in the ninth embodiment only in that it is provided with a retainer 10746, and the rest of the configuration is the same, so the description thereof will be omitted.

116 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit 10700 according to the tenth embodiment, illustrating a state where the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is positioned on the vertical line Z. FIG. As shown in FIG. 116, a retainer 10746 is arranged on the back surface of the second displacement member 740 in the left rotation unit 10700 in the tenth embodiment. The retainer 10746 will now be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 117(a) is a front view of the retainer 10746, FIG. 117(b) is a cross-sectional view of the retainer 10746 along line CXVIIb-CXVIIb of FIG. 117(a), and FIG. 117(a) is a cross-sectional view of the retainer 10746 along line CXVIIc-CXVIIc of FIG. 117(a). FIG.

As shown in FIG. 117, the retainer 10746 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an internal space with a circular cross section, and a predetermined heavy load is displaceably accommodated in the internal space. In this embodiment, the liquid LQ is a predetermined heavy object, and the liquid LQ fills about 1/3 of the volume of the internal space. Therefore, according to the inclination of the retainer 10746, the liquid LQ can be displaced to one end side or the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the retainer 10746 (right or left side in FIG. 117(c)) (see FIGS. 118 to 121).

Returning to FIG. 116, description will be made. The retainer 10746 has a posture (horizontal posture) in which its longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 116) is orthogonal to the vertical line Z when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732) (that is, the state in FIG. 116). It is disposed on the back surface of the second displacement member 740 at a position where the longitudinal center thereof coincides with the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 .

Therefore, when the second displacing member 740 is rotated to one side or the other side about the rotation shaft 741, the retainer 10746 in the horizontal posture is tilted so that one side or the other side in the longitudinal direction is positioned downward. , the contained heavy object (liquid LQ) is displaced to one side or the other side in the longitudinal direction (that is, the same side as the moving direction of the center of gravity G).

As a result, when the second displacement member 740 rotates around the rotation shaft 741, the second displacement member 740 and the retainer 10746 are integrally formed as compared to the case where the retainer 10746 is not provided. , the amount of change in the position of the center of mass (center of gravity G′) can be increased.

Next, the operation of left rotation unit 10700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 121. FIG. Figures 118 and 119 are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 10700 in each state during forward movement from the retracted position to the extended position, and Figures 120 and 121 from the extended position to the retracted position. 107A and 107B are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 10700 in each state when operating on the return path.

As shown in FIGS. 118 to 121, the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward or reverse direction to rotate the first displacement member 730 with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720, and the first displacement member When the second displacement member 740 is relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to 730, the retainer 10746 is tilted according to the rotational position of the second displacement member 740, and the liquid LQ filled in the internal space thereof is displaced. The retainer 10746 can be displaced to one longitudinal end or the other.

As a result, the center of gravity G' of the second displacement member 740 and the retainer 10746 can be positioned farther from the vertical line Z than when the retainer 10746 is not provided.

Therefore, in the section in which the connecting pin 744a is displaced along the first to third inner walls 9773a to 9773c of the guide portion 9773, the second displacing member 740 using the center of gravity G′ is rotated by its own weight to ensure the rotation of the connecting pin 744a. can be easily maintained in contact with the first to third inner walls 9773a to 9773c. As a result, rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed, and the relative displacement (rotation) thereof can be stabilized.

On the other hand, in the section in which the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight prior to the push-up by the second connecting member 9770, it is possible to ensure that the second displacement member 740 advances by using the center of gravity G'. As a result, the rotation from the crossing angle β4 to the crossing angle β1 can be performed at a higher speed (shorter time) immediately before being arranged at the retracted position.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 130. FIG. In the first embodiment, a case where relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is formed in both the outward path from the retracted position to the extended position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position will be described. However, in the counterclockwise rotation unit 11700 according to the eleventh embodiment, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is formed only in the outward trip and not formed in the return trip. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 11700 in the eleventh embodiment. Note that FIG. 122 illustrates a state in which a part of the left rotation unit 11700 (the rear base 710 and the front base 720) is assembled.

As shown in FIG. 122, in a left rotation unit 11700 according to the eleventh embodiment, a second displacement member 740 and a second connecting member 11770 are connected by a rack and pinion mechanism consisting of a pinion gear 11747 and a rack gear 11774 . In this case, as will be described later, the pinion gear 11747 is configured as a one-way clutch. By restricting the conversion of the linear motion of the member 11770 into the rotational motion of the second displacement member 740, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be formed only in the outward path.

The pinion gear 11747 is formed as a cam-type one-way clutch with a roller and a spring interposed between the inner ring and the outer ring. A gear that meshes with is engraved. In this case, when the outer ring is rotated clockwise in the rear view of the second displacement member 740, the pinion gear 11747 transmits the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740), while the outer ring rotates counterclockwise. Then, the transmission of that rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740) is cut off.

The rack gear 11774 is a gear engraved on the side surface of the second connection member 11770 and meshes with the pinion gear 11747 . The engraving range of the rack gear 11774 is a range in which the engagement with the pinion gear 11747 is released when the second connecting member 11770 is drawn downward to the maximum (see FIGS. 126(b) and 129). ).

Between the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740, a biasing spring SP formed as a torsion spring made of metal is interposed. The coil portion of the biasing spring SP is fitted around the rotation shaft 741 and is elastically torsionally deformed. An arm extending from the other end of the coil portion is engaged with the second displacement member 740, and its elastic recovery force is distributed between the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2). , in the direction of maintaining the crossing angle γ1.

Next, the operation of left rotation unit 11700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 130. FIG.

Here, in the eleventh embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides in the drive groove 762 of the first connection member 760 (presses the inner wall surface), so that the first connection member 760 and the second connection member 11770, the first displacement member 730, and the second displacement member 740 are respectively displaced, and the manner of displacement between the first connection member 760, the second connection member 11770, and the first displacement member 730 is similar to that of the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as the case of the form, its detailed description is omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 123 to 126, the operation of left rotation unit 11700 when moving forward from the retracted position to the extended position will be described.

Figures 123 and 124 are front views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 11700 in each state during forward movement from the retracted position to the extended position, and Figures 125 and 126 are views from the retracted position to the extended position. 117A and 117B are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 11700 in each state when the forward movement is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 123(a) and 125(a), at the retracted position, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is the intersection angle γ1. In this case, the second connection member 11770 is in a state of being pushed up most upward (the upper side in FIG. 125(a)).

From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 125(a)), the first connecting member 760 extends in the direction of extension (counterclockwise in FIG. 125(a)) about the rotation shaft 761. 110(a)), the first displacement member 730 is rotated about the rotation shaft 731 in the projecting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110(a)). 124(a) and 126(a), the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the projecting direction through the states shown in FIGS. 123(b) and 125(b).

Further, when the first connection member 760 is rotated in the projecting direction, the second connection member 11770 is drawn downward (lower side in FIG. 125(a)), so that the rack gear 11774 of the second connection member 11770 becomes the pinion gear. 11747 (outer ring) is rotated clockwise in FIG. 125(a). Rotation of the outer ring in such a direction is rotation in a direction that transmits the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740).

123(b) and 125(b), and then as shown in FIGS. ) is further elastically deformed in the torsional direction and rotated relative to the first displacement member 730, and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is The crossing angle γ1 is changed (increased) to the crossing angle γ3 via the crossing angle γ2 (γ1<γ2<γ3).

After that, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 extends to the maximum as shown in FIGS. 730 and second displacement member 740 are positioned in the extended position.

In this case, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 124(b) and 126(b), when the second connection member 11770 is pulled to the lowest position, the rack gear 11774 and the pinion gear 11747 are disengaged. As a result, the second displacement member 740 receives the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP (see FIG. 122) and returns to the initial position. That is, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) returns (decreases) from the intersection angle γ3 to the intersection angle γ1.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 127 to 130, the operation of the counterclockwise rotation unit 11700 during the return movement from the extended position to the retracted position will be described.

Figures 127 and 128 are front views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 11700 in each state during the return movement from the extended position to the retracted position, and Figures 129 and 130 are views from the extended position to the retracted position. 117A and 117B are schematic rear views of the counterclockwise rotation unit 11700 in each state when operating on the return path. FIG. 127(a) is the same as FIG. 124(b), and FIG. 128(b) is the same as FIG. 123(a).

Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 127(b) and 129(b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 124(a) and 126(a). 128(a) and 130(a) are the same as the rotational positions of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 123(b) and 125(b). .

123 to 126), the transmission member 754 moves in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in ), the first connecting member 760 rotates about the rotating shaft 761 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. It rotates in the retraction direction (clockwise in FIG. 129(a)) about the center of rotation. 128(b) and 130(b) through the states shown in FIGS. 127(b) and 128(a) and FIGS. ), it is placed (raised) at the retracted position.

Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 11770 is pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 129(a)), thereby turning into FIGS. 127(b) and 129(b). As shown, the rack gear 11774 meshes with the pinion gear 11747, and the second coupling member 11770 is further pushed upward, causing the rack gear 11774 to rotate the pinion gear 11747 (outer ring) counterclockwise in FIG. 129(b). Rotation of the outer ring in such a direction is rotation in a direction that cuts transmission of that rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740).

Therefore, from the state shown in FIGS. 127(b) and 129(b), through the states shown in FIGS. 128(a) and 130(a), the retracted position shown in FIGS. , the second displacement member 740 is not relatively rotated with respect to the first displacement member 730, and the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) are separated from each other. is maintained at the intersection angle γ1.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the forward trip, as the first displacement member 730 rotates (tilts) with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720 in the projecting direction, the first displacement member 730 is rotated (tilted). The second displacement member 740 is gradually relatively displaced, and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is increased from the intersection angle γ1 to the intersection angle γ3, In the overhang position, a displacement mode is formed in which the crossing angle γ1 is changed, while in the return path, a relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is not formed (that is, the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (imaginary line M2) while maintaining the crossing angle γ1), the first displacement member 730 rotates (stands up) in the retraction direction with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720. It is possible to form a displacement mode that

<Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the base-side engaging member 726 is fixed so as to protrude from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described. It is arranged so that it can appear in front of the. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 131 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 12700 in the twelfth embodiment. 132(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 12720, and FIG. 132(b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 12720 taken along line CXXXIIb-CXXXIIb in FIG. 132(a).

As shown in FIGS. 131 and 132, a left rotation unit 12700 according to the twelfth embodiment accommodates a base-side engagement member 12726 and a transmission member 12728 in an internal space of a front base 12720, and a second displacement member. An insert member 12745 is disposed on the back of 12740 .

The base-side engaging member 12726 is a sliding portion that is disposed so as to be slidably displaceable in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 132(a) and the vertical direction in FIG. 132(b)) along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 12720. 12726c, and a base portion 726a and a bent portion 726b are formed on the front surface of the slide portion 12726c (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 132(a) and the lower side of FIG. 132(b)).

The sliding portion 12726c of the base-side engaging member 12726 slides toward the front along a guide groove (not shown), thereby moving the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b from the receiving recess 727 to the front side (Fig. 132(a) paper surface). 132c (b) lower side), and the sliding portion 12726c slides toward the back side (FIG. 132 (a) back side of the paper surface and FIG. 132 (b) upper side) along a guide groove (not shown). By being displaced, the base portion 726 a and the bent portion 726 b can be retracted into the receiving recess 727 .

In this case, between the front surface of the slide portion 12726c and the rear surface of the front base 12720, an urging spring SP1 made of a coil spring is disposed in an elastically compressed state, and the urging spring SP1 is elastically restored. The force maintains the base side engaging member 12726 in the retracted state (the state shown in FIG. 132(b)). In this immersed state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b and the front surface of the front base 12720 are flush with each other, making it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the base-side engaging member 12726. FIG.

A side surface of the slide portion 12726c (left side in FIG. 132(b)) is formed as an inclined surface inclined in a direction away from the transmission member 12728 toward the rear side, and the inclined surface of the transmission member 12728 is formed on the inclined surface. abutted.

The transmission member 12728 is slidably displaceable in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 132(a), left-right direction in FIG. 132(b)) along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 12720. b) right side) is exposed from the insertion opening 12720a formed in the side surface of the front base 12720; In addition, on the other end side of the transmission member 12728 (left side in FIG. 132(b)), an inclined surface inclined in a direction away from the base-side engaging member 12726 toward the front side is formed. , the inclined surface of the base-side engaging member 12726 abuts thereon.

Therefore, the inclined surfaces of the base-side engaging member 12726 and the transmission member 12728 slidably displace the transmission member 12728 in a direction approaching the base-side engaging member 12726, thereby moving the base-side engaging member 12726 toward the front side. In addition, by slidingly displacing the transmission member 12728 in a direction away from the base-side engaging member 12726, the base-side engaging member 12726 can be slid to the rear side (inside the receiving recess 727). It can be displaced (immersed).

Between the transmission member 12728 and the front base 12720, an urging spring SP2 made of a coil spring is disposed in an elastically deformed state. 12728 is maintained at a position spaced apart from the base side engaging member 12726 (the position shown in FIG. 132(b), that is, the position where the base side engaging member 12726 is retracted).

The pressing member 12745 includes a base portion 12745a erected from the rear surface of the second displacement member 12740, and an insertion portion 12745b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 12745a. In the pressing member 12745, the standing height of the base portion 12745a is set higher than the standing height of the base portion of the displacement side engaging member 742 so that the insertion portion 12745b can be inserted into the insertion opening 12720a of the front base 12720. In addition, the extension direction of the insertion portion 12745b is the same direction (parallel) as the extension direction of the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 742 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the engagement action by the base-side engagement member 12726 and displacement-side engagement member 742 will be described.

FIG. 133 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 12700 for explaining the engagement action by the base-side engaging member 12726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742, in which the second displacement member 12740 is displaced toward the retracted position. Schematically, the transition state when the 133(a) to the state shown in FIG. 133(c), the second displacement member 12740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIG. 133(a), when the second displacement member 12740 is displaced in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 133(a)) with respect to the front base 12720, the insertion portion 12745b of the pressing member 12745 is first displaced. The tip abuts on one end side of the transmission member 12728 via the insertion opening 12720a of the front base 12720 .

From the state shown in FIG. 133(a), when the second displacement member 12740 is further displaced toward the retreating direction (left side in FIG. 133(a)) with respect to the front base 12720, the insertion portion 12745b of the pressing member 12745 is By inserting the transmission member 12728 into the front base 12720 through the insertion port 12720a against the biasing force of the biasing springs SP1 and SP2, the transmission member 12728 is pushed in a direction approaching the base-side engagement member 12726 (sliding displacement). is done).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 133(b) and 133(c), the base side engaging member 12726 is gradually protruded to the front of the front base 12720 and displaced toward the base side engaging member 12726. The side engaging member 742 is brought closer, and the mutual bent portions 726b, 742b enter the inner surfaces of the mating bent portions 726b, 742b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 133(d), when the second displacement member 12740 is arranged at the retracted position, the inner surfaces (engagement surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b can be engaged with each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 12740 from tilting away from the front base 12720 .

In particular, in this embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 12740 are extended to the extended position, the base-side engaging member 12726 is pushed into the receiving recess 727 by the elastic recovery force of the biasing springs SP1 and SP2. You can immerse yourself inside. That is, in the retracted state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b of the base-side engaging member 12726 can be arranged flush with the front surface of the front base 12720. As shown in FIG. As a result, even when the front surface of the front base 12720 is exposed, the base-side engaging member 12726 is made difficult for the player to visually recognize, and the appearance can be improved.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 136. FIG. In the first embodiment, the displacement-side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base-side engaging member 726 projecting from the front of the front base 720. However, the thirteenth embodiment The displacement-side engaging member 13742 of the second displacement member 13740 in the form is engaged with the wall surface on the front side of the front base 13720 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 134 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 13700 in the thirteenth embodiment. 135(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 13720, and FIG. 135(b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 13720 along line CXXXVb-CXXXVb in FIG. 135(a).

As shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, a left rotation unit 13700 according to the thirteenth embodiment is attached to a front base 13720 on the front side (FIG. 135(a) front side, FIG. 135(b) bottom side) and side sides. 135(a) and 135(b) right side) is formed, and a rotating member 13726 is rotatably disposed in the space formed by the opening 13720a.

The rotating member 13726 is formed in a V shape in cross section from a side portion 13726a that closes the side surface of the front base 13720 in the opening 13720a and a front portion 13726b that closes the front side of the front base 13720. One side (opposite side of front portion 13726b) is rotatably supported.

That is, the rotating member 13726 is rotated to one side about the pivotal portion of the side surface portion 13726a, and is placed in the initial position (the position shown in FIGS. 134 and 135) to close the opening 13720a. It is retracted into the front base 13720 by rotating to the other side around the pivotal portion of the side surface portion 13726a.

In this case, between the front base 13720 and the rotating member 13726, an urging spring SP3 made of a torsion spring is disposed in an elastically torsionally deformed state. Rotating member 13726 is maintained in the initial position. In this initial position, the front of the front portion 13726b and the side of the side portion 13726a are flush with the front and side of the front base 13720, making it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the rotating member 13726.

The displacement-side engaging member 13742 includes a base portion 13742a erected from the rear surface of the second displacement member 13740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 13742a and having an inner surface serving as an engaging surface. The standing height of the base portion 13742a is set to such a height that the bent portion 742b can come into contact with the side portion 13726a of the rotating member 13726. As shown in FIG. As a result, when the second displacement member 13740 is displaced in the retracting direction, the bent portion 742b can rotate the rotating member 13726 in the retracting direction along with the displacement (see FIG. 136).

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the engagement action by the front base 13720 and displacement side engagement member 13742 will be described.

FIG. 136 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 13700 for explaining the engagement action by the front base 13720 and the displacement-side engagement member 13742, when the second displacement member 13740 is displaced toward the retracted position. is schematically illustrated. 136(a) to the state shown in FIG. 136(b), the second displacement member 13740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIG. 136(a), when the second displacement member 13740 is displaced in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 136(a)) with respect to the front base 13720, the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 13742 , abuts on the side surface portion 13726 a of the rotating member 13726 .

From the state shown in FIG. 136(a), when the second displacement member 13740 is further displaced toward the retreating direction (left side in FIG. 136(a)) with respect to the front base 13720, the bent portion of the displacement-side engaging member 13742 742b pushes (rotates) the rotating member 13726 in the retraction direction against the biasing force of the biasing spring SP3.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 136(b), the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 13742 is gradually advanced into the internal space of the front base 13720 through the opening 13720a, as shown in FIG. 136(c). Thus, when the second displacement member 13740 is arranged at the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 13742 can face the rear surface of the front base 13720 in an engageable manner. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 13740 from tilting away from the front base 13720 .

In particular, in this embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 13740 are extended to the extended position, the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP3 places (returns) the rotating member 13726 to the initial position. can be made That is, in its initial position, the front surface of the front portion 13726b and the side surface of the side surface portion 13726a can be flush with the front surface and side surfaces of the front base 13720, respectively. As a result, even when the front and side surfaces of the front base 13720 are exposed, the opening 13720a and the rotating member 13726 are difficult for the player to see, and the appearance can be improved.

<14th Embodiment>
Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 to 139. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the base-side engaging member 726 is fixed so as to protrude from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described. It is arranged so that it can appear in front of the. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 137 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit 14700 according to the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 138(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 14700 with the second displacement member 740 arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 138(b) is the line CXXXVIIIb-CXXXVIIIb of FIG. 138(a). is a partially enlarged cross-sectional schematic diagram of the counterclockwise rotation unit 14700 in FIG. 139(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 14700 with the second displacement member 740 arranged at the extended position, and FIG. 139(b) is CXXXIXb of FIG. 139(a). 147 is a partially enlarged schematic cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 14700 taken along line -CXXXIXb; FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 137 to 139, a left rotation unit 14700 according to the fourteenth embodiment accommodates a base-side engagement member 14726 in the internal space of a front base 14720, and a rack member 14752 on one longitudinal end side ( A transmission portion 14752b is formed on the front surface of FIG. 137 (upper side).

The base-side engaging member 14726 includes a slide portion 14726c that is disposed so as to be slidably displaceable in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIGS. 138(b) and 139(b)) along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 14720. , a base portion 726a and a bent portion 726b are formed on the front surface of the slide portion 14726c (the left side surface in FIGS. 138(b) and 139(b)).

The base-side engaging member 14726 slides and displaces the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b toward the front side (the left side in FIG. 138(b)) from the receiving recess 727 by sliding the sliding portion 14726c toward the front along a guide groove (not shown). ) (see FIG. 138), and the slide portion 14726c is slid along a guide groove (not shown) toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 139(b)) to receive the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b. It can be retracted into recess 727 (see FIG. 139).

In this case, between the rear surface of the slide portion 14726c and the front surface of the rear base 710, an urging spring SP4 made of a coil spring is disposed in an elastically deformed state. The force maintains the base-side engaging member 14726 in the retracted state (the state shown in FIG. 139(b)). In this immersed state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b and the front surface of the front base 14720 are flush with each other, making it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the base-side engaging member 14726. FIG.

The rear surface of the slide portion 14726c (right side in FIGS. 138(b) and 139(b)) is inclined in a direction away from the rack member 14752 as it goes upward (upper side in FIGS. 138(b) and 139(b)). It is formed as an inclined surface, and the inclined surface (front surface) of the transmission portion 14752b of the rack member 14752 abuts against the inclined surface.

138(b) and 139(b)), the base side engaging member 14726 (slide portion 14726c) is formed, and the inclined surface of the slide portion 14726c abuts on the inclined surface.

Therefore, the base side engaging member 14726 slides toward the front side (in the direction in which it protrudes from the receiving recess 727) as the rack member 14752 is displaced downward by the action of the inclined surfaces of the base side engaging member 14726 and the transmission portion 14752b. In addition, as the rack member 14752 is displaced upward, the base-side engaging member 14726 can be slid to the rear side (into the receiving recess 727).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 138, when the rack member 14752 is displaced to the lowest position and the second displacement member 740 is arranged at the retracted position, the inner surfaces (engagement surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b are brought into contact with each other. The first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can be prevented from tilting away from the front base 14720 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 139, when the rack member 14752 is displaced to the uppermost position and the second displacement member 740 is arranged at the extended position, the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP4 causes the base side engagement. Member 14726 can be recessed into receiving recess 727 . That is, in the retracted state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b of the base-side engaging member 14726 can be arranged flush with the front surface of the front base 14720. As shown in FIG. As a result, even when the front surface of the front base 14720 is exposed, the base-side engaging member 14726 is made difficult for the player to visually recognize, and the appearance can be improved.

<Fifteenth Embodiment>
Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 to 142. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the base-side engaging member 726 is fixed so as to protrude from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described. is slidably disposed in front of the . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 140 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 15700 in the fifteenth embodiment. 141(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 15720, and FIG. 134(b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 15720 taken along line CXLIb-CXLIb in FIG. 141(a).

As shown in FIGS. 140 and 141, a left rotation unit 15700 according to the fifteenth embodiment is attached to a front base 15720 on the front side (FIG. 141(a) front side, FIG. 141(b) bottom side) and side sides. (Fig. 141(a) and Fig. 141(b) right side) is formed, and the front side (Fig. 141(b) lower side) of the front base 15720 in the space formed by the opening 15720a is formed. A base-side engaging member 15726 is slidably disposed in the portion.

The base-side engaging member 15726 is formed in a flat plate shape having substantially the same shape as the front side of the front base 15720 in the opening 15720a (that is, a shape that closes the opening 15720a when viewed from the front). Along the first guide groove 15720b1 and the second guide groove 15720b2, it is disposed so as to be slidable in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIGS. 141(a) and 141(b)).

The first guide groove 15720b1 is formed to have a first inclination angle with respect to the left-right direction of the front base 15720 (left-right direction in FIG. 141(b)) when viewed from above in FIG. The guide groove 15720b2 is formed to have an angle of inclination (second angle of inclination) smaller than the angle of inclination of the first guide groove 15720b1 with respect to the left-right direction of the front base 15720 (the left-right direction in FIG. 141(b)). be. In this embodiment, the second tilt angle is 0°. That is, the second guide groove 15720b2 is formed parallel to the left-right direction of the front base 15720. As shown in FIG.

Therefore, the base-side engaging member 15726 is guided along the first guide groove 15720b1 from the initial position shown in FIG. left upper side), and then guided along the second guide groove 15720b2, so that the front base 15720 is slid sideways (left side in FIG. 141(b)), It is immersed inside the base 15720 .

In this case, between the front base 15720 and the base-side engaging member 15726, an urging spring (not shown) consisting of a coil spring is disposed in an elastically deformed state. The elastic recovery force maintains the base side engaging member 15726 in the initial position. In this initial position, the front surface of the base-side engaging member 15726 (the surface on the front side in FIG. 141(a) and the bottom surface in FIG. 141(b)) and the front surface of the front base 15720 are arranged flush with each other. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the side engaging member 15726 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the engagement action by the base-side engagement member 15726 and displacement-side engagement member 742 will be described.

FIG. 142 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 15700 for explaining the engagement action by the base-side engaging member 15726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742, in which the second displacement member 740 is displaced toward the retracted position. Schematically, the transition state when the 142(a) to the state shown in FIG. 142(c), the second displacement member 740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 142(a) and 142(b), when the second displacement member 740 is displaced with respect to the front base 15720 toward the retreating direction (left side in FIG. 142(a)), displacement-side engagement occurs. The tip of the bent portion 742b of the member 742 is inserted through the opening 15720a into the front base 15720, and the base portion 742a of the displacement-side engaging member 742 is brought into contact with the side surface of the base-side engaging member 15726.

From the state shown in FIG. 142(b), when the second displacement member 740 is further displaced toward the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 142(b)) with respect to the front base 15720, as shown in FIG. 142(c). , the base portion 742a of the displacement-side engaging member 742 pushes (slides) the base-side engaging member 15726 in the retracting direction along the first guide groove 15720b1 against the biasing force of the biasing spring. When the second displacement member 740 is further displaced in the retreating direction from the state shown in FIG. is done).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 142(d), when the second displacement member 740 is arranged at the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 742 faces the rear surface of the base-side engaging member 15726. , can be engagably opposed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 from tilting away from the front base 15720 (downward in FIG. 142(c)).

In particular, in this embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are extended to the extended position, the base-side engaging member 15726 is arranged (returned) to the initial position by the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring. ). That is, in the initial position, the front surface of the base-side engaging member 15726 can be arranged flush with the front surface of the front base 15720 . As a result, even when the front of the front base 15720 is exposed, the opening 15720a and the base-side engaging member 15726 are made difficult for the player to see, and the appearance can be improved.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. FIG. In the first embodiment, the displacement-side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base-side engaging member 726 projecting from the front of the front base 720. The displacement side engaging member 16742 of the second displacement member 16740 in the form is engaged with the inner edge of the opening 16720a of the front base 16720 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 143 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 16700 in the sixteenth embodiment. 144(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 16720, and FIG. 144(b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 16720 taken along line CXLIVb-CXLIVb in FIG. 144(a).

FIG. 145 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 16700 for explaining the engagement action by the front base 16720 (opening 16720a) and the displacement side engagement member 16742, and the second displacement member 16740 moves to the retracted position. Schematically illustrated is the transition state as it is displaced towards. 145(a) to the state shown in FIG. 145(b), the second displacement member 16740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 143 to 145, the left rotation unit 16700 in the sixteenth embodiment has an opening 16720a formed in the side surface of the front base 16720 (the right side surface in FIGS. 135(a) and 135(b)). .

The displacement-side engaging member 16742 includes a base portion 16742a erected from the rear surface of the second displacement member 16740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 16742a and having an inner surface serving as an engaging surface. The standing height of the base portion 16742a is set to a height that allows the bending portion 742b to be inserted into the opening 16720a of the front base 16720. As shown in FIG.

Thus, according to the present embodiment, when the second displacement member 16740 is displaced in the retracting direction, the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 16742 is moved through the opening 16720a along with the displacement to the front base. 16720, and when the second displacement member 16740 is placed at the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 16742 is engaged with the inner edge of the opening 16720a of the front base 16720. can face each other as much as possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 16740 from tilting away from the front base 16720 .

In particular, in this embodiment, it is only necessary to open the opening 16720a in the front base 16720, and there is no need to provide a base-side engaging member, so the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. In addition, since the opening 16720a is arranged on the side surface of the front base 16720, the opening 16720a is visible to the player when the second displacement member 16740 is displaced in the projecting direction and the front of the front base 16720 is exposed. The appearance can be improved by making it difficult.

<Seventeenth Embodiment>
Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147. FIG. In the first embodiment, the displacement-side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base-side engaging member 726 projecting from the front of the front base 720. The displacement side engaging member 17742 of the second displacement member 17740 in the form is engaged with the rear surface of the rear base 710 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 146 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 17700 in the seventeenth embodiment. 147 is a schematic top view of the counterclockwise rotation unit 17700 for explaining the engagement action by the rear base 710 and the displacement-side engagement member 17742, in which the second displacement member 17740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition state at the moment is schematically illustrated.

147(a) to the state shown in FIG. 147(b), the second displacement member 17740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state of being placed in the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, in the left rotation unit 17700 of the seventeenth embodiment, the entire front and side surfaces of one longitudinal end side (upper side in FIG. 146) of the front base 17720 are formed as decorative surfaces. That is, the front base 17720 is formed in a shape in which the base-side engaging member 726 and the receiving recess 727 are omitted from the front base 720 in the first embodiment.

The displacement-side engaging member 17742 includes a base portion 17742a erected from the rear surface of the second displacement member 17740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 17742a and having an inner surface serving as an engaging surface. The standing height of the base portion 17742a is set to such a height that the inner surface of the bent portion 742b can face the rear surface of the rear base 710 with a predetermined gap therebetween.

Thus, according to the present embodiment, when the second displacement member 17740 is displaced in the retracting direction, the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 17742 is gradually moved toward the rear side of the rear base 710 along with the displacement. , and the second displacement member 17740 is arranged at the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engaging member 17742 can face the rear surface of the rear base 710 in an engageable manner. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 17740 from tilting away from the front base 17720 .

In particular, in this embodiment, since it is not necessary to provide the front base 17720 with a base-side engaging member, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

Furthermore, since it is not necessary to form an opening on the side surface of the front base 17720, the appearance of the front base 17720 can be improved by avoiding the functional part unrelated to the decoration from being visually recognized by the player. can be done. In other words, there is no need to obscure the sides of the front base 17720 from the player by means of the second displacement member 17740 arranged at the overhanging position, so the amount of overhang of the second displacement member 17740 is increased to enhance the presentation effect. be able to.

<Eighteenth Embodiment>
Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 151. FIG. In the right rotation unit 600 of the first embodiment, the operation of displacing (raising) the first displacement member 630 tilted in the overhanging direction toward the retracted position (raising operation of the first displacement member 630) is performed by the drive motor 650. Although the case where it is performed only by the rotational driving force has been described, the erecting motion of the first displacement member 630 in the right rotation unit 18600 of the eighteenth embodiment utilizes the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650 and the action of the inertial force. is done. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 148 is an exploded perspective view of a right rotation unit 18600 according to the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 149 is a front view of the clockwise rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position, and FIG. 18600 is a rear view of the right rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half section of FIG.

149(a) and 150(a) show the state in which the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 18640 are arranged in the extended position (that is, FIGS. 34(c) and 36(c)). corresponds to 149(b) and 150(b) correspond to FIGS. 34(b) and 36(b), and FIGS. 149(c) and 150(c) correspond to FIGS. 36(a).

FIG. 151 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half section when moving from the extended position toward the retracted position, and FIG. 151(c) corresponds to FIGS. 150(a), 150(b) and 150(c) respectively.

As shown in FIG. 148, in the right rotation unit 18600 according to the eighteenth embodiment, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped abutted portion 18629 from the front of the front base 18620 is attached to the decorative portion 642b of the connecting displacement member 18642 of the second displacement member 18640. Approximately cylindrical contact portions 18644 protrude from the rear surface. The contact portion 18644 is disposed at the end portion of the connecting displacement member 18642 in the longitudinal direction opposite to the pivot hole 642a (support shaft 633).

As shown in FIGS. 149 to 151, the abutted portion 18629 and the abutting portion 18644 are in the middle of displacing the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 18640 from the extended position to the retracted position. In a predetermined section, the outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 18644 is formed so as to contact the upper surface of the contacted portion 18629 (upper surface in FIG. 148).

Specifically, from the extended position shown in FIGS. 149(a), 150(a) and 151(a), as shown in FIGS. 149(b), 150(b) and 151(b), 149(c), 150(c) and 151(c), the connecting displacement member 18642 is rotated about the support shaft 633 (shaft support hole 642a) in the direction of retreating to the rear surface of the first displacement member 630. ), when the connecting displacement member 18642 is rotated to the maximum around the support shaft 633 (shaft support hole 642a), the contact portion 18644 is brought into contact with the upper surface of the contact portion 18629. As shown in FIG.

From the states shown in FIGS. 149(c), 150(c) and 151(c), the first displacement member 630 starts to rotate (stand up) toward the retracted position about the rotation shaft 631. 33(b), 35(b), and 37(b), the contact portion 18644 is separated from the upper surface of the contact portion 18629, and the contact portion 18629 and the contact portion 18644 are separated from each other. Abutment is released.

In this case, the drive motor 650 moves only the second displacement member 18640 in the interval until the contact portion 18644 contacts the contacted portion 18629 (that is, the interval shown in FIGS. 149, 150, and 151). Rotational driving is sufficient, and the driving load is relatively small. That is, since this section is a section where the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, only the weight of the second displacement member 18640 is rotationally driven. is assumed to be the load of In addition, since the displacement direction of the connecting displacement member 18642 is the downward direction of gravity, the load on the drive motor 650 is reduced in this respect as well.

On the other hand, when the contact portion 18644 is in contact with the contacted portion 18629 , the driving pin 654 b of the transmission member 654 reaches the working section 635 a of the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 . Therefore, from this state, not only the weight of the second displacement member 18640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 630 is added as the load of the rotational drive of the drive motor 650 . In particular, from this state, the first displacement member 630 is raised against gravity, so the load on the drive motor 650 is rapidly increased in this respect as well.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the contact portion 18644 is provided at the end of the connecting displacement member 18642 opposite to the shaft support hole 642 a (support shaft 633 ), and the connecting displacement member 18642 rotates the support shaft 633 . When rotated around the center, the abutting portion 18644 abuts on the abutted portion 18629 of the front base 18620 (see FIG. 151(c)).

That is, the rotation of the connecting displacement member 18642 about the support shaft 633 can be regulated by the abutment of the abutted portion 18629 and the abutting portion 18644, and the rotation of the connecting displacement member 18642 can be suddenly stopped. , the inertial force of the connecting displacement member 18642 generated by the sudden stop is the force in the direction (arrow F) can act on the first displacement member 630 .

As a result, the driving pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, and the weight of the first displacement member 630 as well as the weight of the second displacement member 18640 is reached. Also, when added as a load for rotationally driving the drive motor 650 , the inertial force described above can be used as a force that assists the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the drive motor 650, stabilize the displacement of each of the displacement members 630 and 18640 from the extended position to the retracted position, and increase the durability of the drive motor 650. It is possible to improve the quality.

<Nineteenth Embodiment>
Next, a nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 160. FIG. In the right rotation unit 18600 of the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the abutting portion 18644 of the connecting displacement member 18642 contacts the abutted portion 18629 of the front base 18620 has been described. The contacting portion 19644 of the contacting portion 19644 contacts the contacted portion 19639 provided on the first displacement member 19630 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

152 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 19600 in the nineteenth embodiment, and FIG. 153 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 19600. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, in a right rotation unit 19600 according to the nineteenth embodiment, the connecting portion (connecting groove 641c and connecting pin 643) of the driven member 19641 of the second displacement member 19640 and the connecting displacement member 19642 is the first. It is set at a position different from that of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 29 and 30).

Specifically, one end in the longitudinal direction of the driven member 19641 (the side opposite to the second groove 641b across the shaft support hole 641a, the upper side in FIGS. 152 and 153) is curved in an arc, and the curved portion A connecting groove 641c is provided on the extended distal end side of the . This curved portion avoids interference between the driven member 19641 and the shaft support hole 642 a of the connecting displacement member 19642 . The connecting displacement member 19642 is formed by projecting a plate-like projecting portion 19642c outward from the shaft support hole 642a, and a connecting pin 643 projects from the front side of the projecting portion 19642c.

In this case, in the above-described first embodiment, the axis of the shaft support hole 641a (support shaft 632) of the driven member 641 is centered and the axis of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) of the connecting displacement member 19642 is The connecting portion (connecting groove 641c and connecting pin 643) of the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 is positioned inside (on the center side) of the virtual circle passing through the center.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, an imaginary shaft centered on the shaft center of the shaft support hole 641a (support shaft 632) of the driven member 19641 passes through the shaft center of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) of the connecting displacement member 19642. The connecting portion (connecting groove 641c and connecting pin 643) of the driven member 19641 and the connecting displacement member 19642 is positioned outside the circle.

Therefore, the direction of relative rotation of the connecting displacement member 19642 with respect to the first displacement member 19630 is opposite to that in the first embodiment. Here, the relative rotation in the opposite direction will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 157. FIG.

154 and 155 are front views of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state during operation between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 19600 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state when rotating. FIG.

154(a), 154(b) and 154(c) are the same states as FIGS. 156(a), 156(b) and 156(c) respectively, ), FIGS. 155(b) and 155(c) are the same states as FIGS. 157(a), 157(b) and 157(c), respectively. 154(c) is the same as FIG. 155(a), and FIG. 156(c) is the same as FIG. 157(a).

Here, in the right rotation unit 19600 in the nineteenth embodiment, relative rotation of the connecting displacement member 19642 with respect to the first displacement member 19630 is caused by the difference in the positions of the connecting portions (the connecting groove 641c and the connecting pin 643) described above. , is opposite to that of the first embodiment, the other operation modes are formed substantially in the same manner, so description of the same portions will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 154 and 156, at the retracted position, the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. By pushing down the inner wall surfaces of the section 635a) and the second groove 641b in the projecting direction, the first displacement member 19630 is rotated (tilted) in the projecting direction integrally with the second displacement member 19640. FIG.

155(a) and 157(a), when the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. The inner wall surface of the second groove 641b of the driven member 19641 is pushed downward (lower side in FIG. 157(a)) while passing through the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of .

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 155(b) and 157(b), the driven member 19641 rotates around the support shaft 632 in a direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 157(b)) to raise the connecting groove 641c. , the rotation of the driven member 19641 is transmitted to the connection displacement member 19642 through the connection of the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643, and the connection displacement member 19642 lowers the decorative portion 642b with the support shaft 633 as the rotation center. direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 108(b)).

That is, while the first displacement member 19630 is stopped, the connecting displacement portion 19642 is displaced (rotated) relative to the first displacement member 19630 in the direction opposite to that in the first embodiment. After that, as shown in FIGS. 155(c) and 157(c), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moves the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640. By reaching the end of the second groove 641b, the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 are arranged at the overhang position.

Returning to FIGS. 152 and 153, description will be made. In this embodiment, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped contacted portion 19639 projects from the back surface of the first displacement member 19630, and a substantially cylindrical contact portion 19644 projects from the front surface of the decorative portion 642b of the connecting displacement member 19642. . The contacted portion 19639 is arranged between the rotation shaft 631 and the support shaft 632 in the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 19630 .

The contacted portion 19639 and the contact portion 19644 are arranged in a predetermined section in the middle of the displacement of the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 from the extended position to the retracted position. The outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 19644 is formed so as to be able to contact with the side surface of (the right side surface in FIG. 153). 158 to 160, the effect of the abutment of the abutted portion 19639 and the abutting portion 19644 will be described.

FIG. 158 is a front view of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position, and FIG. 19600 is a rear view of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state in the first half section of FIG.

158(a) and 159(a) show the state in which the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 are arranged in the extended position (that is, FIGS. 155(c) and 157(c)). corresponds to 158(b) and 159(b) correspond to FIGS. 155(b) and 157(b), and FIGS. 158(c) and 159(c) correspond to FIGS. 157(a).

FIG. 160 is a schematic back view of the clockwise rotation unit 19600 in each state in the first half section when it operates from the extended position toward the retracted position, and FIG. 160(a), FIG. 160(c) corresponds to FIGS. 159(a), 159(b) and 159(c) respectively.

From the extended position shown in FIGS. 158(a), 159(a) and 160(a), as shown in FIGS. 158(b), 159(b) and 160(b), the connecting displacement member 19642 158(c), 159(c), and 160(c) are rotated in the direction of retracting to the rear surface of the first displacement member 19630 with the support shaft 633 (shaft support hole 642a) as the center of rotation. Further, when the connecting displacement member 19642 is rotated to the maximum around the support shaft 633 (shaft support hole 642a), the contact portion 19644 is brought into contact with the lower surface of the contacted portion 19639 .

In this case, the drive motor 650 moves only the second displacement member 19640 in the interval until the contact portion 19644 contacts the contacted portion 19639 (that is, the interval shown in FIGS. 158, 159 and 160). Rotational driving is sufficient, and the driving load is relatively small. That is, since this section is a section where the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the non-interfering section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630, only the weight of the second displacement member 19640 is rotationally driven. is assumed to be the load of

On the other hand, when the contact portion 19644 is in contact with the contacted portion 19639 , the drive pin 654 b of the transmission member 654 reaches the working section 635 a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630 . Therefore, in such a state, not only the weight of the second displacement member 19640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 19630 is added as a load for rotationally driving the drive motor 650 . In particular, from this state, the load on the drive motor 650 is abruptly increased because the first displacement member 19630 is erected against gravity.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the decorative portion 642b of the connecting displacement member 19642 is provided with the abutting portion 19644, and the connecting displacement member 19642 is rotated around the support shaft 633, thereby rotating the connecting displacement member 19642. The abutting portion 19644 lifted upward along with this abuts against the lower surface of the abutted portion 19639 of the first displacement member 19630 (see FIG. 160(c)).

That is, the rotation of the connecting displacement member 19642 about the support shaft 633 can be restricted by the abutment of the abutted portion 19639 and the abutting portion 19644, and the rotation of the connecting displacement member 19642 can be suddenly stopped. , the inertial force of the connecting displacement member 19642 generated by the sudden stop is the force in the direction (arrow F) can act on the first displacement member 19630 .

As a result, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630, and the weight of the first displacement member 19630 as well as the weight of the second displacement member 19640 is reached. Also, when added as a load for rotationally driving the drive motor 650 , the inertial force described above can be used as a force that assists the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the drive motor 650, stabilize the displacement of the displacement members 19630 and 19640 from the extended position to the retracted position, and increase the durability of the drive motor 650. It is possible to improve the quality.

<Twentieth Embodiment>
Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162. FIG. In the winning device 65 of the first embodiment, the game ball is delivered from the delivery port 821c to the seesaw member 840 (receiving surface 844) regardless of the state of the seesaw member 840 (that is, either the first state or the second state). state), but the winning device 20065 in the twentieth embodiment restricts the delivery of game balls from the delivery port 821c to the seesaw member 20840 (receiving surface 844) at least in the second state. be done. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 161 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 20065 in the twentieth embodiment. Also, FIG. 162(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 20065 with the seesaw member 20840 forming the first state, and FIG. 162(b) is a winning device with the seesaw member 20840 forming the second state. 20065 is a cross-sectional view of device 20065. FIG. 162(a) and 162(b) correspond to FIGS. 52(a) and 52(b), respectively.

As shown in FIG. 161, in the prize winning device 20065 of the twentieth embodiment, a seesaw member 20840 is formed with a restricting portion 20848 . The restricting portion 20848 is formed as a substantially triangular portion in front view that stands upward (upper side in FIG. 161) from the edge portion of the receiving surface 844 opposite to the inclined surface 845 .

As shown in FIG. 162(a), when the seesaw member 20840 is in the first state, the restricting portion 20848 is positioned outside the opening area of the delivery port 821c. (Fig. 162(a) left-right dimension) is maintained at a dimension W1 larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, delivery of the game ball from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is allowed.

On the other hand, when the seesaw member 20840 is in the second state, as shown in FIG. A portion is located inside the opening region of the delivery port 821c (that is, a portion of the restricting portion 20848 overlaps the opening region of the delivery port 821c). As a result, the opening width of the delivery port 821c is reduced to the dimension W2 which is smaller than the diameter of the game ball (W2<W1). Therefore, the delivery of game balls from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is restricted (prohibited).

Thus, according to this embodiment, the delivery of the game ball from the guide passage (delivery port 821c) of the intermediate base 820 to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 20840 is controlled (allowed) according to the state of the seesaw member 20840. or regulation).

That is, in the first state, the game ball is delivered from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844, and the game ball is rolled from the receiving surface 844 toward the inclined surface 845 and the discharging surface 846, thereby rotating the seesaw member 20840. , the second state can be formed quickly.

Here, even after the seesaw member 20840 starts rotating toward the second state, when the game balls are sent out in a row from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844, they were sent out first (the receiving surface 844 received ) A state in which the game ball is still rolling on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 is formed, and the seesaw member 20840 is likely to be maintained in the second state.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the seesaw member 20840 starts to rotate toward the second state, the restricting portion 20848 narrows the opening width of the delivery port 821c to the dimension W2, so that the receiving surface is separated from the delivery port 821c. By restricting (prohibiting) the delivery of game balls to 844, it is possible to secure time for discharging the game balls rolling on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d.

That is, until game balls are completely discharged from the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d and there are no more game balls on the seesaw member 20840, the delivery of the game balls from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is on standby. can be made As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

The dimension W2 may be larger than the diameter of the game ball as long as it is smaller than the dimension W1. That is, the dimension W2 may be a dimension that allows the game ball to be delivered from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844. Even in this case, the width of the opening of the delivery port 821c is narrowed by the restricting portion 20848, making it difficult for the game ball to pass through. (delay the passage of the game ball). As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

<21st Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 163, a twenty-first embodiment will be described. In the winning device 65 of the first embodiment, by rolling along the downward slope of the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840, the game ball is discharged to the discharge port 821d. The winning device 21065 in the twenty-first embodiment comprises a rotating member 21870 for pushing out the game balls and discharging them to the discharge port 821d. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

163(a) and 163(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 21065 in the twenty-first embodiment, corresponding to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 163, the winning device 21065 in the twenty-first embodiment comprises a rotating member 21870 above the seesaw member 840. As shown in FIG. The rotating member 21870 does not interfere with the seesaw member 840 and does not contact the game ball on the seesaw member 840 even if the seesaw member 840 is in the first state or the second state. placed at the height possible.

The rotating member 21870 includes a shaft support portion 21871 through which a shaft support pin (not shown) is inserted so as to be rotatably supported on the rear surface of the front base 810, and a delivery port 821c that protrudes from the shaft support portion 21871 to one side. A plate-shaped receiving plate 21872 facing the receiving plate 21872, and a plate-shaped receiving plate 21872 and a push plate projected from the shaft support portion 21871 to the other side opposite to the receiving plate 21872 and facing the discharge port 821d 21873.

The shaft support portion 21871 is disposed in a posture in which the axial direction thereof is along the direction of gravity (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 163(a)) (that is, perpendicular to the rotation shaft (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 840). The receiving plate 21872 and the ejecting plate 21873 are connected with a predetermined crossing angle with the shaft support portion 21871 as the crossing center. Therefore, the rotating member 21870 is bent in a substantially doglegged shape when viewed in the direction of the pivot 21871 (gravitational force).

163(a), the rotating member 21870 is such that when the pushing plate 21873 rotates along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (horizontal direction in FIG. 163(a)), the receiving plate 21872 can 163(a), and when the receiving plate 21872 rotates along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, as shown in FIG. 163(b), The pushing plate 21873 is in a posture protruding above the inclined surface 845 and/or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 .

163(a), the rotating member 21870 is such that when the push plate 21873 is retracted to the side opposite to the discharge port 821d (lower side in FIG. 163(a)), the receiving plate 21872 is positioned at the discharge port 163(b), the receiving plate 21872 is advanced toward the side close to 821c, and the receiving plate 21872 is retracted to the side opposite to the delivery port 821c (lower side in FIG. 163(b)), as shown in FIG. 163(b). The pushing plate 21873 is advanced toward the outlet 821d.

Therefore, according to this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. When the game ball is delivered to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, the game ball delivered to the receiving surface 844 from the delivery port 821c is received by the receiving plate 21872 of the rotating member 21870, and the rotating member 21870 pushes the pushing plate 21873. is rotated in a direction to protrude above the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 . By this rotation, as shown in FIG. 163(b), the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be pushed out by the pushing plate 21873 and discharged to the discharge port 821d.

As a result, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are changed. Alternate switching can be performed smoothly.

In addition, the receiving plate 21872 of the rotating member 21870 receives the game ball sent out from the delivery port 821c, and the rotating member 21870 is in a posture in which the ejecting plate 21873 protrudes above the inclined surface 845 and the discharging surface 846 (that is, , posture shown in FIG. 163(b)), the game ball received by the receiving plate 21872 (the game ball shown on the left side of FIG. Since it rolls along the discharge surface 846, the rotating member 21870 can be returned to the posture in which the receiving plate 21872 protrudes above the receiving surface 844 (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 163(a)).

In this way, the rotating member 21870 uses the rolling motion of the game ball to move to the initial position (the position where the game ball can be received by the receiving plate 21872 and the game ball can be pushed out by the pushing plate 21873, that is, FIG. position shown in (a)). Therefore, since driving by the driving means and detection by the sensor device can be eliminated, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

<22nd Embodiment>
Next, a twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

164(a) and 164(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 22065 in the twenty-second embodiment, corresponding to FIG. 165(a) and 165(b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the winning device 22065, corresponding to FIG.

Here, the prize winning device 22065 of the twenty-second embodiment differs from the prize winning device 21065 of the twenty-first embodiment by having an opening 22849 formed in the seesaw member 22840 and a projecting piece 22874 projecting from the rotating member 22870. Furthermore, since only the provision is different and the other configurations are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 164 and 165, the rotating member 22870 has a plurality of (three in this embodiment) projecting pieces 22874 protruding from the lower side of the pushing plate 21873 (on the side of the seesaw member 22840, on the lower side in FIG. 165). is set. On the other hand, a plurality of (three in this embodiment) openings 22849 for receiving the projecting pieces 22874 are formed in the plate-like portion where the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 22840 are formed.

The protruding piece 22874 is curved in an arc around the rotation axis of the seesaw member 22840 when viewed from the front (when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 22840, i.e., the state shown in FIG. 165). be. On the other hand, the opening 22849 is curved in an arc shape around the rotation axis of the rotation member 22870 when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of the rotation axis (shaft support portion 21871) of the rotation member 22870, that is, the state shown in FIG. 164). It is formed.

Therefore, the seesaw member 22840 rotates between the first state and the second state around the support shaft 821e (bearing 841), and the rotating member 22870 rotates through its movable range around the shaft support 21871. In either state, interference of the projecting piece 22874 with the inner edge of the opening 22849 can be suppressed. As a result, the seesaw member 22840 and the rotating member 22870 can be made independent of each other and smoothly rotated.

Here, when the pushing plate 21873 of the rotating member 21870 does not have a projecting piece as in the case of the twenty-first embodiment, the seesaw member 840 is in the second state (or in a state similar thereto). , When the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is pushed out to the discharge port 821d by the push plate 21873, the distance between the push plate 21873 and the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 is large, the lower part of the ejector plate 21873 is brought into contact with the upper part of the game ball (the front part of the paper surface in FIG. 163(a)). Therefore, the time required for the pushing plate 21873 to contact the upper part of the game ball increases, and it becomes difficult to discharge the game ball to the discharge port 821d quickly. In addition, it becomes difficult to sufficiently apply the energy of the rotation of the rotating member 21870 formed by receiving the game ball with the receiving plate 21872 to the game ball via the pushing plate 21873 .

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the projecting piece 22874 projects downward (the seesaw member 22840) from the ejector plate 21873 of the rotating member 22870. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. In addition, when the seesaw member 22840 forms the second state, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 22840 can be pushed out to the discharge port 821d by the projecting piece 22874.

Therefore, in this case, the projecting piece 22874 can be brought into contact with the side portion of the game ball (lower portion in FIG. 164(a)). Therefore, the time until the projecting piece 22874 comes into contact with the side portion of the game ball can be shortened, and the game ball can be quickly discharged (pushed out) to the discharge port 821d accordingly. Also, the energy of the rotation of the rotating member 22870 formed by receiving the game ball with the receiving plate 21872 can be sufficiently applied to the game ball via the projecting piece 22874 .

As a result, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are changed. Alternate switching can be performed smoothly.

<Twenty-third embodiment>
Next, a twenty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167. FIG. In the twenty-first embodiment, the rotating member 21870 is arranged (rotatably supported) on the front base 810, but the rotating member 23870 of the twenty-third embodiment is arranged (rotatably supported) on the seesaw member 840. pivoted on). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 166 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 23065 in the twenty-third embodiment. 167(a) and 167(b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the winning device 23065, corresponding to FIG. 168(a) and 168(b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the winning device 23065, corresponding to FIG.

Here, the prize winning device 23065 of the twenty-third embodiment differs from the prize winning device 21065 of the twenty-first embodiment in the position where the rotating member 23870 is arranged and the presence or absence of the stopper portion 23875, and the rest of the configuration is the same. Therefore, its description is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 166 to 168 , the rotating member 23870 in the twenty-third embodiment is rotatably supported on the upper surface of the seesaw member 840 by a shaft support pin 23876 inserted through the shaft support portion 21871 . In this case, in this embodiment, the rotating member 23870 is disposed in such a manner that the axial direction of the shaft support portion 21871 is orthogonal to the rotating shaft (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 840, The side surfaces face the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 substantially in parallel.

As described above, according to this embodiment, since the rotating member 23870 is disposed on the seesaw member 840, the seesaw member 840 is in the first state or the first state as shown in FIGS. 168(a) and 168(b). In any of the two states, the pushing plate 21873 can face the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 .

Therefore, unlike the case of the twenty-first embodiment described above (that is, the form in which the lower part of the ejector plate 21873 abuts against the upper part of the game ball (the part on the near side of the paper in FIG. 163(a)), the ejector plate 21873 can be brought into contact with the side portion of the game ball (lower portion in FIG. 167(a)). Therefore, the time required for the pushing plate 21873 to come into contact with the side portion of the game ball can be shortened, and the game ball can be quickly discharged (pushed out) to the discharge port 821d accordingly. Also, the energy of the rotation of the rotating member 23870 formed by receiving the game ball with the receiving plate 21872 can be sufficiently applied to the game ball via the pushing plate 21873 .

As a result, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are changed. Alternate switching can be performed smoothly.

Here, the rotating member 23870 of this embodiment has a stopper portion 23875 projecting from the back surface of the pushing plate 21873 (the surface opposite to the side that pushes out the game ball), and the stopper portion 23875 hits the back surface of the front base 810. be accessible. When the stopper portion 23875 is in contact with the rear surface of the front base 810 (see FIG. 167(a)), the rotating member 23870 moves the pushing plate 21873 in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (horizontal direction in FIG. 167(a)). It is arranged in a rotational position along.

Therefore, compared to the case where the stopper portion 23875 is omitted and the push plate 21873 is retracted to the position where it abuts against the back surface of the front base 810, the push plate is closer to the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the ejection surface 846. 21873 can be made to stand by, and the time until the pushing plate 21873 comes into contact with the game ball can be shortened. As a result, the game ball can be quickly discharged (pushed out) to the discharge port 821d.

Here, as described above, even if the rotary member 23870 is arranged in a posture in which the ejector plate 21873 protrudes above the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 167(b)), The game ball received by the receiving plate 21872 (the game ball shown on the left side in FIG. 167(b)) rolls along the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 while retracting the ejecting plate 21873. The rotating member 23870 can be returned to the posture in which it protrudes upward from the receiving surface 844 (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 167(a)).

In this case, since the rotating member 23870 is arranged on the seesaw member 840 in this embodiment, a predetermined gap is formed between the pushing plate 21873 and the front base 810 . Therefore, when the push-out plate 21873 is retracted to a position where it abuts against the rear surface of the front base 810, the game ball rolls away from the discharge port 821d, and the rolling trajectory of the game ball increases. Therefore, the discharge to the discharge port 821d is delayed.

On the other hand, by protruding the stopper portion 23875 from the back surface of the pushing plate 21873, the game ball received by the receiving plate 21872 (the game ball shown on the left side in FIG. It is possible to prevent the ejector plate 21873 from being excessively retreated to the rear side of the front base 810 when rolling along (see FIG. 167(a)). That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling in a direction away from the discharge port 821d, and to easily discharge the game ball to the discharge port 821d.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since no stopper portion is formed on the rear surface of the receiving plate 21872, the receiving plate 21872 can be retracted to a position where it contacts the rear surface of the front base 810 (FIG. 167(b)). )reference). That is, by utilizing the gap between the rotating member 23870 and the front base 810 formed by disposing the rotating member 23870 on the seesaw member 840, the receiving plate 21872 receives the game ball and rotates when the rotating member 23870 is rotated. The rotation angle of the member 23870 (rotation angle from the rotation position shown in FIG. 167(a) to the rotation position shown in FIG. 167(b)) can be increased.

As a result, the time during which the game ball delivered from the delivery port 821c is in contact with the receiving plate 21872 can be lengthened (that is, the impulse received by the rotating member 23870 from the game ball can be increased). Therefore, the energy of the rotation of the rotating member 23870 formed by receiving the game ball with the receiving plate 21872 can be increased, and even when a plurality of game balls roll on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846, they A plurality of game balls can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d by pushing out the push-out plate 21873. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the ejection surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the transition between the first state and the second state is made. Alternate switching can be performed smoothly.

<24th Embodiment>
Next, a twenty-fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the seesaw member 840 is rotated while maintaining its rotation axis in a horizontal posture has been described. be done. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

169 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 24065 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 170 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 24065. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 170, a winning device 24065 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment has bearings 24816 and 24826 protruding from the rear surface of a front base 24810 and the front surface of an intermediate base 24820, respectively. The bearing portions 24816 and 24826 are portions that rotatably support both ends of the rotating shaft 24877 on their inner peripheral surfaces, and have substantially U-shaped projections with an open upper side (the upper side in FIGS. 169 and 170). formed as a part.

In this embodiment, the bearing portion 24816 of the front base 24810 has a larger inner radius than the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate base 24820 . As will be described later, this permits the rotation of one axial end of the rotary shaft 24877 (the end on which the cam portion 24877b is formed).

The rotating shaft 24877 is a shaft-like body for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840 with respect to the front base 24810 and the intermediate base 24820 . Here, referring to FIG. 171, the rotating shaft 24877 will be described.

Fig. 171(a) is a front view of the rotating shaft 24877, and Fig. 171(b) is a side view of the rotating shaft 24877 viewed in the direction of arrow CLXXIb in Fig. 171(a).

As shown in FIG. 171, the rotary shaft 24877 includes a body portion 24877a formed as a shaft-like body having a circular cross section, and a cam portion 24877b formed at an axial end of the body portion 24877a. The cam portion 24877b is formed to protrude radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 24877a (that is, the distance from the axis of the main body portion 24877a to the outer peripheral surface of the cam portion 24877b varies depending on the rotation angle). ) is formed as a so-called disc cam.

Returning to FIGS. 170 and 171, description will be made. The rotating shaft 24877 is set such that the axial length of the body portion 24877 a is larger than the axial length of the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840 . Therefore, the main body portion 24877a of the rotary shaft 24877 is fitted in the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840, and the cam portion 24877b and the main body portion 24877a projecting from both ends of the bearing 841 in the axial direction are connected to the bearing portion 24816 of the front base 24810 and the intermediate base. 24820 are pivotally supported by bearings 24826 (see FIG. 173). The rotating shaft 24877 is fixed to the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840 after being positioned at a predetermined phase (rotational position).

Next, the action of the cam portion 24877b on the rotating shaft 24877 when the seesaw member 840 is rotated will be described.

FIG. 172(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 24065 with the seesaw member 840 forming the first state, and FIG. 172(b) is the winning device 24065 with the seesaw member 840 forming the second state. is a cross-sectional view of. 173(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 24065 along the line CLXXIIIa-CLXXIIIa in FIG. 172(a), and FIG. 173(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 24065 along the line CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb in FIG. 172(b). is a cross-sectional view of. 172(a) and 172(b) correspond to FIGS. 52(a) and 52(b), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 172(a) and 173(a), in the first state, the axis of the rotating shaft 24877 is parallel to the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 173(a)). Both ends in the axial direction are pivotally supported by the bearing portion 24816 of the front cover 24810 and the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate cover 24820, respectively. In this case, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820 at the first inclination angle.

When the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state shown in FIGS. 172(a) and 173(a) toward the second state, the cam portion 24877b at one end of the rotating shaft 24877 in the axial direction increases as the rotation angle increases. gradually acts on the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 24816 of the front cover 24810 to gradually increase the height position of the one axial end side of the rotating shaft 24877 (the side where the cam portion 24877b is formed).

As shown in FIGS. 172(b) and 173(b), when the seesaw member 840 reaches the second state, the height position of the one axial end side of the rotating shaft 24877 (the side on which the cam portion 24877b is formed) reaches the maximum. , and the axis of the rotating shaft 24877 is tilted downward from the front base 24810 toward the intermediate base 24820 . As a result, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is tilted downward toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820 at a second tilt angle larger than the first tilt angle described above.

Thus, according to the present embodiment, as the seesaw member 840 rotates from the first state toward the second state, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 can be increased.

Here, as in the first embodiment described above, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated while maintaining its rotation axis in a horizontal position (that is, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is maintained at a predetermined angle). case), if the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the ejection surface 846 is strong (large), the ejection of the game ball from the ejection surface 846 is hasty, and the second state cannot be reliably formed, while the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the ejection surface 846 is If is loose (small), the discharge of the game ball from the discharge surface 846 is slowed down, and the residence time becomes long, so that the alternating switching between the first state and the second state is not performed smoothly.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is relatively loose (small) at the initial stage. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the rapid discharge of the game ball from the discharge surface 846 (that is, to make the game ball stay on the discharge surface 846), and to make it easier to reliably form the second state. can.

On the other hand, in the final stage, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is relatively strong (large), and the game ball can be discharged quickly from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d. By shortening the time during which the ball is placed (that is, the time during which the second state is formed), the alternating switching between the first state and the second state can be performed smoothly.

<25th Embodiment>
Next, a twenty-fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 177. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the seesaw member 840 is rotated while maintaining its rotation axis in a horizontal posture has been described. be done. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

174 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 25065 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, and FIG. 175 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 25065. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, a winning device 25065 according to the twenty-fifth embodiment has bearings 25816 and 24826 protruding from the rear surface of a front base 25810 and the front surface of an intermediate base 24820, respectively. These bearing portions 25816 and 24826 are portions that rotatably support both ends of the rotating shaft 25877 on their inner peripheral surfaces, and are formed in the same shape as each other.

The rotating shaft 25877 is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840 with respect to the front base 25810 and the intermediate base 24820, and its axial length is the length of the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840. Set to a dimension greater than the axial length. Therefore, the rotating shaft 25877 is fitted in the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840, and the portions protruding from both ends of the bearing 841 in the axial direction are supported by the bearing portion 25816 of the front base 25810 and the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate base 25820, respectively. (See FIG. 177).

Also, on the rear surface of the front base 25810, a push-up portion 25817 is provided to protrude on the side of the bearing portion 25816. As shown in FIG. The push-up portion 25817 is positioned on the locus of movement of the discharge surface 846 forming portion when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, and is discharged when the seesaw member 840 approaches the second state. It abuts against the lower surface of the surface 846 forming portion. Due to this contact, as will be described later, one side of the seesaw member 840 is pushed up by the push-up portion 25817, and the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is increased.

Next, the action of the push-up portion 25817 when the seesaw member 840 is rotated will be described.

FIG. 176(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 with the seesaw member 840 forming the first state, and FIG. 176(b) is the winning device 25065 with the seesaw member 840 forming the second state. is a cross-sectional view of.

177(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 along the line CLXXVIIa-CLXXVIIa in FIG. 176(a), and FIG. 177(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 along the line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 176(a). 177(c) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 taken along line CLXXVIIc-CLXXVIIc in FIG. 176(b), and FIG. 177(d) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CLXXVIId-CLXXVIId in FIG. 176(b) is a sectional view of the winning device 25065 in FIG. 176(a) and 176(b) correspond to FIGS. 52(a) and 52(b), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 176(a), 177(a), and 177(b), in the first state, since there is a gap between the seesaw member 840 and the push-up portion 25817, the rotating shaft 25877 177(a) left-right direction), both axial ends of the rotating shaft 25877 are supported by the bearing portion 25816 of the front cover 25810 and the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate cover 24820, respectively. be. In this case, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820 at the first inclination angle.

When the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state shown in FIGS. 176(a), 177(a), and 177(b) toward the second state, and the discharge surface 846 formation portion of the seesaw member 840 is lowered. , the lower surface of the portion forming the discharge surface 846 is brought into contact with the upper surface of the push-up portion 25817 (not shown).

From this state, when the seesaw member 840 is further rotated toward the second state, the lower surface of the portion forming the discharge surface 846 is in contact with the upper surface of the push-up portion 25817, so that the seesaw member 840 rotates toward the rotation shaft 25877. 174 (left front side in FIG. 174, left side in FIG. 177(a)), and the discharge surface 846 forming portion is not in contact with the upper surface of the push-up portion 25817 (right rear side in FIG. 174). , right side of FIG. 177(b)).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176(b), 27(c), and 177(d), when the seesaw member 840 reaches the second state, the one axial end side of the rotation shaft 25877 moves toward the inner periphery of the bearing portion 25816. It is lifted from the bottom surface, and the axis of the rotating shaft 25877 is tilted downward from the front base 25810 toward the intermediate base 24820 . As a result, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is tilted downward toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820 at a second tilt angle larger than the first tilt angle described above.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, the initial stage (until the lower surface of the discharge surface 846 formation portion comes into contact with the push-up portion 25817). section), the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is maintained at the first inclination angle (that is, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is not changed), and the final stage (the part where the discharge surface 846 is formed 25817), the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 can be rapidly increased to the second inclination angle.

As a result, in the initial stage, it is possible to easily suppress the rapid discharge of the game ball from the discharge surface 846 (that is, the game ball can be easily retained on the discharge surface 846), so that the second state can be formed more reliably. . On the other hand, in the final stage, the game ball can be quickly discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d easily, so the time when the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 (that is, the second state is formed) time) can be shortened, so that alternating switching between the first state and the second state can be performed more smoothly.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the groove 971 is recessed in the front surface of the frame plate substrate 910 in the third path M3 has been described. It is also possible to provide a protruding strip that is provided and extends in a substantially sawtooth shape when viewed from the front. In this case, as in the case of the recessed groove 971, the game ball flowing down the third path M3 can be guided along the outer surface of the ridge to meander left and right. Therefore, the falling speed of the game ball can be slowed down, and the movement of the game ball can be varied. Also, the ridges can be used as lenses for diffusing or condensing light.

In each of the embodiments described above, in the second state, the case where the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is positioned above the downward inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. However, in the second state, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is aligned in the height direction with the downwardly inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 or positioned below the downwardly inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a. You may form so that it may carry out.

In the above-described third embodiment, the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 3662 is used to slide the third displacement member 3660 relative to the first displacement member 3630, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, a groove is provided in one of the first displacement member 3630 or the third displacement member 3660, a pin that slides along the groove is provided in the other of the first displacement member 3630 or the third displacement member 3660, and the pin for the groove may be used to slide the third displacement member 3660 relative to the first displacement member 3630.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the relative rotation of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is performed by the weight of the second displacement member 740 (action of gravity) has been described. Instead, the elastic force of an elastic spring such as a coil spring or a torsion spring or an elastic body such as rubber or urethane is used to move the second displacement member 740 in either one direction or the other direction with respect to the first displacement member 730 . may be energized. Thereby, the relative rotation of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be stabilized.

In the tenth embodiment, the case of using the liquid LQ as the predetermined heavy object has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Other heavy objects may be those that can be displaced (for example, rolling or sliding) in the internal space of the retainer 10746 along the longitudinal direction as the posture of the retainer 10746 changes. Examples include spheres and cylindrical bodies made of metal. In that case, the internal space of retainer 10746 need not be sealed.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where a predetermined heavy load is held in the internal space of the retainer 10746 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The second displacement member 740 may be suspended from any position on the vertical line Z passing through G. Thus, when the second displacement member 740 is rotated about the rotation shaft 741 to one side or the other side, it is possible to displace a predetermined heavy object to the same side as the movement direction of the center of gravity G.

In the tenth embodiment described above, the retainer 10746 is arranged at a position where the center in the longitudinal direction thereof coincides with the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740, but this is not necessarily the case. However, it is preferable to position the center of the retainer 10746 in the longitudinal direction on the vertical line Z passing through the center of gravity G.

In the eleventh embodiment, the return operation of the second displacement member 740 to the crossing angle γ1 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is performed using the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP, but this is not necessarily the case. However, the biasing spring SP may be omitted and the movement may be performed by the weight of the second displacement member 740 (action of gravity).

In the twenty-fourth and twenty-fifth embodiments, in the first state, the rotating shaft 24877 is pivotally supported in a posture in which the axis is parallel to the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 173(a)). , but not necessarily limited to this, in the first state, the height position of one axial end of the rotating shaft 24877 (the side on which the cam portion 24877b is formed) is higher (or lower) than the other axial end. position may be set. That is, the above-described first tilt angle (the tilt angle at which the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 in the first state is tilted downward toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820) is the above-described second tilt angle (the second tilt angle). It suffices if the ejection surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 in the two states is formed to be able to increase to a greater inclination angle than the inclination angle downwardly inclined toward the ejection port 821d of the intermediate base 24820).

In the 21st and 22nd embodiments, a case where a sufficient gap is not formed between the rotating members 21870, 22870 and the front base 810 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A predetermined gap may be provided between the receiving plate 21872 and the pushing plate 21873 and the front base 810 . In this case, it is preferable to provide a predetermined gap only on the receiving plate 21872 side. This provides the same effect as in the twenty-third embodiment.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 in each embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 257. FIG. In this first control example, normal state (low probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols), probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols and time saving state of normal symbols), and latent state ( There are three game states, namely, a high-probability state of special symbols and a normal state of normal symbols. And it is configured so that the latent state is the most advantageous game state for the player. More specifically, in the latency state, the variation time of the variation display that is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 1640 is made shorter than in other gaming states (600 seconds → 0.5 seconds). In addition, the normal pattern normal state (low probability state) and the normal pattern time saving state (high probability state) are configured so that the probability of winning the normal pattern is almost the same (231/240 → 232/240), The open period of the electric accessory 1640a in the case of winning the normal symbol is common (1 second×2 times). As a result, in the hidden state in which the normal state of the normal pattern is set, the ball is aimed at the second ball entrance 1640 rather than hitting the ball aiming at the first ball entrance 64 (so-called left-handed hitting). By hitting (so-called right hitting), the lottery of special symbols can be executed more efficiently. Hereinafter, the special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is referred to as the first special symbol lottery, and the ball enters the second ball entrance 1640. The special symbol lottery executed based on the ball being thrown is called a second special symbol lottery.

In the first control example, the lottery for the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol. Specifically, in the lottery for the second special symbol, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period (1.648 seconds x 1 time, 0.06 seconds x 6 times, or 0.06 seconds x 8 times ) is released. Therefore, even if the lottery of the second special pattern does not result in a big win, it is more advantageous than the lottery of the first special pattern because it gives a lot of opportunities to enter the ball into the specific prize winning port 65a and win the prize ball. becomes. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of explanation, the result of the lost lottery in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened will be referred to as a "small win".

In addition to the big hit in the lottery of the second special pattern, the specific prize winning port 65a is opened even when the small win is achieved, thereby increasing the number of prize balls in the latent state where the fluctuation time of the second special pattern is short. can continue to let Therefore, it is possible to play a game in anticipation of a latent definite state. In addition, although details will be described later, in the normal state and the variable probability state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is extremely long, so the frequency of opening the specific winning opening 65a as a big hit or a small hit is the latent state significantly reduced compared to Therefore, in the normal state and the variable probability state, the number of balls used in the game is larger than that of prize balls even if the player hits to the right. Therefore, in the normal state and the variable probability state, it is more advantageous to hit left. In a general game machine, the variable probability state is the most advantageous game state, but in this control example, the latent probability state is more advantageous than the variable probability state, so it is possible to provide novel game characteristics.

In addition, in the first control example, the variation display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous using the variable method). As a result, even when the variable display of one special pattern is being executed, the variable display of the other special pattern can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the lottery of the special patterns can be executed more efficiently. can. Also, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, if one of them stops fluctuating with a jackpot or a small hit stop pattern, the other fluctuation display will indicate the remaining fluctuation time or lottery. Regardless of the result, it will be stopped with a stop symbol that is out. As a result, during the execution of the big win or the small win, the other variable display is fixedly displayed as the win or the small win, and it is possible to prevent the problem that the big win or the small win is started redundantly.

First, details of the variable winning device 65 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 180. FIG. FIG. 178 is a front view of the center frame 86 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 178, a second through gate 67 is arranged on the right side of the center frame 86, and a variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower left side of the second through gate 67. As shown in FIG. There is a possibility that the ball will reach the second through gate 67 and the variable winning device 65 when the player hits to the right. In FIG. 178, in order to facilitate understanding of the structure of the variable winning device 65, of the cover provided on the front side of the variable winning device 65 when viewed from the front, the portion other than the outer peripheral portion is omitted. (Part CLXXIX in FIG. 178).

Here, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 179(a) and (b). 179 is an enlarged view of the CLXXIX portion in FIG. 178. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 179(a) and (b), the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening into which game balls can enter. Below the specific winning opening 65a, a detection opening 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor for detecting winning of a game ball is arranged. A game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is distributed to either the normal discharge channel 65e1 or the special discharge channel 65e2 provided on the downstream side.

As shown in FIGS. 179(a) and 179(b), the opening of the specific prize winning port 65a is opened by the opening/closing plate 65f1 so that the game ball can be entered, and is in a closed state where the game ball cannot be entered (difficult to enter the ball). and is variable. In the closed state, the opening is covered with the opening/closing plate 65f1, and the ball can flow down the right side of the opening/closing plate 65f1. Further, in the open state, the opening/closing plate 65f1 is configured so that the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is opened by tilting toward the right side in front view.

By configuring in this way, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball flows down the flow path on the right side of the variable winning device 65 when viewed from the front, to the second ball entrance 1640 side. is configured to be induced. Therefore, in the most advantageous latent state, the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 1640 to perform the lottery of the second special symbol, and when a small hit or a big hit is made, the specific winning opening 65a. Winning a prize ball by hitting the ball into the bottom can be achieved by simply continuing to hit right. Therefore, in the latent state, the player can play the game more easily.

Next, referring to FIGS. 179(a) and 179(b), the opening/closing plate 65f1 is opened, and game balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a are distributed to the normal discharge channel 65e1 and the special discharge channel 65e2, which will be described later. The configuration to be used will be described.

First, referring to FIG. 179(a), the case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1 will be described. In FIG. 179(a), the channel solenoid 65k is inactive, and the switching member 65h protrudes to the left side of the front view (the channel side where the ball flows down). It is a figure which shows the state which block|closes the opening surface.

When the opening/closing plate 65f1 is opened, the game ball entering the specific winning hole 65a flows down through the detection hole 65a1. Then, the game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the switching member 65h, and as a result of being blocked by the switching member 65h from flowing down the special discharge channel 65e2, the normal discharge channel You will be directed to 65e1. A discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge channel 65e1. With this discharge confirmation switch 65e4, the number of out balls discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as out balls from the normal discharge passage 65e1 can be accurately detected.

Next, referring to FIG. 179(b), the case where the game ball is guided to the special discharge channel 65e2 will be described. FIG. 179(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the channel solenoid 65k is activated and the switching member 65h is retracted to the right in front view, thereby opening the opening of the entrance of the special discharge channel 65e2. .

As shown in FIG. 179(b), the game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 flows down along the outer peripheral wall and is guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. The game ball guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2 is provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2, is detected by the V passage switch 65e3 configured by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball, and is detected as an out ball. It is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 . As a result, whether or not all the game balls entering the variable winning device 65 have been discharged can be determined by the sum of the out balls detected by the V passage switch 65e3 and the out balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 65e4. Therefore, when trouble such as clogged balls occurs in the variable winning device 65, the trouble can be found early.

Here, details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the game ball passes through the above-described V passing switch 65e3 during the big win game, so that the game state after the big win is a special symbol probability variable state ( definite variable state, or latent definite state) is set. That is, the V pass switch 65e3 is configured as a prize winning opening for providing a probability variable state of the special symbol. In addition, the switching member 65h has a configuration for distributing the game state after the big hit to a low probability state or a variable probability state of the special symbols.

In this way, the game state set after the big win game is varied according to the downflow route of the game balls that have entered the specific winning hole 65a during the big win game, so that the interest of the player can be improved even during the big win game. . The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 65e2 (opening surface closed by the switching member 65h) is 1 second at the longest. As for the operation of the switching member 65h, the operation timing and the operation time are set in association with the elapsed time after the start of the big win. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 180, but in this control example, the switching member 65h operates for 4 seconds after the start of the first round of the jackpot, and the special discharge flow continues to the V passage switch 65e3. A game ball can pass through the path 65e2.

In this way, when a game ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the detection hole 65a1, the player receives a prize ball (in this example of control, for one ball winning) as a privilege. 15 prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by utilizing the game ball after being detected by the detection port 65a1, whether or not to pass through the V passing switch 65e3 can be sorted, so that whether or not to give the probability variable state of the special symbol A lottery can also be performed. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated prize winning port for giving variable probability states of special symbols separately from the variable prize winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 180, the correspondence relationship between the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65f1 in one jackpot will be described. In this control example, by varying the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 in the first round of the big win according to the type of the big win, the easiness of the ball flowing down the special discharge channel 65e2 is changed. In this control example, two types of patterns (a pattern that makes it difficult to enter a ball into the specific winning hole 65a and a pattern that makes it easy to enter a ball) are provided as the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1.

FIG. 180 is a diagram schematically showing time-measured changes in the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and time-measured changes in opening/closing timing of the opening/closing plate 65f1 for each jackpot type. As shown in FIG. 180(a), the flow path solenoid 65k is kept off before the start of one round of jackpots. That is, before the start of one round, the state is such that the ball can flow down to the normal discharge channel 65e1 (see FIG. 179(a)). This off state continues until one round starts. Then, when the first round is started, the channel solenoid 65k is set to the ON state for 4 seconds. That is, the state is such that the ball can flow down to the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 179(a)). When the ON state period of 4 seconds ends, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the OFF state again (set to a state in which the ball can flow down to the normal discharge flow path 65e1), and after that, the OFF state until the end of the big win. kept in

Further, as shown in FIG. 180(b), when the jackpot C is reached, the closed opening/closing plate 65f1 is opened when one round starts. A ball can enter the inside of the variable winning device 65 by opening the opening/closing plate 65f1. This open state lasts only 0.2 seconds. After 0.2 seconds have passed since the open/close plate 65f1 was opened, the open/close plate 65f1 is kept closed until 2.9 seconds have passed since the start of the first round. Then, when 2.9 seconds have passed since the start of the first round, the opening/closing plate 65f1 is set to the open state again. This open state continues for only 0.1 second, after which one round ends and the open/close plate 65f1 is kept closed until the second round starts after an interval period of 5 seconds. One round in this control example ends when 10 balls enter the specific winning hole 65a or three seconds elapse after the start of one round. It is very difficult to enter the ball into the specific winning hole 65a during the open period of 0.2 seconds and the open period of 0.1 seconds. , the big hit ends without the ball flowing down to the special discharge channel 65e2. That is, since the ball cannot be passed through the V-passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, the variable probability state of the special symbol is not given after the big hit. Therefore, when the jackpot C is reached, the game state after the jackpot is disadvantageous to the player compared to the other jackpot types. In addition, although the probability is low, when the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a during 0.2 seconds or 0.1 seconds when the opening and closing plate 65f1 is opened, and the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 , can be shifted to a special symbol probability variable state after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, even when the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the game can be played in anticipation of setting the probability variable state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends.

Also, as shown in FIG. 180(c), when one of the jackpots A, B, D to G is achieved, the opening/closing plate 65f1 is opened for three seconds after the start of the first round of jackpots. That is, an opening/closing pattern is set in which it is easy for the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a in the first round. Therefore, the ball can be easily passed through the V-pass switch 65e3 by entering the specific winning hole 65a during the open period of 3 seconds, which is longer than the jackpot C. Therefore, when the jackpots A, B, E to G are achieved, the ball can easily pass through the V-pass switch 65e3 during the jackpot. Then, after the big hit, it is possible to shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol.

The ON period of the passage solenoid 65k is one second longer than the opening period of the opening/closing plate 65f1 because the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a and then reaches the special discharge passage 65e2. This is because it takes a maximum of 1 second to complete. That is, even if a ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a just before the end of the first round of the jackpot flows down in the maximum flow time, the ball can pass through the V-pass switch 65e3. As a result, when the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a in the first round of the big win, the variable probability state of the special symbol can be imparted after the big win regardless of the timing of entering the ball.

Thus, in this control example, the easiness of shifting to the variable probability state is varied according to the jackpot type. As a result, the game can be played in anticipation of setting an opening/closing pattern that facilitates transition to the variable probability state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 181, transition of the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. FIG. 181 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a method of shifting from one game state to another game state with respect to the three types of game states set in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example.

First, a description will be given of a method for transitioning to the game state when staying in the normal state. As described above, in the normal state, the left-handed game is more advantageous for the player because the special symbol lottery frequency tends to be higher when the left-handed game is played than when the right-handed game is played. This is because it becomes easier to enter the ball into the first ball entrance 64 when hitting left-handed. In addition, as described above, in the lottery for the first special symbol that is executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, a small win is not drawn. It becomes a disadvantageous state that continues to decrease. In this normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to another game state only when a big win is achieved. In addition, four types of jackpots A to D are provided as jackpot types that can be won in the lottery of the first special symbols. Details of these jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG. 192(a).

As shown on the left side of FIG. 181, in the normal game state ST1 (normal state), when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, when the jackpot A determined at a rate of 32% is reached, after the jackpot ends, FIG. It shifts to the probability variation gaming state ST2 (probability variation state) shown in the center. Also, in the normal game state ST1 (normal state), when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, if either jackpot B or D determined at a rate of 58% in total, after the jackpot ends, the state shown in FIG. 181 It shifts to the latent probability variable gaming state ST3 (latent probability state) shown on the right side. On the other hand, when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, when the big win C is determined at a rate of 10%, the normal state is set again as the game state after the big win (the normal state is looped. do).

As described above, in the latent state, the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened, and the game efficiency is increased when hitting to the right, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the normal state and the variable probability state, the variation time of the second special symbol is long, so the gaming efficiency when hitting to the right is extremely reduced, resulting in a disadvantageous gaming state compared to the latent probability state. . Therefore, in the normal state, the game can be played in anticipation of the big wins B and D that will trigger the transition to the advantageous latent state.

In the normal state, the game is usually played aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by hitting left, but if the player intentionally hits to the right, the ball enters the second ball entrance 1640. Or, as a result of some of the left-handed balls entering the second ball entrance 1640, there is a possibility that the lottery for the second special symbol will result in a big win. In this case, all the jackpot types (jackets E to G) are common, and after the jackpot is completed, the state shifts to the probability variation gaming state ST2 (probability variation state). When the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit in the normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent state at a rate of 58% (jackpots B, D), while the second in the normal state. When a special pattern lottery results in a big hit, the possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent certainty state becomes zero. Therefore, it is possible to increase the demerit when performing the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol by hitting right in the normal state, so that the irregular game can be suppressed.

Also, as described above, even when the big wins A, B, D to G are achieved, if the ball cannot be passed through the V-pass switch 65e3 during the big win because the ball was not launched during the big win. , the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the most unfavorable normal state (the normal state is looped). On the other hand, even when the most unfavorable jackpot C is reached, if the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the most advantageous latent state.

Next, a description will be given of a game state transition method when staying in the variable probability state. As described above, in the variable probability state, as in the normal state, playing the game with the left hand is more likely to increase the lottery frequency of special symbols than playing the game with the right hand, so the left hand is more advantageous for the player. becomes. In addition, in the definite variable state, the special symbol jackpot probability increases compared to the normal state, so it is advantageous compared to the normal state, but disadvantageous compared to the latent definite state. In the probability variation gaming state ST2 (probability variation state), if it becomes a big hit or if it is continuously lost over the lottery of special symbols of the specified number of times (120 times) after becoming the probability variation state, it will be in another gaming state. Transition.

Specifically, as shown in the central part of FIG. 181, when it becomes a jackpot C determined at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, after the jackpot ends, the left side of FIG. to the normal game state ST1 (normal state) shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbols, if either the jackpot B or D is determined at a rate of 58% in total, after the jackpot ends, the latent probability variable game state ST3 shown on the right side of FIG. 181 (latent state). On the other hand, if the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot and the jackpot A is determined at a rate of 32%, the probability variable state is set again after the jackpot ends (the probability variable state is looped). . In addition, when the special symbol lottery of the specified number of times (120 times) is continuously lost in the variable probability state, the normal game state ST1 (normal state) is entered after the specified number of times has elapsed.

In the variable probability state, it is normal to play a game aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by hitting to the left as in the normal state, but the ball enters the second ball entrance 1640 and the second special There is also the possibility of winning a big prize by lottery of patterns. In this case, in common for all jackpot types (jackets E to G), the probability variation gaming state ST2 (probability variation state) is looped after the end of the jackpot. In the case of a jackpot due to the lottery of the first special symbol in the variable state, there is a possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent state at a rate of 58% (jackets B, D) as in the normal state. When a big win is obtained by lottery of the second special symbols in the variable probability state, the possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent probability state becomes zero. Therefore, it is possible to increase the demerit when performing the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol by hitting the right hand in the probability variable state, so that the irregular game can be suppressed.

Next, a description will be given of a game state transition method when staying in the latent state. As described above, in the latent probability variable state, unlike the normal state and the probability variable state, the variation time of the second special symbol is short, so the lottery of the second special symbol can be efficiently performed by playing the game with the right hand. . Therefore, a right-handed hit is more advantageous for the player than a left-handed hit. In the latent definite variable game state ST3 (latent definite state), it shifts to another game state when it is lost continuously over the specified number of times (120 times) of special symbol lotteries mainly after becoming the latent definite state. do.

Specifically, as shown on the right side of FIG. 181, if the latent state is set and the special symbol lottery of the specified number of times (120 times) is continuously lost, after the specified number of times has passed, the normal It shifts to game state ST1 (normal state). On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the latent state where the game is played with the right hand (the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed) and the jackpot is won, basically after the big win (specified during the big win) If the ball is launched aiming at the winning opening 65a), the latent probability variable game state ST3 (latent probability state) is set again after the end of the big hit. Therefore, in the latent state, by continuing to win the jackpot before losing 120 consecutive times, the advantageous latent state and the big win with which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained are repeated. The game state becomes extremely advantageous for the player. Although the details will be described later, the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/80 when the special symbol lottery is executed in the latent state (high probability state of special symbols). In the 1/80 jackpot lottery, the probability of losing 120 times in a row is about 22% (79/80 to the 120th power), so the probability of winning the jackpot within 120 times in the latent state is about 78%. Therefore, once it enters the latent definite state, it becomes a very advantageous state in which the big win and the latent definite state loop at about 78%.

In addition, since the game is normally played with the right hand in the latent state, basically the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the first special symbol lottery is not executed. , When the player makes a mistake in the direction of launching, or when the player shifts to the hidden state while the reserved ball of the first special symbol remains in the normal state, etc., the first special symbol is displayed even in the hidden state. A lottery may be held. In this case, if a big win is achieved, there is a possibility of shifting to another game state. Specifically, when the jackpot C (distribution 10%) is reached in the lottery of the first special symbol in the latent state, the state shifts to the normal state after the jackpot. On the other hand, if the lottery of the first special symbols results in big wins A, B, and D, the latent definite state is set again after the big win.

In addition, unlike the normal state and the variable state, the latent state is set even after the end of the jackpot A. This is to reduce the possibility of shifting to a disadvantageous variable probability state when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed after the state transition and a big win is achieved. Immediately after the transition to the latent state, the first special pattern lottery that was held is held and becomes a big hit, and if it shifts to the variable state, it will be in a disadvantageous state without benefiting from the latent state. Since the player falls, there is a risk that the player's motivation for playing the game will be lowered. On the other hand, in the first control example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in an advantageous latent certainty state, the ratio of looping the latent certainty state after the big win becomes higher than the normal state or the variable probability state. is set to As a result, even when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit immediately after shifting to an advantageous latent certainty state, the latent certainty state is set again at a high rate (90%). Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a decrease in the player's motivation for playing the game.

Next, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 189. FIG. FIG. 182 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 182(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 182(b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 9 types of main patterns numbered from "1" to "9". Each main pattern is composed of rear patterns imitating various animals with numbers "1" to "9" attached thereto. Specifically, for example, the number "1" is attached to the rear design imitating an elephant, and the number "2" is attached to the rear design imitating a lion.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variable display is finished. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur later. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

As shown in FIG. 182(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. Approximately 1/4 of the lower side of the .

The main display area Dm displays upper, middle, and lower three pattern rows L1, L2, and L3. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 is periodically scrolled in the left-right direction for variable display. In particular, the upper symbol row L1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row L2 and the lower symbol row L3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of left, middle and right for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. The left vertical line, the middle vertical line, and the right vertical line of the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, a downward-sloping line and an upward-sloping line in the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V4 and V5, respectively. During each game, the third symbols are stopped and displayed on the activated lines V1 to V5 in the order of upper symbol row L1→lower symbol row L3→middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is maintained for at least one second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period of time (one second or more), the player can determine whether or not the combination of the third symbols corresponds to the big win (the lottery result of the special symbol is the big win). presence or absence) can be suppressed from being overlooked. Also, when the combination of big winning patterns (combination of the same main patterns in this control example) is aligned on the effective lines V1 to V5 when the third pattern is stopped, a big winning moving image (opening performance) is displayed as a big winning.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to a loss and there is a held ball, a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the held ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. . In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third pattern of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special pattern is stop-displayed for one second in the absence of the reserved ball, the stop-display of the third pattern continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640 . Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration screen) indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed (see FIG. 186). ). A situation in which no ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640 even though the player continuously shoots the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is rare. In most cases, when the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the game by the pachinko machine 10 is not performed at all because the player quits the game. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and a demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration performance. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 1640 before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new ball entrance. Variation display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm. This sub-display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64 . In this control example, the ball entered the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display based on the first special symbol lottery was being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37). In this case, the number of ball entries is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds allows the player to clearly recognize the number of reserved balls whose variable display is currently reserved. In this control example, only the variable display of the first special symbol can be reserved, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not stored. Therefore, only the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

Next, an example of display contents actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 182(b). On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 182(b), a total of nine main symbols and sub-symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, on the right side and the left side of the display area Dm, three parts of the main symbols and three parts of the sub symbols are displayed. These show the lottery results of the first special symbol in the normal state and the variable probability state. Furthermore, a small area Dm1 for displaying a third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in the upper central portion of the main display area Dm. In this small area Dm1, a simple variable display of three third symbols composed only of numbers "1" to "9" is executed. Also in this small area Dm1, a big win is started by stop-displaying three third symbols composed of the same number. It should be noted that the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in a simpler manner than the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol is basically in the normal state and the variable state. This is because the lottery for the first special symbol is executed at the beginning of the game, and there is almost no opportunity for the lottery for the second special symbol to be executed. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol that is mainly executed is displayed in a larger display area, the game result is displayed more clearly. In the following description, the variable display of the special symbol that is mainly executed in each gaming state (in the normal state and the probability variable state, the variable display of the first special symbol corresponds) is called the main variation, and in each gaming state The variable display of the special symbol that is hardly executed when the regular game method is performed (in the normal state and the probability variable state, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponds) is called sub-variation.

In the small area Ds1 in the sub-display area Ds, the reserved symbols imitating a bird's face are displayed in the same number as the number of reserved balls of the first symbol. At the start of the variable display based on the corresponding reserved balls, the reserved symbols enter the inside of the house displayed on the right side in the small area Ds1. This allows the player to easily understand that the variable display corresponding to the held ball has started. Further, in the small area Ds1, a notice effect is sometimes performed such that a reserved symbol performs a special action or another character appears.

In this control example, the number of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 is held up to four times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to four. It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Also, it may be configured such that the ball entering the second ball entrance 1640 can be suspended. Alternatively, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the areas divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, colors or lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 183(a) and 183(b), the variation display effect (variation pattern effect) of the third symbol in this control example will be described. FIG. 183(a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when all the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows are fluctuating in the variable display effect. When each symbol row is fluctuating, each symbol row is scroll-displayed (varying display) from the right side to the left side of the screen. By executing the variable display, the player can easily recognize that the lottery for the special symbols has been newly executed. Therefore, the game can be played with the expectation of a big hit stop pattern (main patterns to which the same numbers are attached are aligned on any of the effective lines V1 to V5) after the end of the variable display presentation.

FIG. 183(b) shows an example of display contents when a ready-to-win effect is generated to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that the stop symbol of the big win will be stop-displayed in the variable display effect of the third symbol. It is a diagram.

Here, reach means a state in which the upper symbol row L1 and the lower symbol row L3 are stopped and displayed in variable display, and only the middle symbol row L2 is variably displayed, and on any of the activated lines V1 to V5. This is a mode in which the main symbols with the same number are stopped and displayed, suggesting that there is a chance that the main symbols with the same number are aligned on the activated line L1. In the example shown in FIG. 183(b), two main symbols with the number "1" attached on the activated line V4 are stopped and displayed, and the number "2" attached on the activated line V5. It shows a state in which two main symbols drawn are stopped and displayed. In this case, when the main symbol with the number "1" or "2" attached to the middle row of the medium symbol row L2 is stopped and displayed, it becomes a stop symbol for a big hit, so that the player will be rewarded with a big win. can be expected to become

The upper symbol L1 and the lower symbol row L3 are stopped and displayed, and when a ready-to-win occurs, a character "reach!" . By displaying this character, it is possible to make the player more certainly recognize the occurrence of ready-to-win. Therefore, it can be expected that the stop symbol of the big win will be stop-displayed at the end of the variable performance in which the reach has occurred.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 184 and 185, a special ready-to-win effect, which is a type of ready-to-win effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, will be described. In this special ready-to-win effect, once the effect (temporary stop effect) is executed as if all the symbol rows L1 to L3 were stopped and displayed in combination with the stop symbols corresponding to the loss, the symbol rows L1 to L3 are different. A special form of reach in which a different pattern row is newly displayed and reach occurs in the newly displayed pattern row and part (two) of the symbol rows L1 to L3 that are stopped and displayed. It is a performance. This special reach effect is selected as part of the reach effect, and is set so that the expectation that it will be a big hit is higher than the normal reach effect (it will be difficult to select if the lottery result of the special pattern is out). there is

As shown in FIG. 184(a), when the special ready-to-win effect is executed, first, each symbol row is stop-displayed (temporarily stopped) with an off stop symbol without being accompanied by a ready-to-win. In this case, when there is another symbol row on the upper side of the upper symbol row L1, the stop symbols of the combination of the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are stop-displayed. be. In the example of FIG. 184(a), main symbols with the numeral "1" are displayed in the middle of the upper symbol row L1 and on the left side of the middle symbol row L2. That is, if there is a symbol row above the upper symbol row L1, and the main symbol with the symbol "1" on the right side of the symbol row is stopped and displayed, the same number "1" is displayed. The main symbols marked with are stopped and displayed in the order in which they are arranged in a straight line. In addition, as a mode of temporary stop in the special ready-to-win effect, there are a plurality of modes other than a mode in which the main symbols with the same numbers are arranged in the left side of the upper symbol row L1 and the middle row of the middle symbol row L2 in an ascending rightward direction. is provided. For example, in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2, the main symbols with the same number on either the left side, the middle row, or the right side are aligned vertically, or the middle symbol of the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol are aligned. There is also provided a mode in which the main symbols having the same numbers as those on the right side of the row L2 are arranged upward to the right.

In the special ready-to-win production, after the third symbols of each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 are temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. Among the patterns, the main pattern changes to look up. By changing the mode, the player can easily recognize that the current variable display effect has not ended.

After each main pattern is changed to look up, as shown in FIG. 185(a), the screen angle (camera angle) is shifted toward the direction in which each main pattern is looked up (upward). is executed. When the effect of shifting the angle of the screen is performed, a new symbol row L4 in the process of shifting is displayed (the new symbol row L4 enters the frame). Along with this, the lower pattern row L4 is framed out of the screen.

Then, as shown in FIG. 185(b), when the new symbol row L4 appears (frame-in), the new symbol row L4 and the "1" displayed in the middle of the upper symbol row L1 are combined. The ready-to-win state is constituted by the main symbols with numbers and the main symbols with the number "1" displayed on the left side of the middle symbol row L2. Along with this, the main symbol on which the reach is applied (the main symbol with the number "1" attached) is changed to a form wearing an aura, and the characters "Reach!" Is displayed. As a result, when the fluctuation of the new symbol row L4 stops, if the main symbol with the number "1" attached to the right side is stopped and displayed, the main symbol with the same number on the new activated line V6 is displayed. 3 are aligned (the symbol for stopping the big win), it is possible to clearly suggest to the player that there is a chance to win the big win.

As described above, in the first control example, as a kind of ready-to-win effect, a special ready-to-win is provided in which a new symbol row is displayed after the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination that is not possible. ing. As a result, even when the symbols are stopped and displayed in an incorrect combination, it is possible to confirm the combination of the stop symbols in anticipation of developing a special ready-to-win effect. That is, the combination of the stop patterns can be confirmed by paying attention to whether it is a combination of the stop patterns that can develop into a special ready-to-win performance (a combination that becomes a ready-to-win if a new pattern row L4 is displayed). Therefore, every time an incorrect combination is stop-displayed in the variable display, development to a special ready-to-win effect can be expected, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the first control example, when the special ready-to-win effect is executed, the new symbol row L4 is displayed above the upper symbol row L1, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the new symbol row L4 may be displayed below the lower symbol row L3, and the middle symbol row L2, the lower symbol row L3, and the new symbol row L4 may form a reach. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a new symbol row L4 is displayed between each symbol row. That is, a new symbol row L4 appears between the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2, and a reach is formed by the upper symbol row L1, the middle symbol row L2, and the new symbol row L4. good too. Further, in the first control example, by erasing the lower symbol row L3 when the new symbol row L4 is displayed, the number of symbol rows displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not changed. Since the type of the displayed pattern row is changed, the size of each pattern displayed during the special ready-to-win effect and the size of each pattern displayed before the special ready-to-win effect can be unified. However, without being limited to this, a new symbol row L4 may be displayed so that the number of symbol rows displayed on the third symbol display device 81 increases.

Next, with reference to FIG. 186, the demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration screen) in the first control example will be described. FIG. 186(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the result of the variable display of the first special symbol is out in the normal state or the variable probability state. When there is no suspension of the first special symbol (when the number of suspended balls is 0), as long as the ball does not enter the first ball entrance 64, the combination of the third symbol at the time of stopping the fluctuation is within 30 seconds. continue to appear across. Then, after 30 seconds have passed, the screen is switched to the customer waiting demo screen shown in FIG. 186(b). In the example of FIG. 186(b), a movie of the sun setting over the mountains is displayed as the customer waiting demo screen. In this movie, the display content changes with the lapse of time. For example, as the time elapses, three birds pass in front of the mountain as shown in FIG. 186(c). By switching to this customer waiting demo screen, a player who is not playing a game can easily determine whether or not the table is empty. When the display is switched to the customer waiting demo screen, the stop symbol of the first special symbol is displayed in a simplified form (only numbers) on the upper left of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 186 (c), in the normal state and the probability variation state, the variation display (secondary variation) of the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol while the customer waiting demo screen is displayed. is started, or the 3rd symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the 1st special symbol is stopped and displayed, and 30 seconds have passed while only the secondary fluctuation is being executed, the customer waiting demo screen is displayed. It is configured so that As described above, in the normal state and the probability variable state, by setting the variation time of the second special symbol extremely long (600 seconds), it is configured to improve the game efficiency by hitting left rather than hitting right. . For this reason, when the player accidentally hits right in the normal state or the probability variable state, and the player quits the game immediately after the second special symbol variation display (secondary variation) is started. will keep the subvariation running for about 600 seconds. Under this circumstance, if the customer waiting demo screen is not displayed during execution of the secondary variation, the third symbol display device 81 will be displayed for a maximum of about 600 seconds even though no one is playing. There is a risk that the displayed content will appear as if a game is in progress. Therefore, other players may hesitate to start a game with the pachinko machine 10 until the secondary fluctuation ends, and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 may decrease.

On the other hand, in the first control example, after 30 seconds have passed since the main variation is completed, the screen is switched to the customer waiting demo screen regardless of whether or not the secondary variation is being executed. And this customer waiting demo screen is configured to continue to be displayed until the next lottery of the first special symbol is executed (until the main fluctuation is started) regardless of whether the secondary fluctuation is being executed or not. there is With this configuration, even if the player enters the ball into the second ball entrance 1640 and quits the game immediately after the start of the variable display for 600 seconds, it will take about 30 seconds. After that, the customer waiting demo screen can be displayed. Therefore, other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demo screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is an empty machine, so that a game can be started with the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 from decreasing. In addition, in this first control example, as shown in FIG. 186(b), on the demonstration display screen when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are stopped and displayed, the stop symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and the Although the stop symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in substantially the same size, for example, the size of the special symbol on the side of the main fluctuation is larger than the size of the special symbol on the side of the secondary fluctuation. You may make it display. In addition, in the display screen shown in FIG. 186(b), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper left, and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper center. The special symbol may be stopped and displayed on the upper left of the display screen, and the special symbol on the side of the secondary variation may be stopped and displayed on the upper center of the display screen. As a result, regardless of the game state, it is possible to easily grasp the fluctuation state of the main fluctuation simply by checking a specific portion of the display screen.

Next, with reference to FIG. 187, the display mode in the latent state will be described. As described above, in the first control example, the latent state is the most advantageous state. In this latent state, in the main display area Dm1, an effect (a character 811 resembling a rabbit running at full speed) different from the normal variable display is performed.

As shown in FIG. 187(a), in the latent state, a character 811 resembling a rabbit is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. Then, the variation display corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol (secondary variation in the latent state) is displayed in the upper center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the variation corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol. The display (primary variation in latent state) is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. In addition, as described above, in the latent state, the regular game method is to play the game aiming at the second ball entrance 1640 by hitting to the right, so the fluctuation display (main fluctuation) corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in a larger display area than the variation display (secondary variation) corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol. That is, the special symbol that is the main variation is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol based on the game state shifting from the normal state to the latent state, and the special symbol that is the secondary variation is the second special. Even if the symbol is changed to the first special symbol, the area where the secondary variation is displayed is configured not to be changed from the upper center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁This makes it possible to share and use at least a portion of the data that performs the display (variation display or demo display) for the sub-variation.

In addition, below the area for displaying the variation display (main variation) corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol, the character "right hit" is displayed. By displaying this character, the player can easily recognize that hitting to the right is the regular game method.

Further, in the remaining number display area D1 displayed on the upper left of the main display area Dm, an indication of the remaining number of times in the latent probability state (an indication of the number of lotteries until transition to the normal state) is displayed. In the example of FIG. 187(a), "40 times remaining" is displayed, and the player is informed that there is a possibility of shifting to the normal state when the special symbol lottery is lost 40 times in a row. suggests to. The remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is 120 times, which is the number of continuations of the latent certainty state, when the state is first shifted from another game state (normal state or probability variable state) to the latent certainty state. The value is decremented by one in conjunction with the start of the variable display indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this control example, even if a special symbol lottery results in a big win, the number of remaining times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is not reset, and the number of times before the big win continues to be displayed even after the big win ( That is, when a big win is achieved, the displayed number of times and the actual remaining number of times are shifted). If the player continues to hit the right hand according to the displayed instruction (characters of "Right hit"), the ball can be passed through the V passage switch 65e3 when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win. Since it is possible, a new probability state of 120 times is set after the end of the big win. Therefore, if a jackpot is won during the latent certainty state, the number of times the latent certainty state actually continues is greater than the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1. Although the details will be described later, the difference between the displayed remaining number of latent definite states and the actual remaining number of latent definite states is the displayed remaining number of times when the displayed remaining number of times becomes 0. (see FIG. 189). Thus, even if the displayed remaining number of times approaches 0, the game can be played in anticipation that the number of times will be added when the remaining number of times on the display becomes 0. - 特許庁

As described above, it is easier to win a small win in the lottery for the second special symbol. It becomes difficult for the player to determine whether or not it has been won and moved. In addition, in this control example, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is the same regardless of whether a big win or a small win is made. Specifically, even if a big win or a small win is made, by keeping the display mode in which the character 811 sprints during the big win or small win, the appearance of the third pattern display device 81 becomes a big win. It is configured so that it is difficult to determine whether it is a small win or a small win. Therefore, in the latent state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not there is a difference between the displayed remaining number of times and the actual remaining number of times, so that the displayed remaining number of times becomes zero. It is possible to make it difficult to predict whether or not the remaining number of times will be added and displayed when it becomes. Therefore, when the remaining number of times on the display becomes 0, the player can play the game with a strong expectation that the remaining number of times will be displayed in addition to the remaining number of times, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. be able to.

As described above, both the variable prize winning device 65 and the second ball entrance 1640 are arranged at positions where the ball can easily enter the ball by hitting to the right. Even if the display mode is the same as that during the variation of the third pattern or during the stop display of the third pattern, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from missing the winning ball of the big win or the small win. Therefore, when the remaining number of times on the display becomes 0, it is possible to make the player strongly expect that the number of times will be displayed with the number of times added, without causing a loss to the player.

FIG. 187(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 within 30 seconds after the end of the variable display corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol. In this case, the same display mode (a rabbit-like character 811 running) is displayed except that the symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, in the present first control example, in addition to not having the function of suspending the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely short in the latent state (0.5 seconds and ), the frequency of the fluctuation stop state becomes extremely high. Under such circumstances, if the display mode is changed (switched) between when the symbols are changing and when the variation is stopped, the display mode will switch frequently, which may confuse the player. Moreover, if the frequency of switching the display modes increases, there is a possibility that the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 will also increase.

Therefore, in the first control example, the display mode of the main display area Dm is made common during the variable display of the pattern and during the stationary display. As a result, frequent switching of the display mode can be suppressed, so that confusion of the player can be prevented (suppressed). Also, the processing load on the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, when 30 seconds have passed in the stealth state with the fluctuation stop state, the display mode is switched to the display mode (stealth proof display) in which the character 811 imitating a rabbit stands still. By switching the display mode, it is possible to easily recognize that the fluctuation stop state has continued for a long time (30 seconds or more). In addition, when 30 seconds have passed since the change stopped state in the stealth state, by displaying a screen (demonstration display for stealth) that is different from the customer waiting demo screen (see FIG. 186(b)), It is possible to easily recognize that the current game state is in the latent state. Therefore, for example, when a player who is playing in a latent state temporarily leaves the pachinko machine 10 due to a break or the like, it prevents (suppresses) the trouble that another player starts playing with the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加can do. The latent state is the most advantageous state in the pachinko machine 10, and since it is difficult to think of quitting the game during the latent state, the player who was playing the game only temporarily leaves the seat. This is because other players can be made to recognize that.

Furthermore, in the latent certainty state in the first control example, the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely short, so if the customer waiting demo screen (see FIG. 187(b)) is displayed, the second input When the ball enters the ball opening 1640, if it takes a long time to switch the screen, there is a possibility that the variable time will end before the effect associated with the ball entering is displayed. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player will feel distrust that the performance is not executed even though the ball has entered the second ball entrance 1640 . On the other hand, in this control example, instead of the customer waiting demo screen (see FIG. 187(b)) in the hidden state, the hidden confirmation demo display (FIG. 187(c)) in which the same character 811 as during fluctuation continues to be displayed ), it is possible to smoothly switch the display mode (effect mode) when the ball entering the second ball entrance 1640 is detected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of distrust.

Next, with reference to FIG. 188(a), a description will be given of the latent state end screen displayed when the latent state ends. FIG. 188(a) is a diagram showing this latent state end screen. This latent state end screen is displayed when the remaining number of lotteries in the latent state becomes zero.

As shown in FIG. 188(a), when the latent state end screen is displayed, the character 811 in the shape of a rabbit falls to the ground, and the upper side of the character 811 says, "Finish, return to left-handed." !” is displayed in the display area 812 . This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the advantageous latency state has ended. In addition, on the right side of the character 811, the characters "return to left-handed" are displayed. This display allows the player to return to left-handed hitting more reliably. In addition, this latent state end screen detects the entry into the first ball entrance 64 and starts the variable display, or after the latent state ends, the first special symbol is in a state where the fluctuation is stopped. will continue to be displayed until 30 seconds have elapsed. Then, when either of these two conditions is met, a result screen showing the prize balls obtained during the latent state and the total number of times the latent state has continued is displayed. The details of this result screen will be described with reference to FIG. 188(b).

FIG. 188(b) is a diagram showing an example of a result screen displayed after the end of the latent state. As shown in FIG. 188(b), after the end of the latent certainty state, when the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is first detected and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the variation A results screen is displayed showing the results of the latent state using time. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 188(b), the characters "456 GAME" are displayed as the number of times the latent state has continued (the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the latent state), and the number of times of continuation. Below the characters indicating , the characters "10030 points won!" indicating the total number of prize balls paid out during the latent state are displayed. By displaying these characters, the player can clearly understand how many times the latent state has continued and how many prize balls have been won. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game in the normal state without having any doubts about the finished potential state. In addition, by displaying the result screen after each latent state, the player can play the game with the aim of achieving a better result in the next latent state. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the result of the latent state (result) is not displayed during the latent state, but after the end of the latent state, it is displayed during the fluctuation time of the first special symbol that is executed first. , This is because the variation time of the second special symbol in the latent definite state is extremely short. Therefore, if the result of the latent certainty state is displayed during the variable display executed last in the latent certainty state, the result can only be displayed for an extremely short period of time. On the other hand, in the first control example, after the end of the latent certainty state, the results of the latent certainty state are displayed during the variable display of the first special symbol executed first. The status results can be displayed long enough. Although the details will be described later, in this first control example, in order to make the player confirm the result of the latent state more reliably, a lottery of special symbols is held twice after the latent state ends. A fixed variable time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol. With this configuration, the results can be displayed each time within the fixed variable time, so that the players can more reliably confirm the results.

Even if 30 seconds have passed since the end of the latent certainty state, if the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is not detected (the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is not started), , instead of the customer waiting demo screen, a result display is performed. After that, the result display in this case continues to be displayed until the change display of the first special symbol, which is performed when the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is first detected, ends. As a result, even a player who leaves the pachinko machine 10 for a break or the like immediately after the end of the latent state can be made to confirm the result of the latent state.

In addition, in the first control example, the result is not displayed until the variable display of the first special symbol is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the result of the latent certainty state is displayed immediately after the latent certainty state ends. Then, the display may be continued until the first variable display of the first special symbol is completed. By adopting a configuration in which the result is displayed immediately after the end of the latent certainty state, the player can immediately know the result of the completed latent certainty state. Therefore, even if it takes a long time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 after the player returns to the left-hand shot, the result of the latent state is not displayed and stress is given to the player. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the storage.

In addition, when displaying the result of the latent certain state immediately after the latent certain state ends, a measuring means for measuring the period after the latent certain state ends is provided, and the measuring means measures a predetermined period (for example, 12 Seconds) may be configured to display the result until the elapse. In this case, when the variation of the first special symbol is started before the lapse of the predetermined period, the result is continuously displayed until the variation is finished, and the variation of the first special symbol is started after the lapse of the predetermined period. In such a case, it may be configured to perform normal display instead of result display in that variation.

Furthermore, when the variation of the first special symbol for displaying the latent definite result is winning, it is preferable to change the display mode of the result. For example, it is preferable to display "10,030 points or more!" as a suggestive display suggesting that the player has won the prize on the normal result display screen shown in FIG. 188(b). In this way, by displaying the success/failure determination result of the special symbol using the result contents of the latent probability state, the player can be informed of the result display of the latent probability state and the success/failure determination result of the special symbol without discomfort. . In addition, if a jackpot is won during the period when the result display of the latent state is executed and the state is shifted to the latent state again, the contents of the result in the previous latent state are taken over and updated. good. As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game during the period in which the result display in the latent state is executed.

In addition, as an effect during the latent state, using the period of one special symbol variation or multiple special symbol variations, a display similar to the display screen of the latent state result displayed after the end of the latent state. An effect in which a screen is displayed (pseudo end effect) may be used. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected presentation, and to continue the latent state for the player even when the latent state is actually ended and the result display of the latent state is executed. You will be able to make people expect that.

Next, with reference to FIG. 189, the resurrection effect, which is a type of effect executed during the latent definite state, will be described. This resurrection effect is a effect that may be displayed when the remaining number of lotteries in the latent state displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 becomes zero. More specifically, when the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is 1 or more and the remaining number of lotteries on the display becomes 0, the actual remaining number of times is added to the remaining number of times on the display. It is a production to display.

When this resurrection effect is executed, first, the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 becomes 0 as in the case where the latent state end screen (see FIG. 188(a)) is displayed. , the character 811 imitating a rabbit falls to the ground. Then, as shown in FIG. 189, the character 811, which has once fallen to the ground, stands up, and the characters "resurrection" are displayed around the character 811. FIG. By executing this mode of presentation, the player can be made to recognize that the advantageous latent state will continue, so that the player can be pleased. In addition, the number of actual remaining latent states is displayed in addition to the number of remaining times display area D1 in accordance with the effect that the character 811 stands up. FIG. 189 illustrates a case where the display of the remaining count display area D1 is updated to "10 remaining counts" because there are actually 10 remaining latent definite state counts.

As described above, in the first control example, when the second special symbol lottery is a big hit during the latent state, and the remaining number of times of the latent state (actual remaining number) is updated to 120 times, the remaining It is configured to take over the obvious display content without resetting the remaining number of times displayed in the number display area D1 (remaining number of times on the display). Then, when there is a difference between the actual remaining number of times and the displayed remaining number of times and the displayed remaining number of times becomes 0, the revival is performed by adding the difference from the actual remaining number of times to the displayed remaining number of times. It is configured to execute production. By configuring in this way, even when the remaining number of times on the display approaches 0, the game can be played in anticipation that the resurrection effect will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game during the latent certainty state.

In addition, in this control example, the difference between the actual remaining number of times of the potential state and the displayed remaining number of times is added and displayed in the resurrection effect, but it is not limited to this. In the revival performance to be executed first, a configuration may be adopted in which a value smaller than the difference is added and displayed, and when the revival performance is executed once, the revival performance is always executed a plurality of times. As a result, when the resurrection performance is executed first in the latent certainty state of 1, it is confirmed that the resurrection performance is further executed even if the remaining number of times added by the resurrection performance is completed, so that the resurrection is performed next. The game can be played without anxiety until the performance is performed. In addition, the player can play the game looking forward to how many times the resurrection presentation will be performed. Also, when this resurrection effect is executed, it is preferable to execute the result display that is displayed when the latent certainty state ends, and then execute the resurrection effect. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 to 207. FIG. First, the details of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

The main controller 110 executes major processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 190) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 190, counters and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. used in

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, the selection of the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small hit) lottery and the jackpot type (jackpot pattern). A first winning type counter C2 used for , a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1 are used. A second winning random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols (second symbol display device 83), and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In addition, a small hit type counter C5 is used for selecting the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 208), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 227). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value for winning the first ball entrance 64 is stored, and each counter value for each winning prize for the second ball entrance 1640. A second special symbol execution area 203b to be stored is provided. In this control example, up to four holding balls are provided in the first ball entrance 64 . Therefore, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 during a period in which a special symbol lottery is possible, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable display or when the special symbol jackpot game is not in progress, each counter value is increased to the first. It is stored in the 1 special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and when a game ball wins in the second ball entrance 1640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b. After that, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is variably displayed (dynamic Various settings and control processing for displaying the image are executed. Further, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is used as it is for various settings and control processing for variably displaying the second special symbol.

On the other hand, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 during a period in which the first special symbol lottery is impossible, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or during the jackpot game with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, In addition, when the number of reserved balls in the first ball entrance 64 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example), each counter value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. be done. Also, if the number of pending balls for the first ball entrance 64 is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (four in this control example), each counter value is not acquired and prize balls (five in this embodiment) prize balls) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player. In addition, when the ball wins the second ball entrance 1640 during the second special symbol lottery period such as during the variable display of the second special symbol or during the jackpot game with the first special symbol or the second special symbol. , only prize balls (in this embodiment, 5 prize balls) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player without acquiring each counter value or the like.

In this control example, the upper limit of the number of held balls is set to 4 with respect to the first ball entrance 64, but it is not limited to this, and may be less than 4 (for example, 3), More than 4 (eg, 8) may be used. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not provide an upper limit. In addition, in this control example, the entry into the second ball entrance 1640 (variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is not suspended, but as with the first ball entrance 64, it is possible to hold and store it. may be configured.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 479. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 208) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 227).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and is the timing at which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640. is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is defined in the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 192(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the first winning random number counter C1 If the value coincides with the value of the random number for the big win defined in the first random number table 202a, it is determined as the special symbol big win. In addition, the value of the random number that becomes the small hit of the special symbol is specified in the small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 192(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 192(a). The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined as winning in each game state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 192(a), when the gaming state is a low probability gaming state, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the acquired first random number counter C1 is determined to be either "7 or 8", and if it is either "7 or 8", it is determined to be a big win. In addition, when the game state is a high probability game state, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is within the range of "0 to 5". If it is within the range of "0 to 5", it is determined to be a big hit.

Next, with reference to Drawing 192 (b), small hit random number table 202b is explained. The small hit random number table 202b is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined as a small hit is set in the special symbol lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 192(b), in the lottery for the first special symbol, no random number value for a small win is defined. That is, the lottery for the first special symbol does not result in a small hit. On the other hand, in the lottery for the second special symbol, regardless of the gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is within the range of "212 to 432". If it is within, it is determined to be a small hit.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that becomes a small winning, the first symbol The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is the one at the time of the small hit of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot, the second The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the 1-symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big win is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0-479. As described above, in the low-probability state of the special symbol, there are two values of the first winning random number counter C1 for the special symbol jackpot. It is stored in the random number table 202a. Among the total number of random numbers of 480, the total number of random number numbers that will result in a big win is 2, so the probability of winning a special symbol with a big win is "1/240". On the other hand, in the high-probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first winning random number counter C1 for the special symbol jackpot. 202a. Among the total number of random numbers of 480, the total number of random number numbers for a big hit is 6, so the probability of a big win for special symbols is "1/80".

Furthermore, as described above, there are 221 values of the first winning random number counter C1 that becomes a small winning in the lottery of the second special symbols, and the random numbers "212 to 432" are stored in the small winning random number table 202b. ing. Among the total number of random numbers of 480, the total number of small winning random numbers is 221, so the probability of winning a special symbol is "221/480" (approximately 46%).

Returning to FIG. 190, the description continues. The value of the first win type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, the big win type is selected based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 and the big winning type selection table 202d (see FIG. 193(a)). becomes. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 193(a).

The small hit type counter C5 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a small hit, based on the value of this small hit type counter and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 193 (b)), the small hit type (small hit A to C) will be selected. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 193(b).

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). One variation pattern is determined from the set variation pattern selection table by the variation type counter CS1. A variation time (dynamic display period) is set for this variation pattern, and the variation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the variation time. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 227) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 194 to 196) storing a random number for determining one fluctuation time of pattern fluctuation from the value (random number) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. located inside.

A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 194 to 196). In this variation pattern selection table 202f, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables are set according to the game state, and variation pattern selection tables are set for each winning/failure determination result. Details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 194 to 196. FIG.

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this example of control, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 208), and the ball has passed through either the left or right normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired when this is detected and stored in the second symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 .

Then, the value of the random number that becomes the normal winning pattern is defined in the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 192(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4. is equal to the value of the winning random number defined in the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol (second symbol). Details of the second winning random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 192(c).

FIG. 192(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second winning random number table 202c. In this second winning random number table 202c, there are 231 random numbers that are normal symbols when the probability of normal symbols is low (during the normal state of normal symbols), and the range is "0 to 230". . Since the total number of winning random numbers is 231 out of 240 possible random numbers of the second winning random number counter C4, the probability of winning a normal symbol is "231/240".

On the other hand, when the probability of normal symbols is high (during the time-saving state of normal symbols), there are 232 random numbers that are normal symbols, and the range is "0 to 231". Since the total number of winning random numbers is 232 out of 240 possible random numbers of the second winning random number counter C4, the probability of winning a normal symbol is "232/240". In this way, in this control example, since the random number value for winning the normal symbols differs only by one between the low-probability state of the normal symbols and the high-probability state of the normal symbols, the winning probabilities are almost the same. there is In addition, the variation time of the normal symbols and the opening time of the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second ball entrance 1640 in the case of winning the normal symbols are also the same. Therefore, the ease of entering the second ball entrance 1640 is the same between the normal symbol low probability state and the normal symbol high probability state. However, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, as described above, the variation time of the second special symbol in the normal state and the variable probability state is extremely longer (600 seconds) than the variation time in the probability state. As a result, in the normal state and the variable probability state, it becomes more difficult to execute the lottery of the second special symbol than in the latent state, so in the normal state and the variable probability state, the player aims at the first ball entrance 64 and plays the game. can be done.

When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second symbol display device 83 performs the variable display of normal symbols for 3 seconds. Then, in the low-probability state of normal symbols, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "0 to 230", it is determined to be winning, and the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 ends. After that, the symbol "O" is illuminated as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the second ball entrance 1640 is opened only "1 second x 2 times". On the other hand, in the high-probability state of normal symbols, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 231", it is determined to be winning, and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished. Afterwards, the "o" symbol is illuminated as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the second ball entrance 1640 is opened only "1 second x 2 times". In addition, in this control example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the normal electric accessary product opening time, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed within a range that does not impair the game performance.

Ordinary figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially added by 1 in the range of 0 to 198 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). When the game ball passes through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g for selecting the normal pattern fluctuation pattern based on the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 (see FIG. 197) is defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG. The details of this normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described later with reference to FIG.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see Fig. 208). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 227).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 to 197. FIG. FIG. 191 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this control example. In the ROM 202, in addition to the above-described first winning random number table 202a, small winning random number table 202b, and second winning random number table 202c, a large winning type selection table 202d, a small winning type selection table 202e, and a variation pattern selection At least a table 202f and a normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202g are provided.

First, with reference to FIG. 193(a), details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described. The jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 193(a)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is , are defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the jackpot type selection table 202d, and the first hit A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 193(a), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 31" in association with "jackpot A". . This "jackpot A" has 15 rounds, and the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 is an opening/closing pattern in which the V passage switch 65e3 can be passed (easily) in the first round of the big win (see FIG. 180(c)). is set. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 32 counter values are "jackpot A". ratio is 32% (32/100).

It should be noted that, in the case of "jackpot A", whether or not the time-saving state of the normal pattern is given depends on whether the game state at the time of winning the "jackpot A" and whether the V passage switch 65e3 was passed during the jackpot. It depends on whether or not Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193(a), when the "jackpot A" is set in the normal state and the probability variable state, and the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot, at the end of the jackpot 120 time reduction times are set. On the other hand, in other cases (when the V pass switch e3 is not passed during the jackpot, or when the jackpot is hit in the latent state and the V pass switch 65e3 is passed during the jackpot), the number of time saving times is not set. (set to 0 times). Therefore, when it becomes "jackpot A" in the normal state or the probability variable state, in many cases, the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the probability variable number of times of 120 times and the time saving number of times of 120 times are set, The game state after the big hit becomes a probability variable state. On the other hand, when it becomes "jackpot A" in the latent probability state, the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the probability variable number of times (and the number of time reduction times of 0 times) is set, and the game state after the jackpot. becomes latent. On the other hand, if the ball does not pass through the V passage switch 65e3 because the player did not hit the ball during the big win, the normal state, which is the most disadvantageous to the player, is set as the game state after the big win. be.

"Jackpot A" is one of the jackpot types with the largest number of rounds, so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained, but in the normal state and the variable state, basically the game state after the end of the jackpot. is set (advantageous latent state is not given), the game state after the big win is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, when "jackpot A" is reached in the probability state, the probability state is basically looped even after the end of the big win.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "32 to 80" in association with "jackpot B". This "jackpot B" has seven rounds, and the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 is an opening/closing pattern that allows (easily) passage through the V-passing switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpot (see FIG. 180(c)). is set. In addition, after the end of the "jackpot B", the time saving state is not provided (the number of time saving is set to 0 times). Therefore, after the end of the "jackpot B", basically the probability state (probability variable number of times 120 times, time saving number of times 0 times) is set. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 48 counter values are "jackpot B". 48% (48/100).

"Jack B" is one of the jackpot types with the fewest number of rounds, so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be won, but if the ball is hit toward the variable prize winning device 65 during the big win (right-handed) ), regardless of the game state, the player moves to an advantageous latent state, which is advantageous in terms of the game state. If the ball does not pass through the V-pass switch 65e3 during the big win because the ball is not hit during the big win, the game state after the big win is set to the normal state regardless of the game state at the time of winning. .

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "81 to 90" in association with "jackpot C". This "jackpot C" has seven rounds, and the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 is set to an opening/closing pattern (see FIG. 180(b)) in which it is difficult to pass through the V-passing switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpot. be. In addition, after the end of the "jackpot C", the time saving state is not given (the number of time saving is set to 0 times). Therefore, after the end of the "jackpot C", basically the normal state (both 0 times as the number of probability variation and the number of time reduction) is set. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values are the "jackpot C", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot C" is determined. ratio is 10% (10/100).

"Jackpot C" has the smallest number of rounds and is basically set to the most unfavorable normal state after the jackpot is finished regardless of the game state at the time of winning, so it is the jackpot type that is the most disadvantageous for the player. be. Although the possibility is low, if the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a within a short period of time when the specific winning opening 65a is opened, the ball will pass through the V passage switch 65e3. In this case, the most advantageous probability state is set after the big win.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "80 to 99" in association with "jackpot D". This "jackpot D" has 15 rounds, and the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 is an opening/closing pattern in which the V passage switch 65e3 can (easily) be passed in the first round of the jackpot (see FIG. 180(c)). is set. In addition, after the "jackpot D" is completed, the time saving state is not provided (the number of time saving times is set to 0). Therefore, after the end of the "jackpot D", basically the probability state (probability variable number of times 120 times, time saving number of times 0 times) is set. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values are the "jackpot D", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot D" is determined. ratio is 10% (10/100).

"Jackpot D" has the largest number of rounds, and basically the most advantageous latent state is set after the jackpot is finished regardless of the game state at the time of winning, so that the jackpot type is the most advantageous for the player. one of. If the ball does not pass through the V-pass switch 65e3 during the big win because the ball is not hit during the big win, the game state after the big win is set to the normal state regardless of the game state at the time of winning. .

On the other hand, as the type of jackpot by lottery of the second special symbols, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 79" is defined in association with "jackpot E". This "jackpot E" has seven rounds, and the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 is an opening/closing pattern that allows (easily) passage through the V-passing switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpot (see FIG. 180(c)). is set. Moreover, the number of times of time saving is set under the same conditions as the "jackpot A". In other words, when the "jackpot E" is set in the normal state or the probability variable state, and the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the number of times of time reduction is set to 120 times, and the game state after the jackpot becomes the probability variable state. . In addition, when "jackpot E" is won in the potential state and the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the number of times of time saving is set to 0 times, so the game state after the jackpot is the potential state. become (loop latent state). Also, when the ball does not pass through the V passage switch 65e3 during the big win, the number of times of time saving is set to 0 regardless of the game state at the time of winning, so the game state after the big win becomes the normal state. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 80 counter values are the "jackpot E", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the "jackpot E" is determined. ratio is 80% (80/100).

Since this "jackpot E" has the smallest number of rounds among the six jackpot types, it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls. On the other hand, the lottery for the second special pattern is basically performed in the latent state, and when the "jackpot E" is reached in the latent state, the latent state is basically looped even after the big win, so the game state after the big win. favors the player.

In addition, it becomes "big hit E" in the normal state and the variable probability state, and when the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3, it is configured to shift to the variable probability state. This is in order to suppress a game method that is unfair. That is, even if the "jackpot E" is obtained in the normal state or the probability variable state, if the latent state is set after the big hit, the normal state or the probability state is expected to shift to an advantageous latent state. There is a possibility that the player will play an irregular game method to execute the lottery for the second special symbol (perform a right-handed stroke) even in the variable probability state. Therefore, in this control example, the second special symbol jackpot (jackpot E to G) is obtained in the normal state or the probability variable state, and when the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the game state after the jackpot is the probability variable state. is configured to be set. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the advantage of performing the lottery for the second special symbol in the normal state or the variable probability state, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the irregular game method of always hitting to the right.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "80 to 95" in association with "jackpot F". This "jackpot F" has 15 rounds, and the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 is an opening/closing pattern that allows (easily) the passage of the V-passing switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpot (see FIG. 180(c)). is set. In addition, the number of times of time saving is set under the same conditions as "jackpot A" and "jackpot E". That is, when the "jackpot F" is won in the normal state or the variable probability state, and the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the number of times of time saving is set to 120 times. On the other hand, in other cases, the number of times of time saving is not set (set to 0 times). Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 15 counter values become the "jackpot F", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the "jackpot F" is determined. ratio is 15% (15/100).

Although this "jackpot F" has a large number of rounds, the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 in each round other than the first round is different from other jackpot types. More specifically, an opening/closing pattern (special opening/closing pattern) is set in which the opening/closing plate 65f1 is opened only for a maximum of 0.06 seconds in each of the 2nd to 15th rounds of the "jackpot F". Since it is difficult to enter the ball into the specific winning hole 65a in 0.06 seconds, it becomes difficult to win the prize ball in the 2nd to 15th rounds of the "jackpot F". In this way, the reason why the special opening/closing pattern is set in the case of "big hit F" is that when the opening/closing plate 65f1 is opened in the latent state, it is either a small hit or a "big hit F". This is to make it ambiguous. Details will be described later, but the small hit of this control example is a small hit A in which the opening and closing plate 65f1 is opened only once for a relatively long time (1.648 seconds), and a short time (0.06 seconds). Small hits B and C are provided in which the opening operation is repeated multiple times. Therefore, by setting a special opening/closing pattern in the case of a "big hit F", it is possible to make the operation of the opening/closing plate 65f1 similar to the case of a small win B or a small win C after a small win A. can. As a result, it is difficult to discriminate whether the 120-time probability state is reset by becoming a "jackpot F" during the probability state, or whether the number of small wins is successively won and the number of times is subtracted. can be Therefore, whether or not the number of times of the remaining definite state on the display matches the actual remaining number of times (whether or not the definite state ends when the remaining number of times on the display becomes 0 or not) is determined. Since it can be difficult to distinguish from the appearance, when the remaining number of times on the display approaches 0, a revival effect (see FIG. 189) is performed and the remaining number of times on the display is displayed on top of the remaining number of times. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game during the latent state of the player.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "95 to 99" in association with "jackpot G". This "jackpot G" has 15 rounds, and the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing plate 65f1 is an opening/closing pattern in which the V passage switch 65e3 can (easily) be passed in the first round of the jackpot (see FIG. 180(c)). is set. Also, the number of times of time saving is set under the same conditions as "jackpot A", "jackpot E", and "jackpot F". That is, when the "jackpot G" is won in the normal state or the variable probability state and the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot, 120 times of time saving is set. On the other hand, in other cases, the number of times of time saving is not set (set to 0 times). Among 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the number of counter values that become the "jackpot G" is five, so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot G" is determined. ratio is 5% (5/100).

Since this "jackpot G" has the largest number of rounds among the six types of jackpot types, it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls. In addition, the lottery for the second special pattern is basically performed in the latent state, and if the "jackpot G" is reached in the latent state, the latent state is basically looped even after the big win, so the game state after the big win is established. is also advantageous to the player.

Thus, in this control example, when the left-handed hit is performed in the normal state or the variable probability state, and the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the latent probability state is advantageous at a rate of 58% (jackpots B, D). configured to move to Then, in the latent definite state, the player hits to the right, and when the second special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the advantageous latent definite state is looped at a rate of 100% (big hits E to G). Therefore, once the latent state (probability variable state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols) is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is performed by winning the second ball entrance 1640 by hitting to the right. It is easy to execute, and the state with a high jackpot probability and the jackpot of the second special symbol are likely to be repeated. For this reason, the player can play the game with the purpose of making the transition to the latent state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to Drawing 193 (b), the details of small hit classification selection table 202e are explained. This small hit type selection table 202e is a data table that is referred to for determining the type of small hit when the first special symbol lottery results in a small hit. In this small hit type selection table 202e, a corresponding small hit type is defined for each value range of the small hit type counter C5.

As shown in FIG. 193(b), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "0 to 93" in association with "small hit A". This "small win A" is a small win type in which the opening/closing plate 65f1 of the variable prize winning device 65 is set to the open state only once for 1.648 seconds during the small win game. Of the 100 possible random numbers of the small hit type counter C5, the number of random numbers that become "small hit A" is 94, so when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit, "small hit A" is obtained. is determined 94% (94/100).

In addition, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "94 to 98" in association with "small hit B". This "small win B" is a small win type in which the opening/closing plate 65f1 is set to be opened 6 times for 0.06 seconds during the small win game. Among the 100 possible random numbers of the small hit type counter C5, there are 5 random numbers that become "small hit B", so when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit, "small hit B". is determined at a rate of 5% (5/100).

Furthermore, the value "99" of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with "small hit C". This "small win C" is a small win type in which the opening/closing plate 65f1 is set to the open state for 0.06 seconds x 8 times during the small win game. Among the 100 possible random numbers of the small winning type counter C5, one random number becomes ``small winning C'', so when a special symbol lottery results in a small winning, it becomes ``small winning C''. The proportion is 1% (1/100).

Thus, in this control example, a small winning game is executed in which the opening/closing plate 65f1 opens and closes one or more times, triggered by a small winning in the special symbol lottery. Thus, when the opening/closing plate 65f1 performs the opening/closing operation in the latent sure state, it is made difficult to discriminate whether the opening/closing operation is due to the winning of the big win or the winning of the small win. can be done. Therefore, even if the lottery of the second special symbols executed during the latent definite state does not result in a big win even once, when the number of remaining times of the latent definite state on the display approaches 0, the resurrection performance is performed. can be expected. In addition, in this control example, when the lottery for the second special symbol is performed, the percentage of small hits is about 46%. Therefore, in the lottery of 120 times of special symbols set as a latent probability state, a small hit is won about 55 times. Therefore, since the opening/closing plate 65f1 is frequently opened and closed during the latent certainty state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the win is a big win or a small win.

Next, details of the variation pattern selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. 194 to 196. FIG. As described above, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f defines a random number that determines the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation display from the value (random number) of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 194, the variation pattern selection table 202f includes a normal table A202f1 and a normal table B202f2 for determining the variation pattern (variation time) in the normal state, and for determining the variation pattern in the probability variation state. At least a definite variable table 202f3 and a definite variable table 202f4 for determining a variation pattern in the definite state are included. Specific contents of these tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 and 196. FIG. In each table shown in FIGS. 195 and 196, the fluctuation time is expressed in units of milliseconds, but in the following description, the fluctuation time is expressed in units of seconds for easy understanding.

First, the normal table A202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. This normal table A is a table that is referred to when the game state is the normal state and special symbol lotteries other than two times are executed immediately after the end of the latent probability variable state. FIG. 195 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this normal table A202f1. As shown in FIG. 195, the normal table A202f1 is a random value for determining the type of variation pattern (variation time) for each type of special symbol and each stop type of special symbol (counter of variation type counter value CS1 value) is specified.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determined when the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 50" and normal reach (20 seconds) is associated, Super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "51 to 100", Super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "101 to 150", Super reach is associated with the range of "151 to 198" C (30 seconds) is associated.

On the other hand, if the first special symbol is lost in the lottery and this normal table A202f1 is referred to, the correspondence between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the selected variation pattern is variable according to the number of held balls. do. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 195, when the number of held balls is within the range of 0 or 1, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "0 to 70" (10 seconds) is associated with the variation pattern of , and outside the range of "71 to 150", normal reach (20 seconds) is associated. In addition, as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the range of "151 to 170" is associated with super reach A (30 seconds), and the range of "171 to 198" is associated with super reach B (30 seconds). It is

On the other hand, when the number of held balls is 2 or 3, a short deviation (8 seconds) variation pattern is associated with the range of "0 to 70" as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation type As the value of the counter CS1, the range of "71 to 150" is associated with the variation pattern of long outliers (10 seconds), and the range of "151 to 170" is associated with the normal reach (20 seconds). In addition, as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the range of "171 to 185" is associated with super reach A (30 seconds), and the range of "185 to 198" is associated with super reach B (30 seconds). It is It should be noted that the process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol with reference to the normal table A202f1 (see S307 of S210) is faster than the process of subtracting the reserved balls of the first special symbol (see S303 of FIG. 210). Executed later. Therefore, the normal table A202f is not referred to when there are four reserved balls.

Thus, when the number of held balls is small (0 or 1), a variation pattern with a long fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than when the number of held balls is large (2 or 3). By configuring in this way, when the number of held balls is small, it is possible to secure the time for storing the held balls and to make the fluctuation display less likely to be interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from becoming bored with the game. On the other hand, when the number of held balls is large, the fluctuation time becomes short and it becomes difficult to accumulate the held balls. can be prevented (suppressed) from entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that he or she has lost.

On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is executed and the normal table A202f1 is referred to, 600 seconds (10 minutes) is set as the variable time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the variation type counter CS1 can take is associated with the long variation A (600 seconds), When the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the small hit long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, When the lottery result of the second special symbol is out, the out long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the whole range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As a result, when the right hand is hit in the normal state and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the variation time is set to 600 seconds each time, so the game efficiency is extremely worse than when the left hand is hit. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which the player hits right at normal times.

Next, details of the normal table B202f2 will be described with reference to FIG. 196(a). This normal table B202f2 is a table that is referred to only when the game state is the normal state and the number of special symbol lotteries is two or less after the end of the latent certainty state.

As shown in FIG. 196(a), when this normal table B202f2 is referred to, the same variation time is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol or the number of reserved balls. Specifically, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation after ST (12 seconds) is associated with the entire range of values (0 to 198) that can be taken by the variation type counter CS1. ing. Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is out, the fluctuation after the out ST (12 seconds) is associated with the whole range of possible values (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Therefore, if the first or second special symbol lottery after the end of the latent definite state is the first special symbol lottery, the variation time of 12 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result. During these 12 seconds, the above-described latent state result display (see FIG. 188(b)) is performed. By adopting a configuration in which a fixed variable time is selected, it is possible to ensure sufficient time for displaying the result. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to fully confirm the result of the definite state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 196(a), for the lottery for the second special symbol, a fluctuation time of 600 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result, similarly to the normal table A202f1. Since the content is the same as the normal table A202f1 described above with reference to FIG. 195, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, after the end of the latent probability, not only the first special symbol lottery, but also the second special symbol lottery is the first special symbol lottery. This is because there is a possibility that the ball enters the second ball entrance 1640 during the period from the end of the latent definite state to the return to left-handed hitting, and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed first. . As in this control example, if the second special symbol lottery after the end of the latent probability is configured to set the variation time of 12 seconds, even if the second special symbol variation display is started first, Since the fluctuation time of 12 seconds can be set by executing the first special symbol lottery after that, regardless of whether or not the first special symbol lottery was executed first, every time. Result display can be performed for the same amount of time after the end of the latent state. Also, in the latent certainty state, it is conceivable that the lottery for the second special symbol is executed twice in succession without the lottery for the first special symbol being executed. However, as described above, when the fluctuation stop state of the first special symbol continues for 30 seconds or more after the latent certainty state ends (that is, when the main fluctuation does not start for 30 seconds), the result display is performed. It is configured. Therefore, even in this case, the results can be displayed for a sufficiently long time.

In addition, the result of the latent state (result) is not displayed during the latent state, but after the end of the latent state, it is displayed during the fluctuation time of the first special symbol that is executed first. , This is because the variation time of the second special symbol in the latent definite state is extremely short. Therefore, if the result of the latent certainty state is displayed during the variable display executed last in the latent certainty state, the result can only be displayed for an extremely short period of time. On the other hand, in the first control example, after the end of the latent certainty state, the results of the latent certainty state are displayed during the variable display of the first special symbol executed first. The status results can be displayed long enough. Although the details will be described later, in this first control example, in order to make the player confirm the result of the latent state more reliably, a lottery of special symbols is held twice after the latent state ends. A fixed variable time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol. With this configuration, the results can be displayed each time within the fixed variable time, so that the players can more reliably confirm the results.

In this control example, a fixed variable time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol. It may be set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. For example, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a win, a display suggesting the win may be executed in addition to the display contents of the result display. In addition, even when the lottery result of the second special symbol whose variation is performed simultaneously (in parallel) with the variation of the first special symbol whose result display is performed based on the variation of the first special symbol is a hit, In addition to the display contents of the result display executed based on the variation of the first special symbol, a display suggesting a win may be executed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to display the game result of the latent definite state and the lottery result of the special symbol in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

Further, in this control example, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed twice in succession after the end of the latent certainty state, the result display is executed only for the first fluctuation. In the second fluctuation, the fluctuation display based on the lottery result of the special symbol is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the latent definite game result is excessively displayed and the variable display based on the lottery result of the special symbol is not executed.

In addition, the probability variation table 202f3 has almost the same configuration as the normal table A202f1, so it will be briefly described. Each variation pattern (per normal reach, per super reach A to C) is selected at the selection ratio. Moreover, even when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the variable time of 600 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result, similarly to the normal state. On the other hand, when the lottery for the first special symbol is lost, a variation pattern with a shorter variation time than in the normal state is likely to be selected. This is because the odds of a big win are increased in the variable probability state, so if a variation pattern with a long variation time occurs frequently despite the failure, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in the first control example, when the first special symbol lottery is lost during the variable probability state, the variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected, and the variation pattern with a long variation time is configured. It is configured to make the player more strongly expect a big win when it is selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 196(b), the details of the latency confirmation table 202f4 will be described. This table 202f4 for latent probability is a table referred to for selecting a variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result when a special symbol lottery is executed in the latent probability state.

As shown in FIG. 196(b), the jackpot of the first special pattern is defined by matching the middle variation (60 seconds) with the whole range of values (0 to 198) that can be taken by the variation type counter CS1. It is Further, in the deviation of the first special symbol, the deviation super-short variation A (0.5 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range of possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198).

Also, as shown in FIG. 196(b), the second special symbol jackpot has a super short variation (0.5 seconds) for the entire range of possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198). is defined in association with the small hit of the second special symbol, and a small hit super short variation (0.5 seconds) is associated with the entire range of possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198). , and the deviation of the second special symbol is defined in association with the entire range of possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198) and the super short variation (0.5 seconds). . That is, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the latent certainty state, the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result.

In the latent state, the second special symbol lottery is basically performed, so the variation time is approximately 0.5 seconds. Therefore, the game can be played efficiently (speedily) by hitting to the right in an advantageous latent state. Also, even if the lottery for the first special symbol is lost in the latent state, 0.5 seconds is selected as the variable time, so for example, in a state where there is one or more pending first special symbols When entering into the latent definite state, the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be quickly digested. Therefore, the player can play the game while concentrating on the variation display of the second special symbol, which is the main variation in the latent certainty state.

It should be noted that the relatively long variation time (60 seconds) is set when the first special symbol lottery is a jackpot in the latent state. This is because the latent state may end. Specifically, when the jackpot C is reached in the latent certainty state, an opening/closing pattern (see FIG. 180(b)) in which the ball is difficult to pass through the V passage switch 65e3 is set for the opening/closing plate 65f1, so basically the jackpot The game state after the end becomes the normal state. If such a situation occurs, there is a risk that the player's motivation for playing the game will be lowered. Therefore, in this control example, by setting a relatively long variation time when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the second special symbol is hit to the right during the first special symbol big hit variation. It is configured so that the lottery of symbols can be executed a plurality of times. As described above, in the lottery of the second special symbol, about once every two times (at about 46%) to win a small hit, so before the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol ends, the second special symbol It is possible to end the small hit fluctuation with a high probability. As described above, in this control example, a simultaneous variation method is adopted in which the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. In addition, if the fluctuation display of one special design is confirmed and displayed with a stop design of a big hit or a small hit during simultaneous fluctuation, the fluctuation display of the other special design is the remaining fluctuation time or the lottery at the start of fluctuation Regardless of the result, it will be forcibly stopped with an out of stop symbol. Therefore, even during the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol, the big hit of the first special symbol can be discarded by first confirming and displaying the stop symbol of the small hit due to the small hit variation of the second special symbol. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) with a high probability the start of the first special pattern jackpot, which may end the latent certainty state, so that the player can more surely enjoy the latent certainty state. can let

In addition, in this control example, 0.5 seconds is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol set corresponding to the latent state, but there is a small probability (for example, "1/199" ) to select a long variation time (eg, 12 seconds). Further, when a long fluctuation time is selected, a result display showing the above-described latent state game result (actually, the game result during the latent state game) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It should be displayed. As a result, it is possible to execute a performance that makes the latent definite state end during the latent definite state, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance, and the effect of enhancing the performance effect. There is

Next, with reference to FIG. 197, the details of the normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described. As described above, the normal pattern variation pattern table 202g is a table referred to for selecting a normal pattern variation pattern when a normal symbol lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 197, in this general pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g, for each game state at the time when the normal pattern lottery is executed, the range of the value of the general pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) and are defined in association with each other.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 197, when the gaming state is a normal state, the variation time is 3 seconds for the entire range of values that can be taken by the normal figure variation type counter CS2 (0 to 198) A variation pattern is associated. Similarly, when the game state is a probability variable state, a variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds is associated with the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the normal figure variation type counter CS2 can take.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is the potential state, the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 190" and the fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is associated with the normal pattern fluctuation type counter. A variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second is associated with the CS2 value range of "191 to 198". When the normal pattern lottery is executed in the latent definite state, by varying the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, the time from the execution of the normal pattern lottery to the release of the electric accessory 1640a is predicted. can be made difficult. Therefore, the ball is hit one by one to the first through gate 66, the second first through gate 66, or the second through gate 67, and when the ball passes through one of the through gates, the normal pattern hits. In this case, the irregular game method of predicting the timing when the electric accessory 1640a is released and hitting the ball can be suppressed, and the player can continuously hit to the right during the latent definite state.

In addition, in the first control example, the configuration is such that a plurality of variation patterns are provided only in the latent state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the normal state and the probability variable state, the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal design may have variations.

In addition, in this control example, when the normal symbol lottery is executed in the latent certainty state, either one of two types of variation time, 1 second or 3 seconds, is set, but there are two types of variation time. , and may be configured so that more variation times can be selected. The more variations are given to the variation time, the more difficult it is for the player to predict the variation time, so that the player can be made to continuously hit the right hand more reliably during the latent definite state.

Furthermore, in this control example, the variation time of the normal design is set based on the game state and the value of the acquired normal pattern variation type counter CS2, but in addition to that, based on the number of reserved balls of the normal design It is also possible to use a configuration that changes the variation time by changing the variation time, a configuration that changes the variation time based on the number of special symbol lotteries, and a configuration that sets the variation time of the normal symbol by a method combining the above-described various configurations. Specifically, 1 second is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the game state shifts to the latent definite state, and after that (51 times to 120 times) may be configured such that 3 seconds is set as the normal symbol variation time. In addition, during the period when the even-numbered special symbol lottery is being executed after the game state shifts to the latent definite state, 1 second is set as the normal symbol variation time, and otherwise (odd-numbered times), It may be configured such that 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. In this way, by changing the variation time of the normal symbols based on the number of times the lottery of the special symbols is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the variation time. You can continuously hit right. In this case, when the special symbol lottery is not executed, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is longer (longer than when the special symbol lottery is executed), or the special symbol is changed. It is preferable to configure such that the variation time of the normal symbol becomes longer as the number of pending memories of the lottery is smaller.

Further, when setting the variation time of the normal symbol based on the number of retained balls of the normal symbol, it is preferable that the larger the number of retained balls of the normal symbol, the longer the variation time is likely to be selected. By constructing in this way, the pachinko machine 10 adjusted to make it difficult for the number of reserved balls of normal symbols to accumulate and the pachinko machine 10 adjusted to easily accumulate the number of reserved balls of normal symbols to increase the number of balls per unit time. Normal pattern lottery frequency can be made uniform.

Details of the RAM 203 will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 198 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 203 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 198, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol execution area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a normal symbol reserved ball. Number counter 203e, V winning flag 203f, time saving counter 203g, winning prize counter 203h, special figure 1 standby flag 203i, special figure 2 standby flag 203j, variable probability counter 203k, big hit flag 203m, winning state storage area 203n, small hit Flag 203o, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p, prefetching reservation storage area 203r, special figure 1 fluctuation timer 203s, special figure 2 fluctuation timer 203t, big hit flag 203u, small hit flag 203v, other memory area 203z ing.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area (first special symbol execution area) and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). The area stores the values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the small per type counter C5, and the variation type counter CS1.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), the value of each counter is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (first holding area to holding 4th area) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to the reservation area (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this control example, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

The second special symbol execution area 203b, like the first special symbol execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, stores a determination value (counter value) for executing a special symbol lottery. In this second special symbol execution area 203b, each counter value acquired at the timing when the start winning to the second entrance 1640 is detected is stored.

Similar to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area (normal symbol reserved ball execution area) and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). ). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, when the ball passes through either the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is Among the vacant areas of the reservation areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes vacant. A shift process is performed to pack the winning data into a reserve area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display of special symbols (first symbol display device 37, It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero. is incremented by 1 (see S1504 in FIG. 222). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S303 in FIG. 210).

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of holding the variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S304 of FIG. 210, of FIG. 222 S1505 reference). The pending ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113, every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed, by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the variable display of the variable display withheld by the main control device 110 It is possible to acquire the value of the number of retained balls itself. As a result, the number of holding balls of the variable display managed by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the holding of the actual variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of pitches deviates from the number of balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of pending pitches command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is a normal symbol (second symbol) variable display held ball that is performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67. It is a counter that counts the number (waiting times) up to four times. The value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number M of holding variable display in normal symbols) is initially set to zero, and the ball passes through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67. 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 each time the number of held balls in the variable display increases (see S1704 in FIG. 224). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S1605 in FIG. 223).

When the ball passes through the first thru gate 66 or the second thru gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times M of variable display in normal symbols is held) is less than 4, the second The value of the hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (see S1705 in FIG. 224). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. It is not stored (see S1703: No in FIG. 224).

The V winning flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state after the jackpot game to the probability variable state. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the variable probability state is determined by whether or not the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 (see FIG. 179(b)) during the big win game. Here, when the ball passes through the V pass switch 65e3, the V winning flag 203f is set to ON (see S2410 in FIG. 231). On the other hand, this V winning flag 203f is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see S2307 in FIG. 230). The V winning flag 203f is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power was turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Moreover, it is set to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized.

If the V winning flag 203f is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the V passing switch 65e3 was passed before the power was turned off. The flag 203f may be formally set to ON to return. In this case, whether or not the V passage switch 65e3 is passed before the power is turned off can be determined by checking whether the variable probability passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value greater than zero. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement arcade side by discriminating fraud such as turning on only the V winning flag 203f while the power is turned off and turning on the power again. can.

The time saving counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving state. This time-saving counter 203g is set to 120 when one of the jackpots A, E to G is won in the normal state or the variable probability state, and the V winning flag 203f is ON at the end of the jackpot game. Also, the time-saving counter 203g is decremented by one in the game state update process executed immediately after setting the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (see S607 in FIG. 213). If the value of the time saving counter 203g is 1 or more when the lottery for the normal pattern is carried out, it is determined that the time saving state for the normal pattern is selected, and the suitability determination for the normal pattern is executed by referring to the table for the high probability time. (See S1610 in FIG. 223). On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 203g is 0, it is determined as the normal state of the normal design, and the normal design propriety determination is executed with reference to the table for low probability (see S1611 in FIG. 223).

The prize winning counter 203h is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won (entered) the specific prize winning opening 65a in each round of the big win. When the value of the prize winning counter 203h reaches 5, which is the upper limit, it is determined that the end conditions for the round are met, and the round is ended (see S2406 in FIG. 231). Even if the value of the winning counter 203h is less than 5 in each round of the jackpot, the round is terminated when the round period set for each round is reached. The prize winning counter 203h is incremented by 1 every time a ball enters the specific prize winning opening 65a during the jackpot round validity period. Also, the value is reset to 0 at the end of each round.

The special figure 1 standby flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not the first special symbol is in the fluctuation stop state. If this special figure 1 standby flag 203i is on, it indicates that the first special symbol is in a state of stopping fluctuation, and if it is off, the first special symbol is fluctuating or the first special symbol is reserved. It means that it is in the state immediately before starting the variable display based on the sphere. This special figure 1 standby flag 203i is set to ON when the first special symbol is not fluctuating and the number of pending balls is 0 (see S311 in FIG. 210). On the other hand, when the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol is set, it is set to OFF (see S309 in FIG. 210).

The special figure 2 standby flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not the second special symbol is in the fluctuation stop state. If this special figure 1 standby flag 203j is ON, it indicates that the second special symbol is in a fluctuation stop state, and if it is OFF, it means that the second special symbol is fluctuating. This special figure 2 standby flag 203j is set to ON when the second special symbol is not fluctuating and the start winning prize for the second entrance 1640 is not detected (see S809 in FIG. 215). On the other hand, when the start of variation of the second special symbol is set, it is set to OFF (see S807 in FIG. 215).

The variable probability counter 203k is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a variable probability state of special symbols (high probability state of special symbols). If the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 1 or more, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state, and if the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (special It indicates that it is a low probability state of the pattern).

The variable probability counter 203k has an initial value of 0, and when the ball passes the V-pass switch 65e3 during the big win, 120 is set at the end of the big win (see S2304 in FIG. 230). In addition, in the game state update process (see FIG. 213) executed immediately after setting the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the value is subtracted by one (see FIG. 213). (see S602). In addition, the variable probability counter 203k is reset to 0 when a jackpot game is started (see S708 in FIG. 214 and S1309 in FIG. 220). This probability variation counter 203k is referred to in order to determine whether or not the probability variation state of the special symbols in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 216). (See S402 in FIG. 211 and S902 in FIG. 216).

The jackpot flag 203m is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. 211 and S906 in FIG. 216). This jackpot flag 203m is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (see S708 in FIG. 214 and S1309 in FIG. 220). A 2-bit storage area is allocated to the jackpot flag 203m, and information corresponding to the first special design is stored in the upper bits and information corresponding to the second special design is stored in the lower bits. More specifically, if the jackpot flag 203m is "10B", it indicates that the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and that the variable display showing the lottery result is in progress. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 203m is "01B", it indicates that the jackpot has been won in the lottery of the second special symbol, and that the variable display showing the lottery result is in progress. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 203m is "00B", it indicates that the jackpot variation is not executed.

When the variation time of the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the ON state ends while the jackpot flag 203m is on, a process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol by removing the symbol is executed (S705 in FIG. 214, FIG. 220). (see S1306 of ). As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that the first special symbol and the second special symbol result in a big win or a small win while one of the big wins is being executed.

The winning state storage area 203n is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a normal state (if the values of the time reduction counter 203g and the variable probability counter 203k are both 0), the normal state is indicated in the winning state storage area 203n. "00H" is stored as information. On the other hand, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a variable probability state (if the values of the time saving counter 203g and the variable probability counter 203k are both 1 or more), information indicating the variable probability state is stored in the winning state storage area 203n "01H" is stored. Also, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a latent state (if the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 and the value of the variable probability counter 203k is 1 or more), the winning state storage area 203n "02H" is stored as information indicating the certain state.

The information stored in the winning state storage area 203n is retained until the end of the big win, and is referred to when setting the time-saving game after the end of the big win (see S2301 in FIG. 230). As described above, when the jackpots A, E to G occur and the ball passes through the V-pass switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the game state after the jackpot depends on whether or not the game state at the time of winning is the latent state. I'm letting In this control example, information corresponding to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is stored in the state storage area 203n at the time of winning, and by referring to the information at the end of the jackpot, the information corresponding to the type of jackpot and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is stored. Appropriate game state can be set.

The small hit flag 203o is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 1640 matches the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation. This is a flag to be set (see S1002 in FIG. 217). This small win flag 203o is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small win (see S1405 in FIG. 220). When the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends while the small hit flag 203o is on, a process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol with the missing symbol is executed (see S1403 in FIG. 221). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem that a big win is made in the lottery of the first special symbol while the small winning of the second special symbol is being executed, and the big winning is started during the small winning. can.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is a flag indicating that it is a period between when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) by the stop symbol of the big hit and when the big win is started. When this special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to ON, even if there is a new entry to the second entrance 1640, the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. (See S801: Yes in FIG. 215). This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to ON when the second special symbol is forced to stop in the off design (see S703 in FIG. 214), avoiding the process for executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is set to OFF (S811 in FIG. 215).

The prefetching reservation storage area 203r is a storage area for storing the prediction result when the special symbol lottery result is predicted before the original special symbol lottery timing. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, immediately after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) and each counter value is acquired, each of the acquired From the counter value, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated). Predicting various information obtained when the original lottery is performed in this way before the original lottery for the special symbols is performed is hereinafter referred to as "prefetching". In the look-ahead reservation storage area 203r, at the timing when each counter value is acquired based on the start winning for the first entrance 64, the look-ahead result based on the counter value jackpot type, and fluctuation pattern) are stored. Further, the same number of prefetch results as the number of reserved balls (that is, up to four) can be stored in the prefetch pending storage area 203r.

The special figure 1 variation timer 203s and the special figure 2 variation timer 203t are timers for measuring the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol respectively, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol When a variation pattern is selected, a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. It is determined whether or not the variation time of each special symbol has ended according to the timing results of the special figure 1 variation timer 203s and the special figure 2 variation timer 203t (see S701 in FIG. 214 and S1301 in FIG. 220).

The jackpot flag 203u is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot is in progress. When this jackpot middle flag 203u is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in jackpot, and when it is OFF, it indicates that it is not jackpot. This jackpot middle flag 203u is set to ON when the start of jackpot is set (see S709 in FIG. 214 and S1310 in FIG. 220). On the other hand, it is set to OFF in the jackpot end processing executed at the end of the jackpot (see S2307 in FIG. 230).

The flag 203v during a small hit is a flag which shows whether it is during a small hit. If the small hit medium flag 203v is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a small hit, and if it is off, it indicates that it is not in the middle of a small hit. This small hit medium flag 203v is set to ON when the start of the small hit is set (see S1406 in FIG. 221). On the other hand, it is set to OFF at the end of the small hit (see S2512 in FIG. 232).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is provided with various flags, counters, and the like. Based on various tables provided in the ROM 202 and flags and counters provided in the RAM 203, the basic functions of the pachinko machine 10 and novel state transitions shown in FIG. 181 can be realized.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 199 and 200, details of the electrical configuration of audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 199(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 199(a), the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and a screen display selection table 222b.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 by the sound ramp control device 113. ) to determine the details of the variable display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes. Here, one variation mode out of a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation contents instructed by the main controller 110 . In addition, the aspect of the special reach production described above (see FIGS. 184 and 185) is also defined in this variation pattern selection table 222a, and the variation content indicated by the variation pattern command is winning super reach A or losing super reach A. selected in some cases.

The screen display selection table 222b is a table that defines the display contents when 30 seconds have passed since the first special symbol or the second special symbol has stopped changing. As described above, in this example of control, the simultaneous variation method is adopted, and even if one special symbol is in a state where the variation is stopped, the situation that the other special symbol is being varied frequently occurs. In addition, depending on the game state, the variation display of the first special symbol becomes the main variation, or the variation display of the second special symbol becomes the main variation, and the special symbol that the player should pay attention to is switched. This screen display selection table 222b is referred to in order to appropriately display the variation display of the main symbols in each game state and to set the demonstration display corresponding to the game state when the main variation is stopped. Details of the screen display selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 200 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the screen display selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 200, this screen display selection table 222b is associated with the combination of the gaming state, the state of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s, and the state of the special figure 2 standby flag 223t, and the third symbol display device The display content (screen display type) to be displayed in 81 is defined. In addition, the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t are the first special symbol and the second special symbol respectively. flag to indicate When each flag is on, it indicates that a predetermined time has passed. 30 seconds).

As shown in FIG. 200, when the gaming state is normal state or variable probability state, the display content (screen display type ) is defined as normal display. In this normal display, the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol and the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol are displayed in the normal state (see FIG. 182(b)). display content. In the normal state, the main fluctuation is the fluctuation display based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. By setting the normal display, the main fluctuation can be reliably displayed.

In the normal state or the probability variable state, the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is on, and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is off for the combination, the demonstration display is associated. When this demo display is determined, the customer waiting demo screen (see FIGS. 186(b) and (c)) is set. After 30 seconds have passed since the fluctuation of the first special symbol, which is the main fluctuation, is completed, regardless of whether or not the secondary fluctuation is being executed, the display is switched to the demonstration display (customer waiting demonstration screen). As a result, even if the player enters the ball into the second ball entrance 1640 and quits the game immediately after the 600-second variable display starts, the game will be displayed after the predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed. can display the customer waiting demo screen. Therefore, other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demo screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is an empty machine, so that a game can be started with the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 from decreasing.

In the normal state or the probability variable state, the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t are also associated with a combination of off. Therefore, in this case as well, the customer waiting demo screen (see FIGS. 186(b) and (c)) is set. As a result, other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demo screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is empty.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is the latent state, the special display is associated with the combination of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s off and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t on. This special display means the aforementioned demonstration display for concealment (see FIG. 187(c)), and a special mode of demonstration display is set in which the same character 811 as during fluctuation continues to be displayed. As a result, when the ball entering the second ball entrance 1640 is subsequently detected, the display mode (effect mode) can be switched smoothly. It should be noted that special display is set even in the case of a combination in which both the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t are turned on. That is, regardless of the situation of the first special symbol corresponding to the sub-fluctuation in the latent certainty state, if 30 seconds or more have passed since the second special symbol corresponding to the main fluctuation has become a fluctuation stop state, the special display is displayed. set.

In the latent state, the normal display is associated with the combination of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s on and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t off. Therefore, in the latent definite state, variable display or stop display corresponding to the lottery result of the second special pattern continues to be displayed as usual even if 30 seconds or more have passed since the first special pattern entered the variable stop state.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 199 is a block diagram showing the contents of RAM 223. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e, and a special figure 1 stop. Type selection flag 223f, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g, production counter 223h, state setting area 223i, sub special figure 1 standby flag 223j, special figure 1 standby counter 223k, sub special figure 2 A standby flag 223m, a special figure 2 standby counter 223n, a remaining probability variation number area 223o, a production probability variation number area 223p, a short remaining time number area 223q, a special figure 1 standby flag 223s, and a special figure 2 standby flag 223t and at least another memory area 223z.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the commands are processed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written according to a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 238) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out and is read by the command determination processing. , the command is parsed and an action is taken according to the command.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects the starting winning for the first ball entrance 64, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the first winning type counter C2 are obtained according to the starting winning. From each value of the small hit type counter C5 and the variation type counter CS1, various information (whether or not, jackpot type in the case of a big hit, variation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed The main controller 110 predicts (estimates), and the predicted various information is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of winning information commands.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win or fail, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and extracts the winning information. is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four open areas (1st to 4th areas). be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a variable effect (variable display) of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is suspended in the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable performance of the first special symbol that is being held up to 4 times at maximum for each type of special symbol.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and cannot acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of reserved balls is counted based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of reserved balls is counted as a special symbol by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. are managed by type.

Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of pending balls for variable display is added by entering the first ball entrance 64, or when main controller 110 executes variable display in special symbols. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 d after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 is acquired from the reserved ball number command. , stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4310 in FIG. 238). Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c is updated, the first special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used to display the reserved ball number symbols in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and stores the first special symbol reserved after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the number of balls counter 223c, a command for the number of reserved balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is reserved. Image drawing is controlled so that the number of balls pattern is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 . As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. can. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e receive the first special symbol variation pattern command and the second special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 respectively. It is turned on (see S4304 and S4307 in FIG. 238), and turned off when the variable display is set in the third pattern display device 81 (see S4702 and S4706 in FIG. 243). When the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e are turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 236). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g receive the stop type command of the first special symbol and the stop type command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 , respectively (see S4401 in FIG. 239), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S4710 in FIG. 243). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is turned on, the stop type is based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command. It is determined.

The effect counter 223h is a counter used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various effects, and the like. This effect counter 223h is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated within the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 236) is executed, the value is incremented by 1 and updated. be done.

The state setting area 223i is a storage area in which information corresponding to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. This state setting area 223i is updated with information corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the state command each time a state command output from the main controller 110 is received (S4011 in FIG. 235, FIG. 240 S4506). More specifically, the state setting area 223i is assigned a 2-bit storage area, and in order from the upper bit, whether it is a probability variable state of a special symbol or whether it is a time saving state of a normal symbol. The indicated value is stored. For example, if the value of the state setting area 223i is "11B", it means that the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol (that is, the probability variation state), and if it is "10B", the special It means that the definite variable state of the symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, the latent definite state). On the other hand, "00H" means the normal state.

By updating the state setting area 223i according to the state command output from the main controller 110, the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped in the sound lamp control device 113.

The sub-special figure 1 standby flag 223j and the sub-special figure 2 standby flag 223m are flags indicating whether or not the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in the fluctuation stop state, respectively. If these flags are on, it means that the corresponding special symbol is in a state of stopping fluctuation, and if it is off, it means that it is in fluctuation. These are updated in synchronization with the state of the special figure 1 standby flag 203i and the special figure 2 standby flag 203j of the main controller 110.

The special figure 1 standby counter 223k and the special figure 2 standby counter 223n are counters for counting the elapsed time after the first special symbol and the second special symbol become a fluctuation stop state, respectively. Among the special figure 1 standby counter 223k and the special figure 2 standby counter 223n, when the count value corresponding to the special symbol to be the main fluctuation in the current game state becomes a value corresponding to 30 seconds, the game A demonstration effect corresponding to the state is set (see S4211 in FIG. 237).

The remaining probability variable number of times area 223o and the remaining time reduction number area 223q are storage areas for storing the number of remaining times of the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time reduction state of the normal symbol, respectively. The remaining probability variable count area 223o and the remaining short time count area 223q are notified by a residual probability variable count command and a remaining short time count command output each time the values of the variable probability counter 203k and the short time counter 203g are updated in the main control device 110, respectively. (See S4652 and S4662 in FIG. 242). As a result, in synchronization with the values of the probability variation counter 203k and the time reduction counter 203g of the main control device 110, the values stored in the remaining probability variation number area 223o and the remaining time short number area 223q can be updated, so the sound lamp control device The remaining number of probability variations and the number of times of saving time grasped by 113 can be matched with the actual number of times of probability variation and the number of times of saving time updated by the main controller 110 .

The effect probability variable count area 223p is a storage area for storing a guideline of the remaining count of the latent definite state displayed in the remaining count display region D1 of the third symbol display device 81 in the latent definite state. 120 is set in the effect probability variation count area 223p when the state is shifted from another game state to the probability state (see S4505 in FIG. 240). In addition, the value is subtracted by 1 each time the special symbol is varied in the latent certainty state (see S4657 in FIG. 242).

Special figure 1 standby flag 223s and special figure 2 standby flag 223t are flags indicating whether or not the fluctuation stop state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has continued for 30 seconds or more, respectively, and if it is on It indicates that the corresponding special symbols have been stopped from fluctuating for 30 seconds or more. On the other hand, if it is off, it indicates that the corresponding special symbol is fluctuating or within 3 seconds after the fluctuation stop state. These special figure 1 standby flag 223s and special figure 2 standby flag 223t are turned on when the count value of special figure 1 standby counter 223k and special figure 2 standby counter 223n respectively becomes a value corresponding to 30 seconds It is set (see S4204 and S4208 in FIG. 237).

The standby setting completion flag 223u refers to the screen display selection table 222b (see FIG. 200) with reference to the screen display selection table 222b (see FIG. 200), and the demonstration production (See FIGS. 186(b), 186(c) and 187(c)). This standby set flag 223u is set to ON when a new screen display is set by referring to the screen display selection table 223b in the customer waiting effect process (see FIG. 237) (see S4212 in FIG. 237). ). Also, when the special figure 1 standby flag 223s or the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON (see S4204, S4208 in FIG. 237), the special figure 1 standby flag 223s or the special figure 2 When the standby flag 223t is newly set to OFF, the standby set flag 223u is set to OFF.

The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not there has been a momentary power failure. The power-off flag 223y receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 and is set to ON before the power-off process is executed (see S4115 in FIG. 236). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain period of time (100 milliseconds) has passed. Therefore, when the power-off flag 223y is on (see 1508: Yes in FIG. 42) in the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 235), the power-off flag 223y is set to on and then This is when the audio lamp controller 113 starts up before the time (100 milliseconds) elapses, that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 is not deleted, and unnecessary information (or incomplete information due to the deletion of only part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there is a case, the information in the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S4009 in FIG. 235). As a result, processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

Next, referring to FIG. 201, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 201 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third pattern display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The data of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. to store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third pattern display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR-type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND-type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 should be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 244) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 244) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 207) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws one frame of a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c to be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 246(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display control device 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance is displayed. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variable image that displays the lottery result performed by main controller 110 in a variable effect when a ball entering the mouth 1640 is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 244).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 202 . FIG. 202 shows a power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. 202(a). The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 performs the command shown in FIG. 202(b). As shown in FIG. 202(c), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a variation image at power-on with a "○" pattern at the lower right position of the screen, and a "○" at power-on as shown in FIG. A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit with special design", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Also, when the power is turned on, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player starts the game, and the ball is detected to enter the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640. 202(b) and 202(c), the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display on the third pattern display device 81 at 10:00 a.m. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640 while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed in the third symbol. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

Returning to FIG. 201, the description continues. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 203, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. FIG. 203 is an explanatory diagram for explaining four kinds of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 203(b) shows the back faces B to D corresponding to the "forest stage", "river stage", and "empty stage", respectively, with respect to back face A corresponding to "town stage". . Also, FIG. 204 is shown with respect to the back surface E corresponding to the "island stage".

As shown in FIG. 203, the character ROM 234 prepares back images corresponding to the respective back images A to D, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When a change in the back surface type is determined based on the back surface type selection table 222b and the stage is changed to "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "sky stage", the MPU 231 selects the corresponding back surface. First, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the initial position of the display area is set between position a and position a′ of the image, and the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . As time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the positions a to c by repeatedly scrolling smoothly in a leftward direction.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 204, the rear image on the rear surface E shows the third pattern in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→ . . . It is displayed on the display device 81 . Specifically, on the back side E, an image of a mountain towering over an island, an image of a sandy beach at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed as the third pattern in a state where the displayed positions are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81 . On the other hand, an image of the sky that spreads over the mountains changes its color tone over time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the back image shown in FIG. 204(a) is displayed as the initial back image of the back E. FIG. In the rear image shown in FIG. 204(a), an orange sky indicating morning glow is displayed. As time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 204(b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 204(b), a clear blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, as time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 204(c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 204(c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and further to orange. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 204(a) is restored, and the rear images shown in FIGS.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 203(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the street stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage "town stage" is displayed. By keeping all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "sky stage" are shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. Further, the back side E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 204(a), and the image data corresponding to the back side images between FIGS. is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident during the start-up process.

Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235 . As such, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a' (or the range shown in FIGS. 204(a) to (b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, if a stage change is determined by a lottery at the start of fluctuation, the resident video RAM 235 can be stored on the back side of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back faces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and scroll display or color tone change with the passage of time. can be displayed while In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images are stored for back faces B to D, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In addition, after the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear faces B to D, the image data stored in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to turn the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

204(a) to 204(b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 after the image at the initial position is displayed. 204(a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 204(b) to (c) and FIGS. to (b) is set. As a result, image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 204(b)-(c) and 204(c)-(a) are normally used while the images of FIGS. 204(a)-(b) are displayed. 204(a)-(b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. 204(b) to (c) and FIGS. 204(c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with the lapse of time using the image data corresponding to the rear image obtained. be able to.

Image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 in the rear-side images B to E is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear-side images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 201) of the normal-use video RAM 236. FIG. As a result, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the rear faces B to D, the image data stored in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to images between position b' and position b. image data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 201, the description continues. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640, although the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable performance is not immediately started.

In addition, in the third design area 235d, as the main designs to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main design consisting of the rear design such as a wooden box, and the rear design and characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of the accessory pattern which imitates is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, it does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but stores the resident data. By reading out the image data previously resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

It should be noted that the transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

By providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, as described above, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image for one frame developed earlier can be read out from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a background image change flag 233w, a background image determination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a fixed display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main controller 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is a performance for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state from now on and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round performance will start from now on. This is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is a effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the people involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to an opening effect, a round effect, an ending effect, and a demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 205 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. The type of back face is the back face A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information specifying whether to display one of the back images or to display a back image different from the back images A to E is described. Further, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to E, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image is to be displayed.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to E is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back faces A to E as a drawing target, In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to E, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed according to the back surface type, and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81 display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether or not the back surface image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H" which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 205) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 207), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order defined in the display data table, so the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in a conventional pachinko machine, if a program to be executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is generated for each frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 206, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 206 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that should be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 206). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 206).

The transfer data information includes the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table. "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 207) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 206, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, since the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can easily display various effects images. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not the third pattern display device 81 displays the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. flag to indicate This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 244) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 244). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S7605 in FIG. 255(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 246(b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 246(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 246(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 247 to 251) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 252 to 254) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 255(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 255(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 256) is executed to transfer image data required for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the rendering content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 207), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f one by one, the MPU 231 draws an image for the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 207), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 207) described later, which describes the contents of image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of image is completed (FIG. 246(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 252) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list described later. (see FIG. 207), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 207 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (pattern) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. Therefore, the type and address of the storage RAM where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (FIG. 246(b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 252). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. perform various operations to

The storage image data discrimination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S6002 in FIG. 244) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The storage image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 256) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, the stored state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 256). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 256). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing for that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. The information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 257).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of drawing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 246(b)) is performed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not the type of the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is to be changed. If the back image change flag 233w is ON, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is OFF, it means that no change is made. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when a back image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 251(a)). The back image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 256), and is set to OFF when the back image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 256). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the presentation mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag consists of, for example, 1 byte, and each bit is associated with each rear face type. If any bit of the back image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the bit that is on is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image determination flag 233x is ON, it means that the rear surface A is set. In the rear image determination flag 233x, when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 251(a)). ) of S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily identified.

The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 252) (see S7221 in FIG. 252). is set to off when a display data table other than the display data table buffer 233d is set to the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 248(a), S6705 in FIG. 249(a), S6805 in FIG. 249(b) , S6905 in FIG. 250). With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration effect is currently being performed.

The fixed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect means the effect of stopping display (fixed display) of the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is ON, it means that the confirmation display effect is being performed, and if it is OFF, it means that the confirmation display effect is not being performed. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 252) (S7214 in FIG. 252). It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 248(a), S6705 in FIG. 249(a), S6805 in FIG. 249(b), FIG. 250 S6905). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmation display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 208 to 234. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this control example). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 208 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the second per random number counter C4 and the small per type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the second per random number counter C4 and the small per type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum value (in this control example 479, 99, 232, 99) are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2, C4 and C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104). After that, a starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the start winning process, the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 and the normal symbol variation process for performing the process associated with the passage of the ball in the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 are executed ( S106). Details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the normal symbol variation process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and further, other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 209, special symbol variation processing (S104), which is one processing of the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 209 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104), various judgments and determinations are made based on each counter value acquired based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 1640, and predetermined In the variable display mode determined by the control of , the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 can be controlled to simultaneously perform variable display, or control to stop display in the display mode showing the determination result. is executed. The special symbol variation processing (FIG. 209, S104) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (whether or not the jackpot flag 203u is ON) (S201). 203u is ON) (S201: Yes), since there is no need to set special symbol lottery or stop variable display, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (the jackpot flag 203u is off) (S201: No), whether or not the small hit game is in progress (whether the small hit flag 203v is on) is determined (S202). In the process of S202, when it is determined that the small winning medium flag 203v is on (S202: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not during the small hit (the flag 203v during the small hit is off) (S202: No), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S203). When it is determined that the first special symbol is displayed in a variable display (S203: Yes), in the first special symbol variation stop process (S205), when the variable time of the first special symbol in the variable display has passed , a first special symbol variation stop process for stopping and displaying a stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol is executed (S205), and the process proceeds to S206. In addition, in the first special symbol variation stop processing (S205), when the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the stop symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is forcibly removed. Stop display processing is executed. The details of this first special symbol variation stop process (S205) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S203, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not displayed in a variable display (S203: No), at least one reserved data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. On the condition that it has been done, the first special symbol variation start processing is executed for executing the jackpot determination and variation pattern selection processing based on the reserved data (S204), and the processing proceeds to S206. The details of this first special symbol variation start process (S204) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the processing of S206 executed after the first special symbol variation start processing (S204) or the first special symbol variation stop processing (S205) is performed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. (S206), if the variation display of the second special symbol is being performed (S206: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process is executed (S208), and this process is terminated. In this second special symbol variation stop process (S208), similarly to the first special symbol variation stop process (S205), when the prescribed variation time of the second special symbol during variable display has passed, the second special symbol It is a process for setting the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the lottery result. Details of the second special symbol variation stop processing (S208) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 220 and 221. FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S206, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable display (S206: No), on the condition that a new start winning to the second entrance 1640 is detected, the second A special symbol lottery is executed to execute a second special symbol variation start process for setting the start of a new variation display (S207), and this process is terminated. The details of this second special symbol variation start process (S207) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

Next, with reference to FIG. 210, the first special symbol variation start process (S204), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104), will be described. FIG. 210 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S204).

In the first special symbol variation start process (Fig. 210, S204), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the acquired value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter It is determined whether (N1) is greater than 0 (S302). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 1 is subtracted (S303), and a reserved ball number command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after the subtraction is set (S304). .

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 227) executed by the MPU 201, voice It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c. Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c is updated, the first special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

When the process of S304 is finished, next, the data in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the previous data (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.

When the process of S305 is completed, then, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). This first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 211, S306) will be described later in detail. It is a process for executing a big win determination as to whether or not a big win is made based on the set game state.

When the process of S306 is finished, next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (FIG. 212, S307). Although the details will be described later, this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) includes the determination result of the first special symbol and the variation type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of CS1.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is finished, next, the game state update process is executed (S308). This game state update process (FIG. 213, S308) will be described in detail later, but by updating the values of various counters (probability variable counter 203k, time reduction counter 203g) indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 This is processing for updating the state. When the process of S308 ends, the special figure 1 standby flag 203i is set to off, and the special figure 1 standby command indicating off is set (S309), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S302: No), whether the special figure 1 standby flag 203i is ON It is determined (S310), and if it is determined that it is on (S310: Yes), this processing is terminated. In the process of S310, when it is determined that it is off (that is, not on) (S310: No), the special figure 1 standby flag 203i is set to on (S311), and the special figure 1 standby command indicating on After setting (S312), this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 211, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 210, S204), will be described. FIG. 211 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 211, S306), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable probability counter 203k is 1 or more (S402). That is, it is determined whether or not it is in a high probability state (probability variable state of special symbols). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol) (S402: Yes), the first per random number table 202a for high probability When it is defined as a jackpot It is determined whether or not the random value obtained from the counter buffer matches the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the determination result (lottery result) is obtained (S403). On the other hand, in the process of S402, when it is determined that the probability variation counter 203k is 0 (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S402: No), the first per random number table 202a for low probability It is determined whether or not the specified random value for the big win matches the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is obtained (S404).

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in S403 or S404 is a big hit (S405), and if the lottery result is a big hit (S405: Yes), the big hit flag 203m is set to ON for the first special symbol. (S406), the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a big hit (S407). Then, based on the value of the obtained win type counter, the first special symbol jackpot symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S408), and the value corresponding to the current game status is stored in the winning status storage area. 203n (S409), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S405, when it is determined that the lottery result is lost (S405: No), the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S410), and then , the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 212, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 210, S204), will be described. FIG. 212 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 212, S307), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 211, S306), whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, that is, the first It is determined whether or not a jackpot of 1 special symbol is set (S501). Here, whether or not the big hit is determined is determined by whether or not the big hit flag 203m is turned on for the first special symbol. This jackpot flag 203m is set to ON in the processing of S406 in the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 211).

In the process of S501, when it is determined that the first special symbol jackpot is set (S501: Yes), the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) acquired in the process of S401 Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 193(a)) (S502), and the process proceeds to S503.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (that is, the jackpot flag 203m for the first special symbol is off) (S501: No), the process of S502 is performed. Skip and move to the processing of S503.

In the processing of S503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S503). Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 194 to 196) corresponding to the game state is read out (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. The game state is determined based on the value of the variable probability counter 203k and the value of the time reduction counter 203g. In the process of S505, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S505), and then based on the selected variation pattern, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set ( S506).

When the processing of S506 ends, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop design is set (S507). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the first special symbol (S508), and ends this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 213, the game state update process (S308), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 210), will be described. FIG. 213 is a flow chart showing this game state update process (S308).

When the gaming state update process (see FIG. 213) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable probability counter 203k is greater than 0 (S601). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 0 (S601: No), the processes of S602 to S605 are skipped and the process proceeds to S606. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variable counter 203k is greater than 0 (S601: Yes), the value of the probability variable counter is subtracted by 1 (S602), and a remaining probability variable number command indicating the value of the probability variable counter is set ( S603).

The remaining probability variation count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 227), which will be described later. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . Upon receiving the residual probability variation number command, the audio ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the probability variation counter 203k from the residual probability variation number command, and stores the extracted value in the residual probability variation number area 223o of the RAM 223. In this way, the sound ramp control device 113 updates the value of the remaining probability variation count area 223o in accordance with the pending ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that it is synchronized with the value of the probability variation counter 203k of the main controller 110. while you can update its value. As a result, it is possible for the sound lamp control device 113 side to accurately grasp whether or not it is in the latent state, and to execute the corresponding effect.

When the process of S603 ends, it is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 203k after subtraction is 0 (S604), and if it is determined that the value after subtraction is not 0 (S604: No), S605 Skip the process and move to the process of S606. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203k is 0 (S604: Yes), a state command indicating a normal state is set (S605), and the process proceeds to S606.

In the process of S606, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203g is greater than 0 (S606), and if the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 (S606: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S606, if it is determined that the time reduction counter 203g is greater than 0 (S606: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S607), and a remaining time reduction number command indicating the value of the time reduction counter is set. After (S608), this process is terminated.

The remaining time reduction command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 227) described later. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the short remaining time command, it extracts the value of the short working time counter 203g from the short remaining time command and stores the extracted value in the short remaining time area 223q of the RAM223. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the remaining time reduction number area 223q according to the pending ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that it is synchronized with the value of the time reduction counter 203g of the main control device 110. while you can update its value.

Next, referring to FIG. 214, the first special symbol variation stop process (S205), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104), will be described. FIG. 214 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing (S205).

In the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 214, S205), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation display of the first special symbol (S701), and if it is determined that it is the end timing ( S701: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203m is set to ON for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) (S702). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203m is set to ON for the first special symbol (S702: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to ON (S703), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop Set the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the flag 203p has been turned on (S704). Next, the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a deviated symbol (S705).

When the processing of S705 is completed, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S706), and the jackpot flag 203m, probability variation counter 203k, and time reduction counter 203g are reset (S707). Next, the jackpot medium flag 203u is set to ON (S708), and the process proceeds to S709.

On the other hand, in the process of S702, if the jackpot flag 203m is set to OFF for the first special symbol (S702: No), the process of S703 to S708 is skipped and the process proceeds to S709.

In the process of S709, a special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of fixing and stopping the first special symbol is set (S709). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (S710), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S701, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable display of the first special symbol being executed (S701: No), the display of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated ( S711), the process ends.

Thus, in the first special symbol stop processing (S205), when the prescribed fluctuation time of the first special symbol during variable display has elapsed (S701: Yes), the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game Processing (S703 to S710) for stopping the variable display is executed. Also, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (S702: Yes), a process (S703, S704) of forcibly stopping the second special symbol during variable display is executed.

In this first control example, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol during variable display is forcibly stopped and displayed as a deviated symbol. is not limited to For example, it may be configured such that the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped) when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol is finished, the variable display of the second special symbol may be restarted. As a result, it is possible to produce a more natural presentation than when the game is forcibly stopped due to a failure. In addition, in this control example, a jackpot scenario is set in the processing of S706 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203n in the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 211). For example, a jackpot scenario is set in the processing of S706 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203n in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) using the opening period of the jackpot game. You may make it

Next, with reference to FIG. 215, the second special symbol variation start process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104), will be described. FIG. 215 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation start process (S207).

In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 215, S207), first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203p is set to ON (S801). If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to ON (S801: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to OFF, and this process is terminated. Special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p, as described above, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol ends, is a flag that is set to ON while causing the stop symbol corresponding to the second special symbol to be stopped and displayed. . That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is ON, it means that the big hit is started, so the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. Therefore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is ON in the process of S801, without executing each process of S802 to S810 to set the start of fluctuation, the process is configured to end as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S801, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S801: No), the second entrance 1640 It is determined whether or not winning has been detected (S802). If the winning to the second ball entrance 1640 is detected (S802: Yes), next, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1, and the small per type counter C5 Each value is acquired and stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b (S803), and the second special symbol jackpot determination process for executing the second special symbol jackpot determination is executed based on each stored counter value. (S804). The details of this second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S804 is completed, then, based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S803, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern is performed. Execute (S805). The details of this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S805) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S805 is completed, the above-described game state update processing (see FIG. 213) is executed (S806), and the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is set to off, and the special figure 2 standby command indicating off is issued. After setting (S807), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S801, if it is determined that the winning to the second ball entrance 1640 is not detected (S801: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is on (S808 ), if it is ON (S808: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S808, when it is determined that the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is off, the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is set to on (S809), and the second special symbol is in a fluctuation stop state. Set a special figure 2 standby command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of that (S810), and terminate this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 216, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S804), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 215, S207), will be described. FIG. 216 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S804).

In this second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 216, S804), the same process as the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) is executed, so the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 211 ) will be mainly explained.

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S804) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203b is acquired (S901). Then, the processing of S902 to S904 for acquiring the lottery result as to whether or not the jackpot is won is executed based on each acquired counter value and the value of the variable probability counter 203k. In each of these processes, the only difference is that the counter value used for the lottery (judgment) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b. control is executed.

When the processing of S903 or S904 ends, it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (S905), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (S905: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is obtained. The processing of S906 to S909 for setting the jackpot is executed, and this processing ends. In each of these S906 to S909 processes, the same processes as those of S406 to S409 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol to the big hit in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) are executed. be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S905, when it is determined that the obtained lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big hit (S905: No), a small hit of the second special symbol or a stop symbol corresponding to the loss is set. Special figure 2 deviation processing is executed (S910), and this processing ends. Details of this special figure 2 deviation variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing this special figure 2 deviation variation process (S909).

In the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation process (S909), first, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in the process of S903 or S904 in FIG. 216 is a small hit of the second special symbol (S1001), and the lottery result If so (S1001: Yes), the small hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1002), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a small hit (S1003). Then, the small winning symbol indicating the small winning type corresponding to the acquired value of the small winning type counter C5 is set as the stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S1004), and the process is finished.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is lost in the process of S1001 (S1001: No), the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1005), and then, End this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 218, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S805), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 215, S805), will be described. FIG. 218 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S805).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 212, S307), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b (S1101). Next, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 216, S804), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the second special symbol jackpot is set. (S1102). Here, whether or not the big win is determined is determined by whether or not the big win flag 203m is turned on for the second special symbol. This jackpot flag 203m is set to ON in the processing of S906 in the above-described second special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 216).

In the process of S1102, when it is determined that the second special symbol jackpot is set (S1102: Yes), the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 195 and 1196) corresponding to the current game state is read. (S1103). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in the process of S901 in the above-described second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 216), the jackpot from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 193 (a)) The type is determined (S1105).

When the process of S1105 is completed, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S1105), and then, based on the selected variation pattern, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is set. (S1106). Then, the process proceeds to S1108.

On the other hand, in the process of S1102, when it is determined that the second special symbol jackpot is not set (S1102: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1107) is executed, and the process of S1108 Transition.

In the process of S1108, the special figure 2 stop classification command which shows a stop design is set (S1108). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the second special symbol (S1109), and then terminates this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 219, this special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1107) will be described. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process (S1107).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (FIG. 219, S1107), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S1201). Here, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1201). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203o is ON (S1201: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S1202). Then, based on the obtained value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 192(b)), the small hit type is selected (S1203).

Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 195 and 1196) corresponding to the current gaming state is read (S1204), and from the read variation pattern selection table, the small per variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected (S1205). After that, set the special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the selected small hit variation pattern (S1206), and terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out) (S1201: No), the variation pattern selection table (Fig. 195 and FIG. 1196) is read (S1207), and from the read variation pattern selection table, an outlier variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected (S1208). After that, based on the variation pattern of the selected deviation, set the special figure 2 variation pattern command (S1209), and terminate this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 220, the second special symbol variation stop process (S208), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104), will be described. FIG. 220 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation stop process (S208).

In the second special symbol variation stop processing (S208), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variation based on the second special symbol being executed (S1301). In the process of S1301, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the variation based on the second special symbol being executed (S1301: Yes), the jackpot flag 203m is turned on for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is set (S1303). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203m is set to ON for the second special symbol (S1303: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the fluctuation stop of the special figure 1 is set (S1305), The process proceeds to S1306.

Next, the processing after S1306 differs from the processing after S705 of the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 214, S205) in the following points. In the processing of S1306 and S1312 corresponding to the processing of S705 and S711, the point that the first special symbol is changed to the second special symbol, and in the processing of S1311 corresponding to the processing of S710, the special figure 1 confirmation command is a special figure 2 in that it is changed to a definite command. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variation based on the second special symbol being executed (S1301: No), the display of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated ( S1302), the process ends. In addition, in the processing of S1303, if the jackpot flag 203m is set to OFF for the second special symbol (S1303: No), special figure 2 out stop processing is executed (S1304), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 221, special figure 2 deviation stop processing (S1304), which is one processing of the second special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 220, S208), will be described. FIG. 221 is a flow chart showing this special figure 2 deviating stop process (S1304).

In the special figure 2 deviating stop processing (Fig. 221, S1304), first, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1401). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1401: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the fluctuation stop of the special figure 1 is set (S1402). Next, the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a deviated symbol (S1403).

After completing the processing of S1403, a small winning scenario based on the selected small winning type is set (S1404). After that, the small hit flag 203o is set to OFF (S140, and the small hit medium flag 203v is set to ON (S1406).

When the processing of S1406 ends, the special figure 2 decision command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to decide and stop the second special symbol is set (S1407). After that, the second special symbol, which is being variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 37, stops variably in the small hit symbol (S1408), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1401, when it is determined that the small hit flag 203o is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out) (S1401: No), the second special symbol is fixed and stopped. Set a special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing that to the audio lamp control device 113 (S1409). After that, the second special symbol that is being variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 37 is deviated and the variation is stopped with the symbol (S1410), and this process is terminated.

As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be independently executable in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously varied. can be displayed. Therefore, lottery games with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined period of time, and the probability that a player will receive a big win within the predetermined period of time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In this control example, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed as a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, it is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be temporarily stopped or variably displayed while the measurement of the variability time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbols are stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can understand that the temporary stop is being performed, so that the player can see that the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display disappears. It is possible to grasp that the player is not in the game, and the player can play the jackpot game with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 222, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 208) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 222 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). The start winning process (FIG. 222, S105) determines whether the game ball has won the first start port (first ball entrance) 64, and if it wins, the upper limit number of reservations Up to 4), it is a process of storing each acquired counter value in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a , a process of predicting the result of determination of suitability, the variation pattern to be selected, etc. is executed in advance. The starting winning process (FIG. 222, S105) will be described below.

In the starting winning process (FIG. 222, S105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first starting opening 64 (starting winning) (S1101). Here, winning to the first ball entrance 64 is detected. When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 64 (there has been a starting prize) (S1501: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is obtained (S1502). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1503). It is determined whether this is less than 4, which is the upper limit of the number of reservations for the first starting port 64 (that is, whether the number of reservations is stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1503: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (1504). A reserved pitch number command for notifying the reserved number to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S1505). Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1, which are various counter values, is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S1506).

Next, based on each stored counter value, the determination result of the first special symbol, the determined hit type, and the variation pattern are predicted (S1507). Then, the winning information command including the predicted result of determination of the first special symbol, the winning type, and the variation pattern is set (S1508), and this process is finished.

Thus, in this control example, when the game ball wins the first starting port (first ball entrance) 64 and is newly stored on hold, based on the information stored on hold, the winning/failure determination result is determined before the start of fluctuation and notified to the audio ramp controller 113 . As a result, based on the hold-stored hit/fail judgment result, the display mode of the hold ball is changed (for example, the color of the hold ball is changed to a different color than usual) and displayed, or before the start of variation It is possible to execute an effect to suggest the result of winning/failure determination to the player by displaying the notice pattern or the like.

Next, with reference to FIG. 223, normal design variation processing (S106), which is one processing of the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 223 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variable display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display unit 88, the opening time of the electric accessory 1640a, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 223, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting. (S1601). Winning of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes the period from when the winning is displayed on the second symbol display device (not shown) to when the electric accessory 1640a is controlled to open and close. When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S1601: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S1601: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol of the second symbol display device is being variably displayed (S1602). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being changed and displayed (S1602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S1618 ). It should be noted that the variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S1617, which will be described later, before the variable display is started in the second symbol display unit (not shown).

In the process of S1011, if the variation time has not elapsed (S1618: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1618, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbols displayed in a variable manner has passed (S1618: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1619). In the processing of S1619, if the lottery of normal symbols is won and the display mode is set by the processing of S1613, the second symbol display device (not shown) stops the "○" symbol as the second symbol. It is set to be displayed (lit display). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode at the time of loss is set by the processing of S1615, the second symbol display device (not shown) displays the "x" symbol as the second symbol. It is set so that it is stopped (lighted up). When the stop display is set by the process of S1619, the variable display on the second symbol display device is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in the second symbol in the display mode set by the process of S1613 and the process of S1615. Stopped display (lighting display) is performed on the symbol display device.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a win (S1620). When it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a hit (S1620: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 1640a is set (S1621). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a loss (S1620: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1602, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not displayed in a variable display (S1602: No), the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203e (the number M of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1603).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S1604), and when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S1604: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S1604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S1605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1606). In the process of S1606, the data stored in the normal design reservation first to fourth areas of the normal design reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, normal design reservation 1st area → execution area, normal design reservation 2nd area → normal design reservation 1st area, normal design reservation 3rd area → normal design reservation 2nd area, normal design reservation 4th area → Shift the data in each area such as the third area for normal design reservation. After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S1607).

Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the time saving state (S1608). More specifically, when the value of the time saving counter 203g is 1 or more, it is determined that the time saving state. In the process of S1608, if it is determined that it is not in the time saving state (S1608: No), based on the hit determination value of the normal per symbol random number table for low probability (see FIG. 192 (c)), the success or failure determination A result is acquired (S1611). On the other hand, in the process of S1608, when it is determined that the time saving game is in progress (S1608: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1609). In the process of S1609, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1609: Yes), the process of S1611 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in the jackpot (S1609: No), the hit determination value of the normal symbol random number table for high probability (see FIG. 192 (c)) Based on this, the result of the suitability determination is acquired (S1610).

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery of the second symbol (normal symbol) is hit (S1612), and when it is determined that the result of the lottery of the second symbol (normal symbol) is not hit (that is, it is lost). (S1612: No), the display mode of "x", which is the display mode when out, is set (S1615), and the process proceeds to S1616. On the other hand, in the process of S1612, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is winning (that is, winning) (S1612: Yes), the display mode at the time of winning is "○". is set (S1613).

Next, the electric accessory 1640a is set to 1 second for an open period and 2 times for the number of times of opening (S1614). Then, in the process of S1616 to be executed after executing the process of S1614 or S1615, the normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202g (see FIG. 197) is read (S1616), the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 from the read normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202g A variable time corresponding to the value of is set (S1617), and this process ends.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 224 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 208) to determine whether or not a game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 when there is.

In the through gate passing process (FIG. 224, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1701). Here, passage of a game ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained. (S1702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example) (S1703).

Whether the game ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1701: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter If the value (M) of 203e is not less than 4 (S1703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), normal The value (M) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S1704).

When the processing of S1704 is finished, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 208) is stored in the free reservation area (reservation first area to the fourth reserved area) (S1705), and the process ends. In the process of S1705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the lottery based on the second special symbol is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol. Therefore, the state in which the ball can enter the second ball entrance 1640 provided by winning the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is a game state more advantageous than the normal game state.

By indicating the timing at which such a game state is provided based on the pre-determined result of the normal game, the player can play the game without missing a game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state. It should be noted that, when the production is performed using the preliminary determination result of such a general pattern, not only the production based on the result of the judgment of the general pattern, but also the electric accessory 1640a in the case where the general pattern is determined to be hit is opened. It is good to perform a production that suggests the timing of By doing so, in the normal game state, the game is played aiming at the game area on the left side of the game board 13, and the second ball entrance 1640 (the ball entrance accompanied by the electric accessory 1640a) is the game board 13. Even if it is arranged on the right side, it is possible to switch to a game aiming at the right side of the game board 13 (so-called right hitting) before the electric accessory 1640a performs the opening operation, and it is a normal game state. Also, there is an effect that the possibility of a ball entering the second ball entrance 1640 can be increased.

225 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as power-off occurrence information setting (S1801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

Incidentally, the above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, referring to FIG. 226, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 226 is a flow chart showing this startup process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 226), first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this control example) is executed. (S1902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3132) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1904), and if it is turned on (S1904: Yes), the process proceeds to S1910. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3132) is not turned on (S1904: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1905). : No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S1910.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1906). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S1910, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1910). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization processing of RAM 203 (S1911, S1912).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall opens, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (Fig. 3132). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3132) is pushed during execution of startup processing, initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1911, S1912) is executed.

Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1911, S1912) is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S1911, S1912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1912). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1913.

On the other hand, the RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3132) is not turned on (S1904: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. If there is (S1907: Yes), the data backed up in the RAM 203 is retained, and the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1908). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S1909), and the process proceeds to S1910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1913). After that, each value of the variable probability counter 203k and the time saving counter 203g is read (S1914), and a state command is set based on the read counter value (S1915). After the process of S1915 is completed, the interrupt is permitted (S1916), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 227, the main process (S2000) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up process described above will be described. FIG. 227 is a flow chart showing this main process (S2000). This main process (S2000) is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process (FIG. 227, S2000), first, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 223 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 208) is sent to each sub side. External output processing for transmission to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S2001).

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S2002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 .

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2003). A jackpot control process is executed (S2004). Details of this jackpot control process (S2004) will be described later with reference to FIG. 228, but a process of setting the operation of the variable winning device 65 in the jackpot game is executed.

After the big hit game process (S2004) is executed, the small hit control process (S2005) is executed. This small winning control process will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, an electric accessary product opening/closing process is executed (S2006). In this electric accessary product opening/closing process (S2006), the opening/closing process of the electric accessary product 1640a is executed. Thereafter, display control processing of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S2007).

Next, display control processing of the second pattern (for example, the pattern of "o" or "x") by the second pattern display device 83 is executed (S2008). Briefly, on the condition that the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of passing, and the second symbol display device 83 Then, the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) is carried out. Then, a lottery for the second symbol (normal symbol) is carried out according to the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the second symbol (normal symbol) wins, the electric accessory 1640a is opened for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2009). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S2010). If the predetermined time (4 ms) has already passed (S2010: Yes), the process proceeds to S2001, and the above-described processes after S2001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S2010: No), the second main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (479, 232 in this control example), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffers of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S2002 (S2012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S2001 to S2008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and displayed as a variable. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S2009, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S2009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 225 is executed, so the processing at power-off from S2013 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S2013), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S2014). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S2015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2016), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

In addition, the processing of S2009 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S2001 to S2008, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S2011 and S2012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S2001. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S2001 as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the initialization process (FIG. 226, S1901) By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S2001 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S2004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 228 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S2004). This jackpot control processing (S2004) is executed in the main interrupt processing (see FIG. 227), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, specific winning This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 228, S2004), first, it is determined whether a jackpot scenario is set (S2101). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario is not set (S2101: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S2101, if it is determined that the jackpot scenario is set (S2101: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (S2102), and it is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the jackpot scenario (S2103). ). More specifically, in the processing of S2102, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown), and in the processing of S2103, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) is the opening start of the jackpot scenario. Determine whether the value corresponds to

In the processing of S2103, when it is determined that it is time to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S2103: Yes), an opening command for jackpot is set (S2104), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no timing to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S2103: No), then it is determined whether it is time to start a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2105).

In the processing of S2105, if it is determined that it is time to start a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting processing is executed (S2106), and this processing ends. The details of this jackpot operation setting process (S2106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2105 that it is not the time to start a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2105: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the round currently being executed has been met ( S2107). Here, in this control example, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 5) are won in total while the specific winning opening 65a is open, or when the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a elapses for a predetermined period of time. If so, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the round end condition of the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S2107: Yes), the processing of S2108 sets the specific winning opening 65a to be closed (opening/closing plate of the first specific winning opening 65a 65f1 is set to be in a closed state), and this process is terminated. It should be noted that the determination process of S2105 to S2107 described above is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the big win set in the big win scenario.

On the other hand, in the process of S2107, if it is determined that the round end condition of the round currently being executed is not established (S2107: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S2109), and the ending effect is determined. If it is the start timing of (S2109: Yes), the ending command for big hits is set (S2110), and this process is completed. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S2001) of the main processing (see FIG. 227). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the big win.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2109, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2109: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2111). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed. In the process of S2111, when it is determined that it is time to end the big win (S2111: Yes), the big win end process for setting the gaming state after the big win ends (S2112), and this process ends. The details of this jackpot ending process (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S2111: No), the first winning process is executed (S2113), and this process ends. Details of the first winning process (S2113) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 229, the jackpot operation setting process (S2106), which is one process in the jackpot control process (FIG. 228, S2004), will be described. FIG. 229 is a flow chart showing the contents of this jackpot operation setting process (S2106). In the jackpot action setting process (FIG. 229, S2106), first, the opening scenario in which the opening action corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to start is set is read (S2201). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k (see FIG. 179) is set based on the data read in S2201 (S2202). The opening operation is set according to the data read in the process of S2201 (S2203), and this process ends.

In this way, each operation of the variable prize winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big win game, the big win game will end in the middle. Defects can be suppressed.

In addition, in this control example, in the case of a small winning game, the operation of the variable probability solenoid 65k is not set, and only the opening operation of the opening/closing plate 65f1 is set. The small prize consists of two rounds, and the opening/closing plate 65f1 is opened for one second in each round.

Next, with reference to FIG. 230, the jackpot ending process (S2112), which is one process in the jackpot control process (FIG. 228, S2004) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. This jackpot end process (S2112) is, as described above, a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends. FIG. 230 is a flow chart showing the contents of this jackpot ending process (S2112).

In the jackpot ending process (FIG. 230, S2112), first, based on the winning state storage area 203n, the gaming state at the time of winning is specified (S2301). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning is the latent state (S2302). In the process of S2302, if it is determined that the game state at the time of winning is not the latent state (S2302: No), it is determined whether the V winning flag 203f is ON (S2303). In the processing of S2303, if it is determined that the V winning flag 203f is ON (S2303: Yes), it means that the ball has passed through the V passage switch 65e3 during the big hit this time, so the value of the variable probability counter 203k is set to 120 (S2304).

Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot types are jackpots B to D (S2305). If it is not a big hit B to D (S2305: No), the value of the time saving counter 203g is set to 120 (S2306), and the process proceeds to S2307.

On the other hand, in the process of S2302, if it is determined that the game state at the time of winning is the latent state (S2302: Yes), or in the process of S2303, if the V winning flag 203f is off (that is, not on). If it is determined (S2303: No), or if it is not a jackpot B to D in the process of S2305 (S2305: No), the process proceeds to S307. Thus, when the game state at the time of winning is not the latent state, and when the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch 65e3 during the big win, the game state after the big win is set to the normal state. Further, when the game ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 and the hit type is the big hit B to D, the 120 times probability variable state is set after the big hit. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 and the hit type is the jackpot A, the variable probability state of 120 times and the time saving state of 100 times are set after the jackpot.

In the process of S2307, both the jackpot medium flag 203u and the V prize winning flag 203f are set to OFF, and the winning state storage area 203n is cleared (S2207). After that, a state command corresponding to the set game state is set (S2308), and this process is terminated.

Thus, in this control example, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the variable probability setting flag 203h is ON, and if it is ON, the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V passage switch 65e3, and a high probability game state can be set. Therefore, the player can continue to expect the transition to the high probability game state (latent probability variable game state ST2 or probability variable game state ST3) until the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, if the game ball can be passed through the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, a high probability game state (latent probability variable game state ST2 or probability variable game state ST3) is given after the jackpot game, so during the jackpot game Also, the player can play the game with an interest in whether or not the game ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3.

Next, with reference to FIG. 231, details of the first winning process (S2113) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing this first winning process (S2113). This first winning process (S2113) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 228), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a. be.

In the first winning process (FIG. 231, S2113), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is reached (S2401). Here, the round effective period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from when the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is set to the open state to when the interval period (5 seconds) ends. is. In the process of S2401, if it is not the round valid period (S2401: No), the prize winning counter 203h is reset (S2402), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2401, if it is determined that the current round is valid (S2401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not winning to the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a has been detected (S2403), If the winning to the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is not detected (S2403: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2403, if winning for the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is detected (S2403: Yes), the value of the winning counter 203h is updated by adding 1 (S2404). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 203h is equal to or greater than the upper limit (5 in this control example) (S2405), and if the value of the winning counter 203h is equal to or less than the upper limit (5 in this control example) ( S2405: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter 203h is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (5 in this control example) (S2405: Yes), the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a (opening/closing plate 65f1 attached thereto) is set. (S2406). Next, the jackpot scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2407), and it is determined whether the V winning flag 203f is ON (S2408). If the V winning flag 203f is ON (S2408: Yes), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the V winning flag 203f is off (that is, not on) (S2408: No), it is determined whether the V passage switch 65e3 is on (S2409). In the process of S2409, if the V pass switch 65e3 is off (that is, not on) (S2409: No), this process ends.

In the process of S2409, if the V passage switch 65e3 is ON (S2409: Yes), the V winning flag is set ON. Then, a V winning command is set, and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 232, the small winning control process (S2005), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 227) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 227 is a flow chart showing the contents of this small winning control process (S2005).

In the small hit control process (FIG. 232, S2005), first, it is determined whether a small hit scenario is set (S2501). Specifically, the process of S1404 of the special figure 2 deviating stop process (see FIG. 221) is executed, and it is determined whether a small hit scenario is set. In the process of S2501, if the small winning scenario is not set (S2501: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501, if the small winning scenario is set (S2501: Yes), the small winning scenario is updated (S2502), and it is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the small winning scenario (S2503). More specifically, in the processing of S2502, 1 is added to the counter value of the small winning scenario counter (not shown), and in the processing of S2503, the counter value of the small winning scenario counter (not shown) is a small winning scenario It is determined whether the value corresponds to the opening start of .

In the process of S2503, if it is determined that it is time to start the opening of the small winning scenario (S2503: Yes), the small winning opening command is set (S2504), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the opening start timing of the small winning scenario (S2503: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the round of the small winning scenario (S2505).

In the processing of S2505, when it is determined that it is time to start the round of the small winning scenario (S2505: Yes), small winning operation setting processing is executed (S2506), and this processing ends. The details of the small hit operation setting process (S2506) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the time to start the round of the small winning scenario (S2505: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the round currently being executed is met (S2507). Here, in this control example, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 5) are won in total while the specific winning opening 65a is open, or when the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a elapses for a predetermined period of time. If so, it is determined that the round end condition is met.

In the processing of S2507, when it is determined that the round end condition of the round currently being executed is satisfied (S2507: Yes), the processing of S2108 sets the specific winning opening 65a to be closed (first The solenoid is turned off so that the opening/closing plate 65f1 of the specific winning port 65a is closed), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end condition of the specific winning opening 65a is not established (S2507: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S2509).

In the process of S2509, when it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S2509: Yes), the small winning ending command is set (S2510), and the process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S2001) of the main processing (see FIG. 227). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the big win.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2509, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511). Here, the end timing of the small hit indicates the case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed.

In the process of S2511, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511: Yes), the flag 203v during the small hit is set to OFF (S2512), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small hit (S2511: No), the second winning process is executed (S2513), and this process ends. Details of the second winning process (S2513) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 233, the small hitting operation setting process (S2506) which is one process in the small hitting control process (FIG. 232, S2005) will be described. FIG. 233 is a flow chart showing the contents of this small winning operation setting process (S2506). In the small winning operation setting process (FIG. 233, S2506), first, the opening scenario in which the opening operation corresponding to the number of small winning rounds to be started is set is read (S2601). The opening operation of (the opening/closing plate 65f1 attached thereto (see FIG. 179)) of the specific winning opening 65a is set by the data read in the process of S2601 (S2602), and this process ends.

In this way, each operation of the variable prize winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big win game, the big win game will end in the middle. Defects can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 234, details of the second winning process (S2513) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 234 is a flow chart showing this second winning process (S2513). This second winning process (S2513) is executed in the small winning control process (see FIG. 232), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to winning to the specific winning opening 65a.

In the second winning process (FIG. 234, S2513), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is reached (S2701). Here, the round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from when the specific winning opening 65a is set to the open state to when the interval period (5 seconds) ends. In the process of S2401, if it is not the round valid period (S2701: No), the prize winning counter 203h is reset (S2702), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2701, if it is determined that the current round valid period (S2701: Yes), then it is determined whether or not winning to the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S2703), and to the specific winning opening 65a is not detected (S2703: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2703, if winning for the specific winning hole 65a is detected (S2703: Yes), the value of the winning counter 203h is updated by adding 1 (S2704). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 203h is equal to or greater than the upper limit (5 in this control example) (S2705), and if the value of the winning counter 203h is equal to or less than the upper limit (5 in this control example) ( S2705: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the value of the prize winning counter 203h is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (5 in this control example) (S2705: Yes), the specific winning port 65a (the opening/closing plate 65f1 associated therewith) is set to be closed (S2706). Next, the small winning scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2707), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 235 to 243, each control process executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing that is activated upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 235, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 235 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S4116 (see FIG. 236) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 236, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives power-off occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see FIG. 236, S4113), the power-off processing of S4116 is executed. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S4116 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S4116. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), it will transfer to S2004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). from), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S4116 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S4116, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4116 is executed (see FIG. 236 and S4115). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S4116 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the startup processing this time is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S4009), and after setting the initial values of the RAM 223 (S4010), the state The state setting area is updated based on the command (S4011). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4010 to set the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010).

The reason why the clearing process of S4009 is skipped is that when the process of S4008 is reached from S4004 via the process of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 236, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 236 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process was started or since the processing of S4101 was last executed (S4101). If the time has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4110. In the processing of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has passed because S4102 to S4110 are processing related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). , S4111 and the variable display setting process of S4112 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, the setting regarding the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is a command in the display control device. 114.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S4109, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S4110). After that, the process proceeds to S4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. Lamp edit processing of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring processing. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After that, a command determination process (S4111) for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to S4112. Details of this command determination process (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4112, in order to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variable pattern command for display is generated based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110, and the command is sent to the display controller 114. Executes a variable display setting process, which is a process for setting to transmit to. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S4112 is finished, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4115), and the power-off processing is executed (S4116). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S4117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the customer waiting presentation process (S4105) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 237 is a flow chart showing the customer waiting effect process (S4105). This customer waiting effect processing (S4105) is a sub-special figure 1 standby flag 223j that is set to ON when a special figure 1 standby command or a special figure 2 standby command output from the main control device 110 is received, a sub special Based on the setting status of the standby flag 223m in FIG. 2, processing for setting the standby display screen is executed. Details of the customer waiting effect process (S4105) will be described below.

In the customer waiting effect process (FIG. 237, S4105), first, it is determined whether or not the sub special figure 1 waiting flag 223j is set to ON (S4201). When it is determined that the sub special figure 1 standby flag 223j is set to ON (S4201: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k is updated (S4202). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k is the upper limit value (S4203). Here, in this control example, a value (30000) corresponding to 30 seconds is set as the upper limit value of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k. That is, when 30 seconds have passed since the fluctuation of the special figure 1 stopped (when the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k reaches the upper limit value) the special figure 1 standby flag is set to ON It is

If the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k is less than the upper limit (S4203: No), the process proceeds to S4205.

On the other hand, in the process of S4203, if the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k is the upper limit value (S4203: Yes), set the special figure 1 standby flag 223s to ON, the sub special figure 1 standby flag 223j, Then, the standby set flag 223u is set to OFF (S4204), and the process proceeds to S4205. By setting the standby setting completion flag 223u to OFF in the processing of S4204, for example, in a state where the standby display command for display is set based on the fact that the special figure 2 standby flag 223t described later is set to ON , When the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to ON, it becomes possible to determine the standby display type again. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately perform the standby display according to the variation situation (standby situation) of each special figure (special figure 1, special figure 2).

Also, in the processing of S4201, if it is determined that the sub special figure 1 standby flag 223j is set to OFF (that is, not set to ON) (S4201: No), the processing of S4202 to S4204 is performed. Skip and move to the processing of S4205.

In the processing of S4205, it is determined whether or not the sub special figure 2 standby flag 223m is set to ON (S4205). When it is determined that the sub special figure 2 standby flag 223m is set to ON (S4205: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 223n is updated (S4206). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 223n is the upper limit (30000) (S4207). If the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 223n is less than the upper limit (S4207: No), the process proceeds to S4209.

On the other hand, in the process of S4207, if the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 223n is the upper limit (S4207: Yes), set the special figure 2 standby flag 223t to ON, the sub special figure 2 standby flag 223m, Then, the standby set completion flag 223u is set to OFF (S4208), and the process proceeds to S4209. By setting the standby set flag 223u to off in the process of S4208, for example, in a state where the standby display command for display is set based on the fact that the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to ON, When the standby flag 223t in FIG. 2 is set to ON, the standby display type can be determined again. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately perform the standby display according to the variation situation (standby situation) of each special figure (special figure 1, special figure 2).

Also, in the process of S4205, if it is determined that the sub special figure 2 standby flag 223m is set to OFF (that is, not set to ON) (S4205: No), S4206 and S4207 Skip the process and move to the process of S4209.

In the processing of S4209, it is determined whether or not the standby set completion flag 223u is set to ON (S4209). If it is determined that the standby setting completion flag 223u is set to ON (S4209: Yes), the processing of S4211 to S4214 for setting the standby display type is skipped, and this processing ends. In other words, the state in which the standby setting completion flag 223u is set to ON is a state in which the variation state of each special figure (the setting state of the standby flag) has not been changed from the state in which the standby display type has already been set. Therefore, by not executing the processing for setting the standby display type when such a state is determined, the load of the processing for setting the standby display type can be reduced.

In addition, although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 241, in this control example, a new special figure variation in a state where the standby flag (special figure 1 standby flag 223s or special figure 2 standby flag 223t) is set to ON Also when a command (special figure standby command indicating OFF) indicating that it has been started is received, the process of setting the standby setting completion flag 223u to OFF is executed. Therefore, each special figure (special figure 1, special figure 2) because it is possible to always reset the standby display type whenever the fluctuation situation of special figure 1 or special figure 2 (setting status of standby flag) is changed It is possible to more appropriately perform the standby display according to the fluctuation state (standby state) of the display.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the standby set flag 223u is set to OFF (that is, not set to ON) (S4209: No), the special figure 1 standby flag 223s or the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON (S4210).

In the process of S4210, if it is determined that the special figure 1 standby flag 223s or special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S4210: No), this process finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 standby flag 223s or the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON (S4210: Yes), the game state set in the state setting area 223i is read (S4211) . Then, based on the read game state and the setting status of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t, the standby display type is determined from the screen display selection table 222b (see FIG. 200) (S4212).

Next, based on the determined standby display type, a display standby display command for notifying the standby display type to the display control device 114 is set (S4213). After that, the stand-by set completion flag 223u is set to ON (S4214), and this processing is terminated.

Next, the command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 238 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 236) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. . Details of the command determination process (S4111) will be described below.

In the command determination process (S2111), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read out and analyzed. It is determined whether or not the 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4301). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4301: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4302) and this process ends. The details of this stop type command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4301, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4301: No), whether or not the special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received It is determined (S4303). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol.

In the process of S4303, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S4303: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4304) and received The variation pattern type is extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command (S4305), and the process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that allows identification of the variation pattern type of the first special symbol. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the first special symbol (set the variable pattern command for the display of the first special symbol used).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is not received (S4303: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (S4306). In addition, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

In the process of S4306, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received (S4306: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM223 is set to ON (S4307), and the received special The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command in FIG. 2 (S4308), and this process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that allows identification of the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and in the variation display setting process described later (see FIG. 243) , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variable pattern command for the display of the second special symbol used).

In the processing of S4306, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S4306: No), it is determined whether the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4309). If it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S4309: Yes), the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the received pending ball number command (that is, the first The number of reserved balls of variable display of special symbols) is extracted, and the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value ( S4310), the process ends. In addition, in this control example, since it does not have a configuration to hold and store the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), in the process of S4310, the value of the first special symbol (special figure 1) reserved ball number counter 223c Only updates are performed.

Here, the pending ball number command is transmitted from main controller 110 when a ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), so each time there is a starting winning, the process of S4310 , the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start When the reserved ball number command is notified based on the winning, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, and the first special symbol reserved ball number of the main controller 110 is corrected. It can be matched with the value of the counter 203d.

Also, in the process of S4309, if it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4309: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4311). In the process of S4311, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4311: Yes), the information of the received winning information command (special symbol lottery propriety, hit type, and variation pattern) is converted to winning information corresponding to The data is set in the storage area 223b (S4312), and the processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4311 that the winning information command has not been received (S4311: No), it is determined whether or not the status command has been received (S4313). If it is determined that a state command has been received (S4313: Yes), state command processing (S4314) is executed. Details of this state command processing (S4314) will be described with reference to FIG. state) in the state setting area 223i.

In the processing of S4313, if it is determined that the state command has not been received (S4313: No), it is determined whether the special figure 1 standby command or the special figure 2 standby command is received from the main controller 110 (S4315) . In the process of S4315, when it is determined that either the special figure 1 standby command or the special figure 2 standby command is received (S4315: Yes), customer waiting command processing (S4316) is executed. Details of this customer waiting command process (S4316) will be described with reference to FIG. A process for setting the standby flag 223s or the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is executed.

In the process of S4315, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 standby command nor the special figure 2 standby command is received (S4315: No), the remaining probability variable number command or the remaining time short number command is received from the main controller 110 It is determined whether or not it has been done (S4317). In the process of S4315, when it is determined that either the remaining probability variable number command or the remaining time short number command is received (S4317: Yes), the remaining number update process (S4318) is executed. Details of this remaining number update process (S4318) will be described with reference to FIG. A process for setting the content of the effect display to be displayed is executed.

In the process of S4317, if it is determined that neither the remaining probability variable number command nor the remaining time short number command is received (S4317: No), the process according to other commands is executed (S4319), and this process ends do. In the processing of S4319, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is processed. to the display control device 114 .

Next, the stop type command reception process (S4302) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 239 is a flow chart showing this stop type command reception process (S4302). This stop type command reception process (S4302) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 238) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. Details of the stop type command reception process (S4302) will be described below.

In the stop type command reception process (FIG. 239, S4302), first, in response to the received command, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is set to ON, When the special figure 2 stop classification command is received, the special figure 2 stop classification selection flag 223g is set to ON. (S4401). Next, the stop type (jackpot A to jackpot G, small hit A to small hit C, off, reach off, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S4402), this End the process.

The stop type extracted in S4402 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. In addition, the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the second special symbol Each stop type is stored so as to be identifiable. Thereby, even if the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) start to fluctuate at the same time, it becomes possible to manage the stop types respectively, and to execute appropriate fluctuation display. can be done.

Next, referring to FIG. 240, the state command processing (S4314) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 240 is a flow chart showing this state command processing (S4314). This state command processing (S4314) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 238) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. Details of the state command processing (S4314) will be described below.

In the state command process (FIG. 240, S4314), first, the game state before receiving the state command is determined from the value of the state setting area 223i provided in the RAM 223 (S4501). That is, it is determined in which game state the state command was received. Next, it is determined whether the game state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4502). If it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is not the latent state (S4502: No), it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating transition to the latent state (S4503). In the processing of S4503, if the received command is a state command indicating transition to the latent certain state (S4503: Yes), the latent certainty notification effect for informing the entry of the latent certainty state is set (S4504). Then, 120 is set in the effect probability variation number area 223p (S4505), and the process proceeds to S4506.

On the other hand, in the processing of 4502, if it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4502: Yes), or in the processing of 4503, the received command indicates a transition to the latent state. If it is not a status command to indicate (S4503: No), the process proceeds to S4506.

In the processing of S4506, the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the received state command is stored in the state setting area 223i (S4506), and the processing ends.

As described above, the state command processing (S4314) in this control example is based on the game state set in the state setting area 223i and the game state indicated by the state command output from the main controller 110. , it is determined that a game state other than the latent certainty state has shifted to the latent certainty state, and when the game state other than the latent certainty state has shifted to the latent certainty state, the remaining number display area of the third symbol display device 81. A process of controlling "120" as an initial value is executed in D1 (see FIG. 187(a)). On the other hand, if the jackpot is won during the latent definite state and the latent definite state is set again after the jackpot game ends, it is determined that the latent definite state is set in the state setting area 223i in the processing of S4502 (S4502 : Yes), in order to skip the processing of S4504 and S4505, the effect probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (see FIG. 187(a)) of the third symbol display device 81 is added (reset). never As a result, even if you win a jackpot during the latent probability state and the actual probability variation number is reset (set to 120 times), the display of the production probability variation number will continue to be the value that was displayed before winning the jackpot. will be displayed. Therefore, the rest of the actual probability variation number (remaining probability variation number) and the remaining number of production probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (see FIG. 187 (a)) of the third symbol display device 81 (production remaining probability variation number) can be made different, making it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the latent certainty state ends.

It should be noted that in the above-described state command processing (S4314 in FIG. 240), when entering a new latent probability state, the same number of times (120 times) as the actual probability variation number of times (120 times) of the third symbol display device 81 Although it is configured to be displayed in the remaining number display area D1, other configurations may be used. For example, a number smaller than the actual probability variation number may be displayed in the remaining number display area D1.

Next, the standby command process (S4316) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 241 is a flow chart showing this standby command process (S4316). This state command processing (S4314) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 238) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and each standby command output from the main control device 110 Based on (special figure 1 standby command, special figure 2 standby command), a process of setting the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t to ON or setting it to OFF is executed. The setting status of this special figure 1 standby flag 223s and special figure 2 standby flag 223t is referred to in the above-described customer waiting effect processing (see S4105 in FIG. 237).

When the standby command process (S4316) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 standby command is received (S4601). In the process of S4601, if it is determined that the special figure 1 standby command is received (S4601: Yes), the sub special figure 1 standby flag 223j is set to ON (S4602), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, if it is determined that the special figure 1 standby command has not been received (S4601: No), it is determined whether the special figure 1 standby command indicating the off of the special figure 1 standby flag 203i has been received (S4603). In the process of S4603, if it is determined that the special figure 1 standby command indicating the off of the special figure 1 standby flag 203i is received (S4603: Yes), the sub special figure 1 standby flag 223j is set to off (S4604 ), the special figure 1 waiting counter 223k is reset (S4605). After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to ON (S4606).

In the processing of S4606, if it is determined that the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to OFF (that is, it is not set to ON) (S4606: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4606, if it is determined that the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to ON (S4606: Yes), the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the standby set flag 223u are set to off (S4607), this processing ends.

That is, in the state in which the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to ON (a state in which 30 seconds or more have passed without the special figure 1 fluctuating), the special figure 1 standby flag 203i has been set to off When receiving the special figure 1 standby command indicating (that the variation of the special figure 1 is executed), the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to off, and the standby set flag 223u is set to off , In the customer waiting effect process (see S4105 in FIG. 237), the standby display type corresponding to when the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to OFF is set. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the standby display type according to the fluctuation situation of each special figure (the setting situation of the standby flag).

On the other hand, in the processing of S4603, if it is determined that the special figure 1 standby command indicating the off of the special figure 1 standby flag 203i is not received (S4603: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 standby command is received (S4608). In the process of S4608, if it is determined that the special figure 2 standby command is received (S4608: Yes), the sub special figure 2 standby flag 223m is set to ON (S4609), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4608, if it is determined that the special figure 2 standby command is not received (S4608: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 standby command indicating the off of the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is received (S4610). In the process of S4610, if it is determined that the special figure 2 standby command indicating the off of the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is received (S4610: Yes), the sub special figure 2 standby flag 223m is set to off (S4611 ), the special figure 2 standby counter 223n is reset (S4612). After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON (S4613).

In the process of S4613, if it is determined that the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to OFF (that is, not set to ON) (S4613: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4613, if it is determined that the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON (S4613: Yes), the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the standby set flag 223u are set to off (S4614), this processing ends.

That is, in the state that the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON (the state in which 30 seconds or more have passed without the special figure 2 fluctuating), the special figure 2 standby flag 203j has been set to off When receiving the special figure 2 standby command indicating (that the variation of the special figure 2 is executed), the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to off, and the standby set flag 223u is set to off , In the customer waiting effect process (see S4105 in FIG. 237), the standby display type corresponding to when the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to OFF is set. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the standby display type according to the fluctuation situation of each special figure (the setting situation of the standby flag).

On the other hand, in the process of S4610, if it is determined that the special figure 2 standby command indicating the off of the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is not received (S4610: No), this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 242, the remaining count update process (S4318) will be described. FIG. 242 is a flow chart showing the content of this remaining count update process (S4318). This remaining number update process (S4318) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 238) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113. Or based on receiving a short time remaining command. A process of updating the contents set in the remaining probability variable count area 223o, the effect probability variable floor area 223p, and the remaining time short floor area 223q is executed.

In the remaining number update process (S4318), first, it is determined whether or not a remaining probability variation number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4651). In the processing of S4651, if it is determined that the remaining probability variation count command has been received (S4651: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is stored in the remaining probability variation count area 223o (S4652). Next, it is determined whether or not data indicating the latent state is stored in the state setting area 223i (S4653).

That is, in the process of S4653, it is determined whether the currently set gaming state is the latent state or the variable probability state, and if it is determined to be the latent certainty state, an effect display dedicated to the latent certainty state, which will be described later. will be executed. On the other hand, if it is determined to be in the variable probability state, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example executes the same effect display in the variable probability state and the normal state, so this processing ends without executing a dedicated effect display. do.

In the processing of S4653, if it is determined that the data indicating the probability state is stored (set) in the state setting area 223i (S4653: Yes), the remaining probability change number notified (received) by the main controller 110 is 0 times (S4654). In the process of S4654, when it is determined that the number of remaining probability variations notified (received) by the main control device 110 is 0 (S4654: Yes), the end effect of the latent probability state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Set (S4657). Then, the state setting area 223i is overwritten with data indicating the normal state, and the process proceeds to S4661.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4654, when it is determined that the number of remaining probability variations notified (received) by the main controller 110 is one or more (that is, not 0 times) (S4654: No), the effect probability variation number area 223p is decremented by 1 (S4657). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of production probability variations after the subtraction is 0 (S4658). In the processing of S4658, when it is determined that the number of times of probability variation after the subtraction is 0 (S4658: Yes), the number of times of the number of times of probability variation remaining area 223o is set to the number of times of probability variation of effect 223p (S4659). Thereafter, a resurrection effect for notifying the set number of times in the effect probability variable number area 223p is set (S4660), and the process proceeds to S4661.

That is, in a state where the actual remaining probability variation number (substantially remaining probability variation number) stored (set) in the remaining probability variation number area is 1 or more, when the production probability variation number (representation probability variation number) becomes 0 , in order to notify the player that the latent certainty state continues, the value of the number of times of residual probability change is updated to the value of the actual number of times of residual probability change, and the value is displayed in the remaining number display area of the third symbol display device 81. The effect (resurrection effect) displayed in D1 is executed.

By executing such a performance, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the latent definite state ends, and after making the player think that the latent definite state has ended, the number of times of remaining probability variation of the performance is increased again. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

In this control example, the timing at which this resurrection effect is executed is the case where the number of times of production probability variation (remaining probability variation number of productions) becomes 0, but other configurations may be used, for example, the number of production probability variations On the condition that (remaining probability variation number of performances) is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times (for example, 5), a lottery is conducted as to whether or not to execute the resurrection performance, and the resurrection performance is executed based on the result of the lottery. You may As a result, the player can play the game while predicting at what timing (special figure fluctuation) the resurrection effect will occur, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Moreover, instead of executing the resurrection effect based on the special figure variation, for example, it may be executed using the ending period of the small winning game. In this case, on the condition that the production probability variation number (production remaining probability variation number) is 0 (or a state in which a display mode indicating that the latent probability state is not confirmed to continue) is displayed. It is desirable to execute a resurrection effect. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to set a long variable time during which the resurrection effect can be executed as the special figure variable time in the latent certainty state, and the game in the latent certainty state can be provided smoothly.

In addition, it may be configured such that the long variable time in which the resurrection effect can be executed is set as the special figure variable time only in the final stage (for example, the number of times of real residual probability variation is 10 times or less) among the latent definite states. As a result, the display state in which the resurrection effect can be executed (the number of times of probability of effect variation (the number of times of probability of effect remaining) is 0 (or the state in which the display mode indicating that the continuation of the latent probability state is not confirmed is displayed) )) is difficult to execute in the early stages of the latent definite state, there is no need to set a long variable time during which the resurrection performance can be executed, and the latent definite state game can be provided smoothly.

Next, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 243 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S4112). This variable display setting process (FIG. 243, S4112) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 236) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As described above, in the variable display setting process (FIG. 243, S4112), in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, the first or special figure 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 Based on this, the process of setting the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Also, based on the extracted stop type (jackpot A to jackpot G), the process of setting the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 243, S4112), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4701). Then, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is off (S4701: No), since it is in a state where the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, the process of S4705 Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S4701: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S4702).

Next, in the processing of S4703, the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command in the processing of S4303 of the command determination processing (Fig. 238, S4111) is stored in the other memory area of the RAM 223. 223z to generate a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol (S4703). The display variation pattern command for the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is the display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol variation pattern command. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the variable pattern command for display of the 2-byte configuration are "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special design, and if it is "01", the second special design It is configured to indicate that it corresponds to

The first special symbol display variation pattern command set in the process of S4703 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and displayed by the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 236). is transmitted to the control device 114 for use. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, a special symbol corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 is displayed with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the pattern is performed.

Along with the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol The data corresponding to the first special symbol is shifted in the winning information storage area 223b (S4704).

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4705). And, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S4705: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110 Therefore, the processing of S4709 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S4705: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S4706). In the processing of S4306 of the command determination processing (FIG. 238, S4111), the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the special figure 2 variation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223, and the second 2 Set a variation pattern command for displaying special symbols (S4707).

The second special symbol display variation pattern command set in the process of S4707 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and displayed by the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 236). is transmitted to the control device 114 for use. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, a special symbol corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 is displayed with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the pattern is performed. Then, the data corresponding to the second special symbol is shifted in the winning information storage area 223b (S4708).

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4709). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g are not set to ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4709: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on (S2709: Yes), when the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is on sets the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f to off, and when the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on, sets the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g to off (S4710).

In the process of S4301 of the command determination process (Fig. 238, S4111), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command is set (S4711), and this process ends. When the extracted stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, a display special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. In addition, when the extracted stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, based on the stop type, set the display special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the stop type to the display control device 114 . In addition, the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 is to notify the jackpot type when the jackpot is hit, even if the determination result is out. be done. If the determination result is out, the out symbol is set without referring to the stop type.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 244 to 257. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 244, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 244 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present control example, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, thereby speeding up the NOR ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, referring to FIG. 245, the boot processing (S6001) will be described. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 244) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S6002 in FIG. 244) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 245, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a in step S6101. and the processing of S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in this control example, the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing in S6003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 255(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 255(a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 246(b)) can be easily performed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) (not shown) is drawn. Command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 246(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 246(b)) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is issued. When received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and simple variation is performed. can perform. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 246(a). FIG. 246(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 246(b). FIG. 246(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 246(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S6302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 247 to 251. FIG.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 252 to 254. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 255 and 256. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305), 207, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the buffer information to be drawn. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear out reach, reach other than front-rear out, complete out) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, simple command determination processing (S6308) is executed, then simple display setting processing (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 247 to 251, the details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 247 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 247, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a variation pattern command for display (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 248(a), the details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will be described. FIG. 248(a) is a flow chart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114. FIG.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation longer than the set display data table can be actually obtained. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501 , extracts the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 248(b). FIG. 248(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (any of jackpots A to G, small hits A to C, reach out, complete out) stop type table corresponding to is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 246(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each of the stop symbols, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. It is set to ON (S6603) and returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 247, the description is continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the opening command process (S6409) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 249(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 247, the description is continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S6410), and display If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 249(b), details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described. FIG. 249(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing. This number-of-rounds command process is for executing a process corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 247, the description continues. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the ending command process (S6413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 247, the description is continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no ending command for display (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 251, the details of the back image change command process (S6415) will be described. FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the back image determination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the other bits are set to ON. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after change is selected from the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display one of the back faces A and B according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, from the back face image determination flag 233x set in S7002, The type of background image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the background image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type ( Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6414 that there is no back image change command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). Otherwise (S6416: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the error command processing (S6417) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 251(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp controller 114 .

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process of S7102 sets on error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no error command (S6416: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6418), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), and the processing of S6402 to S6418 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6418 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 246(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 248(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 248(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and for other commands, A process to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 248(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on varying moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 252 to 254, the details of the display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 252, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). ), it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S7202), S7203-S7204 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

Here, with reference to FIG. 253, details of the warning image setting process will be described. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S7301).

In task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are specified, and the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing such as

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 252 . After the warning image setting process (S7204), or if it is determined in the process of S7203 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S7203: No), then the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Details of the pointer update processing will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7401, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the display data table for demonstration set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S7405), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7402: No), this process ends and returns to the display setting process.

Here, return to FIG. 252 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S7206 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and each sprite , determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (S7210), and then the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), returns to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114 .

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S7215, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7209, if the fixed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S7216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect. After that, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demonstration display data table is obtained and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents thereof are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加, you can set its drawing contents.

In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 246(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. A process of setting a display data table specifying that the image is to be displayed still in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 255 and 256, the details of the transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 255(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S7502), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S7501, that is, if it is turned off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S7502), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 255(b). FIG. 255(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S7601). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7602). In the processing of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7602 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S7603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 246(b)), command Since the judgment processing (see FIGS. 247 to 251) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 252 to 254) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 256) (see S7501: No in FIG. 255(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, with reference to FIG. 256, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 256 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is obtained (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

In addition, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not ended (S7706: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), image data to be transferred exists, so is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709). Then, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the back image determination flags 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is obtained (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the image to be transferred, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, thereby obtaining the predetermined address according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 257, details of the drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 257 is a flow chart showing this rendering process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (FIG. 207) is generated (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately identified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops the images in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information by overwriting. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ) and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image drawn from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and drawing processing and display processing can be processed simultaneously in parallel. can be done.

In the rendering process, after the process of S7802, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the load process (see FIG. 246(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is configured to switch between the three game states of the normal state, the variable probability state, and the latent probability state, triggered by a big win or the like. Then, the probability state is set to the most advantageous game state. Specifically, compared to the lottery of the first special symbol, after increasing the ratio of small hits in the lottery of the second special symbol (0% → about 46%), in the latent state, other games It is configured to make it easier to execute the lottery of the second special symbol compared to the state. As a result, if the lottery for the second special pattern is performed in the hidden state, the probability of winning a small prize is high and the probability of winning a big prize is also increased, so the ball is made to enter the specific prize winning port 65a and the prize ball is won. can be made more likely than in other game states. Therefore, the game can be played in anticipation of transition to the latent certainty state.

In addition, in the first control example, the type of special symbol that is likely to be selected according to the game state is switched (main variation and sub variation are switched). Specifically, in the normal state and the probability variation state, the variation display of the first special symbol is the main variation, and in the latent probability state, the variation display of the second special symbol is the main variation. In each game state, when the elapsed time from the stop of the main variation reaches a predetermined time (30 seconds) or longer, even if the secondary variation is being executed, a demo display corresponding to the game state is displayed. (customer waiting demo screen, hidden confirmation display) are displayed. Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a certain period of time has passed since the fluctuation stopped state, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and a demonstration display is performed. In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not a game is being played by the presence or absence of a demonstration display. A game can be started on the machine. As a result, it is possible to improve the operation rate of the gaming machine.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when applied to a gaming machine with specifications in which a plurality of symbols fluctuate at the same time, even if some symbols are in a state of stopping fluctuation, as long as the other symbols are fluctuating. , was unable to run the demo display. Therefore, it may be difficult for a player looking for an empty table to determine from the displayed content whether the table is empty or not.

On the other hand, in the first control example, in the normal state and the probability variable state, it is configured to determine whether or not to display the customer waiting demo screen (regardless of the secondary fluctuation) only according to the main fluctuation situation. . As a result, even if the player enters the ball into the second ball entrance 1640 and quits the game immediately after the 600-second variable display is started, the player will be able to can display the customer waiting demo screen. Therefore, other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demo screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is an empty machine, so that a game can be started with the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the rate of operation of the pachinko machine 10 from decreasing.

In addition, in this control example, when 30 seconds or more have passed since the main variation stopped in the latent state, a special demo display (special display) in which the same character 811 as during the variation continues to be displayed is displayed. It is configured to be set. That is, the display contents of the same system are displayed during the normal display and during the demonstration display. As a result, when the ball entering the second ball entrance 1640 is subsequently detected, the display mode (performance mode) can be switched smoothly, so the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. .

In addition, in the first control example, as a type of ready-to-win effect, a special ready-to-win is provided in which a new symbol row is displayed after the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination that does not come off. . Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a plurality of symbols are variably displayed and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, an advantageous winning state is given to the player. In such a game machine, while one symbol is changing and the other symbols are stopped and displayed, a ready-to-win state is generated in which the stopped and displayed symbols constitute a part of a predetermined combination, resulting in a win. By making players expect that, they are trying to improve their interest.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, even if all symbols are not stopped and displayed when the ready-to-win state does not occur, there is no possibility of a winning state at that time, and the player's play is greatly affected. There was a risk of losing interest. On the other hand, in this control example, a special ready-to-win effect is provided in which, after the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in an out-of-combination combination, a new pattern row is framed to develop into a ready-to-win effect. As a result, even if the third symbol is stop-displayed once due to a combination that is out of alignment, it can be expected to develop into a special ready-to-win effect. That is, the combination of the stop patterns can be confirmed by paying attention to whether it is a combination of the stop patterns that can develop into a special ready-to-win performance (a combination that becomes a ready-to-win when the new pattern row L4 is temporarily displayed). Therefore, every time an incorrect combination is stop-displayed in the variable display, development to a special ready-to-win effect can be expected, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this first control example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be executable in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, irrespective of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in a state where one variable display is being performed, other variable displays may be configured to be unexecutable. Then, when there is a reserved ball, the variable display may be executed in order from the reserved ball with the oldest starting prize in terms of time. By configuring in this way, the control can be simplified, so the processing load can be reduced.

In the first control example, the latent state is set to the most advantageous state, but it is not limited to this. For example, the variable probability state may be set to the most advantageous state. That is, in the variable probability state, the ball is configured to easily enter the second ball entrance 1640, and in the normal state and the latent state, the ball is more likely to enter the first ball entrance 64 than the second ball entrance 1640. may be configured to make it easier for the ball to enter the ball. Specifically, for example, in the normal state and the latent state, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a variation pattern with a variation time of 600 seconds is selected as the variation pattern, and in the variable state. , a variation pattern having an extremely short variation time (0.5 seconds) may be selected. That is, the specified contents of the probability variation table 202f3 and the probability variation table 202f4 in the first control example may be exchanged. In addition, when the second special symbol jackpot (jackpot E to F) is obtained in the variable probability state, and the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the number of times of time reduction is set to 120 times, and in the normal state and the latent state, It is good also as a structure which sets the number of times of time saving as 0 times. As a result, when the second special pattern is a big hit in the probability variable state, the game state after the big win is easily set to the probability variable state again (the probability variable state is easily looped), so the superiority of the probability variable state is enhanced. be able to.

Also, the normal state may be set as the most advantageous state instead of the latent probability state or the probability variable state. Specifically, for example, the specified contents of the normal table A202f1 and the latency table 202f4 in the first control example are exchanged, and the normal state is easily looped in the case of a big hit in the normal state (the V passage switch 65e3 is turned on). In the latent probability state or the probability variable state, the V passage switch 65e3 is configured so that it is easy to win the jackpot type of the open/close pattern in which the ball easily passes. good too.

In the first control example, among the opening/closing patterns set for the opening/closing plate 65f1, the opening/closing plate 65f1 is kept open for 0.2 second after the start of one round as a pattern in which the ball is difficult to pass through the V-pass switch 65e3. Although a set opening/closing pattern is provided, the opening period may be shortened to reliably prevent the ball from entering the specific winning hole 65 .

In the first control example, when the special ready-to-win effect is executed and each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 is temporarily stopped, all the temporarily stopped main symbols on the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are new symbols. Although it is configured to face the direction of the row L4, it is not limited to this. For example, only the main symbol (in the example of FIG. 185(a), the main symbol with the number "1") that is reachable by the appearance (frame-in) of the new symbol row L4 is the new symbol row L4. may be configured to look up in the direction of Further, for example, the degree of expectation for a big win may be suggested by the number of main symbols that look up at the new symbol row L4 among the main symbols other than the main symbols on which reach is applied. That is, the higher the number of main symbols looking up in the direction of the new symbol row L4, the higher the expectation of a big win in the special ready-to-win effect. In this case, when all the main symbols look up at the new symbol row L4, the big win may be decided (for example, it may be selected only in the case of winning super reach). By constructing in this manner, when the symbols that have been fluctuating are stopped and displayed in an incorrect combination, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the aspect of each main symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. .

In the first control example, when the special ready-to-win effect is executed, all the main symbols temporarily stopped in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 face the direction of the new symbol row L4. It is not limited to this. Not only the main symbols but also the reserved symbols may face the direction of the new symbol row L4. In this case, the number of reserved symbols facing the direction of the new symbol row L4 may indicate the degree of expectation for a big win in the special ready-to-win effect. That is, the greater the number of reserved symbols facing the direction of the new symbol row L4, the higher the expectation of a big win. In addition, instead of suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit in the special ready-to-win effect by the number of reserved symbols, it may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the reserved balls corresponding to the reserved symbols will be a big hit. For example, from the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the variation pattern of each reserved ball is read in advance, and the variation pattern (losing super reach or winning super reach) that develops into a super reach effect is reserved in the reserved ball. When it is determined that the ball is included, the reserved pattern corresponding to the reserved ball that develops into the super ready-to-win performance is directed to a new pattern row L4 at the time of temporary stop in the special ready-to-win performance. may be configured. As a result, when the game is temporarily stopped in the special super ready-to-win effect, the game can be played while paying attention to the reserved symbols, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the first control example, the new symbol row L4 displayed when the special ready-to-win effect is executed is scroll-displayed in parallel with each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. , it is not necessary to scroll and display the symbol rows L1 to L3 in parallel. For example, the new symbol row L4 may be displayed on the right or left side of each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 and scrolled in the vertical direction (perpendicular to each of the symbol rows L1 to L3). As a result, it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom in the performance when the special ready-to-win performance is selected. Also, the number of new symbol rows is not limited to one, and a plurality of symbol rows may be newly displayed when the special ready-to-win effect is executed. By adopting a configuration in which a plurality of symbol rows are displayed, it is possible to increase the number of combinations of main symbols at the time of temporary stop that can develop into a special reach. Therefore, when it stops at the stop pattern corresponding to the loss, it is possible to increase the possibility of becoming a stop pattern that may develop into a special reach, so that the player is more likely to develop into a special reach effect. You can expect more frequently. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In this first control example, a result display (see FIG. 188(b)) indicating the result of the latent state is basically performed until the variable display of the first special symbol is started after the latent state is ended. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the result of the latent certainty state is displayed immediately after the latent certainty state ends. Then, the display may be continued until the first variable display of the first special symbol is completed. By adopting a configuration in which the result is displayed immediately after the end of the latent certainty state, the player can immediately know the result of the completed latent certainty state. Therefore, even if it takes a long time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 after the player returns to the left-hand shot, the result of the latent state is not displayed and stress is given to the player. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the storage.

In this first control example, after the end of the latent certainty state, the variation time of the first special symbol is fixed to 12 seconds over two special symbol lotteries, but it is not limited to 12 seconds, and the result It may be set arbitrarily (for example, 10 seconds or 20 seconds) as long as the display is sufficiently recognizable to the player.

In this first control example, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big win or a small win, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, it is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be temporarily stopped or variably displayed while the measurement of the variability time is interrupted. Also, if either the first special symbol or the second special symbol wins a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol will win a big hit or a small hit until the big hit or small win is stopped. A compulsory lottery that never wins may be executed so that the result of the lottery is always a loss. As a result, it is possible to suppress the situation where both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are elected as a big win or a small win. In addition, in this case, it is preferable to configure so that the remaining probability variation number and the remaining time reduction number are not subtracted based on the number of times the forced lottery is executed. As a result, it is possible to provide a fair game to the players.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 258 to 289. FIG. In the above-described first control example, the first ball entrance 64 into which the ball is likely to enter by hitting left-handed and the second ball entrance 1640 into which the ball is likely to enter by hitting right-handed are provided. In the normal state and the probability variable state that are executed, the game (special figure 1 Substantially variable game), in the latent state where the right-handed game is executed, the lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 2) based on the entry of the ball into the second ball entrance 1640 is mainly The game to be executed (special figure 2 substantial variation game) was configured to be executed. Then, in the latent state where the right-handed game is executed, the variable winning device 65 is set for a predetermined period (for example, , about 1.65 seconds).

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is configured so that both the lottery of the special figure 1 and the lottery of the special figure 2 can be executed by hitting to the right, and the variation of each special figure in the latent definite state. By setting the variable time of the special figure 2 shorter than the variable time of the special figure 1, the lottery of the special figure 2 is more likely to be executed than the special figure 1 in the latent sure state. In addition, the number of time reductions given in the probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols and time saving state of normal symbols) is set to the number of times that the high probability state of special symbols is set (for example, 120 times). (For example, set to 100 times), and when the number of lotteries of special figures (number of fluctuations of special figures) exceeds 100 times in the probability variation state, it is configured to move from the probability variation state to the latent probability state. .

In addition, long variation (180 seconds) and short variation (3 seconds) are set for the variation time of the second special symbol in the probability variation state, and the second special symbol variation at the timing of transition from the probability variation state to the latent probability state It is configured to vary the degree of occurrence of small hits in the latent state according to the situation. Specifically, when the second special symbol shifts to the latent state at the timing immediately after the long fluctuation (180 seconds) starts, the fluctuation by the first special symbol until the second special symbol starts to fluctuate is executed, the number of lotteries for the second special symbol during the latent certainty state is reduced, and as a result, the degree of occurrence of small wins can be reduced. On the other hand, when the second special symbol shifts to the latent state in the short fluctuation (3 seconds) or near the end timing of the long fluctuation (180 seconds), the second special immediately after the transition to the latent state Since the variation of the pattern is started, as a result, the degree of occurrence of small winnings can be increased. In addition, although the details will be described later, in the area where the ball is launched by right-handed hitting (right-handed hitting area), there is a mechanism for alternately entering the ball into the right first ball entrance 64b and the second right ball entrance 1640b. is provided, and it is configured so that a ball cannot be entered only through one of the ball entry holes (for example, the second ball entry hole 1640a) (to make it difficult).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the opportunity to shift to the latent state, which is the game state most advantageous to the player, and to improve the player's motivation for the game, as in the first control example described above. can. Furthermore, since the degree of advantage (the degree of occurrence of small hits) when shifting from the variable probability state to the latent probability state can be varied depending on the timing of the state transition, it is possible to provide the player with more complicated game characteristics, and the game It is possible to suppress early boredom. In addition, the ball is alternately placed in the right first ball entrance 64b for executing the lottery for the first special symbol by entering the ball and the second ball entrance 1640b for executing the lottery for the second special symbol by entering the ball. is provided in the right-handed area, it is possible to suppress the execution of only the second special symbol lottery that is advantageous to the player, and a state that is excessively advantageous to the player It is possible to suppress giving.

Furthermore, in the first control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to execute the lottery at the same time (execute variation), and the lottery result of either one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a hit (big hit or small hit), and at the timing when the pattern indicating the winning lottery result is stopped and displayed (at the time when the hit is confirmed), the other special pattern (for example, the first special pattern) is out of fluctuation. It was configured to be forcibly stopped by the design.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, the lottery result of any one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a win (big win or small win), and a symbol indicating the winning lottery result. At the timing when is stopped and displayed (at the timing when the hit is confirmed), the measurement (count) of the fluctuation time for the fluctuation of the other special pattern (for example, the first special pattern) is interrupted, and the lottery result of one special pattern At the timing when the base winning game is finished (timing when the special symbol can be varied), the measurement (counting) of the variation time for the variation of the other special symbol which has been interrupted is restarted.

Thereby, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously executed (executed variation), the lottery result of each special symbol can be surely provided to the player, and the player can enjoy the game. You can make it so that you don't feel dissatisfied with it.

The pachinko machine 10 in the second control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that, on the game board 13, the arrangement position of the variable winning device 65 is changed from the right-handed area to the left-handed ball. And the point that the ball hit to the right moves to the central lower area where the ball can be entered, the point that the distribution unit 660 is provided instead of the second ball entrance 1640, the ball to the second ball entrance 1640 The contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 are partially changed in that an electric accessory 660f that restricts the entry of balls into the sorting unit 660 is provided instead of the electric accessory 1640a that restricts ball entry. , the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 are partially changed, and a part of the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. , the content of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, the content of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and The point is that part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are as follows: It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 258, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 258 is a front view of the board surface 13 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 258, in the second control example, the sorting unit 660 is placed at the position where the variable winning device 65 was arranged in the first control example (on the right side of the variable display unit 80 (right-handed area)). , the electric accessory 660f is arranged above the sorting unit 660, and the second input arranged on the downstream side of the right-handed area (lower right side of the board surface 13) in the first control example. The difference is that the ball hole 1640 is removed and the variable winning device 65 is arranged below the central area of the board surface (below the first ball hole 64). Although the details will be described later, the sorting unit 660 is configured so that a ball can enter through a passage opening provided in the upper portion thereof. Inside the sorting unit 660, there is a right first ball entrance 64b where a lottery for a first special symbol is executed when a ball enters, and a lottery for a second special symbol is executed when a ball enters. A second ball entry port 1640b is provided, and a ball entered into the distribution unit 660 through the passage port is distributed to one of these ball entry ports. Therefore, by hitting the ball aiming at the sorting unit 660 by hitting to the right, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed.

Furthermore, above the sorting unit 660, an electric accessory 660f is arranged that can be changed between an allowable position for allowing balls to flow into a passage opening provided at the top of the sorting unit 660 and a regulation position for regulating it. there is This electric accessory 660f, like the electric accessory 640a of the first control example described above, is executed for a predetermined period of time when the result of the normal symbol lottery executed based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is a win. (1 second x 2 times) It is controlled to vary to the allowable position. As a result, in the normal state, aiming at the first ball entrance 64 in a game for executing left-handed hitting (hereinafter referred to as a left-handed game) results in a game for executing right-handed hitting (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game). Rather than aiming at the entrance 64b, it is configured so that the first special symbol can be changed efficiently.

Here, with reference to FIG. 259, the configuration of distribution unit 660 will be described. 259(a) and (b) are diagrams showing the internal structure of the sorting unit 660. FIG. Actually, a cover body is arranged on the front side, and the cover body is composed of a member whose inside can be seen through. It is configured so that it is difficult to visually recognize the inside.

As shown in FIGS. 259(a) and 259(b), the upper part of the sorting unit 660 is provided with a passage opening through which a ball can enter. A mold entry sensor 660a is located. A distribution member 900 for distributing balls to the right first ball entrance 64b or the second ball entrance 1640b is provided below the passage opening. A right first ball entrance 64b is arranged in the lower left direction of the distribution member 900 when viewed from the front, and a second ball entrance 1640b is arranged in the lower right direction of the distribution member 900 when viewed from the front. The ball that has passed through the passage port is alternately distributed to the right first ball entrance port 64b and the second ball entrance port 1640b by the distribution member 900. FIG.

The sorting member 900 is configured to be able to receive a ball that has entered the sorting unit 660 with the accommodating portion 900a or 900c. When a ball is received by the storage portion 900a, the weight of the ball causes the distribution member 900 as a whole to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front. As a result, the housing portion 900a is inclined downward to the left (see FIG. 89(b)), and the first right ball entering the distribution member 900 is arranged in the lower left direction in front view. The ball falls toward the opening 64b (the ball is guided to the right first ball entrance 64b).

Here, the sorting member 900 is configured to be rotatable about 15 degrees clockwise and counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and a magnet 900b is provided on the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900b. ing. On the other hand, on the base body provided on the back side of the sorting unit 660, the state where the sorting member 900 is not rotated clockwise or counterclockwise ), the base-side magnet 901 is arranged on the rear side (on the center line of the passage port) of the position where the magnet 900b is arranged.

The magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 and the base-side magnet 901 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a bar-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet 901 is arranged and fixed so that the tip thereof faces the distribution member 900 side. The magnet 900b is also made of a bar-shaped magnet similar to the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the sorting member 900 so that the tip thereof faces the base-side magnet 901 side. At a position where the distribution member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900c is directly above (on the center line of the interval where about one game ball can enter the passage opening), the base side magnet 901 and the magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 are closest to each other (tips face each other). Here, since the mutual magnets are arranged so as to have the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole), they repel each other and stop at the position where the boundary wall of the distribution member 900 faces directly upward. It is maintained at a position rotated to either the left or right.

As a result, when the magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 is positioned on the center line of the passage port (upward position), the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 repel each other. As a result, one of the storage portions 900a and 900c faces the side of receiving incoming balls of the sorting unit 660 (passing port side of the sorting unit 660). Therefore, the ball entering the sorting unit 660 can be reliably sorted to the right first ball entrance 64b and the second ball entrance 1640b.

In addition, due to the repulsion between the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901, for example, the accommodation portion 900a receives the ball and rotates about 30 degrees to the left, guiding the ball to the right first ball entrance 64b, and then swinging. It is possible to prevent the division member 900 from rotating to the right (the receiving portion 900a faces upward). As a result, after the ball is guided to the right first ball entrance 64b, the storage portion 900c faces upward, and the ball that enters the sorting unit 660 is received by the storage portion 900c. The distribution member 900 rotates clockwise by about 30 degrees due to the weight of the ball, and the container 900c is tilted in the lower right direction when viewed from the front. , enters the second ball entrance 1640b (the ball is guided to the second ball entrance 1640b). In this way, the sorting member 900 can alternately guide the ball entering the sorting unit 660 to the right first ball entrance 64b and the second right ball entrance 1640b. The balls can be evenly distributed to the 64b and the second ball entrance 1640b to win a prize. Thereby, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed in parallel.

A guide plate 900z1 is provided between the distribution member 900 and the right first ball entrance 64b to guide the ball housed in the housing portion 900a to the right first ball entrance 64b. A guide plate 900Z2 is provided between the member 900 and the second ball entrance 1640b to guide the ball housed in the housing portion 900a to the second ball entrance 1640b. As a result, the balls sorted by the sorting member 900 can be smoothly guided to the respective ball entrances.

Furthermore, a regulating member (not shown) for regulating the rotation range of the distribution member 900 is provided on the upper end side (distribution member 900 side) of each of the guide plates 900z1 and 900z2. The rotation range is regulated by contact with the member. As a result, excessive rotation of the distribution member 900 (further counterclockwise rotation than in the state shown in FIG. 259(b)) due to the weight of the balls accommodated in the accommodation portion 900a can be suppressed. The balls distributed by the distribution member 900 can be smoothly guided to the respective ball entrances.

<Explanation of the game of the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 260 to 268, the contents of the game in this second control example will be described. In the second control example, the ratio of transition to each game state (normal state, variable probability state, latent probability state) is changed with respect to the first control example described above, and the number of time reductions given in the variable probability state is changed. A point, a point of changing the fluctuation time of each special symbol in the probability variable state and the latent probability state, and when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, one special symbol stops at a winning symbol. At the displayed timing (the timing at which the hit is confirmed), the measurement of the fluctuation time for the fluctuation of the other special pattern is interrupted (temporary stop), and after the winning game based on the lottery result of one special pattern, the interrupted fluctuation time is different in that it uses a configuration that restarts the measurement of

First, referring to FIG. 260, the flow of game state transition in the second control example will be described. FIG. 260 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of game state transition in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 260, the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, like the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, is configured to transition between three game states (normal state, variable probability state, latent probability state). It is configured.

Among the three game states described above, in the normal state (normal game state), the variation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is set in the same manner as the first control example described above. It is Therefore, the normal state is a game state in which the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is mainly performed (actual special figure 1 fluctuation). Further, in this control example, since a small hit is not set in the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1), a small hit game is not executed.

Next, in the variable probability state (variable probability gaming state), the variation time of the second special symbol is set shorter than the above-described first control example, and the right area of the board 13 (the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80 ) is executed (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game), and a game is executed in which balls flow into the sorting unit 660 and both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed at the same time. Details of the variation time of the second special symbol will be described later with reference to FIG. 270 (b), but in this control example, the first special symbol (special Short-term variation (3 seconds) shorter than the variation time of Figure 1) and long-term variation (180 seconds) longer than the variation time of special figure 1 are set, and the probability variation state depending on the selected variation time The ratio of lottery (fluctuation) executed in is set to be different.

Furthermore, in the present control example, the number of times (100 times) less than the number of times the variable probability state is set as the number of time reductions during the variable probability state (100 times) is configured. Therefore, in the definite variable state, when the variation of the special symbols exceeds 100 times without winning the special symbol jackpot, the game state is configured to shift from the definite variable state to the latent definite state (20 times). there is As a result, for example, after the jackpot game won in the normal state, even if the game shifts from the latent probability state that is the most advantageous to the player to the variable probability state, the player does not go through the special symbol jackpot. Since it is possible to shift to the latent definite state, the player can continue to have expectations.

In addition, as described above, in this control example, as the variation time of the second special symbol in the probability variation state, short-term variation (3 seconds) and long-term variation (180 seconds) are set, so special during the probability variation state When the number of symbol fluctuations exceeds 100 times and the game state shifts from the definite variable state to the latent definite state (20 times), depending on the variation situation of the second special symbol, a small hit during the latent definite state (20 times) It is possible to make a difference in the number of winning times. Specifically, for example, when the time saving state ends by the start of the long-time variation (180 seconds) of the second special symbol, and the game state shifts from the probability variation state to the latent probability state, the second special symbol The timing at which the next variation is executed is 180 seconds later. On the other hand, the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 10 seconds in the definite state (see FIG. 270 (b)) and 5 seconds in the latent state (see FIG. 271), so the next variation of the second special symbol The first special symbol is set to be variable 20 times before 180 seconds elapses until is executed.

Furthermore, in this control example, when a right-handed game is executed, the ball flows into the sorting unit 660 and is configured to enter the right first ball entrance 64b and the second ball entrance 1640b alternately. Therefore, it is impossible (difficult) to keep changing only the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to easily provide a difference by the number of variations of each special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) executed during the latent certainty state (20 times).

In the latent state (latent playing state), the variation time of the first special symbol is set shorter than the above-described first control example, and the lottery (fluctuation) of the first special symbol and the selection of the second special symbol are performed. Lottery (variation) is configured to be executed together (special figure 1 special figure 2 real variation). Since other elements are the same as those of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the second control example, an opportunity is provided to shift to the latent state, which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, without winning a special symbol jackpot, so the player's willingness to play has the effect of being able to continuously increase Furthermore, when the state shifts to the latent state without winning the jackpot of the special symbol, it is possible to vary the degree of advantage in the latent state depending on the transition timing and the fluctuation situation of the second special symbol. There is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a variety of playability and prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In addition, in the latent certainty state, the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol in which the small hit is set in the lottery result and the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol in which the small hit is not set in the lottery result are executed. Since it is a configuration, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the situation where a small winning game occurs excessively.

In addition, the variation ratio between the variation of the first special symbol (lottery) and the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) in the gaming state (variable state, latent state) in which the right-handed game is executed is It is set differently depending on the variation time set for the variation. Therefore, even in the same game state, the degree of advantage differs depending on the set variation time of each special symbol, so that the player can play the game while expecting that the variation of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player will be executed frequently. There is an effect that it can be done.

In this control example, although a small hit is not set in the lottery result of the first special symbol, the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. For example, the lottery result of the first special symbol may be set so that the small winning is won with a winning probability lower than that of the second special symbol. In addition, the small winning probability is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the small winning game executed when the small winning is won is higher than the case where the small winning is won with the first special symbol. , a small winning game may be provided in which the ball is more likely to enter the variable winning device 65 during the small winning game when winning a small winning with the second special symbol. In this case, a plurality of small winning games with different opening periods and opening patterns of the variable winning device 65 are set, and the case where the small winning is won with the second special symbol is higher than the case where the small winning is won with the first special symbol. , it is preferable that the opening period of the variable winning device 65 is lengthened, or an opening pattern in which the ball is likely to enter is selected.

Next, referring to FIG. 261, in the state where the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are fluctuating simultaneously in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, either one (the special figure 2) wins (jackpot or The flow of each special figure fluctuation and the effect display (the effect display displayed by the third symbol display device 81) in the case of a small hit will be described. Figure 261 is the timing chart which shows one example of the flow of each special figure fluctuation, the production display which is based on the fluctuation of special figure 1 in 3rd design display 81 (the production display which uses the 3rd design) is executed. In the probability variation state, the variation of the special figure 1 (10 seconds) and the variation of the special figure 2 (3 seconds) are executed at the same time, and the flow when the special figure 2 has been elected as a small hit is shown.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be varied (lottery) at the same time, the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the variation of each special figure. There is a thing where the effect display is executed. In this control example, among each special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2), the variation display corresponding to one of the special figure variations (main variation) and the variation display corresponding to the other special figure variation (sub variation) is executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 182).

This main variation and sub-variation are configured so that the corresponding special figure variation is switched according to the game state. It is set so that the variation display corresponding to the special figure 2 is a secondary variation. In this way, among the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation, the special figure variation that is substantially executed in the set game state is displayed as the main variation, so that the player can display the third symbol. The result of the game can be displayed on the device 81 in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in this second control example, an example is shown in which the variation display of each special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is switched to the main variation and the sub-variation according to the game state, but it is limited to this without, it may be configured so that the variation display corresponding to the special figure 1 variation and the variation display corresponding to the special figure 2 variation are randomly switched to the main variation and the sub-variation, or a predetermined rule (for example, alternating ) may be switched. Also, it may be configured so that the player can select. Even with such a configuration, the same problem occurs when a special figure variation on the side that does not correspond to the main variation executed by the third symbol display device 81 is won.

Returning to FIG. 261, the description continues. First, the variation of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are simultaneously started, and the special figure 1 effect display (10 seconds) is executed by the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the variation start timing of the special figure 1. Then, after 3 seconds from the start of the fluctuation of each special figure (after the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 has elapsed), the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a pattern indicating that the small hit has been won, and the variation of the special figure 1 is interrupted. In addition, details will be described later with reference to FIG. 275, but during the period when the measurement of the fluctuation time for the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is interrupted (the interruption period of FIG. 261), the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. The 1-symbol display device 37 is configured so that the variation of the special figure 1 is continuously executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player that the variation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped when the small winning game is executed.

On the other hand, in the second control example, the same processing as the variable display setting processing in the first control example (see S4112 in FIG. 243) is executed. The variation display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed by is a predetermined period (corresponding to the variation time of the special figure variation) even if the special figure variation is interrupted (the measurement of the special figure variation time is interrupted) 8 seconds) is configured to run continuously. As a result, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted (the measurement of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted), the fluctuation display ( (or effect display) is interrupted, and a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable can be suppressed.

Here, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted (the measurement of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted) as described above, the third symbol variation display (or effect display) executed by the third symbol display device 81 In the case of continuous execution, the interrupted special figure variation is resumed, and the timing at which the restarted special figure variation ends and the variation display (or effect) of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 There was a problem that an error for a predetermined period (interruption period of special figure fluctuation) would occur with the timing at which the display) ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, the variation pattern (variation display of the third symbol or The third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is not completely stopped and displayed until the pattern confirmation command output from the main control device 110 is received after the execution of the effect display) is completed. , is configured to execute a shaking performance in which each pattern is slightly shaken. Therefore, a predetermined period (interruption period of special figure fluctuation ) minute error period, the third pattern display device 81 continues the shaking performance with respect to the third pattern, making the player think that the pachinko machine 10 has a problem, thereby lowering the player's willingness to play. I had a problem letting it go.

On the other hand, in the second control example, the above-described problem is solved by enabling execution of the additional effect using the above-described error period. That is, the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, as shown in FIG. If the game state has not ended, during the period (1 second) until the small winning game state ends, a shaking effect that swings the third pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 on the third pattern display device 81 is executed, after that, the small winning game state is ended, and when the special figure 1 fluctuation is restarted, an additional performance corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation period after the restart is executed. By configuring in this way, the interrupted special figure fluctuation is resumed, and the timing at which the restarted special figure fluctuation ends and the variation display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 ) and the end of the timing (6 seconds in FIG. 261), it is possible to suppress the situation where the third symbol is continuously oscillatingly displayed. It is possible to suppress the situation where

Although the details will be described later, in the second control example, the length of the error period is calculated, and the content of the additional effect to be executed is changed according to the error period. As a result, it is possible to execute a more suitable effect display for the player.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 262 to 264, the contents of the additional effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 will be described. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273(b), but in this control example, the types of additional effects to be executed are made different based on the length of the period during which the additional effects are executed. As a result, regardless of the lottery result of the secondary fluctuation, the player feels uncomfortable with the production display (additional production display) that is executed in the remaining period when the production display corresponding to the main fluctuation is continuously executed. can be suppressed from giving

FIG. 262(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display screen when the additional effect is not executed in the remaining period. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273(b), but in this control example, in some cases where the remaining period is less than the predetermined period (less than 2 seconds), the additional effect is not executed. . This is done intentionally because if the additional effect is executed when the remaining period is so short that it is difficult for the player to grasp the content of the additional effect, the player will feel uncomfortable. This is to prevent the additional performance from being executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 262(a), until the stop command from the main control device 110 is received (see point D to point E in FIG. 261), the shaking is performed in the state corresponding to the main fluctuation. Stop is displayed.

Next, FIG. 262(b) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when additional effect A is executed as the type of additional effect during the remaining period. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273(b), but in this control example, in some cases where the remaining period is less than the predetermined period (less than 2 seconds), the additional effect A is executed. there is As shown in FIG. 262(b), in this additional effect A, when the effect corresponding to the main variation is completed, the number (identification information) displayed with each symbol is changed to "?" Shaking stop display. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the result of the main fluctuation until the remaining period elapses.

In this control example, a display mode in which only the numbers attached to each pattern are hidden is used, but for example, a display mode in which characters (such as "animals") of each pattern are also hidden may be used. By doing so, it is possible to further prevent the player from grasping the result of the main fluctuation until the remaining period elapses. In addition, since this additional effect A is a effect that only changes the display mode (display mode of the pattern) of a part of the effect corresponding to the executed main variation, even if it is executed when the remaining period is short It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

FIG. 263(a) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when additional effect B is executed as the type of additional effect during the remaining period. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273(b), but in this control example, in some cases where the remaining period is a predetermined period (2 seconds to 6 seconds), the additional effect B is configured to be executed. ing. As shown in FIG. 263(a), in this additional effect B, the same display as in FIG. A telop is displayed in the small area Ds5 to notify the presence. As a result, the player can easily understand that the main fluctuation is being fluctuated even when the state in which the main fluctuation is displayed in a state where the shaking is stopped continues.

In this control example, as the additional effect B, the display in the main display area Dm is configured to display the same display as in FIG. However, without being limited to this, for example, as an additional effect B, the display of the main display area Dm may be the same display as in FIG. . As a result, it is possible to execute the additional effect using the entire area of the third symbol display device 81, and there is an effect that the player can easily grasp that the additional effect is being executed.

Next, FIG. 263(b) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when additional effect C is executed as the type of additional effect during the remaining period. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273(b), but in this control example, in some cases where the remaining period is a predetermined period (2 seconds to 6 seconds), the additional effect C is configured to be executed. ing. As shown in FIG. 263(b), in this additional effect C, the main variable display is displayed in a reduced size in a small area Dm5 in the upper right part of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, and the pachinko machine 10 is displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm. A game description is displayed. In this way, by providing the player with information different from the information suggesting the lottery result of the main variation during the remaining period after the main variation effect is finished, the player is given a sense of discomfort. The remaining period of the main fluctuation can be digested without. Also, in the sub-display area Ds, similarly to FIG. 263(a), a telop is displayed in the small area Ds5 to inform the player that the variation is being executed. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the change is in progress.

FIG. 264 is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when an additional effect D is executed as the type of additional effect during the remaining period. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273(b), in this control example, the additional effect D is executed when the remaining period is longer than or equal to a predetermined period (6 seconds or longer). As shown in FIG. 264, in this additional effect D, similar to the additional effect C shown in FIG. In the central portion of the area Dm, the main variation effect is displayed again (replay display). In this way, when the period (residual period) during which the additional effect is executed is longer than or equal to a predetermined period (6 seconds or more), the effect (replay display effect) dedicated to the additional effect is executed without making the player feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the performance effect using the remaining period can be enhanced.

As described above, in the second control example, in the configuration in which the variation of each special figure (special figure 1, special figure 2) is executed at the same time, one of the special figures stops at the symbol indicating the hit When it is displayed, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special figure is stopped, and after the winning game is completed, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special figure is restarted, so the above-described first control example As in, it is possible to execute the game without forcibly stopping the variation of the special figure, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable with the game content.

Furthermore, the variation display corresponding to the special figure variation executed by the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the main variation) is set in advance even if the measurement of the special figure variation time is stopped. Since it is continuously executed during the period (period corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special figure), it is possible to suppress the interruption of the fluctuation display corresponding to the other special figure fluctuation due to the lottery result of one special figure. can. As a result, for example, as a variation display corresponding to the other special figure variation, when a production with a story is being executed, it is a case where the winning game is started by winning with one special figure variation Even so, it is possible to execute without interrupting the production with a story corresponding to the other special figure fluctuation. Therefore, there is an effect that the performance effect of the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, when the measurement of the variation time of the other special figure is stopped, the period until the variation of the other special figure is completed, and the other special figure variation executed by the third symbol display device 81 Although the period during which the corresponding variable display is completed is different, since the different period (remaining period) is used to execute the additional effect, the special figure is changed for the player. It is possible to suppress giving discomfort due to the difference between the period and the period of the fluctuation display corresponding to the special figure fluctuation.

In addition, in the second control example, the additional effect that is executed when the variation period of the special figure and the period of the variation display corresponding to the special figure variation are different, the length of the different period (remainder period) Since it is configured to be changed according to the situation, it is possible to further suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Specifically, when the remaining period is less than a predetermined period (for example, less than 2 seconds), the additional performance is intentionally prevented from being executed so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the additional performance being executed. , It is configured to execute an additional effect (short-term additional effect) in which only a part of the display content indicating that the variation display corresponding to the special figure variation is completed is changed. As a result, even if there is a surplus period in which it is difficult to provide the additional effect to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, in this second control example, as an additional effect in which only a part of the display content indicating that the fluctuation display corresponding to the special figure fluctuation has ended, of the fluctuation display corresponding to the special figure fluctuation, the special figure It is configured to execute an additional effect in which the display mode showing the lottery result is changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation by the fluctuation display corresponding to the special figure fluctuation before the special figure fluctuation period ends.

Also, if the remainder period is a predetermined period (for example, from 2 seconds to 6 seconds), the period during which the additional effect is being executed (the display of the special figure fluctuation has ended, but the special figure fluctuation has not been completed Period), since no new special figure variation is executed, there is a possibility that the player may suspect that the pachinko machine 10 is broken. Therefore, in this control example, when the remainder period is a predetermined period, the display for notifying the player that the special figure is fluctuating on the third symbol display device 81 ("fluctuation display") is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the state in which no new special figure variation is executed is a normal state.In addition, in the main issue 2 control example, the remainder period is a predetermined period At the same time as the additional effect that is executed in the case is started, the above-described “display during fluctuation” is displayed, but for example, a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the additional effect was executed. It may be configured so that the "in-varying display" is executed later. By configuring in this way, immediately after the additional effect is executed (for example, two seconds from the start), the same effect as the above-described short-term additional effect is executed, so the execution period of the additional effect is the game. It is possible to suppress being grasped by a person.

In addition, in the second control example, when a remainder period of a predetermined period (2 seconds to 6 seconds) is set, information unrelated to the lottery result of the special figure (for example, information explaining the game content etc.) An additional effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is also executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to effectively use the period in which a new special figure variation is not started on the display on the third symbol display device 81 to inform the player of the information regarding the game. Furthermore, by displaying information unrelated to the lottery result of the special figure, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the occurrence of the remaining period. In addition, in the second control example, information explaining the game content is displayed as information unrelated to the lottery result of the special figure. Often, for example, past game history may be displayed, or information unrelated to the game itself (fortune-telling, games, etc.) may be displayed.

In addition, in the second control example, among the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation that are executed at the same time, the special figure variation that the player expects more for the lottery result is the main variation, and the other is the secondary variation. In order for the player to easily grasp the contents of the main variation, the area in which the main variation is performed is larger than the area in which the secondary variation is performed on the third symbol display device 81. there is As a result, the player can easily comprehend the variation content of the main variation.

Furthermore, in the second control example, the special figure (special figure subject to actual variation) that the player expects in the lottery result is switched according to the gaming state. is executed as the main variation, the game content can be displayed (notified) in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 265, the flow of variation of each special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) when the game state in the second control example shifts from the latent state to the normal state will be described. do. Figure 265 (a) is a timing chart showing the flow when the special figure fluctuation of the 1st rotation after the end of the latent state (121st rotation after the end of the previous jackpot) is special figure 2, Figure 265 (b) Is a timing chart showing the flow when the special figure fluctuation of the 1st rotation after the end of the latent certainty state (121st exhibition after the end of the previous jackpot) is the special figure 1.

As shown in FIGS. 265(a) and (b), in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed at the same time, the advantageous state (potential state) in which the player is advantageous is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 120 times), the number of times the advantageous state is set when the special figure variation (special figure 1 variation or special figure 2 variation) is executed during the advantageous state (that is, the probability variation number ) is subtracted. In this case, if the special figure variation to be executed in the first rotation after the end of the advantageous state (number of variations "121" in FIG. 265) becomes special figure 1 variation (see FIG. 265 (b)) and special figure 2 variation (see FIG. 265(a)).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, a short variation time is set as the special figure variation time during the latent state in order to efficiently digest (execute) the game during the latent state. (See FIG. 270(b)), The game result displayed when the latent certainty state ends (see FIG. 188(b)) is configured to be displayed during the special figure fluctuation executed after the latent certainty state ends. is doing. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation (main fluctuation in the normal state) that is executed first after shifting from the latent state to the normal state makes the player grasp the game result (Fig. 188 (b) is set to be a sufficient time (12 seconds in this control example).

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, the special figure 1 fluctuation that is executed first after shifting from the latent certainty state to the normal state is the special figure of the first rotation after the end of the latent certainty state. Whether it will be a fluctuation or a special figure fluctuation in the second rotation depends on the game situation during the latent state, so just setting the special figure fluctuation time of the first rotation after the latent state to 12 seconds is latent. There is a problem that the player cannot grasp the game result of the state.

Therefore, in this second control example, the fluctuation time for two rotations after the end of the latent certainty state is set to a time (12 seconds in this control example) sufficient for the player to grasp the game result (FIG. 188(b)). Set, when the variation of the special figure 1 is executed in any special figure variation, it is configured to notify the game result using the variation time.By this, the player is surely latent The state game result can be notified.

That is, in the case shown in FIG. 265 (a), the special figure variation of the second rotation after the end of the latent state (variation number "122") becomes the special figure 1 variation, and the game result is notified using the variation time , In the case shown in FIG. 265 (b), the special figure variation of the first rotation after the end of the latent state (variation number "121") becomes the special figure 1 variation, and the game result is notified using the variation time .

It should be noted that, in the case shown in FIG. 265 (a), after the transition from the latent state to the normal state, the game result using the period until the special figure 1 fluctuation that becomes the main fluctuation in the normal state is started It is good also as a structure which alert|reports.

Next, with reference to FIG. 266 and FIG. 267, screen display contents set based on the setting status of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t will be described. 266(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of demonstration display A, FIG. 266(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of demonstration display B, and FIG. 267B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of special display A, and FIG. 267B is a schematic diagram showing the contents of special display B. FIG.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, configurations of ROM 202 and RAM 203 provided in main controller 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 268 to 271. FIG. In the ROM 202 of the second control example, the content of the jackpot type selection table 202d is partially changed with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 of the first control example described above, and the content of the variation pattern selection table 202f is partially changed. The difference is that

First, with reference to FIG. 268(a), the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the second control example will be described. FIG. 268(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d.

The jackpot type selection table 202d used in the second control example is a first hit type counter in which each jackpot type is defined for the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 193) used in the first control example described above. The point that the value of C2 is changed, the point that the jackpot H is defined instead of the jackpot G, which is the jackpot type selected when the pattern type is the special figure 2, and the case where a part of the jackpot type wins V. It is different from the point that the number of times of reduced working hours to be given is stipulated as 100 times instead of 120 times. Other than that, it is the same as the first control example described above, and detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 268 (a), when the symbol type is special figure 1 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 29", the jackpot A is selected as the jackpot type, and the first hit When the value of the type counter C2 is "30 to 79", the jackpot B is selected as the jackpot type, and when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 89", the jackpot C is selected as the jackpot type. If selected and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "90 to 99", the jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type.

Also, if the symbol type is special figure 2 and the value of the first per type counter C2 is "0 to 44", the big hit E is selected as the big hit type, and the value of the first per type counter C2 is " 45 to 49", jackpot F is selected as the jackpot type, and when the value of the first win type counter C2 is "50 to 99", jackpot H is selected as the jackpot type.

Here, the jackpot H, which is the jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d of the second control example, will be described. This big win H is a big win in which two rounds (R) of the big win game are executed, and the same opening pattern as the small win game is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 65 executed during the big win game. . As a result, it is possible to execute a big winning game and a small winning game with the same opening pattern of the variable winning device 65, and by grasping the opening pattern of the variable winning device 65, the type of winning game (big winning game or small winning game) games) can be difficult to identify.

Therefore, for example, when a winning game is executed during the latent certainty state, whether the winning game is a winning game (that is, a jackpot game H) that resets the value of the actual residual probability variation number to the initial value (120 times) , Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify whether it is a winning game (that is, a small winning game) that does not change the value of the number of times of real residual probability variation, it is an advantageous gaming state for the player It is made difficult to grasp the period during which a certain latent state continues, and the game can be played while predicting the period during which the latent certain state continues.

In addition, in this second control example, the number of times of time saving set when shifting to the variable probability state (high probability / time saving state) is set to 100 times, which is less than the number of times the probability variable state continues (120 times), When the special figure variation exceeds 100 times without winning a jackpot in the probability variable state, the game state is shifted from the probability variable state to the latent probability state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set an opportunity other than the opportunity to win a big hit with a special figure as a transition opportunity to shift to the latent state which is a game state advantageous to the player, and to increase the interest of the game. can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 268(b), the contents of the variation pattern table 202f of the second control example will be described. FIG. 268(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern table 202f. As shown in FIG. 268(b), in the second control example, the period in which the normal table A202f1 is referred to for the variation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 194) of the first control example described above is set to the latent state. Instead of the 3rd rotation after the end, the 9th rotation after the end of the latent state, the normal table B202fb2 instead of the normal table B202f2, and the high variation table instead of the high variation table 202f3. b202fb3 is provided, the concealment table b202fb4 is provided instead of the concealment table 202f4, and the normal table Cb202fb5 is provided which is referred to during the period of the third to eighth rotations after the concealment state ends. It is different from the point.

Here, a characteristic variation pattern set for a characteristic game property of the second control example (a game property different from that of the above-described first control example) will be described. As described above, this second control example is configured to be able to hold and store up to four lotteries of special figure 2. Therefore, for example, when the game state shifts from the latent certainty state to the normal state in a state where the right-handed game is executed during the latent certainty state and the four lotteries of the special figure 2 are held and stored, the held storage The lottery of the special figure 2 that is being executed will be executed in the state where the normal state is set as the game state.

In addition, in the second control example as well as in the first control example described above, in order to suppress the frequent execution of the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state, the variation pattern with a long variation time (for example, , a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 minutes) is set to be selected, so there was a problem that the lottery of the special figure 2 held and stored during the latent state was executed in the normal state. .

Therefore, in the second control example, even if the lottery of the special figure 2 held and stored during the latent certainty state is executed during the normal state, in order to suppress the execution of the special figure fluctuation with a long fluctuation time, A predetermined period (period until the special figure lottery is executed 8 times) after the game state shifts from the latent definite state to the normal state is set so that the fluctuation time for the special figure 2 lottery is short. there is As a result, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 from fluctuating for a long time even though the player is playing a proper game.

Furthermore, in the second control example, as described above, when one of the special symbols stops with a symbol indicating a win (big win or small win), until the winning game based on that win ends (the winning game ends However, until the special figure variation becomes executable), the other special figure variation is temporarily stopped (the subtraction of the special figure variation time is temporarily stopped), so the long-time variation of the special figure 2 is executed If it is done, even if the jackpot is won in the lottery of special figure 1 and the game state shifts from normal state to latent state, the lottery of special figure 2 will be held during the period until the long-term fluctuation ends. There is a risk that the game will not be executed and that a game state that is advantageous to the player cannot be provided.

Even for such a problem, the predetermined period after the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state (the period until the special figure lottery is executed 8 times) is the period after that in the normal state. (The period after the special figure lottery is executed 8 times) By configuring so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected, the above-described problem can be solved.

Here, the normal table Bb202fb2 will be described with reference to FIG. 269(a). FIG. 269(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal table Bb202fb2. This normal table Bb202fb2 is the same as the normal table B202f2 of the first control example described above except that the fluctuation times defined for some fluctuation patterns are changed. A detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

Specifically explaining the difference from the above-described first control example, in the normal table Bb202fb2, any variation pattern selected when the symbol type is special figure 2 is "12000 milliseconds (12 seconds)" Variable time is specified. In other words, from the time the game state transitions from the latent state to the normal state until the special drawing is executed twice, regardless of the symbol type and the success/failure determination result, the fluctuation of "12000 milliseconds (12 seconds)" A time will be set.

By configuring in this way, one of the two fluctuations after the game state shifts from the latent certainty state to the normal state can be made the special figure 1 fluctuation. Therefore, for example, when the game result in the latent certainty state is notified in response to the variation of the special figure 1, there is an effect that the period for notifying the game result can be reliably secured.

In addition, in the second control example, the normal table Bb202fb2 is referred to only for a predetermined period (period until the special figure fluctuation is executed twice) after the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state , Regardless of the type of symbol and the result of the judgment result, the same variation time (12 seconds) is specified to be set, but it is not necessary to set all the variation times to the same value. It may be configured to set In this case, it is better to set the variation time of the special figure 2 longer than the variation time of the special figure 1 (for example, 15 seconds). As a result, during the variation of the special figure 1 executed after the game state shifts from the latent certainty state to the normal state, the variation of the special figure 2 won as a jackpot is stopped and displayed to prevent the start of the jackpot game. It is possible to suppress it, and it is possible to make it easier to display the effect display that is executed corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 for a predetermined period (12 seconds).

In addition, in this second control example, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed at the same time, the effect display executed in response to the variation of the special figure 1 (for example, the game in the latent state In order to execute the result display showing the result) for a predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds), each special figure (special figure 1 Or special figure 2) is configured to be a predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds), so that the special figure 1 fluctuates for 12 seconds regardless of the timing when the variation between special figure 1 and special figure 2 is started In response to the variation of the special figure 1, a predetermined effect display for 12 seconds (for example, a result display showing the game result during the latent state) is executed. After the game state transitions from the latent certainty state to the normal state, if the special figure 1 fluctuates continuously, a predetermined effect display (for example, in the latent certainty state in response to the first special figure 1 fluctuation Result display showing the game result) is executed, and for the second special figure 1 variation, a normal effect display that suggests the corresponding lottery result to the player may be executed.

Next, the normal table Cb202fb5 will be described with reference to FIG. 269(b). FIG. 269(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table Cb202fb5. This normal table Cb202fb5 is a table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern for the 3rd to 8th rotations after the end of the latent state.

This normal table Cb202fb5 is set so that the variation time set for the variation pattern selected when the symbol type is special figure 2 is shorter than the normal table Bb202fb2 described above. Specifically, the variation time selected when the symbol type is the special figure 2 is set to be 0.5 seconds (500 milliseconds) regardless of the result of the determination. By constructing in this way, the lottery of the special figure 2 held and stored in the latent definite state is completely consumed within a predetermined period (within 8 rotations of the special figure fluctuation) after the game state shifts to the normal state. becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the motivation of the player from being lowered due to the execution of a long-time variation when the game state is changed despite the fact that a proper game is being executed.

In addition, in this control example, in order to prevent the lottery of the special figure 2 held and stored during the latent state from being executed with a long time variation (about 10 minutes), the maximum number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 (4 pieces) and the maximum number of reserved memories (4 pieces) of special figure 2 are configured so that a special variation pattern is selected during the period in which the special figure lottery for 8 pieces is executed, It should be possible to prevent the lottery of the special figure 2 held and stored during the latent state from being executed for a long time (about 10 minutes), for example, it corresponds to the special figure 1 defined in the normal table Bb202fb2 By configuring the shortest fluctuation time to be four times longer than the longest fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure 2 defined in the normal table Bb202fb2, the fluctuation pattern was set with reference to the normal table Bb202fb2. By the time the variation (lottery) of the special figure 1 ends, all the lotteries of the special figure 2 that are reserved and stored may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to digest the lottery of special figure 2 held and stored in a shorter period of time.

In addition, the period from when the game state shifts from the latent certainty state to the normal state until all the lotteries reserved and stored in the special figure 2 are digested (the lottery is executed) is a special effect period for displaying the results of the latent certainty state. Alternatively, the third symbol display device 81 may execute a dedicated effect. As a result, for example, the lottery of the special figure 2 in which the lottery result is a big win is reserved and stored during the latent definite state, and even if the lottery is executed in the normal state, the big win is stopped and displayed during the special performance period. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

Furthermore, after the special effect period ends (after all the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is consumed), the normal state effect display is executed by configuring the normal state effect display. It is better to prevent the lottery of special figure 2 from being executed (variation is executed). As a result, the state where the special figure 2 is being variably displayed while the normal state effect display is being executed on the third pattern display device 81 can easily be regarded as a state where an appropriate game is not being executed. can be discriminated. Therefore, the hall clerk can appropriately deal with the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 270(a), the contents of the probability variation table b202fb3 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 270(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation table b202fb3. This probability variation table b202fb3 is a table referred to when the gaming state is the probability variation state.

As shown in FIG. 270 (a), in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, as the variation time of the special figure 1 in the variable probability state, the same variation time is set regardless of the number of pending balls and the result of winning or not determination is doing. Specifically, if the hit or fail determination result of special figure 1 is hit (jackpot), the hit probability variation (variation time 10 seconds) is defined, and if the hit or fail determination result of special figure 1 is off , deviation probability variation (variation time 10 seconds) is defined.

In addition, as the variation time of the special figure 2, a long variation longer than the variation time of the special figure 1 and a short variation shorter than the variation time of the special figure 1 are configured to be set for each propriety determination result. ing. Specifically, if the result of the special figure 2 hit/fail judgment is a hit (jackpot), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 159". , and a probability variable short variation (variation time of 3 seconds) is associated with the range of “160 to 198”.

If the success or failure determination result of the special figure 2 is a small hit, a small hit probability variable long fluctuation (variation time 180 seconds (3 minutes)) is associated with the range of "0 to 159" as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, A small hit probability variable short variation (variation time 3 seconds) is associated with the range of “160 to 198”. Furthermore, if the result of the right or wrong determination of the special figure 2 is out, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "0 to 159". Out of the range of "160 to 198", variable probability short fluctuation (variation time: 3 seconds) is associated.

Here, the relationship between the game content in the probability variable state in the second control example and the variable time set for each special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) described above will be described. In this second control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 260, a probability variable state in which time reduction is given to the first 100 times of the high probability state (120 times) is set, and in the high probability state When the number of special lottery numbers exceeds 100 without winning a jackpot, a latent definite state is set in which the reduction of working hours is not provided.

Furthermore, in the second control example, a distribution unit 660 is provided in the right-handed area, and by executing a right-handed game, the ball alternately enters the right first ball entrance 64b and the second ball entrance 1640b. It is configured to enter the ball (see Figure 258). And, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, since the variable time is set so that both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 lottery can be executed during the variable probability state as described above, the above-described first Unlike the control example, it becomes possible to execute a right-handed game during the variable probability state.

That is, in the second control example, a right-handed game is executed during the variable probability state, and a game in which the ball is alternately entered into the right first ball entrance 64b and the second ball entrance 1640b is executed. Since the lottery between 1 and special figure 2 is executed based on the variation time set, for example, the variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds is continuously set as the variation pattern of special figure 2, Lottery (variation) based on special figure 2 can be executed more than in FIG. Also lottery (fluctuation) based on special figure 1 will be executed a lot.

In this way, by varying the rate at which the special figure variation (the variation of the special figure 2) that is advantageous to the player is executed, depending on the set variation time, the game that gives the player a sense of tension can be realized. can be executed. In this control example, one type of variation time of special figure 1 (10 seconds) and two types of variation time of special figure 2 (3 seconds, 3 minutes) are configured, but it is advantageous for the player The shortest variation time of special figure variation (variation of special figure 2) is made shorter than the shortest variation time of special figure variation (variation of special figure 1) that is disadvantageous to the player, and a feature that is advantageous to the player The maximum variation time of the figure fluctuation (variation of special figure 2) may be configured to be longer than the longest variation time of the special figure variation (variation of special figure 1) that is disadvantageous to the player. It may be configured such that multiple types of variable times are set for the figures (special figure 1 and special figure 2).

Furthermore, as the variation time of the special figure variation (variation of special figure 1) that is disadvantageous to the player, with a low probability (for example, only in the range of "1" as the value of the variation type counter CS1), the player It may be configured so that a longer variation time (for example, 5 minutes) than the longest variation time of the special figure variation (variation of special figure 2) on the side to be advantageous is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a definite variable state in which many special figure variations (variations of special figure 2) that are advantageous to the player are performed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the second control example, it is configured so that the variation time of each special figure in the probability variable state is set regardless of the number of retained balls, but the variation time is configured to differ according to the number of retained balls. For example, the variation time of the special figure 2 that is advantageous to the player may be lengthened as the number of pending balls decreases. As a result, it is possible to continuously execute the game (right-handed game) so that the number of reserved balls is always the upper limit in order to execute the lottery of the special figure 2 more often.

In addition, the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponding to the lottery of the reserved and stored special figures is determined, and a notification (prefetching It may be configured to execute variable time notification). In this case, for example, when the number of held balls is small (for example, when the number of held balls is 0 or 1) as a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of a specific fluctuation type counter CS1 (for example, "10 to 30") A long variation time (eg, 3 minutes) is selected, and a short variation time (eg, 3 seconds) is set when the number of held balls is large (eg, when the number of held balls is 2 or more) By configuring as above, the player may be informed that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 30" has been retained and stored by the pre-read fluctuation time notice. As a result, the player can more positively execute the game (right-handed game) in order to prevent the special figure 2 from fluctuating for a long time.

The contents explained above are executed for the special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) that is advantageous to the player, but the same technical idea is applied to the special figure variation (special figure 1 variation) that is disadvantageous to the player. variation). In addition, the number of pending memories referred to when changing the variable time according to the number of pending memories may refer to the sum of the number of pending memories of special figures 1 and 2, and the variation is executed You may refer only to the reserved memory number corresponding to the symbol type (special figure 1 or special figure 2).

In addition, in the variable state, without winning the jackpot, the number of special drawing lots (number of fluctuations) of special drawing 1 and the number of drawing of special drawing 2 (number of fluctuations) is 100 By exceeding the number of times, the game state is shifted from the definite variable state to the latent definite state. The advantage in the latent certainty state can be varied according to the variation situation of the special figure 2 at the timing when the game state shifts to the latent certainty state.

Next, referring to FIG. 270(b), the contents of the latency confirmation table b202fb4 will be described. FIG. 270(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latency confirmation table b202fb4. This latency table b202fb4 is different from the latency table 202f4 of the first control example described above in that the variation time of special figure 1 is set shorter, and the variation time of special figure 2 is It is different in that it changes and that the variation time of Toku-zu 2 is changed.

Specifically, if the hit or fail determination result of the special figure 1 is a hit (jackpot), a short variation per hit (variation time 5 seconds) is defined, and if the hit or fail determination result of the special figure 1 is out , and out-of-short variation (variation time 5 seconds) are defined.

In addition, as the fluctuation time of special figure 2, if the result of special figure 2 is a hit (jackpot), the number of held balls is 1 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198" A short variation A (variation time of 1 second) is associated with a hit, and a short variation B (variation time of 5 seconds) is associated with a range of “0 to 198” with the number of held balls being 0, 2, 3. . Also, if the success/failure determination result of special figure 2 is a small hit, the number of held balls is 1 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to a small hit short fluctuation A (variation time 1 second) in the range of "0 to 198" ) is associated, and the number of held balls is 0, 2, 3 and the small hit short fluctuation B (variation time 5 seconds) is associated with the range of "0 to 198". Furthermore, if the success/failure determination result of special figure 2 is out, regardless of the number of held balls, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "0 to 198" Short variation A (variation time 1 second) corresponds attached.

In this way, in the table b202fb4 for concealment that is referenced during the concealment state, by setting a plurality of types of variation times of the special figure 2 when the result of the success or failure determination is a small hit, the timing at which the small hit is executed It is possible to suppress the game of shooting a ball aiming at (so-called stopping shot).

Furthermore, when the number of held balls is large (the number of held balls is 2 and 3), the fluctuation time is set longer than when the number of held balls is small (the number of held balls is 1). This is because when the number of held balls is large, a large number of balls enter the first right ball entrance 64b and the second ball entrance 1640b. This is a state in which sufficient prize balls are paid out to the player. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is small (the number of reserved balls is 1), the number of balls entering the right first ball entrance 64b and the second ball entrance 1640b is small. has not been paid out.

Therefore, when the number of held balls is large (the number of held balls is 2 and 3), the set fluctuation time is longer than when the number of held balls is small (the number of held balls is 1). It is possible to equalize the total number of prize balls, which is the sum of the number of prize balls paid out by the ball entering the game and the number of prize balls paid out by the small winning game. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 is adjusted unfavorably to the player (adjustment to make it difficult for the ball to enter each ball entrance), it is possible to easily obtain the prize balls by small hits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation from declining.

In addition, in this control example, when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is 0, the same fluctuation time as when the number of reserved balls is large (number of reserved balls 2, 3) is set. . This is to suppress a game in which a player shoots balls at intervals and aims for a short fluctuation time. As a result, it is possible to provide a game in which it is difficult for a player who plays a malicious game to win a prize ball by a small hit.

Furthermore, in this control example, by executing a right-handed game, the second ball entrance 1640b where the lottery of the special figure 2 advantageous to the player is executed and the right number 1640b where the lottery of the disadvantageous special figure 1 is executed Since the ball is alternately entered into the 1 ball entrance 64b, it is more suppressed that the game intentionally aiming only for the lottery of the special figure 2 in which the short fluctuation time is set is executed. can do.

In addition, in this second control example, as the variable time of the special figure 2, it is configured to be able to set two types of variable time according to the number of held balls, but there is no limit to this, and multiple types of variable time can be set in various ways. It may be configured to be set under various conditions. For example, a different variation time may be set for each number of retained balls, or the range of the variation type counter CS1 may be divided and varied so that different variation times are set even for the same number of retained balls. You can set the time. In addition, only the special figure lottery of the predetermined number of times executed after the end of the small winning game may be set to a different variation time. For example, after the end of the small winning game, until the lottery of the special figure is executed three times, it is preferable to configure so that the fluctuation time set when winning the small winning becomes longer. As a result, it is possible to suppress the excessive payout of prize balls when the lottery for winning a small prize is biased.

Alternatively, only for a predetermined period after the end of the small winning game (for example, the period until the special drawing is executed 3 times), a short fluctuation when the number of reserved balls of the special drawing 2 is a predetermined number or more (for example, 2 or more) It is preferable to set a time (for example, 0.5 seconds). By configuring in this way, the player can continue to play the game. Furthermore, the variable time set in this case may be the same as the time interval between rounds in the jackpot game. As a result, when small wins are won successively, the variable prize winning device 65 can be varied as if a big win is won, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As described above, in this second control example, the frequency of executing the small hit game during the latent state can be set based on the number of balls held in the special figure 2, so that the latent state We are trying to equalize the number of prize balls paid out inside (the number of prize balls based on the number of balls entered into each entrance and the number of prize balls based on the small winning game), but other than that, the normal figure lottery It may be configured to set the fluctuation time of the normal drawing lottery based on the number of pending memories. For example, if the number of pending memories of the normal drawing lottery is large, the ball is likely to enter the distribution unit 660 (because the ball is likely to enter each ball entrance). , and if the number of pending memories of the general pattern lottery is small, it is better to set the fluctuation time of the general pattern lottery to be shorter than when it is large. As a result, the degree of ball entry into the distribution unit 660 can be made uniform, and as a result, the number of prize balls paid out during the latent state (the number of prize balls based on the number of balls entered into each ball entrance) And the number of prize balls based on the small hit game) can be uniformed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 271, details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in this second control example will be described. FIG. 271 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this second control example.

As shown in FIG. 271, the RAM 203 in the second control example has the second special symbol execution area 203b and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p deleted from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first control example (see FIG. 198). In addition, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203bb, a special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc, and a special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd are added.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is a variable display (third It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the pattern display device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. is incremented by 1 until On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed. The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, like the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d.

The second special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203bb has one execution area and four reserved areas, like the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. In the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203bb, each counter value acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 1640b (start winning) is stored. Since the counter value storage method and the like are the same as those in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is a flag indicating a period to stop the update (subtraction) of the variation time of special figure 1, and stops the update (subtraction) of the variation time when it is set to ON, When the ON state is changed to OFF, the stopped update (subtraction) of the variable time is restarted.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON when stopping the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) where the lottery result is a big hit (S1332 in FIG. 281), special symbol variation processing 2 ( 275) (S232 in FIG. 275). As a result of referencing, if it is set to ON, a process of updating the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the special figure 1 in the same manner as during variation is executed (S233 in FIG. 275). That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the variable display is continuously executed. Become. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped by setting the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc to ON. Then, when it is determined that it is set to ON in the first special symbol variation in-execution process (see FIG. 277) (S2801 in FIG. 277: Yes), it is set to OFF (S2803 in FIG. 277). Although detailed description and illustration are omitted, this special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is the same process as when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a small hit. is executed and set to on.

Special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is a flag indicating a period to stop the update (subtraction) of the variation time of special figure 2, and stops the update (subtraction) of the variation time when it is set to ON, When the ON state is changed to OFF, the stopped update (subtraction) of the variable time is restarted.

This special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON when stopping the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) where the lottery result is a big hit (S732 in FIG. 278), special symbol variation processing 2 ( 275) (S232 in FIG. 275). In addition, since it is the same as that of special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc mentioned above about the content referred in this process, the description is abbreviate|omitted. Then, when it is determined that it is set to ON in the second special symbol variation in-execution process (see FIG. 280) (S2901 in FIG. 280: Yes), it is set to OFF (S2903 in FIG. 280).

Next, with reference to FIG. 272(a), details of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 272(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in this second control example.

As shown in FIG. 272(a), the ROM 222 in the second control example partially replaces the contents of the screen display selection 2 table 222b with the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example (see FIG. 199(a)). It is different in that it has been changed and that an additional effect selection table 222ba has been added.

Here, the screen display selection 2 table 222b in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 272(b). FIG. 272(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the screen display selection 2 table 222b. This screen display selection 2 table 222b is configured such that different screen display types are selected depending on whether the game state is the normal state or the variable probability state with respect to the screen display selection table 222b of the first control example described above; The difference is that the display content (screen display type) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Other elements are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

As shown in Figure 272 (b), when the gaming state is the normal state, the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is off, the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is for the combination of on, the display content (screen display type) The normal display is defined as In this normal display, the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol and the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol are displayed in the normal state (see FIG. 182(b)). display content. In the normal state, since the main fluctuation is the fluctuation display based on the lottery result of the first special symbol, the main fluctuation can be reliably displayed by setting the normal display.

In the normal state, the demonstration display A is associated with the combination of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s on and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t off. When this demonstration display A is determined, the demonstration display A screen (see FIG. 266(a)) is set. After 30 seconds have passed since the fluctuation of the special figure 1, which is the main fluctuation, has passed, regardless of whether the secondary fluctuation is being executed or not, it is configured to switch to the demonstration display A screen (customer waiting demonstration screen). By doing so, even if the player enters the ball into the second ball entrance 1640b and quits the game immediately after the long-time fluctuation display starts, the predetermined time (30 seconds) will elapse. After that, the customer waiting demo screen can be displayed. Therefore, other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demo screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is an empty machine, so that a game can be started with the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the rate of operation of the pachinko machine 10 from decreasing. Furthermore, in this demonstration display A screen, the special figure 2 is actually displayed in a variable manner. You can play the game." is displayed. As a result, the player can start the game with more peace of mind.

In the normal state, the combination of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t both off is associated with the demonstration display B (see FIG. 266(b)). As a result, other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is empty.

Next, in the probability variable state, the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is on, the combination of the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is off, or the combination of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s off and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is on are associated with normal display. In the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, a game in which both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are variable is executed in the variable probability state, so that either special figure standby flag (special figure 1 standby flag 223s , The customer waiting demo screen is not displayed while the special figure 2 standby flag 223t) is set to OFF. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In this way, it is determined whether the special figure is changing for each of the special figures 1 and 2 (whether a predetermined period has passed since the variation of the special figure has stopped), and the respective determination results, And by setting the screen display type based on the currently set game state, the symbol type (special figure 1, special figure 2) for the pachinko machine 10 having a game property to change (game property to change the symbol type (special figure 1, special figure 2) that substantially changes according to the game state), in the current game state It is possible to easily inform whether or not the variation (main variation) of the symbol type (special figure 1, special figure 2) expected by the person is executed.

In the probability variation state, special display A (see FIG. 267 (a)) is associated with the combination of both special figure 1 standby flag 223s and special figure 2 standby flag 223t off. This makes it possible to suggest the current game situation to the player who has confirmed the customer waiting demo screen.

In the latent state, the display content ( Special display B (FIG. 267(b)) is defined as the screen display type). This special display B is displayed in a state in which the special figure 2, which is a substantial variation in the latent state, has not changed (the special figure 2 standby flag is set to ON).

Next, with reference to FIG. 273, the additional effect selection table 222ba in this control example will be described. FIG. 273 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional effect selection table 222ba. This additional effect selection table 222ba, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON, the additional effect period ( FIG. 261) is a table that is referred to when selecting the type of additional effect to be executed (additional effect type), and the length of the period during which the additional effect can be executed (remaining fluctuation time) and the acquired effect An additional effect type is selected based on the value of the counter 223h.

Specifically, when the remaining variation time (period in which additional effects can be executed) is less than 2 seconds (period A) and the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is "0 to 99", the additional effect “None” is selected as the type (see FIG. 262(a)), and in the case of “100 to 198”, “additional effect A” is selected as the additional effect type (see FIG. 262(b)).

When the remaining variation time (period in which additional effects can be executed) is 2 seconds to 15 seconds (period B), and the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is "0 to 99", the additional effect type is " "Additional effect B" is selected (see FIG. 263(a)), and in the case of "100 to 198", "additional effect C" is selected as the additional effect type (see FIG. 263(b)).

If the remaining fluctuation time (period in which additional effects can be executed) is 15 seconds or more (period C), and the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is "0 to 99", the additional effect type is "additional effect C" is selected (see FIG. 263(b)), and in the case of "100 to 198", "additional effect D" is selected as the additional effect type (see FIG. 264).

As described above, in this control example, the additional effect to be executed is selected based on the length of the period (remaining fluctuation time) during which the additional effect can be executed. When the variable time is short (when it is difficult for the player to grasp the contents of the effect to be executed by the additional effect), an additional effect (for example, an additional effect A) is executed by partially changing the normal effect, and the remaining effect is executed. When the remaining variation time is long so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the performance executed during the variable time (when the player can fully grasp the details of the performance executed by the additional performance). , an additional effect (for example, an additional effect D) different from the normal effect can be executed to enhance the effect of the effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 274, details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 274 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this second control example.

As shown in FIG. 274, the RAM 223 in the second control example has the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 199(b)), the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223ba, the remaining variation time information A storage area 223bb and an additional effect information storage area 223bc are added.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ba is a counter updated based on the reserved ball number command related to the second special symbol output from the main control device 110, and is the first special symbol described above in the first control example. The only difference with respect to the symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is that the counter update target is the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba instead of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and the other elements are the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

The remaining variation time information storage area 223bb stores information about the remaining period (remaining variation time) of the currently set variation pattern calculated when the special figure 1 or special figure 2 temporary stop command is received from the main controller 110. This is an area for storing, and the stored information is referred to when selecting an additional effect to be executed after restarting the fluctuation.

This remaining variation time information storage area 223bb in the temporary stop related processing (see Figure 286), when receiving the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command (S4901 in Figure 286: Yes), the variation pattern The remaining fluctuation period is calculated (S4903 in FIG. 286), and the remaining fluctuation period information is set based on the length of the remaining fluctuation period (see S4907 to S4908 in FIG. 286). Then, in the fluctuation restart process (see FIG. 287), the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command is received (S5001 in FIG. 287: Yes), and when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not being executed (S5002 in FIG. 287: No), used to determine the additional effect type (S5003 in FIG. 287), and then the set remaining fluctuation period information is cleared (S5009 in FIG. 287).

The additional effect information storage area 223bc is an area for storing the determined additional effect type, and the additional effect is executed based on the stored additional effect type. This additional effect information storage area 223bc is set with the determined additional effect type (S5005, S5006 in FIG. 287) in the variable resuming process (see FIG. 287), and is read when setting the display additional effect command. (S5007 in FIG. 287), and then cleared (S5009 in FIG. 287).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 275 to 283. FIG. The control processing of the main controller 110 in the second control example is the special symbol variation processing 2 instead of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 209) in contrast to the control processing of the main controller 110 in the first control example described above. (see FIG. 275), game state update processing 2 (see FIG. 276) in place of the game state update processing (see FIG. 213), start winning processing 2 (see FIG. 282) instead of starting winning processing (see FIG. 222), The difference is that the jackpot end processing 2 (FIG. 283) is executed instead of the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 230), and otherwise the same processing is executed. The same processes are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the second control example, in addition to the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special symbol 1), which is a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special symbol), in addition to the first control example described above, In the case that the lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 2) can also be held and stored, and when the special figure 1 and special figure 2 are performing fluctuations at the same time, either one When the special figure is stopped and displayed with a pattern indicating a win, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the other special figure is interrupted, and after the winning game based on the win of one special figure, the subtraction of the fluctuation time is resumed again. They are very different in terms of structure.

In addition, the point that the lottery of special figure 2 can be retained and stored, and the control processing based on it are the same as the configuration and control processing for retaining and storing the lottery of special figure 1 described in the first control example described above. Therefore, its description is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 275, the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (S104) in the second control example will be described. FIG. 275 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (S104). When the special symbol variation process 2 (S104) is executed, first, it is determined whether a big win or a small win is in progress (S231). When it is determined that the jackpot or the small hit is in progress (S231: Yes), next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON (S232). . In the processing of this S232, it is determined whether or not the subtraction of the other special figure fluctuation time during fluctuation is interrupted because one special figure is stopped and displayed in a pattern indicating a hit. In the process of S232, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON (S232: Yes), the first corresponding to the special figure that is temporarily stopped The display of the symbol display device 37 is updated (S233), that is, the process of continuing the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed for the special symbols for which the subtraction of the variable time is interrupted, and this processing exit. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player that the special figure fluctuation is not forcibly stopped.

On the other hand, in the process of S231, if it is determined that the current is a big hit or a small hit (S231: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203s is greater than 0 (that is, the special figure 1 fluctuates If it is determined (S234), and the value of the special figure 1 variable time timer 203s is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S234: No), the above-described first control example The same processing as the first special symbol variation start processing (S204) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S238 for executing the variation processing regarding the special figure 2.

In the processing of S234, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time timer 203s is greater than 0 (S234: Yes), the first special symbol variation in-execution processing (S235) is executed. This first special symbol variation in-execution process (S235) executes the process during special figure 1 variation, and will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

When the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S235) is finished, next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the special figure 1 variation time timer 203s is 0) (S236), and the variation time When it is determined that it is the end timing (S236: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S237) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S238. On the other hand, in the processing of S236, if it is determined that the timing is not the end of the variable time (S236: No), the processing of S237 is skipped and the process proceeds to S238.

In the processing of S238-S242, the same processing as S234-S237 executed for special figure 1 is executed. When the process of S238 is executed, first, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203t is greater than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is fluctuating) is determined (S238), special figure 2 fluctuation When it is determined that the value of the time timer 203t is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S238: No), the second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239) is executed, and then this process is terminated. This second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239) is the second special symbol variation start process 2 described above (see S217 in FIG. 215) in which subtraction processing of the number of pending memories is added. will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S238, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time timer 203t is greater than 0 (S238: Yes), the second special symbol variation in-execution processing (S240) is executed. This second special symbol variation in-execution process (S240) executes the process during special figure 2 variation, and its detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the second special symbol variation executing process (S240) is finished, next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the special figure 2 variation time timer 203t is 0) (S241), and the variation time When it is determined that it is the end timing (S241: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S242) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S241, if it is determined that the timing is not the end of the variable time (S241: No), the process of S242 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 276, the content of the game state update process 2 (S307) will be described. FIG. 276 is a flow chart showing the contents of the game state update process 2 (S307). In this game state update process 2 (S307), the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 0 and the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 0, in contrast to the game state update process (see FIG. 213) of the first control example described above. The difference is that a configuration is added to set a state command indicating a latent state when there is no such state. This is, in the present second control example, is configured so that the number of times (100 times) set in the variable probability state is less than the number of times the variable probability state is set (120 times), special figure in the variable probability state This is because when the number of lotteries (fluctuations) exceeds 100 times, the game state can be shifted from the variable probability state to the latent probability state without winning a jackpot.

When the game state update process 2 (S307) is executed, first, the same processing as S601 to S608 of the above-described game state update process (see FIG. 213) is executed, and when the process of S608 is finished, then time saving It is determined whether the value of the counter 203g is 0 (S631), and if it is determined to be 0 (S631: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 0 (S632). Here, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203k is not 0 (1 or more) (S632: No), it is a variable probability state (that is, a latent probability state) in which the time saving game is not given, so the latent probability state is set (S633), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S631, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203g is not 0 (S631: No), or in the process of S632, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203k is 0 (S632: Yes ) skips the processing of S633 and terminates this processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 277, the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process (S235) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S104 of FIG. 275) will be described. FIG. 277 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S235). In this first special symbol variation executing process (S235), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the first special symbol variation executing process (S235) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON (S2801). Here, the case where this processing is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON will be briefly described. As described above, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed in a pattern indicating a hit (big hit or small hit) while the special figure 1 is fluctuating. be. Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON, since the big hit flag 203u is set to ON in the process, the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds by the main controller 110 When the process loops and the next (2 milliseconds after the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON) special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 275) is executed, the process of S231 is during the jackpot. Since it is determined that there is, the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S235) is not executed. Then, when the big winning game (or small winning game) is completed and it is determined that it is not during the big winning (or during the small winning) in the process of S231, the first special symbol variation executing process (S235) is executed. It will be. By configuring in this way, the state in which the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S235) is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON is a jackpot (or a small hit) game It is configured to be the timing of restarting the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation that has been terminated and the subtraction of the fluctuation time has been interrupted.

Returning to FIG. 277, the description continues. In the process of S2801, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON (S2801: Yes), then set the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command (S2802), special figure 1 provisional The stop flag 203bc is set to OFF (S2803), and the process proceeds to S2804. On the other hand, in the process of S2801, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S2801: No), the processes of S2802 and S2803 are skipped and S2804 to process.

In the process of S2804, the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer (special figure 1 fluctuation timer) 203s is updated by subtracting 1 (S2804), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S2805), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 278, the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S237) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S104 of FIG. 275) will be described. FIG. 278 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S237). This first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S237) executes the process for stopping the variation of the special figure 1, and is the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 214) of the first control example described above. ), when the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a big hit, instead of the configuration of forcibly stopping the variation of the special figure 2, the variation of the special figure 2 is interrupted (the subtraction of the variation time is interrupted). The difference is that the

When the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S237) is executed, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit (S731), and it is not a big hit (it is a loss ) (S731: No), the same processing as S709 and S710 of the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 214) of the first control example described above is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S731, if it is determined to be a big hit (S731: Yes), then set the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd to ON (S732), and turn on the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd Set a special figure 2 temporary stop command indicating that it has been set (S733). Then, the same processing as S706 and S708 of the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 214) of the first control example described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 279, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S104 of FIG. 275) will be described. FIG. 279 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239). In this second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239), a process for starting the variation of the special figure 2 is executed.

In the second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239), first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON (S831), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S831 : Yes), that is, the second special symbol variation start processing 2 (Figure 279 S239) is executed, all the various processes executed in the second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239 in FIG. 279) are skipped, and this process ends. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the variation of the special figure 2 is started at the timing when the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed in the pattern indicating the hit (within the same process).

In the process of S831, if it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S831: No), then the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba (N2) is acquired (S832), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter is greater than 0 (S833). In the processing of S833, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is greater than 0 (S833: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba Subtract 1 (S834), and set a pending ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the pending ball number command indicating the value (N2) of the second special symbol pending ball number counter 203ba after the subtraction. (S835).

The reserved ball number command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 227), as in the first control example described above. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223ba. Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the pending ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the second special symbol pending ball number counter 223ba is updated, the second special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203ba.

When the processing of S835 is finished, next, the data of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203bb is shifted to the previous data (S836). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.

When the process of S836 ends, then the same processes as S804 to S807 of the second special symbol variation start process (see S207 in FIG. 215) of the first control example described above are executed, and this process ends. Also, in the process of S833, even when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is 0 (S833: No), the second special symbol fluctuation start of the above-described first control example The same processing as S808 to S810 of the processing (see S207 in FIG. 215) is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 280, the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (S240) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S104 of FIG. 275) will be described. FIG. 280 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S240). In this second special symbol variation executing process (S240), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 2 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the second special symbol variation executing process (S240) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON (S2901). Here, the case where this processing is executed in a state where the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON will be briefly described. As described above, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON when the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed in a pattern indicating a win (jackpot) while the special figure 2 is fluctuating. Then, when the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON, since the big hit flag 203u is set to ON in the process, the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds by the main controller 110 When the process loops and the next (2 milliseconds after the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON) special symbol variation process 2 (Figure 275) is executed, during the jackpot in the process of S231 Since it is determined that there is, the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S240) is not executed. Then, when the jackpot game ends and it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress in the processing of S231, the second special symbol variation in-execution processing (S240) is executed. By configuring in this way, the state in which the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S240) is executed in a state where the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON, the jackpot game ends, and the variation time It is configured to be the timing to restart the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation that had been interrupted.

Returning to FIG. 280, the description continues. In the process of S2901, if it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON (S2901: Yes), then set the special figure 2 fluctuation resume command (S2902), special figure 2 provisional The stop flag 203bd is set to OFF (S2903), and the process proceeds to S2904. On the other hand, in the process of S2901, if it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S2901: No), S2902 and S2903 are skipped and S2904 to process.

In the process of S2904, the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer (special figure 2 fluctuation timer) 203t is updated by subtracting 1 (S2904), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S2805), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 281, the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S242) will be described. FIG. 281 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S242). This second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S242) executes the process for stopping the variation of the special figure 2, and is the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 220) of the first control example described above. See), when the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a big hit, instead of the configuration for forcibly stopping the variation of the special figure 1, interrupt the variation of the special figure 1 (interrupt the subtraction of the variation time) The difference is that the configuration is provided and the processing that is executed when the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit is added.

When the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S242) is executed, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit (S1331), and it is not a big hit (it is a loss ), (S1331: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit (S1334). In the process of S1334, when it is determined that the small hit is not (S1334: No), the same process as S1310 and S1311 of the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 220) of the first control example described above is executed, End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1334, when it is determined that it is a small hit (S1334: Yes), next, a small hit stop process is executed (S1335). In this small hit stop processing, the same processing as S1402 to S1406 of the special figure 2 out stop processing (see S1304 in FIG. 221) of the first control example described above is executed. When this small winning stop process (S1335) is finished, the same process as S1310 and S1311 of the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 220) of the first control example described above is executed, and this process is finished.

In the process of S1331, when it is determined that it is a big hit (S1331: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON (S1332), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON Set the special figure 1 temporary stop command shown (S1333). Then, the same processing as S1307-1311 of the second special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 220) of the first control example described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 282, the contents of the starting winning process 2 (S105) will be described. FIG. 282 is a flow chart showing the contents of the starting winning process 2 (S105). This starting winning process 2 (S105) is different from the starting winning process (see FIG. 222) of the above-described first control example, and is performed when a ball enters the second ball entrance 1640b. They are different in that respect. Specifically, since the second control example is configured to be able to hold and store the lottery of special figure 2, when the ball wins (enters) the second ball entrance 1640b, the second special symbol holding ball A process of adding the value (N2) of the number counter 203ba is executed.

Regarding the processing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 1640b, the ball enters the first ball entrance (enters the prize) in the above-described starting prize winning processing of the first control example (see FIG. 222). Since it differs only in that the target of the processing is changed from the special figure 1 to the special figure 2, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 283, the content of the jackpot ending process 2 (S2112) will be described. FIG. 283 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot ending process 2 (S2112). This jackpot end processing 2 (S2112) is different from the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 230) of the first control example described above only in that the value set in the time saving counter 203g is changed from 120 to 100, and other , the detailed description thereof will be omitted. Thereby, in the present second control example, the number of times of time reduction (100 times) set when the gaming state becomes the variable probability state is less than the number of times the variable probability state is set (120 times), so in the variable probability state When the lottery (fluctuation) of the special figure exceeds 100 times, it becomes possible to shift the game state to the latent definite state.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 284 to 287. FIG. The control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example is the command determination processing 2 instead of the command determination processing (see FIG. 238) in the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first control example. (S4111 in FIG. 284) is executed, and otherwise the same processing is executed. Specifically, a process is added that is executed when various commands output by changing the control contents executed by the main controller 110 from the first control example are received.

Here, the contents of the command determination process 2 (S4111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 2 (S4111). This command determination process 2 (S4111) is, in contrast to the command determination process (FIG. 238) of the first control example, the process executed when the remaining probability variable number command or the remaining time short number command is received, and the temporary stop A process that is executed when a related command is received has been added.

When the command determination process 2 (S4111) is executed, first, the same processes as S4301 to S4317 of the command determination process (FIG. 238) of the first control example described above are executed. Then, in the process of S4317, if it is determined that the remaining probability variable number command or the remaining time short number command is received (S4317: Yes), then the remaining number update process 2 (S4318) is executed.

Here, the contents of the remaining count update process 2 (S4318) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 285 is a flow chart showing the contents of the remaining count update process 2 (S4318). When this remaining count update process 2 (S4318) is executed, the same processes as S4651 and S4652 of the remaining count update process (see FIG. 242) of the first control example described above are executed. The same processes as S4661 and S4662 of the remaining count update process (see FIG. 242) of the first control example described above are executed. That is, only the process of updating the information in the residual probability variable count area 223o and the effect probability variable count area 223q to the information corresponding to the value of the residual probability variable count command or the remaining time short command output from the main controller 110 is executed. Also in the second control example, the same remaining count update process (see FIG. 242) as in the first control example described above may be executed.

Returning to FIG. 284, the description continues. In the processing of S4317, when it is determined that the remaining probability variable number command or the remaining time short number command has not been received (S4317: No), next, it is determined whether or not the temporary stop related command has been received (S4331). Here, as the temporary stop related command, the special figure 1 temporary stop command output when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to on, and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd when it is set to on The special figure 2 temporary stop command output to, the special figure 1 fluctuation resume command output when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to off, and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd are set to off There is a special figure 2 fluctuation resume command that is output when

In the process of S4331, if it is determined that the temporary stop related command has been received (S4331: Yes), then the temporary stop related process is executed (S4332), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4331 that the temporary stop-related command has not been received (S4331: No), the same process as S4319 of the above-described command determination process of the first control example (see FIG. 238) is executed. and terminate this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 286, the content of the temporary stop related process (S4332) will be described. FIG. 286 is a flow chart showing the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4332). In this temporary stop related process (S4332), the process of determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when receiving the special figure 1 temporary stop command or special figure 2 temporary stop command, special figure 1 fluctuation resume command or special figure When the 2-fluctuation resume command is received, a process of setting an effect (additional effect) to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

When the temporary stop related process (S4332) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received (S4901), and if it is determined that it is not received (S4901 : No), the process proceeds to S4902 to execute the variable restart process. On the other hand, in the process of S4901, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received (S4901: Yes), the remaining fluctuation period of the currently set fluctuation pattern is calculated (S4903 ). Then, it is determined whether or not the residual fluctuation period calculated in the processing of S4903 is less than 2 seconds (S4904). A period A indicating that the period is short is set (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4902.

On the other hand, in the process of S4904, if it is determined that the remaining variation period is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (S4904: No), then it is determined whether the remaining variation period is less than 15 seconds ( S4906), if it is determined that it is less than 15 seconds (S4906: Yes), the period B indicating the normal remaining variation period is set in the remaining variation time information storage area 223bb (S4907), and the process proceeds to S4902. Transition.

In the process of S4906, if it is determined that the remaining variation period is not less than 15 seconds (15 seconds or more) (S4906: No), the period C indicating that the remaining variation period is long is added to the remaining variation time information storage area 223bb. set (S4908) and proceed to the processing of S4902. In this way, the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) to be executed when the special figure fluctuation is resumed is calculated at the timing when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted (the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted), and corresponds to that period By setting the information to be performed, it is possible to execute the production (additional production) suitable for the remaining fluctuation period without delay at the timing of restarting the special figure fluctuation.

Next, referring to FIG. 287, the content of the variable restart processing (S4902) will be described. FIG. 287 is a flow chart showing the details of the variable restart processing (S4902). This fluctuation restart process (S4902) executes the process of setting the additional effect to be executed when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command is received.

When the fluctuation restart process (S4902) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command is received (S5001), and if it is determined that it is not received (S5001: No ), the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5001, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation resume command or the special figure 2 fluctuation resume command is received (S5001), then it is determined whether the current fluctuation effect is being executed (S5002) . In the process of S5002, the variation production that is executed for the variation time of the special figure variation (for example, 30 seconds) in accordance with the execution of the special figure variation interrupts the special figure variation (interrupts the subtraction of the special figure variation time). , It is to determine whether the state is not completed when the special figure fluctuation is restarted after the end of the winning game.

In the process of S5002, when it is determined that the variable effect is being executed (S5002: Yes), the additional effect A is set in the additional effect information storage area (S5006), and the process proceeds to S5007. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5002 that the variable effect is not being executed (S5002: No), then the remaining variation time information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223bb is read out (S5003). Then, based on the read remaining fluctuation time information and the effect counter 223h, the additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection table 222ba (S5004), and the determined additional effect type is set (stored) in the additional effect information storage area 223bc. (S5005).

After completing the processing of S5005 or S5006, the additional effect type stored (set) in the additional effect information storage area 223bc is read (S5007), and the additional effect command for display corresponding to the read additional effect week is set. (S5008), clears the information set in the remaining variation time information storage area 223bb and the additional effect information storage area 223bc (S5009), and ends this processing.

As described above, in the second control example, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted, the normal production (the production display executed when the special figure fluctuation is started) is finished, and the special figure fluctuation During the period until is resumed, a shaking effect that oscillates the 3rd pattern is executed, and when the special figure fluctuation is resumed, an additional production corresponding to the special figure fluctuation period (remaining fluctuation period) after the restart Although it is configured to run, other configurations may be used.

For example, an effect period discriminating means for discriminating a normal effect period during which a normal effect is executed is provided, and when the effect period discriminating means determines that the normal effect period has ended, the additional effect is executed. good too. By configuring in this way, the normal effect and the additional effect can be executed continuously, so it is possible to provide a more suitable effect display to the player. Also, in this case, there may be an error between the end timing of the additional effect period in which the additional effect is executed and the special figure fluctuation period after the restart, but during the error period, the additional effect is continuously executed. Alternatively, a shaking effect may be executed to display the third symbol in a swinging manner. Further, an error period discriminating means for discriminating the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period discriminating means discriminates that the error period is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the additional effect is executed again. It may be configured as

Further, in the second control example described above, one of the special figure fluctuations (for example, special figure 2) is stopped and displayed in a pattern indicating the hit, so that the other special figure variation (for example, special figure 1) is interrupted (special figure Figure variation time subtraction is interrupted), and when the other special figure variation is restarted, the normal production corresponding to the other special figure variation has already ended (Figure 261), for example, when the other special figure variation is restarted, the case where the normal effect corresponding to the other special figure variation has not ended will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 288 is the timing chart which shows one example of the flow of each special figure fluctuation, the production display which is based on the fluctuation of special figure 1 in 3rd design display 81 (the production display which uses the 3rd design) is executed. In the probability variation state, the variation of the special figure 1 (10 seconds) and the variation of the special figure 2 (3 seconds) are executed at the same time, and the flow when the special figure 2 has been elected as a small hit is shown.

In the example shown in FIG. 288, when the special figure 1 fluctuation is restarted, the normal effect (normal effect period 10 seconds) executed by the third symbol display device 81 is not completed. In such a case, if the additional effect is executed at the timing when the special figure 1 fluctuation is restarted, the additional effect will be executed before the normal effect is completed, and the effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort. There is a problem that it will be executed. In order to solve such a problem, in the example shown in FIG. 288, the additional effect is not executed at the timing when the special figure 1 fluctuation is restarted, but the additional effect is executed after the normal effect is completed. It consists of In this way, the timing for executing the additional performance is not the special figure 1 fluctuation restart timing, but the normal performance end timing, so that the normal performance and the additional performance can be executed without discomfort, and the player's willingness to play. can be suppressed.

In this case, when the special figure 1 fluctuation is interrupted, the remaining period discriminating means for discriminating the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) after restarting, and the interruption period discriminating means for discriminating the period during which the special figure 1 fluctuation is interrupted , Restart determining means for determining that the special figure 1 fluctuation has been resumed, and when it is determined that it is the timing at which the special figure 1 fluctuation is restarted by the restart deciding means, whether or not the normal performance is being executed and a performance situation determination means for determining the remaining period determined by the remaining period determination means when the performance status determination means determines that the normal performance is not executed (already finished). An additional performance executing means for executing additional performance corresponding to the above, and when it is determined that the normal performance is being executed, the execution of the additional performance is put on standby until the performance situation determining means determines that the normal performance is finished. It is preferable to provide an additional effect execution waiting means. By configuring in this way, the timing of executing the additional production based on the timing at which the special figure 1 fluctuation is restarted and the end timing of the normal production of the special figure 1 fluctuation It is possible to set an appropriate timing as time), and to provide an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, in the second control example, by providing a distribution unit 660 in the right hitting area of the game board 13, it is configured so that the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation are executed during the right hitting game, Similarly, as the board configuration of the game board 13 on which the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation are executed during the right-handed game, other configurations may be used, for example, even if the configuration as shown in FIG. 289 is used good.

Here, another example of the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 289 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in another example of the second control example. In another example of the second control example, instead of the distribution unit 660, the second ball entrance 1640 and the second ball entrance are used for the board configuration (see FIG. 258) of the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example described above. The difference is that an electric accessory 1640a attached to the mouth is provided, and the variable winning device 65 is moved from the lower center area of the game board to the lower right-handed area, and the other configurations are the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 289, in the pachinko machine 10 of this another example, a first ball entrance 64 or a second ball entrance 1640 is provided so that a ball fired in a right-handed game can be entered. there is By configuring in this way, in the game state (variable probability state or latent probability state) in which the right hitting game is executed, the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation will be executed. In addition, as in the distribution unit 660 of the second control example described above, the entrance (right first entrance 64b) where the special figure 1 lottery (variation) is executed and the special figure 2 lottery (variation) are executed Since there is no mechanism for distributing balls so that they alternately enter the ball entrance (second ball entrance 1640b), the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640. You can randomize the rate of balls. As described above, in the second control example, the degree of advantage to the player is different between the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery. The player can be made to pay attention to whether the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced. Also, the ratio of the balls launched in the right-handed game flowing down (rolling) toward the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640 is Since it can be changed by adjusting, it is possible to easily adjust the ratio of the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation in the special figure variation executed during the right hitting game.

As described above, in this second control example, the number of times the time saving state is set (100) than the number of times the high probability state of the special symbol is set as the variable probability state (120 times) is reduced , it is possible to increase the opportunities for transition to the latent state which is advantageous to the player, and to increase the player's willingness to play. In addition, since the lottery based on the special figure 1 and the lottery based on the special figure 2 are configured to be executable in the latent certainty state, it is possible to suppress the state of being excessively advantageous to the player in the latent certainty state.

In this second control example, the lottery result of one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a hit (big win or small win), and at the timing when the symbol indicating the winning lottery result is stopped and displayed ( At the timing when the hit is confirmed), the measurement (counting) of the fluctuation time for the fluctuation of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is interrupted, and the timing when the winning game based on the lottery result of the one special symbol is completed ( At the timing when the special symbol can be changed), the measurement (counting) of the variation time for the variation of the other special symbol, which has been interrupted, is restarted.

Here, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted (the measurement of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted), the fluctuation display (or effect display) of the third pattern executed by the third pattern display device 81 is continuously executed. In that case, the interrupted special figure fluctuation is resumed, and the timing at which the restarted special figure fluctuation ends and the third symbol variation display (or effect display) executed by the third symbol display device 81 are finished. There was a problem that an error for a predetermined period (interruption period of special figure fluctuation) occurred in the timing to do.

On the other hand, in this second control example, the timing at which the restarted special figure variation ends and the timing at which the variation display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 ends When an error for a predetermined period (interruption period of special figure fluctuation) occurs, additional production (specific production) is configured to be executable using the error period. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

<Third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 290 to 303. FIG. This control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the content of the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the latent state is different. Specifically, the display control of the remaining number of effects displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 of the main area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is changed, and winning (big or small) during the latent probability The difference is that an effect display that is executed when the game is executed is added, and other effect displays are changed so as to correspond to the above two points.

In the first control example described above, when the latent probability state is entered (the latent probability state is set), the same number of times as the internally set probability variable number (120 times) is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. However, the remaining number of probability variation times set internally each time the special figure variation is executed (hereinafter referred to as the actual remaining probability variation number), and the remaining number of times for the effect display displayed in the remaining number display area D1 ( Hereinafter, it is configured to update (subtract) the effect remaining probability variation number). In addition, in order to prevent the player from easily grasping whether the player has won a big win in which the number of real residual probability changes is set again or a small win in which the number of real residual probability changes is not set during the latent probability state, When a win (big win or small win) is won in a certain state, the performance of returning the number of times of the remaining probability change to the initial value (120 times) and the performance of not returning the number of times of the remaining probability change are executed, and the actual number of times of the remaining probability change and the remaining probability change of the effect are performed. The number of games is different from the number of games, so that the player has a sense of anticipation until the end. Then, in a state in which the number of real remaining probability variations and the number of remaining production probability variations are different, if the number of remaining production probability variations becomes "0" ”), the resurrection effect (see FIG. 189) is executed, and the number of times (“10 times”) corresponding to the substantial remaining probability variation count is displayed in the remaining count display area D1. As a result, even when the number of times display displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 becomes "0", the player can expect the latent state to continue.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example, when entering the latent probability state (the latent probability state is set), the number of times smaller than the internally set probability variable number of times (120 times) (for example, "100 times") is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. As a result, when the latent probability state is set, it is possible to make the actual residual probability variation number and the production residual probability variation number different (display the production residual probability variation number less than the actual residual probability variation number). During the state, it is possible to make it easier to execute the performance that adds the number of times of remaining probability variation of the performance. It should be noted that, in this control example, each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2) is executed in the same manner as the first control example described above (every time the actual residual probability variation number is subtracted), the remaining number of times Although it is configured to subtract the number of times of effect remaining probability variation displayed in the display area D1, for example, when the variation of the special figure (special figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player is executed in the latent probability state may be configured so as not to subtract the number of production remaining probability variations. In this case, as in this control example, at the timing of starting the latent certainty state (timing at which the latent certainty state is set), the number of remaining probability variations displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is displayed smaller than the actual remaining probability variation number. As a result, a situation occurs in which the number of residual probability variations of production is greater than the number of actual residual probability variations even if the number of variations of the residual probability of production is not subtracted for the fluctuation of the special figure (special figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the third control example, as a lottery result of the special figure, the number of real residual probability variations is set to the initial value (120 times). is not set to the initial value (120 times), and when winning a small win, an additional performance is executed to add a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 to 40 times) to the number of times of remaining probability change during the small win game. It consists of As a result, when a winning game (a game in which the variable winning device 65 opens and closes) is executed during the latent probability state, whether or not the actual probability variable number of times is reset to the initial value (120 times) (during the latent probability state) It is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether or not the special figure jackpot has been won.

In addition, in the third control example, the timing of starting the latent state (the timing at which the latent state is set) and the number of real probability variations and the number of residual probability variations that occur when the special figure jackpot is won during the latent probability state In order to fill the difference, it is configured to execute an additional performance that adds the number of performance remaining probability variation displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 as a special figure variation performance in the latent probability state. As a result, since it is possible to add the number of production remaining probability variations at various timings during the latent probability state, whether the actual probability variation number has been reset to the initial value (120 times) during the latent probability state (latent probability state It is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether or not the special figure jackpot has been won.

Furthermore, in the third control example, the number of additions displayed in the addition effect executed at each timing (special figure fluctuation timing, timing during execution of winning game) (remaining probability change number of effects displayed in the remaining number display area D1 The number of times added to ) is configured to be changed based on the difference between the actual probability variation frequency and the effect remaining probability variation frequency (see FIG. 290). As a result, when the number of performance remaining probability variations is greatly increased by the additional performance, the player is made to think that he or she has won a special figure jackpot with the actual probability variation frequency at the initial stage (120 times) during the latent probability state. In addition, it is possible to suppress the number of times of residual probability change of production from becoming "0 times" in a state where the number of times of real probability change and the number of times of residual probability change of production deviate greatly.

In addition, in the above-described first control example, a winning game (for example, a ball out of a jackpot game) is played during the latent state so as not to let the player know that a win (big win or small win) has been won during the latent state. Even if a big winning game or a small winning game with a small amount of money is executed, the third pattern display device 81 is configured not to execute the performance display showing the winning game, and at any timing during the latent certainty state, the actual probability variation number is initialized. It is configured to make it difficult to identify whether the jackpot set to the value (120 times) has been won.

On the other hand, in the third control example, a winning game (a big winning game or a small winning game) that is executed when winning (for example, a big winning game or a small winning game with few balls out of the big winning games) is won during the latent state. It is configured such that the third symbol display device 81 executes a display based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65 as a winning effect executed during the winning game (see FIG. 293). As a result, the player can easily grasp that the winning game will be executed during the latent certainty state. Then, as a winning effect executed during this winning game, the details will be described later, but the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, when a ball enters the variable winning device 65 A display mode for displaying the number of winning balls) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so as to be different between when a big winning game is being executed and when a small winning game is being executed. . As a result, even when the player wins a big win in which the number of balls winning the variable winning device 65 in one winning game is larger than that in the small winning game, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the small winning. It is possible to make it similar to the performance during hitting corresponding to the game. Therefore, while notifying (displaying) that the winning game is executed in the latent certainty state in an easy-to-understand manner to the player, it notifies (displaying) whether the winning game is a big winning game or a small winning game in an incomprehensible manner to the player. This allows the player to play the latent state with anticipation until the end.

The pachinko machine 10 in the third control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the content of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The content of the RAM 223 provided in the voice ramp control device 113 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice ramp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. The point is that Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are as follows: It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 290, the actual remaining probability variation number set while the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example is in the latent probability state and the effect remaining number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 I will explain the transition of the number of probability variations. FIG. 290 is a timing chart showing the flow during the latent state in the third control example.

As shown in FIG. 290, when the game state is the normal state, when the jackpot game winning the jackpot B or the jackpot D is executed, the actual remaining probability change count is "120 times" at the end timing (during the ending) of the jackpot game. is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays a display indicating that the state is shifted to a latent probability state, and "100 times" is displayed as the number of times of effect remaining probability change in the remaining number of times display area D1 (Fig. 291 (see)) .

Then, when the game in the latent probability state is started, the actual residual probability variation number and the effect residual probability variation number are subtracted "1 time" each time the special figure variation is executed. In this control example, the first special figure variation in the latent certainty state is executed because the real remaining probability variation number and the effect remaining probability variation number are subtracted at the timing when the special figure variation is started in the same way as the first control example. In the interval, "99 times" is displayed as the number of times of the remaining probability change in the remaining number of times display area D1.

After that, the special figure variation (lottery) is executed, and if you win a small hit at the 14th special figure variation in the latent state (the special figure variation that displays "86th" as the number of production remaining probability variations), the real residual A small winning game is started while the probability variable number of times is maintained at "106 times". During the small winning game, when the third symbol display device 81 executes an additional effect A (effect of adding (adding) the value of the number of times of the remaining probability change of the effect to "5 times")), the remaining number of times The value of the effect remaining probability change number displayed in the display area D1 is added and displayed from "86th time" to "91st time" (see FIG. 291(b)). In this way, during the winning game (small winning game) that is executed when the winning is won (when winning the small winning) when the actual remaining probability changing number is not changed (not reset), the value of the production remaining probability changing number is changed. By executing the effect to add (additional effect), the player can expect that the actual remaining probability variation number has been reset by the current winning game.

Then, when the small winning game ends, the special figure variation in the latent probability state (the special figure variation corresponding to the actual residual probability variation number of times "105 times" and the effect remaining probability variation number of times "90") is continuously started. Next, when the jackpot is won by the special figure variation in which the actual number of remaining probability variations is "30 times" (the special figure variation in which the number of times of effect remaining probability variation is "15 times"), the timing at which the jackpot game is started. is set to "0 times". It should be noted that the remaining probability variation number of effects displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is not set to "0 times", but is configured to continuously display "15 times". In the case of shifting to the latent certainty state again after the end of the big winning game, "120 times" is reset as the substantial remaining probability variation number at the timing when the big winning game ends. In addition, during the big win game, as in the case of the small win game, an additional effect is executed as the effect display of the third symbol display device 81, and the additional effect C (the value of the number of times of the effect remaining probability change is set to "20 When the effect of adding (adding) "time" is executed, the value of the effect remaining probability change number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added and displayed from "15 times" to "35 times".

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, regardless of the type of winning (big win or small win), the difference value between the actual remaining probability variation number and the production remaining probability variation number and the value of the acquired production counter 223f are added. It is configured to determine the number of additions (the number of additions) displayed in the performance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether the current winning game is a small winning game or a big winning game depending on the contents of the additional performance executed during the winning game.

Next, when the jackpot game ends, the special figure variation in the latent probability state (substantial residual probability variation number "119") is started. During this special figure variation, the additional effect D is executed, and the value of the effect remaining probability change number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added and displayed from "34 times" to "74 times". Thus, in this third control example, the value of the remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added (added) even during the special figure fluctuation in the latent probability state. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to predict the number of real remaining probability variations, and to play a game while expecting how long the latent probability state will continue.

In addition, by making it possible to execute the additional performance even during the special figure fluctuation, the value of the remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 during the winning game and during the special figure fluctuation during the latent probability state can be added (added). Therefore, since it is possible to increase the number of times that the additional effect is executed, even if the value of the actual remaining probability change number and the effect remaining probability change number greatly deviates (when the difference value is large), the player feels uncomfortable. You can make its value easier to converge without giving it. Further, in the third control example, the number of additions (the number of additions) to be displayed in the additional effect is determined based on the difference value between the actual remaining probability variation count and the effect remaining probability variation count. Since it is configured such that the larger the difference value between the actual residual probability variation number and the effect residual probability variation frequency, the more the production residual probability variation frequency is added (added), the value can be adjusted without making the player feel uncomfortable. It can be made easier to converge.

Then, the additional effect D is executed and the value of the number of times of the remaining probability change displayed in the remaining number display area D1 becomes "74 times". The number of remaining probability variations is "118 times" and the number of remaining probability variations is "83 times". After that, when the variation of the number of remaining probability changes to "1 time" ends without winning a win, the number of remaining probability changes of production "???" It continues to be displayed until "0 times" is reached. By constructing in this way, even if the actual remaining probability variation frequency and the performance remaining probability variation frequency finally do not match, the game can be executed in a latent probability state without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In the third control example, a configuration is used in which "???" is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 in the final effect display. When is "0 times", the value of the actual remaining probability variation number may be displayed in the remaining number display area D1 ("35 times" is displayed in the example of FIG. 290). Further, the additional effect may be forcibly executed based on the value of the actual remaining probability change number of times when the value of the number of times of the remaining probability change of the effect becomes "0 times". By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the player to play the latent certainty state with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 291 and 292, the display contents displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example is the latent state will be described. It should be noted that the same elements as in the first control example described above are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 291(a), the jackpot end screen when the game state shifts to the latent certainty state will be described. FIG. 291(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot end screen. As shown in FIG. 291(a), when it is confirmed that the game state shifts to the latent definite state after the end of the big win (when V is won in the big win that shifts to the latent definite state by winning V during the big win game) , A remaining number display area D1 is provided in the upper left area of the jackpot end screen, and "100 times" is displayed as the number of production remaining probability variations (see point A in FIG. 290). In the central part of the main display area Dm, the characters "RUSH Rush" for notifying that the state will shift to the latent state and the character 811 imitating a rabbit used for display during the latent state are shifted to the latent state. It is displayed in a display mode that congratulates you on doing so. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the game state will shift to the latent state after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in the third control example, the above-described display is performed on the jackpot end screen. can be configured to In addition, unlike the pachinko machine 10 used in the third control example, the jackpot game is terminated according to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won, unlike the configuration in which the variable probability state is provided after the jackpot game ends by winning the V prize during the jackpot game. You may use the structure by which a probability change state is provided later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 291(b), the display screen during the winning game (during the small winning game) in the latent state will be described. FIG. 291(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen during a winning game. As shown in FIG. 291(b), even when a small winning game or a big winning game is executed during the latent certainty state, the effect that the character 811 moves from the left direction of the screen to the right direction continues as in the special figure fluctuation. is executed as Then, when the additional effect is executed, the character 811 runs through the side of the "treasure box" and at the same time, the "treasure box" opens, and the value of the remaining probability variation number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added (added). A display mode corresponding to the value is displayed ("5 times" in FIG. 291(b)), and the value of the number of times of the remaining probability change is added to "5 times" to display "95 times" (of FIG. 290). See point B). In addition, in the display area D4 provided below the main display area, the value of the number of times of remaining probability variation ("5 times") added in this additional effect is displayed in characters.

In this way, in the third control example, the additional effect that is executed during the latent state is executed using part of the effect that is always executed during the latent state (the effect of moving the character 811). Therefore, there is an effect that the value of the remaining probability variation number of times ("5 times") can be added (added) without making the player feel uncomfortable.

FIG. 292(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content displayed when the additional effect D (see point D in FIG. 290) is executed during the special figure fluctuation in the latent certainty state. As shown in FIG. 292(a), during the special figure variation, an effect is executed in which the character 811 moves from left to right on the screen. Then, when the additional effect is executed, the character 811 runs through the side of the "treasure box" and at the same time, the "treasure box" opens, and the value of the remaining probability variation number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added (added). The display mode corresponding to the value is displayed ("40 times" in FIG. 292(a)), and the value of the number of times of the effect remaining probability variation is added to "40 times" to display "74 times" (in FIG. 290 See point D). In addition, in the display area D4 provided below the main display area, the value of the number of times of remaining probability variation ("40 times") added in the current additional effect is displayed in characters.

Above, as explained in FIG. 291 (b) and FIG. 292 (a), the value of the remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 during the winning game and special figure variation in the latent state An add-on effect for adding (adding) is executed. Then, since the additional performance executed during the winning game and the additional performance executed during the special figure fluctuation are executed in the same performance mode, it is possible to determine whether the current winning game is in progress by the executed additional performance. It is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether it is in the process of fluctuating.

In addition, since the display form of the value is changed according to the value of the number of times of production remaining probability variation added (added) by the additional production (the display form of "+5" in FIG. 291 (b) and the display form of FIG. 292 (a ), the player can be visually notified of the effect of the additional effect. In addition, it is possible to execute a production display that suggests the value of the number of times of production remaining probability change to be added (added) by the addition production, for example, the value of the number of times of production remaining probability change to be added (added) by the addition production is stored. You may change the display form of the "treasure chest" which exists according to the value added.

Next, with reference to FIG. 292(b), the final effect executed during the latent state will be described. FIG. 292(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the final effect during the latent definite state. This final effect is executed when the value of the actual remaining probability variation number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is "0 times" in a state in which the value of the actual number of remaining probability variations is greater than "0 times". It is an effect of displaying “???” as the value of the number of times of the remaining real probability variation until the remaining substantial number of times of probability variation is consumed. Thus, even if the values of the substantial remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number are different, the performance during the latent probability state can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, while the final effect is being executed, an effect in which the character 811 is chased by the rock 813 is executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 as an effect suggesting that the latent state is finished. As a result, it is possible to visually suggest to the player the possibility that the latent certainty state will end, and to provide the player with an easily comprehensible effect. Furthermore, a character "pinch" is displayed in the display area D4 as a character suggesting that the latent state will end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 293, the display contents during the latent certainty state winning game in the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example will be described. FIG. 293 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the winning effect during the latent certainty state. As shown in FIG. 293, when a winning game is executed during the latent definite state and the ball wins the variable winning device 65, a winning display mode 815 is displayed to indicate that the ball has won the variable winning device 65. be. This winning display mode 815 moves from the lower right side of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see 815c in FIG. 293) to the left side (see 815b in FIG. 293) and expands. It is stopped and displayed (see 815a in FIG. 293). The winning display mode 815 displays a value ("15" in this control example) corresponding to the number of winning balls to be paid out when the variable winning device 65 wins. A player can be notified of the fact that a ball has won a prize and the number of prize balls to be paid out due to the prize.

Further, when a plurality of balls win the variable winning device 65 in one winning game and the winning display mode 815 is executed a plurality of times, a plurality of winning displays are displayed until the winning game ends. Mode 815 is configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, other configurations may be used as the display method of the winning display mode 815. For example, the winning display mode 815 may be displayed without being stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Furthermore, in this control example, instead of executing the display of the winning display mode 815 corresponding to all the balls that have won the variable winning device 65 during the winning game, the type of the winning game (big winning game or small winning game ) and whether or not to display the winning display mode 815 is determined based on the winning number information during the winning game, and if it is determined to display the winning display mode 815, the winning display mode 815 is displayed. Configure. With this configuration, even when the ease with which the ball enters the variable winning device 65 is varied depending on the type of winning game (when the period during which the variable winning device 65 is opened is varied) ), since it is possible to adjust the number of winning display modes 815 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the game can be played according to the number of winning display modes 815 displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to suppress that a person perceives the type of winning game (big winning game or small winning game).

In this control example, the value ("15" in this control example) corresponding to the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball wins is displayed in the variable prize winning device 65 as the prize display mode. For example, the value corresponding to the number of winning balls to be paid out when the variable winning device 65 wins a prize may be divided into a plurality (for example, "10" and "5") and displayed. As a result, it is possible to set a plurality of patterns for the number of times the winning display mode 815 is displayed for the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 . In addition, even if the player has a variable winning device in which the number of prize balls to be paid out at the time of winning is different, the value corresponding to the number of prize balls to be paid out is divided and displayed so that the player can determine the type of winning game. It is possible to suppress grasping (big hit game or small hit game). Also, the period until the winning display mode 815 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be varied depending on the winning type. Specifically, in the case of a winning type (for example, 15R hit) that can be expected to win more prizes, the winning display mode 815 is the third symbol than the winning type (for example, 7R hit) that is less winning than that. It is preferable to set the period until the display on the display device 81 is long. As a result, even if the winning display mode 815 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 determines the winning type, the period until determination can be extended. Even in this case, the winning display mode 815 may be displayed at the same timing for the game ball that wins first.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 294, configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 294(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example.

As shown in FIG. 294(a), the ROM 222 in the third control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example in that an additional effect table 222ca and a winning effect table 222cb are added. do.

First, with reference to FIG. 295(a), details of the additional effect table 222ca in the third control example will be described. FIG. 295(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional effect table 222ca in this control example. This additional effect table 222ca is a table referred to when determining the type of the additional effect to be executed during the latent probability state, and is obtained as a difference value indicating the difference between the actual residual probability change and the number of times of the effect residual probability change. The type of additional effect is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223f. This additional production is a production that adds (adds) the value of the remaining probability variation number of productions displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display area during the latent probability state, and the value differs for each type of additional production. (Value to be added (added)) is set.

This add-on effect table 222ca, in the special figure 2 variation setting process (see FIG. 299) in the latent certainty state, when it is determined that the value of the effect residual probability variation number is less than the value of the actual residual probability variation number (of FIG. 299 S5103: Yes) and when the winning ending command is received during the latent state (see S5218 in FIG. 300).

As shown in FIG. 295(a), the add-on effect table 222ca in this control example is set so that the type of add-on effect selected according to the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation count and the value of the effect remaining probability change count is different. It is Specifically, when the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation count and the value of the effect remaining probability variation count is “1 to 40” and the value of the performance counter 223f is “0 to 99”, the additional performance is executed. If the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 179", the add-on effect A (the number of additions +5) is set as the add-on effect. Further, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "180 to 198", an additional effect B (number of times of addition +5 times) is set as an additional effect.

When the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is "41 to 80" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 49", the additional performance is not executed, and the performance When the value of the counter 223f is "50 to 149", the additional effect A (the number of additions +5) is set as the additional effect. Further, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "150 to 198", an additional effect B (the number of additions +5 times) is set as an additional effect.

Furthermore, if the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is "81 or more" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 99", the additional performance C (addition number of times +20) is set. Further, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 198", an additional effect D (number of additions +40 times) is set as an additional effect.

As described above, in this control example, the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is calculated, and the type of the additional performance is selected based on the calculated difference value. Therefore, it is possible to execute an additional effect suitable for the display situation of the number of times of effect remaining probability change in the latent probability state. In addition, the larger the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the number of times of the production remaining probability variation, the more the additional production is set to be easily executed. When there is a divergence (when the difference value increases), the difference can be made easier to converge. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the effect display in the latent probability state due to the fact that the value of the actual remaining probability change frequency remains large even though the value of the effect residual probability variation frequency is "0". can.

Furthermore, in this control example, the value to be added (added) in one additional performance is set to increase as the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation frequency and the value of the effect remaining probability variation frequency increases. Thereby, when the value of the actual residual probability variation count and the value of the effect residual probability variation count deviate greatly (when the difference value becomes large), the difference can be easily converged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of incongruity with respect to the performance display in the latent probability state due to a large value of the substantial remaining probability variation frequency remaining despite the fact that the value of the performance remaining probability variation frequency is "0". be able to.

Next, the prize effect table 222cb will be described with reference to FIG. 295(b). FIG. 295(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the prize effect table 222cb. This winning effect table 222cb is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the display of the winning display mode (winning effect) when the ball wins the variable winning device 65 in the winning game executed during the latent definite state. It is a table to be played, and whether or not there is a winning effect is determined based on the winning determination result (hit type) of the special figure, the number of balls won in the winning game, and the value of the effect counter 223f. The winning effect is the effect of displaying the winning display mode 815 shown in FIG.

Specifically, if the win/loss determination results are jackpots A to E and jackpot G (that is, jackpots that can be expected to come out) and the number of winning balls is one or two, regardless of the value of the effect counter 223f. (when the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 198"), the winning effect "Yes" is selected and the winning effect is executed (the display of the winning display mode 815 is executed). That is, the winning display mode 815 is always displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the first and second winning balls after the winning game is executed. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that a winning game is being executed.

If the number of winning balls is the third winning, if the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "0 to 4", the winning effect "none" is selected, and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "5 to 198". , the prize-winning effect "Yes" is selected. That is, it is set so that the winning effect is executed with a probability of about 97.5% and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of 2.5%.

If the number of winning balls is the fourth prize, and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "0 to 119", the winning effect "none" is selected, and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "120 to 198". , the prize-winning effect "Yes" is selected. That is, it is set so that the winning effect is executed with a probability of about 40% and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of about 60%.

If the number of winning balls is the fifth prize, and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "0 to 189", the winning effect "none" is selected, and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "5 to 198". , the prize-winning effect "Yes" is selected. That is, it is set so that the winning effect is executed with a probability of about 5% and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of about 95%. If the number of winning balls is six or more, and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "0 to 193", the winning effect "none" is selected, and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "194 to 194". 198", the prize effect "with" is selected. That is, it is set so that the winning effect is executed with a probability of about 2.5% and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of about 97.5%.

Next, if the success/failure determination result is a jackpot F (that is, a jackpot that cannot be expected to come out), regardless of the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls is the first or more), and regardless of the value of the effect counter 223f. (When the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 198"), the winning effect is executed. In other words, the winning display mode 815 is always displayed based on the winning of the ball in the variable winning device 65 . Also, when the win/fail judgment result is a small hit, the same as the above-described big win F, regardless of the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls is the first or more), and regardless of the value of the effect counter 223f (acquired effect counter 223f is "0 to 198"), a winning effect is executed. In other words, the winning display mode 815 is always displayed based on the winning of the ball in the variable winning device 65 .

As described above, in this control example, the execution of the winning game (big winning game or small winning game) during the latent state is indicated to the player by the winning effect based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65. can be notified to This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that a winning game has occurred during the latent state.

Furthermore, since the degree of occurrence of the winning effect based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65 is varied according to the type of winning game, it is possible to execute the winning effect suitable for each winning game.

In addition, in this control example, the winning game executed during latent probability is a jackpot game that can set the value of the actual residual probability variation number to the initial value (120 times) after the end of the game, or the value of the substantial residual probability variation number In order to suppress the player from easily identifying whether it is a small winning game that is not changed, a big winning game (jackets A to E, and G) are set so that the more the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65, the more difficult it is to execute the winning effect. Thus, even if many balls actually win in the variable prize winning device 65 (even if more balls win than the number of balls won in the small winning game), the number of times the winning performance is executed is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying the type of winning game based on the number of winning presentations executed by the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, the cumulative value of the number of balls acquired during the latent certainty state (accumulated value of the number of prize balls paid out in each winning game executed while the latent certainty state continues) is displayed on the third symbol display device. The configuration indicated at 81 may also be used. When such a configuration is used, the number of winning balls may be accumulated regardless of the presence or absence of the winning effect, or the cumulative value of the number of winning balls may be displayed according to the number of times the winning effect is executed. It may be configured to add. In this case, the difference between the actual cumulative value and the displayed cumulative value is the same as the number of winning balls for which the winning effect has not been executed. When a winning game is executed, it is preferable to execute a prize winning effect without being based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65, and execute a provisional winning effect to converge the difference of the cumulative value. As a result, it is possible to display the display mode of the winning effect and the cumulative display mode of the number of winning balls without discomfort. In addition, by executing the provisional winning effect, it is possible to display the winning display mode 815 with more than the number of balls that actually won the variable winning device 65 during the small winning game. It is possible to prevent the player from identifying the type of the winning game by the number of times of the winning effect (the number of times of displaying the winning display mode 815).

Returning to FIG. 294(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 294(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example.

As shown in FIG. 294(b), the RAM 223 in the third control example has a flag 223ca for the remaining probability variation count display, an additional effect flag 223cb, and an additional effect type storage area 223cc for the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example. is added.

The remaining probability variation number displaying flag 223ca is a flag for indicating a period in which the number of remaining probability variations is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (see FIG. 291 (a)) of the third symbol display device 81, and is turned on. When it is set, the number of production remaining probability variations is displayed. This remaining probability variable number of times display flag 223ca determines that the winning ending command has been received in the winning related command process 2 (see FIG. 301), (S5207 in FIG. 301: Yes), then the current winning is the winning game When it is determined that it is a win to shift the game state to the latent state after the end (S5209 in FIG. 301: Yes), and further, when it is determined that the flag 223ca during the remaining probability variation number display is not set to ON (Fig. S5210 of 301: Yes), set to ON (S5213 of FIG. 301), and similarly, in the winning related command process (see FIG. 301), it is determined whether or not the current winning game is a winning game capable of executing an additional effect. It is referred to at that time (S5210 in FIG. 301). Then, in the state command process 2 (see FIG. 300), when a state command indicating that the game state has changed from the latent state to the normal state is received (S4531 in FIG. 300: Yes), it is set to OFF (see FIG. 300). 300 S4532).

The add-on effect flag 223cb is a flag for indicating that the add-on effect based on the special figure fluctuation is being executed in the third symbol display device 81, and when it is set to on, the change display setting process is performed. 2 (see FIG. 303) is executed, the addition effect is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4736 in FIG. 304) executed in the fluctuation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303) (Fig. S4813 of 304). This add-on effect flag 223cb is set to on (S5106 in FIG. 299) when the add-on effect is selected in the special figure 2 fluctuation setting process (see FIG. 299) (S5108 in FIG. 299), and the special figure 2 Referred to in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 304) (S4809 in FIG. 304), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S4809 in FIG. 304: Yes), it is set to OFF (S4810 in FIG. 304) , An additional effect is set.

Add-on effect type storage area 223cc is an area for setting the selected add-on effect table 222ca with reference to the add-on effect table 222ca. reference). This add-on effect type storage area 223cc is set the type of add-on effect selected in the special figure 2 fluctuation setting process (see FIG. 299) (S5107 in FIG. 299), to the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 304) When it is determined that the add-on effect flag 223cb is set to ON (S4809 in FIG. 304: Yes), the add-on effect based on the type of the set add-on effect is set (S4812 in FIG. 304).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the third control example>
Next, various control processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 296 and 297. FIG. The control process of main controller 110 in the third control example is the first winning process ( 231) instead of the first winning process 2 (see FIG. 296), the second winning process 2 (see FIG. 234) executed in the small hit control process (see FIG. 232) instead of the second winning process 2 (see FIG. 297), and otherwise the same processing is executed. The same processes are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the first winning process 2 (S2113) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 296 is a flow chart showing the first winning process 2 (S2113). This first winning process 2 (S2113 in FIG. 296) is similar to the first winning process (see FIG. 231) in the above-described first control example, during the jackpot game in the pachinko machine 10. 65a) is processed based on the winning ball.

When the first winning process 2 (S2113) is executed, the same processes as S2401 to S2404 of the first winning process (see FIG. 231) of the first control example are executed. Then, when the process of S2404 is finished, a winning prize command is set (S2431), then the same processes as S2405 to S2411 of the above-described first winning process (see FIG. 231) are executed, and this process ends. In this first winning process 2 (S2113), by setting a winning command, the ball that has won the variable winning device 65 (specific winning port 65a) during the jackpot game is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. can output information about

Information about the number of balls won during one round of the jackpot game is added to the winning command, and the sound lamp control device 113 performs winning command processing described later when receiving the winning command. (Refer to FIG. 302) is executed, and it is determined whether or not to execute the winning effect during the winning game (Refer to FIG. 293).

Next, with reference to FIG. 297, the second winning process 2 (S2513) will be described. FIG. 297 is a flow chart showing the second winning process 2 (S2513). This second winning process 2 (S2513) is similar to the second winning process (see FIG. 234) in the first control example described above. A process based on the winning ball is executed.

When the second winning process (S2513) is executed, the same processes as S2701 to S2704 of the second winning process (see FIG. 234) are executed. When the process of S2704 is completed, a winning command is set (S2731), and then the same processes as S2705 to S2711 of the second winning process (see FIG. 234) are executed, and this process ends. In this second winning process 2 (S2513), by setting a winning command, the variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening 65a) is won during the small winning game from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. Information about the sphere can be output.

Information about the number of balls won during the small winning game is added to the winning command, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning command, the winning command processing described later (see FIG. 302) is executed. ) is executed, and it is determined whether or not to execute the winning effect (see FIG. 293) during the winning game.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the third control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 298 to 304. FIG. The control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example is the command determination processing 3 instead of the command determination processing (see FIG. 238) in the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first control example. (S4111 in FIG. 298), the variable display setting process 2 (S4112 in FIG. 303) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 243), and otherwise the same processes are executed.

First, the command determination process 3 (S4111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 298 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 3 (S4111). Similar to the command determination process (see FIG. 238) in the first control example described above, this command determination process 3 is a process in which various processes are executed when various commands output from main controller 110 are received.

Command determination processing 3 (S4111) is, for the command determination processing (Figure 238) of the first control example described above, when receiving a special figure 2 variation pattern command (S4306 in Figure 298: Yes), special figure 2 299) is executed, and when a state command is received (S4313 in FIG. 298: Yes), instead of the state command processing (see FIG. 240), state command processing 2 (FIG. (see S4352 in FIG. 298), and when a hit-related command is received (S4352 in FIG. 298: Yes), the hit-related command The difference is that the processing (see FIG. 301) is executed, and the other processing is the same. The same processes are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 3 (S4111) is executed, first, the processes of S4301 to S4306 are executed similarly to the command determination process (see FIG. 238) of the first control example described above. And, in the processing of S4306, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received (S4306: Yes), the special figure 2 variation setting process is executed (S4351).

Here, with reference to FIG. 299, the special figure variation setting process 2 (S4351) will be described. Figure 299 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special figure 2 variation setting process 2 (S4351). In this special figure 2 variation setting process 2 (S4351), the process of setting the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e to ON in the same way as the command determination process of the first control example (see FIG. 238) (S5101), and reception A process (S5102) of extracting a variation pattern command from the command executed is executed, and a process (S5103 to S5108) of determining whether or not to execute an additional effect (see FIG. 292(a)) is executed.

First, when the special figure 2 variation setting process 2 (S4351) is executed, the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e is set to ON (S5101), and then the variation pattern command is extracted from the received command (S5102) . The processing of S5101 described above is the same as the processing of S4307 of the command determination processing of the first control example (see FIG. 238), and the processing of S5102 is the same as the command determination processing of the first control example (see FIG. 238). 238), the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the remaining probability variation number set in the remaining probability variation number area 223o (hereinafter referred to as the actual remaining probability variation number) and the remaining probability variation number set in the effect probability variation number area (hereinafter referred to as the effect remaining probability variation number) A comparison is made (S5103). In the processing of S5103, when it is determined that the value of the number of times of residual probability variation is less than the value of the number of times of real probability variation, that is, the number of times of residual probability variation displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 The value is smaller than the actually set remaining probability variation count (remaining probability variation count updated in the game state update process (see FIG. 213) of the main controller 110), and it is determined that the additional effect can be executed. If it is (S5103: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired (S5104), then the additional effect table 222cb is referred to, and the difference value between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the value of the effect residual probability variation number Based on the value of the production counter 223h acquired in the process of S5104, the additional production type is selected (S5105).

On the other hand, in the processing of S5103, if it is determined that the value of the number of times of residual probability change is not less than (same or more than) the value of the actual number of times of probability of residual change, that is, the value of the number of times of residual probability change is added by the additional effect. If it is determined that it is not possible (S5103: No), this processing is set as it is.

When the processing of S5105 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the additional effect has been selected (S5106). In the process of S5106, if no additional effect is selected, that is, in the process of S5105, the difference value between the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the value of the effect residual probability variation number is "1 to 40" and acquired When the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is "0 to 99", and the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is "41 to 80", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 49" (S5106: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5106, if it is determined that the additional effect is selected (S5106: Yes), the type of the selected additional effect is set in the additional effect type storage area 223cc (S5107), and the additional effect flag 223cb is set. It is set to ON (S5108), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 298, the description continues. In the process of S4306, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is not received (S4306), then the command determination process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 238) S4309 ~ S4318 same process. Then, in the process of S4317, when it is determined that the remaining probability variable number of times command or the remaining time short number of times command is not received (S4317: No), it is determined whether the hit-related command is received (S4352).

In the process of S4352, if it is determined that the win-related command has not been received (S4352: No), in the same manner as the command determination process of the first control example (see FIG. 238), other commands are processed. Various processes are executed (S4319), and this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a hit-related command has been received (S4352: Yes), a hit-related command process is executed (S4353). This winning-related command process (S4353) is a process executed when each command related to winning output from the main controller 110 is output. opening command output when the game) is started, round start command output when a new round game is started in the jackpot game, winning game (jackpot game or small winning game) is being executed Winning command output based on the winning of the ball to the specific winning opening 65a between, Ending command output when the ending period starts in the winning game (jackpot game or small winning game), other commands related to winning (V winning command, etc.) is executed when it is determined that it is output (received) from the main controller 110 .

When the hit-related command process (S4353) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S5201), and if it is determined that an opening command has been received (S5201: Yes), then A display opening command is set (S5202). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5201 that the opening command has not been received (S5201: No), then it is determined whether or not the round start command has been received (S5203).

In the processing of S5203, if it is determined that the round start command has been received (S5203), the display round command is set (S5204), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5203, if it is determined that the round start command has not been received (S5203: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning command has been received (S5205). This winning command is a command set in the first winning process 2 (see S2113 in FIG. 296) and the second winning process 2 (see S2513 in FIG. 297) executed by main controller 110, It is a command output based on the fact that a ball enters the variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening 65a) during a game or a small winning game. It should be noted that this winning prize command includes information about the number of winning balls and the type of winning game being executed (big hit type or small hit type) and information that can be specified.

Here, the winning command process (S5206) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 302 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning command process (S5206).

When the winning command process (S5206) is executed, first, the game state at the time of winning is specified based on the state setting area (S5301). is determined (S5302). If it is determined that it is not in the latent definite state (S5302: No), the winning effect is selected (S5305), and the process proceeds to S5306. On the other hand, in the process of S5302, when it is determined that it is in the latent state (S5302: Yes), when selecting the winning effect to be executed in the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) in the latent state The value of the effect counter 223h to be used is acquired (S5303), and the winning effect is selected based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223h and the winning effect table 222cb (S5304).

When the process of S5304 or the process of S5305 is finished, it is next determined whether or not the winning effect has been selected (S5306), and if it is determined that the winning effect has been selected (S5306: Yes), the selected winning effect is indicated. A winning effect command for display is set (S5307), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5306, if it is determined that the prize effect is not selected (S5306: No), this process is terminated.

Next, the variable display setting process 2 (S4112) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 303 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S4112). This variable display setting process 2 (S4112) is different from the variable display setting process (see FIG. 243) of the first control example described above, in which the process of updating the display content of the remaining probability variation number of times and the addition effect flag 223cb being turned on. A process of executing an additional effect when it is set to is added. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the same element other than that, and the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, in the variable display setting process 2 (S4112), the same processes as S4701 to S4704 of the variable display setting process (FIG. 243) of the first control example are executed. Based on the information provided. It is determined whether the present state is in the latent state (S4731).

In the processing of S4731, if it is determined that the current state is not the latent certainty state (S4731: No), the process of updating the number of times of remaining probability variation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the latent certainty state (S4732 to S4736) is skipped and the process proceeds to S4705. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent definite state (S4731: Yes), then 1 is subtracted from the effect remaining probability variable number of times set in the effect probability variable number of times area 223p (S4732) and subtracted. It is determined whether or not the value of the effect remaining probability variation frequency is greater than 0 (S4733). In the processing of S4733, if it is determined that the value of the number of times of effect remaining probability variation is greater than 0, that is, "1 time" or more in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 When the number of times of probability variation is displayed (S4733: Yes), a command of the number of times of probability variation for display is set based on the value of the number of times of probability variation set in the number of times of effect probability variation area 223p (S4734).

On the other hand, in the processing of S4733, if it is determined that the value of the number of times of variation of the remaining probability of effect is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S4733: No), It is determined whether the value of the number of remaining probability variations is greater than 0 (S4735). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of times of residual probability variation of the effect is 0, but the value of the number of times of real probability variation is not 0 (1 or more).

In the process of S4735, if it is determined that the value of the actual remaining probability variation number is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S4735: No), the process proceeds to the above-described S4734 process, and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number Based on this, a display residual probability variation command (that is, a command for indicating "0 times" in the residual number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81) is set (S4734). Then, the process proceeds to S4705.

On the other hand, in the process of S4735, if it is determined that the value of the actual residual probability variation number is greater than 0 (S4735: Yes), a residual probability variation number command for display indicating the number of production residual probability variations "???" is set ( S4736), the process proceeds to S4705. By doing so, in a situation where the value of the actual residual probability variation frequency is not 0, when the effect residual probability variation frequency displayed in the remaining frequency display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 is "0 times" "???" can be displayed instead of the display of "0 times" (see Fig. 292(b)). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the latent probability state continues even after "0 times" is displayed as the number of times of remaining probability variation of the effect. Further, by setting the number of times of the effect remaining probability change to "???", the player can play the game while predicting how long the latent probability state will continue, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the process of S4701, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4701: No), it is determined that there is no latent state in the process of S4731 If so (S4731: No), and when the process of S4734 or S4736 is finished, then the same process as S4705 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 243) of the first control example described above is executed.

In the processing of S4705, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to ON (S4705: Yes), then special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is executed (S4737). For this special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4737), the detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S4705: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4737) is skipped The process proceeds to S4709, the same processes as S4709 to S4711 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 243) of the first control example described above are executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in the third control example, when the latent probability state is entered (the latent probability state is set), the number of times ( For example, "100 times") is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. As a result, when the latent probability state is set, it is possible to make the actual remaining probability variation number different from the production remaining probability variation number (display the production remaining probability variation number less than the actual remaining probability variation number). During the state, it is possible to make it easier to execute the performance that adds the number of times of remaining probability variation of the performance. It should be noted that, in this control example, each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2) is executed in the same manner as the first control example described above (every time the actual residual probability variation number is subtracted), the remaining number of times Although it is configured to subtract the number of times of effect remaining probability variation displayed in the display area D1, for example, when the variation of the special figure (special figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player is executed in the latent probability state may be configured so as not to subtract the number of production remaining probability variations. In this case, as in this control example, at the timing of starting the latent certainty state (the timing at which the latent certainty state is set), the number of remaining probability variations displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is displayed smaller than the actual remaining probability variation number. As a result, a situation occurs in which the number of residual probability variations of production is greater than the number of actual residual probability variations even if the number of variations of the residual probability of production is not subtracted for the fluctuation of the special figure (special figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the third control example, as a lottery result of the special figure, the number of real residual probability variations is set to the initial value (120 times). is not set to the initial value (120 times), and when winning a small win, an additional performance is executed to add a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 to 40 times) to the number of times of the remaining probability change during the small win game. It consists of As a result, when a winning game (a game in which the variable winning device 65 opens and closes) is executed during the latent probability state, whether or not the actual probability variable number of times is reset to the initial value (120 times) (during the latent probability state) It is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether or not the special figure jackpot has been won.

Also, in the third control example, the timing of starting the latent state (the timing at which the latent state is set) and the number of real probability variations and the number of residual probability variations that occur when the special figure jackpot is won during the latent probability state In order to fill the difference, it is configured to execute an additional performance that adds the number of performance remaining probability variation displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 as a special figure variation performance in the latent probability state. As a result, since it is possible to add the number of production remaining probability variations at various timings during the latent probability state, whether the actual probability variation number has been reset to the initial value (120 times) during the latent probability state (latent probability state It is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether or not the special figure jackpot has been won.

Furthermore, in the third control example, the number of additions displayed in the addition effect executed at each timing (special figure fluctuation timing, timing during execution of winning game) (remaining probability change number of effects displayed in the remaining number display area D1 The number of times added to) is configured to be changed based on the difference between the actual probability variation frequency and the effect remaining probability variation frequency (see FIG. 290). As a result, when the performance remaining probability variation frequency is greatly added by the additional performance, the player is made to think that he or she has won a special figure jackpot with the actual probability variation frequency at the initial stage (120 times) during the latent probability state. In addition, it is possible to suppress the number of times of residual probability change of production from becoming "0 times" in a state where the number of times of real probability change and the number of times of residual probability of production deviate greatly.

In the third control example, during a winning game (a big winning game or a small winning game) that is executed when winning (for example, a big winning game or a small winning game with few balls out of a big winning game) is won during a latent state It is configured such that the third symbol display device 81 executes the display based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65 as the performance during the hit (see FIG. 293). As a result, the player can easily grasp that the winning game will be executed during the latent certainty state. Then, as a winning effect executed during the winning game, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the variable winning device 65 is displayed. Display mode) is configured to make the ratio of display on the third symbol display device 81 different between when a big winning game is being executed and when a small winning game is being executed. As a result, even if the player wins a big win with a larger number of balls winning the variable winning device 65 in one winning game than in the small winning game, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the small winning. It is possible to make it similar to the effect during hitting corresponding to the game. Therefore, while informing (displaying) that the winning game is executed in the latent certainty state in an easy-to-understand manner for the player, it informs (displays) whether the winning game is a big-hit game or a small-hit game in an incomprehensible manner to the player. The player can play the latent definite state with anticipation until the end.

<Fourth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 305 to 325. FIG. In the first control example described above, when the jackpot hits during the latent probability state and the latent probability state is newly set 120 times (the value of the probability variable counter 203k is overwritten to 120), the displayed probability The remaining number of times in the state is configured to continue to display the number of times before becoming a big hit. Then, if there is a difference between the displayed number of remaining definite states and the actual remaining number of definite states, and the displayed remaining number of times becomes 0, the actual remaining number of times is changed. It was configured to execute a resurrection effect to be displayed in addition. That is, the timing at which the remaining number of times on the display is additionally displayed is limited to the timing when the remaining number of times becomes 0.

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, when there is a difference between the actual remaining number of times of the latent state and the remaining number of times on the display, a plurality of opportunities to display the remaining number of times on the display are provided. and More specifically, in the state where the difference is generated, a lottery is performed at the start of the fluctuation to determine whether or not to execute the additional effect, and if the lottery is won, the remaining number of times displayed may be added. It was configured to execute an additional production that suggests something. In this superimposition effect, the number of times of superimposition display is changed according to the operation timing of the frame button 22 . As a result, the player's willingness to participate in the additional performance is intended to be improved. Hereinafter, the additional effect in which the displayed remaining number of times is added by operating (pressing) the frame button 22 will be referred to as the pressing additional effect.

In addition, in the fourth control example, when the displayed remaining number of times is 0 and the actual remaining number of times is not 0 (is 1 or more), the remaining number of times is not displayed (hidden). ) It is configured to set the non-display mode. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine when the latent certainty state ends, so that it is possible to provide a game with a sense of tension in the latent certainty state. Furthermore, when the non-display mode is set, if the second special symbol jackpot occurs in a state where the actual remaining number of times in the latent state (the value of the probability variation counter 203k) is within a predetermined number of times (5 times) ( That is, when the remaining number of times of the latent certainty state is updated to 120 times immediately before the latent certainty state ends), a special additional performance (special additional performance) different from the normal additional performance is executed. and As a result, it is possible to make the player who confirms the special additional performance recognize that he/she has won the jackpot just before the actual remaining number of times becomes 0 and that the latent certainty state is newly set. can bring greater joy to

Further, in the fourth control example, an effect is provided in which the effect mode is changed by operating the frame button 22 in addition to the additional effect. Specifically, in the normal state and the variable probability state, there is provided a suspension notice effect that changes the mode of the suspension symbol according to the operation content of the frame button 22. - 特許庁In this pending notice performance, the range of pending symbols for executing the notice performance is determined based on the player's operation of the frame button 22 (player's selection), and based on the look-ahead results for the pending balls in the range selected by the player. Then, it is configured to execute the notice effect using the reserved pattern. As a result, when an effect with a high degree of expectation is executed as the advance notice effect for the selected range, the player's sense of expectation for the big win can be heightened. Also, as a notice effect for the selected range, even if a low expected effect is executed, if a ball different from the selected range is selected, a high expected notice effect may be executed. It is possible to make the player think that they do not know. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel effect that a big hit can be expected for the reserved balls corresponding to the reserved symbols outside the selection range.

The pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the configurations of the RAM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The only difference is that part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 305 to 310, the display modes of various characteristic effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described. FIGS. 304 and 306 are diagrams showing the display mode when the suspension notice effect is executed in the fourth control example, and FIGS. FIG. 309 and FIG. 310 are diagrams showing a display mode when executed, and FIGS. 309 and 310 are diagrams showing a display mode when a non-display mode is set in which the remaining count is hidden in the latent state. .

FIG. 304(a) is a diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the suspension notice effect is started in this control example. As shown in FIG. 305(a), when the suspension notice effect is started, a display area Ds1a in which characters "Push to decide who to feed" is displayed on the upper left side of the sub-display area Ds1. is formed. This character can prompt the player to press the frame button 22 . Also, a tray Ds1b on which the number of pieces of meat on the bone smaller than the number of reserved symbols is placed is displayed below the reserved symbols Dh1 to Dh4. The example of FIG. 305(a) illustrates a case where there are four reserved balls and three pieces of meat on the bone. The tray Ds1b is displayed in a reciprocating manner in the horizontal direction.

When the player presses the frame button 22 according to the characters displayed in the display area Ds1a, the reciprocating motion of the tray Ds1b is stopped at the timing of the press. FIG. 305(b) illustrates a case where the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the tray Ds1b is placed below the reserved symbols Dh2 to Dh4. In this case, the tray Ds1b is stopped below the reserved patterns Dh2 to Dh4, and the reserved patterns Dh2 to Dh4 displayed above the stopped tray Ds1b are changed to a happy smiling face. As a result, the player can be made aware that the reserved symbols Dh2 to Dh4 whose modes have been changed are subject to the current reserved notice.

If the player does not press the frame button 22 while the display area Ds1a is being formed, the reciprocating movement of the tray Ds1b is stopped when the display time (for example, two seconds) of the display area Ds1a has elapsed. be.

Next, as shown in FIG. 305(c), an effect of eating the meat on the bone placed on the tray is executed according to the reserved symbols in the range selected by the player's operation (the tray is stopped on the lower side). , After each reserved pattern eats up the meat with the bone, an effect is executed in which part or all of the reserved patterns that have eaten the meat with the bone lay eggs. FIG. 305(c) illustrates a mode in which a reserved symbol Dh2 and a reserved symbol Dh4 lay eggs Dh2a and Dh4a, respectively. A reserved symbol that has laid an egg is displayed to suggest to the player that it is a reserved symbol based on a highly anticipated reserved ball. More specifically, if the reserved ball indicated by the reserved pattern in the selection range includes a reserved ball that causes reach, the reserved pattern corresponding to the reserved ball has completely eaten the bone meat. An effect of laying an egg later is executed. In addition, when the selection range does not include the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball that causes reach, the effect of laying eggs is not executed. As a result, the player can perceive the occurrence of the ready-to-win performance before the lottery for the first special symbol based on the reserved balls is executed, so that the player can enjoy the ready-to-win performance while playing the game. can. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the pending notice effect is configured to be more likely to be determined when there is a pending ball that causes the ready-to-win effect. Therefore, when the effect of laying eggs is not executed after the effect of eating the meat on the bone, the ready-to-win effect is generated in the reserved patterns outside the range of the reserved patterns selected by the player by operating the frame button 22. It is more likely that a reserved symbol corresponding to the sphere is included. Therefore, if the effect of laying an egg is executed by the reserved symbols within the range selected by the player, a big win can be expected for the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved symbol that laid the egg, and in addition, the egg is laid. It is possible to provide a novel performance that a big hit can be expected for a reserved ball corresponding to a reserved pattern outside the range selected by a player when the spawning performance is not executed. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

After execution of the effect that the reserved symbol lays an egg, as shown in FIG. 306(a), an image prompting repeated pressing of the frame button 22 is displayed inside the display area Ds1a. This image makes it possible for the player to recognize that the performance will develop by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22, so that the player can be made to continuously press the frame button 22.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the pending advance notice effect.

When the player repeatedly hits the frame button 22 according to the instruction of the image displayed in the display area Ds1a, and reaches the prescribed number of repeated hits determined when the effect occurs, the inside of the house Ds1c displayed on the right side of the reserved symbols Dh1 to Dh4. A production in which the egg moves to is executed. In addition, the eggs are moved in order from the reserved pattern with the oldest reserved order. FIG. 306(b) illustrates a case where only the egg Dh2a displayed above the reserved symbol Dh2 moves inside the house Ds1c. The movement to the house Ds1c suggests that there is a possibility of developing super reach in the variable display based on the held ball. Super ready-to-win is likely to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, and is less likely to be selected when the result is a loss, so the degree of expectation for a big win is high. Therefore, the player can be made to repeatedly hit the frame button 22 more seriously. It should be noted that it is undetermined whether or not super reach will occur only by moving to house Ds1c, and as shown in FIG. Superreach is confirmed when it occurs.

As described above, in the fourth control example, when the suspension notice effect is executed, the player selects the range of the reservation symbols for generating the notice. As a result, depending on the content of the reservation notice performance, the player can have expectations for the reserved balls within the range selected by the player, or expect for the reserved balls outside the selection range of the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unprecedented novel pending notice effect.

In addition, in the fourth control example, it is configured to notify whether or not the pattern of the egg moves to the house Ds1c by repeatedly pressing the frame button 22, but it is not limited to this. For example, the effect of moving to the house Ds1c may be omitted, and an effect may be executed in which super reach is determined when the egg is broken by repeated hits. In other words, it may be configured such that all the egg symbols are collectively informed of whether or not a single continuous hit by the player will lead to super ready-to-win. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the presentation easier to understand.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 307 and 308, the press-up effect performed during the latent definite state will be described. This pressing additional effect is an effect indicating that pressing (operating) the frame button 22 may increase the number of remaining times of the latent certainty state on the display. This press-up addition performance is provided with a normal mode in which the number of times of addition when the player operates the frame button 22 is relatively small (or zero), and a special mode in which the number of times of addition is relatively large. It is The special mode is when the difference between the number of remaining latent states on the display and the actual number of remaining latent states is 30 or more, or when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit. This is an aspect that is likely to be selected in some cases. On the other hand, the normal mode is a mode that is likely to be selected when the difference between the displayed remaining number of times and the actual remaining number of times is less than 30.

First, the normal mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 307 and 308(a). FIG. 307(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of execution of the normal mode press-up effect. As shown in FIG. 307(a), when the push-up effect is started, a button D2 with the characters "push" written is displayed near the center of the main display area Dm, and "additional chance ” is displayed. Further, below the button D2, a display area D3 having a substantially rectangular shape in the horizontal direction is displayed, and below the display area D3, a display area D4 is displayed with the words "Press the button at the right timing!" is displayed. The display area D3 includes small areas D3b and D3f marked with "?", small areas D3c and D3e marked with "chance!" and a scroll bar D3a for scrolling from the left side to the right side in front view on each small area. These display contents make it possible for the player to easily recognize that operating the frame button 22 with good timing may increase the probability variation count on the display. Note that the number of additions is greatest when the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is placed on the small region D3d, and the frame button is pressed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is placed on the small regions D3b and D3f. It is the lowest when 22 is pressed.

FIG. 307(b) is a diagram showing the display contents when the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged on the small area D3d. As shown in FIG. 307(b), when the player operates (depresses) the frame button 22 at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is placed on the small area D3d to which the characters "Extremely hot!!!" A number-of-additions display area D5 in which the characters "+5" are displayed is displayed, and the characters "GET" are displayed above the number-of-additions display area D5. In addition, 5 times is added to the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1. Further, the characters "GET ADDED 5 TIMES!!" are displayed in the display area D4. These display contents make it possible for the player to easily understand the displayed remaining number of times added in the current pressing additional effect. Note that the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 defines the correspondence relationship between the timing of pressing the scroll bar D3a and the displayed remaining number of times to be added.

FIG. 308(a) shows the display contents when the player presses the frame button 22 at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is placed on the small area D3f with the character "?" It is a figure showing. In this case, as shown in FIG. 308(a), the button D2 is split in two, and the characters "Unfortunately..." are displayed above the button D2. In addition, the characters "Failure to add..." are displayed in the display area D4. These display contents allow the player to easily recognize that the operation timing of the frame button 22 was bad. Therefore, when the pressing additional performance is executed next time, the player can be made to press the frame button 22 at a better timing, so that the player's willingness to participate in the pressing additional performance can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 308(b), the special mode pressing-up effect will be described. When the special mode press-up effect is executed, a button D2 larger than that displayed in the normal mode is displayed near the center of the screen in the main display area Dm, and a "super-addition chance" is displayed above the button D2. ” is displayed. As a result, the player can be made to understand that a special effect, which is clearly different from the normal mode, has started.

Further, in each of the small areas D3b to D3h of the display area D3, the number of times (5 to 30) to be superimposed when the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged is displayed. is set to , and the text "Determine the number of additions with your own power!" is displayed in the display area D4. As a result, the player can be made aware that the timing at which he or she operates the frame button 22 determines the number of additions (that is, it is not a successful race). Therefore, since the player can be made to press the frame button 22 more positively, the player's willingness to participate in the pressing additional effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 309 and 310, the non-display mode during the latent state will be described. As described above, this non-display mode may be set when the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display becomes 0, making it unclear when the latent state will end. It is a production to give a sense of tension to the audience.

As shown in FIG. 309(a), when the remaining count of the latent state displayed in the remaining count display area D1 becomes 0, a character 811 imitating a rabbit falls to the ground in the same manner as in the first control example. is set to In addition, in this control example, the characters “end...?” are displayed in the display area 812 displayed above the character 811 . In other words, the display content is set as if it is not yet known whether or not the latent state will end.

Then, if the actual remaining number of latent definite states is not 0, the state shifts to the non-display mode shown in FIG. 309(b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 309(b), an effect is executed in which a rock 813 approaches a rabbit-like character 811 from behind, and "Pinch!" is displayed below the main display area Dm. !” appears in a display area. Further, in the remaining count display area D1, characters "???" are displayed in place of the indication of the number of remaining latent states. With these displays, it is possible to make the player recognize that although the latent state has not ended yet, it is unknown when it will end. Therefore, it is possible to make the player face the game with a sense of urgency because of the anxiety that the end of the latent certainty state may be near.

FIG. 310(a) is a diagram showing the display contents in the non-display mode when the number of actual remaining times of the latent certainty state becomes 0 and the latent certainty state ends. As shown in FIG. 310(a), when the latent probability state ends while the non-display mode is set (when the value of the variable probability counter 203k becomes 0), an effect in which the character 811 is crushed by the rock 813 is performed. will be In the display area 812 above the crushed character 811, the characters "END!!" are displayed. These displays allow the player to clearly understand that the latent state has ended.

Also, FIG. 310(b) is a diagram showing a display mode (pinch escape effect) when a jackpot is set in a non-display mode and the number of times remaining in the latent state is within 5 times. . If the jackpot of the second special symbol occurs just before the end of the latent definite state, the latent definite state is basically set 120 times after the big win, which is advantageous for the player. In this case, as shown in FIG. 310(b), an effect is executed in which the character 811 jumps over the rock 813 approaching from behind. In addition, the characters "Get out of pinch!!" are displayed on the left side of the rock 813, and the display of the remaining count display area D1 is updated to "Remaining 100 times". Since this pinch escape effect is performed only when a big hit occurs just before the end of the latent state (within 5 times of the latent certainty state remaining), the player who has confirmed this pinch escape effect is latently confirmed. Just before the state ends, a big hit is achieved, and the player can be made to recognize that a new latent certainty state has been given. Therefore, it is possible to make the player happy with the timing of the big win, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Electrical configuration in the fourth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 311 to 315. FIG. First, FIG. 311(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 311(a), in the ROM 222 in the fourth control example, in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example, an additional effect selection table 222da, a pressing period table 222db, and a pending notice determination table 222dc and are provided.

The add-on effect selection table 222da is a data table that is referred to for determining whether or not to execute the press-on add-on effect in the latent definite state, and the form of the press-on add-on effect to be executed (either normal form or special form). be. Details of the additional effect selection table 222da will be described with reference to FIGS. 312 and 313. FIG.

FIG. 312(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the additional effect selection table 222da. As shown in FIG. 312(a), in the additional effect selection table 222da, the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, and the degree of participation of the player in the pressing additional effect is normal (the game has been played in the additional effect within the past 5 times). The participation degree normal table 222da1 referred to when the player operates the frame button 22), the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, and the player's participation degree in the pressing additional effect is low (past 5 A table 222da2 for low participation level referred to when the player does not operate the frame button 22 in the additional performance over times or more, and a table 222da3 for big win referred to when a big win is achieved in the special pattern lottery. and are provided.

First, the details of the normal participation degree table 222da1 will be described with reference to FIG. 312(b). FIG. 312(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal participation level table 222da1. As shown in FIG. 312(b), the normal participation level table 222da1 changes the value of the effect counter 223h for each difference between the displayed remaining number of latent definite states and the actual remaining number of latent definite states. The range is defined in association with the type (mode) of the pressing additional effect.

As shown in FIG. 312(b), when the difference between the number of remaining times of the latent definite state on the display and the actual remaining number of times of the latent definite state is within the range of 5 times to 29 times, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined in association with the range of "0 to 95" with "no additional effect". On the other hand, the range of the value of the effect counter 223h from "96 to 99" is defined in association with the "normal mode". For this reason, when the special pattern lottery results in a small hit and the normal participation table 222da1 is referred to, "no additional effect" is selected at a rate of 96% (96/100), so the pressing additional effect is selected. is not executed. In addition, the normal mode pressing additional effect is executed at a rate of 4% (4/100). In addition, the reason why the special mode is not selected when the difference between the displayed remaining number of hidden definite states and the actual remaining number of hidden definite states is within the range of 5 to 29 times is the displayed remaining number of times and the actual remaining number of times. This is to prevent an additional display that exceeds the difference from the remaining number of times.

In addition, if the difference between the displayed remaining number of latent states and the actual remaining number of latent states is 30 times or more, the value of the effect counter 223h is "additional effect" to the range of "0 to 90". "None" is associated and defined. On the other hand, when the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "91 to 97", the "normal mode" is defined in correspondence, and when the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "98, 99", the "special mode" is defined. are defined in association with each other. For this reason, when the special symbol lottery results in a small hit and the normal participation table 222da1 is referred to, "no additional effect" is selected at a rate of 91% (91/100), so the pressing additional effect is selected. is not executed. In addition, the normal mode press-up performance is executed at a rate of 7% (7/100), and the special mode press-up performance is executed at a rate of 2% (2/100).

In this way, if the difference between the displayed remaining number of times and the actual remaining number of times is large (if it is 30 or more), the probability of occurrence of the pressing additional effect is increased, so that the difference is prevented from becoming too large. can do.

Next, the details of the low participation degree table 222da2 will be described with reference to FIG. 313(a). FIG. 313(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the low participation degree table 222da2. As shown in FIG. 313(a), when the difference between the number of remaining times of the hidden definite state on the display and the actual remaining number of times of the definite state is within the range of 5 times to 29 times, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined in association with the range of "0 to 90" with "no additional effect". On the other hand, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined in the range of "91 to 99" in association with the "normal mode". For this reason, when the special symbol lottery results in a small hit and the normal participation table 222da1 is referred to, "no additional effect" is selected at a rate of 91% (91/100), so the pressing additional effect is selected. is not executed. In addition, the normal mode press-up performance is executed at a rate of 9% (9/100). That is, when the degree of participation of the player in the additional pressing effect is low, the frequency of the additional pressing effect is increased (4%→9%). As a result, the player's willingness to participate in the pressing additional effect can be improved.

In addition, if the difference between the number of remaining times of the latent definite state on the display and the actual remaining number of times of the definite state is 30 times or more, the value of the effect counter 223h is "additional effect" for the range of "0 to 80" "None" is associated and defined. On the other hand, when the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "81 to 94", the "normal mode" is defined in correspondence, and when the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "95 to 99", the "special mode" is defined. are defined in association with each other. For this reason, when the special symbol lottery results in a small hit and the normal participation table 222da1 is referred to, "no additional effect" is selected at a rate of 81% (81/100), so the pressing additional effect is selected. is not executed. Further, the normal mode pressing-up effect is executed at a rate of 14% (14/100), and the special mode pressing-over effect is executed at a rate of 5% (5/100). That is, even when the difference between the displayed number of remaining times of the latent definite state and the actual remaining number of times of the latent definite state is 30 times or more, the frequency of the pressing additional effect is increased (9%→19%). . As a result, the player's willingness to participate in the pressing additional effect can be improved.

Next, the jackpot table 222da3 will be described with reference to FIG. 313(b). As described above, this big win table 222da3 is a table that is referred to when a special symbol lottery results in a big win during the latent state. As shown in FIG. 313(b), when the difference between the number of remaining times of the latent definite state on the display and the actual remaining number of times of the latent definite state is within the range of 5 times to 29 times, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined in association with the "normal mode" for the range of "0 to 99". In other words, the normal mode pressing-up effect is always executed.

In addition, when the difference between the displayed remaining number of times of the latent certainty state and the actual remaining number of times of the latent certainty state is 30 times or more, the value of the effect counter 223h is "normal mode" for the range of "0 to 49". ” are defined in association with each other, and a “special mode” is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223h in the range of “50 to 99”. In other words, the normal mode or the special mode press-up effect is always executed. In this manner, when the difference between the displayed remaining number of times and the actual remaining number of times is 5 or more in the latent probability state, when the jackpot is achieved, the pressing-up performance is always executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to expect a big win when the press additional effect is generated. In particular, the addition effect of the special mode has a significantly higher selection rate than the normal expectation level table 222da1 and the low expectation level table 222da2. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that the player has won a big win even more strongly when the special mode pressing-up performance is generated. Therefore, since the game can be played while paying attention to the aspect of the pressing additional effect, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the fourth control example, when the difference between the displayed remaining number of times and the actual remaining number of times is 5 or more and the second special symbol hits the jackpot, the pressing additional effect is always set. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the rate at which the additional pressing effect is set is reduced, and the additional pressing effect is set at a rate of 80%. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily generate a difference between the displayed remaining number of times and the actual remaining number of times, so that the pressing additional effect can be executed more effectively.

Returning to FIG. 311, the description continues. The pressing period table 222db is a data table that defines the number of additional displays according to the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed during execution of the pressing additional effect. Details of the pressing period table 222db will be described with reference to FIGS.

First, FIG. 313(c) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pressing period table 222db. As shown in FIG. 313(c), the pressing period table 222db includes a normal table 222db1 that is referred to when the normal pressing effect is set, and a special pressing effect that is referred to when the special pressing effect is set. and a special table 222db2 that When execution of the additional pressing effect is determined, a table corresponding to the determined pressing additional effect is read out and stored in a pressing period storage area 223da of the RAM 223, which will be described later. When the depression of the frame button 22 is detected during the execution of the depression additional effect, the table stored in the depression period storage area 223da is referenced to determine the number of additions.

First, the details of the normal table 222db1 will be described with reference to FIG. 314(a). FIG. 314(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal table 222db1. As shown in FIG. 314(a), in the normal table 222db1, the number of times (addition value) to be added to the remaining count display area D1 is defined in association with the elapsed time after the press addition effect is started. ing. It should be noted that the elapsed time after the effect is started is counted by the pressing period timer 223db of the RAM 223. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 314(a), the elapsed time range of 0 to 699 milliseconds is associated with "0" as the added value. In addition, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during this period (range of 0 to 699 milliseconds from the start of the pressing additional effect) is that the scroll bar D3a moves on the small area D3b marked with "?" It becomes a mode. Also, the elapsed time range of 700 milliseconds to 999 milliseconds is associated with "3" as the added value. In addition, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during this period (in the range of 700 to 999 milliseconds from the start of the pressing additional effect) is that the scroll bar D3a moves on the small area D3c to which the characters "chance!" It becomes the mode to do. Also, the range of elapsed time from 1000 milliseconds to 1499 milliseconds is associated with "5" as an added value. The display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during this period (in the range of 1000 to 1499 milliseconds from the start of the pressing additional effect) is that the scroll bar D3a is displayed in a small area D3d to which the characters "Extremely hot!!!" It will move upwards.

Similarly, the elapsed time range of 1500 to 1799 milliseconds (the period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3e) is associated with "2" as an additional value, and the elapsed time range of 1800 to 2500 milliseconds. "0" is associated with (a period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3f) as an additional value.

In this way, the normal table 222db1 defines the correspondence relationship between the elapsed time and the additional value corresponding to the presentation mode of the pressing additional presentation of the normal mode (time-measured change in the position of the scroll bar D3a). As a result, the number of times according to the display mode (the position of the scroll bar D3a) at the time when the player presses the frame button 22 can be additionally displayed.

Next, the details of the special table 222db2 will be described with reference to FIG. 314(b). FIG. 314(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal table 222db2.

As shown in FIG. 314(b), the range of elapsed time from 0 to 799 milliseconds (the period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3b) is associated with "5" as the added value, and the elapsed time is 800 milliseconds. to 999 milliseconds (the period during which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small region D3c) is associated with "10" as an added value, and the elapsed time range is 1000 to 1099 milliseconds (the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small region D3d). ) is associated with an additional value of "20", and an elapsed time in the range of 1100 to 1299 milliseconds (period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3e) is associated with an additional value of "10". The associated elapsed time range of 1,300 to 1,999 milliseconds (the period during which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3f) is associated with "5" as the added value, and the elapsed time range of 2,000 to 2,049 milliseconds. (The period during which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3g) is associated with "30" as the added value, and the elapsed time range of 2050 to 2500 milliseconds (the period during which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3h) , and "5" is associated as an added value.

With this special table 222db2, the number of additions displayed in the small area through which the scroll bar D3a is passing can be accurately displayed in the remaining number display area D1 at the timing when the frame button 22 is pressed.

Returning to FIG. 311(a), the description continues. The pending advance notice determination table 222dc is a table referred to for determining whether or not to execute the pending advance notice effect. As described above, the pending notice effect may be executed when the game state is the normal state or the probability variable state and the number of retained balls of the first special symbol increases. is a rendition performed to suggest the existence of Details of this pending notice determination table 222dc will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 315 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the pending notice determination table 222dc. As shown in FIG. 315, the pending notice determination table 222dc includes a table for when there is reach, which is referred to when there is a held ball that causes a ready-to-win effect among the held balls, and a ready-to-win effect occurs in the held ball. It is composed of a table for no reach that is referred to when there is no ball to be held. Each table is associated with the value of the effect counter 223h for determining the execution of the pending notice effect for each number of pending balls.

As shown in FIG. 315, in the ready-to-win table, the value of the production counter 223h is not specified in the range of 0 to 2 for the number of pending balls. That is, when the number of pending balls is 2 or less, the pending advance notice effect is not set. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is 3, "0 to 9" is associated as the value range of the effect counter 223h, and when the number of reserved balls is 4, the value range of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 15" are associated. In other words, the larger the number of pending balls, the easier it is to execute the pending notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player actively shoot balls in an attempt to accumulate more reserved balls, so that the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 315, even in the no-reach table, the value of the production counter 223h is not specified in the range of 0 to 2 of the number of pending balls. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is 3, "0" is associated as the value of the tooth effect counter 223h, and when the number of reserved balls is 4, the value range of the effect counter 223h is "0, 1". ” is associated. That is, the non-reach table has fewer random numbers (counter values) for determining the execution of the pending notice effect than the table for the ready reach. Therefore, the presence of the ball on hold for which the ready-to-win performance is performed makes it easier to execute the pending notice performance, so that the ready-to-win performance is developed for the player at the stage when the pending notice performance is started. can be strongly expected.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 311(b). FIG. 311(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. is. The RAM 223 in the fourth control example differs from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a depression period storage area 223da, a depression period timer 223db, and a continuous hit counter 223dc are added.

The pressing period storage area 223da is a storage area for storing the pressing period corresponding to the type of the determined pressing additional effect when execution of the pressing additional effect is determined. That is, when it is determined to start the pressing effect, the table (normal table 222db1 or special table 222db2) read from the pressing period table 222db is stored (see S4392 in FIG. 321). When the depression of the frame button 22 is detected during execution of the additional depression effect, the additional value is determined based on the table stored in the depression period storage area 223da and the timer value of the depression period timer 223db, which will be described later. , the remaining count displayed in the remaining count display area D1 is updated.

The pressing period timer 223db is a timer that counts the elapsed time from the start of the pressing additional effect. Based on the timer value of the pressing period timer 223db and the table stored in the pressing period storage area 223da, the additional value in the pressing additional effect is determined.

The repeated hit counter 223dc is set to a predetermined upper limit value for each effect when an effect (see FIG. 306(a)) prompting repeated hits of the frame button 22 occurs in the pending notice effect. is a counter whose value is decremented by one each time the frame button 22 is operated (see S5703 in FIG. 318). When the value of the repeated hitting counter 223dc becomes 0 during execution of the effect for prompting repeated hitting of the frame button 22, the effect progresses to the next stage (the egg pattern moves inside the house Ds1c).

The depressed flag 223dd is a flag indicating whether or not the operation (depression) of the frame button 22 has been executed by the player in the 1 depression additional effect. If this pressed flag 223dd is ON, it means that the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 has been detected in the pressing effect of 1, and if it is OFF, the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 has been detected. Means not detected. When the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is detected during execution of the press-over effect, this pressed-down flag 223dd is referred to, and only when the state is OFF, the pressed state stored in the pressed-down period table storage area 223da is detected. An added value corresponding to the period is read out and displayed in addition to the remaining count display area D1 (see S5605 in FIG. 317). That is, even if the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 a plurality of times in the 1st addition effect, only the addition for the first operation (presses) is executed. In addition, when the pressing additional effect ends with the pressed flag 223dd turned off, 1 is added to the value of the participation degree counter 223df, which will be described later. In other words, the number of times the player did not participate in the pressing additional effect (pressing the frame button 22) is counted by the participation degree counter 223df. In this control example, the execution frequency of the pressing additional effect is varied according to the count value of the participation degree counter 223df.

The on-hold notice flag 223de is a flag indicating whether or not the on-hold notice effect (see FIGS. 305 and 306) is being executed. Indicates that the performance is not in progress. This pending notice flag 223de is set to ON when execution of the pending notice effect is determined (see S5808 in FIG. 322), and is set to OFF at the end of the pending notice effect (see S5835 in FIG. 325). While this pending notice flag 223de is on, execution of a new pending notice effect is avoided. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from being confused by repeated execution of the pending notice.

The degree-of-participation counter 223df is a counter that indicates the degree of participation of the player in the pressing additional effect. This participation degree counter 223df is incremented by 1 when the additional pressing effect ends without detecting the operation of the frame button 22 (see S5509 in FIG. 316). When an operation is detected, the value is reset to 0 (see S5609 in FIG. 317). That is, the value of the participation degree counter 223df counts the number of consecutive times the player did not press the frame button 22 (did not participate) in the press additional effect. In this control example, the execution frequency of the pressing additional effect is varied according to the count value of the participation degree counter 223df. That is, if the count value of the participation degree counter 223df is greater than 5 (if the player has not participated in the push-up additional effect six or more times in a row), the determination ratio of the push-up additional effect is increased. As a result, it is possible to increase the opportunity for prompting the player to operate (depress) the frame button 22, so that the player's willingness to participate in the pressing additional effect can be enhanced.

The non-display setting flag 223dg is a flag indicating whether or not the non-display mode (see FIG. 309(b)) is set as the display mode during the latent state. When the non-display setting flag 223dg is on, it indicates that the non-display mode is set, and when it is off, it indicates that the non-display mode is not set. This non-display setting flag 223dg is set to ON when the non-display mode is set (see S5896 in FIG. 324), and when an additional effect (pressing additional effect, special additional effect) is set (see FIG. 321). S4395, see S5860 in FIG. 323), it is set to OFF when the latent state ends during the non-display mode (see S5858 in FIG. 323).

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 316 to 325. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 316, the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 236) of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 316 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107).

When this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see FIG. 316) is started, first, it is determined whether or not pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S5501). (S5501: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the pressing additional effect is being executed (S5502).

In the process of S5502, if it is determined that the pressing additional effect is being executed (S5502: Yes), in the pressing additional effect, the additional value corresponding to the operation timing of the frame button 22 is added to the remaining count display area D1. Pressing processing during an additional effect is executed (S5503), and this processing ends. The details of this press-down process during addition effect (S5503) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S5502, if it is determined that the pressing additional effect is not being executed (S5502: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending notice effect is being executed (S5504). In the processing of S5504, if it is determined that the suspension notice effect is being performed (S5504: Yes), the suspension notice pressing process for executing the effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 in the suspension notice effect is executed ( S5505), the process ends. The details of this pending notice pressing process (S5505) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, in the processing of S5504, if it is determined that the suspension notice effect is not being executed (S5504: No), other processing corresponding to the pressing timing is executed (S5506), and this processing ends. It should be noted that the other pressing timing is, for example, the timing at which the back image can be changed. In the fourth control example, as described above, a plurality of back images are defined, and the back surface type is switched each time the player operates the frame button 22 in the fluctuation stop state. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

If it is determined in the process of S5501 that the pressing of the frame button 22 has not been detected (S5501: No), then it is determined whether or not it is time to end the pressing effect (S5507). If it is determined that it is time to end the addition effect (S5507: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the depressed flag 223dd is ON (S5508). Then, when it is determined that the pressed flag 223dd is off (S5508: No), the player did not operate (press) the frame button 22 in the pressing additional effect, and the pressing additional effect ended (the player 1 is added to the value of the participation degree counter 223df (S5509), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5507 that it is not the end timing of the pressing additional effect (S5507: No), or if it is determined in the process of S5508 that the pressed flag 223dd is ON (S5508: Yes), S5509 This process ends without executing the process of .

By executing these processes of S5507 to S5509, it is possible to accumulate the player's degree of participation in the pressing additional effect over a plurality of additional effects. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the pressing additional effect according to the player's degree of participation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 317, the details of the pressing process during addition effect (S5503) will be described. As described above, the process of pressing during the additional effect (S5503) is a process for displaying the additional value corresponding to the operation timing of the frame button 22 in addition to the remaining count display area D1.

When the pressing process during the addition effect (S5503) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the pressed flag 223dd is ON (S5601). Since the additional value has been displayed in the remaining count display area D1 in the press additional effect, and there is no need to execute a new additional addition, this processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5601 that the pressed flag 223dd is off (S5601: Yes), then the pressed period set in the pressed period table storage area is read (S5602), and the Among the pressing periods, the additional value corresponding to the value of the pressing period timer 223db is read out (S5603). Next, it is determined whether or not the read additional value is 0 (S5604), and if not 0 (S5604), an effect is set to display the read additional value in the remaining count display area D1 (S5605).

After the processing of S5605, the added value read in the processing of S5603 is added to the number of times stored in the effect probability variation number of times area 223p and updated (S5606), and the process proceeds to S5608. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5604 that the read-out add-on value is 0 (S5604: Yes), an add-on failure effect (see FIG. 308(a)) for informing that the add-on has failed is set (S5607). ), and the process proceeds to S5608.

In the process of S5608 executed after the process of S5606 or S5607 is completed, the pressed flag 223dd is set to ON (S5608), the value of the participation degree counter 223df is reset to 0 (S5609), and this process exit. By executing the pressing process during the additional effect (see FIG. 317), when the additional pressing effect occurs, the additional value of the number of times corresponding to the position where the scroll bar D3a is displayed is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. can be displayed in addition to the number of times Therefore, it is possible to provide a production that does not give a sense of discomfort.

Next, with reference to FIG. 318, the details of the pending notice pressing process (S5505) will be described. This pending notice pressing process (S5505) is, as described above, a process for executing an effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 in the pending notice effect. In this pending notice pressing process (S5505), first, it is determined whether it is the pressing period (see FIG. 305(a)) in the holding notice effect (S5701), and if it is not the pressing period (S5701: No), then, It is determined whether or not it is the continuous hitting period (see FIG. 306(a)) (S5702).

In the processing of S5702, if it is determined that it is not the repeated hitting period (S5702: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5702, if it is determined that it is in the continuous hitting period (S5702: Yes), the value of the repeated hitting counter 223dc is updated by subtracting 1 (S5703), and whether the updated counter value is 0 or not. is determined (S5704). Then, if it is determined that the updated counter value has become 0 (S5704: Yes), a development effect (see FIG. 306(b)) is set to move the egg pattern to the house Ds1c (S5705). End the process. On the other hand, in the process of S5704, if it is determined that the value of the repeated hitting counter 223dc after updating is 1 or more (S5704: No), the process of S5705 is skipped and the process ends.

Also, in the process of S5701, if it is determined that the current time is the pressing period (S5701), first, at the pressing timing of the frame button 22, it is specified in the third symbol display device 81 (the tray Ds1b is displayed directly below). (S5706). Next, it is determined whether or not the winning information within the range specified by pressing the frame button 22 includes the winning information that causes the ready-to-win effect (S5707). Incidentally, the ready-to-win effect refers to any of the normal reach to lose, the super reach to lose A and B, the normal reach to hit, and the super reach to hit A to C.

In the process of S5707, if it is determined that the winning information that causes the reach effect is included in the specified range (S5707: Yes), then for the pending symbol corresponding to the winning information that the reach occurs to display an egg pattern (reserved pattern lays an egg) is set (S5708). Then, a repeated hitting period for executing a repeated hitting effect that encourages repeated hitting of the frame button 22 is set (S5709), a value corresponding to the value of the repeated hitting counter 223dc is set (S5710), and this processing ends.

In the processing of S5707, if it is determined that the winning information for generating the ready-to-win effect is not included in the specified range (S5707: No), the pending notice flag 223de is set to indicate the end of the pending notice effect. It is set to off (S5711), and this processing ends.

By executing this pressing process during pending notice (see FIG. 318), when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the pending notice effect, it is possible to set an appropriate effect mode according to the pressing timing. Further, as described above, in this control example, the range of pending symbols for executing the pending notice effect is configured to be selectable by the player's operation. As a result, when no advance notice (egg symbol display) is made for the reserved symbols within the selection range, it is possible to inform the player that there is a highly anticipated reserved symbol among the reserved symbols outside the player's selection range. can be expected. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel performance in which a big hit can be expected from the held ball even when the suspension notice performance does not occur.

Next, with reference to FIG. 319, details of command determination processing 4 executed in place of the command determination processing (see FIG. 238) in the first control example will be described. Of the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 319) in the fourth control example, each process of S4301 to S4306, S4309 to S4311, S4313 to S4315, and S4319 is the command determination process in the first control example (see FIG. 238). ) are executed in steps S4301 to S4306, S4309 to S4311 to S4315, and S4319.

In addition, in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 319) in the fourth control example, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received in the process of S4306 (S4303: Yes), the variation start of the second special symbol Executes the special figure 2 fluctuation start process for setting (S4361) and ends this process. Details of this special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4361) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 319) in the fourth control example, if it is determined that the winning command has been received in the process of S4311 (S4311: Yes), based on the winning information notified by the winning command is executed (S4362), and this process is terminated. Details of this pending notice setting process (S4362) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Also, in the process of S4315, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 standby command nor the special figure 2 standby command is received (S4315: No), it is determined whether the remaining probability variation number command is received (S4363 ), if the residual probability variable number command is received (S4363), the residual probability variable number command process is executed for executing the process corresponding to the number of times notified by the residual probability variable number command (S4364), and this process is executed. finish. The details of this remaining probability variable count command process (S4364) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Furthermore, in the process of S4363, if it is determined that the remaining probability variation number command has not been received (S4363: No), then at least one of the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command is received (S4364), if at least one of the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command is received (S4364: Yes), the confirmation display of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol corresponding to the command is executed (S4364), and the process ends. Details of this confirmation command processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 320, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4361) will be described. Figure 320 is the flowchart which shows the details of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. When this special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 320) is started, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to ON (S4371), and then it is notified by the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command A variation pattern is extracted (S4372).

When the processing of S4372 ends, it is then determined whether or not the current game state is the latent state (S4373). is executed (S4374), and the process proceeds to S4376. On the other hand, in the processing of S4373, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S4373: No), the display mode corresponding to the variation pattern extracted in the processing of S4372 is specified from the variation pattern selection table 222a. , the process proceeds to S4376. In the processing of S4376, a variation pattern command for display is set for notifying the selected variation pattern to the display control device 114 (S4376), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 321, details of the additional effect setting process (S4374) will be described. As described above, this pressing additional effect setting process (S4374) is a process for determining execution of the pressing additional effect during the latent certainty state.

When the addition effect setting process (see FIG. 321) is started, first, it is determined whether the lottery of the second special symbol of this time was the lottery result of the stop type of the small hit (S4381), and it is not the stop type of the small hit. If it is determined (S4381: No), then, when the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received, during the setting of the non-display mode (see FIG. 309 (b)), and the remaining probability variation number is 5 or less (S4382). In the process of S4382, if the non-display mode is not being set, or if the number of remaining probability variations is 6 or more (S4382: No), the process proceeds to S4391.

On the other hand, in the process of S4382, the non-display mode is set, and if it is determined that the remaining probability variation number is 5 or less (S4382: Yes), then the lottery of the second special symbol of this time is a big hit E ~ It is determined whether or not the lottery result was the stop type of G (S4383), and when it is determined that none of the jackpots E to G is determined (S4383: No), the process proceeds to S4391. On the other hand, in the process of S4383, if it is determined that any one of the jackpots E to G (S4383: Yes), as a table for determining the setting of the pressing additional effect, it is selected from the additional effect selection table 222da for the big win. The table 222da3 is read (S4384). Next, the difference between 120, which is the number of latencies given after the big hit, and the number of times stored in the effect probability variable number storage area 223p is calculated (S4385), and the process proceeds to S4391.

Also, in the process of S4381, if it is determined that the current stop type is a small hit (S4381: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the participation counter 223df is greater than 5 (S4386), If the value of the participation degree counter 223df is greater than 5 (S4386: Yes), the participation degree normal table 222da1 is read from the additional effect selection table 222da as a table for determining the setting of the pressing additional effect (S4387). Next, the difference between the actual remaining number of times of the latent probability state stored in the remaining probability variation number area 223o and the remaining number of times of the latent probability state on the display stored in the effect probability variation number of times area 223p is calculated, and the process proceeds to S4391. to move to.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4386, when it is determined that the value of the participation degree counter 223df is less than 5 (S4386: No), the low participation degree table 222da1 is read from the addition effect selection table 222da (S4387). Next, the difference between the actual remaining number of times of the latent probability state stored in the remaining probability variation number area 223o and the remaining number of times of the latent probability state on the display stored in the effect probability variation number of times area 223p is calculated, and the process proceeds to S4391. to move to.

In the process of S4391 executed after any one of S4385, S4388, and S4391 is completed, the difference calculated in any of S4385, S4388, and S4391 and the difference calculated in any of S4384, S4387, and S4388 are calculated. Based on the table read out, the mode of the pressing additional effect (any of no additional effect, normal mode, and special mode) is specified (S4391), and the process proceeds to S4392.

In the process of S4392, it is determined whether or not execution of the pressing additional effect is determined (S4392). The corresponding pressing period is read from the pressing period table 222db (see FIGS. 314(a) and (b)) and set in the pressing period storage area 223da (S4393). The pressing period set here is referred to when the player's operation (pressing) on the frame button 22 is detected during execution of the pressing additional effect decided to be executed this time, and the pressing period corresponding to the operation (pressing) timing is referred to. The value is displayed in addition to the remaining count display area D1. As a result, the player can positively operate (press) the frame button 22 in anticipation that the number of times of the remaining latent definite state on the display will be increased. It can improve willingness to participate. After the processing of S4393, the non-display setting flag 223dg is set to OFF (S4394), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4392, if it is determined that the execution of the pressing additional effect is not determined (S4392: No), the effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command is specified from the variation pattern selection table 222a. (S4395), this processing ends. By executing this add-on performance setting processing, it is possible to select an appropriate form of push-down add-on performance according to the player's past participation status for the push-down add-on performance, the lottery result of the second special symbol, or the like.

In addition, in this control example, in the latent state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit or only when the big hit E to G, the push-up effect is set, but it is not limited to this. . For example, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, it may be possible to set the press-up effect. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in performance.

Next, details of the pending notice setting process (S4362) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This pending notice setting process (S4362) is, as described above, a process for determining execution of the pending notice based on the winning information notified by the winning command. When this pending notice setting process (S4362) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the game state is the latent state (S5801). Skip each processing of S5802 to S5809 for setting the advance notice effect, and terminate this processing as it is. The reason why the suspension notice effect is not executed in the latent definite state is that the main variation in the latent definite state is the variable display of 2 special symbols that cannot be held and stored. For this reason, in the latent state, in most cases, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol becomes 0, and it is not necessary to determine whether or not to execute the reserved notice. Therefore, the processing load of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the latent state can be reduced by skipping the execution determination of the on-hold notice itself.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5801, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not a latent state (normal state or variable probability state) (S5801: No), then whether the pending notice flag 223de is on It is determined whether or not (whether or not the suspension notice effect is already being executed) (S5802), and if it is determined that the suspension notice flag 223de is ON (the suspension notice effect is already being executed) (S5802 : Yes), and the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pending notice flag 223de is off in the process of S5802 (S5802: No), then the winning information of the first special symbol is read from the winning information storage area 223a (S5803), It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the variation pattern in which the ready-to-win effect occurs is included in the read winning information (S5804).

In the process of S5804, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the variation pattern that generates the ready-to-win effect is included (S5804: Yes), the The table is read from the pending notice determination table 222dc (see FIG. 315) to determine execution of the pending notice, and the process proceeds to S5807. On the other hand, in the processing of S5804, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the variation pattern in which the ready-to-win effect occurs is not included (S5804: No), the table for determining the execution of the pending notice effect is set to no reach. The time table is read from the suspension notice determination table 222dc to determine whether the suspension notice is to be executed, and the process proceeds to S5807.

In the process of S5807 executed after the process of S5805 or S5806, it is determined whether or not the execution of the pending notice effect is determined in the process of S5805 or S5806 (S5807), and it is determined that the execution of the pending notice effect is determined. If so (S5807: Yes), the on-hold notice flag 223de is set to ON (S5808). Next, an effect (see FIG. 305(a)) that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 is set (S5809), and the process ends.

By executing this pending notice setting process, the pending notice effect can be set at an appropriate ratio according to the number of pending balls and the content of each pending ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 323, details of the remaining probability variation number command processing (S4364) will be described. This residual probability variable number command process (S4364) is, as described above, a process for executing control according to the probability variable number of times notified by the residual probability variable number command. When this residual probability variable number command process (S4364) is started, first, the residual probability variable number of times notified by the residual probability variable number command is stored in the residual probability variable number area 223o (S5851), and then the current game state is latent probability. It is determined whether it is in the state (S5852).

In the processing of S5852, if it is determined that the gaming state is not the latent state (S5852: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5852, if it is determined that the gaming state is the latent state (S5852: Yes), then whether the non-display setting flag 223dg is on (whether the non-display mode is set) (S5853), and if the non-display setting flag 223dg is off (S5853), a non-display setting process for determining whether or not to set the non-display mode is executed (S5861). ), the process ends. The details of this non-display setting process (S5861) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5853 that the non-display setting flag 223dg is ON (S5854), it means that the non-display mode (see FIG. 309(b)) is set. In the processing, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining probability variations stored in the remaining probability variation number area 223o is 5 or less (S5854). In the process of S5854, when it is determined that the number of remaining probability variations is 6 or more (S5854: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of remaining probability variations is 5 or less (S5854: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is one of the jackpots E to G (S5855), and the jackpots E to If it is determined that it is neither G (S5855: No), then it is determined whether or not the remaining probability variation count is 0 (whether the number of times stored in the remaining probability variation count area 223o is 0). Determine (S5856).

In the processing of S5856, if it is determined that the number of remaining probability variations is not 0 (S5856: No), this processing is terminated as it is in order to continue the non-display mode. On the other hand, in the process of S5856, if it is determined that the number of remaining probability variations is 0 (S5856: Yes), it means that the latent probability state in which the non-display mode is set has ended, so the end effect of the non-display mode (see FIG. 310(a)) is set, the non-display setting flag 223dg is set to off (S5858), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5855, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is one of the big hits E to G (S5855: Yes), since the latent state of 120 times is set after the big hit, first , Set the execution of the special addition effect (see FIG. 310 (b)) (S5859), then overwrite the effect probability variable number of times area 223p to 100 times, set the non-display setting flag 223dg to off ( S5860), the process ends.

Thus, in the present fourth control example, when the non-display mode is set, the second In the case of a special pattern jackpot (that is, when the number of remaining times of the latent certainty state is updated to 120 times just before the latent certainty state ends), a special addition of a mode different from the normal press-up addition performance is performed. It is configured to execute production (special additional production). As a result, the player who has confirmed the special additional performance can be made to recognize that the jackpot is won just before the actual remaining number of times becomes 0 and the latent certainty state is newly set. can bring greater joy to

Next, details of the non-display setting process (S5861) will be described with reference to FIG. This non-display setting process (S5861) is, as described above, a process for determining whether or not to set the non-display mode. As shown in FIG. 324, when the non-display setting process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of times stored in the effect probability variation number area 223p is 0 (S5891). If it is determined (S5891: No), subtract 1 from the remaining number of times stored in the effect probability variable number of times area 223p (S5892), display in the remaining number display area D1 according to the stored value of the effect probability variable number of times area 223p after subtraction The displayed number of times is updated (S5893), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5891, if it is determined that the remaining number of times stored in the effect probability variation number of times area 223p is 0 (S5891: Yes), the actual remaining number of times stored in the remaining probability variation number of times area 223o It is determined whether or not the number is 0 (S5894), and if the actual number of remaining times is not 0 (S58994: No), the non-display mode (see FIG. 309(b)) is set (S5895) and non-display is performed. The setting flag 223dg is set to ON (S5896), and this processing ends. By setting the non-display mode, it is possible to make it impossible to know when the latent state ends, so that the player can have a sense of tension in the remaining latent state of the game.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5894, if it is determined that the actual remaining number of times of the latent certainty state stored in the remaining probability variation number area 223o is 0 (S5894: Yes), the display on the display at the end timing of the latent certainty state Since it means that the remaining number of times has also been updated to 0, a normal ending effect (see FIG. 188(a)) is set (S5897), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the non-display setting process in the fourth control example, the non-display mode is set if the latent state does not end when the remaining number of times on the display becomes zero. This makes it possible to create a state in which it is not known how long the latent state will last. Therefore, while the non-display mode is set, the game can be played with a sense of tension.

Next, with reference to FIG. 325, the details of the confirmation command process (S4366) will be described. This confirmation command process (S4366) is, as described above, a process for setting the confirmation display of the third symbol. When this confirmation command process (see FIG. 325) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 confirmation command is received (S5831), and if it is determined that it is a special figure 1 confirmation command (S5831), set the confirmation display of the first special symbol (S5832). Next, it is determined whether or not the pending notice flag 223de is ON (S5833), and if it is determined to be ON (S5833: Yes), the pending notice effect is displayed during the variable display for which the fixed display is set this time. It is determined whether or not the processing has ended (S5834). In the processing of S5834, when it is determined that the suspension notice effect has ended (S5834: Yes), the suspension notice flag 223de is set to OFF (S5835), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5833, if it is determined that the pending notice flag 223de is off (S5833: No), or if it is determined that the pending notice effect is continuing in the processing of S5834 (S5834: No ), and the process ends. In addition, in the processing of S5831, if it is determined that the received confirmation command is the special figure 2 confirmation command (S5831: No), the confirmation display of the second special symbol is set (S5836), and this processing is terminated. .

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example is configured to be able to execute the suspension notice effect as the interest effect in the normal state or the variable probability state. In this pending notice performance, the pending symbol for executing the notice is configured to be selectable by the player's operation of the frame button 22.例文帳に追加

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines capable of executing a suspension notice effect indicating the degree of expectation of a suspended variable display. In such a conventional gaming machine, by changing the color and shape of the reserved symbols, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbols will result in a big win. , making it possible to heighten the player's expectations.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when a suspension notice effect is generated, it may be difficult for the player to have expectations for the suspension symbols that are not subject to the suspension notice. This is because it was normal to set the suspension notice effect for the suspension pattern corresponding to the suspension ball with high expectation in the suspension.

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, it is possible to designate the range of pending symbols in which the pending notice effect is executed. In addition, it is configured so that the percentage of execution of the suspension notice effect is higher when the suspension ball with high expectation of winning a big hit is included. As a result, when the pending notice performance is not set for the reserved symbols in the specified range, or when the pending notice performance in the form of low expectation is executed, the reserved symbols outside the range specified by the player are handled. It is possible to have the expectation that the held ball will be a big hit. Therefore, when a highly anticipated suspension notice effect occurs in the selection range, the expectation that the suspension ball corresponding to the reservation pattern in which the suspension notice has occurred will be a big hit, and whether the suspension notice will occur, When a reservation notice with a low degree of expectation is generated, it is possible to provide a novel performance in which expectations can be felt for the reservation ball outside the selection range.

In addition, in the fourth control example, as a type of additional effect for pressing down which is executed in the latent state, the rest of the latent state is displayed in the remaining count display area D1 according to the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22. There is a production that adds to the number of times.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has operation means such as operation buttons that can be operated by a player, and is capable of executing an operation effect prompting the player to operate the operation means as a kind of entertainment effect. be. In this conventional game machine, by operating the operation button in the operation presentation, a special presentation different from the usual one is generated, or a win is announced, etc., to improve the interest of the player.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since the operation effect is executed as part of the effect of notifying the result of the predetermined winning lottery, the result of the player's operation of the frame button is the result of the effect (the winning (whether or not it is notified) was irrelevant. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to increase the player's willingness to participate in the operation presentation.

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, there is a case where there is a difference between the actual remaining number of times in the latent certainty state and the displayed remaining number of times. Then, when the pressing additional performance is executed, a different additional value is added and displayed according to the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22 within a range in which the displayed remaining number of times does not exceed the actual remaining number of times. and As a result, the remaining number of additions on the display can be varied depending on the operation timing of the player, so that the player can be made to actively participate in the addition performance (the frame button 22 can be pressed at the appropriate timing). . Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the game.

Furthermore, in the fourth control example, in the latent certainty state, the number of remaining latent certainty states is set to a non-display mode in which the number of remaining latent certainty states is not displayed, and the actual remaining number of latent certainty states is set. becomes a jackpot of the second special pattern within a predetermined number of times (5 times) (the probability state is newly set to 120 times), a special add-on effect different from the normal add-on effect can be executed. Configure.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the normal state is set for a predetermined number of lotteries based on a predetermined trigger such as winning. In such a conventional game machine, when the player enters an advantageous state, it is difficult to know how long the advantageous state will continue. There are things that are trying to improve interest.

However, in such a conventional game machine, when a predetermined trigger such as winning occurs in an advantageous state and the advantageous state is reset (overwritten), it is unknown at what stage of the advantageous state was reset. , and there is a risk of making the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, a special additional effect is provided that is executed only when the number of remaining latent chances is within 5 times and the jackpot is achieved. On the other hand, it is possible to clearly recognize that the latent certainty state has been added just before the end of the latent certainty state. Therefore, it is possible to bring greater joy to the player who recognizes that he or she has won the jackpot with good timing. In addition, since the remaining number of times of the latent definite state at the time of the big win is clarified, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in the fourth control example, the special additional effect is executed only when the non-display mode is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the remaining number of times is displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1, if the remaining number of times of the actual probability state (the value stored in the remaining probability change number area 223o) is within 5 times, a special It is good also as composition which performs additional production. As described above, in the fourth control example, there may be a difference between the displayed remaining number of latent definite states and the actual remaining number of latent definite states. In other words, even if the displayed remaining number of times is five or less, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the actual remaining number of times is five or less. Therefore, even if the remaining number of times on the display is within 5 times, and the remaining number of times on the display is added, the actual remaining number of times is also within 5 times (that is, just before the end of the latent state). It becomes unclear whether the actual remaining number of times was sufficient or not, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, if the actual remaining number of times is within 5 times, regardless of whether or not the non-display mode is set, a special additional effect is executed. To make a player surely recognize the fact when winning a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable. Note that the effect mode of the special additional effect may be changed depending on whether or not the non-display mode is set. That is, when the non-display mode is not set, for example, an effect may be executed in which the running character 811 is enlarged and 100 times is added to the remaining number displayed in the remaining number display area D1. . By executing a different special additional effect depending on whether or not the non-display mode is set, a more natural flow effect can be executed in each display mode. Moreover, the mode of presentation can be diversified.

In the fourth control example, whether or not the pattern of the egg moves to the house Ds1c is notified by the effect of prompting repeated hitting of the frame button 22 in the reservation notice effect, but it is not limited to this. For example, the effect of moving to the house Ds1c may be omitted, and an effect may be executed in which if the egg is broken by repeated hits, the super reach is confirmed. In other words, it may be configured such that all the egg symbols are collectively informed as to whether or not they will develop into super ready-to-win with one continuous hit by the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the presentation easier to understand.

In the fourth control example, when the suspension notice effect is generated and the player does not operate (press) the frame button 22, the range of the suspension symbols for automatically performing the suspension notice is determined. However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the player does not operate (press) the frame button 22 within a predetermined period (for example, within 2 seconds) from the occurrence of the pending notice effect, the pending notice effect itself may be terminated. By configuring in this way, it is possible to meet the needs of players who do not want to see the pending notice effect (purely want to enjoy the variable display). That is, if the degree of expectation for a big win is suggested by the reservation notice effect, there is a possibility that the variable display corresponding to the reservation ball with the low degree of expectation may become unenjoyable. Therefore, by enabling the player to select not only the range of reserved symbols in which the reserved notice effect is executed, but also whether or not to perform the reserved notice effect itself, the variable display corresponding to each reserved symbol can be used as expected. can make you feel. Therefore, the needs of each player can be widely met.

In the fourth control example, the degree of expectation of each reserved symbol is suggested depending on whether the reserved symbol lays an egg and whether the egg breaks. It is not something that can be done. It is sufficient that the reserved symbols can be varied in different modes according to the degree of expectation of the corresponding reserved ball. good. More specifically, for example, it is configured such that the degree of expectation increases in the order of white→blue→yellow→green→red→rainbow. Then, when the player selects a reserved pattern for performing a reserved notice effect, the reserved pattern in the selection range is changed to white. Then, when the player repeatedly hits the frame button 22, the color of each reserved symbol may be changed. In this case, for each reserved symbol, how much the color changes according to the number of repeated hits may be determined in advance at the start of the reserved notice or when the player selects the reserved symbol. Specifically, for example, when a reserved pattern corresponding to a holding ball that becomes a variation pattern of short out, normal reach out, and hit super reach A is selected, the reserved pattern corresponding to short out is changed from white to another color Set it so that it does not change, and set it so that the reserved pattern corresponding to the lost normal reach changes up to yellow according to the number of repeated hits (changes in the order of white → blue → yellow), and the hold corresponding to hit super reach A The pattern may be set to change up to a rainbow color according to the number of repeated hits (changes in the order of white→blue→yellow→green→red→rainbow). By configuring in this way, the player can be made to aggressively hit repeatedly while looking forward to the extent to which the colors of the reserved symbols change. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate.

<First Modification of First Control Example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 326 to 331. FIG. In the first control example described above, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the latent state, the same (0.5 seconds) variation time is set regardless of the second special symbol lottery result. It was configured. As a result, it is configured to improve the efficiency of the game in the latent state.

On the other hand, in the first modified example, the variation time of the second special symbol is varied according to the remaining number of times of the latent definite state. In the first half of the latent certainty state, a relatively short variation time is likely to be set, and in the second half, a relatively long variation time is likely to be set. As a result, in the first half of the latent definite state, the interval between small hits or big wins is shortened, and it is possible to increase the number of prize balls in a relatively short period of time. It is possible to lengthen the interval between the balls and make the increase width of the prize balls relatively gentle. Therefore, since it is possible to add waves to the number of prize balls, it is possible to give sharpness to the ball output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous in the latent certainty state.

The first modification of the first control example differs from the first control example in configuration in that the configurations of the RAM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 are partially changed. The difference is that part of the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the control device 110 is changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first modified example of the first control example>
First, with reference to FIGS. 326 to 328, the electrical configuration of the first modified example of the first control example will be described. FIG. 327(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the first modified example of the first control example. As shown in FIG. 326(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the first modified example has a variation pattern scenario table 202ea added to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first control example (see FIG. 191). The difference is that Moreover, in this modified example, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202f are partially changed.

First, with reference to FIG. 326(b), the variation pattern selection table 202f in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 326(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202f in this control example. As shown in FIG. 326(b), the variation pattern selection table 202f in the first modified example replaces the latency table 202f4 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 194) in the first control example. A latent (first half) table 202f4a and a latent (second half) table 202f4b are provided.

The latent probability (first half) table 202f4a is a table that is referred to for selecting a variation pattern in the first half of the latent probability state (when the lottery of the 1st to 50th special symbols is executed). The second half) table 202f4b is a table referred to in the latter half of the latent state (when the lottery for the 51st to 120th special symbols is executed). The details of this latent probability (latter half) table 202f4b will be described with reference to FIG. 327(a). In addition, the stipulated content of the latent probability (first half) table 202f4a is the same as the latent probability table 202f4 (see FIG. 196(b)) in the first control example, and is 0 regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol. A variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 327(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the latency (latter half) table 202f4b. Of these, the contents of the regulation for the lottery of the first special symbols are the same as those of the probability (first half) table 202f4a (and the probability table 202f4 in the first control example), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. . Further, for the lottery for the second special symbol, a variable time of 2 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the second special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the winning short variation (2 seconds) is selected in the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that the variation type counter CS1 can take, and the second special symbol lottery. In the case of a small hit, if the small hit short fluctuation (2 seconds) is selected in the entire range of values that can be taken by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (0 to 198), and the second special symbol lottery is lost. is out of the whole range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and a short fluctuation (2 seconds) is selected.

In this way, when the latency (second half) table 202f4b is referred to, the variation time becomes longer (0.5 seconds→2 seconds) than when the latency (first half) table 202f4a is referred to. By doing so, in the latter half of the latent state (51 times to 120 times), it is possible to lengthen the interval between small wins or big wins. Therefore, in the first half of the latent probability state, the number of possession balls increases easily, and in the second half, the increase in the possession balls becomes gentle, so that the increase in the possession balls can be waved, and the game becomes monotonous. can be prevented (suppressed).

Next, details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ea will be described with reference to FIG. 327(b). This variation pattern scenario table 202ea is a table in which the number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the big win and a table for selecting a variation pattern are defined in association with each other. When selecting a variation pattern, a table for selecting a variation pattern is specified from this variation pattern scenario table 202ea.

As shown in FIG. 327(b), when the normal state is set as the game state after the big hit, regardless of the number of special symbol lotteries after the big hit in which the normal state is set, the fluctuation pattern A normal table A202f1 is associated as a selection table. Therefore, when the normal state is set after the big hit, the normal table A202f1 is always referred to and the variation pattern is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 327 (b), when the probability variation state is set as the gaming state after the big hit, the number of lotteries of special symbols after the end of the big hit ranges from 1 to 120, the probability variation table 202f3 are defined in association with each other, and normal table A202f1 is defined in association with special symbol lottery times of 121 or later. Therefore, when the lottery number of special symbols is 120 times or less, the probability variation table 202f3 is referred to as a table for selecting the variation pattern selection table, and after 121 times, the normal table A202f1 is referred to. be.

Also, as shown in FIG. 327(b), when the latent certainty state is set as the gaming state after the big win, the number of lotteries after the big win is in the range of 1 to 50, and the latent certainty (first half) table 202f4a is defined in association with the number of times of lottery of special symbols in the range of 51 to 120, the table 202f4b for latency (second half) is defined in association with the range of 121, 122, normal A normal table A 202f1 is defined corresponding to 123 and later.

As a result, in the first half of the latent probability state, the variation pattern can be determined by referring to the latent probability (first half) table 202f4a, in which a short variation time is likely to be determined, so that the intervals between small wins or big wins can be shortened. can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the increasing speed of prize balls in the first half of the latent probability state. On the other hand, in the latter half of the latent probability state, the variation pattern can be determined by referring to the latent probability (second half) table 202f4b in which long variation times are difficult to determine, so the intervals between small wins or big wins become longer. Therefore, since the increasing speed of the prize balls can be moderated in the second half of the latent probability state, the degree of increase of the prize balls can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous during the latent certainty state.

Further, after the end of the latent state, in the special symbol lottery twice, the variation pattern can be selected by referring to the normal table B202f2, so as in the first control example, the result of the latent state Sufficient production time for displaying can be secured. Furthermore, when the number of special symbol lotteries exceeds 123 times, the normal table A202f1 is referred to.

Next, referring to FIG. 328, the configuration of RAM 203 of main controller 110 in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 328 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 328, the RAM 203 in the first modified example has a scenario storage area 203ea and a lottery number counter 203eb added to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first control example (see FIG. 198). differ in

The scenario storage area 203ea is a storage area for storing a scenario corresponding to a game state after a big win among the scenarios defined in the variation pattern scenario table 202ea. The scenario storage area 203ea stores a variation pattern scenario corresponding to the gaming state after the big win at the end of the big win (see S2351 in FIG. 331). At the start of fluctuation, the scenario stored in the scenario storage area 203ea is referenced to determine a fluctuation pattern selection table for selecting a fluctuation pattern.

The number-of-lotteries counter 203eb is a counter for counting the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the big win. When the variation pattern selection table is selected from the scenario storage area 203ea, the number of special symbol lotteries is determined by the value of the lottery counter 203eb, and the variation pattern selection table is selected.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first modified example of the first control example>
Next, various control processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the first modified example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 329 to 331. FIG. First, referring to FIG. 329, first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 5 (see FIG. 212) executed in this first modification instead of first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 212) in the first control 329) will be explained.

Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (see FIG. 330) in the first modification, in each process of S501 to S503 and S505 to S508, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process in the first control example The same processes as the processes of S501 to S503 and S505 to S508 (see FIG. 212) are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (see FIG. 329) in this modification, when the process of S503 is completed, the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the value of the lottery number counter 203eb is then selected from the scenario storage area 203ea. (S551), and the process proceeds to S505. Using the variation pattern selection table read here, a variation pattern is selected by the process of S505. It should be noted that, although not shown in the drawings, also in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process, when reading the variation pattern selection table, the same process as this S551 is executed to determine the table.

Next, with reference to FIG. 330, the game state update process 5 (see FIG. 330) executed in this first modified example instead of the game state update process (see FIG. 213) in the first control example will be described. Of the game state update process 5 (see FIG. 330) in the first modification of the first control example, in each process of S601 to S608, S601 to S601 of the game state update process (see FIG. 213) in the first control example The same processing as each processing of S608 is executed.

In addition, in the game state update process 5 (see FIG. 330) in the first modified example, after the process of S608, the value of the lottery number counter 203eb is updated by adding 1 (S651), and this process ends. By updating the value of the lottery number counter 203eb each time in the game state update process 5 (see FIG. 330), the value of the lottery number counter 203eb can always be matched with the number of lotteries of special symbols executed after the big win. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 331, description will be given of jackpot end processing 5 (see FIG. 331) that is executed in this first modification instead of the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 230) in the first control example. In the processing of S2301 to S2308 of the jackpot end processing 5 (see FIG. 331), the same processing as the processing of S2301 to S2308 in the jackpot control processing of the first control example (see FIG. 230) is executed. .

In addition, in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 331) in the first modified example, when the process of S2308 is completed, the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the gaming state set in the processes of S2302 to S2306 is displayed in the variation pattern scenario table 202ea. , and set in the scenario storage area 203ea (S2351). Next, the value of the lottery number counter 203eb is reset to 0 (S2352), and this process ends. By this jackpot end processing 5 (see FIG. 331), an appropriate variation pattern scenario can be set according to the game state after the jackpot ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modification of the first control example, the first half of the latent state (the number of lotteries after the big win is 1 to 50) or the latter half (the number of lotteries after the big win is 51 to 120) times), the variation pattern selection table referred to for selecting the variation pattern is switched. A variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected in the second half of the latent definite state than in the first half of the latent definite state. As a result, the interval between the small win or the big win can be made different between the first half and the latter half of the latent definite state, and the possibility of the small win or big win being made at shorter intervals in the first half can be increased. That is, the increasing speed of prize balls can be increased in the first half of the latent state, and the increasing speed of prize balls can be relatively moderated in the latter half. Therefore, since the increasing speed of the prize balls can be varied, the increase of the prize balls can be waved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous during the latent certainty state. In addition, since the speed of increase of prize balls is faster in the first half of the latent state, the player's expectation for the first half of the latent state can be enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to win a jackpot in the first half of the latent probability state (before entering the second half) and make the player want to play the game in the first half of the latent probability state again. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the game.

In addition, in this first modification, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the first half of the latent state, the variation time of 0.5 seconds is always set, and in the second half of the latent state, the second special symbol Although the variation time is always set to 2 seconds when the lottery is executed, it is not limited to this. For example, even in the first half of the latent state, a variable time of 2 seconds may be set at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 20%). Similarly, even in the trial in the latent state, the variable time of 0.5 seconds may be set at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 20%). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to determine from the fluctuation time whether it is the first half or the latter half of the latent state, so even when the fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set, the player is expected to play the game in the first half. be able to.

<Second Modification of First Control Example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second modified example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 332 and 333. FIG. In the above-described first control example, referring to the screen display selection table 222b (see FIG. 200), the third symbol display based on the fluctuation situation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (setting status of each standby flag) It is configured to set the display content (screen display type) to be displayed on the device 81, and in the normal state, the second special symbol fluctuation situation (special figure 2 standby flag 223t setting situation) which is a secondary fluctuation Regardless, by executing the demonstration display only when the special figure 1 standby flag 223 s indicating that a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation of the first special symbol that is the main fluctuation is stopped is set to ON, It was configured to reliably display the main fluctuation.

Here, in the above-described first control example, during the normal state, that is, in the state in which the left-hand shot is executed, the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol, which is the secondary variation, continues to be stopped and displayed in the small area Dm1. Met. This is because the second ball entrance 1640 where the lottery for the second special symbol is executed is provided in the right hitting area.

As described above, if the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in the small area Dm1 while stopped, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 where the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. When the player sees the symbols displayed in the small area Dm1 where the fluctuation is not started, the player may feel that the pachinko machine 10 is out of order.

On the other hand, in this second modification, the special figure 2 standby flag 223t indicating that a predetermined period has passed since the variation of the second special symbol, which is a secondary variation, stops during the normal normal state was set to ON. In the case, it is configured to execute the sub-variation demonstration display (special figure 2 demonstration display) in the small area Dm1. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the simultaneous variation is executed, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol (second special symbol) on the side of the secondary variation continues to be displayed while stopped. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the contents of the game.

The second modification of the first control example differs from the first control example in terms of configuration in that the configuration of the RAM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first control. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, the contents of the sub-variation demonstration display (the second special symbol demonstration display) displayed according to the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 332 is a diagram showing an example of a secondary variation demonstration display (second special symbol demonstration display) displayed in the small area Dm1 in the normal state (or probability variation state).

As shown in Figure 332, in the normal state (or probability variation state), the state in which the first special symbol is fluctuating, the second special symbol has not fluctuated for a predetermined period (30 seconds in this modification) In the state, instead of the stop display (see FIG. 182) showing the lottery result of the second special symbol in the small area Dm1, a sub-fluctuation demonstration display indicating that the first special symbol is fluctuating is displayed as "playing". characters are displayed. In this way, by executing the display other than the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol in the small area Dm1 as the secondary variation demonstration display, even though the game is being executed (the left-handed game is executed) A game player is given a sense of incongruity by continuing to display a symbol (second special symbol) in which variation is not executed (even though the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64). can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the content of the secondary variation demonstration display (second special symbol demonstration display) is configured to be settable based on the variation situation of the first special symbol (setting status of special figure 1 standby flag 223s). As shown in 332, when the first special symbol is fluctuating (if the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to off), the fact that the first special symbol, which is the main fluctuation, is fluctuating Since the content is displayed, it is possible to provide a display mode that is easy for the player to understand.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second modification of the first control example>
An electrical configuration in the second modification of the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 333 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the screen display selection 3 table 222b in the second modified example of the first control example. As shown in FIG. 333, the screen display selection 3 table 222b in the second modified example is different from the screen display selection table 222b (see FIG. 200) in the first control example. Then, the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to off, and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is different in that it changes the screen display type defined in response to the state that is set to on there is Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 333, the gaming state is a normal state or a variable probability state, the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to off, and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to on the screen As a display type, "special figure 2 demonstration display" is defined correspondingly. This "special figure 2 demonstration display" is a screen display type in which the small area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is used as the demonstration display area of the second special symbol to display "playing" (see FIG. 332). .

As described above, in the second modification, in the pachinko machine 10 in which two types of special symbols are varied simultaneously, one of the two types of special symbols (which is advantageous for the player) Special symbol) is variably displayed as the main variation using most of the third symbol display device 81, and the other special symbol (special symbol more disadvantageous than the main variation for the player) is part of the third symbol display device 81'. (An area smaller than the display area where the variation display of the main variation is performed) When using a configuration that is displayed as a secondary variation, the area where the variation display of the secondary variation is performed (secondary variation display area) Since the demo display corresponding to the secondary fluctuation can be executed in , it is possible to prevent the pattern indicating the lottery result of the secondary fluctuation from being displayed for a long time (30 seconds or more), which makes the player feel uncomfortable. can be suppressed. Also, the player can be made to pay attention to the variation display (effect display) corresponding to the main variation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . It is possible to provide a presentation that is easy for the player to understand.

Furthermore, by setting the contents of the demonstration display executed for the sub-fluctuation (second special symbol) based on the fluctuation situation of the main fluctuation (first special symbol), the sub-fluctuation (second special symbol) is displayed. It is possible to notify the player of the fluctuation situation of the main fluctuation (first special symbol) using the area (secondary fluctuation display area). Therefore, in the state where the demonstration display is performed in the sub-variation area, all (almost) of the third symbol display device 81 can be used to perform display related to the main variation, providing an easy-to-understand effect for the player. be able to.

In addition, in the second modification, the second special symbol demo display is executed instead of the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol, which is a secondary variation, but other configurations may be used. Well, for example, the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol may be displayed in a reduced size, and the second special symbol demonstration display may be executed in the empty space of the secondary variation display area, or the secondary variation display area You may use the structure which performs a 2nd special design demonstration display in a different area|region.

In addition, in the second modification, the configuration of the second special symbol demonstration display (secondary variation demonstration display) in the normal state or probability variation state in which the first special symbol is the main variation and the second special symbol is the secondary variation. However, for example, it is preferable to use the same configuration even in a latent state where the second special symbol is the main fluctuation and the first special symbol is the sub-fluctuation. In this case, by setting the small area Dm1 of the third symbol display area 81 as the variation display area of the first special symbol and setting the small area Dm1 as the secondary variation display area regardless of the game state, the secondary variation demonstration display can be performed. Display data and display control can be shared, and there is an effect that the processing load of display control on the third pattern display device 81 can be reduced.

<First Modification of Fourth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 334 to 350, a first modification of the fourth control example described above will be described. In the fourth control example described above, when there is a difference between the actual remaining number of times in the latent state and the remaining number of times displayed, the remaining number of times displayed is displayed in addition to the variable effect of the special symbol. A non-display mode (see FIG. 309(b)) is set when the displayed remaining number of times is 0 and the actual remaining number of times is not 0 (is 1 or more). , when the non-display mode is set, and a special additional performance executed when the jackpot is achieved with the actual remaining number of times of the latent probability state within a predetermined number of times (5 times), At various timings during the latent state, an effect was executed to add the remaining number of times on the display.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a specific game state (latency state) in which the player is advantageous is executed a predetermined number of times (120 times), and is updated and managed by the main controller 110. There is a difference between the actual remaining number of times and the displayed remaining number of times displayed on the third symbol display device 81, making it difficult for the player to understand how long the specific game state will continue. In such a game machine, by executing an effect that adds the displayed remaining number of times and converging the difference between the actual remaining number of times and the displayed remaining number of times, the player can enter a specific game state without any sense of incongruity. It is configured to be played.

In this case, as the effect to add the remaining number of times on the display, as described in the fourth control example described above, an additional effect (pressing additional effect) executed based on the variation of the special symbol, and the remaining number of times on the display is within a predetermined number of times. By executing various additional effects in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult to understand the remaining number of times that the specific game state (latency state) is executed, and the state that gives the player a sense of tension. A game can be played continuously, and a sense of security can be imparted when a large number of times is added by the additional performance.

However, the effect (additional effect) for converging the difference between the actual remaining number of times and the displayed remaining number of times is different depending on the player. There was a fear that the motivation of the employees would decrease. Specifically, it is for a player who prefers an effect in which the actual remaining number of times is not known until the displayed remaining number of times decreases, and the actual remaining number of times is added when the displayed remaining number of times decreases. On the other hand, if the additional effect is performed before the displayed remaining number of times decreases, the difference between the displayed remaining number of times and the actual remaining number of times will be reduced by the number of times added by the additional effect. When the upper remaining number of times is reduced, the number of times of adding the actual remaining number of times is reduced, and there is a fear that the player's motivation for the performance is lowered.

On the other hand, in the first modified example, as the additional effect executed during the latent certainty state, the effect mode (additional chance mode) that can be expected for each fluctuation additional effect, and the remaining number of times on the display is a predetermined number or less Since the player can select the performance mode (post-notification mode) in which the additional performance is executed when the game becomes true, the player can arbitrarily set the mode of the additional performance desired by the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player's motivation for the performance is lowered.

Furthermore, as described above, in the gaming machine capable of selecting the effect mode of the additional effect, for example, every time the variation of the special symbol is executed, the first effect mode capable of executing the additional effect is set, and the remaining on the display In a state where 3 times is displayed as the number of times, if the user selects the second effect mode in which the additional effect is executed when the remaining number of times on the display reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 rotations), the additional effect will not be performed. There is a problem that the execution timing is missed and the performance effect is lowered.

On the other hand, in this modification, during the jackpot game in which the actual remaining number of times is reset to 120 times, the effect mode of the additional effect can be selected, and further, the remaining number of times on the display as the effect mode is a predetermined number of times. It is configured to set the remaining number of times on the display to 100 times during the big winning performance based on the selection of the second performance mode in which the additional performance is executed when (for example, 5 rotations) are made.

Thus, in a game machine in which a player can arbitrarily select a performance mode of an additional performance, a performance corresponding to the selected performance mode can be executed regardless of which performance mode is selected at any timing.

The first modified example of the fourth control example differs from the fourth control example in terms of configuration in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The content of the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed, and the content of the partial processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and other processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the 4 control examples. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the fourth control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

Here, the contents of the effect display executed according to the first modified example will be described with reference to FIGS. 334 to 337. FIG. In this first modification, as the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, after the symbol variation display moving in the horizontal direction is stopped (temporarily stopped) (after reach loss), some symbols are displayed in the vertical direction. A moving variation pattern (scroll variation effect) is set (see FIGS. 334 and 335). Further, when a jackpot G is won in the latent definite state, a plurality of performance modes are selectable in which different additional performance modes are executed during the jackpot game (see FIGS. 336 and 337).

First, with reference to FIGS. 334 and 335, the contents of the scroll change effect will be described. FIG. 334(a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the reach (first reach mode) in which the pattern moves in the horizontal direction is stopped (temporarily stopped) due to disengagement among the scroll change effects, and FIG. 334(b) is a 335(a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which, after the first ready-to-reach mode is disengaged and stopped (temporary stop), some of the symbols are displayed in a suggestive mode suggesting that they move in the vertical direction, and FIG. FIG. 335(b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the ready-to-win state in which the symbol moves in the vertical direction (second ready-to-win mode) is executed, and FIG. . Note that the reach (first reach mode) in which the pattern moves in the horizontal direction is the same as the above-described fourth control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 334(a), in the first modification, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into a left display area Dz1 and a right display area Dz2 and is configured to be controllable. During the pattern variation display (symbol variation display in the horizontal direction), the display control of the left display region Dz1 and the right display region Dz2 is collectively executed, so that the entire display region of the third pattern display device 81 is varied. When the display is executed and a special pattern variation display (vertical pattern variation display) different from normal is performed, the areas (left display area Dz1 and right display area Dz2 ) is configured to execute control to update only the display data. As a result, it is possible to execute a proper design display effect only by updating the display data of the area suitable for the design variation display, so that the processing load of the control relating to the design variation processing can be reduced.

In FIG. 334(a), the symbol row L1 and the symbol row L3 are first stopped and displayed (first ready-to-win mode), and as a result, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit, the symbols to be stopped and displayed are displayed. The symbol row L2 is stop-displayed in a mode shifted by one frame (shifted by one frame in the plus direction) with respect to the combination (a combination of patterns in which the patterns showing the same number are stopped and displayed linearly).

After that, among the symbols stopped and displayed in the left display area Dz1 (the symbol row L1 is a symbol imitating a "lion", the symbol row L2 is a sub-symbol, and the symbol row L3 is a symbol imitating a "snake"), A pattern simulating a character is displayed in a moving direction suggesting mode indicating an action suggesting a vertical (downward) movement, and a vertical (downward) pattern row is displayed in the left display area Dz1. Specifically, a sub-symbol is displayed above the symbol row L1 displayed in the left display area Dz1, and a sub-symbol is displayed below the symbol row L3 displayed in the left display area Dz1. A pattern row in the vertical direction (from the top, a sub-symbol, a “lion” pattern, a sub-symbol, a “snake” pattern, and a sub-symbol pattern row are displayed in this order). (See FIG. 334(b)).

As a result, it is possible to suggest that the symbols displayed in the left display area Dz1 will fluctuate in the vertical direction, and an effect that gives the player a feeling of anticipation can be executed. Furthermore, in the first modified example, the display content in the left display area Dz1 is changed (that is, the display mode of each symbol stopped and displayed in the left display area Dz1 is changed, and the left display area Dz1 is newly displayed. It is a configuration that suggests that the reach (second reach mode) in which the pattern fluctuates in the vertical direction will be executed only by executing the process of adding a pattern and additionally displaying the pattern row in the vertical direction. , it is possible to reduce the processing load of the control related to the pattern variation processing.

It should be noted that, without using the configuration of the first modified example, a configuration suggesting that the second ready-to-win mode is executed by changing the display mode of the symbols stopped (temporarily stopped) in the right display area Dz2. may be used. As a result, since it is possible to execute the suggestive effect using the entire third symbol display device 81, it is possible to give an easy-to-understand notification to the player.

Then, when the second ready-to-win mode (the ready-to-win in which the pattern fluctuates in the vertical direction) is executed, as shown in FIG. As a second reach mode, a main symbol (main symbol imitating an elephant) with the number "1" attached to the activated line V5 or activated line V6 is stopped and displayed to indicate a big hit. A special double reach mode is executed. In this way, by combining the normal horizontal reach mode (first reach mode) and the vertical reach mode (second reach mode), from the variable display of the unidirectional symbol row (L1 to L3) Even complicated pattern variation display can be easily executed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 335(a), it is possible to set a plurality of stop positions where a specific main symbol (main symbol with the number "1" attached) indicates a big win, increasing the expectation of a big win. can perform the performance.

Then, when the execution of the second ready-to-win mode is finished and the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit, the main symbol (the elephant model) with the number "1" attached to either of the activated lines V5 and V6 is displayed. main symbols) are stopped and displayed in a row (see FIG. 335(b)). After that, a jackpot game is executed.

In the display example described above, the left display area Dz1 is displayed from the state in which the first reach state is stopped (temporary stop) (see FIG. 334(a)) to the state in which the second reach state is stopped (temporarily stopped). Although an example of not changing the display data of areas other than Dz2 has been shown, the display data corresponding to each symbol (main symbol and sub symbol) stopped and displayed in the right display area Dz2 is not updated. display data (for example, the display of "reach" displayed in the right display area Dz2) may be updated. As a result, when the special double reach mode shown in FIG. 334(a) is executed, the display of "reach" is changed to the display of "multi reach" indicating that the expectation of the big win is higher than in the normal reach mode. It becomes possible to update, and the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, a display area showing the current pattern variation status (the area displaying "Reach" in FIG. 334(a)) is provided in the left display area Dz1, and the contents to be displayed are appropriately changed according to the pattern variation status. It may be configured to As a result, only by executing the process of updating the display data of only the specific display area (the left display area Dz1) among the display areas of the third symbol display device 81, the second ready-to-win mode is executed and the symbol fluctuation situation is executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the control related to the pattern variation processing, and to execute an effect that enhances the expectation of a big win.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 336 and 337, the contents of the add-on mode selection effect for selecting the add-on effect executed during the latent certainty state in the first modified example of the fourth control example will be described. This additional mode selection effect is displayed in order to converge the difference between the actual remaining number of times in the latent probability state (value of the probability variable number area 223o) and the remaining number of times on the display (value of the probability variable number counter 223p). It is a production for selecting the production mode (addition mode) of the additional production that adds (adds) the remaining number of times, and it is determined whether or not to execute the additional production each time the fluctuation of the special symbol is started. A player selects an optional performance mode (additional mode) from a performance mode (additional chance mode) and a performance mode (post notification mode) in which an additional performance is executed when the remaining number of times on the display reaches a predetermined number of times. It is a selectable performance.

As a result, the player can select a performance mode in which an additional performance suitable for his or her taste is executed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation due to execution of an unintended additional performance. .

First, with reference to FIG. 336(a), the display contents of the additional mode selection effect in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 336(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents of the additional mode selection effect. As shown in FIG. 336(a), in the first modification, the extra mode selection effect is executed during the jackpot game executed when the jackpot G is won in the latent state.

When the addition mode selection effect is executed, the remaining number of times displayed when winning the big win G (remaining probability variation number of effects) continues in the remaining number display area D1 of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display area 81. is displayed. As a result, the remaining number of times on the display can be easily confirmed even during the jackpot game. In the main control unit 110, the value of the probability variation counter 203k is cleared (set to 0) when a jackpot game is executed, but the remaining number of times displayed in the effect probability variation number area 223p of the sound lamp control device 113 By storing (setting) the (remaining probability variation number of times), the remaining number of times on the display can be continuously displayed even during the jackpot game.

In the central area of the main display area Dm, a button D6a with the word "push" for prompting the user to operate (depress) the frame button 22 is displayed. A first selected display D6b described and a second selected display D6c described as "post notification mode" are displayed, and a first selection position for selecting the first selected display D6b and a second selected display D6b are displayed. A selection display D6d is displayed, which moves at a predetermined interval to the second selection position for selecting the display D6c. In the display area D4, a telop is displayed to explain the contents of the additional mode selection effect, and in FIG. In addition, on the left side of the sub-display area Ds, the additional performance mode (additional mode) selected in the state of winning the jackpot is displayed, making it easy to know which additional performance mode the player has selected. making it comprehensible.

During this add-on mode selection effect, the designated add-on mode is set by operating (depressing) the frame button 22 while the selection display D6d designates the desired add-on mode.

Then, in FIG. 336(a), when the additional chance mode (first selected display D6b) is selected, as shown in FIG. is displayed, and a character 811 is displayed in a display mode to congratulate the continuation of the latent state. Also, in this case, since the add-on effect mode is not changed in the add-on mode selection effect (because it is "add-on chance mode" at the time of winning the jackpot → "add-on chance mode" after the add-on mode selection effect), the remaining number display area D1 , the same “remaining 3 times” as at the time of winning the jackpot is continuously displayed. As a result, the latent state can be resumed in the same situation (remaining number of times on the display) as the situation (remaining number of times on the display) at the time of winning the jackpot, so that the player can resume the latent state without making the player feel uncomfortable. A game can be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 336(b), the add-on mode selected by the add-on mode selection effect is displayed on the right side of the sub-display area Ds. Thus, by seeing the display contents of the sub-display area Ds, it is possible to easily grasp both the add-on mode at the time of the big win and the add-on mode after the add-on mode selection performance.

On the other hand, in FIG. 336(a), when the post notification mode (second selected display D6c) is selected, as shown in FIG. display is performed. Other than that, the same contents as those explained in FIG. 336(b) are displayed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same location, and the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted. In this way, when the add-on mode at the time of winning the jackpot and the add-on mode selected by the add-on mode selection effect are different, the add-on mode is newly executed by setting the remaining number display area D1 to 100 times. , it is possible to smoothly execute the additional performance without a sense of incongruity, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 336(a), a jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed in a state where the remaining count display area D1 indicates "three times", and an extra mode selection effect is performed during the jackpot game. When the add-on mode is changed from the add-on chance mode to the post-announcement mode, if the number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is left as "three times", the add-on effect is executed in the post-announcement mode. (the number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is within "five times") may be lost, and there is a problem that a suitable effect cannot be provided to the player. However, as in the first modification, when the addition mode is changed, the number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is set to 100, so that the addition effect is executed in the post-notice mode. Opportunities (the number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is within "five times") can be reliably secured.

In addition, in the first modification, it is configured so that it is determined whether or not the latent state is given after the jackpot game ends in the 7th round of the jackpot game (the ball passes V in the 7th round Since the switch 65e3 (see FIG. 179) is configured so that the latent state is given when it passes through), the above-mentioned additional performance mode selection effect is configured to be executed after the 8th round during the jackpot game. It is As a result, it is possible to execute the effect of selecting the additional mode in the state that the actual remaining number of times is reset to 120 times, so that the ball does not pass through the V passage switch 65e3 during the big win and the big win. When the latent certainty state is not imparted after the end, the jackpot game can be ended without executing the additional performance mode selection performance.

<Electrical configuration in the first modification of the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 338 and 339, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the fourth control example will be described. First, FIG. 338 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second normal table A202ff1 provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the first modification of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 338, this second normal table A 202ff1 has a defined variation pattern partially changed from the normal table 202f1 (see FIG. 195) used in the above-described fourth control example. The difference is that Since other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, among the variation patterns defined in the second normal table A202ff1, variation patterns changed from the normal table A202f1 will be described. In the first modification of the fourth control example, a scroll change effect (see FIGS. 334 and 335) is executed as the special symbol variation pattern. Specifically, when the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "101 to 150", and super reach D (30 seconds) is associated with "151 ∼ 198" is associated with super reach E (30 seconds).

Furthermore, the lottery for the first special symbol is lost, and the number of pending balls is 0 or 1, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "71 to 150" Normal reach B (20 seconds) It is associated with super reach C (30 seconds) outside the range of "171 to 198". In addition, when the lottery for the first special symbol is lost and the number of reserved balls is 2 or 3, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "131 to 170" and corresponds to normal reach B (20 seconds) and is out of the range of "186-198" and associated with super reach C (30 seconds).

When hit super reach D (30 seconds) is set as a variation pattern, the reach performance (first reach mode) (see FIG. 183(b)) in which the third symbol moves in the horizontal direction is executed for the first 17 seconds. , the mode indicating that the first ready-to-reach mode is out (the mode in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by one frame) is stopped (temporary stop display) (see FIG. 334(a)), after which a scroll change effect is suggested. The production is executed for 3 seconds, which is the suggested production period (Fig. 334(b)), and after the suggested production period, the ready-to-win production (second ready-to-win mode) in which the third symbol moves in the vertical direction is executed for 10 seconds (Fig. 334(b)). 335(a)). Then, the third symbol is stop-displayed in a combination indicating winning (see FIG. 335(b)).

When hit super reach E (30 seconds) is set as a variation pattern, the reach effect (first reach mode) (see FIG. 183(b)) in which the third symbol moves in the horizontal direction is executed for the first 17 seconds. , the mode indicating that the first ready-to-reach mode is out (the mode in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by one frame) is stopped (temporary stop display) (see FIG. 334(a)), after which a scroll change effect is suggested. The effect is executed for 3 seconds, which is the suggestive effect period (Fig. 334(b)), and after the suggestive effect period passes, the ready-to-win effect (third ready-to-win mode) in which the third symbol moves laterally is executed for 10 seconds. Then, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a win.

When normal reach B (20 seconds) is set as a variation pattern, the reach effect (first reach mode) (see FIG. 183 (b)) in which the third symbol moves in the horizontal direction is executed for the first 17 seconds, A stop display (temporary stop display) is displayed in a state in which the first ready-to-reach state indicates a loss (a state in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by one frame) (see FIG. 334(a)). After that, after the suggestive effect suggesting the scroll change effect is executed for 3 seconds which is the suggestive effect period (Fig. 334(b)), the third symbol is stop-displayed in a combination indicating the disengagement.

When Super Reach C (30 seconds) is set as a variation pattern, the Reach performance (first Reach mode) (see FIG. 183(b)) in which the third symbol moves in the horizontal direction is executed for the first 17 seconds. , the mode indicating that the first ready-to-reach mode is out (the mode in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by one frame) is stopped (temporary stop display) (see FIG. 334(a)), after which a scroll change effect is suggested. The effect is executed for 3 seconds, which is the suggestive effect period (Fig. 334(b)), and after the suggestive effect period passes, the ready-to-win effect (third ready-to-win mode) in which the third symbol moves laterally is executed for 10 seconds. Then, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a disengagement.

As described above, in the first modification of the fourth control example, the first reach mode (17 seconds) and the suggestive effect ( 3 seconds) is executed, and the second reach mode (10 seconds) is executed in the remaining 10 seconds. As a result, after the completion of the suggestive effect, the third pattern is stopped and displayed as it is in combination with a deviation time of 20 seconds. 10 seconds) can be combined with variations (hitting super reach E, losing super reach C) to make the player expect to win at various timings during pattern fluctuation.

Specifically, while the suggestive effect is being executed, the game can be played while expecting that the temporarily stopped third symbol will be restarted. In addition, in the first modification, the degree of expectation for winning is different depending on the direction in which the third symbol restarts, so the game is played while also expecting in which direction the third symbol restarts. be able to. It should be noted that during execution of this suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 334(b), the third pattern display device 81 indicates whether or not the third pattern will restart, or suggests the direction in which the third pattern restarts. Since the effect (suggestive effect) is executed, the player confirms the content of the effect executed as the suggestive effect to determine whether or not the third symbol restarts or the direction in which the third symbol restarts. The game can be played while predicting the

In addition, in FIG. 334(b), a suggestion effect is executed in which the display form of the third symbol is changed to a display form (moving direction suggesting display form) suggesting the moving direction (downward), but other suggestions are executed. As an effect, for example, in order to suggest that the third pattern restarts in the horizontal direction (left direction), the display form of the third pattern is changed to a display form (second movement direction suggestion display form), a suggestion effect in which the reserved pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 changes to a display form suggesting the restart direction of the third pattern, and a suggestion effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 There is a suggestive effect that suggests the restart direction of the third pattern using other display bodies.

Furthermore, instead of suggesting the restart direction of the third symbol, it may be configured to execute a suggestion effect that simply suggests the restart of the third symbol. In this case, during the suggestive effect period, a suggestive effect (restart suggestive effect) that suggests that the third symbol restarts is first executed, and then a suggestion that suggests the moving direction of the third symbol when restarted. It is preferable to configure so as to execute an effect (restart direction suggesting effect). As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the degree of expectation of winning step by step, and to make the player continue to watch the performance.

In addition, in the first modified example, when the third symbol is restarted, it is configured so that the variation in the vertical direction (downward) or the variation in the horizontal direction (leftward) is executed. The direction in which the three symbols are restarted may be provided in addition to the above, and for example, a variation pattern may be provided in which the game is restarted in the upward direction in addition to the downward direction described above as the restart in the vertical direction. In this case, the variation patterns in which the third pattern restarts in the vertical direction (upward, downward) are set so that the hit expectation is different, and as a suggestive effect, it is suggested that the third pattern restarts in the vertical direction. By providing a suggestive effect to suggest that the third pattern restarts upward, and a suggestive effect to suggest that the third pattern restarts downward, The degree of expectation for winning can be reported step by step.

Next, with reference to FIG. 339, the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 339(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the first modified example. As shown in FIG. 399(a), the ROM 222 in the first modified example is provided with an add-on mode selection table 222fa in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example.

This add-on mode selection table 222fa stores the contents of each add-on effect to be executed in the add-on mode (add-on chance mode, post-announcement mode) selectable by the player during the latent state, and selects the add-on mode effect. An effect corresponding to the add-on mode effect selected in the process is read out and executed.

FIG. 223(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first modified example. In the first modified example, a pressed a flag 223fa, a pressed b flag 223fb, a scroll change flag 223fc, a mode change flag 223d, a mode addition flag 223fd, and an addition mode setting area 223fe are added to the above-described fourth control example. is doing.

The depressed a flag 223fa indicates that the frame button 22 is operated during a period set during reach (depressed period during reach) within a period during which the operation (depression) of frame button 22 is determined to be valid (operation valid period). This flag is set to ON based on the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 during the pressing period during reach. This pressed a flag 223fa is set to ON when the pressing process (see S5332 in FIG. 341) of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (see FIG. 340) is executed (see S8002 in FIG. 341), It is referenced (S8201 in FIG. 343) in the pressing end time process (see S5537 in FIG. 343), and then set to OFF (S8204 in FIG. 343).

The pressed b flag 223fb indicates that the frame button 22 is operated during a period set during the jackpot game (pressing period during the jackpot) in a period during which the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is determined to be valid (operation valid period). It is a flag for indicating that it has been done, and is set to ON based on the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 during the pressing period during the jackpot. This pressed b flag 223fb is set to ON when the jackpot middle pressing process (see S5334 in FIG. 341) of the frame button input monitoring/production process 2 (see FIG. 340) is executed (see S8102 in FIG. 342), It is referred to in the pressing end process (see S5537 in FIG. 343) (S8207 in FIG. 343), and then set to OFF (S8212 in FIG. 343).

The scroll change flag 223fc is a flag that is set to ON when the conditions for changing the scroll are established in the scroll change effect (see FIGS. 334 and 335) in which the variation direction of the third symbol is switched midway. This scroll change flag 223fc is set when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the pressing period (suggestion rendering period) during reach of the variation pattern (hit super reach D) in which the variation direction of the third symbol can be switched midway. Then, it is determined that the condition for changing the scroll in the scroll change effect is established, and is set to ON (see S8005 in FIG. 341). Then, it is referred to in the pressing end time process (see S5537 in FIG. 343) (S8202 in FIG. 343), and when it is determined to be ON (see S8202 in FIG. 343: Yes), it is set to OFF (see S8203 in FIG. 343). ). In this pressing end time process (see S5537 in FIG. 343), the display command output to the display control device 114 is changed in accordance with the setting status of the scroll change flag 223fc, thereby making it possible to execute a scroll change effect. is doing.

The mode change flag 223fd is a flag indicating that the currently set add-on mode is changed in the add-on mode selection effect executed during the jackpot game, and is turned on when the add-on mode is changed by the add-on mode selection effect. is set to This mode change flag 223fd is set to ON (S8105 in FIG. 342) when it is determined that the mode has been changed in the jackpot middle pressing process (see S5534 in FIG. 342) (S8104 in FIG. 342: Yes) and pressed It is referred to in the termination process (see S5537 in FIG. 343) (S8208 in FIG. 343), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S8208 in FIG. 343: Yes), it is set to OFF (S8209 in FIG. 343). ). In this pressing end processing (S5537 in FIG. 343), it is configured to vary the value of the effect probability variable number of times area 223p according to the setting status of the mode change flag 223fd, and the mode change flag 223fd is set to ON. If there is, 100 is set to the value of the effect probability variation number area 223p (S8210 in FIG. 343). Thus, when the add-on mode is changed by the add-on mode selection effect, the value of the effect probability variable number of times area 223p is set to 100, that is, the remaining number of times display area D1 of the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. It is possible to execute a game in a latent probability state from a state in which the remaining number of times on the display (the number of times of variation of the remaining probability of performance) is set to 100, and to suitably provide the additional performance executed in the added mode after the change. can.

The add-on mode setting area 223fe is an area for setting (storing) at least the currently set add-on mode and the previously set add-on mode. The add-on mode is set (S8211 in FIG. 343). In this addition mode setting area 223fe, information indicating that the addition chance production mode is set in the initial setting (S4001 in FIG. 235) of the start-up process (see FIG. 235) executed when the power is turned on is set. In a state in which the player has not selected the add-on mode, the add-on chance mode in the latent certainty state is executed. The information set (stored) in the add mode setting area 223fe (currently set add mode) is referred to in special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 6 (see S4361 in FIG. 344) (see S4391 in FIG. 344), In addition, it is configured to be referenced (see S5871 in FIG. 345) in the remaining count command process 6 (see S4364 in FIG. 345) and to execute an add-on effect corresponding to the currently set add-on mode.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the first modification of the fourth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the first modification of the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 340 to 345. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 340, frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (see FIG. 340) of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 340 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S4107).

When this frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (see FIG. 340) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S5501), and it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected. If so (S5501: Yes), then it is determined whether it is during the reach pressing period (S5531).

In the process of S5531, when it is determined that it is during the reach pressing period (S5531: Yes), during reach pressing process for changing the variation direction (scrolling direction) of the third symbol during reach is executed (S5532 ), the process ends. The details of this reach-while-pressing process (S5532) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S5531, if it is determined that the reach pressing period is not noted (S5531: No), then it is determined whether it is the pressing period during the jackpot (S5533). In the process of S5533, when it is determined that it is during the jackpot pressing period (S5533: Yes), the jackpot pressing process for selecting one add-on mode from a plurality of add-on modes with different types of add-on effects to be executed is performed. Execute (S5534) and terminate this process. The details of this jackpot middle pressing process (S5534) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Also, in the process of S5533, if it is determined that it is not the pressing period during the jackpot (S5533: No), other processes corresponding to the pressing timing are executed (S5535), and this process ends. It should be noted that the other pressing timings refer to the processing of S5507 of the fourth control example described above, as well as the additional effect executed in the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S4107 of FIG. 316) of the fourth control example described above. Middle press processing (S5503 in FIG. 316) and pending notice mid-press processing (S5505 in FIG. 316) are executed.

In the process of S5501, if the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is not detected (S5501: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the pressing period (S5536), and it is determined that it is the end timing of the pressing period. If so (S5536: Yes), the pressing end time process (see FIG. 343) is executed (S5537), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5501 that the frame button 22 is not operated (pressed), the process at the end of pressing (see FIG. 340) is skipped and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 341, the content of the reach-in-progress pressing process (S5532) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (see FIG. 340) will be described. FIG. 341 is a flow chart showing the details of the process of pressing during reach (S5532). This reach-while pressing process (S5532) is to execute the process when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the reach-while pressing period. Specifically, a process of determining whether or not a condition for changing the variation direction (scrolling direction) of the third symbol is established in the scroll change effect (see FIGS. 334 and 335) is executed.

When the in-reach pressing process (S5532) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pressed a flag 223fa is set to ON (S8001), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S8001: No) , the pressed a flag 223fa is set to ON (S8002), and then the display reach middle press command is set (S8003). By setting the push-down command during reach for display, the third symbol display device 81 is notified (displayed) of the pressed display mode indicating that the frame button 22 has been pushed within the push-down period during reach. It should be noted that this pressed-down display mode is continuously displayed during the reach-while-pressing period (suggestion effect period), and although not shown in the figure, indicates whether or not the third symbol is restarted in the scroll change effect. It is displayed in a manner suggesting the degree of expectation or the direction to restart.

After the processing of S8003 is finished, it is next determined whether the variation pattern being executed is the hit super reach D (see FIG. 338) (that is, whether it is a variation pattern corresponding to the scroll change effect) (S8004). . In the process of S8004, when it is determined that the variation pattern is the hit super reach D (S8004: Yes), the scroll change flag 223fc is set to ON (S8005), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern is not hit super reach D (S8004: No), this process is terminated.

Further, when it is determined that the pressed a flag 223fa is set to ON in the process of S8001 (S8001: Yes), the frame button 22 has already been operated within the pressing period during reach (second and subsequent times). Since it is in a state where the frame button operation has been executed), all processing is skipped and this processing ends. In addition, in the first modification of the fourth control example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) for the first time within the pressing period during reaching, the pressing process during reaching (S5532) is executed. However, for example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) a predetermined number of times, the process of pressing during reach (S5532) is executed, or a lottery is executed each time the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), and the lottery result is It may be configured such that the reach-in-progress pressing process (S5532) is executed when a hit is achieved. By configuring in this way, it is possible to complicate the content of the effect to be executed, and to enhance the effect of the effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 342, the contents of the jackpot middle pressing process (S5534) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (see FIG. 340) will be described. FIG. 342 is a flow chart showing the contents of the process of pressing during the jackpot (S5534). This jackpot middle pressing process (S5534) executes the processing when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed down) during the jackpot middle pressing period (additional mode selection effect period). Specifically, based on the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 in the add-on mode selection effect (see FIG. 336), the process for setting the add-on mode during the latent certainty state executed after the jackpot is completed. executed.

When the jackpot middle pressing process (S5534) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pressed b flag 223fb is set to ON (S8101), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S8101: No) , The pressed b flag 223fb is set to ON (S8102), and then the command for pressing during the display jackpot is set (S8103). By setting this display jackpot mid-press command, the third symbol display device 81 is notified (displayed) of the pressed display mode indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed within the jackpot mid-press period. Although not shown, this pressed display mode is displayed in a mode in which the button D6a shown in FIG. It is displayed in a manner indicating that the selected display (D6b or D6c) on the selected side has been selected.

After completing the process of S8103, it is next determined whether or not the add-on mode has been changed (S8104). Here, the add-on mode set before the jackpot game is executed is read from the add-on mode setting area 223fe and compared with the add-on mode selected in the add-on mode selection effect of this time, so that the add-on mode can be changed. It is determined whether the If it is determined in the process of S8104 that the add-on mode has been changed (S8104: Yes), the mode change flag 223fd is set to ON (S8105), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the add-on mode has not been changed (S8104: No), this processing ends.

In addition, if it is determined that the pressed b flag 223fb is set to ON in the process of S8101 (S8101: Yes), the frame button 22 has already been operated within the pressing period during the jackpot (second and subsequent Since it is in a state where the frame button operation has been executed), all processing is skipped and this processing ends. In addition, in the first modification of the present fourth control example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) for the first time during the pressing period during the jackpot, the pressing process (S5532) during the jackpot is executed, and the addition mode is determined. However, for example, if it is within the pressing period during the jackpot, the addition mode may be configured to be set again.

Next, with reference to FIG. 343, the contents of the pressing end process (S5537) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (see FIG. 340) will be described. FIG. 343 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pressing end process (S5537). This pressing end time process (S5537) is a process that is executed at the timing when the pressing period for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22 (pressing period during reach, pressing period during jackpot) ends, and during each pressing period For setting the contents of the effect to be executed after the pressing period ends based on the status of the flag set in .

When the pressing end time process (S5537) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pressed a flag 223fa is set to ON (S8201). Here, if it is determined that the pressed a flag 223fa is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S8201: No), the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the pressing period during reaching. Since it is the case where there is not, the process (S8202 to S8205) based on the frame button operation within the pressing period during reach is skipped, and the process proceeds to S8207.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8201 that the pressed a flag 223fa is set to ON (S8201: Yes), then it is determined whether the scroll change flag 223fc is set to ON (S8202). If it is determined that the scroll change flag 223fc is set to ON (S8202: Yes), the scroll change flag 223fc is set to OFF (S8203), the display scroll change command is set (S8204), and the process proceeds to S8206.

If it is determined in the process of S8202 that the scroll change flag 223fc is not set to ON (it is set to OFF), a display scroll non-change command is set (S8205), and the process proceeds to S8206. In the process of S8206, the pressed a flag 223fa is set to OFF (S8206).

After the process of S8206 is finished, it is next determined whether the pressed b flag 223fb is set to ON (S8207). Here, if it is determined that the pressed b flag 223fb is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S8207: No), the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the pressing period during the jackpot. Since it is not the case, the processing (S8208 to S8212) based on the frame button operation within the pressing period during the jackpot is skipped and this processing ends. That is, when the frame button 22 is not operated during the pressing period during the jackpot (during the addition mode selection effect), the value of the effect probability variable number of times area 223p and the setting contents of the addition mode setting area 223fe are not changed. A latent state after the end of the jackpot game is executed in a state in which the state at the time of winning the jackpot (additional mode and the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1) is continued. Therefore, if the player does not intentionally operate (press) the frame button 22 during the extra mode selection effect because he/she does not want to change the extra mode in the latent certainty state, the extra mode and It is possible to prevent the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 from being changed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8207 that the pressed b flag 223fb is set to ON (S8207: Yes), then it is determined whether the mode change flag 223fd is set to ON (S8208), If it is determined that it is set to ON (S8208: Yes), the mode change flag 223fd is set to OFF (S8209), the value of the effect probability variation number of times area is set to 100 (S8210), and the selected addition mode is set in the add mode setting area 223fe (S8211). Then, the pressed b flag 223fb is set to OFF, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8208 that the mode change flag 223fd is not set to ON (it is set to OFF) (S8208: No), the processes of S8209 and S8210 are skipped and the process proceeds to S8211. Transition. In this way, when the add-on mode is changed during the add-on mode selection effect, by setting the value of the effect probability variable number of times area 223p to 100, the add-on mode after the change is changed in the latent probability state executed after the end of the jackpot game. The added effect used can be suitably executed. In addition, if the add-on mode is selected so that the add-on mode is not changed during the add-on mode selection effect (see S8208), the process for setting the value of the effect probability variable number of times area 223p (S8210) is skipped. If the player intentionally selects the same add-on mode as the currently set add-on mode during the add-on mode selection effect because he does not want to change the add-on mode during the state, the add-on mode and the remaining mode are changed after the jackpot game ends. It is possible to prevent the remaining number of times displayed in the number of times display area D1 from being changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 344, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 6 (S4361) will be described. Figure 344 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 6. This special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 6 (S4361) is based on the type of the addition mode currently set for the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 4 (see FIG. 319) of the fourth control example described above Add production The difference is that a process for determining whether to execute the process is added. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 6 (S4361) is executed, first, the same processing as S4371 to S4373, S4375 of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 4 (see FIG. 320) of the fourth control example described above is executed , In the processing of S4373, if it is determined that the game state is the potential state (S4373: Yes), next, it is determined whether the currently set add-on mode is the add-on chance mode (S4391). In the process of S4391, information (additional mode information) set in the additional mode setting area 223fe is read, and determination is executed based on the additional mode information.

In the processing of S4391, if it is determined that the currently set add-on mode is the add-on chance mode (S4391: Yes), S4374 of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 4 (see FIG. 320) of the fourth control example described above , S4376 are executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the currently set add-on mode is not the add-on chance mode (it is the post-announcement mode) (S4391: No), the process of S4374 is skipped and this process ends.

By configuring in this way, when the special figure 2 variation start processing 6 (S4361) is executed (when the variation of the second special symbol is executed), the currently set addition mode is the addition chance mode In the case of , the additional production setting process is executed, and it is possible to provide an additional mode that can be expected for each fluctuation additional production. By preventing the difference between the remaining number of times and the remaining number of times on the display from converging, the number of additional times displayed at the time of the post-announcement (additional effect executed when the remaining number of times on the display reaches a predetermined number) You can make it bigger. Therefore, it is possible to execute an unexpected performance for the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 345, the details of the remaining probability variation number command process 6 (S4364) will be described. FIG. 345 is a flow chart showing the contents of the remaining probability variable count command process 6 (S4364). This remaining probability variable number command processing 6 (S4364) is related to the addition effect based on the type of the currently set addition mode in contrast to the remaining probability variation number command processing (see FIG. 323) of the fourth control example described above. The difference is that a process for determining whether to execute the process is added. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the residual probability variable number command process 6 (S4364) is executed, first, the same processes as S5851 and S5852 of the residual probability variable number command process (see FIG. 323) of the above-described fourth control example are executed, and in the process of S5851 If it is determined that the game state is the potential state (S5852: Yes), then it is determined whether the currently set addition mode is the post-announcement mode (S5871). In the process of S5871, the information (additional mode information) set in the additional mode setting area 223fe is read, and determination is executed based on the additional mode information.

In the processing of S5871, if it is determined that the post notification mode is set (S5871: Yes), the same processing as S5853 to S5861 of the remaining probability variation number command processing of the fourth control example (see FIG. 323) is performed. Execute and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the process of S5871, if it is determined that the post-notification mode is not set (additional chance mode is set) (S5871: No), the process of S5853 to S5861 is skipped and this process ends. .

By configuring in this way, when the remaining probability variation number command process 6 (S4364) is executed (when the variation of the second special symbol is executed), the currently set addition mode is the addition chance mode In the case, the additional production setting process is executed, and it is possible to provide an additional mode that can be expected for each variable additional production. By preventing the difference between the remaining number of times and the remaining number of times displayed on the display from converging, the number of additional times displayed at the time of post-notification (additional effect that is executed when the remaining number of times on the display reaches a predetermined number) is increased. can do. Therefore, the performance effect of the performance desired by the player can be enhanced.

<Regarding control processing executed by the display control device in the first modification of the fourth control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the first modification of the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 346 to 350. FIG. This modified example is different from the above-described fourth control example in that the press-related command process is added in the command determination process 6 (see FIG. 346), and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, the command determination process 6 executed by the MPU 221 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In command determination processing 6, the processing of S6401 to S6417 is executed in the same manner as the command determination processing (see FIG. 247) in the fourth control example described above.

If it is determined in the process of S6416 that an error command has not been received (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not a display press-related command has been received (S6431).

In the process of S6431, if it is determined that the display press-related command has been received (S6431: Yes), the press-related command process is executed (S6432), and the process returns to S6401. Details of the press-related command processing (S6432) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6431 that the press-related command has not been received (S6431: No), then other command processing is executed in the same manner as in the first control example (S6418). Return to processing.

Next, details of the press-related command processing (S6432) will be described with reference to FIGS. 347 to 350. FIG. The press-related command processing (S6432) is processing for performing processing corresponding to various commands for displaying (executing) press-related effects.

In the press-related command process (S6432), first, it is determined whether or not a display-use-reach-during-press command has been received (S8301). In the process of S8301, if it is determined that the display reach middle press command is received (S8301: Yes), the reach middle press command process is executed (S8302), and the process proceeds to the process of S8303.

Here, with reference to FIG. 348, details of the reach-in-progress press command process (S8302) will be described. FIG. 348 is a flow chart showing the reach-while-pressing command process. This reach-in-progress press command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display reach-in-progress press command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the reach-while-press command processing, first, the reach-while-press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the reach-while-press command for display is determined, and the determined press-down display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, It is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8401). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S8402).

Then, based on the push-in-reach display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8401, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8404). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S8405), the reach-in-progress press command processing is terminated, and the press-related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 347, the description continues. In the process of S8301, if it is determined that the display reach middle press command has not been received (S8301: No), then it is determined whether or not the display scroll change command has been received (S8303).

In the process of S8303, if it is determined that the scroll change command for display has been received (S8303: Yes), the scroll change command process is executed (S8304), and the process proceeds to S8305.

Details of the scroll change command process (S8304) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 349 is a flowchart showing scroll change command processing. This scroll change command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display scroll change command received from the audio lamp control device 113 .

In the scroll change command process, first, based on the display contents displayed in the display area Dm1 and the win/fail related information, a pattern array for vertical scrolling is set and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8501). Next, the vertical scroll effect display data table corresponding to the display contents of the display area Dm1 is determined, the determined vertical scroll effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8502). ). After that, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S8503).

Based on the vertical scroll effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8502, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8506), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8507). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S8508), the scroll change command processing is terminated, and the press-related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 347, the description continues. In the process of S8303, if it is determined that the display scroll change command has not been received (S8303: No), then it is determined whether or not the display scroll non-change command has been received (S8305).

In the process of S8305, when it is determined that the display scroll non-change command is received (S8305: Yes), the scroll non-change command process is executed (S8306), and the process proceeds to S8307.

Here, with reference to FIG. 350(a), the details of the scroll non-change command process (S8306) will be described. FIG. 350(a) is a flow chart showing the scroll non-change command process. This scroll non-change command process is for executing the process corresponding to the display auto-press start command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the scroll non-change command processing, first, the scroll non-change display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display scroll non-change command is determined, and the determined auto-press start display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8601). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S8602).

Then, based on the scroll non-change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8601, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8604). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S8605), the scroll non-change command processing is terminated, and the press-related command processing is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 347, the description continues. In the process of S8305, when it is determined that the display scroll non-change command is not received (S8305: No), it is then determined whether or not the display jackpot middle press command is received (S8307).

In the process of S8307, when it is determined that the display jackpot middle press command is received (S8307: Yes), the jackpot middle press command process is executed (S8308), and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 350(b), the details of the pressing command process (S8308) during the jackpot will be described. FIG. 350(b) is a flow chart showing the pressing command process during the jackpot. This jackpot middle press command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display jackpot middle press command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the jackpot middle-press command process, first, the jackpot middle-press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the jackpot middle-press command for display is determined, and the determined jackpot middle-press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8701). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S8702).

Then, based on the jackpot mid-press display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8701, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S8705), the big hit middle press command process is terminated, and the process returns to the press related command process.

Returning to FIG. 347, the description continues. In the process of S8307, when it is determined that the display jackpot middle press command is not received (S8307: No), this process is terminated.

<Another example in the first modified example of the fourth control example>
Next, another example of the first modification of the fourth control example described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 351 to 354. FIG. In this example, the scroll change effect (see FIGS. 334 and 335) executed in the first modified example of the fourth control example described above is combined with the special reach effect executed in the first control example (FIGS. 184, 335). FIG. 185 reference) is configured to be able to execute a combined reach effect. As a result, a complicated ready-to-win effect can be executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this example, the character storage area 234a2 set in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 is partially changed from each of the control examples described above, and the one executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is changed. The difference is that the partial processing has been changed. Other configurations are the same as the configurations and various control processes used in the control examples described above. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 351(a), the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 used in this example will be described. FIG. 351(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As shown in FIG. 351(a), in this example, a symbol row L4 that is scrolled in the horizontal direction and variably displayed is added to the upper side of the symbol row L1 in addition to the control examples described above. The difference is that a symbol row L8 scrolled and variably displayed is added below the symbol row L3.

Furthermore, in this example, the main display area Dm in which the patterns are variably displayed in the third pattern display device 81 is variably displayed by scrolling in the left-right direction into five (five columns) pattern rows (L1 to L4). , and L8), the number of symbol rows that can be displayed in the display area at the same time is three (three rows). Of the five (five rows) of symbol rows (L1 to L4, and L8) variably displayed by scrolling in the horizontal direction, the symbol row displayed in the main display area Dm can be changed.

Then, variation control of five (five columns) symbol columns (L1 to L4 and L8) is performed on a variation region Dz3, which is a region wider than the displayable display region of the main display region Dm. , display control is executed for the symbol row displayed in the main display area Dm. As a result, when the symbol row displayed in the main display area Dmm is to be changed, the changed symbol row can be displayed simply by executing display control based on the content of variation control executed in advance. , the variable display of the symbol row can be executed without delay for the player.

In addition, this example is different in that the symbol rows L5 to L7 corresponding to the scroll display in the vertical direction (vertical direction) used when the scroll change effect is executed are set in advance. That is, when the scroll change effect is executed, a combination pattern of symbols to be stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first ready-to-win state is set in advance, and the display mode corresponding to the combination pattern of the symbols is set. A symbol row corresponding to the second ready-to-win mode is set so that the second ready-to-win mode is executed.

Specifically, when the scroll change effect is executed, display control is performed so that the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first ready-to-win mode when it is out of +1 frame, and the first ready-to-win mode is stopped. In the (temporary stop) display state, the vertical display area where the symbol indicating the combination of the reach (reach symbol) and the symbol that is displayed to stop (temporary stop) when plus one frame is missed (loss symbol) is not displayed. A second ready-to-reach mode is executed in which display is variably displayed in the vertical direction (vertical direction). Thus, by setting the stop (temporary stop) display pattern of the first reach mode to a predetermined pattern (reach plus one frame off stop (temporary stop) display pattern), the initial state when the second reach mode is executed It is possible to pattern the pattern array.

In this example, as the symbol array corresponding to the second ready-to-win mode, the symbol array corresponding to the stop (temporary stop) display pattern of the first ready-to-reach mode is stored in advance for each of the symbol arrays L5 to L7. The second ready-to-reach mode can be executed in correspondence with the stop (temporary stop) display pattern of the first ready-to-reach mode. As a result, it is possible to execute the effect without delay when executing the second ready-to-win mode using part of the third symbols stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first ready-to-win mode.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 351(b) to 352(b), the details of the composite ready-to-win effect in another example of the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 351(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a state in which pattern variation in the horizontal direction is executed in the composite reach effect, and FIG. 352(a) shows the main display area Dm FIG. 352(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a state in which the pattern variation in the vertical direction is executed in the composite reach effect. be. In this composite ready-to-win effect, the pattern variation (normal pattern variation) in the horizontal direction using the pattern rows L1 to L3 is executed for 10 seconds (see FIG. 351(b)), and then displayed in the main display region Dm. The ready-to-win effect (first ready-to-win mode) is executed for 10 seconds by changing the symbol row upward or downward (see FIG. 352(a)), and the pattern fluctuation direction (scrolling direction) is changed from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction. And the changed reach effect (second reach mode) is executed for 10 seconds (see FIG. 352(b)).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 351(b), the normal symbol variation is executed, and the third symbol is stopped (temporary stop )Is displayed. At this point in time, variation control (update of variation data in accordance with progress of variation time (elapsed time)) of the symbol rows (L4, L8) not displayed in the main display area Dm is being executed. That is, when the composite ready-to-win effect is executed, first, execution of variation control is started for all symbol rows (L1 to L4, L8) corresponding to symbol variation in the horizontal direction, and then the main display is performed. Variation control and display control for 10 seconds are executed for the symbol rows (L1 to L3) displayed in the area Dm, and symbol rows (L4, L8) set outside the main display area Dm are , 20 seconds (the period until the first reach mode (see FIG. 352(a)) is stopped (temporarily stopped)). In this way, by executing variation control in synchronization with the elapsed time of the ready-to-win effect even for symbol rows that are not displayed in the main display region Dm, the symbol rows displayed in the main display region Dm are changed and new patterns are displayed. When displaying the symbol row (for example, symbol row L4 or L8), it can be displayed without delay.

In the example shown in FIG. 351(b), the third symbol with the number 1 (the third symbol with a character imitating an "elephant") is positioned at the center of the symbol row L1 and on the right side of the symbol row L2. Temporarily stop display is performed in the stopped (temporarily stopped) deviated display mode (first temporary stop mode). In addition, when the deviation variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds is executed, the third symbol is stop-displayed in the deviation display mode shown in FIG. 351(b), and the symbol variation ends.

Then, a suggestive effect (for example, FIG. 184(b)) suggesting that the symbol row displayed in the main display area Dm is changed while the third symbols are stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed in the first temporary stop mode. As shown in , the display form of the character attached to the third pattern is changed to produce an effect suggesting that the display area will change, or display that suggests that the display area will change on the third pattern display device 81. Effect to be executed) is executed, and then the symbol row displayed in the main display area Dm is changed (see FIG. 352(a)).

In the example shown in FIG. 352(a), the display area is moved upward so that the symbol rows L1, L2, and L4 are displayed in the main display area Dm (upper movement area), and the first temporary stop mode ( The symbol row L3 displayed within the main display area Dm in FIG. 351(b) has moved outside the main display area Dm. As a result, from the first temporary stop display mode, which was a stop (temporary stop) display mode indicating a disengagement, the third symbol with the number 1 (the third symbol with a character imitating an "elephant") is changed to the symbol row. It is displayed in the ready-to-win display mode (first ready-to-win mode) stopped (temporarily stopped) at the central position of L1 and the right side position of the symbol row L2. As a result, by executing the process of changing the display area (symbol row) displayed in the main display area Dm, the winning display mode (first temporary stop mode), which temporarily makes the player think that the player has come off, is changed. can be changed to a reach display mode (first reach mode) in which the player can expect a hit, so that even after the third symbol indicating the loss is stopped and displayed, it is possible to continue to have a sense of expectation for the hit. It is possible to maintain the player's motivation for the game.

It should be noted that, in this another example, the third pattern in the first temporary stop mode (each third pattern displayed in FIG. 351(b)) is reached by moving upward the display area displayed by the main display area Dm. The display area of the main display area Dm is moved upward because the stop (temporary stop) display is performed in a combination capable of executing the effect (first reach mode), but the display area displayed by the main display area Dm is changed to When the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed in a combination capable of executing the ready-to-win effect (first ready-to-win mode) by moving downward, the display area of the main display area Dm is moved downward. Processing is performed. In this way, by configuring the display area of the main display area Dm to be movable in two different directions (upward or downward), a combination of third symbols that can be stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed in the first temporary stop mode. can be increased.

That is, when the display area of the main display area Dm is configured to be movable only in one direction, the main display area Dm before movement is required to execute the ready-to-win effect (first ready-to-win mode) in the display area after movement. Although it was necessary to display the same third pattern in rows in the pattern rows displayed on the upper side and the center of the Dm, the display area of the main display area Dm can be moved in two different directions (upper or lower). When the configuration is used, either the pattern row displayed above and in the center of the main display area Dm before movement or the pattern row displayed in the bottom and center of the main display area Dm before movement is the same. By displaying the third symbols in a row, it is possible to execute the ready-to-win effect (first ready-to-win mode) in the display area after movement, so the third symbol that can be displayed to stop (temporarily stop) in the first temporary stop mode can increase the number of combinations, and it is possible to prevent the player from easily predicting whether or not the pattern variation will develop into the first ready-to-win mode, that is, the pattern variation effect to be executed in the future, and the effect There is an effect that the effect can be enhanced.

Then, in the ready-to-win effect (first ready-to-win mode) shown in FIG. )) is stopped (temporarily stopped), that is, of the symbol rows displayed in the main display area Dm, the upper symbol row (symbol row L4) and the lower symbol are displayed. The right position of the row (symbol row L2) and the same third symbol (the third symbol with the number 1 in FIG. 352 (b)) in the middle symbol row (symbol row L1) is stopped (temporary stop) display ( When it is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the second temporary stop display mode, as shown in FIG. It is variably displayed in the vertical direction as a row L5.

As a result, the same ready-to-win effect as the second ready-to-win mode (see FIG. 335(a)) described in the first modification of the fourth control example is executed. Since it is the same as the first modified example of the fourth control example, its description is omitted.

As described above, in another example of the first modified example of the fourth control example, as the composite ready-to-win effect, the normal symbol variation is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first temporary stop display mode, and then a new symbol is displayed. The display area is changed so as to display the array, the first ready-to-win mode is made executable, and the first ready-to-win mode is temporarily stopped and displayed in the second temporary stop display mode, and then the direction of pattern fluctuation is changed. The second reach mode is configured to be executable. As a result, a ready-to-win effect with a high effect can be executed for the player.

In addition, since it is configured to temporarily stop in the temporary stop display mode multiple times during the composite ready-to-win effect, by matching the timing of temporary stop with the stop display timing of the deviation variation pattern, when the deviation variation pattern is executed It is possible to execute the same effect (at least part of the display data can be diverted) in the case where the compound reach effect is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the amount of display data used for the effect can be reduced. In addition, even when the losing variation pattern is executed, the player can be made to think that the complex ready-to-win effect is being executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 353, an electrical configuration in another example of the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. This example differs from the electrical configuration used in any of the control examples described above in that the contents of the character storage area 234a2 set in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 are partially changed. All other elements are identical. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 353(a), the contents of the character storage area 234a2 in another example of the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 353(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the character storage area 234a2. As shown in FIG. 353(a), the character storage area 234a2 stores a command specifying the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (display area change information included in the variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113). ), and a pattern arrangement for storing the pattern arrangement used when executing the pattern variation display executed in the main display region Dm of the third pattern display device 81. An arrangement storage area 234a2b and other storage area 234a2c in which display data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are stored are defined.

Here, the contents of the display area storage area 234a2a will be described with reference to FIG. 353(b). FIG. 353(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display region storage area 234a2a. In the display area storage area 234a2a, as display area types, a display area 1 (reference area) in which the pattern arrays L1 to L3 are displayed in the main display area Dm, and a display area 1 (reference area) in which the pattern arrays L1, L2, and L4 are displayed in the main display area Dm. A display area 2 (upward movement area) to be displayed and a display area 3 (downward movement area) in which the pattern arrays L2, L3, and L8 are displayed in the main display area Dm are set. The display area displayed in the main display area Dm is set based on a command specifying the display area (display area change information included in the variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113).

Although detailed description is omitted, the variation pattern command output from the sound ramp control device 113 includes information for executing symbol variation for all of the symbol arrays L1 to L4 and L8. , the display control device 114 is configured to execute processing so as to update the display contents for all of the pattern arrays L1 to L4 and L8. Specifically, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 248) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is executed for all of the pattern arrays L1 to L4 and L8 based on the received display variation pattern command. . Then, in the drawing process (see FIG. 257), a drawing list is created for the pattern string corresponding to the currently set display area, and the drawing list and drawing object buffer information are transmitted to the image controller. is doing. As a result, all the display information of the pattern arrays L1 to L4 and L8 can be updated in correspondence with the time data, and the display processing can be executed only for the pattern arrays to be displayed. In this case, a flag (storage area) is provided for determining the currently set display area type among the display area types stored in the display area storage area 234a2a, and determination is performed by referring to the flag. good.

Next, referring to FIG. 353(c), the contents of the pattern arrangement storage area 234a2b will be described. FIG. 353(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the pattern arrangement storage area 234a2b. The pattern array storage area 234a2b stores a normal pattern array (horizontal scrolling) used when the normal variation is executed and a vertical scrolling pattern array used when the second ready-to-win state is executed. It is The symbol array for vertical scrolling includes a symbol array (1 for vertical scrolling) corresponding to symbol row L5 (see FIG. 351(a)) and a symbol array (1 for vertical scrolling) corresponding to symbol row L6 (see FIG. 351(a)). Vertical scrolling 2) and a symbol array (vertical scrolling 3) corresponding to the symbol row L7 (see FIG. 351(a)) are stored, and the second ready-to-win mode is executed for each of them. A symbol array corresponding to the third symbol stopped and displayed is stored in .

Specifically, as the pattern arrangement for vertical scrolling 1 (symbol row L5), the third pattern with the number 1 attached when the second ready-to-win mode is executed is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the out-of-reach display mode. (See FIG. 334) "symbol array 1" set when the second ready-to-win state is executed, the third pattern with the number 9 is stopped (temporary stop) display in the out-of-reach display state Nine types are set up to "symbol arrangement 9" which is set when it is set. In this example, the display mode (first temporary stop mode) of the third symbol that is stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed when the second ready-to-win mode is executed is set to a predetermined stop mode. Therefore, the number of pattern arrangement types for vertical scrolling stored in the pattern arrangement storage area 234a2b can be reduced.

Similarly to the pattern arrays 1 to 9 stored corresponding to the vertical scroll 1 (symbol row L5), vertical scroll 2 (symbol row L6) and vertical scroll 3 (symbol row L7) are also provided. Nine kinds of pattern arrangement are set. In addition, when the third pattern stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed at the center position of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 is vertically variably displayed (vertical scroll display), the first temporary stop mode is 2. This is a case where the third symbol of the kind is displayed as a stop (temporary stop) in a combination indicating a disengagement in a state where the third symbol is in a ready-to-win state (so-called double reach state).

Thus, by pre-storing the pattern arrangement used in the second ready-to-win mode (the ready-to-reach mode executed after changing the direction of fluctuation (scrolling direction) of the third symbol), the second ready-to-reach mode is delayed. can be run without Further, by predetermining the combination of the third symbols to be stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed in the first temporary stop mode, it is possible to reduce the types of symbol arrays used when executing the second ready-to-win mode. .

<Regarding control processing executed by the display control device in another example of the first modification of the fourth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 354, pointer update processing 2 executed in another example of the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. This pointer update process 2 differs from the above-described pointer update process (S7205 in FIG. 254) in that a process for changing the display area displayed in the main display area Dm is added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing the contents of pointer update processing 2 (S7205). When the pointer update process 2 (S7205) is executed, first, the same process as S7401 of the above-described pointer update process (see FIG. 254) is executed, and then it is determined whether it is time to change the display area. (S7431). In the process of S7431, if it is determined that it is time to change the display area (S7431: Yes), then the display area corresponding to the command is set by referring to the display area storage area 234a2a (S7432). , the determined display area data is overwritten in the display data table buffer (S7433). Then, the process proceeds to S7402.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7431 that it is not the timing to change the display area, the process skips S7432 and S7433 and proceeds to S7402. In S7402 to S7406, the same processing as S7402 to S7406 of the above pointer update processing (see FIG. 254) is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, in another example of the first modified example of the fourth control example, as the composite ready-to-win effect, the normal symbol variation is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first temporary stop display mode, and then a new symbol arrangement is displayed. is displayed, the first ready-to-win mode is made executable, and the first ready-to-win mode is temporarily stopped and displayed in the second temporary stop display mode, and then the direction of symbol fluctuation is changed. 2 reach modes are configured to be executable. As a result, a ready-to-win effect with a high effect can be executed for the player. It should be noted that in this example, there are two directions of variation of the symbol row, that is, the horizontal direction and the vertical direction, but the symbol row may be varied in other directions.

In addition, since it is configured to temporarily stop in the temporary stop display mode multiple times during the composite ready-to-win effect, by matching the timing of temporary stop with the stop display timing of the deviation variation pattern, when the deviation variation pattern is executed It is possible to execute the same effect (at least part of the display data can be diverted) in the case where the compound reach effect is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the amount of display data used for the effect can be reduced. In addition, even when the losing variation pattern is executed, the player can be made to think that the complex ready-to-win effect is being executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, since the symbol row data used when executing the first ready-to-win mode and the symbol row data used when performing the second ready-to-win mode are stored and set to be different, Various effects can be executed by combining the data. In addition, the first reach mode is set so that the combination of symbols displayed when the first reach mode is stopped (temporarily stopped) matches the combination of symbols set in the symbol row used in the second reach mode. Since the stop (temporary stop) display mode of the ready-to-win mode is set, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when switching the performance mode from the first ready-to-reach mode to the second ready-to-reach mode.

In addition, while the display control of each symbol row (L1 to L4, L8) executed in the first reach mode is being executed, the display control of each symbol row (L5 to L7) executed in the second reach mode may be executed in advance. In this case, a layer in which the display of the first ready-to-reach mode is executed and a layer in which the display of the second ready-to-reach mode is executed are provided separately, and in a state in which the first ready-to-reach mode is being executed, the game is displayed in the second ready-to-reach mode. The display control of each layer may be switched at the timing when the second ready-to-win mode is executed, so that the player can visually recognize the second ready-to-win mode.

In each control example described above, the case of using a gaming machine in which the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) are executed at the same time was described. The symbol display device 81 may be configured to simultaneously display the variation of the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) and the normal symbol, and the technique described in each control example described above may be applied. In this case, as a result of the lottery of the normal symbols, the benefit to be executed when winning is set to be the same as the benefit to be executed when the special symbol is winning, so that more effect can be achieved. can.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Right Rotation Unit 600 as an Example>
a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member displaceably formed with respect to the base member, a transmission member for transmitting driving force to the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the transmission member In the game machine, the transmission member includes a drive pin, the first displacement member and the second displacement member include a first groove and a second groove, respectively, and the second displacement member includes a first groove and a second groove. The first groove includes an action section that receives action from the drive pin and a non-interference section that does not interfere with the drive pin. The second groove includes at least an action section that receives action from the drive pin. The first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged on the base member in a posture in which the groove and the second groove are superimposed and the drive pin is inserted through the first groove and the second groove. Gaming machine A1 to play.

Here, in a game machine such as pachinko, a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and a driving force applied to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. A performance member having a transmission member that transmits and a driving means that imparts a driving force to the transmission member is provided, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are provided via the first groove and the second groove provided in the transmission member. There is a gaming machine in which a member is connected to a transmission member (for example, JP-A-2009-100994).

According to this game machine, when the driving force of the driving means is applied to the transmitting member, the effecting member transmits the driving force from the transmitting member to the first displacement member and the second displacement member through the first groove and the second groove. is transmitted, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced with respect to the base member.

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the first groove and the second groove are arranged side by side, the space required for arranging the first groove and the second groove is large, and the front view of the effect member is correspondingly large. There was a problem that the outer shape in the case became large. In particular, in recent years, there has been a demand for larger liquid crystal display devices, and an increase in the outer shape of the effect member when viewed from the front hinders an increase in the size of the liquid crystal display device, which is not preferable.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged on the base member in a posture in which the first groove and the second groove are superimposed (superimposed). Compared to the conventional product in which the grooves and the second grooves are arranged side by side, the space required for disposing the first grooves and the second grooves can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the outer size in a front view. In this case, even if the liquid crystal display device is required to be enlarged, the space in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) is relatively large. With the structure in which the two layers are superimposed, it is possible to reduce the size of the outer shape in a front view by using a relatively large space in the thickness direction, which is particularly effective for increasing the size of the liquid crystal display device.

Further, according to the gaming machine A1, since the drive pin is inserted through the superimposed first groove and the second groove, the driving force from the transmission member is transferred to the first displacement member and the second displacement member by one drive pin. , making it unnecessary to provide a drive pin for each of the first groove and the second groove. That is, the parts can be used in common, and the part cost can be reduced accordingly.

According to the game machine A1, when the driving force of the driving means is applied to the transmission member, the driving force is transmitted from the transmission member to the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member A member is displaced relative to the base member. In this case, in a state in which the action sections of the first groove and the second groove are acted upon by the transmission member, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are respectively displaced, while only the action section of the second groove is affected by the transmission member. In a state of being acted upon (the transmission member does not interfere with the first groove due to the non-interference section), the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced.

In the gaming machine A1, the second displacement member is connected to a driven member displaceably disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member and formed with the second groove, and to a driven portion thereof. A gaming machine A2 comprising a connecting displacement member displaceably disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member and having a decorative portion.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the second displacement member includes a driven member displaceably disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member and having the second groove formed thereon; A link structure can be formed by the driven member and the connecting displacement member, since the connecting displacement member is connected to the driven portion and displaceably disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member. Accordingly, when the driven member is driven by the transmission member, the decorative portion of the connecting displacement member can be largely displaced relative to the first displacement member.

A gaming machine A3 in the gaming machine A2, wherein the second displacement member can form a posture in which the driven member and the connecting displacement member are superimposed.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, the second displacement member can form a posture in which the driven member and the connecting displacement member are overlapped. It is possible to reduce the size of the outer shape of the displacement member when viewed from the front.

In the game machine A3, the first displacement member is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and an overhanging position, and the second displacement member has a posture in which the driven member and the connecting displacement member are superimposed. A gaming machine A4, characterized in that it is formed so as to be arranged on the back surface of the first displacement member in the retracted position.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3, the second displacement member can be arranged behind the first displacement member in the retracted position in a posture in which the driven member and the connecting displacement member are superimposed. Since it is formed, it is possible to reduce the outer size of the first displacement member and the second displacement member arranged at the retracted position in a front view by the amount corresponding to the overlap.

In any one of the game machines A2 to A4, the connecting displacement member has an overhanging portion formed so as to overhang in the opposite direction to the decorative portion across a portion displaceably arranged to the first displacement member. A gaming machine A5 characterized by:

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A2 to A4, the connecting displacement member protrudes to the side opposite to the decorative portion across the portion displaceably arranged to the first displacement member. With the overhang formed, the overhang can act as a weight.

For example, when the driven portion is driven to lift the decorative portion of the connecting displacement member upward, the weight of the overhanging portion is used because the overhanging portion is formed on the side opposite to the decorative portion. , the decorative portion can be easily lifted upward. Therefore, the overhanging portion can be lifted quickly and the driving force required for lifting can be suppressed. In addition, after the decorative portion is lifted, the weight of the decorative portion and the weight of the overhanging portion can be hung together. The lifted posture can be stabilized and the driving force required to maintain the posture can be suppressed.

A game machine A6 in the game machine A5, wherein the overhanging portion of the connecting displacement member is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the protruding portion of the connecting displacement member is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member. When displacing the displacement member, the projecting portion is brought into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member, so that rattling of the connecting displacement member (decorative portion) can be suppressed. In addition, the protruding portion serving as a weight can also play a role of suppressing rattling by coming into contact with the first displacement member, thereby simplifying the structure and reducing the parts cost accordingly. can be achieved.

A game machine A7, wherein in the game machine A6, the projecting portion of the connecting displacement member is formed in a substantially box shape.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of the game machine A6, the protruding portion of the connecting displacement member is formed in a substantially box shape, so that the weight and rigidity can be ensured while reducing the outer shape. can. Therefore, in a state where the projecting portion is hidden behind the back surface of the first displacement member (that is, in a state in which it is not visible from the front), the connecting displacement member can be displaced, and the function as a weight and the back surface of the first displacement member It is possible to reliably exhibit the function of suppressing rattling by coming into contact with.

In any one of game machines A1 to A7, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and a projecting portion that projects from an outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion. The first displacement member has a contact portion formed to be able to come into contact with the protrusion, the bearing portion pivotally supports the first displacement member in a raised state from the base member, and the protrusion is provided with the first displacement member. A game machine A8 characterized in that the relative rotation of the first displacement member with respect to the base member is restricted within a predetermined range by the abutment of the abutment portion.

According to game machine A8, in the game machine according to any one of game machines A1 to A7, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and the bearing portion supports the first displacement member. Since it is pivotally supported in a raised state from the base member, such raising makes it possible to form a space for disposing the second displacement member between the base member and the first displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to dispose the first displacement member and the second displacement member in an overlapping posture.

In this case, according to the game machine A8, the base member further includes a projecting portion formed to project from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion, and the first displacement member is a contact portion formed to be able to contact the projecting portion. and the contact portion is brought into contact with the projection portion, whereby the relative rotation of the first displacement member with respect to the base member can be restricted within a predetermined range. That is, in order to dispose the first displacement member and the second displacement member in a superimposed posture, the bearing portion that raises the first displacement member from the base member has a relatively high rigidity, and the outer peripheral side of the bearing portion has a A projecting portion is provided from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion where the dead space is formed, and a contact portion is brought into contact with the projecting portion, thereby preventing relative rotation of the first displacement member with respect to the base member. The rigidity of the portion to be regulated can be ensured to improve the durability, and the dead space can be effectively used, so that the size can be reduced accordingly.

A game machine A9 in the game machine A8, wherein the projecting portion of the base member is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A8, the projecting portion of the base member is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member, so when the first displacement member is displaced, , the projecting portion of the base member is brought into contact with the rear surface of the first displacement member, thereby suppressing rattling of the first displacement member. In addition, the projecting portion, which serves to restrict the relative displacement of the first displacement member with respect to the base member, can also serve to suppress rattling by coming into contact with the first displacement member, thereby simplifying the structure. Therefore, the part cost can be reduced accordingly.

In particular, in the game machine A9 subordinate to the game machine A2, the second displacement member (the driven member and the connecting displacement member) is disposed on the first displacement member, so the first displacement member is the weight of the second displacement member. It is necessary to rotate with respect to the base member while supporting the base member, and rattling is likely to occur. Therefore, it is effective to have the protruding portion of the base member contact the rear surface of the first displacement member to suppress rattling of the first displacement member.

In the game machine A9, the first displacement member has its longitudinal one end side pivotally supported by the bearing portion of the base member, and the protrusion of the base member is located at the edge portion of the longitudinal direction one end side of the first displacement member. A gaming machine A10 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to come into contact with its back surface.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effects of the game machine A9, one longitudinal end of the first displacement member is pivotally supported by the bearing portion of the base member, and the projecting portion of the base member corresponds to one longitudinal end of the first displacement member. Since it is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface of the side edge, when the first displacement member tilts due to its own weight, the projection can be arranged at a position where the tilting can be suppressed. As a result, rattling of the first displacement member can be effectively suppressed.

A game machine A11 in the game machine A10, wherein the projecting portion projects from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion and is connected to the front surface of the base member.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A10, the protrusion protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing and is connected to the front surface of the base member, so that the rigidity of the protrusion can be increased. can be done. In particular, when the first displacement member is tilted by its own weight, it is possible to increase the rigidity in the direction in which the tilting is supported (that is, the direction in which the projecting portion is pressed against the front surface of the base member). Sticking can be effectively suppressed.

A game machine A12 according to any one of the game machines A2 to A11, wherein the base member has an inclined surface formed by chamfering the ridgeline portions of the side surface and the front surface thereof.

According to the game machine A12, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A2 to A11, the base member has an inclined surface formed by chamfering the ridgeline portions of the side surface and the front surface. It is possible to prevent the second displacement member from being locked by the side surface of the base member and becoming unable to be displaced. In this case, in the present invention, the connecting displacement member of the second displacement member is displaceably arranged in a cantilevered state on the back surface of the first displacement member, so that the first displacement member and/or the second displacement member When displacing, the connecting displacement member of the second displacement member tends to swing in the direction of approaching and separating from the base member, and the connecting displacement member tends to be locked to the side surface of the base member. Therefore, the configuration in which the base member is provided with the inclined surface is particularly effective.

In the gaming machine A12, the second displacement member is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the base member protrudes from the front surface thereof and extends along the displacement direction of the second displacement member. A gaming machine A13 characterized by having a ridge.

According to the game machine A13, in addition to the effects of the game machine A12, the base member has a ridge projecting from the front surface and extending along the displacement direction of the second displacement member. can be brought into contact with the second displacement member. Therefore, compared to the case where the entire front surface of the base member comes into surface contact with the second displacement member, the contact area can be reduced and the sliding resistance can be suppressed.

Here, since the second displacement member is made of a light-transmitting material, when displacing the connection displacement member and making it visible to the player, the second displacement member transmits the irradiated light to produce an effect. can increase In this case, when the second displacement member is displaced, if the entire front surface of the base member comes into contact with the connecting displacement member, the friction between the front surface of the base member and the front surface of the base member causes clouding of the connecting displacement member. The performance effect of transmitting light of the connecting displacement member is impaired. On the other hand, according to the game machine A12, a ridge is formed on the front surface of the base member, and only the tip of the ridge can be brought into contact with the connection displacement member, so that the connection displacement member rubs. can be partially cloudy due to As a result, it is possible to exhibit a performance effect by allowing light to pass through the connecting displacement portion.

In the gaming machine A13, the second displacement member includes a connection pin that connects the driven member and the connection displacement member and is formed of a metal material, and the ridge of the base member is configured so that the second displacement member A gaming machine A14, characterized in that it extends along the trajectory of the connecting pin when it is displaced.

According to the game machine A14, in addition to the effects of the game machine A13, the second displacement member includes a connection pin that connects the driven member and the connection displacement member and is formed of a metal material, is extended along the trajectory of the connecting pin when the second displacement member is displaced, so that the connecting pin can be brought into contact with the projecting tip of the ridge. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the formation of cloudiness on the portion of the light-transmissive material of the connecting displacement member due to friction with the ridges, and to exhibit the presentation effect by allowing light to pass through the connecting displacement member. can be done.

In the game machine A13 or A14, a gear interposed between the drive means and the transmission member is provided, and the base member includes a gear receiving portion for supporting the gear in its internal space, and A gaming machine A15, wherein a gear receiving portion projects from the front surface of the base member, and the ridge extends to a position corresponding to the gear receiving portion.

According to the game machine A15, in addition to the effects of the game machine A13 or A14, the ridge is extended to a position corresponding to the gear receiving portion projecting from the front surface of the base member, so that the second displacement member It is possible to prevent the member from being locked by the gear receiving portion projecting from the side surface of the member and becoming unable to be displaced or hindered from displacing it. In other words, by providing a ridge on the front surface of the base member and extending the ridge to a position corresponding to the gear receiving portion, the gear receiving portion can be projected from the front surface of the base member. can be done. As a result, the gear can be rotatably accommodated in the inner space of the base member while reducing the thickness dimension of the base member. As a result, for example, it is not necessary to fix the drive shaft of the drive means to the gear (that is, the gear is held in the gear receiving portion of the base member, so the drive shaft of the drive means only needs to be inserted through the gear). ), the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A15, the first displacement member and the transmission member are rotatably supported by the base member, and the first displacement member is positioned in front of the base member at a retracted position. It is formed so as to be displaceable between an overhanging position that overhangs in a direction away from the base member, and the rotating shaft of the first displacement member is disposed closer to the overhanging position than the rotating shaft of the transmission member. A gaming machine A16 characterized by:

According to the game machine A16, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A15, the first displacement member and the transmission member are rotatably supported by the base member, and the rotation shaft of the first displacement member is connected to the transmission member. , the area of the first displacement member protruding to the protruding position can be increased, while the first displacement member can be positioned at any position between the retracted position and the protruding position. Even in the case of , the transmission member can be arranged on the back surface of the first displacement member to make it easier to make it invisible to the player.

In the game machine A16, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and the transmission member is arranged to rotate the second displacement member when the second displacement member is extended to the extended position. A gaming machine A17 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the bearing.

According to the game machine A17, in addition to the effects of the game machine A16, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and the transmission member has the second displacement member that extends to the projecting position. In this case, the second displacement member is formed so as to abut against the bearing portion of the base member, so that the relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member can be restricted within a predetermined range. That is, the transmission member, which serves to transmit the driving force of the driving means, can also serve as a stopper that restricts the relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member within a predetermined range. It is possible to simplify and reduce the part cost accordingly.

Further, the bearing portion is a portion for raising the first displacement member from the base member and arranging the first displacement member and the second displacement member in an overlapping posture, and has relatively high rigidity. Since a dead space is formed on the outer peripheral side of the transmission member, the rigidity of the portion that restricts the relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member can be ensured by adopting a configuration in which the transmission member abuts against the bearing portion. As a result, durability can be improved, dead space can be effectively used, and the size can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine A17, the transmission member is provided with a recess corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing, and when the second displacement member projects to the projecting position, the bearing is received in the recess. A gaming machine A18 characterized in that it is formed in such a way that:

According to the game machine A18, in addition to the effects of the game machine A17, the transmission member is provided with a concave portion corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion, and when the second displacement member is overhanging to the overhanging position, the bearing Since the portion is formed receivably in the recess, the movable range of the transmission member can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the displacement amounts of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be secured. In other words, the position of the rotating shaft of the transmission member can be brought close to the bearing portion while ensuring the movable range of the transmission member. It is possible to easily form a state in which the transmission member is hidden behind the first displacement member (that is, a state in which it is not visible from the front) while being displaced between the position and the extended position.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A18, when the transmission member is driven in the forward direction, the action sections of the first groove and the second groove are acted upon by the transmission member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are operated. After each displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the action section of the second groove is acted upon by the transmission member, and the non-interference section causes the transmission member to be non-interfering with the first groove, A game machine A19 characterized in that the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced in a second direction, and the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions. .

According to the game machine A19, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 to A18, when the transmission member is driven in the forward direction, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are respectively displaced in the first direction, and then the second One displacement member is stopped and a second displacement member is displaced in a second direction. In this case, since the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A18, the inertia accompanying the stop of the first displacement member displaced in the first direction The force can be canceled by the inertia force when the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the parts due to the action of the inertial force and improve the durability.

In the game machine A19, one or more gears are provided between the driving means and the transmission member to transmit the driving force, and the weight of the first displacement member is made heavier than the weight of the second displacement member. A gaming machine A20 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A20, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A19, the weight of the first displacement member is made heavier than the weight of the second displacement member. The heavy first displacement member can be stopped first, and the light weight second displacement member can be stopped last. Thereby, the load on the gear can be reduced.

That is, from a state in which the transmission member is driven in the forward direction and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are each displaced in the first direction, the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction. Since the transition to the state of being displaced in the direction is performed by the transmission member moving from the transmission section of the first groove to the non-interference section, the rotation of the driving means and the gear is continued. Therefore, even if the first displacement member is stopped, no load is applied to the gear. On the other hand, the transition from the state in which the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction to the state in which the second displacement member is also stopped depends on the rotation of the driving means and the gear. In this case, the only member that is stopped is the light weight second displacement member, so the load on the gear can be reduced accordingly.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A20, a third displacement member disposed displaceably on the first displacement member is provided, and the third displacement member is displaced under the action of the second displacement member. A gaming machine A21 characterized by:

According to the game machine A21, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A20, the third displacement member is displaceably disposed on the first displacement member, and the third displacement member is the second displacement member. Since it is displaced by the action of the member, the third displacement member can also be displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member.

In the gaming machine A21, one of the second displacement member and the third displacement member includes a drive pin, and the other of the second displacement member and the third displacement member includes a third groove, and the third groove is , a game machine A22 comprising an action section receiving action from the drive pin and a non-interference section in which the drive pin does not interfere.

According to the game machine A22, in addition to the effects of the game machine A21, one of the second displacement member and the third displacement member has a drive pin, and the other of the second displacement member and the third displacement member has the third groove. Since the third groove has an action section that receives action from the drive pin and a non-interference section that does not interfere with the drive pin, both the second displacement member and the third displacement member are displaced with respect to the first displacement member. and a mode in which only one of the second displacement member and the third displacement member is displaced with respect to the first displacement member.

A gaming machine A23 characterized in that in the gaming machine A21, the second displacement member is displaceably disposed on the third displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A23, since the second displacement member is displaceably disposed on the third displacement member, when the third displacement member is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member, The relative displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member can be superimposed on the relative displacement of the third displacement member with respect to the first displacement member, and as a result, the first It is possible to increase the amount of relative displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the displacement member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention, Taking the Counterclockwise Rotation Unit 700 as an Example>
a base member, a first displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the first displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member and a connecting member connecting between the base member and the second displacement member, wherein the second displacement member is displaced along with the displacement of the first displacement member. In a game machine that is relatively displaced with respect to a first displacement member, the connection member includes a first connection member having one end connected to the base member and the other end connected to the other end of the first connection member. and a connection second member having one end connected to the second displacement member, and a connection portion between the other ends of the connection first member and the connection second member is displaceably connected to the first displacement member A gaming machine B1 characterized by:

Here, in a game machine such as pachinko, a base member, a first displacement member arranged displaceably on the base member, a second displacement member arranged displaceably on the first displacement member, There is a game machine provided with driving means for generating a driving force for displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and a connecting member for connecting between the base member and the second displacement member (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2013). -17886).

According to this game machine, when the first displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the connection member acts between the base member and the second displacement member, thereby displacing the first displacement member. , the second displacement member can be displaced relative to the first displacement member. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the first displacement member is displaced in a direction away from the base member, the connection member connecting between the base member and the second displacement member is exposed. There is a problem that it becomes visible to people, and the appearance is spoiled.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the connecting member includes a connecting first member having one end connected to the base member, and the other end connected to the other end of the connecting first member and to the second displacement member. and a connecting second member to which one end is connected, and the connecting portion between the other ends of the connecting first member and the connecting second member is connected to the first displacement member so as to be displaceable, so that the first displacement member is the base. Even when displaced in a direction away from the member, the connecting member (the first connecting member and the second connecting member) can be arranged on the back surface of the first displacement member to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connection member from being exposed and the appearance from being spoiled.

In the gaming machine B1, the first displacement member is rotatably arranged on the base member, and the second connecting member of the connecting member is slidably arranged on the first displacement member. Gaming machine B2.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, the first displacement member is rotatably disposed on the base member, and the second member connected to the connection member is slidably displaceable to the first displacement member. Therefore, when the first displacement member is rotated with respect to the base member, when the amount of rotation is large (that is, the amount of displacement of the first connecting member and the second connecting member needs to be increased) Even so, it is possible to avoid being viewed by the player by maintaining the state in which the second connecting member of the connecting member is disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second connecting member of the connecting member from being exposed and impairing the appearance.

Further, even when an electrical connection line is wired to the first displacement member, the second connection member of the connection member is slidably disposed on the first displacement member so that the connection line and the second connection member interference with can be easily suppressed. Therefore, since it is not necessary to secure a large space for wiring the connection lines in order to avoid interference, it is possible to reduce the size of the front view shape of the first displacement member accordingly.

In the game machine B1 or B2, a driving body driven by the driving means is provided, the driving body is connected to the first connecting member of the connecting member, and the driving force of the driving means is transferred from the driving body to the first connecting member. A game machine B3 characterized in that the first displacement member and the second displacement member are driven by being transmitted to the members.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the driving body driven by the driving means is provided, the driving body is connected to the connecting first member of the connecting member, and the driving force of the driving means is Since the first displacement member and the second displacement member are driven by transmission from the driving body to the connecting first member, it is possible to reduce the size of the front view shape of the first displacement member.

That is, the connection member is positioned between the first displacement member and the base member because the connection portion between the other ends of the first connection member and the second connection member is displaceably connected to the first displacement member. When the driving body is connected to the first displacement member, the driving body and the connecting member may interfere with each other. Therefore, it is necessary to connect the driving body to the first displacement member at a position that does not overlap the displacement trajectory of the connecting member. There is Therefore, the front view shape of the first displacement member needs to have a size that includes the displacement trajectory of the connection member and the connection portion to which the driving body is connected. do. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B3, it is not necessary to avoid interference between the driving body and the connecting member, and the front view shape of the first displacement member only needs to have a size corresponding to the displacement trajectory of the connecting member. Since it is not necessary to include a connecting portion to which the driving body is connected, the front view shape of the first displacement member can be reduced accordingly.

In game machines B1 to B3, the first displacement member is rotatably disposed on the base member and is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position, and the base member serves as a base-side engagement member. and a displacement-side engaging member formed to be engageable with the base-side engaging member in a state in which the first displacement member is displaced to the retracted position, of the first displacement member or the second displacement member. A game machine B4 characterized in that one side is provided with the game machine B4.

Here, in the above-described conventional game machine, the connecting member connects the base member and the second displacement member in an erected state, and in the retracted position, at a position relatively distant from the rotation axis of the first displacement member, A connecting member connects the base member and the second displacement member. Therefore, even if the first displacement member tries to tilt the portion on the opposite side of the rotation shaft (that is, the second displacement member side) in the direction away from the base member, there will be a gap between the base member and the second displacement member. The tilting can be suppressed by the action of the intervening connecting member.

However, in the game machine B4, since the connection portion between the other ends of the connection first member and the connection second member is connected to the first displacement member so as to be displaceable, the first displacement member is displaceable at the retracted position. With the rotating shaft as the base end, the portion opposite to the rotating shaft (that is, the second displacement member side) is the free end. Therefore, due to its own weight and the weight of the second displacement member, the portion of the first displacement member opposite to the rotating shaft (second displacement member side) tends to tilt away from the base member.

In this case, according to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machines B1 to B3, the base member includes the base-side engagement member, and one of the first displacement member and the second displacement member is the displacement-side engagement member. When the first displacement member is displaced to the retracted position, the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member are formed so as to be able to engage with each other. It is possible to suppress tilting of the portion (on the side of the second displacement member) in a direction away from the base member.

A gaming machine B5, wherein the second displacement member comprises the displacement side engaging member in the gaming machine B4.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4, since the second displacement member includes the displacement side engagement member, the engagement position between the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member is set to the first position. It can be located relatively far from the axis of rotation of the displacement member. Therefore, by utilizing the engagement of the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member, the portion of the first displacement member opposite to the rotation shaft (second displacement member side) tilts in a direction away from the base member. can be effectively suppressed.

In the gaming machine B5, the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member are formed by bending a base portion erected from the front surface of the base member or the rear surface of the second displacement member and bending the tip of the base portion. and a bent portion having an inner surface serving as an engaging surface, and the engaging surfaces of the bent portions are engaged with each other by displacing the first displacement member from the extended position to the retracted position. , the engagement surface of the bent portion of the base-side engaging member is inclined in a direction away from the front surface of the base member toward the engaging tip side thereof, or (and) engagement of the bent portion of the displacement-side engaging member. A gaming machine B6 characterized in that the surface is inclined in a direction away from the back surface of the second displacement member toward the engaging tip side thereof.

Here, when the second displacement member includes a displacement-side engagement member as in the game machine B5, the engagement position between the base-side engagement member and the displacement-side engagement member is shifted from the rotation axis of the first displacement member. Since the positions are relatively distant, it becomes difficult to engage the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member due to the shaking of the first displacement member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B6, the engagement surface of the bent portion of the base-side engagement member is inclined in a direction away from the front surface of the base member toward the engagement tip side, or (and) displacement-side engagement. The engagement surface of the bent portion of the member is inclined in a direction away from the rear surface of the second displacement member toward the engaging tip side, that is, the engagement surface of the bent portion and the front surface of the base member or the rear surface of the second displacement member. Since the distance between is widened toward the engagement tip side, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, even if the first displacement member shakes, the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member can be easily engaged.

Furthermore, according to the gaming machine B6, the engagement surface of the bent portion of at least one of the base-side engagement member and the displacement-side engagement member is inclined as described above, so that the first displacement member moves toward the retracted position. When displaced by the second displacement member, the second displacement member can be brought closer to the base member along with the inclination of the engagement surface of the bent portion. As a result, at the retracted position, the projection dimension of the second displacement member from the base member can be suppressed, and rattling of the second displacement member can be absorbed to maintain its posture.

In the gaming machine B5 or B6, the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member comprise a base erected from the front surface of the base member or the rear surface of the second displacement member, and a tip of the base that is bent to bent portions having inner surfaces serving as engagement surfaces, and the engagement surfaces of the bent portions are engaged with each other by displacing the first displacement member from the extended position to the retracted position. A gaming machine B7 characterized in that a receiving portion for receiving a bent portion of an opponent is formed on the front surface of the base member and the back surface of the second displacement member.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5 or B6, the front surface of the base member and the rear surface of the second displacement member are formed with a receiving portion for receiving the bent portion of the opponent. In a state in which the displacement member is arranged at the retracted position (a state in which the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member are engaged), the bent portion is received by the receiving portion and approaches the base member of the second displacement member. Directional displacement can be allowed. Therefore, the standing dimensions of the base portions of the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member are increased to make it easier to engage the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member, while at the retracted position, the second Damage due to collision can be prevented by allowing displacement of the displacement member in a direction approaching the base member.

In any one of game machines B3 to B7, the displacement-side engagement member is engaged with the first displacement member in a state where the first displacement member is arranged at the extended position. Gaming machine B8.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B3 to B7, in the state where the first displacement member is arranged at the projecting position, the displacement side engaging member is the first displacement member. Engaged, that is, the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be coupled via the displacement-side engaging member. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress rattling of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member at the overhang position. At the retracted position, the displacement-side engaging member engages with the base-side engaging member to couple the second displacement member to the base member. Since the member can also play the role of connecting the member to the first displacement member, the structure can be simplified and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B8, an interposing means interposed between the second displacement member and one end of the second connection member is provided, and the interposing means is adapted to the base member. Different modes of action occurring between the second displacement member and one end of the second connecting member depending on whether the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction or in the second direction. A game machine B9 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the interposing means interposed between the second displacement member and the one end of the connecting second member, and the interposing means is the action that occurs between the second displacement member and one end of the second connecting member when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction and in the second direction with respect to the base member. Since the modes are different, depending on whether the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction or in the second direction with respect to the base member, the mode of displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member is changed. can be different.

In the gaming machine B9, the interposing means includes a guided portion provided at one end of the first displacement member or the second connection member, and one end of the first displacement member or the second connection member. a guide portion disposed on the other side for guiding the guided portion, and when the first displacement member is displaced in a first direction and in a second direction with respect to the base member, A gaming machine B10 characterized in that by guiding the guide portion along different paths of the guide portion, the mode of action occurring between the second displacement member and the one end of the second connecting member is differentiated.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects of the game machine B9, the intervening means displaces the first displacement member in the first direction and in the second direction with respect to the base member. By guiding the guiding portion along different paths of the guided portion, the mode of action generated between the second displacement member and the one end of the second connecting member is made different. It is possible to easily change the mode of displacement of the second displacement member with respect to one displacement member. That is, the degree of freedom in designing can be increased.

In the gaming machine B9, the interposition means acts between the second displacement member and one end of the second connecting member when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction with respect to the base member. is generated, and when the first displacement member is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member, the action between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member is released. Gaming machine B11.

According to the game machine B11, when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction with respect to the base member, the interposition means causes the action between the second displacement member and one end of the second connecting member. On the other hand, when the first displacement member is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member, the action between the second displacement member and the one end of the connecting second member is released. It is possible to make the mode of displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member largely different between when the member is displaced in the first direction and when the member is displaced in the second direction.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Center Frame 86 as an Example>
Formed so as to be displaceable between a game board having a game area on the front and an opening formed in the center, a retracted position on the back side of the game board, and an overhanging position visible through the opening. and a displacement member, comprising a center frame made of a light-transmissive material and fitted in the opening of the game board, the center frame forming part of the game area. A gaming machine C1 characterized by comprising an area forming section.

Here, in a game machine such as pachinko, a game board having a game area on the front and an opening formed in the center, a retracted position on the back side of the game board, and a tension that can be visually recognized through the opening. There is a game machine provided with a displacement member formed to be displaceable between out positions (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-176580).

According to this game machine, the opening of the game board is made larger than the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device to secure an area in which the displacement member can be visually recognized. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since it is necessary to secure an area for the balls to flow down in the game area, there is a limit to enlarging the opening of the game board, and the area where the displacement member can be visually recognized is limited. There was a problem that it could not be sufficiently secured.

On the other hand, the game machine C1 is provided with a center frame made of a light-transmitting material and fitted inside the opening of the game board, and the center frame is provided with an area forming portion that forms a part of the game area. Therefore, the displacement member can be visually recognized through the region forming portion. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently secure an area in which the displacement member can be visually recognized while securing an area for the ball to flow down in the game area.

In the game machine C1, the area forming part of the center frame forms a continuous area from the inner edge of the opening of the game board to the outer edge of the game area as part of the game area. C2.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the area forming part of the center frame forms a continuous area from the inner edge of the opening of the game board to the outer edge of the game area as part of the game area. Therefore, it is possible to secure a maximum area in which the displacement member can be visually recognized.

In the gaming machine C2, the gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the area forming portion of the center frame is set to have a width allowing only one game ball to pass through.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2, the area forming portion of the center frame is set to a width that allows only one game ball to pass through, so that the opening of the game board ( That is, it is possible to ensure the maximum possible area in which the displacement member can be visually recognized (without passing through the center frame).

In the game machine C2 or C3, the game machine C4 is characterized in that the region forming portion of the center frame comprises a downstream wall portion erected on the downstream side of the region and formed integrally with the center frame.

Here, if the center frame is made of a resin material and nails cannot be implanted, the speed of the game ball flowing down increases, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the falling game ball.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C4, since the area forming part of the center frame is provided with a downstream wall part erected on the downstream side of the area, the game ball flowing down the area forming part hits the downstream wall part. can be brought into contact. Therefore, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2 or C3, the falling speed of the game ball can be reduced to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball. In addition, since the downstream wall portion is integrally formed with the center frame, it can be easily molded by molding, and the fastening and fixing of separate parts can be eliminated, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly. .

In the gaming machine C4, the region forming portion of the center frame has a side wall portion which is erected in the region and defines a passage through which game balls flow down and which is integrally formed with the center frame. A gaming machine C5 characterized by being connected to a wall.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4, the area forming part of the center frame is provided with a side wall part which is erected in the area and defines a passage through which game balls flow down, and the side wall part is located downstream. Since it is connected to the wall, it is possible to increase the rigidity of the downstream wall that receives the game ball flowing down. This can prevent the downstream wall from being damaged. In addition, since the connecting wall portion is integrally formed with the center frame, it can be easily formed by molding, and the fastening and fixing of separate parts can be eliminated, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly. . Furthermore, since the side wall portion which plays the role of partitioning the passage through which the game balls flow down can also play the role of increasing the rigidity of the downstream wall portion, the structure can be simplified and the part cost can be reduced accordingly. be able to.

In the game machine C5, an inner rail is provided to guide a game ball launched from the front surface of the game board to the game area, and the side wall portion is arranged in parallel with the inner rail. Machine C6.

Here, in the conventional game machine, the mode in which the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the inner rail after colliding with the nail and bouncing, and the speed is relatively slow, and this causes damage to the inner rail. There was no problem such as inviting On the other hand, in the present invention, in order to maximize the area where the displacement member can be visually recognized, the width of the area forming portion forming a part of the game area is narrow (for example, only one game ball is allowed to pass through). width). That is, the width of the game area is narrowed by the area forming section. Therefore, on the upstream side of the area forming section, it is necessary to guide the game balls flowing down the game area toward the area forming section. , and the inner rail may bend.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C6, since the side wall portion is arranged side by side with the inner rail, the game ball flowing down the game area is guided toward the area forming portion, and as a result, the game ball is directed toward the inner rail. Even if the game ball falls down, the side wall catches the game ball and prevents it from colliding with the inner rail. As a result, in addition to the effects of the game machine C5, it is possible to suppress the bending of the inner rail.

In the gaming machine C5 or C6, a light emitting means is disposed on the back side of the area forming portion of the center frame and formed to emit light, and the side wall portion emits light emitted from the light emitting means. A game machine C7 characterized in that it is formed to function as a light guide leading to the front side of the game area.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects of the game machine C5 or C6, the side wall portion is formed to function as a light guide that guides the light emitted from the light emitting means to the front side of the game area. It is possible to demonstrate the effect of directing by. In particular, in the game machine C7 subordinate to the game machine C6, the side wall portion is arranged side by side with the inner rail, so that the inner rail can reduce the leakage of light, and the amount of light that can be guided can be increased accordingly. . As a result, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the light.

In the game machine C7, the light emitting means is arranged on the displacement member, and the retracted position of the displacement member is the rear surface of the region forming portion of the center frame.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects of the game machine C7, the light emitting means is arranged on the displacement member, and the retracted position of the displacement member is the rear surface of the region forming portion of the center frame. is placed at the retracted position, the displacement member is visible through the region forming portion of the center frame, and the light emitted from the light emitting means of the displacement member is guided through the side wall portion. can be visualized. As a result, the effect of lighting can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C8, the region forming portion of the center frame defines a passage in which the game balls flow down and is erected in the region, and has a pair of side wall portions formed integrally with the center frame. A game machine C9 characterized in that one or a plurality of protrusions are protruded from the opposing surfaces of the pair of side wall portions.

Here, when the center frame is made of a resin material and nails cannot be implanted in the region forming portion, the speed of the game ball flowing down the passage partitioned by the pair of side wall portions increases, and the falling game ball is played. difficult for people to see.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C9, since one or a plurality of protrusions are protrudingly provided on the facing surfaces of the pair of side wall portions, when the game ball flows down the passage partitioned by the pair of side wall portions In addition, the game ball can be made to collide with the protrusions to hinder its flow. As a result, in addition to the effects of the game machines C1 to C8, the falling speed of the game balls can be slowed down, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the falling game balls.

A gaming machine C10 characterized in that, in the gaming machine C9, the projections on one facing surface and the projections on the other facing surface of the pair of side wall portions are arranged in a zigzag pattern.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C9, the projections on one facing surface of the pair of side wall portions and the projections on the other facing surface are arranged in a zigzag manner, so that the pair of side wall portions are partitioned. When the game ball flows down the passage, the game ball is caused to alternately collide with left and right projections, thereby making the flowing down game ball meander. As a result, in addition to the effects of the game machine C9, the falling speed of the game ball can be made slower so that the player can easily see the falling game ball, and the flowing game ball can be seen in the direction perpendicular to the flowing direction. It can be displaced to change the movement of the game ball.

In the game machine C10, the game machine C11 is characterized in that the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with a concave groove that is concavely formed in the front surface thereof and extends in a substantially sawtooth shape.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C10, the area forming portion of the center frame is recessed in the front surface thereof and has a concave groove extending in a substantially sawtooth shape, so that the area forming portion can be used as a game. When the ball flows down, the game ball can be guided by the inner surface of the concave groove to meander. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball can be slowed down, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the falling game ball. In addition, according to the game machine C11 subordinate to the game machine C7, the recessed groove can be used as a lens to guide the light emitted from the light emitting means to the front of the game area, so that the effect of the light can be exhibited. can do.

In the game machine C11, the game machine C12 is characterized in that the concave groove is arranged such that the bent portion thereof is displaced from the protrusion in the flowing direction of the game ball.

According to the game machine C12, in addition to the effects of the game machine C11, the bent portion of the recessed groove is displaced from the projection in the direction in which the game ball flows, so the game ball flows down the area forming portion. In this case, the meandering game ball guided by the inner surface of the groove can easily collide alternately with the protrusions. Therefore, a synergistic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the action of the concave groove and the action of the projection. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball can be made slower, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the falling game ball. In addition, it is possible to increase the change in the motion of the game ball.

In the game machine C10, the game machine C13 is characterized in that the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with a ridge projecting from the front surface thereof and extending in a substantially sawtooth shape.

According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C10, the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with a ridge projecting from the front surface and extending in a substantially sawtooth shape, so that the area forming portion can be used as a game. When the ball flows down, the game ball can be guided by the outer surface of the ridge to meander. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball can be slowed down, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the falling game ball. Further, according to the game machine C13 subordinate to the game machine C7, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be guided to the front of the game area by using the ridge as a lens, and the effect of the light can be exhibited. can do.

In the game machine C13, the game machine C14 is characterized in that the bent portion of the protruding line is aligned with the projection in a flowing direction of the game ball.

According to the game machine C14, in addition to the effects of the game machine C13, the bent portion of the ridge is aligned with the protrusion in the flowing direction of the game ball, so the game ball flows down the area forming portion. In this case, the meandering game ball guided by the outer surface of the ridge can easily collide alternately with the protrusions. Therefore, a synergistic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the action of the ridges and the action of the protrusions. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball can be made slower, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the falling game ball. In addition, it is possible to increase the change in the motion of the game ball.

In any one of the gaming machines C11 to C14, the terminal end side of the groove or the ridge is arranged so that its extending direction overlaps with the downstream wall portion and faces the exit of the passage partitioned by the pair of side wall portions. Characterized game machine C15.

According to the game machine C15, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C11 to C14, the terminal end side of the recessed groove or the ridge overlaps the downstream wall portion in the extending direction and is partitioned by the pair of side wall portions. Since the outlet of the passage is oriented, the game ball guided to the end side of the concave groove or the ridge can collide with the downstream wall from an oblique direction, thereby suppressing the bouncing of the game ball. The game ball can be made to flow down toward the exit of the passage while reducing the flow speed. As a result, the game balls can be smoothly discharged from the outlet of the passage.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Winning Device 65 as an Example>
A first seesaw member having one end side and the other end side rotatably supported by a rotating shaft is provided, and the seesaw member is lowered at one end side and raised at the other end side in an unloaded state. The seesaw member in a gaming machine that forms a state and forms a second state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered by placing a game ball on the other end side of the rotating shaft. The seesaw member has a receiving surface for receiving the game ball guided by the guiding means, and the receiving surface is positioned closer to the one end than the rotating shaft. Gaming machine D1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a seesaw member rotatably supported by a rotating shaft between one end side and the other end side. While forming a first state in which the other end side is raised while the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft, the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered A second state There is a gaming machine that forms a (for example, JP-A-2007-283136).

According to this gaming machine, when a game ball is dropped onto the seesaw member in the first state and placed between the rotating shaft and the other end, the weight of the game ball causes The other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised to form the second state. On the other hand, when the game ball placed between the rotating shaft and the other end side is ejected, the other end side is raised and the one end side is lowered to return to the first state. In other words, the weight of the dropped game ball can be used to alternately appear the first state and the second state, and an effect is produced by an action in which one end side and the other end side of the seesaw member are displaced up and down. It can be carried out.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, the second state is maintained in which the other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised, and the first state and the second state are maintained. There was a problem that it was not possible to alternately switch between

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, since the receiving surface for receiving the game ball guided from the guide means is located on the one end side of the rotating shaft, the other end side of the seesaw member is lowered and the one end side is raised. Even in the second state, the one end side can be lowered by the weight of the game ball received by the receiving surface. That is, it is possible to form the first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

In the gaming machine D1, the receiving surface is formed so as to be able to deliver the game ball to the other end side when receiving the game ball guided from the guide means in the first state. Game machine D2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the receiving surface is formed so as to be able to deliver the game ball to the other end when receiving the game ball guided from the guiding means in the first state. Therefore, switching from the first state to the second state can be reliably performed.

Examples of a configuration in which the game ball can be delivered to the other end include a configuration in which the receiving surface is inclined downward from one end to the other end even in the first state, a projection formed on the receiving surface, For example, the protrusion is formed in a shape that bounces the game ball guided from the guide means toward the other end side.

The game machine D1 or D2 includes a rotatably pivotally supported decorative member, one end of the seesaw member is connected to the decorative member, and the decorative member rotates around the rotation axis of the seesaw member. is displaced.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, it is provided with a rotatably pivotally supported decorative member, one end of the seesaw member is connected to the decorative member, and the rotation axis of the seesaw member is the center. Since a link mechanism is formed in which the decorative member is displaced in accordance with the rotation, the movable range of the decorative member can be expanded according to the link ratio, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Here, in order to reliably alternately switch the seesaw member between the first state and the second state, the first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised when the no-load state is established. It is preferable to be able to return the seesaw member early. In this case, according to the gaming machine D3, since the decorative member is connected to one end of the seesaw member, the weight of the decorative member is applied to the one end of the seesaw member to lower the one end. be able to. Therefore, in the no-load state, the seesaw member can be quickly returned to the first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. Alternate switching between states can be facilitated.

The weight of the decorative member prevents one end of the seesaw member from rising (forming the second state). is placed on the other end side, it is possible to form a second state in which the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the guide means includes a passage through which the game balls pass, and on the terminal end side of the passage, a rolling roller that extends in a substantially horizontal direction and on which the game balls roll. A game machine D4 is characterized in that a horizontal passage having a guide surface is formed, and a game ball rolling on the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage is guided substantially horizontally to the receiving surface of the seesaw member.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of the game machines D1 to D3, the guide means has a passage through which the game balls pass, so a plurality of game balls can be stored using the passage. , the plurality of game balls can be sequentially guided from the passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member.

However, even in this case, in the form in which the game balls are guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member by falling from above, when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, the plurality of game balls will fall on the receiving surface. The seesaw member cannot be alternately switched between the first state and the second state.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D4, a horizontal passage extending substantially horizontally and having a rolling guide surface on which game balls roll is formed on the end side of the passage, and the horizontal passage rolls. Since game balls rolling on the dynamic guide surface are guided substantially horizontally to the receiving surface of the seesaw member, they can be guided one by one from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member (that is, the receiving surface is horizontal). One ball at a time can be received from the passage in order), and it is possible to avoid stacking a plurality of game balls on the receiving surface. Therefore, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member.

In the gaming machine D4, the guide means includes an upstream passage connected to the upstream side of the horizontal passage and extending in a direction different from the extending direction of the horizontal passage, and the length of extension of the horizontal passage is is set to a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects of the game machine D4, the guide means includes an upstream passage connected to the upstream side of the horizontal passage and extending in a direction different from the extending direction of the horizontal passage, Since the extension length of the horizontal passage is set to a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball, even when a plurality of game balls are stored in the passage, the game balls are placed one by one on the receiving surface of the seesaw member. It is possible to provide guidance while keeping an interval.

That is, since the extension length of the horizontal passage is set to a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball, the horizontal passage can be in a state in which only one game ball exists, and the extension of the horizontal passage can be reduced. Since the installation direction and the extension direction of the upstream passage are different directions, when the ball flows from the upstream passage to the horizontal passage, it is necessary to change the inflow direction, It is possible to lengthen the time required to flow into the horizontal passage. Therefore, when the previous game ball existing in the horizontal passage is guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member, the game ball behind the upstream passage flows into the horizontal passage while taking time to change direction, and after that, is guided from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member. That is, the later game ball is spaced from the previous game ball. As a result, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member one by one while being spaced apart.

In the game machine D4 or D5, the game machine D6 is characterized in that, at least in the second state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is positioned above the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of the game machine D4 or D5, at least in the second state (state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered), the receiving surface of the seesaw member rolls in the horizontal path. Since a step is formed between the receiving surface and the rolling guide surface located above the guide surface, the game ball rolling on the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path is guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member. When it is played, the game ball can be run on the receiving surface (collision with the step), and the receiving surface of the seesaw member can be easily lowered by using this running operation (collision). As a result, it is possible to easily form the first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised.

In the gaming machine D6, at least in the first state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is positioned flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path or positioned below the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path. Characterized game machine D7.

Here, the fact that the seesaw member is in the first state means that the seesaw member is in an unloaded state, and the game ball received by the receiving surface after being guided from the horizontal passage is quickly sent out to the other end side. It means that the weight of the game ball is required to act on the other end side of the rotating shaft to lower the other end side (to form the second state).

In this case, according to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, at least in the first state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is positioned flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path or the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path. Since it is positioned below the dynamic guide surface, the game ball can be smoothly guided from the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path to the receiving surface of the seesaw member. That is, unlike the case of the second state, the game ball does not need to ride on the receiving surface (collide with the step), and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a time lag due to such an operation. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly sent out to the other end side, and as a result, it is possible to easily form the second state in which the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered.

In addition, in the first state, it is preferable that the receiving surface of the seesaw member is flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage. When the receiving surface of the seesaw member is positioned below the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage, the game ball guided from the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage falls onto the receiving surface of the seesaw member. This is because the ball bounces, resulting in a time lag and an increased load on the rotating shaft of the seesaw member due to the impact of the drop.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D7, the seesaw member is formed such that the other end of the seesaw member is bent upward in a substantially doglegged shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft. Machine D8.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D7, the seesaw member has the other end bent upward in a substantially dogleg shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotation shaft. Since it is formed, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member while suppressing the space required for arranging the seesaw member.

That is, the seesaw member, if the downward inclination of the other end side of the rotating shaft is insufficient, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side (that is, the other end side is lowered and the second state is formation time) is lengthened, and alternating switching between the first state and the second state is hindered. However, if the entire area on the other end side of the rotating shaft is inclined downward, the other end side protrudes from the space allowed for disposing the seesaw member (that is, the space required for disposing the seesaw member increases. ). On the other hand, if the length from the rotating shaft to the other end is shortened so as to fit in the space allowed for the arrangement of the seesaw member, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end (that is, The time during which the other end is lowered and the second state is formed is shortened, and the formation of the second state becomes uncertain, so alternate switching between the first state and the second state is hindered. In addition, in order to fit the seesaw member in the space allowed for disposing the seesaw member while ensuring the length from the rotating shaft to the other end side, the downward inclination of the other end side from the rotating shaft is insufficient. .

On the other hand, by forming the other end side of the seesaw member in a shape that bends upward in a substantially doglegged shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft, the problems described above can be resolved, and as a result, It is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member while suppressing the space required for arranging the seesaw member.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D8, the seesaw member is provided with an inlet into which game balls rolled from the rotating shaft toward the other end side are introduced, and the other end side of the seesaw member is provided with the above-mentioned A game machine D9, characterized in that a pawl portion is protrudingly formed so as to be capable of switching a rolling direction of a game ball rolled from a rotating shaft toward the other end side to a direction toward the inflow port.

According to the game machine D9, in any one of the game machines D1 to D8, the other end side of the seesaw member has a rolling direction of the game ball rolled from the rotating shaft toward the other end side toward the inlet. Since the pawl is formed to be switchable in direction, the game ball can be quickly introduced into the inlet. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the seesaw member (that is, the time during which the other end side is lowered and the second state is formed) becomes too long, resulting in the first state and the second state. It is possible to suppress the inhibition of alternating switching between and.

In the game machine D9, the game machine D10 is characterized in that the pawl portion is biased toward the side opposite to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member.

According to the game machine D10, in addition to the effects of the game machine D9, the pawl portion is disposed on the side opposite to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member, so that the rolling position of the game ball is aligned with the seesaw member. Even if there is variation in the width direction, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member (that is, the time during which the other end side is lowered and the second state is formed). It can be easily made constant.

That is, the pawl portion is biased toward the side opposite to the inlet in the width direction of the seesaw member, so that the game ball rolling on the back side in the width direction of the seesaw member (opposite side to the inlet) is Since the distance to the inlet in the width direction of the seesaw member is long, it is made to collide with the claw at an early stage and roll to the inlet, while the front of the seesaw member in the width direction (closer to the inlet) rolls. Since the sphere has a short distance to the inlet in the width direction of the seesaw member, it is possible to delay the collision with the pawl. Thereby, in each of the former and the latter, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member can be made nearly equal.

As a result, even if the rolling position of the game ball varies in the width direction of the seesaw member, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member (that is, the other end side is time during which the second state is formed) can be easily made constant.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D10, the seesaw member is provided with an inlet into which the game ball rolled from the rotating shaft toward the other end side is introduced, and the width of the inlet is equal to the diameter of the game ball. A game machine D11 characterized in that it is set to a dimension larger than double.

According to the game machine D11, in any of the game machines D1 to D10, the seesaw member is provided with an inlet into which game balls rolled from the rotating shaft toward the other end side are introduced, and the width of the inlet is is set to a dimension larger than twice the diameter of the game ball, so that the next game ball rolls further toward the other end side while the previous game ball exists on the other end side of the seesaw member. In this case, each of these game balls can be smoothly flowed into the inlet. For example, even if a later game ball collides with a previous game ball and these game balls roll into the inlet at the same time, they can be made to flow in smoothly.

In the game machine D11, the game machine D12 is characterized in that the height of the inflow port is set to be larger on the rotating shaft side than on the other end side of the seesaw member.

According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D11, the height of the inlet is set to be larger on the rotating shaft side than on the other end of the seesaw member. Even when the next game ball rolls further toward the other end side and collides with the previous game ball existing on the other end side of the seesaw member, each of these game balls is smoothly moved to the inflow port. can flow in. That is, even if the game ball bounces up after colliding with the previous game ball, the height of the inlet is increased on the side of the rotating shaft, so that the height of the game ball can be used to catch the subsequent game ball. It can be ejected smoothly. On the other hand, even if the previous game ball collides with the next game ball, it is difficult to bounce up, so by reducing the height dimension on the other end side, the previous game ball smoothly flows into the inlet. In addition, the space required for the inlet can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

Any one of the game machines D1 to D12 is characterized by comprising suppressing means for suppressing guidance of a game ball from the guide means to the seesaw member when the seesaw member is arranged at least in the second state. Game machine D13.

According to the gaming machine D13, any one of the gaming machines D1 to D12 is provided with the suppressing means for suppressing the guidance of the game ball from the guiding means to the seesaw member when the seesaw member is arranged at least in the second state. , the time for the game ball on the other end side of the seesaw member to be kicked can be secured. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

In the gaming machine D13, the guide means includes a delivery port for delivering game balls to the seesaw member, and the suppressing means includes a restricting portion disposed closer to one end of the seesaw member than the rotating shaft, When the seesaw member is rotated to at least a second state, at least a portion of the restricting portion projects to the delivery port, thereby suppressing delivery of the game ball from the delivery port to the seesaw member. Gaming machine D14.

According to the game machine D14, in addition to the effects of the game machine D13, the suppressing means includes a regulating portion arranged on the one end side of the seesaw member relative to the rotation shaft, and the seesaw member is rotated at least to the second state. By projecting at least a part of the regulating portion to the delivery port, the delivery of the game ball from the delivery port to the seesaw member is suppressed, so that the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. That is, the seesaw member can also serve as a mechanism for projecting the restricting portion into the delivery port, and a driving mechanism for displacing the restricting portion and a control means for controlling the displacement timing thereof can be eliminated.

The state in which the restricting portion protrudes into the delivery port and the delivery of the game ball is suppressed means that the game machine cannot pass through the delivery port and the game ball can pass through the delivery port. Including both. Even in the latter case (passable), the regulation portion protrudes into the delivery port and narrows the passage width of the delivery port so that the game ball collides with the inner wall of the delivery port and the outer wall of the regulation portion. Since the game ball is delivered from the delivery port, throwing of the game ball is suppressed. That is, the game balls in a continuous state can be separated.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Winning Device 65 as an Example>
A first seesaw member having one end side and the other end side rotatably supported by a rotating shaft is provided, and the seesaw member is lowered at one end side and raised at the other end side in an unloaded state. A gaming machine that forms a second state in which a game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft so that one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered, wherein the rotating shaft A game machine E1 characterized by comprising a discharge means for easily discharging a game ball placed on the other end side of the game machine E1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a seesaw member rotatably supported by a rotating shaft between one end side and the other end side. While forming a first state in which the other end side is raised while the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft, the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered A second state There is a gaming machine that forms a (for example, JP-A-2007-283136).

According to this gaming machine, when a game ball is dropped onto the seesaw member in the first state and placed between the rotating shaft and the other end, the weight of the game ball causes The other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised to form the second state. On the other hand, when the game ball placed between the rotating shaft and the other end side is ejected, the other end side is raised and the one end side is lowered to return to the first state. In other words, the weight of the dropped game ball can be used to alternately appear the first state and the second state, and an effect is produced by an action in which one end side and the other end side of the seesaw member are displaced up and down. It can be carried out.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, the second state is maintained in which the other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised, and the first state and the second state are maintained. There was a problem that it was not possible to alternately switch between

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the seesaw member is provided with a discharge means for easily discharging the game ball placed on the other end side, so that the other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised. Even in this state, the game ball can be discharged from the other end by the discharge means, the weight of the game ball on the other end can be removed, and the one end can be easily lowered. That is, the state in which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft (that is, the state in which the second state is formed) is terminated early, and the one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. a first state can be formed. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

In the gaming machine E1, the discharging means includes a rotatably supported shaft support portion, a receiving portion disposed on one side of the shaft supporting portion and receiving the game ball guided from the guide means, and a receiving portion. and a push-out portion arranged to sandwich the shaft support portion with respect to the portion, and when the receiving portion receives the game ball guided from the guide means, the push-out portion is rotated around the shaft support portion. A game machine E2 characterized in that a portion protrudes to the other end side of the seesaw member.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, when the receiving part receives the game ball guided from the guide means, the ejecting part rotates about the shaft supporting part so that the pushing part moves to the seesaw member. Since it protrudes to the other end side, the game ball placed on the other end side of the seesaw member can be pushed out by the pushing portion and discharged from the seesaw member. As a result, the other end side of the seesaw member can be raised by discharging the game ball by the pushing portion, and the one end side of the seesaw member can be lowered by the weight of the game ball received by the receiving portion. Early termination can facilitate switching between the first state and the second state. In addition, the operation of receiving the game ball by the receiving portion is used to rotate the ejecting means (protruding the push-out portion).

In the game machine E2, the game machine E3 is characterized in that the shaft supporting portion of the discharge means is rotatably supported by the seesaw member.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the ejecting means is rotatably supported by the seesaw member at the shaft supporting portion, so that the relative position of the ejecting means to the seesaw member can be kept constant. . Therefore, the game ball guided from the guide means can be easily received by the receiving part, and the rotation around the shaft support part can be surely formed, and the pushing part projected to the other end side of the seesaw member by the rotation can be played. The game ball can be reliably pushed out (discharged) from the seesaw member by facilitating contact with the ball. As a result, it is possible to facilitate switching between the first state and the second state.

In the game machine E2 or E3, the receiving portion of the discharging means has a larger retractable amount than the pushing portion with respect to a virtual plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the seesaw member and the pivotal support portion of the discharging means. A gaming machine E4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2 or E3, the ejection means has a larger retractable amount of the receiving portion than the push-out portion. , and the energy received from the received game ball can be increased accordingly. As a result, it is possible to ensure the pushing force of the game ball by the pushing portion accompanying the retreat of the receiving portion. That is, the game ball can be quickly discharged easily.

On the other hand, by making the retraction amount of the pushing portion smaller than that of the receiving portion, when the game ball rolling toward the other end of the seesaw member causes the pushing portion to retreat, the rolling trajectory of the game ball increases. can be suppressed, and such game balls can be quickly discharged easily.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the discharging means is mounted on the other end side of the rotating shaft by relatively raising one of the rotating shafts of the seesaw member in the axial direction with respect to the other in the axial direction. The game machine E5 is characterized by making it easy to discharge placed game balls.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E1 to E4, one of the rotation shafts of the seesaw member in the axial direction is raised relative to the other in the axial direction by the ejecting means, By increasing the downward inclination angle of the seesaw member from one axial direction to the other axial direction of the rotating shaft, a game ball placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft can be ejected from the seesaw member. This makes it easier to alternately switch between the first state and the second state.

It should be noted that the fact that one of the rotating shafts in the axial direction is raised relative to the other in the axial direction means that it is sufficient if the amount of rise in one of the axial directions is greater than the amount of rise in the other axial direction. Therefore, after being raised, one axial direction may be arranged at a lower position than the other axial direction.

In the game machine E5, when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, the discharging means moves one axial direction of the rotation shaft of the seesaw member in the first section. In the second section which is not raised relative to the other and which is closer to the second state than the first section, one of the rotation shafts of the seesaw member in the axial direction is relative to the other in the axial direction. The game machine E6 is characterized by being raised in a positive manner.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5, when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state toward the second state, the ejection means rotates the rotation axis of the seesaw member in the first section. in the second section, which is closer to the second state than the first section, the one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member is shifted to the other axial direction. , it is possible to reliably form the second state and smoothly alternately switch between the first state and the second state.

That is, when the operation of relatively raising one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member relative to the other axial direction is performed from the first section, the discharge of the game ball is accelerated, and the second state is surely formed. Can not. On the other hand, if the operation to raise one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member relative to the other axial direction is not performed, the ejection of the game ball is slowed down (residence time is lengthened), resulting in the second state. easier to maintain.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E5, when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, in the first section, one of the rotation shafts of the seesaw member in the axial direction is rotated to the other axial direction. On the other hand, since it does not rise relatively, it is possible to suppress the ejection of the game ball from being hastened (that is, to make the game ball stay), and to make it easier to reliably form the second state. On the other hand, in the second section, since one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other axial direction, the game ball can be discharged quickly, and the game ball is placed. The time (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) can be shortened. As a result, alternate switching between the first state and the second state can be performed smoothly while the second state can be reliably formed.

In the gaming machine E5 or E6, the seesaw member is formed with a cam on at least one side in the axial direction of the rotating shaft, and along with the rotation of the rotating shaft, from the axis of the rotating shaft to the outer peripheral surface of the cam. A game machine E7 characterized in that one of the rotation shafts of the seesaw member in the axial direction is raised relative to the other in the axial direction by increasing the distance of the seesaw member.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5 or E6, a cam is formed in at least one axial direction of the rotating shaft, and along with the rotation of the rotating shaft, from the axis of the rotating shaft to the outer peripheral surface of the cam By increasing the distance of the seesaw member, one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other axial direction, so control for controlling the drive mechanism and its drive timing for operating such a rotating shaft No means required. Moreover, the first section and the second section can be reliably formed, and the degree of freedom in designing the ratio of the first and second sections can be increased.

In any one of game machines E5 to E7, a push-up portion is provided on a moving locus when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, and the push-up portion hits the seesaw member. A game machine E8 characterized in that one of the rotation shafts of the seesaw member in the axial direction is raised relative to the other in the axial direction by being brought into contact with each other.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E5 to E7, the seesaw member is provided on the movement locus when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, When the push-up portion is brought into contact with the seesaw member, one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other axial direction. Control means for controlling timing can be made unnecessary. In addition, the first section and the second section can be reliably formed, and the degree of freedom in designing the ratio of each section can be increased.

<Regarding the concept of the invention as an example of the base side engaging member 12726>
A game machine comprising a base member and a displacement member rotatably disposed on the base member at its base end side and rotated between a retracted position and an extended position, wherein the base member comprises a base-side engagement member. In addition, the displacement member includes a displacement-side engagement member formed to be engageable with the base-side engagement member at the retracted position, and in a state in which the first displacement member is arranged at the extended position, the base The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the base-side engaging member is formed such that it is difficult for a player to visually recognize the member when viewed from the front.

Here, in a game machine such as pachinko, a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and a driving force applied to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. A performance member having a transmission member that transmits and a driving means that imparts a driving force to the transmission member is provided, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are provided via the first groove and the second groove provided in the transmission member. There is a gaming machine in which a member is connected to a transmission member (for example, JP-A-2009-100994).

In this conventional game machine, the connecting member connects the base member and the second displacement member in an erected state, and in the retracted position, the base member and the second displacement member are positioned relatively apart from the rotation axis of the first displacement member. 2 displacement members are connected by a connecting member. Therefore, even if the first displacement member tries to tilt the portion on the opposite side of the rotation shaft (that is, the second displacement member side) in the direction away from the base member, there will be a gap between the base member and the second displacement member. The tilting can be suppressed by the action of the intervening connecting member.

However, in the game machine F1, the base end side of the displacement member is rotatably supported, while the side opposite to the base end side (tip end side) is a free end. Therefore, at the retracted position, the side opposite to the proximal side (tip side) tends to tilt (forward) in a direction away from the base member due to its own weight and the weight of the decorative portion provided on the front side.

In this case, according to the gaming machine F1, the base member includes the base-side engagement member, the displacement member includes the displacement-side engagement member, and in a state in which the displacement member is displaced to the retracted position, the base-side engagement Since the member and the displacement-side engaging member are formed to be engageable, it is possible to suppress tilting of the side opposite to the base end side of the displacement member (the distal end side) in a direction away from the base member.

On the other hand, in the case where the base member is provided with the base-side engaging member and the displacement member is provided with the displacement-side engaging member as described above, when the displacement member is extended to the projecting position, the front surface of the base member is exposed, the base-side engagement member is visually recognized by the player, and the appearance is spoiled. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the base-side engaging member is formed so as to be difficult for the player to visually recognize when the base member is viewed from the front.

In the game machine F1, the base-side engaging member is disposed in front of the base member so as to be retractable, and when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base-side engaging member moves in front of the base member. and when the displacement member is rotated to the extended position, the base-side engagement member is retracted toward the back side of the base member.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, the base-side engaging member is disposed in front of the base member so as to be retractable, and when the displacement member is rotated to the projecting position, the base-side engaging member is engaged. Since the joining member is retracted toward the back side of the base member, the base-side engaging member can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize when the base member is viewed from the front, and the deterioration of the appearance can be suppressed.

Further, when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base-side engaging member protrudes from the front surface of the base member. be able to. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the displacement-side engaging member from interfering with other members when the displacement member is rotated. In other words, since the protrusion height of the displacement-side engaging member can be reduced, a space for displacing other members can be secured.

In the game machine F2, a drive means is provided for rotating the displacement member with respect to the base member, and the base-side engaging member is protruded from the front surface of the base member by the action of the driving force of the drive means. A game machine F3 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, the driving means for rotating the displacement member with respect to the base member is provided, and the driving force of the driving means causes the base-side engagement member to move to the base member. Since it protrudes from the front, it can also be used as a driving means, and the product cost can be reduced. That is, the driving force for rotationally driving the displacement member can also be used as the driving force for protruding the base-side engaging member, making it unnecessary to separately provide a driving means for such projection.

As a form of projecting the base-side engaging member by the action of the driving force of the driving means, when the displacement member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the base-side engaging member is directly or indirectly engaged by the displacement member. When the member is displaced in the projecting direction, or when the transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the displacing member is displaced, the displacing member directly or indirectly displaces the base-side engaging member in the projecting direction. and the like are exemplified.

The gaming machine F3 is provided with biasing means for biasing the base-side engaging member in the retraction direction, and when the action of the driving force of the driving means is released, the action of the biasing force of the biasing means The game machine F4 is characterized in that the base-side engaging member is returned to the retracted position.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, the biasing means for biasing the base-side engaging member in the direction of insertion is provided, and when the action of the driving force of the driving means is released, the biasing means is activated. Since the base-side engaging member is returned to the retracted position by the action of the biasing force of the biasing means, it is not necessary to interlock both the projecting direction and the retracting direction with the action of the driving force of the driving means, and only the projecting direction is interlocked. The structure can be simplified accordingly.

In the gaming machine F1, the base-side engaging member is arranged so as to be retractable from the front surface of the base member, and when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base-side engaging member moves to the front surface of the base member. a gaming machine F5, wherein the base-side engaging member is advanced toward the front side of the base member when the displacement member is retracted from the base member and the displacement member is rotated to the extended position.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base side engagement member is retracted from the front of the base member. By engaging the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member, it is possible not only to suppress tilting of the base end side and the opposite side (distal end side) of the displacement member in a direction away from the base member, but also to prevent the base-side engaging member from tilting. By narrowing the distance between the engaging surfaces (inner surfaces) of the member and the displacement-side engaging member, it is possible to suppress back-and-forth rattling on the distal end side of the displacement member.

Further, when the displacement member is rotated to the extended position, the base-side engaging member is advanced toward the front of the base member, so that the base-side engaging member is visually recognized by the player when the base member is viewed from the front. It can be made difficult, and it can be suppressed that the appearance is spoiled.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the right rotation unit 18600 as an example>
a base member, a first displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the first displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member , wherein the first displacement member is formed to be displaceable in at least a first direction, and the second displacement member is capable of coming into contact with the first displacement member or the base member The inertial force generated by contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member acts as a force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member in the first direction. Characteristic game machine G1.

Here, in a game machine such as pachinko, a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and a driving force applied to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. There is a game machine provided with driving means for giving (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-100994). According to this gaming machine, it is possible to form a mode in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced and a mode in which only one of the first displacement member or the second displacement member is displaced.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, for example, in a mode in which only the second displacement member is displaced, the load on the driving means is relatively small, while in a mode in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced, Since the load on the driving means is relatively large, the load on the driving means changes (increases) abruptly when the mode is switched. As a result, there is a problem that the durability of the driving means is lowered, and the displacement speed is lowered when the mode is switched, making stable (constant) displacement difficult.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, the second displacement member is formed to be able to contact the first displacement member or the base member, and the second displacement member is generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member. Since the inertial force applied acts as a force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member in the first direction, the first mode of displacing the second displacement member is switched to the second mode of displacing the first displacement member. In this case, the action of the inertial force can be used as an auxiliary force, and a sudden change (increase) in the load of the driving means can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to improve the durability of the driving means, suppress a decrease in displacement speed when switching from the first mode to the second mode, and facilitate stable (constant) displacement. .

As the first mode and the second mode, for example, the first mode displaces only the second displacement member, and the second mode displaces both the first displacement member and the second displacement member. Alternatively, a mode is exemplified in which the first mode displaces only the second displacement member and the second mode displaces only the first displacement member. The latter aspect is particularly useful when the load required for displacement of the first displacement member is sufficiently greater than the load required for displacement of the second displacement member (for example, the weight of the first displacement member relative to the weight of the second displacement member). is sufficient).

In the gaming machine G1, the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the first displacement member. and the rotation axes of the second displacement member are parallel to each other.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the first displacement member. Since the directions of the rotation axes of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are parallel to each other, the inertial force generated by the contact of the second displacement member with the first displacement member or the base member is reduced to , can be efficiently acted on the first displacement member as a force for displacing the first displacement member in the first direction.

In the game machine G1 or G2, the direction of displacement of the second displacement member when the second displacement member is brought into contact with the first displacement member or the base member is a direction including a downward component in the direction of gravity. A game machine G3 characterized by.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1 or G2, the direction of displacement of the second displacement member when the second displacement member abuts against the first displacement member or the base member is downward in the direction of gravity. Since it is a direction including a facing component, it is possible to easily secure the inertial force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member.

A game machine G4 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines G1 to G3, the first direction is a direction including an upward component in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, since the first direction is a direction including an upward component in the gravity direction, the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base It is particularly effective to use the inertial force generated by the contact with the member as an assisting force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member in the first direction.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G4, the first displacement member has one end rotatably supported by the base member, and the second displacement member has one end supported by the first displacement member. When the other end side of the second displacement member is rotatably supported on the other end side, and the other end side of the second displacement member approaches the one end side of the first displacement member from the direction opposite to the first direction, the second displacement member a gaming machine G5, wherein the other end side of the is abutted against the base member.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines G1 to G4, one end side of the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and one end side of the second displacement member is the first displacement member. When the other end of the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the other end of the member and the other end of the second displacement member approaches the one end of the first displacement member from the direction opposite to the first direction, the other end of the second displacement member Since the first displacement member abuts against the base member, the inertial force generated by the abutment between the second displacement member and the base member can be efficiently acted as a force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member in the first direction. can be done. That is, when switching from the first mode in which the second displacement member is displaced to the second mode in which the first displacement member is displaced, the action of the inertial force is used as an auxiliary force for displacing the first displacement member in the first direction. Power can be used effectively.

As a result, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the driving means, improve the durability of the driving means, and reduce the displacement speed when switching from the first mode to the second mode. It can be restrained to facilitate stable (constant) displacement.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G4, the first displacement member has one end rotatably supported by the base member, and the second displacement member has one end supported by the first displacement member. When the other end side of the second displacement member is rotatably supported on the other end side and approaches the one end side of the first displacement member from the same direction as the first direction, the second displacement member is abutted against the first displacement member.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines G1 to G4, one end side of the first displacement member is rotatably pivotally supported by the base member, and one end side of the second displacement member is the first displacement member. When the other end of the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the other end of the member and the other end of the second displacement member approaches the one end of the first displacement member in the same direction as the first direction, the other end of the second displacement member Since the first displacement member contacts the first displacement member, the inertial force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member is effectively used as a force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member in the first direction. can act on That is, when switching from the first mode in which the second displacement member is displaced to the second mode in which the first displacement member is displaced, the action of the inertial force is used as an auxiliary force for displacing the first displacement member in the first direction. Power can be used effectively.

As a result, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the driving means, improve the durability of the driving means, and reduce the displacement speed when switching from the first mode to the second mode. It can be restrained to facilitate stable (constant) displacement.

In any one of game machines G1 to G7, a transmission member having a drive pin for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the first displacement member and the second displacement member, the first displacement member includes the drive pin and a non-interfering section connected to the working section and not interfering with the drive pin, wherein the second displacement member has a working section that receives the action from the drive pin. and a second groove having at least Gaming machine G8.

According to the game machine G8, in addition to the effects of the game machines G1 to G7, the first groove of the first displacement member is connected to the action section that receives the action from the drive pin and the action section, and the drive pin interferes with the action section. and the second groove of the second displacement member has at least an action section that is acted upon by the drive pin, so that the drive pin displaces the non-interference section of the first groove and the action section of the second groove. By doing so, a first mode in which the second displacement member is displaced while the first displacement member is maintained in a stopped state, and a drive pin is displaced in the action section of the first groove and the action section of the second groove. Thus, it is possible to form a second mode in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced, and to smoothly transition from the first mode to the second mode.

<Feature H group> (Demonstration control with AT type special figure 1 waiting)
a first acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition; a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; A first effect execution means for executing a first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means in a first effect period; second acquisition means for acquiring second information; second determination means for executing second determination based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means; and second determination by the second determination means a second effect execution means for executing a second effect based on the result in a second effect period; and a specific first effect or the second effect based on the fact that the result of the first determination is a specific first determination result a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when a specific second performance based on the result of the decision being the specific second decision result is executed. a first timing means for starting a first timing when execution of the first effect is completed and the first information is not acquired by the first obtaining means; and execution of the second performance is completed. a second timekeeping means for starting second timekeeping when the second information is not acquired by the second acquisition means; a notification executing means for starting execution of a first notification mode and starting execution of a second notification mode based on the second time counting becoming a second set value; and when the second acquisition condition is satisfied, A game machine H1 characterized by comprising a setting means capable of switching and setting a first period for terminating the first notification mode being executed and a second period for continuing the same.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines variably display symbols based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning slot, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the variative display is completed. (For example, JP-A-2006-000392). Such gaming machines are configured to display a specific screen (demonstration screen) when the symbols are not changing (playing), allowing the player to easily find an empty table. .

In addition, among the above-described conventional type gaming machines, there is a first symbol in which variable display is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening and the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening. There is a second symbol that is displayed in a variable manner based on the second symbol, and the symbols can be varied simultaneously (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221). In such a gaming machine, the first symbol and the second symbol have different variation periods, and a long variation period (for example, 10 minutes) is executed as the variation period for one of the symbols. there is something

In such a conventional gaming machine, if a specific screen (demonstration screen) is displayed when the variable display of both symbols is completed, the player can When the player ends the game, the next player continues to be in a state where it is difficult for the next player to play the game on that gaming machine (but the screen), so there is a problem that the operation of the game is reduced. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine H1, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the result of the first determination is Based on this, the first effect execution means executes the first effect during the first effect period. Further, based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, the second determination is executed by the second determination means based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means, and the second determination is performed. Based on the result, the second effect execution means executes the second effect during the second effect period. Then, a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result A privilege game that is advantageous to the player when executed is executed by the privilege game execution means, the execution of the first effect is completed, and the first information is not acquired by the first acquisition means. , when the first timing is started by the first timing means, the execution of the second effect is completed, and the second information is not acquired by the second obtaining means, the second timing is started by the second timing means. be done. The notification executing means starts the execution of the first notification mode when the first clock reaches the first set value, and performs the second notification when the second clock reaches the second set value. Execution of the aspect begins. In addition, the setting means switches and sets a first period during which the first notification mode being executed when the second acquisition condition is satisfied and a second period during which the first notification mode is continued.

As a result, even when the second effect is being executed, the first notification mode indicating that the first effect is not being executed can be continued. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily grasp the state of the gaming machine, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation of the game. Furthermore, when the second effect is executed, the setting means can switch between the first period for ending the first notification mode indicating that the first effect is not being executed and the second period for continuing. , it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

The configuration of the gaming machine H1 is, for example, a gaming machine configured to be able to execute a first effect and a second effect at the same time. It is preferable to use it for a game machine having a period during which the effect is substantially executed. In this case, during the period in which the second performance is not substantially executed, even if the second acquisition condition is satisfied, the first notification mode being executed is continued, and during the period in which the second performance is substantially executed. can terminate the first notification mode being executed when the second acquisition condition is satisfied.

The gaming machine H1 is characterized by having game state setting means capable of setting a first game state that facilitates execution of the first determination and a second game state that facilitates execution of the second determination. Game machine H2.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game state setting means sets a first game state in which the first determination is likely to be executed and a second game state in which the second determination is likely to be executed.

This makes it possible to set the first period or the second period according to the game state set by the game state setting means. Therefore, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine H2, the setting means sets the second period when the first game state is set by the game state setting means. The game machine H3 is characterized in that the first period is set when the game state is set.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H2, the following effects are produced. That is, the setting means sets the second period when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, and sets the first period when the second game state is set.

Thus, in a game state in which the first determination is likely to be executed, even if the second acquisition condition is met, the first notification mode being executed is continued, and in a game state in which the second determination is likely to be executed, the second notification mode is continued. When the acquisition condition is satisfied, the first notification mode being executed can be ended. Therefore, it is possible to provide an appropriate effect according to the game state, and it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

A game machine H4 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines H1 to H3, the notification execution means terminates the second notification mode being executed based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. .

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines H1 to H3, the second notification mode being executed is terminated by the notification execution means based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, so that the second effect is executed. An effect can be executed according to the execution state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H4, the notification executing means executes the second notification mode while suppressing the first effect from being hindered even when the first effect is being executed. A gaming machine H5 characterized by:

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects of the game machines H1 to H4, the following effects are produced. That is, the second notification mode is executed by the notification executing means while suppressing the first effect from being disturbed even while the first effect is being executed.

As a result, it is possible to notify that the second effect is not being executed while the first effect is being executed, while preventing the first effect from being disturbed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game in which the game situation is easy for the player to understand.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H5, the first effect executing means and the second effect executing means are capable of simultaneously executing the first effect and the second effect. A game machine H6.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects of the game machines H1 to H5, the first effect execution means and the second effect execution means are configured so that the first effect and the second effect can be executed at the same time. There is an effect that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner of the situation of the first performance and the second performance that are executed simultaneously.

The game machine H7 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines H1 to H6, the notification executing means can simultaneously execute the first notification mode and the second notification mode.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H1 to H6, the notification execution means is configured to simultaneously execute the first notification mode and the second notification mode. There is an effect that the player can be notified of the situation of the performance and the second performance in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H7, the notification executing means notifies predetermined information other than information indicating the result of the second effect as the second notification mode when the first effect is being executed. A game machine H8 characterized by executing a predetermined notification mode.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first effect is being executed, the notification executing means executes a predetermined notification mode in which predetermined information other than the information indicating the result of the second effect is notified as the second notification mode.

Thereby, when the first effect is being executed, it is possible to suppress the notification of the information indicating the result of the previously executed second effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the result of the first effect with the result of the second effect, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8, the notification execution means executes a first effect indicating that the first effect is being executed as the second notification mode when the first effect is being executed. A game machine H9 characterized in that it executes a medium notification mode.

According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first effect is being executed, the notification execution means executes the first effect execution notification mode indicating that the first effect is being executed as the second notification mode.

As a result, it is possible to allow the player to easily understand the effect being executed, and it is possible to provide the game situation in an easy-to-understand manner.

Furthermore, according to the configuration of the gaming machine H6, information regarding the first effect that is actually being executed, out of the first effect and the second effect that can be executed at the same time, is displayed as the second notification mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the game situation can be provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H9, a first display area for displaying either the first notification mode or the second notification mode executed by the notification executing means, and a second display for displaying the other. and display control means for controlling display contents in the first display area and the second display area of the display means, wherein the display control means corresponds to the setting means. When the first period is set by, the first notification mode is displayed in the first display area, and when the second period is set, the second notification mode is displayed in the first display area A gaming machine H10 characterized by controlling the display contents of the display means so as to

According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display means has a first display area in which one of the first notification mode and the second notification mode executed by the notification execution means is displayed and a second display area in which the other is displayed, When the first period is set by the setting means, the first notification mode is displayed in the first display area, and when the second period is set, the second notification mode is displayed in the first display area. Then, the display contents of the display means are controlled by the display control means.

Thereby, the notification mode displayed in the first display area can be changed according to the game state. Therefore, it is possible to execute an easy-to-understand notification mode display according to the game state, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

<Characteristic group I> (demonstration control when the game state is varied)
a first acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition; a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; A first effect execution means for executing a first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means in a first effect period; second acquisition means for acquiring second information; second determination means for executing second determination based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means; and second determination by the second determination means a second effect execution means for executing a second effect based on the result in a second effect period; and a specific first effect or the second effect based on the fact that the result of the first determination is a specific first determination result a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when a specific second performance based on the result of the decision being the specific second decision result is executed. wherein, when a specific condition is established, an advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state advantageous to the player until the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times; Variable control that makes it easier to execute the second judgment than the first judgment when the advantageous state is set, and makes it easier to execute the first judgment than the second judgment when the advantageous state ends means for setting a first setting when the first effect is not executed for a predetermined first period, and setting a second setting when the second effect is not executed for a predetermined second period. setting means for setting a first display setting to the display means based on the setting of the first setting when the advantageous state is set; and setting the first display setting when the advantageous state is set. display setting means for setting a second display setting to the display means based on the second setting being set, wherein the display setting means sets the advantageous state in a state where the second display setting is made; is completed, a specific display setting different from the second display setting is set.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines variably display symbols based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning slot, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the variative display is completed. (For example, JP-A-2006-000392). Such gaming machines are configured to display a specific screen (demonstration screen) when the symbols are not changing (playing), allowing the player to easily find an empty table. .

In addition, among the above-described conventional type gaming machines, there is a first symbol in which variable display is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening and the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening. There is a second symbol that is displayed in a variable manner based on the second symbol, and the symbols can be varied simultaneously (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221). Further, there is a configuration in which a game state in which the first symbol is likely to be variably displayed and a game state in which the second symbol is likely to be variably displayed are set in accordance with the game state to improve the interest of the game.

In such a conventional gaming machine, if the game state shifts while a specific screen (demonstration screen) indicating that the variable display of one of the symbols has ended is displayed, the player will not be able to change the display content. There is a problem that it is difficult to grasp the

For example, in a predetermined game state, if the display area for symbols that are likely to be variably displayed is set to be larger than the display area for symbols that are difficult to be variably displayed, the displayed contents will be enlarged as the game state shifts. There is a problem that the game is different and the player is provided with a game that is difficult to understand. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine I1, the first information is acquired by the first acquisition means based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the first information, and the first determination is performed. A first effect based on the result of the first determination is executed in a first effect period by the first effect executing means. second information is acquired by the second acquisition means based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, and the second determination is performed by the second determination means based on the second information; A second effect based on the result of the second determination is executed in a second effect period by the second effect executing means. A specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result is executed. In this case, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. Then, when the specific condition is satisfied, the advantageous state setting means sets an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player until the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times. When the advantageous state is set, the variable control means makes it easier to execute the second judgment than the first judgment, and makes it easier to execute the first judgment than the second judgment when the advantageous state ends. The setting means sets the first setting when the first effect is not executed for a predetermined first period, and sets the second setting when the second effect is not executed for a predetermined second period. . Further, the display setting means sets the first display setting to the display means based on the fact that the first setting is set when the advantageous state is set, and the second display setting is set when the advantageous state is set. The second display setting is set to the display means based on the setting being set. In addition, when the advantageous state ends while the second display setting is set, a specific display setting different from the second display setting is set by the display setting means.

Accordingly, when the advantageous state ends while the second display setting is set, the specific display setting different from the second display setting is set by the display setting means, so the second display setting is set. Even in the state, the player can easily grasp that the advantageous state has ended. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine I1, the first display setting is set so that a predetermined first display mode is displayed on the display means, and the second display setting is a predetermined second display mode. A game machine I2 characterized in that it is displayed on display means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by setting the first display setting, a predetermined first display mode is displayed on the display means, and by setting the second display setting, a predetermined second display mode is displayed on the display means. be.

This allows the player to easily grasp the execution status of the first determination by the first determination means and the second determination by the second determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In the game machine I1 or I2, when the second effect is executed while the second display setting is being executed, the second effect is performed while the second display setting is maintained. A game machine I3 characterized in that a presentation mode is displayed on the display means.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second effect is executed while the second display setting is being executed, the effect mode corresponding to the second effect is displayed on the display means while the second display setting is maintained. .

Thereby, when the second effect is executed while the second display setting is being executed, the second effect can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

Here, the configuration of the gaming machine I3 may be provided, for example, in a gaming machine in which the second presentation period for executing the second presentation is set to be short. In this case, when the second performance is executed during the period in which the second display setting is being executed, the second performance in which the short second performance period is set can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the second display setting is to display on the display means a suggestive display mode suggesting that the advantageous state is set. A gaming machine I4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by setting the second display setting, the display means displays a suggestive display mode suggesting that it is a period in which the advantageous state is set.

As a result, it is possible to display information about the game state to the player using the period in which the second effect is not executed. Therefore, there is an effect that a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided by effectively utilizing the period in which the second effect is not executed.

In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4, when the advantageous state is set, determination means for determining establishment of a specific condition based on information based on the execution of the first effect and the second effect, and the determination. A game machine I5, characterized by comprising: regulation means for regulating setting of the second display setting when the means determines that a specific condition is established.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the advantageous state is set, the determining means determines whether the specific condition is established based on the information based on the execution of the first effect and the second effect, and when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied, the regulating means restricts the setting of the second display setting.

As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the specific condition is established by not setting the second display setting. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In any one of the game machines I1 to I5, when the second determination is executed, a second effect period determining means for determining the second effect period from a plurality of second effect periods, and one other than the advantageous state. When the normal game state is set, the probability of selecting a longer period than when the advantageous state is set as the second performance period determined by the second performance period determination means is set high. A gaming machine I6 characterized by comprising: a probability variable means for making a game.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second determination is executed, the second effect period is determined from a plurality of second effect periods by the second effect period determining means. When one normal game state other than the advantageous state is set by the probability varying means, the second effect period determined by the second effect period determining means is longer than when the advantageous state is set. The probability that the period will be selected is set high.

As a result, when the advantageous state is set, it becomes possible to execute more second determinations than when one normal game state other than the advantageous state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game aiming at an advantageous state in which the second determination is frequently executed.

A game machine I7 characterized in that, in any of the game machines I1 to I6, the first effect and the second effect can be executed simultaneously.

According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines I1 to I6, the first effect and the second effect are executed simultaneously, so the game can be efficiently executed.

<Characteristics J group> (Securing result production in AT type)
a first acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition; a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; a first effect executing means for executing a first effect in a first effect period based on the result of the first determination by the first determining means; A second determination means for executing 2 determination, a second effect execution means for executing a second effect based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means in a second effect period, and the result of the first determination is When a specific first effect based on a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result is executed, the game and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player until the first performance and the second performance are executed a predetermined number of times from a plurality of game states. A game state setting means capable of setting an advantageous game state, and a second performance period setting means for facilitating setting of a short second performance period when the advantageous game state is set by the game state setting means. Then, when the advantageous game state ends, a specific first effect period is set as the first effect period until the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times. A gaming machine J1 characterized by comprising: first effect period determining means.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines variably display symbols based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning slot, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the variative display is completed. In this way, in the gaming machine, an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is set by increasing the probability of a winning lottery or facilitating the execution of the lottery, and during the period in which the advantageous state continues. There is a system that displays game results such as the number of hits that have occurred and the number of winning balls on a display screen (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-35664). In such a gaming machine, the game result is displayed on the display screen after the advantageous state ends.

In addition, among the above-described conventional type gaming machines, there is a first symbol in which variable display is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening and the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening. There is a second symbol that is displayed in a variable manner based on the second symbol, and the symbols can be varied simultaneously (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221).

In such a conventional gaming machine, since both symbols are configured to fluctuate at the same time, it depends on the game situation whether the first symbol to be executed after the end of the advantageous state is the first symbol or the second symbol. may be different. In such a gaming machine, if only the first variation time period after the end of the advantageous state is set as the variation period during which the game result can be displayed, the game result display may not be displayed depending on the symbol that is first varied after the end of the advantageous state. There is a problem that the player cannot be displayed for a sufficient period of time, and the motivation of the player is lowered. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine J1, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the result of the first determination is Based on this, the first effect execution means executes the first effect during the first effect period. Further, based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, the second determination is executed by the second determination means based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means, and the second determination is performed. Based on the result, the second effect execution means executes the second effect during the second effect period. Then, a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result A privilege game that is advantageous to the player when executed is executed by the privilege game execution means, and the game is played until the first performance and the second performance are executed a predetermined number of times from a plurality of game states. An advantageous game state advantageous to a player is settable by a game state setting means, and when the advantageous game state is set by the game state setting means, the second performance period is set short by the second performance period setting means. When the advantageous game state ends, a specific first performance period is set as the first performance period until the first performance and the second performance are executed a predetermined number of times. Determined by the determining means.

As a result, it is possible to set a specific period as the first performance period when the advantageous game state ends, so that the player can grasp the content of the performance executed when the advantageous game state ends. This has the effect of suppressing a situation in which the player's motivation is lowered due to the fact that the contents of the presentation cannot be grasped.

As an effect executed when the advantageous game state ends, an effect indicating the game result during the advantageous game state (for example, the number of jackpots executed during the advantageous game state or the total number of prize balls) may be executed. In this case, there is an effect that the player can easily grasp the game result during the advantageous game state after the advantageous game state ends.

Further, as in the gaming machine J1, by setting the first effect period to be executed after the end of the advantageous game state to be the specific first effect period, the first effect to be executed using the specific first effect period is advantageous. It can be executed after the game state ends. As a result, for example, it is not necessary to set the first effect period executed at the end (final stage) of the advantageous game state as the first effect period, so that the player can smoothly execute the advantageous game state. effective.

A gaming machine J2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine J1, the predetermined number of times is two or more.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1, the predetermined number of times is two or more. It can be executed using a specific first performance period, and the player can grasp the contents of the performance to be executed when the advantageous game state ends, and the player cannot understand the contents of the performance. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which motivation is lowered.

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the first effect period determining means selects a shortened first effect period shorter than the specific first effect period when a game state different from the advantageous game state is set. A gaming machine J3 characterized by having a high percentage of playing games.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a game state different from the advantageous game state is set, the ratio of selecting the shortened first effect period shorter than the specific first effect period is increased by the first effect period determining means.

As a result, it is possible to set only a specific first effect period set for a predetermined number of times after the end of the advantageous gaming state to a period longer than the other first effect periods. By setting the overall length of the first effect period to be executed, it is possible to prevent the game from slowing down and lowering the player's motivation.

In any one of the game machines J1 to J3, the probability that the first determination is determined as the specific first determination result and the probability that the second determination is determined as the specific second determination result are set to be the same. and the second determination means determines, with a predetermined probability, a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result when the second determination does not determine the specific second determination result. The privilege game execution means executes a special privilege game in which a privilege equal to or lower than the privilege game is given when the second effect based on the special second determination result is executed. A gaming machine J4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the probability that the first determination results in the specific first determination result and the probability that the second determination results in the specific second determination result are set to be the same, and the second determination results in the specific second determination result. If it is not determined, the second determination means determines a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result with a predetermined probability. Then, when the second effect based on the special second determination result is executed, a special privilege game is executed in which a privilege equal to or lower than the privilege game is given by the privilege game executing means.

Thus, the second determination in which the second effect is executed is more advantageous to the player than the first determination in which the first effect is executed. Therefore, an advantageous game state in which the second effect period in which the second effect is executed is likely to be set to be short can be reliably changed to an advantageous state for the player, and there is an effect that the player's willingness to play can be enhanced. .

In addition, according to the gaming machine J4, by executing a special privilege game based on the fact that the determination result of the second determination means is the special second determination result, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is formed. However, it suffices that the game state in which the second effect period is set to be short becomes an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player. The special privilege game may be configured to be executed with a lower probability than the special privilege game (first special privilege game) executed based on the determination result of the first determination means. It may be configured to be a privilege game with a lower value than the special privilege game (second special privilege game) executed based on the determination result.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, when the advantageous gaming state is set, the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first determination, and when the advantageous gaming state ends, the second determination is performed. The game machine J5 is characterized by having variable control means for varying a state in which the first determination is more likely to be executed than the determination.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the advantageous gaming state is set, the second judgment is more likely to be executed than the first judgment, and when the advantageous gaming state is terminated, the first judgment is more likely to be executed than the second judgment. It is varied by the variable control means.

This makes it easier to execute the second determination in the advantageous gaming state than in gaming states other than the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, the advantageous game state can be changed to a game state more advantageous to the player, and there is an effect that the game motivation of the player aiming for the advantageous game state can be enhanced.

Note that the variable control means of the gaming machine J4 includes, for example, a configuration that varies the length of the presentation period between the first presentation period and the second presentation period, and a configuration that varies the ease with which the second acquisition condition is established. can be considered.

In the gaming machine J5, the variable control means is characterized in that the selection ratio is variably set so as to vary the length of the presentation period between the first presentation period and the second presentation period. Game machine J6.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the selection ratio is variably set so as to vary the length of the presentation period between the first presentation period and the second presentation period by the variable control means.

As a result, there is an effect that the easiness of execution of the first determination and the second determination can be easily varied.

<Feature K group> (AT type, even if one wins a small hit, the other variable production continues, and the fluctuation production that balances the balance after the small hit is executed)
a first acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition; a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; a first effect execution means for executing a first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means in a first effect period; and the first effect of the first effect executed by the first effect execution means. a first performance period determination means for determining a performance period from a plurality of performance periods; a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition; a second effect executing means for executing a second effect based on the result of the second determination by the determining means in a second effect period; and the second effect period of the second effect executed by the second effect executing means. a second performance period determining means for determining from a plurality of performance periods; 2. A gaming machine having privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when a specific second effect based on the determination result is executed, wherein the privilege game executing means Temporary stop means for temporarily stopping timing of the first effect period of the first effect being executed or the second effect period of the second effect being executed when the privilege game is executed, and the privilege game release means for releasing the temporary stop by the temporary stop means based on the end of the above, and even when the timing is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop means, the first effect execution means or the second effect execution means A continuation means for executing the first effect or the second effect, and a means for continuing to execute the first effect or the second effect, even when the first effect or the second effect ends, when there is a remaining period of the first effect period or the second effect period. , and a specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect in the remaining period of the gaming machine K1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a variable display is executed for a predetermined period based on the winning of a game ball to the first start winning opening and the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening. There is a second pattern that is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period based on the pattern, and the patterns can be changed simultaneously (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221). In such a gaming machine, when one of the first symbol and the second symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that the winning symbol has been won, the fluctuation period of the other symbol that is being variably displayed is reduced. Some machines are constructed such that measurement is interrupted, and when the winning game ends, the interrupted measurement of the fluctuation period is restarted.

In such a conventional gaming machine, the player expects that the fluctuation display based on the symbols for which the measurement of the fluctuation period is interrupted during the fluctuation display will be stopped based on the interruption of the measurement of the fluctuation period. However, there is a problem that the variable display that the player has been watching while playing is suddenly stopped, which spoils the enjoyment of the game. Also, even if the measurement of the fluctuation period is interrupted, if the fluctuation display is continuously displayed, there will be an error between the end timing of the fluctuation period and the end timing of the fluctuation display (that is, the error for the interruption period ) occurs, and an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort is executed, causing a loss of interest in the game. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine K1, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the result of the first determination is Based on this, the first effect executing means executes the first effect for the first effect period determined from the plurality of effect periods by the first effect period determining means. Further, based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, the second determination is executed by the second determination means based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means, and the second determination is performed. Based on the result, the second performance execution means executes the second performance during the second performance period determined from a plurality of performance periods by the second performance period determination means. Then, a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result A privilege game that is advantageous to the player when executed is executed by the privilege game execution means, and when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, the first effect being executed is determined. The timing of the first effect period or the second effect period of the second effect is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop means, and the temporary stop by the temporary stop means is canceled by the release means based on the end of the privilege game. Even when the timing is temporarily stopped by the temporary stopping means, the continuation means causes the first performance executing means or the second performance executing means to execute the first performance or the second performance, and the first performance or the second performance. Even when is finished, if there is a remaining period of the first performance period or the second performance period, the specified performance execution means executes the specified performance in the remaining period.

As a result, even if the timing of the first effect period of the first effect or the second effect period of the second effect being executed by the temporary stop means is temporarily stopped, the first effect or the second effect is continued. can perform the performance. Therefore, it is possible to continue to execute the effect that the player has been watching while anticipating, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, even when the first performance or the second performance ends, if there is a remaining period of the first performance period or the second performance period, the specific performance executing means executes the specific performance in the remaining period. Even if there is an error between the timing at which the first performance or the second performance ends and the timing at which the first performance period or the second performance period ends, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable, There is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine K1, the first effect is set in advance with effect periods corresponding to a plurality of the first effect periods determined by the first effect period determining means, and the second effect is the second effect. The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that performance periods are set in advance corresponding to a plurality of second performance periods determined by a second performance period determining means.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first effect is set in advance with effect periods corresponding to a plurality of first effect periods determined by the first effect period determining means, and the second effect is set in advance with a plurality of second effect periods determined by the second effect period determining means. A production period corresponding to the production period is set in advance.

Thus, the performance period during which the first performance is executed and the performance period during which the second performance is executed are determined in advance, and the timing at which the first performance or the second performance ends and the first performance period or the second performance period are determined. It is possible to execute a specific effect when an error occurs in the timing of the end of. Therefore, the period during which the first effect or the second effect is executed can be set in advance regardless of the temporary stop of the timing by the temporary stop means, so that the processing load for setting the effect period can be reduced. be.

In the game machine K1 or K2, the first effect and the second effect are the result of the first determination or the second determination in a predetermined period until the first effect period or the second effect period respectively elapses. A game machine K3 characterized in that a fixed effect mode indicating is set.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1 or K2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, for the first effect and the second effect, a fixed effect mode indicating the result of the first determination or the second determination is set for a predetermined period until the respective first effect period or second effect period elapses.

Thus, even if the temporary stop means does not temporarily stop the clocking, the result of the first determination or the second determination can be indicated by executing the first effect or the second effect. Therefore, there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

In the game machine K3, the game machine K4 is characterized in that the specific effect comprises at least part of the fixed effect mode.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effects of the game machine K3, the specific effect is composed of at least a part of the fixed effect mode, so the specific effect is executed after the first effect or the second effect is completed. Even so, there is an effect that the effect can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the privilege game executing means is executed based on the determination by the first determining means that the special first determination result is different from the specific first determination result. A special second effect is executed when a special first effect is executed or when the second determination means determines that the special second determination result is different from the specific second determination result. The gaming machine K5 is characterized by executing a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the privilege game when executed.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a special first effect is executed based on the fact that the first determination means determines that the special first determination result is different from the specific first determination result, or the second determination means specifies When a special second effect that is executed based on the fact that it is determined as a special second determination result different from the second determination result of is executed, the privilege game execution means gives the player more than the privilege game An advantageous special game is executed.

As a result, the player can play the game while having expectations for both the game executed by the first determination means and the game executed by the second determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines K1 to K5, the specific effect executing means is different from the specific effect when the first effect or the second effect ends while the privilege game is being executed. The game machine K6 is characterized in that a special performance is executed at least during the remaining period.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first performance or the second performance ends during the period in which the privilege game is executed by the specific performance executing means, the special performance different from the specific performance is executed at least in the remaining period.

As a result, when the first performance or the second performance ends, a special performance different from the specific performance is executed when a remaining period longer than the remaining period of the first performance period or the second performance period occurs. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of discomfort even when the specific effect alone causes an error that is insufficient.

In addition, as a special effect used in the game machine K6, the period from the end of the first effect or the second effect to the end of the first effect period or the second effect period is used to produce a different effect from the specific effect. may be executed, and the first effect or the second effect ends during the period from the end of the first effect or the second effect to the end of the first effect period or the second effect period. , a new effect is executed in the period until the privilege game is finished, and a specific effect is executed in the period from the end of the privilege game to the end of the first effect period or the second effect period. . In this case, the latter configuration has the advantage of being able to reduce the volume of effect data.

In any one of the game machines K1 to K6, a remainder for determining the length of the remaining period from the end of the first effect or the second effect to the end of the first effect period or the second effect period. A gaming machine K7 characterized by comprising a period discriminating means and a specific effect mode determining means for determining the effect mode of the specific effect based on the result of discrimination by the remaining period discriminating means.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K6, the following effect is exhibited, that is, after the first presentation or the second presentation ends, the first presentation period or the second presentation The length of the remaining period until the end of the period is determined by the remaining period determination means, and the specific effect mode determination means determines the effect mode of the specific effect based on the result of the determination.

As a result, since the effect mode of the specific effect can be determined based on the length of the remaining period, it is possible to execute an effect suitable for the player, thereby increasing the effect of effect.

Here, as the specific effect determined based on the length of the remaining period, for example, it is determined that the remaining period is so short that it is difficult for the player to grasp the content of the specific effect to be executed during the remaining period. In this case, the effect mode using all or part of the first effect or the second effect is set as the effect mode of the specific effect. As a result, the specific performance can be executed as if the first performance or the second performance is extended, and the specific performance can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable. In this case, it is preferable to execute the specific effect including the aspect of notifying that the first effect or the second effect is extended. As a result, for a player who cannot grasp the contents of the specific production, the specific production is executed as if the first production or the second production is extended, and for the player who can grasp the contents of the specific production. In addition, by notifying that the performance mode of the first performance or the second performance is extended, it is possible to suppress the misunderstanding that the first performance or the second performance is not finished due to the malfunction of the game machine. It has the effect of being able to

Further, when it is determined that the remaining period is long enough for the player to fully grasp the content of the specific effect to be executed during the remaining period, information indicated by the first effect or the second effect in the specific effect Information other than (information indicating the determination result of the determination means) may be displayed in an effect mode. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with new information using the remaining period, and to prevent the player from losing his or her desire to play.

In the gaming machine K7, the privilege effect mode determining means selects at least one of the fixed effect mode as the effect mode of the specific effect when the remaining period determining means determines that the remaining period is shorter than a predetermined period. A game machine K8 characterized in that it determines a specific performance mode composed of parts.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the remaining period determination means determines that the remaining period is shorter than the predetermined period, the special effect mode configured by at least a part of the fixed effect mode is determined by the privilege effect mode determination means as the effect mode of the specific effect. determined by

As a result, the specific performance can be executed as if the first performance or the second performance is extended, and the specific performance can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In the gaming machine K7 or K8, when the remaining period determining means determines that the remaining period is longer than a predetermined period, the privilege effect mode determining means selects the first effect or A gaming machine K9 is characterized in that it determines a specific effect mode including information different from information included in the second effect.

According to the game machine K9, in addition to the effects of the game machine K7 or K8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the remaining period determination means determines that the remaining period is longer than the predetermined period, the specific effect mode including information different from the information included in the first effect or the second effect is used as the effect mode of the specific effect. It is determined by the privilege presentation mode determining means.

As a result, it is possible to provide the player with new information using the remaining period, and to prevent the player from losing his or her desire to play.

<Characteristic group L> (ST number display control)
A specific game executing means capable of executing a specific game advantageous to the player for a specific number of times when a predetermined condition is established; a frequency updating means for updating the number of times the specific game is executed by the specific game executing means; Remaining number determination means for determining the number of remaining times of the specific number of times, Number of times reporting means for reporting the number of times equal to or less than the remaining number of times determined by the remaining number of times determining means, and increasing the number of times reported by the number of times reporting means. A game machine L1, characterized in that it comprises privilege notification execution means capable of executing privilege notification according to a predetermined rule, and rule switching means capable of switching the predetermined rule.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines variably display symbols based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning slot, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the variative display is completed. In this way, the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a specific game that is advantageous to the player a specific number of times by increasing the probability of a winning lottery or facilitating the execution of the lottery, and the specific game is executed. There is a device that displays the remaining number of times to be performed on a display screen (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-6562).

In such a conventional gaming machine, the remaining number of times the specific game is executed is displayed on the display screen. There was a problem of hoarding. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine L1, when a predetermined condition is established, a specific game advantageous to the player is executed a specific number of times by the specific game executing means, and the number of times the specific game is executed by the specific game executing means is updated. Updated by means. The remaining number of times of the specific number of times is discriminated by the remaining number of times discriminating means, and the number of times equal to or less than the remaining number of times discriminated by the remaining number of times discriminating means is notified by the number of times informing means. A privilege notification for increasing the number of times notified by the frequency notification means is executed by the privilege notification execution means based on a predetermined rule, and the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means.

As a result, it is possible to notify the number of times the specific game is executed which is equal to or less than the remaining number of times. Therefore, even if the number of times notified is reduced, the game can be played while expecting that the specific game will be continued, and the player's motivation can be prevented from decreasing. has the effect of being able to

Furthermore, by executing the privilege notification that increases the number of times notified by the number of times notification means, it is possible to increase the number of times that the specific game is confirmed to be executed for the player. As a result, the player can continue playing the game while having a moderate sense of security.

In addition, since the rule for executing the privilege notification can be switched, it is possible to increase the number of times notified by the number of times notification means in various patterns. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

The game machine L2 is characterized in that the game machine L1 has operation means that can be operated by the player, and the rule switching means switches the predetermined rule based on the operation of the operation means.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effects of the game machine L1, the following effects are produced. That is, the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means based on the player's operation on the operable operation means.

Therefore, since the player can switch the predetermined rules according to his or her taste, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine L1 or L2, the rule switching means executes a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the privilege notification each time the number of games is updated, and executes the privilege notification based on the result of the lottery. It is configured to be switchable between a first rule and a second rule for determining whether or not to execute the privilege notification based on the number of times notified by the frequency notification means being equal to or less than a predetermined number of times. A gaming machine L3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1 or L2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the rule switching means executes a determination as to whether or not to execute a privilege notification every time the number of games is updated, and a first rule in which the privilege notification is executed based on the determination result; and a second rule in which it is determined whether or not to execute the privilege notification based on the number of times the notification is given by the rule becomes equal to or less than a predetermined number of times.

As a result, it is possible to execute privilege notification according to rules with different tastes.

In any one of the game machines L1 to L3, the privilege notification executing means executes the privilege notification if the remaining number of times is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times when the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means. A gaming machine L4 characterized by:

According to the game machine L4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines L1 to L3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means by the privilege notification executing means, if the remaining number of times is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times, the privilege notification is executed.

Thereby, privilege information can be executed at the timing when the predetermined rule is switched. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while expecting that the predetermined rule will be switched by the rule switching means, and it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

In the game machine L4, the privilege notification executing means executes the privilege notification indicating that the number of times possible within the range of the remaining number of times among the preset upper limit number of times is increased. game machine L5.

According to the game machine L5, in addition to the effects of the game machine L4, the following effects are produced. That is, the privilege notification executing means executes the privilege notification indicating that the number of times that can be played within the range of the remaining number of times among the preset upper limit number of times is increased.

As a result, it is possible to complicate the mode of privilege notification, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

<Characteristic M group> (Attractor winning production is determined by lottery)
A discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a privilege game for executing one privilege game among a plurality of different privilege games based on the fact that the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. When the privilege game is executed by the execution means and the privilege game execution means, a predetermined condition is established to change from a first state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter to a second state in which it is easier to enter than in the first state. a variable ball entry means for varying until a game ball enters the variable ball entry means; a condition determination means for determining establishment of an execution condition based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entrance means; production execution means capable of executing production when the game is executed; ratio variable means for variably setting the ratio of fulfillment of the execution condition based on the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means; A gaming machine M1 characterized by having:

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines variably display symbols based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning slot, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the variative display is completed. In this way, in the gaming machine, when a winning game is executed, a specific winning hole is opened, and there is one that notifies that a game ball has won in the specific winning hole (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-138735). . In addition, there is also a configuration in which a plurality of winning games with different opening patterns of the specific winning opening are set, and the number of game balls that can be won in the specific winning opening varies depending on the winning game to be executed. By making it difficult to understand which winning game is being executed with respect to the player, there is also a game that improves the interest of the game by making the player predict the game.

In such a conventional gaming machine, notification is executed each time a game ball wins a prize in a specific winning hole, so that the player can easily grasp that a winning game is being executed. However, since the notification is executed every time a game ball wins in a specific winning opening, just by grasping the content of the notification that is executed each time a game ball wins in a specific winning opening, the winning that is being executed There is a problem that the player can easily grasp the type of game.

Furthermore, in a gaming machine that shifts the game state after the end of the winning game to a state advantageous to the player depending on the type of the winning game to be executed, making it difficult to understand the type of the winning game to be executed enhances the interest of the game. However, in the case of using such a gaming machine, if notification is executed every time a game ball wins in a specific winning hole, while expecting the game state to shift after the winning game ends There is a problem that the winning game cannot be performed, and the player's desire to play is reduced. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine M1, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and one privilege game among a plurality of different privilege games is selected based on the discrimination result being a specific discrimination result. It is executed by the privilege game executing means. When the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means, the variable ball entry means establishes a predetermined condition from a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to a second state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the first state. variable until The establishment of the execution condition is determined by the condition determination means based on the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means, and the performance is executed by the performance execution means when the condition determination means determines that the execution condition is satisfied. be done. Then, based on the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the rate at which the execution condition is established is variably set by the rate variable means.

Thereby, based on the type of privilege game, it is possible to vary the rate at which the performance is executed based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of the privilege game and lowering the player's willingness to play by the effect executed by the effect executing means.

The game machine M1 has payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls to the player based on the game balls entering the variable ball entry means, and the effect is The gaming machine M2 is characterized in that it is set based on the number of said prize balls paid out by said paying-out means.

According to the game machine M2, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the game balls entering the variable ball entry means, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player as prize balls by the payout means, and the number of prize balls paid out by the payout means is increased. Production is set based on the number.

As a result, the effect executing means executes the effect, so that the player can easily grasp that the privilege game is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player does not realize that a privilege game that is advantageous to the player has been executed, and to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine M1 or M2, the privilege game executing means includes a first privilege game in which the game ball is likely to enter the variable ball entering means and a second privilege game in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first privilege game. 2 privilege game can be executed at least, and the ratio variable means sets the ratio lower when the first privilege game is executed than when the second privilege game is executed. A gaming machine M3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine M3, the privilege game execution means provides a first privilege game in which the game ball is likely to enter the ball entering means, and a second privilege game in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first privilege game. and/or are executed. Then, when the first bonus game is executed, the ratio of fulfillment of the execution condition is set lower than when the second bonus game is executed by the ratio varying means.

Thereby, when the first privilege game and the second privilege game with different easiness of entering the ball into the ball-entering means are executed, it is possible to approximate the number of executions of the performance executed by the performance executing means. becomes. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of the privilege game and lowering the player's willingness to play by the effect executed by the effect executing means.

Here, when using the configuration of the game machine M2, regardless of the type of the privilege game execution means, the game ball that first entered the ball entry means is always (with a high probability) performed by the effect execution means. It is preferable that the performance is executed. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the privilege game has been executed, and furthermore, it is possible to provide a performance that does not allow the player to easily grasp the type of the privilege game that is being executed.

A game machine M4 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines M1 to M3, the effect is to display a display mode as at least one of the effect modes on a display means.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines M1 to M3, the display mode is displayed on the display means as at least one of the presentation modes, so that the player can understand the content displayed on the display means. There is an effect that the player can easily grasp that the privilege game has been executed based on this.

In the gaming machine M3 or M4, in the first privilege game, a period from when the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state until the predetermined condition is satisfied is set longer than in the second privilege game. A game machine M5 characterized in that

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effects of the game machine M3 or M4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the period from when the variable ball entering means is changed to the second state by the first privilege game to when the predetermined condition is established is set longer than in the second privilege game.

As a result, there is an effect that the first privilege game can be reliably executed as a privilege game in which the ball is easier to enter than the second privilege game.

In the game machine M3 or M5, the game machine M6 is characterized in that the number of times the first privilege game is changed to the second state is set larger than the number of times the second privilege game is changed.

According to the game machine M6, in addition to the effects of the game machine M3 or M4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of times of changing to the second state by the first privilege game is set larger than that of the second privilege game.

As a result, there is an effect that the first privilege game can be reliably executed as a privilege game in which the ball is easier to enter than the second privilege game.

Any one of claims M1 to M6, further comprising second rate variable means for variably setting a rate at which the execution condition is established based on the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means. A gaming machine M7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines M1 to M6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second rate varying means variably sets the rate at which the execution condition is established based on the number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means.

As a result, it is possible to change the rate at which the performance is executed based on the number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to set the performance execution ratio in a more complicated manner.

In the gaming machine M7, the privilege game executing means includes a first privilege game in which the game ball is likely to enter the ball entering means and a second privilege game in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first privilege game. and the second rate varying means makes it more difficult for the execution condition to be established as the number of game balls entering the variable means increases. M8.

According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least one of the first privilege game in which the game ball is easy to enter the ball entering means and the second privilege game in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first privilege game by the privilege game execution means. is executed. Then, by the second rate varying means, the more the number of game balls entering the variable means increases, the more difficult it becomes to establish the execution condition.

As a result, it is possible to approximate the number of times of effects executed by the effect executing means between when the first privilege game is executed and when the second privilege game is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of the privilege game and lowering the player's willingness to play by the effect executed by the effect executing means.

In any one of the game machines M2 to M8, the effect executing means displays a divided display mode indicating the number obtained by dividing the number of the prize balls to be paid out by the payout means as the effect to the payout by the payout means. The game machine M9 is characterized in that it is set so as to correspond to the number of prize balls.

According to the game machine M9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines M2 to M8, the following effects are produced. That is, the performance execution means sets the divided display mode indicating the number of the divided number of the prize balls put out by the payout means as the performance so as to correspond to the number of the prize balls put out by the payout means.

This makes it possible to display a plurality of split display modes in one performance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of the privilege game and lowering the player's willingness to play by the effect executed by the effect executing means. Also, even in a gaming machine having privilege games with different numbers of winning balls, the same effect can be obtained by executing the effect using the split display mode.

<Feature N group> (Variable number of additions with PUSH effect)
privilege information determination means for determining privilege information that is advantageous to the player; storage means capable of storing the privilege information determined by the privilege information determination means; and at least the privilege information stored in the storage means. A privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to a corresponding player, and when the privilege is given by the privilege giving means, the privilege corresponds to the privilege information stored in the storage means. Privilege information updating means for updating to privilege information reduced from privileges, display means for displaying identification information based on privilege information less than the privilege information stored in the storage means, and display on the display means. Determination means for determining the privilege information stored in the storage means as an upper limit, operation means operable by the player, and corresponding operation timing when the operation means is operated. setting means for variably setting the privilege information; variable setting means for varying the privilege information set by the setting means based on a specific condition; and the setting means based on the operation of the operation means. and a display updating means for acquiring the privilege information set by the display means and updating the privilege information corresponding to the identification information displayed on the display means to the corresponding identification information. A gaming machine N1 characterized by:

Here, game machines such as pachinko machines have operation means such as operation buttons that can be operated by the player, and are capable of executing operation effects to prompt the player to operate the operation means as a kind of entertainment effect. (for example, JP-A-2006-263523). In this conventional game machine, by operating the operation button in the operation presentation, a special presentation different from the usual one is generated, or a win is announced, etc., to improve the interest of the player.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since the operation effect is executed as part of the effect of notifying the result of the predetermined winning lottery, the result of the player's operation of the frame button is the result of the effect (the winning (whether or not it is notified) was irrelevant. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to increase the player's willingness to participate in the operation presentation. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine N1, privilege information that is advantageous to the player is determined by the privilege information determining means. The privilege information determined by the privilege information determining means is stored in the storage means, and a privilege giving advantage to the player corresponding to at least part of the stored privilege information is given by the privilege giving means. When the privilege is given by the privilege giving means, the privilege information is updated to the privilege information obtained by subtracting the privilege corresponding to the privilege information stored in the storage means by the privilege information updating means. Identification information based on privilege information less than the privilege information stored in the storage means is displayed on the display means. The privilege information to be displayed on the display means is determined by the determination means with the privilege information stored in the storage means as the upper limit. When the operation means is operated by the player, privilege information corresponding to the operation timing is variably set by the setting means. The privilege information set by the setting means is varied by the variable setting means based on specific conditions. The privilege information set by the setting means is acquired based on the operation of the operating means, and the privilege information corresponding to the identification information displayed on the display means is updated to the corresponding identification information by the display updating means. .

This makes it possible to update the privilege information based on the operation of the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the willingness to participate in the operation performance of the player can be improved.

In the game machine N1, a determination means for executing a determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result. and game execution means, wherein the privilege granting means maintains a high probability state for a predetermined number of times to increase the probability that the determination means determines that the specific determination result is obtained, until the determination by the determination means is performed. The gaming machine N2 is characterized in that the privilege is continuously set each time the determination is executed.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the judgment is executed by the judging means based on the establishment of the judging condition. A privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result. Then, the high-probability state that increases the probability of being determined as a specific determination result by the determination means is given as a benefit each time the determination is performed until the determination is performed by the determination means a predetermined number of times. set to continue.

As a result, the high-probability state that increases the probability of being determined as a specific determination result by the determination means continues to be set until the determination is performed by the determination means a predetermined number of times, so that the high-probability state is set. The player can easily grasp that the Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the game machine N2, the identification information is information indicating the number of times that the high-probability state will be continued is decided and notified.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N2, the identification information indicates the number of times to determine and notify that the high probability state will continue.

As a result, the player can easily grasp the number of times that the high-probability state continues. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In any one of game machines N1 to N3, suggestive display control means for displaying a suggestive display mode suggesting the timing of operating the operating means on the display means, and the suggestive display mode displayed on the suggestive display control means. and suggestion display mode determining means for determining based on the timing of the privilege information set by the setting means.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the suggestive display mode suggesting the timing of operating the operation means is displayed on the display means by the suggestive display control means. The suggestive display mode displayed on the suggestive display control means is determined by the suggestive display mode determining means based on the timing of the privilege information set in the setting means.

Thus, by operating the operation means based on the suggestive display mode displayed on the display means, privilege information is given, so that there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine N4, the suggestive display mode includes a variable display mode in which display is changed based on the passage of time, and a determination mode in which the privilege information set in the setting means can be discriminated by the variable display mode. is displayed at least.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the suggestive display mode, the variable display mode is displayed in a variable manner based on the passage of time, and the variable display mode is used to display the determination mode that allows the privilege information set in the setting means to be determined.

As a result, it is possible to determine the privilege information to be given by the display contents displayed in the variable display mode, so that the player can target the timing of operating the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play.

<Feature O group> (Suppresses the frequency of occurrence of small hits)
discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; benefit granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result; a determination condition storage means capable of storing a plurality of determination conditions, and suppressing means for suppressing the frequency with which the determination is performed by the determination means, wherein the suppression means is stored in the determination condition storage means. A gaming machine O1 characterized in that it is easier to suppress the frequency of execution of the determination when the number of determination conditions set is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, rather than when the number is less than the predetermined number.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine pays out a predetermined number of game balls based on the winning of the game balls into the starting prize winning opening, variably displays the symbols, and draws a lottery for the player after the variative display is completed. There is something that reports the results of Some of such gaming machines are configured to hold and store a plurality of lotteries that are executed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning opening (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-35664). .

In such a conventional gaming machine, when the frequency of winning of game balls to the start winning opening is high, more game balls are paid out than when the frequency of winning of game balls to the starting winning opening is low. Since many lotteries are executed and the benefits received by the player differ greatly depending on the frequency of winning the game balls into the starting winning opening, the winning of the game balls into the starting winning opening There is a problem that the operation of a game machine with a low frequency is lowered. To provide a game machine that is fair to a player who executes a game because it is necessary for the player to play many games in order to grasp whether or not the winning frequency of the game balls into the starting winning hole is appropriate. I had a problem that I couldn't. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine O1, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the privilege provision means determines the player based on the result of the determination by the determination means becoming a specific determination result. benefits are given to. A plurality of determination conditions are stored in the determination condition storage means. The suppressing means suppresses the frequency of determination by the determining means. In addition, the suppressing means makes it easier to suppress the frequency of determination when the number of determination conditions stored in the determination condition storage means is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, rather than when the number is less than the predetermined number.

This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which determination is performed when the number of determination conditions stored in the determination condition storage means is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, rather than when the number is less than the predetermined number. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided to a player who executes a game.

In the gaming machine O1, display means for displaying identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination means, dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and the dynamic display and dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the execution means, wherein the suppressing means causes the dynamic display period to be extended by the dynamic display period setting means. The gaming machine O2 is characterized in that the frequency of execution of the determination is suppressed by setting a period.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination means is displayed on the display means, and the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means on the display means. A dynamic display period for dynamic display of identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is set by the dynamic display period setting means. By setting a long dynamic display period by the dynamic display period setting means, the frequency of determination by the suppression means is suppressed.

Thus, by setting a long dynamic display period, it is possible to suppress the frequency of execution of discrimination, so that the frequency of execution of discrimination can be reliably suppressed, and a fair display is provided to the player who is playing the game. There is an effect that the accuracy of providing the game machine can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine O2, a second determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition, and a second display means for displaying second identification information indicating the result of determination by the second determination means. , second dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means; and dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display executing means A second dynamic display period setting means for setting a second dynamic display period, and a second determination result given to the player based on the result of the determination by the second determination means being a specific second determination result. and a second privilege granting means for granting a privilege, wherein the second determination condition is likely to be established by granting the privilege by the privilege granting means. .

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second determination condition is satisfied, the second determination means performs determination, and the second display means displays the second identification information indicating the result of determination by the second determination means. The dynamic display of the second identification information is executed by the second dynamic display execution means on the second display means, and the second dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means is performed. A dynamic display period is set by the second dynamic display period setting means. A second privilege is granted to the player by the second privilege granting means based on the fact that the result of discrimination by the second discrimination means is a specific second discrimination result. Then, when the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means, the second determination condition is likely to be satisfied.

Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the granting of a privilege that facilitates the establishment of the second determination condition by the suppressing means. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided to a player who executes a game.

In the gaming machine O2, a second determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition, and a second display means for displaying second identification information indicating the result of determination by the second determination means. , second dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means; and dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display executing means A second dynamic display period setting means for setting a second dynamic display period, and a second determination result given to the player based on the result of the determination by the second determination means being a specific second determination result. and a second privilege granting means for granting a privilege, wherein the determination condition is likely to be established by granting the second privilege by the second privilege granting means. Machine O4.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second determination condition is satisfied, the second determination means performs determination, and the second display means displays the second identification information indicating the result of determination by the second determination means. The dynamic display of the second identification information is executed by the second dynamic display execution means on the second display means, and the second dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means is performed. A dynamic display period is set by the second dynamic display period setting means. A second privilege is granted to the player by the second privilege granting means based on the fact that the result of discrimination by the second discrimination means is a specific second discrimination result. Then, the determination condition is likely to be met by the second privilege being granted by the second privilege granting means.

Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the granting of the second privilege that makes it easier for the determination condition to be satisfied by the suppressing means. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided to a player who executes a game.

In any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the suppressing means makes it easy to suppress the frequency of performing the determination when the result of determination by the determining means is the specific determination result. Gaming machine O5.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the result of determination by the determination means is a specific determination result, the suppressing means tends to suppress the frequency of performing the determination.

This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the determination is performed when the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which many benefits are granted in a short period of time.

In any one of the game machines O2 to O5, the suppressing means reduces the number of the discrimination conditions stored in the discrimination condition storage means from the first predetermined number which is less than the predetermined number to the first predetermined number which is less than the first predetermined number. 2. A gaming machine O6 characterized in that the frequency of execution of the determination can be easily suppressed in the case of a predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine O6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines O2 to O4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the number of discrimination conditions stored in the discrimination condition storage means is a second predetermined number which is less than the first predetermined number, the frequency at which the determination is performed by the suppressing means is higher than the first predetermined number which is less than the predetermined number. easier to suppress.

Thus, when the number of determination conditions stored in the determination condition storage means is less than the predetermined number, and when the second predetermined number is less than the first predetermined number than the first predetermined number, the determination is executed. Since the frequency of discrimination is likely to be suppressed, when the game is played intentionally while the number of discrimination conditions stored is small, the frequency of discrimination can be suppressed. There is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided.

<Feature P group> (Variable range of pending notice)
information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; information storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of information acquired by the information acquisition means; Determining means for performing determination when a determination condition is satisfied based on the information, and a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determining means. a bonus game execution means, in a gaming machine comprising: a preliminary determination means capable of performing preliminary determination before the determination condition is established based on the information stored in the information storage means; and the information identification pattern display control means for displaying on display means an identification pattern corresponding to each piece of information stored in the storage means; variable means for varying the identification pattern based on the result of preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means; and determining means for determining a combination of identification symbols.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines variably display symbols based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning slot, and inform the player of the result of the lottery after the variative display is completed. Further, the lottery executed based on the winning of the game ball into the start prize winning slot can be held and stored a plurality of times, the held patterns corresponding to the number of reserved memories are displayed, and the displayed reserved patterns are displayed. There is one that is configured to be able to execute a pending notice effect that can notify information about the corresponding lottery in advance by using it (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-297071).

In such a conventional gaming machine, by changing the color and shape of the reserved symbols, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbols will result in a big win. , making it possible to heighten the player's expectations.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when a pending notice effect occurs, it becomes difficult for the player to have expectations for the pending symbols that are not subject to the pending notice, and this reduces the player's desire to play. There was a problem of hoarding. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine P1, information is acquired by the information acquisition means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number by the information storage means. Based on the information stored in the information storage means, discrimination is executed by the discrimination means when a discrimination condition is established, and based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result, it is advantageous to the player. A privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. Based on the information stored in the information storage means, the preliminary determination is executed by the preliminary determination means before the determination condition is satisfied. An identification pattern corresponding to the number of pieces of information stored in the information storage means is displayed on the display means by the identification pattern display control means. The identification pattern is varied by the variable means based on the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means with respect to the information before being determined by the determination means. A determination means determines a combination of identification patterns that are varied by the variable means, among a plurality of identification symbols displayed on the identification pattern display control means.

As a result, it is possible to determine a combination of identification symbols to be varied by the variable means, among the plurality of identification symbols displayed on the identification symbol display control means. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the execution of the variable means for all identification symbols displayed on the display means, it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to play.

In the gaming machine P1, the variable means changes the information corresponding to the identification symbol displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied during a period until the determination condition of the information corresponding to the identification symbol being displayed is satisfied. The game machine P2 is characterized in that the mode of displaying information based on the result of the prior determination for the game machine P2 is variable.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during a period until the determination condition of the information corresponding to the displayed identification pattern is satisfied by the variable means, the information corresponding to the identification pattern is information based on the result of preliminary determination. is displayed.

As a result, it becomes possible for the player to pay attention to the variable content of the identification pattern. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

A game machine P1 or P2 having specific display control means for displaying a specific display mode corresponding to the identification pattern on the display means for a specific period by using the identification pattern changed by the variable means. A gaming machine P3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1 or P2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, using the identification pattern changed by the variable means, a specific display mode corresponding to the identification pattern is displayed on the display means for a specific period by the specific display control means.

As a result, it becomes possible to execute a specific effect mode using the identification pattern changed by the variable means, and there is an effect that an effect advantageous to the player can be executed.

In any one of the game machines P1 to P3, when the identification pattern is changed by the operation means operable by the player and the variable means, setting of a specific performance is executed based on the operation of the operation means. A game machine P4 characterized by having a specific effect executing means.

According to the game machine P4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines P1 to P3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the identification symbol is varied by the variable means, the specific effect execution means executes the setting of the specific effect based on the operation of the operation means by the player.

As a result, there is an effect that a specific performance mode can be executed for a specific period using the identification pattern changed by the changing means.

In the game machine P4, the number of the identification symbols varied by the variable means when the predetermined determination result is determined by the preliminary determination means, compared to when the determination result is other than the specific determination result. A game machine P5, characterized in that it has a variable number setting means for setting a large number of .

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of identification patterns to be changed by the variable means is set by the variable number setting means to be larger when it is determined by the preliminary determination means that it is a specific determination result than when it is determined to be other than the specific determination result. be.

As a result, there is an effect that the frequency at which identification symbols are displayed can be changed according to the game state, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

<Feature Q group> (executing a specific effect when the remaining number of times of ST becomes a big hit below a predetermined number)
Determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition; Bonus game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means; A plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state as the game state after the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means is completed. A game state setting means for setting one game state from among them, and when the second game state is set by the game state setting means, a specification that is likely to be established as the number of executions of discrimination by the discrimination means increases. a specific condition determining means for determining whether or not a condition is satisfied; and based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific condition determining means, the game state is changed from the second game state to the first game state. a game state changing means for changing the state, and a suggestive effect executing means for executing a suggestive effect suggesting the likelihood of establishment of the specific condition when the second game state is set by the game state setting means. and a comparison means for comparing the ease of establishment of the specific condition suggested by the suggestive effect with the actual ease of establishment of the specific condition, and the comparison result by the comparison means is the specific comparison result. a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect corresponding to the specific comparison result based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines variably display symbols based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning slot, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the variative display is completed. In this way, the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a specific game that is advantageous to the player a specific number of times by increasing the probability of a winning lottery or facilitating the execution of the lottery, and the specific game is executed. Some do not notify the player of the number of times the game is played (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-6562).

In such a conventional type gaming machine, since the number of times the specific game is executed is not notified to the player, if a win is won during execution of the specific game, the remaining number of times of the specific game cannot be grasped and the game is played. There is a problem that the player cannot be sufficiently satisfied with the result. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine Q1, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player is played based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result. Executed by execution means. A plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state as game states after the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means is finished. 1 game state is set by the game state setting means. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the specific condition determining means determines whether or not a specific condition, which is likely to be established as the number of executions of determination by the determining means increases, is established. The game state is changed from the second game state to the first game state by the game state changing means when the specific condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the suggestive effect execution means executes a suggestive effect suggesting the likelihood of establishment of the specific condition. The ease of establishment of the specific condition suggested by the suggestive effect and the ease of actual establishment of the specific condition are compared by the comparison means, and when the comparison result by the comparison means is the specific comparison result, the predetermined condition is determined. is established, a specific effect corresponding to a specific comparison result is executed by the specific effect executing means.

As a result, when the likelihood of establishment of the specific condition suggested by the suggestive effect and the likelihood of actual establishment of the specific condition are a specific comparison result, the specific comparison result is obtained based on the establishment of the prescribed condition. A corresponding specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. Therefore, by executing the specific effect, it is possible for the player to grasp the current situation of the second game state, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Here, the player can grasp the situation of the second game state when the privilege game is executed by structuring so that the predetermined condition is established when the determination result of the determination means becomes a specific determination result. become. Therefore, when the privilege game is executed just before the end of the second game state, there is an effect that the player can be given a sense of satisfaction.

In the game machine Q1, a specific condition setting means for setting a predetermined number of execution times by the determination means for satisfying the specific condition when the second game state is set by the game state setting means. A gaming machine Q2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the specific condition setting means sets the predetermined number of executions by the determination means that the specific condition is satisfied.

As a result, the specific condition can be set based on the number of executions of the determination means, so the number of times the second game state is set can be set in advance. Therefore, the player can play the game while being conscious of the remaining number of times that the second game state is set, and the motivation for the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, when the suggestive effect is being executed by the suggestive effect executing means, the easiness of establishing the actual specific effect for the suggestive effect being executed based on the fulfillment of the effect conditions is determined. A gaming machine Q3 characterized by having a variable performance means for varying a suggestive performance close to .

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, when the suggestive effect is being executed by the suggestive effect executing means, based on the fulfillment of the effect conditions, the suggestive effect being executed is suggested by the variable effect means to approach the actual feasibility of the specific effect. It is variable in production.

As a result, the number of times that the second game state is set can be increased, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine Q3, the suggestive performance is a performance suggesting the number of remaining discriminations by the discrimination means until the specific condition is established, and the variable performance means provides a suggestion performance indicating the number of discriminations close to the number of remaining discriminations. A game machine Q4 characterized by being variable to .

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determining means suggests the number of remaining determinations until the specific condition is satisfied by the suggestive effect, and the variable effect means changes the suggestive effect indicating the number of determinations close to the number of remaining determinations.

As a result, it is possible to suggest the number of determinations close to the remaining number of determinations, so that there is an effect that the player can be made to feel nervous.

Any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q4 has means for executing an effect different from the specific effect when the privilege game is executed in a case other than the specific comparison result. Characteristic game machine Q5.

According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the privilege game is executed when the result is other than the specific comparison result, an effect different from the specific effect is executed.

As a result, by executing an effect different from the specific effect, the player can grasp that the second privilege game has been executed when the result is other than the specific comparison result. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic group R> (After temporary stop, reach is formed using a new symbol row)
display means for displaying identification information; dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of a plurality of identification information strings composed of a plurality of pieces of identification information arranged in a predetermined order by the display means; a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the static display of a predetermined combination of identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information string by the display execution means. machine, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the dynamic display of the identification information sequence stops displaying a combination of identification information that is different from the predetermined combination of identification information. identification information string display means for dynamically displaying a new identification information string while at least a part of the combination of the obtained identification information is stopped and displayed; and the new identification information string is displayed by the identification information string display means. Based on this, when the combination of the predetermined identification information is stop-displayed using at least part of the combination of the identification information stop-displayed and the new identification information string, the privilege game is executed. and execution means for executing the privilege game by means.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a plurality of symbols are variably displayed and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, a winning state advantageous to the player is given (for example, , JP-A-10-265). In such a game machine, while one symbol is changing and the other symbols are stopped and displayed, a ready-to-win state is generated in which the stopped and displayed symbols constitute a part of a predetermined combination, resulting in a win. By making players expect that, they are trying to improve their interest.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, even if all symbols are not stopped and displayed when the ready-to-win state does not occur, there is no possibility of a winning state at that time, and the player's play is greatly affected. There was a problem that lost interest. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the game machine R1, the dynamic display execution means dynamically displays a plurality of identification information strings composed of a plurality of identification information arranged in a predetermined order on the display means. Based on the dynamic display of the identification information string by the dynamic display executing means and the static display of the predetermined combination of identification information, the privilege game executing means executes a privilege game advantageous to the player. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, based on the static display of a combination of identification information different from a predetermined combination of identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information sequence, the statically displayed identification A new identification information string is dynamically displayed by the identification information string display means while at least part of the combination of information is still displayed. Based on the display of the new identification information string by the identification information string display means, a predetermined combination of identification information using at least a part of the combination of the identification information stopped and displayed and the new identification information string. is stopped and displayed, the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is executed by the execution means.

As a result, a new identification information string is dynamically displayed by the identification information string display means while at least a part of the combination of identification information that has been stopped and displayed once is still displayed. can provide. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine R1, the identification information string display means dynamically displays the special identification pattern string combined with the plurality of identification information displayed by the plurality of identification information strings in the direction in which the dynamic display execution means dynamically displays the string. is dynamically displayed in different directions.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the identification information string display means dynamically displays the special identification pattern string combined with the plurality of identification information displayed by the plurality of identification information strings in a direction different from the direction in which the dynamic display execution means dynamically displays the special identification pattern string. Is displayed.

As a result, the dynamic display direction of the symbol row can be changed to a different direction, so that an unexpected performance can be provided to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine R2, the identification information string display means dynamically displays the special identification pattern string in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the identification pattern string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. A game machine R3 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special identification pattern row is dynamically displayed by the identification information row display means in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the identification pattern row dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means.

As a result, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the direction of dynamic display has been changed, and it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

In the gaming machine R1, the identification information string display means dynamically displays a new identification information string different from the identification information string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. Non-display setting for setting non-display of at least one of the plurality of identification information strings dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means when the new identification information string is displayed by the display means. A gaming machine R4 characterized by having means.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the identification information string display means dynamically displays a new identification information string different from the identification information string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, and the identification information string display means displays the new identification information string. If so, at least one of the plurality of identification information strings dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means is set to be non-display by the non-display setting means.

As a result, it is possible to dynamically display a new identification information string without changing the area for displaying the identification information string. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load for dynamic display can be reduced.

In the gaming machine R1 or R4, display data for displaying the new identification information string dynamically displayed by the identification information string display means and the identification information string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means The display data to be displayed is set at the same timing, and a decision is made to determine the display data to be displayed among the set display data as the area set in the display area of the display means. A gaming machine R5 characterized by having means.

According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R1 or R4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display data for displaying the new identification information string dynamically displayed by the identification information string display means and the display data for displaying the identification information string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means are The display data to be displayed is determined by the determining means from among the display data that are set at the same timing and set as the display area of the display means.

As a result, there is an effect that the control load for dynamic display can be reduced.

The gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that each gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

The gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

The gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that each gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art In some game machines such as pachinko machines, patterns are variably displayed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting prize winning slot, and a player is notified of the result of a lottery after the variative display is completed. In this way, in the gaming machine, an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is set by increasing the probability of a winning lottery or facilitating the execution of the lottery, and during the period in which the advantageous state continues. game results such as the number of hits that occurred and the number of prize balls won are displayed on the display screen after the advantageous state is over (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-35664 Gazette).
However, there is a problem that the game result display cannot be displayed for a sufficient period of time, and the player's motivation to play is lowered.
The present technical idea was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that suppresses the decline in motivation to play.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Thought 1 comprises a first obtaining means for obtaining first information based on the establishment of a first obtaining condition, and the first information obtained by the first obtaining means. first determination means for executing a first determination based on information; first effect execution means for executing a first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means in a first effect period; A second determination means for executing a second determination based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, and a second effect based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means during a second effect period. A second effect executing means to be executed, and a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when a specific second performance based on is executed, the first performance and the second performance from a plurality of game states. a game state setting means capable of setting an advantageous game state advantageous to the player until is executed a predetermined number of times; second effect period setting means for making it easier to set the period to be short; and a first effect period determining means for setting a specific first effect period as one effect period.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the predetermined number of times is two or more.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the first effect period determining means, when a gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state is set, determines the specific The ratio of selecting the shortened first effect period shorter than the first effect period is high.
The gaming machine of technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein the probability of being determined as the specific first determination result in the first determination and the specific result in the second determination is set to be the same as the second determination result, and the second determination means, when the second determination result is not determined as the specific second determination result, the specific second determination result A special second determination result different from the determination result is determined with a predetermined probability, and the privilege game executing means, when the second effect based on the special second determination result is executed, the privilege A special privilege game is executed in which a privilege below the game is provided.
The gaming machine of technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 4, wherein the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first determination when the advantageous gaming state is set. and a state in which the first determination is more likely to be executed than the second determination when the advantageous game state ends.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. Based on the result of the first determination, the first effect executing means executes the first effect during the first effect period. Further, based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, the second determination is executed by the second determination means based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means, and the second determination is performed. Based on the result, the second effect execution means executes the second effect during the second effect period. Then, a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result A privilege game that is advantageous to the player when executed is executed by the privilege game execution means, and the game is played until the first performance and the second performance are executed a predetermined number of times from a plurality of game states. An advantageous game state advantageous to a player is settable by a game state setting means, and when the advantageous game state is set by the game state setting means, the second performance period is set short by the second performance period setting means. When the advantageous game state ends, a specific first performance period is set as the first performance period until the first performance and the second performance are executed a predetermined number of times. Determined by the determining means.
As a result, it is possible to set a specific period as the first performance period when the advantageous game state ends, so that the player can grasp the content of the performance executed when the advantageous game state ends. is possible, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to play.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, since the predetermined number of times is set to two or more, the effect executed when the advantageous game state ends. It is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the contents, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a game state different from the advantageous game state is set, the ratio of selecting the shortened first effect period shorter than the specific first effect period is increased by the first effect period determining means.
As a result, it is possible to set only a specific first effect period set for a predetermined number of times after the end of the advantageous gaming state to a period longer than the other first effect periods. By setting the overall length of the first effect period to be executed, it is possible to prevent the game from slowing down and lowering the player's motivation.
According to the game machine described in technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the game machine described in any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are obtained. That is, the probability that the first determination results in the specific first determination result and the probability that the second determination results in the specific second determination result are set to be the same, and the second determination results in the specific second determination result. If it is not determined, the second determination means determines a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result with a predetermined probability. Then, when the second effect based on the special second determination result is executed, a special privilege game is executed in which a privilege equal to or lower than the privilege game is given by the privilege game executing means.
As a result, there is an effect that the player's desire to play can be enhanced.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any one of technical ideas 1 to 4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the advantageous gaming state is set, the second judgment is more likely to be executed than the first judgment, and when the advantageous gaming state is terminated, the first judgment is more likely to be executed than the second judgment. It is varied by the variable control means.
As a result, there is an effect that the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
65 variable winning device (variable ball entry means)
111 payout control device (payout means)
S405 determination means
S2004 privilege game executing means
S5306 condition determination means
S5307 effect executing means

Claims (5)

a first obtaining means for obtaining the first information based on the establishment of the first obtaining condition;
a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means;
a first effect execution means for executing a first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means in a first effect period;
a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition;
a second effect execution means for executing a second effect based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means in a second effect period;
A specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result A gaming machine having privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when executed,
a game state setting means capable of setting an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player until the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times from a plurality of game states;
a second effect period setting means for facilitating setting of a short second effect period when the advantageous game state is set by the game state setting means;
A first stage for setting a specific first performance period as the first performance period until the first performance and the second performance are executed a predetermined number of times when the advantageous game state ends. A game machine characterized by comprising a performance period determining means. 2. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined number of times is two or more. When a game state different from the advantageous game state is set, the first effect period determining means has a high probability of selecting a shortened first effect period shorter than the specific first effect period. 3. The game machine according to claim 1 or 2, characterized by: The probability that the first determination is determined to be the specific first determination result and the probability that the second determination is determined to be the specific second determination result are set to be the same,
The second determination means determines, with a predetermined probability, a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result when the second determination does not determine the specific second determination result. and
The privilege game executing means is characterized by executing a special privilege game in which a privilege equal to or lower than the privilege game is given when the second effect based on the special second determination result is executed. The game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3. When the advantageous gaming state is set, the second judgment is more likely to be executed than the first judgment, and the first judgment is executed rather than the second judgment when the advantageous gaming state ends. 5. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising variable control means for varying the easy state.

Images